S I E M E N S

M O B I L E
Mobile Communication System
Task Manual
TML Version SR10.0 SSNC
APS-ID: MRUMPK1.V3502
Volume 1 - 10
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Issued by Bereich Oeffentliche Vermittlungssysteme
Hofmannstrasse 51, D-81359 Muenchen
The reproduction, transmission or use of this
document or its contents is not permitted without
express written authority. Offenders will be liable
for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved. Specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Subject to technical alterations without notice.
Copyright (c) SIEMENS AG 2002
| T M L M O B I L E : Administration Section
ADMIN-2 | P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
q~~~~~~~~~~~~~~{
| ADMIN |
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This document requires 10 50 mm binder
Order No. A30808-X3000-X500-*-99
and the accessories package for TML
Order No. P30305-V6000-A985-*-7692
Hints for interpreting the change designations:
The designations mean:
A ] Alternation, changed
N ] New, no previous chapter
0 ] Chapter removed, no replacement
This document comprises a total of 6543 pages.
Index of Issue: Issue: Pages:
ADMINISTRATION SECTION 01 ADMIN -1... 3
LIST OF CONTENTS 01 CONT -1... 28
INTRODUCTION TML/OML 01 IN -1... 11
COMMANDS 01 -1...6281
REFERENCE LIST COMMAND - MASKS 01 TAB -1... 220
T M L M O B I L E : Administration Section
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ADMIN-3
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DISPLAY A4 TESTPATTERN VALUE 2034.00 1 DISP_A4TPVAL -1... 1
ENTER A4 TESTPATTERN VALUE 2036.00 1 ENTR_A4TPVAL -1... 1
RECORD AUTHENTICATION CENTRE DATA 1927.18 1 REC_AC -1... 4
DIAGNOSE AC ALGORITHMS 1952.03 1 DIAG_ACALGOR -1... 1
TEST AC ALGORITHMS 1953.03 1 TEST_ACALGOR -1... 1
CANCEL AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3664.47 1 CAN_ACC -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3665.47 1 DISP_ACC -1... 1
ENTER AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL 3663.48 1 ENTR_ACC -1... 3
DISP. STATUS OF AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL 3666.47 1 STAT_ACC -1... 1
Display Access Control Configuration 1.00 1 DISP_ACCFG -1... 1
Modify Access Control Configuration 1.00 1 MOD_ACCFG -1... 2
CANCEL AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3661.47 1 CAN_ACCTRAF -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3662.47 1 DISP_ACCTRAF -1... 1
ENTER AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF. 3660.48 1 ENTR_ACCTRAF -1... 3
Activate Accounting Upgrade 1.00 1 ACT_ACCUPG -1... 1
DISPLAY GENERAL ALARM CALL DATA 1589.00 1 DISP_ACDATA -1... 1
ENTER ALARM CALL DATA 1590.04 1 ENTR_ACDATA -1... 3
CANCEL AUTHENTICATION CENTER HLR ID 1935.02 1 CAN_ACHLRID -1... 1
CREATE AUTHENTICATION CENTER HLR ID 1937.03 1 CR_ACHLRID -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTHENTICATION CENTER HLR ID 1939.00 1 DISP_ACHLRID -1... 1
Cancel Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 1 CAN_ACINIGRP -1... 1
Create Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 1 CR_ACINIGRP -1... 1
Display Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 1 DISP_ACINIGRP -1... 1
Modify Access Control Initiator Group 1.00 1 MOD_ACINIGRP -1... 1
CANCEL AUTHENTICATION CENTRE MOBILE SUB 1936.06 1 CAN_ACMSUB -1... 1
CREATE AUTHENTICATION CENTRE MOBILE SUB 1938.08 1 CR_ACMSUB -1... 4
DISPLAY AUTHENTICATION CENTRE MOBILE SUB 1940.17 1 DISP_ACMSUB -1... 1
Cancel Application Context Name 1.00 1 CAN_ACN -1... 1
Create Application Context Name 1.00 1 CR_ACN -1... 1
Display Application Context Name 1.00 1 DISP_ACN -1... 1
Modify Application Context Name 1.00 1 MOD_ACN -1... 1
CANCEL COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS 3825.01 1 CAN_ACOLIM -1... 1
DISPLAY COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS 3824.01 1 DISP_ACOLIM -1... 1
ENTER COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS 3823.01 1 ENTR_ACOLIM -1... 2
CANCEL ALARM CALL ORDER 1587.06 1 CAN_ACORD -1... 2
ENTER ALARM CALL ORDER 1585.07 1 ENTR_ACORD -1... 4
SELECT ALARM CALL ORDER 1586.03 1 SEL_ACORD -1... 1
Cancel Access Control Rule 1.00 1 CAN_ACRULE -1... 1
Create Access Control Rule 1.00 1 CR_ACRULE -1... 3
Display Access Control Rule 1.00 1 DISP_ACRULE -1... 2
Modify Access Control Rule 1.00 1 MOD_ACRULE -1... 3
DISPLAY ALARM CALL STATISTICS 1588.00 1 DISP_ACSTAT -1... 1
Cancel Access Control Target Group 1.00 1 CAN_ACTARGRP -1... 1
Create Access Control Target Group 1.00 1 CR_ACTARGRP -1... 2
Display Access Control Target Group 1.00 1 DISP_ACTARGRP -1... 1
Modify Access Control Target Group 1.00 1 MOD_ACTARGRP -1... 2
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY 1518.03 1 DISP_AENTRY -1... 1
SELECT ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY 1519.08 1 SEL_AENTRY -1... 4
CANCEL ARCHIVE FILE 1515.01 1 CAN_AFILE -1... 1
CREATE ARCHIVE FILE 1514.03 1 CR_AFILE -1... 3
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES 1517.00 1 DISP_AFILE -1... 1
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES 1516.02 1 MOD_AFILE -1... 3
DISPLAY ALARM STATUS 1483.02 1 DISP_ALARM -1... 2
SEARCH ALARM MESSAGE 1486.04 1 SRCH_ALARM -1... 2
Display Alarm Balance Monitor 1.00 1 DISP_ALBALMON -1... 1
ACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY 2017.01 1 ACT_ALDISP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY 2019.01 1 DACT_ALDISP -1... 2
DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY 2020.00 1 DISP_ALDISP -1... 1
Display Alarm Interface 1.00 1 DISP_ALI -1... 1
Modify Alarm Interface 1.00 1 MOD_ALI -1... 1
CANCEL ALIAS NAME 3079.00 1 CAN_ALIAS -1... 1
DISPLAY ALIAS FILE NAMES 3075.00 1 DISP_ALIAS -1... 1
ENTER ALIAS FILE NAME 3076.00 1 ENTR_ALIAS -1... 1
MODIFY ALIAS NAME 3077.00 1 MOD_ALIAS -1... 1
Cancel Alarm Input Interface 1.00 1 CAN_ALINIF -1... 1
Create Alarm Input Interface 1.00 1 CR_ALINIF -1... 3
Display Alarm Input Interface 1.00 1 DISP_ALINIF -1... 1
Modify Alarm Input Interface 1.00 1 MOD_ALINIF -1... 1
Display Alarm Output Interface 1.00 1 DISP_ALOUTIF -1... 1
CANCEL ALARM PRIORITY 2922.00 1 CAN_ALPRIO -1... 2
DISPLAY ALARM PRIORITY 769.13 1 DISP_ALPRIO -1... 4
ENTER ALARM PRIORITY 768.13 1 ENTR_ALPRIO -1... 5
DISPLAY ALARM PROFILE 3174.00 1 DISP_ALPROF -1... 1
Display Alarm Profile MP 1.00 1 DISP_ALPROFMP -1... 1
CONT-1 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Create Alarm Relais 1.00 1 CR_ALRELAIS -1... 1
Reset Alarm Relais 1.00 1 RSET_ALRELAIS -1... 1
Reset Alarm SSNC Recovery 1.00 1 RSET_ALSSNCR -1... 1
SET ALARM STATUS 1485.04 1 SET_ALSTAT -1... 1
CANCEL ALARM TEXT 946.02 1 CAN_ALTEXT -1... 1
DISPLAY ALARM TEXT 947.01 1 DISP_ALTEXT -1... 1
ENTER ALARM TEXT 943.01 1 ENTR_ALTEXT -1... 1
CANCEL ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3162.00 1 CAN_AMP -1... 1
COMMUTE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3166.00 1 COM_AMP -1... 1
CONFIGURE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3155.00 1 CONF_AMP -1... 1
CREATE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3156.00 1 CR_AMP -1... 1
DIAGNOSE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3159.00 1 DIAG_AMP -1... 2
DISPLAY ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3160.00 1 DISP_AMP -1... 1
TEST ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3163.00 1 TEST_AMP -1... 1
Cancel ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 CAN_AMX -1... 1
Configure ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 CONF_AMX -1... 1
Create ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 CR_AMX -1... 3
Diagnose ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 DIAG_AMX -1... 1
Display ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 DISP_AMX -1... 1
Modify ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 MOD_AMX -1... 2
Recover ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 RECOV_AMX -1... 1
Display Status of ATM Multiplexer 1.00 1 STAT_AMX -1... 1
Display ATM Multiplexer Clock 1.00 1 DISP_AMXCLK -1... 1
Display ATM Multiplexer Port 1.00 1 DISP_AMXPORT -1... 1
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2888.04 1 CAN_ANELEM -1... 5
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 4098.01 1 CR_ANELEM -1... 11
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 2890.04 1 DISP_ANELEM -1... 6
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT 4099.01 1 MOD_ANELEM -1... 10
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS 216.06 1 CAN_ANGCOS -1... 1
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS 215.06 1 ENTR_ANGCOS -1... 7
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 214.03 1 CAN_ANGRP -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 213.82 1 CR_ANGRP -1... 9
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP 222.03 1 DISP_ANGRP -1... 1
RECORD ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP DATA 2876.30 1 REC_ANGRP -1... 4
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS 220.05 1 CAN_ANLCOS -1... 1
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS 219.05 1 ENTR_ANLCOS -1... 1
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 218.03 1 CAN_ANLN -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 217.79 1 CR_ANLN -1... 3
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 221.03 1 DISP_ANLN -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF ANNOUNCEMENT LINE 847.69 1 STAT_ANLN -1... 2
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2902.01 1 CAN_ANTXT -1... 1
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2903.01 1 CR_ANTXT -1... 2
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2891.01 1 DISP_ANTXT -1... 1
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT 2904.01 1 MOD_ANTXT -1... 2
CANCEL APPLICATION 1767.00 1 CAN_APPL -1... 1
CREATE APPLICATION 1769.08 1 CR_APPL -1... 7
DISPLAY APPLICATION 1771.01 1 DISP_APPL -1... 1
MODIFY APPLICATION 1774.09 1 MOD_APPL -1... 7
ENTER APS NAME 321.01 1 ENTR_APSNAME -1... 1
INCREMENT APS VERSION NUMBER 322.01 1 INCR_APSVN -1... 1
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE 4131.00 1 MOD_ARCHIVE -1... 3
CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE 1052.46 1 CAN_AREACODE -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL AREA CODE DATA 311.46 1 DISP_AREACODE -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL AREA CODE 310.46 1 ENTR_AREACODE -1... 2
MODIFY LOCAL AREA CODE 1051.46 1 MOD_AREACODE -1... 2
Cancel ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 CAN_ASN -1... 1
Configure ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 CONF_ASN -1... 1
Create ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 CR_ASN -1... 2
Diagnose ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 DIAG_ASN -1... 1
Display ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 DISP_ASN -1... 1
Modify ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 MOD_ASN -1... 2
Recover ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 RECOV_ASN -1... 1
Display Status of ATM Switching Network 1.00 1 STAT_ASN -1... 1
Display ATM Switching Network Port 1.00 1 DISP_ASNPORT -1... 1
CANCEL ASYMMETRICAL KEYS 3337.00 1 CAN_ASYMKEY -1... 1
ENTER ASYMMETRICAL KEYS 3338.00 1 ENTR_ASYMKEY -1... 1
MODIFY ASYMMETRICAL KEYS 2955.00 1 MOD_ASYMKEY -1... 8
Cancel ATM Bridge 1.00 1 CAN_ATMB -1... 1
Configure ATM Bridge 1.00 1 CONF_ATMB -1... 1
Create ATM Bridge 1.00 1 CR_ATMB -1... 2
Display ATM Bridge 1.00 1 DISP_ATMB -1... 1
Modify ATM Bridge 1.00 1 MOD_ATMB -1... 2
Display Status of ATM Bridge 1.00 1 STAT_ATMB -1... 1
ALLOW AUDIT 242.79 1 ALLOW_AUDIT -1... 2
CONT-2 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DISPLAY AUDIT 240.70 1 DISP_AUDIT -1... 1
INHIBIT AUDIT 241.79 1 INHIB_AUDIT -1... 2
START AUDIT 239.79 1 START_AUDIT -1... 3
Activate Audit Main Processor 1.00 1 ACT_AUDITMP -1... 1
Deactivate Audit Main Processor 1.00 1 DACT_AUDITMP -1... 1
Display Audit Main Processor 1.00 1 DISP_AUDITMP -1... 1
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION 897.01 1 CAN_AUT -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION 898.01 1 DISP_AUT -1... 1
ENTER AUTHORIZATION 896.01 1 ENTR_AUT -1... 1
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION CLASS 894.01 1 CAN_AUTCL -1... 1
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION CLASS 895.01 1 DISP_AUTCL -1... 1
ENTER AUTHORIZATION CLASS 893.01 1 ENTR_AUTCL -1... 1
Display Authentication Defaults 1.00 1 DISP_AUTHDEF -1... 1
Modify Authentication Defaults 1.00 1 MOD_AUTHDEF -1... 1
DISPLAY CALL DATA OF BASIC ACCESS 1592.04 1 STAT_BA -1... 2
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS FAULT 1818.09 1 DISP_BAFAULT -1... 3
COMMUTE BASE PROCESSORS 1099.00 1 COM_BAP -1... 1
CONFIGURE BASE PROCESSOR 1089.00 1 CONF_BAP -1... 1
DIAGNOSE BASE PROCESSOR 1109.00 1 DIAG_BAP -1... 2
TEST BASE PROCESSOR 1128.00 1 TEST_BAP -1... 1
CONFIGURE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1101.00 1 CONF_BCMY -1... 1
DIAGNOSE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1112.00 1 DIAG_BCMY -1... 1
TEST BUS TO COMMON MEMORY 1130.01 1 TEST_BCMY -1... 1
ACT BIT ERROR MEASUREMENT 3242.03 1 ACT_BERM -1... 2
DISPLAY BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT 3183.16 1 DISP_BERM -1... 1
ACTIVATE BILLING RECORD 3426.35 1 ACT_BILLREC -1... 5
TRANSFER INDIV. CALL DATA BUFFER TO DISK 593.18 1 TRANS_BUFFER -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 LSET IN RT.SET OF RT AREA 1714.01 1 CAN_C7LSETRA -1... 1
DISP.FOR A GIVEN CCS7 LSET ALL RT.AREAS 1716.01 1 DISP_C7LSETRA -1... 1
ENTER CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESC.OF RT AREA 1710.01 1 ENTR_C7LSETRA -1... 1
CANCEL CCS7 ROUTING AREA 1352.02 1 CAN_C7RTAREA -1... 1
CONFIGURE CCS7 ROUTING AREA 1356.02 1 CONF_C7RTAREA -1... 1
CREATE CCS7 ROUTING AREA 1351.02 1 CR_C7RTAREA -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 ROUTING AREA 1353.03 1 DISP_C7RTAREA -1... 1
MODIFY CCS7 ROUTING AREA 1713.03 1 MOD_C7RTAREA -1... 2
CANCEL CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1758.00 1 CAN_C7TGREL -1... 1
DISPLAY CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1759.26 1 DISP_C7TGREL -1... 3
ENTER CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION 1757.25 1 ENTR_C7TGREL -1... 2
TEST CCS7 TRUNK STATUS 3492.26 1 TEST_C7TRSTAT -1... 4
TEST CCS7 TRUNK 854.25 1 TEST_C7TRUNK -1... 4
TEST CCS7 TRUNK VALIDATION 3628.26 1 TEST_C7TRVAL -1... 4
CANCEL CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1684.26 1 CAN_C7USER -1... 2
CREATE CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1685.26 1 CR_C7USER -1... 2
DISPLAY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION 1695.26 1 DISP_C7USER -1... 2
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2444.52 1 CR_CAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2447.52 1 DISP_CAC -1... 1
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2446.54 1 MOD_CAC -1... 1
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT 4032.52 1 CAN_CACCPT -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT 4031.56 1 CR_CACCPT -1... 3
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT 4034.52 1 DISP_CACCPT -1... 2
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT 4033.52 1 MOD_CACCPT -1... 4
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4040.52 1 CAN_CACLST -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4037.52 1 CR_CACLST -1... 1
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4039.52 1 DISP_CACLST -1... 1
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST 4038.52 1 MOD_CACLST -1... 1
CANCEL MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4019.13 1 CAN_CALIDREC -1... 1
CREATE MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4016.13 1 CR_CALIDREC -1... 2
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4018.13 1 DISP_CALIDREC -1... 1
MODIFY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER 4017.13 1 MOD_CALIDREC -1... 2
CANCEL CALLBACK SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 3297.96 1 CAN_CALLBACK -1... 3
ENTER CALLBACK SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 3301.96 1 ENTR_CALLBACK -1... 4
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING DATA 639.79 1 DISP_CALLDAT -1... 7
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS 1945.07 1 DISP_CALLPOPT -1... 2
MODIFY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS 1950.30 1 MOD_CALLPOPT -1... 32
CANCEL CALL TYPE DATA 3387.05 1 CAN_CALLTYPE -1... 1
CREATE CALL TYPE DATA 2395.06 1 CR_CALLTYPE -1... 12
DISPLAY CALL TYPE DATA 3386.06 1 DISP_CALLTYPE -1... 4
MODIFY CALL TYPE DATA 2396.06 1 MOD_CALLTYPE -1... 16
CANCEL CALL PROCESSOR 3165.00 1 CAN_CAP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CALL PROCESSOR 1090.00 1 CONF_CAP -1... 1
CREATE CALL PROCESSOR 3157.00 1 CR_CAP -1... 1
DIAGNOSE CALL PROCESSOR 1110.00 1 DIAG_CAP -1... 2
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSOR 3161.00 1 DISP_CAP -1... 1
TEST CALL PROCESSOR 1129.01 1 TEST_CAP -1... 1
CONT-3 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
ACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3025.02 1 ACT_CBPGRP -1... 1
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3026.03 1 CAN_CBPGRP -1... 1
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3027.04 1 CR_CBPGRP -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3028.02 1 DACT_CBPGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3029.02 1 DISP_CBPGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP 3030.04 1 MOD_CBPGRP -1... 2
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT 328.85 1 CAN_CBPT -1... 2
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT 326.86 1 CR_CBPT -1... 4
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT 329.84 1 DISP_CBPT -1... 2
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT 327.85 1 MOD_CBPT -1... 3
CANCEL CALL BARRING SERVICE 2963.96 1 CAN_CBSERV -1... 3
ENTER CALL BARRING SERVICE 2974.96 1 ENTR_CBSERV -1... 5
CONFIGURE CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR 928.60 1 CONF_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR 921.10 1 DISP_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCG 143.80 1 STAT_CCG -1... 1
DISPLAY CCG-PARAMETER 1549.10 1 DISP_CCGPAR -1... 3
MODIFY CCG-PARAMETER 1548.10 1 MOD_CCGPAR -1... 3
ACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3858.00 1 ACT_CDSPROG -1... 1
CANCEL CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3856.00 1 CAN_CDSPROG -1... 2
DEACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3859.01 1 DACT_CDSPROG -1... 1
DISPLAY CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3857.01 1 DISP_CDSPROG -1... 6
ENTER CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA 3855.01 1 ENTR_CDSPROG -1... 4
CANCEL CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3851.00 1 CAN_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
CREATE CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3850.00 1 CR_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
DISPLAY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3853.00 1 DISP_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
MODIFY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA 3852.00 1 MOD_CDSPRTIM -1... 2
CANCEL CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2791.09 1 CAN_CDTDAT -1... 3
DISPLAY CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2796.02 1 DISP_CDTDAT -1... 1
ENTER CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA 2799.09 1 ENTR_CDTDAT -1... 9
RESET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS 952.00 1 RESET_CFOPT -1... 1
SET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS 951.01 1 SET_CFOPT -1... 2
CANCEL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES 2964.17 1 CAN_CFSERV -1... 4
ENTER CALL FORWARDING SERVICE 2975.39 1 ENTR_CFSERV -1... 8
DISPLAY CALL FAILURE TREATMENT 1208.00 1 DISP_CFT -1... 1
ENTER CALL FAILURE TREATMENT 1207.00 1 ENTR_CFT -1... 1
DISPLAY COMMAND FILE TIME JOB 648.01 1 DISP_CFTJOB -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGING DATA RECORDS 3819.02 1 DISP_CHAREC -1... 27
DISPLAY CIRCUIT POOL PREFERENCES 4078.18 1 DISP_CIRPPREF -1... 1
MODIFY CIRCUIT POOL PREFERENCES 4079.39 1 MOD_CIRPPREF -1... 4
CANCEL CIRCUIT POOL RELATION 4064.18 1 CAN_CIRPREL -1... 1
DISPLAY CIRCUIT POOL RELATION 4065.39 1 DISP_CIRPREL -1... 5
ENTER CIRCUIT POOL RELATION 4063.39 1 ENTR_CIRPREL -1... 3
Display Clock Reference 1.00 1 DISP_CLKREF -1... 1
Cancel Clock Source 1.00 1 CAN_CLKSRC -1... 1
Create Clock Source 1.00 1 CR_CLKSRC -1... 1
Display Clock Source 1.00 1 DISP_CLKSRC -1... 1
SKIP COMMAND 1.00 1 SKIP_CMD -1... 1
EXECUTE COMMAND FILE 671.75 1 EXEC_CMDFILE -1... 3
CONFIGURE COMMON MEMORY 1102.00 1 CONF_CMY -1... 1
DIAGNOSE COMMON MEMORY 1113.00 1 DIAG_CMY -1... 1
TEST COMMON MEMORY 1131.01 1 TEST_CMY -1... 1
LOAD CMY FIRMWARE 4198.00 1 LOAD_CMYFW -1... 1
DUMP CCNC MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3897.00 1 DMP_CNIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3899.00 1 ACT_CNPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3902.00 1 CAN_CNPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3900.00 1 DACT_CNPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3903.01 1 DISP_CNPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3898.00 1 ENTR_CNPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH 3901.00 1 UPD_CNPRPCH -1... 1
ACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3905.00 1 ACT_CNTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3907.00 1 CAN_CNTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3906.00 1 DACT_CNTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3908.01 1 DISP_CNTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH 3904.00 1 ENTR_CNTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL COUNTRY CODE 2450.44 1 CAN_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
DISPLAY COUNTRY CODE 2451.46 1 DISP_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
ENTER COUNTRY CODE 2449.46 1 ENTR_CNTRYCOD -1... 1
Repair Code File on MP 1.00 1 REP_CODEFILE -1... 2
DISPLAY LARGE CONFERENCE 3508.07 1 DISP_CONFL -1... 2
MODIFY LARGE CONFERENCE 3507.07 1 MOD_CONFL -1... 1
CANCEL CONFERENCE 1932.07 1 CAN_CONFRNC -1... 1
CREATE CONFERENCE 1933.07 1 CR_CONFRNC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONFERENCE 1934.07 1 DISP_CONFRNC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONNECTIONS 1652.11 1 DISP_CONN -1... 5
CONT-4 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
RELEASE CONNECTION 1581.52 1 REL_CONN -1... 5
ACTIVATE CONNECTION TRACE 2013.17 1 ACT_CONNTRAC -1... 13
CANCEL CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET 2057.16 1 CAN_CONNTRAC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CONNECTION TRACE 2014.16 1 DACT_CONNTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET 2058.16 1 DISP_CONNTRAC -1... 1
DUMP CONNECTION TRACE 2015.17 1 DMP_CONNTRAC -1... 3
ENTER CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET 2059.17 1 ENTR_CONNTRAC -1... 8
MODIFY CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET 2060.17 1 MOD_CONNTRAC -1... 5
Cancel Continuity Monitor 1.00 1 CAN_CONTMON -1... 1
Create Continuity Monitor 1.00 1 CR_CONTMON -1... 2
Display Continuity Monitor 1.00 1 DISP_CONTMON -1... 2
Modify Continuity Monitor 1.00 1 MOD_CONTMON -1... 2
CONFIGURATE CONFERENCE UNIT 1492.18 1 CONF_COU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE CONFERENCE UNIT 1491.08 1 DIAG_COU -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CONFERENCE UNIT 1490.88 1 STAT_COU -1... 1
RECORD COORDINATION PROCESSOR 277.39 1 REC_CP -1... 4
ACTIVATE CP DUMP CONDITIONS 1066.20 1 ACT_CPDMPC -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CONDITIONAL CPDUMP 1068.02 1 DACT_CPDMPC -1... 1
DISPLAY CONDITIONAL CPDUMP 1067.00 1 DISP_CPDMPC -1... 1
DUMP CP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3605.00 1 DMP_CPIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3593.00 1 ACT_CPPRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL CP PERMANENT PATCH 3596.00 1 CAN_CPPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3594.00 1 DACT_CPPRPCH -1... 2
DISPLAY CP PERMANENT PATCH 3597.02 1 DISP_CPPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CP PERMANENT PATCH 3592.00 1 ENTR_CPPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE CP PERMANENT PATCH 3595.00 1 UPD_CPPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL CODE POINT 21.49 1 CAN_CPT -1... 3
CREATE CODE POINT 19.60 1 CR_CPT -1... 13
DISPLAY CODE POINT 197.60 1 DISP_CPT -1... 4
MERGE CODE POINT 387.60 1 MERGE_CPT -1... 4
MODIFY CODE POINT 314.60 1 MOD_CPT -1... 10
SPLIT CODE POINT 385.60 1 SPLIT_CPT -1... 5
ACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3599.00 1 ACT_CPTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3601.00 1 CAN_CPTRPCH -1... 2
DEACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3600.00 1 DACT_CPTRPCH -1... 2
DISPLAY CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3602.02 1 DISP_CPTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER CP TRANSIENT PATCH 3598.00 1 ENTR_CPTRPCH -1... 2
ENTER CARRIER QUOTA DATA 1805.02 1 ENTR_CQDAT -1... 4
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA DATA 1807.05 1 MOD_CQDAT -1... 9
CAN CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1800.01 1 CAN_CQGRP -1... 1
CREATE CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1802.03 1 CR_CQGRP -1... 2
DISPLAY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1804.02 1 DISP_CQGRP -1... 1
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP 1808.02 1 MOD_CQGRP -1... 1
CONFIGURE CODE RECEIVER 383.78 1 CONF_CR -1... 2
DIAGNOSE CODE RECEIVER 996.18 1 DIAG_CR -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF CODE RECEIVER 384.88 1 STAT_CR -1... 3
CANCEL CODE RECEIVER MODULE 186.73 1 CAN_CRMOD -1... 1
CREATE CODE RECEIVER MODULE 166.81 1 CR_CRMOD -1... 2
DISPLAY CODE RECEIVER MODULE 176.75 1 DISP_CRMOD -1... 1
DUMP CSC-TRACE DATA 1075.01 1 DMP_CSCTRAC -1... 1
START CSWD PROCESSES 280.10 1 START_CSWD -1... 1
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP 2764.04 1 CAN_CUG -1... 2
DISPLAY CLOSED USER GROUP DATA 2766.02 1 DISP_CUG -1... 2
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP 2768.06 1 ENTR_CUG -1... 3
MODIFY CLOSED USER GROUP AUTHORIZATION 2770.02 1 MOD_CUGAUTH -1... 2
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICE 3285.95 1 CAN_CUGSERV -1... 4
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICE 3286.95 1 ENTR_CUGSERV -1... 4
RELEASE CYCLIC FILE 410.03 1 REL_CYCFILE -1... 1
Dump Disk Allocation 1.00 1 DMP_DALLOC -1... 1
Repair Data Files on MP 1.00 1 REP_DATFILES -1... 1
START DATA BASE 3568.00 1 START_DB -1... 1
Display Database Content 1.00 1 DISP_DBCONT -1... 1
Dump Disk Block 1.00 1 DMP_DBLOCK -1... 1
Patch Disk Block 1.00 1 PATCH_DBLOCK -1... 1
ACTIVATE DATABASE QUERY 4009.13 1 ACT_DBQUERY -1... 1
DISPLAY DATA BASE DESCRIPTION 1251.04 1 DISP_DBSIZE -1... 1
MODIFY DB-SIZE 1079.04 1 MOD_DBSIZE -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER 998.08 1 DIAG_DCR -1... 1
Cancel Disk Dir from Master and Slave 1.00 1 CAN_DDIR -1... 1
Repair Double Disk Outage on MP 1.00 1 REP_DDISKOUT -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR 997.08 1 DIAG_DES -1... 1
ACTIVATE DESTINATION 1799.01 1 ACT_DEST -1... 1
CANCEL DESTINATION 5.02 1 CAN_DEST -1... 1
CREATE DESTINATION 25.87 1 CR_DEST -1... 7
CONT-5 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DEACTIVATE DESTINATION 1803.01 1 DACT_DEST -1... 1
DISPLAY DESTINATION 193.07 1 DISP_DEST -1... 2
MODIFY DESTINATION 412.88 1 MOD_DEST -1... 8
RECORD DESTINATION 261.39 1 REC_DEST -1... 5
CANCEL DESTINATION CONTROL DATA 2957.01 1 CAN_DESTCNTL -1... 2
ENTER DESTINATION CONTROL DATA 2958.01 1 ENTR_DESTCNTL -1... 2
CANCEL DESTINATION DATA 1801.03 1 CAN_DESTDAT -1... 1
ENTER DESTINATION DATA 1806.06 1 ENTR_DESTDAT -1... 3
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA 1809.05 1 MOD_DESTDAT -1... 3
DISPLAY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION 900.01 1 DISP_DEVAUT -1... 1
MODIFY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION 899.02 1 MOD_DEVAUT -1... 1
Cancel Disk File from Master and Slave 1.00 1 CAN_DFILE -1... 1
Catalog Disk File on Master and Slave 1.00 1 CAT_DFILE -1... 1
Display Disk Files on Master or Slave 1.00 1 DISP_DFILE -1... 2
Dump Disk File 1.00 1 DMP_DFILE -1... 1
Patch Disk File 1.00 1 PATCH_DFILE -1... 1
Cancel Disk File FS 1.00 1 CAN_DFILEFS -1... 1
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS STATISTICS 1118.00 1 DISP_DIAGSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITS CP 2162.49 1 DISP_DIGITCP -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITS GP 915.01 1 CAN_DIGITGP -1... 1
CREATE DIGITS GP 992.52 1 CR_DIGITGP -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITS GP 913.46 1 DISP_DIGITGP -1... 1
MODIFY DIGITS GP 1926.49 1 MOD_DIGITGP -1... 3
Dump Disk File Inode 1.00 1 DMP_DINODE -1... 1
Patch Disk File Inode 1.00 1 PATCH_DINODE -1... 1
STOP DISPLAY 379.70 1 STOP_DISP -1... 1
CONFIGURE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 393.88 1 CONF_DIU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 995.08 1 DIAG_DIU -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT 356.88 1 STAT_DIU -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT 655.05 1 CAN_DLU -1... 1
CONFIGURE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 667.50 1 CONF_DLU -1... 2
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 652.81 1 CR_DLU -1... 5
DIAGNOSIS OF THE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1020.50 1 DIAG_DLU -1... 1
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT 649.03 1 DISP_DLU -1... 1
EXTEND DIGITAL LINE UNIT 657.07 1 EXT_DLU -1... 4
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT 4097.01 1 MOD_DLU -1... 2
RECORD DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1056.30 1 REC_DLU -1... 4
REDUCE DIGITAL LINE UNIT 656.05 1 RED_DLU -1... 2
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU SYSTEMS 663.50 1 STAT_DLU -1... 1
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4102.01 1 CAN_DLUEQ -1... 1
CONFIGURE DLU EQUIPMENT 670.50 1 CONF_DLUEQ -1... 3
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4100.01 1 CR_DLUEQ -1... 2
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-EQUIPMENT 1022.50 1 DIAG_DLUEQ -1... 2
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4103.01 1 DISP_DLUEQ -1... 2
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT 4101.01 1 MOD_DLUEQ -1... 2
DISPLAY OST OF DLU EQUIPMENT 665.50 1 STAT_DLUEQ -1... 3
TEST DLU LINE CIRCUIT 676.15 1 TEST_DLULC -1... 6
CANCEL DLU MODULE 654.11 1 CAN_DLUMOD -1... 2
CONFIGURE DLU MODULE 668.50 1 CONF_DLUMOD -1... 2
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE 653.03 1 CR_DLUMOD -1... 12
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-MODULES 1021.50 1 DIAG_DLUMOD -1... 1
DISPLAY DLU MODULE 651.09 1 DISP_DLUMOD -1... 2
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE 1041.11 1 MOD_DLUMOD -1... 3
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU MODULES 664.50 1 STAT_DLUMOD -1... 2
DISPLAY TRANSIENT DLU PATH DATA 849.03 1 DISP_DLUPD -1... 1
CONFIGURE DLU PORTS 669.10 1 CONF_DLUPORT -1... 2
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT PORT 661.13 1 DISP_DLUPORT -1... 2
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF DLU PORT 650.03 1 SEL_DLUPORT -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF DLU PORTS 666.07 1 STAT_DLUPORT -1... 2
ACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1942.00 1 ACT_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
DACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1944.00 1 DACT_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
DISP DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1946.00 1 DISP_DMPSGMSG -1... 1
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER 990.84 1 CAN_DN -1... 1
CREATE DIRECTORY NUMBER 988.86 1 CR_DN -1... 2
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA 192.83 1 DISP_DN -1... 3
EXTEND DIRECTORY NUMBER 2276.03 1 EXT_DN -1... 1
MODIFY DIRECTORY NUMBER 989.86 1 MOD_DN -1... 3
RECORD DIRECTORY NUMBERS 2924.03 1 REC_DN -1... 10
REDUCE DIRECTORY NUMBER 2277.04 1 RED_DN -1... 1
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE 1050.46 1 DISP_DNATT -1... 1
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE 1049.54 1 ENTR_DNATT -1... 2
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2960.04 1 CAN_DNOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2961.03 1 DISP_DNOBS -1... 1
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB 2962.04 1 ENTR_DNOBS -1... 4
CONT-6 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DISPLAY DESTINATION NUMBER POINTS 454.13 1 DISP_DNP -1... 1
CANCEL DPFC ACTION 2483.00 1 CAN_DPFCACT -1... 1
CREATE DPFC ACTION 2482.35 1 CR_DPFCACT -1... 8
DISPLAY DPFC ACTION 2484.00 1 DISP_DPFCACT -1... 1
CANCEL DPFC EVALUATION DATA 2486.35 1 CAN_DPFCDAT -1... 3
CREATE DPFC EVALUATION DATA 2485.35 1 CR_DPFCDAT -1... 6
DISPLAY DPFC EVALUATION DATA 2487.35 1 DISP_DPFCDAT -1... 2
CANCEL DPFC ACTION EXCLUSION 2489.00 1 CAN_DPFCEXCL -1... 1
DISPLAY DPFC ACTION EXCLUSION 2490.00 1 DISP_DPFCEXCL -1... 1
ENTER DPFC ACTION EXCLUSION 2488.00 1 ENTR_DPFCEXCL -1... 1
CANCEL DEVICE GROUP 1791.01 1 CAN_DVGRP -1... 1
CREATE DEVICEGROUP 1793.01 1 CR_DVGRP -1... 2
SELECT DEVICE GROUP 1798.01 1 SEL_DVGRP -1... 1
DISP DEVICE GROUP LINK 1794.00 1 DISP_DVGRPLNK -1... 1
MODIFY DEVICE GROUP LINK 1796.02 1 MOD_DVGRPLNK -1... 2
CANCEL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1016.02 1 CAN_EAL -1... 1
CREATE EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1015.03 1 CR_EAL -1... 1
DISPLAY EXTERNAL ALARM LINE 1017.01 1 DISP_EAL -1... 1
CREATE EAL LEVEL 1019.02 1 CR_EALLVL -1... 1
DISPLAY EAL LEVEL 1018.01 1 DISP_EALLVL -1... 1
Cancel EADAS Signaling Link Measurement 1.00 1 CAN_EASIGLME -1... 1
Create EADAS Signaling Link Measurement 1.00 1 CR_EASIGLME -1... 2
Display EADAS Signaling Link Measurement 1.00 1 DISP_EASIGLME -1... 1
Cancel EADAS Signaling Linkset Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_EASIGLSME -1... 1
Create EADAS Signaling Linkset Meas. 1.00 1 CR_EASIGLSME -1... 2
Display EADAS Signaling Linkset Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_EASIGLSME -1... 1
Cancel EADAS Sign. Network El. Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_EASIGNEME -1... 1
Create EADAS Sign. Network El. Meas. 1.00 1 CR_EASIGNEME -1... 2
Display EADAS Sign. Network El. Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_EASIGNEME -1... 1
EXECUTE EDT SYSTEM 8 270.00 1 EXEC_EDTS8 -1... 4
RECORD EQUIPMENT IDENTITY REGISTER 3062.18 1 REC_EIR -1... 4
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2338.00 1 CAN_ELMSG -1... 1
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2334.02 1 CR_ELMSG -1... 6
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2339.01 1 DISP_ELMSG -1... 2
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE 2335.02 1 MOD_ELMSG -1... 6
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2341.00 1 CAN_ELMSGERR -1... 1
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2336.01 1 CR_ELMSGERR -1... 1
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2342.00 1 DISP_ELMSGERR -1... 1
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR 2340.01 1 MOD_ELMSGERR -1... 1
RESET EMERGENCY OPERATION 647.01 1 RESET_EMERGOP -1... 1
Dump Error Notebook 1.00 1 DMP_ENB -1... 2
DISPLAY ENTITY OPTIONS 2969.17 1 DISP_ENTOPT -1... 1
MODIFY ENTITY OPTIONS 2977.30 1 MOD_ENTOPT -1... 3
MODIFY EQUIPMENT NUMBER 1860.18 1 MOD_EQN -1... 3
ACTIVATE EQUIPMENT TRAP 345.30 1 ACT_EQTRAP -1... 18
CANCEL EQUIPMENT TRAP 348.30 1 CAN_EQTRAP -1... 6
DISPLAY ERROR STATISTIC DATA 2815.06 1 DISP_ERRSTDAT -1... 10
Create Error Tracer Log 1.00 1 CR_ERRTRCLOG -1... 1
Cancel Error Tracer Records 1.00 1 CAN_ERRTRCREC -1... 1
Display Error Tracer Records to File 1.00 1 DISP_ERRTRCRECF -1... 1
Cancel Event Destination 1.00 1 CAN_EVDEST -1... 1
Create Event Destination 1.00 1 CR_EVDEST -1... 3
Disp Event Destination 1.00 1 DISP_EVDEST -1... 1
Modify Event Destination 1.00 1 MOD_EVDEST -1... 2
Cancel Event Log 1.00 1 CAN_EVLOG -1... 1
Create Event Log 1.00 1 CR_EVLOG -1... 3
Display Event Log 1.00 1 DISP_EVLOG -1... 1
Modify Event Log 1.00 1 MOD_EVLOG -1... 2
Cancel Event Log Records 1.00 1 CAN_EVREC -1... 1
Display Event Log Records Into File 1.00 1 DISP_EVRECF -1... 2
RECORD EXCHANGE DATA 290.06 1 REC_EXCH -1... 4
INTERFACE DCP TO SSP 940.01 1 STAT_EXCH -1... 1
ENTER EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION 309.04 1 ENTR_EXCHID -1... 2
DISPLAY EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA 1030.07 1 DISP_EXDDAT -1... 1
ENTER EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA 1029.07 1 ENTR_EXDDAT -1... 3
CANCEL EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE 2965.35 1 CAN_EXTLAC -1... 1
CREATE EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE 2967.35 1 CR_EXTLAC -1... 1
DISPLAY EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE 2970.94 1 DISP_EXTLAC -1... 1
MODIFY EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE 2978.35 1 MOD_EXTLAC -1... 2
START FILE CONTROL PROCESSING 279.10 1 START_FCP -1... 1
DISPLAY FCS COUNTERS 1231.03 1 DISP_FCS -1... 2
CANCEL FILE GROUP 1879.02 1 CAN_FGRP -1... 1
CREATE FILE GROUP 1880.04 1 CR_FGRP -1... 2
DISPLAY FILE GROUPS 1876.02 1 DISP_FGRP -1... 1
CONT-7 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
MODIFY FILE GROUP 2328.00 1 MOD_FGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1507.02 1 DISP_FGRPATT -1... 1
RESET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1878.01 1 RSET_FGRPATT -1... 1
SET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES 1506.06 1 SET_FGRPATT -1... 3
CANCEL FILE GROUP PASSWORD 3410.00 1 CAN_FGRPPW -1... 1
RSET FILE GROUP PASSWORD 1886.01 1 RSET_FGRPPW -1... 1
SET FILE GROUP PASSWORD 1887.02 1 SET_FGRPPW -1... 2
Cancel NE Files 1.00 1 CAN_FILE -1... 1
CATALOG FILE 245.03 1 CAT_FILE -1... 2
CREATE FILE 237.06 1 CR_FILE -1... 1
DELETE FILE 235.04 1 DEL_FILE -1... 2
DISPLAY FILE 959.07 1 DISP_FILE -1... 2
List NE Files 1.00 1 LIST_FILE -1... 1
Receive File from NE 1.00 1 RCV_FILE -1... 2
Send File to NE 1.00 1 SEND_FILE -1... 3
TRANSFER FILE 939.08 1 TRANS_FILE -1... 9
MODIFY FILE AUTHORIZATION 966.02 1 MOD_FILEAUT -1... 1
ACTIVATE FILE FEATURES 2382.00 1 ACT_FILEFEAT -1... 1
CANCEL FILE FEATURES 2381.00 1 CAN_FILEFEAT -1... 1
DEACTIVATE FILE FEATURES 2383.00 1 DACT_FILEFEAT -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE FEATURES 2384.00 1 DISP_FILEFEAT -1... 1
ENTER FILE FEATURES 2380.16 1 ENTR_FILEFEAT -1... 2
ENTER FILE PASSWORD 1891.00 1 ENTR_FILEPSW -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE SECURITY METHOD 3896.00 1 DISP_FILESEC -1... 1
SET FILE SECURITY METHOD 3895.00 1 SET_FILESEC -1... 1
DISPLAY FILETEXT 2837.00 1 DISP_FILETEXT -1... 1
CANCEL FILE TRANSFERS 3246.00 1 CAN_FILETRF -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE TRANSFERS 2870.01 1 DISP_FILETRF -1... 1
STOP FILE TRANSFERS 3245.00 1 STOP_FILETRF -1... 1
CANCEL FILTER COMMAND 4262.00 1 CAN_FILTER -1... 1
CREATE FILTER COMMAND 4261.00 1 CR_FILTER -1... 6
DISPLAY FILTER COMMAND 4263.00 1 DISP_FILTER -1... 1
ACTIVATE FIXPOINT 2683.01 1 ACT_FIXPOINT -1... 2
DEACTIVATE FIXPOINT 2691.00 1 DACT_FIXPOINT -1... 1
DISPLAY FIXPOINT 2693.01 1 DISP_FIXPOINT -1... 1
ACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT 958.02 1 ACT_FNS -1... 1
CANCEL FILE NAME SEGMENT 968.02 1 CAN_FNS -1... 1
DEACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT 1508.00 1 DACT_FNS -1... 1
DISPLAY FILE NAME SEGMENT 956.01 1 DISP_FNS -1... 1
ENTER FILE NAME SEGMENT 967.02 1 ENTR_FNS -1... 1
Display Following Files 1.00 1 DISP_FOLLOW -1... 1
Activate Fast Process Trace 1.00 1 ACT_FPTRC -1... 1
Deactivate Fast Process Trace 1.00 1 DACT_FPTRC -1... 1
Display Fast Process Trace 1.00 1 DISP_FPTRC -1... 1
Dump Data of Fast Process Trace 1.00 1 DMP_FPTRC -1... 1
Display File Security Configuration 1.00 1 DISP_FSCFG -1... 1
Modify File Security Configuration 1.00 1 MOD_FSCFG -1... 1
Cancel File Security File Group 1.00 1 CAN_FSFGRP -1... 1
Create File Security File Group 1.00 1 CR_FSFGRP -1... 3
Display File Security File Group 1.00 1 DISP_FSFGRP -1... 2
Modify File Security File Group 1.00 1 MOD_FSFGRP -1... 3
Modify File Security File Group Password 1.00 1 MOD_FSFGRPPW -1... 2
Reset File Security File Group Password 1.00 1 RSET_FSFGRPPW -1... 2
Cancel File Security Initiator Group 1.00 1 CAN_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Create File Security Initiator Group 1.00 1 CR_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Display File Security Initiator Group 1.00 1 DISP_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Modify File Security Initiator Group 1.00 1 MOD_FSINIGRP -1... 1
Cancel File Security Rule 1.00 1 CAN_FSRULE -1... 1
Create File Security Rule 1.00 1 CR_FSRULE -1... 3
Display File Security Rule 1.00 1 DISP_FSRULE -1... 2
Modify File Security Rule 1.00 1 MOD_FSRULE -1... 2
Test Free Input of FSYS OT Commands 1.00 1 TEST_FSYS -1... 1
Cancel File Transfer Initiator 1.00 1 CAN_FTINI -1... 1
Create File Transfer Initiator 1.00 1 CR_FTINI -1... 3
Display File Transfer Initiator 1.00 1 DISP_FTINI -1... 1
Modify File Transfer Initiator 1.00 1 MOD_FTINI -1... 3
CANCEL FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL 1510.01 1 CAN_FUOMT -1... 1
CREATE FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL 1509.01 1 CR_FUOMT -1... 1
SELECT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINALS 1511.01 1 SEL_FUOMT -1... 1
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS 1512.00 1 DISP_FUOMTLNK -1... 1
MODIFY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS 1513.01 1 MOD_FUOMTLNK -1... 1
CANCEL GENERAL CALL SERVICES 3001.35 1 CAN_GCSERV -1... 3
ENTER GENERAL CALL SERVICES 2976.35 1 ENTR_GCSERV -1... 5
Modify GCS on MP 1.00 1 MOD_GCSMP -1... 1
CONT-8 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
ACTIVATE GENERATION 1204.03 1 ACT_GEN -1... 1
CANCEL GENERATION 1299.01 1 CAN_GEN -1... 1
COPY GENERATION 1302.06 1 COPY_GEN -1... 6
DISPLAY GENERATION 1298.02 1 DISP_GEN -1... 1
ENTER GENERATION 1081.03 1 ENTR_GEN -1... 3
MERGE GENERATION 2698.00 1 MERGE_GEN -1... 2
MODIFY GENERATION 2699.02 1 MOD_GEN -1... 2
UPDATE GENERATION 1202.00 1 UPD_GEN -1... 1
Cancel Generation on Coupled CP and MP 1.00 1 CAN_GENCPMP -1... 2
Copy Generation on Coupled CP and MP 1.00 1 COPY_GENCPMP -1... 2
Display Generation on Coupled CP and MP 1.00 1 DISP_GENCPMP -1... 2
Modify Generation on Coupled CP and MP 1.00 1 MOD_GENCPMP -1... 2
Build Generation First Install on MP 1.00 1 BLD_GENINSMP -1... 1
Cancel Generation on MP 1.00 1 CAN_GENMP -1... 1
Copy Generation on MP 1.00 1 COPY_GENMP -1... 2
Create Generation on MP 1.00 1 CR_GENMP -1... 1
Display Generation on MP 1.00 1 DISP_GENMP -1... 2
Install Delivered Generation on MP 1.00 1 INST_GENMP -1... 1
Merge Generations on MP 1.00 1 MERGE_GENMP -1... 2
Modify Generation on MP 1.00 1 MOD_GENMP -1... 2
Remove Generations on MP 1.00 1 REM_GENMP -1... 1
Restore Generation on MP 1.00 1 REST_GENMP -1... 1
Utilize Installed Generation on MP 1.00 1 UTIL_GENMP -1... 1
Validate Delivered Generation on MP 1.00 1 VAL_GENMP -1... 1
Build Generation During Upgrade on MP 1.00 1 BLD_GENUPGMP -1... 1
RECORD GRADE OF SERVICE 692.03 1 REC_GOS -1... 4
RECORD GROUP PROCESSOR 276.30 1 REC_GP -1... 4
CANCEL GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE 4073.00 1 CAN_GPRSERV -1... 1
ENTER GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE 4072.35 1 ENTR_GPRSERV -1... 2
CAN GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT 3002.39 1 CAN_GSMBCIE -1... 1
CR GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT 3004.39 1 CR_GSMBCIE -1... 3
DISP GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT 3006.39 1 DISP_GSMBCIE -1... 1
MOD GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT 3008.39 1 MOD_GSMBCIE -1... 3
CAN GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2834.30 1 CAN_GTCGPACD -1... 1
DISP GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2835.30 1 DISP_GTCGPACD -1... 1
ENTER GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA 2836.41 1 ENTR_GTCGPACD -1... 3
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 2617.30 1 CAN_GTCPT -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 1970.41 1 CR_GTCPT -1... 3
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 2641.50 1 DISP_GTCPT -1... 1
MERGE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 3122.41 1 MERGE_GTCPT -1... 22
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 1998.41 1 MOD_GTCPT -1... 3
SPLIT GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT 3123.50 1 SPLIT_GTCPT -1... 2
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 2618.30 1 CAN_GTDEST -1... 1
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 1971.41 1 CR_GTDEST -1... 14
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 2642.50 1 DISP_GTDEST -1... 1
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION 1999.41 1 MOD_GTDEST -1... 15
RECORD HOME LOCATION REGISTER DATA 1928.18 1 REC_HLR -1... 4
ACTIVATE HLR CHECKPOINT 4147.00 1 ACT_HLRCHP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE HLR CHECKPOINT 4148.00 1 DACT_HLRCHP -1... 1
DISPLAY HLR CHECKPOINT 4146.00 1 DISP_HLRCHP -1... 1
CANCEL HLR IDENTIFICATION 1960.94 1 CAN_HLRID -1... 1
CREATE HLR IDENTIFICATION 1973.94 1 CR_HLRID -1... 1
DISPLAY HLR IDENTIFICATION 1985.94 1 DISP_HLRID -1... 1
ACTIVATE HOME LOCATION REGISTER UPDATE 3333.18 1 ACT_HLRUPD -1... 1
DISPLAY HOME LOCATION REGISTER UPDATE 3334.18 1 DISP_HLRUPD -1... 1
DISPLAY HEAP MANAGEMENT STATISTICS 375.00 1 DISP_HMSTAT -1... 1
START HEAP MANAGEMENT STATISTICS 374.00 1 START_HMSTAT -1... 1
STOP HEAP MANAGEMENT STATISTICS 373.00 1 STOP_HMSTAT -1... 1
CANCEL HOLIDAY 55.39 1 CAN_HOLIDAY -1... 1
DISPLAY HOLIDAY 53.39 1 DISP_HOLIDAY -1... 1
ENTER HOLIDAY 54.39 1 ENTR_HOLIDAY -1... 2
Cancel Hop Feature for IP 1.00 1 CAN_HOPFEATIP -1... 1
Create Hop Feature for IP 1.00 1 CR_HOPFEATIP -1... 4
Display Hop Feature for IP 1.00 1 DISP_HOPFEATIP -1... 1
Modify Hop Feature for IP 1.00 1 MOD_HOPFEATIP -1... 2
Define Hardware Code Tracepoint 1.00 1 DEF_HWTPCOD -1... 1
Define Hardware Data Tracepoint 1.00 1 DEF_HWTPDATA -1... 1
Continue HW Upgrade on MP 1.00 1 CONT_HWUPGMP -1... 1
CANCEL IACHASTA OBJECT 2386.04 1 CAN_IACOBJ -1... 8
CREATE IACHASTA OBJECT 2385.04 1 CR_IACOBJ -1... 8
DISPLAY IACHASTA OBJECT 2387.04 1 DISP_IACOBJ -1... 9
ACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2397.04 1 ACT_IACRG -1... 4
DEACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2398.02 1 DACT_IACRG -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION 2399.02 1 DISP_IACRG -1... 1
CONT-9 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
CANCEL IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2389.04 1 CAN_IACRGPT -1... 2
CREATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2388.05 1 CR_IACRGPT -1... 7
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2391.04 1 DISP_IACRGPT -1... 4
MODIFY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT 2390.05 1 MOD_IACRGPT -1... 4
DISPLAY IACHASTA SCHEDULE 2441.02 1 DISP_IACSCHED -1... 1
MODIFY IACHASTA SCHEDULE 2440.02 1 MOD_IACSCHED -1... 2
DISPLAY IACHASTA SETTINGS 2364.02 1 DISP_IACSET -1... 1
ENTER IACHASTA SETTINGS 2363.04 1 ENTR_IACSET -1... 1
DISPLAY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION 2453.02 1 DISP_IACTRADI -1... 1
MODIFY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION 2438.04 1 MOD_IACTRADI -1... 6
ACTIVATE INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE 835.19 1 ACT_IAFEAT -1... 13
CANCEL INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE 836.18 1 CAN_IAFEAT -1... 1
DISPLAY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURES 833.18 1 DISP_IAFEAT -1... 1
MODIFY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE 3946.18 1 MOD_IAFEAT -1... 1
ACTIVATE INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 831.01 1 ACT_IAOPT -1... 1
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 832.01 1 CAN_IAOPT -1... 1
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS 834.01 1 DISP_IAOPT -1... 1
COPY IARACCOUNT 718.00 1 COPY_IARACCT -1... 1
CANCEL IARSTAT CONNEC.GROUP ASSIGNMENTS 2783.01 1 CAN_IARCON -1... 2
DISPLAY IARSTAT CONNEC.GROUP ASSIGNMENTS 2785.00 1 DISP_IARCON -1... 1
ENTER IARSTAT CONNEC.GROUP ASSIGNMENTS 2788.01 1 ENTR_IARCON -1... 2
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS DATA 541.01 1 DISP_IARDAT -1... 2
MODIFY IARA STATISTICS DATA 540.70 1 MOD_IARDAT -1... 2
DISPLAY IARA MEASUREMENT FILE 3142.16 1 DISP_IARFILE -1... 1
CANCEL IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUPS 2787.00 1 CAN_IARGRP -1... 1
CREATE IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUPS 2784.00 1 CR_IARGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUPS 2786.00 1 DISP_IARGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS JOB 636.00 1 DISP_IARJOB -1... 1
CANCEL IARSTAT MATRIX POINT 716.03 1 CAN_IARMPT -1... 2
CREATE IARSTAT MATRIX POINT 1000.03 1 CR_IARMPT -1... 3
DISPLAY IARSTAT MATRIX POINT 715.03 1 DISP_IARMPT -1... 3
CANCEL IARA STATISTICS NAME 704.05 1 CAN_IARNAME -1... 10
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS NAME 542.05 1 DISP_IARNAME -1... 5
ENTER IARA STATISTICS NAME 703.05 1 ENTR_IARNAME -1... 10
MODIFY IARA STATISTICS NAME 705.05 1 MOD_IARNAME -1... 10
CANCEL IARSTAT SAVING DATE 1290.00 1 CAN_IARSAVDA -1... 1
DISPLAY IARSTAT SAVING DATE 1289.00 1 DISP_IARSAVDA -1... 1
ENTER IARSTAT SAVING DATE 1288.00 1 ENTR_IARSAVDA -1... 1
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS 539.71 1 DISP_IARSTAT -1... 2
RECORD IARA STATISTICS 538.72 1 REC_IARSTAT -1... 2
CANCEL IARSTAT TIME PERIOD 339.75 1 CAN_IARTMPD -1... 2
CREATE IARSTAT TIME PERIOD 337.75 1 CR_IARTMPD -1... 2
DISPLAY IARA TIME PERIOD 334.71 1 DISP_IARTMPD -1... 1
MODIFY IARSTAT TIME PERIOD 338.75 1 MOD_IARTMPD -1... 2
CANCEL IARA STATISTICS ZONE 545.71 1 CAN_IARZONE -1... 2
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS ZONE 546.00 1 DISP_IARZONE -1... 2
ENTER IARA STATISTICS ZONE 543.71 1 ENTR_IARZONE -1... 2
MODIFY IARA STATISTICS ZONE 544.71 1 MOD_IARZONE -1... 2
ACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY 3913.00 1 ACT_IBFS -1... 1
DEACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY 3914.00 1 DACT_IBFS -1... 1
DISPLAY INITIATOR BASED FILE SEC. STATUS 3915.00 1 DISP_IBFS -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF LAYER 1 FOR ISDN PORTS 1591.01 1 STAT_ILAYER1 -1... 2
CANCEL INTERNAT. MOBILE EQUIPMENT ID. 3136.34 1 CAN_IMEI -1... 2
CREATE INTERNAT. MOBILE EQUIPMENT ID. 3137.34 1 CR_IMEI -1... 5
DISPLAY INTERNAT. MOBILE EQUIPMENT ID. 3139.34 1 DISP_IMEI -1... 6
ACTIVATE IMSI TRACING 3287.94 1 ACT_IMSITRAC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE IMSI TRACING 3288.94 1 DACT_IMSITRAC -1... 1
CANCEL IN AUTHORIZATION 3804.02 1 CAN_INAUTH -1... 1
CREATE IN AUTHORIZATION 3803.02 1 CR_INAUTH -1... 2
DISPLAY IN AUTHORIZATION 3806.02 1 DISP_INAUTH -1... 2
MODIFY IN AUTHORIZATION 3805.02 1 MOD_INAUTH -1... 3
CANCEL INTERCEPT 82.40 1 CAN_INC -1... 5
CREATE INTERCEPT 81.40 1 CR_INC -1... 41
DISPLAY INTERCEPT 194.40 1 DISP_INC -1... 7
DISPLAY INDICATION STATUS 1487.03 1 DISP_INDIC -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA 3244.04 1 DISP_INEXDATA -1... 1
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA 3243.04 1 ENTR_INEXDATA -1... 1
Cancel Initiator 1.00 1 CAN_INI -1... 1
Create Initiator 1.00 1 CR_INI -1... 3
Display Initiator 1.00 1 DISP_INI -1... 2
Modify Initiator 1.00 1 MOD_INI -1... 3
CANCEL IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3169.08 1 CAN_INOVLCO -1... 2
DISPLAY IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3167.08 1 DISP_INOVLCO -1... 2
ENTER IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA 3168.30 1 ENTR_INOVLCO -1... 3
CONT-10 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Reset Input Log Function 1.00 1 RSET_INPLOG -1... 1
Set Input Log Function 1.00 1 SET_INPLOG -1... 1
Display Status of Input Log Function 1.00 1 STAT_INPLOG -1... 1
Activate Input Log Execution 1.00 1 ACT_INPLOGEX -1... 2
Deactivate Input Log Execution 1.00 1 DACT_INPLOGEX -1... 1
Display Status of Input Log Execution 1.00 1 STAT_INPLOGEX -1... 1
Cancel Input Log File 1.00 1 CAN_INPLOGFILE -1... 2
Copy Input Log File 1.00 1 COPY_INPLOGFILE -1... 2
Modify Input Log Files 1.00 1 MOD_INPLOGFILE -1... 1
CAN IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2413.03 1 CAN_INSCM -1... 1
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2411.03 1 CR_INSCM -1... 25
DISP IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2414.03 1 DISP_INSCM -1... 2
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK 2412.03 1 MOD_INSCM -1... 27
ACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 3673.02 1 ACT_INSCMREF -1... 9
CANCEL IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2417.03 1 CAN_INSCMREF -1... 7
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2415.03 1 CR_INSCMREF -1... 10
DEACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REF. 3674.02 1 DACT_INSCMREF -1... 8
DISPLAY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2418.03 1 DISP_INSCMREF -1... 7
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE 2416.03 1 MOD_INSCMREF -1... 8
ACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2818.08 1 ACT_INSLDAT -1... 1
CAN INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2820.08 1 CAN_INSLDAT -1... 1
DACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2831.08 1 DACT_INSLDAT -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2825.08 1 DISP_INSLDAT -1... 2
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA 2816.08 1 ENTR_INSLDAT -1... 9
END INSTALLATION RECOVERY 296.10 1 END_INSTALL -1... 1
RECORD INTELLIGENT NETWORK STATISTIC 3170.04 1 REC_INSTAT -1... 3
ENTER INSTALLATION GENERATION 1214.02 1 ENTR_INSTGEN -1... 2
CANCEL INTERNAL CELL 1962.94 1 CAN_INTCELL -1... 1
CREATE INTERNAL CELL 1975.35 1 CR_INTCELL -1... 2
DISPLAY INTERNAL CELL 1987.34 1 DISP_INTCELL -1... 4
MODIFY INTERNAL CELL 2002.35 1 MOD_INTCELL -1... 2
RECORD INTERNAL CELL 3063.18 1 REC_INTCELL -1... 4
ACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2819.30 1 ACT_INTRIG -1... 1
CAN INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2821.30 1 CAN_INTRIG -1... 1
CR INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2823.35 1 CR_INTRIG -1... 31
DACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2824.05 1 DACT_INTRIG -1... 1
DISP INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2826.35 1 DISP_INTRIG -1... 2
MOD INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE 2828.35 1 MOD_INTRIG -1... 39
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM 1133.00 1 TEST_IO -1... 1
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 3154.00 1 CAN_IOC -1... 1
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1100.00 1 CONF_IOC -1... 1
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 3158.00 1 CR_IOC -1... 1
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1111.00 1 DIAG_IOC -1... 2
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1119.00 1 DISP_IOC -1... 1
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER 1132.01 1 TEST_IOC -1... 1
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1092.06 1 CAN_IOP -1... 1
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1091.06 1 CONF_IOP -1... 1
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1105.10 1 CR_IOP -1... 6
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1114.06 1 DIAG_IOP -1... 3
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1120.06 1 DISP_IOP -1... 1
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR 1134.07 1 TEST_IOP -1... 1
CONFIGURE IOP GROUP 1411.01 1 CONF_IOPG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE IOP GROUP 1410.01 1 DIAG_IOPG -1... 1
TEST IOP GROUP 1409.01 1 TEST_IOPG -1... 1
DUMP IOP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3604.00 1 DMP_IOPIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3582.00 1 ACT_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3585.00 1 CAN_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3583.00 1 DACT_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3586.02 1 DISP_IOPPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3581.00 1 ENTR_IOPPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH 3584.00 1 UPD_IOPPRPCH -1... 1
ACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3588.00 1 ACT_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3590.00 1 CAN_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3589.00 1 DACT_IOPTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3591.02 1 DISP_IOPTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER IOP TRANSIENT PATCH 3587.00 1 ENTR_IOPTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL AN IP-ADDRESS 3794.00 1 CAN_IPADR -1... 1
CREATE AN IP-ADDRESS 3792.01 1 CR_IPADR -1... 1
DISPLAY IP-ADDRESSES 3795.00 1 DISP_IPADR -1... 1
MODIFY IP-ADDRESS 3793.01 1 MOD_IPADR -1... 2
CANCEL INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT 2845.95 1 CAN_IWE -1... 1
CREATE INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT 2846.30 1 CR_IWE -1... 4
DISPLAY INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT 2847.18 1 DISP_IWE -1... 2
MODIFY INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT 2848.18 1 MOD_IWE -1... 4
CONT-11 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
RECORD INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT FUNCTION 3064.18 1 REC_IWE -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT 2849.95 1 STAT_IWE -1... 2
Cancel Interworking Point for SS7 1.00 1 CAN_IWPSS7 -1... 1
Create Interworking Point for SS7 1.00 1 CR_IWPSS7 -1... 3
Display Interworking Point for SS7 1.00 1 DISP_IWPSS7 -1... 2
Modify Interworking Point for SS7 1.00 1 MOD_IWPSS7 -1... 2
CANCEL JOB 115.00 1 CAN_JOB -1... 1
CONTINUE JOB 116.01 1 CONT_JOB -1... 1
DISPLAY JOB 34.02 1 DISP_JOB -1... 1
STOP JOB 113.00 1 STOP_JOB -1... 1
DISPLAY JOSIT DATA 1904.00 1 DISP_JOSITDAT -1... 1
Display OSI Tracer State MP 1.00 1 DISP_JOSITDATMP -1... 1
CANCEL KEYWORD 818.14 1 CAN_KEYWORD -1... 4
DISPLAY KEYWORD 819.14 1 DISP_KEYWORD -1... 4
ENTER KEYWORD 817.99 1 ENTR_KEYWORD -1... 6
Activate L1 Link Upgrade 1.00 1 ACT_L1LNKUPG -1... 1
CONFIGURE LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1858.00 1 CONF_LAU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1859.00 1 DIAG_LAU -1... 2
TEST LINK ADAPTION UNIT 1862.00 1 TEST_LAU -1... 1
CANCEL LOCATION SERVICES 4244.35 1 CAN_LCS -1... 3
CREATE LOCATION SERVICES 4242.35 1 CR_LCS -1... 4
DISPLAY LOCATION SERVICES 4245.35 1 DISP_LCS -1... 1
MODIFY LOCATION SERVICES 4243.35 1 MOD_LCS -1... 4
Cancel Line Interface Card 1.00 1 CAN_LIC -1... 1
Configure Line Interface Card 1.00 1 CONF_LIC -1... 1
Create Line Interface Card 1.00 1 CR_LIC -1... 3
Diagnose Line Interface Card 1.00 1 DIAG_LIC -1... 1
Display Line Interface Card 1.00 1 DISP_LIC -1... 1
Modify Line Interface Card 1.00 1 MOD_LIC -1... 2
Recover Line Interface Card 1.00 1 RECOV_LIC -1... 1
STAT Line Interface Card 1.00 1 STAT_LIC -1... 1
Cancel LIC Port of Type DS1 1.00 1 CAN_LICPRTDS1 -1... 1
Create LIC Port of Type DS1 1.00 1 CR_LICPRTDS1 -1... 3
Display LIC Port of Type DS1 1.00 1 DISP_LICPRTDS1 -1... 2
Modify LIC Port of Type DS1 1.00 1 MOD_LICPRTDS1 -1... 3
Cancel LIC Port of Type E1 1.00 1 CAN_LICPRTE1 -1... 1
Create LIC Port of Type E1 1.00 1 CR_LICPRTE1 -1... 3
Display LIC Port of Type E1 1.00 1 DISP_LICPRTE1 -1... 2
Modify LIC Port of Type E1 1.00 1 MOD_LICPRTE1 -1... 2
Cancel Line Interface Card Red. Group 1.00 1 CAN_LICREDG -1... 1
Create Line Interface Card Red. Group 1.00 1 CR_LICREDG -1... 1
Display Line Interface Card Red. Group 1.00 1 DISP_LICREDG -1... 1
DISPLAY ENHANCED STATUS OF SUB AND PBXLN 2983.06 1 STAT_LINE -1... 4
DISPLAY LINE DATA 3712.14 1 DISP_LINEDATA -1... 5
DISP LINE THRESHOLDS 1888.00 1 DISP_LINETHR -1... 1
ENTER LINE THRESHOLDS 2547.00 1 ENTR_LINETHR -1... 1
DISPLAY LISTENER TO ANNOUNCEMENT 843.01 1 DISP_LISTTOAN -1... 1
CANCEL LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 2557.15 1 CAN_LMBLK -1... 8
ENTER LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING 2558.15 1 ENTR_LMBLK -1... 8
DISPLAY LOCATION MARK NUMBER 2610.94 1 DISP_LMN -1... 1
MODIFY LOCATION MARK NUMBER 1955.94 1 MOD_LMN -1... 2
DISPLAY LINE LOCKOUT 359.15 1 DISP_LNLCKOUT -1... 3
CANCEL LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3865.00 1 CAN_LNPDAT -1... 1
DISPLAY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3866.00 1 DISP_LNPDAT -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3867.00 1 ENTR_LNPDAT -1... 1
MODIFY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA 3868.00 1 MOD_LNPDAT -1... 1
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3893.49 1 CAN_LNPTCPT -1... 1
CREATE LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3891.49 1 CR_LNPTCPT -1... 2
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3894.49 1 DISP_LNPTCPT -1... 1
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT 3892.49 1 MOD_LNPTCPT -1... 1
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3887.49 1 ACT_LNPTPROF -1... 1
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3889.49 1 CAN_LNPTPROF -1... 1
CREATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3885.52 1 CR_LNPTPROF -1... 2
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3888.49 1 DACT_LNPTPROF -1... 1
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3890.52 1 DISP_LNPTPROF -1... 2
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE 3886.52 1 MOD_LNPTPROF -1... 3
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3882.49 1 ACT_LNPTTYP -1... 2
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3883.49 1 DACT_LNPTTYP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF LNP TRIGGER TYPE 3884.49 1 DISP_LNPTTYP -1... 1
Install New LoadType on PCP 1.00 1 INST_LOADTYPE -1... 1
RECORD LOCATION AREA 3065.18 1 REC_LOCAREA -1... 4
DISPLAY LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT 1034.00 1 DISP_LOCDIAL -1... 1
ENTER LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT 1033.00 1 ENTR_LOCDIAL -1... 1
CANCEL LOCKING RESTRICTION 3080.00 1 CAN_LOCKRST -1... 1
CONT-12 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DISPLAY LOCKING RESTRICTION 3082.00 1 DISP_LOCKRST -1... 1
ENTER LOCKING RESTRICTION 3085.00 1 ENTR_LOCKRST -1... 1
RESET LOG FUNCTION 1920.00 1 RSET_LOG -1... 1
SET LOG FUNCTION 366.03 1 SET_LOG -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF LOG 368.00 1 STAT_LOG -1... 1
DISPLAY LOG ATTRIBUTES 741.00 1 DISP_LOGATT -1... 1
CANCEL LOGGING EVENTS 3081.01 1 CAN_LOGEVENT -1... 1
DISPLAY LOGGING EVENT 3083.00 1 DISP_LOGEVENT -1... 1
ENTER LOGGING EVENTS 3086.01 1 ENTR_LOGEVENT -1... 1
COPY LOG FILE 2688.02 1 COPY_LOGFILE -1... 2
MODIFY LOG FILE 1919.01 1 MOD_LOGFILE -1... 3
CANCEL LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3088.00 1 CAN_LOGOBJ -1... 1
DISPLAY LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3089.00 1 DISP_LOGOBJ -1... 1
ENTER LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT 3090.00 1 ENTR_LOGOBJ -1... 2
LOOPBACK TEST OF ISDN BA SUBSCRIBER 1228.07 1 TEST_LOOPBA -1... 4
CANCEL LRN FOR NUMBER PORTABILITY 3917.00 1 CAN_LRNNP -1... 1
CREATE LRN FOR NUMBER PORTABILITY 3916.00 1 CR_LRNNP -1... 1
DISPLAY LRN FOR NUMBER PORTABILITY 3918.00 1 DISP_LRNNP -1... 1
CANCEL LTG 181.73 1 CAN_LTG -1... 1
CONFIGURE LINE TRUNK GROUP 929.17 1 CONF_LTG -1... 2
CREATE LINE TRUNK GROUP 163.93 1 CR_LTG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE LTG 980.03 1 DIAG_LTG -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG 175.73 1 DISP_LTG -1... 1
MODIFY LINE TRUNK GROUP 182.91 1 MOD_LTG -1... 1
RECORD LINE TRUNK GROUP 275.30 1 REC_LTG -1... 5
DISPLAY STATE OF LTG 917.17 1 STAT_LTG -1... 1
ALLOW LTG FAULT REPORT 922.17 1 ALLOW_LTGFRPT -1... 1
DUMP LTG MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 3603.01 1 DMP_LTGIMDMP -1... 3
ACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3571.01 1 ACT_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3574.00 1 CAN_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3572.01 1 DACT_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3575.03 1 DISP_LTGPRPCH -1... 4
ENTER LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3570.00 1 ENTR_LTGPRPCH -1... 4
UPDATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH 3573.00 1 UPD_LTGPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG RESOURCES 2947.03 1 DISP_LTGRES -1... 1
ACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3577.01 1 ACT_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
CANCEL LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3579.01 1 CAN_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
DEACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3578.01 1 DACT_LTGTRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3580.03 1 DISP_LTGTRPCH -1... 4
ENTER LTG TRANSIENT PATCH 3576.01 1 ENTR_LTGTRPCH -1... 2
CANCEL LINE TRUNK UNIT 184.77 1 CAN_LTU -1... 1
CREATE LINE TRUNK UNIT 164.97 1 CR_LTU -1... 5
DISPLAY LINE TRUNK UNIT 199.73 1 DISP_LTU -1... 1
EXTEND LINE TRUNK UNIT 195.81 1 EXT_LTU -1... 2
REDUCE LINE TRUNK UNIT 196.81 1 RED_LTU -1... 2
ACTIVATE MOBILE A-INTERFACE TRACER 3381.00 1 ACT_MATRAC -1... 7
DEACTIVATE A-INTERFACE TRACER 3382.00 1 DACT_MATRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY A-INTERFACE TRACER STATUS 3383.00 1 DISP_MATRAC -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB 923.60 1 CONF_MB -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER 977.00 1 DIAG_MB -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE BUFFER 330.00 1 DISP_MB -1... 1
MODIFY MESSAGE BUFFER 3929.00 1 MOD_MB -1... 2
DISPLAY STATUS OF MESSAGE BUFFER 919.10 1 STAT_MB -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB ATM INTERFACE 3880.00 1 CONF_MBIA -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER ATM INTERFACE 3879.00 1 DIAG_MBIA -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB HDLC INTERFACE 3881.00 1 CONF_MBIH -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER HDLC INTERFACE 3878.00 1 DIAG_MBIH -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB UNIT LTG 924.60 1 CONF_MBUL -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MB UNIT FOR LINE TRUNK GROUP 978.00 1 DIAG_MBUL -1... 1
CONFIGURE MB UNIT SPACE GROUP CONTROL 925.60 1 CONF_MBUS -1... 2
DIAGNOSE UNIT SWITCH GROUP CONTROL 979.00 1 DIAG_MBUS -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE CALL RECORDS 2329.95 1 DISP_MCR -1... 4
CONFIGURE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3807.10 1 CONF_MCT -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3809.08 1 DIAG_MCT -1... 1
DISP. STATUS MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS 3808.08 1 STAT_MCT -1... 1
DISPLAY MAGNETIC DISK 961.01 1 DISP_MD -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC DISK 962.01 1 INIT_MD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1093.01 1 CONF_MDD -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1115.01 1 DIAG_MDD -1... 3
TEST MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE 1137.01 1 TEST_MDD -1... 1
CONTINUE MDD-ACTIVATION 1203.00 1 CONT_MDDACT -1... 1
STOP ACTIVATION OF DISC 1215.00 1 STOP_MDDACT -1... 1
ACTIVATE MDD AUDIT 2984.00 1 ACT_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
DEACTIVATE MDD AUDIT 2985.00 1 DACT_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
CONT-13 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DISPLAY MDD AUDIT ATTRIBUTES 2988.00 1 DISP_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
MODIFY DATA FOR ROUTINE MDD AUDIT 2992.00 1 MOD_MDDAUDIT -1... 1
Configure Magnetic Disk Device MP 1.00 1 CONF_MDDMP -1... 1
Diagnose Magnetic Disk Device MP 1.00 1 DIAG_MDDMP -1... 1
Display Magnetic Disk Device MP 1.00 1 DISP_MDDMP -1... 1
Modify Magnetic Disk Device MP 1.00 1 MOD_MDDMP -1... 2
STAT Magnetic Disk Device MP 1.00 1 STAT_MDDMP -1... 1
CANCEL MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3682.01 1 CAN_MDTOG -1... 1
CONFIGURE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3612.10 1 CONF_MDTOG -1... 1
CREATE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3681.01 1 CR_MDTOG -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3614.08 1 DIAG_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3683.01 1 DISP_MDTOG -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF MODEM TONE GENERATOR 3613.08 1 STAT_MDTOG -1... 1
Display Managed Element 1.00 1 DISP_ME -1... 1
DISPLAY CHARGE METERS 112.78 1 DISP_MET -1... 4
EDIT CHARGE METER 517.77 1 EDIT_MET -1... 9
REGENERATE CHARGE METER 518.03 1 REG_MET -1... 1
SAVE CHARGE METER 68.76 1 SAVE_MET -1... 2
DISPLAY METER ADMINISTRATION DATA 360.03 1 DISP_METADM -1... 1
ENTER METER ADMINISTRATION DATA 1010.10 1 ENTR_METADM -1... 4
DISPLAY METER SAVE TIMES 69.01 1 DISP_METSAV -1... 1
ENTER METER SAVE TIMES 601.01 1 ENTR_METSAV -1... 1
Activate Measurement Upgrade 1.00 1 ACT_MEUPG -1... 1
CANCEL MOBILE LOCATION CENTER 4186.39 1 CAN_MLC -1... 1
CREATE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER 4184.39 1 CR_MLC -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER 4187.39 1 DISP_MLC -1... 1
MODIFY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER 4185.39 1 MOD_MLC -1... 1
CANCEL MOBILE LOCATION CENTER AREA 4182.39 1 CAN_MLCAREA -1... 2
DISPLAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER AREA 4183.39 1 DISP_MLCAREA -1... 3
ENTER MOBILE LOCATION CENTER AREA 4181.39 1 ENTR_MLCAREA -1... 1
CANCEL MOBILE NATION. ROAMING AGREEMENT 3039.00 1 CAN_MNATROAG -1... 2
CREATE MOBILE NATION. ROAMING AGREEMENT 3040.00 1 CR_MNATROAG -1... 2
DISPLAY MOBILE NATION. ROAMING AGREEMENT 3041.00 1 DISP_MNATROAG -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2331.00 1 DISP_MO -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2332.00 1 INIT_MO -1... 2
MOUNT MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2330.00 1 MOUNT_MO -1... 2
RESET MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK 2333.00 1 RSET_MO -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE IN THRESHOLD 3948.35 1 DISP_MOBINTHR -1... 1
ACTIVATE METER OBSERVATION 71.76 1 ACT_MOBS -1... 3
CANCEL METER OBSERVATION 72.75 1 CAN_MOBS -1... 3
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION 110.75 1 DISP_MOBS -1... 2
SELECT METER OBSERVATION 858.73 1 SEL_MOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION DATA 993.06 1 DISP_MOBSDAT -1... 4
DISPLAY MOBILE THRESHOLD 2296.35 1 DISP_MOBTHR -1... 1
MODIFY MOBILE THRESHOLD 2295.35 1 MOD_MOBTHR -1... 2
CANCEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2356.00 1 CAN_MOD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2357.00 1 CONF_MOD -1... 1
CREATE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2358.00 1 CR_MOD -1... 1
DIAGNOSE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2359.00 1 DIAG_MOD -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2360.00 1 DISP_MOD -1... 1
TEST MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE 2361.00 1 TEST_MOD -1... 1
DUMP MODULE MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP 4137.00 1 DMP_MODIMDMP -1... 2
Cancel Magneto Optical Disk Device MP 1.00 1 CAN_MODMP -1... 1
Configure Magneto Optical Disk Device MP 1.00 1 CONF_MODMP -1... 1
Create Magneto Optical Disk Device MP 1.00 1 CR_MODMP -1... 1
Diagnose Magneto Optical Disk MP 1.00 1 DIAG_MODMP -1... 1
Display Magneto Optical Disk Device MP 1.00 1 DISP_MODMP -1... 1
Modify Magneto Optical Disk MP 1.00 1 MOD_MODMP -1... 2
STAT Magneto Optical Disk MP 1.00 1 STAT_MODMP -1... 1
Cancel Main Processor 1.00 1 CAN_MP -1... 1
Configure Main Processor 1.00 1 CONF_MP -1... 1
Create Main Processor 1.00 1 CR_MP -1... 5
Diagnose Main Processor 1.00 1 DIAG_MP -1... 1
Display Main Processor 1.00 1 DISP_MP -1... 1
Modify Main Processor 1.00 1 MOD_MP -1... 3
Recover Main Processor 1.00 1 RECOV_MP -1... 1
Display Status of Main Processor 1.00 1 STAT_MP -1... 1
Cancel MP Event Dump 1.00 1 CAN_MPEVDMP -1... 1
Display MP Event Dump 1.00 1 DISP_MPEVDMP -1... 1
Dump MP Event Dump 1.00 1 DMP_MPEVDMP -1... 1
Enter MP Event Dump 1.00 1 ENTR_MPEVDMP -1... 3
Dump MP Memory Immediate Dump 1.00 1 DMP_MPIMDMP -1... 2
Cancel MP Load Measurement Logfile 1.00 1 CAN_MPLDLOG -1... 1
Create MP Load Measurement Logfile 1.00 1 CR_MPLDLOG -1... 1
CONT-14 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Display MP Load Measurement Logfile Info 1.00 1 DISP_MPLDLOG -1... 1
Cancel MP Load Measurement 1.00 1 CAN_MPLDME -1... 1
Create MP Load Measurement 1.00 1 CR_MPLDME -1... 1
Display MP Load Measurement 1.00 1 DISP_MPLDME -1... 1
Cancel MP Load Measurement Reporting 1.00 1 CAN_MPLDRPT -1... 1
Create MP Load Measurement Reporting 1.00 1 CR_MPLDRPT -1... 1
Display MP Load Measurement Reporting 1.00 1 DISP_MPLDRPT -1... 1
Modify MP Load Measurement Reporting 1.00 1 MOD_MPLDRPT -1... 1
Activate MP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 ACT_MPPRPCH -1... 1
Cancel MP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 CAN_MPPRPCH -1... 1
Deactivate MP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 DACT_MPPRPCH -1... 1
Display MP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 DISP_MPPRPCH -1... 2
Enter MP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 ENTR_MPPRPCH -1... 3
Update MP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 UPD_MPPRPCH -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE PROJECT DESCRIPTION DATA 3406.96 1 DISP_MPRDDAT -1... 1
ENTER MOBILE PROJECT DESCRIPTION DATA 3396.35 1 ENTR_MPRDDAT -1... 17
Activate MP Transient Patch 1.00 1 ACT_MPTRPCH -1... 1
Cancel MP Transient Patch 1.00 1 CAN_MPTRPCH -1... 1
Deactivate MP Transient Patch 1.00 1 DACT_MPTRPCH -1... 1
Display MP Transient Patch 1.00 1 DISP_MPTRPCH -1... 2
Enter MP Transient Patch 1.00 1 ENTR_MPTRPCH -1... 2
Activate MTP Route Verification Test 1.00 1 ACT_MRVT -1... 3
Cancel MTP Route Verification Test 1.00 1 CAN_MRVT -1... 1
Create MTP Route Verification Test 1.00 1 CR_MRVT -1... 1
Display MTP Route Verification Test 1.00 1 DISP_MRVT -1... 3
Modify MTP Route Verification Test State 1.00 1 MOD_MRVTST -1... 1
RECORD MOBILE SWITCHING CENTRE DATA 1929.18 1 REC_MSC -1... 4
DISPLAY MOBILE SECURITY HANDLING 3411.01 1 DISP_MSECHAND -1... 1
MODIFY MOBILE SECURITY HANDLING 3412.18 1 MOD_MSECHAND -1... 3
DISPLAY MOBILE SERVICE OPTIONS 3009.35 1 DISP_MSERVOPT -1... 11
MODIFY MOBILE SERVICE OPTIONS 3010.35 1 MOD_MSERVOPT -1... 15
SELECT MESSAGE 1533.02 1 SEL_MSG -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE LINK 1527.01 1 DISP_MSGLNK -1... 2
RESET MESSAGE LINK 1526.02 1 RSET_MSGLNK -1... 2
SET MESSAGE LINK 1525.03 1 SET_MSGLNK -1... 2
CANCEL MESSAGE GROUP 1531.02 1 CAN_MSGRP -1... 1
CREATE MESSAGE GROUP 1530.03 1 CR_MSGRP -1... 2
SELECT MESSAGE GROUP 1532.02 1 SEL_MSGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY MESSAGE GROUP LINK 1529.01 1 DISP_MSGRPLNK -1... 1
SET MESSAGE GROUP LINK 1537.05 1 SET_MSGRPLNK -1... 2
CAN MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK 1963.94 1 CAN_MSRNB -1... 1
CR MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK 1976.35 1 CR_MSRNB -1... 4
DISP MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK 2648.94 1 DISP_MSRNB -1... 1
MOD MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK 2003.35 1 MOD_MSRNB -1... 6
CANCEL MOBILE SUBSCRIBER 1371.35 1 CAN_MSUB -1... 9
CREATE MOBILE SUBSCRIBER 1369.35 1 CR_MSUB -1... 19
DISPLAY MOBILE SUBSCRIBER 1372.35 1 DISP_MSUB -1... 10
MODIFY MOBILE SUBSCRIBER 1370.35 1 MOD_MSUB -1... 16
DISPLAY MOBILE SUBSCRIBER DATABASE SIZE 2971.94 1 DISP_MSUBDBSZ -1... 1
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 3562.00 1 CAN_MSUBFT -1... 1
ENTER SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 3561.00 1 ENTR_MSUBFT -1... 1
CANCEL LINKAGE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER 2966.17 1 CAN_MSUBLINK -1... 1
CREATE LINKAGE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER 2968.35 1 CR_MSUBLINK -1... 1
DISPLAY LINKAGE OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS 2972.94 1 DISP_MSUBLINK -1... 1
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE 965.01 1 DISP_MT -1... 1
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC TAPE 964.01 1 INIT_MT -1... 2
REWIND MAGNETIC TAPE 963.01 1 REWIND_MT -1... 1
CANCEL MOBILE TARIFF 3017.00 1 CAN_MTAR -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE TARIFF 3020.00 1 DISP_MTAR -1... 1
ENTER MOBILE TARIFF 3035.00 1 ENTR_MTAR -1... 2
MODIFY MOBILE TARIFF 3038.00 1 MOD_MTAR -1... 2
CANCEL MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY 3018.00 1 CAN_MTARCAT -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY 3021.00 1 DISP_MTARCAT -1... 1
CREATE MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY 3036.01 1 ENTR_MTARCAT -1... 1
MODIFY MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY 3022.01 1 MOD_MTARCAT -1... 2
CANCEL MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1096.01 1 CAN_MTD -1... 1
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1095.00 1 CONF_MTD -1... 1
CREATE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1107.03 1 CR_MTD -1... 2
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1116.00 1 DIAG_MTD -1... 2
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 2362.00 1 DISP_MTD -1... 1
TEST MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE 1136.01 1 TEST_MTD -1... 1
Cancel MTP Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 CAN_MTPAV -1... 1
Create MTP Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 CR_MTPAV -1... 3
Display MTP Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 DISP_MTPAV -1... 3
CONT-15 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Modify MTP Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 MOD_MTPAV -1... 3
Cancel MTP Level 2 Protocol Profile 1.00 1 CAN_MTPL2PF -1... 1
Create MTP Level 2 Protocol Profile 1.00 1 CR_MTPL2PF -1... 7
Display MTP Level 2 Protocol Profile 1.00 1 DISP_MTPL2PF -1... 7
Display MTP Logical Numbers 1.00 1 DISP_MTPLOGNU -1... 1
Cancel MTP Scheduling 1.00 1 CAN_MTPSCHD -1... 1
Create MTP Scheduling 1.00 1 CR_MTPSCHD -1... 2
Display MTP Scheduling 1.00 1 DISP_MTPSCHD -1... 1
Modify MTP Scheduling 1.00 1 MOD_MTPSCHD -1... 2
CANCEL MOBILE TRAFFIC BLOCKING DATA 3769.39 1 CAN_MTRABL -1... 3
DISPLAY MOBILE TRAFFIC BLOCKING DATA 3770.17 1 DISP_MTRABL -1... 2
ENTER MOBILE TRAFFIC BLOCKING DATA 3768.39 1 ENTR_MTRABL -1... 4
ACTIVATE MOBILE TRAFFIC DATA COLLECTION 2475.18 1 ACT_MTRDCOL -1... 2
DEACTIVATE MOBILE TR. DATA COLLECTION 2476.18 1 DACT_MTRDCOL -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE TRAFFIC DATA COLLECTION 2477.18 1 DISP_MTRDCOL -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE TRAF. FILE CHARACTERISTIC 1367.18 1 DISP_MUSFICH -1... 2
ACTIVATE MOBILE USER MONITORING FUNCTION 3068.39 1 ACT_MUSMON -1... 2
CANCEL MOBILE USER MONITORING FUNCTION 2457.39 1 CAN_MUSMON -1... 1
DEACTIVATE MOBILE USER MONITOR FUNCTION 3070.39 1 DACT_MUSMON -1... 1
DISPLAY MOBILE USER MONITOR FUNCTION 3071.39 1 DISP_MUSMON -1... 1
ENTER MOBILE USER MONITORING FUNCTION 2456.39 1 ENTR_MUSMON -1... 2
DISPLAY MOBILE TRAFFIC MEASUREM. ORDERS 1366.50 1 DISP_MUSMORD -1... 1
CANCEL MAP ENTITY VERSION NEGOT. TABLE 4050.35 1 CAN_MVNENT -1... 1
DISPLAY MAP ENTITY VERSION NEGOT. TABLE 4048.35 1 DISP_MVNENT -1... 1
ENTER MAP ENTITY VERSION NEGOT. TABLE 4049.35 1 ENTR_MVNENT -1... 13
MODIFY MAP ENTITY VERSION NEGOT. TABLE 4264.00 1 MOD_MVNENT -1... 14
DISPLAY MAP VERSION NEGOTIATION TABLE 3945.35 1 DISP_MVNGENR -1... 1
MODIFY MAP VERSION NEGOTIATION TABLE 3944.35 1 MOD_MVNGENR -1... 2
CANCEL MOBILE ZONE 3044.94 1 CAN_MZONE -1... 1
CREATE MOBILE ZONE 3045.94 1 CR_MZONE -1... 2
DISPLAY MOBILE ZONE 3047.94 1 DISP_MZONE -1... 1
MODIFY MOBILE ZONE 3046.94 1 MOD_MZONE -1... 3
CANCEL MOBILE ZONE POINT 3275.16 1 CAN_MZOPT -1... 1
CREATE MOBILE ZONE POINT 3276.72 1 CR_MZOPT -1... 9
DISPLAY MOBILE ZONE POINT 3277.39 1 DISP_MZOPT -1... 6
MODIFY MOBILE ZONE POINT 3278.72 1 MOD_MZOPT -1... 10
DISPLAY NETWORK TIMER 2973.35 1 DISP_NETTIMER -1... 3
MODIFY NETWORK TIMER 2979.35 1 MOD_NETTIMER -1... 10
CANCEL NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL 1909.05 1 CAN_NMCNTL -1... 1
DISPLAY NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL DATA 376.93 1 DISP_NMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROLS 325.97 1 ENTR_NMCNTL -1... 3
ACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2806.02 1 ACT_NTMINFO -1... 1
CAN NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2807.02 1 CAN_NTMINFO -1... 1
CR NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO 2808.03 1 CR_NTMINFO -1... 4
DACT NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2809.01 1 DACT_NTMINFO -1... 1
DISP NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2810.13 1 DISP_NTMINFO -1... 7
ENTER NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO. 2811.13 1 ENTR_NTMINFO -1... 4
MOD NETWORK TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT INFO 2812.07 1 MOD_NTMINFO -1... 2
ACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 838.04 1 ACT_NUC -1... 4
CANCEL NAILED-UP CONNECTION 839.02 1 CAN_NUC -1... 1
CREATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 837.16 1 CR_NUC -1... 10
DEACTIVATE NAILED-UP CONNECTION 1872.03 1 DACT_NUC -1... 3
DISPLAY NAILED-UP CONNECTION 840.13 1 DISP_NUC -1... 6
MODIFY NAILED-UP CONNECTION 841.13 1 MOD_NUC -1... 8
CONFIGURE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 1811.20 1 CONF_OCANEQ -1... 1
DIAGNOSE OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNCEM. EQU. 1825.10 1 DIAG_OCANEQ -1... 1
DISP OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 3616.03 1 DISP_OCANEQ -1... 3
STATUS OF OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU. 1826.29 1 STAT_OCANEQ -1... 1
CANCEL OCANEQ VARIANT 3050.05 1 CAN_OCAVAR -1... 1
DISPLAY OCANEQ VARIANT 2892.04 1 DISP_OCAVAR -1... 1
ENTER OCANEQ VARIANT 2894.04 1 ENTR_OCAVAR -1... 1
ACTIVATE OCT LOADER 3789.01 1 ACT_OCTLOAD -1... 3
DEACTIVATE OCT LOADER 3791.01 1 DACT_OCTLOAD -1... 2
DISPLAY OCT LOADER 3790.01 1 DISP_OCTLOAD -1... 2
ACTIVATE ODR 3671.02 1 ACT_ODR -1... 1
CANCEL ODR 3670.00 1 CAN_ODR -1... 1
CREATE ODR 3667.00 1 CR_ODR -1... 1
DEACTIVATE ODR 3672.00 1 DACT_ODR -1... 1
DISPLAY ODR 3669.01 1 DISP_ODR -1... 1
MODIFY ODR 3668.00 1 MOD_ODR -1... 2
START O&M PROCESSES 278.10 1 START_OM -1... 1
CANCEL O&M TERMINAL 1363.03 1 CAN_OMT -1... 1
CONFIGURE O&M TERMINAL 1362.02 1 CONF_OMT -1... 1
CREATE O&M TERMINAL 1361.04 1 CR_OMT -1... 1
CONT-16 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DIAGNOSE O&M TERMINAL 1360.01 1 DIAG_OMT -1... 2
DISPLAY O&M TERMINAL 3032.02 1 DISP_OMT -1... 1
MODIFY O&M TERMINAL 3034.01 1 MOD_OMT -1... 2
TEST O&M TERMINAL 1359.02 1 TEST_OMT -1... 1
CANCEL OPERATOR SERVICE DATA 2156.35 1 CAN_OPRSERV -1... 4
ENTER OPERATOR SERVICE DATA 2155.35 1 ENTR_OPRSERV -1... 7
CANCEL ORIGINATION DATA 2374.15 1 CAN_ORIGDAT -1... 2
CREATE ORIGINATION DATA 2373.15 1 CR_ORIGDAT -1... 4
DISPLAY ORIGINATION DATA 2376.15 1 DISP_ORIGDAT -1... 4
MODIFY ORIGINATION DATA 2375.14 1 MOD_ORIGDAT -1... 1
Display all OS Events from MP 1.00 1 DISP_OSEV -1... 1
CANCEL OSI ADDRESSES 1863.00 1 CAN_OSIADR -1... 1
CREATE OSI ADDRESSES 1864.04 1 CR_OSIADR -1... 2
DISPLAY OSI ADDRESSES 1857.00 1 DISP_OSIADR -1... 1
MODIFY OSI ADDRESSES 1865.04 1 MOD_OSIADR -1... 3
DISPLAY OSITIMER 3797.00 1 DISP_OSITIMER -1... 1
ENTER OSITIMER 3796.00 1 ENTR_OSITIMER -1... 2
ACTIVATE OSI TRACER 1903.05 1 ACT_OSITRAC -1... 7
DISPLAY OSI TRACE DATA 1905.02 1 DISP_OSITRAC -1... 1
DUMP OSI TRACE DATA 1906.05 1 DMP_OSITRAC -1... 3
Cancel OSI Tracer Log 1.00 1 CAN_OSITRACLOG -1... 1
Activate OSI Tracer MP 1.00 1 ACT_OSITRACMP -1... 2
Deactivate OSI Tracer MP 1.00 1 DACT_OSITRACMP -1... 1
Dump OSI Tracer Data MP to File 1.00 1 DMP_OSITRACMPF -1... 2
Display OS and LMDH Resources from MP 1.00 1 DISP_OSLMRES -1... 2
DISPLAY OS RESOURCE DATA 3627.00 1 DISP_OSRES -1... 2
ACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION 949.00 1 ACT_OUTDIV -1... 2
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT DIVERSION 950.00 1 DEC_OUTDIV -1... 1
ACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1535.00 1 ACT_OUTSUP -1... 1
DEACTIVATE OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1721.02 1 DACT_OUTSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY OUTPUT SUPPRESSION 1536.00 1 DISP_OUTSUP -1... 1
DISPLAY OVERLOAD 400.22 1 DISP_OVLD -1... 1
CANCEL PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2720.00 1 CAN_PA -1... 1
CREATE PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2719.00 1 CR_PA -1... 1
DISPLAY PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 2722.00 1 DISP_PA -1... 1
TEST PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 1708.01 1 TEST_PA -1... 1
DISPLAY PA CHANNEL STATUS 1910.00 1 DISP_PACHSTAT -1... 1
DISPLAY PA FAULT 1869.01 1 DISP_PAFAULT -1... 3
DISPLAY PA LINK STATISTICS 1777.00 1 DISP_PASTAT -1... 1
Cancel Profibus Device 1.00 1 CAN_PBUSDEV -1... 1
Create Profibus Device 1.00 1 CR_PBUSDEV -1... 1
Display Profibus Device 1.00 1 DISP_PBUSDEV -1... 1
Modify Profibus Device 1.00 1 MOD_PBUSDEV -1... 1
CANCEL PBX 105.85 1 CAN_PBX -1... 2
CREATE PBX 104.99 1 CR_PBX -1...193
DISPLAY PBX 170.99 1 DISP_PBX -1... 14
MODIFY PBX 551.99 1 MOD_PBX -1...229
RECORD PBX 342.39 1 REC_PBX -1... 12
CANCEL PBX DDI NUMBER 3999.02 1 CAN_PBXDDINO -1... 2
DISPLAY PBX DDI NUMBER 3998.02 1 DISP_PBXDDINO -1... 1
ENTER PBX DDI NUMBER 3997.02 1 ENTR_PBXDDINO -1... 2
CANCEL PBX LINE 77.12 1 CAN_PBXLN -1... 2
CREATE PBX LINE 76.15 1 CR_PBXLN -1...170
DISPLAY PBX LINE 168.24 1 DISP_PBXLN -1... 10
MODIFY PBX LINE 1039.20 1 MOD_PBXLN -1...100
DISPLAY STATUS OF PBX LINE 537.85 1 STAT_PBXLN -1... 4
DISPLAY PCM ALARM COUNTER 695.52 1 DISP_PCMAC -1... 1
Cancel PCP Event Dump 1.00 1 CAN_PCPEVDMP -1... 1
Display PCP Event Dump 1.00 1 DISP_PCPEVDMP -1... 1
Dump PCP Event Dump 1.00 1 DMP_PCPEVDMP -1... 1
Enter PCP Event Dump 1.00 1 ENTR_PCPEVDMP -1... 3
Dump PCP Memory Immediate Dump 1.00 1 DMP_PCPIMDMP -1... 2
Activate PCP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 ACT_PCPPRPCH -1... 1
Cancel PCP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 CAN_PCPPRPCH -1... 1
Deactivate PCP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 DACT_PCPPRPCH -1... 1
Display PCP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 DISP_PCPPRPCH -1... 2
Enter PCP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 ENTR_PCPPRPCH -1... 3
Update PCP Permanent Patch 1.00 1 UPD_PCPPRPCH -1... 1
Activate PCP Trace 1.00 1 ACT_PCPTRC -1... 1
Cancel PCP Trace 1.00 1 CAN_PCPTRC -1... 1
Deactivate PCP Trace 1.00 1 DACT_PCPTRC -1... 1
Display PCP Trace 1.00 1 DISP_PCPTRC -1... 1
Dump PCP Trace 1.00 1 DMP_PCPTRC -1... 1
Enter PCP Trace 1.00 1 ENTR_PCPTRC -1... 1
CONT-17 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Activate PCP Transient Patch 1.00 1 ACT_PCPTRPCH -1... 1
Cancel PCP Transient Patch 1.00 1 CAN_PCPTRPCH -1... 1
Deactivate PCP Transient Patch 1.00 1 DACT_PCPTRPCH -1... 1
Display PCP Transient Patch 1.00 1 DISP_PCPTRPCH -1... 2
Enter PCP Transient Patch 1.00 1 ENTR_PCPTRPCH -1... 2
DISPLAY PDC CHARACTERISTICS 1900.09 1 DISP_PDCCHR -1... 2
ENTER PDC CHARACTERISTICS 1901.19 1 ENTR_PDCCHR -1... 16
DISPLAY PDC CONTROLS 2608.17 1 DISP_PDCCNTL -1... 2
ENTER PDC CONTROLS 2609.17 1 ENTR_PDCCNTL -1... 8
ACTIVATE PDC FEATURE 1913.00 1 ACT_PDCFEA -1... 1
DEACTIVATE PDC FEATURE 1914.00 1 DACT_PDCFEA -1... 1
DISPLAY PDC FEATURE INFORMATIONS 1915.00 1 DISP_PDCFEA -1... 1
CANCEL PRIMARY DIGITAL CARRIER LINK 3321.06 1 CAN_PDCLNK -1... 1
CREATE PRIMARY DIGITAL CARRIER LINK 3320.06 1 CR_PDCLNK -1... 2
DISPLAY PRIMARY DIGITAL CARRIER LINK 3360.06 1 DISP_PDCLNK -1... 1
DISPLAY PDC PERFORMANCE DATA 1916.14 1 DISP_PDCPERF -1... 6
DISPLAY PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2733.08 1 DISP_PDCTHR -1... 1
RESET PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2734.00 1 RSET_PDCTHR -1... 1
SET PDC THRESHOLD CLASS VALUES 2736.08 1 SET_PDCTHR -1... 1
Display Pitch 1.00 1 DISP_PITCH -1... 1
CANCEL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK TARIFF 3023.00 1 CAN_PLMNTAR -1... 1
DISP PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK TARIFF 3024.00 1 DISP_PLMNTAR -1... 1
ENTER PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK TARIFF 3048.00 1 ENTR_PLMNTAR -1... 2
MODIFY PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK TARIFF 3049.00 1 MOD_PLMNTAR -1... 3
DISPLAY PBX MAINTENANCE CONTROL 1048.11 1 DISP_PMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER PBX MAINTENANCE CONTROLS 1040.11 1 ENTR_PMCNTL -1... 2
CONFIGURE PORT 807.20 1 CONF_PORT -1... 2
DISPLAY PORT 201.75 1 DISP_PORT -1... 2
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF PORT 600.01 1 SEL_PORT -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF PORT 353.88 1 STAT_PORT -1... 2
ACTIVATE PORT TRACER 2369.15 1 ACT_PORTTRAC -1... 5
DEACTIVATE PORT TRACER 2392.00 1 DACT_PORTTRAC -1... 1
DISPLAY PORT TRACER 2370.00 1 DISP_PORTTRAC -1... 1
DUMP PORT TRACER 2372.00 1 DMP_PORTTRAC -1... 1
CANCEL PROCESSOR 888.02 1 CAN_PRO -1... 1
CREATE PROCESSOR 886.07 1 CR_PRO -1... 2
DISPLAY PROCESSOR 1773.00 1 DISP_PRO -1... 1
MODIFY PROCESSOR 1776.04 1 MOD_PRO -1... 2
START PROCESS 281.10 1 START_PROCESS -1... 1
RESET PROCESSOR CONNECTION 1498.00 1 RSET_PROCON -1... 1
SET PROCESSOR CONNECTION 1497.00 1 SET_PROCON -1... 1
CANCEL PROHIBITED FORWARDED TO NUMBER 3003.96 1 CAN_PROHFTNO -1... 2
CREATE PROHIBITED FORWARDED TO NUMBER 3005.96 1 CR_PROHFTNO -1... 2
DISPLAY PROHIBITED FORWARDED TO NUMBER 3007.96 1 DISP_PROHFTNO -1... 1
CANCEL ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4042.13 1 CAN_PROTTAB -1... 1
CREATE ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4041.15 1 CR_PROTTAB -1... 2
DISPLAY ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4044.13 1 DISP_PROTTAB -1... 1
MODIFY ISUP PROTOCOL TABLE 4043.15 1 MOD_PROTTAB -1... 3
CANCEL SERVICE PROVIDER NAME 2993.94 1 CAN_PROVNAM -1... 1
CREATE SERVICE PROVIDER NAME 2997.16 1 CR_PROVNAM -1... 2
DISPLAY SERVICE PROVIDER NAME 2999.94 1 DISP_PROVNAM -1... 1
CANCEL SERVICE PROVIDER NUMBER 2996.94 1 CAN_PROVNO -1... 1
CREATE SERVICE PROVIDER NUMBER 2998.94 1 CR_PROVNO -1... 1
DISPLAY SERVICE PROVIDER NUMBER 3000.94 1 DISP_PROVNO -1... 1
MODIFY SERVICE PROVIDER NUMBER 2994.94 1 MOD_PROVNO -1... 2
MODIFY PASSWORD 41.01 1 MOD_PSW -1... 1
DISPLAY PASSWORD DATA 2857.00 1 DISP_PSWDAT -1... 1
MODIFY PASSWORD DATA 2859.00 1 MOD_PSWDAT -1... 1
Display Q3 Job Register 1.00 1 DISP_Q3JOBREG -1... 1
CANCEL QUALITY OF SERVICE PROFILE 4076.00 1 CAN_QOSPROF -1... 1
CREATE QUALITY OF SERVICE PROFILE 4074.34 1 CR_QOSPROF -1... 5
DISPLAY QUALITY OF SERVICE PROFILE 4077.00 1 DISP_QOSPROF -1... 1
MODIFY QUALITY OF SERVICE PROFILE 4075.34 1 MOD_QOSPROF -1... 5
Cancel Rack 1.00 1 CAN_RACK -1... 1
Create Rack 1.00 1 CR_RACK -1... 1
Display Rack 1.00 1 DISP_RACK -1... 1
Modify Rack 1.00 1 MOD_RACK -1... 1
EXECUTE REGENERATION 611.75 1 EXEC_REGEN -1... 10
ACTIVATE RE-ENCRYPTION 3272.00 1 ACT_RENCRYPT -1... 1
CANCEL ROAMING AREA 3289.95 1 CAN_ROAMAREA -1... 1
CREATE ROAMING AREA 3290.17 1 CR_ROAMAREA -1... 2
DISPLAY ROAMING AREA 3291.95 1 DISP_ROAMAREA -1... 1
MODIFY ROAMING AREA 3292.17 1 MOD_ROAMAREA -1... 2
TEST ROUTING DATA BASE 3095.11 1 TEST_ROUDB -1... 37
CONT-18 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
ACTIVATE ROUTE 32.10 1 ACT_ROUTE -1... 2
BAR ROUTE 27.11 1 BAR_ROUTE -1... 2
CANCEL ROUTE 13.79 1 CAN_ROUTE -1... 3
CREATE ROUTE 10.93 1 CR_ROUTE -1... 27
DISPLAY ROUTE 206.85 1 DISP_ROUTE -1... 4
INSERT ROUTE 30.93 1 INS_ROUTE -1... 26
MODIFY ROUTE 413.89 1 MOD_ROUTE -1... 10
TAKE OUT ROUTE 31.79 1 TAKO_ROUTE -1... 3
CANCEL ROUTE SWITCH 313.81 1 CAN_ROUTESW -1... 4
DISPLAY ROUTE SWITCH 414.05 1 DISP_ROUTESW -1... 1
ENTER ROUTE SWITCH 312.82 1 ENTR_ROUTESW -1... 4
CANCEL ROUTE THRESHOLD 1792.02 1 CAN_ROUTETHR -1... 1
DISPLAY ROUTE THRESHOLD 1790.03 1 DISP_ROUTETHR -1... 2
ENTER ROUTE THRESHOLD 1795.04 1 ENTR_ROUTETHR -1... 3
MODIFY ROUTE THRESHOLD 1797.04 1 MOD_ROUTETHR -1... 1
CANCEL REGIONAL SUBSCRIPTION SERV. DATA 2298.00 1 CAN_RSSERV -1... 1
ENTER REGIONAL SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE DATA 2297.00 1 ENTR_RSSERV -1... 1
CANCEL REGIONAL SUBSCRIPTION ZONE 2306.00 1 CAN_RSZONE -1... 1
CREATE REGIONAL SUBSCRIPTION ZONE 2305.00 1 CR_RSZONE -1... 1
DISPLAY REGIONAL SUBSCRIPTION ZONE 2307.00 1 DISP_RSZONE -1... 1
MODIFY REGIONAL SUBSCRIPTION ZONE 2308.00 1 MOD_RSZONE -1... 2
Cancel SAAL NNI Protocol Profile 1.00 1 CAN_SAALPF -1... 1
Create SAAL NNI Protocol Profile 1.00 1 CR_SAALPF -1... 8
Display SAAL NNI Protocol Profile 1.00 1 DISP_SAALPF -1... 7
Cancel SAM File Array 1.00 1 CAN_SAMAR -1... 1
Create SAM File Array 1.00 1 CR_SAMAR -1... 4
Display SAM File Array 1.00 1 DISP_SAMAR -1... 1
Modify SAM File Array 1.00 1 MOD_SAMAR -1... 3
Cancel SAMAR File Buffer 1.00 1 CAN_SAMFILBUF -1... 1
Create SAMAR File Buffer 1.00 1 CR_SAMFILBUF -1... 1
Display SAMAR File Buffer 1.00 1 DISP_SAMFILBUF -1... 1
Modify SAMAR File Buffer 1.00 1 MOD_SAMFILBUF -1... 1
CANCEL SCREENING LIST 2404.05 1 CAN_SCLST -1... 5
DISPLAY SCREENING LIST 2405.05 1 DISP_SCLST -1... 5
ENTER SCREENING LIST 2403.05 1 ENTR_SCLST -1... 12
Cancel STP Screening Table 1.00 1 CAN_SCRTAB -1... 1
Create STP Screening Table 1.00 1 CR_SCRTAB -1... 2
Display STP Screening Table 1.00 1 DISP_SCRTAB -1... 2
Modify STP Screening Table 1.00 1 MOD_SCRTAB -1... 2
Cancel STP Screening Table Line 1.00 1 CAN_SCRTABLN -1... 2
Create STP Screening Table Line 1.00 1 CR_SCRTABLN -1... 2
Display STP Screening Table Line 1.00 1 DISP_SCRTABLN -1... 2
Modify STP Screening Table Line 1.00 1 MOD_SCRTABLN -1... 2
TRANSFER SECURITY BUFFER 1941.01 1 TRANS_SCRTBUF -1... 1
RECORD SCCP AND TCAP 2940.18 1 REC_SCTC -1... 3
Display Security Alarming 1.00 1 DISP_SECAL -1... 1
Modify Security Alarming 1.00 1 MOD_SECAL -1... 2
Cancel Security Alarm Report Log 1.00 1 CAN_SECALLOG -1... 1
Create Security Alarm Report Log 1.00 1 CR_SECALLOG -1... 2
Display Security Alarm Report Log 1.00 1 DISP_SECALLOG -1... 1
Cancel Security Alarm Report Records 1.00 1 CAN_SECALREC -1... 1
Disp Sec. Alarm Report Records to File 1.00 1 DISP_SECALRECF -1... 2
Display Security Audit Trail 1.00 1 DISP_SECAT -1... 1
Modify Security Audit Trail 1.00 1 MOD_SECAT -1... 2
Cancel Security Audit Trail Log 1.00 1 CAN_SECATLOG -1... 1
Create Security Audit Trail Log 1.00 1 CR_SECATLOG -1... 1
Display Security Audit Trail Log 1.00 1 DISP_SECATLOG -1... 1
Cancel Security Audit Trail Records 1.00 1 CAN_SECATREC -1... 1
Display Sec. Audit Trail Records to File 1.00 1 DISP_SECATRECF -1... 1
UPDATE SECURITY DATA 3087.00 1 UPD_SECDATA -1... 1
DISPLAY SECURITY THRESHOLDS 3084.00 1 DISP_SECTHR -1... 1
MODIFY SECURITY THRESHOLDS 3091.00 1 MOD_SECTHR -1... 3
Display Security Tracer 1.00 1 DISP_SECTRC -1... 1
Dump Security Trace File 1.00 1 DMP_SECTRC -1... 1
Modify Security Tracer 1.00 1 MOD_SECTRC -1... 2
CANCEL SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2765.07 1 CAN_SERVCUG -1... 2
DISPLAY SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2767.04 1 DISP_SERVCUG -1... 2
ENTER SERVICE DEPENDENT CUG DATA 2769.06 1 ENTR_SERVCUG -1... 2
Cancel Service Profile 1.00 1 CAN_SERVPROF -1... 1
Create Service Profile 1.00 1 CR_SERVPROF -1... 2
Display Service Profile 1.00 1 DISP_SERVPROF -1... 2
Modify Service Profile 1.00 1 MOD_SERVPROF -1... 2
Cancel Service Selector 1.00 1 CAN_SERVSEL -1... 1
Create Service Selector 1.00 1 CR_SERVSEL -1... 2
CONT-19 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Display Service Selector 1.00 1 DISP_SERVSEL -1... 2
Modify Service Selector 1.00 1 MOD_SERVSEL -1... 2
CANCEL SESSION 2855.00 1 CAN_SESSION -1... 1
DISPLAY SESSION 2858.00 1 DISP_SESSION -1... 1
END SESSION 45.00 1 END_SESSION -1... 1
START SAFEGUARDING SOFTWARE 632.10 1 START_SFGSW -1... 1
Dump Collected Safeguarding MP 1.00 1 DMP_SFGSYMPMP -1... 1
DUMP SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES 1947.00 1 DMP_SGMSG -1... 1
CANCEL SHORT CODE PROCESSING 3322.95 1 CAN_SHCODEPR -1... 1
CREATE SHORT CODE PROCESSING 3323.95 1 CR_SHCODEPR -1... 1
DISPLAY SHORT CODE PROCESSING 3324.95 1 DISP_SHCODEPR -1... 1
Cancel Shelf 1.00 1 CAN_SHELF -1... 1
Create Shelf 1.00 1 CR_SHELF -1... 1
Display Shelf 1.00 1 DISP_SHELF -1... 1
Cancel Signaling Data Link 1.00 1 CAN_SIGDL -1... 1
Display Signaling Data Link 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDL -1... 3
Create Sign. Data Link ATM High Speed 1.00 1 CR_SIGDLHS -1... 2
Display Sign. Data Link ATM High Speed 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDLHS -1... 3
Display Signaling Data Link on a HW Unit 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDLHW -1... 4
Create Signaling Data Link TDM via LIC 1.00 1 CR_SIGDLLIC -1... 2
Display Signaling Data Link TDM via LIC 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDLLIC -1... 4
Create Signaling Data Link NB via LTG 1.00 1 CR_SIGDLLTG -1... 3
Display Signaling Data Link NB via LTG 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDLLTG -1... 5
Modify Signaling Data Link Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGDLN -1... 1
Cancel Signaling Destination Point 1.00 1 CAN_SIGDP -1... 2
Create Signaling Destination Point 1.00 1 CR_SIGDP -1... 4
Display Signaling Destination Point 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDP -1... 6
Modify Signaling Destination Point 1.00 1 MOD_SIGDP -1... 4
Cancel Sign. Dest. Point Group 1.00 1 CAN_SIGDPGRP -1... 1
Create Sign. Dest. Point Group 1.00 1 CR_SIGDPGRP -1... 2
Display Sign. Dest. Point Group 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDPGRP -1... 2
Modify Sign. Dest. Point Group 1.00 1 MOD_SIGDPGRP -1... 2
Modify Sign. Dest. Point Group Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGDPGRPN -1... 1
Cancel Sign. Dest. Point Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_SIGDPME -1... 2
Create Sign. Dest. Point Meas. 1.00 1 CR_SIGDPME -1... 2
Display Sign. Dest. Point Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_SIGDPME -1... 2
Modify Signaling Destination Point Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGDPN -1... 1
Create Signaling Destination Point US 1.00 1 CR_SIGDPUS -1... 4
Cancel Sign. First and Interval Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_SIGFAIME -1... 2
Create Sign. First and Interval Meas. 1.00 1 CR_SIGFAIME -1... 2
Display Sign. First and Interval Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_SIGFAIME -1... 2
Cancel Signaling Link 1.00 1 CAN_SIGLINK -1... 1
Create Signaling Link 1.00 1 CR_SIGLINK -1... 4
Display Signaling Link 1.00 1 DISP_SIGLINK -1... 7
Modify Signaling Link 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLINK -1... 4
Display Signaling Link on HW Unit 1.00 1 DISP_SIGLINKHW -1... 2
Modify Signaling Link Inhibiting State 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLINKINH -1... 2
Display Signaling Link States 1.00 1 DISP_SIGLINKST -1... 4
Modify Signaling Link Admin. State 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLINKST -1... 2
Cancel Sign. Link Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_SIGLME -1... 2
Create Sign. Link Meas. 1.00 1 CR_SIGLME -1... 5
Display Sign. Link Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_SIGLME -1... 2
Cancel Signaling Linkset 1.00 1 CAN_SIGLSET -1... 1
Create Signaling Linkset 1.00 1 CR_SIGLSET -1... 5
Display Signaling Linkset 1.00 1 DISP_SIGLSET -1... 6
Modify Signaling Linkset 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLSET -1... 4
Cancel Signaling Linkset Combined 1.00 1 CAN_SIGLSETC -1... 1
Create Signaling Linkset Combined 1.00 1 CR_SIGLSETC -1... 3
Display Signaling Linkset Combined 1.00 1 DISP_SIGLSETC -1... 4
Modify Signaling Linkset Combined 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLSETC -1... 2
Modify Signaling Linkset Combined Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLSETCN -1... 1
Modify Signaling Linkset Home 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLSETH -1... 2
Modify Signaling Linkset Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLSETN -1... 1
Modify Signaling Linkset Type 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLSETT -1... 1
Create Signaling Linkset US 1.00 1 CR_SIGLSETUS -1... 5
Cancel Sign. Linkset Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_SIGLSME -1... 1
Create Sign. Linkset Meas. 1.00 1 CR_SIGLSME -1... 2
Display Sign. Linkset Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_SIGLSME -1... 1
Activate Signaling Linkset Upgrade 1.00 1 ACT_SIGLSUPG -1... 2
Modify Signaling Linkset VMS Flag 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLSVMS -1... 1
Modify Signaling Link VMS Flag 1.00 1 MOD_SIGLVMS -1... 1
Display Signaling Monitor 1.00 1 DISP_SIGMON -1... 1
Cancel Sign. Network Element Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_SIGNEME -1... 1
Create Sign. Network Element Meas. 1.00 1 CR_SIGNEME -1... 1
CONT-20 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Display Sign. Network Element Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_SIGNEME -1... 1
Cancel Signaling Point 1.00 1 CAN_SIGPOINT -1... 1
Create Signaling Point 1.00 1 CR_SIGPOINT -1... 7
Display Signaling Point 1.00 1 DISP_SIGPOINT -1... 9
Modify Signaling Point 1.00 1 MOD_SIGPOINT -1... 6
Modify Signaling Point Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGPOINTN -1... 1
Modify Signaling Point Timer 1.00 1 MOD_SIGPOINTT -1... 1
Create Signaling Point for US 1.00 1 CR_SIGPOINTUS -1... 7
Modify Signaling Point for US 1.00 1 MOD_SIGPOINTUS -1... 6
Cancel Signaling Point Secondary 1.00 1 CAN_SIGPSEC -1... 1
Create Signaling Point Secondary 1.00 1 CR_SIGPSEC -1... 2
Display Signaling Point Secondary 1.00 1 DISP_SIGPSEC -1... 1
Create Sign. Point Secondary Extension 1.00 1 CR_SIGPSECE -1... 2
Display Sign. Point Secondary Extension 1.00 1 DISP_SIGPSECE -1... 2
Modify Sign. Point Secondary Extension 1.00 1 MOD_SIGPSECE -1... 1
Cancel Sign. Point Meas. 1.00 1 CAN_SIGPTME -1... 1
Create Sign. Point Meas. 1.00 1 CR_SIGPTME -1... 2
Display Sign. Point Meas. 1.00 1 DISP_SIGPTME -1... 1
Activate Signaling Point Upgrade 1.00 1 ACT_SIGPTUPG -1... 1
Cancel Signaling Route 1.00 1 CAN_SIGROUTE -1... 2
Create Signaling Route 1.00 1 CR_SIGROUTE -1... 7
Display Signaling Route 1.00 1 DISP_SIGROUTE -1... 3
Modify Signaling Route 1.00 1 MOD_SIGROUTE -1... 5
Cancel Signaling TSM 1.00 1 CAN_SIGTSM -1... 1
Display Signaling TSM Control Info 1.00 1 DISP_SIGTSM -1... 3
Create Signaling TSM Daily 1.00 1 CR_SIGTSMD -1... 3
Cancel Sign. TSM File Template 1.00 1 CAN_SIGTSMFT -1... 1
Create Sign. TSM File Template 1.00 1 CR_SIGTSMFT -1... 1
Display Sign. TSM File Template 1.00 1 DISP_SIGTSMFT -1... 1
Modify Sign. TSM File Template Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGTSMFTN -1... 1
Modify Signaling TSM Name 1.00 1 MOD_SIGTSMN -1... 1
Modify Signaling TSM State 1.00 1 MOD_SIGTSMST -1... 1
Create Signaling TSM Timer 1.00 1 CR_SIGTSMT -1... 3
Create Signaling TSM Weekly 1.00 1 CR_SIGTSMW -1... 3
ACTIVATE SILC TRACE EVENT 3607.02 1 ACT_SILCTRC -1... 2
CANCEL SILC TRACE EVENT 3609.02 1 CAN_SILCTRC -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SILC TRACE EVENT 3608.02 1 DACT_SILCTRC -1... 2
DISPLAY SILC TRACE EVENT 3610.02 1 DISP_SILCTRC -1... 2
DUMP SILC TRACE EVENT 3611.02 1 DMP_SILCTRC -1... 2
ENTER SILC TRACE EVENT 3606.02 1 ENTR_SILCTRC -1... 2
CANCEL SIM CARD CHANGEOVER DATA 3308.94 1 CAN_SIMCCH -1... 1
DISPLAY SIM CARD CHANGEOVER DATA 3309.94 1 DISP_SIMCCH -1... 1
ENTER SIM CARD CHANGEOVER DATA 3310.35 1 ENTR_SIMCCH -1... 1
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3652.04 1 CAN_SLNACC -1... 1
CREATE SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3649.05 1 CR_SLNACC -1... 11
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3651.05 1 DISP_SLNACC -1... 4
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER/LINE ACCESS 3650.05 1 MOD_SLNACC -1... 25
MODIFY SLRAM 1080.01 1 MOD_SLRAM -1... 1
DISPLAY SUSPECT MOBILE CALL 3548.00 1 DISP_SMCALL -1... 1
RELEASE SUSPECT MOBILE CALL 3549.00 1 REL_SMCALL -1... 1
DISPLAY SUSPECT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER 3551.00 1 DISP_SMSUB -1... 1
ACTIVATE SUSPECT MSUB DETECTION 3544.00 1 ACT_SMSUBDET -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SUSPECT MSUB DETECTION 3545.00 1 DACT_SMSUBDET -1... 1
DISPLAY SUSPECT MSUB DETECTION 3546.00 1 DISP_SMSUBDET -1... 1
CONFIGURE SWITCHING NETWORK 926.17 1 CONF_SN -1... 3
DIAGNOSE SWITCHING NETWORK 974.03 1 DIAG_SN -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF SN 918.10 1 STAT_SN -1... 1
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE SN 938.00 1 TEST_SN -1... 3
DISPLAY SN BIT ERROR RATE COUNT 694.01 1 DISP_SNBERC -1... 1
START SN BIT ERROR RATE COUNT 693.02 1 START_SNBERC -1... 2
DISPLAY SWITCHING NETWORK DATA 4071.01 1 DISP_SNDAT -1... 1
MODIFY SWITCHING NETWORK DATA 4070.01 1 MOD_SNDAT -1... 7
DISPLAY SN PATH DATA (TRANSIENT) 848.01 1 DISP_SNPD -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Account 1.00 1 CAN_SPACC -1... 1
Create Sccp Account 1.00 1 CR_SPACC -1... 2
Display Sccp Account 1.00 1 DISP_SPACC -1... 2
Modify Sccp Account 1.00 1 MOD_SPACC -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Access Point Local 1.00 1 CAN_SPAPLOC -1... 1
Create Sccp Access Point Local 1.00 1 CR_SPAPLOC -1... 5
Display Sccp Access Point Local 1.00 1 DISP_SPAPLOC -1... 1
Modify Sccp Access Point Local 1.00 1 MOD_SPAPLOC -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Access Point Remote 1.00 1 CAN_SPAPREM -1... 1
Configure Sccp Access Point Remote 1.00 1 CONF_SPAPREM -1... 1
Create Sccp Access Point Remote 1.00 1 CR_SPAPREM -1... 5
CONT-21 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Display Sccp Access Point Remote 1.00 1 DISP_SPAPREM -1... 2
Modify Sccp Access Point Remote 1.00 1 MOD_SPAPREM -1... 2
Disp Status Sccp Access Point Remote 1.00 1 STAT_SPAPREM -1... 2
Modify VMZ of Sccp Access Point Local 1.00 1 MOD_SPAPVMZ -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Concerned Area 1.00 1 CAN_SPCAREA -1... 1
Create Sccp Concerned Area 1.00 1 CR_SPCAREA -1... 1
Display Sccp Concerned Area 1.00 1 DISP_SPCAREA -1... 2
Modify Sccp Concerned Area 1.00 1 MOD_SPCAREA -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Calling Party Addr.Conv. 1.00 1 CAN_SPCLGCON -1... 1
Create Sccp Calling Party Addr.Conv. 1.00 1 CR_SPCLGCON -1... 3
Display Sccp Calling Party Addr.Conv. 1.00 1 DISP_SPCLGCON -1... 1
Modify Sccp Calling Party Addr.Conv. 1.00 1 MOD_SPCLGCON -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Calling Party Address 1.00 1 CAN_SPCLGPA -1... 1
Create Sccp Calling Party Address 1.00 1 CR_SPCLGPA -1... 4
Display Sccp Calling Party Address 1.00 1 DISP_SPCLGPA -1... 1
Modify Sccp Calling Party Address 1.00 1 MOD_SPCLGPA -1... 4
Cancel Sccp End Node Ent.Set w.o. Ssn 1.00 1 CAN_SPENS -1... 1
Create Sccp End Node Ent.Set w.o. Ssn 1.00 1 CR_SPENS -1... 2
Disp. Sccp End Node Ent.Set w.o. Ssn 1.00 1 DISP_SPENS -1... 1
Mod. Sccp End Node Ent.Set w.o. Ssn 1.00 1 MOD_SPENS -1... 3
Cancel Sccp End Node Ent.Set with Ssn 1.00 1 CAN_SPENSSSN -1... 1
Create Sccp End Node Ent.Set with Ssn 1.00 1 CR_SPENSSSN -1... 2
Display Sccp End Node Ent.Set with Ssn 1.00 1 DISP_SPENSSSN -1... 1
Modify Sccp End Node Ent.Set with Ssn 1.00 1 MOD_SPENSSSN -1... 3
CANCEL SPOOLENTRY 1761.01 1 CAN_SPENTRY -1... 1
DISPLAY SPOOLENTRY 1764.00 1 DISP_SPENTRY -1... 1
MODIFY SPOOLENTRY 1766.01 1 MOD_SPENTRY -1... 1
DISPLAY SPOOLFILE 1765.00 1 DISP_SPFILE -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Global Title Conv.Rule 1.00 1 CAN_SPGTCRUL -1... 1
Create Sccp Global Title Conv.Rule 1.00 1 CR_SPGTCRUL -1... 3
Display Sccp Global Title Conv.Rule 1.00 1 DISP_SPGTCRUL -1... 1
Modify Sccp Global Title Conv.Rule 1.00 1 MOD_SPGTCRUL -1... 3
Cancel Sccp Global Title Rule 1.00 1 CAN_SPGTRUL -1... 2
Create Sccp Global Title Rule 1.00 1 CR_SPGTRUL -1... 4
Display Sccp Global Title Rule 1.00 1 DISP_SPGTRUL -1... 2
Modify Sccp Global Title Rule 1.00 1 MOD_SPGTRUL -1... 4
Cancel Sccp Global Title Translator 1.00 1 CAN_SPGTTRL -1... 1
Create Sccp Global Title Translator 1.00 1 CR_SPGTTRL -1... 2
Display Sccp Global Title Translator 1.00 1 DISP_SPGTTRL -1... 1
Modify Sccp Global Title Translator 1.00 1 MOD_SPGTTRL -1... 1
DISPLAY SPLIT OPTION 3480.00 1 DISP_SPLITOPT -1... 1
RESET SPLIT OPTION 3479.00 1 RSET_SPLITOPT -1... 1
SET SPLIT OPTION 3478.00 1 SET_SPLITOPT -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Linkage Local 1.00 1 CAN_SPLNKLOC -1... 1
Create Sccp Linkage Local 1.00 1 CR_SPLNKLOC -1... 3
Display Sccp Linkage Local 1.00 1 DISP_SPLNKLOC -1... 1
Modify Sccp Linkage Local 1.00 1 MOD_SPLNKLOC -1... 4
Cancel Sccp Linkage Remote 1.00 1 CAN_SPLNKREM -1... 1
Create Sccp Linkage Remote 1.00 1 CR_SPLNKREM -1... 3
Display Sccp Linkage Remote 1.00 1 DISP_SPLNKREM -1... 2
Modify Sccp Linkage Remote 1.00 1 MOD_SPLNKREM -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Measurements 1.00 1 CAN_SPME -1... 1
Create Sccp Measurements 1.00 1 CR_SPME -1... 1
Display Sccp Measurements 1.00 1 DISP_SPME -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Measurements All 1.00 1 CAN_SPMEALL -1... 1
Create Sccp Measurements All 1.00 1 CR_SPMEALL -1... 1
Display Sccp Measurements All 1.00 1 DISP_SPMEALL -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Meas. First And Int. 1.00 1 CAN_SPMEFAI -1... 1
Create Sccp Meas. First And Int. 1.00 1 CR_SPMEFAI -1... 1
Display Sccp Meas. First And Int. 1.00 1 DISP_SPMEFAI -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Measurements Netdep. 1.00 1 CAN_SPMEN -1... 1
Create Sccp Measurements Netdep. 1.00 1 CR_SPMEN -1... 1
Display Sccp Measurements Netdep. 1.00 1 DISP_SPMEN -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Meas.Netdep.First And Int. 1.00 1 CAN_SPMENFAI -1... 1
Create Sccp Meas.Netdep.First And Int. 1.00 1 CR_SPMENFAI -1... 1
Display Sccp Meas.Netdep.First And Int. 1.00 1 DISP_SPMENFAI -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Meas.Scheduler 1.00 1 CAN_SPMESCHD -1... 1
Create Sccp Meas.Scheduler 1.00 1 CR_SPMESCHD -1... 2
Display Sccp Meas.Scheduler 1.00 1 DISP_SPMESCHD -1... 1
Modify Sccp Meas.Scheduler 1.00 1 MOD_SPMESCHD -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Measurements per Ssn 1.00 1 CAN_SPMESSN -1... 1
Create Sccp Measurements per Ssn 1.00 1 CR_SPMESSN -1... 1
Display Sccp Measurements per Ssn 1.00 1 DISP_SPMESSN -1... 1
Cancel Scmg User Data Screening 1.00 1 CAN_SPMGUDS -1... 1
CONT-22 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Create Scmg User Data Screening 1.00 1 CR_SPMGUDS -1... 2
Display Scmg User Data Screening 1.00 1 DISP_SPMGUDS -1... 1
Modify Scmg User Data Screening 1.00 1 MOD_SPMGUDS -1... 2
Cancel Scmg User Data Screening Element 1.00 1 CAN_SPMGUDSE -1... 2
Create Scmg User Data Screening Element 1.00 1 CR_SPMGUDSE -1... 3
Display Scmg User Data Screening Element 1.00 1 DISP_SPMGUDSE -1... 3
Modify Scmg User Data Screening Element 1.00 1 MOD_SPMGUDSE -1... 3
Cancel Sccp Relay Node Entity Set 1.00 1 CAN_SPRNS -1... 1
Create Sccp Relay Node Entity Set 1.00 1 CR_SPRNS -1... 5
Display Sccp Relay Node Entity Set 1.00 1 DISP_SPRNS -1... 1
Modify Sccp Relay Node Entity Set 1.00 1 MOD_SPRNS -1... 5
Cancel Sccp Scr. CldPA After Gt Trans. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDAT -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. CldPA After Gt Trans. 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDAT -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. CldPA After Gt Trans. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDAT -1... 1
Modify Sccp Scr. CldPA After Gt Trans. 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDAT -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. CldPA AfterGtTrans. El. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDATE -1... 2
Create Sccp Scr. CldPA AfterGtTrans. El. 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDATE -1... 3
Disp. Sccp Scr. CldPA AfterGtTrans. El. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDATE -1... 3
Modify Sccp Scr. CldPA AfterGtTrans. El. 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDATE -1... 3
Cancel Sccp Scr. Called Party Address 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDPA -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. Called Party Address 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDPA -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. Called Party Address 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDPA -1... 1
Modify Sccp Scr. Called Party Address 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDPA -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDPAD -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDPAD -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDPAD -1... 1
Modify Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDPAD -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDPADE -1... 2
Create Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDPADE -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDPADE -1... 2
Modify Sccp Scr. CldPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDPADE -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. Called Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDPAE -1... 2
Create Sccp Scr. Called Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDPAE -1... 4
Disp. Sccp Scr. Called Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDPAE -1... 3
Modify Sccp Scr. Called Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDPAE -1... 3
Cancel Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDPAT -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDPAT -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDPAT -1... 1
Modify Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDPAT -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator El. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLDPATE -1... 2
Create Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator El. 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLDPATE -1... 3
Display Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator El. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLDPATE -1... 4
Modify Sccp Scr. CldPA Translator El. 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLDPATE -1... 4
Cancel Sccp Scr. Calling Party Address 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLGPA -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. Calling Party Address 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLGPA -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. Calling Party Address 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLGPA -1... 1
Modify Sccp Scr. Calling Party Address 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLGPA -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLGPAD -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLGPAD -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLGPAD -1... 1
Modify Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLGPAD -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLGPADE -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLGPADE -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLGPADE -1... 2
Modify Sccp Scr. ClgPA GT Digit Element 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLGPADE -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. Calling Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLGPAE -1... 2
Create Sccp Scr. Calling Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLGPAE -1... 3
Disp. Sccp Scr. Calling Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLGPAE -1... 3
Modify Sccp Scr. Calling Party Addr. El. 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLGPAE -1... 3
Cancel Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLGPAT -1... 1
Create Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLGPAT -1... 2
Display Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLGPAT -1... 1
Modify Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLGPAT -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator El. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSCLGPATE -1... 2
Create Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator El. 1.00 1 CR_SPSCLGPATE -1... 3
Display Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator El. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSCLGPATE -1... 4
Modify Sccp Scr. ClgPA Translator El. 1.00 1 MOD_SPSCLGPATE -1... 4
Cancel Sccp Screening Domain 1.00 1 CAN_SPSDOM -1... 2
Create Sccp Screening Domain 1.00 1 CR_SPSDOM -1... 3
Display Sccp Screening Domain 1.00 1 DISP_SPSDOM -1... 3
Modify Sccp Screening Domain 1.00 1 MOD_SPSDOM -1... 3
ACTIVATE SPOOLSERVICE 1760.02 1 ACT_SPSERV -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SPOOLSERVICE 1762.00 1 DACT_SPSERV -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Screening Measurements 1.00 1 CAN_SPSME -1... 1
CONT-23 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Create Sccp Screening Measurements 1.00 1 CR_SPSME -1... 1
Display Sccp Screening Measurements 1.00 1 DISP_SPSME -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Screening Meas.FirstAndInt. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSMEFAI -1... 1
Create Sccp Screening Meas.FirstAndInt. 1.00 1 CR_SPSMEFAI -1... 1
Disp. Sccp Screening Meas.FirstAndInt. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSMEFAI -1... 1
Act. Sccp Scr. Meas. First And Int. Upg. 1.00 1 ACT_SPSMEFAIUPG -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Screening Meas. Scheduler 1.00 1 CAN_SPSMESCHD -1... 1
Create Sccp Screening Meas. Scheduler 1.00 1 CR_SPSMESCHD -1... 2
Display Sccp Screening Meas. Scheduler 1.00 1 DISP_SPSMESCHD -1... 1
Modify Sccp Screening Meas. Scheduler 1.00 1 MOD_SPSMESCHD -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Screening Message Type 1.00 1 CAN_SPSMT -1... 1
Create Sccp Screening Message Type 1.00 1 CR_SPSMT -1... 2
Display Sccp Screening Message Type 1.00 1 DISP_SPSMT -1... 1
Modify Sccp Screening Message Type 1.00 1 MOD_SPSMT -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Screening Message Type El. 1.00 1 CAN_SPSMTE -1... 1
Create Sccp Screening Message Type El. 1.00 1 CR_SPSMTE -1... 2
Display Sccp Screening Message Type El. 1.00 1 DISP_SPSMTE -1... 2
Modify Sccp Screening Message Type El. 1.00 1 MOD_SPSMTE -1... 3
Cancel Sccp Subsystem Number 1.00 1 CAN_SPSSN -1... 2
Create Sccp Subsystem Number 1.00 1 CR_SPSSN -1... 4
Display Sccp Subsystem Number 1.00 1 DISP_SPSSN -1... 2
Modify Sccp Subsystem Number 1.00 1 MOD_SPSSN -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Term.Acc.Class Accounting 1.00 1 CAN_SPTACACC -1... 1
Create Sccp Term.Acc.Class Accounting 1.00 1 CR_SPTACACC -1... 2
Disp. Sccp Term.Acc.Class Accounting 1.00 1 DISP_SPTACACC -1... 2
Mod. Sccp Term.Acc.Class Accounting 1.00 1 MOD_SPTACACC -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Term.Acc.Class Verification 1.00 1 CAN_SPTACVRF -1... 1
Create Sccp Term.Acc.Class Verification 1.00 1 CR_SPTACVRF -1... 2
Disp. Sccp Term.Acc.Class Verification 1.00 1 DISP_SPTACVRF -1... 2
Mod. Sccp Term.Acc.Class Verification 1.00 1 MOD_SPTACVRF -1... 2
Display Sccp Timers 1.00 1 DISP_SPTIMER -1... 1
Modify Sccp Timers 1.00 1 MOD_SPTIMER -1... 2
Activate Special Trace 1.00 1 ACT_SPTRC -1... 3
Deactivate Special Trace 1.00 1 DACT_SPTRC -1... 1
Display Special Trace 1.00 1 DISP_SPTRC -1... 1
Dump Data of Special Trace 1.00 1 DMP_SPTRC -1... 1
Cancel Sccp Translation Type 1.00 1 CAN_SPTT -1... 2
Create Sccp Translation Type 1.00 1 CR_SPTT -1... 2
Display Sccp Translation Type 1.00 1 DISP_SPTT -1... 2
Modify Sccp Translation Type 1.00 1 MOD_SPTT -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Translation Type for Us 1.00 1 CAN_SPTTUS -1... 2
Create Sccp Translation Type for Us 1.00 1 CR_SPTTUS -1... 3
Display Sccp Translation Type for Us 1.00 1 DISP_SPTTUS -1... 2
Modify Sccp Translation Type for Us 1.00 1 MOD_SPTTUS -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Verification Rule 1.00 1 CAN_SPVRFRUL -1... 2
Create Sccp Verification Rule 1.00 1 CR_SPVRFRUL -1... 2
Display Sccp Verification Rule 1.00 1 DISP_SPVRFRUL -1... 2
Modify Sccp Verification Rule 1.00 1 MOD_SPVRFRUL -1... 2
Cancel Sccp Verification Translator 1.00 1 CAN_SPVRFTRL -1... 1
Create Sccp Verification Translator 1.00 1 CR_SPVRFTRL -1... 3
Display Sccp Verification Translator 1.00 1 DISP_SPVRFTRL -1... 4
Modify Sccp Verification Translator 1.00 1 MOD_SPVRFTRL -1... 3
Activate SS7 Basic Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 ACT_SS7BAV -1... 1
Cancel SS7 Basic Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 CAN_SS7BAV -1... 1
Create SS7 Basic Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 CR_SS7BAV -1... 1
Deact. SS7 Basic Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 DACT_SS7BAV -1... 1
Display SS7 Basic Account. and Verific. 1.00 1 DISP_SS7BAV -1... 1
Cancel SS7 Log File 1.00 1 CAN_SS7LOG -1... 1
Create SS7 Log File 1.00 1 CR_SS7LOG -1... 2
Display SS7 Log File 1.00 1 DISP_SS7LOG -1... 1
Cancel SS7 Log File additional 1.00 1 CAN_SS7LOGADD -1... 1
Create SS7 Log File additional 1.00 1 CR_SS7LOGADD -1... 1
Display SS7 Log File additional 1.00 1 DISP_SS7LOGADD -1... 1
ALLOW SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1083.00 1 ALLOW_SSA -1... 1
DISPLAY SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS DATA 1121.00 1 DISP_SSA -1... 1
INHIBIT SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1123.00 1 INHIB_SSA -1... 1
MODIFY SYSTEM STATUS ANALYSIS 1126.00 1 MOD_SSA -1... 1
ACTIVATE SECURE SUBSCRIBER ADM. FILE 3092.00 1 ACT_SSAFILE -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SECURE SUBSCRIBER ADM. FILE 3093.00 1 DACT_SSAFILE -1... 1
DISPLAY SECURE SUBSCRIBER ADM. FILE 3094.00 1 DISP_SSAFILE -1... 1
RECORD SUPPL. SERVICE UTILIZATION DATA 1930.18 1 REC_SSERV -1... 4
CONFIGURE SPACE STAGE GROUP 927.17 1 CONF_SSG -1... 2
DIAGNOSE SPACE STAGE GROUP 976.00 1 DIAG_SSG -1... 4
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE SSG 971.00 1 TEST_SSG -1... 5
CONT-24 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
Recover SSNC 1.00 1 RECOV_SSNC -1... 1
Cancel SSNC Measurement Log 1.00 1 CAN_SSNCMELO -1... 1
Create SSNC Measurement Log 1.00 1 CR_SSNCMELO -1... 2
Display SSNC Measurement Log 1.00 1 DISP_SSNCMELO -1... 1
DISPLAY SSP 1654.01 1 DISP_SSP -1... 1
MERGE SSP 1125.00 1 MERGE_SSP -1... 1
RECOVER SSP 453.10 1 RECOV_SSP -1... 1
SPLIT SSP 1088.01 1 SPLIT_SSP -1... 1
SEARCH SSP 1127.01 1 SRCH_SSP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF SSP 123.71 1 STAT_SSP -1... 1
TEST SSP 121.70 1 TEST_SSP -1... 1
ALLOW ROUTINE TEST 1085.01 1 ALLOW_SSPRT -1... 1
CUT OFF ROUTINETEST 1108.00 1 CUT_SSPRT -1... 1
DISPLAY ROUTINE TEST DATA 1122.01 1 DISP_SSPRT -1... 1
INHIBIT ROUTINE TEST 1124.01 1 INHIB_SSPRT -1... 1
MODIFY ROUTINE TEST DATA 1084.03 1 MOD_SSPRT -1... 3
ACTIVATE SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2928.12 1 ACT_STMON -1... 7
DEACTIVATE SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2930.41 1 DACT_STMON -1... 7
DISPLAY SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2932.12 1 DISP_STMON -1... 10
ENTER SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING 2921.12 1 ENTR_STMON -1... 17
DISPLAY SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING INFO 3482.00 1 DISP_STMONINF -1... 1
ENTER SCCP AND TCAP MONITORING INFO 3481.00 1 ENTR_STMONINF -1... 1
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER 4.82 1 CAN_SUB -1... 2
CREATE SUBSCRIBER 2.15 1 CR_SUB -1...270
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER 171.15 1 DISP_SUB -1... 16
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER 1038.20 1 MOD_SUB -1...181
DISPLAY STATUS OF SUBSCRIBER 536.78 1 STAT_SUB -1... 4
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER PROFILE ID 4011.01 1 CAN_SUBPRFID -1... 1
CREATE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE ID 4010.01 1 CR_SUBPRFID -1... 1
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER PROFILE ID 4012.01 1 DISP_SUBPRFID -1... 1
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER RELATED SERVICE DATA 2153.35 1 CAN_SUBRSERV -1... 4
CREATE SUBSCRIBER RELATED SERVICE DATA 2151.35 1 CR_SUBRSERV -1... 52
DISPLAY SUBSCRIBER RELATED SERVICE DATA 2154.35 1 DISP_SUBRSERV -1... 4
MODIFY SUBSCRIBER RELATED SERVICE DATA 2152.35 1 MOD_SUBRSERV -1... 63
ACTIVATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3815.06 1 ACT_SVSUB -1... 1
CANCEL SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3817.06 1 CAN_SVSUB -1... 1
CREATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3813.06 1 CR_SVSUB -1... 5
DEACTIVATE SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3816.06 1 DACT_SVSUB -1... 1
DISPLAY SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3818.06 1 DISP_SVSUB -1... 2
MODIFY SERVICE SUBSCRIBER 3814.06 1 MOD_SVSUB -1... 5
Activate SWT ID 1.00 1 ACT_SWTID -1... 1
Build SWT ID 1.00 1 BLD_SWTID -1... 1
Cancel SWT ID 1.00 1 CAN_SWTID -1... 1
Deactivate SWT ID 1.00 1 DACT_SWTID -1... 1
Dump SWT ID 1.00 1 DMP_SWTID -1... 1
Display SWT ID Definition 1.00 1 DISP_SWTIDDEF -1... 1
Build SWT ID Easy 1.00 1 BLD_SWTIDE -1... 1
Display SWT ID Hits 1.00 1 DISP_SWTIDHIT -1... 1
Display SWT ID Overview 1.00 1 DISP_SWTIDOVW -1... 1
Display SWT ID State 1.00 1 DISP_SWTIDSTA -1... 1
Cancel SWT ID Total 1.00 1 CAN_SWTIDT -1... 1
Activate SWT ID at Certain Time 1.00 1 ACT_SWTIDTM -1... 1
Deactivate SWT ID at Certain Time 1.00 1 DACT_SWTIDTM -1... 1
Cancel SWT Notifications Log 1.00 1 CAN_SWTLOG -1... 1
Create SWT Notifications Log 1.00 1 CR_SWTLOG -1... 1
Display SWT Notifications Log 1.00 1 DISP_SWTLOG -1... 1
Display SWT Notifications Log Records 1.00 1 DISP_SWTLOGRC -1... 1
Define Software Tracepoint 1.00 1 DEF_SWTP -1... 1
TRANSFER SYSTEM FILES 1002.06 1 TRANS_SYFILE -1... 6
ACTIVATE SYMMETRICAL KEY K4 4140.39 1 ACT_SYMKEY -1... 1
CANCEL SYMMETRICAL KEY K4 4139.39 1 CAN_SYMKEY -1... 2
DISPLAY SYMMETRICAL KEY K4 4141.39 1 DISP_SYMKEY -1... 1
ENTER SYMMETRICAL KEY K4 4138.39 1 ENTR_SYMKEY -1... 2
MODIFY SYMMETRICAL KEY 4222.35 1 MOD_SYMKEY -1... 2
CONFIGURE SYSTEM PANEL 930.60 1 CONF_SYP -1... 1
DISPLAY STATUS OF SYSTEM PANEL 920.10 1 STAT_SYP -1... 1
RECOVER SYSTEM 456.14 1 RECOV_SYSTEM -1... 2
Display System Time 1.00 1 DISP_SYSTIME -1... 1
Modify System Time 1.00 1 MOD_SYSTIME -1... 1
ACTIVATE SYSTEM UPGRADE 3238.00 1 ACT_SYSUPG -1... 1
DEACTIVATE SYSTEM UPGRADE 3239.00 1 DACT_SYSUPG -1... 1
START SYSTEM UPGRADE 3241.00 1 START_SYSUPG -1... 1
MOUNT TAPE 8.01 1 MOUNT_TAPE -1... 1
CANCEL TARIFF 57.06 1 CAN_TAR -1... 1
CONT-25 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DISPLAY TARIFF 202.04 1 DISP_TAR -1... 2
ENTER TARIFF 56.09 1 ENTR_TAR -1... 4
MODIFY TARIFF 58.06 1 MOD_TAR -1... 2
CANCEL TARIFF SWITCH 60.07 1 CAN_TARSW -1... 2
DISPLAY TARIFF SWITCH 205.07 1 DISP_TARSW -1... 2
ENTER TARIFF SWITCH 59.07 1 ENTR_TARSW -1... 2
Cancel Transm. Convergence Sublayer 1.00 1 CAN_TCSUBL -1... 1
Create Transm. Convergence Sublayer 1.00 1 CR_TCSUBL -1... 3
Display Transm. Convergence Sublayer 1.00 1 DISP_TCSUBL -1... 2
Modify Transm. Convergence Sublayer 1.00 1 MOD_TCSUBL -1... 2
TRANSFER TEXT 1505.00 1 TRANS_TEXT -1... 1
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2772.01 1 CAN_TGCLU -1... 1
CREATE TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2771.04 1 CR_TGCLU -1... 3
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2773.01 1 DISP_TGCLU -1... 1
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP CLUSTER 2774.04 1 MOD_TGCLU -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP DATA 1874.30 1 CAN_TGDAT -1... 8
ENTER TRUNK GROUP DATA 1875.30 1 ENTR_TGDAT -1... 88
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP 14.39 1 CAN_TGRP -1... 1
CREATE TRUNK GROUP 11.42 1 CR_TGRP -1...124
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP 226.42 1 DISP_TGRP -1... 10
MODIFY TRUNK GROUP 35.47 1 MOD_TGRP -1... 8
RECORD TRUNK GROUP 291.30 1 REC_TGRP -1... 5
DISPLAY TRUNK GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD 1889.30 1 DISP_TGRPTHR -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK GROUP ALARM THRESHOLDS 2548.30 1 ENTR_TGRPTHR -1... 11
DISPLAY THRESHOLD 256.01 1 DISP_THR -1... 1
ENTER THRESHOLD 255.73 1 ENTR_THR -1... 1
Cancel Ticket Distributor 1.00 1 CAN_TICKDISTR -1... 1
Create Ticket Distributor 1.00 1 CR_TICKDISTR -1... 1
Display Ticket Distributor 1.00 1 DISP_TICKDISTR -1... 1
DISPLAY TIME 50.15 1 DISP_TIME -1... 1
ENTER TIME 52.15 1 ENTR_TIME -1... 2
MODIFY TIME 4142.15 1 MOD_TIME -1... 3
DISPLAY TIMEOUT 767.13 1 DISP_TIOUT -1... 1
MODIFY TIMEOUT 850.35 1 MOD_TIOUT -1... 18
DISPLAY TIME JOB 259.01 1 DISP_TJOB -1... 1
CAN TRUNK MAINTENANCE BLOCKING STATUS 1882.07 1 CAN_TMBLK -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK MAINTENANCE BLOCKING STATUS 1883.06 1 ENTR_TMBLK -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK MAINTENANCE CONTROL 377.71 1 DISP_TMCNTL -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK MAINTENANCE CONTROL 324.30 1 ENTR_TMCNTL -1... 7
Cancel Time Event 1.00 1 CAN_TMEVENT -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBSERVATION JOB 1649.01 1 CAN_TOBS -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBSERVATION JOBS 1542.00 1 DISP_TOBS -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBSERVATION JOB 1544.01 1 ENTR_TOBS -1... 3
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBSERVATION RECORDS 2959.00 1 DISP_TOBSREC -1... 1
CANCEL TONE IDENTIFICATION 2344.01 1 CAN_TONEID -1... 1
CREATE TONE IDENTIFICATION 2337.02 1 CR_TONEID -1... 4
DISPLAY TONE IDENTIFICATION 2345.01 1 DISP_TONEID -1... 1
MODIFY TONE IDENTIFICATION 2343.02 1 MOD_TONEID -1... 4
CANCEL TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1416.52 1 CAN_TRABLOCK -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1415.49 1 DISP_TRABLOCK -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC RESTRICTION CLASS BLOCK 1417.52 1 ENTR_TRABLOCK -1... 3
DISPLAY TRAFFIC FILE CHARACTERISTIC 283.39 1 DISP_TRAFICH -1... 1
GET TRAFFIC FILE 286.34 1 GET_TRAFILE -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT ORDERS 507.04 1 DISP_TRAMORD -1... 1
Repair SYTRANSLOG File on MP 1.00 1 REP_TRANSLOG -1... 2
DISPLAY IRREGULARITY TRAPS 1058.30 1 DISP_TRAPS -1... 10
CANCEL TRAFFIC TYPE 3639.46 1 CAN_TRAT -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC TYPE 3637.54 1 CR_TRAT -1... 3
DISPLAY TRAFFIC TYPE 3640.46 1 DISP_TRAT -1... 1
MODIFY TRAFFIC TYPE 3638.52 1 MOD_TRAT -1... 3
CANCEL TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3643.46 1 CAN_TRATCPT -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3641.56 1 CR_TRATCPT -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3644.56 1 DISP_TRATCPT -1... 2
MODIFY TRAFFIC TYPE CODE POINT 3642.56 1 MOD_TRATCPT -1... 2
Display Trace Buffer 1.00 1 DISP_TRCB -1... 1
Modify Trace Buffer Layout 1.00 1 MOD_TRCB -1... 1
Define Trace Conditions 1.00 1 DEF_TRCCOND -1... 1
Define Tracedata 1.00 1 DEF_TRCDATA -1... 1
CANCEL TRUNK DATA 687.42 1 CAN_TRDAT -1... 3
ENTER TRUNK DATA 686.42 1 ENTR_TRDAT -1... 3
Define Trigger Functions 1.00 1 DEF_TRIGFUNC -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK METER 262.02 1 DISP_TRMET -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBJECTS 1575.00 1 DISP_TRO -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS DESTINATION 1576.02 1 CAN_TRODEST -1... 1
CONT-26 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECTS DESTINATION 1562.02 1 ENTR_TRODEST -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1570.00 1 CAN_TRODLU -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT DIGITAL LINE UNIT 1569.01 1 ENTR_TRODLU -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS GROUP 1577.00 1 CAN_TROGRP -1... 1
CREATE TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP 1558.04 1 CR_TROGRP -1... 1
DISPLAY TRAFFIC OBJECTS GROUPS 1574.00 1 DISP_TROGRP -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJ INCOM OUTGO TRUNK GRP 1573.00 1 CAN_TROICOGT -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJ INCOM OUTGO TRUNK GRP 1559.01 1 ENTR_TROICOGT -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJ PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 3069.00 1 CAN_TROPA -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT PRIMARY RATE ACCESS 3066.01 1 ENTR_TROPA -1... 1
CAN TRAFFIC OBJ PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 1561.01 1 CAN_TROPBX -1... 1
ENTR TRAFFIC OBJ PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE 1560.03 1 ENTR_TROPBX -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT PBX LINE 1572.04 1 CAN_TROPBXLN -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT PBX LINE 1571.05 1 ENTR_TROPBXLN -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECTS SUBSCRIBER 1564.03 1 CAN_TROSUB -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECTS SUBSCRIBER 1563.04 1 ENTR_TROSUB -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNKGROUP 1566.00 1 CAN_TROTGRP -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNKGROUP 1565.01 1 ENTR_TROTGRP -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNK 1568.03 1 CAN_TROTRUNK -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC OBJECT TRUNK 1567.04 1 ENTR_TROTRUNK -1... 1
CANCEL TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT JOB 700.05 1 CAN_TRST -1... 2
DISPLAY TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT JOB 701.01 1 DISP_TRST -1... 1
ENTER TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT JOB 2670.15 1 ENTR_TRST -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2026.01 1 CAN_TRSVCNTL -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2028.02 1 DISP_TRSVCNTL -1... 1
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2030.08 1 ENTR_TRSVCNTL -1... 3
MODIFY TRUNK RESERVATION CONTROL 2032.07 1 MOD_TRSVCNTL -1... 2
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRIT. 2027.04 1 CAN_TRSVCRIT -1... 3
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRIT. 2029.06 1 DISP_TRSVCRIT -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC CRITERIA 2031.05 1 ENTR_TRSVCRIT -1... 4
CANCEL TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3811.00 1 CAN_TRSVTRAF -1... 1
DISPLAY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3812.00 1 DISP_TRSVTRAF -1... 2
ENTER TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3810.02 1 ENTR_TRSVTRAF -1... 5
MODIFY TRUNK RESERVATION TRAFFIC 3942.02 1 MOD_TRSVTRAF -1... 7
ACTIVATE TRUNK TRAP 346.30 1 ACT_TRTRAP -1... 18
CANCEL TRUNK TRAP 347.30 1 CAN_TRTRAP -1... 6
DISPLAY TRIPLE TEST VALUES 2035.00 1 DISP_TRTVAL -1... 1
ENTER TRIPLE TEST VALUES 2037.00 1 ENTR_TRTVAL -1... 2
CANCEL TRUNK 15.42 1 CAN_TRUNK -1... 2
CREATE TRUNK 12.42 1 CR_TRUNK -1... 12
DISPLAY TRUNK 189.42 1 DISP_TRUNK -1... 4
DISPLAY STATUS OF TRUNK 355.35 1 STAT_TRUNK -1... 6
CONFIGURE TIME STAGE GROUP 972.17 1 CONF_TSG -1... 2
DIAGNOSE TIME STAGE GROUP 975.00 1 DIAG_TSG -1... 3
TEST SPEECH PATHS THROUGH THE TSG 973.00 1 TEST_TSG -1... 5
CREATE TSM 4122.00 1 CR_TSM -1... 1
RELEASE TEST CALL 1280.15 1 REL_TSTCALL -1... 1
SET UP TEST CALL 1283.24 1 SETUP_TSTCALL -1... 24
DISPLAY TESTING JOBS 803.01 1 DISP_TSTJOB -1... 1
CHANGE TEST OBJECT 1273.24 1 CHANGE_TSTOBJ -1... 24
DISPLAY UPDATE 406.02 1 DISP_UPDATE -1... 1
Modify Mass Update on MP 1.00 1 MOD_UPDATEMP -1... 1
ACTIVATE UPDATE CHECKPOINTING 4226.10 1 ACT_UPDCHP -1... 1
Stop Upgrade on MP 1.00 1 STOP_UPGMP -1... 1
Display Upgraded Object Classes on MP 1.00 1 DISP_UPGOCMP -1... 1
CANCEL USER IDENTIFICATION 2860.01 1 CAN_USERID -1... 1
CREATE USER IDENTIFICATION 2856.39 1 CR_USERID -1... 2
DISPLAY USER IDENTIFICATION 2861.00 1 DISP_USERID -1... 1
MODIFY USER IDENTIFICATION 2862.39 1 MOD_USERID -1... 3
DISPLAY USSD TEXT 2491.00 1 DISP_USSDTXT -1... 1
MODIFY USSD TEXT 2492.39 1 MOD_USSDTXT -1... 3
Cancel Virtual Channel 1.00 1 CAN_VCHAN -1... 1
Create Virtual Channel 1.00 1 CR_VCHAN -1... 2
Display Virtual Channel 1.00 1 DISP_VCHAN -1... 2
Modify Virtual Channel 1.00 1 MOD_VCHAN -1... 1
Diagnose Virtual Channel with Loopback 1.00 1 DIAG_VCHANLPB -1... 2
CANCEL VOICE GROUP SERVICE AREA 4053.18 1 CAN_VGSAREA -1... 1
CREATE VOICE GROUP SERVICE AREA 4051.34 1 CR_VGSAREA -1... 2
DISPLAY VOICE GROUP SERVICE AREA 4054.39 1 DISP_VGSAREA -1... 3
MODIFY VOICE GROUP SERVICE AREA 4052.34 1 MOD_VGSAREA -1... 3
CANCEL VOICE GROUP SERVICE GROUP 4062.00 1 CAN_VGSGRP -1... 1
ENTER VOICE GROUP SERVICE GROUP 4060.00 1 ENTR_VGSGRP -1... 2
CANCEL VOICE GROUP SERV. CALL REFERENCE 4057.18 1 CAN_VGSREF -1... 1
CREATE VOICE GROUP SERV. CALL REFERENCE 4055.34 1 CR_VGSREF -1... 6
CONT-27 + P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Contents and Issue Information
Task Description Number Issue Task Name Pages
DISPLAY VOICE GROUP SERV. CALL REFERENCE 4058.39 1 DISP_VGSREF -1... 2
MODIFY VOICE GROUP SERV. CALL REFERENCE 4056.34 1 MOD_VGSREF -1... 6
RECORD VISITOR LOCATION REGISTER DATA 1931.18 1 REC_VLR -1... 4
CANCEL VOICE MAIL SERVICE 3298.94 1 CAN_VMS -1... 1
CREATE VOICE MAIL SERVICE 3299.94 1 CR_VMS -1... 1
DISPLAY VOICE MAIL SERVICE 3300.94 1 DISP_VMS -1... 1
MODIFY VOICE MAIL SERVICE 3302.94 1 MOD_VMS -1... 1
CANCEL VOICE RECOGNITION 2348.00 1 CAN_VOICEREC -1... 1
CREATE VOICE RECOGNITION 2346.00 1 CR_VOICEREC -1... 1
DISPLAY VOICE RECOGNITION 2349.00 1 DISP_VOICEREC -1... 1
MODIFY VOICE RECOGNITION 2347.00 1 MOD_VOICEREC -1... 1
Cancel Virtual Path 1.00 1 CAN_VPATH -1... 1
Create Virtual Path 1.00 1 CR_VPATH -1... 2
Display Virtual Path 1.00 1 DISP_VPATH -1... 2
Modify Virtual Path 1.00 1 MOD_VPATH -1... 2
CONFIGURE VOICE PROCESSING UNIT 4143.00 1 CONF_VPU -1... 1
DIAGNOSE VOICE PROCESSING UNIT RECEIVERS 4144.00 1 DIAG_VPU -1... 1
DISP. STATUS VPU RECEIVERS 4145.00 1 STAT_VPU -1... 1
COPY VSD DATABASE BACKUP FILE 4125.15 1 COPY_VSD -1... 1
MERGE VSD 4088.28 1 MERGE_VSD -1... 1
RELINK VSD RECORDS 4127.14 1 RLINK_VSD -1... 1
UPDATE VSD BACKUP FILE 4128.14 1 UPD_VSD -1... 1
DISPLAY VSD DATABASE STATISTIC DATA 4126.15 1 DISP_VSDSTAT -1... 1
CANCEL VLR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER DATA 4225.35 1 CAN_VSUB -1... 2
DISPLAY VLR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER DATA 3349.35 1 DISP_VSUB -1... 2
DISPLAY VLR SUBSCRIBER DATABASE SIZE 4254.35 1 DISP_VSUBDBSZ -1... 1
DISPLAY VLR SUBSCRIBER ORIGINATION 4089.39 1 DISP_VSUBORIG -1... 1
DISPLAY WEEKDAY CATEGORY 685.39 1 DISP_WDCAT -1... 1
MODIFY WEEKDAY CATEGORY 725.39 1 MOD_WDCAT -1... 1
STATUS X25 DATA 3037.01 1 STAT_X25DAT -1... 2
CANCEL X25DTE 2685.00 1 CAN_X25DTE -1... 1
CREATE X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2689.03 1 CR_X25DTE -1... 12
DISPLAY X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2695.03 1 DISP_X25DTE -1... 3
MODIFY X25 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 2701.03 1 MOD_X25DTE -1... 3
CANCEL X25 LINK 2512.02 1 CAN_X25LINK -1... 1
CONFIGURE X25 LINK 2513.02 1 CONF_X25LINK -1... 1
CREATE X25 LINK 2509.05 1 CR_X25LINK -1... 10
DISPLAY X25 LINK 2511.02 1 DISP_X25LINK -1... 1
MODIFY X25 LINK 2510.05 1 MOD_X25LINK -1... 10
CANCEL X25PVC 2520.02 1 CAN_X25PVC -1... 1
CREATE X25PVC 2519.02 1 CR_X25PVC -1... 3
DISPLAY X25PVC 2521.04 1 DISP_X25PVC -1... 2
CANCEL X25ROUTE 2686.00 1 CAN_X25ROUTE -1... 1
CREATE X25ROUTE 2690.03 1 CR_X25ROUTE -1... 4
DISPLAY X25ROUTE 2696.01 1 DISP_X25ROUTE -1... 1
ACTIVATE X25 STATISTICS 2754.00 1 ACT_X25STC -1... 2
DEACTIVATE X25 STATISTICS 2755.00 1 DACT_X25STC -1... 1
DISPLAY X25 STATISTICS INFORMATION 2756.00 1 DISP_X25STC -1... 1
DUMP X25 STATISTICS 2581.01 1 DMP_X25STC -1... 2
ACTIVATE X25 TRACER 2501.02 1 ACT_X25TRAC -1... 9
DEACTIVATE X25 TRACER 2502.01 1 DACT_X25TRAC -1... 2
DISPLAY X25 TRACER INFORMATION 2504.00 1 DISP_X25TRAC -1... 1
DUMP X25 TRACE DATA 2503.01 1 DMP_X25TRAC -1... 3
DISPLAY ZONING INFORMATION 2869.04 1 DISP_ZOINF -1... 1
MODIFY ZONING INFORMATION 2868.04 1 MOD_ZOINF -1... 1
CANCEL ZONE POINT 29.72 1 CAN_ZOPT -1... 4
CREATE ZONE POINT 26.72 1 CR_ZOPT -1... 8
DISPLAY ZONE POINT 190.72 1 DISP_ZOPT -1... 5
MERGE ZONE POINT 388.72 1 MERGE_ZOPT -1... 7
MODIFY ZONE POINT 37.72 1 MOD_ZOPT -1... 8
SPLIT ZONE POINT 386.72 1 SPLIT_ZOPT -1... 7
CONT-28 - P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Mobile IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTRODUCTION TO TML/OML
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 IN-1
IN Mobile
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IN-2 P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Mobile IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The Task Manual (TML) is a reference document which contains all tasks needed to
operate the system including those tasks intended only for system specialists
with special authorization.
Technological advances have led to changes in the way the switch is addressed.
Concretely this means that there are new interfaces via which communication with
the switch is possible. Therefore some tasks communicate with the switch via
traditional commands (MML tasks), others via a slightly different input format.
For the sake of continuity all of these elements will be called tasks in future
and described in this document. As in the past, the reader accesses the required
information from the TML Table of Contents, or if task access is made from one of
the manuals, through links in those documents.
Care has been taken to make input format representation as similar as possible.
There are however differences which the user must be aware of. For example the
output masks for traditional MML tasks are described in an independent document
(OML). The outputs of the new tasks are described in the relevant task in this
document, if further clarification is required. Another example is that the
length of the input parameters is not limited to 8 characters in the new tasks,
the parameter names may be up to 20 characters long.
Structure
The structure of the TML is as follows:
Administration section
List of contents
Introduction TML/OML
Task descriptions
Reference list MML tasks - masks
Administration section
The title pages, the index of issues and the explanation of the change
designations make up the administration section.
List of contents
The list of contents comprises of all tasks in tabular order. All entries
contain an issue report and, if necessary, a change designation.
The list of contents includes links which allow the user to jump to the information
in the other TML section.
Introduction TML/OML
The Introduction contains specific instruction for using the TML including the
differences relevant to operation between traditional MML tasks and the newer tasks.
These idiosyncrasies are specified in the Task description sections:
MML task specific
Specific conventions for all other tasks
The Introduction also contains specific instruction for using the Output Manual
(OML) for masks used by MML tasks - see following section:
Output Manual (OML) for MML tasks
Task descriptions
The task descriptions are the main part of the TML and reflect the set of tasks
relevant to a specific APS. Task descriptions include information about the syntax,
parameters, and where applicable paths and parameter values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 IN-3
IN Mobile
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Task descriptions are structured as follows:
1. Task short and long name
2. Task helptext
3. Task syntax
4. Parameter information including general parameter information, and where
applicable, subparameter and parameter value information
Input syntax
This section provides an overview of the input format for tasks and the syntax.
The syntax is displayed in Backus-Naur Notation:
Input format

[ Graphic display of [ Comment [

[ parameters [ [
[[[
[ DEMO= [ Entering the parameters is [
[ [ mandatory. [
[[[
[ [,DEMO ] [ Entering the parameters is [
[ [ optional. [
[[[
[ ,DEMO1= [ Entering exactly one parameter [
[ ,DEMO2= [ is mandatory. [
[ [ [
[[[
[ ,DEMO1= [ Entering exactly one parameter [
[ [ ,DEMO2= [ [ is optional. [
[ ! - [ [
[[[
[ [ ,DEMO1=,DEMO2= ] [ Entering all parameter or none [
[ [ entered. [
[[[
[ [ ,DEMO1= [ ,DEMO2= ] ] [ Possible combinations: [
[ [ - Enter all parameters [
[ [ - Enter only parameter DEMO1 [
[ [ - Enter both parameters [
[ [ (Parameter DEMO2 alone may [
[ [ not be entered.) [
[[[
[ <,DEMO1=,DEMO2=,DEMO3= > [ At least one parameter must [
[ [ be entered. [
!-
The syntax diagrams contain links which allow direct access to the individual
parameter descriptions.
IN-4 P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Mobile IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MML task specific
MML tasks which can be used for different purposes are split into different input
formats (paths). This applies particularly in cases in which the above mentioned
syntax is not able to represent all the dependencies among parameters, parameters
and parameter values, or among parameter values. If the general version of the
task is used, the dependencies between parameters which may occur when particular
parameter values are selected are not dynamically modified to represent these
dependencies. For example, if a particular parameter value is selected, and this
selection causes mandatory input of another parameter, this is not indicated
through color change.
An overview of the input formats is given at the beginning of each task
description.
Example: The MML task has the following paths:
1. CR TEQ - ATCL ACCESS TEST CIRCUIT SUB LINE
2. CR TEQ - ATE AUTOMATIC TEST EQUIPMENT
3. CR TEQ - ATEMAN ATE FOR TESTING AND MEASURING
4. CR TEQ - ATESELF ATE FOR SELFTEST
5. CR TEQ - TEMLE TEST MODULE LEVEL
6. CR TEQ - TESTSET TEST SET
7. CR TEQ - RBSI RING BACK SERVICE INTEGRATED
8. CR TEQ - TLFI TRANSLATION FUNCTION INTEGRAT.
9. CR TEQ - ADDATE ADDITIONAL ATE PORT
The paths also contain links which allow direct access to the individual input
descriptions.
Input parameters
The description of the input parameters explains the syntax of the individual
parameters.
In the simplest cases, parameters are described by the parameter short and long
name and the parameter value range. The parameter value range may be, e.g. a range
of decimal numbers or it may be defined by a specific character set as shown below:
Alphanumeric symbolic names: A...Z 0...9. + * % #
Alphanumeric text strings: A...Z 0...9. + * % # < ( & ! $ ) ; - / ,
_ > ? : @ =
<enter> <line feed>
Text strings must be enclosed in quotation marks ("). If a quotation mark must be
included in a text string, it must be doubled (""). The maximum length of a text
string including the quotation marks is 72 characters.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 IN-5
IN Mobile
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example:
PARDM1 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 1 =
5...8 characters from the symbolic name character set
However in certain cases, mnemonic abbreviations may be entered for a parameter.
These abbreviations are also called identifiers. Identifiers have short and long
names and may be supplemented by a help text.
Example:
PARDM2 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 2=
IDF1 LONGNAME IDENTIFIER NO.1
IDF2 LONGNAME IDENTIFIER NO.2
Under certain circumstances a parameter may have up to 4 subparameters.
Subparameters are also called information units; they must be separated
by a hyphen. In the Task Manual, information units are symbolized by the
lowercase letters a, b, c, and d.
Example:
PARDM3 PARAMETER DEMONSTRATION 3 =
a-b-c-d
a: FIRST INFORMATION UNIT =
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: SECOND INFORMATION UNIT =
etc.
The so-called new and old parameters are also represented by lowercase
letters.
Example:
DIGIT DIGITS =
The parameter specifies the prefix digits for test multiple.
n/o
n/
/o
1...8 hexadecimal number where B is interchangeable with *
and C is interchangeable with #
In this case, new and old have a very general meaning.
EXAMPLE:
MOD TEQ: DIGITS=newvalue/oldvalue Changes the prefix digit
new value/old value
MOD TEQ: DIGITS=newvalue/ Enters new prefix digit
MOD TEQ: DIGITS= /oldvalue Deletes old prefix digit
IN-6 P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Mobile IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default values/Standard behavior
If the syntax allows omission of a parameter or subparameter, the key word
"Default" in the parameter help text describes how the system will respond.
The following cases are possible:
- Default value:
Default: <value>
<value> is a parameter value within the permissible range that is
automatically used if the parameter is omitted.
- Standard behavior:
Standard behavior: <text>
<text> describes the behavior of the system if the parameter is omitted.
This option is selected if it is not possible to specify a default value
(=concrete value).
Examples:
- This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2500, range of decimal numbers.
Default: 0
- This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers.
Standard behavior: If no value is entered, in case of individual
announcements the default value will be set to
1, otherwise it will be set to 16.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 IN-7
IN Mobile
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Specific conventions for all other tasks
Input parameters
The description of the input parameters explains the syntax of the individual
parameters. In the simplest cases, parameters are described by both parameter name
and parameter value range. The parameter value range may be e.g. a range of decimal
numbers or a specific character set (different from MML tasks) as shown below may
define it:
Alphanumeric character set: A...Z a...z 0...9
Alphanumeric printable character set: A...Z a...z 0...9 <space> ( ) + , - . /
: = ?
Integer number with unlimited range: 0...2.147.843.647
Character strings may be but need not be enclosed in quotation marks (-). In the
output however the character strings are usually set in quotation marks.
If parameter values have preceding or succeeding spaces, please note that these
spaces will be deleted. If several spaces are between the words of the parameter
value, these are reduced to one as well.
Examples:
Parameter name 1
Help text
Input format:
1...20 characters from the printable character set
Parameter name 2
Help text
Input format:
Integer number
A parameter may have parameter values that consist of a single word/several words or
are a mnemonic abbreviation. These values are either of the same or of different
types of which one has to be selected.
This kind of parameter value is called identifier. In case identifiers are
abbreviations they have also a long name, in both cases identifiers may be
supplemented by a help text.
Parameter name 3
Help text
Input format:
Selection from:
Identifier 1 Long name identifier 1
Help text for identifier 1
Identifier 2 Long name identifier 2
Help text for identifier 2
The parameter may offer a list of (not) ordered elements (either values or
identifiers with their number depending on Size) of the same type.
Parameter name 4
Help text
Input format:
Set:
Size: 1...4
Of 0...4294967296, range of decimal numbers
The parameter may offer a list of (not) ordered elements (either values or
identifiers) of different types.
Parameter name 5
Help text
Input format:
Sequence:
Value 1
0...4294967296, range of decimal numbers
Identifier 2 Long name identifier 2
Help text for identifier 2
IN-8 P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Mobile IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default/Standard behavior/Automatic Instance Naming:
If the syntax allows omission of a parameter value, the key word given in the
parameter help text describes how the system will respond. The following cases
are possible:
- Default value:
Default: <value>
<value> is a parameter value within the permissible range or identifier that
is automatically used if the parameter is omitted.
- Standard behavior:
Standard behavior: <text>
<text> describes the behavior of the system if the parameter is omitted. This
option is selected if it is not possible to specify a default value.
- Automatic Instance Naming (AIN):
AIN indicates that a unique value is used if the parameter is omitted.
A note in the parameter help describes the use of AIN, e.g. with: If this
parameter is omitted, a unique (numerical) value will be assigned automatically.
Reference list MML tasks - masks
The reference list MML tasks - masks contains an overview of all MML tasks with
their respective referenced masks in tabular order. The table is sorted as
follows:
MML task name - mask number - mask variant
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 IN-9
IN Mobile
Introduction IN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Output Manual (OML) for MML tasks
The structure of the OML is as follows:
Administration section
Mask list
Introduction TML/OML
Statusmessages
Reference list mask - MML tasks
Reference list message group - mask - MML tasks
Administration section
The title pages, the index of issues and the explanation of the change
designations make up the administration section.
Mask list
The mask list comprises of all MML masks with their mask variant and
correction version in tabular order.
The mask list includes links which allow the user to jump to the information
in the respective OML section.
Introduction TML/OML
The introduction part for both TML and OML is identical.
Statusmessages
The statusmessages are the main part of the OML and reflect the set of masks
relevant to a specific APS.
Masks that occur in various situations are described only once.
For this reason, parameters may be listed for a mask that do not apply in a
specific case.
The description includes
- the format of the report (keyword: Output format)
- the reason for the report (keyword: Reason for output)
- remedies (keyword: Necessary action)
- the meaning of the output parameters (keyword: Output parameter)
The output parameters are displayed in a grid.
IN-10 P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619
Mobile IN
IN Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Example:
Output format
[
[
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012

[ [
0 [ [
1 [ TEXTTEXT TEXT TEXT TEXTTEXTTEXT TEXT [
2 [ [
3 [ PARAM2 [
4 [ [
5 [ XXXXXX [
[ [
!-
Output parameter
Position Explanation of the output
of output
in mask
(line,
column)

5,32 PARAMETER 2 =
:
:
:
etc.
For a detailed explanation of the output parameters, please refer to the parameters
on the MML task level. These parameters can be found in the OML reference lists
and in the associated basic MML tasks in the CMD part; these are usually setup
MML tasks.
Example:
You need a detailed explanation of the output parameter value of a report.
This information can be found by referring to the five-digit mask number that
appears in the mask header. The mask number is the number following the
forward slash, for example, 3077/00045.
By looking up the mask number in the OML reference list, you can find the
MML task that initiated this report. For example, this could be the display
MML task of the object. Detailed information can then be found in the create
MML task for the object.
Reference list Mask - MML tasks & Reference list Message group - Mask - MML tasks
The reference lists allow you to assign output mask numbers to message groups.
These lists are divided into two tables that are sorted as follows:
- Mask number, mask variant, message group and, if necessary, the MML task
- Message group, mask number, mask variant and, if necessary, the MML task
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 IN-11
DISP A4TPVAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY A4 TESTPATTERN VALUE
This is a command to administrate the reference patterns used to
test the A4 algorithm.
With this command you can display reference values for one or
all the 16 available test reference patterns.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP A4TPVAL : ELEMNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ELEMNO ELEMENT NUMBER
This parameter indicates the number of the test pattern, you want
to display.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP A4TPVAL- 1-
ENTR A4TPVAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER A4 TESTPATTERN VALUE
This is a command to administrate the reference patterns used to
test the A4 algorithm.
With this command you can enter new reference values for one of
the 16 available test reference patterns.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR A4TPVAL : ELEMNO= ,A4TP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ELEMNO ELEMENT NUMBER
This parameter indicates the number of the test pattern, you want
to change.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
A4TP A4 TESTPATTERN
This parameter specifies a reference pattern for the A4 algorithm
test.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: 8 NIBBLES=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 NIBBLES=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 NIBBLES=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
d: 8 NIBBLES=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR A4TPVAL- 1-
REC AC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD AUTHENTICATION CENTRE DATA
This command records the authentication center related data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- Only 1 measurement job can be started.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB if the time
parameter values allow a continuation of the job.
- This command is only allowed for an AC.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC AC : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first be
copied to tape.
Notes:
- Identifier a covers both MDD and MOD.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: FILETYPE
SINGLE SINGLE FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
DAILY DAILY FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to daily files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files (MO...SU) are prepared and created
before the command is accepted.
Time parameters are not permissible for these
measurements.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is automatically
created on disk or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file
for the same day of the week is overwritten.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC AC- 1+
REC AC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CYCLIC CYCLIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full the newest
data will be overwritten.
This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily files or single measurement, or cyclic files).
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception : time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily and cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates (in ascending order) may be linked
with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after entry.
- It is not permissible to enter the command after 23:45 hours with a
begin date on the following day.
- The first measurement may not begin later than one month after the
current day. Subsequent measurements may not begin later than one
year after the current date.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year of the begin
date.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month of the begin
date.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day of the begin
date.
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must
be specified.
Exception: time parameters may not be specified for data output
in daily and cyclic files.
Default: the end of the measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC AC- 2+
REC AC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year in which
recording is to terminate.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month in which
recording is to terminate.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day on which
recording is to terminate.
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a
begin date (BEG).
Incompatibilities:
- Intervals covering more than one day (e.g. 23-00-01-00).
- Intervals separated by a break of less than one hour.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval begins.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval begins.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval terminates.
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval terminates.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC AC- 3+
REC AC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
recording is to take place.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date (TER).
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC AC- 4-
DIAG ACALGOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE AC ALGORITHMS
This command diagnoses the security algorithms of the authentication
center.
PREREQUISITES:
- The unit concerned must be MBL.
CAUTION:
- The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the authentication center.
This command is only permitted if an authentication center
(AC) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG ACALGOR : IOPAUC= [,TESTOP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOPAUC IOPAUC NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...43, range of decimal numbers
TESTOP TEST OPTIONS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TRIPLE TRIPLE GENERATION
ALGOR4 ALGORITHM TO CODE SECUR. PARAM
RANDOM RANDOM GENERATOR
NBSDES NAT. BUREAU DATA ENCRYP. STAN.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG ACALGOR- 1-
TEST ACALGOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST AC ALGORITHMS
This command tests the security algorithms of the authentication center.
PREREQUISITES:
- The unit concerned must be ACT.
CAUTION:
- The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the authentication center.
This command is only permitted if an authentication center
(AC) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST ACALGOR : IOPAUC= [,TESTOP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOPAUC IOPAUC NUMBER
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...43, range of decimal numbers
TESTOP TEST OPTIONS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TRIPLE TRIPLE GENERATION
ALGOR4 ALGORITHM TO CODE SECUR. PARAM
RANDOM RANDOM GENERATOR
NBSDES NAT. BUREAU DATA ENCRYP. STAN.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST ACALGOR- 1-
CAN ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command cancels an automatic congestion control element.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ACC : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
element.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACC- 1-
DISP ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command displays data for
- one automatic congestion control element,
- a maximum of two automatic congestion control elements according to the
addressed trunk group number, or
- all automatic congestion control elements.
When addressing with the trunk group number the element for
CNTRL = CANCEL is displayed before the element for CNTRL = SKIP
if both elements exist for this trunk group.
If all elements are displayed, the display can be sorted by NAME or TGNO.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [NAME=[ [
[ DISP ACC : TGNO= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
element to be displayed.
If X is entered, the elements will be displayed in alphabetical order
of parameter NAME.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to be displayed.
If X is entered, the elements will be displayed in alphabetical order
of parameter TGNO.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACC- 1-
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTOMATIC CONGESTION CONTROL
This command creates or modifies an automatic congestion control element.
If an overload occurs in a succeeding exchange the responding congestion level
is sent to the preceding exchange. In the preceding exchange the reaction of
the overload has to be administrated if it is needed by the commands for
automatic congestion control traffic and automatic congestion control.
The overload is sent via a trunk of a trunk group. Therefore the indicator can
be administrated by the command CR TGRP with GCOS = SENDACCL.
The automatic congestion control element connects the relevant trunk group with
one automatic congestion control traffic element per type of CNTRL.
This means a maximum of two automatic congestion control traffic elements can be
assigned per trunk group. The assigned values for CNTRL = CANCEL
are preferred to the assigned values for CNTRL = SKIP.
The parameter INCEPT depends on parameter CNTRL:
In the case of CNTRL = CANCEL the parameter INCEPT is mandatory.
In the case of CNTRL = SKIP the parameter INCEPT is optional, i.e. only
relevant if there is an overflow in the last trunk group to a destination.
If CNTRL (i.e. = SKIP) is entered without a value for parameter INCEPT an
already existing value of parameter INCEPT is canceled.
Prerequisites: - the automatic congestion control traffic element must already
exist
- the trunk group must already exist
- only allowed for ISUP trunk groups.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ACC : NAME= <,TGNO= ,ACCTRAF= ,BLK= ,CNTRL= ,INCEPT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
element. The name must be unique.
Six control types share a naming pool:
- CR CBPT,
- ENTR TRSVCNTL,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = SKIP,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANTO,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANFROM,
- ENTR ACC.
This means that each NAME may only be used by one of these
controls.
The user may specify any name not yet used in the above-mentioned
naming pool except for two specific values:
- The user must not choose a single "X" as name because this input
stands for all existing values of a display command parameter.
- The NAME "MABEZ" is reserved for the mass call control function
which is an automatic network management control.
Therefore "MABEZ" must not be entered in this command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter must be entered when the element is created and may not
be entered if additional data of the element are modified.
The trunk group number must already exist.
The parameter value cannot be changed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACC- 1+
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ACCTRAF ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the automatic congestion control traffic
element for the relevant type of CNTRL.
This parameter must be entered when the element is created.
The automatic congestion control traffic element must already exist.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking entered for the automatic
congestion control element.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value NONE is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NO BLOCK
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This blocking prevents activation of the
administrated control, even when an overload
occurs.
CNTRL NETWORK MANAGEMENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the type of control.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value SKIP is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SKIP SKIP TO THE NEXT TGRP
The traffic percentages defined in the given
automatic congestion control traffic element
are rejected for this trunk group and flow over
to the next trunk group of the routing list.
In the case of modification, an existing
INCEPT-value is canceled.
CANCEL CANCEL THE CALL
The traffic percentages defined in the given
automatic congestion control traffic element
are rejected for this trunk group. Overflow to
the next trunk group is prevented.
Prerequisites: INCEPT is mandatory.
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept, which defines the system
reaction for rejected calls.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
The parameter is mandatory in the case of CNTRL = CANCEL
and optional in the case of CNTRL = SKIP.
If parameter CNTRL is changed to value SKIP, an existing
INCEPT-value is canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 0
NETWOMA1 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 1
NETWOMA2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 2
NETWOMA3 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 3
NETWOMA4 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 4
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACC- 2+
ENTR ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NETWOMA5 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 5
NETWOMA6 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 6
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACC- 3-
STAT ACC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP. STATUS OF AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL
This command displays the status for
- one automatic congestion control element,
- a maximum of two automatic congestion control elements according to the
addressed trunk group number, or
- all automatic congestion control elements.
When addressing with the trunk group number the element for
CNTRL = CANCEL is displayed before the element for CNTRL = SKIP
if both elements exist for one trunk group.
If all elements are displayed, the display can be sorted by NAME or TGNO.
Only elements which received a congestion level are considered.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [NAME=[ [
[ STAT ACC : TGNO= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
element to be displayed.
If X is entered, the elements will be displayed in alphabetical order
of parameter NAME.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to be displayed.
If X is entered, the elements will be displayed in alphabetical order
of parameter TGNO.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT ACC- 1-
DISP ACCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Configuration
This task displays the global parameters of Q3 Access Control:
Default access, Denial response, Sec. administrator and
Rule restriction.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACCFG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACCFG- 1-
MOD ACCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Configuration
This task modifies the global parameters of Q3 Access Control.
It is used for an initial setup of the Access Control System and
to change the default access rights after definition of
individual Access Control Rules.
!!!!! C A U T I O N !!!!!
Do not change the Default access before defining a Sec.
administrator and setting up access rights by Access Control
Rules. Otherwise any Q3 operation might be rejected and no
further administration would be possible.
Therefore:
1. Always set up the Sec. administrator first: assign the AET
of the NetM (user group) that is used to administrate the Q3
security data base. This will ensure that this NetM (user group)
can always access the Q3 Access Control data base, e.g. to
correct incorrect Access Control Rules or an incorrect
Default access. The Sec. administrator should be assigned
already during installation of a new network element.
2. Set up your Access Control data base and assign access rights for
Q3 operations.
3. Change the Default access - to disable unauthorized Q3 access -
only after individual access rights have been set up.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ACCFG : [Default access=] [,Denial response=] [
[ [
[ [,Sec. administrator=] [,Rule restriction=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default access
This parameter defines Default access rights for Q3
operations. Default access rights are applied if
there is no matching Access Control Rule.
Default access should be set to Deny after creating
the Rules for an individual Access Control system.
!!!!! C A U T I O N !!!!!:
Default access must be changed to Deny only, after
you have assigned a Sec. administrator AET and after
you have assigned Q3 access rights by Access Control
rules. Otherwise any Q3 administration might be
inhibited.
Input format:
Deny : Denies default access right for the Q3 operation.
Allow : Grants default access right for the Q3 operation.
Select Default access for the Q3 operations M-GET,
M-SET, M-CREATE, M-DELETE and M-ACTION.
Denial response
This parameter defines the response to a Q3 request which is
rejected due to missing Default access rights.
Input format:
Deny : Deny by Q3 response "Access Denied"
Abort : Abort Q3 Association
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACCFG- 1+
MOD ACCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Sec. administrator
This parameter defines the AET of a Sec. administrator application.
An AET represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS.
The Sec. administrator is always granted the right to access the
Access Control database.
Q3 Authentication ensures that authentication data is defined
for this AET.
The password used for authentication will not change in the event of
a generation fallback.
Make sure that the AET assigned here is the AET of the initiator
that will be used for Q3 administration in an emergency case, e.g.
after System Recovery with a generation fallback.
Prerequisite:
System access rights for this AET have been defined by Q3
Authentication. Otherwise the parameter is rejected.
Input format: 3 to 16 numbers separated by blank
(AET as "Object Identifier")
Rule restriction
This parameter may be used to restrict the supported Rule type
of the Access Control Rules. Such a restriction may help to make
an Access Control System less complex, and may thus help to avoid
conflicting rules. Therefore, use only Allow rules and set the
Default access to Deny for all Q3 operations.
Prerequisite:
If the Rule restriction is set either to Deny rules or to
Allow rules only, no Access Control Rule of the other type
may exist.
Input format:
Deny rules : Only Rules of Type Deny or Abort are
supported.
Allow rules : Only Rules of Type Allow are supported.
All rules : All Rule types are supported.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACCFG- 2-
CAN ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command cancels an automatic congestion control traffic element.
It may not be connected to an automatic congestion control element.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ACCTRAF : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
traffic element.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACCTRAF- 1-
DISP ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command displays data for
- one automatic congestion control traffic element, or
- all automatic congestion control traffic elements (in alphabetical order).
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACCTRAF : NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
traffic element.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACCTRAF- 1-
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTOM. CONGEST. CONTROL TRAF.
This command creates or modifies an automatic congestion control traffic
element. With such an element different traffic reduction percentages for the
following congestion level - route type combinations can be administrated:
+--------------------------------------------------------+
Route type Command parameter
----------------------------------------------------------
Congestion level 1 direct route CL1DRT
Congestion level 1 alternate route CL1ART
Congestion level 2 direct route CL2DRT
Congestion level 2 alternate route CL2ART
+--------------------------------------------------------+
Additionally it is possible to administrate per congestion level whether
priority traffic is also affected by the traffic reduction or not.
An automatic congestion control traffic element can be connected to several
automatic congestion control elements (see command ENTR ACC).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR ACCTRAF : NAME= <,CL1DRT= ,CL1ART= ,CL2DRT= ,CL2ART= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CL1PRIOT= ,CL2PRIOT=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME ACC TRAFFIC ELEMENT NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the automatic congestion control
traffic element. The name must be unique.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CL1DRT CL1 DIRECT ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for direct route
traffic and a received congestion level 1.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value UNSPEC is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12,5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
PERC37P5 37,5 % BLOCKING
PERC50 50 % BLOCKING
PERC62P5 62,5 % BLOCKING
PERC75 75 % BLOCKING
PERC87P5 87,5 % BLOCKING
PERC100 100 % BLOCKING
UNSPEC UNSPECIFIED BLOCKING
CL1ART CL1 ALTERNATE ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for alternate route
traffic and a received congestion level 1.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF- 1+
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the value UNSPEC is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12,5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
PERC37P5 37,5 % BLOCKING
PERC50 50 % BLOCKING
PERC62P5 62,5 % BLOCKING
PERC75 75 % BLOCKING
PERC87P5 87,5 % BLOCKING
PERC100 100 % BLOCKING
UNSPEC UNSPECIFIED BLOCKING
CL2DRT CL2 DIRECT ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for direct route
traffic and a received congestion level 2.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value UNSPEC is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12,5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
PERC37P5 37,5 % BLOCKING
PERC50 50 % BLOCKING
PERC62P5 62,5 % BLOCKING
PERC75 75 % BLOCKING
PERC87P5 87,5 % BLOCKING
PERC100 100 % BLOCKING
UNSPEC UNSPECIFIED BLOCKING
CL2ART CL2 ALTERNATE ROUTE TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the traffic reduction for alternate route
traffic and a received congestion level 2.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value UNSPEC is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12,5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
PERC37P5 37,5 % BLOCKING
PERC50 50 % BLOCKING
PERC62P5 62,5 % BLOCKING
PERC75 75 % BLOCKING
PERC87P5 87,5 % BLOCKING
PERC100 100 % BLOCKING
UNSPEC UNSPECIFIED BLOCKING
CL1PRIOT CL1 PRIORITY TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies whether priority traffic is affected by the
administrated reductions for congestion level 1 or not.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value CNTRL is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOCNTRL NO CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF- 2+
ENTR ACCTRAF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNTRL CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
CL2PRIOT CL2 PRIORITY TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies whether priority traffic is affected by the
administrated reductions for congestion level 2 or not.
Redundant entry of a value is allowed.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered for this parameter
the value CNTRL is set at creation of
a new element. The existing value is not
changed if an existing element is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOCNTRL NO CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
CNTRL CONTROL OF PRIORITY TRAFFIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACCTRAF- 3-
ACT ACCUPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate Accounting Upgrade
This task starts the upgrade for Accounting
Input format

[ [
[ ACT ACCUPG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT ACCUPG- 1-
DISP ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GENERAL ALARM CALL DATA
This command displays the general alarm call data :
- indication whether the alarm call execution is active
- maximum number of alarm call orders in the database
- maximum number of alarm call orders per interval
- maximum number of tries per alarm call order
- number of alarm call orders present in the database
- directory number of the announcement that will be used
to execute the alarm call orders
- directory number of the alarm call trunk group
- index of the alarm call trunk group
- category of the alarm call trunk group
- maximum number of previous intervals where to an alarm
call can be advanced
- indication if an alarm call order should be searched in
the previous intervals when not found in the entered
interval.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACDATA ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACDATA- 1-
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM CALL DATA
This command enters the general alarm call data.
Prerequisites:
- The necessary ports must be available in the LTGs were the alarm
call program is running.
- At least one announcement trunk group and announcement line must be
available.
- The number of trunk ports and announcement lines must be in proportion
to the maximum number of alarm call executions within one 5 minute interval.
Formula :
2 x D x M x (W + 1) N
N = A =
5 2
N = number of alarm call ports to be created
A = number of announcement lines to be created
D = average time of an alarm call connection in minutes
(ringing time + listening time)
M = number of maximum permitted alarm call orders per 5
minute interval (<= 200)
W = percentage of the alarm call orders that must be repeated
- The timers which determine ringing and listening time should have the
required values, the default values are :
ringing timer : T25 = 30 s.
listening timer : T33 = 30 s.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR ACDATA : <MAX= ,RETRY= ,ANNDN= ,TGRPDN= ,CAT= ,BLOCK= [
[ [
[ ,ASHIFT= ,ASRCHE= ,OPRRETRY=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MAX MAX NO OF ORDERS PER INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the maximum number of alarm call orders per
5 minute interval.
If there are intervals that contain more alarm call orders than
permitted in the new maximum, the alarm call orders are nevertheless
executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...200, range of decimal numbers
RETRY NUMBER OF RETRIES
This parameter specifies how often an unsuccessful
executed alarm call order can be re-executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2, range of decimal numbers
ANNDN ANNOUNCEMENT DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the
announcement that will be used to execute the alarm call
orders.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACDATA- 1+
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TGRPDN TRUNK GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the alarm
call trunk group of which the ports will be used to set up
the alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the alarm call trunk group.
The category must be the same as the category entered when creating
the trunk group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
BLOCK BLOCK ALARM CALL EXECUTION
This parameter specifies whether the alarm call execution is active
or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO ALARM CALL EXEC. NOT BLOCKED
YES ALARM CALL EXECUTION BLOCKED
ASHIFT ALARM CALL SHIFT
This parameter specifies the maximum permitted number of previous
intervals where to an alarm call can be advanced when the interval,
corresponding the booking time, is full.
The shift function is only valid for orders entered by subscriber
controlled input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
ASRCHE ALARM CALL ORDER SEARCH METHOD
This parameter indicates whether the ASHIFT-intervals must be
searched for an alarm call order that is not found in the
entered interval. This extended search has only effect for actions
by subscriber controlled input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINGLE SEARCH ONLY ENTERED INTERVAL
SHIFTED SEARCH ALSO SHIFT INTERVALS
OPRRETRY ADMOSS OPERATOR RETRY
This parameter indication whether there should be an extra
execution for the automatic and semi-automatic alarm calls
by means of the ADMOSS operator.
Notes:
- when this parameter is omitted there will be no
reexecution. Default value = NO.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO OPERATOR RETRY
When the execution of the automatic and
semi-automatic alarm call orders are unsuccessful
there will be no extra execution by means of the
ADMOSS operator.
YES OPERATOR RETRY
When the execution of the automatic and
semi-automatic alarm call orders are unsuccessful
there will be attempt to have an execution by
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACDATA- 2+
ENTR ACDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
means of the ADMOSS operator.
This parameter specifies whether a reexecution should be
done by means of the ADMOSS operator for automatic and
semi-automatic alarm calls.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACDATA- 3-
CAN ACHLRID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHENTICATION CENTER HLR ID
This command cancels an authentication center home location register
identification (ACHLRID). This identification represents the HLR
(Home Location Register) code of the mobile subscriber identification
number (MSIN).
Prerequisites:
- The mobile subsribers created in the authentication center for this
HLR code must have been deleted with the command CAN ACMSUB.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if an authentication center
(AC) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ACHLRID : ACHLRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACHLRID HOME LOCATION REGISTER CODE
ACHLRID = a: 2 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACHLRID- 1-
CR ACHLRID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE AUTHENTICATION CENTER HLR ID
This command creates an authentication center home location register
identification (ACHLRID). This identification represents the HLR
(Home Location Register) code of the mobile subscriber identification
number (MSIN).
This command should be executed prior to the CR ACMSUB commands.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if an authentication center
(AC) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ACHLRID : ACHLRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACHLRID HOME LOCATION REGISTER CODE
ACHLRID = a: 2 Digits
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...3 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACHLRID- 1-
DISP ACHLRID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHENTICATION CENTER HLR ID
This command displays the home location register identifications that
are created in the authentication center (AC) together with the number
of mobile subsribers that are created per home location register
identification in the AC.
Also the total number of mobile subscribers that are created in the AC
is displayed.
This command is only permitted if an authentication center
(AC) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACHLRID ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACHLRID- 1-
CAN ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Access Control Initiator Group
This task cancels an Access Control Initiator group, which defines a list of
remote initiators.
Prerequisite:
The Initiator group is no longer be referenced by any Access Control Rule.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ACINIGRP : Initiator group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter defines a unique name for the Initiator
group. This name is used by an Access Control Rule
to reference the Initiator group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACINIGRP- 1-
CR ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Access Control Initiator Group
This task creates an Access Control Initiator group which defines a list of
remote initiators. Each initiator is defined by its AET (Application
Entity Title), which represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS.
An Access Control Initiator group is referenced by one or more Access Control
Rules in order to grant or deny access rights to Q3 objects.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ACINIGRP : Initiator group= ,AET list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter defines a unique name for the Initiator
group. This name is used by an Access Control Rule
to reference the Initiator group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
AET list
This parameter defines a list of initiators for this
Access Control Initiator group. Each initiator is represented
by its AET (Application Entity Title).
Input format: Set (1..10) of AETs
One AET consists of 3 to 16 numbers separated
by blank (AET as "Object Identifier").
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACINIGRP- 1-
DISP ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Initiator Group
This task displays one or more Access Control Initiator groups, which define
a list of remote initiators. Each initiator is defined by its AET (Application
Entity Title), which represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS.
The following selections are possible:
- One single Access Control Initiator group:
--> Enter the Initiator group
- All Access Control Initiator groups:
--> Default: Enter no selection parameter
- Selection by filter criteria:
--> Enter Substring for Initiator group name (match at any position),
--> Enter AET entry for AET list (AET is in the list).
If both criteria are entered they must both be met.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACINIGRP : [Initiator group=] [,Substring=] [,AET entry=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter selects one specific Initiator group by its
name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if all Initiator groups
are to be selected, or Substring or AET entry is entered
as a filter parameter.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Substring
This parameter defines a string pattern for the Initiator
group name. The Initiator group name must contain this
pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if an Initiator group
is entered.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
AET entry
This parameter defines an AET which must be contained in the AET list.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if an Initiator group
is entered.
Input format: 3 to 16 numbers separated
by blank (AET as "Object Identifier")
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACINIGRP- 1-
MOD ACINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Initiator Group
This task modifies an Access Control Initiator group, which defines a list of
remote initiators. Each initiator is defined by its AET (Application
Entity Title), which represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS.
The AET list of the Initiator group can be replaced or AETs may be added to
or removed from the list.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ACINIGRP : Initiator group= ,AET list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter defines a unique name for the Initiator
group. This name is used by the Access Control Rule
to reference the Initiator group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters).
AET list
This parameter updates the list of initiators for this
Access Control Initiator group. Each initiator is represented
by its AET (Application Entity Titles).
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace AET list,
ADD : Add AETs in AET list to the old list,
REMOVE : Remove AETs in AET list from the old
list.
AET list: Set (1..10) of AETs
One AET consists of 3 to 16 numbers separated
by blank (AET as "Object Identifier")
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACINIGRP- 1-
CAN ACMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHENTICATION CENTRE MOBILE SUB
This command cancels an authentication centre mobile subscriber
(ACMSUB).
Prerequisites:
- The associated subscriber in the home location register (HLR)
should be deleted first using the command CAN MSUB.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ACMSUB : MSIN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ID NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACMSUB- 1-
CR ACMSUB
GSM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE AUTHENTICATION CENTRE MOBILE SUB
This command creates an authentication centre mobile subscriber
(ACMSUB),either for GSM, CDMA or UMTS.
Prerequisites:
- The associated authentication centre home location register
(ACHLRID) must be created using the command CR ACHLRID.
This is only valid for GSM and UMTS.
- At least two input output processors for the authentication
centre (IOP:AUC) should be activated via the command CONF IOP.
- The database can be expanded via the command MOD DBSIZE (group
ACDSD (GSM/UMTS) or ACDSD and ACDCD (CDMA)).
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR ACMSUB - GSM CREATE GSM SUBSCRIBER
2. CR ACMSUB - UMTS CREATE UMTS SUBSCRIBER
1. Input format
CREATE GSM SUBSCRIBER

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ACMSUB : MSIN= ,A4KI= [,A38V=] [,K4ID=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ID NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
A4KI ENCYPHERED AUTHENTICATION KEY
This parameter specifies the authentication key (Ki) of this
authentication centre mobile subscriber (ACMSUB), encrypted
with algorithm A4.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: UNIT 1 OF A4KI=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: UNIT 2 OF A4KI=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: UNIT 3 OF A4KI=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
d: UNIT 4 OF A4KI=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACMSUB- 1+
CR ACMSUB
GSM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A38V ALGORITHM A3 AND A8 VERSION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: VERSION OF ALGORITHM A3=
0...F, range of hexadecimal numbers
This parameter specifies the version of the A3 algorithm for
this authentication centre mobile subscriber (ACMSUB).
Default: 0
b: VERSION OF ALGORITHM A8=
0...F, range of hexadecimal numbers
This parameter specifies the version of the A8 algorithm for
this authentication centre mobile subscriber (ACMSUB).
Default: 0
K4ID IDENTIFICATION FOR KEY K4
This parameter specifies the identification for the key K4. This
parameter consists of 2 units.
If this parameter is not filled in, the default key K4 is used.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LOGICAL NAME FOR KEY K4=
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit contains the logical name of the key K4.
b: VERSION OF K4 ID=
1...2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit contains the version of the
identification of the key K4. This version is used to have
an extra check on the key value that is referenced by the
logical name of the key K4.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACMSUB- 2+
CR ACMSUB
UMTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE UMTS SUBSCRIBER

[ [
[ CR ACMSUB : MSIN= ,A4K= [,K4ID=] [,ALGVERS=] [,AMF=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SQN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ID NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
A4K ENCYPHERED AUTH KEY FOR UMTS
This parameter specifies the authentication key (K) of this
authentication centre mobile subscriber (ACMSUB) used with UMTS and
encrypted with algorithm A4.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: UNIT 1 OF A4K=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: UNIT 2 OF A4K=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: UNIT 3 OF A4K=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
d: UNIT 4 OF A4K=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
K4ID IDENTIFICATION FOR KEY K4
This parameter specifies the identification for the key K4. This
parameter consists of 2 units.
If this parameter is not filled in, the default key K4 is used.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LOGICAL NAME FOR KEY K4=
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit contains the logical name of the key K4.
b: VERSION OF K4 ID=
1...2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit contains the version of the
identification of the key K4. This version is used to have
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACMSUB- 3+
CR ACMSUB
UMTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
an extra check on the key value that is referenced by the
logical name of the key K4.
ALGVERS VERSION OF AUTH ALGORITHM
This parameter contains the version of the CDMA algorithm, as well as
the version of f1-f5/f1*/f5* algorithms for UMTS.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
AMF AUTH MANAGEMENT FIELD
The Authentication Management Field is an operator specific field.
If no value is entered, a default value will be filled in
(see DISP MPRDDAT).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
SQN SEQUENCE NUMBER
This parameter is used to support the regeneration process. It is
not entered for the creation of a subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: UNIT 1 OF SQN=
0...7FFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
b: UNIT 2 OF SQN=
0...1FFFFFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACMSUB- 4-
DISP ACMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHENTICATION CENTRE MOBILE SUB
This command displays the authentication centre mobile
subscribers (ACMSUB) which are created in the authentication
centre (AC) of the exchange.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACMSUB : MSIN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ID NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACMSUB- 1-
CAN ACN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Application Context Name
This task is used to cancel an existing Application Context Name (ACN)
object for the Number Portability Service Logic.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ACN : ACN ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACN ID
This parameter identifies the Application Context Name object
which is to be cancelled.
Input format : String ( 1 - 16 characters )
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACN- 1-
CR ACN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Application Context Name
This task is used to create an Application Context Name (ACN)
object for the Number Portability Service Logic.
Each object specifies the mapping of an Application Context Name
to a particular ACN Selector. Different objects can map different
Application Context Names to the same ACN Selector.
The value of the Application Context Name parameter must be unique,
i.e. it must not occur in more than one object.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ACN : ACN Id= ,ACN Selector= ,ACN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACN Id
This parameter identifies the Application Context Name object
which is to be created.
Input format : String ( 1 - 16 characters )
ACN Selector
This parameter specifies the Application Context Name Selector mapped
to the Application Context Name for this object.
It is used for the selection of the protocol version for the dialogue
with the SSP.
Input format : Integer ( 0 - 31 )
ACN
This parameter specifies the Application Context Name (ACN).
It represents a certain subset of functions contained in a protocol
of a particular application. For the received messages it will be
evaluated in order to determine the proper protocol to use.
The value of this parameter must be unique.
Input format : String ( 1 - 32 hexadecimal digits )
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACN- 1-
DISP ACN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Application Context Name
This task is used to display the parameters of existing Application
Context Name (ACN) objects for the Number Portability Service Logic.
The objects to be displayed can be selected either by entering
- the identifier ACN Id of a specific object or
- the values for one or more of the parameters ACN and ACN Selector
that specify the objects.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACN : [ACN ID=] [,ACN Selector=] [,ACN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACN ID
This parameter identifies the Application Context Name object
which is to be displayed.
This parameter is optional.
Input format : String ( 1 - 16 characters )
ACN Selector
This parameter specifies the Application Context Name Selector of the
Application Context Name objects to be displayed.
It is used for the selection of the protocol version for the dialogue
with the SSP.
This parameter is optional.
Input format : Integer ( 0 - 31 )
ACN
This parameter specifies the Application Context Name (ACN) of the
Application Context Name objects to be displayed.
It represents a certain subset of functions contained in a protocol
of a particular application. For the received messages it will be
evaluated in order to determine the proper protocol to use.
This parameter is optional.
Input format : String ( 1 - 32 hexadecimal digits )
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACN- 1-
MOD ACN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Application Context Name
This task is used to modify the parameters of an existing Application
Context Name (ACN) object for the Number Portability Service Logic.
At least one of the optional parameters ACN and ACN Selector must be
specified for modification.
The value of the Application Context Name parameter must be unique,
i.e. it must not occur in more than one object.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ACN : ACN ID= [,ACN Selector=] [,ACN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACN ID
This parameter identifies the Application Context Name object
which is to be modified.
Input format : String ( 1 - 16 characters )
ACN Selector
This parameter specifies the Application Context Name Selector which
is to be modified.
It is used for the selection of the protocol version for the dialogue
with the SSP.
This parameter is optional.
Input format : Integer ( 0 - 31 )
ACN
This parameter specifies the Application Context Name (ACN) which is
to be modified.
It represents a certain subset of functions contained in a protocol
of a particular application. For the received messages it will be
evaluated in order to determine the proper protocol to use.
The value of this parameter must be unique.
This parameter is optional.
Input format : String ( 1 - 32 hexadecimal digits )
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACN- 1-
CAN ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS
This command cancels a comfort alarm call limit for a specified
time period for a specified OSS common service group.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted for an operator service system (OSS).
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ACOLIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,TIME=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time period for which the comfort
alarm call limit will be canceled.
Notes:
- The time can be omitted, if all comfort alarm call limits
of the specified common service group are to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour.
b: MINUTE=
0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACOLIM- 1-
DISP ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS
This command displays the comfort alarm call limits for a
specified OSS common service group.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted for an operator service system (OSS).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACOLIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACOLIM- 1-
ENTR ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER LIMITS
This command enters a comfort alarm call limit for a specified
time period for a specified OSS common service group.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted for an operator service system (OSS).
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ACOLIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,TIME= ,MAX= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TIME STARTTIME OF BOOKING INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time at which the comfort
alarm call limit will become active.
Notes:
- Up to 24 time periods are allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour.
b: MINUTE=
0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute.
MAX MAX NO OF ORDERS PER INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the maximum number of alarm calls
allowed per 5 minute interval for the specified time period.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACOLIM- 1+
ENTR ACOLIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0...200, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACOLIM- 2-
CAN ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM CALL ORDER
This command cancels casual or/and daily alarm call orders.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ACORD : DN= ,TIME= ,TYPE= [,FIRST=] [,LAC=] [,CHRGINF=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,KIND= [,DAYWK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit decimal number
TIME TIME OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the time of the alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
The entered time will be rounded to a
previous 5 minute interval.
TYPE TYPE OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specifies the alarm call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CASUAL CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
One execution on the specified time.
DAILY DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on consecutive days on the
specified time.
SPECIFIC SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on specified days on the
specified time.
X ALL TYPES OF ALARM CALL ORDERS
Casual, daily and specific alarm calls
FIRST SKIP FIRST EXECUTION
This parameter determines whether only the first execution
of a daily alarm call order must be disabled or whether the
complete order must be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO REMOVE ALARM CALL ORDER
YES DISABLE FIRST EXECUTION
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACORD- 1+
CAN ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code. It is required, if there
is more than one local network in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CHRGINF CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter indicates whether the order is
canceled by an automatic operator.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MACHINE MACHINE CONTROLLED INPUT
The alarm call is canceled by an
automatic operator.
KIND KIND OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specified the kind of alarm call order.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AUTO AUTOMATIC ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the automatic alarm call orders will be
canceled.
SEMIAUTO SEMI-AUTOM. ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the semi-automatic alarm call orders will be
canceled.
COMFORT COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER
Only the comfort alarm call orders will be
canceled.
X ALL KINDS OF ALARM CALL ORDERS
All automatic, semi-automatic and comfort alarm
call orders will be canceled.
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm you want
to cancel.
DAYWK DAYS OF WEEK
This parameter indicates the days of the week that should be
deleted for the alarm call.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=SPECIFIC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACORD- 2-
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM CALL ORDER
This command books a casual, daily or specific alarm call.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,DAYNO= [[ [
[ ENTR ACORD : DN= ,TIME= ,TYPE= [,WEEKNO=[ [,LAC=] [
[ [[,DATE= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,SHIFT=] [,CHRGINF=] [,KIND=] [,NAMESUB=] [
[ [
[ [,NOTE=] [,EXTNOTE=] [,CSGID=] [,LANGID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,OPERATOR=] [,DAYWK=] [,EXECHOL=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TIME TIME OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the time of the alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the hour of the alarm call time.
b: MINUTE=
0,5,10,15,20,25,30,35,40,45,50,55, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the minute of the alarm call time.
TYPE TYPE OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the alarm call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CASUAL CASUAL ALARM CALL ORDER
One execution on the specified time.
Notes:
- if DATE is entered the execution will be
performed on that particular day otherwise the
execution will be within the next 24 hours.
DAILY DAILY ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on consecutive days on the
specified time.
Prerequisites:
- DAYNO
SPECIFIC SPECIFIC ALARM CALL ORDER
A number of executions on specified days on the
specified time.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACORD- 1+
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- WEEKNO
- DAYWK
This parameter specifies the type of alarm call.
DAYNO NUMBER OF DAYS
This parameter specifies the number of consecutive days during
which a daily alarm call order is to be executed.
When DAYNO = 0 is entered, the alarm call order will be
executed for an unlimited number of days.
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE=CASUAL
- =SPECIFIC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
WEEKNO NUMBER OF WEEKS
This parameter specifies the number of weeks during
which a specific alarm call order is to be executed.
When WEEKNO = 0 is entered, the alarm call order will be
executed for an unlimited number of weeks.
Incompatibilities:
- TYPE=CASUAL
- =DAILY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...52, range of decimal numbers
DATE DATE OF LAST EXECUTION
This parameter specifies the date on which the alarm call order
must be executed for the last time.
If it is entered, the following applies:
- for TYPE=CASUAL, date must be within one month
- for TYPE=DAILY, date must be within 99 days.
- for TYPE=SPECIFIC, date must be within one year.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code. It is required, if there
is more than one local network in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
SHIFT ALARM CALL SHIFTED
This parameter specifies whether the alarm call order should be
marked as shifted. Shifting is normally only valid for an alarm
call order entered by subscriber controlled input, but must be
available for regeneration of such orders.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACORD- 2+
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO ALARM CALL NOT SHIFTED
YES ALARM CALL SHIFTED
CHRGINF CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MACHINE MACHINE CONTROLLED INPUT
The alarm call is booked by an
automatic operator.
KIND KIND OF ALARM CALL ORDER
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AUTO AUTOMATIC ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by the system and
will be executed by the system.
SEMIAUTO SEMI-AUTOM. ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by means of the
ADMOSS operator and executed by the system. This
value is only relevant in case of regeneration of
a semi-automatic alarm call.
COMFORT COMFORT ALARM CALL ORDER
The alarm call order is booked by means of the
ADMOSS operator and executed by means of the
ADMOSS operator. This value is only relevant in
case of regeneration of a comfort alarm call.
This parameter specifies the kind of alarm call order
you want to book.
Default: AUTO
NAMESUB NAME OF THE SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the name of the subscriber
that booked an alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
It is only relevant for regeneration of comfort alarm calls.
Prerequisites:
- KIND=COMFORT
NOTE NOTE FROM THE SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the note the subscriber
wants to hear when executing the alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
It is only relevant for regeneration of comfort alarm calls.
Prerequisites:
- KIND=COMFORT
EXTNOTE EXTENDED NOTE FROM THE SUBSCR.
This parameter specifies the extended note the subscriber
wants to hear when executing the alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACORD- 3+
ENTR ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
It is only relevant for regeneration of comfort alarm calls.
Prerequisites:
- KIND=COMFORT
CSGID COMMON SERVICE GROUP ID
This parameter specifies the common service group ID
of the OSS operator that was responsible for the booking
of the alarm call order. This information is only relevant
for the regeneration of semi-automatic and comfort calls.
Prerequisites:
- KIND=COMFORT
- =SEMIAUTO
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
LANGID LANGUAGE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the language identification of
the subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
OPERATOR NAT/INAT OPERATOR INDICATION
This parameter indicates whether a national or international
operator should be addressed. It is only relevant for the
regeneration of comfort calls.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NAT NATIONAL OPERATOR
INAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATOR
DAYWK DAY OF WEEK
This parameter indicates the days of the week on which the
alarm call should be executed.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=SPECIFIC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
EXECHOL EXECUTION ON HOLIDAYS
This parameter indicates whether the alarm calls must be
executed on holidays or not.
Prerequisites:
- TYPE=DAILY
- =SPECIFIC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES EXECUTIONS ON HOLIDAYS
NO NO EXECUTION ON HOLIDAYS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ACORD- 4-
SEL ACORD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT ALARM CALL ORDER
This command displays all casual and daily alarm call orders
for one or all subscribers for the specified time.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL ACORD : DN= ,TIME= [,LAC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber line.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit decimal number
TIME TIME OF ALARM CALL
This parameter specifies the time of the alarm call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
The entered time will be rounded
to a previous 5 minute interval.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code. It is required, if there
is more than one local network in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL ACORD- 1-
CAN ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Access Control Rule
This task cancels an Access Control Rule, which defines the access rights
of an Access Control Initiator group on an Access Control Target group
for the Q3 operations defined by Target group.
Depending on the Rule type the cancel operation can remove existing
access rights (Rule type = Allow) or grant new access rights
(Rule type = Deny).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ACRULE : Rule= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter defines the name of the Access Control Rule.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACRULE- 1-
CR ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Access Control Rule
This task creates an Access Control Rule which defines the access
rights of an Access Control Initiator group list on an Access Control
Target group list for the Q3 operations defined by Target group.
An Allow Rule (Rule type = Allow) will allow execution of the
Q3 operation as long as no matching Deny Rule exists. A Deny Rule
will reject the Q3 operation (Rule type = Deny) or abort the
association (Rule type = Abort) in any case.
A Global Rule references no Target group. It defines the access
rights for the referenced Initiator group globally, i.e. it
includes all Q3 object classes and all Q3 operations.
A Common Rule references no Initiator group. It defines the common
access rights to the referenced Target group, i.e. it is valid for
all initiators (AETs).
Optional time dependencies may be defined by scheduling parameters.
The validity of the Access Control Rule can be restricted by:
- Duration: a Start time and Stop time) and/or
- Daily scheduling: time intervals for all days of the week or
- Weekly scheduling: time intervals per day of the week
The parameter Availability status indicates if a Rule with
scheduling parameters is active (On) or not (Off). This parameter
is only for output. " " indicates that no scheduling parameter was
entered.
Prerequisite:
- The referenced Access Control Initiator groups and Access Control
Target groups must have been created by CR ACINIGRP and
CR ACTARGRP.
- The supported Rule type may have been restricted by the parameter
Rule restriction in MOD ACCFG. In this case only Allow Rules or
only Deny Rules can be created.
Note:
- The parameters Daily intervals and Weekly intervals exclude one
another.
- The scheduling parameters must be selected when the Access Control
Rule is created. It is not possible to add scheduling parameters by
MOD ACRULE.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ACRULE : Rule= ,Rule type= ,Initiator group list= [
[ [
[ ,Target group list= [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter defines the name of the Access Control Rule.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Rule type
Defines the Rule type, i.e. the action performed
when the Rule matches.
The supported values can be restricted by MOD ACCFG.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACRULE- 1+
CR ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Allow Allow access (if no other deny rule exists)
Deny Deny access by "Access Denied"
Abort Deny access and abort the association
Initiator group list
This parameter references a list of Access Control
Initiator groups. The rule is applied to all Initiators
(AETs) of all Initiator Groups in this list.
Enter an empty Initiator group list to create a Common
Rule, which is valid for all initiators (AETs).
The referenced Initiator groups must have been created by
CR ACINIGRP.
Input format: Set (0..10) of Initiator groups
One Initiator group is identified by its
name (1-12 characters).
Target group list
This parameter references a list of Access Control
Target groups, each member defines an object class list
and a set of Q3 operations.
Enter an empty list (size=0) to create a Global Rule,
which defines global access rights (to all object classes
and for all Q3 operations) for the referenced Initiator groups.
The referenced Target groups in the list must have been created
by CR ACTARGRP.
Input format: Set (0..10) of Target groups
One Target group is identified by its
name (1-12 characters).
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the rule
becomes active.
If only the Start time is set the Stop time will be set
automatically to Continuous.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes or
10 minutes (EWSD classic).
Input format: standard date and time values
Default value: actual system time
will be set if this parameter is omitted but
Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the rule becomes
inactive.
If only the Stop time is set the Start time will be set
automatically to the actual system time of the switch.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes or
10 minutes (EWSD classic).
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
will be set if this parameter is omitted but
Start time is set.
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified within which the rule is active.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for weekly
scheduling must not be entered.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes or
10 minutes (EWSD classic).
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACRULE- 2+
CR ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week.
The rule will be inactive on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals set. At least
one day with one interval must be selected.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for daily
scheduling must not be entered.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes or
10 minutes (EWSD classic).
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use "00:00-00:00" to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled
from the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACRULE- 3-
DISP ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Rule
This task displays one or more Access Control Rules, which define
the access rights of Access Control Initiator groups on Access Control
Target groups for the Q3 operations.
The following selections are possible:
- One single Access Control Rule:
--> Enter Rule
- All Access Control Rules:
--> Default: Enter no selection parameter
- Selection by filter criteria:
--> Enter Substring for Rule name (match at any position),
--> Enter Rule type (equality)
--> Enter Initiator group (member in Initiator group list).
--> Enter Target group (member in Target group list).
More than one selection criteria are combined by logical AND.
Different output formats are supported for the display of a single Access
control Rule.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACRULE : [Rule=] ,Output format= [,Substring=] [,Rule type=] [
[ [
[ [,Initiator group=] [,Target group=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter selects one specific Access Control Rule.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if all Access Control
Rules are to be selected or one of the following filter
parameters is entered.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Output format
This parameter defines the Output format of the displayed Access
Control Rules. Format Compact must be used if parameter Rule
is not specified.
Input format:
Compact displays Access Control Rule parameters without
scheduling parameters.
Complete displays all Access Control Rule parameters.
Extended displays all Access Control Rule parameters plus
the referenced Initiator group and Target group.
Default: Compact
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the Rule name. The Rule
name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if Rule was entered.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Rule type
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACRULE- 1+
DISP ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter selects the Rule type of the Rules to display.
Input format:
Allow Select Allow Rules
Deny Select Deny Rules
Abort Select Deny Rules with Abort
Initiator group
This parameter selects the referenced Initiator group list of
the Rules to display.
If a value is entered, the Initiator group list must
contain the value;
if "" is entered, only common rules are selected.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for Initiator group name
"" (empty string) selects Common Rules (with no Initiator
group).
Target group
This parameter selects the referenced Target group list
of the Rules to display.
If a value is entered, the Target group list must contain
the entered value;
if "" is entered, only global rules are selected.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for Target group name
"" (empty string) selects Global Rules (with no Target
group).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACRULE- 2-
MOD ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Rule
This task modifies the parameters of an Access Control Rule,
which defines the access rights of Access Control
Initiator groups on an Access Control Target groups for Q3
operations.
Depending on the parameters entered, the Rule type, the
referenced Target group list or Initiator group list is changed.
Scheduling parameters can be modified as follows:
- Duration: replace Start time and/or Stop time.
- Daily scheduling: replace Daily intervals.
- Weekly Scheduling: replace time intervals of single days of the
week.
Note:
- It is not possible to change a Common Rule (empty
Initiator group list) to a non Common Rule or to change a non
Common Rule to a Common Rule. Thus it is only possible to modify
a Initiator group list, which is not empty.
- It is not possible to change a Global Rule (no Target group) to
a non Global Rule or to change a non Global Rule to a Global Rule.
Thus it is only possible to modify a Target group list, which
is not empty.
- It is not possible to change an Allow Rule to a Deny Rule or a
Deny Rule to an Allow Rule respectively. Thus it is only possible
to change the Rule Type from Deny to Abort or vice versa.
- Only scheduling parameters selected by CR ACRULE can be modified.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ACRULE : Rule= [,Rule type=] [,Initiator group list=] [
[ [
[ [,Target group list=] [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter defines the name of the Access Control Rule.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Rule type
This parameter replaces the Rule type, i.e. the action performed
when the Rule matches.
Note: It is not possible to change an Allow Rule to a Deny Rule, or
a Deny Rule to an Allow Rule.
Input format:
Deny Deny access by "Access Denied"
Abort Deny access and abort the association
Initiator group list
This parameter modifies the Access Control Initiator group list,
which defines the Initiator groups the Rule is applied to.
Note: It is not possible to set up an Initiator group list for
a Common Rule (empty Initiator group list) or to change a
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACRULE- 1+
MOD ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
non Common Rule to a Common Rule (remove all
Initiator groups.
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace Initiator group list,
ADD : Add Initiator groups to the old list,
REMOVE : Remove Initiator groups from the old
list.
Group list: Set (1..10) of Initiator groups
One Initiator group is identified by its
name (1-12 characters).
Target group list
This parameter modifies the Access Control Target group list;
each member defines an object classes list and a set ofQ3
operations.
Note: It is not possible to set up a Target group list for a
Global Rule (empty Target group list) or to change a
non Global Rule to a Global Rule (remove all Target Groups.
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace Target group list,
ADD : Add Target groups to the old list,
REMOVE : Remove Target groups from the old list.
Group list: Set (1..10) of Target groups
One Target group is identified by its
name (1-12 characters).
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the rule
becomes active.
The parameter can be replaced only if a Start time or
Stop time was entered when the Rule was created.
Input format: standard date and time values
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the rule
becomes inactive.
The parameter can be replaced only if a Start time or
Stop time was entered when the Rule was created.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces Daily intervals (up to 6) within which
the rule is active. The parameter can be entered only if Daily
intervals were entered when the Rule was created. The
time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces Weekly intervals within which the
rule is active.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are replaced.
The intervals of the days not selected will not be changed.
Enter 0 intervals to disable the whole day.
At least one day with one interval must be active in the
resultant Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is
rejected.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACRULE- 2+
MOD ACRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACRULE- 3-
DISP ACSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM CALL STATISTICS
This command displays the alarm call statistics.
Following data are displayed :
- number of refused orders; the number of input attempts, entered
between the last but one and the last activation of the interval,
which were refused
- number of accepted orders; the number of alarm call orders in the
interval at the moment of the last activation of the interval.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACSTAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACSTAT- 1-
CAN ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Access Control Target Group
This task cancels an Access Control Target group which defines a set
of Q3 object classes (OCs) and the Q3 operations on these object classes.
Prerequisite:
The Target group is not canceled if it is referenced by an Access Control Rule
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ACTARGRP : Target group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter defines the unique name of the Target group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ACTARGRP- 1-
CR ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Access Control Target Group
This task creates an Access Control Target group which defines a set
of Q3 object classes (OCs) and the Q3 operations on these object classes.
A Target group is referenced by one or more Access Control Rules in order
to grant or deny access rights for the Q3 operations on the OCs.
The set of OCs is defined by an Object class list and a Scope parameter.
The Scope parameter selects a subtree for the OCs in the Object class list.
Thus the Target Group contains the sum of all "scopes" of the OCs in the
Object class list.
The optional parameter Ref. target group allows an already defined set
of OCs to be reused. If defined, the Object class list and Scope are copied
from the Ref. target group.
Note:
- The scope of each OC in the Object class list must not be empty, i.e. it must
contain at least 1 OC.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ACTARGRP : Target group= [,Ref. target group=] [
[ [
[ [,Object class list=] [,Scope=] ,Operations list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter defines the name of the Target group.
This name is used by an Access Control Rule to reference
the Target group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Ref. target group
This parameter defines an optional reference Target group.
If entered, the parameters Object class list and Scope
may be omitted. Their values are then copied from the reference
Target group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Object class list
This parameter defines a list of Q3 object classes (OCs).
This parameter may be omitted only if a Ref. target group
is entered. In this case the Object class list is copied
from the Ref. target group.
See also Scope parameter
Input format: Set (1..10) of Q3 object classes
Select object classes from list
Scope
This parameter defines the Scope of all object classes in
Object class list according to the Q3 "Name Binding" relation.
This parameter may be omitted only if a Ref. target group
is entered. In this case the Scope is copied from the
Ref. target group.
Input format:
Standard:
Base object Base OC only
First level 1st level subordinate base OC
Whole subtree Base OC and all subordinate OCs
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACTARGRP- 1+
CR ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Level: n nth level subordinate base OC
Base to level: n Base OC and all OCs down to level n
Default Value: Whole subtree
Operations list
This parameter selects the Q3 Operations that are defined for this
Target group.
Input format:
Enabled: Q3 operation is included
Disabled: Q3 operation is not included
Select value for all Q3 operations:
M-GET, M-SET, M-CREATE, M-DELETE and M-ACTION.
Default value: All Q3 operations are selected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ACTARGRP- 2-
DISP ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Access Control Target Group
This task displays one or more Access Control Target groups, which define
a set of Q3 object classes (OCs) and the Q3 operations on these object classes.
The following selections are possible:
- One single Access Control Target group:
--> Enter the Target group
- All Access Control Target groups:
--> Default: Enter no selection parameter
- Selection by filter criteria
--> Enter Substring for Target group name (match at any position),
--> Enter Object class for Object class list (Object class is in the list)
If both criteria are entered they must both be met.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ACTARGRP : [Target group=] [,Substring=] [,Object class=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter selects one specific Target group by its name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if all Target groups
are to be selected, or if Substring or Object class is
entered as a filter parameter.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Substring
This parameter defines a name pattern for the Target group name.
The Target group name must contain this pattern at any one position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if Target group was entered.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Object class
This parameter defines an Object class which must be contained in
the Object class list.
Note:
The task will evaluate the Object class list but not
the Scope.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered if a Target group
was entered.
Input format: Select Object class from list
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ACTARGRP- 1-
MOD ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Access Control Target Group
This task modifies an Access Control Target group, which defines a list
of Q3 object classes (OCs) and the Q3 operations on these object classes.
The set of OCs defined by the Target group is affected by modification
of the Object class list and/or the Scope parameter.
Note:
- The modification of the Object class list or Scope parameter must not
produce empty scopes, i.e. the scope of each OC in the Object class list
must contain at least 1 OC.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ACTARGRP : Target group= [,Object class list=] [,Scope=] [
[ [
[ [,Operations list=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Target group
This parameter defines the name of the Target group.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Object class list
This parameter updates the Object class list of the Target group.
Input format:
Operation: REPLACE: Replace Object class list.
ADD : Add OCs in Object class list to the
old list.
REMOVE : Remove OCs in Object class list from the
old list.
Object class list: Set (1..10) of Q3 object classes
Select Object classes from list.
Scope
This parameter replaces the Scope for the object classes in
Object class list according to the Q3 "Name Binding" relation.
Input format:
Std:
Base object OC only
Whole subtree OC and all subordinate OCs
First level 1st level subordinate OC
Level: n nth level subordinate OC
Base to level: n OC itself and all OCs down to level
n
Operations list
This parameter replaces the Q3 operations that are defined for this
Target group.
Input format:
Enabled : Q3 operation is included.
Disabled: Q3 operation is not included.
Select Value for all Q3 operations:
M-GET, M-SET, M-CREATE, M-DELETE and M-ACTION.
Default value: All Q3 operations are selected.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACTARGRP- 1+
MOD ACTARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ACTARGRP- 2-
DISP AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This command displays the contents of archive files.
The messages can be specified either in their entirety or as
a list containing general information (table of contents) for the
selected message entries. The amount of messages can be restricted by
specifying the entry numbers.
Prerequisite:
- The file must exist and have the attributes of an archive file.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AENTRY : AFILE= [,AENTRY=] [,TOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter designates an archive file.
Notes:
- The first character may not be a period, the last character
may be neither a period nor an asterisk, and two periods may
not appear consecutively in the filename.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
AENTRY ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This parameter specifies the entry number assigned by the FCP to
incoming messages for an archive file. When displaying archive files, a
list of ranges (intervals) of these numbers can be specified as limits.
Notes:
- A maximum of two intervals can be linked with &.
- If 99999 is entered, the most recently entered message is displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...99999, range of decimal numbers
TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS
This parameter specifies whether only message headers or whole messages
are displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO TABLE OF CONTENTS
YES TABLE OF CONTENTS
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AENTRY- 1-
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT ARCHIVE FILE ENTRY
This command displays data from an archive file. These data are
restricted via parameter entry.
of records from an archive file to the output device. The search
direction can be set either to ascending or descending. As long as the
individual conditions from the combination of named possibilities do not
contradict themselves, they are linked to form an overall condition.
The following can be selected:
- messages with a certain job number
- messages which are determined by context and
format number or only by context
- alarm messages, limited to alarms with a certain priority
- messages which have been entered within a specified period of time
- If neither DATE nor TIME are specified, the search covers
the entire file.
- If only DATE is specified, the search covers all entries within
the specified DATE interval.
- If only TIME is specified, the current date is implied for DATE.
- If DATE and TIME are specified, the search covers all entries in
each of the specified TIME intervals on every day included in the
specified DATE intervals.
Prerequisite:
- The specified file must exist and must be created with the attributes
of an archive file.
Input format

[ [
[ SEL AENTRY : AFILE= [,TIME=] [,DATE=] [,JN=] [,MSG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ALPRIO=] [,DIR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter designates an archive file.
Note:
- The first character may not be a period, the last character
may be neither a period nor an asterisk, and two periods may
not appear consecutively in the filename.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time as one of the search
criteria for selecting records from an archive file.
Note:
- Seconds are ignored during conversion to an internal format.
- A maximum of two intervals can be linked with &.
- If selective output of archive entries is desired, where the
intended time interval contains a date change, it is not
possible to achieve the result with one time interval.
- For example,
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, TIME = 23-00-00&&01-00-00
will not work, since without a specified date, always the
current day is assumed. A date change is not considered.
The mentioned example will produce entries between
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL AENTRY- 1+
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1h and 23h of the same day.
The desired result can be achieved as follows, working
with the DATE parameter:
- if for ONE time interval the entries are to be selected,
2 commands are needed:
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, DATE = 98-10-05,
TIME = 23-00-00 && 23-59-59
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, DATE = 98-10-06,
TIME = 00-00-00 && 01-00-00
- if cyclically (i.e. on each day), entries are to be
displayed, the TIME interval must be split in two:
SEL AENTRY AFILE = MY.AFILE, DATE = 98-09-01&&98-12-31,
TIME = 23-00-00&&23-59-59 & 00-00-00&&01-00-00.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b-c
a: HOURS=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MINUTES=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date as one of the search criteria.
Note:
- A maximum of two intervals can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies job number as one of the search criteria.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL AENTRY- 2+
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSG MESSAGE
This parameter specifies a message.
Note:
- There are two kinds of messages: command response messages and
system messages.
- system context for system messages with the following
possible values:
SPT spontaneous message which is not an alarm
Alarm contexts:
SYOP SYSTEM OPERATOR CALL
SYPUPD SYSTEM PANEL UPDATE
SYPCHNG SYSTEM PANEL CHANGE
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE ALARM
CALLID CALL IDENTIFICATION
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
CU CENTRAL UNIT ALARM
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR ALARM
MB MESSAGE BUFFER ALARM
SN SWITCHING NETWORK ALARM
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ALARM
LNMAIN LINE MAINTENANCE ALARM
LNLNCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK ALARM
TRMAIN TRUNK MAINTENANCE ALARM
TGBL TRUNKGROUP BLOCKED
TGAL TRUNKGROUP ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
SYP SYSTEM PANEL ALARM
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
NLMPAL NO LAMP ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
SERV SERVICE CIRCUITS
TAXUP CCS7 TAXATION USER PART
TIMESYNC EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
ATMF ATM FABRIC
- project-specific some of the values may be unused.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Corresponds to the command code in a
command response message or the
system context in a system message.
The following characters are not permitted:
.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: FORMAT=
0...99999, range of decimal numbers
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the priority of an alarm output message
as a search criteria.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL AENTRY- 3+
SEL AENTRY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the read direction when archive file records
are searched.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FORW FORWARD SEARCH DIRECTION
BACKW BACKWARD SEARCH DIRECTION
Default: FORW
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL AENTRY- 4-
CAN AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ARCHIVE FILE
This command cancels an archive file.
Prerequisite:
- the archive file must exist
- the archive file may not be assigned to any device group
- If output suppression is deactivated, the AFILE may not
be the output device.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN AFILE : AFILE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies an archive file.
Note:
- The first character may not be a period, the last character
may be neither a period nor an asterisk, and two periods may
not appear consecutively in the file name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN AFILE- 1-
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ARCHIVE FILE
This command creates an archive file to act as a functional device,
its static attributes (size and type) and the variable attributes
(threshold limits and alarm) which can be set by administration .
Notes:
A threshold triple consists of THRU, THRD and THRF.
If the occupancy level of the archive file exceeds the threshold value
set in THRU,
- a system panel alarm is output if the corresponding THRF value
is set to ALARM
- an INFO system message is sent if the corresponding THRF value
is set to NOALARM.
These alarm indications are not canceled until the occupancy level of the
archive file is less than the value set in THRD.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR AFILE : AFILE= ,SIZE= ,TYPE= [,THRU=] [,THRD=] [,THRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter designates an archive file.
Note:
- The first character may not be a period, the last character
may be neither a period nor an asterisk, and two periods may
not appear consecutively in the filename.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SIZE SIZE OF AN ARCHIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the size of an archive file in 2 KB blocks.
Notes:
- The theoretical upper limit is dependent on the hardware.
- The command is rejected if the specified memory requirement is
too big or too small.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
35...8388607, range of decimal numbers
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies whether an archive file is to be created
as a single file or a double file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINGLE SINGLE
DOUBLE DOUBLE
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level of an archive file
at which the alarm condition should commence.
Notes:
- The occupancy level is expressed as a percentage.
- An upper threshold value must be higher than the associated
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR AFILE- 1+
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
lower threshold value, i.e. THRU=0, THRD>0 is not allowed.
- If no THRU value has been set, the corresponding THRF should
not be set to ALARM.
- The THRU values entered must be different.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT LOW=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
0...100, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which the alarm
condition (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level of
an archive file), is to be reset.
Note:
- The occupancy level is expressed as a percentage.
- An upper threshold value must not be less than the associated
lower threshold value, i.e. THRU=0, THRD>0 is not allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT LOW=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
0...100, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
THRF THRESHOLD FEATURES
This parameter specifies whether the alarm which was activated by
the excessive occupancy level of an archive file is to be displayed
on the system panel.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT LOW
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGES
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR AFILE- 2+
CR AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGE
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGE
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR AFILE- 3-
DISP AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES
This command displays a table of archive files and their respective
attributes. The information can be displayed for individual archive
files or for all archive files.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AFILE : AFILE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies an archive file. It can be input
in partially qualified form. Up to five parameter values can
be linked with &.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AFILE- 1-
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE ATTRIBUTES
This command modifies the threshold values and threshold value
characteristics of an archive file.
Threshold values THRU and THRD, together with the threshold value
characteristic THRF, make up a threshold value triple
(THRU,THRD,THRF).
A maximum of three threshold value triples can be assigned to an archive
file. However, they must have different THRU components.
While THRU, THRD and THRF must be entered in the input form of
a-b-c, the user can use dummy value 0 for THRU, THRD and dummy value
NOALARM for THRF, if necessary.
The following operations are possible:
- Adding up to three threshold value triples:
The components THRU,THRD and THRF must be entered like a-b-c/
- Switching between up to three threshold value triples:
Independent of modification the old THRU parameter a-b-c must be
specified for identification.
The components THRU THRD and THRF will be changed by entering
d-e-f/a-b-c with d-e-f as new and a-b-c as old input parameters.
- Canceling up to three threshold value triples:
The threshold value triple (THRU,THRD,THRF), that will be
canceled, must be changed to the triple (0,0,NOALARM).
Prerequisite:
- The available threshold value triples are known and can be displayed
using command DISP AFILE.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD AFILE : AFILE= [,THRU=] [,THRD=] [,THRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter designates an archive file.
Notes:
- The first character may not be a period, the last character
may be neither a period nor an asterisk, and two periods may
not appear consecutively in the file name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which an alarm
message (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level
of an archive file), is to be initiated.
Notes:
- The occupancy level is expressed as a percentage.
- An upper threshold value must be higher than the associated
lower threshold value, i.e. THRU=0, THRD>0 is not allowed.
- If no THRU value has been set, the corresponding THRF should
not be set to ALARM.
- The THRU values entered must be different.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AFILE- 1+
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT LOW=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
0...100, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE
This parameter specifies the occupancy level at which the alarm
message (which was activated due to an exceeded occupancy level
of an archive file), is to be reset.
Notes:
- The occupancy level is expressed as a percentage.
- The command is rejected if an upper threshold value is below the
associated lower threshold value THRU=0, THRD>0.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT LOW=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
c: THRESHOLD DOWNGRADE LIMIT HIGH=
0...100, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
THRF THRESHOLD FEATURES
This parameter specifies whether the alarm which was activated by
the excessive occupancy level of an archive file is to be displayed
on the system panel.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT LOW
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGE
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AFILE- 2+
MOD AFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT MEDIUM
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGE
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE FOR UPGRADE LIMIT HIGH
ALARM SYSTEM PANEL ALARM MESSAGE
NOALARM OUTPUT MESSAGE ONLY ON PRINTER
Default: NOALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AFILE- 3-
DISP ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM STATUS
This command displays the current alarm status of objects.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALARM : [OBJECT=] [,ALSTAT=] [,ALPRIO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJECT ALARM OBJECT
This parameter specifies the alarm object.
Note:
- If one parameter is omitted, all its values will be taken
into consideration.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
SN SWITCHING NETWORK
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK
CU CENTRAL UNITS
LNLCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
TGAL TRUNK GROUP ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE
SYOP CALL FOR SYSTEM OPERATOR
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
ATMF ATM FABRIC
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
This parameter describes the fault clearance status of an
alarm condition. The processing code is a part of the alarm
file entry.
Note:
- If one parameter is omitted, all its values will be taken
into consideration.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NP NOT PROCESSED
D DEFERRED
IP IN PROCESS
UR UNDER REPAIR
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the alarm priority.
Note:
- If one parameter is omitted, all its values will be taken
into consideration.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALARM- 1+
DISP ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALARM- 2-
SRCH ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEARCH ALARM MESSAGE
This command displays the alarm message. The information output is
organized according to the time at which the alarm occurred. Current
messages are displayed first.
Input format

[ [
[ SRCH ALARM : <OBJECT= ,ALSTAT= ,ALPRIO= ,MSGNO=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJECT ALARM OBJECT
This parameter specifies the alarm object.
Note:
- If one parameter is omitted, all its values will be taken
into consideration.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
SN SWITCHING NETWORK
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK
CU CENTRAL UNITS
LNLCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
TGAL TRUNK GROUP ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE
SYOP CALL FOR SYSTEM OPERATOR
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
ATMF ATM FABRIC
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
This parameter describes the fault clearance status of an
alarm condition. The processing code is a part of the alarm
file entry.
Note:
- If one parameter is omitted, all its values will be taken
into consideration.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NC NOT CLEARED
All alarms with NP, D, IP and UR
are displayed.
NP NOT PROCESSED
D DEFERRED
IP IN PROCESS
UR UNDER REPAIR
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the target priority for alarm signaling.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SRCH ALARM- 1+
SRCH ALARM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
MSGNO MESSAGE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a 5-digit message number, which
corresponds to the entry number used in the alarm file
AM.ALARM.
Note:
- There is no relation to the entry numbers of the history
file HF.ARCHIVE !
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...99999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SRCH ALARM- 2-
DISP ALBALMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Alarm Balance Monitor
This task displays an ]Alarm Balance Monitor]. According to the
input parameters the followong output is supported:
- No ]Alarm balance monitor] is specified:
A list of all ]Alarm Balance Monitors] created in the system is
displayed including all their parameters.
- An ]Alarm balance monitor] is specified:
The specified ]Alarm Balance Monitor] is displayed including
all its parameters.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALBALMON : [Alarm balance monitor=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm balance monitor
This parameter specifies an ]Alarm Balance Monitor]
created in the system. The following input values are valid:
1) No input value is given, then a list of all ]Alarm Balance Monitors]
created in the system is displayed including all their parameters.
2) A string is given with a length of 1...8 characters of the character
set specifying the ]Alarm balance monitor] created
in the system. Then all parameters of the specified ]Alarm Balance
Monitor]
are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALBALMON- 1-
ACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY
This command cancels the present entries of the alarm display suppression
and sets the default values.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT ALDISP : WDCAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the alarm display
suppression.
The following values are possible:
- WO for workday.
- EH for half weekend day.
This means a portion of a day with the half weekend
day category ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- EF for full weekend day.
This means the full day with 24 hours and with the full
weekend day category.
- HH for half holiday international. It means a day
with the half holiday category, which contains only a
portion of a day ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- HO for full holiday international. It means a day
with the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
- HN for full holiday national. It means a day with
the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
International holidays are applicable for all countries.
National holidays are applicable only for one country.
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HN > HO > HH > EF > EH > WO
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT ALDISP- 1-
DACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE ALARM DISPLAY
This command sets the parameters for the alarm display suppression.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for
the specified weekday category.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT ALDISP : ALPRIO= ,WDCAT= ,BEGTIM= ,ENDTIM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the priorities for the alarm display
suppression.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MINOR MINOR ALARM
display of minor alarms are suppressed
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
display of minor and major alarms are suppressed
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday category for the alarm display
suppression.
The following values are possible:
- WO for workday.
- EH for half weekend day.
This means a portion of a day with the half weekend
day category ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- EF for full weekend day.
This means the full day with 24 hours and with the full
weekend day category.
- HH for half holiday international. It means a day
with the half holiday category, which contains only a
portion of a day ( any value between 1 to 24 hours ).
- HO for full holiday international. It means a day
with the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
- HN for full holiday national. It means a day with
the full holiday category, which has 24 hours.
International holidays are applicable for all countries.
National holidays are applicable only for one country.
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HN > HO > HH > EF > EH > WO
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT ALDISP- 1+
DACT ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
BEGTIM BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the start time of the alarm display
suppression.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...24, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIM END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the alarm display
suppression.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...24, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT ALDISP- 2-
DISP ALDISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY
This command lists the parameters of alarm display suppression.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALDISP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALDISP- 1-
DISP ALI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Alarm Interface
This task displays the ]ALI].
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALI ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALI- 1-
MOD ALI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Alarm Interface
This task changes the ]Alarm profile MP] of the ]ALI].
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ALI : Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ALI- 1-
CAN ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALIAS NAME
This command has two functions:
- Cancel an alias name from the alias name table.
- Start the garbage treatment.
Which function has to be performed is indicated by the parameter given.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ALIAS= [ [
[ CAN ALIAS : GARBAGE= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALIAS ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter indicates that an alias name of a file shall be
cancelled.
The value of the parameter specifies the alias name to be cancelled.
After the execution of this command this file can just be accessed with
the file name.
Prerequisites:
- The alias name must exist.
- The file must not be in use by using the alias name.
Notes:
- The alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GARBAGE GARBAGE TREATMENT
This parameter indicates that the user wants to start the garbage
treatment.
This command starts the garbage treatment to check the shadow catalog
whether there are existing alias names to files, that are not existing
anymore.
As long as the garbage treatment is running no other command to modify
the alias name table will be accepted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y START GARBAGE TREATMENT
YES START GARBAGE TREATMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ALIAS- 1-
DISP ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALIAS FILE NAMES
This command displays a list of all existing alias names or a specified
subset of them.
The list contains the alias names and the file names which they are
related to.
Notes:
- If no parameter is given all alias names are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[ALIAS=[[ [
[ DISP ALIAS : [FILE= [ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALIAS ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the alias name(s) that should be displayed.
The output list will be displayed sorted by the alias names.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not given or supplied with X, all existing alias
names with their relation to the file names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a partly qualified alias name
(indicated by a . as the last character) all matching alias names
with their relation to the file names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a fully qualified alias name then
the relation of this name to the original file name will be
displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name(s) with related alias names,
that should be displayed.
The output list will be displayed sorted by the file names.
Notes:
- If the parameter is supplied with X, all file names with their
related alias names are displayed (so far there are related alias
names).
- If the parameter is supplied with a partly qualified file name
(indicated by a . as the last character) all matching file names
with their related alias names are displayed.
- If the parameter is supplied with a fully qualified file name then
the related alias name to the original file name will be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALIAS- 1-
ENTR ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALIAS FILE NAME
This command creates an alias name to an existing disk file.
Afterwards this file can be accessed either with the original file name or the
alias name.
Prerequisites:
- The file must exist.
- The file must not be a generation file.
- The alias name must not exist (neither as a file name nor as an alias name).
- The file must not yet have an alias name.
- The alias name must not be file name protected.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR ALIAS : FILE= ,ALIAS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an existing file.
Notes:
- The file name has to be entered fully qualified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ALIAS ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the alias name for the file.
Notes:
- The alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ALIAS- 1-
MOD ALIAS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ALIAS NAME
This command renames the alias name of disk files.
After the execution of this command the old alias name is no longer valid.
The file can only be accessed by using the original file name or the new
alias name.
Prerequisites:
- The old alias name must exist.
- The new alias name must not exist (neither as a file name nor as an alias
name).
- The new alias name must not be file name protected.
- The file must not be in use by using the old alias name.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ALIAS : ALIAS= ,NEWALIAS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALIAS OLD ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the old alias name that shall be renamed.
Notes:
- The old alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NEWALIAS NEW ALIAS FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the new alias name.
Notes:
- The new alias name has to be entered fully qualified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ALIAS- 1-
CAN ALINIF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Alarm Input Interface
This task cancels an ]Alarm Input Interface] serving the
administration of system external alarms.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ALINIF : Alarm input interface= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm input interface
This parameter specifies the ]Alarm Input Interface] that shall
be canceled. Valid input parameters are 1...8 characters from
the character set.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ALINIF- 1-
CR ALINIF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Alarm Input Interface
This task creates an ]Alarm Input Interface]. This interface is
used to administer the system external alarms. The system external alarms
are connected to the system by an ]Alarm line].
Input format

[ [
[ CR ALINIF : Alarm input interface= ,Alarm line= ,Alarm level= [
[ [
[ ,Alarm profile MP= ,Probable cause= ,Device type= [
[ [
[ [,Profibus address=] [,Additional text=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm input interface
This parameter specifies the ]Alarm Input Interface].
A valid input value is a string with a length of 1...8 characters from
the
character set.
Alarm line
This parameter specifies the ]Alarm line], the
]Alarm Input Interface] is assigned to.
Valid input values are: 0...31, range of decimal numbers.
Alarm level
This parameter specifies the level activating the external alarm line.
Valid input values are: High, Low. The value Low behaves reverse to
High.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP
on the MP to a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause
values. For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable causeindicates that the
alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is major,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ALINIF- 1+
CR ALINIF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
Probable cause
This parameter defines the ]Probable cause]. It is
specifying the error reason within an emitted alarm in case a failure
occurs at the ]Alarm Input Interface]. Valid input values
for the ]Probable cause] are:
]Air compressor failure],
]Air conditioning failure],
]Air dryer failure],
]Battery discharging],
]Battery failure],
]Commercial power failure],
]Cooling fan failure],
]Enclosure door open],
]Engine failure],
]Excessive vibration],
]Explosive gas],
]Fire detected],
]Fire detector failure],
]Flood detected],
]Fuse failure],
]Generator failure],
]Heating, ventilation or cooling system problem],
]High humidity],
]High temperature],
]High wind],
]Humidity unacceptable],
]Ice build up],
]Indeterminate],
]Intrusion detection],
]Leak detected],
]Low battery threshold],
]Low cable pressure],
]Low fuel],
]Low humidity],
]Low temperature],
]Low water],
]Material supply exhausted],
]Power problem],
]Pressure unacceptable],
]Pump failure],
]Rectifier failure],
]Rectifier high voltage],
]Rectifier low F Voltage],
]Smoke detected],
]Temperature unacceptable],
]Toxic gas],
]Toxic leak detected],
]Ventilations system failure]
Device type
The parameter Device type represents
either an
- Alarm Line Interface (ALI) or
- Profibus Device (PBUSDEV),
where the alarm line is connected to.
For each Device type the Alarm line
must be unambiguous.
Valid input values are: ALI, PBUSDEV.
Profibus address
This parameter corresponds to the bus address adjusted at the
]Profibus Device]. The input of this parameter is
mandatory for device type ]Profibus Device]. Valid
input values are: 16...19, range of decimal numbers.
Additional text
This parameter specifies the error situation of the external alarm
assigned at the ]external alarm line]. Valid input value
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ALINIF- 2+
CR ALINIF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is a text string of 0...80 characters from the character set. If no alarm
text is specified a text string containing a blank value is used as
default.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ALINIF- 3-
DISP ALINIF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Alarm Input Interface
This task displays an ]Alarm Input Interface]. Dependent on the
input parameters the following output is supported:
- No ]Alarm input interface] is specified:
A list of all ]Alarm Input Interfaces] created in the system is
displayed without any parameters.
- An ]Alarm input interface] is specified:
The specified ]Alarm Input Interface] is displayed including
all its parameters.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALINIF : [Alarm input interface=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm input interface
This parameter specifies the ]Alarm Input Interface].
The following input values are valid:
1) No input value is given, then a list of all ]Alarm Input Interfaces]
existing in the system is displayed without any parameters.
2) 1...8 characters from the character set are given as input value,
specifying an ]Alarm input interface] created in the
system. Then all parameters of the specified ]Alarm Input Interface]
are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALINIF- 1-
MOD ALINIF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Alarm Input Interface
This task modifies the parameter ]Alarm profile MP]
of an ]Alarm Input Interface].
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ALINIF : Alarm input interface= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm input interface
This parameter specifies the ]Alarm Input Interface]. A valid
input value is a string with a length of 1...8 characters from the
character set specifying an ]Alarm input interface]
created in the system.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP
on the MP to a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause
values. For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable causeindicates that the
alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is major,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ALINIF- 1-
DISP ALOUTIF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Alarm Output Interface
This task displays all parameters of ]Alarm Output Interface].
Dependent on the input parameters the following output is supported:
- No ]Alarm output interface] is specified:
A list of all ]Alarm Output Interfaces] created in the system
is displayed including all their parameters.
- An ]Alarm output interface] is specified:
The ]Alarm Output Interface] is displayed including all its
parameters.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALOUTIF : [Alarm output interface=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm output interface
This parameter specifies an ]Alarm Output Interface].
The following input values are valid:
1) No input value is given, then a list of all ]Alarm Output Interfaces]
created in the system is displayed including all their parameters.
2) A string is given with a length of 1...8 characters of the character
set specifying an ]Alarm output interface] created in
the system. Then all parameters of the spaecified ]Alarm Output
Interface]
are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALOUTIF- 1-
CAN ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM PRIORITY
This command cancels the individual priorities of a specified alarm unit.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. CAN ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES

[ [
[ CAN ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units with alarm unit individual
priorities.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DLUC DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
Here the number of the affected DLU with individual alarm priorities
is specified in the three high-order positions (value range 1 to 255 ).
The lowest-order position must always be 0.
For a DLU Controller (DLUC) of a DLUG the alarm priority cannot be
administered by this command. Please use the commands:
MOD DLU or
MOD DLUEQ or
MOD DLUMOD
to administer the alarm profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ALPRIO- 1+
CAN ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES

[ [
[ CAN ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units with alarm unit individual
priorities.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCSLS COMMON CHANNEL SIGN. LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the affected linkset name with individual
alarm priority.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ALPRIO- 2-
DISP ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM PRIORITY
This command displays the priorities for alarm signaling which are
currently set in the system. All alarm priorities can be displayed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. DISP ALPRIO - GENERAL GENERAL PRIORITIES
3. DISP ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES

[ [
[ DISP ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DLUC DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
Here the number of the affected DLU with individual alarm priorities
is specified in the three high-order positions (value range 1 to 255 ).
The lowest-order position must always be 0.
For a DLU Controller (DLUC) of a DLUG the alarm priority cannot be
administered by this command. Please use the commands:
DISP DLU or
DISP DLUEQ or
DISP DLUMOD
to administer the alarm profile.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 1+
DISP ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GENERAL PRIORITIES

[ [
[ DISP ALPRIO : [ALUNIT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACTGENDE DOUBLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ACTGENSE SINGLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ADMFIL1 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 1
ADMFIL2 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 2
ADMFIL3 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 3
AIC AIR CIRCULATOR
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
ANNAL REC. ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP ALARM
BAP BASE PROCESSOR
BCMY BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
CALLID1 CALL IDENTIFICATION 1
CALLID2 CALL IDENTIFICATION 2
CALLID3 CALL IDENTIFICATION 3
CALLID4 CALL IDENTIFICATION 4
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
CCG CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
CCNCCD CCNC CODE OR DATA
CCNCTD CCNC TRUNK DATA
CCNP COMMON CHANNEL NETW. PROCESSOR
CCNPLOLD CCNP LOCAL OVERLOAD
CCNPPAF PARTIAL FAILURE CCNP
CCSCOLS CCS COMMBINED LINK SET
CCSL COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING LINK
CCSLNAC CCS LINK NAC
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
CCSLSNAC CCS LINK SET NAC
CCSLSNEX CCS LINK SET NAC EXCEPTION
CCSTGAL CCS TRUNK GROUP ALARM
CDBUS CD-BUS FAILURE
CITERA COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
CMY COMMON MEMORY
CPACC UNAUTHORIZED CP-ACCESS
CR CODE RECEIVER
CSC CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
CYCFIL1 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 1
CYCFIL2 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 2
CYCFIL3 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 3
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER
DFILFAIL DOUBLE FILE FAILURE
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
DLUC DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL
ECSL EMERGENCY CALL STATION LINE
ECSM EMERGENCY CALL STATION MODULE
FISPARES NO SPARE SECT. FOR DOUBLE FILE
ICHAN INTERNET CHANNEL
IOC INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL
IOPAUC IOP AUTHENTICATION CENTER
IOPLAU IOP LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPSCDV IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. V
IOPSCDX IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. X
IOPTA IOP TIME/ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
ISTART CP INITIAL START RECOVERY
ISTART2G CP ISTART + FALLBACK OLD. GEN.
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 2+
DISP ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
LTGCEN LTG CENTRAL FAILURE
LTGLOLD LTG LOCAL OVERLOAD
LTGPAF LTG PARTIAL FAILURE
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter is only valid for DE3.
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT LTG
This parameter is only valid for DE4 and DE5.
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT SGC
This parameter is only valid for DE4 and DE5.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
MTACC METALLIC TEST ACCESS ERROR
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
MUXMFAIL MULTIPLEXER FAILURE
NODEISO LOCAL NODE ISOLATION
NSTART CP NEW START RECOVERY
OMT OPERATION/MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
PCHANNUC P-CHANNEL NUC FAILURE
PCHANS P-CHANNEL SWITCHED FAILURE
PCMMAL PCM MAINTENANCE ALARM
PCMSAL PCM SERVICE ALARM
RAE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPM.
RCI RADIO CLOCK INTERFACE
RCULINK REMOTE CONTROL UNIT LINK
RGMG RING-/METER GENERATOR FOR DLU
SAVGENE SAVE GENERATION ERROR
SCGROUP SOFTWARE CARRIER GROUP ALARM
SIDAT SYSTEM INDEPEND. DATA TRANSFER
SILT SIGNALING DATA LINK TERMINAL
SILTC SILT CONTROL
SLM SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE
SN SWITCHING NETWORK
This parameter is only valid for DE3 and DE4.
SSG SPACE STAGE GROUP
This parameter is only valid for DE5.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
SYPC SYSTEM PANEL CONTROL
SYSOP SYSTEM OPERATOR
SYSOVLD SYSTEM OVERLOAD
TGAL TRUNK GROUP ALARM
TIMINCOR TIME INCORRECT
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE
TRUNKHD TRUNK HELD
TSG TIME STAGE GROUP
This parameter is only valid for DE5.
UNSPARES NO SPARE SECT. F. UNUSED SPACE
VOCAFAIL VOLUME/CATALOG FAILURE
X25LINK BX.25 LINK
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 3+
DISP ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES

[ [
[ DISP ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the affected linkset name with individual
alarm priority.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALPRIO- 4-
ENTR ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM PRIORITY
This command modifies the priorities for alarm signaling which are
currently set in the system.
- Units which are in MBL or CBL are displayed on the system panel
by a HARDWARE UNITS lamp.
This display cannot be changed with this command.
Nor can the displays for the advisory messages CAT1, CAT2, TGBL,
SIGLBL and ALDSUP be changed with this command.
- Procedures to determine an operational restriction are implemented
for some alarm units. If one of these procedures finds an operational
restriction for the unit with alarm condition, the alarm priority is
raised to CRITICAL. This alarm priority cannot be changed with this
command.
- DLU failures are displayed on the system panel with the double LED
for the line/trunk group. The lamp for remote equipment (under the
the line/trunk group lamp) also lights up. The lamp display for
remote equipment cannot be changed with this command.
- System panel failures trigger an alarm on the double LED. The alarm
priority for this lamp (at present CRITICAL) is determined in the
system panel firmware. However, the priority for this alarm can be
changed for other alarm units (system status displays, output messages,
critical indicator channel to SCC) with this command.
Prerequisite:
- The priorities for external exchange alarms are part of the SYPC firm-
ware.
- If the system panel has only one LED for a particular alarm, ALPRIO
cannot be set to CRITICAL because this requires 2 LEDs.
- The use of the command only makes sense, if there is no active alarm
of the specified ALUNIT, because different priorities of active alarm
and new alarm with modified alarm priority lead to different alarm
signaling.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR ALPRIO - DLU DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
2. ENTR ALPRIO - GENERAL GENERAL PRIORITIES
3. ENTR ALPRIO - LSNAM LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES
1. Input format
DLU INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES

[ [
[ ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,DLU= ,ALPRIO= [,SDG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DLUC DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
Here the number of the affected DLU with individual alarm priorities
is specified in the three high-order positions (value range 1 to 255 ).
The lowest-order position must always be 0.
For a DLU Controller (DLUC) of a DLUG the alarm priority cannot be
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 1+
ENTR ALPRIO
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
administered by this command. Please use the commands:
CR DLU/MOD DLU or
CR DLUEQ/MOD DLUEQ or
CR DLUMOD/MOD DLUMOD
to administer the alarm profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the target priority for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
SDG SERVICE DEGRADATION
This parameter defines the check of service degradation condition.
Default: no affect on database
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
YES SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 2+
ENTR ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GENERAL PRIORITIES
Prerequisite:
The command is rejected if no service degradation condition is defined
for the specified ALUNIT.

[ [
[ ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,ALPRIO= [,SDG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACTGENDE DOUBLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ACTGENSE SINGLE ERROR ACTUAL GENERATION
ADMFIL1 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 1
ADMFIL2 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 2
ADMFIL3 ADMINISTRATION FILE ALARM 3
AIC AIR CIRCULATOR
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
ANNAL REC. ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP ALARM
BAP BASE PROCESSOR
BCMY BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
CALLID1 CALL IDENTIFICATION 1
CALLID2 CALL IDENTIFICATION 2
CALLID3 CALL IDENTIFICATION 3
CALLID4 CALL IDENTIFICATION 4
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
CCG CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
CCNCCD CCNC CODE OR DATA
CCNCTD CCNC TRUNK DATA
CCNP COMMON CHANNEL NETW. PROCESSOR
CCNPLOLD CCNP LOCAL OVERLOAD
CCNPPAF PARTIAL FAILURE CCNP
CCSCOLS CCS COMMBINED LINK SET
CCSL COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING LINK
CCSLNAC CCS LINK NAC
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
CCSLSNAC CCS LINK SET NAC
CCSLSNEX CCS LINK SET NAC EXCEPTION
CCSTGAL CCS TRUNK GROUP ALARM
CDBUS CD-BUS FAILURE
CITERA COMMAND INTERFACE FOR TERADYNE
CMY COMMON MEMORY
CPACC UNAUTHORIZED CP-ACCESS
CR CODE RECEIVER
CSC CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
CYCFIL1 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 1
CYCFIL2 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 2
CYCFIL3 CYCLIC FILE ALARM 3
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER
DFILFAIL DOUBLE FILE FAILURE
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
DLUC DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL
ECSL EMERGENCY CALL STATION LINE
ECSM EMERGENCY CALL STATION MODULE
FISPARES NO SPARE SECT. FOR DOUBLE FILE
ICHAN INTERNET CHANNEL
IOC INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL
IOPAUC IOP AUTHENTICATION CENTER
IOPLAU IOP LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPSCDV IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. V
IOPSCDX IOP SERIAL DATA COMMUN. DEV. X
IOPTA IOP TIME/ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 3+
ENTR ALPRIO
GENERAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ISTART CP INITIAL START RECOVERY
ISTART2G CP ISTART + FALLBACK OLD. GEN.
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
LTGCEN LTG CENTRAL FAILURE
LTGLOLD LTG LOCAL OVERLOAD
LTGPAF LTG PARTIAL FAILURE
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter is only valid for DE3.
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT LTG
This parameter is only valid for DE4 and DE5.
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT SGC
This parameter is only valid for DE4 and DE5.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
MTACC METALLIC TEST ACCESS ERROR
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
MUXM MULTIPLEXER
MUXMFAIL MULTIPLEXER FAILURE
NODEISO LOCAL NODE ISOLATION
NSTART CP NEW START RECOVERY
OMT OPERATION/MAINTENANCE TERMINAL
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
PCHANNUC P-CHANNEL NUC FAILURE
PCHANS P-CHANNEL SWITCHED FAILURE
PCMMAL PCM MAINTENANCE ALARM
PCMSAL PCM SERVICE ALARM
RAE RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPM.
RCI RADIO CLOCK INTERFACE
RCULINK REMOTE CONTROL UNIT LINK
RGMG RING-/METER GENERATOR FOR DLU
SAVGENE SAVE GENERATION ERROR
SCGROUP SOFTWARE CARRIER GROUP ALARM
SIDAT SYSTEM INDEPEND. DATA TRANSFER
SILT SIGNALING DATA LINK TERMINAL
SILTC SILT CONTROL
SLM SUBSCRIBER LINE MODULE
SN SWITCHING NETWORK
This parameter is only valid for DE3 and DE4.
SSG SPACE STAGE GROUP
This parameter is only valid for DE5.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
SYPC SYSTEM PANEL CONTROL
SYSOP SYSTEM OPERATOR
SYSOVLD SYSTEM OVERLOAD
TGAL TRUNK GROUP ALARM
TIMINCOR TIME INCORRECT
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE
TRUNKHD TRUNK HELD
TSG TIME STAGE GROUP
This parameter is only valid for DE5.
UNSPARES NO SPARE SECT. F. UNUSED SPACE
VOCAFAIL VOLUME/CATALOG FAILURE
X25LINK BX.25 LINK
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the target priority for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
SDG SERVICE DEGRADATION
This parameter defines the check of service degradation condition.
Default: no affect on database
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
YES SERVICE DEGRADATION DESIRED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 4+
ENTR ALPRIO
LSNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LSNAM INDIVIDUAL PRIORITIES

[ [
[ ENTR ALPRIO : ALUNIT= ,LSNAM= ,ALPRIO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALUNIT ALARM UNIT
This parameter specifies the alarm units for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCSLS CCS LINK SET
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter specifies the affected linkset name with individual
alarm priority.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the target priority for alarm signaling.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
MINOR MINOR ALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ALPRIO- 5-
DISP ALPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM PROFILE
This command displays
- all alarm profiles for alarm signaling which are currently set in the
system;
- the assignment of alarm priorities ( non-degrading and degrading ) to
the existing probable causes for a specified alarm profile identifica-
tion.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALPROF : ALPROF= [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the alarm profile identification for
alarm signaling.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the output format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONTENTS CONTENTS OF ALARM PROFILE
SUMMARY SUMMARY OF EXISTING PROFILES
Default: SUMMARY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALPROF- 1-
DISP ALPROFMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Alarm Profile MP
This task displays an ]Alarm Profile MP].
Dependent on the input parameters the following output is supported:
- No ]Alarm profile MP] is specified:
A list of all ]Alarm Profile MPs] created in the
system is displayed without their parameters.
- An ]Alarm profile MP] is specified:
The specified ]Alarm Profile MP] is displayed
including all its parameters.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALPROFMP : [Alarm profile MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Alarm profile MP
This parameter specifies the Alarm Profile created on the MP.
The following input values are valid:
1) No input value is given, then a list of all ]Alarm Profile MPs]
created in the system is displayed.
2) A string is given with a length of 1...8 characters of the character
set specifying an ]Alarm profile MP] created in the system.
Then all parameters of the specified ]Alarm Profile MP]
are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALPROFMP- 1-
CR ALRELAIS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Alarm Relais
This script installs an alarm relais to provide alarm forwarding for all alarms
with Alarm priority Minor, Major, Critical and all PCM alarms in the system.
Therefore the following units are created:
1) Alarm forwarding of alarms with Alarm priority Critical:
Creates an ]Alarm Output Interface] called CRITICAL, that serves
as alarm forwarding relais for all alarms with Alarm priority Critical in the
system by referencing the Standard ]Alarm Balance Monitor]
(STALBAMO).
2) Alarm forwarding of alarms with Alarm priority Major:
Creates an ]Alarm Output Interface] called MAJOR, that serves
as alarm forwarding relais for all alarms with Alarm priority Major in the
system by referencing the Standard ]Alarm Balance Monitor]
(STALBAMO).
3) Alarm forwarding of alarms with Alarm priority Minor:
Creates an ]Alarm Output Interface] called MINOR, that serves
as alarm forwarding relais for all alarms with Alarm priority Minor in the
system by referencing the Standard ]Alarm Balance Monitor]
(STALBAMO).
4) Alarm forwarding of PCM alarms:
a) Creates an ]Alarm Balance Monitor] called PCM collecting
the balance information of the CP alarm object SAL and MAL.
b) Creates an ]Alarm Output Interface] called PCM that serves
as alarm forwarding relais for PCM alarms with Alarm priority Major.
It references the ]Alarm Balance Monitor] PCM.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ALRELAIS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ALRELAIS- 1-
RSET ALRELAIS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Reset Alarm Relais
This script resets the alarm relais that provide alarm forwarding for
all alarms with Alarm priority Minor, Major, Critical and Major PCM
alarms in the system.
Therefore the following alarm balance monitors are confirmed:
1) Action Confirm Alarm Balance for the Standard Alarm Balance Monitor
(STALBAMO), to reset relais for alarm forwarding of alarms with alarm
priority Minor, Major, Critical.
2) Action Confirm Alarm Balance for the PCM Alarm Balance Monitor
(PCM) collecting the balance information of the CP alarm objects
SAL and MAL.
If a new alarm occurs after executing this script, the appropriate
alarm forwarding is reactivated.
Input format

[ [
[ RSET ALRELAIS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET ALRELAIS- 1-
RSET ALSSNCR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Reset Alarm SSNC Recovery
This task is used to clear the alarm after a LOADREC3 Recovery of SSNC.
Input format

[ [
[ RSET ALSSNCR ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET ALSSNCR- 1-
SET ALSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET ALARM STATUS
This command sets the processing code which describes the current status
of fault clearance in the alarm file stored for each alarm.
Input format

[ [
[ SET ALSTAT : MSGNO= ,ALSTAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSGNO MESSAGE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a 5-digit message number, which
corresponds to the entry number used in the alarm file
AM.ALARM.
Note:
- There is no relation to the entry numbers of the history
file HF.ARCHIVE !
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99999, range of decimal numbers
ALSTAT ALARM STATUS
This parameter describes the fault clearance status of an
alarm condition. The processing code is a part of the alarm
file entry.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
D DEFERRED
The command is rejected, if the corres-
ponding object instance is UR.
IP IN PROCESS
The command is rejected, if the corres-
ponding object instance is UR.
C CLEARED
This value applies for
- System operator alarms (SYOP)
- Administration alarms (ADMINAL)
Exception: Alarms with alarm class THRES
- Recovery alarms (RECOV )
- Time insecure alarms (TIMINSEC)
with alarm unit/class TIMINCOR.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET ALSTAT- 1-
CAN ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ALARM TEXT
This command cancels an existing alarm text.
Prerequisite:
- The cancellation job is only executed if the alarm text in
question is not assigned to an external alarm circuit.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number assigned to an alarm text.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...40, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ALTEXT- 1-
DISP ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ALARM TEXT
This command displays the alarm texts assigned to a number.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the alarm text number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...40, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ALTEXT- 1-
ENTR ALTEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ALARM TEXT
This command enters an alarm text and assigns a text number to it.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if a text already exists under
this number.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR ALTEXT : TEXTNO= ,TEXT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the alarm text number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...40, range of decimal numbers
TEXT TEXT
This parameter consists of a text (freely definable).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...30 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ALTEXT- 1-
CAN AMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This command cancels a pair of ATM bridge processors.
Prerequisites:
- Both ATM bridge processors must be PLA. Note that the configuration
of the last AMP of a pair from ACT to MBL is only executed when
the redundant AMP is already PLA.
- The ATM bridge must be cancelled first.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN AMP : AMP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies one of the ATM bridge processors to be
cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN AMP- 1-
COM AMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COMMUTE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This command commutes the working states (working / spare) of one or
more pairs of ATM bridge processors.
Possible Effects:
- During the execution of this command simultaneously to high
traffic-load a minimal loss of messages is possible.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ COM AMP : AMP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the pairs of ATM bridge processors whoes
working state have to be commuted.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COM AMP- 1-
CONF AMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This command configures an ATM bridge processor.
Possible Effects:
- During the execution of this command simultaneously to high
traffic-load a minimal loss of messages is possible.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to ACT is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personal determines by
entering + or - whether the command is to be executed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF AMP : AMP= ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the ATM bridge processor to be configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis before configuration to ACT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF AMP- 1-
CR AMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This command creates a pair of ATM bridge processors (AMP-0/1, AMP-2/3
or AMP-4/5). The created ATM bridge processors are in the operating
state PLA after the command is executed.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR AMP : AMP= ,PBI= ,AMPR= ,PBIR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the ATM bridge processor to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
PBI PHYSICAL BUS INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
ATM bridge processor.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the ATM bridge processor specified by parameter AMP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...15, range of decimal numbers
AMPR REDUNDANT ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the redundant ATM bridge processor to be
created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
PBIR PBI OF REDUNDANT AMP
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
redundant ATM bridge processor.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the redundant ATM bridge processor specified by parameter AMPR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR AMP- 1-
DIAG AMP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for an ATM bridge processor.
Prerequisites:
- The ATM bridge processor must be MBL.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG AMP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG AMP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an ATM bridge processor.
The diagnosis includes a BCMY interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG AMP : AMP= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the ATM bridge processor to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG AMP- 1+
DIAG AMP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for an ATM bridge
processor. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG AMP : AMP= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the ATM bridge processor to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG AMP- 2-
DISP AMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This command displays all ATM bridge processors with their physical bus
interface number and working state (working / spare).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AMP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AMP- 1-
TEST AMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This command tests an ATM bridge processor.
Prerequisites:
- The AMP and the redundant AMP must be ACT.
Possible Effects:
- During the execution of this command simultaneously to high
traffic-load a minimal loss of messages is possible.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST AMP : [AMP=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AMP ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the ATM bridge processor to be tested.
Standard Behavior: all active ATM bridge processors are tested
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST AMP- 1-
CAN AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel ATM Multiplexer
This task deletes an ATM Multiplexer. The input is the identifier of the ]ACCG].
Prerequisites:
- The ]AMX] is the last unit in a shelf.
- The ]ACCG] with identifier 1 must not be deleted.
- The ]ACCG] with identifier 2 is not allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN AMX : ACCG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 3...64.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN AMX- 1-
CONF AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Configure ATM Multiplexer
This task configures an ]ACCG] or an ]AMX].
There is a choice between the states ]Locked], ]Unlocked], ]Reserved] and
]Under repair]. If the input of ]Admin. state] is ]Locked]
then ]Hazard check] can be performed. Performing
the ]Hazard check] means that in case a hazard is
detected, the configuration will not be executed and detected hazards are
displayed in the output table as Hazards. Not performing the
]Hazard check] means that the configuration will
be executed always and detected hazards are displayed in the output table
as Actual effects.
If there is no input for the ]AMX], then
the ]ACCG] will be configured else the given
]AMX] will be configured.
Prerequisite:
- The ]ACCG] with number 2 is not allowed.
Notes:
- If ]Admin. state] is not ]Locked] the inputparameter
]Hazard check] is not used.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF AMX : Side= ,ACCG= [,AMX=] ,Admin. state= ,Hazard check= [
[ [
[ [,Load information=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed ranges of decimal numbers are 1, 3...64.
AMX
This parameter is the number of an existing ]AMX].
The only allowed value is 1.
Admin. state
This parameter is used to select the kind of configuration.
Hazard check
If this parameter is ]Yes], ]Hazard check]
is started at the deactivation of a unit.
Load information
This parameter specifies if the code portion should be loaded by force
or only if necessary.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF AMX- 1-
CR AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create ATM Multiplexer
This task creates the ATM Multiplexer.
Prerequisites:
- A ]Shelf] must exist.
- The ]AMX] with ]ACCG] 1 and 2 is already in the system.
Input format

[ [
[ CR AMX : ACCG= ,Rack= ,AMX shelf= ,Conn. of AMX to ASN= [
[ [
[ [,Conn. of AMX to ACCG=] ,Incoming connected port= [
[ [
[ ,Outgoing connected port= ,SYS CLK connection= [
[ [
[ ,SYS CLK connected port= ,ACCG Alarm profile= [
[ [
[ ,AMX Alarm profile= [,AUB MP=] [,Line sync. connection=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACCG
This parameter is the number of the ]ACCG].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is: 3...64.
Rack
This parameter is the name of an existing ]Rack].
Allowed values are symbolic names of exactly 8 characters.
AMX shelf
This parameter is the number of an existing ]Shelf].
Conn. of AMX to ASN
This parameter is the number of the connected ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...9.
Conn. of AMX to ACCG
This parameter is the number of the connected ]ACCG].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...32767.
Default value is 2.
Incoming connected port
This parameter specifies the incoming port of an ]ASN].
Outgoing connected port
This parameter specifies the outgoing port of an ]ASN].
SYS CLK connection
This parameter is the number of the ]ACCG] of ]SYS CLK connection].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...64.
SYS CLK connected port
This parameter specifies the port of the ]SYS CLK connection]. The
allowed range of decimal numbers is 0...3 for an ]ACCG] of ]AMX]
and 0...19 for an ]ACCG] of ]ASN].
ACCG Alarm profile
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP of ACCG to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR AMX- 1+
CR AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
AMX Alarm profile
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP of AMX to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR AMX- 2+
CR AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
AUB MP
This parameter specifies an MP with RHS functionality which
administers and controls the resources on each LIC belonging
to the AUB. The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...128.
if not assigned, default value 1 will be used.
Line sync. connection
This parameter specifies the connected port of the ]Actual CLK master]
if the CLK src. is Line timed.
+---------------+-------------------------+
! ASN type ! `Line sync. connection` !
+---------------+-------------------------+
! ASN5 ! 0,2,4,6,8 !
! ASN20, ASN40 ! 0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14 !
+---------------+-------------------------+
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR AMX- 3-
DIAG AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Diagnose ATM Multiplexer
This task starts a diagnostics test of an ]ACCG] or an ]AMX]
on demand. If there is no input for ]AMX], the
]ACCG] is diagnosed.
Prerequisite:
- The ]ACCG] with identifier 2 is not allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG AMX : Side= ,ACCG= [,AMX=] ,Kind of diagnosis= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed ranges of decimal numbers are 1, 3...64.
AMX
This parameter is the number of an existing ]AMX].
The only allowed value is 1.
Kind of diagnosis
This parameter specifies the kind of diagnosis.
Following values are allowed:
]Self diagnosis]:
Base test for the unit.
It checks the availability and the workability of
the components .
Resets unit and becomes ]Self diagnosis].
No further tests are performed.
]Quick diagnosis]:
Performs a more comprehensive test than ]Self
diagnosis].
It includes all diagnosis tests without long
running
tests.
It must include testing of those hardware parts
which
are tested during normal operation.
]Complete diagnosis]:
This option performs full testing of all the
object functions, including tests which take a
long time
to complete such as memory tests.
]Cable diagnosis]:
This value is only allowed for ]AMX]:
It verifies correct plugging of cables (Yb Ports
only).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG AMX- 1-
DISP AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Multiplexer
This task displays one or all AMXs and ACCGs.
Following combinations are allowed:
+---------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT ! OUTPUT !
+---------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
! - ! all ACCGs and all AMXs are displayed !
!Side ! one ACCG and one AMX of one Side are displayed !
!Side, ACCG ! one ACCG of one Side is displayed !
!Side, ACCG, AMX! one AMX of one Side is displayed !
+---------------------+-------------------------------------------------------+
Prerequisites:
- The ACCG with number 2 is not allowed within ASMG configuration.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AMX : [Side=] [,ACCG=] [,AMX=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side.
Input format:
0...1 range of decimal numbers.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ACCG.
Input format:
1...64 range of decimal numbers.
AMX
This parameter is the number of an existing AMX.
The only allowed value is 1.
Input format:
decimal number 1
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AMX- 1-
MOD AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM Multiplexer
This script changes the value of the ]Alarm profile MP]
of ]AMX] or ]ACCG] of both ]Sides].
Also the ]Board type] of ACCG can be changed.
Allowed Combinations of input parameters:
+--------------------------------------------+
! Input parameter !
+------------------+------+-----+------------------+------------+
! action type ! ACCG ! AMX ! Alarm profile MP ! Board type !
+------------------+------+-----+------------------+------------+
! change ! ! ! ! !
! Alarm profile MP ! YES ! YES ! YES ! NO !
! of AMX ! ! ! ! !
+------------------+------+-----+------------------+------------+
! change ! ! ! ! !
! Alarm profile MP ! YES ! NO ! YES ! NO !
! of ACCG ! ! ! ! !
+------------------+------+-----+------------------+------------+
! change ! ! ! ! !
! Board type ! YES ! NO ! NO ! YES !
! of ACCG ! * ! ! ! !
+------------------+------+-----+------------------+------------+
* Action supporten only in case of ASN5 configuration.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD AMX : ACCG= [,AMX=] [,Alarm profile MP=] [,Board type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed ranges of decimal numbers are 1...64.
AMX
This parameter is the number of an existing ]AMX].
The only allowed value is 1.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AMX- 1+
MOD AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
Board type
Attribute to specify the board (hardware) of a unit.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AMX- 2-
RECOV AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Recover ATM Multiplexer
This task is used to recover an ]AMX].
Allowed parameters for recovery of ]AMX] are:
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! ]Scope] ]Depth] ]Measures] !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
!LOADREC2 ]Platform] ]Cold start] ]Loading of code and data] !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ RECOV AMX : Side= ,ACCG= ,Scope= ,Depth= ,Measures= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed ranges of decimal numbers are 1, 3...64.
Scope
This parameter specifies that only the addressed ]Platform] is recovered.
Depth
This parameter specifies that the recovery shall be a ]Cold start]
recovery.
Measures
This parameter specifies that code and data are reloaded.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RECOV AMX- 1-
STAT AMX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Status of ATM Multiplexer
This task displays the states of ]AMX] and
]ACCG]. Following combinations are allowed:
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT | OUTPUT !
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! - | states of all ]ACCGs] and of all ]AMXs] are displayed !
!]Side] | states of one ]ACCG] and of one ]AMX] of one ]Side] !
! | are displayed !
!]Side], ]ACCG] | state of one ]ACCG] of one ]Side] is displayed !
!]Side], ]ACCG], ]AMX]| state of one ]AMX] of one ]Side] is displayed !
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Prerequisite:
- The ]ACCG] with number 2 is not allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT AMX : [Side=] [,ACCG=] [,AMX=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed ranges of decimal numbers are 1, 3...64.
AMX
This parameter is the number of an existing ]AMX].
The only allowed value is 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT AMX- 1-
DISP AMXCLK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Multiplexer Clock
This task is used to display the ]Clock connection list] of ]ACCG] of an ]AMX].
Prerequisite:
- The ]ACCG] with number 2 is not allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AMXCLK : Side= ,ACCG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed ranges of decimal numbers are 1, 3...64.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AMXCLK- 1-
DISP AMXPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Multiplexer Port
This task displays the AMX ports of ]AMX].
Prerequisite:
- The ]ACCG] with number 2 is not allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AMXPORT : Side= ,ACCG= ,AMX= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The allowed ranges of decimal numbers are 1, 3...64.
AMX
This parameter is the number of an existing ]AMX].
The only allowed value is 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AMXPORT- 1-
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command cancels announcement elements of the types
INDAS phrase, INDAS word, INDAS standard announcement, and INDAS pause.
Prerequisites:
- The INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant must be available.
Notes:
- The cancelation of announcement elements is considered
dangerous because this request may remove announcements for
call processing.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel is requested
to determine whether the command is to be executed or not by
entering + or -.
- If the last announcement element for the specified OCANEQ variant
is canceled, the OCANEQ variant will be removed implicitly,
provided that the related UI database is empty and no LTG
exists for which this OCANEQ variant is entered.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. CAN ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format cancels the links between
INDAS pauses and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PAUSEALL ANELEM ALL INDAS PAUSE
All INDAS pauses.
This value is not allowed to be linked
with other values.
PAUSEEND ANELEM INDAS PAUSE END
Pause after the end of each announcement cycle.
PAUSELA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE LANGUAGE
Pause between two different languages of
an announcement.
PAUSEPH ANELEM INDAS PAUSE PHRASE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANELEM- 1+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Pause between two phrases of an announcement.
PAUSEST ANELEM INDAS PAUSE START
Pause before the start of each announcement
cycle.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANELEM- 2+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format cancels the links between
INDAS phrase and INDAS phrase definition.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PHRASE ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-1023, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be canceled.
The number range follows from the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANELEM- 3+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
This input format cancels the links between
INDAS standard announcement and INDAS standard
announcement definition.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
STDANN ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-2500, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be canceled.
The number range follows from the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANELEM- 4+
CAN ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format cancels the links between
INDAS word numbers and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 32 INDAS word numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1...4094, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be canceled.
The number range follows from the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANELEM- 5-
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command creates announcement elements of the types
INDAS phrase, INDAS word, INDAS standard announcement, and INDAS pause.
It allows announcements, which are played by INDAS with OCANEQ, to be
composed from sets of text fragments stored in the OCANEQ.
A text fragment is the smallest physical speech unit and can be addressed
by its text fragment number.
A text fragment consists of one or more spoken words or is a pause or
a tone burst.
Text fragments can be put together in any sequence desired.
There are two types of announcements:
- Individual announcements:
Each individual announcement is logically addressed by one or more
announcement elements of the type "INDAS phrase".
An INDAS phrase consists of several fixed text parts and several variable
parts (e.g. directory number, hour, minute, week-day) determined by
INDAS parameters which use groups of logical announcement elements of the
type "INDAS word" that can be addressed.
- Standard announcements:
Each standard announcement is logically addressed by an announcement
element of the type "INDAS standard announcement" and consists only of
fixed text parts.
No variable parts are included.
Within the system, each announcement element created by INDAS is immediately
active and can be accessed by call processing.
Prerequisites:
- The INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant must be available.
- Memory space for the OCANEQ variant data must be provided in the
database (for expandable groups OC1/OC2, see MOD DBSIZE).
Notes:
- If the OCANEQ variant has not yet been registered by either ENTR OCAVAR
or CR ANELEM or through User Interaction database administration,
a new element in the OCANEQ variant specific data structure will be used.
- The command will be rejected with an error message saying that the database
list has been exceeded, and specifying the parameter name OCAVAR if the
maximum number of 10 OCANEQ variants have already been registered in the
system (see also ENTR OCAVAR).
- If the command is rejected with the above error message and the specified
parameter names are OCAVAR and LANGUAGE, the database area for group OC1
has to be expanded (use MOD DBSIZE).
- If the command is rejected with the above error message and the specified
parameter name is PHDEFIN or STDADEF, the database area for group OC2
has to be expanded (use MOD DBSIZE).
- The available text fragments and the associated text fragment numbers are
to be taken from the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
- The command should only be used for LANGUAGE values identified by the
INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
MOD CALLPOPT will adapt the way in which announcements are played in these
identified languages or in a specific language sequence, dependent upon the
exchange location.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. CR ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. CR ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. CR ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format is used to create an announcement element "INDAS
pause" by assigning a pause type to a text fragment.
INDAS pause specifies all pauses defined by INDAS which are inserted
according to attribute if an announcement is to be played. They are
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 1+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
used separately from an INDAS phrase or INDAS standard announcement
definition.
An INDAS pause consists of just one text fragment.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PAUSE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PAUSE ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
PAUSE ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
Notes:
- Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANN. ELEM. INDAS PAUSE
PAUSEEND ANELEM INDAS PAUSE END
A pause is inserted at the end of each
announcement cycle.
PAUSELA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE LANGUAGE
A pause is inserted between two different
languages if the announcement is to be
played in more than one language.
PAUSEPH ANELEM INDAS PAUSE PHRASE
A pause is inserted between two phrases
if the individual announcement consists
of more than one INDAS phrase.
PAUSEST ANELEM INDAS PAUSE START
A pause is inserted at the start of each
announcement cycle.
b: OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 2+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to create an announcement element "INDAS
phrase" by entering its phrase definition.
An INDAS phrase consists of several fixed text parts defined by one
or more text fragments, and several variable parts defined by text
fragments which are determined by INDAS parameters using groups of
INDAS words.
Notes:
- INDAS functions are used to identify individual announcements in the
system.
Only INDAS phrases selected by INDAS functions are allowed.
The allowed number range is to be taken from the INDAS document
related to the OCANEQ variant.
The parameter numbers and the specific meaning assigned to an INDAS
phrase are also described.
INDAS phrases applied by User Interaction must have phrase numbers
between 1 and 900.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PHDEFIN= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PHRASE ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-1023, range of decimal numbers
PHDEFIN INDAS PHRASE DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS phrase definition.
The phrase definition for an INDAS phrase describes the various
modifications of an announcement text for an individual
announcement as a function of the actual INDAS parameter values
and takes the foreign-language requirements into account.
It specifies the sequence in which fixed text fragments are to be
arranged and locates the positions where the text fragments
determined by the INDAS parameter values must be inserted. An
INDAS parameter is represented by a fixed parameter number assigned.
As a result, the phrase definition controls the combination of text
fragments which form an announcement.
For each one of the allowed INDAS phrases and each valid language,
the phrase definition in its application form is part of the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
To produce such a phrase definition, a formal definition language
similar to a programming language is used.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 3+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Syntax of INDAS phrase definition components:
The following INDAS phrase definition components are specified
and completed by the permissible combination of the required units:
- "Insert fragment definition":
Statement to insert a text fragment,
e.g.: compose the fixed text part of an announcement.
INFRAGM-<fragment no>
input values:
<fragment no> = 0 .. 65279, range of decimal numbers
- "Insert parameter definition":
Statement to insert an INDAS parameter:
Fit in the text fragment determined by the parameter value by
using the corresponding INDAS word.
INPAR-<parameter no>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODNONE
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVNONE
(MLVNONE: only for INDAS parameters
which may have more than one value)
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
Statement to insert an INDAS parameter:
Fit in the text fragment determined by the parameter value by
using the corresponding INDAS word modified plus or minus by a
specified INDAS word offset. This corresponds with a change to
an alternative group of text fragments.
This statement may be used
- for modification to lower voice
(e.g.: the INDAS parameter is the final part of an announcement),
- for the several interpretations of the INDAS parameter "number"
(e.g.: applied as year, as part of a price),
- for a different representation of an INDAS parameter in the same
context
(e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "month" by its name ("January")
or alternatively by its ordinal number ("first")).
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODPLUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODMINUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVPLUS-<word offset>
(MLVPLUS: only for INDAS parameters
which may have more than one value)
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVMINUS-<word offset>
(MLVMINUS: only for INDAS parameters
which may have more than one value)
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
<word offset> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
- "Parameter block definition":
Statement to process an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value,
e.g.: the INDAS parameter "directory number".
PARDO-<parameter no>
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
- "IF condition block definition":
An "Insert fragment definition" or "Insert parameter definition"
is to be dependent of the value(s) of one INDAS parameter or
several INDAS parameters correlated to each other,
e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "minute" unless it is a full hour.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 4+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A single condition will be initiated by IFPAR. The parameter
value must be specified by its INDAS word.
Several conditions can be combined by ANDIFPAR ("and" relation,
i.e. all conditions must be true) or ORIFPAR ("or" relation, i.e.
one of the conditions must be true).
ELSIFPAR corresponds to a nested "IF condition definition" in
the form of ELSE IFPAR ... ENDIF.
If the condition(s) stated by IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ANDIFPAR /
ORIFPAR is(are) true the definition statement(s) following will
be executed. If the condition(s) is(are) false, the definition
statement(s) following ELSE (if existent) or ENDIF will be
executed.
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
<word no> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
<condition> = EQUAL
NOTEQUAL
LESS
GREATER
or
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
<condition> = FRSTWORD
NOTFRSTW
LASTWORD
NOTLASTW
SELECTED
The conditions FRSTWORD, NOTFRSTW, LASTWORD, NOTLASTW
are only valid for an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value.
The condition SELECTED is true if the INDAS parameter has
at least one value.
or
ELSE
- "End definition" :
Statement to terminate a block definition or phrase definition.
ENDDO
ENDIF
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS phrase definition:
- A "definition block" must consist of one
"Insert fragment definition" or
"Insert parameter definition" or
"Parameter block definition" or
"IF condition block definition".
- A "Parameter block definition" is mandatory if an INDAS parameter
which may have more than one value is to be processed.
This "Parameter block definition" for an INDAS parameter must be
specified before an "IF condition block definition" or "Insert
parameter definition" of that parameter is entered.
There are however the following exceptions:
- The "IF condition block definition" can be entered prior to the
"Parameter block definition" if the condition(s) of an
"IF condition block definition" has(have) been formed using
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 5+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECTED.
- Mandatory input of a "Parameter block definition" is excluded
if no "IF condition block definition" has been specified for
the INDAS parameter and
- only the last value of that parameter has to be modified
exclusively and the corresponding "Insert parameter definition"
is formed with MLVPLUS, MLVMINUS,
- none of the INDAS parameter values has to be modified and the
corresponding "Insert parameter definition" is formed with
MLVNONE.
- The body of a "Parameter block definition" must contain at least
one "definition block" and must be terminated with ENDDO.
- The "IF condition block definition" must contain at least one
statement initiated by IFPAR and must be terminated with ENDIF.
- For each case of "IF condition block definition" initiated by
IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ELSE the body must contain at least one
"definition block".
- Nested "IF condition block definitions" and/or "Parameter block
definitions" may be used up to the maximum nested level = 10.
- Nested "Parameter block definitions" for the same parameter
number are not allowed.
- The body of an INDAS phrase definition must contain at least one
"definition block" and must be terminated with END.
Notes:
- Within an INDAS phrase, INDAS parameters may be rearranged from
the original order indicated by the parameter numbers.
The parameter number retains the meaning of the INDAS parameter.
- The length of an INDAS phrase definition is only restricted by
the maximum number of permissible characters for an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS phrase definition components that
can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS phrase definition components must be
observed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ACTION CODE
ANDIFPAR AND IF PARAMETER CONDITION
ELSE ELSE CONDITION
ELSIFPAR ELSE IF PARAMETER CONDITION
END END OF PHRASE DEFINITION
ENDDO END OF PARAMETER DO LOOP
ENDIF END OF IF CONDITION
IFPAR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
INFRAGM INSERT FRAGMENT
INPAR INSERT PARAMETER
ORIFPAR OR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
PARDO FOR ALL PARAMETER VALUES DO
b: FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM- NO.=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
c: MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
EQUAL EQUAL
[FRSTWORD[ FIRST WORD
[GREATER [ GREATER
[LASTWORD[ LAST WORD
[LESS [ LESS
[MLVMINUS[ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: DECRE.
[MLVNONE [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MLVPLUS [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: INCRE.
[MODMINUS[ MOD. PARAM VALUE: DECREMENT
[MODNONE [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MODPLUS [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: INCREMENT
[NOTEQUAL[ NOT EQUAL
[NOTFRSTW[ NOT FIRST WORD
[NOTLASTW[ NOT LAST WORD
!SELECTED- SELECTED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 6+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: OFFSET=
1...4094, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in an exchange.
Notes:
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 7+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
This input format is used to create an announcement element "INDAS
standard announcement" by entering its standard announcement definition.
Notes:
- The standard announcement number specified here must be used as the
STANNO for CR ANGRP if the assignment of an announcement to an
announcement group leading to OCANEQ is defined as definite (fixed).

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,STDADEF= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
STDANN ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-2500, range of decimal numbers
STDADEF INDAS STD. ANN. DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS standard announcement
definition.
The standard announcement definition for each INDAS standard
announcement describes the way in which text fragments are
sequenced and takes foreign-language requirements into account.
As a result, the standard announcement definition controls the
combination of text fragments which form an announcement.
For each one of the allowed INDAS standard announcements and
each valid language, the standard announcement definition in
its application form is part of the INDAS document related to
the OCANEQ variant.
To produce such a standard announcement definition, a formal
definition language similar to a programming language is used.
Syntax of INDAS standard announcement definition components:
- "Insert fragment definition":
Statement to insert a text fragment.
INFRAGM-<fragment no>
input values:
<fragment no> = 0 .. 65279, range of decimal numbers
- "End definition" :
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 8+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Statement to terminate a standard announcement definition.
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS standard
announcement definition:
- The body of an INDAS standard announcement definition must
contain at least one "Insert fragment definition" and must be
terminated with END.
Notes:
- The length of an INDAS standard announcement definition is only
restricted by the maximum number of permissible characters for
an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS standard announcement definition
components that can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS standard announcement definition
components must be observed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: ACTION CODE
END END OF STD. ANN. DEFINITION
INFRAGM INSERT FRAGMENT
b: FRAGMENT-NO.=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in an exchange.
Notes:
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 9+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format is used to create an announcement element "INDAS
word" by entering its allocation to a text fragment.
An INDAS word is the smallest logical speech unit and is addressable by its
INDAS word number. A group of INDAS words represents an INDAS parameter
with its definite meaning. An INDAS parameter is a variable part of an
INDAS phrase. Each INDAS word consists of just one text fragment.
Notes:
- The meaning of the defined INDAS words and the associated INDAS word
numbers are to be taken from the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ
variant.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,WORD= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
Notes:
- Up to 32 INDAS words and/or ranges can be linked with &.
- Input of an INDAS word range is only allowed if the resulting
number of INDAS words equals those of text fragments (implicit
increment one by one for both), or exactly one and the same
text fragment is assigned to all INDAS words of a given range.
- An INDAS word number may not be entered twice with different
text fragment numbers.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: INDAS WORD NUMBER=
1...4094, range of decimal numbers
b: OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in an exchange.
Notes:
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 10+
CR ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANELEM- 11-
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command displays announcement elements of the types
INDAS phrase, INDAS word, INDAS standard announcement, and INDAS pause.
Prerequisites:
- The INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant must be available.
- Only those announcement elements will be displayed which are
previously created.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. DISP ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format displays the links between
INDAS pauses and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked.

[ [
[ DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
Notes :
- If the entered OCANEQ variant is unknown there are no data to
display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PAUSEALL ANELEM ALL INDAS PAUSE
All INDAS pauses.
This value is not allowed to be linked
with other values.
PAUSEEND ANELEM INDAS PAUSE END
Pause after the end of each announcement cycle.
PAUSELA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE LANGUAGE
Pause between two different languages of
an announcement.
PAUSEPH ANELEM INDAS PAUSE PHRASE
Pause between two phrases of an announcement.
PAUSEST ANELEM INDAS PAUSE START
Pause before the start of each announcement
cycle.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANELEM- 1+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format displays the components of an
INDAS phrase definition.
Each component may consist of up to 4 units:
ACTION CODE
FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM- NO.
MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
OFFSET
The phrase definition controls the combination of text
fragments which form an announcement.
Up to 32 INDAS phrase numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.

[ [
[ DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,LANGUAGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
Notes :
- If the entered OCANEQ variant is unknown there are no data to
display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PHRASE ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-1023, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be displayed.
The number range follows from the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
If X is specified, the announcement elements are
displayed for all the languages for which they are defined.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANELEM- 2+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
X ALL OFFICIAL LANGUAGES
Default: X
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANELEM- 3+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
This input format displays the components of an
INDAS standard announcement definition.
Each component may consist of up to 2 units:
ACTION CODE
FRAGMENT-NO.
The standard announcement definition controls the
combination of text fragments which form an announcement.
Up to 32 INDAS standard announcement numbers and/or
intervals can be linked.

[ [
[ DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,LANGUAGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
Notes :
- If the entered OCANEQ variant is unknown there are no data to
display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
STDANN ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-2500, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be displayed.
The number range follows from the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
If X is specified, the announcement elements are
displayed for all the languages for which they are defined.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANELEM- 4+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
X ALL OFFICIAL LANGUAGES
Default: X
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANELEM- 5+
DISP ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format displays the links between
INDAS word numbers and OCANEQ text fragment numbers.
Up to 32 INDAS word numbers and/or intervals
can be linked.

[ [
[ DISP ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= [,LANGUAGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
Notes :
- If the entered OCANEQ variant is unknown there are no data to
display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1...4094, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number range of
the announcement elements to be displayed.
The number range follows from the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement elements.
If X is specified, the announcement elements are
displayed for all the languages for which they are defined.
Notes :
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
X ALL OFFICIAL LANGUAGES
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANELEM- 6-
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This command modifies announcement elements of the types
INDAS phrase, INDAS word, INDAS standard announcement, and INDAS pause.
Prerequisites:
- The INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant must be available.
- Only the announcement elements previously created by CR ANELEM
can be modified.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMPA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
2. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMPH ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
3. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMST ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
4. MOD ANELEM - ANELEMWO ANELEM INDAS WORD
1. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
This input format is used to modify the text fragment allocated
to each type of the announcement element "INDAS pause".
INDAS pause specifies all pauses defined by INDAS which are inserted
according to attribute if an announcement is to be played. They are
used separately from an INDAS phrase or INDAS standard announcement
definition.
An INDAS pause consists of just one text fragment.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PAUSE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PAUSE ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
PAUSE ANELEM INDAS PAUSE
Notes:
- Up to 4 INDAS pauses can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANN. ELEM. INDAS PAUSE
PAUSEEND ANELEM INDAS PAUSE END
A pause is inserted at the end of each
announcement cycle.
PAUSELA ANELEM INDAS PAUSE LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 1+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A pause is inserted between two different
languages if the announcement is to be
played in more than one language.
PAUSEPH ANELEM INDAS PAUSE PHRASE
A pause is inserted between two phrases
if the individual announcement consists
of more than one INDAS phrase.
PAUSEST ANELEM INDAS PAUSE START
A pause is inserted at the start of each
announcement cycle.
b: OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 2+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to modify the phrase definition of
an announcement element "INDAS phrase".
Notes:
- The modified phrase definition must be entered completely.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,PHDEFIN= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
PHRASE ANELEM INDAS PHRASE
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-1023, range of decimal numbers
PHDEFIN INDAS PHRASE DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS phrase definition.
The phrase definition for an INDAS phrase describes the various
modifications of an announcement text for an individual
announcement as a function of the actual INDAS parameter values
and takes the foreign-language requirements into account.
It specifies the sequence in which fixed text fragments are to be
arranged and locates the positions where the text fragments
determined by the INDAS parameter values must be inserted. An
INDAS parameter is represented by a fixed parameter number assigned.
As a result, the phrase definition controls the combination of text
fragments which form an announcement.
For each one of the allowed INDAS phrases and each valid language,
the phrase definition in its application form is part of the INDAS
document related to the OCANEQ variant.
To produce such a phrase definition, a formal definition language
similar to a programming language is used.
Syntax of INDAS phrase definition components:
The following INDAS phrase definition components are specified
and completed by the permissible combination of the required units:
- "Insert fragment definition":
Statement to insert a text fragment,
e.g.: compose the fixed text part of an announcement.
INFRAGM-<fragment no>
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 3+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
input values:
<fragment no> = 0 .. 65279, range of decimal numbers
- "Insert parameter definition":
Statement to insert an INDAS parameter:
Fit in the text fragment determined by the parameter value by
using the corresponding INDAS word.
INPAR-<parameter no>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODNONE
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVNONE
(MLVNONE: only for INDAS parameters
which may have more than one value)
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
Statement to insert an INDAS parameter:
Fit in the text fragment determined by the parameter value by
using the corresponding INDAS word modified plus or minus by a
specified INDAS word offset. This corresponds with a change to
an alternative group of text fragments.
This statement may be used
- for modification to lower voice
(e.g.: the INDAS parameter is the final part of an announcement),
- for the several interpretations of the INDAS parameter "number"
(e.g.: applied as year, as part of a price),
- for a different representation of an INDAS parameter in the same
context
(e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "month" by its name ("January")
or alternatively by its ordinal number ("first")).
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODPLUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MODMINUS-<word offset>
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVPLUS-<word offset>
(MLVPLUS: only for INDAS parameters
which may have more than one value)
INPAR-<parameter no>-MLVMINUS-<word offset>
(MLVMINUS: only for INDAS parameters
which may have more than one value)
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
<word offset> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
- "Parameter block definition":
Statement to process an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value,
e.g.: the INDAS parameter "directory number".
PARDO-<parameter no>
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
- "IF condition block definition":
An "Insert fragment definition" or "Insert parameter definition"
is to be dependent of the value(s) of one INDAS parameter or
several INDAS parameters correlated to each other,
e.g.: insert the INDAS parameter "minute" unless it is a full hour.
A single condition will be initiated by IFPAR. The parameter
value must be specified by its INDAS word.
Several conditions can be combined by ANDIFPAR ("and" relation,
i.e. all conditions must be true) or ORIFPAR ("or" relation, i.e.
one of the conditions must be true).
ELSIFPAR corresponds to a nested "IF condition definition" in
the form of ELSE IFPAR ... ENDIF.
If the condition(s) stated by IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ANDIFPAR /
ORIFPAR is(are) true the definition statement(s) following will
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 4+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be executed. If the condition(s) is(are) false, the definition
statement(s) following ELSE (if existent) or ENDIF will be
executed.
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>-<word no>
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
<word no> = 1 .. 4094, range of decimal numbers
<condition> = EQUAL
NOTEQUAL
LESS
GREATER
or
IFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ELSIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ANDIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
ORIFPAR-<parameter no>-<condition>
input values:
<parameter no> = 1 .. 63, range of decimal numbers
<condition> = FRSTWORD
NOTFRSTW
LASTWORD
NOTLASTW
SELECTED
The conditions FRSTWORD, NOTFRSTW, LASTWORD, NOTLASTW
are only valid for an INDAS parameter which may have more than
one value.
The condition SELECTED is true if the INDAS parameter has
at least one value.
or
ELSE
- "End definition" :
Statement to terminate a block definition or phrase definition.
ENDDO
ENDIF
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS phrase definition:
- A "definition block" must consist of one
"Insert fragment definition" or
"Insert parameter definition" or
"Parameter block definition" or
"IF condition block definition".
- A "Parameter block definition" is mandatory if an INDAS parameter
which may have more than one value is to be processed.
This "Parameter block definition" for an INDAS parameter must be
specified before an "IF condition block definition" or "Insert
parameter definition" of that parameter is entered.
There are however the following exceptions:
- The "IF condition block definition" can be entered prior to the
"Parameter block definition" if the condition(s) of an
"IF condition block definition" has(have) been formed using
SELECTED.
- Mandatory input of a "Parameter block definition" is excluded
if no "IF condition block definition" has been specified for
the INDAS parameter and
- only the last value of that parameter has to be modified
exclusively and the corresponding "Insert parameter definition"
is formed with MLVPLUS, MLVMINUS,
- none of the INDAS parameter values has to be modified and the
corresponding "Insert parameter definition" is formed with
MLVNONE.
- The body of a "Parameter block definition" must contain at least
one "definition block" and must be terminated with ENDDO.
- The "IF condition block definition" must contain at least one
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 5+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
statement initiated by IFPAR and must be terminated with ENDIF.
- For each case of "IF condition block definition" initiated by
IFPAR / ELSIFPAR / ELSE the body must contain at least one
"definition block".
- Nested "IF condition block definitions" and/or "Parameter block
definitions" may be used up to the maximum nested level = 10.
- Nested "Parameter block definitions" for the same parameter
number are not allowed.
- The body of an INDAS phrase definition must contain at least one
"definition block" and must be terminated with END.
Notes:
- Within an INDAS phrase, INDAS parameters may be rearranged from
the original order indicated by the parameter numbers.
The parameter number retains the meaning of the INDAS parameter.
- The length of an INDAS phrase definition is only restricted by
the maximum number of permissible characters for an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS phrase definition components that
can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS phrase definition components must be
observed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ACTION CODE
ANDIFPAR AND IF PARAMETER CONDITION
ELSE ELSE CONDITION
ELSIFPAR ELSE IF PARAMETER CONDITION
END END OF PHRASE DEFINITION
ENDDO END OF PARAMETER DO LOOP
ENDIF END OF IF CONDITION
IFPAR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
INFRAGM INSERT FRAGMENT
INPAR INSERT PARAMETER
ORIFPAR OR IF PARAMETER CONDITION
PARDO FOR ALL PARAMETER VALUES DO
b: FRAGMENT- OR INDAS PARAM- NO.=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
c: MODIFY ACTION OR CONDITION
EQUAL EQUAL
[FRSTWORD[ FIRST WORD
[GREATER [ GREATER
[LASTWORD[ LAST WORD
[LESS [ LESS
[MLVMINUS[ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: DECRE.
[MLVNONE [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MLVPLUS [ MOD. LAST PARAM VALUE: INCRE.
[MODMINUS[ MOD. PARAM VALUE: DECREMENT
[MODNONE [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: NOT
[MODPLUS [ MOD. PARAM VALUE: INCREMENT
[NOTEQUAL[ NOT EQUAL
[NOTFRSTW[ NOT FIRST WORD
[NOTLASTW[ NOT LAST WORD
!SELECTED- SELECTED
d: OFFSET=
1...4094, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in an exchange.
Notes:
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 6+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMPH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 7+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
This input format is used to modify the standard announcement definition
of an announcement element "INDAS standard announcement".
Notes:
- The modified standard announcement definition must be entered completely.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,STDADEF= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TYPE OF ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
STDANN ANELEM INDAS STD. ANN.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT NUMBER=
1-2500, range of decimal numbers
STDADEF INDAS STD. ANN. DEFINITION
This parameter specifies an INDAS standard announcement
definition.
The standard announcement definition for each INDAS standard
announcement describes the way in which text fragments are
sequenced and takes foreign-language requirements into account.
As a result, the standard announcement definition controls the
combination of text fragments which form an announcement.
For each one of the allowed INDAS standard announcements and
each valid language, the standard announcement definition in
its application form is part of the INDAS document related to
the OCANEQ variant.
To produce such a standard announcement definition, a formal
definition language similar to a programming language is used.
Syntax of INDAS standard announcement definition components:
- "Insert fragment definition":
Statement to insert a text fragment.
INFRAGM-<fragment no>
input values:
<fragment no> = 0 .. 65279, range of decimal numbers
- "End definition" :
Statement to terminate a standard announcement definition.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 8+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
END
There are the following requirements for an INDAS standard
announcement definition:
- The body of an INDAS standard announcement definition must
contain at least one "Insert fragment definition" and must be
terminated with END.
Notes:
- The length of an INDAS standard announcement definition is only
restricted by the maximum number of permissible characters for
an MML command.
As a result, the number of INDAS standard announcement definition
components that can be linked with &, must follow this restriction.
- The correct order of the INDAS standard announcement definition
components must be observed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: ACTION CODE
END END OF STD. ANN. DEFINITION
INFRAGM INSERT FRAGMENT
b: FRAGMENT-NO.=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in an exchange.
Notes:
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 9+
MOD ANELEM
ANELEMWO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ANELEM INDAS WORD
This input format is used to modify the text fragment allocated
to an announcement element "INDAS word".

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD ANELEM : OCAVAR= ,ANELEM= ,WORD= ,LANGUAGE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant. It is used to identify
the content of text fragments stored in OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the subsequent characters must
be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANELEM ANNOUNCEMENT ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
WORD ANELEM INDAS WORD
Notes:
- Up to 32 INDAS words and/or ranges can be linked with &.
- Input of an INDAS word range is only allowed if the resulting
number of INDAS words equals those of text fragments (implicit
increment one by one for both), or exactly one and the same
text fragment is assigned to all INDAS words of a given range.
- An INDAS word number may not be entered twice with different
text fragment numbers.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: INDAS WORD NUMBER=
1...4094, range of decimal numbers
b: OCANEQ FRAGMENT NUMBER=
0...65279, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE RELATIVE LANGUAGE OF ANN.ELEM.
This parameter indicates one of up to four official languages
commonly used in an exchange.
Notes:
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the INDAS document related to the OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANELEM- 10-
CAN ANGCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS
This command cancels the given announcement group data for the specified
announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement group must already exist.
- The given announcement group data to be canceled must already exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be canceled in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
DATEANN DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates a date announcement in
addition to the time announcement.
It is only allowed for time announcement groups
(GCOS=OCANEQ&TIMEANN).
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement group is administratively
blocked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANGCOS- 1-
ENTR ANGCOS
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP COS
This command enters the given announcement group data for the specified
announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement group must already exist.
- The given announcement group data (parameters GCOS and BLK) to be entered
must not already exist.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR ANGCOS - OCINDANN OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
2. ENTR ANGCOS - OCSTDANN OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
3. ENTR ANGCOS - OCTIMANN OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
4. ENTR ANGCOS - STANDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
This input format enters the given announcement group data for the specified
individual or user interactive (UI) announcement group leading to OCANEQ.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement group is administratively
blocked.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 1+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format enters the given announcement group data for the specified
standard announcement group leading to OCANEQ.

[ [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,STANNO= ,NUMCYC= ,SIT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,OCALSEQ=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<CHARGABL> CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement group is administratively
blocked.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the standard announcement number for the
announcement group.
It is evaluated only in input format OCSTDANN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1-2500, range of decimal numbers
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles.
Value 0 indicates an endless-loop announcement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
SIT SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
This parameter specifies the use of the special information tone.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 2+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
[Y [ SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for OCANEQ. Input of up to 4 languages
for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 3+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 4+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format enters the given announcement group data for the specified
time announcement group leading to OCANEQ.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,TIMINT= ,OCALSEQ=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<CHARGABL> CHARGEABLE
< > Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
<DATEANN > DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates a date announcement in
addition to the time announcement.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement group is administratively
blocked.
TIMINT PERIODIC TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval (in seconds) for
time announcements.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,15,20,30,60, range of decimal numbers
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for OCANEQ. Input of up to 4 languages
for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 5+
ENTR ANGCOS
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 6+
ENTR ANGCOS
STANDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format enters the given announcement group data for the specified
standard announcement group that is not applied via OCANEQ.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ANGCOS : TGNO= <,GCOS= ,BLK= ,STANNO= ,NUMCYC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<CHARGABL> CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement group is administratively
blocked.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the standard announcement number for the
announcement group.
It is evaluated only in input format OCSTDANN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2500, range of decimal numbers
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles.
Value 0 indicates an endless-loop announcement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANGCOS- 7-
CAN ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command cancels an existing announcement group.
Prerequisites:
- The announcement group must not contain any announcement lines.
- No route may exist to this announcement group.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANGRP : TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANGRP- 1-
CR ANGRP
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command creates an announcement group with the specified trunk group
number. All specified data will be entered in the announcement group table.
Prerequisite:
- The specified trunk group number must not exist within the exchange.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR ANGRP - OCINDANN OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
2. CR ANGRP - OCSTDANN OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
3. CR ANGRP - OCTIMANN OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
4. CR ANGRP - STANDANN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
OCANEQ INDIVIDUAL AND UI ANNOUNCEMENTS
This input format creates an announcement group for individual or user
interactive (UI) announcements leading to OCANEQ.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= [,BLK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number. Any number can be
selected by the system operator provided it is clearly identifiable
within the exchange.
It is used for:
- addressing the announcement group, if commands are entered which are
related to the announcement group.
- identifying the announcement group in system outputs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OCANEQ OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
This announcement group leads to OCANEQ.
[CHARGABL] CHARGEABLE
Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<ADMIN > ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
< > This announcement group is administratively
< > blocked.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 1+
CR ANGRP
OCINDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<MAINT > MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement group is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 2+
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OCANEQ STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an announcement group for standard announcements
leading to OCANEQ.

[ [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= ,STANNO= [,BLK=] [,NUMCYC=] [,SIT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,OCALSEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number. Any number can be
selected by the system operator provided it is clearly identifiable
within the exchange.
It is used for:
- addressing the announcement group, if commands are entered which are
related to the announcement group.
- identifying the announcement group in system outputs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OCANEQ OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
This announcement group leads to OCANEQ.
[NONBARGE] NON BARGE-IN ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates an announcement group for
non barge-in announcements.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
[ [ Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
!STAGGER - TIME STAGGER FOR NONBARGE
If this value is entered, time-staggering for the
announcement lines of this announcement group will
be activated.
Compatibilities: Only allowed for GCOS=NONBARGE.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the standard announcement number for the
announcement group.
It is evaluated only in input format OCSTDANN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1-2500, range of decimal numbers
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<ADMIN > ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 3+
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
< > This announcement group is administratively
< > blocked.
<MAINT > MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement group is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles.
Value 0 indicates an endless-loop announcement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 2
SIT SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
This parameter specifies the use of the special information tone.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered and GCOS=NONBARGE, then SIT
will be set to NO, otherwise it will be set to YES.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
[Y [ SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for OCANEQ. Input of up to 4 languages
for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 4+
CR ANGRP
OCSTDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 5+
CR ANGRP
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OCANEQ TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an announcement group for time announcements
leading to OCANEQ.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= ,GCOS= ,TIMINT= [,BLK=] [,OCALSEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number. Any number can be
selected by the system operator provided it is clearly identifiable
within the exchange.
It is used for:
- addressing the announcement group, if commands are entered which are
related to the announcement group.
- identifying the announcement group in system outputs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OCANEQ OPERATOR CONTR. ANNOUNC. EQU.
This announcement group leads to OCANEQ.
TIMEANN TIME ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates an announcement group for
time announcements.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
[ [ Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
!DATEANN - DATE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates a date announcement in
addition to the time announcement.
TIMINT PERIODIC TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval (in seconds) for
time announcements.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,15,20,30,60, range of decimal numbers
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<ADMIN > ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
< > This announcement group is administratively
< > blocked.
<MAINT > MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement group is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 6+
CR ANGRP
OCTIMANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for OCANEQ. Input of up to 4 languages
for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 7+
CR ANGRP
STANDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format creates an announcement group for standard announcements
that are not applied via OCANEQ.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANGRP : TGNO= [,GCOS=] [,BLK=] [,STANNO=] [,NUMCYC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number. Any number can be
selected by the system operator provided it is clearly identifiable
within the exchange.
It is used for:
- addressing the announcement group, if commands are entered which are
related to the announcement group.
- identifying the announcement group in system outputs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GCOS GROUP CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter defines classes of service for all announcement lines
of the announcement group. The specified data will be entered in the
announcement group table.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
[NONBARGE] NON BARGE-IN ANNOUNCEMENT
This value indicates an announcement group for
non barge-in announcements.
CHARGABL CHARGEABLE
[ [ Calls to this announcement group will be charged.
!STAGGER - TIME STAGGER FOR NONBARGE
If this value is entered, time-staggering for the
announcement lines of this announcement group will
be activated.
Compatibilities: Only allowed for GCOS=NONBARGE.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement group.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<ADMIN > ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
< > This announcement group is administratively
< > blocked.
<MAINT > MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement group is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the standard announcement number for the
announcement group.
It is evaluated only in input format OCSTDANN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2500, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 8+
CR ANGRP
STANDANN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles.
Value 0 indicates an endless-loop announcement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 2
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANGRP- 9-
DISP ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This command displays the announcement group specific data.
Prerequisite:
- The specified announcement group(s) must already exist.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ANGRP : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number(s) of the announcement
group(s) to be addressed.
Up to 34 trunk group numbers may be linked.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANGRP- 1-
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP DATA
This command enables announcement trunk group data
to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is accepted.
Notes:
- 8 measurement jobs can be started.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more than one job at
any one time.
- Traffic data are output to OMT or MDD file every 15 minutes.
- The measurement job can be stopped by STOP JOB if it is not a
daily and not a cyclic measurement job and if the time parameter
values allow a continuation of the job.
- A STOP JOB command during the last or the only measurement interval
results automatically in job termination.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC ANGRP : TGNO= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the announcement trunk groups
for which traffic data are to be recorded.
Allowed parameter values are:
- X, means: measurement of all created announcement
trunk groups,
or
- up to 16 specified announcement group numbers
(separated by &).
Prerequisites:
- The measurement of all announcement trunk groups (TGNO=X)
is only allowed if the data output will be to the magnetic
disk device (single or daily or cyclic measurement file).
Notes:
- Only the names of existing announcement trunk groups may be
specified.
Up to 16 trunk groups may be linked with &.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data will be output to
OMT every 15 minutes throughout the specified
measurement period.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC ANGRP- 1+
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is created and the received traffic data are
output every 15 minutes to this file.
After the parameter has been accepted and at
the end of the last recording, an acknowledgement
is output to the OMT. It includes the name of the
file in which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data will be
output to single measurement files.
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended, a
message appears at OMT.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data will be
output to daily files.
Additional time parameters are not allowed.
This type of measurement is appropriate to
continuous measurements which start immediately
and have no defined end.
They can only be cancelled by the command
CAN JOB.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7 daily
files (MO...SU) are prepared and created during
command acceptance.
The first data output after command acceptance
will be at the second 15-minute stroke.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day and
the new file for the next day is automatically
opened or created.
Existing files are replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file for
the same day of the week before will be
overwritten.
CYCLIC CYCLIC TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are written
into a cyclic measurement file. Time parameters
are not permitted for these measurements.
If a cyclic file runs full the newest data will
be lost. This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily or single or cyclic measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output unit = MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily or cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates may be linked with &. In case of
linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC ANGRP- 2+
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after command
entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily or cyclic files.
Default: If no termination date is entered, single day measurement
takes place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter reduces the daily data delivery by defining
measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a begin date
(BEG).
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
are to be recorded.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC ANGRP- 3+
REC ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the values NO, WO and HO which are not
linkable with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC ANGRP- 4-
CAN ANLCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS
This command cancels the given announcement line data for the specified
announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement line must already exist.
- The given data to be canceled must already exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANLCOS : TGNO= ,LNO= ,BLK= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...1000, range of decimal numbers
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement line is administratively
blocked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANLCOS- 1-
ENTR ANLCOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ANNOUNCEMENT LINE COS
This command enters the given announcement line data for the specified
announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement line must already exist.
- The given data to be entered must not already exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR ANLCOS : TGNO= ,LNO= <,BLK= ,SEIZMX=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...1000, range of decimal numbers
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement line is administratively
blocked.
SEIZMX SEIZURE COUNTER MAXIMUM VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum number of subscribers that can
simultaneously be connected to the announcement line.
- For individual announcements only value 1 is allowed.
- For time announcements or when GCOS=NONBARGE is entered for the
announcement group, value 1 is not allowed.
- When GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered for the announcement group and
when value greater than 1 is entered (broadcast), the entered value
of parameter NUMCYC is not relevant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ANLCOS- 1-
CAN ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command cancels an existing announcement line.
Prerequisites:
- The announcement line must be administrativly blocked.
- The announcement line is no longer seized for call processing.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line to be
canceled.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, the line with the highest
existing number available in the announcement group
will be deleted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...1000, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANLN- 1-
CR ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command creates an announcement line with the specified data.
Prerequisites:
- The specified announcement group must already exist.
- The specified equipment number must exist and has to be free.
Announcement lines may be created on the following port construction types:
TCB800CA
TCO305
DIUPORT
DIURAPRT
INDASPRT Prerequisite: GCOS=OCANEQ is entered for the announcement group.
INDAS0PT Prerequisite: GCOS=OCANEQ is entered for the announcement group.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ANLN : TGNO= ,EQN= [,LNO=] [,LCOS=] [,BLK=] [,SEIZMX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of the announcement
group to be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
In the case of a time announcement the following conditions apply:
- It is necessary to combine two adjacent ports to get one "logical"
port. This port pair must always be completed before another pair
is created.
- The ports of a coupled pair must belong to the same announcement
group.
- The ports of a coupled pair must have successive port numbers,
whereby the lower number always has to be odd and the higher even.
- The total number of created announcement lines for a time
announcement belonging to the same LTU:OCANEQ must not exceed 6
lines (3 pairs).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: TIME SWITCH GROUP=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANLN- 1+
CR ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the announcement line to be
created.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, the line will be given
the highest existing number available in the
announcement group plus 1. When the first line
is created, the value is set to 1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...1000, range of decimal numbers
LCOS LINE CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the signaling type when creating an
announcement line, or changes the port construction type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UIPRT USER INTERACTION PORT
This value indicates a port for user interaction.
It is only possible on port construction type
INDASPRT (ports 1..31 of LTU:OCANEQ). The
announcement group must have been created with
input format OCINDANN. The port construction type
will be changed to UIPRT.
DIGSIG16 DIGITAL SIGNALING 16
LT = 46, DIR = OG/IC, Sig. = BASIS-LIP F-SIG.
DIGSIG17 DIGITAL SIGNALING 17
LT = 46, DIR = BW/OG/IC, Sig. = E&M IMPULS
DIGSIG18 DIGITAL SIGNALING 18
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG19 DIGITAL SIGNALING 19
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG20 DIGITAL SIGNALING 20
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG21 DIGITAL SIGNALING 21
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG22 DIGITAL SIGNALING 22
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG23 DIGITAL SIGNALING 23
LT = 46, DIR = BW/OG/IC, Sig. = MIC Loop ISUP
DIGSIG1 DIGITAL SIGNALING 01
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG2 DIGITAL SIGNALING 02
LT = 46, DIR = OG/IN, Sig. = SW Loop
DIGSIG3 DIGITAL SIGNALING 03
LT = 46, DIR = BW/OG/IC, Sig. = Loop + MFC:R2D
DIGSIG4 DIGITAL SIGNALING 04
LT = 41, DIR = BW, Sig. = BSSAP
LT = 46, DIR = BW/OG/IC, Sig. = E&M MFC:R2A
DIGSIG5 DIGITAL SIGNALING 05
LT = 46, DIR = BW/IC, Sig. = Monitoring Loop
DIGSIG6 DIGITAL SIGNALING 06
LT = 46, DIR = OG/IC, Sig. = MIC-Loop TUP
DIGSIG7 DIGITAL SIGNALING 07
LT = 46, DIR = BW , Sig. = PABX-Loop TUP
DIGSIG8 DIGITAL SIGNALING 08
LT = 41, DIR = BW/OG/IC, Sig. = MUX CCS #7
LT = 46, DIR = BW/OG/IC, Sig. = MUX CCS #7
DIGSIG9 DIGITAL SIGNALING 09
LT = 46, DIR = BW/OG/IC, Sig. = Basic CAS / PABX
DIGSIG10 DIGITAL SIGNALING 10
Only possible on port construction type
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANLN- 2+
CR ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG11 DIGITAL SIGNALING 11
LT = 41, DIR = BW/IC, Sig. = IN: Leg Control
LT = 46, DIR = BW/IC, Sig. = IN: Leg Control
DIGSIG12 DIGITAL SIGNALING 12
LT = 46, DIR = BW/IC, Sig. = ISUP
DIGSIG13 DIGITAL SIGNALING 13
LT = 46, DIR = OG/IC, Sig. = Pool Echo
DIGSIG14 DIGITAL SIGNALING 14
LT = 46, DIR = BW Sig. = TUP
DIGSIG15 DIGITAL SIGNALING 15
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG24 DIGITAL SIGNALING 24
LT = 46, DIR = BW, Sig. = PBX LOOP ISUP
DIGSIG25 DIGITAL SIGNALING 25
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG26 DIGITAL SIGNALING 26
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG27 DIGITAL SIGNALING 27
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG28 DIGITAL SIGNALING 28
LT = 46, DIR = IC, Sig. = Monitoring Trunk
DIGSIG29 DIGITAL SIGNALING 29
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG30 DIGITAL SIGNALING 30
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
DIGSIG31 DIGITAL SIGNALING 31
Only possible on port construction type
DIUPORT.
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the blocking of the announcement line.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK
This announcement line is administratively
blocked.
MAINT MAINTENANCE BLOCK
This announcement line is blocked for maintenance
purposes.
SEIZMX SEIZURE COUNTER MAXIMUM VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum number of subscribers that can
simultaneously be connected to the announcement line.
- For individual announcements only value 1 is allowed.
- For time announcements or when GCOS=NONBARGE is entered for the
announcement group, value 1 is not allowed.
- When GCOS=NONBARGE is not entered for the announcement group and
when value greater than 1 is entered (broadcast), the entered value
of parameter NUMCYC is not relevant.
Standard Behavior: If no value is entered, in the case of individual
announcements the default value will be set to 1,
otherwise the default value will be set to 16.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANLN- 3-
DISP ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command displays the announcement line specific data.
Prerequisite:
- The specified announcement group(s) must already exist.
All combinations of linked trunk group numbers and linked line numbers or a
range of line numbers are possible.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number(s) of the announcement
group(s) to be addressed.
Up to 34 trunk group numbers may be linked.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number(s) of the announcement line(s)
to be displayed.
Up to 34 line numbers or ranges of line numbers may be linked.
Standard Behavior: If this parameter is not entered, all announcement
lines within the specified announcement group(s)
will be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...1000, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANLN- 1-
STAT ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF ANNOUNCEMENT LINE
This command displays the transient states and the seizure counters for one
or more or all lines of one or all announcement trunk groups.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT ANLN : TGNO= [,LNO=] [,STATUS= [,MODE=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
Notes:
- The administration assigns trunk group numbers for recorded
announcement groups, trunk groups and test equipment groups.
- The trunk group number is used in the sequence as a search criterion
for a specific group in the system.
- Only alphanumeric characters are permitted for this parameter.
- All trunk group numbers can be assigned with X.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the recorded announcement
group.
Notes:
- Up to 32 LNO parameter values can be chained as input.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
STATUS TRANSIENT RCA TRUNK STATE
This parameter specifies the status of a recorded announcement group.
The default value of this parameter is X.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OUT BUSY OUTGOING
INT BUSY INTERNAL
PBMS PORT BLOCKED BY MANUAL SWITCH
BBAC BLOCK BACKWARD
BPRM BLOCK PERMANENT
BMNT BLOCK MAINTENANCE
BADM BLOCK ADMINISTRATIVE
CADM CAMPED ON ADMINISTRATION
NLTG NOT ACCESSIBLE LTG
NDIU NOT ACCESSIBLE DIU
NPRT NOT ACCESSIBLE PORT
NCAR NOT ACCESSIBLE CARRIER
NMNT NOT ACCESSIBLE MAINTENANCE
NMNI NAC MAINTENANCE INDICATION
AUD AUDIT
MLTG MAINTENANCE BLOCKED LTG
MDIU MAINTENANCE BLOCKED DIU
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT ANLN- 1+
STAT ANLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MPRT MAINTENANCE BLOCKED PORT
CLTG CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED LTG
CDIU CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED DIU
CPRT CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED PORT
IDLE IDLE STATUS
GBAD GROUP BLOCKED ADMIN
GBMT GROUP BLOCKED MAINT
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
BSTC TRANSMISSION CHANNEL BLOCKED
MODE SEARCH MODE
This parameter specifies the search mode.
This parameter can be set up only together with the STATUS parameter.
With this parameter announcement lines with special status values can
be restricted.
The default value is ANY.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ANY ANY MATCH
ALL ALL MATCHES
ONLY EXACT STATUS MATCH
SUBSET SUBSET OF RESPECTIVE STATE SET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT ANLN- 2-
CAN ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command cancels a definition of an announcement text of OCANEQ
(Operationally Controlled Equipment for Announcement).
When the definitions of all official languages are canceled, the
textnumber and its data (use if the special information tone,
number of announcement cycles) is canceled too.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN ANTXT : TXTNO= [,LANGUAGE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the selected announcement
text.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE OF ANNOUCEMENT TEXT
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the announcement text.
Default: Announcement text is canceled for all official
languages.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ANTXT- 1-
CR ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command creates definitions of an announcement text (in up
to four languages) by combining numbers of text parts that are
available on OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled Equipment for
Announcement).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ANTXT : TXTNO= <,TXTLAN1= ,TXTLAN2= ,TXTLAN3= ,TXTLAN4=> [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SIT=] [,NUMCYC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the selected announcement
text.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
TXTLAN1 TEXT DATA OF FIRST LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the first official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN1 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
TXTLAN2 TEXT DATA OF SECOND LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the second official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN2 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
TXTLAN3 TEXT DATA OF THIRD LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the third official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANTXT- 1+
CR ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN3 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
TXTLAN4 TEXT DATA OF FOURTH LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the fourth official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN4 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SIT SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
This parameter determines whether the announcement text in every
language has to start with the special information tone or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
N NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
Y YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
Default: NO
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles for an
individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until the listener hangs up.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ANTXT- 2-
DISP ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command displays the definitions of announcement texts of OCANEQ
(Operationally Controlled Equipment of Announcement).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ANTXT : [TXTNO=] [,LANGUAGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies those numbers of the announcement texts
that shall be displayed.
Up to 10 parameter values can be linked by &.
Default: All announcement texts
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE OF ANNOUCEMENT TEXT
This parameter specifies one of up to four official languages
for the annoucement texts.
Default: The announcement texts are displayed for all the
languages for which they are defined.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN1 FIRST OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN2 SECOND OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN3 THIRD OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
LAN4 FOURTH OFFICIAL LANGUAGE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ANTXT- 1-
MOD ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT TEXT
This command modifies a definition of an announcement text (in up
to four languages) by combining numbers of text parts that are
available on OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled Equipment for
Announcement).
Modifications of the number of announcement cycles and the use of
the special information tone are valid for all languages.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ANTXT : TXTNO= <,TXTLAN1= ,TXTLAN2= ,TXTLAN3= ,TXTLAN4= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SIT= ,NUMCYC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the selected announcement
text.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
TXTLAN1 TEXT DATA OF FIRST LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the first official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN1 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
TXTLAN2 TEXT DATA OF SECOND LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the second official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN2 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
TXTLAN3 TEXT DATA OF THIRD LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the third official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANTXT- 1+
MOD ANTXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN3 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
TXTLAN4 TEXT DATA OF FOURTH LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the components of an
announcement text for the fourth official language:
- Numbers of the elements (words or phrases) on OCANEQ
- Digit strings (e.g. telephone numbers) which are
converted to their corresponding text element numbers
automatically. They start with #.
These components are connected by +.
Example: TXTLAN4 = "4+16+#73154+50".
The maximum number of text elements is 50.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SIT SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
This parameter determines whether the announcement text in every
language has to start with the special information tone or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
N NO SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
YES YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
Y YES SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NUMCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of announcement cycles for an
individual announcement.
Notes:
NUMCYC = 0 results in announcement running until the listener hangs up.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...127, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ANTXT- 2-
CAN APPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL APPLICATION
This command cancels all information concerning the specified application.
Notes:
- NEATT data network:
When this command is entered, the server concerned is sent a message
informing it of the modification to the database (providing that it is
registered). If the server acknowledges this modification negatively,
the command will not be executed.
- OSI data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, the local application
concerned (providing it is registered) is sent a message informing
it of the modification to the database. If the local application
acknowledges this modification negatively, the command will not be
executed.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of the application in
an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN APPL- 1-
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE APPLICATION
This command is used to create applications in processors.
- NEATT data network:
When this command is entered, a message is sent to the server concerned,
informing it of the database modification (providing the server is
registered). If the server acknowledges this modification negatively,
the command will not be executed.
- OSI and IP data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, a message is sent to
the local application concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the local application is registered). If the local application
acknowledges this modification negatively, the command will not be
executed.
The servers are the local partners from remote applications in the NEATT
data network. They only report in a special table of the databases.The
difference between servers and local applications is that local applications
must be additionally created via command CR APPL. Local applications
are only used in data networks with OSI or IP addressing.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR APPL - CRNEAAPL CREATE NEA APPLICATIONS
2. CR APPL - CROSIAPL CREATE OSI APPLICATIONS
1. Input format
CREATE NEA APPLICATIONS
Input format for NEA applications.
When this command is entered, a message is sent to the server concerned,
informing it of the database modification (providing the server is
registered). If the server acknowledges this modification negatively,
the command will not be executed.

[ [
[ CR APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ,ADRNAM= [,SSID=] [,PSID=] [
[ [
[ [,SERVID=] [,AUT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the application
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR APPL- 1+
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA or OSI
or IPA.
- Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- In the OSI data network a maximum of sixteen addresses can be
specified.
- If the entered address is an IP-address only one address is
allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SESSION SERVICE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the session layer for
file transfer jobs (layer 5 in the ISO reference model).
Notes:
- Default: "FJAM" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
for all NEAB applications).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PSID PRESENTATION PROCESSOR ID
This parameter specifies the name of the presentation layer for
file transfer jobs (layer 6 in the ISO reference model).
Notes:
- Default: "NDMS" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
for all NEAB applications).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SERVID SERVER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the server responsible for
the applications which have been entered.
Notes:
- Only those servers already registered in the CLS database can
be assigned to the applications ( not to be used with
OSI-addresses).
- The parameter SERVID specifies the service identification
associated with the application. The local application is to
be taken from the software module specific documentation.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR APPL- 2+
CR APPL
CRNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
AUT AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the authorization name for an external
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must previously be created using the
command ENTR AUT.
Notes:
- The authorization must be specified for dialog applications.
- This parameter can be entered only for remote applications.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR APPL- 3+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE OSI APPLICATIONS
Input format for OSI applications.
If the command is entered for remote applications, a message is sent to
the local application concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the local application is registered). If the local application
acknowledges this modification negatively, the command will not be
executed.

[ [
[ CR APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= ,ADRNAM= [,LOCAPL=] [,PORTNR=] [
[ [
[ [,SPROCESS=] [,AUT=] [,TSEL=] [,SSEL=] [,PSEL=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,AET=[[ [
[ [,MUX=] [,APQ=[ [,AEQ=] [,APPLC=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the application
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA or OSI
or IPA.
- Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- In the OSI data network a maximum of sixteen addresses can be
specified.
- If the entered address is an IP-address only one address is
allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LOCAPL LOCAL APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the corresponding
local application.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered only for remote
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR APPL- 4+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
applications connected via TCP/IP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PORTNR PORTNUMBER
This parameter specifies application specific portnumbers.
Notes:
- The parameter can be entered only for remote applications
connected via TCP/IP.
- If the parameter is not entered the default value 102 will
be administrated.
- The value of the portnumber can be an integer value from
0 to 32767.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
Default: 102
SPROCESS SERVER PROCESS
This parameter specifies the name of the server process
which supports the entered application.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
AUT AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the authorization name for an external
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must previously be created using the
command ENTR AUT.
Notes:
- The authorization must be specified for dialog applications.
- This parameter can be entered only for remote applications.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: 0
TSEL TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Transport Layer Entity.
In case of OSI applications that do not allow the use of selectors
this parameter can not be entered.
Notes:
-Only hexadecimal values (numbers from 0 to 9 and characters
from A to F) are allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...64 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSEL SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Session Layer Entity.
In case of OSI applications that do not allow the use of selectors
this parameter can not be entered.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR APPL- 5+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Only hexadecimal values (numbers from 0 to 9 and characters
from A to F) are allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PSEL PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the Presentation Layer Entity.
In case of OSI applications that do not allow the use of selectors
this parameter can not be entered.
Notes:
-Only hexadecimal values (numbers from 0 to 9 and characters
from A to F) are allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MUX MULTIPLEX SIGN
This parameter specifies if a remote application can be multiplexed
or not.
If this parameter is not entered the value is set to NO. This means
that the application cannot be multiplexed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
YES MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
AET APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
This parameter is an additional identification of the
application.
A maximum of 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- For the first component only the values 0, 1 and
2 are allowed.
- For the second component only a value from 0 to
39 is allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
APQ APPLICATION PROCESS QUALIFIER
The application process qualifier is a part of the
application entity title and specifies the application
on a specific processor.
Notes:
-The parameter APQ can only be entered for applications
with a server process on a processor with system title.
-The maximum length of APQ is 14 components.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
AEQ APPLICATION ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter is a part of the application entity title.
Notes:
-This parameter can only be entered if the parameter
APQ has been entered, too.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR APPL- 6+
CR APPL
CROSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0...2147483646, range of decimal numbers
APPLC APPLICATION CONTEXT
This parameter specifies the application context.
A maximum of 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered for local Q3-application.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR APPL- 7-
DISP APPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY APPLICATION
This command displays information about:
- one application in a processor, or
- all applications in a processor, or
- all known applications.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP APPL : APPLID= [,PRONAM=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of the application in all
processors.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ALL ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies if only short information (NO)
or all information (YES) about the application will be
displayed.
If the parameter is not entered, the short information
will be displayed.
YES can only be entered for a specified application.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
YES DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
N DISPLAY SHORT INFORMATION
NO DISPLAY SHORT INFORMATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP APPL- 1-
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY APPLICATION
This command modifies information concerning applications which have
been entered.
- NEATT data network:
If no default application is present, a message is sent to the
server concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the server is registered). If the server acknowledges
this modification negatively, the command will not be executed.
- OSI and IP data network:
If this command is entered for remote applications, a message
is sent to the local application concerned, informing it of the
database modification (providing the local application is
registered). If the local application acknowledges this modification
negatively, the command will not be executed.
- The authorization (parameter AUT) can also be modified in the
case of default applications.
- The names of the message and data description levels (parameters
SSID and PSID) can also be modified in the case of default
applications.
- In case of default applications, the address name cannot be
modified by the MOD APPL command. The MOD PRO command has to be
used.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD APPL - MDNEAAPL MODIFY NEA APPLICATIONS
2. MOD APPL - MDOSIAPL MODIFY OSI APPLICATIONS
1. Input format
MODIFY NEA APPLICATIONS
Input format for NEA applications.
If no default application is present, a message is sent to the
server concerned, informing it of the database modification
(providing the server is registered). If the server acknowledges
this modification negatively, the command will not be executed.

[ [
[ MOD APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= [,ADRNAM=] [,AUT=] [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ [,PSID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the application
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
n
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD APPL- 1+
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA or OSI
or IPA.
Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- Only in OSI data network can a maximum of sixteen addresses be
specified.
- If the entered address is an IP-address only one address is
allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
AUT AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the authorization name for an external
application.
Prerequisites:
- The authorization name must be created previously.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered only for remote applications.
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SESSION SERVICE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the name of the session layer for
file transfer jobs (layer 5 in the ISO reference model).
Notes:
- Default: "FJAM" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
for all NEAB applications).
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PSID PRESENTATION PROCESSOR ID
This parameter specifies the name of the presentation layer for
file transfer jobs (layer 6 in the ISO reference model).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD APPL- 2+
MOD APPL
MDNEAAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Default: "NDMS" (only valid for PROTYP=
SSP
DCPSR
DCPDR
PDCPSR
PDCPDR
DCPXSR
DCPXDR
BS2
MVS
OMTD
OMTX
for all NEAB applications).
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD APPL- 3+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY OSI APPLICATIONS
Input format for OSI applications.
If the command is entered for remote applications, a message is
sent to the local application concerned, informing it of the
database modification (providing the local application is
registered). If the application acknowledges this modification
negatively, the command will not be executed.

[ [
[ MOD APPL : APPLID= ,PRONAM= [,ADRNAM=] [,AUT=] [,OTSEL=] [
[ [
[ [,OSSEL=] [,OPSEL=] [,NTSEL=] [,NSSEL=] [,NPSEL=] [
[ [
[ [,MUX=] [,OAET=] [,NAET=] [,OAPQ=] [,NAPQ=] [
[ [
[ [,OAEQ=] [,NAEQ=] [,OAPPLC=] [,NAPPLC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the application
in an OSS
OMTA
OMTS
ANSI
SSP
and CPE
processor type.
n
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic processor name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
Notes:
- The first three characters of the name must be NEA or OSI
or IPA.
Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
- Only in OSI data network can a maximum of sixteen addresses be
specified.
- If the entered address is an IP-address only one address is
allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
AUT AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the authorization name for an external
application.
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD APPL- 4+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The authorization name must be created previously.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered only for remote applications.
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OTSEL OLD TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Transport
Layer Entity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...64 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OSSEL OLD SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Session Layer
Entity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OPSEL OLD PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the old value assigned to the Presentation
Layer Entity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NTSEL NEW TRANSPORT SELECTOR
This value specifies the new value of the Transport Layer Entity.
If Transport Layer Entity already has an old value the user must
enter the OTSEL parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...64 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NSSEL NEW SESSION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the new value of the Session Layer Entity.
If Session Layer Entity already has an old value, the user must
enter the OSSEL parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NPSEL NEW PRESENTATION SELECTOR
This parameter specifies the new value of the Presentation Layer
Entity.
If the Presentation Layer Entity already has an old value the user
must enter the OPSEL parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD APPL- 5+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MUX MULTIPLEX SIGN
This parameter specifies if a remote application can be multiplexed
or not.
If this parameter is not entered the value is set to NO. This means
that the application cannot be multiplexed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
YES MULTIPLEX ALLOWED
OAET OLD APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
This parameter is an additional identification of the
application. It specifies the old value of the identification.
A maximum of 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- For the first component only the values 0, 1 and
2 are allowed.
- For the second component only a value from 0 to
39 is allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
NAET NEW APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE
This parameter is an additional identification of the
application. It specifies the new value of the application
entity title.
A maximum of 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- For the first component only the values 0, 1 and
2 are allowed.
- For the second component only a value from 0 to
39 is allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
OAPQ OLD APPL. PROCESS QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the old value of the application
process qualifier.
A maximum of 14 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
NAPQ NEW APPL. PROCESS QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the new value for the
application process qualifier.
A maximum of 14 parameter values can be linked with &
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
OAEQ OLD APPL. ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the old value for the
application entity qualifier.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483646, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD APPL- 6+
MOD APPL
MDOSIAPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NAEQ NEW APPL. ENTITY QUALIFIER
This parameter specifies the new value for the
application entity qualifier.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483646, range of decimal numbers
OAPPLC OLD APPLICATION CONTEXT
This parameter specifies the old application context.
A maximum of 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered for a local Q3-application.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
NAPPLC NEW APPLICATION CONTEXT
This parameter specifies the new application context.
A maximum of 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered for a local Q3-application.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD APPL- 7-
ENTR APSNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER APS NAME
This command enters the name and version number of an APS.
The name and version number of an APS appear in the 1st header line
of every output.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR APSNAME : NAME= [,VN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the name segment in the APS version.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
VN VERSION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the version number of an APS.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR APSNAME- 1-
INCR APSVN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INCREMENT APS VERSION NUMBER
This command increments the APS version number by 1.
The version number appears in the 1st header line of every output.
Input format

[ [
[ INCR APSVN ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INCR APSVN- 1-
MOD ARCHIVE
COMPRESS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ARCHIVE FILE
This command comprises two functions:
- Compress one or more files and combine these files to an
archive file.
- Extract all files from an existing archive.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD ARCHIVE - COMPRESS ENTRY FOR COMPRESSING FILES
2. MOD ARCHIVE - EXTRACT ENTRY FOR EXTRACTING FILES
1. Input format
ENTRY FOR COMPRESSING FILES
This command compresses the files listed in FILE and stores
them in the ARCHIVE file.
Prerequisite:
The archive file must not exist.

[ [
[ MOD ARCHIVE : OPTION= ,ARCHIVE= ,FILE= [,GEN=] [,SSWF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OPTION COMPRESSING OPTION
This parameter specifies which function of the command
has to be performed.
Note:
Valid values are:
- COMPRESS
- EXTRACT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMPRESS COMPRESS FILE
ARCHIVE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the archive file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILE FILE LIST
This parameter specifies a list of up to 10 file names
that will be compressed and combined to the archive
file.
Each file name can specify either a fully qualified
file name or a partly qualified file name with a dot
at the end of the file name.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GEN GENERATION NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the generation the files
belong to.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ARCHIVE- 1+
MOD ARCHIVE
COMPRESS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default:
Files of actual generation and non-generation files.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSWF SUPPORT SOFTWARE FORMAT
This parameter specifies if an SSWF header will be
added to each of the specified files when a new
archive file is created or if an SSWF header exists
for the files in an archive.
Default:
- a
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO SSWF HEADER TREATMENT
YES INCLUDE SSWF HEADER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ARCHIVE- 2+
MOD ARCHIVE
EXTRACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTRY FOR EXTRACTING FILES
This command extracts all files stored in the specified archive.
The extracted files are not added to a generation.

[ [
[ MOD ARCHIVE : OPTION= ,ARCHIVE= [,SSWF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OPTION COMPRESSING OPTION
This parameter specifies which function of the command
has to be performed.
Note:
Valid values are:
- COMPRESS
- EXTRACT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EXTRACT EXTRACT FILE
ARCHIVE ARCHIVE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the archive file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSWF SUPPORT SOFTWARE FORMAT
This parameter specifies if an SSWF header will be
added to each of the specified files when a new
archive file is created or if an SSWF header exists
for the files in an archive.
Default:
- a
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO SSWF HEADER TREATMENT
YES INCLUDE SSWF HEADER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ARCHIVE- 3-
CAN AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This command cancels the local area code (as well as existing
blocks in the digit destination translator)
or the local area code originating from the local area code table.
Prerequisites:
- No linkages from the entered local area code to directory numbers,
code points, bothway trunk groups or test equipments exist.
- No linkages from the entered local area code originating to digit zone
translators, bothway trunk groups or iarstat data exist.
Attention:
- Before canceling the local area code:
- verify that no traffic measurement to the old local area code is
running since traffic measurements may be performed for code belonging
to this local area code,
- verify that no traffic type code point beginning with the same digit
string like the old local area code still exists.
- If a DLU is entered, only the linkage between the local area code and
the DLU will be canceled, not the local area code itself.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [LAC= [ ; [
[ CAN AREACODE : LACOR= [,DLU=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
It consists of the national prefix code
and the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code originating.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the external DLU number.
Notes:
- Up to 32 DLUs can be linked.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN AREACODE- 1-
DISP AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCAL AREA CODE DATA
This command displays the local area code(s) with their appropriate DLUs
and the LACEXT value.
Furthermore it displays the local area codes originating.
It is possible to define one, several or all local area codes for display.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AREACODE : <LAC= ,LACOR=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit decimal number
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code originating.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AREACODE- 1-
ENTR AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCAL AREA CODE
This command creates a local area code or a local area code originating,
i.e. an entry in the table of local area codes.
DLUs and LACEXT can be assigned to the local area code with the
same command.
(Depending on the number of digits entered and EVLAC was preset
or the DNVOL is multiple (see MML command ENTR DNATT),
the blocks are seized in the digit-destination translator and
linked together.)
The entire digit combination of the local area code (i.e. with national
prefix code) and the area code table are transmitted to the
GP (group processor).
The entire digit combination of the local area code originating are
transmitted to the GP (group processor), too.
Prerequisites:
- Before a local area code will be created, the directory number attribute
must be entered (see MML command ENTR DNATT).
- The local area code to be created may be a part of another shorter local
area code.
- The local area code to be created may not be part of another digit chain.
- The number of digits in the local area code must be greater or equal as
the national prefix code length.
- The specified DLU must have been created before.
It isnt possible to assign a DLU to a local area code if this DLU
was assigned to another local area code before.
- The local area code originating to be created may not be part of another
local area code or local area code originating.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [LAC= [ ; [
[ ENTR AREACODE : LACOR= [,DLU=] [,LACEXT=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code.
Notes:
- Up to 50 local area codes can be set up in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code originating.
Notes:
- Up to 48 local area codes originating can be set up in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the external DLU number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR AREACODE- 1+
ENTR AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Up to 32 DLUs can be linked.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
LACEXT EXTENTION OF LAC FOR ACC.REC.
This parameter specifies the completion digit for a 3-digit area code
or a changed 3-digit area code for building the area code part in the
account record.
The local area code in the account record has no national prefix
code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO COMPLETION DIGIT
NO NO COMPLETION DIGIT
Y COMPLETION DIGIT 0 OR 1
YES COMPLETION DIGIT 0 OR 1
3-digit area code will be completed with 1 to
XXX1 and changed 3-digit area code will be
completed with 0 to XXX0.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR AREACODE- 2-
MOD AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOCAL AREA CODE
This command modifies the local area code whereby the DLU allocation
remains unchanged.
The LACEXT value for the new local area code can be modified also.
Alternatively it is possible to modify the local area code originating.
Before command execution, a check is made to see whether the old local
area code (originating also) exists and whether the new one is available.
Prerequisites:
- The number of digits of the local area code has to be greater or equal
than that of the national prefix code.
Attention:
- Before modifying the local area code to a new local area code:
- verify that no traffic measurement to the old area code is running,
since traffic measurements may be performed for code belonging to the
old local area code,
- verify that no traffic type code point beginning with the same digit
string like the old local area code still exists.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [LAC= [ ; [
[ MOD AREACODE : LACOR= [,NEWLAC=] [,LACEXT=] [,NLACOR=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
It usually consists of the national prefix code
and the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
It usually consists of the national prefix code and the
local area code originating.
Notes:
- Up to 48 local area codes originating can be set up in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
NEWLAC NEW LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the new local area code. It has the same
attributes as the old local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LACEXT EXTENTION OF LAC FOR ACC.REC.
This parameter specifies the completion digit for a 3-digit area code
or a changed 3-digit area code for building the area code part in the
account record.
The local area code in the account record has no national prefix
code.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AREACODE- 1+
MOD AREACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO COMPLETION DIGIT
NO NO COMPLETION DIGIT
Y COMPLETION DIGIT 0 OR 1
YES COMPLETION DIGIT 0 OR 1
3-digit area code will be completed with 1 to
XXX1 and changed 3-digit area code will be
completed with 0 to XXX0.
NLACOR NEW LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATG.
This parameter specifies the new local area code originating.
It has the same attributes as the old local area code originating.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AREACODE- 2-
CAN ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel ATM Switching Network
This task deletes an ]ASN].
Prerequisite:
- The ]ASNs] with number 1 or 2 must not be deleted.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ASN : ASN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ASN
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 3...9.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ASN- 1-
CONF ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Configure ATM Switching Network
This task configures an ]ACCG] or an ]ASN].
There is a choice between the states ]Locked], ]Unlocked], ]Reserved] and
]Under repair]. If the input of ]Admin. state] is ]Locked]
then ]Hazard check] can be performed. Performing
the ]Hazard check] means that in case a hazard is
detected, the configuration will not be executed and detected hazards are
displayed in the output table as Hazards. Not performing the
]Hazard check] means that the configuration will
be executed always and detected hazards are displayed in the output table
as Actual effects.
If there is no input for ]ASN], then
the ]ACCG] will be configured, else the given
]ASN] will be configured.
Prerequisite:
- Only the ]ACCG] with number 2 is allowed.
Notes:
- If ]Admin. state] is not ]Locked] the inputparameter
]Hazard check] is not used.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF ASN : Side= ,ACCG= [,ASN=] ,Admin. state= ,Hazard check= [
[ [
[ [,Load information=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The only allowed value is 2.
ASN
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...9.
Admin. state
This parameter is used to select the kind of configuration.
Hazard check
If this parameter is ]Yes], ]Hazard check]
is started at the deactivation of a unit.
Load information
This parameter specifies if the code portion should be loaded by force
or only if necessary.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF ASN- 1-
CR ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create ATM Switching Network
This task creates an ]ASN].
Prerequisites:
- One ]ASN] with number 2 exists in the system.
- One ]ASMG] with number 1 exists in the system.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ASN : ASN= ,Rack= ,Shelf= ,Pitch= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ASN
This parameter is the number of an ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 3...9.
Rack
This parameter is the name of an existing ]Rack].
Allowed values are symbolic names of exactly 8 characters.
Shelf
This parameter is the number of an existing ]Shelf].
Pitch
This parameter is the number of an existing ]Pitch].
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ASN- 1+
CR ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ASN- 2-
DIAG ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Diagnose ATM Switching Network
This task starts diagnoses of an ]ACCG] or an ]ASN].
If there is no input for ]ASN], then the ]ACCG] is diagnosed.
Prerequisite:
- Only the ]ACCG] with number 2 is allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG ASN : Side= ,ACCG= [,ASN=] ,Kind of diagnosis= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The only allowed value is 2.
ASN
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...9.
Kind of diagnosis
This parameter specifies the kind of diagnosis.
Following values are allowed:
]Self diagnosis]:
Base test for the unit.
It checks the availability and the workability of
the components .
Resets unit and becomes ]Self diagnosis].
No further tests are performed.
]Quick diagnosis]:
Performs a more comprehensive test than ]Self
diagnosis].
It includes all diagnosis tests without long
running
tests.
It must include testing of those hardware parts
which
are tested during normal operation.
]Complete diagnosis]:
This option performs full testing of all the
object functions, including tests which take a
long time
to complete such as memory tests.
]Cable diagnosis]:
This value is only allowed for ]ASN]:
It verifies correct plugging of cables (Yb Ports
only).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG ASN- 1-
DISP ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Switching Network
This task displays one or all ]ASNs] and ]ACCGs].
Following combinations are allowed:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT | OUTPUT !
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! - | all ]ACCGs] and all ]ASNs] with ]ASNTYPE] are displayed !
!]Side] | one ]ACCG] and one ]ASN] of one ]Side] are displayed !
!]Side], ]ACCG] | one ]ACCG] of one ]Side] is displayed !
!]Side], ]ACCG], ]ASN]| one ]ASN] of one ]Side] is displayed. !
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Prerequisite:
- Only the ]ACCG] with number 2 is allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ASN : [Side=] [,ACCG=] [,ASN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The only allowed value is 2.
ASN
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...9.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ASN- 1-
MOD ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM Switching Network
This task changes the value of the ]Alarm profile MP]
of ]ASN] or ]ACCG] of both ]Sides].
If there is no input for ]Side] the
]Alarm profile MP] of ]ACCG]
is changed. Also the ]Board type] of ]ACCG] can be changed.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ASN : ACCG= [,Side=] [,ASN Switching Board=] [
[ [
[ [,ASN Switching Module=] [,Alarm profile MP=] [
[ [
[ [,Board type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ASN Switching Board
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN Switching Board].
If Board Type is ASMG16-16 or ASMG8-8 ASN Switching Board must be 1.
ASN Switching Module
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN Switching Module].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...9.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASN- 1+
MOD ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
Board type
Attribute to specify the board (hardware) of a unit.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASN- 2-
RECOV ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Recover ATM Switching Network
This task is used to recover an ]ASN].
Allowed parameters for recovery of ]ASN] are:
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! ]Scope] ]Depth] ]Measures] !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
!LOADREC2 ]Platform] ]Cold start] ]Loading of code and data] !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ RECOV ASN : Side= ,ACCG= ,Scope= ,Depth= ,Measures= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The only allowed value is 2.
This is the ]ACCG] of the ]ASN].
Scope
This parameter specifies that only the addressed ]Platform] is recovered.
Depth
This parameter specifies that the recovery shall be a ]Cold start]
recovery.
Measures
This parameter specifies that code and data are reloaded.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RECOV ASN- 1-
STAT ASN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Status of ATM Switching Network
This task displays the state of ]ASN] and ]ACCG].
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT | OUTPUT !
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! - | states of all ]ACCGs] and of all ]ASNs] are displayed !
!]Side] | states of one ]ACCG] and of one ]ASN] of one ]Side] !
! | are displayed !
!]Side], ]ACCG] | state of one ]ACCG] of one ]Side] is displayed !
!]Side], ]ACCG], ]ASN]| state of one ]ASN] of one ]Side] is displayed !
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Prerequisite:
- Only the ]ACCG] with number 2 is allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT ASN : [Side=] [,ACCG=] [,ASN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The only allowed value is 2.
ASN
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...9.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT ASN- 1-
DISP ASNPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Switching Network Port
This task displays the ASN ports of one ]ASN].
Prerequisite:
- Only the ]ACCG] with number 2 is allowed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ASNPORT : Side= ,ACCG= ,ASN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG].
The only allowed value is 2.
ASN
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ASN].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...9.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ASNPORT- 1-
CAN ASYMKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ASYMMETRICAL KEYS
This command cancels the information on the Access Control Modules
(ACMs). By means of an external interface device (chip card reader),
the keys on the ACMs are deleted. The chip card reader is connected
to the specified IOP:AUC.
Notes:
- Remark that the specified IOP:AUC must be ACT or MBL.
- During command execution, instructions are given to the operator
about the actions that he must take.
- This means that the first ACM must be inserted in the chip card
reader when the text INSERT FIRST ACCESS CONTROL MODULE (ACM)
is displayed on the OMT.
- When the text INSERT SECOND ACCESS CONTROL MODULE (ACM) is
displayed on the OMT, the first ACM must be removed and the
second ACM must be inserted in the chip card reader.
- The second ACM may NOT be removed before the command execution is
ended or an error mask is displayed on the OMT.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is only permitted if an authentication center
(AC) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ASYMKEY : IOPAUC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOPAUC IOPAUC NUMBER
This parameter specifies the IOP:AUC to which the chip card reader is
connected. The keys on the ACMs are deleted via this IOP:AUC.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...43, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ASYMKEY- 1-
ENTR ASYMKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER ASYMMETRICAL KEYS
This command enters the asymmetrical keys from Access Control Modules
(ACMs).
By means of an external interface device (Chip card reader), the keys
on the ACMs are transferred to the specified IOP:AUC.
Afterwards, the keys are distributed to the other active IOP:AUCs.
Following keys are loaded :
- Public key of the Authentication Centre (AC)
- Secret key of the Authentication Centre (AC)
- Public key of the Security Management Centre (SMC)
Notes:
- Remark that the specified IOP:AUC must be ACT or MBL.
If the specified IOP:AUC is MBL, no other IOP:AUCs may be ACT.
- During command execution, instructions are given to the operator
about the actions that he must take.
- This means that the first ACM must be inserted in the chip card
reader when the text INSERT FIRST ACCESS CONTROL MODULE (ACM)
is displayed on the OMT.
- When the text INSERT SECOND ACCESS CONTROL MODULE (ACM) is
displayed on the OMT, the first ACM must be removed and the
second ACM must be inserted in the chip card reader.
- The second ACM may NOT be removed before the command execution
is ended or an error mask is displayed on the OMT.
- Remark that the command may not be executed when one of the
IOP:AUCs in the system is in test. (This means when test or
diagnose is running on an IOP:AUC.)
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is only permitted if an authentication center
(AC) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR ASYMKEY : IOPAUC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOPAUC IOPAUC NUMBER
This parameter specifies the IOP:AUC to which the chip card reader is
connected. The keys on the ACMs will be transferred to this IOP:AUC
initially.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...43, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR ASYMKEY- 1-
MOD ASYMKEY
MODMKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ASYMMETRICAL KEYS
This command modifies asymmetrical keys in the Authentication Center.
It is possible to update two kind of asymmetrical keys:
- master key set of the Authentication Center
- public key of the communication partners of the Authentication Center.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD ASYMKEY - MODMKEY MODIFY MASTER KEY SET
2. MOD ASYMKEY - MODPKEY MODIFY PUBLIC KEY
1. Input format
MODIFY MASTER KEY SET
Input format for modifying the master key set of the authentication
center.

[ [
[ MOD ASYMKEY : TYPE= ,INVOKER= ,DATE= ,TIME= ,KOWNER= [
[ [
[ ,PUBEXP= ,PUBSGN= ,MODULUS= ,MODSGN= ,SECEXP1= [
[ [
[ ,SECEXP2= ,SECSGN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the kind of asymmetrical key entered in the
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MASTER UPDATE MASTER KEY
This parameter value specifies that the master key
Authentication Center will be updated. The master k
by the public key and the secret key of the Authent
INVOKER INVOKER OF THE COMMAND
This parameter specifies the network component which initiates the
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...30 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DATE DATE OF VALIDITY
This parameter specifies the date (year-month-day).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 1+
MOD ASYMKEY
MODMKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TIME TIME OF VALIDITY
This parameter specifies the time (hour-minute-second).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
KOWNER KEY OWNER
This parameter specifies the network component of which the asymmetrical
key will be modified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...30 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PUBEXP PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT
This parameter specifies the exponent of the public key. A public key
is represented by the public exponent and the modulus.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT1=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT2=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT3=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT4=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PUBSGN PUBLIC KEY SIGNATURE
This parameter specifies the signature of the exponent of the public
key.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: PUBLIC KEY SIGN1=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: PUBLIC KEY SIGN2=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 2+
MOD ASYMKEY
MODMKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: PUBLIC KEY SIGN3=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: PUBLIC KEY SIGN4=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MODULUS PUBLIC KEY MODULUS
This parameter specifies the modulus of the public key. A public key
is represented by the public exponent and the modulus.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: MODULUS1=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: MODULUS2=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: MODULUS3=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: MODULUS4=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MODSGN MODULUS SIGNATURE
This parameter spcifies the signature of the modulus of the public key.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: MODULUS SIGN1=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: MODULUS SIGN2=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: MODULUS SIGN3=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: MODULUS SIGN4=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SECEXP1 ENCRYPTED SECRET KEY EXPONENT1
This parameter specifies the first part of the encrypted secret key
exponent.
A secret key is represented by a secret exponent and the same modulus
as used for the public key.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 3+
MOD ASYMKEY
MODMKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: SECRET KEY EXPONENT11=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: SECRET KEY EXPONENT12=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: SECRET KEY EXPONENT13=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: SECRET KEY EXPONENT14=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SECEXP2 ENCRYPTED SECRET KEY EXPONENT2
This parameter specifies the second part of the encrypted secret key
exponent.
A secret key is represented by the secret exponent and the same modulus
as used for the public key.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: SECRET KEY EXPONENT21=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: SECRET KEYEXPONENT22=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: SECRET KEY EXPONENT23=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: SECRET KEY EXPONENT24=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SECSGN SECRET KEY SIGNATURE
This parameter specifies the signature of the exponent of the secret
key.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: SECRET KEY SIGN1=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: SECRET KEY SIGN2=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: SECRET KEY SIGN3=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 4+
MOD ASYMKEY
MODMKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: SECRET KEY SIGN4=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 5+
MOD ASYMKEY
MODPKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY PUBLIC KEY
Input format for modifying the public key of the communication partners
of the authentication center.

[ [
[ MOD ASYMKEY : TYPE= ,INVOKER= ,DATE= ,TIME= ,KOWNER= [
[ [
[ ,PUBEXP= ,PUBSGN= ,MODULUS= ,MODSGN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the kind of asymmetrical key entered in the
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PUBLIC UPDATE PUBLIC KEY
This parameter value specifies that the public key
partners of the Authentication Center will be updat
INVOKER INVOKER OF THE COMMAND
This parameter specifies the network component which initiates the
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...30 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DATE DATE OF VALIDITY
This parameter specifies the date (year-month-day).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TIME TIME OF VALIDITY
This parameter specifies the time (hour-minute-second).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 6+
MOD ASYMKEY
MODPKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KOWNER KEY OWNER
This parameter specifies the network component of which the asymmetrical
key will be modified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...30 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PUBEXP PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT
This parameter specifies the exponent of the public key. A public key
is represented by the public exponent and the modulus.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT1=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT2=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT3=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: PUBLIC KEY EXPONENT4=
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PUBSGN PUBLIC KEY SIGNATURE
This parameter specifies the signature of the exponent of the public
key.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: PUBLIC KEY SIGN1=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: PUBLIC KEY SIGN2=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: PUBLIC KEY SIGN3=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: PUBLIC KEY SIGN4=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MODULUS PUBLIC KEY MODULUS
This parameter specifies the modulus of the public key. A public key
is represented by the public exponent and the modulus.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 7+
MOD ASYMKEY
MODPKEY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: MODULUS1=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: MODULUS2=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: MODULUS3=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: MODULUS4=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MODSGN MODULUS SIGNATURE
This parameter spcifies the signature of the modulus of the public key.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: MODULUS SIGN1=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: MODULUS SIGN2=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
c: MODULUS SIGN3=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
d: MODULUS SIGN4=
32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ASYMKEY- 8-
CAN ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel ATM Bridge
This task deletes an ]ATMB].
Prerequisite:
- It is not allowed to delete the ]ATMBs] with number 1, 2 or 3.
- Only the ]ATMB] with the highest ID can be deleted.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ATMB : ATMB= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ATMB
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ATMB].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 4...11.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ATMB- 1-
CONF ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Configure ATM Bridge
This task configures an ]ATMB].
There is a choice between the ]Admin. state] ]Locked], ]Unlocked]
and ]Reserved].
If the input of ]Admin. state] is ]Locked], then ]Hazard check] can
be performed. Performing the ]Hazard check] means, that in case a hazard
is detected, the configuration will not be executed and detected hazards are
displayed in the output table as Hazards. Not performing the ]Hazard check]
means, that the configuration will be executed always and detected hazards are
displayed in the output table as Actual effects.
If there is an input for the parameter ]Side], then only one
side (0 or 1) will be configured.
For one side it is not allowed to use the ]Admin. state] ]Reserved].
Notes:
If ]Admin. state] is not ]Locked], the input parameter ]Hazard check]
is not used.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF ATMB : ATMB= [,Side=] ,Admin. state= ,Hazard check= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ATMB
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ATMB].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...11.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Admin. state
This parameter is used to select the kind of configuration.
Hazard check
If this parameter is ]Yes], ]Hazard check]
is started at the deactivation of a unit.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF ATMB- 1-
CR ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create ATM Bridge
This task creates the ]ATMB].
Only ]ATMBs] of ]ATMB type] Message Buffer (]ATMBM]) are created.
Prerequisite:
- An ]AMX] must exist.
- The ]AMX] is connected with less than two ]ATMBs].
- The ]ATMBs] with the numbers 1, 2 and 3 already exist in the system.
- There must not be any gaps in the ]ATMB] values.
Input format

[ [
[ CR ATMB : ATMB= ,ACCG= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ATMB
This parameter is the number of an ]ATMB].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 4...11.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ACCG] of an ]AMX].
The values 1 or 2 are not allowed.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ATMB- 1+
CR ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ATMB- 2-
DISP ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display ATM Bridge
This task displays an ]ATMB].
Following combinations are allowed:
+---------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT | OUTPUT !
+---------------------------------------------------------+
! - | each ]Side] of all ]ATMBs] is displayed !
! ]ATMB] | each ]Side] of one ]ATMB] is displayed !
!]ATMB], ]Side] | one ]Side] of one ]ATMB] is displayed !
+---------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ATMB : [ATMB=] [,Side=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ATMB
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ATMB].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...11.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ATMB- 1-
MOD ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify ATM Bridge
This task changes the value of the ]Alarm profile MP] of both sides
of the ]ATMB].
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ATMB : ATMB= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ATMB
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ATMB].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...11.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ATMB- 1+
MOD ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ATMB- 2-
STAT ATMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Status of ATM Bridge
This task displays the state of ]ATMB].
Following combinations are allowed:
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT | OUTPUT !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! - | states of all ]ATMBs] and of each side of all ]ATMBs] are !
! | displayed !
! ]ATMB] | states of one ]ATMB] and of each side of one ]ATMBs] are !
! | displayed !
!]ATMB], ]Side] | state of one ]Side] of one ]ATMB] is displayed !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ STAT ATMB : [ATMB=] [,Side=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ATMB
This parameter is the number of an existing ]ATMB].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...11.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT ATMB- 1-
ALLOW AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLOW AUDIT
This command allows an audit to be started that was previously inhibited by
the command INHIB AUDIT.
Input format

[ [
[ ALLOW AUDIT : NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the audit. The names of all audits known to
the system can be called up with the command DISP AUDIT.
The names of the common audits are:
ABILREG Billing Register Audit
The idle band linkage of all free billing
registers or the billing register to
channel register linkage of all active
billing registers is tested.
CHANREG Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers are checked for each LTG:
- call status
. highest value
. validity
- call status in the channel register as compared
with associated channel register data
- call status in the channel register as compared
with the status of the port involved in this
connection (channel).
Exception: DSB ports (OSS).
- Busy status of the relevant channel in the
GS table in the CP (module PASDA)
- Specific channel register contents (CTE_ACTIVE,
PATH_DATA)
- Announcement table contents for a busy
announcement line and speech channel as compared
with the channel register contents on the A-side.
- specific channel register contents (OCCUPIED_BY
ISDN, CALL_DIVERSION_FOR_ISDN_PBX, OCCUPIED_BY
B_SIDE, IARSTAT_ACTIVE)
To clear a channel register inconsistency, the
interprocessor message MSG_ABORT_CHANNEL is sent to
the Call Processing Process.
CHKSUMVA Interprocessor checksums audit.
The CALL PROCESSING checksum and the LTG checksum
are compared. Errors are corrected.
CPBUFFER Call Processing Buffer Audit
The idle band linkage of all free call processing
buffers is checked, or the call processing buffer
to channel register linkage of all active call
processing buffers.
EQSTA Equipment Status Audit
A check is made to determine whether the
transient operating states of the peripheral
units are valid and whether the transient
and semipermanent operating states are identical.
In the case of DE5 the SW operating states
are compared with the HW operating states.
IPCHASTA Interprocessor Channel Register Audit
The speech channel states in the GP and CP
are checked for consistency, i.e. the channel
states in the GP should be identical with
those in the CP.
IPTRUSTA Interprocessor Trunk Status Audit
The transient states of ports in the CP
are checked for consistency:
- port states are compared
- port states in the GP are compared with port
states in the CP.
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ALLOW AUDIT- 1+
ALLOW AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to the IPTRUSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency the interprocessor
message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to the call processing
process.
IDLLSTAU Idle List Audit
The idle band linkage of trunk groups,
announcement groups and PBX groups is checked.
NWCONF Switching network configuration audit.
The TSG and SSG data are checked for consistency
with the relevant administration and safeguarding
data. Errors are corrected.
NWMAP Switching Network Map Audit.
The consistency between path data and switching
network busy states is checked. Errors are
corrected.
IPPRTSTA Interprocessor Port Status Audit
The transient port states of DLU-Ports and
V5IF-Ports are checked:
- CP port states are compared
- GP port states are compared with CP port states
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
to the IPPRTSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to
the call processing process.
CCS7AU Common Channel Signaling No.7 Audit
The port states of TUP and ISUP trunks lines
are checked:
Blocks which have been set or cancelled
(NAC_SYNCHRO and NUC_SEIZED), are compared
with DPC blocking.
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_CCS7_PORT
is sent to the call processing process.
OCHANREG OSS Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers of an OSS LTGB are
checked with respect to the port state of an
associated DSB port.
OCPBUFF OSS Call Processing Buffer Audit
The CPBs in the OSS-specific states
CPB_QUEUED and CPB_TRUNK_QUEUEING, and their
associated data, are checked.
COPRTSTA Conference Port Audit
The conference port data within the CP are checked.
NUCAUDIT Nailed Up Connection Audit
The active nailed-up connections (NUC) are checked for
their connection status during operation. In the event
of an error, the faulty NUC is through-connected
again. The NUC database data serve as a reference
for this purpose.
MMBUAUD MSB/MAC output buffer audit:
The buffers used to store the systems responses to
administration requests originated via MSB/MAC are
tested, if the linkage to the job registers is valid.
Buffers with invalid linkage are initialized and
inserted in the list of free buffers.
CDRSUTR RSU Trunk and Channel Register Audit
The consistency between the transient RSU trunk data
and the Channel Register data for trunk indices is
checked. In the event of an error, the RSU trunk is
idled and placed back into the trunk idle list.
RSUTRKST RSU Trunk Status Audit
The consistency between the transient RSU trunk data
and the CP Safeguarding data for high-speed links
is checked against the RSUC high-speed link data.
In the event of an error, the transient RSU trunk
data and the CP Safeguarding data will be
updated by Communication Maintenance.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ALLOW AUDIT- 2-
DISP AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUDIT
This command displays the state of currently running audits and the names
of inhibited audits. All audits known to the system are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AUDIT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AUDIT- 1-
INHIB AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INHIBIT AUDIT
This command inhibits audits thereby preventing their execution.
Prerequisites:
- The audit name must be known to the system.
- The audit must not already be inhibited.
Input format

[ [
[ INHIB AUDIT : NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the audit. The names of all audits known to
the system can be called up with the command DISP AUDIT.
The names of the common audits are:
ABILREG Billing Register Audit
The idle band linkage of all free billing
registers or the billing register to
channel register linkage of all active
billing registers is tested.
CHANREG Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers are checked for each LTG:
- call status
. highest value
. validity
- call status in the channel register as compared
with associated channel register data
- call status in the channel register as compared
with the status of the port involved in this
connection (channel).
Exception: DSB ports (OSS).
- Busy status of the relevant channel in the
GS table in the CP (module PASDA)
- Specific channel register contents (CTE_ACTIVE,
PATH_DATA)
- Announcement table contents for a busy
announcement line and speech channel as compared
with the channel register contents on the A-side.
- specific channel register contents (OCCUPIED_BY
ISDN, CALL_DIVERSION_FOR_ISDN_PBX, OCCUPIED_BY
B_SIDE, IARSTAT_ACTIVE)
To clear a channel register inconsistency, the
interprocessor message MSG_ABORT_CHANNEL is sent to
the Call Processing Process.
CHKSUMVA Interprocessor checksums audit.
The CALL PROCESSING checksum and the LTG checksum
are compared. Errors are corrected.
CPBUFFER Call Processing Buffer Audit
The idle band linkage of all free call processing
buffers is checked, or the call processing buffer
to channel register linkage of all active call
processing buffers.
EQSTA Equipment Status Audit
A check is made to determine whether the
transient operating states of the peripheral
units are valid and whether the transient
and semipermanent operating states are identical.
In the case of DE5 the SW operating states
are compared with the HW operating states.
IPCHASTA Interprocessor Channel Register Audit
The speech channel states in the GP and CP
are checked for consistency, i.e. the channel
states in the GP should be identical with
those in the CP.
IPTRUSTA Interprocessor Trunk Status Audit
The transient states of ports in the CP
are checked for consistency:
- port states are compared
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INHIB AUDIT- 1+
INHIB AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- port states in the GP are compared with port
states in the CP.
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
to the IPTRUSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency the interprocessor
message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to the call processing
process.
IDLLSTAU Idle List Audit
The idle band linkage of trunk groups,
announcement groups and PBX groups is checked.
NWCONF Switching network configuration audit.
The TSG and SSG data are checked for consistency
with the relevant administration and safeguarding
data. Errors are corrected.
NWMAP Switching Network Map Audit.
The consistency between path data and switching
network busy states is checked. Errors are
corrected.
IPPRTSTA Interprocessor Port Status Audit
The transient port states of DLU-Ports and
V5IF-Ports are checked:
- CP port states are compared
- GP port states are compared with CP port states
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
to the IPPRTSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to
the call processing process.
CCS7AU Common Channel Signaling No.7 Audit
The port states of TUP and ISUP trunks lines
are checked:
Blocks which have been set or cancelled
(NAC_SYNCHRO and NUC_SEIZED), are compared
with DPC blocking.
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_CCS7_PORT
is sent to the call processing process.
OCHANREG OSS Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers of an OSS LTGB are
checked with respect to the port state of an
associated DSB port.
OCPBUFF OSS Call Processing Buffer Audit
The CPBs in the OSS-specific states
CPB_QUEUED and CPB_TRUNK_QUEUEING, and their
associated data, are checked.
COPRTSTA Conference Port Audit
The conference port data within the CP are checked.
NUCAUDIT Nailed Up Connection Audit
The active nailed-up connections (NUC) are checked for
their connection status during operation. In the event
of an error, the faulty NUC is through-connected
again. The NUC database data serve as a reference
for this purpose.
MMBUAUD MSB/MAC output buffer audit:
The buffers used to store the systems responses to
administration requests originated via MSB/MAC are
tested, if the linkage to the job registers is valid.
Buffers with invalid linkage are initialized and
inserted in the list of free buffers.
CDRSUTR RSU Trunk and Channel Register Audit
The consistency between the transient RSU trunk data
and the Channel Register data for trunk indices is
checked. In the event of an error, the RSU trunk is
idled and placed back into the trunk idle list.
RSUTRKST RSU Trunk Status Audit
The consistency between the transient RSU trunk data
and the CP Safeguarding data for high-speed links
is checked against the RSUC high-speed link data.
In the event of an error, the transient RSU trunk
data and the CP Safeguarding data will be
updated by Communication Maintenance.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INHIB AUDIT- 2-
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START AUDIT
This command starts an audit. Audits are programs with a low priority which
run periodically to check whether the code and data areas are correct.
Detected errors are corrected automatically. The audits IPTRUSTA and
IPPRTSTA stop correcting if they detect that previous corrections have
been unsuccessful.
Prerequisites:
- The name of the audit must be known to the system.
- The audit must not be inhibited.
- The audit must have a demand attribute.
- The audit state table must not be dynamically expanded during
execution of the command.
- The audit must not already be running.
- The requested processor must not be seized by an audit or a
fault detection.
- Only one project-specific audit may run at one time.
- Only five demand audits (audits that can be demanded via MML command
or via a user process) may run at one time.
- Sufficient resources must be available to allow the audit to be
started dynamically.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ START AUDIT : NAME= [,UNIT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the audit. The names of all audits known to
the system can be called up with the command DISP AUDIT.
The names of the common audits are:
ABILREG Billing Register Audit
The idle band linkage of all free billing
registers or the billing register to
channel register linkage of all active
billing registers is tested.
CHANREG Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers are checked for each LTG:
- call status
. highest value
. validity
- call status in the channel register as compared
with associated channel register data
- call status in the channel register as compared
with the status of the port involved in this
connection (channel).
Exception: DSB ports (OSS).
- Busy status of the relevant channel in the
GS table in the CP (module PASDA)
- Specific channel register contents (CTE_ACTIVE,
PATH_DATA)
- Announcement table contents for a busy
announcement line and speech channel as compared
with the channel register contents on the A-side.
- specific channel register contents (OCCUPIED_BY
ISDN, CALL_DIVERSION_FOR_ISDN_PBX, OCCUPIED_BY
B_SIDE, IARSTAT_ACTIVE)
To clear a channel register inconsistency, the
interprocessor message MSG_ABORT_CHANNEL is sent to
the Call Processing Process.
CHKSUMVA Interprocessor checksums audit.
The CALL PROCESSING checksum and the LTG checksum
are compared. Errors are corrected.
CPBUFFER Call Processing Buffer Audit
The idle band linkage of all free call processing
buffers is checked, or the call processing buffer
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 START AUDIT- 1+
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to channel register linkage of all active call
processing buffers.
EQSTA Equipment Status Audit
A check is made to determine whether the
transient operating states of the peripheral
units are valid and whether the transient
and semipermanent operating states are identical.
In the case of DE5 the SW operating states
are compared with the HW operating states.
IPCHASTA Interprocessor Channel Register Audit
The speech channel states in the GP and CP
are checked for consistency, i.e. the channel
states in the GP should be identical with
those in the CP.
IPTRUSTA Interprocessor Trunk Status Audit
The transient states of ports in the CP
are checked for consistency:
- port states are compared
- port states in the GP are compared with port
states in the CP.
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
to the IPTRUSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency the interprocessor
message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to the call processing
process.
IDLLSTAU Idle List Audit
The idle band linkage of trunk groups,
announcement groups and PBX groups is checked.
NWCONF Switching network configuration audit.
The TSG and SSG data are checked for consistency
with the relevant administration and safeguarding
data. Errors are corrected.
NWMAP Switching Network Map Audit.
The consistency between path data and switching
network busy states is checked. Errors are
corrected.
IPPRTSTA Interprocessor Port Status Audit
The transient port states of DLU-Ports and
V5IF-Ports are checked:
- CP port states are compared
- GP port states are compared with CP port states
The GP supplies blocking states and busy states
to the IPPRTSTA as "summation bits".
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_LINE is sent to
the call processing process.
CCS7AU Common Channel Signaling No.7 Audit
The port states of TUP and ISUP trunks lines
are checked:
Blocks which have been set or cancelled
(NAC_SYNCHRO and NUC_SEIZED), are compared
with DPC blocking.
To clear a port inconsistency, the inter-
processor message MSG_ABORT_CCS7_PORT
is sent to the call processing process.
OCHANREG OSS Channel Register Audit
The 127 channel registers of an OSS LTGB are
checked with respect to the port state of an
associated DSB port.
OCPBUFF OSS Call Processing Buffer Audit
The CPBs in the OSS-specific states
CPB_QUEUED and CPB_TRUNK_QUEUEING, and their
associated data, are checked.
COPRTSTA Conference Port Audit
The conference port data within the CP are checked.
NUCAUDIT Nailed Up Connection Audit
The active nailed-up connections (NUC) are checked for
their connection status during operation. In the event
of an error, the faulty NUC is through-connected
again. The NUC database data serve as a reference
for this purpose.
MMBUAUD MSB/MAC output buffer audit:
The buffers used to store the systems responses to
administration requests originated via MSB/MAC are
tested, if the linkage to the job registers is valid.
Buffers with invalid linkage are initialized and
inserted in the list of free buffers.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 START AUDIT- 2+
START AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CDRSUTR RSU Trunk and Channel Register Audit
The consistency between the transient RSU trunk data
and the Channel Register data for trunk indices is
checked. In the event of an error, the RSU trunk is
idled and placed back into the trunk idle list.
RSUTRKST RSU Trunk Status Audit
The consistency between the transient RSU trunk data
and the CP Safeguarding data for high-speed links
is checked against the RSUC high-speed link data.
In the event of an error, the transient RSU trunk
data and the CP Safeguarding data will be
updated by Communication Maintenance.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the equipment unit where the audit is to
be performed.
Compatibilities:
- If NAME=CHANREG, then entry of the parameter UNIT is mandatory.
- If NAME=CDRSUTS, then entry of the parameter UNIT is mandatory.
- If NAME=ABILREG, CPBUFFER, EQUSTA, NWCONF, NWMAP, or IPTRUSTA,
parameter UNIT is illegal.
- If NAME=CHKSUMVA, IPCHASTA, or IPTRUSTA, then LTG must be entered
for parameter value a in parameter UNIT.
- If a= LTG, then units b and c refer to:
b: TSG number =
0 for DE3 and DE4
0, 1 for DE5/1
0...3 for DE5/2
0...7 for DE5/4
c: LTG number =
1...15 for DE3
1...63 for DE4,DE5/1,DE5/2,DE5/4
- If a= MBUL, then units b and c refer to:
b: System side =
0,1
c: MBUL number =
0 for DE3 and DE4
0, 1 for DE5/1
0...3 for DE5/2
0...7 for DE5/4
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: EQUIPMENT UNIT
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT : LTG
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
b: TIME STAGE GROUP NUMBER / SYSTEM SIDE / RSU NUMBER=
0...286, range of decimal numbers
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER / MBUL NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 START AUDIT- 3-
ACT AUDITMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate Audit Main Processor
This task is used to activate the execution of ]Audit MP].
One input is the number of ]MP] and the other one is ]Audit MP],
which is optional.
If there is no input for ]Audit MP] then all ]Audit MPs] of one
]MP] are activated.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT AUDITMP : MP= [,Audit MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Audit MP
This parameter is the name of an existing ]Audit MP].
Allowed values are symbolic names of exactly 8 characters.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT AUDITMP- 1-
DACT AUDITMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Deactivate Audit Main Processor
This task deactivates ]Audit MP] thereby preventing their execution of one or
all ]Audit MPs] of one ]MP].
One input is the number of ]MP] and the other one is ]Audit MP].
If there is no input for the ]Audit MP] then all ]Audit MPs] of one
]MP] are deactivated.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT AUDITMP : MP= [,Audit MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Audit MP
This parameter is the name of an existing ]Audit MP].
Allowed values are symbolic names of exactly 8 characters.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT AUDITMP- 1-
DISP AUDITMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Audit Main Processor
This task displays one or all ]Audit MPs] of ]MP].
One input is the number of ]MP] and the other one is ]Audit MP].
If there is no input for the ]Audit MP] then all ]Audit MPs] of one ]MP]
are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AUDITMP : MP= [,Audit MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Audit MP
This parameter is the name of an existing ]Audit MP].
Allowed values are symbolic names of exactly 8 characters.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AUDITMP- 1-
CAN AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION
This command cancels authorization classes from an authorization and
cancels entire authorizations from the authorization table.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN AUT : AUT= [,AUTCL=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUT CP AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies an authorization.
An authorization contains a number of authorization classes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
AUTCL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This parameter specifies an authorization class.
An authorization class contains a number of command authorizations.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...50, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN AUT- 1-
DISP AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION
This command displays the authorization classes associated with
the authorizations on the terminal.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AUT : AUT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUT CP AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies an authorization.
An authorization contains a number of authorization classes.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AUT- 1-
ENTR AUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTHORIZATION
This command enters new authorizations with their associated
authorization classes and allows authorization classes to be
entered in an existing authorization.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR AUT : AUT= ,AUTCL= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUT CP AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies an authorization.
An authorization contains a number of authorization classes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
AUTCL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This parameter specifies an authorization class.
An authorization class contains a number of command authorizations.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...50, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR AUT- 1-
CAN AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command cancels command authorizations for MML commands from a
particular authorization class.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN AUTCL : AUTCL= ,CMDCOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUTCL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This parameter specifies an authorization class.
An authorization class contains a number of command authorizations.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...49, range of decimal numbers
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies command to be entered into or deleted
from an authorization class. CMDCOD must be a valid command name.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN AUTCL- 1-
DISP AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command displays the command authorizations defined
in single or in all authorization classes.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP AUTCL : AUTCL= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUTCL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This parameter specifies an authorization class.
An authorization class contains a number of command authorizations.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...50, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AUTCL- 1-
ENTR AUTCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This command enters a desired authorization class for the MML command
authorizations.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR AUTCL : AUTCL= ,CMDCOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUTCL AUTHORIZATION CLASS
This parameter specifies an authorization class.
An authorization class contains a number of command authorizations.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...49, range of decimal numbers
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies command to be entered into or deleted
from an authorization class. CMDCOD must be a valid command name.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR AUTCL- 1-
DISP AUTHDEF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Authentication Defaults
This task displays the global parameters of Q3 Authentication:
Default authent. and Denial response.
Note: These settings are only relevant for system access via Q3-interface.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP AUTHDEF ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP AUTHDEF- 1-
MOD AUTHDEF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Authentication Defaults
This task modifies the global parameters of Q3 Authentication.
It is used to change the default authentication access and to specify the
response which shall be returned for unauthorized authentication attempts.
Note: The settings are only relevant for system access via Q3-interface. For file
transfer there is no default access possible.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD AUTHDEF : [defaultAuth=] [,denialResp=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
defaultAuth
This parameter specifies the default authentication access
for initiators, which are not known at the authentication
domain:
Input values:
allow : System access allowed.
abortAssociation : abort Q3 association request.
denyWithResponse : reject Q3 association request.
denialResp
This parameter defines the response to be returned for
identified initiators if the authentication check
should fail.
Input values:
abortAssociation : abort Q3 association request.
denyWithResponse : reject Q3 association request.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD AUTHDEF- 1-
STAT BA
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DATA OF BASIC ACCESS
This command displays all current call-related data for the specified
basic access.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing ISDN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. STAT BA - DN DN ORIENTED
2. STAT BA - EQN EQN ORIENTED
1. Input format
DN ORIENTED
Input format for directory-number-oriented output.

[ [
[ STAT BA : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more
than one local network connected to an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber.
Up to ten parameters can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT BA- 1+
STAT BA
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQN ORIENTED
Input format for equipment-number-oriented output.

[ [
[ STAT BA : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the port connected to
the subscriber or PBX line to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c[-d]
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT / V5INTERFACE=
10...8999, range of decimal numbers
- DLU number (10,20,30...2550 for a DLU port)
- V5IF number (6000,6001,..8999 for a V5 port)
b: SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU port, 0 for a V5 port)
c: MODULE=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
- Module number (0..15 for a DLU port, 0..20 for a V5 port)
d: CIRCUIT / V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
- Circuit number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..15 for a DLU16 port,
0..99 for a V5 port)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT BA- 2-
DISP BAFAULT
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BASIC ACCESS FAULT
This command displays the last occured ISDN basic access faults.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP BAFAULT - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. DISP BAFAULT - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
Path input format for display basic access fault, directory number oriented.

[ [
[ DISP BAFAULT : DN= ,TYPE= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the
subscriber or PBX line.
Maximum 12 digits in the range 1...9,A...F hexadecimal
value is specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the last occurred basic access line fault.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BER BIT ERROR RATE
Bit error frequency of transmission
(10exp-3/10exp-6).
LAY1 LAYER 1 FAULT
LAY2 LAYER 2 FAULT
Loss or deactivation of Layer2 of lines with
lineattribut "Lay2hold".
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
Maximum 6 digits in the range 1...9 value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP BAFAULT- 1+
DISP BAFAULT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Path input format for display basic access fault, digital line unit
number oriented.

[ [
[ DISP BAFAULT : EQN= ,TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR DLU/V5=
10...8999, range of decimal numbers
For DLU port: a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V51IF port: a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
For V52IF port: a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
b: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
For DLU port: a shelf in the range 0...7
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: 0
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT NUMBER FOR MODULE/TH V52 PORT=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
For DLU port: a module number in the range 0...15
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: THv5port number in the range 00...20
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: EQUIP. NUMBER FOR CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range 0...7 for DLU8
0...15 for DLU16
For V51IF port: a v5port number in the range 0...31
For V52IF port: TUv5port number in the range 00...99
Note: v52port is limited to the number 2047.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
TYPE TYPE OF FAULT
This parameter specifies the last occurred basic access line fault.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BER BIT ERROR RATE
Bit error frequency of transmission
(10exp-3/10exp-6).
LAY1 LAYER 1 FAULT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP BAFAULT- 2+
DISP BAFAULT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAY2 LAYER 2 FAULT
Loss or deactivation of Layer2 of lines with
lineattribut "Lay2hold".
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP BAFAULT- 3-
COM BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COMMUTE BASE PROCESSORS
This command initiates a master-spare commutation. Prior to command
execution, the base processor spare (which will be the future base
processor master) is tested.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ COM BAP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COM BAP- 1-
CONF BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE BASE PROCESSOR
This command configures the BAP spare.
A configuration attempt of the BAP master to MBL is rejected.
Notes:
- The configuration from SPR to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to SPR is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF BAP : [BAP=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BAP BASE PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
SPR ACTIVE SPARE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows the base processor to be diagnosed before
configuring it from MBL or UNA to ACT.
Notes:
- Interim diagnostic messages are displayed if SUP=NO and
DIAG=YES is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF BAP- 1-
DIAG BAP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE BASE PROCESSOR
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a base processor.
Prerequisites:
- The base processor must be MBL.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG BAP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG BAP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a base processor.
The diagnosis includes a BCMY interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG BAP : [BAP=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BAP BASE PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG BAP- 1+
DIAG BAP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a base
processor. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG BAP : [BAP=] ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BAP BASE PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG BAP- 2-
TEST BAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST BASE PROCESSOR
This command tests the BAP spare.
Prerequisites:
- The base processor must be SPR.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST BAP : [BAP=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BAP BASE PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST BAP- 1-
CONF BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command configures a bus to common memory.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to ACT is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF BCMY : [BCMY=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCMY BUS FOR COMMON MEMORY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis before configuration to ACT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF BCMY- 1-
DIAG BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command initiates a diagnosis for a bus to common memory.
The diagnosis includes interface tests of the active processors and the
common memory. Repeated diagnosis is not possible.
Prerequisites:
- The bus to common memory must be MBL.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG BCMY : [BCMY=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCMY BUS FOR COMMON MEMORY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG BCMY- 1-
TEST BCMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST BUS TO COMMON MEMORY
This command tests a bus to common memory.
Prerequisites:
- Both B:CMYs must be ACT.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST BCMY : [BCMY=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCMY BUS FOR COMMON MEMORY
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, both B:CMYs are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST BCMY- 1-
ACT BERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT BIT ERROR MEASUREMENT
This command starts a Bit Error Rate Measurement, the purpose of BERM
is to provide limits for bringing into service, and limits for
maintenance of digital paths, sections, and line sections in order
to achieve the performance objective given for series G recommendations.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT BERM : RSPDN= ,MEASTYP= ,LTG= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RSPDN RESPONDER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the Responder directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MEASTYP MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
M1 MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
Type of measurement:
End to End unidirectional.
M2 MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
Type of measurement:
End to End bidirectional.
M3 MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
Type of measurement:
Digital Loopback.
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this
unit represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB)
or the Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND
and upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT BERM- 1+
ACT BERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: PORT NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT BERM- 2-
DISP BERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY BIT ERROR RATE MEASUREMENT
This command displays bit error rate data for 64kb/s paths.
Specifying the incoming trunk under measurement and date limits the
operator get the following counters:
SES, ES, MT, EFS, BS, LS, BLER, BER, AS and UAS.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP BERM : LTG= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG
This parameter specifies the LTG number of the incoming trunk
under measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTG SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <LTG SET no>
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <LTG no>
LC LINE CHANNEL
This parameter specifies the LC of the incoming trunk
under measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <LTU no>
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <CHANNEL no>
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP BERM- 1-
ACT BILLREC
ACTIVATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE BILLING RECORD
This command activates the following possibilities:
- it activates new billing, IMSI trace or IN record layouts.
- it determines the record format of the billing, IMSI trace
or IN records,
the record size of the client records destination file and
the fillers to be used in the destination file.
- it activates a selective transfer of billing or IMSI trace records.
Prerequisites:
- The activation of a new layout must not happen during the formatting
of a hot billing, emergency call trace or IMSI trace, nor during the
formattting and transfer of the contents of the IA.ICMCR, IA.ICITR
or IA.ICINA file.
Possible Effects:
- During the last transfer of records from the IA.ICMCR file or the
IA.ICITR file, always the entire file contents will be transferred.
So possible restrictive selection criteria will then be ignored.
- The contents of the selective transfer parameters can be lost after
a system recovery.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT BILLREC - ACTIVATE ACTIVATE RECORD LAYOUTS
2. ACT BILLREC - RECATTR ACT BILLREC RECORD ATTRIBUTES
3. ACT BILLREC - SELTRANS ACT BILLREC SEL FILE TRANSFER
1. Input format
ACTIVATE RECORD LAYOUTS

[ [
[ ACT BILLREC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT BILLREC- 1+
ACT BILLREC
RECATTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ACT BILLREC RECORD ATTRIBUTES

[ [
[ ACT BILLREC : FILE= ,RECFORM= ,RECSIZE= [,FILLER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE FOR SELECTIVE TRANSFER
This parameter specifies the file on which the selective transfer of
records must be applied or the file for whose destination file new
record attributes are defined.
Possible values:
- IA.ICMCR : cyclic file for billing records.
- IA.ICITR : cyclic file for IMSI trace records.
- IA.ICINA : cyclic file for IN records.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RECFORM RECORD FORMAT
This parameter specifies the logical record format of the billing,
IMSI trace or IN records destination file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIX FIXED LOGICAL RECORD
VAR VARIABLE LOGICAL RECORD
RECSIZE RECORD SIZE
This parameter specifies the physical/logical record size (in bytes)
of the billing, IMSI trace or IN records destination file.
Incompatibilities:
- The logical record size may only be specified in case of
FIXED logical records (RECFORM = FIX).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: PHYSICAL RECORD SIZE=
3...16384, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the physical record size
of the billing records destination file.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter must be >= logical record size.
- This parameter must be <= SET FGRPATT in command COPATT.
b: LOGICAL RECORD SIZE=
3...2048, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the logical record size
of the billing records destination file.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter must be <= physical record size.
- This parameter must be >= maximum billing record length.
FILLER FILLER VALUE
This parameter specifies the fillers at the end of a physical/logical
record, used to obtain the fixed physical/logical record size.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT BILLREC- 2+
ACT BILLREC
RECATTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- The logical record filler may only be specified in case of
FIXED logical records (RECFORM = FIX).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: PHYSICAL RECORD FILLER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the fillers at the end of
a physical record.
Default: 255
b: LOGICAL RECORD FILLER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the fillers at the end of
a logical record.
Default: 255
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT BILLREC- 3+
ACT BILLREC
SELTRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ACT BILLREC SEL FILE TRANSFER

[ [
[ ACT BILLREC : FILE= [,RECLAY=] [,SEL=] [,SSV=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE FOR SELECTIVE TRANSFER
This parameter specifies the file on which the selective transfer of
records must be applied or the file for whose destination file new
record attributes are defined.
Possible values:
- IA.ICMCR : cyclic file for billing records.
- IA.ICITR : cyclic file for IMSI trace records.
- IA.ICINA : cyclic file for IN records.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RECLAY RECORD LAYOUT
This parameter specifies the selective transfer of billing records or
IMSI trace records based on the record layout.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFC CALL FORWARDING CONDITIONAL
CFCATT CALL FORW COND ATTEMPT
CFU CALL FORWARDING UNCONDITIONAL
CFUATT CALL FORW UNCOND ATTEMPT
ECT EMERGENCY CALL TRACE
EMY EMERGENCY CALL
EMYATT EMERGENCY CALL ATTEMPT
MOC MOBILE ORIGINATING CALL
MOCATT MOBILE ORIG CALL ATTEMPT
MOCTRAC MOBILE ORIG CALL TRACE
MTC MOBILE TERMINATING CALL
MTCATT MOBILE TERM CALL ATTEMPT
MTCTRAC MOBILE TERM CALL TRACE
PABXIC PABX INCOMING CALL
PABXOG PABX OUTGOING CALL
PABXSCI PABX SUB CONTR INPUT OPERATION
RECLAY1 RECORD LAYOUT 1
ROA ROAMING TICKET
SCI SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED INPUT
SMSMO SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE ORIGINAT
SMSMT SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE TERMINAT
SMSOTRAC SHORT MESS SERV ORIG TRACE
SMSTTRAC SHORT MESS SERV TERM TRACE
TRANSIT TRANSIT CALL
Default: ECT
SEL SELECTIVE TRANSFER
This parameter specifies the selective transfer of billing records or
IMSI trace records based on whether the hot transfer of these records
to the OS over the hot operation link or the hot trace link succeeded
or not.
Prerequisites:
- This parameter is only applicable for the features hot billing,
emergency call trace and IMSI tracing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT BILLREC- 4+
ACT BILLREC
SELTRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FAILED FAILED TICKETS
GOOD GOOD TICKETS
X ALL TICKETS
Default: X
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies the selective transfer of billing records
based on the supplementary service hot billing.
Prerequisites:
- This parameter is only applicable for the feature hot billing.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter may only be specified for the billing records file
(FILE = IA.ICMCR) and not for the IMSI trace records file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HB TICKETS WITH SS HOT BILLING
NOHB TICKETS WITHOUT SS HOT BILLING
X ALL TICKETS
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT BILLREC- 5-
TRANS BUFFER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRANSFER INDIV. CALL DATA BUFFER TO DISK
This command initiates the immediate transfer of the contents of the
(not necessarily full) data buffer for the specified feature type
from the CP memory to the corresponding disk file.
Prerequisites :
- The specified feature type must be active (advisory and command
rejection).
- The corresponding file is not full (advisory and command rejection).
- The CP memory data buffer is not in overflow (advisory and command
rejection).
Input format

[ [
[ TRANS BUFFER : TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
MCR MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
UAM US AUTOMATIC MSG ACCOUNTING
ITR IMSI TRACE RECORD BUFFER
LIR LAWFUL INTERCEPT RECORDING
MOB METER OBSERVATION
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
MAL MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
OME OBSERVED MOB. EQUIPM. BUFFER
FIR FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
DNOB DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
TOB TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
TST TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT
ERS ERROR STATISTICS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS BUFFER- 1-
CAN C7LSETRA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 LSET IN RT.SET OF RT AREA
This command cancels a link set in the route set of a routing area. If
the link set is the last in the route set, the command will be rejected.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN C7LSETRA : RANAM= ,LSNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN C7LSETRA- 1-
DISP C7LSETRA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP.FOR A GIVEN CCS7 LSET ALL RT.AREAS
This command displays the following data:
- the name of the link set
- the network indicator to which the link set belongs
- the destination point code of the signaling point at the far
end of the link set (adjacent destination point)
In addition, the display shows the following data for routing
areas which have the specified link set as possible route
direction:
- the routing area name itself
- the operating (semipermanent) state of the routing area
- the effective (transient) state of the routing area
- an indication whether this link set is the current route to the
routing area
- an indication whether this routing area is reachable
exclusively (ONLYAV) via the specified link set or not.
Notes:
- If the parameter value YES is input for the (optional) parameter
ONLYAV, only these routing areas are displayed which are
exclusively reachable via the specified link set. If the parameter
value NO is input or if the parameter is omitted, all routing
areas are displayed which have the specified link set as possible
route direction.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [LSNAM=[ [
[ DISP C7LSETRA : LSNO= [,ONLYAV=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSNO LINK SET NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
ONLYAV ONLY AVAIL.LINK SET TO DESTINA
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO DEST.NOT ONLY AVAIL. BY LSET
YES DEST.ONLY AVAIL.BY LSET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP C7LSETRA- 1-
ENTR C7LSETRA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 LSET IN ROUTE DESC.OF RT AREA
This command inserts one new route direction (link set) at a specific
priority order in the route set for the routing area. A route set may
contain one to eight link sets. If there is already a link set with the
same priority as entered, this command will decrement the priority of this and
the following route directions (link sets) (lower priority means higher number).
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR C7LSETRA : RANAM= ,LSNAM= ,LSPRIO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSNAM LINK SET NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSPRIO PRIORITY OF ENTERED LINK SET
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR C7LSETRA- 1-
CAN C7RTAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 ROUTING AREA
This command cancels a routing area.
Prerequisites :
- The routing area must not contain any destination points.
- The routing area must be configured to the operating state
administrative blocked (ABL).
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN C7RTAREA : RANAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN C7RTAREA- 1-
CONF C7RTAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CCS7 ROUTING AREA
This command configures a routing area to one
of the operating states: active (ACT) or administrative blocked
(ABL). When a routing area is created, it is automatically
configured to the operating state administrative blocked
(ABL).
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
Notes:
- The configuring of a routing area to operating state ABL
prevents message signal units (MSUs) being transmitted to the
routing area by the users. It does not automatically prevent
MSUs being transmitted from the routing area. Bi-directional
message flow can only be terminated when both signaling points at
the end of the route set (routing area and own signaling point)
are mutually configured to ABL.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF C7RTAREA : RANAM= ,OST= [,UNCOND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
ABL ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCKED
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
NO DO NOT CONFIG. UNCONDITIONALLY
Y CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
YES CONFIGURE UNCONDITIONALLY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF C7RTAREA- 1-
CR C7RTAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 ROUTING AREA
This command creates a routing area, which is a group of destination points
in the foreign area that can be reached via the same route set.The route
set may be created with one to eight possible route directions (link
sets). The first route direction in this set will be assigned the highest
priority.
The operating state of the routing area is initially administrative
blocked (ABL).
The route set still will not carry signaling traffic until it has
been activated using the command CONF C7RTAREA.
Prerequisites :
- The link set of the route set must be created.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be re-entered to prevent data base inconsistency.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ CR C7RTAREA : RANAM= ,NETIND= ,PRD= ,LSK= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
PRD POSSIBLE ROUTE DIRECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSK LOAD SHARING KEY FOR RT DIRECT
This parameter specifies the loadsharing key of the route set.
It indicates a method used to determine whether the load is
distributed to one (LSK = 0) or two (LSK > 0) signaling
link sets.
If distributed to two signaling link sets the LSK = 1,2,3 or 4
additionally defines which load portions are distributed to which one
of the two signaling link sets.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR C7RTAREA- 1-
DISP C7RTAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 ROUTING AREA
This command displays the following data of created routing areas:
- the name of the routing area
- the network indicator of this routing area
- the destination point codes (or ranges of destination point
codes) that belong to this routing area
If a specific routing area is requested, the following additional data
is displayed:
- the load sharing key for the route direction
- the operating state (semipermanent) of the routing area
- the effective state (transient) of the routing area
- the name of the link sets which lead to this routing area
- the current priority of each link set
- an indication if the link set is the current route to the routing area
- an indication if the link set is inhibited or not inhibited
- the effective state (transient) of the link set
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [RANAM= [ [
[ DISP C7RTAREA : NETIND= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP C7RTAREA- 1-
MOD C7RTAREA
LSK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCS7 ROUTING AREA
This command either interchanges the priorities of the two link sets
LSNAM1 and LSNAM2 in the route set of a routing area or modifies
the loadsharing key of the route set.
Possible effects:
- If execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command
must be reentered to prevent data base inconsistency.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD C7RTAREA - LSK CHANGE LOADSHARING KEY
2. MOD C7RTAREA - PRIORITY CHANGE PRIORITY OF TWO LINK SETS
1. Input format
CHANGE LOADSHARING KEY
Change of the loadsharing key:
The loadsharing key is used to define the traffic distribution
between the current routes.
The loadsharing key must have a value between zero and four.
If the loadsharing key has the value zero, no loadsharing will
be carried out between the routes and the possible route direction
with highest priority will be used.
If the loadsharing key has a value between one and four, loadsharing
will be carried out between the two available possible route
directions with highest priority. The different values effect the
distribution of the traffic within the route directions.

[ [
[ MOD C7RTAREA : RANAM= ,LSK= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSK LOADSHARING KEY FOR RT DIRECT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD C7RTAREA- 1+
MOD C7RTAREA
PRIORITY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CHANGE PRIORITY OF TWO LINK SETS
Interchange of the priorities
The new priority of LSNAM1 must be specified explicitely
by LSPRI1.
The highest priority is one, the lowest is eight.

[ [
[ MOD C7RTAREA : RANAM= ,LSNAM1= ,LSNAM2= ,LSPRI1= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RANAM CCS7 ROUTING AREA NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSNAM1 FIRST LINK SET TO BE SWAPPED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSNAM2 SECOND LINK SET TO BE SWAPPED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LSPRI1 PRIO.OF 1ST ENTERED LINK SET
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD C7RTAREA- 2-
CAN C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command cancels the relation between a destination point (including
the associated user part) and a trunk group with common channel signaling.
Prerequisites:
- All trunks belonging to the specified trunk group must be cancelled.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN C7TGREL : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN C7TGREL- 1-
DISP C7TGREL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command displays the relation between a destination point (including
the associated user part) and trunk groups with common channel signaling.
The display can also be selective.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP C7TGREL - DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
2. DISP C7TGREL - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
DESTINATION POINT CODE
Input format for the destination point code identifier
option

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NETIND= [[ [
[ DISP C7TGREL : DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETNAME=[ [,USNAME=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
OSPC OWN SIGNALLING POINT CODE
The allowable entries are defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP C7TGREL- 1+
DISP C7TGREL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
SCCP SIGN. CONNECTION CONTROL PART
TUP TELEPHONE USER PART
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP C7TGREL- 2+
DISP C7TGREL
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
Input format for the trunk group number option

[ [
[ DISP C7TGREL : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP C7TGREL- 3-
ENTR C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCS7 TRUNK GROUP RELATION
This command enters a relation between a destination point (including the
associated user part) and a trunk group with common channel signaling.
A maximum of 64 trunk groups with common channel signaling may lead to a
a destination point and each of its associated user parts.
Prerequisites:
- The destination point must be created.
- The trunk group with common channel signaling must be created.
- The dialing procedure of the trunk group with common channel signaling must
correspond to one of the created user parts for the destination point.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NETIND= [[ [
[ ENTR C7TGREL : TGNO= ,DPC= [,NETNAME=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR C7TGREL- 1+
ENTR C7TGREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signalling network where
the destination point is located by its name ( cf. SIEMENS
Q-MTP-E-STANDARD FOR V13 ). This parameter is mandatory if the
feature "multiple networks" is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR C7TGREL- 2-
TEST C7TRSTAT
ONDEMAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK STATUS
This command starts the circuit group query test for ISUP/BICC trunks.
This test examines if the ISUP/BICC trunk states at the own exchange and
at the partner exchange do match. If any discrepancies are detected,
the trunk states are automatically corrected.
If the parameter SCHED is omitted, the test is started immediately,
otherwise it is started at the scheduled time.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. TEST C7TRSTAT- ONDEMAND ON DEMAND (IMMEDIATELY)
2. TEST C7TRSTAT- SCHED SCHEDULED START (ROUTINE-TEST)
1. Input format
ON DEMAND (IMMEDIATELY)
Input format for starting the circuit group query test on demand
(immediately).

[ [
[ [
[ [[NETIND= [[ [
[ TEST C7TRSTAT : [NETNAME=[ ,DPC= ,USNAME= ,CIC= ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signalling network where
the destination point is located by its name ( cf. SIEMENS
Q-MTP-E-STANDARD). This parameter is mandatory if the
feature "multiple networks" is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 1+
TEST C7TRSTAT
ONDEMAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code
of the user ISUP.
Wildcard input is allowed as X-X and a-X.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Within an ANSI or ITU network which support a 12-bit CIC:
- 0...127, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...169, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
Within an ANSI network which supports a 14-bit CIC value:
- 0...511, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...681, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
0...31, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30.
0...23, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 2+
TEST C7TRSTAT
SCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SCHEDULED START (ROUTINE-TEST)
Input format for starting the circuit group query test by scheduler
(routine test).

[ [
[ [
[ [[NETIND= [[ [
[ TEST C7TRSTAT : [NETNAME=[ ,DPC= ,USNAME= ,CIC= ,SCHED= ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signalling network where
the destination point is located by its name ( cf. SIEMENS
Q-MTP-E-STANDARD). This parameter is mandatory if the
feature "multiple networks" is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 3+
TEST C7TRSTAT
SCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code
of the user ISUP.
Wildcard input is allowed as X-X and a-X.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Within an ANSI or ITU network which support a 12-bit CIC:
- 0...127, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...169, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
Within an ANSI network which supports a 14-bit CIC value:
- 0...511, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...681, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
0...31, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30.
0...23, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
SCHED SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRSTAT- 4-
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK
This command tests the specified circuit to determine if the circuit
identification code in the home exchange matches the circuit
identification in the partner exchange. The test is performed for up
to 31 circuits specified by the optional parameter TRRANGE.
The maximal value for TRRANGE is 24 if the trunks are connected to
a DIU24.
The test result is displayed on the OMT.
Prerequisite:
- The specified circuit must be blocked for maintenance.
Attention:
- The test result "not ok" usually indicates a circuit identification
code allocation mismatch between two exchanges. As an exception,
the result "not ok" is caused by a mismatch between the trunk
parameter LCOS and the created user. The trunk parameter LCOS
can be checked by using the command DISP TRUNK.
- If the test is cancelled by time control, wait for 30 seconds
before repeating the test.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. TEST C7TRUNK - DPC
2. TEST C7TRUNK - TGNAM
1. Input format
This input format starts a CIC allocation test. The circuit is
defined by the signaling point to which the associated trunk group
leads, the network indicator, the user part and the circuit identification
code (CIC). The parameter trunk range (TRRANGE) is optional and defines
the number of circuits to be tested by one command. The CIC defines the
first circuit of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NETIND= [[ [
[ TEST C7TRUNK : DPC= ,CIC= [,NETNAME=[ ,USNAME= [,TRRANGE=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 1+
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Within an ANSI or ITU network which support a 12-bit CIC:
- 0...127, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...169, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
Within an ANSI network which supports a 14-bit CIC value:
- 0...511, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...681, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
0...31, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30.
0...23, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24.
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter specifies the user part.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
SCCP SIGN. CONNECTION CONTROL PART
TUP TELEPHONE USER PART
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
This parameter specifies the number of trunks to be tested by
one command. If this parameter is not entered, only the
specified trunk is tested.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 2+
TEST C7TRUNK
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 3+
TEST C7TRUNK
TGNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format starts a CIC allocation test. The circuit is
specified by the parameters trunk group number (TGNO) and the circuit
identification code (CIC) or the line number (LNO). The parameter trunk
range (TRRANGE) is optional and specifies the number of circuits to be
tested by one command. The parameter CIC or LNO specifies the first circuit
of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.

[ [
[ [
[ [,CIC=[ [
[ TEST C7TRUNK : TGNO= ,LNO= [,TRRANGE=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Within an ANSI or ITU network which support a 12-bit CIC:
- 0...127, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...169, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
Within an ANSI network which supports a 14-bit CIC value:
- 0...511, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...681, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
0...31, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30.
0...23, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
This parameter specifies the number of trunks to be tested by
one command. If this parameter is not entered, only the
specified trunk is tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRUNK- 4-
TEST C7TRVAL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CCS7 TRUNK VALIDATION
This command tests the specified circuit to determine if the circuit
group characteristics in the home exchange match the circuit
group characteristics in the partner exchange. The test is performed
for up to 31 circuits specified by the optional parameter TRRANGE.
The maximal value for TRRANGE is 24 if the trunks are connected to
a DIU24.
The test result is displayed on the OMT.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. TEST C7TRVAL - DPC
2. TEST C7TRVAL - TGNAM
1. Input format
This input format starts a circuit validation test. The circuit is
defined by the signaling point to which the associated trunk group
leads, the network indicator, the user part and the circuit identification
code (CIC). The parameter trunk range (TRRANGE) is optional and defines
the number of circuits to be tested by one command. The CIC defines the
first circuit of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NETIND= [[ [
[ TEST C7TRVAL : DPC= [,CIC=] [,NETNAME=[ ,USNAME= [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,TRRANGE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRVAL- 1+
TEST C7TRVAL
DPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Within an ANSI or ITU network which support a 12-bit CIC:
- 0...127, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...169, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
Within an ANSI network which supports a 14-bit CIC value:
- 0...511, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...681, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
0..31, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30.
0..23, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24.
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter specifies the user part.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISUP ISDN USER PART
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
This parameter specifies the number of trunks to be tested by
one command. If this parameter is not entered, only the
specified trunk is tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRVAL- 2+
TEST C7TRVAL
TGNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
This input format starts a circuit validation test. The circuit is
specified by the parameters trunk group number (TGNO) and the circuit
identification code (CIC) or the line number (LNO). The parameter trunk
range (TRRANGE) is optional and specifies the number of circuits to be
tested by one command. The parameter CIC or LNO specifies the first circuit
of the circuit group if the parameter TRRANGE is entered.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,CIC=[[ [
[ TEST C7TRVAL : TGNO= [,LNO=[ [,TRRANGE=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Within an ANSI or ITU network which support a 12-bit CIC:
- 0...127, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...169, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
Within an ANSI network which supports a 14-bit CIC value:
- 0...511, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30
- 0...681, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
0..31, if the trunk is connected to a DIU30.
0..23, if the trunk is connected to a DIU24.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
TRRANGE TRUNK RANGE
This parameter specifies the number of trunks to be tested by
one command. If this parameter is not entered, only the
specified trunk is tested.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRVAL- 3+
TEST C7TRVAL
TGNAM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST C7TRVAL- 4-
CAN C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command cancels an association between a user part and a destination
point.
Prerequisites:
- All trunk group relations must have been cancelled if the user part is
circuit related
- All SCCP relations must have been cancelled if the user part SCCP is
to be cancelled. Possible SCCP relations are: global title translation
destinations, SCCP subsystems or translator service groups.
Possible effects:
- If the execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NETIND= [[ [
[ CAN C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETNAME=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SCCP SIGN. CONNECTION CONTROL PART
TUP TELEPHONE USER PART
ISUP ISDN USER PART
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN C7USER- 1+
CAN C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OSPC OWN SIGNALLING POINT CODE
The allowable entries are defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signalling network where
the destination point is located by its name ( cf. SIEMENS
Q-MTP-E-STANDARD). This parameter is mandatory if the
feature "multiple networks" is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN C7USER- 2-
CR C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command creates an association between a user part and a destination
point.
Prerequisites:
- The destination point must have been created.
Possible effects:
- If the execution of this command is aborted by recovery, the command must
be entered again to prevent data inconsistency.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NETIND= [[ [
[ CR C7USER : USNAME= ,DPC= [,NETNAME=[ [,PCMTYP=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,CICSIZE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SCCP SIGN. CONNECTION CONTROL PART
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
TUP TELEPHONE USER PART
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
ISUP ISDN USER PART
Compatibilities:
-INAT0
-INAT1
-NAT0
-NAT1
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR C7USER- 1+
CR C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located by its indicator .
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional. The default value for NETIND
is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signalling network where
the destination point is located by its name ( cf. SIEMENS
Q-MTP-E-STANDARD). This parameter is mandatory for
SSNC configuration if the feature "multiple networks" is
activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PCMTYP PCM TYPE
This parameter specifies the used PCM type.
For USNAME=SCCP the parameter is allowed only for mobile switches.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DIU24 DIU 24
DIU30 DIU 30
CICSIZE CIC SIZE
This parameter specifies the size of the CIC (circuit identification
code).
In the world market CICSIZE is optional and only valid for user ISUP
in SSNC configuration.
Possible values:
CIC12 : CIC size 12 Bit
CIC13 : CIC size 13 Bit
CIC14 : CIC size 14 Bit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CIC12 CIC SIZE 12 BITS
CIC13 CIC SIZE 13 BITS
CIC14 CIC SIZE 14 BITS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR C7USER- 2-
DISP C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCS7 USER ASSOCIATION
This command displays user-related data.
This command is only permitted for an exchange with common channel signaling
according to signaling system No.7 (CCS7).
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NETIND= [[ [
[ DISP C7USER : DPC= [,OSPC=] [,NETNAME=[ [,USNAME=] [,CIC=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: DPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: DPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
OSPC OWN SIGNALLING POINT CODE
The allowable entries are defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OSPC-UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: OSPC-UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: OSPC-UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: OSPC-UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP C7USER- 1+
DISP C7USER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter identifies the ITU network where the destination
point is located.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
In the world market, NETIND is mandatory for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
In U.S. Releases, NETIND is optional for CCNC configuration and
SSNC configuration with the "multiple networks" feature not activated.
The default value for NETIND is NAT0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signalling network where
the destination point is located by its name ( cf. SIEMENS
Q-MTP-E-STANDARD). This parameter is mandatory if the
feature multiple networks is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
USNAME USER NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SCCP SIGN. CONNECTION CONTROL PART
TUP TELEPHONE USER PART
ISUP ISDN USER PART
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
b: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP C7USER- 2-
CR CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command creates the carrier access code data.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CAC [ROWNCAC=] [,EXCCAC1=] [,EXCCAC2=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ROWNCAC REMOVE OWN CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y OWN CAC IS REMOVED
YES OWN CAC IS REMOVED
N OWN CAC IS NOT REMOVED
NO OWN CAC IS NOT REMOVED
Default: YES
EXCCAC1 EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 1
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 1
YES CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 1
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 1
NO CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 1
Default: NO
EXCCAC2 EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 2
YES CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 2
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 2
NO CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 2
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CAC- 1-
DISP CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE
The optional paramters reduce the amount of displayed data if they are entered.
All parameters are logically linked with AND, i.e. only those data are displayed
which meet all the entered restrictions.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CAC : <EXCCAC1= ,EXCCAC2=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EXCCAC1 EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 1
This parameter specifies that the display is restricted
to those carrierr access codes, which have the selected
value assigned to.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC
YES CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC
NO CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC
EXCCAC2 EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2
This parameter specifies that the display is restricted
to those carrierr access codes, which have the selected
value assigned to.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC
YES CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC
NO CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CAC- 1-
MOD CAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This command modifies the carrier access code data.
All parameters can be modified, including the
carrier access code itself.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CAC <ROWNCAC= ,EXCCAC1= ,EXCCAC2=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ROWNCAC REMOVE OWN CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y OWN CAC IS REMOVED
YES OWN CAC IS REMOVED
N OWN CAC IS NOT REMOVED
NO OWN CAC IS NOT REMOVED
Default: YES
EXCCAC1 EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 1
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 1
YES CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 1
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 1
NO CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 1
EXCCAC2 EXCHANGE CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 2
YES CAC IS EXCHANGE CAC 2
N CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 2
NO CAC IS NOT EXCHANGE CAC 2
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CAC- 1-
CAN CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT
This command cancels a codepoint for which special handling of carrier
access codes was performed or for which a default carrier access code
was assigned.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ ; [
[ CAN CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies a code combination which identifies the called
party (B-side).
The code combination has to be part of the code point of an existing
carrier access code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...18 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies an originating local area code which partly
identifies the calling party (A-side).
The local area code originating has to be part of the code point of
an existing carrier access code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies an originating mark which identifies the
calling party (A-side).
The originating mark has to be part of the code point of an existing
carrier access code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CACCPT- 1-
CR CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODE POINT
This command creates an object for which a special handling of carrier access
codes has to be performed and/or which is connected to one of the possible
default carriers.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ [
[ CR CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ <,DEFCAC= ,CACSHUC= ,CACSHDI= [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CACSHPS= ,CACGHUC= ,CACGHDI= ,CACGHPS=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies a code combination which identifies the
destination number or a part of it.
The destination number can be a subscriber number (including local area
code), a service number, a national significant number, an
international number or a routing number.
Prerequisites:
- This code combination must be different from all carrier access
codes which were entered with CR CAC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...18 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies an originating local area code which partly
identifies the calling party (A-side).
Any local area code which is administered via ENTR AREACODE
can be specified. This applies to all LAC values and to all
LACOR values in the same manner.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies an originating mark which identifies the
calling party (A-side).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
DEFCAC DEFAULT CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies which default carrier access code is to be
selected when applicable.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAC1 CARRIER ACCESS CODE 1
CAC2 CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CACCPT- 1+
CR CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CACSHUC CAC SEL. HANDLING. UNCOND.
This parameter specifies a list of carrier access codes for which
special handling of carrier access codes has to be performed.
The handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Dialed and preselected carrier access codes are affected equally.
Notes:
- This parameter makes the input easier for the operator if dialed and
preselected carrier access codes are to be treated in the same
manner.
Any value entered in this parameter is stored, displayed and
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACSHDI and
CACSHPS.
Prerequisites:
- The specified list must already be created with CR CACLST.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CACSHDI CAC SEL. HANDLING. DIALLED.
This parameter specifies a list of carrier access codes for which
special handling of carrier access codes has to be performed.
This handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Dialed carrier access codes only are affected.
Prerequisites:
- The specified list must already be created with CR CACLST.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CACSHPS CAC SEL. HANDLING. PRESELEC.
This parameter specifies a list of carrier access codes for which
special handling of carrier access codes has to be performed.
This special handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Preselected carrier access codes only are affected.
Prerequisites:
- The specified list must already be created with CR CACLST.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHPS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CACGHUC CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. UNCOND.
This parameter specifies which special handling of carrier access codes
has to be performed. The special handling is applied for all carrier
access codes equally.
Dialed and preselected carrier access codes are affected equally.
Notes:
- This parameter makes the input easier for the operator if dialed and
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CACCPT- 2+
CR CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
preselected carrier access codes are to be treated in the same
manner.
Any value entered in this parameter is stored, displayed and
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACGHDI and
CACGHPS.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
CACGHDI CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. DIALLED.
This parameter specifies which special handling of carrier access codes
has to be performed. The special handling is applied for all carrier
access codes equally.
Dialed carrier access codes only are affected.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI
- CACGHUC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
CACGHPS CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. PRESELEC.
This parameter specifies which special handling of carrier access codes
has to be performed. The special handling is applied for all carrier
access codes equally.
Preselected carrier access codes only are affected.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CACCPT- 3-
DISP CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT
This command displays some or all carrier access code points.
An extended display format allows to display additionally carrier access codes.
All entries are displayed if CODE = X is entered.
The optional paramters reduce the amount of displayed data if they are entered.
All parameters are logically linked with AND, i.e. only those data are displayed
which meet all the entered restrictions.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ ; [
[ DISP CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ [,CACLST=] [,FORMAT=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies the code combination(s) to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...18 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies that the display is restricted to those
carrier access code points which refer to the originating local
area code.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies that the display is restricted to those
carrier access code points which refer to the originating mark.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
CACLST CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST NAME
This parameter specifies that the display is restricted to those
carrier access code points which refer to the carrier access code
list name.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the amount of data displayed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CACCPT- 1+
DISP CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
STD STANDARD DATA
This value specifies that the display contains
carrier access code points (created with
CR CACCPT) only.
WITHCAC WITH CAC
This value specifies that the display contains
carrier access code points
(created with CR CACCPT) and
carrier access codes
(created with CR CAC).
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CACCPT- 2-
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE CODEPOINT
This command modifies data for a codepoint to a destination for which special
handling of carrier access codes has to be performed and/or which is
connected to one of the possible default carriers.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,LACOR=[[ [
[ MOD CACCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=[ <,DEFCAC= ,CACSHUC= ,CACSHDI= [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CACSHPS= ,CACGHUC= ,CACGHDI= ,CACGHPS= ,CFUNC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE CODE
This parameter specifies a code combination which identifies the called
party (B-side).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...18 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code of the calling
party (A-side).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the origin of the calling
party (A-side).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
DEFCAC DEFAULT CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies which default carrier access code is to be
selected when applicable.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAC1 CARRIER ACCESS CODE 1
CAC2 CARRIER ACCESS CODE 2
CACSHUC CAC SEL. HANDLING. UNCOND.
This parameter specifies a list of carrier access codes for which
special handling of carrier access codes has to be performed.
The handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Dialed and preselected carrier access codes are affected equally.
Notes:
- This parameter makes the input easier for the operator if dialed and
preselected carrier access codes are to be treated in the same
manner.
Any value entered in this parameter is stored, displayed and
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CACCPT- 1+
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACSHDI and
CACSHPS. It replaces any existing value in those two parameters.
Prerequisites:
- The specified list must already be created with CR CACLST.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CACSHDI CAC SEL. HANDLING. DIALLED.
This parameter specifies a list of carrier access codes for which
special handling of carrier access codes has to be performed.
This handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Dialed carrier access codes only are affected.
Notes:
- Any value entered in this parameter replaces any existing
value of parameter CACGHDI.
Prerequisites:
- The specified list must already be created with CR CACLST.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHDI
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CACSHPS CAC SEL. HANDLING. PRESELEC.
This parameter specifies a list of carrier access codes for which
special handling of carrier access codes has to be performed.
This special handling is applied on a per carrier access code basis.
Preselected carrier access codes only are affected.
Notes:
- Any value entered in this parameter replaces any existing
value of parameter CACGHPS.
Prerequisites:
- The specified list must already be created with CR CACLST.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACGHUC
- CACGHPS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CACGHUC CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. UNCOND.
This parameter specifies which special handling of carrier access codes
has to be performed. The special handling is applied for all carrier
access codes equally.
Dialed and preselected carrier access codes are affected equally.
Notes:
- This parameter makes the input easier for the operator if dialed and
preselected carrier access codes are to be treated in the same
manner.
Any value entered in this parameter is stored, displayed and
regenerated with identical values in the parameters CACGHDI and
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CACCPT- 2+
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CACGHPS.It replaces any existing value in those two parameters.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI CACSHPS
- CACGHDI CACGHPS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
CACGHDI CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. DIALLED.
This parameter specifies which special handling of carrier access codes
has to be performed. The special handling is applied for all carrier
access codes equally.
Dialed carrier access codes only are affected.
Notes:
- Any value entered in this parameter replaces any existing
value of parameter CACSHDI.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHDI
- CACGHUC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
CACGHPS CAC GLOBAL HANDLING. PRESELEC.
This parameter specifies which special handling of carrier access codes
has to be performed. The special handling is applied for all carrier
access codes equally.
Preselected carrier access codes only are affected.
Notes:
- Any value entered in this parameter replaces any existing
value of parameter CACSHPS.
Incompatibilities:
- CACSHUC
- CACSHPS
- CACGHUC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
CFUNC CANCEL FUNCTION
This parameter specifies a parameter which is to be removed from the
carrier access code point being modified.
Notes:
- At least one parameter has to remain in the code point after the
command has been executed, i.e. empty code points are not allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEFCAC DEFAULT CAC
CACSHUC CAC SEL. HANDLING UNCOND.
CACSHDI CAC SEL. HANDLING DIALLED.
CACSHPS CAC SEL. HANDLING PRESELEC.
CACGHUC CAC GLOBAL HANDLING UNCOND.
CACGHDI CAC GLOBAL HANDLING DIALLED.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CACCPT- 3+
MOD CACCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CACGHPS CAC GLOBAL HANDLING PRESELEC.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CACCPT- 4-
CAN CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command cancels a carrier access code list for which
special carrier routing was performed.
Prerequisites:
- The list is not referred to by a carrier codepoint.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CACLST : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list name to be canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CACLST- 1-
CR CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command creates a list with a new listname and inserts up to 32 carrier
access codes to destinations for which special carrier routing is performed.
The same action is valid for all codes, entered with the create command.
More codes as well as codes with a different ACTION can be entered
with MOD CACLST.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CACLST : NAME= ,CAC= ,ACTION= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list name with carrier access codes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies carrier access codes for which special
carrier routing is performed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ACTION ACTION FOR CAC HANDLING
This parameter specifies the action for carrier routing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CACLST- 1-
DISP CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command displays some or all carrier access code lists.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CACLST : NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list name(s) to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CACLST- 1-
MOD CACLST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER ACCESS CODE LIST
This command modifies a carrier access code list.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CACLST : NAME= [,CAC= ,ACTION=] [,CCAC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the list being modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies carrier access code(s)
to be added to the list.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ACTION ACTION FOR CAC HANDLING
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE CAC FOR ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT CAC
ROUTE CAC HAS TO BE ROUTED
CCAC CANCEL CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies carrier access code(s) to be
removed from the list.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CACLST- 1-
CAN CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command cancels the recording center specified with the entered recording
center identification number.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CALIDREC : CALIDREC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CALIDREC MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This parameter identifies the recording center to be canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CALIDREC- 1-
CR CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command creates the data for a malicious call recording center.
The entered data specifies the recorder identification number,
the recording center directory number and, if needed, certain
features.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR CALIDREC : CALIDREC= ,DNREC= [,CUGILC=] [,CUGDNIC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SINGCON=] [,COLPREQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CALIDREC MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This parameter identifies the recording center to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5, range of decimal numbers
DNREC DN OF RECORDING CENTER
This parameter specifies the national significant directory number of
the recording center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CUGILC CUG INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the national closed user group interlock code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
CUGDNIC CUG DATA NETWORK IDENT. CODE
This parameter specifies the international closed user group
identification code.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed if CUGILC value is also specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
SINGCON SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
This parameter specifies wether call content data is transmitted
via one single 64 kb connection to the recording center as the sum
of information of A and B sides (value YES) or whether the A and B
sides information is separately transmitted via two 64 kb connections
(value NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
NO DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Y SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
YES SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALIDREC- 1+
CR CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COLPREQ CONNECTED LINE PRESENT.REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether the call content connection has to be
protected by using the COLP feature.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO COLP REQUEST
NO NO COLP REQUEST
Y COLP REQUEST
YES COLP REQUEST
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALIDREC- 2-
DISP CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command displays data of one recording center specified with the entered
malicious call recording center identification number or the data of all
created centers.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CALIDREC : CALIDREC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CALIDREC MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This parameter identifies the recording center to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALIDREC- 1-
MOD CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This command modifies the data of a malicious call recording center.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD CALIDREC : CALIDREC= <,NDNREC= ,NCUGILC= ,CCUGILC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NCUGDNIC= ,CCUGDNIC= ,SINGCON= ,COLPREQ=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CALIDREC MALICIOUS CALL ID REC. CENTER
This parameter identifies the recording center to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5, range of decimal numbers
NDNREC NEW DN OF RECORDING CENTER
This parameter specifies the new national significant directory number
of the recording center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCUGILC NEW CUG INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the new international closed user group
identification code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
CCUGILC CANCEL CUG INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the international closed user group
identification code to be canceled.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed if no CUGDNIC is present in the
database or if CCUGDNIC is also specified.
- This parameter is incompatible with NCUGILC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
NCUGDNIC NEW CUG NETWORK IDENT.CODE
This parameter specifies the new national closed user group interlock
code.
Notes:
- This parameter is only allowed if a CUGILC is present in the
database or if NCUGILC is also specified.
- This parameter is incompatible with CCUGILC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
CCUGDNIC CANCEL CUG NETWORK IDENT.CODE
This parameter specifies the national closed user group interlock
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALIDREC- 1+
MOD CALIDREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
code to be canceled.
Notes:
- This parameter is incompatible with NCUGDNIC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
SINGCON SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
This parameter specifies wether call content data is transmitted
via one single 64 kb connection to the recording center as the sum
of information of A and B sides (value YES) or whether the A and B
sides information is separately transmitted via two 64 kb connections
(value NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
NO DOUBLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Y SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
YES SINGLE CONNECTION CALL CONTENT
Default: NO
COLPREQ CONNECTED LINE PRESENT.REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether the call content connection has to be
protected by using the COLP feature.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO COLP REQUEST
NO NO COLP REQUEST
Y COLP REQUEST
YES COLP REQUEST
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALIDREC- 2-
CAN CALLBACK
DEACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALLBACK SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
This command withdraws, erases or deactivates call back service
to the given MSIN.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN CALLBACK - DEACT DEACTIVATION
2. CAN CALLBACK - ERASE ERASURE
3. CAN CALLBACK - WITHDRAW WITHDRAWAL
1. Input format
DEACTIVATION
Input format for deactivation of call back services.
Deactivation is an action to prevent execution of call back call
diversion service.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CALLBACK : MSIN= ,SHRTCD= ,STATUS= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
SHRTCD SHORT CODE OF VOICE MAIL SERV.
This parameter indentifies a Voice Mail Service.
It is stored in the Voice Mail Service Table of the HLR and is used as
index to this table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
STATUS STATUS
This parameter specifies if erasure or deactivation of the call
back service is requested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVATION
Default: REG
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CALLBACK- 1+
CAN CALLBACK
ERASE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ERASURE
Input format of erasure of call back services.
Erasure is an action to delete data registered in the network for
call back call diversion service.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CALLBACK : MSIN= ,SHRTCD= [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
SHRTCD SHORT CODE OF VOICE MAIL SERV.
This parameter indentifies a Voice Mail Service.
It is stored in the Voice Mail Service Table of the HLR and is used as
index to this table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
STATUS STATUS
This parameter specifies if erasure or deactivation of the call
back service is requested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
REG REGISTRATION
Default: REG
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CALLBACK- 2+
CAN CALLBACK
WITHDRAW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
WITHDRAWAL
Input format for withdrawal of call back services.
Withdrawal is an action to remove the call back service from the
subscribers access.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CALLBACK : MSIN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CALLBACK- 3-
ENTR CALLBACK
ACTIVATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALLBACK SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
This command provides, registers or activates call back service
to the given MSIN.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR CALLBACK- ACTIVATE ACTIVATION
2. ENTR CALLBACK- PROVIDE PROVISION
3. ENTR CALLBACK- REGISTER REGISTRATION
1. Input format
ACTIVATION
Input format for activation of call back services.
Activation is an action which enables execution of call back call
diversion service.
Notes:
- To activate Call Back the parameter SHRTCD has to be
entered if the actual state is provisioned. If the status is
registered, it is possible to enter the command without the
parameter SHRTCD.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CALLBACK : MSIN= [,SHRTCD=] ,STATUS= [,RCTIM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
SHRTCD SHORT CODE OF VOICE MAIL SERV.
This parameter identifies a Voice Mail Service.
It is stored in the Voice Mail Service Table of the HLR and is used as
index to this table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
STATUS STATUS
This parameter specifies whether registration or activation of the
call back service is requested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVATION
RCTIM NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
This parameter specifies the no reply condition timer for call back.
The default is project dependent.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CALLBACK- 1+
ENTR CALLBACK
ACTIVATE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CALLBACK- 2+
ENTR CALLBACK
PROVIDE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROVISION
Input format for provision of call back services.
Provision is an action to provide call back service to the mobile
subscriber.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CALLBACK : MSIN= [,RCTIM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
RCTIM NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
This parameter specifies the no reply condition timer for call back.
The default is project dependent.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CALLBACK- 3+
ENTR CALLBACK
REGISTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
REGISTRATION
Input format for registration of call back services.
Registration is an action to store data needed for call back call
diversion operations in the network.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CALLBACK : MSIN= ,SHRTCD= [,RCTIM=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
SHRTCD SHORT CODE OF VOICE MAIL SERV.
This parameter identifies a Voice Mail Service.
It is stored in the Voice Mail Service Table of the HLR and is used as
index to this table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
RCTIM NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
This parameter specifies the no reply condition timer for call back.
The default is project dependent.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
STATUS STATUS
This parameter specifies whether registration or activation of the
call back service is requested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
REG REGISTRATION
Default: REG
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CALLBACK- 4-
DISP CALLDAT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING DATA
This command displays a snapshot of the contents of the transient CP and GP
resources for one or more ports. The resources must have a state which is
not idle.
The command displays the CP resources CHR, CPB, BOR, BKR, CQI,
CRL and TCB, as well as the GP resources CALLREG, LST, and DPS.
One or more ports can be specified by the equipment number.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP CALLDAT - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
2. DISP CALLDAT - LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER

[ [
[ DISP CALLDAT : EQN= [,FORMAT=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter defines the equipment number.
Notes:
- The following qualifications of the port are allowed:
LTG: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific port
EQN = a-b-X all ports of an LTG
EQN = a-b-c all ports of an LTU
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific port in each LTU
DLU: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific DLU port
EQN = a-b-X all DLU ports of a shelf
EQN = a-b-c all DLU ports of a module
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific DLU port in each module
V5IF: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific V5IF port
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG / DLU OR V5IF NUMBER=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: a TSG number in the range 0...7
For DLU port: a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V5IF port: a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
b: LTG / SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: an LTG number in the range 1...63
For DLU port: a shelf in the range 0...7
For V5IF port: 0
c: LTU / MODULE OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: an LTU number in the range 0...7
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 1+
DISP CALLDAT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
For DLU port: a module number in the range 0...15
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: a V52IF port number in the range 0...20
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: CHANNEL / CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: a channel number in the range 0...31
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range
0...7 for SLM with 8 ports
0...15 for SLM with 16 ports
0...32 for SLM with 32 ports
For V51IF port: a V51IF port number in the range 0...31
For V52IF port: a V52IF port number in the range 0...99
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the display format.
Notes:
- The format parameter values DATA and BOTH are allowed only if
the parameter TYPE is unsupplied or if it is supplied with CHR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH DISPLAY IN HEX AND STRUCTURED
[ [ Only for CHR (channel register).
[ [ For the equipment number range, the
[ [ channel registers found are displayed first
[ [ in structured format, followed by
[ [ an output of the channel registers in
[ [ hexadecimal format.
[ [ To identify a channel register in the structured
[ [ list and in the hexadecimal list,
the processor number and the speech channel number
[ [ are also displayed in both output formats.
[ [ Since the tailing zeros are suppressed in the
[ [ hexadecimal output, the channel register may
[ [ be displayed with different length.
[BYTE [ DISPLAY IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
[ [ This is the standard output format for all types
[ [ of resources.
[ [ Tailing zeros are suppressed in the output of
[ [ each resource. As a result, the displays may show
[ [ the resource with different lengths.
DATA DISPLAY IN STRUCTURED FORMAT
Only for CHR (channel register).
For the equipment number range, the
channel registers found are displayed
in structured format.
Default: BYTE
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the resource to be displayed.
Note:
- If the TYPE and FORMAT parameters are omitted, the
searching for data of the equipment number includes all supported
CP and GP resources. This has as condition that there is a channel
register not idle linked to this equipment number.
- If a GP resource is specifically requested, a display is attempted
regardless of the state of the channel register in CP.
Output formats dependent on input
+---------------------------------+----------------------------------+
! Input: ! Output format: !
! ! !
! TYPE= !FORMAT= ! hexadecimal structured !
! ! +---------------------+------------+
! a b c d e f g h i k ! ! a b c d e f g h i k !Channel reg.!
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 2+
DISP CALLDAT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+---------------------+-----------+---------------------+------------+
! - - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! - ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! - ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! - ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! - ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! - ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! - ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! - ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! - ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! - ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! Y ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! Y ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! Y ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! Y ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! Y ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! Y ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! Y ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! Y ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! Y ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! D ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! D ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! D ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! D ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! D ! ) !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! B ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! B ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! B ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! B ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! B ! ) !
+---------------------+-----------+----------------------------------+
TYPE=TYPE, FORMAT=FORMAT,
Y=BYTE,
D=DATA,
B=BOTH
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BKR BOOKING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: d = booking register
[BOR [ OPERATOR BILLING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: c = operator billing register
[CALLREG [ CALL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: h = call register
[CHR [ CHANNEL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
Table number: a = channel register
[CPB [ CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: b = call processing buffer
[CQI [ COMMON QUEUEING INDEX TABLE
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: e = common queueing index table
[DPS [ DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: k = DLU port status table
[LST [ LINE STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: i = line status table
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 3+
DISP CALLDAT
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TCB TRANSACTION CONTROL BLOCK
Resource in CP
Table number: f = transaction control block
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 4+
DISP CALLDAT
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINE TRUNK GROUP

[ [
[ DISP CALLDAT : LTG= [,LC=] [,FORMAT=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNG GROUP
This parameter specifies the line trunk group of the set of objects to
be traced.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
LTGSET : 0..31
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND
and upper ones)
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
LTG : 1..63
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the line connection of a LTG.
Notes:
- The input of this parameter is only valid in combination
with the LTG parameter.
- The following input is allowed:
LC = X
LC = a
LC = a-b
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTU NO.OF A LTG=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
LTU : 0..7
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL OF A LTG PORT=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Channel : 0..31
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the display format.
Notes:
- The format parameter values DATA and BOTH are allowed only if
the parameter TYPE is unsupplied or if it is supplied with CHR.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 5+
DISP CALLDAT
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH DISPLAY IN HEX AND STRUCTURED
[ [ Only for CHR (channel register).
[ [ For the equipment number range, the
[ [ channel registers found are displayed first
[ [ in structured format, followed by
[ [ an output of the channel registers in
[ [ hexadecimal format.
[ [ To identify a channel register in the structured
[ [ list and in the hexadecimal list,
the processor number and the speech channel number
[ [ are also displayed in both output formats.
[ [ Since the tailing zeros are suppressed in the
[ [ hexadecimal output, the channel register may
[ [ be displayed with different length.
[BYTE [ DISPLAY IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
[ [ This is the standard output format for all types
[ [ of resources.
[ [ Tailing zeros are suppressed in the output of
[ [ each resource. As a result, the displays may show
[ [ the resource with different lengths.
DATA DISPLAY IN STRUCTURED FORMAT
Only for CHR (channel register).
For the equipment number range, the
channel registers found are displayed
in structured format.
Default: BYTE
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the resource to be displayed.
Note:
- If the TYPE and FORMAT parameters are omitted, the
searching for data of the equipment number includes all supported
CP and GP resources. This has as condition that there is a channel
register not idle linked to this equipment number.
- If a GP resource is specifically requested, a display is attempted
regardless of the state of the channel register in CP.
Output formats dependent on input
+---------------------------------+----------------------------------+
! Input: ! Output format: !
! ! !
! TYPE= !FORMAT= ! hexadecimal structured !
! ! +---------------------+------------+
! a b c d e f g h i k ! ! a b c d e f g h i k !Channel reg.!
+---------------------+-----------+---------------------+------------+
! - - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x x x x x x x x x x ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! - ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! - ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! - ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! - ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! - ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! - ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! - ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! - ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! - ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! - ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! Y ! x - - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! Y ! - x - - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! Y ! - - x - - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! Y ! - - - x - - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! Y ! - - - - x - - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! Y ! - - - - - x - - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! Y ! - - - - - - x - - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! Y ! - - - - - - - x - - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! Y ! - - - - - - - - x - ! - !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! Y ! - - - - - - - - - x ! - !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! D ! - - - - - - - - - - ! x !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 6+
DISP CALLDAT
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! - x - - - - - - - - ! D ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! D ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! D ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! D ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! D ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! D ! ) !
! x - - - - - - - - - ! B ! x - - - - - - - - - ! x !
! - x - - - - - - - - ! B ! ) !
! - - x - - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - x - - - - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - x - - - - - ! B ! ! This combination results !
! - - - - - x - - - - ! B ! > in an error message !
! - - - - - - x - - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - x - - ! B ! ! !
! - - - - - - - - x - ! B ! ) !
! - - - - - - - - - x ! B ! ) !
+---------------------+-----------+----------------------------------+
TYPE=TYPE, FORMAT=FORMAT,
Y=BYTE,
D=DATA,
B=BOTH
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BKR BOOKING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: d = booking register
[BOR [ OPERATOR BILLING REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: c = operator billing register
[CALLREG [ CALL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: h = call register
[CHR [ CHANNEL REGISTER
[ [ Resource in CP
Table number: a = channel register
[CPB [ CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: b = call processing buffer
[CQI [ COMMON QUEUEING INDEX TABLE
[ [ Resource in CP
[ [ Table number: e = common queueing index table
[DPS [ DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: k = DLU port status table
[LST [ LINE STATUS TABLE
[ [ Resource in GP
[ [ Table number: i = line status table
TCB TRANSACTION CONTROL BLOCK
Resource in CP
Table number: f = transaction control block
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLDAT- 7-
DISP CALLPOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
This command displays exchange parameters related to call processing.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CALLPOPT : <FORMAT= ,SERV= ,ADMSERV=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT OUTPUT MASK FORM
This parameter is for displaying a table with the values of exchange
parameters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPTIONS CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE COMPATIBILITY
This parameter is for displaying a table containing
service types and all compatible services for one or
more internal services.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TANALOG TRAFFIC ANALOG MODE
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRCUIT MODE SPEECH
TCMUNRST TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.
TCMAUDIO TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
TCMAUDI7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
TCMSERV6 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
TCMSERV7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 07
TUNKNOWN TRAFFIC UNKNOWN BEARER SERV.
TPMBCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
TPMDCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
TPMBDCHA TRAFFIC PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TTEL3K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TTEL7K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TFAX3 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
TFAX4 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTTX64K TRAFFIC TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
TVIDEOTX TRAFFIC VIDEOTEXT
TVIDEOTL TRAFFIC VIDEOTELEPHONY
TSERV19 TRAFFIC SERVICE 19
TSERV20 TRAFFIC SERVICE 20
TSERV21 TRAFFIC SERVICE 21
TSERV22 TRAFFIC SERVICE 22
TSERV23 TRAFFIC SERVICE 23
TSERV24 TRAFFIC SERVICE 24
TSERV25 TRAFFIC SERVICE 25
TSERV26 TRAFFIC SERVICE 26
TSERV27 TRAFFIC SERVICE 27
TSPCONN TRAFFIC SEMIPERM. CONNECTION
TSERV29 TRAFFIC SERVICE 29
TSERV30 TRAFFIC SERVICE 30
TSERV31 TRAFFIC SERVICE 31
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
ADMSERV ADMIN. SERVICE COMPATIBILITY
This parameter is for displaying a table containing
service types and all compatible services for one or
more administrative services.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLPOPT- 1+
DISP CALLPOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CMSPEECH CIRCUIT MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CM UNRESTRICTED DIGITAL INFO.
CMAUDIO CIRCUIT MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRCUIT MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRCUIT MODE SERVICE 06
CMSERV7 CIRCUIT MODE SERVICE 07
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
PMBCHANN PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TEL3K TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTX64K TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEOTELEPHONY
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICES GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICES GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICES GROUP
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLPOPT- 2-
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL PROCESSING OPTIONS
This command modifies the exchange parameters and the services related to
Call Processing.
In the following a description is given for
- modification of administrative services
- input of exchange parameters
- modification of internal services for one service
- modification of internal services for several services.
Note: The input of exchange parameters is always possible with the
input for modification of internal and administrative services.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD CALLPOPT - ADMSERV MODIFIC. ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
2. MOD CALLPOPT - OPTIONS OPTIONS
3. MOD CALLPOPT - SERV MODIFIC. ONE INTERNAL SERVICE
4. MOD CALLPOPT - SERVTYPE MODIFIC. SEVERAL INTERNAL SERVICES
1. Input format
MODIFIC. ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
This input format modifies the powersets of services (exept the powerset of
internal services) for one or more administrative services.

[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : ADMSERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADMSERV ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
This parameter specifies the administrative service that has values to
be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one
of the parameters TYPE, CTYPE.
- The values of parameter ADMSERV are verified against the
powersets of administrative services.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLGRP ALL SERVICES GROUP
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
CMAUDIO CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
CMSERV7 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 07
CMSPEECH CIRC.MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.DIGITAL INFO
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICES GROUP
PMBCHANN PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 1+
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SERV27 SERVICE 27
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
TEL3K TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TTX64K TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
VIDEOTEL VIDEOTELEPHONY
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICES GROUP
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services where the entered
service shall be added.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC ,VOICE services can only be
modified using parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- All VOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
TRAFFIC services.
- All SCIVOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
VOICE services except for ADMSERV is VOICEGRP and ALLGRP.
In case of ADMSERV is NONVCGRP SCIVOICE is not possible.
- All standard services must also be contained in the powerset of
the corresponding administrative service.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
SCIVOICE, (only for administrative services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB1TR6, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH, (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG, (only for adminstrative services)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
FH FRAME HANDLER SERVICE
FHSTD FRAME HANDLER SERVICE STANDARD
IDSB ISDN-DSB SERVICE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE SERV.
PHISTD PHI SERVICE STANDARD
QSIG Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE
QSIGSTD Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE STANDARD
SCIVOICE SCI VOICE SERVICE
SUB SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUBSTD SUBSCRIBER SERVICE STANDARD
SUB1TR6 1TR6-SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUB1TR6S 1TR6-SUBSCR. SERVICE STANDARD
CTYPE CANCEL SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services from which the entered
service shall be deleted.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC,VOICE services can only be
modified using parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- In the case of CTYPE = TRAFFIC the complete sequence of
administrative services for the addressed TRAFFIC service in
the compatibility tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = VOICE the complete sequence
of administrative services for the addressed VOICE
service and SCIVOICE service in the compatibility-
tables will be deleted automatically.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 2+
MOD CALLPOPT
ADMSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- In the case of CTYPE = ADMIN it is verified that the addressed
service is not used in the compatibility tables.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
SCIVOICE, (only for administrative services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB1TR6, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH, (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG, (only for adminstrative services)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADMIN ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
FH FRAME HANDLER SERVICE
FHSTD FRAME HANDLER SERVICE STANDARD
IDSB ISDN-DSBSERVICE
PHI PACKET HANDLER INTERFACE SERV.
PHISTD PHI SERVICE STANDARD
QSIG Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE
QSIGSTD Q-SIGNALLING SERVICE STANDARD
SCIVOICE SCI VOICE SERVICE
SUB SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUBSTD SUBSCRIBER SERVICE STANDARD
SUB1TR6 1TR6-SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
SUB1TR6S 1TR6-SUBSCR. SERVICE STANDARD
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 3+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OPTIONS
This input format modifies the exchange parameters.

[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : <OCALSEQ= ,OOSOPT= ,COOSOPT= ,CCQUEL= [
[ [
[ ,CFWTIMER= ,CTXTIMER= ,ANITX= ,CFWMAX= [
[ [
[ ,FACFRM= ,VOIREC= ,CTXNAME= ,NUISWRH= [
[ [
[ ,TELCOCNT= ,MSNMAX= ,ABB= ,MLDIVNO= ,RELFEA= [
[ [
[ ,TRIVKW= ,CTRIVKW= ,RBSIN= ,CRBSIN= ,PHDN= [
[ [
[ ,CPHDN= ,GENPROT= ,MDMSN= ,DESTMAXL= ,DLUEM= [
[ [
[ ,SLANAPRT= ,SYSREA= ,CFWNOT= ,ANNFCFW= [
[ [
[ ,CFWFIX= ,SATMAX= ,HOPCO= ,ISDNPROT= [
[ [
[ ,COURTESY= ,PROPDELY= ,TMSLRES= ,SPCHRES= [
[ [
[ ,SWAPORIG= ,LOADS4LS= ,CFACSUOR= ,CFRQSUOR= [
[ [
[ ,MWIA= ,MWIFIMM= ,MWISTI= ,SCLSTNAE= [
[ [
[ ,ISSCODEP= ,SCF= ,KEY= ,INTKEY= ,INTKEYLN= [
[ [
[ ,SECWORD= ,DNMAXL= ,TRCLMAX= ,TRCLMIN= [
[ [
[ ,CONFLMAX= ,KEYMAX= ,ANNARDN= ,KEYWREQ= [
[ [
[ ,REDUDACT= ,IGFEAMCI= ,IMPLDACT= ,ANSCIPBX= [
[ [
[ ,PINLNGTH= ,SCLSTCAT= ,POPDN= ,CPOPDN= ,IWUDN= [
[ [
[ ,CIWUDN= ,IWUILC= ,IWUDNIC= ,PRSAUTH= ,TMFEAT= [
[ [
[ ,CTMFEAT= ,ERN= ,CERN= ,NRN= ,CNRN= [
[ [
[ ,DNDTIMER= ,OPRASST= ,COPRASST= ,TRRMINA= [
[ [
[ ,TRRMINB= ,TRRNOMA= ,TRRNOMB= ,BASEPOS= [
[ [
[ ,DN2ADM= ,CTDN= ,DOMSTD= ,NETISTD= ,REDIRMAX= [
[ [
[ ,CACOVRTR= ,FPTHRS= ,FPTIMLIM= ,FPOMT= ,FPACT= [
[ [
[ ,BIERIP= ,BCHDLDN= ,TMUOCAC=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages and the sequences of these
languages for the OCANEQ (Operationally Controlled ANnouncement
Equipment) within the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
L1L2
L1L2L3
L1L2L3L4
L1L2L4
L1L2L4L3
L1L3
L1L3L2
L1L3L2L4
L1L3L4
L1L3L4L2
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 4+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L1L4
L1L4L2
L1L4L2L3
L1L4L3
L1L4L3L2
L2
L2L1
L2L1L3
L2L1L3L4
L2L1L4
L2L1L4L3
L2L3
L2L3L1
L2L3L1L4
L2L3L4
L2L3L4L1
L2L4
L2L4L1
L2L4L1L3
L2L4L3
L2L4L3L1
L3
L3L1
L3L1L2
L3L1L2L4
L3L1L4
L3L1L4L2
L3L2
L3L2L1
L3L2L1L4
L3L2L4
L3L2L4L1
L3L4
L3L4L1
L3L4L1L2
L3L4L2
L3L4L2L1
L4
L4L1
L4L1L2
L4L1L2L3
L4L1L3
L4L1L3L2
L4L2
L4L2L1
L4L2L1L3
L4L2L3
L4L2L3L1
L4L3
L4L3L1
L4L3L1L2
L4L3L2
L4L3L2L1
OOSOPT OUT OF SERVICE OPTION
This parameter specifies the reason for automatic remove of
trunks from service.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter COOSOPT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
HOLD OOS WITH SINGLE HOLDING
KILL OOS FOR KILLER TRUNK
MDII OOS FOR EXCESSIVE MDII
COOSOPT CANCEL OUT OF SERVICE OPTION
This parameter cancels reason for automatic trunk removal from
service.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter OOSOPT.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 5+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
HOLD OOS WITH CONNECTION HOLDING
KILL OOS FOR KILLER TRUNKS
MDII OOS FOR EXCESSIVE MDII
CCQUEL CCBS QUEUE LENGTH
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
CFWTIMER CALL FORWARDING TIMER
Defines a default value for individual
call forwarding timers.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5...60, range of decimal numbers
CTXTIMER CTX CALL FORWARDING TIMER
This parameter specifies a default value for CENTREX
call forwarding timers
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5...60, range of decimal numbers
ANITX A-NUMB.IDENT. IN TRANSIT EXCH.
This parameter specifies whether A-number identification in
international and transit exchanges is active (YES)
or inactive (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N ANITX NOT ACTIVE
NO ANITX NOT ACTIVE
Y ANITX ACTIVE
YES ANITX ACTIVE
CFWMAX CALL FORWARD (MAXIMUM)
This parameter specifies the maximum number of call forwards allowed
in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1..5 range of decimal numbers.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5, range of decimal numbers
FACFRM FACILITY FORMAT
This parameter specifies the type of procedure for subscriber dialed
inputs of the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CEPT CEPT FORMAT
EWSA EWSA FORMAT
VOIREC VOICE RECOGNITION
This parameter specifies whether voice recognition is disabled
or enabled in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISABLE VOICEREC.DISABLED
ENABLE VOICEREC.ENABLED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 6+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CTXNAME CENTREXNAME
This parameter specifies whether the centrexname recognition
is disabled or enabled in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISABLE CTXNAME DISABLED
ENABLE CTXNAME ENABLED
NUISWRH PROMPT F. FEATURE
enabling resp. disabling the possibility to prompt for a new
feature input without replacing the handset.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISABLE PROMPT DISABLED
ENABLE PROMPT ENABLED
TELCOCNT TELECOMMUNICATION CENTER NO.
This parameter specifies the telecommunication centre number.
It is used in traffic measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
MSNMAX MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO. MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the maximum number of multiple subscriber
numbers allowed in the exchange during one access.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
ABB ABBREVIATED DIALING DATA
This parameter specifies the short number lower limits for abbreviated
dialing.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: SHORT NUMBER TYPE
SLPLIM SCREENING LIST PLACE LIMIT
SNOLIM1 SHORT NUM. LIMIT ONE DIGIT
SNOLIM2 SHORT NUM. LIMIT TWO DIGITS
This parameter unit specifies whether the short number list of
one digit and/or the short number list of two digits is valid.
b: SHORT NUMBER LIMIT VALUE=
0...90, range of decimal numbers
In case of SNOLIM1 this parameter unit can take the values
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 .
In case of SNOLIM2 this parameter unit can take the values
0, 10, 20 . . . 90 .
In case of SLPLIM this parameter unit can take the values
0, 1.
MLDIVNO MAX. LENGTH OF DIVERSION NO.
This parameter specifies the maximum length of diversion numbers
allowed in the exchange.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 7+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: DIVERSION
DIVBY DIVERSION BUSY
DIVDA DIVERSION NOT ANSWERED
DIVI DIVERSION IMMEDIATELY
This parameter specifies whether call forwarding
immediately, call forwarding no reply or call forwarding busy
is valid.
b: MAX. LENGTH OF DIVERSION NUMBER=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
RELFEA RELEASED FEATURES
This parameter specifies the released features for the exchange.
This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CENTREX CENTREX ALLOWED
OSS OSS ALLOWED
PRIOQUE PRIORITY QUEUING ALLOWED
TRIVKW TRIVIAL KEYWORD
This parameter specifies the whether the keyword digits are
equal, in ascending order or in descending order. More than
one value connected with & may be entered.
This parameter may not be used together with the cancelling
operation.
This parameter can be used during normal operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ASCEDIG DIGITS IN ASCENDING ORDER
digits of keyword in ascending order
DESCDIG DIGITS IN DESCENDING ORDER
digits of keyword in descending order
EQUALDIG EQUAL DIGITS IN KEYWORD
only equal digits in keyword
CTRIVKW CANCEL TRIVIAL KEYWORD
This parameter specifies, which allowed form of the trivial
keyword has to get cancelled. It is not allowed to enter this
parameter together with the parameter to set the trivial
keyword.
This parameter can be used during normal operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ASCEDIG DIGITS IN ASCENDING ORDER
DESCDIG DIGITS IN DESCENDING ORDER
EQUALDIG EQUAL DIGITS IN KEYWORD
RBSIN RING BACK SERVICE ID. NO.
This parameter specifies the ring back service identification number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CRBSIN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CRBSIN CANCEL RING BACK SERV. ID. NO.
This parameter cancels the ring back service identification number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 8+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter RBSIN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PHDN PACKET HANDLER DIR. NO.
This parameter specifies the packet handler directory number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CPHDN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPHDN CANCEL PACKET HANDLER DIR. NO.
This parameter cancels the packet handler directory number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter PHDN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
GENPROT GENERIC PROTOCOL
This parameter specifies which protocol, functional and/or stimulus,
is applied.
A value for GLOBAL always has to be entered.
If GLOBAL-STIPROT or GLOBAL-FCTPROT is entered no other
value is allowed.
In case of GLOBAL-BOTH all of the other parameters
(OUTPUT, REQUEST, OUTAOC) have to be entered.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only during Installation Recovery.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: GENERIC PROTOCOL
GLOBAL ALLOWED PROTOCOL
OUTAOC OUTPUT ADVICE OF CHARGE
output advice of charge default protocol
OUTPUT DEFAULT PROTOCOL FOR OUTPUT
REQUEST DEFAULT PROTOCOL FOR REQUEST
This parameter unit specifies whether the global parameter or
the subscription option ( request or output ) is valid.
b: PROTOCOL TYPE
BOTH BOTH PROTOCOLS
FCTPROT FUNCTIONAL PROTOCOL
STIPROT STIMULUS PROTOCOL
MDMSN DEFAULT MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO.
This parameter specifies whether the marking of a multiple subscriber
number as default multiple subscriber number is mandatory or optional.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MANDAT MANDATORY
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 9+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DESTMAXL MAX. LENGTH OF DEST. NAME
This parameter specifies the maximum length allowed for the destination
name in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LONG LONG NAME: 12 CHARACTERS
SHORT SHORT NAME: 6 CHARACTERS
DLUEM DLU EMERGENCY ALLOWED
This parameter specifies whether the complete DLU emergency operation
can be activated in this exchange or only a reduced mode.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PARTLY PARTLY ALLOWED
SLANAPRT SUB LINE ANALOG PORT FAILURE
This parameter specifies whether a subscriber line
port failure is printed out or not.
This parameter can only be used during Installation
Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PRTNO SUBSCRIBER PRINTOUT NO
PRTYES SUBSCRIBER PRINTOUT YES
SYSREA SYSTEM REACTION
This parameter specifies whether or not a specific
system reaction is required in call processing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SPECIAL SPECIAL REACTION
STANDARD STANDARD REACTION
CFWNOT CFW NOTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the kind of call forwarding notification
at the calling users side.
This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO NOTIFICATION
WITH NOTIFICATION WITH NUMBER
WITHOUT NOTIFICATION WITHOUT NUMBER
ANNFCFW ANNOUNCEMENT FOR CALL FORWARD
This parameter specifies whether an announcement must be
applied to a calling subscriber, when his call was
forwarded.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
NO DO NOT APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
Y DO APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
YES DO APPLY ANNOUNCEMENT
CFWFIX CALL FORWARDING IS FIX
This parameter specifies whether fixed call forwarding
to voice mail service is activated.
This parameter can only be used during Installation
Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 10+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N CALL FORWARDING IS NOT FIX
NO CALL FORWARDING IS NOT FIX
Y CALL FORWARDING IS FIX
YES CALL FORWARDING IS FIX
SATMAX MAX NUMBER OF SATELLITE LINKS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of satellite links
within one connection.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
HOPCO HOPCOUNTER
This parameter specifies the value of the hopcounter used to
limit of consecutive transit connections (caused by incorrect
routing data) to a certain level (1..31).
After reaching the put in value the call is released.
- This parameter can be used during normal operation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...31, range of decimal numbers
ISDNPROT ISDN PROTOCOL
This parameter specifies the type of ISDN D1 - PROTOCOL, that is
used in the exchange.
The parameter may only be entered at installation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH BOTH 1TR6 AND EDSS1 PROTOCOL
EDSS1 EDSS1:DIG.SUB.SIGNAL.1(BLUEB.)
ISDN1TR6 1TR6:TECHN.RICHTL.(REDB.)
COURTESY COURTESY CALL
This parameter specifies whether a courtesy call attempt
to the forward-to party must be performed after subscriber
controlled input of call forwarding.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
NO DO NOT ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
Y DO ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
YES DO ACTIVATE COURTESY CALL
PROPDELY PROPAGATION DELAY COUNTER
This parameter specifies the maximum value of the propagation
delay counter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...999, range of decimal numbers
TMSLRES MAX. RESERVED TIMESLOTS
This parameter specifies the maximum value of reserved timeslots
for the BEV-condition in GP.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...127, range of decimal numbers
SPCHRES MAX. RESERVED SPEECHCHANNELS
This parameter specifies the maximum value of reserved speech-
channels for the BEV-condition in GP.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 11+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...127, range of decimal numbers
SWAPORIG SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
NO DO NOT SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
Y DO SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
YES DO SWAP ORIGINATING MARKS
LOADS4LS LOADSHARING 4 LINK SETS
This parameter specifies whether the loadsharing via two or
four linksets is applied in the switch.
The parameter may only be entered at installation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N LOADSHARING VIA MAX 2 LINKSETS
NO LOADSHARING VIA MAX 2 LINKSETS
Y LOADSHARING VIA MAX 4 LINKSETS
YES LOADSHARING VIA MAX 4 LINKSETS
CFACSUOR CFW. ACCOUNT SUSPENSION ORIG.
In order to choose a required interworking between enhancement call
forwarding and accountsuspension originating an action can be entered.
The parameter may only be entered at installation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CFW CALL FORWARDING IS PERFORMED
CONNECT CALL CONNECTED TO B1 SUB
The call is connected to the B1 subscriber.
REJECT REJECTION(DEFAULT VALUE)
RING CALLING SUB.REC.RINGING TONE
The calling subscriber receives ringing tone.
CFRQSUOR CFW. REQ.SUSP.ORIG.
In order to choose a required interworking between
enhancement call forwarding and requested suspension
originating an action can be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CFW CALL FORWARDING IS PERFORMED
CONNECT CALLING CONNECTED TO B1 SUB.
The call is connected to the B1 subscriber.
REJECT DEFAULT VALUE
RING CALLING SUB.REC.RINGING TONE
The calling subscriber receives ringing tone.
MWIA MESSAGE WAIT. INDIC. ANALOG
This parameter specifies the maximum number of controlling users for
message waiting indication analog.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2, range of decimal numbers
MWIFIMM MESSAGE WAIT.IND.FUNC.IMM.
This parameter specifies the maximum number of controlling users for
message waiting indication functional immediately.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...10, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 12+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MWISTI MESSAGE WAIT. INDIC. STIMULUS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of controlling users for
message waiting indication stimulus.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2, range of decimal numbers
SCLSTNAE SCREENLIST NOT ACT WHEN EMPTY
This parameter specifies whether an empty screening list
is allowed to be active or not.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N EMPTY SCREENING LST MAY BE ACT
Empty screening lists may be active.
NO EMPTY SCREENING LST MAY BE ACT
Empty screening lists may be active.
Y EMPTY SCR. LST MAY NOT BE ACT
Empty screening lists must not be active.
YES EMPTY SCR. LST MAY NOT BE ACT
Empty screening lists must not be active.
ISSCODEP ISDN SUPLEM. SERV. CODE PROC.
This parameter specifies whether the called party number
should be used from the global title header or from
the Call Completion Busy Subscriber component to
determine the B-side user.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
NO DO NOT USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
Y DO USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
YES DO USE ISS CODE PROCESSING
SCF SELECTIVE CALL FORWARDING.
This parameter specifies whether selective call forwar-
ding takes precedence over non-selective call forwarding
or vice versa.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PRECEDENCE FOR NON SEL CFW
Precedence for non selective call forwarding.
NO PRECEDENCE FOR NON SEL CFW
Precedence for non selective call forwarding.
Y PRECEDENCE FOR SELECTIVE CFW
Precedence for selective call forwarding.
YES PRECEDENCE FOR SELECTIVE CFW
Precedence for selective call forwarding.
KEY KEYWORD
This parameter specifies the default keyword for subscriber
controlled inputs.
The length of this parameter must be the minimum value of
PINLNGTH.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...12 digit decimal number
INTKEY DEFAUL INTERNET PW
This parameter specifies the default internet password.
The parameter may only be entered at installation.
The length of this parameter must be the minimum value
of the parameter INTKEYLN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 13+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INTKEYLN INTKEY MIN/MAX VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum and minimum pinlength for the
internet password. It has to be entered in the form min-max:
min....minimum keylength (between 4 and 12)
max....maximum keylength (between 4 and 12)
min has to be equal max or lower.
With this parameter the parameter INTKEY has to be entered as well.
This parameter can just be entered at installation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: MINIMUM INTKEY LENGTH=
4...12, range of decimal numbers
b: MAXIMUM INTKEY LENGTH=
4...12, range of decimal numbers
SECWORD SECRET WORD
This parameter specifies a secret password.
The parameter may be entered at normal
operation but is displayed only at installation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DNMAXL MAX. DIRECTORY NUMBER LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum length of directory numbers
that are allowed in an exchange.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12, range of decimal numbers
TRCLMAX MAX. TRAFFIC CLASSES
This parameter specifies the maximum number of traffic classes
that are allowed in an exchange.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
TRCLMIN TRAFFIC CLASSES MINIMUM
This parameter specifies the minimum value of traffic classes
that is allowed in an exchange.
Notes:
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
CONFLMAX MAX. CONFERENCE PARTICIPANTS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of participants in
a large conference.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...32, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 14+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KEYMAX MAX. KEYWORD MISUSES
This parameter specifies the maximum number of keyword misuses.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3...5, range of decimal numbers
ANNARDN AUTOM. REC. (1 NUMB. STORED)
This Parameter specifies, whether an announcement with the
calling party number currently stored is fed in (YES) or
not (NO), if the subscriber put in the appropriate access
code for AR with announcement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N ANNARDN NOT ACTIVATED
NO ANNARDN NOT ACTIVATED
Y ANNARDN ACTIVATED
YES ANNARDN ACTIVATED
KEYWREQ KEYWORD REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether the necessity of a keyword is
defined on feature-office-base or on subscribed base.
The parameter may only be entered at installation
recovery
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FEATURE FEATURE BASE
SUBSCR SUBSCR. BASE
REDUDACT REDUNTANT ACTIVATION CFW
This Parameter specifies, whether a redundant
deactivation of CFW can be done (YES) or
is rejected (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N REDUNDANT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
NO REDUNDANT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
Y REDUNDANT ACT. NOT REJ.
YES REDUNDANT ACT. NOT REJ.
IGFEAMCI IGN. FEAT. WHEN MAL. CALL ID.
This Parameter specifies, whether features are
ignored in case of malicious call identification
(YES) or not (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N FEATURES NOT IGNORED.
NO FEATURES NOT IGNORED.
Y FEATURES IGNORED.
YES FEATURES IGNORED.
IMPLDACT IMPLICIT ACTIVATION CFW
This Parameter specifies, whether a implicit
deactivation of CFW can be done (YES) or
is rejected (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N IMPLICIT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
NO IMPLICIT ACTIVATIOND REJEC.
Y IMPLICIT ACT. NOT REJ.
YES IMPLICIT ACT. NOT REJ.
ANSCIPBX ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
This Parameter specifies, whether an analog
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 15+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SCI on PBX-Level can be done (YES) or
not (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
NO NO ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
Y ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
YES ANALOG SCI ON PBX-LEVEL
PINLNGTH PINLENGTH MIN/MAX VALUE
This parameter specifies the maximum and minimum pinlength for sub-
scriber controlled input. It has to be entered in the form min-max:
min....minimum pinlength (between 4 and 12)
max....maximum pinlength (between 4 and 12)
min may be equal max or lower.
With this parameter the parameter KEY has to be entered as well.
This parameter can only be entered at installation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: MINIMUM PINLENGTH=
4...12, range of decimal numbers
b: MAXIMUM PINLENGTH=
4...12, range of decimal numbers
SCLSTCAT SCREENING LIST CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the symbolic digit strings attached to
screening list categories
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA TRANSMIS. INTERNAT.
DATRANS DATA TRANSMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNAT.
SUBINAT SUBSCRIBER INTERNATIONAL
SUBMFC SUB. CATEG. REQUESTED BY MFC
Subscriber category requested by MFC
SUBORD SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUBSCR. INTERNAT.
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This parameter unit specifies which screening list
category the symbolic digit string is attached to.
b: SYMBOLIC DIGIT STRING=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
A value between 0 and 99 may be entered.
In case of omission of part b the digit
string is removed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 16+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
POPDN POINT OF PRESENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the point of presence number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CPOPDN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPOPDN CANCEL POINT OF PRESENCE NO.
This parameter cancels the point of presence number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter POPDN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
IWUDN INTERWORKING UNIT DIR.NUMBER
This parameter specifies the interworking unit number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CIWUDN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CIWUDN CAN. INTERWORKING UNIT DIR.NO.
This parameter cancels the interworking unit number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter IWUDN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
IWUILC INT.WORK UNIT INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interworking unit interlock code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
IWUDNIC IWU DATANETWORK IDENT. CODE
This parameter specifies the interworking unit datanetwork
identification code. The value may be between 0 and 9999
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
PRSAUTH PROTOCOL SPEC. AUTHORISATIONS
This parameter specifies whether protocol specific
authorisation is set.
It may only be entered at installation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PROTOCOL SPEC. AUTH.
NO NO PROTOCOL SPEC. AUTH.
Y PROTOCOL SPECIFIC AUTH.
YES PROTOCOL SPECIFIC AUTH.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 17+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TMFEAT TRAF.MEAS.-FEATURES
This parameter specifies the features for which
traffic measurement can be started.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALLING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACCEPTCW ACCEPTED CALL WAITINGS USE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACO ALARM CALL ORDER
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
AFS AUTOMATIC FEATURE SUBSCRIPT.
automatic feature subscription
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
AGRU ANS. GEAEND. RUFNR. (TELEKOM)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
AOC ADVICE OF CHARGE ON REQUEST
allowed for EDSS1
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NUMBER
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CC COMPLETION OF CALLS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCIBI CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY IMMID.
call completion internet busy immediate,
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCIBU CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY USER
call completion internet busy user,
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCIBVOIP CALL CMP.INT.BUSY VOICE O.IP
call completion international
busy voice over internet,
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCSSVI COLL.CALL SCR.FILT.INT.SERV.
collect call screening filtered
interception service.
Allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR
calling line identification restriction,
allowed for Analog
CLIRR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
CLIRS CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
COLRR CONNECT LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
COLRS CONNECT LINE IDENT TESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CONF3 3WAY CONFERENCE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
CT CALL TRANSFER (A-SIDE, B-SIDE)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CTD CLICK TO DIAL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CW CALL WAITING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
CWD CALL WAITING DE LUXE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWDA CALL WAITING DELUXE ACCEPTED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWDC CALL WAITING DELUXE CONF.
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWDF CALL WAITING DELUXE FORWARDED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWIB CALL WAITING INTERN. BUSY
call waiting internet busy
DEBNC DETAILLED BILLING NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVA FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 18+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVBRVMS BUSY ROUTE DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVBY BUSY LINE DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVBYVMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVCD CONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVCDE DIVERSION ON CALL DEFLECTION
allowed for EDSS1
DIVDA DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVDAVMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVI IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVIA INDIVID. ANNOUNC. DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVIP CFW UNCONDITIONAL PARALLEL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVIVMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVND DONT DISTURB DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
DIVOP OPERATOR DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
DIVOPD DELAYED DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVUCD UNCONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
EECT ENHANCED EXPLICIT CALL TR.
enhanced explicit call transfer
FSK FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
allowed for Analog
HOTLDEL HOTLINE DELAYED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
HOTLIMM HOTLINE IMMEDIATE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ISCI INTERN.SUB.CONTR.INPUT
internet subscriber controlled input
KEYWORD KEYWORD MODIFICATION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
MCII MALICIOUS CALL ID IMMED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
MCIR MALICIOUS CALL ID REQU
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
PR PARTIAL REROUTING (EDSS1-PBX)
allowed for EDSS1
RCCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
RCREQS REVERSED CHARGE AT SET UP TIME
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
REJDIV CALL FORWARDING REJCTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
REQSTDA REQUEST STATUS/FEATDATA
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
RSCI REMOTE SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
SCA SELECTIVE CALL ACCEPTANCE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCD SELECTIVE CALL DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCIR SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT RESTR.
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCLIM SUPERVISION OF CREDIT LIMIT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCLST SCREENING LIST
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
SCLSTKO SCREENING LIST KICK OUT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
SCO SELECTIV CALL ORIGINATION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCR SELECTIV CALL REJECTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCW SELECTIV CALL WAITING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 19+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SERVC SERVICE CHANGE
allowed for 1TR6
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
allowed for 1TR6
SR SELECTIVE RINGING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
STH STOP HUNT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SUBADDR SUBADDRESSING
allowed for EDSS1
TRARSDN CALL RESTRICTION DN/PRT
allowed for 1TR6
TRARSS TRAFFIC RESTRICTION SUB
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
TRARSTR TRAFFIC RESTRICTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
TRARSTRT TRAFFIC RESTRICTION TERM
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
TRARSUSP BLUEBOOK OUTGOING CALL SUSP.
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
TWC THREE WAY CALL (INQUIRY)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
UISCI USER INTERACTIVE SCI
User interactive subscriber controlled input.
allowed for Analog and ISDN
UUS1 USER-TO-USER-SIGNALLING 1
allowed for EDSS1
UUS3 USER-TO-USER-SIGNALLING 3
allowed for EDSS1
VACNC VERB ANN CHARGES FOR NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog
VMSRETR VMS MESSAGE RETRIEVAL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
VOI VOICE OVER INTERNET
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CTMFEAT CANCEL TRAF.MEAS.-FEATURES
This parameter is used to cancel features for which
traffic measurement can be started.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ABBD ABBREVIATED DIALLING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACCEPTCW ACCEPTED CALL WAITINGS USE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACO ALARM CALL ORDER
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
AFS AUTOMATIC FEATURE SUBSCRIPT.
automatic feature subscription
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
AGRU ANS. GEAEND. RUFNR. (TELEKOM)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
AOC ADVICE OF CHARGE ON REQUEST
allowed for EDSS1
AR AUTOMATIC RECALL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ARNO ACCOUNT RECORD NUMBER
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CC COMPLETION OF CALLS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCIBI CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY IMMID.
call completion internet busy immediate,
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCIBU CALL COMP.INTERN.BUSY USER
call completion internet busy user,
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCIBVOIP CALL COMP.INT.BUSY VOICE O.IP
call completion international
busy voice over internet,
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CCSSVI COLL.CALL SCR.FILT.INT.SERV.
collect call screening filtered
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 20+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
interception service,
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR
allowed for Analog
CLIRR CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
CLIRS CALLING LINE IDENT RESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
COLRR CONNECT LINE IDENT RESTR REQU
allowed for EDSS1
COLRS CONNECT LINE IDENT TESTR SUSP
allowed for EDSS1
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CONF3 3WAY CONFERENCE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
CT CALL TRANSFER (A-SIDE, B-SIDE)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CTD CLICK TO DIAL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CW CALL WAITING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
CWD CALL WAITING DE LUXE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWDA CALL WAITING DELUXE ACCEPTED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWDC CALL WAITING DELUXE CONF.
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWDF CALL WAITING DELUXE FORWARDED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
CWIB CALL WAITING INTERN. BUSY
call waiting internet busy
DEBNC DETAILLED BILLING NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVA FIXED ANNOUNCEMENT DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVBRVMS BUSY ROUTE DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVBY BUSY LINE DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVBYVMS BUSY LINE DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVCD CONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVCDE DIVERSION ON CALL DEFLECTION
allowed for EDSS1
DIVDA DONT ANSWER DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVDAVMS DONT ANSWER DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVI IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
allowed for 1TR6
DIVIA INDIVID. ANNOUNC. DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVIP CFW UNCONDITIONAL PARALLEL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVIVMS IMMEDIATE DIVERSION TO VMS
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVND DONT DISTURB DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
DIVOP OPERATOR DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
DIVOPD DELAYED DIVERSION TO OPERATOR
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
DIVUCD UNCONDITIONAL DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
EECT ENHANCED EXPLICIT CALL TR.
enhanced explicit call transfer
FSK FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
allowed for Analog
HOTLDEL HOTLINE DELAYED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
HOTLIMM HOTLINE IMMEDIATE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ISCI INTERN.SUB.CONTR.INPUT
internet subscriber controlled input
KEYWORD KEYWORD MODIFICATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 21+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
MCII MALICIOUS CALL ID IMMED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
MCIR MALICIOUS CALL ID REQU
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
PR PARTIAL REROUTING (EDSS1-PBX)
allowed for EDSS1
RCCS REVERSE CHARGE CALL SECURITY
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
RCREQS REVERSED CHARGE AT SET UP TIME
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
REJDIV CALL FORWARDING REJCTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
REQSTDA REQUEST STATUS/FEATDATA
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
RSCI REMOTE SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
SCA SELECTIVE CALL ACCEPTANCE
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCD SELECTIVE CALL DIVERSION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCIR SUBS. CONTROLLED INPUT RESTR.
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCLIM SUPERVISION OF CREDIT LIMIT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCLST SCREENING LIST
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
SCLSTKO SCREENING LIST KICK OUT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
SCO SELECTIVE CALL ORIGINATION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCR SELECTIVE CALL REJECTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SCW SELECTIVE CALL WAITING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SERVC SERVICE CHANGE
allowed for 1TR6
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
allowed for 1TR6
SR SELECTIVE RINGING
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
STH STOP HUNT
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
SUBADDR SUBADDRESSING
allowed for EDSS1
TRARSDN CALL RESTRICTION DN/PRT
allowed for 1TR6
TRARSS TRAFFIC RESTRICTION SUB
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
TRARSTR TRAFFIC RESTRICTION
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
TRARSTRT TRAFFIC RESTRICTION TERM
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
TRARSUSP TRAFFIC RESTR. SUSPENDED
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
TWC THREE WAY CALL (INQUIRY)
allowed for Analog and EDSS1 and 1TR6
UISCI USER INTERACTIVE SCI
User interactive subscriber controlled input.
allowed for Analog and ISDN
UUS1 USER-TO-USER-SIGNALLING 1
allowed for EDSS1
UUS3 USER-TO-USER-SIGNALLING 3
allowed for EDSS1
VACNC VERB ANN CHARGES FOR NEXT CALL
allowed for Analog
VMSRETR VMS MESSAGE RETRIEVAL
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
VOI VOICE OVER INTERNET
allowed for Analog and EDSS1
ERN EXCHANGE ROUTING NO.
This parameter specifies the exchange routing number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CERN.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 22+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CERN CANCEL EXCHANGE ROUTING NO.
This parameter cancels the exchange routing number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter ERN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NRN NETWORK ROUTING NO.
This parameter specifies the network routing number
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter CNRN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CNRN CANCEL NETWORK ROUTING NO.
This parameter cancels the network routing number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter NRN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DNDTIMER DO NOT DISTURB TIMER
This parameter specifies the time in hours after which the feature
do not disturb of a subscriber is automatically deactivated.
An input of zero means that no deactivation takes place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...48, range of decimal numbers
OPRASST OPERATOR ASSIST NO.
This parameter specifies the operator assist number
for malicious call tracing
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter COPRASST.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COPRASST CANCEL OPERATOR ASSIST NO.
This parameter cancels the operator assist number.
Notes:
- This parameter is not allowed with parameter OPRASST.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 23+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRRMINA TRANSFER RATE MINIMUM A
This parameter specifies the minimum
transfer rate for SLMI:SDA.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be larger
than TRRNOMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0,6,12, range of decimal numbers
TRRMINB TRANSFER RATE MINIMUM B
This parameter specifies the minimum
transfer rate for SLMI:SDB/SCC/SDD.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be larger
than TRRNOMB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0,6,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,
30,31,32, range of decimal numbers
TRRNOMA TRANSFER RATE NOMINAL A
This parameter specifies nominal transfer rate
for SLMI:SDA.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be smaller
than TRRMINA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0,6,12, range of decimal numbers
TRRNOMB TRANSFER RATE NOMINAL B
This parameter specifies the nominal
transfer rate for SLMI:SDB/SCC/SDD.
Notes:
-The value of it must not be smaller
than TRRMINB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0,6,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29,
30,31,32, range of decimal numbers
BASEPOS BASIC SERVICE POSSIBLE
This Parameter specifies, whether the SDSL line card will
try to set up with 160kbit/sec as a last possibility
independently of the administrated bandwidth(YES) or
not (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N BASEPOS NOT ACTIVATED
NO BASEPOS NOT ACTIVATED
Y BASEPOS ACTIVATED
YES BASEPOS ACTIVATED
DN2ADM DN2 POSSIBLE
This Parameter specifies whether a second directory
number may be entered while modifying a subscriber(YES)
or not (NO). This parameter may only be entered at
installation operation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DN2ADM NOT ACTIVATED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 24+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO DN2ADM NOT ACTIVATED
Y DN2ADM ACTIVATED
YES DN2ADM ACTIVATED
CTDN CLICK TO DIAL NO.
This parameter specifies the click to dial number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DOMSTD DOMAIN STANDARD
This parameter specifies standard domain for MLPP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16777215, range of decimal numbers
NETISTD NETWORK ID STANDARD
This parameter specifies the default network identification
code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
REDIRMAX REDIRECTION (MAXIMUM)
This parameter specifies the maximum number of redirections allowed
in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8, range of decimal numbers
CACOVRTR CAC OVERRIDES TRAFFIC RESTR
This parameter specifies whether carrier access code
overrides traffic restrictions.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO OVERRIDE
NO NO OVERRIDE
Y OVERRIDE
YES OVERRIDE
FPTHRS FRAUD PREV THRESHHOLD
This parameter specifies the fraud prevention
threshhold.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3...10, range of decimal numbers
FPTIMLIM FRAUD PREV TIMELIMIT
This parameter specifies the fraud prevention
timelimit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...168, range of decimal numbers
FPOMT FRAUD PREV OUTPUT ON OMT
This parameter specifies whether fraud prevention is
output on operation and maintenance terminal (YES)
or not (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 25+
MOD CALLPOPT
OPTIONS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO OUTPUT ON OMT
NO NO OUTPUT ON OMT
Y OUTPUT ON OMT
YES OUTPUT ON OMT
FPACT FRAUD PREVENTION ACTIVE
This parameter specifies, whether the fraud prevention
is active (YES) or not (NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N FRAUD PREVENTION NOT ACTIVATED
NO FRAUD PREVENTION NOT ACTIVATED
Y FRAUD PREVENTION ACTIVATED
YES FRAUD PREVENTION ACTIVATED
BIERIP BASIC INTERN. EXCH. RES.
This parameter specifies a basic internode
exchange resource IP.
Notes:
It is of the form a.b.c.d where a/b/c/d are
integers in the range 0..255.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BCHDLDN B-CHANNEL DATA LINK DN
This parameter specifies the b-channel data link directory
number.
Notes:
- This parameter is cancelled by entering zero.
- Up to 24 digits between 0 and 9 may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit decimal number
TMUOCAC TRAFFIC MEASURE. USE OWN CAC
This Parameter specifies, whether, for traffic
measurement, if the carrier access code is not dialed,
the own carrier access code has to be used (YES), or
not(NO).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT USE OWN CAC
NO DO NOT USE OWN CAC
Y USE OWN CAC
YES USE OWN CAC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 26+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFIC. ONE INTERNAL SERVICE
This input format modifies the powersets of services and the service
compatibility tables for one service.

[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : SERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE= ,COMPORIG= ,COMPTERM= [
[ [
[ ,BSIGN=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE
This parameter specifies which internal service has parameters
to be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one of the
parameters TYPE, CTYPE, COMPORIG, COMPTERM or BSIGN.
- The values of parameter SERV are verified against the
powerset of TRAFFIC services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TANALOG TRAFFIC ANALOG MODE
TCMAUDIO TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
TCMAUDI7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
TCMSERV6 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
TCMSERV7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 07
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SPEECH
TCMUNRST TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.
TFAX3 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
TFAX4 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 4
TPMBCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
TPMBDCHA TRAFFIC PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TPMDCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
TSERV19 TRAFFIC SERVICE 19
TSERV20 TRAFFIC SERVICE 20
TSERV21 TRAFFIC SERVICE 21
TSERV22 TRAFFIC SERVICE 22
TSERV23 TRAFFIC SERVICE 23
TSERV24 TRAFFIC SERVICE 24
TSERV25 TRAFFIC SERVICE 25
TSERV26 TRAFFIC SERVICE 26
TSERV27 TRAFFIC SERVICE 27
TSERV29 TRAFFIC SERVICE 29
TSERV30 TRAFFIC SERVICE 30
TSERV31 TRAFFIC SERVICE 31
TSPCONN TRAFFIC SEMIPERM. CONNECTION
TTEL3K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TTEL7K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TTTX64K TRAFFIC TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
TUNKNOWN TRAFFIC UNKNOWN BEARER SERV.
TVIDEOTL TRAFFIC VIDEOTELEPHONY
TVIDEOTX TRAFFIC VIDEOTEXT
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services where the entered
service shall be added.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC ,VOICE services can only be
modified using parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- All VOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
TRAFFIC services.
- All SCIVOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 27+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOICE services except for ADMSERV is VOICEGRP and ALLGRP.
In case of ADMSERV is NONVCGRP SCIVOICE is not possible.
- All standard services must also be contained in the powerset of
the corresponding administrative service.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
SCIVOICE, (only for administrative services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB1TR6, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH, (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG, (only for adminstrative services)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TRAFFIC INTERNAL SERVICE
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
CTYPE CANCEL SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services from which the entered
service shall be deleted.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC,VOICE services can only be
modified using parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- In the case of CTYPE = TRAFFIC the complete sequence of
administrative services for the addressed TRAFFIC service in
the compatibility tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = VOICE the complete sequence
of administrative services for the addressed VOICE
service and SCIVOICE service in the compatibility-
tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = ADMIN it is verified that the addressed
service is not used in the compatibility tables.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
SCIVOICE, (only for administrative services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB1TR6, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH, (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG, (only for adminstrative services)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TRAFFIC INTERNAL SERVICE
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
COMPORIG COMPAT. SERVICE (ORIG.TRAFFIC)
This parameter specifies the sequence of administrative services
associated with one internal service for originating traffic.
This internal service is specified by the parameter SERV.
Notes:
- First administrative service in the sequence has the highest
priority, with a maximum of 8 elements in the sequence.
- A service may not be entered twice.
- Administrative service must be allowed in this exchange.
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV.
- The entered value(s) of administrative service must match
the protocol of the internal service specified by SERV.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 28+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLGRP ALL SERVICES GROUP
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
CMAUDIO CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
CMSERV7 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 07
CMSPEECH CIRC.MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.DIGITAL INFO
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICES GROUP
PMBCHANN PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
TEL3K TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TTX64K TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
VIDEOTEL VIDEOTELEPHONY
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICES GROUP
COMPTERM COMPAT. SERVICE (TERM.TRAFFIC)
This parameter specifies the sequence of administrative services
associated with one internal service for terminating traffic.
This internal service is specified by the parameter SERV.
Notes:
- First administrative service in the sequence has the highest
priority, with a maximum of 16 elements in the sequence.
- A service may not be entered twice.
- Administrative service must be allowed in this exchange.
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV.
- The entered value(s) of administrative service must match
the protocol of the internal service specified by SERV.
- This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLGRP ALL SERVICES GROUP
ANALOG ANALOG MODE
CMAUDIO CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
CMAUDI7K CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
CMSERV6 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
CMSERV7 CIRC.MODE SERVICE 07
CMSPEECH CIRC.MODE SPEECH
CMUNRST CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.DIGITAL INFO
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICES GROUP
PMBCHANN PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 29+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPCONN SEMIPERMANENT CONNECTION
TEL3K TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TTX64K TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
VIDEOTEL VIDEOTELEPHONY
VIDEOTEX VIDEOTEXT
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICES GROUP
BSIGN B-SIDE SIGNALLING COMPAT.
This parameter specifies the basic signalling services
associated with one internal service.
This internal service is specified by the parameter SERV.
Notes:
- A basic signalling service parameter should not be entered twice.
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: KIND OF PROTOCOL
ANALOG ANALOG SERVICES
EDSS1 EDSS1:DIG.SUB.SIGNAL.1(BLUEB.)
ISDN1TR6 1TR6:TECHN.RICHTL.(REDB.)
This unit specifies the type of signalling protocol of the
terminating side of the call.
This parameter can only be used during Installation Recovery.
b: INTERNAL SERVICE OF B-SIDE
TANALOG TRAFFIC ANALOG MODE
TCMAUDIO TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
TCMAUDI7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
TCMSERV6 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
TCMSERV7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 07
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SPEECH
TCMUNRST TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.
TFAX3 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
TFAX4 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 4
TNOSERV TRAFFIC NO SERVICE
TPMBCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
TPMBDCHA TRAFFIC PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TPMDCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
TSERV19 TRAFFIC SERVICE 19
TSERV20 TRAFFIC SERVICE 20
TSERV21 TRAFFIC SERVICE 21
TSERV22 TRAFFIC SERVICE 22
TSERV23 TRAFFIC SERVICE 23
TSERV24 TRAFFIC SERVICE 24
TSERV25 TRAFFIC SERVICE 25
TSERV26 TRAFFIC SERVICE 26
TSERV27 TRAFFIC SERVICE 27
TSERV29 TRAFFIC SERVICE 29
TSERV30 TRAFFIC SERVICE 30
TSERV31 TRAFFIC SERVICE 31
TSPCONN TRAFFIC SEMIPERM. CONNECTION
TTEL3K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TTEL7K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TTTX64K TRAFFIC TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
TUNKNOWN TRAFFIC UNKNOWN BEARER SERV.
TVIDEOTL TRAFFIC VIDEOTELEPHONY
TVIDEOTX TRAFFIC VIDEOTEXT
This unit specifies the internal service, that is associated
to the type of signalling protocol of the terminating
side of the call.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 30+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERVTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MODIFIC. SEVERAL INTERNAL SERVICES
This input format modifies the powersets of services for one or more services.

[ [
[ MOD CALLPOPT : SERV= <,TYPE= ,CTYPE=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SERV INTERNAL SERVICE
This parameter specifies which internal service has parameters
to be modified.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with at least one of the
parameters TYPE, CTYPE, COMPORIG, COMPTERM or BSIGN.
- The values of parameter SERV are verified against the
powerset of TRAFFIC services.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TANALOG TRAFFIC ANALOG MODE
TCMAUDIO TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 3.1KHZ AUDIO
TCMAUDI7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE 7KHZ AUDIO
TCMSERV6 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 06
TCMSERV7 TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SERVICE 07
TCMSPEEC TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE SPEECH
TCMUNRST TRAFFIC CIRC.MODE UNRESTR.
TFAX3 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
TFAX4 TRAFFIC TELEFAX GROUP 4
TPMBCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE B-CHANNEL
TPMBDCHA TRAFFIC PACKET MODE BD-CHANNEL
TPMDCHAN TRAFFIC PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
TSERV19 TRAFFIC SERVICE 19
TSERV20 TRAFFIC SERVICE 20
TSERV21 TRAFFIC SERVICE 21
TSERV22 TRAFFIC SERVICE 22
TSERV23 TRAFFIC SERVICE 23
TSERV24 TRAFFIC SERVICE 24
TSERV25 TRAFFIC SERVICE 25
TSERV26 TRAFFIC SERVICE 26
TSERV27 TRAFFIC SERVICE 27
TSERV29 TRAFFIC SERVICE 29
TSERV30 TRAFFIC SERVICE 30
TSERV31 TRAFFIC SERVICE 31
TSPCONN TRAFFIC SEMIPERM. CONNECTION
TTEL3K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 3.1KHZ
TTEL7K TRAFFIC TELEPHONY ISDN 7KHZ
TTTX64K TRAFFIC TELETEX 64 KBIT/S
TUNKNOWN TRAFFIC UNKNOWN BEARER SERV.
TVIDEOTL TRAFFIC VIDEOTELEPHONY
TVIDEOTX TRAFFIC VIDEOTEXT
TYPE SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services where the entered
service shall be added.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC ,VOICE services can only be
modified using parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- All VOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
TRAFFIC services.
- All SCIVOICE services must also be contained in the powerset of
VOICE services except for ADMSERV is VOICEGRP and ALLGRP.
In case of ADMSERV is NONVCGRP SCIVOICE is not possible.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 31+
MOD CALLPOPT
SERVTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- All standard services must also be contained in the powerset of
the corresponding administrative service.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
SCIVOICE, (only for administrative services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB1TR6, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH, (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG, (only for adminstrative services)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TRAFFIC INTERNAL SERVICE
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
CTYPE CANCEL SERVICE TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of services from which the entered
service shall be deleted.
Notes:
- This parameter must always be entered with parameter
SERV or ADMSERV.
- The TRAFFIC,VOICE services can only be
modified using parameter SERV.
- All other service types are administrative services and can
only be modified using parameter ADMSERV.
- In the case of CTYPE = TRAFFIC the complete sequence of
administrative services for the addressed TRAFFIC service in
the compatibility tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = VOICE the complete sequence
of administrative services for the addressed VOICE
service and SCIVOICE service in the compatibility-
tables will be deleted automatically.
- In the case of CTYPE = ADMIN it is verified that the addressed
service is not used in the compatibility tables.
- The following parameter values are only allowed during Installation
Recovery : TRAFFIC, (only for internal services)
VOICE, (only for internal services)
SCIVOICE, (only for administrative services)
ADMIN, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB, (only for adminstrative services)
SUB1TR6, (only for adminstrative services)
PHI, (only for adminstrative services)
FH, (only for adminstrative services)
QSIG, (only for adminstrative services)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TRAFFIC INTERNAL SERVICE
VOICE VOICE SERVICE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLPOPT- 32-
CAN CALLTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL TYPE DATA
This command cancels an ADMOSS or CENTREX call type
for common CDS.
Compatibilities:
- If the ADMOSS call type is assigned to a task group or if it is referenced
in the common service subscriber database, or in the common service
group specific intercept datebase or in the route database, or in the
virtual operator service database it can not be canceled.
- If the CENTREX call type is assigned to a task group or if it is referenced
in the common service subscriber database, it can not be canceled.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This input format is used to cancel an ADMOSS or CENTREX
call type.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX
call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CALLTYPE- 1-
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL TYPE DATA
This command creates an ADMOSS or CENTREX call type
for common CDS.
Prerequisites:
- A call type can only be entered if the common service group is already
existing.
- The call type name must be unique in a common service group.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR CALLTYPE - CRCCTYP CREATE CENTREX CALL TYPE
2. CR CALLTYPE - CRHDCTYP CREATE HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
3. CR CALLTYPE - CROCTYP CREATE ADMOSS CALL TYPE
1. Input format
CREATE CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create a CENTREX call type.

[ [
[ CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] [
[ [
[ [,CTYPFEA=] [,INCEPT=] [,GOS=] [,APPLID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,OCALSEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must not exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 1+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the call type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYPFEA CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of the call type.
Following inputs are allowed:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
CTLIST
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
INETSERV
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
Following inputs are incompatible for one Calltype:
SPECOP & RCSROPR
SPECOP & RCSRANN
SPECOP & RCSRLS
SPECOP & CTLIST
AUTOCB & RCSROPR
AUTOCB & RCSRANN
AUTOCB & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & RCSROPR
AUTOTC & RCSRANN
AUTOTC & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & CTLIST
RCSROPR & RCSRANN
RCSROPR & RCSRLS
RCSRANN & RCSRLS
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
INETSERV & SPECOP
INETSERV & AUTOCB
INETSERV & AUTOTC
INETSERV & AUTOGR
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 2+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INETSERV & SCREENLT
INETSERV & NATDNA
INETSERV & INATDNA
INETSERV & NATDNAR
INETSERV & INATDNAR
INETSERV & RNATDNA
INETSERV & RINATDNA
INETSERV & RCSROPR
INETSERV & RCSRANN
INETSERV & RCSRLS
INETSERV & VOPRSVP
INETSERV & CTLIST
INETSERV & ACDMON
INETSERV & ROUTING
INETSERV & ENHROUT
INETSERV & FEA1
INETSERV & FEA2
INETSERV & FEA3
Following Call Type Feature are only once allowed in a
Common Service Group:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
ROUTING ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept for a calltype.
For following intercepts only the fix Part is allowed:
QPOS
QWAIT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT WITH DATA
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
QPOS QUEUE POSITION ANNOUNCEMENT
QWAIT QUEUE WAITING ANNOUNCEMENT
ROUTFAIL ROUTING FAILED
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
b: NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GOS GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the grade of service for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
QABANDC QUEUEING TIME ABANDONED CALLS
QPRESC QUEUEING TIME PRESENTED CALLS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 3+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TIME1=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME2=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
d: TIME3=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the Application Identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for QPOS and QWAIT. Input of up to
4 languages for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 4+
CR CALLTYPE
CRCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 5+
CR CALLTYPE
CRHDCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create an ADMOSS call type
for high Performance Datalink

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [,VOPSERV=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must not exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VOPSERV VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE
This parameter assignes one virtual operator service to an
ADMOSS call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BCHDL B-CHANNEL DATALINK
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 6+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE ADMOSS CALL TYPE
This input format is used to create an ADMOSS call type.

[ [
[ CR CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [,LAC=] [,DN=] [
[ [
[ [,CTYPFEA=] [,CTYPR=] [,DICON=] [,INCEPT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,GOS=] [,APPLID=] [,VOPSERV=] [,OCALSEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must not exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the call type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 7+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CTYPFEA CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of the call type.
Following inputs are allowed:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
CTLIST
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
INETSERV
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
Following inputs are incompatible for one Calltype:
SPECOP & RCSROPR
SPECOP & RCSRANN
SPECOP & RCSRLS
SPECOP & CTLIST
AUTOCB & RCSROPR
AUTOCB & RCSRANN
AUTOCB & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & RCSROPR
AUTOTC & RCSRANN
AUTOTC & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & CTLIST
RCSROPR & RCSRANN
RCSROPR & RCSRLS
RCSRANN & RCSRLS
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
INETSERV & SPECOP
INETSERV & AUTOCB
INETSERV & AUTOTC
INETSERV & AUTOGR
INETSERV & SCREENLT
INETSERV & NATDNA
INETSERV & INATDNA
INETSERV & NATDNAR
INETSERV & INATDNAR
INETSERV & RNATDNA
INETSERV & RINATDNA
INETSERV & RCSROPR
INETSERV & RCSRANN
INETSERV & RCSRLS
INETSERV & VOPRSVP
INETSERV & CTLIST
INETSERV & ACDMON
INETSERV & ROUTING
INETSERV & ENHROUT
INETSERV & FEA1
INETSERV & FEA2
INETSERV & FEA3
Following Call Type Feature are only once allowed in a
Common Service Group:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 8+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
AUTOCB AUTOMATIC CALL BACK
AUTOGR AUTOMATIC GREETING
AUTOTC AUTOMATIC TIME & CHARGE
CTLIST CALL TRANSFER LIST
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
INATDNA INAT.DN ASSISTANCE
INATDNAR INAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POS.
INETSERV INTERNET SERVICE
NATDNA NAT.DN ASSISTANCE
NATDNAR NAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POSS.
RCSRANN RCS RECONNECT TO ANNOUNCEMENT
RCSRLS RCS RELEASE CALL
RCSROPR RCS RECONNECT TO OPERATOR
RINATDNA RECONNECT FROM INAT.DN ASSIST.
RNATDNA RECONNECT FROM NAT.DN ASSIST.
ROUTING ROUTING
SCREENLT SCREENING LIST
SPECOP SPECIFIC OPERATOR
VOPRSVP VIRT.OPR.SERVICE POSSIBLE
CTYPR CALL TYPE RECONNECTED
This parameter specifies the reconnected call type for ADMOSS.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DICON DIGIT CONVERTING CODE
This parameter specifies the digit converting code.
It is only entered, if the call type should be created for
quasiautomatic calls, to modify the existing dial information.
The following modifications can be made:
- removal of digits
- insertion of digits
- replacement of digits
Valid input characters:
0-9, A-F, #, +, ., X
The control characters have the following significance:
X : The character of the old code remains as it is.
. : The character of the old code is deleted.
+ : The character following this character, up to the
next control character, are inserted or added at the
appropriate place.
Example:
a = 123XX. specifies that the first 3 digits of the existing
dial information are replaced by 123, the next 2 digits remain
and the 6th digits is omitted.
The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 9+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept for a calltype.
For following intercepts only the fix Part is allowed:
QPOS
QWAIT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT WITH DATA
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
QPOS QUEUE POSITION ANNOUNCEMENT
QWAIT QUEUE WAITING ANNOUNCEMENT
ROUTFAIL ROUTING FAILED
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
b: NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GOS GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the grade of service for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
QABANDC QUEUEING TIME ABANDONED CALLS
QPRESC QUEUEING TIME PRESENTED CALLS
b: TIME1=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME2=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
d: TIME3=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
APPLID APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the Application Identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
VOPSERV VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE
This parameter assignes one virtual operator service to an
ADMOSS call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC AUTOMATIC CALL COMPLETION
BCHDL B-CHANNEL DATALINK
NOSERV NO SERVICE
ONAA ONE NUMBER AGENT ACCESS
SEMADA SEMI AUTOMATIC DIR.ASSISTANCE
VOPS01 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 1
VOPS02 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 2
VOPS03 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 3
VOPS04 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 4
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 10+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOPS05 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 5
VOPS06 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 6
VOPS07 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 7
VOPS08 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 8
VOPS09 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 9
VOPS10 VIRT.OPERATOR SERVICE 10
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for QPOS and QWAIT. Input of up to
4 languages for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
[L1L2 [
[L1L2L3 [
[L1L2L3L4[
[L1L2L4 [
[L1L2L4L3[
[L1L3 [
[L1L3L2 [
[L1L3L2L4[
[L1L3L4 [
[L1L3L4L2[
[L1L4 [
[L1L4L2 [
[L1L4L2L3[
[L1L4L3 [
[L1L4L3L2[
[L2 [
[L2L1 [
[L2L1L3 [
[L2L1L3L4[
[L2L1L4 [
[L2L1L4L3[
[L2L3 [
[L2L3L1 [
[L2L3L1L4[
[L2L3L4 [
[L2L3L4L1[
[L2L4 [
[L2L4L1 [
[L2L4L1L3[
[L2L4L3 [
L2L4L3L1
[L3 [
[L3L1 [
[L3L1L2 [
[L3L1L2L4[
[L3L1L4 [
[L3L1L4L2[
[L3L2 [
[L3L2L1 [
[L3L2L1L4[
[L3L2L4 [
[L3L2L4L1[
[L3L4 [
[L3L4L1 [
[L3L4L1L2[
[L3L4L2 [
[L3L4L2L1[
[L4 [
[L4L1 [
[L4L1L2 [
[L4L1L2L3[
[L4L1L3 [
[L4L1L3L2[
[L4L2 [
[L4L2L1 [
[L4L2L1L3[
[L4L2L3 [
[L4L2L3L1[
[L4L3 [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 11+
CR CALLTYPE
CROCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[L4L3L1 [
[L4L3L1L2[
[L4L3L2 [
[L4L3L2L1[
NONE
Default: NONE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CALLTYPE- 12-
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL TYPE DATA
This command displays ADMOSS or CENTREX call type data
for common CDS.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTCSG DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CSG
2. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTDN DISP.CALL TYPE FOR DN
3. DISP CALLTYPE- DICTOCSG DISP.CALL TYPE ONE CSG
1. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR CSG
This input format is used to display call type
data of a specific common service group or
to get an overview of several common service
groups.

[ [
[ DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLTYPE- 1+
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE FOR DN
This input format is used to display call types
that are connected with a directory number.

[ [
[ DISP CALLTYPE : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the ADMOSS
or CENTREX call type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the ADMOSS
or CENTREX call type.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLTYPE- 2+
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTOCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISP.CALL TYPE ONE CSG
This input format is used to display call type
data of a specific common service group.

[ [
[ DISP CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= [,CTYP=] [,CTYPFEA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX
call type name.
Notes:
- If X is entered for CSGLAC and/or CSGDN this
parameter is not allowed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CTYPFEA CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of the call type.
Notes:
- If X is entered for CSGLAC and/or CSGDN this
parameter is not allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
AUTOCB AUTOMATIC CALL BACK
AUTOGR AUTOMATIC GREETING
AUTOTC AUTOMATIC TIME & CHARGE
CTLIST CALL TRANSFER LIST
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLTYPE- 3+
DISP CALLTYPE
DICTOCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
INATDNA INAT.DN ASSISTANCE
INATDNAR INAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POS.
INETSER INTERNET SERVICE
NATDNA NAT.DN ASSISTANCE
NATDNAR NAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POSS.
RCSRANN RCS RECONNECT TO ANNOUNCEMENT
RCSRLS RCS RELEASE CALL
RCSROPR RCS RECONNECT TO OPERATOR
RINATDNA RECONNECT FROM INAT.DN ASSIST.
RNATDNA RECONNECT FROM NAT.DN ASSIST.
ROUTING ROUTING
SCREENLT SCREENING LIST
SPECOP SPECIFIC OPERATOR
VOPRSVP VIRTUAL OPR.SERVICE POSSIBLE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CALLTYPE- 4-
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CALL TYPE DATA
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD CALLTYPE - MOCCTYP MODIFY CENTREX CALL TYPE
2. MOD CALLTYPE - MOHDCTYP MODIFY HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
3. MOD CALLTYPE - MOOCTYP MODIFY ADMOSS CALL TYPE
1. Input format
MODIFY CENTREX CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify a CENTEX call type.

[ [
[ MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= <,NCTYP= ,LAC= ,DN= [
[ [
[ ,CLAC= ,CDN= ,CXCTYP= ,CTYPFEA= ,CCTYPFEA= [
[ [
[ ,INCEPT= ,CINCEPT= ,GOS= ,CGOS= ,APPLID= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,OCALSEQ=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NCTYP NEW CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the new name of the ADMOSS or
CENTREX call type.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 1+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- The new name must not exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the call type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLAC CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel local area code of the call
type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CDN CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the cancel directory number of the
call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CXCTYP FIX CENTREX CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the fixed CENTREX call type.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ATATGR ATTN. TO ATTN. GROUP CALL
ATNCO ATTN. RECALL FROM CAMP-ON
ATNGR DIAL ATTENDANT GROUP CALL
ATNIC ATTENDANT INTERCEPT INCOMING
ATNOG ATTENDANT INTERCEPT OUTGOING
CRLFCD CALL REDIRECTED TO LFCD NUMBER
CRNS CALL REDIRECTED TO NS NUMBER
CSHRATN CALL TO SHARED ATTENDANT
DIVBY BUSY LINE DIVERSION
DIVDA DO NOT ANSWER DIVERSION
DIVI IMMEDIATE DIVERSION
DTAC DIAL THROUGH ATTN. CALL
HOTATN HOTLINE CALL TO ATTN.
ILPDNAG INAT.CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
NLPDNAG NAT.CALL TO LPDN OF ATTN.GRP.
NOWORK CALL TO NON-WORKING NUMBER
OAWIID OPR.ASSIST.WITH IDENTIFICATION
OAWOID OPR.ASSIST.WITHOUT IDENT.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 2+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESECATN REROUTE TO SERIAL CALL ATTN.
REST RESTRICTED CALL TO ATTENDANT
SPECL SPECIAL (E.G. NIGHT SERVICE)
TOLDIV TOLL DIVERSION TO ATTENDANT
TRANS TRANSFERRED CALL
CTYPFEA CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of the call type.
Following inputs are allowed:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
CTLIST
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
INETSERV
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
Following inputs are incompatible for one Calltype:
SPECOP & RCSROPR
SPECOP & RCSRANN
SPECOP & RCSRLS
SPECOP & CTLIST
AUTOCB & RCSROPR
AUTOCB & RCSRANN
AUTOCB & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & RCSROPR
AUTOTC & RCSRANN
AUTOTC & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & CTLIST
RCSROPR & RCSRANN
RCSROPR & RCSRLS
RCSRANN & RCSRLS
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
INETSERV & SPECOP
INETSERV & AUTOCB
INETSERV & AUTOTC
INETSERV & AUTOGR
INETSERV & SCREENLT
INETSERV & NATDNA
INETSERV & INATDNA
INETSERV & NATDNAR
INETSERV & INATDNAR
INETSERV & RNATDNA
INETSERV & RINATDNA
INETSERV & RCSROPR
INETSERV & RCSRANN
INETSERV & RCSRLS
INETSERV & VOPRSVP
INETSERV & CTLIST
INETSERV & ACDMON
INETSERV & ROUTING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 3+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INETSERV & ENHROUT
INETSERV & FEA1
INETSERV & FEA2
INETSERV & FEA3
Following Call Type Feature are only once allowed in a
Common Service Group:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
ROUTING ROUTING
CCTYPFEA CANCEL CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the cancel call type features.
Following inputs are allowed:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
CTLIST
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
INETSERV
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
Following inputs are incompatible for one Calltype:
SPECOP & RCSROPR
SPECOP & RCSRANN
SPECOP & RCSRLS
SPECOP & CTLIST
AUTOCB & RCSROPR
AUTOCB & RCSRANN
AUTOCB & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & RCSROPR
AUTOTC & RCSRANN
AUTOTC & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & CTLIST
RCSROPR & RCSRANN
RCSROPR & RCSRLS
RCSRANN & RCSRLS
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
INETSERV & SPECOP
INETSERV & AUTOCB
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 4+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INETSERV & AUTOTC
INETSERV & AUTOGR
INETSERV & SCREENLT
INETSERV & NATDNA
INETSERV & INATDNA
INETSERV & NATDNAR
INETSERV & INATDNAR
INETSERV & RNATDNA
INETSERV & RINATDNA
INETSERV & RCSROPR
INETSERV & RCSRANN
INETSERV & RCSRLS
INETSERV & VOPRSVP
INETSERV & CTLIST
INETSERV & ACDMON
INETSERV & ROUTING
INETSERV & ENHROUT
INETSERV & FEA1
INETSERV & FEA2
INETSERV & FEA3
Following Call Type Feature are only once allowed in a
Common Service Group:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
ROUTING ROUTING
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept for a calltype.
For following intercepts only the fix Part is allowed:
QPOS
QWAIT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT WITH DATA
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
QPOS QUEUE POSITION ANNOUNCEMENT
QWAIT QUEUE WAITING ANNOUNCEMENT
ROUTFAIL ROUTING FAILED
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
b: NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CINCEPT CANCEL INTERCEPT
This parameter cancels the intercept for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
QPOS QUEUE POSITION ANNOUNCEMENT
QWAIT QUEUE WAITING ANNOUNCEMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 5+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ROUTFAIL ROUTING FAILED
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
GOS GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the grade of service for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
QABANDC QUEUEING TIME ABANDONED CALLS
QPRESC QUEUEING TIME PRESENTED CALLS
b: TIME1=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME2=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
d: TIME3=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
CGOS CANCEL GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter cancels the grade of service for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
HOLD HOLDING
QABANDC QUEUEING TIME ABANDONED CALLS
QPRESC QUEUEING TIME PRESENTED CALLS
APPLID APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the Application Identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for QPOS and QWAIT. Input of up to
4 languages for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
L1L2
L1L2L3
L1L2L3L4
L1L2L4
L1L2L4L3
L1L3
L1L3L2
L1L3L2L4
L1L3L4
L1L3L4L2
L1L4
L1L4L2
L1L4L2L3
L1L4L3
L1L4L3L2
L2
L2L1
L2L1L3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 6+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOCCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L2L1L3L4
L2L1L4
L2L1L4L3
L2L3
L2L3L1
L2L3L1L4
L2L3L4
L2L3L4L1
L2L4
L2L4L1
L2L4L1L3
L2L4L3
L2L4L3L1
L3
L3L1
L3L1L2
L3L1L2L4
L3L1L4
L3L1L4L2
L3L2
L3L2L1
L3L2L1L4
L3L2L4
L3L2L4L1
L3L4
L3L4L1
L3L4L1L2
L3L4L2
L3L4L2L1
L4
L4L1
L4L1L2
L4L1L2L3
L4L1L3
L4L1L3L2
L4L2
L4L2L1
L4L2L1L3
L4L2L3
L4L2L3L1
L4L3
L4L3L1
L4L3L1L2
L4L3L2
L4L3L2L1
NONE
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 7+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOHDCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY HIGH PERF.DL.CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify an ADMOSS call type
for high Performance Datalink

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= [,VOPSERV=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VOPSERV VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE
This parameter assignes one virtual operator service to an
ADMOSS call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BCHDL B-CHANNEL DATALINK
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 8+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY ADMOSS CALL TYPE
This input format is used to modify an ADMOSS call type.

[ [
[ MOD CALLTYPE : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,CTYP= <,NCTYP= ,LAC= ,DN= [
[ [
[ ,CLAC= ,CDN= ,CTYPFEA= ,CCTYPFEA= ,CTYPR= [
[ [
[ ,CCTYPR= ,DICON= ,CDICON= ,INCEPT= ,CINCEPT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,GOS= ,CGOS= ,APPLID= ,VOPSERV= ,OCALSEQ=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into
several local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS or CENTREX call type name.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NCTYP NEW CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the new name of the ADMOSS or
CENTREX call type.
Prerequisites:
- The new name must not exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the call type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 9+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLAC CANCEL LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel local area code of the call
type.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CDN CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the cancel directory number of the
call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTYPFEA CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature of the call type.
Following inputs are allowed:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
CTLIST
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
INETSERV
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
Following inputs are incompatible for one Calltype:
SPECOP & RCSROPR
SPECOP & RCSRANN
SPECOP & RCSRLS
SPECOP & CTLIST
AUTOCB & RCSROPR
AUTOCB & RCSRANN
AUTOCB & RCSRLS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 10+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUTOTC & RCSROPR
AUTOTC & RCSRANN
AUTOTC & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & CTLIST
RCSROPR & RCSRANN
RCSROPR & RCSRLS
RCSRANN & RCSRLS
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
INETSERV & SPECOP
INETSERV & AUTOCB
INETSERV & AUTOTC
INETSERV & AUTOGR
INETSERV & SCREENLT
INETSERV & NATDNA
INETSERV & INATDNA
INETSERV & NATDNAR
INETSERV & INATDNAR
INETSERV & RNATDNA
INETSERV & RINATDNA
INETSERV & RCSROPR
INETSERV & RCSRANN
INETSERV & RCSRLS
INETSERV & VOPRSVP
INETSERV & CTLIST
INETSERV & ACDMON
INETSERV & ROUTING
INETSERV & ENHROUT
INETSERV & FEA1
INETSERV & FEA2
INETSERV & FEA3
Following Call Type Feature are only once allowed in a
Common Service Group:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
AUTOCB AUTOMATIC CALL BACK
AUTOGR AUTOMATIC GREETING
AUTOTC AUTOMATIC TIME & CHARGE
CTLIST CALL TRANSFER LIST
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
INATDNA INAT.DN ASSISTANCE
INATDNAR INAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POS.
NATDNA NAT.DN ASSISTANCE
NATDNAR NAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POSS.
RCSRANN RCS RECONNECT TO ANNOUNCEMENT
RCSRLS RCS RELEASE CALL
RCSROPR RCS RECONNECT TO OPERATOR
RINATDNA RECONNECT FROM INAT.DN ASSIST.
RNATDNA RECONNECT FROM NAT.DN ASSIST.
ROUTING ROUTING
SCREENLT SCREENING LIST
SPECOP SPECIFIC OPERATOR
VOPRSVP VIRT.OPR.SERVICE POSSIBLE
CCTYPFEA CANCEL CALL TYPE FEATURE
This parameter specifies the cancel call type features.
Following inputs are allowed:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 11+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUTOGR
SCREENLT
NATDNA
INATDNA
NATDNAR
INATDNAR
RNATDNA
RINATDNA
RCSROPR
RCSRANN
RCSRLS
VOPRSVP
CTLIST
ACDMON
ROUTING
ENHROUT
INETSERV
FEA1
FEA2
FEA3
Following inputs are incompatible for one Calltype:
SPECOP & RCSROPR
SPECOP & RCSRANN
SPECOP & RCSRLS
SPECOP & CTLIST
AUTOCB & RCSROPR
AUTOCB & RCSRANN
AUTOCB & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & RCSROPR
AUTOTC & RCSRANN
AUTOTC & RCSRLS
AUTOTC & CTLIST
RCSROPR & RCSRANN
RCSROPR & RCSRLS
RCSRANN & RCSRLS
ACDMON & ROUTING
ACDMON & ENHROUT
ROUTING & ENHROUT
INETSERV & SPECOP
INETSERV & AUTOCB
INETSERV & AUTOTC
INETSERV & AUTOGR
INETSERV & SCREENLT
INETSERV & NATDNA
INETSERV & INATDNA
INETSERV & NATDNAR
INETSERV & INATDNAR
INETSERV & RNATDNA
INETSERV & RINATDNA
INETSERV & RCSROPR
INETSERV & RCSRANN
INETSERV & RCSRLS
INETSERV & VOPRSVP
INETSERV & CTLIST
INETSERV & ACDMON
INETSERV & ROUTING
INETSERV & ENHROUT
INETSERV & FEA1
INETSERV & FEA2
INETSERV & FEA3
Following Call Type Feature are only once allowed in a
Common Service Group:
SPECOP
AUTOCB
AUTOTC
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 12+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACDMON ACTIVATES CDS MONITORING
AUTOCB AUTOMATIC CALL BACK
AUTOGR AUTOMATIC GREETING
AUTOTC AUTOMATIC TIME & CHARGE
CTLIST CALL TRANSFER LIST
ENHROUT ENHANCED ROUTING
FEA1 FEATURE 1
FEA2 FEATURE 2
FEA3 FEATURE 3
INATDNA INAT.DN ASSISTANCE
INATDNAR INAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POS.
NATDNA NAT.DN ASSISTANCE
NATDNAR NAT.DN ASSIST.WITH RECON.POSS.
RCSRANN RCS RECONNECT TO ANNOUNCEMENT
RCSRLS RCS RELEASE CALL
RCSROPR RCS RECONNECT TO OPERATOR
RINATDNA RECONNECT FROM INAT.DN ASSIST.
RNATDNA RECONNECT FROM NAT.DN ASSIST.
ROUTING ROUTING
SCREENLT SCREENING LIST
SPECOP SPECIFIC OPERATOR
VOPRSVP VIRT.OPR.SERVICE POSSIBLE
CTYPR CALL TYPE RECONNECTED
This parameter specifies the ADMOSS reconnected call type.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CCTYPR CANCEL CALL TYPE RECONNECTED
This parameter cancel the ADMOSS reconnected call type.
Prerequisites:
- The call type name must exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DICON DIGIT CONVERTING CODE
This parameter specifies the digit converting code.
It is entered to modify the existing dial information.
The following modifications can be made:
- removal of digits
- insertion of digits
- replacement of digits
Valid input characters:
0-9, A-F, #, +, ., X
The control characters have the following significance:
X : The character of the old code remains as it is.
. : The character of the old code is deleted.
+ : The character following this character, up to the
next control character, are inserted or added at the
appropriate place.
Example:
a = 123XX. specifies that the first 3 digits of the existing
dial information are replaced by 123, the next 2 digits remain
and the 6th digits is omitted.
The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 13+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
CDICON CANCEL DIGIT CONVERTING CODE
This parameter specifies the cancel digit converting code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept for a calltype.
For following intercepts only the fix Part is allowed:
QPOS
QWAIT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT WITH DATA
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
QPOS QUEUE POSITION ANNOUNCEMENT
QWAIT QUEUE WAITING ANNOUNCEMENT
ROUTFAIL ROUTING FAILED
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
b: NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CINCEPT CANCEL INTERCEPT
This parameter cancels the intercept for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GREET SERV.GREETING ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRQ OPERATOR QUEUE
OPRQFULL OPERATOR QUEUE FULL
QPOS QUEUE POSITION ANNOUNCEMENT
QWAIT QUEUE WAITING ANNOUNCEMENT
ROUTFAIL ROUTING FAILED
TAGUNMAN TASKGROUP UNMANNED
GOS GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the grade of service for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: GOS WITH DATA
HOLD HOLDING
QABANDC QUEUEING TIME ABANDONED CALLS
QPRESC QUEUEING TIME PRESENTED CALLS
b: TIME1=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME2=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 14+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: TIME3=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
CGOS CANCEL GRADE OF SERVICE
This parameter cancels the grade of service for a calltype.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
HOLD HOLDING
QABANDC QUEUEING TIME ABANDONED CALLS
QPRESC QUEUEING TIME PRESENTED CALLS
APPLID APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the Application Identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
VOPSERV VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE
This parameter assignes one virtual operator service to an
ADMOSS call type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC AUTOMATIC CALL COMPLETION
BCHDL B-CHANNEL DATALINK
NOSERV NO SERVICE
ONAA ONE NUMBER AGENT ACCESS
SEMADA SEMI AUTOMATIC DIR.ASSISTANCE
VOPS01 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 1
VOPS02 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 2
VOPS03 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 3
VOPS04 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 4
VOPS05 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 5
VOPS06 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 6
VOPS07 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 7
VOPS08 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 8
VOPS09 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 9
VOPS10 VIRTUAL OPERATOR SERVICE 10
OCALSEQ OCANEQ KIND & SEQ OF LANGUAGE
This parameter specifies the languages of the announcements and the
sequences of these languages for QPOS and QWAIT. Input of up to
4 languages for one sequence is possible.
Value NONE indicates the use of the switch-specific value entered by
the command MOD CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
L1
L1L2
L1L2L3
L1L2L3L4
L1L2L4
L1L2L4L3
L1L3
L1L3L2
L1L3L2L4
L1L3L4
L1L3L4L2
L1L4
L1L4L2
L1L4L2L3
L1L4L3
L1L4L3L2
L2
L2L1
L2L1L3
L2L1L3L4
L2L1L4
L2L1L4L3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 15+
MOD CALLTYPE
MOOCTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L2L3
L2L3L1
L2L3L1L4
L2L3L4
L2L3L4L1
L2L4
L2L4L1
L2L4L1L3
L2L4L3
L2L4L3L1
L3
L3L1
L3L1L2
L3L1L2L4
L3L1L4
L3L1L4L2
L3L2
L3L2L1
L3L2L1L4
L3L2L4
L3L2L4L1
L3L4
L3L4L1
L3L4L1L2
L3L4L2
L3L4L2L1
L4
L4L1
L4L1L2
L4L1L2L3
L4L1L3
L4L1L3L2
L4L2
L4L2L1
L4L2L1L3
L4L2L3
L4L2L3L1
L4L3
L4L3L1
L4L3L1L2
L4L3L2
L4L3L2L1
NONE
Default: NONE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CALLTYPE- 16-
CAN CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL PROCESSOR
This command cancels a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be PLA.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CAP : CAP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the call processor to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CAP- 1-
CONF CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CALL PROCESSOR
This command configures a call processor.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to ACT is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF CAP : CAP= ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the call processor to be configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis before configuration to ACT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF CAP- 1-
CR CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CALL PROCESSOR
This command creates a call processor.
The created call processor is in the operating state PLA after the
command has been executed.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR CAP : CAP= ,PBI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the call processor to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
PBI PHYSICAL BUS INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the call processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CAP- 1-
DIAG CAP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CALL PROCESSOR
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be MBL.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG CAP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG CAP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a call processor.
The diagnosis includes a BCMY interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG CAP : CAP= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the call processor to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG CAP- 1+
DIAG CAP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a call
processor. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG CAP : CAP= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the call processor to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG CAP- 2-
DISP CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL PROCESSOR
This command displays all call processors with their physical bus
interface numbers.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CAP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CAP- 1-
TEST CAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST CALL PROCESSOR
This command tests a call processor.
Prerequisites:
- The call processor must be ACT.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST CAP : [CAP=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CAP CALL PROCESSOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the call processor to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active call processors
are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST CAP- 1-
ACT CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command activates either a single or all code block point groups.
It is not possible to activate the code block point group named
"MABEZ",because this group is internally used for traffic monitoring
of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Activation of all code block point groups does not include the
code block point group "MABEZ".
Prerequisites:
- The given code block point group must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block point
group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CBPGRP- 1-
CAN CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command cancels a code block point group.
It is not possible to cancel the code block point group named
"MABEZ", because this group is used for traffic monitoring of
mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations) and is therefore
internally created and cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- No code block point is assigned to this group.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the existing code block
point group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CBPGRP- 1-
CR CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command creates a code block point group for the control
function Leaky Bucket. A number of code points may be assigned to
a code block point group with the MML command CR CBPT.
The Leaky Bucket control function limits the number of call attempts
to the code block points of the group to a predefined call attempt
rate. Reduction is active if the defined threshold of call attempts
per second is exceeded.
This results in the rejection of all call attempts to this group
which exceed the predefined limit (parameter LBUCLCR).
Notes:
- It is not possible to create a code block point group named
"MABEZ", because this group is internally used for traffic
monitoring of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
- The number of code block point groups within an exchange is
limited to 500.
- The administered leaky bucket threshold may not be less than
the administered leaky bucket limit call rate.
- The maximum number of code block points assigned to one CBPGRP
is 64.
- The CBPGRP has to be activated by the command ACT CBPGRP,
in order to start traffic control.
- The network management function Leaky Bucket may be activated
(parameter PRIVTRAF=CNTRL, standard value) or deactivated
(parameter PRIVTRAF=NOCNTRL) for a privileged subscriber
(i.e. BEV subscriber).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CBPGRP : CBPGRP= ,LBUCLCR= [,LBTHR=] [,PRIVTRAF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LBUCLCR LEAKY BUCKET LIMIT CALL RATE
This parameter specifies the limit of call attempts for the Leaky
Bucket function.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LCPS0P05 LIMIT 0.05 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P1 LIMIT 0.1 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P15 LIMIT 0.15 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P2 LIMIT 0.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P25 LIMIT 0.25 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P3 LIMIT 0.3 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P35 LIMIT 0.35 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P4 LIMIT 0.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P45 LIMIT 0.45 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P5 LIMIT 0.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P55 LIMIT 0.55 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P6 LIMIT 0.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P65 LIMIT 0.65 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P7 LIMIT 0.7 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P75 LIMIT 0.75 CALLS PER SECOND
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CBPGRP- 1+
CR CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LCPS0P8 LIMIT 0.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P85 LIMIT 0.85 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P9 LIMIT 0.9 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P95 LIMIT 0.95 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P0 LIMIT 1.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P2 LIMIT 1.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P4 LIMIT 1.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P6 LIMIT 1.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P8 LIMIT 1.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P0 LIMIT 2.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P2 LIMIT 2.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P4 LIMIT 2.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P6 LIMIT 2.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P8 LIMIT 2.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P0 LIMIT 3.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P2 LIMIT 3.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P4 LIMIT 3.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P6 LIMIT 3.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P8 LIMIT 3.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P0 LIMIT 4.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P2 LIMIT 4.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P4 LIMIT 4.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P6 LIMIT 4.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P8 LIMIT 4.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS5P0 LIMIT 5.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS5P5 LIMIT 5.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS6P0 LIMIT 6.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS6P5 LIMIT 6.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS7P0 LIMIT 7.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS7P5 LIMIT 7.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS8P0 LIMIT 8.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS8P5 LIMIT 8.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS9P0 LIMIT 9.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS9P5 LIMIT 9.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS10P0 LIMIT 10.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS12P0 LIMIT 12.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS14P0 LIMIT 14.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS16P0 LIMIT 16.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS18P0 LIMIT 18.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS20P0 LIMIT 20.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS22P0 LIMIT 22.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS24P0 LIMIT 24.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS26P0 LIMIT 26.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS28P0 LIMIT 28.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS30P0 LIMIT 30.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LBTHR LEAKY BUCKET THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the maximum number of call
attempts per second which are not controlled by
Leaky Bucket.
Standard value of this parameter is 30 calls.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...256, range of decimal numbers
PRIVTRAF PRIVILEGED TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the privileged traffic,
i.e. traffic initiated by a BEV subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOCNTRL NO_CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that privileged
traffic is not subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
CNTRL CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that privileged
traffic is subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CBPGRP- 2-
DACT CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command deactivates either a single or all code block point groups.
Code block points connected to this code block point group will thus
no longer be blocked via the code block point translator.
It is not possible to deactivate the code block point group named
"MABEZ" because this group is used internally for traffic monitoring
of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
Deactivation of all code block point groups does not include the
code block point group "MABEZ".
The deactivation of a code block point group has no effect on the
related code block points. Call Processing always has to process all
digits of the code block points before the activity status of the
code block point group can be evaluated.
Prerequisites:
- The given code block point group must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block point
group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CBPGRP- 1-
DISP CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command displays a single, all or a list of code block point
groups with their specified limit call rate and the indicator for
privileged traffic.
The data of the code block point group "MABEZ" will be displayed,
although this code block point group is not created by the command
CR CBPGRP.
This code block point group is created internally after activation
of mass call event recognition, detection of a mass call event and
start of rate reduction for the relevant code.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CBPGRP : CBPGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block point
group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CBPGRP- 1-
MOD CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This command changes the limit call rate, leaky bucket threshold
and the indicator for privileged traffic for the specified CBPGRP.
Notes:
- The limit call rate can be changed at any time, i.e. even when
the controlling network function is in use.
- It is not possible to modify the code block point group named
"MABEZ" because this group is used internally for traffic
monitoring of mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CBPGRP : CBPGRP= <,LBUCLCR= ,LBTHR= ,PRIVTRAF=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of an existing code block
point group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LBUCLCR LEAKY BUCKET LIMIT CALL RATE
This parameter specifies the limit of call attempts for the Leaky
Bucket function.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LCPS0P05 LIMIT 0.05 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P1 LIMIT 0.1 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P15 LIMIT 0.15 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P2 LIMIT 0.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P25 LIMIT 0.25 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P3 LIMIT 0.3 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P35 LIMIT 0.35 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P4 LIMIT 0.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P45 LIMIT 0.45 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P5 LIMIT 0.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P55 LIMIT 0.55 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P6 LIMIT 0.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P65 LIMIT 0.65 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P7 LIMIT 0.7 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P75 LIMIT 0.75 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P8 LIMIT 0.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P85 LIMIT 0.85 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P9 LIMIT 0.9 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS0P95 LIMIT 0.95 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P0 LIMIT 1.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P2 LIMIT 1.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P4 LIMIT 1.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P6 LIMIT 1.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS1P8 LIMIT 1.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P0 LIMIT 2.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P2 LIMIT 2.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P4 LIMIT 2.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P6 LIMIT 2.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS2P8 LIMIT 2.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P0 LIMIT 3.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P2 LIMIT 3.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P4 LIMIT 3.4 CALLS PER SECOND
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CBPGRP- 1+
MOD CBPGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LCPS3P6 LIMIT 3.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS3P8 LIMIT 3.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P0 LIMIT 4.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P2 LIMIT 4.2 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P4 LIMIT 4.4 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P6 LIMIT 4.6 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS4P8 LIMIT 4.8 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS5P0 LIMIT 5.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS5P5 LIMIT 5.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS6P0 LIMIT 6.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS6P5 LIMIT 6.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS7P0 LIMIT 7.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS7P5 LIMIT 7.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS8P0 LIMIT 8.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS8P5 LIMIT 8.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS9P0 LIMIT 9.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS9P5 LIMIT 9.5 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS10P0 LIMIT 10.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS12P0 LIMIT 12.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS14P0 LIMIT 14.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS16P0 LIMIT 16.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS18P0 LIMIT 18.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS20P0 LIMIT 20.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS22P0 LIMIT 22.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS24P0 LIMIT 24.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS26P0 LIMIT 26.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS28P0 LIMIT 28.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LCPS30P0 LIMIT 30.0 CALLS PER SECOND
LBTHR LEAKY BUCKET THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the maximum number of call
attempts per second which are not controlled
by Leaky Bucket.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...256, range of decimal numbers
PRIVTRAF PRIVILEGED TRAFFIC
This parameter specifies the privileged traffic,
i.e. traffic initiated by a BEV subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOCNTRL NO_CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that privileged
traffic is not subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
CNTRL CONTROL
This parameter value specifies that privileged
traffic is subject to the blocking function
Leaky Bucket.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CBPGRP- 2-
CAN CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE BLOCK POINT
This command cancels a code block point.
The code block point is either defined by NAME or by the
combination of CODE, ORIGDC or CAT.
Prerequisite:
- The code block point already exists.
Notes:
- It is not possible to cancel code block points belonging to
the code block point group "MABEZ", because they are used
internally to reduce traffic to mass call destinations
(MABEZ destinations).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [CODE=[ ; [
[ CAN CBPT : NAME= [,ORIGDC=] [,CAT=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (i.e. the destination)
where traffic is blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NAME CODE BLOCK POINT OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies the code block point object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ORIGDC ORIG FOR DESTINATION CONTROLS
This parameter specifies the originating mark of the code block point.
ORIGDC serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic to
the entered digit combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the code block point.
CAT serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic
to the entered digit combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
COINB COIN BOX
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CBPT- 1+
CAN CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CBPT- 2-
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE BLOCK POINT
This command creates a code block point, i.e. a network traffic
management control is defined for the specified digit combination.
The parameter NAME specifies the code block point object.
The type of network traffic management control is defined by the
parameters PERC, CGAP or CBPGRP.
The destination code to be controlled by code blocking may be national
or international telephone numbers, service codes, local area codes,
carrier codes, country codes, etc. or suitable concatenations of these.
All code block points have to be preceded by the international or, if
applicable, the national prefix.
Example: Within the local area 089 of an exchange a subscriber number
4711 exists.
- The code block point 0894711 blocks traffic to the given subscriber.
- The code block point 089 blocks traffic to the local area 089.
- If there is another local area 088 within the exchange, the code block
point 08 blocks the traffic to 088 and 089.
Code block points consist of digit combinations together with parameters
ORIGDC und CAT. Because the digit translator is not checked
to ensure that a code point exists for this digit combination, only code
block points should be created which refer to existing code points in
the digit translator.
This command facilitates
- the blocking of a certain percentage of traffic (see parameter PERC).
Thus it is possible to block a certain percentage of call attempts
for a given code block point.
- the blocking of call attempts for a certain time interval
(see parameter CGAP).
After each successful call attempt to a given code block point, it is
possible to block further call attempts for a certain time interval.
The first call after creation of the code block point or after recovery
is never blocked by call gapping.
- the assignment of code block points to a code block point group for
the Leaky Bucket control function (see parameter CBPGRP).
A total of 64 code block points may be assigned to a code block point
group.
Notes:
- The number of code block points within an exchange is limited to 10000.
- Each code block point can be marked with parameter TRAMEA=YES to be
controlled by traffic measurement (TRAMEA=NO, standard value).
In this case the assigned traffic measurement index is displayed
together with the command execution message.
- It is not possible to create a code block point for the code block point
group "MABEZ", because this group contains only code block points which
are used internally to reduce traffic to mass call destinations
(MABEZ destinations).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,PERC= [ [
[ CR CBPT : CODE= [,NAME=] [,ORIGDC=] [,CAT=] ,CGAP= [
[ [,CBPGRP=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,INCEPT= [,TRAMEA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CBPT- 1+
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (i.e. the destination)
where traffic is blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NAME CODE BLOCK POINT OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies a unique name for a code block point object.
This name is the key that identifies the code block point and must not
be changed.
Six control types share a naming pool:
- CR CBPT,
- ENTR TRSVCNTL,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = SKIP,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANTO,
- ENTR NMCNTL with CNTRL = CANFROM,
- ENTR ACC.
This means that each NAME may only be used by one of these
controls.
The user may specify any name not yet used in the above-mentioned
naming pool except for two specific values:
- The user must not choose a single "X" as name because this input
stands for all existing values of a display command parameter.
- The NAME "MABEZ" is reserved for the mass call control function
which is an automatic network management control.
Therefore "MABEZ" must not be entered in this command.
Automatic instance naming is performed if this parameter is not
entered, i.e. the system itself assigns a name to the code block
point object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ORIGDC ORIG FOR DESTINATION CONTROLS
This parameter specifies the originating mark of the code block point.
ORIGDC serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic to
the entered destination depending on the origin of the call.
Using the parameter ORIGDC the following points must be considered:
- Value 0 is used as subscriber origin. All subscribers are
implicitly assigned this value. Assigning this value to trunk groups
is not possible.
- If a code block point is created without ORIGDC, the specified
control is independent of the origin of the call. If, in addition,
a code block point with the same code and a specific ORIGDC-value
is created, all calls with this origin are controlled in the specified
way. Calls with any other ORIGDC-value are controlled by the code
block point created without origin.
Example:
A code block point 1234 is created without ORIGDC, and specifying
PERC=PERC100. The same code is created with ORIGDC=1, and
specifying PERC=PERC50. All calls with ORIGDC unequal 1 are then
blocked with 100%. Calls with ORIGDC=1 are blocked with 50%.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the code block point.
CAT serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic
to the entered digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CBPT- 2+
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
COINB COIN BOX
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
PERC PERCENTAGE OF BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the percentage of traffic to the
code block point which has to be blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12.5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
PERC37P5 37.5 % BLOCKING
PERC50 50 % BLOCKING
PERC62P5 62.5 % BLOCKING
PERC75 75 % BLOCKING
PERC87P5 87.5 % BLOCKING
PERC100 100 % BLOCKING
CGAP CALL GAPPING TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval when the traffic to
the code block point is blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEC0 0 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P1 0.1 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P25 0.25 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P5 0.5 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC1 1 SECOND CALL GAP
SEC2 2 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC5 5 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC10 10 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC15 15 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC30 30 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC60 60 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC120 120 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC300 300 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC600 600 SECONDS CALL GAP
INF INFINITE CALL GAP
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group
for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code (e.g. an announcement)
where the blocked traffic will be diverted if blocking is valid.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CBPT- 3+
CR CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 0
NETWOMA1 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 1
NETWOMA2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 2
NETWOMA3 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 3
NETWOMA4 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 4
NETWOMA5 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 5
COINNEAR INTERNATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
CONANEAR NATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
NETWOMA6 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 6
TRAMEA TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement has
to be activated or deactivated for the code block point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CBPT- 4-
DISP CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE BLOCK POINT
This command displays the code block points and their blocking
functions. One or more of the parameters CODE, NAME, PERC,
CGAP, CBPGRP, TRAMEA or INCEPT may be entered.
The code block point belonging to the code block point group "MABEZ"
will also be displayed although it is not created by the command
CR CBPT.
This code block point group is created internally after activation of
mass call recognition, detection of a mass call event and start of
rate reduction for the relevant code.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [CODE=[ [[,PERC= [[ [
[ DISP CBPT : NAME= [,CGAP= [ [,TRAMEA=] [,INCEPT=] ; [
[ [ [ [[,CBPGRP=[[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code
block point(s) to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NAME CODE BLOCK POINT OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies the code block point object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PERC PERCENTAGE OF BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the percentage of traffic to the code
block point which has to be blocked.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12.5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
PERC37P5 37.5 % BLOCKING
PERC50 50 % BLOCKING
PERC62P5 62.5 % BLOCKING
PERC75 75 % BLOCKING
PERC87P5 87.5 % BLOCKING
PERC100 100 % BLOCKING
X ALL PERC VALUES
CGAP CALL GAPPING TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval when the traffic to
the code block point is blocked.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CBPT- 1+
DISP CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEC0 0 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P1 0.1 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P25 0.25 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P5 0.5 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC1 1 SECOND CALL GAP
SEC2 2 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC5 5 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC10 10 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC15 15 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC30 30 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC60 60 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC120 120 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC300 300 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC600 600 SECONDS CALL GAP
INF INFINITE CALL GAP
X ALL GAP VALUES
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of a code block point group
for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TRAMEA TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement is
activated or deactivated for the code block point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
INDEP INDEPENDENT
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept for the code block point(s)
to be displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 0
NETWOMA1 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 1
NETWOMA2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 2
NETWOMA3 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 3
NETWOMA4 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 4
NETWOMA5 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 5
COINNEAR INTERNATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
CONANEAR NATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
NETWOMA6 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 6
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CBPT- 2-
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE BLOCK POINT
This command modifies the percentage, time interval or code block
point group of a particular code block point according to the values
entered for the parameters PERC, CGAP or CBPGRP.
The blocking function may not be changed (e.g. from code blocking
to call gapping).
The modification of INCEPT and the activation or deactivation
of traffic measurement for the code block point by parameter
TRAMEA are also possible.
The code block point is either defined by NAME or by the combination
of CODE, ORIGDC or CAT.
Prerequisite:
- The code block point already exists.
Note:
- It is not possible to modify a code block point belonging to, or so
that it subsequently belongs to, the code block point group "MABEZ".
The code block points belonging to this group are used internally
to reduce traffic to mass call destinations (MABEZ destinations).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [CODE=[ [[,PERC= [[ [
[ MOD CBPT : NAME= [,ORIGDC=] [,CAT=] [,CGAP= [ [,INCEPT=] [
[ [ [ [[,CBPGRP=[[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TRAMEA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (i.e. the destination)
where traffic is blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NAME CODE BLOCK POINT OBJECT NAME
This parameter specifies the code block point object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ORIGDC ORIG FOR DESTINATION CONTROLS
This parameter specifies the originating mark of the code block point.
ORIGDC serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic to
the entered digit combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
CAT CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of the code block point.
CAT serves as a criterion for selective blocking of traffic
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CBPT- 1+
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to the entered digit combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
COINB COIN BOX
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
PERC PERCENTAGE OF BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the (new) percentage of traffic to the
code block point which has to be blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PERC0 0 % BLOCKING
PERC12P5 12.5 % BLOCKING
PERC25 25 % BLOCKING
PERC37P5 37.5 % BLOCKING
PERC50 50 % BLOCKING
PERC62P5 62.5 % BLOCKING
PERC75 75 % BLOCKING
PERC87P5 87.5 % BLOCKING
PERC100 100 % BLOCKING
CGAP CALL GAPPING TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the (new) time interval when the
traffic to the code block point is blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEC0 0 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P1 0.1 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P25 0.25 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC0P5 0.5 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC1 1 SECOND CALL GAP
SEC2 2 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC5 5 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC10 10 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC15 15 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC30 30 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC60 60 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC120 120 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC300 300 SECONDS CALL GAP
SEC600 600 SECONDS CALL GAP
INF INFINITE CALL GAP
CBPGRP CODE BLOCK POINT GROUP
This parameter specifies the (new) name of a code block point
group for the network management function Leaky Bucket.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the (new) intercept code (e.g. an announce-
ment) where the blocked traffic will be diverted if blocking is
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CBPT- 2+
MOD CBPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
valid.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NETWOMA0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 0
NETWOMA1 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 1
NETWOMA2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 2
NETWOMA3 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 3
NETWOMA4 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 4
NETWOMA5 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 5
COINNEAR INTERNATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
CONANEAR NATIONAL NEAR CONGESTION
NETWOMA6 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERCEPT 6
TRAMEA TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
This parameter indicates whether traffic measurement has
to be activated or deactivated for the code block point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CBPT- 3-
CAN CBSERV
DEACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL BARRING SERVICE
This command withdraws or deactivates call barring services.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN CBSERV - DEACT DEACTIVATION
2. CAN CBSERV - WITHDRAW WITHDRAWAL
1. Input format
DEACTIVATION
Input format for deactivation of call barring services.
Deactivation of a call barring service applies to one or
more groups of basic services.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CBSERV : MSIN= ,CBSERV= ,BSVG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CBSERV CALL BARRING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call barring service to be withdrawn or
deactivated.
Notes:
- If the last call barring service is withdrawn the following values
are deleted. In case of a new provision they are reset to their
defaults.
CCB
PW
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCB ALL CALL BARRING SERVICES
CBI CB OF INCOMING CALLS
CBIC CB OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT CBIC ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
CBO CB OF OUTGOING CALLS
CBOC CB OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC CB OF ALL OUTGOING INT CALLS
CBOICEXH CBOIC EXCEPT TO HPLMN COUNTRY
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
This parameter specifies a basic service group code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CBSERV- 1+
CAN CBSERV
DEACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
BS40 PAD ACCESS SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS20 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CBSERV- 2+
CAN CBSERV
WITHDRAW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
WITHDRAWAL
Input format for withdrawal of call barring services.
Withdrawal of a call barring service applies to all basic
services the mobile subscriber subscribed to.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CBSERV : MSIN= ,CBSERV= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CBSERV CALL BARRING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call barring service to be withdrawn or
deactivated.
Notes:
- If the last call barring service is withdrawn the following values
are deleted. In case of a new provision they are reset to their
defaults.
CCB
PW
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCB ALL CALL BARRING SERVICES
CBI CB OF INCOMING CALLS
CBIC CB OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT CBIC ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
CBO CB OF OUTGOING CALLS
CBOC CB OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC CB OF ALL OUTGOING INT CALLS
CBOICEXH CBOIC EXCEPT TO HPLMN COUNTRY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CBSERV- 3-
ENTR CBSERV
ACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL BARRING SERVICE
This command provides call barring services or activates basic
service related call barring services.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR CBSERV - ACT ACTIVATION
2. ENTR CBSERV - PROV PROVISION
3. ENTR CBSERV - PWOPT PASSWORD OPTION
1. Input format
ACTIVATION
Input format for activation of call barring services.
Activation of a call barring service applies to one or more groups
of basic services.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CBSERV : MSIN= ,CBSERV= ,BSVG= [,CCB=] [,PW=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CBSERV CALL BARRING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call barring service to be provided or
activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CBIC CB OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT CBIC ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
CBOC CB OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC CB OF ALL OUTGOING INT CALLS
CBOICEXH CBOIC EXCEPT TO HPLMN COUNTRY
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
This parameter specifies a basic service group code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
BS40 PAD ACCESS SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS20 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CBSERV- 1+
ENTR CBSERV
ACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCB CONTROL OF CALL BARRING
This parameter specifies the control of call barring supplementary
service.
Prerequisites:
- Provision of at least one call barring service.
The provision can be entered with the same or a prior command.
Notes:
- If there is no provision of call barring service and a new
provision is entered and CCB is omitted, control of call barring
is reset to its default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPR OPERATOR
SUB SUBSCRIBER
PW PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the password in case of subscriber controlled
call barring. Only one password per mobile subscriber for all call
barring services is possible.
Prerequisites:
- Provision of at least one call barring service.
The provision can be entered with the same or a prior command.
Notes:
- If there is no provision of call barring service at all and a new
provision is entered, the password is reset to its default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CBSERV- 2+
ENTR CBSERV
PROV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROVISION
Input format for provision of call barring services.
Provision of a call barring service applies to all basic services
the mobile subscriber subscribed to.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CBSERV : MSIN= ,CBSERV= [,CCB=] [,PW=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CBSERV CALL BARRING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call barring service to be provided or
activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCB ALL CALL BARRING SERVICES
CBI CB OF INCOMING CALLS
CBIC CB OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT CBIC ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
CBO CB OF OUTGOING CALLS
CBOC CB OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC CB OF ALL OUTGOING INT CALLS
CBOICEXH CBOIC EXCEPT TO HPLMN COUNTRY
CCB CONTROL OF CALL BARRING
This parameter specifies the control of call barring supplementary
service.
Prerequisites:
- Provision of at least one call barring service.
The provision can be entered with the same or a prior command.
Notes:
- If there is no provision of call barring service and a new
provision is entered and CCB is omitted, control of call barring
is reset to its default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPR OPERATOR
SUB SUBSCRIBER
PW PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the password in case of subscriber controlled
call barring. Only one password per mobile subscriber for all call
barring services is possible.
Prerequisites:
- Provision of at least one call barring service.
The provision can be entered with the same or a prior command.
Notes:
- If there is no provision of call barring service at all and a new
provision is entered, the password is reset to its default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CBSERV- 3+
ENTR CBSERV
PROV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...4 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CBSERV- 4+
ENTR CBSERV
PWOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PASSWORD OPTION
Input format for password option.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CBSERV : MSIN= <,CCB= ,PW=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CCB CONTROL OF CALL BARRING
This parameter specifies the control of call barring supplementary
service.
Prerequisites:
- Provision of at least one call barring service.
The provision can be entered with the same or a prior command.
Notes:
- If there is no provision of call barring service and a new
provision is entered and CCB is omitted, control of call barring
is reset to its default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPR OPERATOR
SUB SUBSCRIBER
PW PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the password in case of subscriber controlled
call barring. Only one password per mobile subscriber for all call
barring services is possible.
Prerequisites:
- Provision of at least one call barring service.
The provision can be entered with the same or a prior command.
Notes:
- If there is no provision of call barring service at all and a new
provision is entered, the password is reset to its default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CBSERV- 5-
CONF CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This command configures a central clock generator side to the requested
operating state.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF CCG : CCG= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CCG CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the side of CCG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operational states.
The following table shows which operational state transitions
are permitted.
Compatibilities:
+------------+---------------------+
! from / to ! ACT STB MBL !
+------------+---------------------+
! ACT ! - 1 !! !
! STB ! - - + !
! MBL ! - + - !
! NAC ! - - + !
! UNA ! - + + !
+------------+---------------------+
+ : legal state transition
- : illegal state transition
1 : legal state transition, if the redundant CCG
is in the operational state STB.
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or loss of
calls. This operational state transition is permitted, if the
redundant CCG is in the operational state STB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
STB STANDBY
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
If parameter SUP=Y is specified, messages from the periphery are
suppressed during command execution.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF CCG- 1-
DISP CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This command displays the state and error registers for the central
clock generator CCG.
Notes:
- Reference frequencies which are not set are evaluated as GOOD in the
associated output mask.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CCG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CCG- 1-
STAT CCG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CCG
This command displays the CCG operating state.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT CCG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT CCG- 1-
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCG-PARAMETER
This command displays the internal CCG(A) parameters.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CCGPAR : CCG= ,DATA0= ,DATA1= ,DATA2= ,DATA3= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CCG CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the central clock generator side.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
DATA0 SPECIFIC CCG DATA0
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
DATA1 SPECIFIC CCG DATA1
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
DATA2 SPECIFIC CCG DATA2
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
DATA3 SPECIFIC CCG DATA3
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
The following combinations of DATA0 .. DATA3 are possible:
----------------------------------------------------------
a) REQMOD: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 01
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the modifications made by
PRIOFR, DISFS and DISCONF.
Expected acknowledgement: REQMODACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 01 xx yy zz
with: xx see xx for PRIOACK - MOD CCGPAR b)
= 00 = Reference frequencies have HW priority
= 01 = Reference frequency 1 has priority
= 02 = Reference frequency 2 has priority
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 1+
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
yy see xx for DISFSACK - MOD CCGPAR c)
= 00 = Reference frequencies are supervised
= 01 = Reference frequency supervision disabled
zz see xx for DISCOACK - MOD CCGPAR d)
= 00 = All reference frequencies are enabled
01 = Reference 0 disabled
02 = Reference 1 disabled
03 = Reference 0 and reference 1 disabled
04 = Partner reference disabled
05 = Partner reference and reference 0 disabled
06 = Partner reference and reference 1 disabled
07 = Partner reference and
references 0 and 1 disabled
b) PDACT: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 02
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the current PD value. An
evaluation is only useful in conjunction with the current phase
offset (Acknowledgement to the command OFFSET).
Expected acknowledgement: PDACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 02 xx yy zz
with: xx = Byte after point in PD contents
yy = 1st byte before point in PD contents
zz = 2nd byte before point in PD contents (MSB)
c) OFFSET: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 03
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the present phase offset, which
is a result of the previous phase corrections.
Expected acknowledgement: OFFACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 03 xx yy zz
with: xx = Byte after point in offset contents
yy = 1st byte before point in offset contents
zz = 2nd byte before point in offset contents (MSB)
d) SIREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 04
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the original contents of the
integration register stored in the ANMOD.
Expected acknowledgement: SIACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 04 xx yy zz
with: xx = Byte after point in safeguarding IR
yy = 1st byte before point in safeguarding IR
zz = 2nd byte before point in safeguarding IR (MSB)
e) IREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 05
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the current contents of the
integration register.
Expected acknowledgement: IACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 05 xx yy zz
with: xx = Byte after point in integration register
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 2+
DISP CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
yy = 1st byte before point in integration register
zz = 2nd byte before point in integration register (MSB)
f) DAC: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 06
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the current DAC value.
Expected acknowledgement: DACACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 06 xx yy zz
with: xx = Byte after point in DAC value
yy = 1st byte before point in DAC value
zz = 2nd byte before point in DAC value (MSB)
g) PREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 07
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination interrogates the current contents of the
proportional register.
Expected acknowledgement: PACK
and output of
CCG-INFORMATION: H 07 xx yy zz
with: xx = Byte after point in the proportional register
yy = 1st byte before point in proportional register
zz = 2nd byte before point in proportional register (MSB)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CCGPAR- 3-
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CCG-PARAMETER
This command modifies the CCG(A) control parameters. The command is
only valid for the digital CCG(A) or CCGR. The analog CCG does not
execute the command.
This command is a dangerous command because it may destroy the
network synchronism.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD CCGPAR : CCG= ,DATA0= ,DATA1= ,DATA2= ,DATA3= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CCG CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the central clock generator side.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
DATA0 SPECIFIC CCG DATA0
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
DATA1 SPECIFIC CCG DATA1
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
DATA2 SPECIFIC CCG DATA2
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
DATA3 SPECIFIC CCG DATA3
This parameter specifies the contents of the byte to be sent to the
CCG(A).
The following modifications of DATA0 .. DATA3 are possible :
------------------------------------------------------------
a) RESET: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 01
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
With this byte combination the CCG(A)/CCGR is reset, i.e. start in
mode A, if a reference frequency is available (without heating
the VCO).
Expected acknowledgement: MSTSY
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 01 00 00 00
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 1+
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b) PRIOFR: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 02,
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Restoration of HW priority
= 01 = Reference frequency 1 now has priority
= 02 = Reference frequency 2 now has priority
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination changes the hardware priority of the
reference frequencies. If the frequency given in the command is
available, a switchover is made correspondingly.
Expected acknowledgement: PRIOACK
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 02 xx 00 00
with: xx = 00 = HW priority restored
= 01 = Reference frequency 1 has priority
= 02 = Reference frequency 2 has priority
c) DISFS: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 03
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Switch off disable
= 01 = Switch on disable
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination disables or reactivates the supervision of
the reference frequency (frequencies) being applied.
Expected acknowledgement: DISFSACK
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 03 xx 00 00
with: xx = 00 = Disable switched off (supervision)
= 01 = Disable switched on (no supervision)
d) DISCONF: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 04
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00 = Switch off disable
= 01 = Disable reference 0
= 02 = Disable reference 1
= 03 = Disable reference 0 and reference 1
= 04 = Disable partner reference
= 05 = Disable partner reference and reference 0
= 06 = Disable partner reference and reference 1
= 07 = Disable partner reference and
references 0 and 1
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination disables or reactivates the reference
frequencies being applied at the CCG(A)/CCGR. Any combination of
the two external reference frequencies (reference 0 and
reference 1) and of the reference frequency of the partner
CCG(A)/CCGR (partner reference) can be disabled.
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 07 puts the CCG(A)/CCGR in HOLDOVER mode.
Expected acknowledgement: DISCOACK
and output of
CCG-PARAMETER: H 04 xx 00 00
with: xx = 00 = All disables switched off
01 = Reference 0 disabled
02 = Reference 1 disabled
03 = Reference 0 and reference 1 disabled
04 = Partner reference disabled
05 = Partner reference and reference 0 disabled
06 = Partner reference and reference 1 disabled
07 = Partner reference and
references 0 and 1 disabled
e) UIREG: SPECIFIC CCG DATA0 = 15
SPECIFIC CCG DATA1 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA2 = 00
SPECIFIC CCG DATA3 = 00
This byte combination saves the contents of the integration
register on disk.
Expected acknowledgement: SADIR
and output of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 2+
MOD CCGPAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCG-PARAMETER: H 15 00 00 00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CCGPAR- 3-
ACT CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command activates a certain CDS time program.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CDSPROG- 1-
CAN CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command cancels one or several common service subscribers from a
certain program time for the program TGASSIGN.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,TASKGRP= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSSUBID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the time program TGASSIGN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CDSPROG- 1+
CAN CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the task group.
Prerequisites:
- The task group must exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CSSUBID COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the number of the common service
subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CDSPROG- 2-
DACT CDSPROG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE A CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command deactivates a certain CDS time program.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not divided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CDSPROG- 1-
DISP CDSPROG
DCDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command displays a CDS time program data for a specified time program.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP CDSPROG - DCDSCONF DISPLAY CDSCONF DATA
2. DISP CDSPROG - DSUBTOTG DISPLAY CSSUB TO TASKGROUP DATA
3. DISP CDSPROG - DTGTOSUB DISPLAY TASKGROUP TO CSSUB
1. Input format
DISPLAY CDSCONF DATA
This input format is used to display a CDS-Configuration
for a certain or all created program times for the program
CDSCONF.

[ [
[ DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 1+
DISP CDSPROG
DCDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 2+
DISP CDSPROG
DSUBTOTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY CSSUB TO TASKGROUP DATA
This input format is used to display the CSSUBs for a certain
or all task groups for a certain or all program times for the
program TGASSIGN.

[ [
[ DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] [,TASKGRP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 3+
DISP CDSPROG
DSUBTOTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the task group.
Prerequisites:
- The task group have to exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 4+
DISP CDSPROG
DTGTOSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY TASKGROUP TO CSSUB
This input format is used to display all task groups for a
certain CSSUB for a certain or all program times for the
program TGASSIGN.

[ [
[ DISP CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] ,CSSUBID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 5+
DISP CDSPROG
DTGTOSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
CSSUBID COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the number of the common service
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPROG- 6-
ENTR CDSPROG
ECDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CDS TIME PROGRAM DATA
This command enters a new CDS time program for a specified program time.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR CDSPROG - ECDSCONF ENTER CDSCONF DATA
2. ENTR CDSPROG - ETGASSGN ENTER TGASSIGN DATA
1. Input format
ENTER CDSCONF DATA
This input format is used to enter a CDS-Configuration
for a certain program time for the program CDSCONF.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,CONF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 1+
ENTR CDSPROG
ECDSCONF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
CONF CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the call distribution system configuration.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 2+
ENTR CDSPROG
ETGASSGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ENTER TGASSIGN DATA
This input format is used to enter one or several CSSUBs to a
certain task group for a certain program time for the program
TGASSIGN.

[ [
[ ENTR CDSPROG : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,TASKGRP= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSSUBID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
FR FRIDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
MO MONDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 3+
ENTR CDSPROG
ETGASSGN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
TASKGRP TASK GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the task group.
Prerequisites:
- The task group have to exist in the common service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CSSUBID COMMON SERVICE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the number of the common service
subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDSPROG- 4-
CAN CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command cancels a CDS program time for a specified time program.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CDSPRTIM- 1+
CAN CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CDSPRTIM- 2-
CR CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command creates a new CDS program time for a specified time program.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= [,INIT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CDSPRTIM- 1+
CR CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
INIT INITIAL CONFIGURATION
Initial value of the assignments at the time of
creating a program time.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEFAULT DEFAULT
SET SET
RESET RESET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CDSPRTIM- 2-
DISP CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command displays a CDS program time for a specified time program.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= [,TIME=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPRTIM- 1+
DISP CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDSPRTIM- 2-
MOD CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CDS PROGRAM TIME DATA
This command modifies a CDS program time for a specified time program.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CDSPRTIM : [CSGLAC=] ,CSGDN= ,PROG= ,TIME= ,NTIME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSGLAC COMMON SERVICE GROUP LAC
This parameter specifies the local area code of the common service
group.
Notes:
- If the exchange directory number volume is not devided into several
local area codes, this parameter can be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
CSGDN COMMON SERVICE GROUP DN
This parameter specifies the directory number of the common service
group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PROG CDS TIME PROGRAM
This parameter specifies the kind of time program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDSCONF CDS CONFIGURATION
TGASSIGN TASK GROUP ASSIGNMENT
TIME CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CDSPRTIM- 1+
MOD CDSPRTIM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
NTIME NEW CDS PROGRAM TIME
This parameter specifies the new program time, that shall be
administred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
ALL EVERY DAY
This parameter specifies the begin day of program time.
b: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin hour of program time.
c: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the begin minute of program time.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CDSPRTIM- 2-
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
This command cancels:
- control flags for call data treatment;
- non standard (extra and alternative) data for several recording types;
- activation of preventive meter observation.
This command resets:
- preventive meter observation thresholds, category and traffic type
dependent.
- the record version identification, recording type dependent.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CDTDAT : [REC=] <,EXTNSD= ,ALTNSD= ,MARKS= ,VERSID= [
[ [
[ ,PMOBS=> [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies for which recording type the extra
data no longer has to be recorded for a call by the
EWSD-switching system, and/or for which recording type
the specified version identification is no longer valid.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
METSUB SUBSCRIBER METERING
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
MOBORIG METER OBSERVATION ORIGINATING
MOBTERM METER OBSERVATION TERMINATING
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
IARSTAT INTER ADMINISTR. REVENUE STAT.
MDR MESSAGE DATA RECORDING
INAMA INTELIGENT NETWORK AMA
OPERAMA AMA FOR OPERATOR INPUT
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERING
EXTNSD EXTRA NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which extra data no longer have
to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
If no recording is specified, the entered extra data items
are reset for each relevant recording.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CHARGES CALL CHARGES
RECTRID RECORD TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
BMETPULS B SIDE METER PULSES
OCLGDN ORIGINATING CALLING PARTY DN
DURBANS DURATION BEFORE ANSWER
THRDPRTY THIRD PARTY NUMBER
CLDRCVD RECEIVED CALLED PARTY NUMBER
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
BGID BUSSINES GROUP IDENTIFICATION
CTXNO CENTREX NUMBERS
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE NUMBER
CHECKSUM CHECKSUM
CALLIND ADDITIONAL CALL INDICATORS
CALLTAR CALL TARIFF
GCR GLOBAL CHARGE REFERENCE
CONNID CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
FAUPRTNR FAU BY PARTNER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CDTDAT- 1+
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRAFQUAL TRAFFIC QUALITY DATA
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
ADVCUMCH ADVISED CUMULATED CHARGES
ADDCLGDN ADDITIONAL CALLING PARTY DN
DEFMSN DEFAULT MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO.
CLDSENT SENT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
CLDTOSCP CALLED PARTY DN SENT TO SCP
SCPRDGDN PROVIDED REDIRECTING DN BY SCP
RECOWNER RECORD OWNER DN
PFXNATIN NATIONAL/INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
EXCHNAME EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NAME
VERSID RECORD VERSION IDENTIFICATION
ADDTAR ADD-ON TARIFF DATA
PBXOPN PBX OPERATOR NUMBER
RELIND RELEASE INDICATOR
INSERVK IN SERVICE KEY
MLPP M LEVEL PRECEDENCE/PREEMPTION
REFINDUR REFINED DURATION
CLGSENT SENT CALLING PARTY NUMBER
REDSENT SENT REDIRECTING NUMBER
CATSENT SENT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
CATRCVD RECEIVED CALLING PARTY CATEG.
SERVINFO SERVICE INFO
MAPCREF MAP CALL REFERENCE
IMSI IMSI NUMBER
SPC SIGNALLING POINT CODE
ALTNSD ALTERNATIVE NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which alternative data no longer
has to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TGNA TRUNK GROUP NAME
CACTYPE CAC TYPE
OWNCAC OWN CAC
EXCHIDNO EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
RANSWTIM RECORD ANSWER TIME
EXTBDIG EXTENDED B DIGITS
RECTRCIC RECORD TRUNK IDENT. WITH CIC
TGN2 SECOND TRUNK GROUP NO. IDENT.
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies which specific control data are disabled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMASFAI AMA IMM.OUTP.FOR SUB.FAC.INPUT
UCALLAMA UNANSWERED CALLS WITH AMA
DEBFA DEB FOR FACILITY INPUT/USAGE
UCALLIAC UNSUCCESS. CALLS WITH IACHASTA
AMAFAIID AMA F.SUB.FAC.INP.IMPL. DEACT.
CXSFAICH CENTREX STATION FAC.INP.CHARG.
CTXFAU CENTREX FAU CHARGING
UCALMOBT UNANSW. CALLS FOR MOBTERM.
PMOBIO PREVENT.MOB IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ATTNOCHA RECORD CHRG.FREE CALL ATTEMPT
UCALLINA INAMA FOR UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS
VERSID RECORD VERSION IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the record version identification
value which is to be reset. This value refers to the APS software
version.
A recording type (parameter REC) must also be specified when
previously the record version identification was entered with
a specified recording type.
Prerequisite:
This value can only be reset when this value is not requested
as EXTNSD data by any recording type (parameter REC).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CDTDAT- 2+
CAN CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...99, range of decimal numbers
PMOBS CANCEL ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
This parameter specifies that the activation of the PMOBS feature is
canceled (with reset of the threshold value).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT CANCEL ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
TYPE PMOB TYPE
This parameter specifies for which category and traffic type
combination the PMOB threshold is no longer valid.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: CATEGORY
COINB COINBOX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
b: TRAFFIC TYPE
NAT NATIONAL
INAT INTERNATIONAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CDTDAT- 3-
DISP CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
This command displays
- the extra and/or alternative data items.
- the activated call data treatment control flags
- non standard (extra and alternative) data for several recording types
- the status and the threshold value for preventive meter observation.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CDTDAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CDTDAT- 1-
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL DATA TREATMENT DATA
This command enters:
- control flags for call data treatment
- non standard (extra and alternative) data items for several recording types
- charging counter for facility input and facility usage
- activation and threshold value (charge limit) for preventive meter
observation (can be entered per category and traffic type)
- the record version identification value (per recording).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR CDTDAT : [REC=] <,EXTNSD= ,ALTNSD= ,MARKS= ,FAICNTR= [
[ [
[ ,FAUCNTR= ,VERSID= ,PMOBS=> [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies for which recording type the extra
data has to be recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching
system, and/or for which recording type the version identification
is valid.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
METSUB SUBSCRIBER METERING
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be
recorded for a subscriber metering
registration.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be recorded
with AMA registration.
MOBORIG METER OBSERVATION ORIGINATING
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be recorded
with meter observation at the
originating side.
MOBTERM METER OBSERVATION TERMINATING
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be recorded
with meter observation at the
terminating side.
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be
recorded for an active PMOB
registration.
MDR MESSAGE DATA RECORDING
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be recorded
for CENTREX subscriber charging with
MDR registration.
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be
recorded for an active IN AMA
registration.
OPERAMA OPERATOR AMA
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to be
recorded for AMA registration
for an operator input.
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to record with
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 1+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AMA at active IACHASTA registration.
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERING
This identifier allows to enter extra
non standard data items to
record for an active
IACHASTA metering registration.
EXTNSD EXTRA NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which extra data items must be
recorded by the EWSD switching system for a call.
For a specific recording type, the amount of data to be
collected per recording type consists of:
- basic data items, which are always collected (i.e. fixed)
- extra data items, which are collected if entered via this
parameter (i.e. administrable).
Notes:
1. In case no recording type (see parameter REC) is specified,
the extra data items entered are set for all relevant
recordings (see next overview).
2. The Extra Non Standard Data Items CONNID, FAUPRTNR,
TRAFQUAL, CAC and SERVINFO are default set for the relevant
recordings. They can be removed with the CAN CDTDAT
command.
The following overview shows which extra data items can be
administered for which recording types by entering the respective
parameter value(s):
METSUB
PFXNATIN: National/International prefix digit(s).
DEB
CHARGES : Charge units for connection, charge units for
facility usage, zone and charge band.
RECTRID : Trunk Identification incoming/outgoing.
BMETPULS: B-side meter pulses.
OCLGDN : Originating calling party directory number.
DURBANS : Duration before answer.
THRDPRTY: Third party number.
CLDRCVD : Received called party number.
NEWDEST : New destination.
BGID : Business group identification.
CTXNO : CENTREX numbers.
SEQUENCE: Sequence number.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
CALLIND : Additional call indicators.
CALLTAR : Call tariff.
GCR : Global Charge reference.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
FAUPRTNR: Facility Usage by Partner.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
CAC : Carrier Access Code.
ADVCUMCH: Advised Cumulated Charges.
ADDCLGDN: Additional calling party directory number.
DEFMSN : Default multiple subscriber number.
CLDSENT : Sent called party number.
RECOWNER: Record owner directory number.
PFXNATIN: National/International prefix digit(s).
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
ADDTAR : Add-on tariff data.
PBXOPN : PBX operator number.
RELIND : Release indicator.
INSERVK : IN service key.
MLPP : MLPP level.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
CLGSENT : Sent calling party number.
REDSENT : Sent redirecting number.
CATSENT : Sent calling party category.
CATRCVD : Received calling party category.
SERVINFO: Service info.
SPC : Signalling point code.
RECTRID : Trunk Identification incoming/outgoing.
BMETPULS: B-side meter pulses.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 2+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OCLGDN : Originating calling party directory number.
DURBANS : Duration before answer.
THRDPRTY: Third party number.
CLDRCVD : Received called party number.
NEWDEST : New destination.
BGID : Business group identification.
CTXNO : CENTREX numbers.
CALLIND : Additional call indicators.
CALLTAR : Call tariff.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
FAUPRTNR: Facility Usage by Partner.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
CAC : Carrier Access Code.
ADVCUMCH: Advised Cumulated Charges.
ADDCLGDN: Additional calling party directory number.
DEFMSN : Default multiple subscriber number.
CLDSENT : Sent called party number.
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
ADDTAR : Add-on tariff data.
PBXOPN : PBX operator number.
RELIND : Release indicator.
INSERVK : IN service key.
MLPP : MLPP level.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
CLGSENT : Sent calling party number.
REDSENT : Sent redirecting number.
CATSENT : Sent calling party category.
CATRCVD : Received calling party category.
SERVINFO: Service info.
SPC : Signalling point code.
OCLGDN : Originating calling party directory number.
BGID : Business group identification.
CTXNO : CENTREX numbers.
CALLIND : Additional call indicators.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
ADDCLGDN: Additional calling party directory number.
DEFMSN : Default multiple subscriber number.
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
PBXOPN : PBX operator number.
RELIND : Release indicator.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
SERVINFO: Service info.
IACHASTA: IACAMA
CHARGES : Charge units for connection.
BMETPULS: B-side meter pulses.
OCLGDN : Originating calling party directory number.
THRDPRTY: Third party number.
CLDRCVD : Received called party number.
NEWDEST : New destination.
SEQUENCE: Sequence number.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
CALLIND : Additional call indicators.
CALLTAR : Call tariff.
GCR : Global Charge reference.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
CAC : Carrier Access Code.
ADVCUMCH: Advised Cumulated Charges.
ADDCLGDN: Additional calling party directory number.
DEFMSN : Default multiple subscriber number.
CLDSENT : Sent called party number.
RECOWNER: Record owner directory number.
PFXNATIN: National/International prefix digit(s).
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
ADDTAR : Add-on tariff data.
PBXOPN : PBX operator number.
RELIND : Release indicator.
INSERVK : IN service key.
MLPP : MLPP level.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
CLGSENT : Sent calling party number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 3+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDSENT : Sent redirecting number.
CATSENT : Sent calling party category.
CATRCVD : Received calling party category.
SERVINFO: Service info.
SPC : Signalling point code.
IACHASTA: IACMET
CHARGES : Charge units for connection.
BMETPULS: B-side meter pulses.
VERSID : Record version identification.
CHARGES : Charge units for connection.
OCLGDN : Originating calling party directory number.
DURBANS : Duration before answer.
THRDPRTY: Third party number.
BGID : Business group identification.
CALLIND : Additional call indicators.
CALLTAR : Call tariff.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
FAUPRTNR: Facility Usage by Partner.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
CAC : Carrier Access Code.
ADVCUMCH: Advised Cumulated Charges.
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
ADDTAR : Add-on tariff data.
INSERVK : IN service key.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
SERVINFO: Service info.
INAMA
RECTRID : Trunk Identification incoming/outgoing.
OCLGDN : Originating calling party directory number.
CLDRCVD : Received called party number.
SEQUENCE: Sequence number.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
CALLTAR : Call tariff.
GCR : Global Charge reference.
CONNID : Connection Identification.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
CAC : Carrier Access Code.
ADDCLGDN: Additional calling party directory number.
DEFMSN : Default multiple subscriber number.
CLDSENT : Sent called party number.
CLDTOSCP: Called party number sent to SCP.
SCPRDGDN: SCP redirecting number.
RECOWNER: Record owner directory number.
PFXNATIN: National/International prefix digit(s).
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
ADDTAR : Add-on tariff data.
PBXOPN : PBX operator number.
INSERVK : IN service key.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
CLGSENT : Sent calling party number.
REDSENT : Sent redirecting number.
SERVINFO: Service info.
MAPCREF : MAP call reference.
IMSI : IMSI number.
SPC : Signalling point code.
PMOB
CONNID : Connection Identification.
TRAFQUAL: Traffic Quality Data.
RECOWNER: Record owner directory number.
PFXNATIN: National/International prefix digit(s).
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
REFINDUR: Refined duration.
SERVINFO: Service info.
OPERAMA
SEQUENCE: Sequence number.
CHECKSUM: Checksum.
DEFMSN : Default multiple subscriber number.
RECOWNER: Record owner directory number.
PFXNATIN: National/International prefix digit(s).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 4+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXCHNAME: Exchange name.
VERSID : Record version identification.
PBXOPN : PBX operator number.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CHARGES CALL CHARGES
This identifier allows to record charge units,
zone and charge band.
RECTRID RECORD TRUNK IDENTIFICATION
This identifier allows the recording of the trunk
identification.
The trunk identification can be recorded in the
following form:
- trunk group number + line number
or
- trunk group number + CIC identification
(see parameter ALTNSD).
BMETPULS B SIDE METER PULSES
This identifier allows to collect the B side
meter pulses for an IACHASTA registration.
OCLGDN ORIGINATING CALLING PARTY DN
This identifier allows to record the originating
calling party number within several recording type
records.
In case of PBX with DDI, this is the signalled
and screened directory number.
In case of CAMA and IACAMA this is the
inter-office signalled directory number.
DURBANS DURATION BEFORE ANSWER
This identifier allows to record the
call duration before answer.
THRDPRTY THIRD PARTY NUMBER
This identifier allows to provide the
third party number of a call transfer or
call forwarding within the tickets.
E.g. in case of serial call forwarding
the AMA records of all the call legs
contain the original calling party.
CLDRCVD RECEIVED CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This identifier allows to provide the
received called party number within the tickets.
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
This identifier allows to provide the
new destination number within the
tickets.
BGID BUSINESS GROUP IDENTIFICATION
This identifier allows to provide the
CENTREX business group identifier within
the tickets.
CTXNO CENTREX NUMBERS
This identifier allows to provide the
CENTREX numbers within the tickets.
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE NUMBER
This identifier allows to provide the
sequence number within the tickets.
CHECKSUM CHECKSUM
This identifier allows to provide the
checksum within the tickets.
CALLIND ADDITIONAL CALL INDICATORS
This identifier allows to provide the
additional call indicators within the tickets.
CALLTAR CALL TARIFF
This identifier allows to provide the
call tariff within the tickets.
GCR GLOBAL CHARGE REFERENCE
This identifier allows to record the
global charge reference .
Because this is an extension of the local
charge reference (controlable with the
identifier CONNID) the connection
identification will no longer be available
in the charging ticket when the global
charge reference is requested.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 5+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONNID CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
This identifier allows to record the
connection identification.
FAUPRTNR FAU BY PARTNER
This identifier allows to record the
facility usage by the partner.
TRAFQUAL TRAFFIC QUALITY DATA
This identifier allows to record the
traffic quality data.
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This identifier allows to record the
carrier access code.
ADVCUMCH ADVISED CUMULATED CHARGES
This identifier allows to record the
advised cumulated charges.
ADDCLGDN ADDITIONAL CALLING PARTY DN
This identifier allows to record the
additional calling party number.
DEFMSN DEFAULT MULTIPLE SUBSCR. NO.
This identifier allows to record the
default multiple subscriber number.
CLDSENT SENT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This identifier allows to record the
sent called party number.
CLDTOSCP CALLED PARTY DN SENT TO SCP
This identifier allows to record the
called party number sent to the SCP.
SCPRDGDN PROVIDED REDIRECTING DN BY SCP
This identifier allows to record the
SCP provided redirecting number.
RECOWNER RECORD OWNER DN
This identifier allows to record the
record owner directory number.
PFXNATIN NATIONAL/INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
This identifier allows to have the
national and/or international prefix
included in the directory numbers.
EXCHNAME EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NAME
This identifier allows to record the
exchange identification name.
VERSID RECORD VERSION IDENTIFICATION
This identifier allows to record the
record version identification.
Prerequisite:
A record version identification value
(see parameter VERSID) must either
have been entered before or is entered
in the same command.
ADDTAR ADD-ON TARIFF DATA
This identifier allows to record the
add-on tariff data.
PBXOPN PBX OPERATOR NUMBER
This identifier allows to record the
PBX operator number.
RELIND RELEASE INDICATOR
This identifier allows to record the
release indicator.
INSERVK IN SERVICE KEY
This identifier allows to record the
IN service key.
MLPP M LEVEL PRECEDENCE/PREEMPTION
This identifier allows to record the
MLPP precedence level.
REFINDUR REFINED DURATION
This identifier allows recording of the
refined duration.
CLGSENT SENT CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This identifier allows recording of the
sent calling party number.
REDSENT SENT REDIRECTING NUMBER
This identifier allows recording of the
sent redirecting number.
CATSENT SENT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This identifier allows recording of the
sent calling party category.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 6+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CATRCVD RECEIVED CALLING PARTY CATEG.
This identifier allows recording of the
received calling party category.
SERVINFO SERVICE INFO
This identifier allows recording of the
service info.
MAPCREF MAP CALL REFERENCE
This identifier allows recording of the
MAP call reference.
IMSI IMSI NUMBER
This identifier allows recording of the
IMSI number.
SPC SIGNALLING POINT CODE
This identifier allows recording of the
signalling point code.
ALTNSD ALTERNATIVE NON STANDARD DATA
This parameter specifies which alternative data items must be
recorded for a call by the EWSD-switching system.
The possibility exists to collect alternative data items instead of
the standard data items for some recording types.
The alternative data items are administered independent from
the recording type. This means that when an alternative data item
is entered, it is valid for all recording types for which it is
relevant.
Following overview shows for which recording types, which
alternative data items are relevant:
DEB
EXCHIDNO: Exchange identification number instead of name.
RANSWTIM: Recording of begin time instead of end time.
EXTBDIG : More than 18 B-digits can be registered (only
relevant for old ticket layout of V4.X).
RECTRCIC: Trunk identification with CIC instead of
the line number.
TGN2 : Special representation of the trunk group number.
CACTYPE : CAC type.
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
TGNA : Trunk group name.
IACHASTA: IACAMA
EXCHIDNO: Exchange identification number instead of name.
RANSWTIM: Recording of begin time instead of end time.
RECTRCIC: Trunk identification with CIC instead of
the line number.
TGN2 : Special representation of the trunk group number.
CACTYPE : CAC type.
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
TGNA : Trunk group name.
MOBORIG
INAMA
EXCHIDNO: Exchange identification number instead of name.
RANSWTIM: Recording of begin time instead of end time.
RECTRCIC: Trunk identification with CIC instead of
the line number.
TGN2 : Special representation of the trunk group number.
CACTYPE : CAC type.
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
TGNA : Trunk group name.
OPERAMA:
EXCHIDNO: Exchange identification number instead of name.
RANSWTIM: Recording of begin time instead of end time.
PMOB:
EXCHIDNO: Exchange identification number instead of name.
RANSWTIM: Recording of begin time instead of end time.
CACTYPE : CAC type.
OWNCAC : Own CAC.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 7+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TGNA TRUNK GROUP NAME
This identifier allows to record a trunk group
in form of the trunk group name instead of the
standard trunk group number (parameter TGNA
in command CR TGRP).
Incompatibilities: ALTNSD=TGN2.
CACTYPE CAC TYPE
This identifier allows to record the
CAC type instead of the MCE type.
OWNCAC OWN CAC
This identifier allows to record the
own carrier access code.
EXCHIDNO EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
This identifier allows to record the
exchange identification number instead
of the exchange identification name.
RANSWTIM RECORD ANSWER TIME
This identifier allows to record the
begin date/time of the call instead
of the end date/time.
EXTBDIG EXTENDED B DIGITS
RECTRCIC RECORD TRUNK IDENT. WITH CIC
This identifier allows to record a trunk in form
of circuit identification code instead of line
number for Signaling System No. 7 trunk groups.
This alternative data item only becomes active
if the extra data item RECTRID is set.
TGN2 SECOND TRUNK GROUP NO. IDENT.
This identifier allows to record a trunk group in
form of the second trunk group number instead of
the standard trunk group number (parameter TGN2
in command CR TGRP).
Incompatibilities: ALTNSD=TGNA.
MARKS MARKS
This parameter specifies the control flags that can be used
to control specific functions of call data treatment.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMASFAI AMA IMM.OUTP.FOR SUB.FAC.INPUT
UCALLAMA AMA FOR UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS
DEBFA DEB FOR FACILITY INPUT/USAGE
If this flag is set, DEB records are also
generated for facility input/usage by the
subscriber if the DEB feature is activated
for this subscriber.
UCALLIAC IACHASTA FOR UNSUCCESS. CALLS
AMAFAIID AMA FOR IMPLICIT DEACTIVATION
CXSFAICH CENTREX STATION FAC.INP.CHARG.
CTXFAU CENTREX FAU CHARGING
UCALMOBT UNANSW. CALLS FOR MOBTERM.
PMOBIO PREVENT.MOB IMMEDIATE OUTPUT
ATTNOCHA RECORD CHRG.FREE CALL ATTEMPT
UCALLINA INAMA FOR UNSUCCESSFUL CALLS
If this flag is set, IN AMA tickets are generated
for unsuccessful calls. These are calls that have
not been answered but IN AMA must be performed
nevertheless for that call, e.g. because of the
zoning result or 1st dialed digit (project
specific GP implementation).
FAICNTR FACILITY INPUT CHARGE COUNTER
This parameter specifies on which counter the charge units for
facility input have to be accumulated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 8+
ENTR CDTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
FAUCNTR FACILITY USAGE CHARGE COUNTER
This parameter specifies on which counter the charge units for
facility usage have to be accumulated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CNTR1 COUNTER 1
CNTR3 COUNTER 3
CNTR2 COUNTER 2
CNTR4 COUNTER 4
CNTR5 COUNTER 5
VERSID RECORD VERSION IDENT. VALUE
This parameter specifies the record version identification
value per recording.
If no recording type (parameter REC) is specified, the
entered record version identification value is set for all
relevant recordings, i.e. for those recordings for which
the EXTNSD value VERSID can be set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
PMOBS PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
This parameter allows the PMOB feature to be activated together with
entering the PMOB threshold value.
PMOB tickets are generated for calls whose charges have reached
or exceeded the threshold specified in the command.
The generated PMOB tickets can be displayed with DISP CHAREC.
The PMOB threshold can be displayed with DISP CDTDAT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: ACTIVATION OF PMOBS
ACT ACTIVATE PMOBS
b: PMOBS THRESHOLD VALUE=
1...65534, range of decimal numbers
TYPE PMOB TYPE
This parameter specifies for which category and traffic type
combination the PMOB threshold becomes valid.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: CATEGORY
COINB COINBOX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
b: TRAFFIC TYPE
NAT NATIONAL
INAT INTERNATIONAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CDTDAT- 9-
RESET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS
This command resets the command file options to their defaults in the
session level. If it forms part of a command file, this command sets the
command file options to the values of the next higher level.
Input format

[ [
[ RESET CFOPT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RESET CFOPT- 1-
SET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET COMMAND FILE OPTIONS
This command sets the command file options. In dialog, the parameters
defined with this command remain in effect until the command is entered
again or until the command is input from a command file with parameter
SCOPE=GLOBAL or until the defaults are set with the appropriate
command.
If the command SET CFOPT is entered from a command file, the
following is valid:
- It remains in effect until the command is entered again or until
RESET CFOPT is entered from the command file.
- In a command file addressed from this command file (lower level)
it remains in effect until the command SET CFOPT/RESET CFOPT is
entered from the lower level command file.
When the higher level command file is re-entered, the last
SET CFOPT/RESET CFOPT entered there is valid.
- Otherwise the command is valid up to the end of the command file.
Input format

[ [
[ SET CFOPT : <ACKCFS= ,ON= ,OFF= ,DANCMD= ,ACKREQ=> [
[ [
[ [,SCOPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACKCFS EXTEND OF CMD ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This parameter defines to what extent commands from command files
are to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL
CMDERR COMMAND ACKNOWLEDGE + ERROR
ERROR ERROR ACKNOWLEDGE
Default: ERROR
ON SWITCH ON
This parameter specifies which of the switches are set to ON.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
OFF SWITCH OFF
This parameter specifies which of the switches are set to OFF.
Default value: X
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
DANCMD EXECUTION OF DANGEROUS COMMAND
This parameter specifies whether commands in the command file
with the attribute Dangerous command are to be executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET CFOPT- 1+
SET CFOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXEC EXECUTION
NOEXEC NO EXECUTION
Default: NOEXEC
ACKREQ ACKNOWLEDGE OF READ REQUEST
This parameter specifies whether acknowledgement requests
arising due to command input are to be answered positively
or negatively.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
POS POSITIVE ACKNOWLEDGE
NEG NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE
Default: NEG
SCOPE RANGE OF VALIDITY
This parameter specifies the range of validity of the other
parameters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LOCAL ONLY FOR ACTUAL NESTING LEVEL
GLOBAL GLOBAL VALIDITY FOR ALL LEVELS
Default: LOCAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET CFOPT- 2-
CAN CFSERV
DEACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
This command withdraws or deregistrates or deactivates
call forwarding services.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN CFSERV - DEACT DEACTIVATE
2. CAN CFSERV - ERASURE ERASURE
3. CAN CFSERV - WITHDRAW WITHDRAWAL
1. Input format
DEACTIVATE
Input format for deactivate of call forwarding services.
Deactivation of a call forwarding service applies to one or
more groups of basic services.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CFSERV : MSIN= ,CFSERV= ,BSVG= ,STATUS= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call forwarding service to be withdrawn or
erased or deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
Notes:
- If this call forwarding service is withdrawn
the value of RCTIM is deleted. In case of a
new provision it is reset to its default.
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CFSERV- 1+
CAN CFSERV
DEACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CFSERV- 2+
CAN CFSERV
ERASURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ERASURE
Input format for erasure of call forwarding services.
Erasure of a call forwarding service applies to one or
more groups of basic services.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CFSERV : MSIN= ,CFSERV= ,BSVG= [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call forwarding service to be withdrawn or
erased or deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
Notes:
- If this call forwarding service is withdrawn
the value of RCTIM is deleted. In case of a
new provision it is reset to its default.
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
STATUS STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
REG REGISTRATION
Default: REG
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CFSERV- 3+
CAN CFSERV
WITHDRAW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
WITHDRAWAL
Input format for withdrawal of call forwarding services.
Withdrawal of a call forwarding service applies to all
basic services the mobile subscriber subscribed to.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CFSERV : MSIN= ,CFSERV= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call forwarding service to be withdrawn or
erased or deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFD CF DEFAULT
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
Notes:
- If this call forwarding service is withdrawn
the value of RCTIM is deleted. In case of a
new provision it is reset to its default.
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CFSERV- 4-
ENTR CFSERV
ACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL FORWARDING SERVICE
This command provides or registrates or activates
call forwarding services.
It is also possible to overwrite the subscriber related RCTIM.
Notes:
- If CFNREPLY is withdrawn the value of RCTIM is deleted.
In case of a new provision of this service the timer is
reset to its default.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR CFSERV - ACT ACTIVATE
2. ENTR CFSERV - PROV PROVISION
3. ENTR CFSERV - REG REGISTRATION
4. ENTR CFSERV - TIMER NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
1. Input format
ACTIVATE
Input format for activation of call forwarding services.
Activation of a call forwarding service applies to one or
more groups of basic services.

[ [
[ ENTR CFSERV : MSIN= ,CFSERV= ,BSFTNO= [,REPCF=] [,SERVAV=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,RCTIM=] [,NCS=] [,NFS=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call forwarding service to be provided or
registered or activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
Compatibilities:
- In case of activation of a provisioned
"forwarded to number" or in case of
registration the value ALLCF can only
be entered together with a "forwarded
to number".
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFD CF DEFAULT
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 1+
ENTR CFSERV
ACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BSFTNO BASIC SERVICE GROUP AND FTNO
This parameter specifies a basic service group code, a
forwarded to number (MSISDN) and the format of a
forwarded to number.
If the FTNO is already registered, only the first unit of
BSFTNO is necessary for activation.
In case of a forwarded to number in international format
the range "0"-"9" is allowed only. Furthermore "E" can
be used as replacement indicator for template subscriber
at the end of FTNO (replace with SUBSCRIBER NUMBER).
The forwarded to number in unknown format consists of up
to 15 digits in the range "0"-"9" and "A"-"E".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
b: FORWARDED TO NUMBER=
1...17 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: NUMBERTYPE OF FTNO
INTNO FTNO IN INTERNATIONAL FORMAT
UNKNOWN FTNO IN UNKNOWN FORMAT
Default: INTNO
REPCF REPLACEMENT OF CF SERVICE
This parameter specifies the forwarding conditions for which CFD
is to be applied.
Default: CFBUSY + CFNREPLY + CRNREACH
Compatibilities:
- If REPCF is entered, parameter value of CFSERV must be CFD.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
SERVAV SERVICE AVAILABILITY
This parameter specifies the availability of a "call forwarding
by default" service.
Compatibilities:
- If SERVAV is entered, parameter value of CFSERV must be CFD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
Default: ALLPLMN
RCTIM NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
This parameter specifies the no reply condition timer.
Compatibilities:
- CFSERV=CFNREPLY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 2+
ENTR CFSERV
ACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Each new provision of CFNREPLY resets the timer to
its default.
- If the no reply condition timer is changed and
CFSERV=CFD is active, then - depending on
the project - no VLR update is performed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
NCS NOTIFICATION TO CALLING SUB
This parameter specifies whether the calling subscriber is notified
or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO NOTIFICATION
NO NO NOTIFICATION
Y NOTIFICATION
YES NOTIFICATION
NFS NOTIFICATION TO FORWARDING SUB
This parameter specifies whether the forwarding subscriber is notified
or not.
Compatibilities:
- CFSERV=CFBUSY
- CFSERV=CFNREPLY
- CFSERV=ALLCF , but has only effect on CFBUSY and CFNREPLY
- CFSERV=ALLCFCON, but has only effect on CFBUSY and CFNREPLY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO NOTIFICATION
NO NO NOTIFICATION
Y NOTIFICATION
YES NOTIFICATION
STATUS STATUS
Notes:
- In case of activation of a provisioned "forwarded to number" or
in case of registration a "forwarded to number" has to be
entered too.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVATION
Default: ACT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 3+
ENTR CFSERV
PROV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROVISION
Input format for provision of call forwarding services.
Provision of a call forwarding service applies to all basic services
the mobile subscriber subscribed to.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CFSERV : MSIN= ,CFSERV= [,NCS=] [,NFS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call forwarding service to be provided or
registered or activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
Compatibilities:
- In case of activation of a provisioned
"forwarded to number" or in case of
registration the value ALLCF can only
be entered together with a "forwarded
to number".
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
NCS NOTIFICATION TO CALLING SUB
This parameter specifies whether the calling subscriber is notified
or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO NOTIFICATION
NO NO NOTIFICATION
Y NOTIFICATION
YES NOTIFICATION
Default: NO, NO
NFS NOTIFICATION TO FORWARDING SUB
This parameter specifies whether the forwarding subscriber is notified
or not.
Compatibilities:
- CFSERV=CFBUSY
- CFSERV=CFNREPLY
- CFSERV=ALLCF , but has only effect on CFBUSY and CFNREPLY
- CFSERV=ALLCFCON, but has only effect on CFBUSY and CFNREPLY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO NOTIFICATION
NO NO NOTIFICATION
Y NOTIFICATION
YES NOTIFICATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 4+
ENTR CFSERV
PROV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: NO, NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 5+
ENTR CFSERV
REG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
REGISTRATION
Input format for registration of call forwarding services.
Registration of a call forwarding service applies to one or
more groups of basic services.

[ [
[ ENTR CFSERV : MSIN= ,CFSERV= ,BSFTNO= ,STATUS= [,RCTIM=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,NCS=] [,NFS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICE
This parameter specifies a call forwarding service to be provided or
registered or activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
Compatibilities:
- In case of activation of a provisioned
"forwarded to number" or in case of
registration the value ALLCF can only
be entered together with a "forwarded
to number".
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
BSFTNO BASIC SERVICE GROUP AND FTNO
This parameter specifies a basic service group code, a
forwarded to number (MSISDN) and the format of a
forwarded to number.
If the FTNO is already registered, only the first unit of
BSFTNO is necessary for activation.
In case of a forwarded to number in international format
the range "0"-"9" is allowed only. Furthermore "E" can
be used as replacement indicator for template subscriber
at the end of FTNO (replace with SUBSCRIBER NUMBER).
The forwarded to number in unknown format consists of up
to 15 digits in the range "0"-"9" and "A"-"E".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 6+
ENTR CFSERV
REG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: FORWARDED TO NUMBER=
1...17 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: NUMBERTYPE OF FTNO
INTNO FTNO IN INTERNATIONAL FORMAT
UNKNOWN FTNO IN UNKNOWN FORMAT
Default: INTNO
STATUS STATUS
Notes:
- In case of activation of a provisioned "forwarded to number" or
in case of registration a "forwarded to number" has to be
entered too.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
REG REGISTRATION
RCTIM NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
This parameter specifies the no reply condition timer.
Compatibilities:
- CFSERV=CFNREPLY
Notes:
- Each new provision of CFNREPLY resets the timer to
its default.
- If the no reply condition timer is changed and
CFSERV=CFD is active, then - depending on
the project - no VLR update is performed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
NCS NOTIFICATION TO CALLING SUB
This parameter specifies whether the calling subscriber is notified
or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO NOTIFICATION
NO NO NOTIFICATION
Y NOTIFICATION
YES NOTIFICATION
NFS NOTIFICATION TO FORWARDING SUB
This parameter specifies whether the forwarding subscriber is notified
or not.
Compatibilities:
- CFSERV=CFBUSY
- CFSERV=CFNREPLY
- CFSERV=ALLCF , but has only effect on CFBUSY and CFNREPLY
- CFSERV=ALLCFCON, but has only effect on CFBUSY and CFNREPLY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO NOTIFICATION
NO NO NOTIFICATION
Y NOTIFICATION
YES NOTIFICATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 7+
ENTR CFSERV
TIMER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
Input format for changing the no reply condition timer.
Prerequisites:
- Activation or registration for call forwarding on no reply.
Incompatibilities:
CFSERV=CFD

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CFSERV : MSIN= ,BSFTNO= ,RCTIM= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
BSFTNO BASIC SERVICE GROUP AND FTNO
This parameter specifies a basic service group code, a
forwarded to number (MSISDN) and the format of a
forwarded to number.
If the FTNO is already registered, only the first unit of
BSFTNO is necessary for activation.
In case of a forwarded to number in international format
the range "0"-"9" is allowed only. Furthermore "E" can
be used as replacement indicator for template subscriber
at the end of FTNO (replace with SUBSCRIBER NUMBER).
The forwarded to number in unknown format consists of up
to 15 digits in the range "0"-"9" and "A"-"E".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
RCTIM NO REPLY CONDITION TIMER
This parameter specifies the no reply condition timer.
Compatibilities:
- CFSERV=CFNREPLY
Notes:
- Each new provision of CFNREPLY resets the timer to
its default.
- If the no reply condition timer is changed and
CFSERV=CFD is active, then - depending on
the project - no VLR update is performed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFSERV- 8-
DISP CFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CALL FAILURE TREATMENT
This command prints out the entire RCF table (call failure treatment table).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CFT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CFT- 1-
ENTR CFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CALL FAILURE TREATMENT
This command can allocate or remove a table for a certain type of program.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR CFT : PRTYPE= ,CFTTAB= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRTYPE PROGRAM TYPE
This parameter specifies the user program.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8, range of decimal numbers
CFTTAB CALL FAILURE TREATMENT TABLE
This parameter specifies the call failure handling table that
defines the response to specific call failures. Its values are:
0 Initial value
1...15 Table number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CFT- 1-
DISP CFTJOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COMMAND FILE TIME JOB
This command displays the significant data for timed command file-jobs.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP CFTJOB : [JN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number. If this parameter
is omitted, all existing scheduled command file-jobs are
displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CFTJOB- 1-
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGING DATA RECORDS
This command displays EWSD charging data records, i.e. call detail
records and administrative records that are used for charging purposes
or for charging observation purposes.
The charging data records to be displayed may be stored on the following
locations:
- the EWSD CP (Central Processor) disk
- the EWSD MP (Main Processor) disk
- a tape or magneto optical disk.
Following types of charging data records exist and can be displayed:
- for charging purposes:
AMA records: To charge a PSTN subscriber or a TFS subscriber.
If feature type AMA is activated these records are
stored in the default file IA.ICAMA , otherwise if
feature type CDR is activated these records are
stored in the default file IA.ICCDR or the two files
IA.ICCDR1 and IA.ICCDR2.
INAMA records: To charge an IN service subscriber.
These records are stored in the default file
IA.ICINA.
IACAMA records: To perform inter-operator charging.
If feature type IARA is activated these records are
stored in the default file IA.ICIAR or the two files
IA.ICIAR1 and IA.ICIAR2, otherwise if feature type
CDR is activated these records are stored in the
default file IA.ICCDR or the two files IA.ICCDR1 and
IA.ICCDR2.
- for observation purposes:
MOB records: To observe charges of a PSTN/TFS subscriber.
These records are stored in the default file
IA.ICMOB.
PMOB records: To observe expensive calls (calls for which the
charges exceed a certain limit) for PSTN subscribers.
These records are stored in the default file
IA.ICPMB.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP CHAREC - AMA DISPLAY AMA RECORDS
2. DISP CHAREC - CDR DISPLAY CDR RECORDS
3. DISP CHAREC - CHN DISPLAY AMA/INA RECORDS FOR PROJ. CHINA
4. DISP CHAREC - IACAMA DISPLAY IACAMA RECORDS
5. DISP CHAREC - INAMA DISPLAY INAMA RECORDS
6. DISP CHAREC - MOB DISPLAY MOB RECORDS
7. DISP CHAREC - PMOB DISPLAY PMOB RECORDS
1. Input format
DISPLAY AMA RECORDS
This input format is used to display the AMA records.

[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [
[ [
[ [,NEWDEST=] [,ADDNO=] [,ICTGNO=] [,OGTGNO=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,FILE=] [,FILEAR=] [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 1+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
OWNERDN OWNER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the "Owner Directory Number" of the
relevant charging records :
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
The parameter must be entered with local area code and without
discriminating digits.
The "Owner Directory Number" in the charging data records can
be stored in different fields :
* In the field "Record-Owner" if this field is available.
* In the data package mentioned in the field "Record Owner Type".
The Record Owner Type refers to either:
- the data package "Calling Party Number" ,
- the data package "Redirecting Number" ,
- the data package "System Provided Number" ,
- the data package "Connected Party Number" ,
- the data package "Called Party Number" or
- the data package "Service Subscriber Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digits as stored in the data package
"Calling Party Number" of the relevant charging records :
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
The national or international prefix digits (e.g. "0" for national
and "00" for international) are never present in the data package
"Calling Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination digits
stored in the data package "New Destination"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ADDNO ADDITIONAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies one of the additional numbers
stored in the data package "Additional Numbers".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 2+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ICTGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the incoming trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OGTGNO OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the outgoing trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 3+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF END DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILEAR FILE NAME OF THE SAMAR FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the SAMAR (SAMAR = array
of SAM files which logically belong together) stored on the
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
This parameter can be used in combination with parameter FILE.
The following table gives an overview of the location where
the charging data records are searched:
FILE FILEAR SEARCH ON
- - the default file on EWSD CP disk
- x all the SAM files of the SAMAR on EWSD
MP disk
x - the indicated file on EWSD CP disk or
on tape/magneto optical disk
x x the indicated SAM file of the SAMAR on
the EWSD MP disk
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 4+
DISP CHAREC
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 5+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISPLAY CDR RECORDS
This input format is used to display the IACAMA and the AMA records
stored in the CDR file IA.ICCDR.

[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [
[ [
[ [,NEWDEST=] [,ADDNO=] [,ICTGNO=] [,OGTGNO=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,FILE=] [,FILEAR=] [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDR COMMON DATA RECORD
OWNERDN OWNER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the "Owner Directory Number" of the
relevant charging records :
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
The parameter must be entered with local area code and without
discriminating digits.
The "Owner Directory Number" in the charging data records can
be stored in different fields :
* In the field "Record-Owner" if this field is available.
* In the data package mentioned in the field "Record Owner Type".
The Record Owner Type refers to either:
- the data package "Calling Party Number" ,
- the data package "Redirecting Number" ,
- the data package "System Provided Number" ,
- the data package "Connected Party Number" ,
- the data package "Called Party Number" or
- the data package "Service Subscriber Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digits as stored in the data package
"Calling Party Number" of the relevant charging records :
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
The national or international prefix digits (e.g. "0" for national
and "00" for international) are never present in the data package
"Calling Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 6+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination digits
stored in the data package "New Destination"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ADDNO ADDITIONAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies one of the additional numbers
stored in the data package "Additional Numbers".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ICTGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the incoming trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OGTGNO OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the outgoing trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 7+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF END DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILEAR FILE NAME OF THE SAMAR FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the SAMAR (SAMAR = array
of SAM files which logically belong together) stored on the
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
This parameter can be used in combination with parameter FILE.
The following table gives an overview of the location where
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 8+
DISP CHAREC
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the charging data records are searched:
FILE FILEAR SEARCH ON
- - the default file on EWSD CP disk
- x all the SAM files of the SAMAR on EWSD
MP disk
x - the indicated file on EWSD CP disk or
on tape/magneto optical disk
x x the indicated SAM file of the SAMAR on
the EWSD MP disk
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 9+
DISP CHAREC
CHN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DISPLAY AMA/INA RECORDS FOR PROJ. CHINA
This input format is used to display the AMA/INA records
for Project China.

[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] [
[ [
[ [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK WITH AMA
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digits as stored in the data package
"Calling Party Number" of the relevant charging records :
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
The national or international prefix digits (e.g. "0" for national
and "00" for international) are never present in the data package
"Calling Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 10+
DISP CHAREC
CHN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF END DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 11+
DISP CHAREC
CHN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 12+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DISPLAY IACAMA RECORDS
This input format is used to display the IACAMA records.

[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [
[ [
[ [,NEWDEST=] [,ADDNO=] [,ICTGNO=] [,OGTGNO=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,FILE=] [,FILEAR=] [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IACAMA INTERADMIN. CHARGING VIA AMA
OWNERDN OWNER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the "Owner Directory Number" of the
relevant charging records :
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
The parameter must be entered with local area code and without
discriminating digits.
The "Owner Directory Number" in the charging data records can
be stored in different fields :
* In the field "Record-Owner" if this field is available.
* In the data package mentioned in the field "Record Owner Type".
The Record Owner Type refers to either:
- the data package "Calling Party Number" ,
- the data package "Redirecting Number" ,
- the data package "System Provided Number" ,
- the data package "Connected Party Number" ,
- the data package "Called Party Number" or
- the data package "Service Subscriber Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digits as stored in the data package
"Calling Party Number" of the relevant charging records :
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
The national or international prefix digits (e.g. "0" for national
and "00" for international) are never present in the data package
"Calling Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 13+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination digits
stored in the data package "New Destination"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ADDNO ADDITIONAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies one of the additional numbers
stored in the data package "Additional Numbers".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ICTGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the incoming trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OGTGNO OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the outgoing trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 14+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF END DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILEAR FILE NAME OF THE SAMAR FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the SAMAR (SAMAR = array
of SAM files which logically belong together) stored on the
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
This parameter can be used in combination with parameter FILE.
The following table gives an overview of the location where
the charging data records are searched:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 15+
DISP CHAREC
IACAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILE FILEAR SEARCH ON
- - the default file on EWSD CP disk
- x all the SAM files of the SAMAR on EWSD
MP disk
x - the indicated file on EWSD CP disk or
on tape/magneto optical disk
x x the indicated SAM file of the SAMAR on
the EWSD MP disk
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 16+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISPLAY INAMA RECORDS
This input format is used to display the INA records.

[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,CLI=] [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,NEWDEST=] [
[ [
[ [,ADDNO=] [,ICTGNO=] [,OGTGNO=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] [
[ [
[ [,FILEAR=] [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAMA INTELLIGENT NETWORK WITH AMA
CLI CALLING LINE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the directory number as stored in the
data package "Calling Line Id" for the relevant charging record
INAMA.
The parameter must be entered with local area code, and, depending
on the project, with or without discrimination digit.
The "Calling Line Id" data package contains the signalled calling
party number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digits as stored in the data package
"Calling Party Number" of the relevant charging records :
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
The national or international prefix digits (e.g. "0" for national
and "00" for international) are never present in the data package
"Calling Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination digits
stored in the data package "New Destination"
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 17+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ADDNO ADDITIONAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies one of the additional numbers
stored in the data package "Additional Numbers".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ICTGNO INCOMING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the incoming trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OGTGNO OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the outgoing trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 18+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF END DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILEAR FILE NAME OF THE SAMAR FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the SAMAR (SAMAR = array
of SAM files which logically belong together) stored on the
EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
This parameter can be used in combination with parameter FILE.
The following table gives an overview of the location where
the charging data records are searched:
FILE FILEAR SEARCH ON
- - the default file on EWSD CP disk
- x all the SAM files of the SAMAR on EWSD
MP disk
x - the indicated file on EWSD CP disk or
on tape/magneto optical disk
x x the indicated SAM file of the SAMAR on
the EWSD MP disk
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 19+
DISP CHAREC
INAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 20+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
DISPLAY MOB RECORDS
This input format is used to display the MOB records.

[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLGDN=] [,CLDDN=] [
[ [
[ [,OGTGNO=] [,NEWDEST=] [,ADDNO=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] [
[ [
[ [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MOB METER OBSERVATION
OWNERDN OWNER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the "Owner Directory Number" of the
relevant charging records :
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
The parameter must be entered with local area code and without
discriminating digits.
The "Owner Directory Number" in the charging data records can
be stored in different fields :
* In the field "Record-Owner" if this field is available.
* In the data package mentioned in the field "Record Owner Type".
The Record Owner Type refers to either:
- the data package "Calling Party Number" ,
- the data package "Redirecting Number" ,
- the data package "System Provided Number" ,
- the data package "Connected Party Number" ,
- the data package "Called Party Number" or
- the data package "Service Subscriber Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGDN CALLING DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digits as stored in the data package
"Calling Party Number" of the relevant charging records :
- AMA,
- INAMA,
- IACAMA,
- MOB.
The national or international prefix digits (e.g. "0" for national
and "00" for international) are never present in the data package
"Calling Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 21+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OGTGNO OUTGOING TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the outgoing trunk group of the
call for which the charging record was generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination digits
stored in the data package "New Destination"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ADDNO ADDITIONAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies one of the additional numbers
stored in the data package "Additional Numbers".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 22+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF END DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
IACAMA,
INAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: IA.ICMOB
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 23+
DISP CHAREC
MOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 24+
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
DISPLAY PMOB RECORDS
This input format is used to display the PMOB records.

[ [
[ DISP CHAREC : TYPE= [,OWNERDN=] [,CLDDN=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,FILE=] [
[ [
[ [,VSN=] [,ALL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF CHARGING RECORD
This parameter specifies the type of the charging
data record.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
OWNERDN OWNER DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the "Owner Directory Number" of the
relevant charging records :
AMA,
IACAMA,
MOB,
PMOB.
The parameter must be entered with local area code and without
discriminating digits.
The "Owner Directory Number" in the charging data records can
be stored in different fields :
* In the field "Record-Owner" if this field is available.
* In the data package mentioned in the field "Record Owner Type".
The Record Owner Type refers to either:
- the data package "Calling Party Number" ,
- the data package "Redirecting Number" ,
- the data package "System Provided Number" ,
- the data package "Connected Party Number" ,
- the data package "Called Party Number" or
- the data package "Service Subscriber Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDDN CALLED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party directory number.
This directory number can be stored either in the data package
"Partner Directory Number" or in the data package
"Called Party Number".
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 25+
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF BEGIN TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF END DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF END DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF END DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOURS OF END TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS OF END TIME=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file on tape or
magneto optical disk or the name of the file on the EWSD CP disk
or on the EWSD MP disk.
Notes:
The EWSD MP disk file name is only allowed for the record types
AMA,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 26+
DISP CHAREC
PMOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IACAMA,
INAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: IA.ICPMB
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape/magneto optical disk.
Notes:
If this parameter is not entered, the file is assumed to be on disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ALL DISPLAY ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies whether all information,
i.e. the total record content, must be displayed
or not.
N DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
NO DONT PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Y PRINT ALL INFORMATION
YES PRINT ALL INFORMATION
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CHAREC- 27-
DISP CIRPPREF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CIRCUIT POOL PREFERENCES
This command displays the circuit pool preferences:
- Standard circuit pool.
- Alternative circuit pool.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CIRPPREF ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CIRPPREF- 1-
MOD CIRPPREF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CIRCUIT POOL PREFERENCES
This command defines the STANDARD CIRCUIT POOL and the
ALTERNATIVE CIRCUIT POOL.
Initial values : SCIRPNO=POOL1,ACIRPNO=NOPOOL
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD CIRPPREF : SCIRPNO= ,ACIRPNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCIRPNO STANDARD CIRCUIT POOL NO
This parameter specifies the Standard circuit pool number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
POOL1 CIRCUIT POOL NO 1
Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL2 CIRCUIT POOL NO 2
Not supported
POOL3 CIRCUIT POOL NO 3
Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL4 CIRCUIT POOL NO 4
Not supported
POOL5 CIRCUIT POOL NO 5
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL6 CIRCUIT POOL NO 6
Not supported
POOL7 CIRCUIT POOL NO 7
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL8 CIRCUIT POOL NO 8
Not supported
POOL9 CIRCUIT POOL NO 9
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL10 CIRCUIT POOL NO 10
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL11 CIRCUIT POOL NO 11
Not supported
POOL12 CIRCUIT POOL NO 12
Not supported
POOL13 CIRCUIT POOL NO 13
Not supported
POOL14 CIRCUIT POOL NO 14
Not supported
POOL15 CIRCUIT POOL NO 15
Not supported
POOL16 CIRCUIT POOL NO 16
Not supported
POOL17 CIRCUIT POOL NO 17
Not supported
POOL18 CIRCUIT POOL NO 18
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL19 CIRCUIT POOL NO 19
Not supported
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CIRPPREF- 1+
MOD CIRPPREF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
POOL20 CIRCUIT POOL NO 20
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL21 CIRCUIT POOL NO 21
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL22 CIRCUIT POOL NO 22
Not supported
POOL23 CIRCUIT POOL NO 23
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL24 CIRCUIT POOL NO 24
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL25 CIRCUIT POOL NO 25
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL26 CIRCUIT POOL NO 26
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL27 CIRCUIT POOL NO 27
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL28 CIRCUIT POOL NO 28
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL29 CIRCUIT POOL NO 29
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL30 CIRCUIT POOL NO 30
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL31 CIRCUIT POOL NO 31
Not supported
POOL32 CIRCUIT POOL NO 32
Not supported
ACIRPNO ALTERNATIVE CIRCUIT POOL NO
This parameter specifies the Alternative circuit pool number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOPOOL NO ALTERNATIVE CIRCUIT POOL
POOL1 CIRCUIT POOL NO 1
Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL2 CIRCUIT POOL NO 2
Not supported
POOL3 CIRCUIT POOL NO 3
Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL4 CIRCUIT POOL NO 4
Not supported
POOL5 CIRCUIT POOL NO 5
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CIRPPREF- 2+
MOD CIRPPREF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
POOL6 CIRCUIT POOL NO 6
Not supported
POOL7 CIRCUIT POOL NO 7
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL8 CIRCUIT POOL NO 8
Not supported
POOL9 CIRCUIT POOL NO 9
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL10 CIRCUIT POOL NO 10
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL11 CIRCUIT POOL NO 11
Not supported
POOL12 CIRCUIT POOL NO 12
Not supported
POOL13 CIRCUIT POOL NO 13
Not supported
POOL14 CIRCUIT POOL NO 14
Not supported
POOL15 CIRCUIT POOL NO 15
Not supported
POOL16 CIRCUIT POOL NO 16
Not supported
POOL17 CIRCUIT POOL NO 17
Not supported
POOL18 CIRCUIT POOL NO 18
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL19 CIRCUIT POOL NO 19
Not supported
POOL20 CIRCUIT POOL NO 20
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL21 CIRCUIT POOL NO 21
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL22 CIRCUIT POOL NO 22
Not supported
POOL23 CIRCUIT POOL NO 23
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL24 CIRCUIT POOL NO 24
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL25 CIRCUIT POOL NO 25
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL26 CIRCUIT POOL NO 26
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
POOL27 CIRCUIT POOL NO 27
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL28 CIRCUIT POOL NO 28
Full Rate speech channel
Enhanced Full Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Full Rate speech channel
Full Rate data channel (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
Half Rate speech channel
Adaptative Multi-rate Half Rate speech channel
Half Rate data channel (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CIRPPREF- 3+
MOD CIRPPREF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
POOL29 CIRCUIT POOL NO 29
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL30 CIRCUIT POOL NO 30
Not allowed as standard or alternative pool
POOL31 CIRCUIT POOL NO 31
Not supported
POOL32 CIRCUIT POOL NO 32
Not supported
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CIRPPREF- 4-
CAN CIRPREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CIRCUIT POOL RELATION
This command cancels a circuit pool characteristic related to a BSSAP trunk
group.
Notes:
- The circuit pool characteristic related to the specified BSSAP trunk group
will be set to the default value NOPOOL.
Prerequisites:
- All BSSAP trunk groups assigned to the same BSC destination as the specified
BSSAP trunk group must have related circuit pool characteristic different from
the default value NOPOOL.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CIRPREL : TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CIRPREL- 1-
DISP CIRPREL
BSCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CIRCUIT POOL RELATION
This command displays data of created circuit pool relation between a BSSAP
trunk group and a circuit pool number.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP CIRPREL - BSCAREA BSC AREA
2. DISP CIRPREL - CIRPNO CIRCUIT POOL NUMBER
3. DISP CIRPREL - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
BSC AREA
This input format displays all BSSAP trunk groups, together with the
related circuit pool number, that are assigned to the specified
base station controller signaling point code.
Notes:
- If a BSSAP trunk group is not related to the circuit pool number,
the default value NOPOOL will be displayed.

[ [
[ DISP CIRPREL : BSCSPC= ,NETIND= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BSCSPC BASE STATION CONTROLLER SPC
BSCSPC a: = 1..15
b: = 1..7
c: = 1..15
d: = 1..7
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CIRPREL- 1+
DISP CIRPREL
CIRPNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CIRCUIT POOL NUMBER
This input format displays all BSSAP trunk groups related to the specified
circuit pool number, together with the base station controller signaling
point code and network indicator.

[ [
[ DISP CIRPREL : CIRPNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CIRPNO CIRCUIT POOL NUMBER
This parameter specifies a group of circuits supporting the same
channel types.
Notes:
- Some of the circuit pools are not allowed, because they are reserved
for future usage.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOPOOL NO CIRCUIT POOL ASSIGNMENT
POOL1 CIRCUIT POOL NO 1
FR speech version 1
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL10 CIRCUIT POOL NO 10
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL11 CIRCUIT POOL NO 11
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL12 CIRCUIT POOL NO 12
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL13 CIRCUIT POOL NO 13
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL14 CIRCUIT POOL NO 14
HSCSD max. 6*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL15 CIRCUIT POOL NO 15
FR data (14.5 kbit/s)
POOL16 CIRCUIT POOL NO 16
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5 kbit/s)
POOL17 CIRCUIT POOL NO 17
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5 kbit/s)
POOL18 CIRCUIT POOL NO 18
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL19 CIRCUIT POOL NO 19
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL2 CIRCUIT POOL NO 2
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL20 CIRCUIT POOL NO 20
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL21 CIRCUIT POOL NO 21
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CIRPREL- 2+
DISP CIRPREL
CIRPNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL22 CIRCUIT POOL NO 22
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL23 CIRCUIT POOL NO 23
FR speech version 3
HR speech version 3
POOL24 CIRCUIT POOL NO 24
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 3
POOL25 CIRCUIT POOL NO 25
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 3
POOL26 CIRCUIT POOL NO 26
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 3
POOL27 CIRCUIT POOL NO 27
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL28 CIRCUIT POOL NO 28
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL29 CIRCUIT POOL NO 29
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL3 CIRCUIT POOL NO 3
FR speech version 1
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL30 CIRCUIT POOL NO 30
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL31 CIRCUIT POOL NO 31
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CIRPREL- 3+
DISP CIRPREL
CIRPNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL32 CIRCUIT POOL NO 32
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL4 CIRCUIT POOL NO 4
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL5 CIRCUIT POOL NO 5
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL6 CIRCUIT POOL NO 6
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL7 CIRCUIT POOL NO 7
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL8 CIRCUIT POOL NO 8
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL9 CIRCUIT POOL NO 9
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CIRPREL- 4+
DISP CIRPREL
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format displays information of a specified BSSAP trunk group.
Notes:
- If a BSSAP trunk group is not related to the circuit pool number,
the default value NOPOOL will be displayed.

[ [
[ DISP CIRPREL : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CIRPREL- 5-
ENTR CIRPREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CIRCUIT POOL RELATION
This command enters a circuit pool characteristic related to a BSSAP trunk
group.
Prerequisites:
- The BSSAP trunk group must be created (CR TGRP).
- The BSSAP trunk group must be assigned to a BSC destination
(ENTR C7TGREL).
- At least one BSSAP trunk group must have a circuit pool characteristic equal
to the standard pool or equal to the alternative pool, in order not to
interrupt the traffic to the BSC destination. Standard/alternative pool can be
displayed by DISP CIRPPREF.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CIRPREL : TGNO= ,CIRPNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CIRPNO CIRCUIT POOL NUMBER
This parameter specifies a group of circuits supporting the same
channel types.
Notes:
- Each CIRPNO is allowed only once per BSC destination.
- Some of the circuit pools are not allowed, because they are reserved
for future usage.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
POOL1 CIRCUIT POOL NO 1
FR speech version 1
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL2 CIRCUIT POOL NO 2
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL3 CIRCUIT POOL NO 3
FR speech version 1
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL4 CIRCUIT POOL NO 4
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL5 CIRCUIT POOL NO 5
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL6 CIRCUIT POOL NO 6
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL7 CIRCUIT POOL NO 7
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CIRPREL- 1+
ENTR CIRPREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL8 CIRCUIT POOL NO 8
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL9 CIRCUIT POOL NO 9
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL10 CIRCUIT POOL NO 10
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL11 CIRCUIT POOL NO 11
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL12 CIRCUIT POOL NO 12
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL13 CIRCUIT POOL NO 13
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL14 CIRCUIT POOL NO 14
HSCSD max. 6*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL15 CIRCUIT POOL NO 15
FR data (14.5 kbit/s)
POOL16 CIRCUIT POOL NO 16
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5 kbit/s)
POOL17 CIRCUIT POOL NO 17
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5 kbit/s)
POOL18 CIRCUIT POOL NO 18
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL19 CIRCUIT POOL NO 19
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL20 CIRCUIT POOL NO 20
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL21 CIRCUIT POOL NO 21
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL22 CIRCUIT POOL NO 22
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL23 CIRCUIT POOL NO 23
FR speech version 3
HR speech version 3
POOL24 CIRCUIT POOL NO 24
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 3
POOL25 CIRCUIT POOL NO 25
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CIRPREL- 2+
ENTR CIRPREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HR speech version 3
POOL26 CIRCUIT POOL NO 26
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 3
POOL27 CIRCUIT POOL NO 27
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL28 CIRCUIT POOL NO 28
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
POOL29 CIRCUIT POOL NO 29
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL30 CIRCUIT POOL NO 30
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 2*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL31 CIRCUIT POOL NO 31
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (12, 6 kbit/s)
POOL32 CIRCUIT POOL NO 32
FR speech version 1
FR speech version 2
FR speech version 3
FR data (14.5, 12, 6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HR speech version 1
HR speech version 3
HR data (6, 3.6 kbit/s)
HSCSD max. 4*FR data (14.5, 12, 6 kbit/s)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CIRPREL- 3-
DISP CLKREF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Clock Reference
This task displays the actual ]CLK reference].
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CLKREF ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CLKREF- 1-
CAN CLKSRC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Clock Source
This task deletes the CLK src..
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CLKSRC : Priority= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Priority
This parameter is the number of an existing ]CLK src.].
Allowed values are a range of 1...10 of decimal numbers.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CLKSRC- 1-
CR CLKSRC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Clock Source
This task creates a ]CLK src.]. It can be ]Line timed] with input parameters
of ]LIC] and ]LIC port] or External timed timed with input parameters
ACCG and ACCG port.
Prerequisites:
- If it is Line timed then a LIC with a LIC port
must exist and the AMX connected directly to the LIC must
have a Line sync. connection.
- If there is Protection type then the redundant LIC must also have
a Line sync. connection.
- If it is External timed the ACCG must exist.
- At most 2 Line timed and 2 External timed
CLK src.s can be created.
- The Quality of a CLK src. must not be set to a value less than the
minimum required clock Quality.
The value 1 is the highest Quality.
Input format

[ [
[ CR CLKSRC : Priority= ,Quality= [,LIC=] [,LIC port=] [,ACCG=] [
[ [
[ [,ACCG port=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Priority
This parameter specifies the Priority of the ]CLK src..
Allowed values are a range of 1...10 of decimal numbers.
Quality
This parameter describes the Quality of the ]CLK src.].
Allowed values are a range of 1...4 of decimal numbers.
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing LIC if the CLK src.
is Line timed.
Allowed values are a range of 1...32767 of decimal numbers.
LIC port
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC port] of the ]LIC] if
the CLK src. is Line timed.
Allowed values are a range of 1...8 of decimal numbers.
ACCG
This parameter is the number of an existing ACCG, if the CLK src. is
External timed.
Allowed values are a range of 1...64 of decimal numbers.
ACCG port
This parameter is the number of an existing ACCG port of the ACCG, if
the CLK src. is External timed.
Allowed values are 0, 1 of decimal numbers.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CLKSRC- 1-
DISP CLKSRC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Clock Source
This task displays one or all ]CLK src.s].
If no value is specified, all ]CLK src.s] are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CLKSRC : [Priority=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Priority
This parameter is the number of an existing ]CLK src.].
Allowed values are a range of 1...10 of decimal numbers.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CLKSRC- 1-
SKIP CMD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKIP COMMAND
This command skips a command sequence which is dependent on the
control switches. They are set with ON or OFF .
The command labeled with LABEL = <NAME> is processed next.
This command is only legal in a command file, and cannot be entered
from the terminal.
Input format

[ [
[ SKIP CMD : LABEL= [,ON=] [,OFF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LABEL LABEL OF TARGET COMMAND
This parameter identifies the label of the target command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ON SWITCH ON
This parameter lists the control switches which must be set to
ON for the command to be executed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...32, range of decimal numbers
OFF SWITCH OFF
This parameter lists the control switches which must be set to
OFF for the command to be executed.
Notes:
- OFF overrides ON.
- 32 is the error switch.
- Command SET CFOPT sets the switches (1...16) for use in the
command file.
- Only forward skips are legal.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...32, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SKIP CMD- 1-
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXECUTE COMMAND FILE
This command starts the execution of a command file. The file can
execute on a specified date and/or time, but will execute immediately
if no future time or date is specified. Command files can also be
scheduled to execute periodically.
Timer jobs with an insecure start time are accepted, but not started,
either at the specified start time or retrospectively.
At 23.50 the time administration sets the weekday and the weekday
category.
Timer jobs which are started at 23.50 and 23.55 are only executed at
the desired time if the operator takes the characteristics of the time
administration into consideration when he enters a timer job (e.g.
non-recurring timer jobs must be predated).
Commands may also exist in the command file through which a nested call
of command files is possible. The nesting depth for command files is
three. After the internal command file finishes processing, the
processing of the external file is continued.
Notes:
- In the case of tape / optical disk files, only one file can be open
at a time, i.e., tape / optical disk files may not be nested in one
another, and during a COFIP run, one tape / optical disk file can be
accessed from a disk file and must be processed and closed before a
second tape / optical disk file may be opened. Tape / optical disk
files must have ASCII text format with variable record size.
- It is possible to read MML commands from the O&M terminal. The input
of an asterisk (*) for the file name causes the display of a
number sign (#) on the O&M terminal, which marks the input
request of an MML command. This feature allows the execution of a
command file which is situated on a PC if the PC is capable of
reading MML commands from a PC file. Nested files are not allowed in
this case.
It is possible to store 120 timer jobs but only 10 timer jobs can be
started at the same time. Timer jobs are illegal in command files.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ EXEC CMDFILE : FILE= [,STEP=] [,VSN=] [,CHOL=] [,TIME= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PER= [,WDCAT=]]] [,DATE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the command file name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STEP STEP COMMAND
This parameter specifies that, after errors have occurred in the
execution of a command, a branch is made to the next STEP command
or if this next STEP command does not exist, a branch is made to
the end of the file.
If the parameter is omitted, the STEP command will be ignored.
N NO
NO NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXEC CMDFILE- 1+
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y YES
YES YES
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of a
tape / optical disk or disk. It is mandatory for tape /
optical disk files.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CHOL CHECK ONLY
This parameter checks MML commands for syntax errors.
The only command which is executed is EXEC CMDFILE.
It is rejected if the commands are located in nested command
files. For nested command files only the parameter value of the
outermost file is valid.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies when the command file is to be executed.
Immediate start is the default. This parameter is illegal in
nested command files.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <Hour>
b: MINUTE=
0,5,10...55, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <Minutes>
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter indicates a periodic timer job. Workdays, international
half holidays, international full holidays, national holidays, half
weekend, full weekend, all the days of the week, or a non-periodic
job can be identified. This parameter is illegal in nested command
files.
Notes:
- Weekdays MO, TU, ... SU: execution on the respective
weekday (irrespective of the entered category, i.e. SU
means: execution on every Sunday)
- The combination of several weekdays with & corresponds to a
logical OR, i.e. execution on all the days entered
- Categories WO, EH, EF, HO, HH, HN: execution
in the respective category
- The combination of several categories with & corresponds to
a logical OR, i.e. execution in all categories specified
- The combination of category and weekday, in PER is not
possible. However it is possible to enter a weekday in
PER and a category in WDCAT. This corresponds to a
logical AND, i.e. both parameters must be entered
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXEC CMDFILE- 2+
EXEC CMDFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NOT A PERIODIC JOB
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAYS
HH HOLIDAY HALF (INTERNATIONAL)
HO HOLIDAY FULL (INTERNATIONAL)
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
YES EVERY DAY OF THE WEEK
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday category, which must be
valid at job execution time. This parameter is illegal in nested
command files.
Compatibilities:
- WDCAT is only allowed if parameter PER is not NO.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF (INTERNATIONAL)
HO HOLIDAY FULL (INTERNATIONAL)
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date when command processing is to
start. The current date is the default. This parameter is illegal
in nested command files.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <Year>
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <Month>
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <Day>
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXEC CMDFILE- 3-
CONF CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE COMMON MEMORY
This command configures a common memory.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to ACT is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF CMY : [CMY=] ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
This parameter specifies the common memory to be configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis before configuration to ACT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF CMY- 1-
DIAG CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE COMMON MEMORY
This command initiates a diagnosis for a common memory. The diagnosis
includes a BCMY interface test. Repeated diagnosis is not possible.
Prerequisites:
- The common memory must be MBL.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG CMY : [CMY=] [,SUP=] [,ONEBIT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
ONEBIT ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
NO NO ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
Y ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
YES ONE BIT FAILURE TREATMENT
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG CMY- 1-
TEST CMY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST COMMON MEMORY
This command tests a common memory.
Prerequisites:
- Both CMYs must be ACT.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST CMY : [CMY=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMY COMMON MEMORY
This parameter specifies the common memory to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, both CMYs are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST CMY- 1-
LOAD CMYFW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LOAD CMY FIRMWARE
This command loads the firmware for the common memory.
The firmware is loaded from file FW.CMYE to the
APS-part image of the firmware which is linked in the
APS. This APS part is used to update the FEPROM of the common
memory.
Notes:
- The flash update of the FEPROM is executed when the CMY is
configured to active.
- The firmware versions of APS part and base part can be
displayed with the DISP SSP command.
- The command is only executed on the CP113E.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ LOAD CMYFW : FWVAR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FWVAR FIRMWARE VARIANT
This parameter specifies the firmware variant to be loaded.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 LOAD CMYFW- 1-
DMP CNIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CCNC MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of CCNC
platforms or of the corresponding load library on system disk.
If UNIT = DISK is entered, the specified address range to be
dumped will be read from load library.
To dump contents of a platforms memory, select the appropriate
platform using parameter PLF.
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [PLF= [ [
[ DMP CNIMDMP : UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
SIPA SIGNALING PERIPHERY ADAPTER
SILTC SIGNALING LINK TERMINAL CTRL
SILT SIGNALING LINK TERMINAL
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
This parameter specifies the system unit.
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the CCNC loadlib
at the specified address range will be performed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISK REQUEST READ FROM DISK
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter defines the address (range) of the memory
content to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either an address range is entered with ADDR,
or, if only the start address is given, you have to specify
the length of the dump using parameter LENGTH.
Following inputs are possible:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CNIMDMP- 1+
DMP CNIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e load
module name (can be repeated or not) and module name are
entered (8 characters each), plus a distance within the
module
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="LOADNAME.LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
or rather:
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter "H" and a
single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name (i.e.
the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
- Address ranges must be specified by entering the start address
and the upper limit, separated by "&&".
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The load module name has to be entered with the start address only
and must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
The upper limit of an address range may be specified in
relation to the lower limit in the following way:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"MODULE0C+HCF"
The second address is interpreted as number of bytes to be dumped if
it begins with the character plus ("+").
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label is
preceded by the letter "L" and a single quote:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C
+MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="LOADNAME.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="LOADNAME+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
Up to 5 different address ranges may be entered, concatenated by "&".
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
This parameter provides the length of a single chained
element of a linked list, or, in case of a linear dump,
the number of bytes which shall be dumped if only a start
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CNIMDMP- 2+
DMP CNIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
address is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the format type of the output.
If HEX is chosen an output in hexadecimal form will be
produced, in case of ASCII the output will contain ASCII
characters additionally to the hex output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HEX HEXADECIMAL OUTPUT
SYMBOL SYMBOLIC OUTPUT
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CNIMDMP- 3-
ACT CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action AM (Activate in Memory) in
parallel on all respective platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT CNPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CNPRPCH- 1-
CAN CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Permanent
Patches on disk implicitly deactivating them in the memory on all
platforms in operation. Successful execution of the command
results in execution of the atomic actions DUD
(Deupdate on Disk), DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CD (Cancel
on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CNPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CNPRPCH- 1-
DACT CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic actions DUD (Deupdate on Disk) and
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) in parallel on all respective
platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT CNPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CNPRPCH- 1-
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on disk and patch states concerning
Permanent Patches for all platform(s) in operation specified
by parameter PLF.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
If ID = X is entered, parameter LIB is also required.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ID= [ [
[ DISP CNPRPCH : ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified load module and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname" or
ID="loadname.*" or
ID="loadname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from load module
begin or symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="loadname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="loadname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"loadname.modname+offset+distance", or
"loadname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 1+
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
loadname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem loadname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of load module or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 2+
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 3+
DISP CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOTENTER NEITHER ENTERING NOR ENTERED
HIT HIT
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
NOTUPD OTHER THAN UPDATED
PARTACT PARTLY ACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
UPD UPDATED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNPRPCH- 4-
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Permanent Patch into the
patch administration on disk. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic action ED (Enter on
Disk).
With each ENTR CNPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatch types can be entered:
- Insert Rucksack Subpatches using parameter INSRADDR
- Replace Subpatches using parameter REPADDR
- Insert Procedure Subpatches using parameter INSPREF
- Insert Variable Subpatches using parameter INSVREF
The subpatch types can be entered in the form of subpatches
belonging to a specified Patch ID. Under one specified Patch ID
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR CNPRPCH command is
necessary.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO.
All Subpatches with the exception of Insert Variable can be
entered in subpatch parts for each part using an individual
ENTR CNPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Procedure Subpatches are referred to the same patch address.
The concatenation of those subpatch parts is supported by
means of parameter SUBPPART.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,INSRADDR=[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CNPRPCH : ID= ,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= [
[ [,INSVREF= [ [
[ [,SUBPCHNO=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
subpatch part is entered for a certain patch the identifier
must be identical.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSRADDR INSERT RUCKSACK SUBPATCH ADDR.
This parameter provides the insert rucksack subpatch
address. The address format is an interval within the
module boundaries in the form of begin address and end
address (linked by &&) whereby the latter may be given as a
distance relative to the begin address. At the begin address
the instruction is replaced by a branch instruction for jumping
to the respective rucksack. The end address serves as
continuation address from which the program will continue
after the rucksack code has been executed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 1+
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The old instruction (6 Byte), overwritten by the branch
instruction, is at users own risk to add to the rucksack
or not.
An address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from load module begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="loadname.modname.symbol+distance" or
INSRADDR="offset+distance" or
INSRADDR="label+distance",
&&"loadname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"label+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
loadname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem loadname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the load module denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address, where address can
be specified in the same way as described for the first part
of INSRADDR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSPREF INSERT PROCED. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert procedure subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert procedure.
The inserted procedure is only visible within the defining
patch. The number <n> serves to address the inserted
procedure within other subpatches of the defining patch.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSVREF INSERT VARIAB. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert variable subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert variable and the length of the variable in bytes.
The inserted variable is only visible within the defining
patch.
e.g.: INSVREF="IV5"-50
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: "INSERT VARIABLE" SUBPATCH REFERENCE=
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 2+
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit serves to address the inserted variable
within other subpatches of the defining patch.
b: LENGTH OF INSERT VARIABLE IN BYTES=
1...4096, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the length of the variable to be
declared.
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR CNPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20, range of decimal numbers
SUBPPART ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART
This parameter characterizes a part of a subpatch. A subpatch
of a Permanent Patch may, for some reason, have more than one
part in the case of Insert Rucksack Subpatch, Permanent
Replace Subpatch, or Insert Procedure Subpatch.
e.g.: SUBPPART="partcounter-lastsign"
The partcounter denotes the subpatch part sequence number
and serves as concatenation controller.
The lastsign denotes either the last or not last part of a
subpatch.
If SUBPPART is omitted, e.g., typical proceeding in case
of a short subpatch consisting of only one part, the default
value 1-LAST is assumed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART TO BE ENTERED=
1...999, range of decimal numbers
This unit denotes the subpatch part sequence number.
b: INDICATOR THAT LAST PART OF SUBPATCH IS ENTERED
NOTLAST NOT LAST SUBPATCH PART
LAST LAST SUBPATCH PART
This unit denotes either last or not last part.
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
Must not be used for Insert Variable or Insert Procedure
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 3+
ENTR CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CNPRPCH- 4-
UPD CNPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE CCNC PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can update one or more Permanent
Patches on disk, whereby they are implicitly activated in
memory on all active platforms. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic actions
AM (Activate in Memory) and UD (Update on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ UPD CNPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 UPD CNPRPCH- 1-
ACT CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
AM (Activate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CNTRPCH- 1-
CAN CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform by implicitly
deactivating them in the memory on this platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution of
the atomic actions DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CM (Cancel
in Memory) on the respective platform in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CNTRPCH- 1-
DACT CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CNTRPCH- 1-
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on the individual platform and patch
states concerning Transient Patches for a specified platform in
operation.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
If ID = X is entered, parameter LIB is also required.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,ID= [ [
[ DISP CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified load module and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname" or
ID="loadname.*" or
ID="loadname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 1+
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from load module
begin or symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="loadname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="loadname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"loadname.modname+offset+distance", or
"loadname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
loadname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem loadname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of load module or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 2+
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 3+
DISP CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNTRPCH- 4-
ENTR CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CCNC TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Transient Patch into the
patch administration on a platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action EM (Enter into Memory) on the
respective platform in operation.
With each ENTR CNTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
Subpatch can be entered by using parameter REPADDR.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO. For each subpatch of a patch a new
ENTR CNTRPCH command is necessary.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CNTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CCNC platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
CPI CP INTERFACE OF CCNC
SIMP SIGNALING MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: PROCESSOR NUMBER=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the processor number.
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
load module name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
entered for a certain patch the identifier must be
identical.
e.g.: ID="loadname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address.
e.g.: REPADDR="loadname.modname.symbol+distance" or
REPADDR="offset+distance" or
REPADDR="label+distance",
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CNTRPCH- 1+
ENTR CNTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
loadname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem loadname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the load module denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR CNTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7, range of decimal numbers
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CNTRPCH- 2-
CAN CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL COUNTRY CODE
This command cancels one country code from country code table.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CNTRYCOD : CC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CC COUNTRY CODE
This parameter determines the country code to be canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CNTRYCOD- 1-
DISP CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY COUNTRY CODE
This command displays:
- the country code,
- the country name,
- whether or not the country code is belonging
to this exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CNTRYCOD ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CNTRYCOD- 1-
ENTR CNTRYCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER COUNTRY CODE
This command enters the country code data.
It determines:
- the country code,
- the name of the dependend country,
- whether the entered country code is the country code
belonging to this exchange.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CNTRYCOD : CC= ,CNTRY= [,OWNCC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CC COUNTRY CODE
This parameter determines the country code.
Notes:
- Up to 1000 country codes can be set up in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
CNTRY COUNTRY
This parameter specifies the country name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OWNCC OWN COUNTRY CODE
This parameter specifies whether or not the entered country code
is the country code belonging to this exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES OWN COUNTRY CODE
NO NOT OWN COUNTRY CODE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CNTRYCOD- 1-
REP CODEFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Repair Code File on MP
This task repairs a Code file of the
loaded, disabled Generation on the
system disk of the MP. If the loaded
Generation is corrupted due to a
defective Code file there is the
possibility to repair this Generation by
a restore of a single Code file from
a fallback Generation on the system disk
or an archive Generation on the
magneto-optical disk device (MOD).
The current corrupted Code file is
deleted and replaced by the file which is restored.
The system runs in diskless operation mode because of the
disabled loaded Generation; therefore a
data snapshot into the loaded Generation
is performed, which ends the diskless operation.
Notes:
- The task is possible only if the loaded
Generation is defective and the
Operational state attribute equals Disabled.
- This is a long-running task. The NE issues following
event reports:
Data Snapshot Report,
begin-, progress- and end event reports
Input format

[ [
[ REP CODEFILE : Device Name= ,Code generation= ,Code file= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device Name
This parameter specifies the source of
the code generation, which is either
system disk or magneto-optical disk
device.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Code generation
This parameter specifies the name of
Generation which is
the source of the
Code file to be
copied.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
Code file
This parameter specifies the name of
the Code file to
be copied.
Input format: 1...30 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REP CODEFILE- 1+
REP CODEFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REP CODEFILE- 2-
DISP CONFL
CONFDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LARGE CONFERENCE
This command displays the conference data for
large conferences.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP CONFL - CONFDATA CONFERENCE DATA FORMAT
2. DISP CONFL - MAXDATA MAXIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
1. Input format
CONFERENCE DATA FORMAT
This input format displays the conference IDs,
and the port specific data for large conferences.

[ [
[ DISP CONFL : FORMAT= ,LTG= [,COU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT MASK
This parameter specifies the output format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONFLST CONFERENCE ID LIST
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the conference unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONFL- 1+
DISP CONFL
MAXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MAXIMAL NUMBER FORMAT
This input format is used to display all existing values
of the max. no. of conferees for a large conference,
originated by an analog/ISDN-subscriber or by an
OSS-operator.

[ [
[ DISP CONFL : FORMAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT MASK
This parameter specifies the output format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MAXNUM MAXIMAL NUMBERS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONFL- 2-
MOD CONFL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LARGE CONFERENCE
This command modifies the max. no.
of conferees in a large conference.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD CONFL : <MAXSUB= ,MAXOSS= ,DEFSUB=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MAXSUB MAX. NO. OF SUB. CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the max. no. of conference
subscribers for a large conference originated by an
analog or ISDN-subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...32, range of decimal numbers
MAXOSS MAX. NO. OF OSS CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the max. no. of conference
subscribers for a large conference originated by an
OSS-operator.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...32, range of decimal numbers
DEFSUB DEFAULT NO. OF SUB. CONFEREES
This parameter specifies the default value of the max.
no. of conferees for a large conference originated by
an ISDN-subscriber, in case of no value is given for
this no. by the subscriber.
Notes :
- The value of this parameter should not exceed
the value of MAXSUB-parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...32, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONFL- 1-
CAN CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CONFERENCE
This command cancels the 32 conference ports belonging to a conference
unit (CONFERENCE UNIT).
Prerequisites :
- The conference unit must be in safeguarding status planned.
- None of the CONFERENCE UNIT conference circuits
is allocated to a telephone meeting group.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CONFRNC : LTG= ,COU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
This parameter specifies the number of the conference unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CONFRNC- 1-
CR CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CONFERENCE
This command creates the 32 conference ports belonging to a conference unit
(CONFERENCE UNIT) for a specified service feature application.
Prerequisites :
- The LTU must have previously been created with the appropriate type for
conference units.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ CR CONFRNC : LTG= ,COU= ,COUTYP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
This parameter specifies the number of the conference unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
The application of this CONFERENCE UNIT is the
service feature large conference.
MEETME MEET ME
The service feature meet me is not
implemented in this version and is
not usable for CONFERENCE UNIT!
PHONMEET TELEPHONE MEETING
The application of this CONFERENCE UNIT is the
service feature telephone meeting.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CONFRNC- 1-
DISP CONFRNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONFERENCE
This command displays the application of one or all CONFERENCE UNITs
within a specified range (interval) of LTGs.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CONFRNC : LTG= [,COU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
This parameter specifies the number of the conference unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONFRNC- 1-
DISP CONN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONNECTIONS
This command displays the port address, processor number, speech
channel, and, if possible, the directory number or the trunk group
number and line number of ports seized by a call in progress.
The display is a snapshot of the situation at the time of the command.
The scope of data displayed can be specified by equipment number,
directory number or trunk group.
If there are several local networks a subscriber in a specific
local network can be specified.
Notes:
- The command only displays complete data for connections which are
occupying two channel registers.
Therefore, the output mask displays either NO MORE DATA or a
series of stars (*) in the SIDE column for connections to recorded
announcements, for incomplete connections or for SULIM connections.
Recorded announcements can be displayed by the command
DISP LISTTOAN.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP CONN - DN DN FOR ANALOG OR ISDN SUBSCRIBER
2. DISP CONN - DNPBX DN FOR ANY PBX LINE
3. DISP CONN - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
4. DISP CONN - LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
5. DISP CONN - TGNO TGNO FOR TRUNK GROUP OR TRUNK
1. Input format
DN FOR ANALOG OR ISDN SUBSCRIBER

[ [
[ DISP CONN : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber
or PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONN- 1+
DISP CONN
DNPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN FOR ANY PBX LINE

[ [
[ DISP CONN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= ,OPMODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber
or PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or
trunk group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
OPMODE OPERATION MODE
This parameter specifies a subset of PBX lines, referring to the
operation mode of these lines.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW HUNT GROUP: ANALOG BOTHWAY
[AIC [ HUNT GROUP: ANALOG INCOMING
[AOG [ HUNT GROUP: ANALOG OUTGOING
[IBW [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN BOTHWAY
[IBW1TR6 [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6
[IIC [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN INCOMING
[IIC1TR6 [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN INCOMING 1TR6
[IOG [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN OUTGOING
[IOG1TR6 [ HUNT GROUP: ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6
!MBW - HUNT GROUP: MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONN- 2+
DISP CONN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER

[ [
[ DISP CONN : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter defines the equipment number.
Notes:
- The following port qualifications are allowed:
LTG: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific port
EQN = a-b-X all ports of an LTG
EQN = a-b-c all ports of an LTU
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific port in each LTU
DLU: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific DLU port
EQN = a-b-X all DLU ports of a shelf
EQN = a-b-c all DLU ports of a module
EQN = a-b-X-d one specific DLU port in each module
V5IF: EQN = a-b-c-d one specific V5IF port
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c[-d]
a: TSG / DLU OR V5IF NUMBER=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: a TSG number in the range 0...7
For DLU port: a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V5IF port: a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
b: LTG / SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: an LTG number in the range 1...63
For DLU port: a shelf in the range 0...7
For V5IF port: 0
c: LTU / MODULE OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: an LTU number in the range 0...7
For DLU port: a module number in the range 0...15
For V51IF port: 0
For V52IF port: a V52IF port number in the range 0...20
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: CHANNEL / CIRCUIT OR V5IF PORT NUMBER=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
For LTG port: a channel number in the range 0...31
For DLU port: a circuit number in the range 0...7 for DLU8
0...15 for DLU16
0...31 for DLUG
For V51IF port: a V51IF port number in the range 0...31
For V52IF port: a V52IF port number in the range 0...99
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONN- 3+
DISP CONN
LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
LINE TRUNK GROUP

[ [
[ DISP CONN : LTG= [,LC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNG GROUP
This parameter specifies the line trunk group of the set of objects to
be traced.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
LTGSET : 0..31
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND
and upper ones)
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
LTG : 1..63
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the line connection of a LTG.
Notes:
- The input of this parameter is only valid in combination
with the LTG parameter.
- The following input is allowed:
LC = X
LC = a
LC = a-b
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTU NO.OF A LTG=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
LTU : 0..7
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL OF A LTG PORT=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Channel : 0..31
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONN- 4+
DISP CONN
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TGNO FOR TRUNK GROUP OR TRUNK

[ [
[ [
[ [[,LNO=[[ [
[ DISP CONN : TGNO= [,CIC=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number in a PBX group or
trunk group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code of CCS7 lines.
Prerequisites:
- Input of a trunk group specified by the parameter TGNO
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PCM LINK NUMBER=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
For DIU 30 the input 0...511 is possible.
For DIU 24 the input 0...681 is possible.
b: CHANNEL NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
For DIU 30 the input 0...31 is possible.
For DIU 24 the input 0...23 is possible.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONN- 5-
REL CONN
DNPATH1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CONNECTION
This command sends an appropriate message to the CP call
processing programs for connections to ordinary subscribers and
to the relevant LTGs for connections to ISDN PA.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. REL CONN - DNPATH1 RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. REL CONN - DNPATH2 RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
3. REL CONN - EQNPATH RELEASE BY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
4. REL CONN - LTGPATH RELEASE BY LINE TRUNK GROUP
5. REL CONN - TGNOPA RELEASE BY TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This input format should be used if there is only
one OPMODE for each LNO.

[ [
[ REL CONN : DN= [,LAC=] [,LNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber, an
analog or ISDN PBX line (pilot DN or line service number) or test
phone control.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter must be specified if several local area codes
have been created within an exchange. If there is only one
local area code for each exchange, this parameter need not
be specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of a trunk in a trunk group
or a line of an analog or ISDN PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REL CONN- 1+
REL CONN
DNPATH2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
RELEASE BY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This input format should be used if there are
several OPMODE for each LNO.

[ [
[ REL CONN : DN= [,LAC=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of a subscriber, an
analog or ISDN PBX line (pilot DN or line service number) or test
phone control.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter must be specified if several local area codes
have been created within an exchange. If there is only one
local area code for each exchange, this parameter need not
be specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of a trunk in a trunk group
or a line of an analog or ISDN PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
OPMODE OPERATION MODE
The operating mode must be specified if the PBX is created with two or
more operating modes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
DEF DEFAULT VALUE (NOT INPUT)
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING EDSS1 PROTOCOL
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REL CONN- 2+
REL CONN
EQNPATH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RELEASE BY EQUIPMENT NUMBER

[ [
[ REL CONN : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: TIME STAGE GROUP / DIGITAL LINE UNIT/V5 INTERFACE=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP / SHELF NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT / MODULE NUMBE=
0...96, range of decimal numbers
d: CHANNEL NUMBER / CIRCUIT NUMBER/V5IF PORT NUMBER=
0...96, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REL CONN- 3+
REL CONN
LTGPATH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
RELEASE BY LINE TRUNK GROUP

[ [
[ REL CONN : LTG= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
When LTG and LC are entered, a check is made as
to whether the corresponding connection has been set up
and the specified connection group is type A. Tasks
executed by the call processing programs cannot be
monitored.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TIME STAGE GROUP=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CHANNEL
The line circuit number must be entered in connection with the
LTG number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REL CONN- 4+
REL CONN
TGNOPA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
RELEASE BY TRUNK GROUP NUMBER

[ [
[ [
[ [,CIC=[ [
[ REL CONN : TGNO= ,LNO= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number of a trunk group or a
recorded announcement group. It must be input in connection with LNO
or CIC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CIC CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE
This parameter specifies the circuit identification code for CCS7
trunks.
CIC can only be input in conjunction with TGNO.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
0...681, range of decimal numbers
b: CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of a trunk in a trunk group
or a line of an analog or ISDN PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16383, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REL CONN- 5-
ACT CONNTRAC
IM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CONNECTION TRACE
This command activates the connection trace facility of call processing.
The tracer will stay active until
.It is deactivated by DACT CONNTRAC
.The tracebuffer on CP is completely filled and MODE=SEQU was
entered
.If the parameter TDUR was entered and the trace duration timer
has expired
.If the parameter EEVENT was entered and one of the trigger
event has occured
.If a recovery with a level greater than the level of the parameter
RECLEV occures.
The tracebuffer is ODAGEN expandable with command MOD DBSIZE.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is a test command only permitted for use by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel for NM-test purposes.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT CONNTRAC - IM IMMEDIATELY
2. ACT CONNTRAC - SDEL START DELAY
3. ACT CONNTRAC - SEVENT START EVENT
1. Input format
IMMEDIATELY
Input format for activating connection trace facility immediately.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,TDUR= [[ [
[ ACT CONNTRAC : PARSET= [,MODE=] [,EEVENT=[ [,RECLEV=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,GPSEND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the trace parameter sets to be
activated . CONNTRAC is activated on all processors
(CP and GPs) defined in the entered parameter sets.
Notes:
- It is not allowed to activate together parameter sets
containing the definition of the same processors. In such
a case only the first activation of each processor will be
performed and an error message will be displayed, which
shows the parsets, which are not activated (OBJECT ALREADY
ACTIVE).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
MODE BUFFER WRITE MODUS
This parameter describes the way of writing the trace data
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 1+
ACT CONNTRAC
IM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
into the CONNTRAC trace buffer on the CP.
Incompatibilities:
- SEQU and CYCLIC are not allowed simultaneously.
- NEW and CONTINUE are not allowed simultaneously.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CONTINUE CONTINUE
CYCLIC CYCLIC
NEW NEW
SEQU SEQUENTIAL
Default: CYCLIC, NEW
TDUR TRACE DURATION
This parameter specifies the trace duration in mm-ss-ms after
entering the MML command ACT CONNTRAC. This can be:
.If a start delay is entered, tracing is started after the
start delay has expired.
.If start events are entered, tracing is started after the
one of the start events has occured.
.If no start delay and no start trigger event are entered,
tracing is started immediately after activation of the
tracer per MML.
After expiration of the trace duration, tracing is stopped.
Restrictions:
- This parameter has to be omitted if an END TRIGGER EVENT is
specified.
- For this parameter a value of at least 50 ms has to
be specified.
Notes:
- If this parameter is omitted, the tracer is tracing until
an end trigger condition occured or the user stops the trace
due to a MML command.
- If this parameter is entered it might be necessary in some
special cases to terminate the tracer by DACT CONNTRAC.
For example this has to be done if a LTG has been specified,
which is not active or for which the tracer does not support
the loadtype.
Default: No trace duration, tracer runs until deactivation
by the user.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: TIME IN MINUTES=
0...1439, range of decimal numbers
b: TIME IN SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME IN MILLISECONDS=
0...999, range of decimal numbers
EEVENT END TRIGGER EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, which are able to stop
the trace on all processors which are mentioned in the PARSETs.
Restrictions:
- A maximum of 6 LTGs can be deactivated simultaneously by
a trigger event.
- This parameter has to be omitted if a TRACE DURATION is specified.
Notes:
- Up to 4 trigger events can be entered.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 2+
ACT CONNTRAC
IM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: EVENT TYPE
AUDIT AUDIT TRIGGER EVENT
CMD CP/GP COMMAND
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENT
COMEV GP COMMON EVENT
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENT
CPMSG CP MESSAGE
CPTIMEV CP TIMER EVENT
DLU GP DLU EVENT
GPMSG GP MESSAGE
GPTIMEV GP TIMER EVENT
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENT
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENT
PRIVATE PRIVATE TRIGGER EVENT
RCF REASON FOR CALL FAILURE
RCT REASON FOR CALL TERMINATION
REP GP REPORT
SWSG SWSG TRIGGER EVENT
b: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART ONE=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on EEVENT
EEVENT: MEANING:
GPMSG JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CMD JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
REP JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CPMSG SRC ... SOURCE
PEREV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GPTIMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COLEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GSEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
DLU OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMUEV EV_GRP ... EVENT GROUP
SWSG MODULE NAME
RCT RCT NUMBER
RCF RCF NUMBER
AUDIT AUDIT NAME
Compatibilities:
- Module/Audit name = XXXXXXXX
matches to all modules/audits.
- SOURCE IOCP, TIMER, USER, IOMES
- JC1 is a HEX value
- OT_ID is a HEX value
- EV_GRP is a HEX value
- RCT and RCF is the INT value of the defining set value.
There must not be an input for c.
- AUDIT NAME is the identifier from the defining set
without the prefix AUD_.
c: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART TWO=
1...3 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on EEVENT
EEVENT: MEANING:
GPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CMD JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
REP JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
PEREV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
GPTIMEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 3+
ACT CONNTRAC
IM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COLEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
GSEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
DLU OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMUEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
CPTIMEV TIM_OP ... TIMER OPERATION
SWSG SWSG NUMBER
AUDIT AUDIT NUMBER
Notes:
- All values have to be entered in hexadecimal format.
Except SWSG NUMBER and AUDIT NUMBER which have
to be entered in decimal format.
For the latter the entire range of parameter values is
taken if c is not entered.
- On the GP it is possible to use wildcards for parameter b
and c. Such a wildcard applies to all possible values.
To enter a wildcard, enter a hex value of HFF.
RECLEV RECOVERY LEVEL
This parameter specifies the recovery level which the tracer survives.
Notes :
- Recovery level on CP correspondes to on GP:
NSTART0 ... Local recovery
NSTART1 ... Level 1
NSTART2 ... Level 1.1
NSTART3 ... Level 1.2
ISTART1 ... Level 2.1
Default Values:
- If PRC = CP : RECLEV = NONE
- If PRC = GP : RECLEV = NSTART1 (Rec. level 1 on GP)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISTART1 INITIAL START1
NONE NO RECOVERY LEVEL
NSTART0 NEW START0
NSTART1 NEW START1
NSTART2 NEW START2
NSTART3 NEW START3
GPSEND GP DATA SEND MODE
This parameter specifies if the traced GP data should
be sent to the CP during trace or after the end
of trace.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONT SEND CONTINUOUSLY
In this case the traced data is sent to the
CP immediately, respectively continuously
during trace.
END SEND BY END
In this case the traced data on GP is buffered
without sending to CP, until the end of trace is
reached. If there is more trace data than GP
buffer capacity, the oldest trace data will be
overwritten.
After end of tracing, the whole GP tracebuffer
contents are sent to the CP.
Default: CONT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 4+
ACT CONNTRAC
SDEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
START DELAY
Input format for activating connection trace facility with a delay.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,TDUR= [[ [
[ ACT CONNTRAC : PARSET= [,MODE=] ,SDEL= [,EEVENT=[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,RECLEV=] [,GPSEND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the trace parameter sets to be
activated . CONNTRAC is activated on all processors
(CP and GPs) defined in the entered parameter sets.
Notes:
- It is not allowed to activate together parameter sets
containing the definition of the same processors. In such
a case only the first activation of each processor will be
performed and an error message will be displayed, which
shows the parsets, which are not activated (OBJECT ALREADY
ACTIVE).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
MODE BUFFER WRITE MODUS
This parameter describes the way of writing the trace data
into the CONNTRAC trace buffer on the CP.
Incompatibilities:
- SEQU and CYCLIC are not allowed simultaneously.
- NEW and CONTINUE are not allowed simultaneously.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CONTINUE CONTINUE
CYCLIC CYCLIC
NEW NEW
SEQU SEQUENTIAL
Default: CYCLIC, NEW
SDEL START DELAY
This parameter specifies the start delay in mm-ss-ms after
entering the MML command ACT CONNTRAC. The start delay is the
time between entering the command ACT CONNTRAC and the actual
start of tracing.
Restrictions:
- This parameter has to be omitted if a START TRIGGER EVENT is
specified.
- For this parameter a value of at least 50 ms has to
be specified.
Notes:
- If this parameter is omitted, the tracer starts tracing
immediately or after a specified start trigger condition.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 5+
ACT CONNTRAC
SDEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: TIME IN MINUTES=
0...1439, range of decimal numbers
b: TIME IN SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME IN MILLISECONDS=
0...999, range of decimal numbers
TDUR TRACE DURATION
This parameter specifies the trace duration in mm-ss-ms after
entering the MML command ACT CONNTRAC. This can be:
.If a start delay is entered, tracing is started after the
start delay has expired.
.If start events are entered, tracing is started after the
one of the start events has occured.
.If no start delay and no start trigger event are entered,
tracing is started immediately after activation of the
tracer per MML.
After expiration of the trace duration, tracing is stopped.
Restrictions:
- This parameter has to be omitted if an END TRIGGER EVENT is
specified.
- For this parameter a value of at least 50 ms has to
be specified.
Notes:
- If this parameter is omitted, the tracer is tracing until
an end trigger condition occured or the user stops the trace
due to a MML command.
- If this parameter is entered it might be necessary in some
special cases to terminate the tracer by DACT CONNTRAC.
For example this has to be done if a LTG has been specified,
which is not active or for which the tracer does not support
the loadtype.
Default: No trace duration, tracer runs until deactivation
by the user.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: TIME IN MINUTES=
0...1439, range of decimal numbers
b: TIME IN SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME IN MILLISECONDS=
0...999, range of decimal numbers
EEVENT END TRIGGER EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, which are able to stop
the trace on all processors which are mentioned in the PARSETs.
Restrictions:
- A maximum of 6 LTGs can be deactivated simultaneously by
a trigger event.
- This parameter has to be omitted if a TRACE DURATION is specified.
Notes:
- Up to 4 trigger events can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 6+
ACT CONNTRAC
SDEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: EVENT TYPE
AUDIT AUDIT TRIGGER EVENT
CMD CP/GP COMMAND
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENT
COMEV GP COMMON EVENT
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENT
CPMSG CP MESSAGE
CPTIMEV CP TIMER EVENT
DLU GP DLU EVENT
GPMSG GP MESSAGE
GPTIMEV GP TIMER EVENT
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENT
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENT
PRIVATE PRIVATE TRIGGER EVENT
RCF REASON FOR CALL FAILURE
RCT REASON FOR CALL TERMINATION
REP GP REPORT
SWSG SWSG TRIGGER EVENT
b: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART ONE=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on EEVENT
EEVENT: MEANING:
GPMSG JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CMD JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
REP JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CPMSG SRC ... SOURCE
PEREV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GPTIMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COLEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GSEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
DLU OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMUEV EV_GRP ... EVENT GROUP
SWSG MODULE NAME
RCT RCT NUMBER
RCF RCF NUMBER
AUDIT AUDIT NAME
Compatibilities:
- Module/Audit name = XXXXXXXX
matches to all modules/audits.
- SOURCE IOCP, TIMER, USER, IOMES
- JC1 is a HEX value
- OT_ID is a HEX value
- EV_GRP is a HEX value
- RCT and RCF is the INT value of the defining set value.
There must not be an input for c.
- AUDIT NAME is the identifier from the defining set
without the prefix AUD_.
c: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART TWO=
1...3 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on EEVENT
EEVENT: MEANING:
GPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CMD JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
REP JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
PEREV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
GPTIMEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
COLEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 7+
ACT CONNTRAC
SDEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
GSEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
DLU OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMUEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
CPTIMEV TIM_OP ... TIMER OPERATION
SWSG SWSG NUMBER
AUDIT AUDIT NUMBER
Notes:
- All values have to be entered in hexadecimal format.
Except SWSG NUMBER and AUDIT NUMBER which have
to be entered in decimal format.
For the latter the entire range of parameter values is
taken if c is not entered.
- On the GP it is possible to use wildcards for parameter b
and c. Such a wildcard applies to all possible values.
To enter a wildcard, enter a hex value of HFF.
RECLEV RECOVERY LEVEL
This parameter specifies the recovery level which the tracer survives.
Notes :
- Recovery level on CP correspondes to on GP:
NSTART0 ... Local recovery
NSTART1 ... Level 1
NSTART2 ... Level 1.1
NSTART3 ... Level 1.2
ISTART1 ... Level 2.1
Default Values:
- If PRC = CP : RECLEV = NONE
- If PRC = GP : RECLEV = NSTART1 (Rec. level 1 on GP)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISTART1 INITIAL START1
NONE NO RECOVERY LEVEL
NSTART0 NEW START0
NSTART1 NEW START1
NSTART2 NEW START2
NSTART3 NEW START3
GPSEND GP DATA SEND MODE
This parameter specifies if the traced GP data should
be sent to the CP during trace or after the end
of trace.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONT SEND CONTINUOUSLY
In this case the traced data is sent to the
CP immediately, respectively continuously
during trace.
END SEND BY END
In this case the traced data on GP is buffered
without sending to CP, until the end of trace is
reached. If there is more trace data than GP
buffer capacity, the oldest trace data will be
overwritten.
After end of tracing, the whole GP tracebuffer
contents are sent to the CP.
Default: CONT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 8+
ACT CONNTRAC
SEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
START EVENT
Input format for activating connection trace facility by a
start trigger event.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,TDUR= [[ [
[ ACT CONNTRAC : PARSET= [,MODE=] ,SEVENT= [,EEVENT=[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,RECLEV=] [,GPSEND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the trace parameter sets to be
activated . CONNTRAC is activated on all processors
(CP and GPs) defined in the entered parameter sets.
Notes:
- It is not allowed to activate together parameter sets
containing the definition of the same processors. In such
a case only the first activation of each processor will be
performed and an error message will be displayed, which
shows the parsets, which are not activated (OBJECT ALREADY
ACTIVE).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
MODE BUFFER WRITE MODUS
This parameter describes the way of writing the trace data
into the CONNTRAC trace buffer on the CP.
Incompatibilities:
- SEQU and CYCLIC are not allowed simultaneously.
- NEW and CONTINUE are not allowed simultaneously.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CONTINUE CONTINUE
CYCLIC CYCLIC
NEW NEW
SEQU SEQUENTIAL
Default: CYCLIC, NEW
SEVENT START TRIGGER EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, which are able to start
the trace on all processors which are mentioned in the PARSETs.
Restrictions:
- A maximum of 6 LTGs can be activated simultaneously by
a trigger event.
- This parameter has to be omitted if a START DELAY is specified.
- This parameter has to be omitted if DIRECTORY NUMBERs have been
specified for the corresponding PARSETs.
Notes:
- Up to 4 trigger events can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 9+
ACT CONNTRAC
SEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: EVENT TYPE
CMD CP/GP COMMAND
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENT
COMEV GP COMMON EVENT
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENT
CPMSG CP MESSAGE
CPTIMEV CP TIMER EVENT
DLU GP DLU EVENT
GPMSG GP MESSAGE
GPTIMEV GP TIMER EVENT
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENT
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENT
PRIVATE PRIVATE TRIGGER EVENT
REP GP REPORT
b: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART ONE=
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on SEVENT
SEVENT: MEANING:
GPMSG JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CMD JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
REP JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CPMSG SRC ... SOURCE
PEREV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GPTIMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COLEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GSEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
DLU OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMUEV EV_GRP ... EVENT GROUP
Compatibilities:
- SOURCE IOCP, TIMER, USER, IOMES
- JC1 is a HEX value
- OT_ID is a HEX value
- EV_GRP is a HEX value
c: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART TWO=
0...FF, range of hexadecimal numbers
This unit has various meanings, dependent on SEVENT
EVENT TYPE: MEANING:
GPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CMD JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
REP JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
PEREV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
GPTIMEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
COLEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
GSEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
DLU OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMUEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
CPTIMEV TIM_OP ... TIMER OPERATION
Notes:
- All values have to be entered in hexadecimal format.
- On the GP it is possible to use wildcards for parameter b
and c. Such a wildcard applies to all possible values. To
enter a wildcard, enter a hex value of HFF.
TDUR TRACE DURATION
This parameter specifies the trace duration in mm-ss-ms after
entering the MML command ACT CONNTRAC. This can be:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 10+
ACT CONNTRAC
SEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.If a start delay is entered, tracing is started after the
start delay has expired.
.If start events are entered, tracing is started after the
one of the start events has occured.
.If no start delay and no start trigger event are entered,
tracing is started immediately after activation of the
tracer per MML.
After expiration of the trace duration, tracing is stopped.
Restrictions:
- This parameter has to be omitted if an END TRIGGER EVENT is
specified.
- For this parameter a value of at least 50 ms has to
be specified.
Notes:
- If this parameter is omitted, the tracer is tracing until
an end trigger condition occured or the user stops the trace
due to a MML command.
- If this parameter is entered it might be necessary in some
special cases to terminate the tracer by DACT CONNTRAC.
For example this has to be done if a LTG has been specified,
which is not active or for which the tracer does not support
the loadtype.
Default: No trace duration, tracer runs until deactivation
by the user.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: TIME IN MINUTES=
0...1439, range of decimal numbers
b: TIME IN SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: TIME IN MILLISECONDS=
0...999, range of decimal numbers
EEVENT END TRIGGER EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, which are able to stop
the trace on all processors which are mentioned in the PARSETs.
Restrictions:
- A maximum of 6 LTGs can be deactivated simultaneously by
a trigger event.
- This parameter has to be omitted if a TRACE DURATION is specified.
Notes:
- Up to 4 trigger events can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: EVENT TYPE
AUDIT AUDIT TRIGGER EVENT
CMD CP/GP COMMAND
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENT
COMEV GP COMMON EVENT
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENT
CPMSG CP MESSAGE
CPTIMEV CP TIMER EVENT
DLU GP DLU EVENT
GPMSG GP MESSAGE
GPTIMEV GP TIMER EVENT
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENT
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENT
PRIVATE PRIVATE TRIGGER EVENT
RCF REASON FOR CALL FAILURE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 11+
ACT CONNTRAC
SEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RCT REASON FOR CALL TERMINATION
REP GP REPORT
SWSG SWSG TRIGGER EVENT
b: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART ONE=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on EEVENT
EEVENT: MEANING:
GPMSG JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CMD JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
REP JC1 ... JOBCODE 1
CPMSG SRC ... SOURCE
PEREV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GPTIMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COLEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
GSEV OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
DLU OT_ID ... OPERATION TABLE ID
COMUEV EV_GRP ... EVENT GROUP
SWSG MODULE NAME
RCT RCT NUMBER
RCF RCF NUMBER
AUDIT AUDIT NAME
Compatibilities:
- Module/Audit name = XXXXXXXX
matches to all modules/audits.
- SOURCE IOCP, TIMER, USER, IOMES
- JC1 is a HEX value
- OT_ID is a HEX value
- EV_GRP is a HEX value
- RCT and RCF is the INT value of the defining set value.
There must not be an input for c.
- AUDIT NAME is the identifier from the defining set
without the prefix AUD_.
c: EVENT DESCRIPTION PART TWO=
1...3 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on EEVENT
EEVENT: MEANING:
GPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CMD JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
REP JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
CPMSG JC2 ... JOBCODE 2
PEREV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
GPTIMEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
COLEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
GSEV OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
DLU OT_EV ... OPERATION TABLE EVENT
COMUEV EV_NO ... EVENT NUMBER
CPTIMEV TIM_OP ... TIMER OPERATION
SWSG SWSG NUMBER
AUDIT AUDIT NUMBER
Notes:
- All values have to be entered in hexadecimal format.
Except SWSG NUMBER and AUDIT NUMBER which have
to be entered in decimal format.
For the latter the entire range of parameter values is
taken if c is not entered.
- On the GP it is possible to use wildcards for parameter b
and c. Such a wildcard applies to all possible values.
To enter a wildcard, enter a hex value of HFF.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 12+
ACT CONNTRAC
SEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECLEV RECOVERY LEVEL
This parameter specifies the recovery level which the tracer survives.
Notes :
- Recovery level on CP correspondes to on GP:
NSTART0 ... Local recovery
NSTART1 ... Level 1
NSTART2 ... Level 1.1
NSTART3 ... Level 1.2
ISTART1 ... Level 2.1
Default Values:
- If PRC = CP : RECLEV = NONE
- If PRC = GP : RECLEV = NSTART1 (Rec. level 1 on GP)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ISTART1 INITIAL START1
NONE NO RECOVERY LEVEL
NSTART0 NEW START0
NSTART1 NEW START1
NSTART2 NEW START2
NSTART3 NEW START3
GPSEND GP DATA SEND MODE
This parameter specifies if the traced GP data should
be sent to the CP during trace or after the end
of trace.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONT SEND CONTINUOUSLY
In this case the traced data is sent to the
CP immediately, respectively continuously
during trace.
END SEND BY END
In this case the traced data on GP is buffered
without sending to CP, until the end of trace is
reached. If there is more trace data than GP
buffer capacity, the oldest trace data will be
overwritten.
After end of tracing, the whole GP tracebuffer
contents are sent to the CP.
Default: CONT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CONNTRAC- 13-
CAN CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET
This command allows to cancel one or more trace parameter sets, if
this parameter sets are not active.
If a parameter set has been canceled, it is undefined and cannot be
used for activation or modification.
This command is a test command only permitted for use by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel for NM-test purposes.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CONNTRAC : PARSET= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the trace parameter sets to be canceled.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CONNTRAC- 1-
DACT CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CONNECTION TRACE
This commmand deactivates the connection trace facility of call
processing.
This command is a test command only permitted for use by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel for NM-test purposes.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT CONNTRAC : [PARSET=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the trace parameter sets to be deactivated.
If this parameter is entered, CONNTRAC is deactivated on all processors
(CP and GPs), which are defined in the entered parameter sets.
If the parameter PARSET is entered, CONNTRAC stops tracing on
CP and all activated GPs.
CONNTRAC waits until all trace data from the local tracebuffers
of the LTGs have arrived.
The execution of the MML-command DACT CONNTRAC is terminated
after 10 seconds, but data collection still goes on. When the
MML-command DMP CONNTRAC is entered, the tracebuffer will be
closed and collecting of GP-tracedata is ended.
If this parameter is omitted, CONNTRAC is deactivated immediately on
all processors where it is active. Tracedata in the local
tracebuffers of the LTGS are lost.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CONNTRAC- 1-
DISP CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET
This command allows to display parameter sets and to find out whether
the tracer is active or not.
This command is a test command only permitted for use by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel for NM-test purposes.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CONNTRAC : [PARSET=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the numbers of the trace parameter sets to be
displayed.
If the parameter is omitted, the state of CONNTRAC at CP and a list of
the active LTGs is displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONNTRAC- 1-
DMP CONNTRAC
FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CONNECTION TRACE
This command dumps the connection trace buffer of call processing out
onto the maintenance terminal or copies the trace buffer to or from
disk. Before a dump command can be handled, the connection tracer
must be deactivated.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is a test command only permitted for use by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel for NM-test purposes.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DMP CONNTRAC - FILE FILE OPERATIONS
2. DMP CONNTRAC - TERM TERMINAL OPERATIONS
1. Input format
FILE OPERATIONS
This input form is used to store the contents of the trace buffer
on disk.

[ [
[ [
[ [[FROMFILE=[[ [
[ DMP CONNTRAC : [TOFILE= [ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FROMFILE FILENAME ON DISK
This parameter specifies the file name (including the prefix
CT.) on disc, where from the trace buffer contents are
copied. The chosen filename has to begin always with the
prefix CT., which is a mandatory prefix for a valid
filename.
If this parameter is entered, all other parameters
are insignificant.
Default: No filename, tracedata will be dumped onto maintenance
terminal
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...11 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TOFILE FILENAME ON DISK
This parameter specifies the file name (including the prefix
CT.) on disc, where to the trace buffer contents are
copied. The chosen filename has to begin always with the
prefix CT., which is a mandatory prefix for a valid
filename.
If this parameter is entered, all other parameters
are insignificant.
Default: No filename, tracedata will be dumped onto maintenance
terminal
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...11 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CONNTRAC- 1+
DMP CONNTRAC
TERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TERMINAL OPERATIONS
This input form is used to dump the connection trace buffer on the
O&M-Terminal.

[ [
[ DMP CONNTRAC : [PARSET=] [,FORM=] [,EVNO=] [,MODE=] [,DATA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the trace parameter sets which should be
dumped.
If this parameter is omitted, all trace parameter sets which were
active while tracing are specified.
Default: PARSET = X (all parsets, which were active while tracing)
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
FORM FORM OF DUMP
This parameter specifies the format of dumping.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DIR DIRECTORY OF THE STORED EVENTS
HEX HEXADECIMAL DUMP
LONG LONG DUMP
Default: DIR
EVNO EVENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the event number. When dumping events, an
event index is assigned to each event by the CONNTRAC.
If this parameter is specified, only events with indices within the
defined range are dumped.
Default: No EVNO (no selection by event number)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
MODE DUMP ORDER MODE
This parameter specifies the dump order mode.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEW NEW DUMP
REVERSE REVERSE DUMP
Default: NEW
DATA DATA TO BE DUMPED
This parameter specifies the data (messages and resources) to be
dumped.
Default: All DATA (no selection by data)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CONNTRAC- 2+
DMP CONNTRAC
TERM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ASN1DERR CP/GP ASN1 DECODE ERROR
ATD ADDITIONAL TRANSACTION DATA
BAR CP BILLING APPLICATION REG.
BDU CP BSSAP DATA UNIT
CAPDT GP CALL PROCESSING USER DATA
CDU CP/GP COMPONENT DATA UNIT
CHR CP CHANNEL REGISTER
CMD CP/GP COMMAND DATA
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENT DATA
COMEV GP COMMON EVENT DATA
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENT DATA
CPB CP CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
CR GP CALL REGISTER
CRALL ALL GP CALL REGISTERS
CRCHA CHARGING CALL REGISTER
CRCTX CENTREX CALL REGISTER
CRIN IN CALL REGISTER
CRMOB MOBILE CALL REGISTER
CRPRJ PROJECT SPECIFIC CALL REGISTER
CRUSR USER CALL REGISTER
DLU GP DLU EVENT DATA
DPS GP DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
EDU CP EXTERNAL DATA UNIT
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENT DATA
INTEV CP/GP INTERNAL EVENT DATA
IWF GP INTERWORKING FUNCTION DATA
LST GP LINE STATUS TABLE
MSG CP/GP MESSAGE DATA
ORD CP/GP ORDER DATA
PDU CP PROTOCOL DATA UNIT
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENT DATA
RCB CP RESOURCE CONFIG BUFFER
REP GP REPORT DATA
TCB CP/GP TRANSACTION CONTROL BLK.
TIMEV CP/GP TIMER EVENT DATA
TMM CP TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT MODULE
TR CP TRANSACTION REGISTER
USER GP USER DATA
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CONNTRAC- 3-
ENTR CONNTRAC
CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET
This command enters a connection trace parameter set.
This command is a test command only permitted for use by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel for NM-test purposes.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR CONNTRAC- CP CP PARSET
2. ENTR CONNTRAC- GP GP PARSET
1. Input format
CP PARSET
This input form is used for entering a CP trace parameter set.

[ [
[ ENTR CONNTRAC : PARSET= [,PRC=] [,EQN=] [,EVENT=] [,DATA=] [
[ [
[ [,DN=] [,LAYER=] [,C7ADDR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the number of the trace parameter set to
be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
PRC PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the processor, where the tracing is
performed.
For specification of the LTGs use the parameter EQN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CP COORDINATION PROCESSOR
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment numbers to be traced.
If PRC = GP, EQN defines the LTGs where the tracing is done.
If PRC = CP, only the connections with the specified LTGs
are traced. No selection of ports is done.
Compatibilities:
- a - b specifies a LTG
For PRC = GP also available:
- a specifies all ports of a DLU or V5IF
- a - b - c specifies a LTG pseudoport
- a - b - c - d specifies a LTG port or a DLU port or a V5.1 port
Notes:
- This parameter is mandatory if PRC = GP.
- If no LTG port or DLU port are selected, all ports are
traced.
- A parameter interval is allowed only between values of the
same EQN type. If the EQN type is a DLU or a DLU port, only
ranges within the same DLU are allowed.
- Up to 10 EQN-numbers or up to 5 ranges of EQN-numbers
can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 1+
ENTR CONNTRAC
CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: TSG/DLU NUMBER=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a TSG number in the range 0...7 if
the equipment number refers to LTG or a LTG port;
with reference to a DLU or a DLU port a DLU number in the
range 10...2550 (in steps of 10) and with reference to a
V5.1 or V5.1 port a V5IF in the range of 6000...8999 is
specified.
b: LTG/SHELF NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a LTG number in the range 1...63 if the
equipment number refers to a LTG or a LTG port; with
reference to a DLU port a frame in the range of 0...7 is
specified. For a V5.1 port it will be equal zero.
This unit is omitted if the EQN refers to all ports of a DLU.
EVENT EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, where the tracer will
trace data.
Notes:
- If the user wants to specify a great amount of parameter
values, the input EVENT=X should be chosen and modified
by the command MOD using MODE = SUB.
(Normally the identifier X of parameter EVENT is blocked.
For compound test phase it is possible to unblock the
identifier X by patch.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ASN1DERR CP/GP ASN1 DECODE ERROR
CMD CP/GP COMMANDS
INTEV CP/GP INTERNAL EVENTS
MSG CP/GP MESSAGES
NONE NO EVENTS
ORD CP/GP ORDERS
TIMEV CP/GP TIMER EVENTS
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: ORD
DATA DATA TO BE TRACED
This parameter specifies the data (messages and resources)
to be traced.
Notes:
- If the user wants to specify a great amount of parameter
values, the input DATA=X should be chosen and modified
by the command MOD using MODE = SUB.
(Normally the identifier X of parameter DATA is blocked.
For compound test phase it is possible to unblock the
identifier X by patch.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ASN1DERR CP/GP ASN1 DECODE ERROR
ATD ADDITIONAL TRANSACTION DATA
BAR CP BILLING APPLICATION REG.
BDU CP BSSAP DATA UNIT
CDU CP/GP COMPONENT DATA UNIT
CHR CP CHANNEL REGISTER
CMD CP/GP COMMAND DATA
CPB CP CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
EDU CP EXTERNAL DATA UNIT
INTEV CP/GP INTERNAL EVENT DATA
MSG CP/GP MESSAGE DATA
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 2+
ENTR CONNTRAC
CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORD CP/GP ORDER DATA
PDU CP PROTOCOL DATA UNIT
RCB CP RESOURCE CONFIG BUFFER
TCB CP/GP TRANSACTION CONTROL BLK.
TIMEV CP/GP TIMER EVENT DATA
TMM CP TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT MODULE
TR CP TRANSACTION REGISTER
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: ORD
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the identifications of the subscriber
or the mobile station to be traced. It is only available if
PRC = CP.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b[-c]
a: TYPE OF SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFICATION
HO HANDOVER MSC B-PART
IMEI INT. MOBILE EQUIPM. IDENTITY
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUBSCR. IDENTITY
MINESN MOBILE IDENTIFICATION CDMA
MSISDN MOBILE STATION ISDN NUMBER
PSTNDN PSTN DIRECTORY NUMBER
b: IDENTIFICATION=
1...24 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on
DN
DN: MEANING:
PSTNDN PSTN DIRECTORY NUMBER
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUBSCR. IDENTITY
IMEI INT. MOBILE EQUIPM. IDENTITY
MSISDN MOBILE STATION ISDN NUMBER
HO HANDOVER MSC B-PART
MINESN MOBILE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- If PSTNDN, IMSI, IMEI, MSISDN or HO is entered there
must not be an input for c.
- If MINESN is entered there must be an input (ESN) for c.
- The total number of digits of a MOBILE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER must be 10.
c: ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER=
8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LAYER LAYER
This parameter specifies the protocol layers. The message flow
concerning these protocol layers will be traced.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
C7SIGN ISUP AND TUP
C7USER USERS OF SCCP AND TCAP
GENERIC GENERIC C AND GENERIC M
SCCP SIGNALING CONN. CONTROL PART
TCAP TRANSACTION CAPAB. APPL. PART
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: X
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 3+
ENTR CONNTRAC
CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
C7ADDR CCS7 ADDRESS
This parameter specifies a CCS7 address.
Notes: - Each type of address may only be given once. If more than one
value is specified, an event is traced only if all values
are matching.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF CCS7 ADDRESS
GT GLOBAL TITLE
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS = 1..24 decimal digits
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS =
SPC SIGNALING POINT CODE
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS = 2^24-1 (=16777215), range of decimal
numbers
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS =
BSSAPINT BSSAP INTERNAL
b: ADDRESS=
1...24 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 4+
ENTR CONNTRAC
GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GP PARSET
This input form is used for entering a GP trace parameter set.

[ [
[ ENTR CONNTRAC : PARSET= ,PRC= ,EQN= [,EVENT=] [,DATA=] [
[ [
[ [,LAYER=] [,SUBL=] [,C7ADDR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the number of the trace parameter set to
be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
PRC PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the processor, where the tracing is
performed.
For specification of the LTGs use the parameter EQN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GP GROUP PROCESSOR
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment numbers to be traced.
If PRC = GP, EQN defines the LTGs where the tracing is done.
If PRC = CP, only the connections with the specified LTGs
are traced. No selection of ports is done.
Compatibilities:
- a - b specifies a LTG
For PRC = GP also available:
- a specifies all ports of a DLU or V5IF
- a - b - c specifies a LTG pseudoport
- a - b - c - d specifies a LTG port or a DLU port or a V5.1 port
Notes:
- This parameter is mandatory if PRC = GP.
- If no LTG port or DLU port are selected, all ports are
traced.
- A parameter interval is allowed only between values of the
same EQN type. If the EQN type is a DLU or a DLU port, only
ranges within the same DLU are allowed.
- Up to 10 EQN-numbers or up to 5 ranges of EQN-numbers
can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: TSG/DLU NUMBER=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a TSG number in the range 0...7 if
the equipment number refers to LTG or a LTG port;
with reference to a DLU or a DLU port a DLU number in the
range 10...2550 (in steps of 10) and with reference to a
V5.1 or V5.1 port a V5IF in the range of 6000...8999 is
specified.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 5+
ENTR CONNTRAC
GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LTG/SHELF NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a LTG number in the range 1...63 if the
equipment number refers to a LTG or a LTG port; with
reference to a DLU port a frame in the range of 0...7 is
specified. For a V5.1 port it will be equal zero.
This unit is omitted if the EQN refers to all ports of a DLU.
c: PSEUDOPORT/LTU/MODULE NUMBER=
0...450, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a LTU number in the range 0...7 if the
equipment number refers to a LTG port; with reference to a
DLU port a module in the range 0...15 is specified.
If the equipment number refers to a LTG pseudoport this unit
specifies the pseudoport in the range 0...450.
For a V5.1 port this unit will be equal zero.
This unit is omitted if the EQN refers to all ports of a LTG
or a DLU.
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a channel number in the range 0..31 if the
equipment number refers to a LTG or a V5.1 port; with
reference to a DLU8 (DLU16) a circuit number in the range 0...7
(0...15) is specified. This unit is omitted if the EQN
refers to all ports of a LTG, DLU or a LTG pseudoport.
EVENT EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, where the tracer will
trace data.
Notes:
- If the user wants to specify a great amount of parameter
values, the input EVENT=X should be chosen and modified
by the command MOD using MODE = SUB.
(Normally the identifier X of parameter EVENT is blocked.
For compound test phase it is possible to unblock the
identifier X by patch.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ASN1DERR CP/GP ASN1 DECODE ERROR
CAPDT GP CALL PROCESSING USER EVENTS
CMD CP/GP COMMANDS
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENTS
COMEV GP COMMON EVENTS
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENTS
DLU GP DLU EVENTS
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENTS
INTEV CP/GP INTERNAL EVENTS
IWF GP INTERWORKING FUNCTION EV.
MSG CP/GP MESSAGES
NONE NO EVENTS
ORD CP/GP ORDERS
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENTS
REP GP REPORTS
TIMEV CP/GP TIMER EVENTS
USER GP USER
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: ORD
DATA DATA TO BE TRACED
This parameter specifies the data (messages and resources)
to be traced.
Notes:
- If the user wants to specify a great amount of parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 6+
ENTR CONNTRAC
GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
values, the input DATA=X should be chosen and modified
by the command MOD using MODE = SUB.
(Normally the identifier X of parameter DATA is blocked.
For compound test phase it is possible to unblock the
identifier X by patch.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ASN1DERR CP/GP ASN1 DECODE ERROR
CAPDT GP CALL PROCESSING USER DATA
CDU CP/GP COMPONENT DATA UNIT
CMD CP/GP COMMAND DATA
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENT DATA
COMEV GP COMMON EVENT DATA
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENT DATA
CR GP CALL REGISTER
CRALL ALL GP CALL REGISTERS
CRCHA CHARGING CALL REGISTER
CRCTX CENTREX CALL REGISTER
CRIN IN CALL REGISTER
CRMOB MOBILE CALL REGISTER
CRPRJ PROJECT SPECIFIC CALL REGISTER
CRUSR USER CALL REGISTER
DLU GP DLU EVENT DATA
DPS GP DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENT DATA
INTEV CP/GP INTERNAL EVENT DATA
IWF GP INTERWORKING FUNCTION DATA
LST GP LINE STATUS TABLE
MSG CP/GP MESSAGE DATA
ORD CP/GP ORDER DATA
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENT DATA
REP GP REPORT DATA
TCB CP/GP TRANSACTION CONTROL BLK.
TIMEV CP/GP TIMER EVENT DATA
USER GP USER DATA
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: ORD
LAYER LAYER
This parameter specifies the protocol layers. The message flow
concerning these protocol layers will be traced.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
C7SIGN ISUP AND TUP
C7USER USERS OF SCCP AND TCAP
GENERIC GENERIC C AND GENERIC M
SCCP SIGNALING CONN. CONTROL PART
TCAP TRANSACTION CAPAB. APPL. PART
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: X
SUBL BSSAP SUBLAYER
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CC CALL CONTROL
MM MOBILITY MANAGEMENT
RR RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
SS NON CALL RELATED SUPPL. SERV.
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: X
C7ADDR CCS7 ADDRESS
This parameter specifies a CCS7 address.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 7+
ENTR CONNTRAC
GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes: - Each type of address may only be given once. If more than one
value is specified, an event is traced only if all values
are matching.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF CCS7 ADDRESS
GT GLOBAL TITLE
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS = 1..24 decimal digits
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS =
SPC SIGNALING POINT CODE
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS = 2^24-1 (=16777215), range of decimal
numbers
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS =
BSSAPINT BSSAP INTERNAL
b: ADDRESS=
1...24 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CONNTRAC- 8-
MOD CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CONNECTION TRACE PARAMETER SET
This command modifies a connection trace parameter set.
This command is a test command only permitted for use by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel for NM-test purposes.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD CONNTRAC : PARSET= [,PRC=] [,EQN=] [,EVENT=] [,DATA=] [
[ [
[ [,DN=] [,LAYER=] [,SUBL=] [,C7ADDR=] [,MODE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PARSET TRACE PARAMETER SET
This parameter specifies the number of the trace parameter set to
be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
PRC PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the processor, where the tracing is
performed.
For specification of the LTGs use the parameter EQN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CP COORDINATION PROCESSOR
GP GROUP PROCESSOR
Default: CP
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment numbers to be traced.
If PRC = GP, EQN defines the LTGs where the tracing is done.
If PRC = CP, only the connections with the specified LTGs
are traced. No selection of ports is done.
Compatibilities:
- a - b specifies a LTG
For PRC = GP also available:
- a specifies all ports of a DLU or a V5IF
- a - b - c specifies a LTG pseudoport
- a - b - c - d specifies a LTG port or a DLU port or V5.1 port
Notes:
- Up to 10 EQN-numbers or up to 5 ranges of EQN-numbers
can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: TSG/DLU NUMBER=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a TSG number in the range 0...7 if
the equipment number refers to LTG or a LTG port;
with reference to a DLU or a DLU port a DLU number in the
range 10...2550 (in steps of 10) and with reference to a
V5.1 or V5.1 port a V5IF in the range of 6000...8999 is
specified.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONNTRAC- 1+
MOD CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LTG/SHELF NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a LTG number in the range 1...63 if the
equipment number refers to a LTG or a LTG port; with
reference to a DLU port a frame in the range of 0...7 is
specified. For a V5.1 port this unit wiil be equal zero.
This unit is omitted if the EQN refers to all ports of
a DLU.
c: PSEUDOPORT/LTU/MODULE NUMBER=
0...450, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a LTU number in the range 0...7 if the
equipment number refers to a LTG port; with reference to a
DLU port a module in the range 0...15 is specified.
If the equipment number refers to a LTG pseudoport this unit
specifies the pseudoport in the range 0...450.
For a V5.1 port this unit will be equal zero.
This unit is omitted if the EQN refers to all ports of a LTG
or a DLU.
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies a channel number in the range 0..31 if the
equipment number refers to a LTG or a V5.1 port; with reference
to a DLU8 (DLU16) a circuit number in the range 0...7
(0...15) is specified. This unit is omitted if the EQN
refers to all ports of a LTG, DLU or a LTG pseudoport.
EVENT EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, where the tracer will
trace data.
Notes:
- If the user wants to specify a great amount of parameter
values, the input EVENT=X should be chosen.
(Normally the identifier X of parameter EVENT is blocked.
For compound test phase it is possible to unblock the
identifier X by patch.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
USER GP USER
MSG CP/GP MESSAGES
CMD CP/GP COMMANDS
ORD CP/GP ORDERS
REP GP REPORTS
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENTS
INTEV CP/GP INTERNAL EVENTS
TIMEV CP/GP TIMER EVENTS
COMEV GP COMMON EVENTS
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENTS
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENTS
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENTS
ASN1DERR CP/GP ASN1 DECODE ERROR
IWF GP INTERWORKING FUNCTION EV.
DLU GP DLU EVENTS
CAPDT GP CALL PROCESSING USER EVENTS
NONE NO EVENTS
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: ORD
DATA DATA TO BE TRACED
This parameter specifies the data (messages and resources)
to be traced.
Notes:
- If the user wants to specify a great amount of parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONNTRAC- 2+
MOD CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
values, the input DATA=X should be chosen.
(Normally the identifier X of parameter DATA is blocked.
For compound test phase it is possible to unblock the
identifier X by patch.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ASN1DERR CP/GP ASN1 DECODE ERROR
ATD ADDITIONAL TRANSACTION DATA
BAR CP BILLING APPLICATION REG.
BDU CP BSSAP DATA UNIT
CAPDT GP CALL PROCESSING USER DATA
CDU CP/GP COMPONENT DATA UNIT
CHR CP CHANNEL REGISTER
CMD CP/GP COMMAND DATA
COLEV GP COLLECTIVE EVENT DATA
COMEV GP COMMON EVENT DATA
COMUEV GP COMMUNICATION EVENT DATA
CPB CP CALL PROCESSING BUFFER
CR GP CALL REGISTER
CRALL ALL GP CALL REGISTERS
CRCHA CHARGING CALL REGISTER
CRCTX CENTREX CALL REGISTER
CRIN IN CALL REGISTER
CRMOB MOBILE CALL REGISTER
CRPRJ PROJECT SPECIFIC CALL REGISTER
CRUSR USER CALL REGISTER
DLU GP DLU EVENT DATA
DPS GP DLU PORT STATUS TABLE
EDU CP EXTERNAL DATA UNIT
GSEV GP GROUP SWITCH EVENT DATA
INTEV CP/GP INTERNAL EVENT DATA
IWF GP INTERWORKING FUNCTION DATA
LST GP LINE STATUS TABLE
MSG CP/GP MESSAGE DATA
ORD CP/GP ORDER DATA
PDU CP PROTOCOL DATA UNIT
PEREV GP PERIPHERAL EVENT DATA
RCB CP RESOURCE CONFIG BUFFER
REP GP REPORT DATA
TCB CP/GP TRANSACTION CONTROL BLK.
TIMEV CP/GP TIMER EVENT DATA
TMM CP TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT MODULE
TR CP TRANSACTION REGISTER
USER GP USER DATA
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: ORD
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the identifications of the subscriber
or the mobile station to be traced.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b[-c]
a: TYPE OF SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFICATION
PSTNDN PSTN DIRECTORY NUMBER
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUBSCR. IDENTITY
IMEI INT. MOBILE EQUIPM. IDENTITY
MSISDN MOBILE STATION ISDN NUMBER
HO HANDOVER MSC B-PART
MINESN MOBILE IDENTIFICATION CDMA
b: IDENTIFICATION=
1...24 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit has various meanings, dependent on
DN
DN: MEANING:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONNTRAC- 3+
MOD CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PSTNDN PSTN DIRECTORY NUMBER
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUBSCR. IDENTITY
IMEI INT. MOBILE EQUIPM. IDENTITY
MSISDN MOBILE STATION ISDN NUMBER
HO HANDOVER MSC B-PART
MINESN MOBILE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- If PSTNDN, IMSI, IMEI, MSISDN or HO is entered there
must not be an input for c.
- If MINESN is entered there must be an input (ESN) for c.
- The total number of digits for the MOBILE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER must be 10.
c: ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER=
8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LAYER LAYER
This parameter specifies the protocol layers. The message flow
concerning these protocol layers will be traced.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
SCCP SIGNALING CONN. CONTROL PART
TCAP TRANSACTION CAPAB. APPL. PART
C7USER USERS OF SCCP AND TCAP
GENERIC GENERIC C AND GENERIC M
C7SIGN ISUP AND TUP
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: X
SUBL BSSAP SUBLAYER
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
RR RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
MM MOBILITY MANAGEMENT
CC CALL CONTROL
SS NON CALL RELATED SUPPL. SERV.
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
Default: X
C7ADDR CCS7 ADDRESS
This parameter specifies a CCS7 address.
Notes:
- Each type of address may only be given once. If more than one
value is specified, an event is traced only if all values
are matching.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF CCS7 ADDRESS
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS =
SPC SIGNALING POINT CODE
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS = 2^24-1 (=16777215)
GT GLOBAL TITLE
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS = 1..24 decimal digits
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONNTRAC- 4+
MOD CONNTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
Compatibilities:
- ADDRESS =
BSSAPINT BSSAP INTERNAL
b: ADDRESS=
1...24 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MODE MODE FOR ALTERING PARAMETERS
This parameter specifies the modus for altering the trace parameter
set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADD ADD PARAMETERS
SUB SUBSTRACT PARAMETERS
NEW NEW PARAMETERS
Default: NEW
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONNTRAC- 5-
CAN CONTMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Continuity Monitor
This task cancels a Continuity monitor.
Inputparameter:
- TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
- VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value present in
the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value present
in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- Flow Direction
The flowDirection attribute indicate in which direction the
monitoring is made, in relation to the TP by which the monitor object
is named. The value outOfSwitch means that the monitored flow extends
from TP toward the network. The value inToSwitch means that monitored
flow extends from TP into the cross-connect.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CONTMON : TCS ID= ,VPI= ,VCI= ,Flow Direction= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
Input format:
0...4095, range of decimal numbers
VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
Input format:
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
Flow Direction
The flowDirection attribute indicate in which direction the
monitoring is made, in relation to the TP by which the monitor object
is named. The value outOfSwitch means that the monitored flow extends
from TP toward the network. The value inToSwitch means that monitored
flow extends from TP into the cross-connect.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CONTMON- 1-
CR CONTMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Continuity Monitor
This task creates a Continuity monitor for VC.
The Continuity monitor models a Continuity Check (CC) OAM flow.
It represents the termination of a VC segment OAM flow.
The Continuity monitor provides a source mechanism
and a sink mechanism which can be activated separately by setting the parameters
Source active respectively Sink active to TRUE.
To monitor a VC segment, a continuity monitor must be present on each segment
endpoint.
When the parameter Sink active is TRUE and the VC
is detected as disrupted, a communications alarm with the probable cause
set to Communications subsystem failure is issued.
The Continuity monitors shall be automatically deleted when the
superior VC is deleted.
Prerequistes:
- VC must exist
- VCs Admin. state must be Unlocked
- VCs Operational state must be Enabled
Inputparameters:
- TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
- VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value present in
the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value present
in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- Source active
This parameter indicates whether the generation of the continuity check OAM
flow is active.
- Sink active
This parameter indicates whether the processing of the continuity check OAM
flow is active.
- Flow Direction
The flowDirection attribute indicate in which direction the
monitoring is made, in relation to the TP by which the monitor object
is named. The value outOfSwitch means that the monitored flow extends
from TP toward the network. The value inToSwitch means that monitored
flow extends from TP into the cross-connect.If both flows (inToSwitch
and outOfSwitch) need to be monitored, then two monitor objects should
be created.
Outputparameters:
- TCS ID
- VPI
- VCI
- Source active
- Sink active
- Operational state
This parameter describes the operability of a resource.
It is read-only and can have one of the following values:
Disabled The resource is totally inoperable and unable to provide
service to the user(s).
Enabled The resource is partially or fully operable and
available for use.
- Alarm status
The parameter Alarm status can indicate the occurrence of:
1. an alarm condition, which will be notified and will be included into the
balance of the Alarm Balance Monitor.
2. a pending alarm condition which will neither be notified
nor included into the balance of the Alarm Balance Monitor. .
3. the highest alarm priority of active alarm conditions,
if more than one alarm condition is active for a unit.
The order of alarm priority from highest to lowest is:
- critical,
- major,
- minor,
- indeterminate,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CONTMON- 1+
CR CONTMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- warning,
- active pending,
- cleared.
- Current problem list
Input format

[ [
[ CR CONTMON : TCS ID= ,VPI= ,VCI= ,Flow Direction= [
[ [
[ ,Source active= ,Sink active= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
Input format:
0...4095, range of decimal numbers
VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
Input format:
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
Flow Direction
The flowDirection attribute indicate in which direction the
monitoring is made, in relation to the TP by which the monitor object
is named. The value outOfSwitch means that the monitored flow extends
from TP toward the network. The value inToSwitch means that monitored
flow extends from TP into the cross-connect.If both flows (inToSwitch
and outOfSwitch) need to be monitored, then two monitor objects should
be created.
Source active
This parameter indicates whether the generation of the continuity check
OAM
flow is active.
Sink active
This parameter indicates whether the processing of the continuity check
OAM
flow is active.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CONTMON- 2-
DISP CONTMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Continuity Monitor
This task displays a Continuity monitor.
The Continuity monitor models a Continuity Check (CC) OAM flow.
It represents the termination of a VC segment OAM flow.
The Continuity monitor provides a source mechanism
and a sink mechanism which can be activated separately by setting the parameters
Source active respectively Sink active to TRUE.
To monitor a VC segment, a continuity monitor must be present on each segment
endpoint.
When the parameter Sink active is TRUE and the VC
is detected as disrupted, a communications alarm with the probable cause
set to Communications subsystem failure is issued.
Inputparameters:
- TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
- VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value present in
the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value present
in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- VP TTP ID
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP) within the network element (NE).
This parameter is given in alarm notifications.
Outputparameters:
- TCS ID
- VPI
- VCI
- Source active
- Sink active
- Operational state
This parameter describes the operability of a resource.
It is read-only and can have one of the following values:
Disabled The resource is totally inoperable and unable to provide
service to the user(s).
Enabled The resource is partially or fully operable and
available for use.
- Alarm status
The parameter Alarm status can indicate the
occurrence of:
1. an alarm condition, which will be notified and will be included into the
balance of the Alarm Balance Monitor.
2. a pending alarm condition which will neither be notified
nor included into the balance of the Alarm Balance Monitor. .
3. the highest alarm priority of active alarm conditions,
if more than one alarm condition is active for a unit.
The order of alarm priority from highest to lowest is:
- critical,
- major,
- minor,
- indeterminate,
- warning,
- active pending,
- cleared.
- Current problem list
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CONTMON : [TCS ID=] [,VPI=] [,VP TTP ID=] [,VCI=] [
[ [
[ [,Flow Direction=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONTMON- 1+
DISP CONTMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
If this parameter is entered, parameter TCS ID is mandatory.
Input format:
0...4095, range of decimal numbers
VP TTP ID
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP) within the network
element (NE).
It can be used only if VPI is assigned
This parameter is given in alarm notifications.
If this parameter is entered, parameter TCS ID is mandatory.
VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
If this parameter is entered, parameter TCS ID is mandatory.
Input format:
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
Flow Direction
The flowDirection attribute indicate in which direction the
monitoring is made, in relation to the TP by which the monitor object
is named. The value outOfSwitch means that the monitored flow extends
from TP toward the network. The value inToSwitch means that monitored
flow extends from TP into the cross-connect.
If this parameter is entered, parameter TCS ID is mandatory.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CONTMON- 2-
MOD CONTMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Continuity Monitor
This task modifies a Continuity monitor.
The Continuity monitor models a Continuity Check (CC) OAM flow.
It represents the termination of a VC segment OAM flow.
The Continuity monitor provides a source mechanism
and a sink mechanism which can be activated separately by setting the parameters
Source active respectively Sink active to TRUE.
To monitor a VC segment, a continuity monitor must be present on each segment
endpoint.
When the parameter Sink active is TRUE and the VC
is detected as disrupted, a communications alarm with the probable cause
set to Communications subsystem failure is issued.
Prerequistes:
To activate the source mechanism or the sink mechanism, the
- VCs Admin. state must be Unlocked
- VCs Operational state must be Enabled
Inputparameter:
- TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
- VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value present in
the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value present
in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
- Flow Direction
The flowDirection attribute indicate in which direction the
monitoring is made, in relation to the TP by which the monitor object
is named. The value outOfSwitch means that the monitored flow extends
from TP toward the network. The value inToSwitch means that monitored
flow extends from TP into the cross-connect.
- Source active
This parameter indicates whether the generation of the continuity check OAM
flow is active.
It may be set to TRUE only if the current value is FALSE and vice versa.
- Sink active
This parameter indicates whether the processing of the continuity check OAM
flow is active.
It may be set to TRUE only if the current value is FALSE and vice versa.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD CONTMON : TCS ID= ,VPI= ,VCI= ,Flow Direction= [
[ [
[ [,Source active=] [,Sink active=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TCS ID
This parameter identifies the transmission convergence sublayer (TCS).
VPI
This parameter identifies the virtual path (VP). It is the VPI value
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
Input format:
0...4095, range of decimal numbers
VCI
This parameter identifies the virtual channel (VC). It is the VCI value
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONTMON- 1+
MOD CONTMON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
present in the header
of the corresponding ATM cells.
Input format:
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
Flow Direction
The flowDirection attribute indicate in which direction the
monitoring is made, in relation to the TP by which the monitor object
is named. The value outOfSwitch means that the monitored flow extends
from TP toward the network. The value inToSwitch means that monitored
flow extends from TP into the cross-connect.
Source active
This parameter indicates whether the generation of the continuity check
OAM
flow is active.
It may be set to TRUE only if the current value is FALSE and vice versa.
Sink active
This parameter indicates whether the processing of the continuity check
OAM
flow is active.
It may be set to TRUE only if the current value is FALSE and vice versa.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CONTMON- 2-
CONF COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURATE CONFERENCE UNIT
This command configures a conference unit to one of the states
PLA, MBL, ACT or CBL.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF COU : LTG= ,COU= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
This parameter specifies the unit number in an LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
The following state transitions are permitted:
MBL <-> PLA
MBL --> ACT
MBL <-- ACT (when the LTG is not active)
ACT <-> CBL
UNA --> ACT, MBL, CBL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF COU- 1-
DIAG COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CONFERENCE UNIT
This command starts diagnosis of a conference unit in an LTG.
Precondition: the LTG must be in the operating status
ACT or CBL and the associated COU must be in the
operating status MBL.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG COU : LTG= ,COU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG COU- 1-
STAT COU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CONFERENCE UNIT
This command displays the operating status of
- one COU in a certain LTG
- one COU in all LTGs
- all COUs in a particular LTG
- all COUs in all LTGs
- all COUs in a particular operating status in a particular
LTG
- all COUs in a particular operating status in all LTGs
For the parameter LTG a value or X must always be entered.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT COU : LTG= [,COU=] [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
COU CONFERENCE UNIT
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
UNA UNAVAILABLE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT COU- 1-
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD COORDINATION PROCESSOR
This command initiates recording of CP traffic data (total load and
callprocessing load).
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- Only one measurement job can be started.
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY OR CYCLIC.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC CP : [INTTIM=] ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INTTIM INTEGRATION TIME
This parameter specifies the time over which the load values are
to be averaged (integrated).
If output is to the OMT, it is not permissible to enter SEC4.
Default: MIN3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEC4 4 SECONDS
SEC36 36 SECONDS
MIN1 1 MINUTE
MIN3 3 MINUTES
MIN5 5 MINUTES
MIN15 15 MINUTES
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC CP- 1+
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
CYCLIC CYCLIC TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for
these measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full, the newest
data will be lost. This occurs
after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily or single or cyclic measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC CP- 2+
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC CP- 3+
REC CP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC CP- 4-
ACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP DUMP CONDITIONS
This command activates a dump condition with specification of CP core storage
address range. The CP dump conditions are activated upon command entry.
This command is normally logged.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [RADDR=[ [
[ ACT CPDMPC : AADDR= [,SWSG=] [,UNIT=] [,MODULE=] [,COUNT=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,LEVEL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RADDR RELATIVE ADDRESS
Only 5 address ranges are allowed
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: MODULE NAME=
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit allows only alphanumeric characters.
b: OFFSET=
0...7FFFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
AADDR ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
Only 5 address ranges are allowed
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...10 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SWSG SWSG IDENTIFICATION
For a SWSG number less than 128
a module name must be specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...999, range of decimal numbers
UNIT CP PROCESSOR UNIT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
BAPM MASTER BASE PROCESSOR
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CPDMPC- 1+
ACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BAPS SPARE BASE PROCESSOR
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
MODULE MODULE NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
COUNT TERMINATION COUNT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
LEVEL RECOVERY LEVEL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NSTART3 NEWSTART WITH CODE LOAD
NSTART2 NEWSTART WITH SEMIDATA LOAD
NSTART1 NEWSTART OF ALL PROCESSES
SASDATS SAVING SW DATA WITH STATISTICS
SASDAT SAVING SW DATA W/O STATISTICS
NSTART0 NEWSTART NON CALLPROS. GROUP
The only non-call-processing processes
are restarted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CPDMPC- 2-
DACT CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CONDITIONAL CPDUMP
This command deactivates conditions set in the dump condition list.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT CPDMPC : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the deactivation conditions.
Note:
- Up to 10 information units can be linked with &.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...20, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CPDMPC- 1-
DISP CPDMPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CONDITIONAL CPDUMP
This command displays the conditional CP dump addresses and conditions
as well as their present state.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CPDMPC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPDMPC- 1-
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of CP
platforms or of the corresponding load library on system disk.
If UNIT = DISK is entered, the specified address range to be
dumped will be read from load library.
To dump contents of a platforms memory, select the appropriate
platform using parameter PLF.
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped,
or, in case of a dump of memory, chained lists of data.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [PLF= [ [
[ DMP CPIMDMP : UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,CHOFFS=] [,CHNO=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
This parameter specifies the system unit.
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the CP loadlib
at the specified address range will be performed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISK REQUEST READ FROM DISK
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CPIMDMP- 1+
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter defines the address (range) of the memory
content to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either an address range is entered with ADDR,
or, if only the start address is given, you have to specify
the length of the dump using parameter LENGTH.
In case of dumping chained elements (a linked list), only
a start address has to be specified, the length of each
chained element has to be entered via parameter LENGTH.
Following inputs are possible:
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e capsule,
SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters each), plus a
distance within the module
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter "H" and a
single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
Notes:
module names have to be entered always in combination with
the corresponding SPU names.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name (i.e.
the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
- Address ranges must be specified by entering the start address
and the upper limit, separated by "&&".
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The capsule name has to be entered with the start address only and
must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
The upper limit of an address range may be specified in
relation to the lower limit in the following way:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HCF"
The second address is interpreted as number of bytes to be dumped if
it begins with the character plus ("+").
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label is
preceded by the letter "L" and a single quote:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0"&&"+H28"
- Indirect dump can be specified by a begin address: It contains
a pointer which indicates the real start address preceded by
the letters "IN" and a single quote:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CPIMDMP- 2+
DMP CPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g.: ADDR="INCAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C+H8"
Up to 5 different address ranges may be entered, concatenated by "&".
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LENGTH LENGTH OF CHAINED ELEMENT
This parameter provides the length of a single chained
element of a linked list, or, in case of a linear dump,
the number of bytes which shall be dumped if only a start
address is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CHOFFS OFFSET OF POINTER TO NEXT ELE.
This parameter specifies the offset of the link pointer
to the next element within the chained (linked) list to
be dumped.
The memory location of this pointer is the begin address
of the current chained element plus the offset defined by
CHOFFS.
Notes:
- a dump of a linked list is specified by the corresponding
parameters LENGTH, CHOFFS, and CHNO.
- chained elements can only be dumped from CP memory and not
from system disk.
- all pointers of the chained list must have the same
offset within their corresponding chained elements.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
CHNO NUMBER OF CHAINED ELEMENTS
This parameter specifies the number of chained elements to be
dumped. If the current linked list contains less elements than
the value specified, only the current number of chained elements
will be dumped.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...50, range of decimal numbers
Default: 50
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the format type of the output.
If HEX is chosen an output in hexadecimal form will be
produced, in case of ASCII the output will contain ASCII
characters additionally to the hex output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HEX HEXADECIMAL OUTPUT
SYMBOL SYMBOLIC OUTPUT
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CPIMDMP- 3-
ACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action AM (Activate in Memory) in
parallel on all respective platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT CPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CPPRPCH- 1+
ACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CPPRPCH- 2-
CAN CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Permanent
Patches on disk implicitly deactivating them in the memory on all
platforms in operation. Successful execution of the command
results in execution of the atomic actions DUD
(Deupdate on Disk), DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CD (Cancel
on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CPPRPCH : ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CPPRPCH- 1-
DACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic actions DUD (Deupdate on Disk) and
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) in parallel on all respective
platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT CPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CPPRPCH- 1+
DACT CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CPPRPCH- 2-
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on disk and patch states concerning
Permanent Patches for all platform(s) in operation specified
by parameter PLF.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ID= [ [
[ DISP CPPRPCH : ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified capsule and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname" or
ID="capsname.*" or
ID="capsname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 1+
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"offset+distance", where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 2+
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 3+
DISP CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOTENTER NEITHER ENTERING NOR ENTERED
HIT HIT
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
NOTUPD OTHER THAN UPDATED
PARTACT PARTLY ACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
UPD UPDATED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPPRPCH- 4-
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Permanent Patch into the
patch administration on disk. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic action ED (Enter on
Disk).
With each ENTR CPPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatch types can be entered:
- Insert Rucksack Subpatches using parameter INSRADDR
- Replace Subpatches using parameter REPADDR
- Insert Procedure Subpatches using parameter INSPREF
- Insert Variable Subpatches using parameter INSVREF
The subpatch types can be entered in the form of subpatches
belonging to a specified Patch ID. Under one specified Patch ID
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR CPPRPCH command is
necessary.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO.
All Subpatches with the exception of Insert Variable can be
entered in subpatch parts for each part using an individual
ENTR CPPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Procedure Subpatches are referred to the same patch address.
The concatenation of those subpatch parts is supported by
means of parameter SUBPPART.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,INSRADDR=[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CPPRPCH : ID= ,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= [
[ [,INSVREF= [ [
[ [,SUBPCHNO=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,OLDCNT=]] [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
subpatch part is entered for a certain patch the identifier
must be identical.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSRADDR INSERT RUCKSACK SUBPATCH ADDR.
This parameter provides the insert rucksack subpatch
address. The address format is an interval within the
module boundaries in the form of begin address and end
address (linked by &&) whereby the latter may be given as a
distance relative to the begin address. At the begin address
the instruction is replaced by a branch instruction for jumping
to the respective rucksack. The end address serves as
continuation address from which the program will continue
after the rucksack code has been executed.
The old instruction (6 Byte), overwritten by the branch
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 1+
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
instruction, is at users own risk to add to the rucksack
or not.
An address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
INSRADDR="offset+distance" or
INSRADDR="label+distance",
&&"spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"label+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address, where address can
be specified in the same way as described for the first part
of INSRADDR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSPREF INSERT PROCED. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert procedure subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert procedure.
The inserted procedure is only visible within the defining
patch. The number <n> serves to address the inserted
procedure within other subpatches of the defining patch.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSVREF INSERT VARIAB. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert variable subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert variable and the length of the variable in bytes.
The inserted variable is only visible within the defining
patch.
e.g.: INSVREF="IV5"-50
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: "INSERT VARIABLE" SUBPATCH REFERENCE=
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 2+
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit serves to address the inserted variable
within other subpatches of the defining patch.
b: LENGTH OF INSERT VARIABLE IN BYTES=
1...4096, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the length of the variable to be
declared.
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR CPPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...59, range of decimal numbers
SUBPPART ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART
This parameter characterizes a part of a subpatch. A subpatch
of a Permanent Patch may, for some reason, have more than one
part in the case of Insert Rucksack Subpatch, Permanent
Replace Subpatch, or Insert Procedure Subpatch.
e.g.: SUBPPART="partcounter-lastsign"
The partcounter denotes the subpatch part sequence number
and serves as concatenation controller.
The lastsign denotes either the last or not last part of a
subpatch.
If SUBPPART is omitted, e.g., typical proceeding in case
of a short subpatch consisting of only one part, the default
value 1-LAST is assumed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART TO BE ENTERED=
1...999, range of decimal numbers
This unit denotes the subpatch part sequence number.
b: INDICATOR THAT LAST PART OF SUBPATCH IS ENTERED
NOTLAST NOT LAST SUBPATCH PART
LAST LAST SUBPATCH PART
This unit denotes either last or not last part.
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
Must not be used for Insert Variable or Insert Procedure
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 3+
ENTR CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CPPRPCH- 4-
UPD CPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE CP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can update one or more Permanent
Patches on disk, whereby they are implicitly activated in
memory on all active platforms. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic actions
AM (Activate in Memory) and UD (Update on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ UPD CPPRPCH : ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 UPD CPPRPCH- 1-
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE POINT
This command cancels the specified code point. Call attempts to the canceled
code point will be diverted to the specified intercept code.
Prerequisites :
- If the code point was created with special codes
MFCAT (MFC CATEGORY),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT),
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE),
ORIG1 (ORIGINATING MARK 1) or
LAC (LOCAL AREA CODE)
these without their positions within the digit combination must be
specified when the code point is to be canceled.
- Any code blocking (CR CBPT), trunk reservation (ENTR TRSVCRIT),
destination (REC DEST) or code measurement (ENTR NTMINFO) that is
existing for the code point, or part of the code point to be canceled,
should be canceled first, because no checks are done.
An indication of whether other code points or test points use the
destination area of the canceled code point is output.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CPT : CODE= [,INCEPT=] [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,ANNDIG=[[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,TXTNO= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
canceled. If the code point was created with special codes then these
have to be entered to define the code point uniquely.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter determines the intercept code to which call attempts
will be diverted. If the intercept UNOBDE0 is entered, the code
point will be deleted completely. If no value is entered, the value
UNOBDE0 is used by default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
UNOBDE0 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 00
UNOBDE1 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
UNOBDE2 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 02
UNOBDE3 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 03
UNOBDE4 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 04
UNOBDE5 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 05
UNOBDE6 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 06
UNOBDE7 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 07
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CPT- 1+
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
ILLDEST ILLEGAL DESTINATION
UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
UNOBDE13 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 13
CHCPTIND CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
RESANN RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
Unit b must be specified.
b: RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
0...9, range of decimal numbers
This parameter determines the number of the reserve
user announcement intercept.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
COINB COIN BOX
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CPT- 2+
CAN CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
ROUTYP1 ROUTE TYPE 01
ROUTYP2 ROUTE TYPE 02
ROUTYP3 ROUTE TYPE 03
ROUTYP4 ROUTE TYPE 04
ROUTYP5 ROUTE TYPE 05
ROUTYP6 ROUTE TYPE 06
ROUTYP7 ROUTE TYPE 07
ROUTYP8 ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
ROUTYP10 ROUTE TYPE 10
ROUTYP11 ROUTE TYPE 11
ROUTYP12 ROUTE TYPE 12
ROUTYP13 ROUTE TYPE 13
ROUTYP14 ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
ANNDIG INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT
This parameter specifies the number of the text to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = RESANN-X.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CPT- 3-
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE POINT
This command creates a code point, i.e. a destination is defined for the
specified digit combination. All digit combinations that are not created
as code points, test points or as subscriber controlled input access codes
are diverted to the UNOBDE0 intercept code.
According to the entered code and the special codes
LAC (LOCAL AREA CODE),
ORIG1 (ORIGINATING MARK 1),
MFCAT (MFC CATEGORY),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT) or
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE)
the blocks are seized in the digit-destination translator. If no position is
input, the special code is attached at the end of the code or, if there is
already such a special code existing for the desired code, the existing position
is used. However, it is possible to determine the positions of the special codes
freely within the digit combination. The last block in the digit chain contains
the reference to the destination.
It is possible to create a code point for a ported directory number
by extending an existing digit chain. For example:
CR CPT:CODE=1234, DEST=A;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, LAC=089, TRATYP=CPTDN;
Using the special code ORIG1 the following must be considered:
- Creating a code point with ORIG1=DEF has the same effect for call
processing as entering up to 3840 code points with ORIG1=0 through to
ORIG1=3839. So a code point with ORIG1=DEF stands for all code points
(with the same CODE) which are not explicitly created with a specific
ORIG1-value.
Example: CODE=12345, split by origination as follows:
For the origination value 10 the digit translation shall lead to
destination A, for value 200 to destination B, for all other values
to destination C.
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=10, DEST=A;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=200, DEST=B;
CR CPT:CODE=12345, ORIG1=DEF, DEST=C;
These commands may be entered in any sequence. Instead of 3840
commands now only 3 commands are needed.
Using ORIG1=DEF, the position of this special code should be at the end of
the code. All exceptional code points must be entered, specially those,
which shall lead to an intercept.
Compatibilities:
- The parameter LAC is only allowed if the DN-attribute (see ENTR DNATT) is
multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number block
(i.e. TRATYP=CPTDN).
- Before entering code points beginning with a carrier access code,
the carrier access code must be defined first (see CR CAC).
These code points may only lead to a destination or an intercept.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR CPT - DEST CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
2. CR CPT - INCEPT CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
3. CR CPT - TRATYP CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
1. Input format
CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
If the code point to the specified destination area should be non barrable
NBARCPT must be entered for the parameter TRATYP.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 1+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Additional prerequisites :
- The destination area must already exist in the destination area table
(see CR DEST).

[ [
[ CR CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ROUTYP=] <,TRATYP=> [,SYMCON=] [,AMA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
The parameter CODE determines the digits for which the code point
is created. In addition to the selected digits, special codes can also
be entered in order to determine the destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area selected by the digit
combination. The specified destination area must exist with at least
one route or be created with a new code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Input is only permitted if the directory number attribute of the
exchange is multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number
block. The use of this parameter may affect the value of the parameter
MINMAX (see CR DEST). The operator has to take care for a
correct value of the parameter MINMAX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...6 digit decimal number
b: POSITION OF LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the local area code
in the digit combination.
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 2+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the origin code
in the digit combination.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[ [ own mobile subscriber
[CAT12 [ CATEGORY 12
[ [ foreign mobile subscriber
[CAT13 [ CATEGORY 13
[ [ fixed mobile subscriber
[CAT14 [ CATEGORY 14
[CAT15 [ CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
[DATAINAT[ DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
[DATRANS [ DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
[OPOS [ OPERATORS POSITION
[OPOSINAT[ OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
[SUBINAT [ ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBORD [ ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
[SUBPINAT[ PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBPRIOR[ PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the category in the digit
combination.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the language digit
in the digit combination.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ROUTE TYPE
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
[ [ The origin of the call is an actual trunk which
[ [ does not benefit from transition into ISDN. The
[ [ call should be held by conventional means.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 3+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ROUTYP1 [ ROUTE TYPE 01
[ROUTYP10[ ROUTE TYPE 10
[ROUTYP11[ ROUTE TYPE 11
[ROUTYP12[ ROUTE TYPE 12
[ROUTYP13[ ROUTE TYPE 13
[ROUTYP14[ ROUTE TYPE 14
[ROUTYP15[ ROUTE TYPE 15
[ROUTYP2 [ ROUTE TYPE 02
[ROUTYP3 [ ROUTE TYPE 03
[ [ A call of an ISDN subscriber for which a
[ [ transition into the analog network is permitted
(on the telephone service). These calls should as
[ [ far as possible be held in ISDN to guarantee a
[ [ defined handling of service features. A transition
[ [ to a conventional line is only advisable if no
[ [ ISDN line exists for the selected direction.
[ROUTYP4 [ ROUTE TYPE 04
[ [ A call of an ISDN subscriber for which a
[ [ transition into the analog network is not
[ [ permitted (in the non-telephone service). These
[ [ calls must be held in ISDN as they cannot be
[ [ handled in the analog network. The corresponding
[ [ destination may therefore only contain ISDN
[ [ routes.
[ROUTYP5 [ ROUTE TYPE 05
[ROUTYP6 [ ROUTE TYPE 06
[ROUTYP7 [ ROUTE TYPE 07
[ROUTYP8 [ ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
b: POSITION OF ROUTE TYPE=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the ROUTE TYPE
in the digit combination.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter indicates the traffic type for the code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ASCITERM ASCI TERMINATING
[ITGW [ INTERNET GATEWAY
[ [ This parameter value indicates that the code
[ [ point leads to an access point for internet
[ [ telephony. It can only be entered in addition
[ [ to the parameter DEST.
[MOBBOTH [ MOBILE BOTH
[MOBHAND [ MOBILE HANDOVER
MOBINTER MOBILE INTERROGATION
[MOBPHA [ MOBILE PACKET A
[MOBPHB [ MOBILE PACKET B
[MOBTERM [ MOBILE TERMINATING
[NBARCPT [ NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
[SELCWROU[ SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call with routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk within the trunk group is
[ [ determined by the digit combination selected.
[VBS [ VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
SYMCON SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
This parameter indicates whether the connection is symmetric or
not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
NO NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
[Y [ YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
YES YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 4+
CR CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This parameter specifies if charging data will be collected
at the specified code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
[NO [ NO AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
[Y [ AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
!YES - AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
Default: N
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 5+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
The call requests for the specified code are diverted to the intercept code.

[ [
[ CR CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,ANNDIG=[[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,TXTNO= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
The parameter CODE determines the digits for which the code point
is created. In addition to the selected digits, special codes can also
be entered in order to determine the destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected by the code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
CHCPTIND CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
[ILLDEST [ ILLEGAL DESTINATION
[RESANN [ RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
[ [ Unit b must be specified.
[UNALLROU[ UNALLOCATED ROUTE
[UNOBDE1 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
[UNOBDE10[ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
[UNOBDE11[ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
[UNOBDE13[ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 13
[UNOBDE2 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 02
[UNOBDE3 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 03
[UNOBDE4 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 04
[UNOBDE5 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 05
[UNOBDE6 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 06
[UNOBDE7 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 07
[UNOBDE8 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
b: RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
0...9, range of decimal numbers
This parameter determines the number of the reserve
user announcement intercept.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Input is only permitted if the directory number attribute of the
exchange is multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number
block. The use of this parameter may affect the value of the parameter
MINMAX (see CR DEST). The operator has to take care for a
correct value of the parameter MINMAX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 6+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...6 digit decimal number
b: POSITION OF LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the local area code
in the digit combination.
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the origin code
in the digit combination.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[ [ own mobile subscriber
[CAT12 [ CATEGORY 12
[ [ foreign mobile subscriber
[CAT13 [ CATEGORY 13
[ [ fixed mobile subscriber
[CAT14 [ CATEGORY 14
[CAT15 [ CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
[DATAINAT[ DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
[DATRANS [ DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
[OPOS [ OPERATORS POSITION
[OPOSINAT[ OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
[SUBINAT [ ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBORD [ ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
[SUBPINAT[ PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBPRIOR[ PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the category in the digit
combination.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 7+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the language digit
in the digit combination.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ROUTE TYPE
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
[ [ The origin of the call is an actual trunk which
[ [ does not benefit from transition into ISDN. The
[ [ call should be held by conventional means.
[ROUTYP1 [ ROUTE TYPE 01
[ROUTYP10[ ROUTE TYPE 10
[ROUTYP11[ ROUTE TYPE 11
[ROUTYP12[ ROUTE TYPE 12
[ROUTYP13[ ROUTE TYPE 13
[ROUTYP14[ ROUTE TYPE 14
[ROUTYP15[ ROUTE TYPE 15
[ROUTYP2 [ ROUTE TYPE 02
[ROUTYP3 [ ROUTE TYPE 03
[ [ A call of an ISDN subscriber for which a
[ [ transition into the analog network is permitted
(on the telephone service). These calls should as
[ [ far as possible be held in ISDN to guarantee a
[ [ defined handling of service features. A transition
[ [ to a conventional line is only advisable if no
[ [ ISDN line exists for the selected direction.
[ROUTYP4 [ ROUTE TYPE 04
[ [ A call of an ISDN subscriber for which a
[ [ transition into the analog network is not
[ [ permitted (in the non-telephone service). These
[ [ calls must be held in ISDN as they cannot be
[ [ handled in the analog network. The corresponding
[ [ destination may therefore only contain ISDN
[ [ routes.
[ROUTYP5 [ ROUTE TYPE 05
[ROUTYP6 [ ROUTE TYPE 06
[ROUTYP7 [ ROUTE TYPE 07
[ROUTYP8 [ ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
b: POSITION OF ROUTE TYPE=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the ROUTE TYPE
in the digit combination.
ANNDIG INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT
This parameter specifies the number of the text to be announced.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 8+
CR CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT = RESANN-X.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 9+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
These code points must be entered first.
Additional prerequisites :
- If the code point refers to a directory number block, this must exist
(see CR DN).
- If the code point refers to an intelligent network service, this
service trigger table must exist (see CR INTRIG).

[ [
[ CR CPT : CODE= ,TRATYP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,PROVNAM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
The parameter CODE determines the digits for which the code point
is created. In addition to the selected digits, special codes can also
be entered in order to determine the destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter indicates the traffic type for the code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
CLOCKTST CLOCK TEST
[CPTDN [ CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
[ [ Code point to a directory number.
[IACBPROC[ INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
[IN [ INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
[ [ Code point for intelligent network service.
[ [ Units b and c must be specified.
[MOBPROV [ MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER
[ [ Parameter PROVNAM must be specified.
PHONMEET PHONE MEETING
[ [ Unit b must be specified.
[RADIOSUB[ RADIO SUBSCRIBER
[SELCWORO[ SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call without routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk is determined directly by the
[ [ digit combination selected.
[TOLLFRNO[ TOLL FREE NUMBER
[ [ Code point for tollfree service. Unit b must be
[ [ specified.
TWOPARTY TWO PARTY LINE
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Unit a = TOLLFRNO: 0-9
Length of the tollfree service directory number.
Unit a = PHONMEET: 0-99
Telephone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN: 0-15
Length of the IN subscriber number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 10+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Unit a = IACBPROC: 0-15
Length of the call back service directory number.
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
1...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
Possible input values:
Unit a = IN: Name of the IN service.
The name of the IN service specified in the command
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID) must be entered.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Input is only permitted if the directory number attribute of the
exchange is multiple or if the code point indicates a directory number
block. The use of this parameter may affect the value of the parameter
MINMAX (see CR DEST). The operator has to take care for a
correct value of the parameter MINMAX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...6 digit decimal number
b: POSITION OF LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the local area code
in the digit combination.
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the origin code
in the digit combination.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[ [ own mobile subscriber
[CAT12 [ CATEGORY 12
[ [ foreign mobile subscriber
[CAT13 [ CATEGORY 13
[ [ fixed mobile subscriber
[CAT14 [ CATEGORY 14
[CAT15 [ CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
[DATAINAT[ DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 11+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[DATRANS [ DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
[OPOS [ OPERATORS POSITION
[OPOSINAT[ OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
[SUBINAT [ ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBORD [ ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
[SUBPINAT[ PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBPRIOR[ PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the category in the digit
combination.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the language digit
in the digit combination.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ROUTE TYPE
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
[ [ The origin of the call is an actual trunk which
[ [ does not benefit from transition into ISDN. The
[ [ call should be held by conventional means.
[ROUTYP1 [ ROUTE TYPE 01
[ROUTYP10[ ROUTE TYPE 10
[ROUTYP11[ ROUTE TYPE 11
[ROUTYP12[ ROUTE TYPE 12
[ROUTYP13[ ROUTE TYPE 13
[ROUTYP14[ ROUTE TYPE 14
[ROUTYP15[ ROUTE TYPE 15
[ROUTYP2 [ ROUTE TYPE 02
[ROUTYP3 [ ROUTE TYPE 03
[ [ A call of an ISDN subscriber for which a
[ [ transition into the analog network is permitted
(on the telephone service). These calls should as
[ [ far as possible be held in ISDN to guarantee a
[ [ defined handling of service features. A transition
[ [ to a conventional line is only advisable if no
[ [ ISDN line exists for the selected direction.
[ROUTYP4 [ ROUTE TYPE 04
[ [ A call of an ISDN subscriber for which a
[ [ transition into the analog network is not
[ [ permitted (in the non-telephone service). These
[ [ calls must be held in ISDN as they cannot be
[ [ handled in the analog network. The corresponding
[ [ destination may therefore only contain ISDN
[ [ routes.
[ROUTYP5 [ ROUTE TYPE 05
[ROUTYP6 [ ROUTE TYPE 06
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 12+
CR CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ROUTYP7 [ ROUTE TYPE 07
[ROUTYP8 [ ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
b: POSITION OF ROUTE TYPE=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the ROUTE TYPE
in the digit combination.
PROVNAM SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the service provider. It may
only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CPT- 13-
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE POINT
This command displays the data related to the specified code point(s).
The displayed data may be restricted to certain code points by specifying
parameters CODE, ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG, ROUTYP or LAC.
Examples: DISP CPT: CODE=X; (show all masks)
DISP CPT: DEST=X,CODE=12; (code and type restricted)
DISP CPT: DEST=MUNICH; (destination restricted)
DISP CPT: PROVNAM=ABCDEF; (provider name restricted)
If X is entered for ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG, ROUTYP or LAC, only
those objects are displayed that have a valid value for this parameter.
The parameters DEST, TRATYP, INCEPT and PROVNAM may be specified
at the same time, then all related masks will be displayed. If none of these
parameters is entered, all data will be displayed.
After successful execution of the command, the command text is repeated
and all data is output within a table.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CPT : [CODE=] [,DEST=] [,INCEPT=] [,TRATYP=] [,PROVNAM=] [
[ [
[ [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter restricts the code points to be displayed. Only code
points that begin with the entered digits will be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area.
Only objects matching this destination will be displayed.
Compatibilities:
- If destination area is specified together with parameter
CODE, then DEST=X must be entered.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the intercept code.
Only objects matching this intercept code will be displayed.
Compatibilities:
- If intercept code is specified together with parameter
CODE then INCEPT=X must be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPT- 1+
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE1 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
UNOBDE2 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 02
UNOBDE3 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 03
UNOBDE4 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 04
UNOBDE5 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 05
UNOBDE6 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 06
UNOBDE7 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 07
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
ILLDEST ILLEGAL DESTINATION
UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
UNOBDE13 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 13
CHCPTIND CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
RESANN RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
X ALL VALUES
b: RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
0...9, range of decimal numbers
This parameter determines the number of the reserve user
announcement intercept. If this parameter is not entered
all reserve user announcement intercepts are output.
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the traffic type.
Only objects matching this traffic type will be displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
X ALL VALUES
NBARCPT NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
TOLLFRNO TOLL FREE NUMBER
SELCWROU SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
SELCWORO SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
MOBBOTH MOBILE BOTH
RADIOSUB RADIO SUBSCRIBER
MOBPROV MOBILE PROVIDER
CLOCKTST CLOCK TEST
PHONMEET PHONE MEETING
TWOPARTY TWO PARTY LINE
CPTDN CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
MOBINTER MOBILE INTERROGATION
MOBTERM MOBILE TERMINATING
MOBHAND MOBILE HANDOVER
IN INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
MOBPHA MOBILE PACKET A
MOBPHB MOBILE PACKET B
IACBPROC INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
ITGW INTERNET GATEWAY
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
ASCITERM ASCI TERMINATING
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Unit a = PHONMEET : 0-99
Phone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN : 0-15
Length of the IN subscriber number.
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
1...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPT- 2+
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Possible input values:
Unit a = IN : Name of the IN service.
The name of the IN service specified in the command
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID).
PROVNAM PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the provider name.
Compatibilities:
- If provider name is specified together with parameter
CODE, then PROVNAM=X must be entered.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered. Only objects matching this parameter value may
be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
Only objects matching this parameter value may
be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
COINB COIN BOX
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
X ALL VALUES
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
Only objects matching this parameter value may be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPT- 3+
DISP CPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
Only objects matching this parameter value may be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
ROUTYP1 ROUTE TYPE 01
ROUTYP2 ROUTE TYPE 02
ROUTYP3 ROUTE TYPE 03
ROUTYP4 ROUTE TYPE 04
ROUTYP5 ROUTE TYPE 05
ROUTYP6 ROUTE TYPE 06
ROUTYP7 ROUTE TYPE 07
ROUTYP8 ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
ROUTYP10 ROUTE TYPE 10
ROUTYP11 ROUTE TYPE 11
ROUTYP12 ROUTE TYPE 12
ROUTYP13 ROUTE TYPE 13
ROUTYP14 ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
X ALL VALUES
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Only objects matching this parameter value may be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPT- 4-
MERGE CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE CODE POINT
This command merges parallel code points. The existing code points and their
destinations are cancelled and a new code point is created with the specified
destination (destination area, intercept code).
Parallel code points are code points whose last digits differ or code points
which have one of the following special codes at the end of the digit string:
ORIG1, (ORIGINATING MARK 1),
MFCAT (MFC CATEGORY),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT),
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE).
Prerequisites:
- At least two code points to be merged must refer to a destination or
intercept code other than UNOBDE0.
- When merging by a digit, the entered code must be one digit shorter than
the code points to be merged.
- When merging by a special code, the entire code must be entered.
- Before using this command, the operator has to verify that no traffic
measurement job is running for the digit combination to be merged.
An indication of whether other code points or test points still use the
destination areas of the merged code points is output.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MERGE CPT - DEST MERGE CPT WITH DEST
2. MERGE CPT - INCEPT MERGE CPT WITH INCEPT
1. Input format
MERGE CPT WITH DEST
This input format describes the merging of code points with DEST.

[ [
[ MERGE CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area selected by the digit
combination. The specified destination area must exist with at
least one route or be created with a new code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE CPT- 1+
MERGE CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code of the code
points to be merged. only decimal numbers, range 0..3839,
and the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the code
points to be merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATORS POS.
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies the language digit of the code
points to be merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic of the code
points to be merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
ROUTYP1 ROUTE TYPE 01
ROUTYP10 ROUTE TYPE 10
ROUTYP11 ROUTE TYPE 11
ROUTYP12 ROUTE TYPE 12
ROUTYP13 ROUTE TYPE 13
ROUTYP14 ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
ROUTYP2 ROUTE TYPE 02
ROUTYP3 ROUTE TYPE 03
ROUTYP4 ROUTE TYPE 04
ROUTYP5 ROUTE TYPE 05
ROUTYP6 ROUTE TYPE 06
ROUTYP7 ROUTE TYPE 07
ROUTYP8 ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE CPT- 2+
MERGE CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MERGE CPT WITH INCEPT
This input format describes merging of code points with INCEPT.

[ [
[ MERGE CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ILLDEST ILLEGAL DESTINATION
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
UNOBDE1 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
UNOBDE13 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 13
UNOBDE2 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 02
UNOBDE3 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 03
UNOBDE4 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 04
UNOBDE5 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 05
UNOBDE6 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 06
UNOBDE7 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 07
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code of the code
points to be merged. only decimal numbers, range 0..3839,
and the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the code
points to be merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE CPT- 3+
MERGE CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATORS POS.
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies the language digit of the code
points to be merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic of the code
points to be merged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
ROUTYP1 ROUTE TYPE 01
ROUTYP10 ROUTE TYPE 10
ROUTYP11 ROUTE TYPE 11
ROUTYP12 ROUTE TYPE 12
ROUTYP13 ROUTE TYPE 13
ROUTYP14 ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
ROUTYP2 ROUTE TYPE 02
ROUTYP3 ROUTE TYPE 03
ROUTYP4 ROUTE TYPE 04
ROUTYP5 ROUTE TYPE 05
ROUTYP6 ROUTE TYPE 06
ROUTYP7 ROUTE TYPE 07
ROUTYP8 ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE CPT- 4-
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CODE POINT
This command modifies the destination for the specified code point. If the code
point is created with special codes
ORIG1 (ORIGINATING MARK 1),
MFCAT (MFC CATEGORY),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT) or
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE)
then the special codes must also be specified in order to define the particular
point uniquely.
If the code point is created for a particular local network, the local area code
(LAC) must be specified.
An indication of whether other code points or test points use the old
destination area of the modified code point is output.
Prerequisites:
- The code point specified by the digit combination must exist.
Compatibilities:
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD CPT - DEST CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
2. MOD CPT - INCEPT CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
3. MOD CPT - TRATYP CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
1. Input format
CPT TO DESTINATION AREA
The destination of the code point is modified to specified destination
area, or the data for specific destination area is modified.
Additional prerequisites :
- The code point to the old destination area specified by the digit
combination must exist.
- The new destination area must already exist in the destination
area table (see CR DEST).

[ [
[ MOD CPT : CODE= ,DEST= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ROUTYP=] <,TRATYP=> [,SYMCON=] [,AMA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
modified. Special codes have to be entered to define the code point
uniquely.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination area selected by the
digit combination. The specified destination area must exist with at
least one route or must be created with a new code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 1+
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the destination
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[ [ own mobile subscriber
[CAT12 [ CATEGORY 12
[ [ foreign mobile subscriber
[CAT13 [ CATEGORY 13
[ [ fixed mobile subscriber
[CAT14 [ CATEGORY 14
[CAT15 [ CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
[DATAINAT[ DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
[DATRANS [ DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
[OPOS [ OPERATORS POSITION
[OPOSINAT[ OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
[SUBINAT [ ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBORD [ ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
[SUBPINAT[ PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBPRIOR[ PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination
is addressed.
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 2+
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIM. Z-DIGIT=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
The parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
[ROUTYP1 [ ROUTE TYPE 01
[ROUTYP10[ ROUTE TYPE 10
[ROUTYP11[ ROUTE TYPE 11
[ROUTYP12[ ROUTE TYPE 12
[ROUTYP13[ ROUTE TYPE 13
[ROUTYP14[ ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
[ROUTYP2 [ ROUTE TYPE 02
[ROUTYP3 [ ROUTE TYPE 03
[ROUTYP4 [ ROUTE TYPE 04
[ROUTYP5 [ ROUTE TYPE 05
[ROUTYP6 [ ROUTE TYPE 06
[ROUTYP7 [ ROUTE TYPE 07
[ROUTYP8 [ ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter indicates the traffic type for the code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ASCITERM ASCI TERMINATING
[ITGW [ INTERNET GATEWAY
[ [ This parameter value indicates that the code
[ [ point leads to an access point for internet
[ [ telephony. It can only be entered in addition
[ [ to the parameter DEST.
[MOBBOTH [ MOBILE BOTH
[MOBHAND [ MOBILE HANDOVER
MOBINTER MOBILE INTERROGATION
[MOBPHA [ MOBILE PACKET A
[MOBPHB [ MOBILE PACKET B
[MOBTERM [ MOBILE TERMINATING
[NBARCPT [ NON-BARRABLE CODE POINT
[SELCWROU[ SELECTIVE CALL WITH ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call with routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk within the trunk group is
[ [ determined by the digit combination selected.
[VBS [ VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
SYMCON SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
This parameter indicates whether the connection is symmetric or
not.
Standard Behavior:
- If type of destination is modified, the connection will
not be symmetric.
- If only data for a type of destination is modified, then
there is no affect on database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 3+
MOD CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NO SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
[Y [ YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
YES YES SYMMETRIC CONNECTION
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This parameter specifies if charging data will be collected
at the specified code point.
Standard Behavior:
- If type of destination is modified, no AMA record is
generated.
- If only data for a type of destination is modified, then
there is no affect on database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
[NO [ NO AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
[Y [ AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
!YES - AMA RECORD IS GENERATED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 4+
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CPT TO INTERCEPT CODE
The old intercept value is changed to another intercept value.

[ [
[ MOD CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,ANNDIG=[[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,TXTNO= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
modified. Special codes have to be entered to define the code point
uniquely.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the new intercept code selected by the
code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
CHCPTIND CHANGED CODE POINT IND. ANN.
[ILLDEST [ ILLEGAL DESTINATION
[RESANN [ RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT
[ [ Unit b must be specified.
[UNALLROU[ UNALLOCATED ROUTE
[UNOBDE1 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
[UNOBDE10[ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
[UNOBDE11[ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
[UNOBDE13[ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 13
[UNOBDE2 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 02
[UNOBDE3 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 03
[UNOBDE4 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 04
[UNOBDE5 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 05
[UNOBDE6 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 06
[UNOBDE7 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 07
[UNOBDE8 [ UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
b: RESERVE USER ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
0...9, range of decimal numbers
This parameter determines the number of the reserve
user announcement intercept.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 5+
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the destination
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[ [ own mobile subscriber
[CAT12 [ CATEGORY 12
[ [ foreign mobile subscriber
[CAT13 [ CATEGORY 13
[ [ fixed mobile subscriber
[CAT14 [ CATEGORY 14
[CAT15 [ CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
[DATAINAT[ DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
[DATRANS [ DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
[OPOS [ OPERATORS POSITION
[OPOSINAT[ OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
[SUBINAT [ ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBORD [ ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
[SUBPINAT[ PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBPRIOR[ PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination
is addressed.
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIM. Z-DIGIT=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 6+
MOD CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
The parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
[ROUTYP1 [ ROUTE TYPE 01
[ROUTYP10[ ROUTE TYPE 10
[ROUTYP11[ ROUTE TYPE 11
[ROUTYP12[ ROUTE TYPE 12
[ROUTYP13[ ROUTE TYPE 13
[ROUTYP14[ ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
[ROUTYP2 [ ROUTE TYPE 02
[ROUTYP3 [ ROUTE TYPE 03
[ROUTYP4 [ ROUTE TYPE 04
[ROUTYP5 [ ROUTE TYPE 05
[ROUTYP6 [ ROUTE TYPE 06
[ROUTYP7 [ ROUTE TYPE 07
[ROUTYP8 [ ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
ANNDIG INDIVIDUAL ANNOUNCEMENT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered
if INCEPT = CHCPTIND.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TXTNO TEXT NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT
This parameter specifies the number of the text
to be announced.
This parameter may only be entered if INCEPT =
RESANN-X
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 7+
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CPT WITH TRAFFIC TYPE
The destination of the code point is modified to specified traffic type,
or the data for specific traffic type is modified.
Additional prerequisites :
- If the code point refers to an intelligent network service, this service
trigger table must exist (see CR INTRIG).

[ [
[ MOD CPT : CODE= ,TRATYP= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [,MFCAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [,PROVNAM=] [,NPROVNAM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
modified. Special codes have to be entered to define the code point
uniquely.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TRATYP TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter indicates the traffic type for the code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: TRAFFIC TYPE A
CLOCKTST CLOCK TEST
[CPTDN [ CODE POINT -> DIRECTORY NUMBER
[ [ Code point to a directory number.
[IACBPROC[ INTERNAT. AUTOM. CALL BACK
[IN [ INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
[ [ Code point for intelligent network service.
[ [ Units b and c must be specified.
[MOBPROV [ MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER
[ [ Parameter PROVNAM must be specified.
PHONMEET PHONE MEETING
[ [ Unit b must be specified.
[RADIOSUB[ RADIO SUBSCRIBER
[SELCWORO[ SELECTIVE CALL WITHOUT ROUTING
[ [ Code point for selective call without routing.
[ [ The outgoing trunk is determined directly by the
[ [ digit combination selected.
[TOLLFRNO[ TOLL FREE NUMBER
[ [ Code point for tollfree service. Unit b must be
[ [ specified.
TWOPARTY TWO PARTY LINE
b: TRAFFIC TYPE B=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Possible input values:
Unit a = TOLLFRNO: 0-9
Length of the tollfree service directory number.
Unit a = PHONMEET: 0-99
Telephone meeting group number.
Unit a = IN: 0-15
Length of the IN subscriber number.
Unit a = IACBPROC: 0-15
Length of the call back service directory number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 8+
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: TRAFFIC TYPE C=
1...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
Possible input values:
Unit a = IN: Name of the IN service.
The name of the IN service specified in the command
CR INTRIG (parameter PRID) must be entered.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the destination
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ORIGINATING MARK=
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF ORIGINATING MARK=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CATEGORY
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
[ [ own mobile subscriber
[CAT12 [ CATEGORY 12
[ [ foreign mobile subscriber
[CAT13 [ CATEGORY 13
[ [ fixed mobile subscriber
[CAT14 [ CATEGORY 14
[CAT15 [ CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
[DATAINAT[ DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
[DATRANS [ DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
[OPOS [ OPERATORS POSITION
[OPOSINAT[ OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
[SUBINAT [ ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBORD [ ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
[SUBPINAT[ PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
[SUBPRIOR[ PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination
is addressed.
b: POSITION OF CATEGORY=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 9+
MOD CPT
TRATYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies up to 16 different digital switchboards.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT=
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: POSITION OF LANGUAGE OR DISCRIM. Z-DIGIT=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
This unit is not evaluated and exists only
to be compatible to the syntax of older
EWSD-versions.
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
The parameter indicates the route type for the ISDN traffic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
[ROUTYP1 [ ROUTE TYPE 01
[ROUTYP10[ ROUTE TYPE 10
[ROUTYP11[ ROUTE TYPE 11
[ROUTYP12[ ROUTE TYPE 12
[ROUTYP13[ ROUTE TYPE 13
[ROUTYP14[ ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
[ROUTYP2 [ ROUTE TYPE 02
[ROUTYP3 [ ROUTE TYPE 03
[ROUTYP4 [ ROUTE TYPE 04
[ROUTYP5 [ ROUTE TYPE 05
[ROUTYP6 [ ROUTE TYPE 06
[ROUTYP7 [ ROUTE TYPE 07
[ROUTYP8 [ ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
PROVNAM OLD SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the old name of the service provider.
It may only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NPROVNAM NEW SERVICE PROVIDER NAME
This parameter specifies the new name of the service provider.
It may only be entered if TRATYP = MOBPROV.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CPT- 10-
SPLIT CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPLIT CODE POINT
This command splits an existing code point into 16 new code points. The option
of specifying 16 new destinations for that code point is created (by using
MOD CPT).
A code point can be split by a digit or by a special code
ORIG1 (ORIGINATING MARK 1),
MFCAT (MFC CATEGORY),
ZDIG (LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT) or
ROUTYP (ROUTE TYPE).
Only the code point specified by the parameter SPLITBY, ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG or
ROUTYP in the command receives the new destination. The other newly-created
code points retain the destination of the old code point. If the code point is
split by digit, the entered code must have one digit more than the code point
to be split.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. SPLIT CPT - DEST SPLIT CPT WITH DEST
2. SPLIT CPT - INCEPT SPLIT CPT WITH INCEPT
1. Input format
SPLIT CPT WITH DEST
This input format describes the splitting of code points with DEST.

[ [
[ SPLIT CPT : CODE= ,DEST= ,SPLITBY= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
split.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the new destination area for the code point
specified by the parameter ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG or ROUTYP.
The specified destination area must exist with at least one route or
must be created with a new code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SPLITBY DETERMINE KIND OF SPLIT
This parameter specifies the kind of special code for which the split
shall be done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DIGIT SPLIT BY DIGIT
MFCAT SPLIT BY BRANCHING CATEGORY
ORIG1 SPLIT BY ORIG1
ROUTYP SPLIT BY ROUTE TYPE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SPLIT CPT- 1+
SPLIT CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ZDIG SPLIT BY LANGUAGE DIGIT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the new code
point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATORS POS.
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies the language digit of the new code
point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic of the
new code point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
ROUTYP1 ROUTE TYPE 01
ROUTYP10 ROUTE TYPE 10
ROUTYP11 ROUTE TYPE 11
ROUTYP12 ROUTE TYPE 12
ROUTYP13 ROUTE TYPE 13
ROUTYP14 ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
ROUTYP2 ROUTE TYPE 02
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SPLIT CPT- 2+
SPLIT CPT
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ROUTYP3 ROUTE TYPE 03
ROUTYP4 ROUTE TYPE 04
ROUTYP5 ROUTE TYPE 05
ROUTYP6 ROUTE TYPE 06
ROUTYP7 ROUTE TYPE 07
ROUTYP8 ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SPLIT CPT- 3+
SPLIT CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPLIT CPT WITH INCEPT
This input format describes splitting of code points with INCEPT.

[ [
[ SPLIT CPT : CODE= ,INCEPT= ,SPLITBY= [,LAC=] [,ORIG1=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,MFCAT=] [,ZDIG=] [,ROUTYP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination of the code point to be
split.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
INCEPT INTERCEPT
This parameter specifies the new intercept code for the code point
specified by the parameter ORIG1, MFCAT, ZDIG or ROUTYP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ILLDEST ILLEGAL DESTINATION
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
UNOBDE1 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 01
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
UNOBDE12 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 12
UNOBDE13 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 13
UNOBDE2 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 02
UNOBDE3 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 03
UNOBDE4 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 04
UNOBDE5 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 05
UNOBDE6 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 06
UNOBDE7 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 07
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
SPLITBY DETERMINE KIND OF SPLIT
This parameter specifies the kind of special code for which the split
shall be done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DIGIT SPLIT BY DIGIT
MFCAT SPLIT BY BRANCHING CATEGORY
ORIG1 SPLIT BY ORIG1
ROUTYP SPLIT BY ROUTE TYPE
ZDIG SPLIT BY LANGUAGE DIGIT
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which
the destination is addressed. Only decimal numbers,
range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF may be
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SPLIT CPT- 4+
SPLIT CPT
INCEPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the branching category of the new code
point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT INTERNATIONAL OPERATORS POS.
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
ZDIG LANGUAGE OR DISCRIMIN. Z-DIGIT
This parameter specifies the language digit of the new code
point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTYP ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the route type for ISDN traffic of the
new code point that receives the specified new destination area or
intercept code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ROUTYP0 ROUTE TYPE 00
ROUTYP1 ROUTE TYPE 01
ROUTYP10 ROUTE TYPE 10
ROUTYP11 ROUTE TYPE 11
ROUTYP12 ROUTE TYPE 12
ROUTYP13 ROUTE TYPE 13
ROUTYP14 ROUTE TYPE 14
ROUTYP15 ROUTE TYPE 15
ROUTYP2 ROUTE TYPE 02
ROUTYP3 ROUTE TYPE 03
ROUTYP4 ROUTE TYPE 04
ROUTYP5 ROUTE TYPE 05
ROUTYP6 ROUTE TYPE 06
ROUTYP7 ROUTE TYPE 07
ROUTYP8 ROUTE TYPE 08
ROUTYP9 ROUTE TYPE 09
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SPLIT CPT- 5-
ACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
AM (Activate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CPTRPCH- 1+
ACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT CPTRPCH- 2-
CAN CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform by implicitly
deactivating them in the memory on this platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution of
the atomic actions DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CM (Cancel
in Memory) on the respective platform in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CPTRPCH- 1+
CAN CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CPTRPCH- 2-
DACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CPTRPCH- 1+
DACT CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT CPTRPCH- 2-
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on the individual platform and patch
states concerning Transient Patches for a specified platform in
operation.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,ID= [ [
[ DISP CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified capsule and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 1+
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname" or
ID="capsname.*" or
ID="capsname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 2+
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 3+
DISP CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CPTRPCH- 4-
ENTR CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Transient Patch into the
patch administration on a platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action EM (Enter into Memory) on the
respective platform in operation.
With each ENTR CPTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
Subpatch can be entered by using parameter REPADDR.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO. For each subpatch of a patch a new
ENTR CPTRPCH command is necessary.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR CPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,LIB=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the CP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BAP0 BASE PROCESSOR 0
BAP1 BASE PROCESSOR 1
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
AMP0 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM BRIDGE PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR SPARE
This unit specifies the platform type.
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
entered for a certain patch the identifier must be
identical.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CPTRPCH- 1+
ENTR CPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address.
e.g.: REPADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
REPADDR="offset+distance" or
REPADDR="label+distance",
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR CPTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...118, range of decimal numbers
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CPTRPCH- 2-
ENTR CQDAT
MEASIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CARRIER QUOTA DATA
This command assigns data to one carrier of a quota group. These data may
be either trunk group sizes or quotas and possibly a list of trunk groups
to be measured. The type of required data depends on the quota procedure,
which is valid for the specified carrier quota group.
The carrier quota group is activated as soon as correct quota data are
assigned to all carriers of that group. The craft will be notified of the
activation with the display of all quota data of that carrier quota group.
For this purpose the same output mask is used as for the command
DISP CQGRP, but no trunk groups to be measured will be displayed in this
case regardless of their existence.
The data which were entered with this command may be displayed with
DISP CQGRP. These data may be cancelled either completely with the
command CAN CQGRP or selectively with MOD CQDAT.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier quota group and the carrier are already created.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR CQDAT - MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
2. ENTR CQDAT - STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
3. ENTR CQDAT - TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
1. Input format
MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
This input format is entered for carrier data belonging to a quota group
with quota procedure MEASIC.
For the quota procedure MEASIC it is necessary to provide a quota to
start with as well as a list of trunk groups to be measured for each
carrier.
Notes:
- The quotas to start with are valid until the first actualization took
place, depending on the measured incoming call duration time. The
actually valid quotas may be displayed with the command DISP CQGRP.
Prerequisites:
- The sum of quotas for all carriers equals exactly 100 %.
- Each TGNO to be measured already exists as an incoming or bothway
trunk group.
- None of the trunk groups to be measured is already part of another list
of trunk groups to be measured, neither for the same quota group nor for
another.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 1+
ENTR CQDAT
MEASIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
0,1,2...100, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the quota of outgoing calls to
be assigned to the specified carrier after activation
of the carrier selection destination. If 0 is entered,
the carrier is deactivated until the operator enters a
different value.
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the names of the trunk groups for which
the times for incoming calls are to be summed up.
Up to 48 parameter values can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 2+
ENTR CQDAT
STAQUO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STATIC QUOTAS
This input format is entered for carrier data belonging to a quota group
with quota procedure STAQUO.
For the quota procedure STAQUO it is necessary to specify a percentage
quota for each carrier of that quota group.
Prerequisites:
- The sum of quotas for all carriers equals exactly 100%.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
0,1,2...100, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the quota of outgoing calls to
be assigned to the specified carrier after activation
of the carrier selection destination. If 0 is entered,
the carrier is deactivated until the operator enters a
different value.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 3+
ENTR CQDAT
TGSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SIZE
This input format is entered for carrier data belonging to a quota group
with quota procedure TGSIZE.
The quota procedure TGSIZE requires the specification of trunk group
sizes.
Those sizes result in calculated percentages for each carrier of the quota
group. The result of this calculation may be displayed with the command
DISP CQGRP.
The trunk group sizes to be entered in this command refer to the sum of
numbers of trunks in all outgoing trunk groups in the own switch, which are
operated by that carrier. No internal check is executed if the crafts
input matches the trunk group data in the call processing data base.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
This parameter specifies the quota of outgoing calls to
be assigned to the specified carrier after activation
of the carrier selection destination. If 0 is entered,
the carrier is deactivated until the operator enters a
different value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CQDAT- 4-
MOD CQDAT
ATGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA DATA
This command modifies quota data for one or more carriers of a quota group.
Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
Depending on the actual status of the data the following actions are
possible:
- add trunk groups to an existing list,
- modify name of a carrier,
- cancel trunk groups from an existing list,
- modify the quota value of a single or all carriers,
- modify the trunk group size of a single or all carriers,
- modify the quota procedure.
Prerequisites:
- The value of at least one parameter is input to be changed.
- All entered objects exist already.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD CQDAT - ATGNO ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP
2. MOD CQDAT - CARR CARRIER
3. MOD CQDAT - CTGNO CANCEL TRUNK GROUP
4. MOD CQDAT - QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
5. MOD CQDAT - QUOTAIND QUOTA INDIVIDUAL CARR
6. MOD CQDAT - QUOTALL QUOTA ALL CARR
7. MOD CQDAT - TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
1. Input format
ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP
This input format is entered to add trunk groups to an already existing
list of incoming/bothway trunk groups to be measured. Each trunk group
specified in this input format occupies an element in a pool (group
index list). This pool is not expandable and comprises 1000 elements.
Additional prerequisites:
- A list of trunk groups to be measured already exists for the entered
carrier (refer to ENTR CQDAT for creation of such a list).
- The number of trunk groups already entered and of those being added does
not exceed 48.
- None of the trunk groups to be measured is a member of another list,
neither in the same nor in another quota group.
- Each TGNO to be measured already exists as an incoming or bothway
trunk group.
- There are enough free elements available in the group index list.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,ATGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 1+
MOD CQDAT
ATGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ATGNO ADDITIONAL TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
Up to 47 parameter values can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 2+
MOD CQDAT
CARR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CARRIER
This input format is entered to modify the name of a carrier.
Additional prerequisites:
- The new name has not been assigned to any carrier within the same carrier
quota group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,NCARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NCARR NEW CARRIER NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 3+
MOD CQDAT
CTGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL TRUNK GROUP
This input format is entered to remove trunk group numbers from the list of
trunk groups to be measured.
It is possible to remove trunk group numbers from a list of trunk groups to
be measured, and to cancel completely a list that was created provisio-
nally.
Additional prerequisites:
- At least one trunk group number is left in the list of trunk groups to be
measured, if QUOPRO=MEASIC is active for the specified carrier quota
group .

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,CTGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CTGNO CANCELLED TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
Up to 48 parameter values can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 4+
MOD CQDAT
QUOPRO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
QUOTA PROCEDURE
This entry is made to modify the quota procedure for a carrier
quota group.
But it is not permissible to change the kind of quota procedure
to or from CDD.
The existing lists of trunk groups to be measured are kept if the quota
procedure MEASIC was active before the execution of this command. A
similar status as for prepared lists is achieved. These lists may be
deleted if not needed any longer after the modification of the quota
procedure with this command using the parameter CTGNO (see above).
Additional prerequisites:
- The quota group is active.
- Each carrier name of the group is entered, possibly with a trunk group size
of 0 or a quota of 0 % . Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
- At least one trunk group to be measured is assigned to each carrier of
the group if MEASIC is entered as new quota procedure.
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers is exactly 100 %, if a new quota
procedure is entered which requires quota values (STAQUO or MEASIC).
If the execution of this command results in previously deactivated carriers
being activated (i.e. instead of a quota of 0 % now a non-zero quota comes
into effect) then the following prerequisites need to be fulfilled for
successful command execution in addition to the standard prerequisites:
- All destinations for carrier selection which belong to this quota group
have a carrier destination assigned to the carrier being activated.
- Each of these carrier destinations has at least one route.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= ,QUOPRO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies quota data of the carrier.
Depending on the specified quota procedure, the numerical
value entered represents either a quota (percentage) or a
trunk group size (to be specified as a number of trunks).
QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
This parameter specifies the quota procedure used to distribute the
call processing load to the carriers in the carrier quota group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 5+
MOD CQDAT
QUOPRO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The outgoing calls are distributed to the
carriers initially in accordance with the
specified start quotas and later in the ratio
of the total call times measured in the incoming
direction. The quotas are updated whenever
an incoming call time of at least 9000 seconds
is measured for all carriers of the carrier
quota group at a full quarter-hour.
Notes:
Arrangements with the corresponding exchanges must
be taken to ensure that this quota procedure is
only used at one end of the connection. Otherwise,
after a certain time, a stable quota distribution
would result whereby one carrier would be assigned
100% of the load and all other carriers would have
no load.
STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
The outgoing calls are distributed according to
the specified quotas.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZES SUM
The outgoing calls are distributed in the ratio of
the trunk group sizes entered.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 6+
MOD CQDAT
QUOTAIND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
QUOTA INDIVIDUAL CARR
This input format is entered to modify the quota of a single carrier
belonging to one quota group.
Additional prerequisites:
- The carrier quota group is not active.
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers, including the value to be entered,
is not greater than 100%.
- Only one carrier is specified.
- Prior to command execution a value was specified with
ENTR CQDAT.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
0-100, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies quota data of the carrier.
Depending on the specified quota procedure, the numerical
value entered represents either a quota (percentage) or a
trunk group size (to be specified as a number of trunks).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 7+
MOD CQDAT
QUOTALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
QUOTA ALL CARR
This input format is entered to modify the quotas of all carriers in a
group. Up to 20 carriers can be specified.
Additional prerequisites:
- The quota group is active.
- Each carrier in the quota group is named, possibly with a new quota of 0%
(deactivation of the carrier).
- The sum of the quotas of all carriers is exactly 100% .

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
0-100, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies quota data of the carrier.
Depending on the specified quota procedure, the numerical
value entered represents either a quota (percentage) or a
trunk group size (to be specified as a number of trunks).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 8+
MOD CQDAT
TGSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP SIZE
This input format is entered to modify trunk group sizes.
Additional prerequisites:
- It is only permissible to specify one carrier or all carriers of the carrier
quota group.
- The carrier quota group was created before with QUOPRO=TGSIZE.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQDAT : CQGRP= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: NAME OF CARRIER=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: VALUE OF QUOTA OR VALUE OF TRUNK GROUP SIZE SUM=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies quota data of the carrier.
Depending on the specified quota procedure, the numerical
value entered represents either a quota (percentage) or a
trunk group size (to be specified as a number of trunks).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQDAT- 9-
CAN CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command cancels the specified carrier quota group.
If lists of trunk groups to be measured exist for carriers of the quota
group to be cancelled, then those entries are deleted.
If all carriers of the group being deleted have more than 48 measured
trunk groups assigned in total, then either those lists have to be
cancelled first (MOD CQDAT, parameter CTGNO) or the carriers have to be
deleted individually (MOD CQGRP, parameter CCARR).
Prerequisites:
- No carrier selection destination refers to the quota group that is to be
cancelled.
- The trunk group lists of all carriers do not contain more than 48 trunk
groups.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CQGRP : CQGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CQGRP- 1-
CR CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command creates a carrier quota group, which is a prerequisite for
routing with load sharing. The following data are assigned to the carrier
quota group.
- the name by which the carrier quota group is addressed
- the quota procedure used
- the names of the carriers belonging to the carrier quota group.
All destinations for carrier selection assigned to a quota group are
subject to joint quota assignment. Destinations for carrier selection must
be assigned to quota groups in such a way that each carrier involved can
serve all subscriber directory numbers or lines within the area represented
by the sum of all destination area groups.
Prerequisites:
- The quota group name does not yet exist.
- No carrier name occurs more than once in the quota group that is to be
created.
To enable a quota group to be activated, it is necessary to assign the
quota data for each carrier with the command ENTR CQDAT.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CQGRP : CQGRP= ,QUOPRO= ,CARR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group.
The name is user specifiable, it is not permissible to specify
a single X.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
This parameter specifies the quota procedure used to distribute the
call processing load to the carriers in the carrier quota group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZES SUM
The outgoing calls are distributed
in the ratio of the trunk group
sizes entered.
STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
The outgoing calls are distributed
according to the specified quotas.
MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
The outgoing calls are distributed to the
carriers initially in accordance with the
specified start quotas and later according to the
total call times measured in the incoming
direction. The quotas are updated whenever an
incoming call time of at least 9000 seconds is
measured for all carriers of the carrier quota
group at a full quarter-hour.
Notes:
- Arrangements must be made with the
corresponding exchanges to ensure that this
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CQGRP- 1+
CR CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
quota procedure is only used at one end of the
connection. Otherwise, after a certain time, a
stable quota distribution would result whereby
one carrier would be assigned 100% of the load
and all other carriers would have no load.
CDD CARRIER DIVERGENCE DESTINATION
A call is routed to a new directory number, which
is selected on a cyclic basis in order to
guarantee equal distribution.
The new directory numbers can be allocated to the
carrier destinations used in this quota procedure,
by means of the parameter FOVCODE.
CARR CARRIER NAME
Up to 20 parameter values can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CQGRP- 2-
DISP CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command displays the data of all or selected carrier quota groups.
The display of all quota group data is achieved by input of CQGRP = X.
The amount of display may be reduced by entering additional parameters:
Only those quota groups out of all existing groups are displayed which have
the specified carrier name (CARR) or quota procedure (QUOPRO).
If several parameters are entered only those quota groups are displayed
which fulfill all conditions at the same time.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CQGRP : CQGRP= [,CARR=] [,QUOPRO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
Up to 32 parameter values can be specified.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
QUOPRO QUOTA PROCEDURE
This parameter specifies the quota procedure used to distribute the
call processing load to the carriers of the carrier group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TGSIZE TRUNK GROUP SIZE
STAQUO STATIC QUOTAS
MEASIC MEASUREMENT INCOMING CALLS
CDD CARRIER DIVERGENCE DESTINATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CQGRP- 1-
MOD CQGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This command modifies data of a quota group. The name of the group may be
changed as well as the amount of assigned carriers.
It is required to modify each destination for carrier selection which is
assigned to the quota group in an identical manner, in order to maintain
consistent data (MOD DESTDAT).
Prerequisite:
- The value of at least one parameter is changed.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD CQGRP : CQGRP= <,NCQGRP= ,CARR= ,CCARR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter specifies the carrier quota group for which data
are to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NCQGRP NEW CARRIER QUOTA GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the new name for the
carrier quota group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR ADDITIONAL CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier to be assigned
to the carrier quota group. Up to 19 parameter
values can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CCARR CANCELLED CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier to be deleted
from the carrier quota group. Up to 19 parameter
values can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CQGRP- 1-
CONF CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE CODE RECEIVER
With this command one or all codereceiver of a module can be
configured to one of the states MBL, ACT or PLA.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,LCPOS=[ [
[ CONF CR : LTG= ,CRPOS= ,OST= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LCPOS LINE CIRCUIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the position of a codereceiver in
the line trunk unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...6, range of decimal numbers
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0-7, range of decimal numbers
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values are
affected.
CRPOS CODE RECEIVER POSITION
This parameter specifies the position of a codereceiver in
a signaling unit SU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: MODULE NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the module.
Compatibilities:
0-2 for LTGB
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF CR- 1+
CONF CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: CODE RECEIVER NUMBER=
0-3, range of decimal numbers
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values
are affected.
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the destination operating status.
The following status transitions are permitted:
ACT <-> MBL
MBL <-> PLA
UNA --> ACT or MBL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF CR- 2-
DIAG CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE CODE RECEIVER
This command starts diagnosis for one or more code receivers on a
module.
Prerequisites:
- A diagnosis is only possible module by module.
- The code receiver to be diagnosed must be MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
- The LTG control unit must be ACTIVE or CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED.
- The code receiver must be MAINTENANCE BLOCKED.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,CRPOS=[ [
[ DIAG CR : LTG= ,LCPOS= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
CRPOS CODE RECEIVER POSITION
This parameter specifies the position of a code receiver in the
signaling unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the position of the CR module.
The following value ranges are permissible:
0-3 for LTGB
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
LCPOS LINE CIRCUIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the position of a code receiver in the
line trunk unit.
The mounting locations are to be determined from the exchange-
specific documentation.These documents must be kept current.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...6, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG CR- 1-
STAT CR
CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF CODE RECEIVER
This command displays the operating state(s) of
- a particular code receiver module in a particular LTG
- a particular code receiver module in all LTGs
- all code receiver in a particular LTG
- all code receiver in all LTGs
- all code receiver in a particular operating state in a particular LTG
- all code receiver in a particular operating state in all LTGs
For the parameter LTG a value or X must always be entered.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. STAT CR - CR CODE RECEIVER
2. STAT CR - OST OPERATIONAL STATUS
1. Input format
CODE RECEIVER
Input format for displaying the CR operating states.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,LCPOS=[[ [
[ STAT CR : LTG= [,CRPOS=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
LCPOS LINE CIRCUIT POSITION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTU NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...6, range of decimal numbers
CRPOS CODE RECEIVER POSITION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: MODULE NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT CR- 1+
STAT CR
CR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the position of the module.
Compatibilities:
0-2 for LTGB
0-7 for LTGC
0 for LTGD
b: CODE RECEIVER NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If this unit is omitted, all possible unit values are affected.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT CR- 2+
STAT CR
OST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
OPERATIONAL STATUS
Input format for determining code receivers in a particular operating
state.
Notes:
- If the parameter LTG NUMBER is omitted, all possible values are affected.

[ [
[ STAT CR : LTG= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
STB STANDBY
UNA UNAVAILABLE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT CR- 3-
CAN CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command cancels a code receiver module in the signaling
unit of an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- The code receiver module must be PLA.
- The ports of the code receiver must not be in service.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CRMOD : LTG= ,CRMOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
CRMOD CODE RECEIVER MODULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module
to be cancelled.
For the signaling unit LTG type LTGB only the code receiver
modules 0, 1 or 2 may be specified. For the signaling unit of
LTG type LTGD only the code receiver modules 0 may be specified.
Notes:
If, in spite of the LTG being operational, the port data cannot
be sent to the GP, it is possible to configure the associated
LTG to MBL. If it is configured from this state to
ACT, the LTG receives the data stored in the CP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CRMOD- 1-
CR CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command creates a code receiver module in the signaling unit
of an LTG.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR CRMOD : LTG= ,CRMOD= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
CRMOD CODE RECEIVER MODULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module.
For the signaling unit of LTG type LTGB only the code receiver
modules 0, 1 or 2 may be specified. For the signaling unit of
LTG type LTGD only the code receiver module 0 may be specified.
For the LTG types and LTGH no code receiver modules may be
specified.
The configuration data for the four ports of a code receiver
module depend on the code receiver type.
The ports are assigned to the code receiver modules as follows:
LTG type LTGB:
+------------+----------------+
! Port no.: ! CR module no.: !
+------------+----------------+
! 256 - 259 ! 0 !
! 260 - 263 ! 1 !
! 264 - 267 ! 2 !
+------------+----------------+
LTG type LTGC:
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! CR module no.! 0 ! 1 ! 2 ! 3 ! 4 ! 5 ! 6 ! 7 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! Port no. ! 160 ! 161 ! 162 ! 163 ! 164 ! 165 ! 166 ! 167 !
! ! 168 ! 169 ! 170 ! 171 ! 172 ! 173 ! 174 ! 175 !
! ! 176 ! 177 ! 178 ! 179 ! 180 ! 181 ! 182 ! 183 !
! ! 184 ! 185 ! 186 ! 187 ! 188 ! 189 ! 190 ! 191 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
LTG type LTGD:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CRMOD- 1+
CR CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+------------+----------------+
! Port no.: ! CR module no.: !
+------------+----------------+
! 256 - 259 ! 0 !
+------------+----------------+
LTG type LTGG, LTGM or LTGN operated as LTGB:
+------------+----------------+
! Port no.: ! CR module no.: !
+------------+----------------+
! 256 - 259 ! 0 !
! 260 - 263 ! 1 !
+------------+----------------+
Code receiver module 0 and 1 must be created with
the same code receiver module type.
RMCTC may only be specified for code receiver module 0;
in this case module 1 is unused.
LTG type LTGG, LTGM or LTGN operated as LTGC:
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! CR module no.! 0 ! 1 ! 4 ! 5 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+
! Port no. ! 160 ! 161 ! 164 ! 165 !
! ! 168 ! 169 ! 172 ! 173 !
! ! 176 ! 177 ! 180 ! 181 !
! ! 184 ! 185 ! 188 ! 189 !
+--------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+
Code receiver module 0 and 1, respectively 4 and 5, must
be created with the same code receive module type.
RMCTC may only be specified for code receiver module 0;
in this case module 1 is unused.
Note:
If, in spite of the LTG being operational, the port data
cannot be sent to the GP, it is advisable to cancel the job
with the command CAN CRMOD and to recreate the code receiver
module. Alternatively, the associated LTG can be configured to
MBL. If the LTG is configured from this state to ACT, it
receives the data stored in the CP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
TYPE CODE RECEIVER TYPE
This parameter specifies the code receiver module type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CRPC CODE RECEIVER PUSHBUTTON CEPT
CRMR2 CODE RECEIVER MFC R2 SIGNALING
RMCTC CODE RECEIVER RMCTC
This module type may only be specified for
code receiver type 0.
CRMR1 CODE RECEIVER MFC R1 SIGNALING
CRMSC CODE RECEIVER MSC SIGNALING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR CRMOD- 2-
DISP CRMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CODE RECEIVER MODULE
This command displays the code receiver module data for one, several or
all the LTGs in an exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP CRMOD : LTG= [,CRMOD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG. Depending on the value entered
the following options are possible:
1. <ltgset> - <ltg>
All objects for the specified LTG are displayed.
Only in this case is it permissable to specify parameter
CRMOD.
2. <ltgset> - <ltg> && <ltgset> - <ltg>
All objects for the specified range of LTGs are displayed.
The first limit must be lower than the second limit.
3. <ltgset> - X
The objects of all LTGs for the specified LTGSET are displayed.
4. X - X
The objects for all LTGs and LTGSETs are displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
CRMOD CODE RECEIVER MODULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the code receiver module.
For the signaling unit LTG type LTGB the code receiver
modules 0, 1 or 2 may be specified. For the signaling unit of
LTG type LTGD only code receiver module 0 may be specified.
For the LTG type LTGH no code receiver modules may be specified.
Default: All code receivers in the specified LTGs are displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CRMOD- 1-
DMP CSCTRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP CSC-TRACE DATA
This command dumps data in the trace memory. The trace function is
stopped by this command. The last event stored is printed first.
If the command is entered several times, the trace memory can be
output to the end (oldest frame).
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DMP CSCTRAC : CSC= [,BLKCO=] [,BLKLEN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CSC CENTRAL SERVICE CHANNEL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
BLKCO BLOCK COUNT
This parameter specifies the number of data blocks
to be printed out.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
Default: 9999
BLKLEN BLOCK LENGTH
This parameter specifies how many bytes per block are to be
printed out.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5200, range of decimal numbers
Default: 5200
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP CSCTRAC- 1-
START CSWD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START CSWD PROCESSES
This command starts the control and switching device processes which handle the
configuration of peripheral units.
Start of functions for activating the call processing(classic) periphery (LTG,
MB, SN, DLU) and start of CALLP.
Notes:
This command is only allowed during the installation phase (installation
recovery).
This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into service.
Input format

[ [
[ START CSWD ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 START CSWD- 1-
CAN CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP
This command cancels
- the existing membership of a subscriber/PBX in one closed user
group,
- the membership of one or several services in a closed user group,
- the traffic restriction within the closed user group for the
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- If the last closed user group of a subscriber/PBX or of a service
is canceled, then also the network authorizations and the prefe-
rential closed group are canceled.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= ,CUGID= [,SERV=] [,CUGBLK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or
the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CUGID CUG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the closed user group identification, which
is specific per subscriber/PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
SERV SERVICE
This parameter specifies the services of the subscriber/PBX
for which the closed user group is to be canceled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ANALOG ANALOG PART OF MIXED PBX
CMSPEECH CIR. MODE SPEECH BEARER SRV
CMUNRST CIR. M. 64KBIT/S UNR. BEA. SRV
CMAUDIO CIR. MODE 3.1KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
CMAUDI7K CIR. MODE 7KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
CMSERV06 CM SERVICE 06
CMSERV07 CM SERVICE 07
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CUG- 1+
CAN CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE SWITCHED BD-CHAN.
TEL3K TELEPHONY 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY 7KHZ
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTX64K TELETEXT 64KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEO TEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEO TELEPHONY
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICE GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICE GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICE GROUP
CUGBLK CUG BLOCKING
This parameter specifies a restriction on the communication with
other members within the same closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TERM TERM. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
ORIG ORIG. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CUG- 2-
DISP CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CLOSED USER GROUP DATA
This command displays closed user group data for
- a specified subscriber or PBX,
- all subscribers and PBX in a directory number interval,
- all subscribers and PBX of a specified local area code or
- all subscribers and PBX in the exchange.
A selection can be made on
- the closed user group identification or
- the interlock code or
- the interlock code and the data network identification code.
Notes:
- If desired, also the service dependant closed user group data of
ISDN-subscribers, ISDN- and mixed PBX can be displayed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,CUGID=[[ ; [
[ DISP CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= [,ILC= [ [,DNIC=] [,FORMAT=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number or directory number
interval. The directory number or, if an interval is entered, the
directory number boundaries, must be numbers of a created directory
number interval. Only one interval can be entered.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit decimal number
CUGID CUG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the closed user group identification, which
is specific per subscriber/PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
ILC INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interlock code, which is the national
identification of the closed user group.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CUG- 1+
DISP CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
DNIC DATA NETWORK IDENTIFICAT. CODE
This parameter specifies the data network identification code, which
is the international identification of the closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies whether, for ISDN subscribers and ISDN or
mixed PBX, only the subscriber/PBX specific closed user group data are
displayed or additionally the service specific closed user group data.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, then only the subscriber/PBX specific
closed user group data are displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CUG OUTPUT OF CUG DATA
Only subscriber/PBX specific closed user group
data are displayed.
ALL OUTPUT OF CUG AND SERVCUG DATA
Subscriber/PBX specific and service specific
closed group data are displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP CUG- 2-
ENTR CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP
This command
- assigns a subscriber (analog mainstation or ISDN) or PBX (analog,
mixed or ISDN) to a closed user group,
- enters data for the closed user group of a subscriber/PBX.
With the first assignment of a subscriber/PBX to a closed user group,
the closed user group is implicitly created in the public network.
A closed user group is identified by the international identi-
fication data network identification code DNIC and the national
identification interlock code ILC.
The different closed user groups of a subscriber/PBX are identified
by the closed user group identification CUGID.
A subscriber/PBX can be a member of 100 different closed user groups.
The services which a subscriber/PBX can use within the closed user
group can be entered. For a mixed PBX, the analog part must expli-
citly be administered with the parameter SERV=ANALOG.
ISDN1TR6 services can only be a member in one closed user group,
which will automatically be set as preferential closed user group for
the service.
With the assignment of the first closed user group to a service, the
protocol types for the service are adopted from the office data. The
office data can be determined with the command DISP CALLPOPT.
For an ISDN-DSS1 or analog subscriber/PBX the traffic restrictions
within the closed user group can be entered. The traffic within a
closed user group may be restricted either to only receiving calls or
to only originating calls within the specified closed user group.
Notes:
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR CUG : [LAC=] ,DN= ,CUGID= [,DNIC=] <,ILC= ,SERV= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CUGBLK=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or
the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CUGID CUG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the closed user group identification, which
is specific per subscriber/PBX.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CUG- 1+
ENTR CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
DNIC DATA NETWORK IDENTIFICAT. CODE
This parameter specifies the data network identification code, which is
the international identification of the closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
ILC INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interlock code, which is the national
identification of the closed user group.
Notes:
- When entering a new closed user group, this parameter is
obligatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
SERV SERVICE
This parameter specifies the existing services of the subscriber/PBX
for which the closed user group is to be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ANALOG ANALOG PART OF MIXED PBX
CMSPEECH CIR. MODE SPEECH BEARER SRV
CMUNRST CIR. M. 64KBIT/S UNR. BEA. SRV
CMAUDIO CIR. MODE 3.1KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
CMAUDI7K CIR. MODE 7KHZ AUD. BEA. SRV
CMSERV06 CM SERVICE 06
CMSERV07 CM SERVICE 07
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN BEARER SERVICE
PMDCHANN PACKET MODE D-CHANNEL
PMBDCHAN PACKET MODE SWITCHED BD-CHAN.
TEL3K TELEPHONY 3.1KHZ
TEL7K TELEPHONY 7KHZ
FAX3 TELEFAX GROUP 2/3
FAX4 TELEFAX GROUP 4
TTX64K TELETEXT 64KBIT/S
VIDEOTEX VIDEO TEXT
VIDEOTEL VIDEO TELEPHONY
SERV19 SERVICE 19
SERV20 SERVICE 20
SERV21 SERVICE 21
SERV22 SERVICE 22
SERV23 SERVICE 23
SERV24 SERVICE 24
SERV25 SERVICE 25
SERV26 SERVICE 26
SERV27 SERVICE 27
NONVCGRP NONVOICE SERVICE GROUP
VOICEGRP VOICE SERVICE GROUP
ALLGRP ALL SERVICE GROUP
CUGBLK CUG BLOCKING
This parameter specifies a restriction on the communication with
other members within the same closed user group.
Notes:
- This parameter is only relevant for ISDN-DSS1 and analog
subscribers/PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CUG- 2+
ENTR CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TERM TERM. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
ORIG ORIG. CALLS BLOCKED WITHIN CUG
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CUG- 3-
MOD CUGAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY CLOSED USER GROUP AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies closed user group data of a subscriber/PBX The closed user
group data that can be modified are
- the authorizations for the traffic to/from the public network,
- the preferential closed user group.
These closed user group data are valid if no service-specific data are assigned
with the command ENTR SERVCUG.
Notes:
- At least one of the parameters NETAUTH, CNETAUTH, PCUGID and CPCUGID
must be entered.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD CUGAUTH : [LAC=] ,DN= [,NETAUTH=] [,CNETAUTH=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,PCUGID= [[ ; [
[ [,CPCUGID=[ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or
the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NETAUTH NETWORK AUTHORIZATION
This parameter enters authorizations for the traffic to/from the
public network.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ICTRAF I/C TRAFFIC FROM PUBLIC NETW.
Incoming traffic from the public network
Notes:
- the incoming traffic is only relevant for
ISDN-DSS1 and analog subscribers/PBX.
OGTRREQ O/G TRAF. TO PUB. NET. ON REQ.
Outgoing traffic to the public network on
explicit request
CNETAUTH CANCEL NETWORK AUTHORIZATION
This parameter cancels existing authorizations for the traffic to/from
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CUGAUTH- 1+
MOD CUGAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the public network.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ICTRAF I/C TRAFFIC FROM PUBLIC NETW.
Incoming traffic from the public network
OGTRREQ O/G TRAF. TO PUB. NET. ON REQ.
Outgoing traffic to the public network on
explicit request
PCUGID PREFERENTIAL CUG IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter enters the preferential closed user group of the
subscriber/PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
CPCUGID CANCEL PREF. CUG IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter cancels the preferential closed user group of the
subscriber/PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD CUGAUTH- 2-
CAN CUGSERV
ALLCUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICE
This command deletes an entry in the CUG table.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN CUGSERV - ALLCUG DELETE ALL CUGS
2. CAN CUGSERV - BSVG DELETE BSVG OF A CUG
3. CAN CUGSERV - CUG DELETE ONE CUG
4. CAN CUGSERV - PCUG DELETE PCUG ENTRY
1. Input format
DELETE ALL CUGS
This input format deletes all CUG entries of a subscriber.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CUGSERV : MSIN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CUGSERV- 1+
CAN CUGSERV
BSVG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DELETE BSVG OF A CUG
This input format deletes BSVG
within a CUG of a subscriber.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CUGSERV : MSIN= ,CUG= ,BSVG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
This parameter specifies the closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODES
This parameter specifies basic service group codes.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CUGSERV- 2+
CAN CUGSERV
CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DELETE ONE CUG
This input format deletes a CUG entry of a subscriber.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CUGSERV : MSIN= ,CUG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
This parameter specifies the closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CUGSERV- 3+
CAN CUGSERV
PCUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DELETE PCUG ENTRY
This input format resets the PCUG entry.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN CUGSERV : MSIN= ,PCUG= ,BSVG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PCUG PREFERENTIAL CUG
This parameter specifies the preferential closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODES
This parameter specifies basic service group codes.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN CUGSERV- 4-
ENTR CUGSERV
CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICE
This command provides closed user group services and activates
the service.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR CUGSERV - CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
2. ENTR CUGSERV - SERVDATA CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICE DATA
3. ENTR CUGSERV - SERVICES CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICES
1. Input format
CLOSED USER GROUP
This input format creates a new CUG.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CUGSERV : MSIN= ,CUG= ,DNIC= ,ILC= ,BSVG= [,INTRACR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
This parameter specifies the closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
DNIC DATA NETWORK IDENTITY CODE
This parameter specifies the data network identification code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
ILC INTERLOCK CODE
This parameter specifies the interlock code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODES
This parameter specifies basic service group codes.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CUGSERV- 1+
ENTR CUGSERV
CUG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
INTRACR INTRA CUG RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the intra cug restrictions.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ICB INCOMING CALLS BARRED
NONE NONE
OCB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CUGSERV- 2+
ENTR CUGSERV
SERVDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICE DATA
This input format modifies basic service specific CUG data.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CUGSERV : MSIN= ,BSVG= <,PCUG= ,INTERCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODES
This parameter specifies basic service group codes.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
PCUG PREFERENTIAL CUG
This parameter specifies the preferential closed user group.
Prerequisites:
- The CUG has to be created first.
Incompatibilities:
- INTRA CUG RESTRICTION = OUTGOING CALLS BARRED
is not allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
INTERCA INTER CUG ACCESSIBILITY
This parameter specifies the inter closed user group
accessibility.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IA INCOMING ACCESS
IOA INCOMING AND OUTGOING ACCESS
NONE NONE
OA OUTGOING ACCESS
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CUGSERV- 3+
ENTR CUGSERV
SERVICES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CLOSED USER GROUP SERVICES
This input format modifies an existing CUG.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR CUGSERV : MSIN= ,CUG= <,BSVG= ,INTRACR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
This parameter specifies the closed user group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
BSVG BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODES
This parameter specifies basic service group codes.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
INTRACR INTRA CUG RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the intra cug restrictions.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ICB INCOMING CALLS BARRED
NONE NONE
OCB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED
Default: NONE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR CUGSERV- 4-
REL CYCFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELEASE CYCLIC FILE
This command releases the last saved data in the specified cyclic file
for overwriting. In addition, an entry is made in the administrative
part of the file stating that the next save is to be started from the
oldest record that has not yet been saved.
Prerequisite:
- The file must exist.
- The file must not be in the process of being saved.
- The file must be a cyclic file.
- The file must have been saved at least once before.
Notes:
- If no data to be released exist (file was not copied at least once),
or if the copied part of the file was already overwritten, it is
possible that command execution is reported (EXECUTED) but that the
occupancy level of the file does not change.
Input format

[ [
[ REL CYCFILE : FILE= [,UNCOND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk file.
The following characters must not be used:
- A succession of periods (...)
- A single period, or a combination ending in a period.
- A single asterisk, or a combination ending in an asterisk.
- A single X.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,%,#
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL
This parameter allows files to be deleted if they have been
transferred at least once to an external data carrier, even
if backup copies are missing.
N CHECK EXECUTED COPIES
NO CHECK EXECUTED COPIES
Y CHECK FILE TRANSFERRED ONCE
YES CHECK FILE TRANSFERRED ONCE
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REL CYCFILE- 1-
DMP DALLOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump Disk Allocation
This task displays a disk allocation (FBSU/FBMUs) using a DUMP utilitity.
The dump will always be displayed symbolic.Symbolic means the logical
structure of the displayed data.
Input format

[ [
[ DMP DALLOC : SCSI= [,MP_ID=] ,Side= ,Number= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD version the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
Number
Specifies the number of disk blocks.
Can be obtained by the dump boot sector.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP DALLOC- 1-
REP DATFILES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Repair Data Files on MP
This task repairs the Data files of the
loaded, disabled Generation on the
system disk of the MP. If the loaded
Generation is corrupted due to defective
Data files there is the possibility to
repair this Generation by performing a
so called data snapshot from memory into the loaded and
disabled Generation on system disk.
The system runs in diskless operation mode because of the
disabled loaded Generation; therefore a
data snapshot into the loaded Generation
is performed, which ends the diskless operation.
Notes:
- The task is possible only if the loaded
Generation is defective and the
Operational State attribute equals Disabled.
- This is a long-running task. The NE issues following
event reports:
Data Snapshot Report,
begin-, progress- and end event reports
Input format

[ [
[ REP DATFILES ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REP DATFILES- 1-
START DB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START DATA BASE
This command starts processes necessary to create and populate the Data Base.
Notes:
This command is only allowed during the installation phase (installation
recovery).
This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into service.
Input format

[ [
[ START DB ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 START DB- 1-
DISP DBCONT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Database Content
This task retrieves the Database Content. The retrieval of a
selected functional area of the Database Content can be specified
by the parameter Functional Area.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DBCONT : Functional Area= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Functional Area
Enter this parameter to specify which functional area of the
Database Content must be retrieved.
Input format: selection of
- NodeBasics
- Log
- Alarming
- EFD
- GPRS/UMTS
- MTP
- SCCP
- SCCP Screening
- ATM
- AccesControl
- FileSecurity
- Authentication
- TrunkLineMaintenance
- Measurements
- MeasurementJob
- SoftwareManagement
- Trace&Debug
- LogRecords
- MTP,SCCP and SCCPScreening
- MTP, SCCP, SCCPScreening and EFD
- All Areas except LogRecords
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DBCONT- 1-
DMP DBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump Disk Block
This task dumps a disk block using a DUMP utilitity.
The dump can be displayed either binary (hexadecimal + ASCII) or symbolic (see
help for input field SYMB).
If the block number is not specified, the block 0 will be displayed (boot sector
/ boot area).
Input format

[ [
[ DMP DBLOCK : SCSI= [,MP_ID=] ,Side= ,Block= ,Offset= ,Length= [
[ [
[ ,Symb= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD version the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
Block
Specifies the disk block number.
Default value is 0 (boot sector / boot area).
Offset
Specifies the offset of displayed data within the block.
Negative value means offset from the block end.
Default value is 0 (from the block beginning).
Length
Specifies the length of displayed data.
Default value is 0 (whole block).
Symb
Specifies if the output will be displayed symbolic.
Symbolic means the logical structure of the blocks.
Allowed values are NO (the blocks are displayed in hex + ASCII Dump),
SHORT (the blocks are displayed symbolic) and LONG (the blocks and all
connected blocks are displayed symbolic). If the value of the parameter
SYMB is unequal NO, the parameters OFFSET and LENGTH will be ignored.
Default value is LONG.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP DBLOCK- 1-
PATCH DBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Patch Disk Block
This task patches a disk block using a PATCH utilitity.
Input format

[ [
[ PATCH DBLOCK : SCSI= [,MP_ID=] ,Side= ,Block= ,Offset= ,Comp= [
[ [
[ ,Data= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD version the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
Block
Specifies the disk block number.
Offset
Specifies the offset of patched data within the block.
Negative value means offset from the block end.
Default value is 0 (from the block beginning).
Comp
Specifies the compare data.
Syntax: value [ & value ] ...
value: [ - ] decimal | $ hexadecimal | string
Data
Specifies the patch data.
Syntax: value [ & value ] ...
value: [ - ] decimal | $ hexadecimal | string
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 PATCH DBLOCK- 1-
ACT DBQUERY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE DATABASE QUERY
This command activates a database query to create a file on disc with
data related to unconnected ports or with connected and unconnected ports.
The query can be performed on :
- all hardware created on the local exchange,
- a single DLU,
- a single LTG,
- a single V5IF.
Prerequisites:
- No file for the same query (FREE/ALL) may exist.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,DLU= [[ [
[ ACT DBQUERY : QUERY= [,LTG= [ ; [
[ [[,V5IF=[[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
QUERY QUERY TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of query to be activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FREE FREE PORTS
ALL ALL PORTS
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TIME STAGE GROUP NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
V5IF V5 INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the V5 interface.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6000...8999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT DBQUERY- 1-
DISP DBSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DATA BASE DESCRIPTION
This command enables the display of information about the expandable
part of database. Parameters can be input in continuation mode.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP DBSIZE : [DPUSED=] [,GROUP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPUSED DISPLAY PERCENT USED
This parameter specifies the displayed information.
Default is NO.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES PERCENT USED DISPLAY
Input of YES or Y includes the display of
filling levels of the expandable data arrays
specified by the group parameter.
Y PERCENT USED DISPLAY
See YES.
NO NO PERCENT USED DISPLAY
Input of NO or N or no input excludes the
display of filling levels of the expandable data
arrays specified by group parameter.
N NO PERCENT USED DISPLAY
See NO.
GROUP NAME OF EXPANDABLE GROUP
Input of group names (three to five characters) in continuation mode
restricts the display of information to those groups. If the
parameter is omitted, all group information is displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DBSIZE- 1-
MOD DBSIZE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DB-SIZE
This command expands the areas of database. This command is part of
the file generation concept of CP113. The command always creates a new
file generation with modified SY.TASKLIB and SY.SEMILIB by expanding
the database. The files SY.SIMP and SY.LOADLIB.LA will be copied
from the current generation. All other files will be connected from
the current generation without any change.
Depending on the system state the new generation will be
- set valid and introduced into the system immediately by
Recovery .
- set blocked.
It is possible to repeat the parameters of this command up to
100 times.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DBSIZE : GROUP= ,SIZE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GROUP NAME OF EXPANDABLE GROUP
This parameter specifies a group of modules with expandable
structures of data to be expanded together.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
SIZE WANTED SIZE OF EXP. GROUP
This parameter specifies the desired number of elements of an
expandable structure of data. The given value has to be greater than
the actual number of elements and less then or equal to the maximum
number of elements.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DBSIZE- 1-
DIAG DCR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER
This command initiates LTG digital code receiver diagnosis.
Precondition: the LTG must be in the operating status
ACT or CBL and the associated DIU must be in the
operating status MBL.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG DCR : LTG= ,DCR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
DCR DIGITAL CODE RECEIVER
This parameter specifies the position of the DCR within
the LTG. A DCR is allocated to the DIU with the same
number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG DCR- 1-
CAN DDIR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Disk Dir from Master and Slave
This task removes a directory from both master and slave disk using an
FCS-Testprocess.
Warning: With the directory the whole content will be removed too.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN DDIR : [MP_ID=] ,Dir= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Dir
Specifies the directory name (with full path).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DDIR- 1-
REP DDISKOUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Repair Double Disk Outage on MP
This task repairs a double disk outage when building the
loaded Generation on the system disk of
the MP. The system runs in diskless operation mode.
The Code portion of the
Generation is selected from any archive
Generation on any MOD.
The Data portion of the
Generation is selected from the loaded
Generation, whose name is determined
within the task. The Data portion is added
by a data snapshot.
If the task is succesfully completed, the newly built
Generation has to be provided with a
matching SY.NETCONFIG file.
In an EWSD Innovation system the
Generation compatibility sign (GCS) has to be supplied
with a reasonable value by means of task MOD GCSMP.
Prerequisites:
- The system disk must be empty, i.e. labelled.
Notes:
- This is a long-running task. The NE issues the
following event reports:
Data Snapshot Report,
begin-, progress- and end event report
Input format

[ [
[ REP DDISKOUT : Code Generation= ,MOD name= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Code Generation
This parameter is the name of the
Code portion
source Generation.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
MOD name
This parameter is the device name of
the magneto-optical disk device MOD,
from which the
Code portion
source Generation is
taken.
Input values: MOD0 or MOD1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REP DDISKOUT- 1-
DIAG DES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR
This command is necessary to diagnose a digital echo
suppressor in an LTG.
Precondition: the LTG must be in the operating status
ACT or CBL and the associated DIU must be in the
operating status MBL.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG DES : LTG= ,DES= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
DES DIGITAL ECHO SUPPRESSOR
This parameter specifies the position of the DES within
the LTG. A DES is allocated to the DIU with the same
number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG DES- 1-
ACT DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE DESTINATION
This command activates the specified destination for carrier selection.
This destination may be either a newly created destination for carrier
selection (ENTR DESTDAT) or an already used destination for carrier
selection, which was expanded beforehand (MOD DESTDAT).
The necessity for another activation of an already earlier activated
destination for carrier selection may result from the change of quotas or
trunk group sizes within an active carrier quota group (MOD CQDAT).
Prerequisites:
- The destination is created.
- It is a destination for carrier selection.
- Each assigned carrier specific destination has at least one route, except
for the case, that the specified carrier is deactivated within the quota
group.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT DEST : DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT DEST- 1-
CAN DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION
This command cancels a standard destination or a destination with new code.
Carrier destinations may be cancelled automatically, if the assignment to
the superior destination of carrier selection was removed with the help of
a MOD DESTDAT or CAN DESTDAT command. If they have been transformed
into standard destinations, they may be cancelled with CAN DEST.
Destinations for carrier selection may only be cancelled, if they were
deactivated first with the help of the command DACT DEST and afterwards
transformed into standard destinations with the help of the command
CAN DESTDAT.
Prerequisites:
- There must be no code point or test point in existence (created) that refers
to this destination.
- There must be no code point group in existence referring to this destination.
- There must be no operator position point in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no centrex code point in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no centrex directory number in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no directory number destination in existence referring to this
destination.
- There must be no network management traffic data in existence referring to
this destination.
- There must be no route in existence to this destination.
- There must be no carrier data referring to this destination.
- There must be no intercept code data referring to this destination.
- There must be no call booking limit referring to this destination.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DEST : DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DEST- 1-
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DESTINATION
This command creates a destination. A destination is normally accessed via
code points. A distinction is made between different types of
destinations, depending on the further treatment of call requests:
- Standard Destinations
These access routes are for trunk group clusters, trunk groups, trunk work
station groups, test equipment, announcement trunk groups, call types and
digit conversion masks addressing PBXs.
- Destinations with new code translation
These are used to access another destination with aid of repeated digit
translation (Call Processing).
These destinations cannot be linked to an optimized dynamic routing
(ODR)-list.
- Destinations for carrier selection and carrier destinations
These are required for conditional alternative routing. Destinations for
carrier selection are initially created as standard destinations
(ENTR DESTDAT).
These destinations cannot be linked to an optimized dynamic routing
(ODR)-list.
Prerequisites:
- The destination does not yet exist.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination
area name, the range of values must be extended with the
command MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR DEST - RETRANS DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
2. CR DEST - STANDARD STANDARD DESTINATION
1. Input format
DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
This input format is entered for destinations with retranslation.
Destinations with new code replace the originally dialed digit combination
with a new digit combination specified in the parameter NEWCODE. This
happens independently of the digit combination which led to the destination
with new code, i.e. many code points may refer to the same destination.
Immediately after the code replacement a new digit translation process
is started in the own switch.
Destinations with NEWCAC replaces the existing carrier access code or
define a new carrier access code.
Immediately after the carrier access code replacement a new digit
translation is started in the own switch.
Destinations with NEWORIG1 replaces the existing originating mark 1 or
define an originating mark 1.
Immediately after the originating mark 1 replacement a new digit
translation is started in the own switch.
A destination that has a digit conversion assigned allows another
destination to be accessed thanks to the new digit translation.
The CONVCODE, NEWCODE, NEWCAC and NEWORIG1 parameters perform a
similar function (i.e. starting a new digit translation).
CONVCODE refers to the dialed digits, i.e. it permits modification of
digits that have not yet been translated (B - DN), but leaves any dialed
area code unchanged that is administered as a LAC in the own switch.
NEWCODE performs a complete replacement of the codepoint, i.e. it allows
the LAC to be replaced, but leaves the B - DN unchanged.
NEWCAC performs a replacement of the carrier access code.
NEWORIG1 performs a replacement of the originating mark 1.
Note:
Combination of NEWCODE with NEWCAC and NEWORIG1 and CONVCODE with
NEWCAC and NEWORIG1 are possible.
Combination of NEWCODE and CONVCODE is not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DEST- 1+
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DEST : DEST= <,NEWCODE= ,NEWCAC= ,NEWORIG1= ,CONVCODE=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NEWCODE NEW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code with which the
originally dialed code is replaced.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWCAC NEW CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the code which replaces an existing
carrier access code or which defines a new carrier access
code if none exists.
Note:
- The existence of this parameter is not checked
in the carrier database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWORIG1 NEW ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code which replaces
an existing originating code or which defines a new
originating code if none exists.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
CONVCODE CONVERTED CODE
This parameter specifies a conversion mask which is used
to modify the originally dialed code.
Any dialed area code which is administered as a local
area code in the own switch remains unchanged.
The modified code is immediately retranslated.
Valid input characteres:
0-9, A-F, #, *, +, ., X
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask
consisting of control characters and digits.
The control characters have the following significance:
X : The digit of the old code is left as it is.
. : The digit of the old code is deleted.
+ : The digits following this character, up to the next
control character, are inserted.
: Digits without a preceeding "+" replace the old code.
Input is subject to the following conditions:
- At least one modification in the code is done.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DEST- 2+
CR DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Not more than two modifications may be made.
- Per modification, a maximum of 15 digits can be affected
but the total of both modifications is restricted to 24.
Example:
CONVCODE = 123xx. specifies that the first 3 digits of the
existing dial information are replaced by 1 2 3, the next
2 digits remain and the 6th digit is omitted.
The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DEST- 3+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
STANDARD DESTINATION
This input format is entered for standard destinations.
Standard destinations refer to up to 16 routes, which are used for the
selection of a trunk group in order to route a call to the outside of the
switch.
The trunk group is selected with a fixed alternative or an optimized
routing scheme, i.e. the routes are checked in ascending hunting sequence
if the addressed trunk group has at least one idle trunk.
If the ODR algorithm is used the routes of the ODR-list are checked
cyclically after the fixed alternate route at the position LINK has failed.
If the route is not allowed to seize the last idle trunk, then a check must
be made to determins whether the addressed trunk group has at least two idle
trunks. The first route in the hunting sequence which fulfills this condition
is seized for the call being set up.
The rerouting feature deviates from the fixed alternative routing scheme.
Rerouting means that in case of an unsuccessful attempt to get through
(i.e. successful seizure of a trunk in the own switch but congestion in a
transit switch), an attempt is made to establish the connection using a route
belonging to another rerouting group, i.e. the congested transit switches
are not addressed again.

[ [
[ CR DEST : DEST= [,FOVCODE=] [,MINMAX=] [,TLIM=] [,DEFEAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ODR= ,LINK=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FOVCODE FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final alternate
route. This code is used for retranslation after all routes
of the overflow sequence have been checked without success.
It will not be used if ODR routes have been checked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MINMAX MIN/MAX NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies that the end-of-selection is determined
by an abbreviated timeout if the minimum number of digits is present.
If the maximum number of digits is present, selection is considered
to be ended.
Note:
- The number of digits of the LAC (known in the own exchange)
associated with the CPT which points to the destination, must not
be considered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DEST- 4+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: MINIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
b: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
Default: 24
TLIM TIME LIMIT
This parameter specifies the time limits which are to be activated or
deactivated for the destination. The project-specific time values
of the specified timers can be output using the command DISP TIOUT.
The following time limit groups are possible:
Group 1:
The parameter values in this group determine the EOS supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, dialing is considered
to be ended when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 2:
The parameter values in this group determine the ring time limit
for the destination. If this is activated, the ring time is limited
to the value specified in the relevant timer.
Group 3:
The parameter values in this group determine the clearback signal
supervision for the destination. If this is activated, the connection
is released when the relevant timer has timed out and the clearback
signal has been received from the called end.
Group 4:
The parameter values in this group determine the call time supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released
when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 5:
The parameter values in this group determine the release delay for
the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released when
the relevant timer has timed out after the calling party has replaced
the receiver.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DIALTM1 DIAL TIME 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 07 for trunks.
[DIALTM2 [ DIAL TIME 2
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 08 for trunks.
[[DIALTM3 [[ DIAL TIME 3
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 09 for trunks.
!OFFDIA - SWITCH OFF DIAL CONTROL
Switches off the EOS supervision.
RINGTM0 RING TIME LIMIT 0
[[ [[ Switches off the ring time limit. This is a
[[ [[ mandatory input if TRACA=ORIG is to be
[[ [[ specified for one of the routes.
[[RINGTM1 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 19.
[[RINGTM2 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 2
[ [ Corresponds to timer 20.
[[RINGTM3 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 3
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 21.
[[RINGTM4 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 4
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 22.
[[RINGTM5 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 5
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 23.
[[RINGTM6 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 6
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 24.
!RINGTM7 - RING TIME LIMIT 7
Corresponds to timer 25.
CLEATM1 CLEAR BACK TIME 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 34.
[[CLEATM2 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 2
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 35.
[[CLEATM3 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 3
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 36.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DEST- 5+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[[CLEATM4 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 4
[ [ Corresponds to timer 37.
[[CLEATM5 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 5
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 38.
[[CLEATM6 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 6
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 39.
[[OFFEND [[ SWITCH OFF END CONTROL
[[ [[ Supervision of the called party clearback signal
[[ [[ is switched off (e.g. to avoid premature release).
!RELCLEA - RELEASE CLEAR BACK
Release takes place as soon as the clearback
signal is received from the called end.
CONVTM1 CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 27.
[[CONVTM2 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 2
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 28.
[[CONVTM3 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 3
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 29.
[CONVTM4 [ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 4
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 30.
[[CONVTM5 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 5
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 31.
[[CONVTM6 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 6
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 32.
[[CONVTM7 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 7
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 33.
!OFFCALL - NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
Switches off the conversation time limit.
RELTM0 RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 0
[[ [[ Specifies that the connection is held until
[[ [[ released by an operator.
[RELTM1 [ RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 1
[[ [[ Specifies that the connection is released as soon
[[ [[ as the dialing party has replaced the receiver.
[[RELTM2 [[ RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 2
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 42.
!RELTM3 - RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 3
This parameter value corresponds to timer 43.
Default: DIALTM1, RINGTM1, CLEATM1, OFFCALL, RELTM3
DEFEAT DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter value specifies particular call processing
destination characteristics.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AUTOINFO AUTOMATIC INFORMATION SERVICE
Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
speech path after the connection has been
established.
FEATCHCK FEATURE CHECK
This value marks a destination for the
protocol check to check a number of
parameters.
FIRSTACT FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE AS PRIMARY
This value assigns the network traffic status
primary traffic to the first active route,
i.e. to the lowest route number in the
overflow sequence to the destination that is
not blocked. Omitting this value assigns the
network traffic status primary traffic to
route number 1 to the destination even if
that route has been deactivated.
INDIDEN INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
This value marks a destination as one
requiring individual identification of an
originating CR PBX.
QUITON QUIET TONE
After dialing of all digits, a project specific
confirmation tone will be sent to the calling
party.
RCALLBAC RECALL BACKWARD ALLOWED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DEST- 6+
CR DEST
STANDARD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The calling party can recall the operator who
set up the connection.
ODR OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which has to be linked
to the destination and is used to find an idle route by the
ODR algorithm.
This is only allowed for standard destinations.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LINK LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
This parameter specifies the position in the ascending hunting
sequence of the fixed alternate route where the routing
algorithm changes to ODR and the routes of the ODR list
are checked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DEST- 7-
DACT DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE DESTINATION
This command deactivates a destination for carrier selection. A standby
carrier destination is specified for the entire traffic volume assigned to
the destination for carrier selection.
Prerequisites:
- The destination has been created.
- A destination is a destination for carrier selection.
- The specified standby carrier destination belongs to the
destination for carrier selection that is to be deactivated.
- The specified standby carrier destination has at least one route.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT DEST : DEST= ,SCDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCDEST STANDBY CARRIER DESTINATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT DEST- 1-
DISP DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DESTINATION
This command displays the data of all or some specified destinations.
To display all parameters the different types of destinations require
three different output masks, which will be displayed successively.
The amount of display may be reduced by specifying the parameter FORMAT .
The amount of display may be reduced further by specifying additional
parameters.
When specifying several parameters at the same time, only those
destinations will be displayed that fulfill all requirements at the same
time.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DEST : DEST= [,FORMAT=] [,CQGRP=] [,CARR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination.
The display of all existing destinations will be performed if
parameter DEST= X is specified.
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter is used to control the amount of information
displayed.
Notes:
There are three identifier groups:
- The first group displays all data of all specified
destinations with ALL.
- The second group specifies which destination data
will be displayed. The possible values are:
NEWCODE,STD,CARRSEL,TMRIPI and LINK.
- The third group specifies in which order the destinations
will be displayed. The display can be in alphabetical
(SORT) or in nonalphabetical (NOSORT) order of the
destinations.
Only one identifier of a group can be linked with an
identifier of another group.
The default values are: ALL and SORT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALL DISPLAY ALL DESTINATIONS
All data for all specified
destinations are output.
NEWCODE SELECT NEW CODE DESTINATIONS
Only the data of destinations with
digit retranslation are output.
STD SELECT STANDARD DESTINATIONS
Only the data of standard destinations,
carrier destinations and destinations
for carrier selection are output.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DEST- 1+
DISP DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CARRSEL SELECT CARRIER SELECTION DESTS
Only the data of carrier destinations
and destinations for carrier selection
are output.
SORT SORTED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER
All destinations will be displayed in
alphabetical order ifparameter
FORMAT=SORT is specified.
The carrier destinations belonging to one
destination for carrier selection will not be
displayed in an alphabetical order, because
they are related to the corresponding
carriers of the quota group.
NOSORT NOT SORTED IN ALPHA. ORDER
TMRIPI SELECT TMRIPI SELECTION DESTS
Only the data of destinations for TMR/IPI
selection are output.
LINK LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
The linkage between the destinations and
the ODR lists are displayed.
Default: ALL, SORT
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter specifies the carrier quota group.
Data output is limited to the destinations for carrier selection
that belong to the specified carrier quota group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CARR CARRIER
This parameter specifies the carrier.
Data output is limited to the destinations for carrier selection
that contain the specified carrier.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DEST- 2-
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DESTINATION
This command modifies one of the following destination data:
- the name of any destination,
- the data of a standard destination,
- the data of a destination for carrier selection and automatically all the
assigned carrier destinations,
- the destination link to an optimized dynamic routing (ODR) list,
- it creates or cancels the link from a destination to an ODR-list.
Notes:
- This command is not intended for changing a standard destination into
a destination with retranslation. Nor is it intended for changing
a destination in the reverse direction. Such modifications have to be
performed using the commands CAN DEST and CR DEST.
- It is possible to modify a destination with NEWCODE into a
destination with CONVCODE and vice versa.
- It is possible to modify a destination with NEWCODE or CONVCODE by
extending the destination with NEWCODE or NEWCODE.
Prerequisites:
- The destination exists already.
- The specified ODR-list exists.
- The specified new value does not yet exist.
- The specified old value is equal to the existing data.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination
area name, the range of values must have been extended with
the command MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
Compatibilities:
- The parameters FOVCODE and CFOVCODE are only allowed in case of
standard or carrier-selection destinations.
Exception: The parameter FOVCODE is also allowed for carrier destinations
which are used for CDD to administrate the code for call
divergence.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD DEST - DESTDATA MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
2. MOD DEST - DESTNAME MODIFY DESTINATION NAME
3. MOD DEST - RETRANS MODIFY DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
1. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
This input format is entered in order to modify:
- data of standard destinations,
- data of destinations for carrier selection or
- linkage of a standard destination to an ODR-list.
The change of a parameter for a destination for carrier selection results
in an identical change of that value within all assigned carrier specific
destinations.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for successful command
execution in addition to the standard prerequisites, if one ofthe parameters
DEFEAT, MINMAX or TLIM is changed:
- The name of a standard or carrier specific destination (DEST) is
specified.
- New and old value of the parameter TLIM refers to the same time limit.
Note if changing the parameter DEFEAT:
- Each command input permits the addition of new values (using parameter
DEFEAT) and/or cancellation of existing values (using parameter CDEFEAT);
unspecified values remain unchanged in the database.
Note if changing the parameter TLIM:
- Each command input allows the value of a single time limit to be changed;
the unspecified values of other time limits remain unchanged in the
database.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 1+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

[ [
[ MOD DEST : DEST= <,FOVCODE= ,CFOVCODE= ,MINMAX= ,TLIM= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,DEFEAT= ,CDEFEAT=> [,ODR=] <,LINK=> [,CODR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FOVCODE FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final
alternate route. This code is used for retranslation
after all routes of the overflow sequence have been
checked without success.
This parameter is also allowed for carrier destinations
which are used for CDD to administrate the code for
call divergence.
It will not be used if ODR routes have been checked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CFOVCODE CANCELLED FINAL OVERFLOW CODE
This parameter specifies the new code as the final
alternative route that has to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
MINMAX NEW MIN/MAX NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies that the end-of-selection is determined by
an abbreviated timeout if the minimum number of digits is present.
If the maximum number of digits is present, selection is considered
to be ended.
Notes:
- The number of digits of the LAC (known in the exchange)
associated with the CPT which points to the destination,
must not be considered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MINIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
b: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS=
1...24, range of decimal numbers
TLIM NEW TIME LIMIT
This parameter specifies the time limits which are to be activated or
deactivated for the destination. An entry can only be made to change
the existing values; if no value was entered for the parameter TLIM
the values created with the command CR DEST remain in the database.
The project-specific time values of the specified timers can
be displayed using the command DISP TIOUT.
The following time limit groups are possible:
Group 1:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 2+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The parameter values in this group determine the EOS
supervision for the destination. If this is activated,
dialing is considered to be complete when the relevant timer
has timed out.
Group 2:
The parameter values in this group determine the ring time limit
for the destination. If this is activated, the ring time is limited
to the value specified in the relevant timer.
Group 3:
The parameter values in this group determine the clearback signal
supervision for the destination. If this is activated, the connection
is released when the relevant timer has timed out and the clearback
signal has been received from the called end.
Group 4:
The parameter values in this group determine the call time supervision
for the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released
when the relevant timer has timed out.
Group 5:
The parameter values in this group determine the release delay for
the destination. If this is activated, the connection is released when
the relevant timer has timed out after the calling party has replaced
the receiver.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DIALTM1 DIAL TIME 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 07 for trunks.
[DIALTM2 [ DIAL TIME 2
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 08 for trunks.
[[DIALTM3 [[ DIAL TIME 3
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 09 for trunks.
!OFFDIA - SWITCH OFF DIAL CONTROL
Switches off the EOS supervision.
RINGTM0 RING TIME LIMIT 0
[[ [[ Switches off the ring time limit.
[[ [[ This is a mandatory input if TRACA=ORIG
[[ [[ is to be specified for one of the routes.
[[RINGTM1 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 1
[ [ Default for ring time supervision.
[[RINGTM2 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 2
[[RINGTM3 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 3
[[RINGTM4 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 4
[[RINGTM5 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 5
[[RINGTM6 [[ RING TIME LIMIT 6
!RINGTM7 - RING TIME LIMIT 7
CLEATM1 CLEAR BACK TIME 1
[[ [[ Default for supervision of the clearback
[[ [[ signal.
[[CLEATM2 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 2
[[CLEATM3 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 3
[CLEATM4 [ CLEAR BACK TIME 4
[[CLEATM5 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 5
[[CLEATM6 [[ CLEAR BACK TIME 6
[[OFFEND [[ SWITCH OFF END CONTROL
[[ [[ Supervision of the called party clearback signal
[[ [[ is switched off (e.g. to avoid premature release).
!RELCLEA - RELEASE CLEAR BACK
Release takes place as soon as the clearback
signal is received.
CONVTM1 CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 1
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 27.
[[CONVTM2 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 2
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 28.
[[CONVTM3 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 3
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 29.
[CONVTM4 [ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 4
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 30.
[[CONVTM5 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 5
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 31.
[[CONVTM6 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 6
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 32.
[[CONVTM7 [[ CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT 7
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 33.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 3+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!OFFCALL - NO CONVERSATION TIME LIMIT
Switches off the call time limit.
RELTM0 RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 0
[[ [[ Specifies that the connection is held until it
[[ [[ is released by an operator.
[[RELTM1 [[ RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 1
[ [ Specifies that the connection is released as
[[ [[ soon as the called party has replaced the
[[ [[ receiver.
[[RELTM2 [[ RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 2
[[ [[ Corresponds to timer 42.
!RELTM3 - RELEASE TIME A-SIDE 3
Corresponds to timer 43.
DEFEAT NEW DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter specifies particular call-processing
destination characteristics.
Default: No value
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AUTOINFO AUTOMATIC INFORMATION SERVICE
[ [ Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
[ [ speech path after the connection has been
[ [ established.
[FEATCHCK[ FEATURE CHECK
[ [ This value marks a destination for the
[ [ protocol check to check a number of
[ [ parameters.
[FIRSTACT[ FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE AS PRIMARY
[ [ This value assigns the network traffic status
[ [ primary traffic to the first active route,
[ [ i.e. to the lowest route number in the
[ [ overflow sequence to the destination that is
[ [ not blocked. Omitting this value assigns the
[ [ network traffic status primary traffic to
[ [ route number 1 to the destination even if
[ [ that route is deactive.
[INDIDEN [ INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
[ [ This value marks a destination as one
[ [ requiring individual identification of an
[ [ originating CR PBX.
[QUITON [ QUIET TONE
[ [ After dialing of all digits, a project specific
[ [ confirmation tone will be sent to the calling
[ [ party.
!RCALLBAC- RECALL BACKWARD ALLOWED
The calling party can recall the operator who
set up the connection.
CDEFEAT CANCELED DESTINATION FEATURES
This parameter specifies particular call-processing
destination characteristics to be canceled.
Default: No value
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AUTOINFO AUTOMATIC INFORMATION SERVICE
[ [ Suffix dialing of digits is possible via the
[ [ speech path after the connection has been
[ [ established.
[FEATCHCK[ FEATURE CHECK
[ [ This value marks a destination for the
[ [ protocol check to check a number of
[ [ parameters.
[FIRSTACT[ FIRST ACTIVE ROUTE FLAG
[ [ The first active route to the destination has
[ [ the network traffic status primary traffic.
[INDIDEN [ INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFICATION
[ [ This value marks a destination as one
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 4+
MOD DEST
DESTDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ requiring individual identification of an
[ [ originating CR PBX.
[QUITON [ QUIET TONE
[ [ After dialing of all digits, a project specific
[ [ confirmation tone will be sent to the calling
[ [ party.
!RCALLBAC- RECALL BACKWARD ALLOWED
The calling party can recall the operator who
set up the connection.
ODR OPTIMIZED DYNAMIC ROUTING LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which has to be linked
to the destination and is used to find an idle route by the
ODR algorithm.
This is only allowed for standard destinations, which are
not already linked to an ODR-list.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LINK LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
This parameter specifies the position in the ascending hunting
sequence of the fixed alternate routes where the routing
algorithm changes to ODR and the routes of the ODR-list
are scanned.
Note:
This parameter must be entered in combination with ODR or
can be entered when ODR already exists.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16, range of decimal numbers
CODR CANCEL LINKAGE TO ODR LIST
This parameter specifies the ODR-list which should no longer
be linked from the destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 5+
MOD DEST
DESTNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION NAME
This input format is to modify a destination name.
The name of a destination can be modified independently of the type, i.e:
- the names of standard and carrier specific destinations can be changed
as well as the names of destinations for carrier selection and
destinations with new code.
Prerequisite:
- The new name is not in use for another destination.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DEST : DEST= ,NDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NDEST NEW DESTINATION NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 6+
MOD DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MODIFY DESTINATION WITH RETRANSLATION
This input format is to modify destination data for destinations with
retranslation.

[ [
[ [
[ [,NEWCODE= [ [
[ [,NEWCAC= [ ; [
[ MOD DEST : DEST= ,NEWORIG1= [
[ [,CONVCODE=[ ! [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NEWCODE NEW NEWCODE
This parameter specifies the new code with which the
originally dialed code is replaced.
This parameter is removed by canceling the whole destination
and creating the destination together with the other
parameters.
For your convenience the following shortcut is provided by
this command:
- Reenter the existing value of this parameter again
and it will be canceled.
This only works as long as at least one code processing
parameter remains for this destination.
Caution:
- If you want to enter a new value for this parameter,
please check that it not exists, using the display
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWCAC NEW CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the code which replaces an existing
carrier access code or which defines a new carrier access
code if none exists.
This parameter is removed by canceling the whole destination
and creating the destination together with the other
parameters.
For your convenience the following shortcut is provided by
this command:
- Reenter the existing value of this parameter again
and it will be canceled.
This only works as long as at least one code processing
parameter remains for this destination.
Caution:
- If you want to enter a new value for this parameter,
please check that it not exists, using the display
command.
Note:
- The existence of this parameter is not checked
in the carrier database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 7+
MOD DEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NEWORIG1 NEW ORIGINATION MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code which replaces
an existing originating code or which defines a new
originating code if none exists.
This parameter is removed by canceling the whole destination
and creating the destination together with the other
parameters.
For your convenience the following shortcut is provided by
this command:
- Reenter the existing value of this parameter again
and it will be canceled.
This only works as long as at least one code processing
parameter remains for this destination.
Caution:
- If you want to enter a new value for this parameter,
please check that it not exists, using the display
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
CONVCODE CONVERTED CODE
This parameter specifies a conversion mask which is used
to modify the originally dialed code.
Any dialed area code which is administered as a local
area code in the own switch remains unchanged.
The modified code is immediately retranslated.
Valid input characteres:
0-9, A-F, #, *, +, ., X
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask
consisting of control characters and digits.
The control characters have the following significance:
X : The digit of the old code is left as it is.
. : The digit of the old code is deleted.
+ : The digits following this character, up to the next
control character, are inserted.
: Digits without a preceeding "+" replace the old code.
Input is subject to the following conditions:
- At least one modification in the code is made.
- Not more than two modifications may be made.
- For each modification, a maximum of 15 digits can be
affected but the total of both modifications is limited
to 24.
Example:
CONVCODE = 123xx. specifies that the first 3 digits of the
existing dial information are replaced by 1 2 3, the next
2 digits remain and the 6th digit is omitted.
The existing dial information 7944583 is changed to 123453.
This parameter is removed by canceling the whole destination
and creating the destination together with the other
parameters.
For your convenience the following shortcut is provided by
this command:
- Reenter the existing value of this parameter again
and it will be canceled.
This only works as long as at least one code processing
parameter remains for this destination.
Caution:
- If you want to enter a new value for this parameter,
please check that it not exists, using the display
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...31 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEST- 8-
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DESTINATION
This command initiates recording of destination load data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- A maximum of 8 jobs of this type with a sum of 512 destinations
(specified via group or destination origin code) may be entered
at the same time.
- The same measurement object may not be specified in more
than one job.
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY OR CYCLIC.
- In case of high system load it is possible that not all
measurement data can be displayed on OMT or written into
the file within a 15 minute interval.
The data record remains incomplete.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,GRP= [ [
[ REC DEST : UNIT= ,DOCODE= [,FORMAT=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DEST- 1+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
CYCLIC CYCLIC TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for
these measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full, the newest
data will be lost. This occurs
after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily or single or cyclic measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
GRP TRAFFIC OBJECT GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a group (containing a
maximum of 512 destinations). One of the two measurement objects
(group or single destination) must be specified; a combination is
not permitted. If a group is specified, output is only possible
to disk. Only valid group names may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DOCODE DESTINATION ORIGIN CODE
This parameter specifies the destination originating code.
Up to 16 destination origin codes may be linked with &.
One of the two measurement parameters (destination origin code or
group) must be specified; a combination is not permitted.
The destinations for which measurement is to be carried out may
lie inside or outside the home exchange.
The destination codes have to be specified including the
traffic discrimination digit(s) and the local area code.
In the destination code part it is possible to specify any digit
combination (up to 18 digits per code). No checks are performed
during command acceptance whether the digit combinations lead
to an existing destination.
The operator must be carefull not to put invalid code under
measurement.
If a code to be measured is too long and not valid (e.g. 089 722 05),
the calls to the smaller and valid digit combination (e.g. 089 722 0)
cannot be performed.
Measurement of subdestinations is possible (e.g. 09 & 098 & 0987 &...),
but not in combination with different origin or language code values.
A maximum of 18 subdestinations can be measured at the same time.
Multiple measurement of identical measurement objects (same digit
combination) is not permitted.
However, identical destinations can be distinguished by providing
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DEST- 2+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
different carrier access codes at part of the destination codes.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: DESTINATION CODE=
1...18 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies the destination.
b: ORIGIN CODE=
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the origin.
The origin code corresponds to the originating mark 1
used for routing purposes.
c: LANGUAGE CODE=
0...F, range of hexadecimal numbers
This information unit specifies the language digit.
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter determines the output format to the output medium.
The identifiers ALL (output of all traffic data counters) or
VOL (output of the following traffic data counters: calls carried,
calls carried with answer, traffic volume and traffic volume
with answer) are permitted.
Default: ALL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL DATA
VOL VOLUME DATA
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DEST- 3+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DEST- 4+
REC DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO DEFAULT
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DEST- 5-
CAN DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION CONTROL DATA
This command cancels from the existing TMRIPI combination the specified call
history data or the relation of all TIRDESTs to their DEST (and in addition
this destination itself).
To re-assign an intercept to a pure TMRIPI combination, the operator has to
enter the parameter TMRIPI with only two info units. After entering this
command the actual assignment to this TMRIPI combination will be cancelled,
modifying it into an assignment of an intercept.
To cancel the call history data, the operator has to enter the parameter
TMRIPI with all three info units. After entering this command, the call
history data of this specific TMRIPI combination will not be evaluated for an
incoming call anymore. If call processing comes with all three values
(transmission requirement, ISUP preference indicator, call history data), the
call can be routed over a TIRDEST to be specified belonging to the specific
TMRIPI combination, ignoring the given call history data.
In case that the operator only entered the parameter DEST, it will be
assumed, that he wants to cancel the whole TMRIPI constellation. Therefore
after entering this command, the destination for TMRIPI selection will be
deleted. The corresponding TIRDEST elements will always be kept.
Prerequisites:
- There must be no code point or test point (created) that refers to this
destination.
- There must be no code point group that refers to this destination.
- There must be no operator position point that refers to this destination.
- There must be no centrex code point that refers to this destination.
- There must be no centrex directory number that refers to this destination.
- There must be no directory number destination that refers to this destination.
- There must be no network management traffic data that refers to this
destination.
- There must be no route to this destination.
- There must be no carrier data that refers to this destination.
- There must be no intercept code data that refers to this destination.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DESTCNTL : DEST= [,TMRIPI=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of destination for
TMRIPI selection.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TMRIPI TMR/IPI COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the valid combinations and consists
of three information units, one for the transmission
requirement, a second for the ISUP preference indicator and
the third info unit for special call history data.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b[-c]
a: TRANSMISSION MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DESTCNTL- 1+
CAN DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S UNRES. FALLBACK CAP.
b: ISDN-UP PREFERENCE INDICATOR
NOTREQ NOT REQUIRED
PREF PREFERRED
REQ REQUIRED
c: CALL HISTORY DATA
ICTUPP INCOMING TUP+
NOGTUPP SERVICE NO OUTGOING TUP+
ORIGMOB ORIGINATING MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
ICR2ECHO IC MFC R2 WITH HALF ECHO SUPPR
ASUBDLU ORIGINATING ANALOG SUB AT DLU
ISDNANCA ISDN ORIGIN WITH ANALOGUE CALL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DESTCNTL- 2-
ENTR DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DESTINATION CONTROL DATA
This command creates a new type of destination, called destination for TMRIPI
selection (DEST).
This destination is used to route a call depending on its incoming
characteristics.
These characteristics are defined with the parameter TMRIPI.
Depending on the valid TMRIPI combinations, a certain destination (TIRDEST)
will be choosen to route the traffic.
This means, that the code point points to the destination for TMRIPI
selection, and depending on the TMRIPI value (coming from the LTG incoming
side) the call will be routed over a certain TMRIPI routing destination
(TIRDEST).
If the specified destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST) does not yet
exist, a new element will be occupied in the datatable, having the new
destination type (destination for TMRIPI selection). In case that the
destination exists already, and it is of the correct type, it is assumed
that the operator wants to:
- enter additional data
- change data
If the parameter TIRDEST is entered:
- an additional TMRIPI combination may be entered for an already
existing destination, as well as for a new destination;
- a change may be made from intercept or destination (TIRDEST) to
a new destination.
If the parameter TIRDEST is not entered:
- a call history value may be brought into the administered state
(i.e. the call history value will be evaluated by Call Processing)
and be assigned to intercept handling;
- a call history value already administered may be reassigned from a
TIRDEST to intercept handling.
Prerequisites:
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area name, the
range of values must have been extended with the command MOD CALLPOPT :
DESTMAXL = LONG.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR DESTCNTL : DEST= ,TMRIPI= [,TIRDEST=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of destination for TMRIPI
selection.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TMRIPI TMR/IPI COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the valid combinations and consists of three
information units, one for the transmission requirement, a second for
the ISUP preference indicator and the third info unit for special call
history data.
Valid input combinations for this parameter:
KBIT64FB-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DESTCNTL- 1+
ENTR DESTCNTL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KBIT64-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
SPEECH-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
A3KHZ1-REQ
-PREF
-NOTREQ
KBIT64-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
SPEECH-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
A3KHZ1-REQ-ICTUPP
-PREF-ICTUPP
-NOTREQ-ICTUPP
KBIT64-REQ-NOGTUPP
-PREF-NOGTUPP
-NOTREQ-NOGTUPP
SPEECH-PREF-ORIGMOB
-PREF-ISDNANCA
-NOTREQ-ORIGMOB
-NOTREQ-ICR2ECHO
-NOTREQ-ASUBDLU
A3KHZ1-PREF-ORIGMOB
-PREF-ISDNANCA
-NOTREQ-ORIGMOB
-NOTREQ-ICR2ECHO
-NOTREQ-ASUBDLU
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b[-c]
a: TRANSMISSION MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
SPEECH SPEECH
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S UNR. FALLBACK CAPAB.
b: ISDN-UP PREFERENCE INDICATOR
NOTREQ NOT REQUIRED
PREF PREFERRED
REQ REQUIRED
c: CALL HISTORY DATA
ICTUPP INCOMING TUP+
NOGTUPP SERVICE NO OUTGOING TUP+
ORIGMOB ORIGINATING MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
ICR2ECHO IC MFC R2 WITH HALF ECHO SUPPR
ASUBDLU ORIGINATING ANALOG SUB AT DLU
ISDNANCA ISDN ORIGIN WITH ANALOGUE CALL
TIRDEST TMR/IPI ROUTING DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of a destination, which will be
referable via a destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST).
The destination may be reached with a code combination directly, or
indirectly via a destination for TMRIPI selection (DEST).
Prerequisites:
- The destination specified for parameter TIRDEST has to be
created as standard or newcode destination, or as a destination
for carrier selection, with help of the command CR DEST or
ENTR DESTDAT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DESTCNTL- 2-
CAN DESTDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DESTINATION DATA
This command converts a destination for carrier selection into a standard
destination. The assignment to a carrier quota group is cancelled. With
the command CAN DESTDAT all routes created for the standby destination
are transferred to the former destination for carrier selection. As a
result, this destination becomes a standard destination again. The former
standby carrier destination is then cancelled.
The other carrier destinations are converted into standard destinations
if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
- a test point exists for the carrier destination
- a route exists for the carrier destination.
Carrier destinations for which neither of these conditions is fulfilled
are cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- The destination has been created.
- It is a destination for carrier selection.
- The destination for carrier selection has already been deactivated.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DESTDAT : DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DESTDAT- 1-
ENTR DESTDAT
NOROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DESTINATION DATA
This command modifies a standard destination to form a destination for
carrier selection. This applies even if calls are already processed via
the standard destination.
Note:
The modification is not allowed for destinations with optimized
dynamic routing (CR ODR) reference.
Prerequisites:
- The standard destination to be modified to form a destination
for carrier selection is created.
- If one of the carrier destinations has already been created
as standard destination, no code points refer to this destination.
- The carrier quota group has been created and is active.
- A carrier destination is specified for each active carrier of the
carrier quota group.
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area
name, the range of values must have been extended with the command
MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR DESTDAT - NOROUTE
2. ENTR DESTDAT - ROUTE
1. Input format
Input format to be used if the destination to be expanded has no routes

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR DESTDAT : DEST= ,CQGRP= ,CDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the standard destination
which is being converted into a carrier selection destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group
which is assigned to the carrier selection destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CDEST CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 20 parameter values may be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DESTDAT- 1+
ENTR DESTDAT
NOROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: CARRIER DESTINATION NAME=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter unit specifies the name of a carrier destination
which can be assigned to the carrier selection destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier to
which the carrier destination will be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DESTDAT- 2+
ENTR DESTDAT
ROUTE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
Input format to be used if the destination to be expanded has routes.
The routes of the standard destination are transferred to the specified
standby carrier destination.
Additional prerequisites:
- The standby carrier destination must be specified in the list of
carrier destinations.
- No routes may have been created for the standby carrier destination.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR DESTDAT : DEST= ,CQGRP= ,CDEST= ,SCDEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the standard destination
which is being converted into a carrier selection destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CQGRP CARRIER QUOTA GROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier quota group
which is assigned to the carrier selection destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CDEST CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 20 parameter values may be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: CARRIER DESTINATION NAME=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter unit specifies the name of a carrier destination
which can be assigned to the carrier selection destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier to
which the carrier destination will be assigned.
SCDEST STANDBY CARRIER DESTINATION
This parameter specifies to which carrier destination the routes
which are assigned to the standard destination, being converted
into carrier selection destination, are to be transferred.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DESTDAT- 3-
MOD DESTDAT
ACDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DESTINATION DATA
This command modifies the assignment of carrier destination to a carrier
selection area.
It is possible to
- assign further carrier destinations to a destination for carrier
selection or
- cancel the assignment of carrier destinations to a destination for
carrier selection.
Prerequisites:
- If more than 6 digits are to be entered in the destination area
name, the range of values must have been extended with the command
MOD CALLPOPT : DESTMAXL = LONG.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD DESTDAT - ACDEST ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
2. MOD DESTDAT - CCDEST CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
1. Input format
ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
This input format is used to modify the extension for a destination for
carrier selection (add carrier destinations).
All destinations for carrier selection need to be expanded after the
addition of one or more carriers to a quota group (MOD CQGRP) in order to
bring the additional carriers into effect for the load sharing scheme.
The expansion of destinations for carrier selection is also necessary, if
no carrier destinations were assigned during the initial ENTR DESTDAT to
carriers with a quota of zero, and if the carriers shall be activated now.
All added carrier destinations with already assigned routes are activated
automatically, if the destination for carrier selection is already active
(ACT DEST).
Prerequisites:
- The name of the additional carrier destination is not yet used.
- The additional carrier destination already exists as a standard
destination without any code points using this destination.
- The carrier name already exists in that quota group used by the specified
destination for carrier selection.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DESTDAT : ACDEST= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACDEST ADDITIONAL CARRIER DESTINATION
Up to 19 parameter values can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: CARRIER DESTINATION NAME=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier
destination which can be assigned to the carrier selection
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DESTDAT- 1+
MOD DESTDAT
ACDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
destination.
b: CARRIER NAME=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter unit specifies the name of the carrier to
which the carrier destination will be assigned.
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier selection area.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DESTDAT- 2+
MOD DESTDAT
CCDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
This input format is entered to modify the extension of destination for
carrier selection (cancel carrier destination).
All carrier destinations assigned to a deactivated carrier (MOD CQDAT)
need to be deleted from the destination for carrier selection before the
carrier can be removed from the quota group (MOD CQGRP).
Additionally, a table is displayed which shows if the cancelled carrier
destinations have been deleted or if they were kept as standard
destinations.
Prerequisites:
- The carrier, which the carrier destination being cancelled is assigned
to, is deactive within the quota group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DESTDAT : CCDEST= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CCDEST CANCELLED CARRIER DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the carrier destination for which the
assignment to the carrier selection area should be cancelled.
Up to 19 parameter values can be cancelled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the name of the carrier selection area.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DESTDAT- 3-
DISP DEVAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION
This command displays authorizations assigned to devices.
A table is displayed showing the authorizations of individual
or all devices.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP DEVAUT : [DEV=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter specifies the device for which the basic or maximum
authorization is to be modified, or which devices authorizations are
to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE TYPE
OMT O&M TERMINAL
WST WORKSTATION
This information unit specifies the device type.
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the device number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DEVAUT- 1-
MOD DEVAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DEVICE AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies the input device authorization.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DEVAUT : DEV= ,AUT= ,OAUT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter specifies the device for which the authorization must
be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE IDENTIFIER
OMT O&M TERMINAL
WST WORKSTATION
b: DEVICE IDENTIFIER=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
AUT NEW AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the new device authorization.
An authorization contains a number of authorization classes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OAUT OLD AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the old device authorization.
An authorization contains a number of authorization classes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DEVAUT- 1-
CAN DFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Disk File from Master and Slave
This task deletes a file from both master and slave disk using an FCS-Testprocess.
This task should be used only if it is not possible to delete a file using
CAN DFILEFS task.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN DFILE : [MP_ID=] ,File= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
File
Specifies the file name (with full path).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DFILE- 1-
CAT DFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Catalog Disk File on Master and Slave
This task renames a file on both master and slave disk using an FCS-Testprocess.
It is not possible to change the directory, only the file member name.
Input format

[ [
[ CAT DFILE : [MP_ID=] ,New file= ,Old file= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
New file
Specifies the new file name (with full path).
Old file
Specifies the old file name (with full path).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAT DFILE- 1-
DISP DFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Disk Files on Master or Slave
This task queries files on master and/or slave disk using an FCS-Testprocess.
It is possible to specify, which disk should be queried (master or slave).
Either the base directory only or the whole base directory tree will be returned.
As a default, all objects except of object with the category system or unsynch
will be returned. In order to see those objects too it is possible to enter
the specific category as a filter. In this case only objects with the specified
category will be displayed.
The output can be either short (only names) or long (names and attributes).
If the output has been truncated (indicate the value of the output parameter
LAST),
use DISP FOLLOW to see following files.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DFILE : [SCSI=] [,MP_ID=] [,Side=] ,Dir= ,Categ= ,Attr= [
[ [
[ ,Whole= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD version the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
If the side is not entered, the scsi is ignored as well.
If the side is entered and this value is not entered the scsi
default value will be the SYS disk.
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
If not entered the query is not disk specific.
Dir
Specifies the base directory name (with full path).
Categ
Specifies the file category. Empty for no categ filter (all files).
Possibilities: DBMS, LOAD, LOG, TEMP, SYSTEM, DIR, UNSYNC, SAMAR
Remark: The files with the category = SYSTEM and UNSYNC will not
be displayed if no categ filter is required. In order to display
these files the file category filter must be used.
Attr
Specifies inquire type.
ONLY NAME = only names (default),
NAME ATTR = names with attributes.
Whole
Specifies scope.
BASE = base directory only,
WHOLE = whole tree (default).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DFILE- 1+
DISP DFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DFILE- 2-
DMP DFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump Disk File
This task dumps a disk file / directory using a DUMP utilitity.
The dump can be displayed either binary (hexadecimal + ASCII)
or symbolic (see help for input field SYMB).
Input format

[ [
[ DMP DFILE : SCSI= [,MP_ID=] ,Side= ,File= ,Offset= ,Length= [
[ [
[ ,Symb= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD versions the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
File
Specifies the file / directory name (with full path).
Offset
Specifies the offset of displayed data within the file / directory.
Negative value means offset from the file / direcory end.
Default value is 0 (from the file / directory beginning).
Length
Specifies the length of displayed data.
Length equals -1 means dump until file end.
Default value is 2048 (one block = 2048 Bytes).
Symb
Specifies if the output will be displayed symbolic.
Symbolic means the logical structure of the object.
Allowed values are NO (the object is displayed in hex + ASCII Dump),
SHORT (only the important fields are displayed symbolic) and LONG
(all fields are displayed symbolic). Only objects of categories DIR
or LOG can be displayed symbolic. If the value of parameter SYMB is
unequal NO, the parameters OFFSET and LENGTH will be ignored.
Default value is NO.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP DFILE- 1-
PATCH DFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Patch Disk File
This task patches a disk file / directory using a PATCH utilitity.
Input format

[ [
[ PATCH DFILE : SCSI= [,MP_ID=] ,Side= ,File= ,Offset= ,Comp= [
[ [
[ ,Data= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD version the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
File
Specifies the file / directory name (with full path).
Offset
Specifies the offset of patched data within the file / directory.
Negative value means offset from the file / directory end.
Default value is 0 (from the file / directory beginning).
Comp
Specifies the compare data.
Syntax: value [ & value ] ...
value: [ - ] decimal | $ hexadecimal | string
Data
Specifies the patch data.
Syntax: value [ & value ] ...
value: [ - ] decimal | $ hexadecimal | string
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 PATCH DFILE- 1-
CAN DFILEFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Disk File FS
This task deletes a file from both master and slave disk using an FS-Testprocess.
If it is not possible to delete a file using this task, a CAN DFILE can be used.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN DFILEFS : [MP_ID=] ,File= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
File
Specifies the file name (with full path).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DFILEFS- 1-
DISP DIAGSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS STATISTICS
This command displays interim results of the active permanent
diagnosis. The number of cyclic runs, the number of faults found,
information on different faults, and the basic information on
the last fault are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DIAGSTAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DIAGSTAT- 1-
DISP DIGITCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITS CP
This command displays the digit translator data related to the
specified digit combination.
The displayed data may be restricted to certain digit combinations
specifying parameters CODE and ORIG1.
Examples: DISP DIGITCP; (no restrictions)
DISP DIGITCP: CODE=X; (no restrictions)
DISP DIGITCP: CODE=12; (code restricted)
DISP DIGITCP: ORIG1=DEF; (origination mark 1 restricted).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DIGITCP : [CODE=] [,ORIG1=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter restricts the digit translation data to be displayed:
Only digit translation data that begin with the entered digits will
be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter restricts the digit translation data to be displayed:
Only digit translation data that contain the entered originating
mark will be displayed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and
the hexadecimal number DEF may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DIGITCP- 1-
CAN DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITS GP
This command cancels the control record for the GP according to the digit
combination entered in the command CR DIGITGP.
The appropriate digit combinations will then be pretranslated according to
the standard values.
Prerequisites :
- The appropriate digit combinations in the digit translator must first be
cancelled if the number of digits for pretranslation is to be changed.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DIGITGP : CODE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination for the control record
for the GP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DIGITGP- 1-
CR DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITS GP
This command creates the control record for the GP. Based on this record, the
number of digits to be pretranslated in the GP is determined.
The record consists of two units. The first unit specifies the code for pre-
translation. The second unit determines the number of digits to be evaluated
by the GP. Codes that dont appear in the control record are handled by using
default values.
(These default values are:
Subscriber Controlled Input - 6 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=TOLLFRNO - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=CLOCKTST - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=NBARCPT - 24 digits,
Code points with TRATYP=ITGW - 24 digits,
Local areacodes - 6 digits.)
Since the pretranslator receives its data from the commands that create the
digit translator, the described command must be entered first.
Prerequisites :
- The entered control record must not already exist.
- The command must be entered before the digit translator is created.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DIGITGP : CODE= ,DIGITS= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter determines the digit combination for the control record
for the GP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DIGITS DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits to be evaluated
in the GP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DIGITGP- 1-
DISP DIGITGP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITS GP
This command displays the digit control data for the GP and also the digit
pretranslation table.
If the parameters are omitted or standard list format is selected, all digit
sequences for which the digit pretranslation differs from the standard setup
(evaluation of a maximum of 4 digits in the GP), are displayed.
If extended list format is selected, the complete digit pretranslation data is
displayed for all digit sequences specified by the parameter CODE.
If all data of digit preanalysis table is selected, the data of the not used
elements (i.e. elements of the digit preanalysis table with initial values)
will be displayed too.
If utilization list format is selected, the rate of capacity utilization of the
digit pretranslation table is displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DIGITGP : [CODE=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit sequence for which data is to be
displayed.
The parameter is mandatory if FORMAT = EXT or
FORMAT = ALL.
Incompatibilities:
- FORMAT = STD
- FORMAT = USE
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
STD STANDARD LIST FORMAT
EXT EXTENDED LIST FORMAT
ALL ALL DATA OF PREANALYSIS TABLE
USE USE OF PREANALYSIS TABLE
Default: STD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DIGITGP- 1-
MOD DIGITGP
COLDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITS GP
This command modifies the number of digits which are to be collected after the
digit pretranslation in the GP. (Prerequisite for this command is a good working
knowledge of the system.) The call is not passed on to the CP until the GP has
received the required number of digits.
The number of GP-CP messages (M:DIGIT_BLOCK_C - C:COME_AGAIN_C cycles) is
reduced if more digits are collected in the GP. This affects the time for
setting up a call as well as the used processor time, but only if the called
party digits are received with an "overlap" protocol. Otherwise a single
GP-CP message M:DIGIT_BLOCK_C is used to send all digits at once to the CP.
The GP uses a subtree of the CP digit translation tree to perform the digit
pretranslation. This subtree, in the standard configuration, comprises four
digits, i.e. the root of the digit tree plus three additional nodes of the digit
tree.
It is also possible to increase the number of digits that are collected in the
GP for specific digit combinations.
The parameters CODE and possibly LAC define the digit combination.
Parameter COLDIG defines how many digits still have to be collected after
the digit pretranslation is finished.
This optimisation does not affect the number of allocated nodes in the GP digit
tree. It is additional data for a pretranslation result.
Note:
This number of additionally collected digits is reset whenever one of the above
listed commands is entered for a digit combination that completely includes
LAC (if present) and CODE. The COLDIG value has to be
re-entered if it still applies.
Caution:
The length of LAC (if present) and CODE plus the value of
COLDIG may not exceed the total length of the shortest called party number
starting with LAC (if present) and CODE.
Entering a COLDIG value that does not comply with this rule REMOVES short
called party numbers beginning with LAC (if present) and CODE the
service!
The called party numbers concerned are not recognized as completely dialed.
The calls are released after a time-out.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD DIGITGP - COLDIG INDIVIDUAL COLLECTION OF DIGITS
2. MOD DIGITGP - DIGITS DEFAULT LENGTH OF PRETRANSLATION TREE
1. Input format
INDIVIDUAL COLLECTION OF DIGITS
This path is used to modify the code individual amount of additionally collected
digits.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DIGITGP : CODE= [,LAC=] ,COLDIG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the control record digit combination for
the GP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DIGITGP- 1+
MOD DIGITGP
COLDIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if multiple directory
number volumes exist in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits which are to be collected
in the GP after the digit pretranslation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...24, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DIGITGP- 2+
MOD DIGITGP
DIGITS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DEFAULT LENGTH OF PRETRANSLATION TREE
This path is used to modify the global standard length of the digit combinations
that are stored in the GP pretranslator.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DIGITGP : DIGITS= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DIGITS PRETRANSLATED DIGITS (DEFAULT)
This parameter specifies the default value for the number of digits
which are stored in the GP digit pretranslator und used for the digit
pretranslation.
Digit combinations with a length lower or equal to the value of this
parameter may be stored completely in the GP. Longer digit combinations
are cut off at the specified length and partially stored in the GP.
The GP handles a subset of the CP functions for digit translation.
Fewer digits than the specified length are stored in GP if a digit
combination uses a CP-only function.
An example for these is a CR CPT using the evalution of
ORIG1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DIGITGP- 3-
DMP DINODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump Disk File Inode
This task dumps a disk file inode using a DUMP utilitity.
The dump can be displayed either binary (hexadecimal + ASCII)
or symbolic (see help for input field SYMB).
Input format

[ [
[ DMP DINODE : SCSI= [,MP_ID=] ,Side= ,File= ,Offset= ,Length= [
[ [
[ ,Symb= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD version the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
File
Specifies the file / directory name (with full path).
Offset
Specifies the offset of displayed data within the inode.
Negative value means offset from the inode end.
Default value is 0 (from the inode beginning).
Length
Specifies the length of displayed data.
Default value is 0 (whole inode).
Symb
Specifies if the output will be displayed symbolic.
Symbolic means the logical structure of the inode.
Allowed values are NO (the inode and secondary
extent table are displayed in hex + ASCII Dump),
SHORT (the inode and secondary extent table are displayed symbolic)
and LONG (the inode and all connected blocks are displayed symbolic).
If the value of the parameter SYMB is unequal NO, the parameters
OFFSET and LENGTH will be ignored.
Default value is LONG.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP DINODE- 1-
PATCH DINODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Patch Disk File Inode
This task patches a disk file inode using a PATCH utilitity.
Input format

[ [
[ PATCH DINODE : SCSI= [,MP_ID=] ,Side= ,File= ,Offset= ,Comp= [
[ [
[ ,Data= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCSI
Specifies the disk SCSI address.
In the current EWSD version the possible values are hard-coded:
SYS: scsi = 0, side = 0&1
MOD0: scsi = 1, side = 0
MOD1: scsi = 1, side = 1
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
Side
Specifies the mpu side.
File
Specifies the file / directory name (with full path).
Offset
Specifies the offset of patched data within the inode.
Negative value means offset from the inode end.
Default value is 0 (from the inode beginning).
Comp
Specifies the compare data.
Syntax: value [ & value ] ...
value: [ - ] decimal | $ hexadecimal | string
Data
Specifies the patch data.
Syntax: value [ & value ] ...
value: [ - ] decimal | $ hexadecimal | string
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 PATCH DINODE- 1-
STOP DISP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP DISPLAY
This command stops the display being output on the O&M terminal.
The command is only effective if the display was started with a command
that performs a display function (e.g. DISP, SEL, STAT commands).
Notes:
- The command must be entered on the same terminal as the command which
causes the output that should be stopped.
Input format

[ [
[ STOP DISP : JN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a display job.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STOP DISP- 1-
CONF DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
With this command a digital interface unit can be configured
to one of the states MBL, ACT, CBL or PLA.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF DIU : LTG= ,DIU= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the destination operating status.
The following status transitions are permitted:
PLA <-> MBL
MBL --> ACT
ACT --> MBL (when the LTG is not active)
MBL <-> CBL
UNA --> MBL or CBL or ACT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DIU- 1-
DIAG DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
This command diagnoses a DIU of the type DIU24 or DIU30 in
an LTG.
Precondition: the LTG must be in the operating status
ACT or CBL and the associated DIU must be in the
operating status MBL.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG DIU : LTG= ,DIU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG DIU- 1-
STAT DIU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
This command displays the operating status of
- one DIU in a particular LTG
- one DIU in all LTGs
- all DIUs in a particular LTG
- all DIUs in all LTGs
- all DIUs with a particular operating status in a
particular LTG
- all DIUs with a particular operating status in all LTGs
For the parameter LTG a value or X must always be entered.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT DIU : LTG= [,DIU=] [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT NUMBER
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
UNA UNAVAILABLE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DIU- 1-
CAN DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command cancels a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
- The existing DLU systems must be PLA.
- The DIUs in the LTGs the DLU is connected
to must be PLA.
- No nailed up connection must exist for this DLU.
- If the DLU is of the type DLUG, no
administerable DLU equipment must exist in
this DLU.
- No administerable DLU modules must exist in
this DLU.
- The DLU must not be object to IACHASTA (see
MML command CR IACOBJ.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DLU : DLU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DLU- 1-
CONF DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command configures a DLU system to the desired operating status.
If a DLU system of any DLU type except DLUG is configured, then the
connected DIUs on the LTG will be configured automatically together
with the DLU system.
If a DLU system of a DLUG is configured, then the connected DIUs on
the LTG are not configured automatically together with the DLU system.
The command CONF DIU must be used to configure the DIUs of a
connected DLUG.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,DLUC0=[ [
[ CONF DLU : DLU= ,DLUC1= ,OST= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL 0
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
DLUC1 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL 1
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the desired operating status.
Compatibilities:
+--------------------------+-------------------+
! ! ! New state !
! Old ! Access- +----+----+----+----+
! state ! Degrading ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+==========================+====+====+====+====+
! UNA ! * ! + ! + ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! MBL ! * ! + ! + ! + ! !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! * ! ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! * ! ! + ! ! + !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLU- 1+
CONF DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! accessible ! + ! ! ! !
! ACT ! not accessible ! + ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
*: not relevant
Notes:
- During installation recovery there are no restrictions for state
transitions and the compatibility table is not relevant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLU- 2-
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command creates a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must not yet exist.
- All LTGs connected to the DLU must be
of the same type.
- All LTGs connected to the DLU must have
the same load type.
- All LTUs connected to the DLU must be
of the same type and not be connected to
another DLU. Allowed types are:
D24
D30
- Enough memory must be provided in the CP
database (see command MODIFY DB-SIZE),
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR DLU : DLU= ,TYPE= <,DLUC0= ,DLUC1=> [,PORTGRID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CCSWIDTH=] [,ALEXF=] [,ALPROF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must not yet exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
TYPE DLU TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DLUA DLU TYPE A
DLUB DLU TYPE B
DLUK DLU TYPE K
DLUO DLU TYPE O
DLUD DLU TYPE D
DLUV DLU TYPE V
DLUX DLU TYPE X
DLUI DLU TYPE I
DLUG DLU TYPE G
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROLLER 0
This parameter specifies the connection of
DLU controller 0 to LTUs in up to two LTGs.
Compatibilities:
- The specified LTGs and LTUs must exist.
- The specified LTGs must be of the
type LTGB.
- The type of these LTUs must be one of the
following:
D24
D30
- The PCM links of all DLU controllers of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLU- 1+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the DLU must be connected to LTUs of the
same type.
- If the type of the LTUs is D30, only the
LTUs 0 to 3 may be used for connecting
the DLU.
- The specified DIUs must not yet be connected
to another DLU.
- CCS links must be connected to DIUs with the
following applications:
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
- Extension links must be connected to DIUs
with the following applications:
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
- All CCS links of a DLU controller must be
connected to DIUs with the same application.
- To each LTG connected to the DLU there must
be exactly one CCS link.
- The CCS links of DLU controller 0 must be
connected to different LTGs than the CCS links
of DLU controller 1.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTDLU.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSLDI, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTLDI.
- The CCS link connected to the port CCS0 of
the DLU controller must lead to a different
LTG than the CCS link connected to port CCS1.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS0,
EXT0, EXT1, EXT2 and EXT3 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS1,
EXT4, EXT5, EXT6 and EXT7 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- The ports EXT3 and EXT7 of the DLU
controller can only be used if they are
connected to LTUs of the type D24.
- For all DLU types except DLUG, only the
ports CCS0 and EXT0 of the DLU controller
can be used for LTG connections.
- If the CCS link of a DLU of the type DLUV
is connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, no extension link may be created.
At maximum 10 values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG set.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DIU to which
the DLU controller 0 is connected via
a PCM link.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLU- 2+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: DLUC PORT
CCS0 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 0
EXT0 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 0
EXT1 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 1
EXT2 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 2
EXT3 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 3
CCS1 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 1
EXT4 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 4
EXT5 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 5
EXT6 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 6
EXT7 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 7
This unit specifies the PCM port on the
DLU controller 0 to which the PCM is
connected.
DLUC1 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROLLER 1
This parameter specifies the connection of
DLU controller 1 to LTUs in up to two LTGs.
Compatibilities:
- The specified LTGs and LTUs must exist.
- The specified LTGs must be of the
type LTGB.
- The type of these LTUs must be one of the
following:
D24
D30
- The PCM links of all DLU controllers of
the DLU must be connected to LTUs of the
same type.
- If the type of the LTUs is D30, only the
LTUs 0 to 3 may be used for connecting
the DLU.
- The specified DIUs must not yet be connected
to another DLU.
- CCS links must be connected to DIUs with the
following applications:
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
- Extension links must be connected to DIUs
with the following applications:
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
- All CCS links of a DLU controller must be
connected to DIUs with the same application.
- To each LTG connected to the DLU there must
be exactly one CCS link.
- The CCS links of DLU controller 0 must be
connected to different LTGs than the CCS links
of DLU controller 1.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTDLU.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSLDI, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTLDI.
- The CCS link connected to the port CCS0 of
the DLU controller must lead to a different
LTG than the CCS link connected to port CCS1.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS0,
EXT0, EXT1, EXT2 and EXT3 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS1,
EXT4, EXT5, EXT6 and EXT7 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- The ports EXT3 and EXT7 of the DLU
controller can only be used if they are
connected to LTUs of the type D24.
- For all DLU types except DLUG, only the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLU- 3+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ports CCS0 and EXT0 of the DLU controller
can be used for LTG connections.
- If the CCS link of a DLU of the type DLUV
is connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, no extension link may be created.
At maximum 10 values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG set.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DIU to which
the DLU controller 1 is connected via
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
CCS0 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 0
EXT0 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 0
EXT1 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 1
EXT2 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 2
EXT3 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 3
CCS1 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 1
EXT4 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 4
EXT5 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 5
EXT6 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 6
EXT7 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 7
This unit specifies the PCM port on the
DLU controller 1 to which the PCM is
connected.
PORTGRID PORT GRID OF THE DLU
This parameter specifies how many ports are
assigned to each DLU module is this DLU.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU of the type DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
16,32, range of decimal numbers
CCSWIDTH CCS WIDTH
This parameter specifies how many timeslots
on each CCS link of the DLU are used as
CCS channel.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU of the type DLUG.
Incompatibilities:
- If the DLU is connected to LTUs of the
type D24, only values from 1 to 8 may
be entered.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLU- 4+
CR DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
ALEXF ALARM EXTERNAL FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether the integrated
ALEX function of the DLU controllers are used.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU of the type DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO ALEX FUNCTION
NO NO ALEX FUNCTION
Y ALEX FUNCTION
YES ALEX FUNCTION
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
CRITICAL critical
If this parameter is omitted for a DLU of
the type DLUG, the alarm profile MAJESC
will be used by default.
Prerequisites:
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU of the type DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLU- 5-
DIAG DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF THE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command starts the diagnosis of a digital line unit or a specific
DLU system.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU system(s) to be diagnosed must have been created.
- No other diagnosis may run on this DLU.
- The pre-switched units (LTG and DIU(CCS)) must be in the operating states
ACT or CBL.
- The DLU system(s) to be diagnosed must be in the operating state(s) MBL.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,DLUC0=[[ [
[ DIAG DLU : DLU= [,DLUC1=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL 0
This parameter specifies whether DLUC0 is to be diagnosed.
Default: 1.) Y if neither DLUC0=Y nor DLUC1=Y is specified or
2.) N if DLUC1=Y is specified.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: Y
DLUC1 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROL 1
This parameter specifies whether DLUC1 is to be diagnosed.
Default: 1.) Y if neither DLUC1=Y nor DLUC0=Y is specified or
2.) N if DLUC0=Y is specified.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: Y
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG DLU- 1-
DISP DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command displays data of one DLU, a range of DLUs or
all DLUs.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DLU : DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLU- 1-
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTEND DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command creates news PCM connections from a DLU
to currently unconnected LTUs.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU to be extended must exist.
- The LTUs of the type D30 or D24 to which
the additional PCMs are to be connected must not
be connected to another DLU.
- If a new CCS link is to be created and there are
any modules created in the DLU, the corresponding
LTG must be PLA or MBL.
- If the DLU type is not DLUG, the specified DLU
controller must be PLA.
- The maximum amount of created DLU ports managed
by each affected LTG must not exceed 2048.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ EXT DLU : DLU= <,DLUC0= ,DLUC1=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROLLER 0
This parameter specifies the connection of
DLU controller 0 to LTUs in up to two LTGs.
Compatibilities:
- The specified LTGs and LTUs must exist.
- The specified LTGs must be of the
type LTGB.
- The type of these LTUs must be one of the
following:
D24
D30
- The PCM links of all DLU controllers of
the DLU must be connected to LTUs of the
same type.
- If the type of the LTUs is D30, only the
LTUs 0 to 3 may be used for connecting
the DLU.
- The specified DIUs must not yet be connected
to another DLU.
- CCS links must be connected to DIUs with the
following applications:
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
- Extension links must be connected to DIUs
with the following applications:
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
- All CCS links of a DLU controller must be
connected to DIUs with the same application.
- To each LTG connected to the DLU there must
be exactly one CCS link.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXT DLU- 1+
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The CCS links of DLU controller 0 must be
connected to different LTGs than the CCS links
of DLU controller 1.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTDLU.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSLDI, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTLDI.
- The CCS link connected to the port CCS0 of
the DLU controller must lead to a different
LTG than the CCS link connected to port CCS1.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS0,
EXT0, EXT1, EXT2 and EXT3 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS1,
EXT4, EXT5, EXT6 and EXT7 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- The ports EXT3 and EXT7 of the DLU
controller can only be used if they are
connected to LTUs of the type D24.
- The specified port of the DLU controller must
not yet be used by an already existing PCM
link.
- For all DLU types except DLUG, only the
ports CCS0 and EXT0 of the DLU controller
can be used for LTG connections.
- If the CCS link of a DLU of the type DLUV
is connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, no extension link may be created.
At maximum 10 values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG set.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DIU to which
the DLU controller 0 is connected via
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
CCS0 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 0
EXT0 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 0
EXT1 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 1
EXT2 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 2
EXT3 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 3
CCS1 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 1
EXT4 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 4
EXT5 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 5
EXT6 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 6
EXT7 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 7
This unit specifies the PCM port on the
DLU controller 0 to which the PCM is
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXT DLU- 2+
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
connected.
DLUC1 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROLLER 1
This parameter specifies the connection of
DLU controller 1 to LTUs in up to two LTGs.
Compatibilities:
- The specified LTGs and LTUs must exist.
- The specified LTGs must be of the
type LTGB.
- The type of these LTUs must be one of the
following:
D24
D30
- The PCM links of all DLU controllers of
the DLU must be connected to LTUs of the
same type.
- If the type of the LTUs is D30, only the
LTUs 0 to 3 may be used for connecting
the DLU.
- The specified DIUs must not yet be connected
to another DLU.
- CCS links must be connected to DIUs with the
following applications:
CCSDLU
CCSLDI
- Extension links must be connected to DIUs
with the following applications:
EXTDLU
EXTLDI
- All CCS links of a DLU controller must be
connected to DIUs with the same application.
- To each LTG connected to the DLU there must
be exactly one CCS link.
- The CCS links of DLU controller 0 must be
connected to different LTGs than the CCS links
of DLU controller 1.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTDLU.
- If a CCS link of a DLU controller is
connected to a DIU with the application
CCSLDI, all extension links of this DLU
controller must be connected to DIUs with the
application EXTLDI.
- The CCS link connected to the port CCS0 of
the DLU controller must lead to a different
LTG than the CCS link connected to port CCS1.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS0,
EXT0, EXT1, EXT2 and EXT3 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- All PCM links connected to the ports CCS1,
EXT4, EXT5, EXT6 and EXT7 of a DLU
controller must be connected to the same LTG.
- The ports EXT3 and EXT7 of the DLU
controller can only be used if they are
connected to LTUs of the type D24.
- The specified port of the DLU controller must
not yet be used by an already existing PCM
link.
- For all DLU types except DLUG, only the
ports CCS0 and EXT0 of the DLU controller
can be used for LTG connections.
- If the CCS link of a DLU of the type DLUV
is connected to a DIU with the application
CCSDLU, no extension link may be created.
At maximum 10 values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXT DLU- 3+
EXT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: LTG SET=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG set.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DIU to which
the DLU controller 1 is connected via
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
CCS0 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 0
EXT0 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 0
EXT1 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 1
EXT2 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 2
EXT3 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 3
CCS1 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 1
EXT4 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 4
EXT5 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 5
EXT6 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 6
EXT7 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 7
This unit specifies the PCM port on the
DLU controller 1 to which the PCM is
connected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXT DLU- 4-
MOD DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command modifies a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
- The DLU must be of the type DLUG.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DLU : DLU= <,CCSWIDTH= ,ALEXF= ,ALPROF=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
CCSWIDTH CCS WIDTH
This parameter specifies how many timeslots
on each CCS link of the DLU are used as
CCS channel.
Compatibilities:
- If the DLU is connected to LTUs of the
type D24, only values from 1 to 8 may
be entered.
- The DLU controllers of the DLU must
be PLA or MBL.
- The corresponding LTUs must be PLA
or MBL.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
ALEXF ALARM EXTERNAL FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether the integrated
ALEX function of the DLU controllers are used.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO ALEX FUNCTION
NO NO ALEX FUNCTION
Y ALEX FUNCTION
YES ALEX FUNCTION
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DLU- 1+
MOD DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DLU- 2-
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command records DLU traffic measurement data for specified DLUs
to operator terminal or to disk every 15 minutes within a given time
interval.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- A maximum of 8 jobs of this type may be entered at the
same time.
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY OR CYCLIC.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC DLU : DLU= ,UNIT= [,FORMAT=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [
[ [
[ [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the numbers of the DLUs for which data
has to be recorded.
It is possible to choose a single DLU, single DLUs linked with &,
a range of DLUs, ranges of DLUs linked with & or a combination
of these possibilities linked with & .
A maximum of 5 links is permitted.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all DLUs (DLU=X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD is specified.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DLU- 1+
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
CYCLIC CYCLIC TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are written
into a cyclic measurement file. Time parameters
are not permitted for these measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full, the newest data will
be lost. This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily, single or cyclic measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
FORMAT OUTPUT_FORMAT
This parameter determines the output format to the output medium.
The identifiers can be concatenated, with the exception of the
following case:
SHORT together with LONG;
are not permitted.
Default: SHORT
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
SHORT SHORT FORMAT
If this option is selected, the common DLU
counters and the short format of CC counters
are recorded.
LONG LONG FORMAT
If this option is selected, the common DLU
counters and the long format of CC counters
are recorded.
TIMESLOT TIME SLOT COUNTER
If this option is selected, the common DLU
counters, the CC counters and the time slot
occupation counters are recorded.
SPEECHCH SPEECH CHANNEL COUNTER
If this option is selected, the common DLU
counters, the CC counters and the speech
channel counters are recorded.
This value is not allowed in a measurement
of all DLUs (DLU = X) .
ALLTRAFF ALL TRAFFIC DATA
If this option is selected, the common DLU
counters, the CC counters , the time slot
occupation- and the speech channel counters
are recorded.
PORT PORT DATA
Additional to the selected counters (default =
DLU) the DLU port data are collected.
In case of UNIT=OMT the port data will be
displayed at the beginning of the measurement.
In case of UNIT=MDD[-DAILY] the port data
will be written at the beginning of all files.
This information unit selects the output format.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DLU- 2+
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DLU- 3+
REC DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DLU- 4-
RED DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUCE DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This command cancels existing PCM connections of a DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU must exist.
- The specified PCM connections must exist
for this DLU.
Compatibilities:
- If a PCM link is to be removed from a DLU
which is not of the type DLUG, the corresponding
DLU controller must be PLA.
- If a CCS link is to be removed from a DLU of
the type DLUG, the corresponding
DLU controller must be PLA.
- If a CCS link is to be removed and there are any
modules created in the DLU, the corresponding
LTG must be PLA.
- If a PCM link is to be removed from a DLU of
the type DLUG, the corresponding LTUs must
be PLA.
- At least one CCS link must remain on this DLU!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ RED DLU : DLU= <,DLUC0= ,DLUC1=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
DLUC0 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROLLER 0
This parameter specifies the connection of
DLU controller 0 to LTUs in up to two LTGs.
Compatibilities:
- The specified PCM connection must exist
for this DLU.
At maximum 10 values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c[-d]
a: LTG SET=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG set.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RED DLU- 1+
RED DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DIU to which
the DLU controller 0 is connected via
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
CCS0 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 0
EXT0 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 0
EXT1 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 1
EXT2 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 2
EXT3 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 3
CCS1 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 1
EXT4 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 4
EXT5 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 5
EXT6 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 6
EXT7 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 7
This unit specifies the PCM port on the
DLU controller 0 to which the PCM is
connected.
DLUC1 DIGITAL LINE UNIT CONTROLLER 1
This parameter specifies the connection of
DLU controller 1 to LTUs in up to two LTGs.
Compatibilities:
- The specified PCM connection must exist
for this DLU.
At maximum 10 values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c[-d]
a: LTG SET=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG set.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
c: LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DIU to which
the DLU controller 1 is connected via
a PCM link.
d: DLUC PORT
CCS0 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 0
EXT0 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 0
EXT1 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 1
EXT2 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 2
EXT3 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 3
CCS1 DLUC PORT FOR CCS 1
EXT4 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 4
EXT5 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 5
EXT6 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 6
EXT7 DLUC PORT FOR EXT 7
This unit specifies the PCM port on the
DLU controller 1 to which the PCM is
connected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RED DLU- 2-
STAT DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU SYSTEMS
This command displays the DLU system operating states of all DLUs, an
interval of DLUs or only one DLU.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT DLU : DLU= [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies an operating status for selective display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
DST DISTURBED
UNA UNAVAILABLE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
FLT FAULTY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLU- 1-
CAN DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command cancels DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
- The DLU must be of the type DLUG.
- The specified DLU equipment must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DLUEQ : DLU= ,EQ= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the location of
the DLU equipment within the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: LOCATION TYPE
EQG EQUIPMENT DLUG SLOT
MOD MODULE SLOT
This unit specifies the location type
of the DLU equipment.
b: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the shelf number.
c: EQUIPMENT NUMBER / MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DLU equipment
number respectively the DLU module number
associated with the DLU equipment.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DLUEQ- 1-
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU EQUIPMENT
This command configures one or more DLU equipment to the desired
operating status.
DLUV equipment will be configured automatically together with
the DLU system. It cannot be configured by this MML command.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,DCC= [ [
[ [,RGMG=[ [
[ CONF DLUEQ : DLU= ,RGB= ,OST= ; [
[ [,EQ= [ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the direct
current converter.
The parameter DCC is valid for all DLU types except DLUG.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: DCC NUMBER=
0...3, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the DCC number within
a shelf.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
RGMG RING METER GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the ringing and metering generator.
The parameter RGMG may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLUEQ- 1+
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RGB RING GENERATOR SHELF B
This parameter specifies the ringing generator.
The parameter RGB may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the equipment of a DLUG.
Depending on the entered unit values, the following
equipment will be configured :
1. for EQG - <shelf> - <eqg_no> or
EQG - <shelf> - X or
EQG - <shelf>
the central DCC in a shelf of a DLUG
2. for EQG - X - X or
EQG - X
all central DCCs within a DLUG
3. for MOD - <shelf> - <mod>
one module located equipment
4. for MOD - <shelf> - X
all module located equipment within a shelf
5. for MOD - X - X
all module located equipment within a DLUG
6. for BD - <bd_no>
one bus distributor specified by its ID
7. for BD - X
all bus distributors within a DLUG
8. for X - X - X
all equipment within a DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: EQUIPMENT ADDRESS TYPE
EQG CENTRAL DCC LOCATION
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE LOCATED EQUIPMENT
X ALL EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the address type of the equipment.
b: EQUIPMENT UNIT 2=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
The meaning of equipment unit 2 depends on the selected
address type.
It specifies the shelf number for the address types EQG
and MOD respectively the ID of the bus distributor for
the address type BD.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT UNIT 3=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
The meaning of equipment unit 3 depends on the selected
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLUEQ- 2+
CONF DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
address type.
For the address type EQG the central equipment position
in a shelf of a DLUG is selected.
For the address type MOD the module position within a
shelf has to be entered.
For the address type BD the equipment unit 3 has to be
omitted.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the desired operating status.
Compatibilities for any equipment except BDs in the DLUG:
+-----------+--------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+
! state ! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+===========+====+====+====+
! MBL ! + ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! PLA ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
Notes:
- DCC status transition from ACT to MBL in all DLU types except
DLUG are only allowed if the depending switching modules or the
supplied DLU system is in the status PLA.
- DCC status transitions in the DLUG can be executed independent
of the supplied DLU modules.
Compatibilities for BDs (bus distributors) in the DLUG:
+--------------------------+-------------------+
! ! ! New state !
! Old ! Access- +----+----+----+----+
! state ! Degrading ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+==========================+====+====+====+====+
! MBL ! * ! + ! + ! + ! !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! * ! ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! * ! ! + ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! accessible ! + ! ! ! !
! ACT ! not accessible ! + ! ! ! + !
+--------------------------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
*: not relevant
During installation recovery there are no restrictions for state
transitions and the compatibility table is not relevant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLUEQ- 3-
CR DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command creates DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
- The DLU must be of the type DLUG.
- The specified DLU equipment address
must be free.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DLUEQ : DLU= ,TYPE= ,EQ= [,ALPROF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
TYPE DLU EQUIPMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU
equipment type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DCC4 DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER 4
DCC8 DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER 8
DCCPOOL DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER POOL
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the location of
the DLU equipment within the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: LOCATION TYPE
EQG EQUIPMENT DLUG SLOT
MOD MODULE SLOT
This unit specifies the location type
of the DLU equipment.
b: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the shelf number.
c: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DLU module number
associated with the DLU equipment.
This unit may only be entered if the
location type is MOD.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUEQ- 1+
CR DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
CRITICAL critical
If this parameter is omitted, the alarm
profile MAJNOESC will be used by default.
Prerequisites:
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU of the type DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUEQ- 2-
DIAG DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-EQUIPMENT
This command starts the diagnosis of a digital line unit equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The equipment to be diagnosed must have been created.
- No other diagnosis may run on this DLU.
- The pre-switched units must be in the operating states ACT or
CBL.
- At least one equipment within the specified range must be in the
operating status MBL.
- No equipment within the specified range must be in the operating
status ACT or CBL.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,RGMG=[ [
[ DIAG DLUEQ : DLU= ,RGB= ; [
[ [,EQ= [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
RGMG RING METER GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the ringing and metering generator.
The parameter RGMG may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
RGB RING GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the ringing generator.
The parameter RGB may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the equipment of a DLUG.
Depending on the entered unit values, the following
equipment will be diagnosed :
1. for EQG - <shelf> - <eqg_no> or
EQG - <shelf> - X or
EQG - <shelf>
the central DCC in a shelf of a DLUG
2. for EQG - X - X or
EQG - X
all central DCCs within a DLUG
3. for MOD - <shelf> - <mod>
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG DLUEQ- 1+
DIAG DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
one module located equipment
4. for MOD - X - X
all module located equipment within a DLUG
5. for BD - <bd_no>
one bus distributor specified by its ID
6. for BD - X
all bus distributors within a DLUG
7. for X - X - X
all equipment within a DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: EQUIPMENT ADDRESS TYPE
EQG CENTRAL DCC LOCATION
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE LOCATED EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the address type of the equipment.
b: EQUIPMENT UNIT 2=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
The meaning of equipment unit 2 depends on the selected
address type.
It specifies the shelf number for the address types EQG
and MOD respectively the ID of the bus distributor for
the address type BD.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT UNIT 3=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
The meaning of equipment unit 3 depends on the selected
address type.
For the address type EQG the central equipment position
in a shelf of a DLUG is selected.
For the address type MOD the module position within a
shelf has to be entered.
For the address type BD the equipment unit 3 has to be
omitted.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG DLUEQ- 2-
DISP DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command displays DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
- The specified DLU equipment must
exist.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,TYPE=[[ ; [
[ DISP DLUEQ : DLU= [,EQ= [ [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
TYPE DLU EQUIPMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU
equipment type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
RGMG RINGING / METERING GENERATOR
DCC4 DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER 4
DCC8 DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER 8
DCCPOOL DIRECT CURRENT CONVERTER POOL
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the location of
the DLU equipment within the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: LOCATION TYPE
EQ EQUIPMENT (CLASSIC) SLOT
EQG EQUIPMENT DLUG SLOT
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE SLOT
RGMG RINGING / METERING GENERATOR
This unit specifies the location type
of the DLU equipment.
b: SHELF / RGMG / BD NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the shelf number,
the Ringing and Metering Generator number,
or the bus distributor number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLUEQ- 1+
DISP DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT NUMBER / MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DLU equipment
number respectively the DLU module number
associated with the DLU equipment.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLUEQ- 2-
MOD DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT EQUIPMENT
This command modifies DLU equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
- The DLU must be of the type DLUG.
- The specified DLU equipment must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DLUEQ : DLU= ,EQ= ,ALPROF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU must exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the location of
the DLU equipment within the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: LOCATION TYPE
EQG EQUIPMENT DLUG SLOT
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE SLOT
This unit specifies the location type
of the DLU equipment.
b: SHELF NUMBER / BD NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the shelf number
or the BD number.
c: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DLU module number
associated with the DLU equipment.
This unit may only be entered if the
location type is MOD.
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DLUEQ- 1+
MOD DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU of the type DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DLUEQ- 2-
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY OST OF DLU EQUIPMENT
This command displays the operating states of DLU equipment.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,DCC= [ [
[ [,RGMG=[ [
[ STAT DLUEQ : DLU= ,RGB= [,OST=] [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [,EQ= [ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
DCC DIRECT CURRENT CONV. LOCATION
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the
direct current converter.
The parameter DCC is valid for all DLU types except DLUG.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: DCC NUMBER=
0...3, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
RGMG RINGING/METERING GENER. NUMBER
This parameter specifies the ringing and metering generator.
The parameter RGMG may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
RGB RINGING GENERATOR SHELF B
This parameter specifies the ringing generator.
The parameter RGB may be entered for all DLU types except
DLUG.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLUEQ- 1+
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EQ EQUIPMENT
This parameter specifies the equipment of a DLUG.
Depending on the entered unit values, the following
equipment will be displayed :
1. for EQG - <shelf> - <eqg_no> or
EQG - <shelf> - X or
EQG - <shelf>
the central DCC in a shelf of a DLUG
2. for EQG - X - X or
EQG - X
all central DCCs within a DLUG
3. for MOD - <shelf> - <mod>
one module located equipment
4. for MOD - <shelf> - X
all module located equipment within a shelf
5. for MOD - X - X
all module located equipment within a DLUG
6. for BD - <bd_no>
one bus distributor specified by its ID
7. for BD - X
all bus distributors within a DLUG
8. for X - X - X
all equipment within a DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: EQUIPMENT ADDRESS TYPE
EQG CENTRAL DCC LOCATION
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
MOD MODULE LOCATED EQUIPMENT
X ALL EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the address type of the equipment.
b: EQUIPMENT UNIT 2=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
The meaning of equipment unit 2 depends on the selected
address type.
It specifies the shelf number for the address types EQG
and MOD respectively the ID of the bus distributor for
the address type BD.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: EQUIPMENT UNIT 3=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
The meaning of equipment unit 3 depends on the selected
address type.
For the address type EQG the central equipment position
in a shelf of a DLUG is selected.
For the address type MOD the module position within a
shelf has to be entered.
For the address type BD the equipment unit 3 has to be
omitted.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLUEQ- 2+
STAT DLUEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OST OPERATING STATUS IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies an operating status for selective display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
DST DISTURBED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
FLT FAULTY
TYPE EQUIPMENT TYPE SELECTOR
This parameter specifies an equipment type for selective display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
RGB RINGING GENERATOR TYPE B
RGMG RINGING/METERING GENERATOR
DCC4 CLASSIC DCC FOR 4 MODULES
DCC8 CLASSIC DCC FOR 8 MODULES
DCCPOOL POOL DCC
BD BUS DISTRIBUTOR
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLUEQ- 3-
TEST DLULC
MULTIPLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST DLU LINE CIRCUIT
This command only tests analog subscriber line circuits
in the DLU.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a job with breakpoints. After a breakpoint the job can be
continued with CONT JOB.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. TEST DLULC - MULTIPLE MULTIPLE SUBSCR. LINE CIRCUITS
2. TEST DLULC - SINGLE ONE SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT
3. TEST DLULC - UNCOND UNCONDTIONAL SLMI:FMA
1. Input format
MULTIPLE SUBSCR. LINE CIRCUITS
This command tests more than one DLU analog subscriber line circuit.
The circuits to be tested are specified by entering port-oriented
data.

[ [
[ TEST DLULC : DLU= ,LC= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU number in an exchange.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the position of one or more line
circuits in the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the shelf number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the module number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the circuit number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST DLULC- 1+
TEST DLULC
MULTIPLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the program variant of testing analog
circuits in a DLU.
In the case of S1 the RINGING TEST for only the first port per
module is carried out.
In the case of S2 only the RINGING TEST is carried out.
In the case of S3 only if TU position 0-11-0 is specified,
TU Calibration will be executed.
In all other cases the COMPLETE CIRCUIT TEST is carried out
(as if optional parameter TTYPE had not been entered).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
S1 RINGING TST.FOR 1.CIRC.OF MOD.
S2 RINGING TST.FOR EACH SEL.CIRC.
S3 TU CALIBRATION
S4 TEST FUNCTION 4 (NORMAL TEST)
S5 TEST FUNCTION 5 (NORMAL TEST)
S6 TEST FUNCTION 6 (NORMAL TEST)
S7 TEST FUNCTION 7 (NORMAL TEST)
S8 TEST FUNCTION 8 (NORMAL TEST)
S9 TEST FUNCTION 9 (NORMAL TEST)
SCHED SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the schedule number which
determines the tasks.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST DLULC- 2+
TEST DLULC
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ONE SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT
This command tests a single DLU analog subscriber line circuit.
The circuits to be tested are specified by entering port-oriented
data.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,PERM=[[ [
[ TEST DLULC : DLU= ,LC= [,TTYPE=] [,SCHED=] [,STEP=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU number in an exchange.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the position of one or more line
circuits in the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the shelf number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the module number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the circuit number.
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the program variant of testing analog
circuits in a DLU.
In the case of S1 the RINGING TEST for only the first port per
module is carried out.
In the case of S2 only the RINGING TEST is carried out.
In the case of S3 only if TU position 0-11-0 is specified,
TU Calibration will be executed.
In all other cases the COMPLETE CIRCUIT TEST is carried out
(as if optional parameter TTYPE had not been entered).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST DLULC- 3+
TEST DLULC
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
S1 RINGING TST.FOR 1.CIRC.OF MOD.
S2 RINGING TST.FOR EACH SEL.CIRC.
S3 TU CALIBRATION
S4 TEST FUNCTION 4 (NORMAL TEST)
S5 TEST FUNCTION 5 (NORMAL TEST)
S6 TEST FUNCTION 6 (NORMAL TEST)
S7 TEST FUNCTION 7 (NORMAL TEST)
S8 TEST FUNCTION 8 (NORMAL TEST)
S9 TEST FUNCTION 9 (NORMAL TEST)
SCHED SCHEDULE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the schedule number which
determines the tasks.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test job is to be
performed.
A permanent test is only allowed for a single line circuit.
The job runs continuously and can be stopped by the STOP JOB
command.
N DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
NO DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
Y SET PERMANENT TEST
YES SET PERMANENT TEST
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a breakpoint during a step test.
The test table of the test object indicates which
test steps represent a breakpoint (country-specific).
A step test is only allowed for a single test of one line circuit.
The test program runs until the defined test step and must
be continued with the command CONT JOB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...998, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST DLULC- 4+
TEST DLULC
UNCOND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
UNCONDTIONAL SLMI:FMA
This command tests a single DLU analog subscriber line circuit, type
SLMI:FMA, with the possibility to override the high bit rate busy
status.
The circuits to be tested are specified by entering port-oriented
data.

[ [
[ TEST DLULC : DLU= ,LC= ,UNCOND= [,TTYPE=] [,PERM=] [,STEP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU number in an exchange.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the position of one or more line
circuits in the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the shelf number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the module number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit value corresponds to the circuit number.
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL TEST
This parameter specifies whether or not the high bit rate portion
of a subscriber is to be tested independently of the high bit rate
busy status. YES means that the high bit rate status busy is to be
overriden and the test performed. NO means that the test is to be
performed only if the high bit rate status is idle. By default the
value of this parameter is NO.
N NORMAL TESTING
NO NORMAL TESTING
Y TEST UNCONDITIONALLY
YES TEST UNCONDITIONALLY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST DLULC- 5+
TEST DLULC
UNCOND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTYPE TEST TYPE
This parameter specifies the program variant of testing analog
circuits in a DLU.
In the case of S1 the RINGING TEST for only the first port per
module is carried out.
In the case of S2 only the RINGING TEST is carried out.
In the case of S3 only if TU position 0-11-0 is specified,
TU Calibration will be executed.
In all other cases the COMPLETE CIRCUIT TEST is carried out
(as if optional parameter TTYPE had not been entered).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
S1 RINGING TST.FOR 1.CIRC.OF MOD.
S2 RINGING TST.FOR EACH SEL.CIRC.
S3 TU CALIBRATION
S4 TEST FUNCTION 4 (NORMAL TEST)
S5 TEST FUNCTION 5 (NORMAL TEST)
S6 TEST FUNCTION 6 (NORMAL TEST)
S7 TEST FUNCTION 7 (NORMAL TEST)
S8 TEST FUNCTION 8 (NORMAL TEST)
S9 TEST FUNCTION 9 (NORMAL TEST)
PERM PERMANENT TEST
This parameter specifies whether a permanent test job is to be
performed.
A permanent test is only allowed for a single line circuit.
The job runs continuously and can be stopped by the STOP JOB
command.
N DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
NO DO NOT SET PERMANENT TEST
Y SET PERMANENT TEST
YES SET PERMANENT TEST
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a breakpoint during a step test.
The test table of the test object indicates which
test steps represent a breakpoint (country-specific).
A step test is only allowed for a single test of one line circuit.
The test program runs until the defined test step and must
be continued with the command CONT JOB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...998, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST DLULC- 6-
CAN DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DLU MODULE
This command cancels a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The module to be canceled must exist and must be PLA.
- The ports of the module must be PLA.
This prerequisite does not apply to modules of the
following types:
IWEA
IWEB
IWEC
IWED
IWEE
IWEF
SLMDVO16
SLMDVO8
- The module type must be administrable.
- The associated DLU ports must not be connected.
- No frame handler must be assigned to this DLU module.
- The DLU module MGB may only be canceled if no depending
DLU module exists in the DLU.
- The DLU module LTAM may only be canceled if the
inter-DLU bus it is connected to is not being used
by a test access for testing the DLU.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting
location of the DLU module.
Depending on the DLU type, several DLU module
positions cannot be administered, because they
are used by vital DLU hardware. These positions
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLU type ! Non-administerable DLU module positions !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DLUMOD- 1+
CAN DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
For a DLU of the type DLUA values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUB values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUD values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=16 values from 0 to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=32 values from 0 to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUI values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUK values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUO values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUV values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUX values from 0
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DLUMOD- 2-
CONF DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU MODULE
This command configures one or more DLU modules to the desired operating
status.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE NAME
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the DLU module.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the desired operating status.
Compatibilities:
+-----------+-------------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+----+
! state ! CBL! ACT! PLA! MBL!
+===========+====+====+====+====+
! MBL ! + ! + ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! PLA ! ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! CBL ! ! + ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
! ACT ! + ! ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
Notes:
- Status transitions to the status CBL are only allowed for
call-processing DLU modules.
- During installation recovery there are no restrictions for state
transitions and the compatibility table is not relevant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLUMOD- 1+
CONF DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLUMOD- 2-
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE
This command creates a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU must exist.
- The specified mounting location must be free and administrable.
- DLU type, module type and mounting location must be compatible.
- The module type and the LTG load type must be compatible.
- Memory space must be provided in the CP database.
(see MOD DBSIZE)
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ,TYPE= [,MEAS=] [,PACC=] [,PATHID=] [
[ [
[ [,SLMXID=] [,IDLB=] [,PHUBMODE=] [,PARTNER=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ALPROF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location of
the DLU module.
It is possible to create more than 1 module by
specifying an interval. The interval must not
exceed the range of one shelf.
Compatibilities:
Depending on the DLU type, several DLU module
positions cannot be administered, because they
are used by vital DLU hardware. These positions
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLU type ! Non-administerable DLU module positions !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
The exact compatibilities of module type, mounting
location and shelf type are described in the
projecting handbook. The CP only checks the
compatibilities listed below.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUA:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 1+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-15 !
! ALMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-14, 0-15, 1-11, 1-12 !
! FAM ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-11 !
! FTEM ! 0-11 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! LMEM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! LTAM ! 1-14 !
! LVMM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! MTAM ! 1-13 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! OLMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! OLMAC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SASC ! 0-2 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMADIOD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPC8 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAMCD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMATPL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMF ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! TBAM ! 1-15 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUB:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 2+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADIOD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMCD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMATPL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-4, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-11 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUB:
- The DLU modules SLMACMRL, SLMATPL, SLMAFPC and
SLMAFPC8 can only be created if the DLU module MGB
exists in the DLU.
- DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and SLMAITM must
be created as SLMAFPE.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUD:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 3+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADIOD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMCD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMATPL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUD:
- The DLU modules SLMACMRL, SLMATPL, SLMAFPC and
SLMAFPC8 can only be created if the DLU module
MGB exists in the DLU.
- DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and SLMAITM must
be created as SLMAFPE.
- Only one DLU module ALEX may be created per DLU.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUG:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-6 !
! LCMM ! 0-5 !
! LTAM ! 0-4 !
! MTAM ! 0-2 !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 4+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SASCG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 1-15 !
! SLMAITFG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAITHG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAITMG ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDQFC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDTFC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIMSD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-8 .. 1-6, 1-8 .. 7-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-3 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUG:
- Only one DLU module ALEX may be created per DLU.
- If the DLU was created with PORTGRID=32, only
the shelves 0 to 3 are available.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUI:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADIOD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMCD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMATPL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 5+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUI:
- The DLU modules SLMACMRL, SLMATPL, SLMAFPC and
SLMAFPC8 can only be created if the DLU module
MGB exists in the DLU.
- DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and SLMAITM must
be created as SLMAFPE.
- Only one DLU module ALEX may be created per DLU.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUK:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADIOD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMCD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMATPL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 6+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! SLMDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUK:
- The DLU modules SLMACMRL, SLMATPL, SLMAFPC and
SLMAFPC8 can only be created if the DLU module
MGB exists in the DLU.
- DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and SLMAITM must
be created as SLMAFPE.
- Only one DLU module ALEX may be created per DLU.
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUO:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-11 !
! LCMM ! 0-12, 0-13 !
! LTAM ! 1-14 !
! MTAM ! 1-13 !
! OLMA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! OLMAC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMADIOD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPC8 ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMAMCD ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMATPL ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDA ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-7, 0-11 .. 1-7, 1-11 .. 7-15 !
! TBAM ! 1-15 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 7+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUV:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11 !
! SLMX ! 1-0 .. 1-4 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
DLU modules for a DLU of the type DLUX:
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! module type ! valid mounting locations !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
! ALEX ! 0-11, 3-15 !
! EMSP ! 0-0, 0-13, 0-15 !
! FMTU ! 0-3, 0-4 !
! IWEA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWED ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! IWEF ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! LCMM ! 0-3 !
! LTAM ! 0-13 !
! MGB ! 1-7 !
! MTAM ! 0-12 !
! NODLUMOD ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SASC ! 0-1 !
! SLMA12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMABEL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAC12R ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACCBR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACM16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACMRL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACOS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACRMP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSP ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMACSR ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADID ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMADIOD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPC8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPE ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAFPS ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMAMCD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMATPL ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDQFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDTFB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO16 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMDVO8 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIAME ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIFMD ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPB ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMPC ! 0-0 .. 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIMSC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMIPH1 ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDA ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDB ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! SLMISDC ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 8+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! SLMX ! 0-0 .. 0-3, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9 .. 3-15 !
! TBAM ! 0-14 !
+-------------+---------------------------------------+
Further compatibilities for a DLU of the type DLUX:
- The DLU modules SLMACMRL, SLMATPL, SLMAFPC and
SLMAFPC8 can only be created if the DLU module
MGB exists in the DLU.
- DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and SLMAITM must
be created as SLMAFPE.
- Only one DLU module ALEX may be created per DLU.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
For a DLU of the type DLUA values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUB values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUD values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=16 values from 0 to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=32 values from 0 to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUI values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUK values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUO values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUV values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUX values from 0
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
TYPE DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE TYPE
This parameter specifies the DLU module type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SLMACOS SLMA DLU ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLMACM16 SLMA DLU METER PULSE 16 KHZ
SLMACCBR SLMA DLU COINBOX REVERSAL
SLMACRMP SLMA DLU METER PULSE 16 REVERS
SLMD SLM DIGITAL (4 CIRCUITS)
LMEM LINE MEASURING MODULE
LVMM LEVEL MEASURING MODULE
FTEM FUNCTION TEST MODULE
ALEX ALARM EXTERN
EMSP EMERGENCY SERVICE PUSHBUTTON
SLMAC12R SLMA DLU 12 KHZ REVERSAL
SLMACMC SLMA DLU 12 KHZ C-WIRE
SLMATPL SLMA DLU TWO PARTY LINE
SLMADID SLMA DLU DIRECT INWARD DIALING
SLMACMRL SLMA DLU 16 KHZ REVERSAL
SLMF SLM FOR OPTICAL FIBRE
FAM FIBRE ACCESS MODULE
MTAM METALLIC TEST ACCESS MODULE
TBAM TEST BUS ACCESS MODULE
LTAM LOOP TEST ACCESS MODULE
SLMAFPA SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. A
SLMADIOD SLMA DLU IN/OUTWARD DIALING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 9+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SLMAFPB SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. B
SLMACSR SLMA CONC SILENT REVERSAL
SLMDA SLM DIGITAL A (8 CIRCUITS)
SLMABEL SLMA DLU BALANCED EXTENDED
SLMA12R SLMA METER PULSE 12 KHZ REVERS
SLMDB SLM DIGITAL B (8 CIRCUITS)
SLMAMCD SLMA DLU THIRD GENERATION SLIC
SLMAFPC SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. C
FMTU FUNCTION TEST MODULE FOR TU
LCMM LINE AND CIRCUIT MEASURING MOD
SASC STAND ALONE SERVICE CONTROLLER
SLMAFPS SLMA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. S
IWEA INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT A
IWEB INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT B
SLMACSP SLMA DLU COINBOX SEMIPUBLICO
ALMA ANNOUNCEMENT LINE MOD ANALOG
OLMA OPERATOR LINE MODULE ANALOG
OLMAC OPERATOR LINE MODULE ANALOG C
SLMAMC SLMA METER PULSE C-WIRE
SLMAFPC8 SLMA DLU FEATURE PROG. C 8
SLMIAMA SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE A
SLMX SUBSCRIBER LINE MULTIPLEXER
SLMIPH1 SLM INTERNET PACKET HUB TYPE 1
IWEC INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT C
IWED INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT D
IWEE INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT E
IWEF INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT F
SLMIFMA SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM A
SLMAFPE SLMA DLU FEATURE PROG. E
DLU modules of the types SLMAITF and
SLMAITM must be created as SLMAFPE.
MGB METERING GENERATOR DLUB
SLMDVO8 SLMD FOR VIRTUAL OPERATOR
SLMISDA SLM INTERNET SYMM. DIGITAL A
SLMIMSB SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE B
SLMIAMC SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE C
SLMIMSA SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE A
SLMDQFB SLM DIGITAL QFB (16 CIRCUITS)
SLMDTFB SLM DIGITAL TFB (16 CIRCUITS)
NODLUMOD NON DLU MODULE
This DLU module type marks a DLU module slot
used by a DLU integrated external hardware.
SLMDVO16 SLMD FOR VIRTUAL OPERATOR
SLMIMPB SLM INTERNET MODEM POOL CARD B
SLMAITFG SLMA INTEGR. TEST FUNC. G
SLMAITMG SLMA INTEGR. METAL. TEST G
SLMISDB SLM INTERNET SYMM. DIGITAL B
SASCG STAND-ALONE SERV. CONTR. G
SLMISDC SLM INTERNET SYMM. DIGITAL C
SLMIAMB SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE B
SLMIAME SLM INTERNET ADSL MODEM TYPE E
SLMIFMB SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM B
SLMIFMC SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM C
SLMIFMD SLM INTERNET FLEX. MODEM D
SLMDQFC SLM DIGITAL QFC
SLMDTFC SLM DIGITAL TFC
SLMIMPC SLM INTERNET MODEM POOL CARD C
SLMAITHG SLMA INTEGR. TEST HIGH CURR. G
SLMIMSC SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE C
SLMIMSD SLMI MULTIPLE SERVICE TYPE D
MEAS MEASUREMENT INDEX
This parameter specifies the test data record index for a DLU
module.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
PACC ACCESS TO PACKET SWITCHING MOD
This parameter specifies the packet access authorization.
Prerequisites:
To assign the packet access authorization, one of
the following packet data connections from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 10+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DLU to the packet handler must exist for the
specified DLU:
Compatibilities:
- Packet access authorization may only be assigned to
DLU modules of the following types:
SLMD
SLMDA
SLMDB
SLMF
SLMX
SLMDQFB
SLMDQFC
SLMDTFB
SLMDTFC
SLMDVO16
SLMDVO8
SLMIAMC
SLMIAME
SLMISDA
SLMISDB
SLMISDC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO PACKET ACCESS
YES PACKET ACCESS
PATHID PACKET DATA PATH ID
This parameter specifies the packet data path ID
for a DLU module.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter is only allowed for DLU modules
in a DLU of the type DLUG.
- This parameter is only allowed if the DLU
module has packet access authorization.
- A nailed-up connection with the specified
PATHID must exist for the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SLMXID SLMX IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the SLMX identifier.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered for DLU modules of the type
SLMX. Its value has to be unique within the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
IDLB INTER-DLU BUS
This parameter specifies the inter-DLU bus.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered if the
DLU module is of the type LTAM and if
the country code has been set to BEL
via the command ENTR EXDDAT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...1023, range of decimal numbers
PHUBMODE PACKET HUB MODE
This parameter specifies the packet hub mode.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 11+
CR DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter may only be entered for DLU
modules of the type SLMIPH1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SUPERIOR SUPERIOR
SUPERRED SUPERIOR REDUNDANT
INFERIOR INFERIOR
PARTNER PACKET HUB PARTNER
This parameter specifies the packet hub partner.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered for DLU
modules of the type SLMIPH1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PACKET HUB PARTNER SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: PACKET HUB PARTNER MODULE=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile
of the DLU module.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU module in a DLU of the type DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DLUMOD- 12-
DIAG DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSIS OF DLU-MODULES
This command starts the diagnosis of DLU modules.
Prerequisites:
- The DLU module(s) to be diagnosed must have been created.
- No other diagnosis may run on this DLU.
- The pre-switched units must be in the operating states ACT or
CBL.
- At least one DLU module within the specified range must be in the
operating status MBL.
- No DLU module within the specified range must be in the operating
status ACT or CBL.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE NAME
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG DLUMOD- 1-
DISP DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DLU MODULE
This command displays the data of DLU modules.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,MOD= [[ [
[ DISP DLUMOD : DLU= [,SLMXID=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location
of the DLU module.
Prerequisites:
It may only be specified if no parameter
interval is entered for the parameter DLU.
Compatibilities:
Depending on the DLU type, several DLU module
positions cannot be administered, because they
are used by vital DLU hardware. These positions
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLU type ! Non-administerable DLU module positions !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
For a DLU of the type DLUA values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUB values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUD values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=16 values from 0 to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLUMOD- 1+
DISP DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PORTGRID=32 values from 0 to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUI values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUK values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUO values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUV values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUX values from 0
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number
in the DLU shelf.
SLMXID SLMX IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the SLMX identifier.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLUMOD- 2-
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIGITAL LINE UNIT MODULE
This command modifies the data of a DLU module.
Prerequisites:
- The specified DLU must exist.
- The DLU module to be modified must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= <,MEAS= ,PACC= ,IDLB= ,PATHID= [
[ [
[ ,ALPROF=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the DLU module.
Depending on the DLU type, several DLU module
positions cannot be administered, because they
are used by vital DLU hardware. These positions
are:
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLU type ! Non-administerable DLU module positions !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
! DLUA ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUB ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-7, 0-8, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUD ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUG ! 0-7, 1-7 !
! DLUK ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUI ! 0-7, 0-8 !
! DLUO ! 0-8, 0-9, 0-10, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 !
! DLUV ! 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 0-10 !
! DLUX ! 0-7, 0-8 !
+----------+-----------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
For a DLU of the type DLUA values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUB values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUD values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=16 values from 0 to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=32 values from 0 to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUI values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUK values from 0
to 3 are valid.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DLUMOD- 1+
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
For a DLU of the type DLUO values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUV values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUX values from 0
to 3 are valid.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in
the DLU shelf.
MEAS MEASUREMENT INDEX
This parameter specifies the test data record
index for a DLU module.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed for DLU modules
in a DLU of the type DLUV.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
PACC PACKET ACCESS AUTHORIZATION
This parameter specifies the packet access authorization.
Prerequisites:
To assign the packet access authorization, one of
the following packet data connections from the
DLU to the packet handler must exist for the
specified DLU:
Compatibilities:
- Packet access authorization may only be assigned to
DLU modules of the following types:
SLMD
SLMDA
SLMDB
SLMF
SLMX
SLMDQFB
SLMDQFC
SLMDTFB
SLMDTFC
SLMDVO16
SLMDVO8
SLMIAMC
SLMIAME
SLMISDA
SLMISDB
SLMISDC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO PACKET ACCESS
YES PACKET ACCESS
IDLB INTER-DLU BUS
This parameter specifies the inter-DLU bus.
Compatibilities:
This parameter may only be entered if the
DLU module is of the type LTAM and if
the country code has been set to BEL
via the command ENTR EXDDAT.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DLUMOD- 2+
MOD DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...1023, range of decimal numbers
If no value for new a is entered
the connection of the DLU to the
inter-DLU bus will be canceled. This
connection may only be canceled if
the inter-DLU bus is not being used by
a test access for testing the DLU.
PATHID PACKET DATA PATH ID
This parameter specifies the packet data path ID
for a DLU module.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter is only allowed for DLU modules
in a DLU of the type DLUG.
- This parameter is only allowed if the DLU
module has packet access authorization.
- A nailed-up connection with the specified
PATHID must exist for the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
ALPROF ALARM PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile
of the DLU module.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
CRITICAL critical
Prerequisites:
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter may only be entered for a
DLU module in a DLU of the type DLUG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DLUMOD- 3-
STAT DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STATUS DISPLAY OF DLU MODULES
This command displays the operating states (with access
degradations), the states of packet data accesses and INTERNET
failures of all modules, an interval of modules or one module for
the specified DLU.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT DLUMOD : DLU= ,MOD= [,OST=] [,PACC=] [,INTERNET=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the digital line unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE LOCATION
This parameter specifies the module location.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
OST OPERATING STATUS IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies an operating status for selective display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
DST DISTURBED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
BLK BLOCKED
NCP NO CALL-PROCESSING
PACC PACKET DATA ACCESS STATE
This optional parameter specifies one packet access state for the
selective display.
Default: no effect on display
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO P-DATA ACC. AUTHORISATION
YES P-DATA ACCESS AUTHORISATION
AVAIL PACKET DATA ACCESS AVAILABLE
NAC PACKET DATA NOT ACCESSIBLE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLUMOD- 1+
STAT DLUMOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PCHAN P-CHANNEL FAILURE
CDBUS CD-BUS FAILURE
INTERNET INTERNET FAILURES
This parameter allows the selective display of DLU modules
with a specific INTERNET failure state.
Default: no effect on display
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL INTERNET MODULES
NOFAIL INTERNET MOD. WITHOUT FAILURE
INTFAIL INTERNET MOD. WITH INT. FAIL.
EXTFAIL INTERNET MOD. WITH EXT. FAIL.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLUMOD- 2-
DISP DLUPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY TRANSIENT DLU PATH DATA
This command displays transient DLU path data.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DLUPD : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter defines the equipment number.
Notes:
- Only the following port qualifications are allowed:
LTG: EQN = a-b
DLU: EQN = a
The input of an V5IF number will be rejected with an operator hint.
- If EQN is given for an LTG path data will be dispayed of this LTGB
which can be connected to 1, 2 or 4 DLUs.
- If EQN is given for a DLU path data will be dispayed of this DLU
which can be connected to 1 or 2 LTGBs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: TSG / DLU OR V5IF NUMBER=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
For LTG : a TSG number in the range 0...7
For DLU : a DLU number in the range 10...2550
(in steps of 10)
For V5IF : a V5IF number in the range 6000...8999
Input of V5 interface will be rejected with an operator hint.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP / SHELF NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
For LTG : an LTG number in the range 1...63
For DLU : not allowed
For V5IF : not allowed
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLUPD- 1-
CONF DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE DLU PORTS
This command initiates the operating status transition of one or more
DLU ports.
Note:
The current operating status of DLU ports can be displayed by the
MML command STAT DLUPORT.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF DLUPORT : DLU= ,LC= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit.
Notes:
- X can be specified only for the CIRCUIT unit, simultaneously for
the MODULE and CIRCUIT unit or simultaneously for all 3 units.
- For a DLU with type DLUB (compact DLU) or DLUD only the input
of SHELF values 0..3 is allowed.
- For a DLU with type DLUA only the input of PORT values 0..7 is
allowed.
(The current DLU type can be displayed using the MML command
DISP DLU.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLUPORT- 1+
CONF DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the new operating state.
Compatibilities:
+-----------+--------------+
! ! New state !
! Old +----+----+----+
! state ! PLA! MBL! ACT!
+===========+====+====+====+
! PLA ! ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! MBL ! + ! ! + !
+-----------+----+----+----+
! ACT ! ! + ! !
+-----------+----+----+----+
+: legal transition
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF DLUPORT- 2-
DISP DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIGITAL LINE UNIT PORT
This command displays the port data for a specified range.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DLUPORT : EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of a port on the
DLU. Depending on the parameter entered, the following ranges are
displayed:
1. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - <modulno> - <circno>
- precisely the DLU port specified
2. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - <modulno> [ - X ]
- all DLU ports of the specified module
3. for <dluno> - <shelfno> - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all DLU modules of the specified shelf
4. for <dluno> - X - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all DLU modules in all shelves of the
specified DLU
5. for X - X - X [ - X ]
- the DLU ports of all created DLUs
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c[-d]
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER=
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DLU number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
For a DLU of the type DLUA values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUB values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUD values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=16 values from 0 to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=32 values from 0 to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUI values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUK values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUO values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUV values from 0
to 3 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUX values from 0
to 3 are valid.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLUPORT- 1+
DISP DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number
in the DLU shelf.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the circuit number.
For a DLU of the type DLUA values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUB values from 0
to 15 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUD values from 0
to 15 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=16 values from 0 to 15 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUG with
PORTGRID=32 values from 0 to 31 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUI values from 0
to 15 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUK values from 0
to 15 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUO values from 0
to 7 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUV values from 0
to 15 are valid.
For a DLU of the type DLUX values from 0
to 15 are valid.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DLUPORT- 2-
SEL DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECTIVE DISPLAY OF DLU PORT
This command displays the port data of one, several or all DLUs.
Input format

[ [
[ SEL DLUPORT : DLU= ,LCTYPE= [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
LCTYPE LINE CIRCUIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the line circuit type of a DLU port.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SLCACOS SLCA DLU ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SLCACM16 SLCA DLU METER PULSE 16 KHZ
SLCACRMP SLCA DLU METER PULSE 16 REVERS
SLCACCBR SLCA DLU COINBOX REVERSAL
SLCAC12R SLCA DLU 12 KHZ SILENT REVERSA
SLCACMRL SLCA DLU 16 KHZ REVERSAL
SLCACMC SLCA DLU 12 KHZ C-WIRE
SLCF SLC FOR OPTICAL FIBRE
SLCD SUBSCRIBER LINE CIRCUIT DIGITA
FTEC DLU FUNCTION TEST CIRCUIT
LMEC DLU LINE MEASURING CIRCUIT
LVMC DLU LEVEL MEASURING CIRUIT
EMSP DLU EMERGENCY SERVICE EQUIPMEN
SLCADID SLCA DLU PBX LINE DID
SLCATPL SLCA DLU TWO PARTY LINE
UNUSEPRT UNUSED PORT
MTAC DLU METALLIC TEST ACCESS CIRCU
TBAC DLU TEST BUS ACCESS CIRCUIT
LTAC DLU LOOP TEST ACCESS CIRCUIT
SLCAFPA SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. A
SLCADIOD SLCA DLU DIRECT IN/OUT DIALING
SLCAFPB SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. B
SLCACSR SLCA DLU SILENT REVERSAL
SLCAMCD SLCA DLU THIRD GENERATION SLIC
SLCAFPC SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. C
SASCL STAND ALONE SERV CONTR LINK
SLCABEL SLCA DLU BALANCED EXTENDED
SLCAMC SLCA DLU 12KHZ C WIRE
SLCAFPS SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. S
ALCA ANNOUNCEMENT LC ANALOG
FCTU DLU FUNCTION TEST CIRCUIT TU
LCMC DLU LINE AND CIRCUIT MEASURING
OLCAC OPERATOR LINE CIRCUIT ANALOG C
OLCA OPERATOR LINE CIRCUIT ANALOG
SLCACCSP SLCA DLU COINBOX SEMIPUBLICO
SLCAFPE SLCA DLU FEATURE PROGRAMMAB. E
SLCX SLCX V51IF PORT
COTPRT CENTRAL OFFICE TERMINAL PORT
SLCDVO SLCD VIRTUAL OPERATOR
SLCSL SLC SDSL LOW
SLCSH SLC SDSL HIGH
SLCADSL SLC ADSL
SLCFMA SLC FLEXIBLE MODEM A
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL DLUPORT- 1+
SEL DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TYPE TABLE TYPE
This parameter specifies the table type for a port.
Default value:
If no entry is made for this parameter, no table type is selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FREE NOT CONNECTED
SUB SUBSCRIBER
ISUB ISDN SUBSCRIBER
PBXLN PBX LINE
IPBXBA ISDN PBX BASIC ACCESS
KEY MULTILINE HUNTING GROUP W. KEY
TEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TRUNK TRUNK
CONSOLE CONSOLE
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL DLUPORT- 2-
STAT DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF DLU PORTS
This command is used to display the operating status of DLU ports.
A specific operating status can be entered to search for DLU ports
with given status.
Note:
The current operating status of DLU ports can be modified using
the MML command CONF DLUPORT.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT DLUPORT : DLU= ,LC= [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the line circuit.
Notes:
- X can be specified only for the CIRCUIT unit, simultaneously for
the MODULE and CIRCUIT unit or simultaneously for all 3 units.
- For a DLU with type DLUB (compact DLU) or DLUD only the input
of SHELF values 0..3 is allowed.
- For a DLU with type DLUA only the input of PORT values 0..7 is
allowed.
(The current DLU type can be displayed using the MML command
DISP DLU.)
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: CIRCUIT=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLUPORT- 1+
STAT DLUPORT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OST OPERATING STATUS
This optional parameter specifies the operating state of the DLU
ports to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
DST DISTURBED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT DLUPORT- 2-
ACT DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command activates the dump of safeguarding messages.
Prerequisites:
- The dump may not previously be active.
- Activation of the dump causes following dump initiations to be processed
but not at the same time as the activation.
- External activations must be specified with the command DMP SGMSG.
This cancels the suppression of internal initiations (internal = from the
distribution process to the dump process, as soon as 200 messages have been
collected since the initiation last processed).
- If no external initiation is specified, there is automatically an internal
initiation after 200 messages have been collected by the distribution
process. This internal initiation initiates the dump of all previously
stored messages.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT DMPSGMSG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT DMPSGMSG- 1-
DACT DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command deactivates the dump of stored safeguarding messages.
Notes:
- Internal initiations from the distribution process to the dump process
are suppressed.
- External initiations to dump by the command DMP SGMSG are rejected
with the appropriate output.
- One reason for the deactivation can be that SG.OPER is full. In this
case, this cyclic file would be (partially) overwritten by further dumping.
The dump can be reactivated if dumping is at first suppressed and
SG.OPER is then dumped.
- Deactivation can also be initiated before the SG.OPER is created with
more than 90 PAM pages.
Prerequisites:
- If the dump is deactivated no further messages are written to SG.OPER,
but messages to be displayed continue to be collected by the distribution
process in its memory area.
- If the memory area is full, the oldest stored messages are compulsorily
overwritten.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT DMPSGMSG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT DMPSGMSG- 1-
DISP DMPSGMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP DUMP OF SAFEGUARDING MESSAGES
This command displays the activation state for the dump of safeguarding
messages.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DMPSGMSG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DMPSGMSG- 1-
CAN DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command cancels a directory number interval or a single directory
number.
Prerequisites:
- The directory number interval must not be connected (command
DISP DN, TYPE=CONNECT) or accessible by the digit
translator (command DISP DN, ACT=YES).
- The directory number interval must not be activated for IACHASTA
registration (command DISP IACOBJ).
- There must not be any ported directory number (command DISP DN,
INCEPT=PORTEDDN) in the interval.
- There must not be any directory number ported by location
( command DISP DN, INCEPT=PORTEDLP) in the interval.
- There must not be any individual announcements (command DISP DN,
INCEPT=CHGDNIND) for directory numbers in the interval.
- There must not be any extended directory number (command DISP DN,
EXTDN=YES) in the interval.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DN : [LAC=] ,DN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number interval or the single
directory number to be canceled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DN- 1-
CR DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command creates a directory number interval or a single directory number
with or without economy.
Prerequisites:
- The local area code must be defined.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DN : LAC= ,DN= [,PBXVOL=] [,DNGRP=] [,STMGRP=] [,ACCNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
Notes:
- Intervals that are used for subscribers should be decimal.
These intervals can be connected with a code point.
- Non-dialable intervals (e.g. for accounting purposes) might
be hexadecimal.
- Intervals of 1, 10, 100, 1000 directory numbers can be entered:
Intervals of 10, 100, 1000 dir.numbers with 2...12 digits
Single DN with PBX volume with 2...12 digits
Single DN without PBX volume with 1...12 digits
- Length of DN is not allowed to be longer tha specified
by DNMAXL to be displayed with DISP CALLPOPT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBXVOL PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
- For a single directory number used for a PBX, the PBX volume
indicates which directory number digits of a decade belong
to the PBX. The PBX volume must contain the last digit of the
given directory number.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
DNGRP DIRECTORY NUMBER GROUP
This parameter specifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to a subgroup (e.g. for
creating an accounting file).
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric digits are possible for input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DN- 1+
CR DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
STMGRP STATISTIC METER GROUP
This parameter specifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to counter groups.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0,1,2...15, range of decimal numbers
ACCNO MARK FOR ACCOUNT NUMBER
This parameter specifies whether the directory number interval is only
used for accounting purposes. In this case the directory number
interval cannot be connected with a code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
NO DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Y DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
YES DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DN- 2-
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER DATA
This command displays data for either all directory numbers, the
directory numbers within an interval or a single directory number.
It displays directory numbers within a certain interval with the
specified information.
A search can be made for one of the following selection criteria:
- Accounting numbers or non-accounting numbers ACCNO
- Directory number group DNGRP
- Access from digit translator ACT
- Statistics meter group STMGRP
- Directory number type TYPE
- Intercept identifier INCEPT
- Extended directory numbers EXTDN.
If TYPE, INCEPT or EXTDN are specified each directory number with
the selected criteria will be displayed besides the data that are valid
for the whole interval.
If ACCNO, DNGRP, ACT or STMGRP are specified the directory
number interval data is displayed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,DNGRP= [[ [
[ [[,INCEPT=[[ [
[ [[,ACT= [[ [
[ DISP DN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,STMGRP=[ [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [[,TYPE= [[ [
[ [[,ACCNO= [[ [
[ [[,EXTDN= [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number range or the single
directory number to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DNGRP DIRECTORY NUMBER GROUP
This parameter specifies the subgroup of the directory number
interval or single directory number.
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric digits are possible for input.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DN- 1+
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
UNOBDN UNOBTAINABLE DIRECTORY NUMBER
CHGDNIND CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER IND.
PORTEDDN NUMBER PORTABILITY
PORTEDLP LOCATION PORTABILITY
ACT ACTIVATED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether or not the
directory number interval or the single directory number is
accessible by the digit translator.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY NOT ACTIVATED DN ONLY
NO DISPLAY NOT ACTIVATED DN ONLY
Y DISPLAY ACTIVATED DN ONLY
YES DISPLAY ACTIVATED DN ONLY
STMGRP STATISTIC METER GROUP
This parameter specifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to counter groups.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
TYPE SUBSCRIBER TYPE FOR DN
This parameter specifies the directory number type of the directory
number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
PBXLN PBX LINE
PBX PBX
PBXADDNO PBX ADDITIONAL NUMBER
Additional number of PBX.
PBXDDINO PBX DIRECT DIALING NUMBER
Direct dialing number of PBX
FREE FREE LINE
Specifies that only directory numbers
with no further connections are selected.
Also directory numbers with an intercept
identification will be selected.
WST WORK STATION
MEETME MEET ME
CSGRP COMMON SERVICE GROUP
RESCSGRP RESERVED FOR COM. SERV. GROUP
CALLTYPE COMMON CDS CALLTYPE
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
CONNECT CONNECTED DIRECTORY NUMBER
Specifies that directory numbers with
further connections are selected.
A connection can be:
-SUB
-PBXLN
-PBX
-PBXADDNO
-PBXDDINO
-WST
-MEETME
-CSGRP
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DN- 2+
DISP DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-RESCSGRP
-CALLTYPE
-CXGRP
ACCNO MARK FOR ACCOUNT NUMBER
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether or not the
directory number interval is used for accounting purposes only.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
NO DN IS NOT AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Y DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
YES DN IS AN ACCOUNT NUMBER
Default: NO
EXTDN MARK FOR EXTENDED DN
This parameter specifies as a selection criterion whether
extended directory numbers are to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y DN IS EXTENDED
YES DN IS EXTENDED
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the output format of the display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTERVAL DIRECTORY NO. INTERVALS ONLY
specifies that only the data valid for the whole
interval (e.g. activation, kind of interval,
directory number group, statistic meter group,
PBX volume, extended directory number in interval
existing) will be displayed.
ALL ALL DIRECTORY NUMBERS
specifies the display of the individual data
of each directory number within the specified
directory number interval (including directory
number type, intercept identification and extended
directory number).
Furthermore the data valid for the whole
interval (e.g. activation, type of interval,
directory number group, statistic meter group
and PBX directory number volume) will be
displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DN- 3-
EXT DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTEND DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command extends an existing directory number to a directory
number interval of 10 numbers. The existing directory number
must be within an interval of 10, 100 or 1000 numbers.
The new directory number interval consists of the existing
directory number followed by one digit where the lower interval
boundary must be 0 and the upper interval boundary must be 9.
Prerequisites:
- The country code is set to BRD.
(Command DISP EXDDAT).
- No extension of ported directory numbers.
- The directory number must be not connected.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ EXT DN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,NEWDN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple
directory number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number
to be extended. No more than DNMAXL-1 digits
are allowed. Length DNMAXL can to be displayed
with DISP CALLPOPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...11 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWDN NEW DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new directory number interval of
10 numbers.
Notes:
-Length of NEWDN is not allowed to be longer then specified
by DNMAXL to be displayed with DISP CALLPOPT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
3...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXT DN- 1-
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command modifies a directory number interval or the data of a
directory number interval.
The following data can be changed:
- PBX directory number volume (PBXVOL) (for a single
directory number only)
- directory number group (DNGRP)
- statistic meter group (STMGRP)
It is also used to enter, modify and cancel the intercept identification
(INCEPT) or the intercept digits (b) of a single directory
number.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,NEWDN= [ [
[ [,PBXVOL=[ ; [
[ MOD DN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,DNGRP= [
[ [,STMGRP=[ ! [
[ [,INCEPT=[ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the existing directory number interval or an
existing single directory number.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWDN NEW DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new directory number interval or a new
single directory number.
Notes:
- When connected (DISP DN, TYPE=CONNECT) or ported (MOD DN,
INCEPT=PORTEDDN) directory numbers are modified, a dangerous
command message is output. In this case care should be taken that
meter observation is stopped and traffic observation/measurement
is canceled.
- When connected directory numbers ported by location (MOD DN,
INCEPT=PORTEDLP) directory numbers are modified, a dangerous
command message is output. In this case care should be taken that
meter observation is stopped and traffic observation/measurement
is canceled.
- The mask is also output, if directory numbers are in the interval,
which are ported with location portability (INCEPT=PORTEDLP).
- The directory number interval must not be accessible by the digit
translator (command DISP DN, ACT=YES).
- If ported directory numbers are existing in the interval (to be
displayed with DISP DN), two cases can be distinguished:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DN- 1+
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a) The ported directory numbers in the exchange, where the
concerned subscribers are located, remain the same:
After the modification of the directory number interval the
directory numbers marked with INCEPT=PORTEDDN values must
be modified (MOD DN, parameter INCEPT=UNOBDN which
means this number is not valid). Because ported subscribers
are only reachable through their original numbers it necessary
to recreate the original numbers as single directory numbers
(CR DN) and modify them (MOD DN, parameter INCEPT=
PORTEDDN-b) so the link from the original number
to the ported number is like before.
b) The ported directory numbers in these exchanges are modified
accordingly:
No further ported directory number handling after the
modification of the directory number interval is necessary.
- For the new directory number (interval) a zone point should exist.
- The size of the directory number interval cannot be changed.
- Intervals that are used for subscribers which can be dialed must
be decimal.
- Intervals that are only used for accounting purposes might be
hexadecimal.
- The PBX volume must contain the last digit of the new directory
number.
- The new directory number with PBX volume must have at least two
digits.
- If a directory number in the interval is part of an operator
number of a PBX (OPN) and the length of the directory numbers
of the interval is changed, the length of the operator number
must not exceed the maximum length of a directory number
(12 digits).
- The Start Position Digits to Send (SSDI) for direct inward
dialing PBXs in the interval has to be adapted after the
modification, if the length of the interval has changed.
- Length of NEWDN is not allowed to be longer than specified
by DNMAXL to be displayed with DISP CALLPOPT.
- If extended directory numbers (EXTDN) are existing within the
interval, the new directory number cannot be longer than
DNMAXL-1 digits.
- If in the interval a PBX pilot directory number exists and the PBX
has additional numbers (ADDNO) in other directory number
intervals, the modification is not possible.
The additional numbers in the other intervals have to be
canceled (see MOD PBX) before the execution of the command and
recreated afterwards.
- If there are additional numbers (ADDNO) of a PBX in the interval
and the pilot directory number or further additional number of the
PBX are in another intervals, then the modification is not
possible.
The additional numbers in the interval to be changed have to be
canceled (see MOD PBX) before the execution of the command and
recreated afterwards.
- If in the interval a DDI-PBX direct dialing number (PBXDDINO)
or a PBX of type PBXDDINO exists, the modification is not
possible.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBXVOL PBX DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
Notes:
- The directory number interval must not be accessible by the digit
translator (command DISP DN, ACT=YES).
- Only an already existing PBX volume can be changed.
- A new PBX volume indicating which directory number digits of a decade
belong to a PBX can be entered for single directory numbers. The PBX
volume must contain the last digit of the given directory number.
- The new PBX volume must be compatible with the operator number of
the PBX if there is one existing.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DN- 2+
MOD DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0...9, range of decimal numbers
DNGRP DIRECTORY NUMBER GROUP
This parameter modifies the allocation of the directory number
interval or the single directory number to a subgroup (e.g. for
creating an accounting file).
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric digits are possible for input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STMGRP STATISTIC METER GROUP
This parameter modifies the allocation of the directory number interval
or the single directory number to counter groups.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies
- the intercept identification and if needed the
individual announcement number or
- the porting information
for the desired directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
A second unit must not be entered.
UNOBDN UNOBTAINABLE DIRECTORY NUMBER
A second unit must not be entered.
CHGDNIND CHANGED DIRECTORY NO INDIV.
A second unit must be entered.
PORTEDDN NUMBER PORTABILITY
A second unit can be entered.
PORTEDLP LOCATION PORTABILITY
The PORTEDLP defines location portability
in project Singapore. A second unit must not
be entered.
b: INTERCEPT DIGITS=
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DN- 3-
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD DIRECTORY NUMBERS
This command records directory numbers to detect high load
connections. Up to 1000 subscribers can be measured by one
measurement. Only subscribers are measured, all other types
(e.g. PBX) are ignored.
The command will be rejected if there is no created subscriber in
the selected intervals. The measurement can only be run once at
any one time. The data of the measured records are output
exclusively to MDD.
The period of every single data collection and data output can be
varied by the command parameter SCANTIME.
If more than 1000 subscribers exist in the selected directory
number intervals, an indication follows in the "started mask".
The "started mask" contains a command repetition which confirms
the selected directory number intervals. In addition, the lowest
and highest directory numbers measured and the total number of
measured subscribers are output.
The three information units (lowest and highest measured
directory number, number of measured subscribers) appear in the
"started mask" and in the "finished mask".
Due to the information about the highest measured subscriber, the
directory number intervals in a subsequent measurement can be
selected optionally.
Which directory numbers from the selected directory number
interval are created subscribers is checked at the moment of
command receipt. The establishment of the directory numbers to be
measured is therefore a snapshot recording. This means that
subscribers created subsequently within the directory number
intervals selected in the command will be disregarded.
Selected subscribers who are deleted or modified after command
receipt will not be measured any more but they remain in the
output data.
Directory numbers can be specified by a digital line unit (DLU)
as an alternative to using intervals. The establishment of the
directory numbers is also a snapshot recording, which means that
the created subscribers at the DLU (including subscribers
connected via a V5 interface) to be measured will be
established at the moment of command receipt. If the number of
created subscribers of a selected DLU exceeds 1000, only
the first 1000 created subscribers will be measured.
With the "started mask" and the "finished mask" the user receives
information about the number of measured subscribers analogous
to the specification of directory number intervals. Information
is also output about the lowest and highest port where
subscribers are measured.
Subscribers to be measured are always selected from the port
with the lowest port number to the port with the highest port
number. A subsequent measurement can be started at the port where
the last measurement has ended by selecting command parameters
DLU and EQN. All or none of the created directory numbers
at an MSN port or connected via a V5 interface are measured.
Directory numbers in the output are not sorted in ascending
order but in the order in which they are found by searching
at the DLU.
If the number of directory numbers to be measured exceeds the
limit of 1000 and the last DLU port is an MSN port or a V5
interface is connected to this DLU port, this DLU port
cannot be measured within the running measurement job.
There could thus be a measurement whose directory number total is
less than 1000 even though the number of created subscribers at
the DLU exceeds 1000.
It is only advisable to measure REC DN for MSN ports if all
the directory numbers at an MSN port are measured in the same
measurement job.
For each subscriber to be measured the following counters are
provided:
- TC:I traffic carried (incoming)
- TC:O traffic carried (outgoing)
- CC:I number of calls carried (incoming)
- CC:O number of calls carried (outgoing)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 1+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Disk Size:
If 1000 directory numbers are measured, 87 kbytes are required
(89 bytes per directory number) on hard disk for every output.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. REC DN - DLU DLU SPECIFICATION
2. REC DN - DN DN SPECIFICATION
1. Input format
DLU SPECIFICATION
This input format records directory numbers of subscribers
connected to the specified digital line unit.

[ [
[ REC DN : UNIT= ,DLU= [,EQN=] [,SCANTIME=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
Notes:
- UNIT=MDD-DAILY is not allowed in combination with
BEG, TER, PER or IV.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
Notes :
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
[ [ If this option is selected, the data are
[ [ output to daily files. The measurement starts
[ [ immediately and has no defined end. Time
[ [ parameters are not permitted.
[ [ To secure the required space on disk, all 7
[ [ daily files are prepared and created at the
[ [ start of measurement.
[ [ A daily file is closed at the end of the day and a
[ [ new file for the next day is automatically
[ [ created, or the existing file is replaced.
[ [ Daily files will be overwritten in the
[ [ following week on the same day.
!SINGLE - SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 2+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement file.
This information unit specifies the desired output mode
(daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output unit = MDD.
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies the digital line unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the start port of the DLU.
Notes:
- The chosen DLU value in the parameter EQN must be equal to
the parameter DLU.
Default: EQN = DLU-0-0-0
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER=
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
b: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
c: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
d: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
SCANTIME SCAN TIME FOR DATA OUTPUT
This parameter specifies a duration in minutes. For this duration,
counter data will be collected and output. The SCANTIME can be
selected in the range from 15 to 720 in the 15 minutes frame.
Restrictions:
If a time parameter is selected, the intervals of measurement must
be a multiple of the selected SCANTIME. In all other cases the
command will be rejected.
Therefore the following combinations between time parameters and
SCANTIME are possible:
For the combinations of time parameter
BEG,
BEG and TER,
BEG and TER and PER or
TER and PER
the default IV 00-00-24-00 is used. In this case the possible
values for the SCANTIME are 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240,
360, 480 and 720, only.
For any combination of time parameters containing the parameter
IV, the possible values of the SCANTIME depend on the duration
of the selected intervals. All selected intervals must be a
multiple of the selected SCANTIME.
The SCANTIME can be arbitrary in the range of 15 to 720 in the 15
minutes frame if TER is the only specified time parameter in the
command or if the parameter UNIT=MDD-DAILY is chosen.
Default: 15 minutes.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 3+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
15,30,45...720, range of decimal numbers
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameter cannot be specified for the
data output in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement time termination
date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for
data output in daily files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
- The earliest possible termination date is the day after the
command input.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is enterred, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 4+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date (BEG)is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurement over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e. g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted..
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e. g. 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN DATE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: HOUR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: MINUTE OF TERMINATION DATE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FR FRIDAY
[HO [ HOLIDAY
[ [ Full national and international holidays are
[ [ included.
[ [ The full weekend day (the day marked EF
[ [ in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
[ [ Half holidays are not included.
[MO [ MONDAY
[NO [ NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
[ [ Measurement every day
[SA [ SATURDAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 5+
REC DN
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[SU [ SUNDAY
[TH [ THURSDAY
[TU [ TUESDAY
[WE [ WEDNESDAY
!WO - WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 6+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN SPECIFICATION
This input format records subscriber directory numbers
specified as directory number intervals.

[ [
[ REC DN : UNIT= [,LAC=] ,DN= [,SCANTIME=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
Notes:
- UNIT=MDD-DAILY is not allowed in combination with
BEG, TER, PER or IV.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
Notes :
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
[ [ If this option is selected, the data are
[ [ output to daily files. The measurement starts
[ [ immediately and has no defined end. Time
[ [ parameters are not permitted.
[ [ To secure the required space on disk, all 7
[ [ daily files are prepared and created at the
[ [ start of measurement.
[ [ A daily file is closed at the end of the day and a
[ [ new file for the next day is automatically
[ [ created, or the existing file is replaced.
[ [ Daily files will be overwritten in the
[ [ following week on the same day.
!SINGLE - SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement file.
This information unit specifies the desired output mode
(daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output unit = MDD.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Default: in exchanges with only one local network, this
parameter may be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 7+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number intervals. A
maximum of 5 intervals can be linked with &.
The upper interval limit must be higher than the lower interval
limit and the directory number intervals must be disjunct.
By selecting the command parameter DN=X a maximum of 1000
created subscribers will be measured. The selection starts with
the lowest directory number in the exchange or with the
lowest directory number belonging to the selected LAC.
Restrictions:
Additional directory numbers of PBXs are rejected.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCANTIME SCAN TIME FOR DATA OUTPUT
This parameter specifies a duration in minutes. For this duration,
counter data will be collected and output. The SCANTIME can be
selected in the range from 15 to 720 in the 15 minutes frame.
Restrictions:
If a time parameter is selected, the intervals of measurement must
be a multiple of the selected SCANTIME. In all other cases the
command will be rejected.
Therefore the following combinations between time parameters and
SCANTIME are possible:
For the combinations of time parameter
BEG,
BEG and TER,
BEG and TER and PER or
TER and PER
the default IV 00-00-24-00 is used. In this case the possible
values for the SCANTIME are 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240,
360, 480 and 720, only.
For any combination of time parameters containing the parameter
IV, the possible values of the SCANTIME depend on the duration
of the selected intervals. All selected intervals must be a
multiple of the selected SCANTIME.
The SCANTIME can be arbitrary in the range of 15 to 720 in the 15
minutes frame if TER is the only specified time parameter in the
command or if the parameter UNIT=MDD-DAILY is chosen.
Default: 15 minutes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
15,30,45...720, range of decimal numbers
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameter cannot be specified for the
data output in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 8+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement time termination
date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be epecified for
data output in daily files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
- The earliest possible termination date is the day after the
command input.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is enterred, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date (BEG)is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurement over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e. g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted..
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e. g. 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 9+
REC DN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN DATE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: HOUR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: MINUTE OF TERMINATION DATE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FR FRIDAY
[HO [ HOLIDAY
[ [ Full national and international holidays are
[ [ included.
[ [ The full weekend day (the day marked EF
[ [ in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
[ [ Half holidays are not included.
[MO [ MONDAY
[NO [ NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
[ [ Measurement every day
[SA [ SATURDAY
[SU [ SUNDAY
[TH [ THURSDAY
[TU [ TUESDAY
[WE [ WEDNESDAY
!WO - WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC DN- 10-
RED DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUCE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This command reduces an extended directory number interval of
10 numbers to a single directory number.
The single directory number is equal to the directory number
of the lower interval boundary reduced by the last digit.
Prerequisites:
- The extended directory number interval must not be connected
(command DISP DN, TYPE=CONNECT).
- There must not be any ported directory number (command
DISP DN, INCEPT=PORTEDDN) in the extension interval.
- There must not be any directory numbers ported by location
(command DISP DN, INCEPT=PORTEDLP) in the extension
interval.
- There must not be any individual announcements (command
DISP DN, INCEPT=CHGDNIND) for directory numbers in the
extension interval.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ RED DN : [LAC=] ,DN= ,NEWDN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple
directory number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number interval of
10 numbers.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
3...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NEWDN NEW DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the single directory number to which the
interval will be reduced.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...11 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RED DN- 1-
DISP DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE
This command displays :
- whether the directory number volume within the exchange
is multiple or unique,
- whether the local area codes are to be evaluated in the
digit-destination translator,
- the national prefix digits,
- the international prefix digits,
- the prefix digits for carrier access code,
- whether the local area code is part of directory number.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DNATT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DNATT- 1-
ENTR DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER ATTRIBUTE
This command enters the directory number attributes.
It determines:
- whether the directory number volume within the exchange is
multiple or unique,
- whether the local area codes are to be evaluated in the
digit-destination translator,
- the national prefix digits,
- the international prefix digits,
- the prefix digits from carrier access code,
- whether national prefix digits or international prefix digits
or the prefix digits for carrier access code are used,
- whether the local area code is part of directory number,
- whether a not dialed LAC will be inserted before the
dialed B-number to build up a national significant number.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR DNATT : <DNVOL= ,EVLAC= ,PFXNAT= ,PFXINAT= ,PFXCAC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NOPFX= ,LACPNO=> [,LACINSOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DNVOL DIRECTORY NUMBER VOLUME
This parameter specifies whether the directory number volume
in the exchange is multiple or unique.
Notes:
- Two subscribers of the exchange may have the same directory number
but a different local area code only if directory number volume
is assigned MULTIPLE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNIQUE UNIQUE DIRECTORY NUMBERS
MULTIPLE MULTIPLE DIRECTORY NUMBERS
EVLAC EVALUATION OF LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies whether the local area codes are to be
evaluated.
Prerequisites:
- An evaluation of the local area codes can only be prevented within an
exchange with a unique directory number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y EVALUATE LAC
(initial value)
YES EVALUATE LAC
N DO NOT EVALUATE LAC
NO DO NOT EVALUATE LAC
PFXNAT PREFIX NATIONAL
This parameter specifies the national prefix digits.
Attention:
- A changed national prefix could be incompatible
to existing local area codes or codepoints.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DNATT- 1+
ENTR DNATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PFXINAT PREFIX INTERNATIONAL
This parameter specifies the international prefix digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PFXCAC PREFIX CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the prefix digits for carrier access code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NOPFX NO PREFIX
This parameter specifies that existing national or
international prefix digits or the prefix digits
for carrier access code are canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NAT NATIONAL PREFIX
INAT INTERNATIONAL PREFIX
CAC CARRIER ACCESS CODE PREFIX
LACPNO LOCAL AREA CODE IS PART OF NO
This parameter specifies if the local area code is part of
of a national significant number.
The entry LACPNO = YES means that a national
significant number consists out of LAC + DN.
The DN alone is in this case only locally significant.
The entry LACPNO = NO means that the DN
alone is national significant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y LOCAL AREACODE IS PART OF NO
(initial value)
YES LOCAL AREACODE IS PART OF NO
N LOC. AREACODE ISNT PART OF NO
NO LOC. AREACODE ISNT PART OF NO
LACINSOC LAC INSERT. FOR OUTG. CALL
This parameter specifies whether a LAC, which was not
dialed, must be inserted before the dialled B-number
to build up a national significant number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y INSERT LAC
YES INSERT LAC
N DO NOT INSERT LAC
(initial value)
NO DO NOT INSERT LAC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DNATT- 2-
CAN DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command either cancels or limits an existing directory number
observation job by cancelling certain object groups (consisting of
subscribers or private branch exchanges) or removes digit
combinations for special encoding.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN DNOBS : [GRP=] [,ENCODE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GRP GROUP OF OBJECTS
This parameter specifies object groups of subscribers or private
branch exchanges.
Up to 10 object groups may be linked with &.
Default: all objects are cancelled
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ENCODE DIGIT STRING FOR ENCODING
This parameter specifies the digit string for special
encoding.
Up to eight digit strings may be entered linked with &.
The command with this parameter must not be entered if
a Directory Number Observation job is already started.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DNOBS- 1-
DISP DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command displays the directory number observation
data. If parameter is not entered the assumed default
for FORMAT is STATUS
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DNOBS : [FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the FORMAT for the output.
If STATUS is entered the directory number observation
job data is output.
If ENCODE is entered the list of digits strings
entered for special encoding is output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
STATUS STATUS OF DN OBSERVATION
ENCODE LIST OF CODES FOR ENCODING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DNOBS- 1-
ENTR DNOBS
DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION JOB
This command may be used to enter a new/expand an existing
directory number observation job by specifying which object
groups (consisting of subscribers or private branch exchanges)
should be measured at a determined time or for input digit
strings for special encoding.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR DNOBS - DNOBS PATH FOR DNOBS START
2. ENTR DNOBS - ENCODE PATH FOR ENCODE
1. Input format
PATH FOR DNOBS START

[ [
[ ENTR DNOBS : GRP= [,RREC=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,PER=] [,IV=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GRP GROUP OF OBJECTS
This parameter specifies object groups of subscribers or private
branch exchanges.
Up to 10 object groups may be linked with &.
Default: no effect on process
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RREC NUMBER OF REQUESTED RECORDS
This parameter specifies the number of requested observation
records.
The value can be changed during observation.
Default: no restriction
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date, which may (as a single date)
describe the beginning of an interval of days or (as up to 4 linked
dates) up to 4 single days.
Default: no effect on process
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DNOBS- 1+
ENTR DNOBS
DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the end of an interval of days.
Default: no effect on process
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the periodic weekdays or the weekday category.
Up to 8 weekdays/categories may be linked with &, the maximum number of
weekdays being limited to 6.
Notes:
- The input of this parameter is only permissible in connection with
a terminating date (TER).
- Weekdays MO, TU, ... SU: execution on the respective
weekday
- Categories WO, HO:
WO = execution on all full working days
HO = execution on all full national and international holidays
Default: observation every day during the observation period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FR FRIDAY
HO HOLIDAY
MO MONDAY
NO DEFAULT VALUE
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
TH THURSDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
WO WORKDAY
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the time intervals during which the
directory number observation job is active each day.
Up to 4 intervals may be linked with &.
Default: no effect on process
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
directory number observation job should begin.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes after the
hour at which the directory number observation job should
begin.
Notes:
- Possible values are: 0, 15, 30 or 45.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DNOBS- 2+
ENTR DNOBS
DNOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
directory number observation job should terminate.
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes after the
hour at which the directory number observation job should
terminate.
Notes:
- Possible values are: 0, 15, 30 or 45.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DNOBS- 3+
ENTR DNOBS
ENCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PATH FOR ENCODE

[ [
[ ENTR DNOBS : ENCODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ENCODE DIGIT STRING FOR ENCODE
This parameter specifies the digit string for encoding.
Up to eight digit strings can be entered linked with &
using a single command. Otherwise, (by multiple entry)
up to 50 encoding strings can be entered.
The database should be expanded with ODAGEN using the
GROUP OBD.
This parameter must not be entered with any other of
the command parameters.
The command entered with this parameter does not start
a Directory Number Observation job.
The command with this parameter must not be entered if
a Directory Number Observation job is already started.
Indication on parameter usage:
- If operator tries to input the digit string: 1234
and digit string 123 was entered before, the command
will be rejected ( new digit string already with
special encode).
- If operator tries to input the digit string: 1234
and digit string 12345 was entered before, the
command is rejected. Hint: Cancel the 12345 digit
string and repeat command with 1234 digit
combination.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DNOBS- 4-
DISP DNP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DESTINATION NUMBER POINTS
This command displays destination number points which are entered in the
special digit translator for traffic measurements (with REC DEST). The
destination number points are output with their digit combination,
destination number and origin language digit.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DNP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DNP- 1-
CAN DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DPFC ACTION
This command cancels a subscriber dependent digit processing
feature control action. It deletes an action to be performed
for a subscriber dependent digit processing feature.
Prerequisites:
- This action is not assigned to an evaluation criterion.
Notes:
- If this action still excludes other actions or is excluded
by other actions the corresponding exclusion data are also
updated (the canceled action is removed from this database).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DPFCACT : ACTION= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DPFCACT- 1-
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DPFC ACTION
This command creates an action for subscriber dependent
digit processing and feature control. It is also possible
to specify a dummy action (action without any parameter
except parameter action) which can be used for excluding
other actions. See more details in action exclusion.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,ZOCHA=[[ [
[ CR DPFCACT : ACTION= [,PRIO=] [,ZOINF=] [,ZONO= [ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,TKZOINF=] [,BILLING=] [,STAT=] [,MEPROC=] [
[ [
[ [,DICON=] [,ZONDAT=] [,NPDAT=] [,POSCC=] [
[ [
[ [,ORIG1=] [,ORIG2=] [,MFCAT=] [,FTCNTL=] [,IN=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ZDIG=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRIO PRIORITY
This parameter is used to determine the sequence of the actions
if more than one action is to be performed for a certain call.
1 is the highest order, it will be executed at first.
255 is the lowest order, it will be executed at last.
Actions without priority will be executed after actions
with a priority.
If more actions with the same priority should be executed, the
sequence of the execution is not defined.
Notes:
- No modification command for action is existing, therefore
it is not possible to modify a action priority without
cancelling the action and all conditions. Therefore
sufficient steps of priority numbers should be used to
have the possibility to create now actions with new
priorities.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
ZOINF ZONING INFORMATION
This parameter specifies if the zoning information is present.
It is only relevant, if zoning is required (incoming trunk group).
Notes:
- If zoning with dialed digits is required (see CR MZOPT) the
parameter ZOINF must have the value NO.
- If ZOINF is set to YES without an action, zoning with
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 1+
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR MZOPT Database will not be done for a call where this action
applies.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N ZONING INFO NOT SPECIFIED
NO ZONING INFO NOT SPECIFIED
Y ZONING INFO SPECIFIED
YES ZONING INFO SPECIFIED
ZOCHA ZONE CHARACTERISTIC
This parameter specifies in which exchange zoning has
to be executed.
Prerequisites:
- Parameter ZOINF has value YES.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOPULSE NO CHARGE PULSE GENERATION
ZONINHI ZONING IN HIGHER EXCHANGE
ZONO ZONE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the zone number.
Prerequisites:
- The specified zone must have been created with the command CR MZONE.
- Parameter ZOINF has value YES.
Notes:
- This parameter will not accept 127, 255.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...511, range of decimal numbers
TKZOINF TAKE OVER ZONING INFORMATION
This parameter determines whether a take over of backward
signalled zoning information or zone information sent by SCP
is allowed or not.
Prerequisites:
- Parameter ZOINF has value YES.
- Parameter ZOCHA or Parameter ZONO must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N TAKE OVER NOT ALLOWED
NO TAKE OVER NOT ALLOWED
Y TAKE OVER ALLOWED
YES TAKE OVER ALLOWED
BILLING REQUESTED RECORDINGS
This parameter specifies the type of requested recordings.
BILLING=AMA means a charging ticket is generated. If
this parameter is not specified there is no charging ticket
generated.
Prerequisites:
- Parameter ZOINF has value YES.
- Parameter ZOCHA or Parameter ZONO must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
STAT STATISTIC MEASUREMENT INDEX
This parameter specifies the meter in which the statistic data
are to be entered.
Prerequisites:
- Parameter ZOINF has value YES.
- Parameter ZOCHA or Parameter ZONO must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 2+
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MEPROC METERING PROCEDURE
This parameter specifies the metering procedure.
Prerequisites:
- Parameter ZOINF has value YES.
- Parameter ZOCHA or Parameter ZONO must be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
SUPANSPU SUPPRESS ANSWER METER IMPULSE
SUP1TIPU SUPPR. 1ST VAR.TIME METER IMP.
APA AUTOMATIC PRICE ADVICE
MEPROC3 METERING PROCEDURE 3
BCINCHRG BACKWARD CALL INDIC. NO CHARGE
BCICHRG BACKWARD CALL INDICATOR CHARGE
DICON DIGIT CONVERTING CODE
This parameter specifies the digit convertion code.
The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
- insertion/append of digits
- removal of digits
The modifications are specified in form of a mask
consisting of control characters and digits.
There are two types of valid input characters:
digit values: 0-9, A-F, #, * (* -> B, # -> C)
control characters: X, ., +, %, R, S, !, (symbolic name)
If digit convertion code is shorter than the evaluated number
the remained digits will be taken over.
Control characters have the following significance:
X the digit of the old code remains unchanged
R digits following this character replace the
corresponding digits in the old code
. the digit of the old code is deleted
+ digits following this character up to next
control character are inserted
% append digits or symbolic names behind old code
or already modified code (This character is only
allowed as last control character except symbolic name)
() characters between brackets are interpreted as
symbolic name
S the conversion is stopped, all digits of the old code
from the corresponding position on are deleted
(This character is only allowed as last character)
! only allowed after symbolic name ANUM to distinguish
how many digits from A-number should be inserted.
After this control character a digit must follow.
Notes:
The input string composed of
- R, +, !, % as last character
- only S as single character
- only X (one or more)
is not allowed.
A digit combination without any control character is used
to replace all original digits.
Symbolic names are replaced by actual values which are handled
in form of digit strings.
The following symbolic names are supported:
NATPREF : national prefix of PLMN (see DISP MPRDDAT)
INATPREF[-index]: international prefix of PLMN (see DISP MPRDDAT)
index: refers to INATPREF as specified in
project data
1...8, range of decimal numbers
CC : country code of PLMN (see DISP MPRDDAT)
LAC[-index] : local area code of PLMN (see DISP MPRDDAT)
index: refers to LAC as specified in project data
1...15, range of decimal numbers
NDC[-index] : national destination code of PLMN
(see DISP MPRDDAT)
index: refers to NDC as specified in project data
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 3+
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...10, range of decimal numbers
NDCLAC : NDC or LAC of subscriber
This symbolic name must only be used together with
a condition, which checks if it is a own subscriber
SN : subscriber number
LACOD : if location area code is used for digit modification
always a five digit decimal code is used
CI : if cell identification is used for digit modification
always a five digit decimal code is used
MCC : mobile country code of PLMN (see DISP MPRDDAT)
MNC : mobile network code of PLMN (see DISP MPRDDAT)
SCM : service class mark
Always the unknown format of SCM is used.
NOD[-format] : number of digits
format: HEX hexadezimal
DEC decimal
If neither HEX nor DEC is declared certainly DEC
will be used.
LOCNO : location number (see CR INTCELL)
DIALNO : dialed number
ANUM : A-number
In combination with control character ! digits
of A-number could be modified.
Examples:
- DICON = XX+123 Description: First two digits remains unchanged.
dial info: 7944583 The next three digits 123 are
inserted. The last five digits
remains unchanged.
Result: 7912344583
- DICON = .+45S Description: First digit is deleted.
dial info: 7944583 The next two digits are inserted
by 45 and after S the convertion
is stopped.
Result: 45
- DICON = ..R32 Description: First two digits are deleted.
dial info: 004921 The next two digits are replaced.
And the last digits remains
unchanged.
Result: 3221
- DICON = +0049%56 Description: First four digits are inserted.
dial info: 1 Two digits are appended.
Result: 0049156
- DICON = +(ANUM)!4 Description: First four digits of A-number
dial info: 23 567890 are inserted.
Result: 567823
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...40 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ZONDAT ZONING AFTER DATA MODIFICATION
This parameter specifies if the digits before DICON modification
or the digits after DICON modification should be used for zoning.
Prerequisites:
- This parameter is only applicable if parameter DICON
is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N ZONE BEFORE DIGIT MODIFICATION
NO ZONE BEFORE DIGIT MODIFICATION
Y ZONE AFTER DIGIT MODIFICATION
YES ZONE AFTER DIGIT MODIFICATION
NPDAT NUM PORT AFTER DATA MODIF.
This parameter specifies which digits should be used for number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 4+
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
portability.
Notes:
- YES in combination with parameter DICON:
digits after digit modification (defined in DICON) should be
used for number portability.
- YES without parameter DICON:
all following digit modifications without parameter NPDAT
(defined in DICONs in following performed actions) should be
used for number portability.
- NO in combination with parameter DICON:
digits before digit modification should be used for number
portability.
- NO without parameter DICON:
all following digit modifications without parameter NPDAT
(defined in DICONs in following performed actions) should not
be used for number portability.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NUM PORT BEFORE DIGIT MODIF.
NO NUM PORT BEFORE DIGIT MODIF.
Y NUM PORT AFTER DIGIT MODIF.
YES NUM PORT AFTER DIGIT MODIF.
POSCC POSITION OF COUNTRY CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15, range of decimal numbers
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the origin mark 1 used for routing.
In case of MTC this parameter overwrites the ORIG1
for roaming and in case of CFGMSC and CFVMSC it
overwrites the ORIG1 for call forwarding.
ORIG1-Loop (ORIG1 is used for multiple SCP dialogues) is
not overwritten by this ORIG1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
ORIG2 ORIGINATING MARK 2
This parameter specifies the origin mark 2 and overwrites
the existing origin mark 2 of the cell database or trunk group
database. It is used for zoning. It is only meaningful if ZOINF
has value NO.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
MFCAT MFC CATEGORY
This parameter specifies a category which can be used by
digit translator (see CR CPT).
Meaning of decimal numbers:
0...subscriber category requested by MFC
1...subscriber
2...priority subscriber
3...test equipment
4...coin box
5...operator position
6...data transmission national
7...subscriber international
8...data transmission international
9...priority subscriber international
10...operator position international
11...category 11
12...category 12
13...category 13
14...category 14
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 5+
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
15...category 15
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
FTCNTL FEATURE CONTROL
This parameter specifies the control of features.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: FEATURE
SREL SUBSCRIBER RELATED ROUTING
RELCALL RELEASE CALL
INCEPT INTERCEPT
RECALLDP RECALL DIGIT PROCESSING
DEFCALL DEFAULT CALL HANDLING FOR IN
TRPLOCNO TRANSPORT LOCNO VIA TUP
A prefix is cut from the called party number and
sent to the SCP in the next IN dialog. The first
digit of the called party number determines the
length of the prefix to be cut. The prefix itself
starts with the second digit.
Example:
- The called party number = 4123456789 results in
length = 4, prefix = 1234 and new called party
number = 56789.
MOCTOP1 CHRG MOC TRANSL. OTHER PARTY 1
If the dialed other party is modified (e.g. by
SDDPFC or by IN), the modified number is written
to the field "other party dialed number" of the
mobile call record for MOC.
SUPTCSI SUPPRESS T-CSI AND CFU
MTCOC CHARGING MTC TO OUTGOING CALL
If a call is routed to outgoing traffic after HLR
interrogation, the digits used for routing are
written to the field "other party translated
number" of the transit charging ticket, instead of
the MSRN.
SUPSCP SUPPRESS SCP
HOTBILRO HOT BILLING FOR ROAMERS
ANNDCS1 ANNOUNCEM. DURING CALL SETUP 1
ANNDCS2 ANNOUNCEM. DURING CALL SETUP 2
ANNDCS3 ANNOUNCEM. DURING CALL SETUP 3
ANNDCS4 ANNOUNCEM. DURING CALL SETUP 4
ANNDCS5 ANNOUNCEM. DURING CALL SETUP 5
INMDIG IN DIALOG WITH MODIFIED DIGITS
If DICON is used for digit modification the
original digits are normally sent to the SCP
during setup of a subsequent IN dialog.
With INMDIG the modified digits are sent instead
of the original digits.
DACTCLIR DEACTIVATE CLIR
ACTCLIR ACTIVATE CLIR
HALFRATE HALF RATE
PFXSCM PREFIX SERVICE CLASS MARK
ANUMEVAL A-NUMBER EVALUATION
ECTPRINT EMERGENCY CALL TRACE PRINTOUT
MOCTOP2 CHRG MOC TRANSL. OTHER PARTY 2
If the dialed other party is modified by SDDPFC,
the modified number is written to the field "other
party dialed number" of the mobile call record for
MOC.
SUPMTPY SUPPRESS MULTI PARTY
Suppress the supplementary services multi party
and call hold.
LIGMSC LAWFUL INTERCEPTION IN GMSC
SUPUSSD SUPPRESS USSD
DEBIT USSD DEBIT SUBSCRIBER
FTCNTL29 FEATURE CONTROL 29
FTCNTL30 FEATURE CONTROL 30
FTCNTL31 FEATURE CONTROL 31
FTCNTL32 FEATURE CONTROL 32
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 6+
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FTCNTL33 FEATURE CONTROL 33
FTCNTL34 FEATURE CONTROL 34
FTCNTL35 FEATURE CONTROL 35
FTCNTL36 FEATURE CONTROL 36
FTCNTL37 FEATURE CONTROL 37
FTCNTL38 FEATURE CONTROL 38
FTCNTL39 FEATURE CONTROL 39
FTCNTL40 FEATURE CONTROL 40
FTCNTL41 FEATURE CONTROL 41
FTCNTL42 FEATURE CONTROL 42
FTCNTL43 FEATURE CONTROL 43
FTCNTL44 FEATURE CONTROL 44
FTCNTL45 FEATURE CONTROL 45
FTCNTL46 FEATURE CONTROL 46
FTCNTL47 FEATURE CONTROL 47
FTCNTL48 FEATURE CONTROL 48
FTCNTL49 FEATURE CONTROL 49
FTCNTL50 FEATURE CONTROL 50
FTCNTL51 FEATURE CONTROL 51
FTCNTL52 FEATURE CONTROL 52
FTCNTL53 FEATURE CONTROL 53
FTCNTL54 FEATURE CONTROL 54
FTCNTL55 FEATURE CONTROL 55
b: AUTHORIZATION
N FEATURE NOT ALLOWED
NO FEATURE NOT ALLOWED
Y FEATURE ALLOWED
YES FEATURE ALLOWED
Compatibilities:
- a=SREL
- a=ANUMEVAL
Default Behavior:
- If this information unit is not entered the default
value is YES.
c: POSITION OF SERVICE INDICATOR=
1...15, range of decimal numbers
It is necessary to enter this parameter unit, if
subscriber related routing is permitted for foreign
subscribers and the length of the country code and
national destination code of foreign subscribers home
PLMN is different to the length of country code and
national destination code of this PLMN.
Compatibilities:
- a=SREL
- b=YES
IN INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICE
This parameter specifies the intelligent network service.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LENGTH OF IN SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This information unit describes the minimum length
of available digits.
b: IN SERVICE=
1...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
This information unit describes name of the IN service trigger
profile.
Prerequisites:
- The specified IN service must have been created with the
command CR INTRIG.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 7+
CR DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ZDIG LANGUAGE DIGIT
This parameter specifies the language digit which can be
evaluated by digit translator (see CR CPT).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCACT- 8-
DISP DPFCACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DPFC ACTION
This command displays subscriber dependent digit processing feature
control action data.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP DPFCACT : ACTION= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DPFCACT- 1-
CAN DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DPFC EVALUATION DATA
This command deletes subscriber dependent digit processing feature
control depending evaluation criterion data and the assignment of
assigned actions.
It is possible to delete the assignment of assigned actions for the
feature. The feature and the remained actions are still assigned.
All evaluation parameters for the specified feature must be entered.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,IMSI= [[ [
[ CAN DPFCDAT : FEAT= ,CALLTYP= ,ACTION= [,MSTYPE=[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,MSISDN=] [,INCEPT=] [,SCM=] [,MSCAT=] [
[ [
[ [,CODE=] [,NOD=] [,NPRES=] [,LOCNO=] [,ORIG1=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSIND=] [,SCP=] [,CRIT1=] [,CRIT2=] [,CRIT3=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the feature name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CALLTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MOC MOBILE ORIGINATING CALL
MTC MOBILE TERMINATING CALL
USSD UNSTRUCTURED SUPPL. SERV. DATA
CFGMSC CALL FORWARDING GATEWAY MSC
CFVMSC CALL FORWARDING VISITED MSC
PRETRANS PRE DIGIT TRANSLATION
NPP NUMBER PORTABILITY PROCESSING
ICALL INCOMING CALL
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
Notes:
- Up to 8 actions can be assigned.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the leading digits of international
mobile subscriber identification. IMSI can be used to distinguish
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DPFCDAT- 1+
CAN DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
between subscribers from different PLMNs or between subscribers
from different HLRs. The evaluation of the full IMSI is possible.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
MSTYPE TYPE OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile subscriber
(mobile subscriber of the own or of a foreign PLMN).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OWN MS OF OWN PLMN
FOREIGN MS OF FOREIGN PLMN
MSISDN MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the leading digits of mobile subscriber
ISDN number. The evaluation of the full MSISDN is possible.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit decimal number
INCEPT INTERCEPT EVALUATION
This parameter specifies if call is leading to intercept or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NORMAL CALL SETUP
NO NORMAL CALL SETUP
Y CALL LEADING TO INTERCEPT
YES CALL LEADING TO INTERCEPT
SCM SERVICE CLASS MARK
This parameter specifies the service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...21 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscriber category
which is assigned to a subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination to be evaluated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NOD NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits.
It is possible to evaluate a digit length from 1 to
maximum 32 digits. Value 32 means an evaluation of
32 and more digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DPFCDAT- 2+
CAN DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NPRES NUM PORT RESULT EVALUATION
This parameter specifies if number portability was successful.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNSUC NUM PORT QUERY UNSUCCESSFUL
SUC NUM PORT QUERY SUCCESSFUL
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the leading digits of LOCATION NUMBER.
The evaluation of full LOCATION NUMBER is possible.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the origin mark 1
used for routing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
SSIND SUPPL. SERVICES INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a supplementary service code.
It is possible to evaluate supplementery services
which are active.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
SCP SERVICE CONTROL POINT DIALOG
This parameter specifies the service control point dialog.
It allows the use of subscriber dependent digit processing
and feature control also after IN dialogs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INV DIALOG INVOLVED
NOTINV DIALOG NOT INVOLVED
CRIT1 CRITERION 1
This parameter specifies an evaluation criterion.
At present but it is not in use.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
CRIT2 CRITERION 2
This parameter specifies an evaluation criterion.
At present but it is not in use.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
CRIT3 CRITERION 3
This parameter specifies an evaluation criterion.
At present but it is not in use.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DPFCDAT- 3-
CR DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DPFC EVALUATION DATA
This command creates subscriber dependent digit processing
feature control evaluation data and assigns up to eight actions.
If evaluation criterion for a feature is already created additional
actions can be assigned.
The maximum number of assigned actions and references to other
evaluation data is eight.
If all evaluation criteria fit exactly to data of a certain call the
assigned actions are executed.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,IMSI= [[ [
[ CR DPFCDAT : FEAT= ,CALLTYP= ,ACTION= [,MSTYPE=[ [,MSISDN=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,INCEPT=] [,SCM=] [,MSCAT=] [,CODE=] [,NOD=] [
[ [
[ [,NPRES=] [,LOCNO=] [,ORIG1=] [,SSIND=] [,SCP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CRIT1=] [,CRIT2=] [,CRIT3=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter is used to identify the set of evaluation data defined
by this command. If the evaluation data will be modified also the
feature name must be changed. The action has no influence for feature
name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CALLTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies at which type of call the condition
should be evaluated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MOC MOBILE ORIGINATING CALL
MTC MOBILE TERMINATING CALL
USSD UNSTRUCTURED SUPPL. SERV. DATA
CFGMSC CALL FORWARDING GATEWAY MSC
CFVMSC CALL FORWARDING VISITED MSC
PRETRANS PRE DIGIT TRANSLATION
NPP NUMBER PORTABILITY PROCESSING
ICALL INCOMING CALL
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
Prerequisites:
- The action must have been created with the command CR DPFCACT.
Notes:
- Up to 8 actions can be assigned.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCDAT- 1+
CR DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the leading digits of international
mobile subscriber identification. IMSI can be used to distinguish
between subscribers from different PLMNs or between subscribers
from different HLRs. The evaluation of the full IMSI is possible.
Which IMSI is used for condition evaluation depends on the
CALLTYP:
MOC/USSD : A-subscriber IMSI
MTC : B-subscriber IMSI
CFGMSC/CFVMSC : B-subscriber IMSI (IMSI of forwarding subscriber)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
MSTYPE TYPE OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile subscriber
(mobile subscriber of the own or of a foreign PLMN).
Compatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed if parameter IMSI was specified.
- Only applicable for call type MOC and USSD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OWN MS OF OWN PLMN
FOREIGN MS OF FOREIGN PLMN
MSISDN MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the leading digits of mobile subscriber
ISDN number. The evaluation of the full MSISDN is possible.
Which MSISDN is used for condition evaluation depends on the
CALLTYP:
MOC/MTC/ICALL : A-subscriber MSISDN
CFGMSC/CFVMSC : B-subscriber MSISDN (MSISDN of forwarding subscriber)
PRETRANS : In ability to operation after PRETRANS.
This information is only visible during call processing
access and consists of following possibilities:
MOC/MTC/CFGMSC/CFVMSC/ICALL : see above
HANDOVER/CCBS : no evaluation will be done
NPP : not possible
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit decimal number
INCEPT INTERCEPT EVALUATION
This parameter specifies if call is leading to intercept or not.
Notes:
- If value YES : This condition is fulfilled if call is
leading to intercept.
If value NO : This condition is fulfilled if normal
call setup is done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NORMAL CALL SETUP
NO NORMAL CALL SETUP
Y CALL LEADING TO INTERCEPT
YES CALL LEADING TO INTERCEPT
SCM SERVICE CLASS MARK
This parameter specifies the service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCDAT- 2+
CR DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...21 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscriber category
which is assigned to a subscriber (see CR MSUB).
Only applicable for call type MOC and CFVMSC.
Values for the following categories:
1...operator language french (OLFRENCH)
2...operator language english (OLENGLSH)
3...operator language german (OLGERMAN)
4...operator language russian (OLRUSSIA)
5...operator language spanish (OLSPANSH)
6...add. operator language 1 (OLADD1)
7...add. operator language 2 (OLADD2)
8...add. operator language 3 (OLADD3)
9...national operator (NATOPER)
10...ordinary calling subscriber (ORDINSUB)
11...priority subscriber (PRIOSUB)
13...data call (DATACALL)
14...test call (TESTCALL)
15...payphone (PAYPHONE)
224...verification subscriber (VERIFSUB)
225...priority 1 subscriber (PRIO1SUB)
226...priority 2 subscriber (PRIO2SUB)
227...priority 3 subscriber (PRIO3SUB)
228...debit subscriber without record (PPSCSUB)
229...debit subscriber with record (PPSCSUBR)
240...ORDINSUB without charging (ORDFREE)
244...PRIOSUB without charging (PRIOFREE)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination to be evaluated.
Evaluation depends on the following CALLTYP:
MOC/ICALL/NPP : The originally dialed digits will be
evaluated before any digit modification takes place.
Except subscriber dependent digit processing and
feature control is called twice if during the first
evaluation feature control has value RECALLDP
(see CR DPFCACT). Than the long number will be
used for evaluation.
MTC : The mobile station roaming number received from VLR
will be evaluated.
USSD : The USSD string will be evaluated. Only the feature code is
expected.
Notes:
- Characters * and # within the first three digits of the USSD
string must not be entered.
- Character * at another position of the USSD string has to be
entered as hexadecimal number B.
- Character # at another position of the USSD string has to be
entered as hexadecimal number C.
- All characters being neither decimal numbers nor * or # have
to be entered as hexadecimal number A.
- For USSD strings using a not supported alphabet the
characters DDD have to be entered.
Examples:
- Feature code = *#132# CODE = 132C
- Feature code = **23#* CODE = 23CB
- Feature code = #***657*# CODE = B657BC
- Feature code = *100 NDC262# CODE = 100AAAA262C
CFGMSC/CFVMSC : The forwarded to number will be evaluated.
The number always has to be entered in unknown format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCDAT- 3+
CR DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOD NUMBER OF DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits.
It is possible to evaluate a digit length from 1 to
maximum 32 digits. Value 32 means the condition is
fulfilled if NOD has value 32 or higher.
Evaluation depends on the following CALLTYP:
MOC/ICALL/NPP : The originally dialed digits will be
evaluated before any digit modification takes place.
Except subscriber dependent digit processing and
feature control is called twice if during the first
evaluation feature control has value RECALLDP
(see CR DPFCACT). Than the long number will be
used for evaluation.
MTC : The mobile station roaming number received from VLR
will be evaluated.
USSD : The USSD string will be evaluated. The characters # and * are
ignored within the first three characters of the USSD string.
CFGMSC/CFVMSC : The forwarded to number will be evaluated.
The number of digits always has to be entered for numbers in
unknown format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32, range of decimal numbers
NPRES NUM PORT RESULT EVALUATION
This parameter specifies if number portability was successful.
Notes:
- If value SUC : This condition is fulfilled if number portability
was successful.
- If value UNSUC : This condition is fulfilled if number portability
was unsuccessful.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNSUC NUM PORT QUERY UNSUCCESSFUL
SUC NUM PORT QUERY SUCCESSFUL
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the leading digits of LOCATION NUMBER.
The evaluation of full LOCATION NUMBER is possible.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the origin mark 1 used for routing.
Only applicable for call type MOC, MTC, CFGMSC,
CFVMSC and ICALL.
Reserved a values (e.g. a for MTC or a
for forwarded calls) are not relevant for this parameter.
If the origin mark 1 is set to a reserved value, the previous
a value is evaluated instead of the reserved value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3839, range of decimal numbers
SSIND SUPPL. SERVICES INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a supplementary service code.
It is just possible to evaluate supplementery services
which are activated in the MSC.
Commandos for the activation status of supplementary services:
- DISP MSERVOPT
- DISP MSUB
- DISP MPRDDAT
SSIND for the GSM defined supplementary services:
16...all line identification SS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCDAT- 4+
CR DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
17...calling line identification present
18...calling line identification restriction
19...connected line identification present
20...connected line identification restriction
21...malicious call identification
32...all forwarding SS
33...call forwarding unconditional
40...all conditional forwarding SS
41...call forwarding on subscriber busy
42...call forwarding on no reply
43...call forwarding on subscriber not reachable
48...all call offering SS (includes also all call forwarding SS)
49...call transfer (CALLTRAN)
50...mobile access hunting
64...all call completion SS
65...call waiting
66...call hold
67...completion of call to busy subscriber (NATCCBS)
80...all multy party SS
81...multy party service (MPTY)
96...all community of interest SS
97...closed user group
112...all charging SS
113...advice of charge: information
114...advice of charge: charging
128...all additional info transfer SS
129...user to user signalling (USERSIG1)
144...all call restriction SS
145...barring of outgoing calls (CBO)
146...barring of all outgoing calls (CBOC)
147...barring of outgoing international calls (CBOIC)
148...barring of outgoing international calls except those
directed to HPLMN (CBOICEXH)
153...barring of all incoming calls (CBIC)
154...barring of incoming calls (CBI)
155...barring of incoming calls roaming outside HPLMN (CBICROUT)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
SCP SERVICE CONTROL POINT DIALOG
This parameter specifies the service control point dialog.
It allows the use of subscriber dependent digit processing
and feature control also after IN dialogs.
Notes:
- If value INV : The dialogue will be done. This
condition is fulfilled if subscriber
dependent digit processing and feature
control is called after a IN dialogue.
If value NOTINV : The dialogue will not be done.
This condition is fulfilled if
subscriber dependent digit processing
and feature control is done before
IN dialogue.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INV DIALOG INVOLVED
NOTINV DIALOG NOT INVOLVED
CRIT1 CRITERION 1
This parameter specifies an evaluation criterion.
At present but it is not in use.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
CRIT2 CRITERION 2
This parameter specifies an evaluation criterion.
At present but it is not in use.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCDAT- 5+
CR DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0...15, range of decimal numbers
CRIT3 CRITERION 3
This parameter specifies an evaluation criterion.
At present but it is not in use.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DPFCDAT- 6-
DISP DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DPFC EVALUATION DATA
This command displays subscriber dependent digit processing
feature control evaluation data and the assigned actions to
be performed.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [FEAT= [ [
[ [ACTION= [ [
[ [CODE= [ ; [
[ DISP DPFCDAT : MSISDN= [
[ [IMSI= [ ! [
[ [CALLTYP=[ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the name of the feature.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
Prerequisites:
- The action must have been created with the command CR DPFCACT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MSISDN MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the leading digits of mobile subscriber
ISDN number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit decimal number
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ID
This parameter specifies the leading digits of international
mobile subscriber identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DPFCDAT- 1+
DISP DPFCDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CALLTYP CALL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MOC MOBILE ORIGINATING CALL
MTC MOBILE TERMINATING CALL
USSD UNSTRUCTURED SUPPL. SERV. DATA
CFGMSC CALL FORWARDING GATEWAY MSC
CFVMSC CALL FORWARDING VISITED MSC
PRETRANS PRE DIGIT TRANSLATION
NPP NUMBER PORTABILITY PROCESSING
ICALL INCOMING CALL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DPFCDAT- 2-
CAN DPFCEXCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DPFC ACTION EXCLUSION
This command cancels data for subscriber dependent digit processing
feature control action exclusion.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DPFCEXCL : ACTION= [,EXCLACT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
Prerequisites:
- The action must have been created with the command CR DPFCACT.
- It is possible to specify up to 8 excluded actions.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
EXCLACT EXCLUDED ACTION
This parameter specifies the name of excluded actions.
Default behavior:
- If this parameter is not entered all actions defined
as excluded actions for the specified action are canceled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DPFCEXCL- 1-
DISP DPFCEXCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY DPFC ACTION EXCLUSION
This command displays data for subscriber dependent digit processing
feature control action exclusion.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP DPFCEXCL : ACTION= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
Prerequisites:
- The action must have been created with the command CR DPFCACT.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DPFCEXCL- 1-
ENTR DPFCEXCL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER DPFC ACTION EXCLUSION
This command enters data for subscriber dependent digit processing
feature control action exclusion.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR DPFCEXCL : ACTION= ,EXCLACT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ACTION ACTION TO BE PERFORMED
This parameter specifies the name of an action.
Prerequisites:
- The action must have been created with the command CR DPFCACT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
EXCLACT EXCLUDED ACTION
This parameter specifies the name of excluded action.
Prerequisites:
- The action must have been created with the command CR DPFCACT.
Notes:
- It is possible to specify up to 8 excluded actions.
If more than 8 excluded actions have to be assigned
it is necessary to enter more commands.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR DPFCEXCL- 1-
CAN DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL DEVICE GROUP
This command cancels a device group.
Prerequisite:
- the device group must exist
- the device group must not be assigned to a message group.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN DVGRP : DVGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group of the message control.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN DVGRP- 1-
CR DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE DEVICEGROUP
This command creates a device group from different types of output device.
A distinction is made between local devices (archive and
functional O&M terminals), remote devices (processors with their
respective applications) and the source terminal.
Prerequisite:
- the device group must not already exist,
- the pair of processor-name applications specified in parameter REMDEV
must not be assigned to a server which cannot process print or dialog
tasks,
- the output devices must exist,
- no more than 5 output devices may be specified,
- if parameter SRC=NO is entered, either parameter
LOCDEV or parameter REMDEV must be specified.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR DVGRP : DVGRP= <,LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group to the message
control.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter designates a local output device.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: LOCAL DEVICE NAME=
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: LOCAL DEVICE TYPE
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M-TERMINAL
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
REMDEV REMOTE DEVICE
This parameter designates an output device in the network.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
b: APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION=
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DVGRP- 1+
CR DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SRC SOURCE O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies whether the input terminal is to serve
as output device for a device group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO OUTPUT NOT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
YES OUTPUT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR DVGRP- 2-
SEL DVGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT DEVICE GROUP
This command selects those device groups to which
at least one of the specified output devices is assigned.
This data is then output as a table.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL DVGRP : <LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter designates a local output device.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: LOCAL DEVICE NAME=
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: LOCAL DEVICE TYPE
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M-TERMINAL
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
REMDEV REMOTE DEVICE
This parameter designates an output device in the network.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
b: APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION=
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SRC SOURCE O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies whether the input terminal is to serve
as output device for a device group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO OUTPUT NOT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
YES OUTPUT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL DVGRP- 1-
DISP DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP DEVICE GROUP LINK
This command displays the output devices to which the device groups
specified in parameter DVGRP are assigned. The display is table.
In this way, a distinction is made between local output devices,
remote output devices and the source terminal as output device.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP DVGRPLNK : DVGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group of the message control.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP DVGRPLNK- 1-
MOD DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DEVICE GROUP LINK
This command modifies the assignment of a device group to the respective
output devices. With parameter SRC, it is possible to indicate whether
the source terminal is to be used as output device.
Prerequisites:
- When adding and replacing an output device, those output devices
specified in parameters LOCDEV or REMDEV must have been previously
created using command CR AFILE or CR FUOMT, if LOCDEV was entered
and CR PRO and possibly CR APPL, if REMDEV was entered.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD DVGRPLNK : DVGRP= <,LOCDEV= ,REMDEV= ,SRC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a customer device group of the message
control.
Incompatibilities:
- If the DVGRP is linked to the MSGRP MSYP.ALARM or
MSYP.REPORT it must consist only of output devices of
DCP type or applications which can handle binary structured
outputs.
These applications must have been created with the command
CR APPL with APPLID = SMMLB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter specifies a local output device.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b
a: LOCAL DEVICE NAME=
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: LOCAL DEVICE TYPE
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M-TERMINAL
AFILE ARCHIVE FILE
REMDEV REMOTE DEVICE
This parameter specifies an output device in the O&M network.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DVGRPLNK- 1+
MOD DVGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
b: APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION=
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SRC SOURCE O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies whether the input terminal is to serve
as output device for a device group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO OUTPUT NOT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
YES OUTPUT ON SOURCE TERMINAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD DVGRPLNK- 2-
CAN EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command cancels the assignment of an alarm text for an external alarm
line or for a DLU external alarm line. In case of DLU it also cancels the
assignment of the alarm priority and set it to the default value "critical".
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SITE HARDWARE INSTALLATION SITE
This parameter specifies whether an exchange or a digital
line unit is involved.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EXCH EXCHANGE
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
EAL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE NUMBER
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EAL- 1-
CR EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command assigns an alarm text to a specified external alarm line or
for a DLU external alarm line. In case of DLU it also assigns a priority
to an external alarm line.
Prerequisite:
- The command is rejected, if an entry already exists for
the specified external alarm line.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ,TEXTNO= [,ALPRIO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SITE HARDWARE INSTALLATION SITE
This parameter specifies whether an exchange or a digital
line unit is involved.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EXCH EXCHANGE
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
EAL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE NUMBER
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
TEXTNO TEXT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number assigned to an alarm text.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...40, range of decimal numbers
ALPRIO ALARM PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the priority of an alarm.
Prerequisites:
SITE = DLU
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MINOR MINOR ALARM
MAJOR MAJOR ALARM
CRITICAL CRITICAL ALARM
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EAL- 1-
DISP EAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EXTERNAL ALARM LINE
This command displays the assignment of a single external alarm line
or of all external alarm lines of the exchange or of the DLU.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EAL : SITE= ,EAL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SITE HARDWARE INSTALLATION SITE
This parameter specifies whether an exchange or a digital
line unit is involved.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EXCH EXCHANGE
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
EAL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE NUMBER
Compatibilities:
1...16 for DLU
1...24 for EXCH
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EAL- 1-
CR EALLVL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE EAL LEVEL
This command creates the "No Alarm" level for an external alarm line
of a specified DLU.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR EALLVL : DLU= ,EAL= ,LVL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
EAL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of an external alarm line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
LVL ELECTRICAL NON-ALARM LEVEL
This parameter specifies whether a high or a low signal is
to be transmitted when there is no alarm.
Default: HIGH
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HIGH HIGH LINE LEVEL
LOW LOW LINE LEVEL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EALLVL- 1-
DISP EALLVL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EAL LEVEL
This command displays the "No Alarm" level for an external alarm line
or for all external alarm lines of the specified DLU.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EALLVL : DLU= ,EAL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
Here the number of the affected DLU is specified in the
three high-order positions. ( Value range 1 to 255 ). The
lowest-order position must always be 0.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
EAL EXTERNAL ALARM LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of an external alarm line.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EALLVL- 1-
CAN EASIGLME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel EADAS Signaling Link Measurement
This task deletes the following measurement type for the switch:
- EADAS sign.link measurem.
Notes :
Valid parametercombinations are :
- Net ID or Net name , Link set ID, Link code
- Link set name, Link code
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EASIGLME : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Link set name=] [
[ [
[ [,Link set ID=] ,Link code= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own signaling
point within a signaling network.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Allowed characters: all letters (no difference between
small and capital letters),
all numerals, +,#,*,%,.
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Possible values: 1..32
Link set name
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Link set ID
This parameter identifies the signaling link set.
Possible values: 1..1024
Link code
This parameter is used to identify a particular
Signaling link instance. The Link code at both ends of
the Signaling link must have the same value.
Possible values: 0..15
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EASIGLME- 1-
CR EASIGLME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create EADAS Signaling Link Measurement
This task creates the type of measurement for Signaling link:
The following types of measurement are supported :
-EADAS sign.link measurem.
This managed object class contains all EADAS signaling link
measurement data. The preferred granularity period is 30 minutes.
The parameters are read-only. For counter parameters filtering
is not possible.
The following counter attributes are supported:
- transmittedOctetsSIFSIO:
Number of SIF and SIO octets transmitted on a link basis
within the specified granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.1.
- retransmittedOctets:
The L2 Message Handling counts all octets retransmitted on a
link basis within the specified granularity period
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.2.
- transmittedMSUs:
Countof all transmitted MSU excluding MSUs which are
retransmitted. This count is performed on a link basis within
the specified granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.3.
- receivedOctetsSIFSIO:
Number of SIF and SIO octets received on a link basis
within the specified granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.4.
- receivedMSUs:
Count of all MSUs received on a linkbasis within the specified
granularity period. All MSUs that are discarded at L2 are not
counted.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.5.
- signUnitsReceived:
Number of signalling units in error.
Examples of these errors are the following:
- Checksum error detected for the signalling unit.
- SIF & SIO length error has exceeded more than 272 bytes.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/1.8.
- slInServiceDuration:
The begin count of the duration of the link in service is started
when the link state is set to active. The link state is set to
active when the link is aligned and passed link test. The duration
count is restarted for each granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/1.1
- slUnavailabilityDuration:
The begin count of the duration of the link unavailable for any
reason is started when the link state is changed to locally
inhibited, remotely inhibited , both locally and remotely
inhibited, remote processor outage or failed. The duration count
is restarted for each granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/2.1
- slUnavailabilityDuration (INHIBIT):
The begin count of the duration of the link unavailable due to
inhibit state is started when the link state is changed to inhibit.
The duration count is halted when the link state is out of
inhibit state.
The duration count is restarted for each granularity period.
- slLocalInhibited:
The count of this measurement is the sum of all events of
link inhibited locally.
- slRemoteInhibited:
The count of this measurement is the sum of all events of
link inhibited remotely.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EASIGLME- 1+
CR EASIGLME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- slLocalBlocked:
The count of this measurement is th esum of all events of
link blocked locally (local processor outage).
- slRemoteBlocked:
The count of this measurement is the sum of all events of
link blocked remotely (remote processor outage).
- slFailed:
The begin count of the duration of the link failure is started
when the link state is changed to failed. The duration count is
halted when the link is out of failed state. The duration count
is restarted for each granularity period. The link state in this
phase is out of service due to MTP level 2 (NB) or SAAL (NNI)
layer is not available, or hardware failure in the SLT. No MSUs
messages can be sent on this link.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/2.7.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- Net ID or Net name, Link set ID, Link code
- Link set name, Link code
- Admin. state is set to UNLOCKED
- all other attributes are set to initial values
Input format

[ [
[ CR EASIGLME : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Link set name=] [
[ [
[ [,Link set ID=] ,Link code= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own signaling
point within a signaling network.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Allowed characters: all letters (no difference between
small and capital letters),
all numerals, +,#,*,%,.
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Possible values: 1..32
Link set name
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Link set ID
This parameter identifies the signaling link set.
Possible values: 1..1024
Link code
This parameter is used to identify a particular
Signaling link instance. The Link code at both ends of
the Signaling link must have the same value.
Possible values: 0..15
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EASIGLME- 2-
DISP EASIGLME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display EADAS Signaling Link Measurement
This task displays the following measurement type for the switch:
- EADAS sign.link measurem.
Notes :
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- one EADAS sign.link measurem. in one Signaling link set
- Net ID or Net name, Link set ID, Link code
- Link set name, Link code
- all EADAS sign.link measurem. of one signLinkset
- Net ID or Net name and Link set ID
- Link set name
- all EADAS sign.link measurem. of one network
- Net ID or Net name
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EASIGLME : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Link set name=] [
[ [
[ [,Link set ID=] [,Link code=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own signaling
point within a signaling network.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Allowed characters: all letters (no difference between
small and capital letters),
all numerals, +,#,*,%,.
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Possible values: 1..32
Link set name
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Link set ID
This parameter identifies the signaling link set.
Possible values: 1..1024
Link code
This parameter is used to identify a particular
Signaling link instance. The Link code at both ends of
the Signaling link must have the same value.
Possible values: 0..15
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EASIGLME- 1-
CAN EASIGLSME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel EADAS Signaling Linkset Meas.
This task deletes the following measurement type for the switch:
- EADAS sign.link set meas.
Notes :
Valid inputparameter combinations are :
- Net ID, Link set ID
- Net name, Link set ID
- Link set name
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EASIGLSME : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Link set name=] [
[ [
[ [,Link set ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own signaling
point within a signaling network.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Allowed characters: all letters (no difference between
small and capital letters),
all numerals, +,#,*,%,.
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Possible values: 1..32
Link set name
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Link set ID
This parameter identifies the signaling link set.
Possible values: 1..1024
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EASIGLSME- 1-
CR EASIGLSME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create EADAS Signaling Linkset Meas.
This task creates the measurement for Signaling link set:
- EADAS sign.link set meas.
The following measurement type is supported :
- EADAS sign.link set meas.
This managed object class contains all EADAS signaling linkset
measurement data, that do not depend on the current congestion
method. The preferred granularity period is 30 minutes.
The parameters are read-only. For counter parameters filtering
is not possible.
The following counter attributes are supported:
- transmittedOctetsSIFSIO:
Number of SIF and SIO octets transmitted on a link basis
within the specified granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.1.
- retransmittedOctets:
The L2 Message Handling counts all octets retransmitted on a
link basis within the specified granularity period
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.2.
- transmittedMSUs:
Count of all transmitted MSU excluding MSUs which are
retransmitted. This count is performed on a link basis within
the specified granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.3.
- receivedOctetsSIFSIO:
Number of SIF and SIO octets received on a link basis
within the specified granularity period.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.4.
- receivedMSUs:
Count of all MSUs received on a link basis within the specified
granularity period. All MSUs that are discarded at L2 are not
counted.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/3.5.
- discardedMSUs (buffer overflow):
Count of all dicarded MSUs due to transmission buffer overflow
received on a link basis within the specified granularity period.
- discardedMSUs (congestion L1):
Once the signalling link congestion threshold level 1 is crossed
then L3 message handling discards the outgoing MSUs and counts
the number of MSU discarded at threshold level 1 on a link basis
within the specified granularity period.
sep messages are discarded at the onset threshold and stp messages
are discarded at the discard threshold.
- discardedMSUs (congestion L2):
Once the signalling link congestion threshold level 2 is crossed
then L3 message handling discards the outgoing MSUs and counts
the number of MSU discarded at threshold level 2 on a link basis
within the specified granularity period.
sep messages are discarded at the onset threshold and stp messages
are discarded at the discard threshold.
- discardedMSUs (congestion L3):
Once the signalling link congestion threshold level 3 is crossed
then L3 message handling discards the outgoing MSUs and counts
the number of MSU discarded at threshold level 3 on a link basis
within the specified granularity period.
sep messages are discarded at the onset threshold and stp messages
are discarded at the discard threshold.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- Net ID or Net name and Link set ID
- Link set name
- Admin. state is set to UNLOCKED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EASIGLSME- 1+
CR EASIGLSME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- all other attributes are set to initial values
Input format

[ [
[ CR EASIGLSME : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Link set name=] [
[ [
[ [,Link set ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own signaling
point within a signaling network.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Allowed characters: all letters (no difference between
small and capital letters),
all numerals, +,#,*,%,.
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Possible values: 1..32
Link set name
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Link set ID
This parameter identifies the signaling link set.
Possible values: 1..1024
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EASIGLSME- 2-
DISP EASIGLSME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display EADAS Signaling Linkset Meas.
This task displays the following measurement type for the switch:
- EADAS sign.link set meas.
Notes :
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- one EADAS sign.link set meas. of one network
- Net ID, Link set ID
- Net name, Link set ID
- Link set name
- all EADAS sign.link set meas. of one network
- Net ID
- Net name
- all EADAS sign.link set meas.
- no input
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EASIGLSME : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Link set name=] [
[ [
[ [,Link set ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own signaling
point within a signaling network.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Allowed characters: all letters (no difference between
small and capital letters),
all numerals, +,#,*,%,.
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Possible values: 1..32
Link set name
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
Link set ID
This parameter identifies the signaling link set.
Possible values: 1..1024
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EASIGLSME- 1-
CAN EASIGNEME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel EADAS Sign. Network El. Meas.
This task deletes the following measurement type for the switch:
- EADAS swit. element meas.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EASIGNEME ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EASIGNEME- 1-
CR EASIGNEME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create EADAS Sign. Network El. Meas.
This task creates the following measurement type for the switch :
- EADAS netw. element meas.
The following measurement types are supported :
- EADAS netw. element meas.
This object class contains some US-specific measurements concerning node
isolation, transit MSUs, and originated and terminated octets.
The following counter attributes are supported:
- numInMSU:
The L3 message handling counts all MSUs received from the
network (excluding transit MSUs) on a network basis within
the specified granularity period (30 minutes).
This attribute represents measurement 1 TR 24.7.
- numTransitMSU:
If the own signalling point supports stp functionality then
L3 message handling counts all MSUs transit in the system
on a network basis within the specified granularity period (30 minutes).
This attribute represents measurement 1 TR 24.7.
- numOutMSU:
The L3 message handling counts its own MSUs formulated for
the outgoing direction and also its own MSUs in the outgoing
direction. This measurement consists of the sum of all outgoing
MSUs originated by both L3 network management and L3 message
handling within the specified granularity period (30 minutes).
This attribute represents measurement 1 TR 24.7.
- MSUOctetsTransit:
The L3 network management counts all MSU octets SIF & SIO
originated on a switch basis within the specified
granularity period (30 minutes).
- originatedOctetsSIFSIO:
The L3 message handling counts all MSU octets SIF & SIO
originated on a switch basis within the specified
granularity period (30 minutes).
- terminatedOctetsSIFSIO:
The L3 message handling counts all MSU octets SIF & SIO
terminated on a switch basis within the specified
granularity period (30 minutes).
- nodeIsolation:
The count of this measurement is the sum of all events of
unavailability of route set of all destinations for all networks.
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/4.9.
- nodeIsolationDuration:
The count of this measurement is the sum of all durations of
node isolation for any reason (see nodeIsolation).
This attribute represents measurement Q.752/4.10.
Notes :
- Admin. state is set to UNLOCKED
- all other attributes are set to initial values
Input format

[ [
[ CR EASIGNEME ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EASIGNEME- 1+
CR EASIGNEME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EASIGNEME- 2-
DISP EASIGNEME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display EADAS Sign. Network El. Meas.
This task displays the following measurement type for the switch:
- EADAS netw. element meas.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EASIGNEME ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EASIGNEME- 1-
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXECUTE EDT SYSTEM 8
This command calls the EDTS8 file editing subroutine to process SAM files.
EDTS8 processes control inputs in interactive mode from a data terminal or
in batch mode from a SAM file on disk. These control inputs are subdivided
into:
- Commands in command mode
Command mode is activated after EDTS8 has started or after data mode has
terminated.
- Data lines in data mode
Data mode is activated when a data line is input. EDTS8 interprets
all subsequent inputs as data lines. The changeover from data mode to
command mode is initiated by
pressing the input key
entering a period
end of a SAM file (with data lines)
- Dialog responses on the data terminal (in interactive mode)
All EDTS8 outputs appear on the data terminal. Optional outputs to a
printer are:
- An EDTS8 command log
- Contents of the EDTS8 line memory (file window)
When data are written to a SAM file, the specified lines of the EDTS8
line memory are written to disk. When data are read from a SAM file, the
specified records are entered as data lines in the EDTS8 line memory.
The records of this SAM file can be up to 252 bytes long.
EDTS8 commands
AGAIN Repetition of no more than the last 5 commands except
AGAIN and HELP
A P Output (print) of the last 5 commands
n Repetition of n commands
Repetition of the last command
CHANGE Changes in text lines or columns in specific lines
CH range domain search := new text
ALL search := new text
.. search := new text
search..:= new text
domain1 := new text
domain1 op search := new text
COPY Copy whole lines or columns to a required position
C range domain TO ln STEP m CLc
ST m
DELETE Delete specific lines
D range
domain search
domain op search
END End EDTS8
FILE Define file and type of access (Write or read)
F file INPUT OUTPUT
I O
HELP Summary of the operating instructions in English
H Command
Command OPD
OPD
OPD operand
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 1+
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INSERT Insert text or data sections in specific lines
in the required position
I range domain := new text
domain op search := new text
domain1 .. search := new text
search .. := new text
ALL search := new text
ALL search .. := new text
LIST List specific lines on the printer
L range domain NON HEX
search N H
domain1 op search
LOG Log the next commands on the printer
Activate the logging function
OFF Deactivate the logging function
MOVE Move lines or columns to the required position
The source data are deleted
M range domain TO ln STEP m CLc
ST m
NUMBER Renumber all lines
N Standard numbering 1,2,3...
ln STEP m
ST m
PRINT Print lines and columns on the data terminal
P range domain NON HEX
search N H
domain1 op search
READ Read in SAM files in the required position
R # file
recrange FROM file
recrange domain FR file
SELECT Select particular lines by deleting lines which are not
selected
S range
range domain search
range domain op search
SPACE Delete spaces to the left up to beginning of text or to
the right after end of text up to end of line
SP range R
L
TAB Tabulator declaration for data input in tabular form and
definition of a tab mark
T t CLn1 n2 n3 ....n32
OFF
TRANSLATE Translate data to EBCDIC or ASCII code
TR range domain TO EBCDIC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 2+
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E
ASCII
A
VERIFY If the text is modified using the commands CHANGE, INSERT,
MOVE, COPY and SELECT, all the lines concerned are output
as a verification
V Activate verification function
OFF Deactivate verification function
WRITE Write all or part of the line memory as a SAM file to
disk
W # file
EXTEND
range TO file EXT
range domain TO file EXT
ln Line input to the line memory, line number
STEP m domain :=data <<
ST m
range Line area
ln1 :ln2
domain Column area, column number
recchange Records (lines) in a SAM file
<< Command linkage with the command character
EDTS8 word symbols
A SCII USASCII code
A GAIN Command abbreviation
CH ANGE Command abbreviation
CL Column data
C OPY Command abbreviation
D ELETE Command abbreviation
E BCDIC EBCDIC code
END End of EDTS8
EXT ENT Extend file
F ILE Command abbreviation
FR OM Direction specification "from"
H ELP Command abbreviation
H EX Hexadecimal specification
I NPUT Read file
I NSERT Command abbreviation
L Left
L IST Command abbreviation
LOG IN log
M OVE Command abbreviation
N ON Output without line number
O UTPUT Write file
OFF Switch off
OPD Operand
P RINT Command abbreviation
R Right
R EAD Command abbreviation
REC Record of a SAM file
S ELECT Command abbreviation
SP ACE Command abbreviation
ST EP Command abbreviation
T AB Command abbreviation
TO Direction specification "to"
TR ANSLATE Command abbreviation
V ERIFY Command abbreviation
W RITE Command abbreviation
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 3+
EXEC EDTS8
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EDTS8 character symbols
+ Page forward
- Page backward
<< Command link, command character
% First line in line memory
* Current line in line memory
$ Last line in line memory
? Free space after last line in line memory
& Whole line memory
: Start:End
:= Is replaced by
.. Area before or after
= Equal to
/= Not equal to
< Less than
> Greater than
Limit
" Text separator
. Period, end of data
Input format

[ [
[ EXEC EDTS8 ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXEC EDTS8- 4-
REC EIR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD EQUIPMENT IDENTITY REGISTER
This command records the equipment identity register related data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- Only 1 measurement job can be started.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB if the time
parameter values allow a continuation of the job.
- This command is only allowed for an EIR.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC EIR : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first be
copied to tape.
Notes:
- Identifier a covers both MDD and MOD.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: FILETYPE
SINGLE SINGLE FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
DAILY DAILY FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to daily files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files (MO...SU) are prepared and created
before the command is accepted.
Time parameters are not permissible for these
measurements.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is automatically
created on disk or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file
for the same day of the week is overwritten.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EIR- 1+
REC EIR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CYCLIC CYCLIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full the newest
data will be lost.
This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily , single or cyclic measurement files).
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception : time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily and cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates (in ascending order) may be linked
with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after entry.
- It is not permissible to enter the command after 23:45 hours with a
begin date on the following day.
- The first measurement may not begin later than one month after the
current date. Subsequent measurements may not begin later than one
year after the current date.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year of the begin
date.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month of the begin
date.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day of the begin
date.
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must
be specified.
Exception: time parameters may not be specified for data output
in daily and cyclic files.
Default: the end of the measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EIR- 2+
REC EIR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year in which
recording is to terminate.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month in which
recording is to terminate.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day on which
recording is to terminate.
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a
begin date (BEG).
Incompatibilities:
- Intervals covering more than one day (e.g. 23-00-01-00).
- Intervals separated by a break of less than one hour.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval begins.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval begins.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval terminates.
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval terminates.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EIR- 3+
REC EIR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
recording is to take place.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date (TER).
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EIR- 4-
CAN ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command cancels an elementary message for a given OCANEQ variant.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ELMSG- 1-
CR ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command creates an elementary message for a given OCANEQ variant and
assigns it to an elementary message identification, known by the SCP
(Service Control Point).
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR ELMSG - INDPHR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
2. CR ELMSG - OPRASS ELMSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
3. CR ELMSG - STAN ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR STD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to assign elementary messages of message type
"INDAS phrase" to an elementary message identification.
An INDAS phrase is composed of fixed text parts and up to six different
variable parts.
The variable part is represented by parameter ELMPAR.
The indas phrases can be used for user confirmation of input information or to
announce frequently changing parts, such as directory number, date/time,...

[ [
[ CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= [,ELMPAR=] ,LANELMSG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SUBVOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(only for INDPHR and STAN) its announcement number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ELMSG- 1+
CR ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter unit is used to define the message type of the
elementary message.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
1,2,3...900, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit is used to define the announcement number.
ELMPAR ELMSG PARAMETER
This parameter builds the contents of the variable part of the INDAS
phrase. The variable part is used to announce variable information as
there are: directory numbers, date/time,....
The variable part can contain up to 6 ELMPAR values, linked with &.
The order in which the different values are given determines
the sequence of the ELMPAR values in the INDAS phrase.
The different values can be placed on any position within the INDAS
phrase. Each of the possible values can be specified more than once.
example: TIME&PRICE&TIME&DIGITS&INTEGER
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DATE DATE
DIGITS DIGITS
INTEGER INTEGER
PRICE PRICE
TIME TIME
WEEKDAY WEEKDAY
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
SUBVOC SUBVOCABULARY
This parameter is only applicable for announcements
which prompt the subscriber to give a response (e.g. acknowledge).
The parameter indicates to the voice recognition system which
subset of the recognizable words can be expected in the response
(e.g.YES and NO for an acknowledge).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SVOC0 SUBVOCABULARY 0
SVOC1 SUBVOCABULARY 1
SVOC2 SUBVOCABULARY 2
SVOC3 SUBVOCABULARY 3
SVOC4 SUBVOCABULARY 4
SVOC5 SUBVOCABULARY 5
SVOC6 SUBVOCABULARY 6
SVOC7 SUBVOCABULARY 7
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ELMSG- 2+
CR ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ELMSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
This input format is used to assign an elementary message of message type
"operator assistance" to an elementary message identification.
The different kind of operator assistances are defined by parameter OPRMODE.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= [,OPRMODE=] ,LANELMSG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(only for INDPHR and STAN) its announcement number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPRASS OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
This parameter unit is used to define the message type of the
elementary message.
OPRMODE OPERATOR MODE
This parameter is used to define the kind of operator
assistance.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPRASSAP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE AFTER PIN
Operator assistance after the user has entered
the Personal Identification Number (PIN).
OPRASSBP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PIN
Operator assistance before the user has entered
the Personal Identification Number (PIN).
OPRASSO OPERATOR ASSISTANCE OUT
Operator assistance has to be finished.
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ELMSG- 3+
CR ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ELMSG- 4+
CR ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR STD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format is used to assign an elementary message of message type
"fixed text announcement" to an elementary message identification.
A fixed text announcement is completely represented by its announcement number.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= ,ELMSG= ,LANELMSG= [,SUBVOC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(only for INDPHR and STAN) its announcement number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
STAN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This parameter unit is used to define the message type of the
elementary message.
b: ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
1,2,3...2500, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit is used to define the announcement number.
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ELMSG- 5+
CR ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
SUBVOC SUBVOCABULARY
This parameter is only applicable for announcements
which prompt the subscriber to give a response (e.g. acknowledge).
The parameter indicates to the voice recognition system which
subset of the recognizable words can be expected in the response
(e.g.YES and NO for an acknowledge).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SVOC0 SUBVOCABULARY 0
SVOC1 SUBVOCABULARY 1
SVOC2 SUBVOCABULARY 2
SVOC3 SUBVOCABULARY 3
SVOC4 SUBVOCABULARY 4
SVOC5 SUBVOCABULARY 5
SVOC6 SUBVOCABULARY 6
SVOC7 SUBVOCABULARY 7
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ELMSG- 6-
DISP ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command displays one or more elementary messages for a certain
OCANEQ variant.
A selective display can be achieved by specifying the message type of the
elementary message and (or) the language.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= [,ELMSG=] [,LANELMSG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(depending on the message type) its announcement number.
For display purposes, only the message function can be specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
STAN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
OPRASS OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
This parameter unit is used to define the message type of the
elementary message.
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
Notes:
- The reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ELMSG- 1+
DISP ELMSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ELMSG- 2-
MOD ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This command modifies, for a given OCANEQ variant, the contents of the
elementary message assigned to an elementary message identification.
It is also possible to change the message type (parameter ELMSG).
If the message type is changed, all parameters necessary for the new
message type must be entered in the command. No data from the old
message type is kept in this case.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD ELMSG - INDPHR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
2. MOD ELMSG - OPRASS ELEMENTARY MSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
3. MOD ELMSG - STAN ELEMENTARY MSG FOR STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
1. Input format
ELEMENTARY MESSAGE FOR INDAS PHRASE
This input format is used to change the linking of an elementary message
identification assigned to a standard announcement or an operator assistance
into an elementary message identification, assigned to an INDAS phrase.
It can also be used to modify the announcement number of the INDAS phrase, the
variable part of the INDAS phrase and (or) the language, assigned to the
elementary message identification. The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.

[ [
[ MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,ELMPAR= ,LANELMSG= [
[ [
[ ,SUBVOC=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(depending on the message type) its announcement number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
INDPHR INDAS PHRASE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ELMSG- 1+
MOD ELMSG
INDPHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
1,2,3...900, range of decimal numbers
ELMPAR ELEMENTARY MESSAGE PARAMETER
This parameter builds the contents of the variable part of the INDAS
phrase. The variable part is used to announce variable information as
there are: directory numbers, date/time,....
The variable part can contain up to 6 ELMPAR values, linked with &.
The order in which the different values are given, determine
the sequence of the ELMPAR values in the INDAS phrase.
The different values can be placed on any position within the INDAS
phrase. Each of the possible values can be specified more than once.
example: TIME&PRICE&TIME&DIGITS&INTEGER
Note that when the announcement number the old parameters in the
are cleared. If the new INDAS phrase requires parameters, these
must be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DATE DATE
DIGITS DIGITS
INTEGER INTEGER
PRICE PRICE
TIME TIME
WEEKDAY WEEKDAY
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
SUBVOC SUBVOCABULARY
This parameter is only applicable for announcements
which prompt the subscriber to give a response (e.g. acknowledge).
The parameter indicates to the voice recognition system which
subset of the recognizable words can be expected in the response
(e.g.YES and NO for an acknowledge).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SVOC0 SUBVOCABULARY 0
SVOC1 SUBVOCABULARY 1
SVOC2 SUBVOCABULARY 2
SVOC3 SUBVOCABULARY 3
SVOC4 SUBVOCABULARY 4
SVOC5 SUBVOCABULARY 5
SVOC6 SUBVOCABULARY 6
SVOC7 SUBVOCABULARY 7
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ELMSG- 2+
MOD ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ELEMENTARY MSG FOR OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
This input format is used to change the linking of an elementary message
identification assigned to an INDAS phrase or a standard announcement into an
elementary message identification, assigned to an operator assistance. It can
also be used to modify the operator mode and (or) the language, assigned to the
elementary message identification.
The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.

[ [
[ MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,OPRMODE= ,LANELMSG=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(depending on the message type) its announcement number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPRASS OPERATOR ASSISTANCE
OPRMODE OPERATOR MODE
This parameter is used to define the kind of operator
assistance.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OPRASSAP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE AFTER PIN
OPRASSBP OPERATOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PIN
OPRASSO OPERATOR ASSISTANCE OUT
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ELMSG- 3+
MOD ELMSG
OPRASS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN10 LANGUAGE 10
LAN11 LANGUAGE 11
LAN12 LANGUAGE 12
LAN13 LANGUAGE 13
LAN14 LANGUAGE 14
LAN15 LANGUAGE 15
LAN16 LANGUAGE 16
LAN17 LANGUAGE 17
LAN18 LANGUAGE 18
LAN19 LANGUAGE 19
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN20 LANGUAGE 20
LAN21 LANGUAGE 21
LAN22 LANGUAGE 22
LAN23 LANGUAGE 23
LAN24 LANGUAGE 24
LAN25 LANGUAGE 25
LAN26 LANGUAGE 26
LAN27 LANGUAGE 27
LAN28 LANGUAGE 28
LAN29 LANGUAGE 29
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN30 LANGUAGE 30
LAN31 LANGUAGE 31
LAN32 LANGUAGE 32
LAN33 LANGUAGE 33
LAN34 LANGUAGE 34
LAN35 LANGUAGE 35
LAN36 LANGUAGE 36
LAN37 LANGUAGE 37
LAN38 LANGUAGE 38
LAN39 LANGUAGE 39
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
LAN5 LANGUAGE 5
LAN6 LANGUAGE 6
LAN7 LANGUAGE 7
LAN8 LANGUAGE 8
LAN9 LANGUAGE 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ELMSG- 4+
MOD ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ELEMENTARY MSG FOR STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
This input format is used to change the linking of an elementary message
identification assigned to an INDAS phrase or an operator assistance into an
elementary message identification, assigned to a standard announcement.
It can also be used to modify the standard announcement number and (or) the
language, assigned to the elementary message identification.
The OCANEQ variant can not be modified.

[ [
[ MOD ELMSG : OCAVAR= ,ELMSGID= <,ELMSG= ,LANELMSG= ,SUBVOC=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ELMSGID ELEMENTARY MSG IDENTIFICATION
This parameter identifies the elementary message in the SCP (Service
Control Point). The elementary message identification implicit
defines the language of the elementary message.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
ELMSG ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
This parameter defines the contents of the elementary message.
The elementary message is identified by its message type and optionally
(depending on the message type) its announcement number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MESSAGE TYPE
STAN STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
b: ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER=
1,2,3...2500, range of decimal numbers
LANELMSG LANGUAGE OF ELEMENTARY MESSAGE
For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT this
parameter indicates one of the possible official languages
commonly used in exchange.
For the input format OPERATOR ASSISTANCE this parameter indicates
which operator is selected.
Notes:
- For the input formats INDAS PHRASE and STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT
the reference between official language and foreign language is
specified by the project-specific INDAS document related to the
OCANEQ variant.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAN0 LANGUAGE 0
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ELMSG- 5+
MOD ELMSG
STAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAN1 LANGUAGE 1
LAN2 LANGUAGE 2
LAN3 LANGUAGE 3
LAN4 LANGUAGE 4
SUBVOC SUBVOCABULARY
This parameter is only applicable for announcements
which prompt the subscriber to give a response (e.g. acknowledge).
The parameter indicates to the voice recognition system which
subset of the recognizable words can be expected in the response
(e.g.YES and NO for an acknowledge).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SVOC0 SUBVOCABULARY 0
SVOC1 SUBVOCABULARY 1
SVOC2 SUBVOCABULARY 2
SVOC3 SUBVOCABULARY 3
SVOC4 SUBVOCABULARY 4
SVOC5 SUBVOCABULARY 5
SVOC6 SUBVOCABULARY 6
SVOC7 SUBVOCABULARY 7
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ELMSG- 6-
CAN ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command cancels for a given OCANEQ variant, the assignment of a fixed
text announcement to a given combination of an error code and error treatment.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ERRTR ERROR TREATMENT
This parameter defines how the detected input error of the user
interaction should be treated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEI STANDARD ERROR AND INFORMATION
This kind of error treatment results in an
immediate release of a pending announcement or
tone, stops the digit collection and starts a
standard announcement.
HLP HELP
This kind of error treatment is used to assist the
end-user with a standard announcement.
The UI(User Interaction)-LTG waits for a corrected
input from the end-user.
UIERRCOD USER INTERACTION ERROR CODE
This parameter defines the possible
user interaction error codes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FDT FIRST DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the first digit timer.
IDT INTER DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the inter digit timer and minimum
number of digits not yet reached.
EOR END OF REPLY
End Of Reply digit received and minimum number of
digits not yet reached.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ELMSGERR- 1-
CR ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command assigns, for a given OCANEQ variant, a fixed text announcement
to a combination of an error treatment and an error code.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ,STANNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ERRTR ERROR TREATMENT
This parameter defines how the detected input error of the user
interaction should be treated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEI STANDARD ERROR AND INFORMATION
This kind of error treatment results in an
immediate release of a pending announcement or
tone, stops the digit collection and starts a
standard announcement.
HLP HELP
This kind of error treatment is used to assist the
end-user with a standard announcement.
The UI(User Interaction)-LTG waits for a corrected
input from the end-user.
UIERRCOD USER INTERACTION ERROR CODE
This parameter defines the possible
user interaction error codes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FDT FIRST DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the first digit timer.
IDT INTER DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the inter digit timer and minimum
number of digits not yet reached.
EOR END OF REPLY
End Of Reply digit received and minimum number of
digits not yet reached.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2500, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ELMSGERR- 1-
DISP ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command displays, for a given OCANEQ variant, the fixed text announcements
assigned to the different combinations of error codes and error treatments.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ELMSGERR- 1-
MOD ELMSGERR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ELEMENTARY MESSAGE ERROR
This command modifies, for a given OCANEQ variant, the assignment of a fixed
text announcement to a combination of error code and error treatment.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ELMSGERR : OCAVAR= ,ERRTR= ,UIERRCOD= ,STANNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OCAVAR OCANEQ VARIANT
This parameter specifies the OCANEQ variant equivalent to the
project-specific firmware label of OCANEQ speech memory.
It is used to identify the content of text fragments stored in the
speech memory of one OCANEQ.
The first character must be a letter, the characters remaining
must be decimal numbers in the range 0...9.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ERRTR ERROR TREATMENT
This parameter defines how the detected input error of the user
interaction should be treated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEI STANDARD ERROR AND INFORMATION
This kind of error treatment results in an
immediate release of a pending announcement or
tone, stops the digit collection and starts a
standard announcement.
HLP HELP
This kind of error treatment is used to assist the
end-user with a standard announcement.
The UI(User Interaction)-LTG waits for a corrected
input from the end-user.
UIERRCOD USER INTERACTION ERROR CODE
This parameter defines the possible
user interaction errors.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FDT FIRST DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the first digit timer.
IDT INTER DIGIT TIMEOUT
Timeout of the inter digit timer and minimum
number of digits not yet reached.
EOR END OF REPLY
End Of Reply digit received and minimum number of
digits not yet reached.
STANNO STANDARD ANNOUNCEMENT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2500, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ELMSGERR- 1-
RESET EMERGOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET EMERGENCY OPERATION
This command resets the emergency operation flag.
Emergency operation is caused by a hardware recovery.
Notes:
- Configuration, diagnosis and test commands for central units, IOPs and
devices cant be executed while the CP is in emergency operation.
Input format

[ [
[ RESET EMERGOP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RESET EMERGOP- 1-
DMP ENB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump Error Notebook
This task activates the memory dump of the SGSN Error Note Books
and the MSC Error Note Books.
A Error Note Book is a part of memory, which contains error
symptom data belonging to occurred software errors.
The error symptom data contained in the dump result is needed
for error analysis. To get actual error symptom data the dump
should be executed as soon as possible after the problems occurred.
To ensure a good error analysis, always dump all of the
Error Note Books.
Note :
- The modules E9LCFA1S, E9LH8A1S, E9LLEA1S, E9LMBA1S and E9LS8A1S
wont be executable in PO because the platforms are only
available in CS.
- The modules E9TLYG0S and E9TLZG0S will be partly executed in PO,
because they contain requests for platforms which are only
available in CS.
- The modules G9MCFA1S, I9CCXA1S, I9EDDA1S, G9ALEA1S, G9PXXA1S
and G9PXYA1S wont be executable in CS because the platforms
are only available in PO.
Input format

[ [
[ DMP ENB : Module name= ,Dump variable part= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Module name
This parameter specifies the Error Note Book to be dumped.
See below for a complete list.
Input format:
selection of:
- E9LCFA1S (MP:AAL2),
- E9LH8A1S (MP:AAL2),
- E9LLEA1S (MP:AAL2),
- E9LMBA1S (MP:AAL2),
- E9LS8A1S (MP:AAL2),
- E9TLYG0S (MP:AAL2,SA),
- E9TLZG0S (MP:AAL2,SA,SM),
- D9ZE0A1S (MP:ACC),
- G9ACXA1S (MP:ACC),
- E9IOEA1S (MP:MM,RANAP),
- G9MCFA1S (MP:MM),
- I9CCXA1S (MP:MM),
- I9EDDA1S (MP:MM),
- G9ALEA1S (MP:PD),
- G9PXXA1S (MP:PD),
- G9PXYA1S (MP:PD),
- E9BCEA1S (MP:RANAP),
- E9R1EG0S (MP:RANAP),
- E9MAFG0S (MP:SA),
- E9MO1A1S (MP:SA),
- E9OAEG0S (MP:SA),
- E9XAAA1S (MP:SA),
- G9OAAA1S (MP:SA),
- G9OAEA1S (MP:SA),
- G9OAWA1S (MP:SA),
- G9TIAA1S (MP:SA),
- HOPEIA1S (MP:SA),
- I9UTEA1S (MP:SA),
- MUCERG0S (MP:SA),
- HIENBA1S (MP:HI).
Dump variable part
This parameter is used to decide if the variable memory part
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP ENB- 1+
DMP ENB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
will be printed after the fixed part of the selected module.
Input format:
selection of
- no
- yes
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP ENB- 2-
DISP ENTOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ENTITY OPTIONS
This command displays the entity specific data, which are relevant
for the given type of entity.
Notes:
- This command will be rejected when :
- the specified type of entity is not installed in the exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ENTOPT : ENTITY= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ENTITY ENTITY TYPE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HLR HOME LOCATION REGISTER
VLR VISITOR LOCATION REGISTER
MSC MOBILE SERV. SWITCHING CENTER
AC AUTHENTICATION CENTER
RELNODE RELAY NODE
HLRSID HLR SENDID
VLRSID VLR SENDID
MSCSID MSC SENDID
PROTMAP PROTOCOL MAPPER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ENTOPT- 1-
MOD ENTOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY ENTITY OPTIONS
This command modifies predefined specific values for the following entities :
- HLR : - the HLR internal ISDN number HLRISD.
- VLR : - the VLR internal ISDN number VLRISD.
- the VLR name VLRNAME.
- AC : - the AC name ACNAME.
- the AC firmware function state ACFWFUST.
- the physical names of the communication partners.
- MSC : - the EIR Status EIR (LOCAL or REMOTE).
- the EIRISD number of the EIR which is consulted if EIR=REMOTE.
Additional predefined specific values can also be modified :
- RELNODE : - NODE is RELAY NODE in case of a HLR.
- HLRSID : - the HLR send identity number in case of a HLR for CDMA
projects.
- VLRSID : - the VLR send identity number in case of a VLR for CDMA
projects.
- MSCSID : - the MSC send identity number in case of a MSC for CDMA
projects.
Notes:
- This command will be rejected when :
- the specified parameter is related to an entity which is not configured in
the exchange.
- the combination of logical name and application which is defined in
ACCOMPAR is not valid.
- EIR = LOCAL and EIRISD has been entered.
- In integrated entities, all entities should be allocated different ISDN
numbers.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD ENTOPT : <HLRISD= ,VLRISD= ,VLRNAME= ,ACNAME= ,ACFWFUST= [
[ [
[ ,ACCOMPAR= ,EIRISD= ,EIR= ,RELNODE= ,HLRSID= [
[ [
[ ,VLRSID= ,MSCSID=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HLRISD HLR INTERNAL ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the internal ISDN number for the HLR which
is used in the MAP messages.
Note: 0 means no HLRISD value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
VLRISD VLR INTERNAL ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the internal ISDN number for the VLR which
is used in the MAP messages.
Note: 0 means no VLRISD value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
VLRNAME VLR NAME
Note: * means no VLR name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...30 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ENTOPT- 1+
MOD ENTOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
text string character set, enclosed in "
ACNAME AC NAME
Note: * means no AC name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...30 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ACFWFUST FIRMWARE FUNCTION STATE
This parameter limits the use of the functionality provided
by the IOP:AUCs.
Notes:
- This command will be rejected if a is lower
than a previously entered value.
- This command will be rejected if some of the activated
IOP:AUC firmware in the exchange has a function state lower
than a.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
ACCOMPAR COMP PHYS. LOG. NAME AND APPL.
This parameter specifies a combination of a physical name, a logical
name and an application.
Prerequisites:
- This command will only be executed when the combination of logical
name and application is defined, in which case the corresponding
physical name will be modified.
Notes:
- The valid combinations of logical name and application may be
obtained via the DISP ENTOPT:ENTITY=AC command.
- At most 7 parameters may be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: PHYSICAL NAME=
0...30 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
Physical name of the communication partner.
This name uniquely identifies the communication partner.
Note: * means no physical name.
b: LOGICAL NAME=
0...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
Logical name of the communication partner.
This is a name for the functionality of the
communication partner.
c: APPLICATION=
0...5 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
Name of the application which is used between the AC and the
communication partner.
EIRISD EIR ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the international ISDN number of the remote
EIR which is consulted by the MSC for the purpose of equipment control.
The parameter has to be entered only when the EIR status is REMOTE.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ENTOPT- 2+
MOD ENTOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Note: 0 means no EIRISD value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
EIR EIR STATUS
This parameter specifies the EIR status.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LOCAL EIR LOCAL
REMOTE EIR REMOTE
RELNODE RELAY NODE
This parameter determines if the node is a relay node.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y YES
N NO
HLRSID HLR SENDID NUMBER
This parameter specifies the send identity number for the HLR which
is used in the MAP messages.
Note: 0 means no HLRSID value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
VLRSID VLR SENDID NUMBER
This parameter specifies the send identity number for the VLR which
is used in the MAP messages.
Note: 0 means no VLRSID value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
MSCSID MSC SENDID NUMBER
This parameter specifies the send identity number for the MSC which
is used in the MAP messages.
Note: 0 means no MSCSID value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD ENTOPT- 3-
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This command changes the equipment number of a subscriber or a
PBX Line without changing any of the subscriber or PBX Line related
data under consideration of the following points:
- A modification is possible from DLU to DLU port and from LTG to DLU
port.
- The old equipment number is assigned to a subscriber/PBX Line.
- ISDN-subscriber and all analog subscriber categories besides
mobile stations can be handled.
- The category of the PBX Line can either be mainstation (for analog
lines) or Basic Access (for ISDN lines).
- No nailed up connection must exist for the old equipment number.
- If the object on the parallel port from the new low bit rate or
high bit rate port of an SDSL access is a subscriber/PBX line,
the moved object has to be of the same type (subscriber/PBX line).
- If the object is moved to a SDSL port the transferrate values are set
to the old values if existing or the values of object connected on
the parallelport or the office values.
- If the object is moved from a SDSL port the transferrate values are
deleted implicitly.
- the number of B-channels must be supported on the new port
Prerequisites:
- The new equipment number must previously be a free DLU port.
- The new equipment must be able to support all the subscriber/PBX Line/PBX
features that exist for the subscriber/PBX Line/PBX to be moved.
- The limitations concerning LTG resources must be fulfilled
(Command DISP LTGRES).
- Compatibility between the circuit type of the new equipment and
the category of the subscriber/PBX Line.
- Compatibility between the circuit type of the new equipment and
the operation mode of the PBX Line.
- Compatibility between the circuit type of the new equipment and
line attributes of the subscriber/PBX Line.
- Compatibility between the circuit type of the new equipment and
classes of service of the subscriber/PBX Line.
- Compatibility between the circuit type of the new equipment and
charging features of the subscriber/PBX Line.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD EQN - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
2. MOD EQN - EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER
Input format for addressing a subscriber/PBX Line via DN.

[ [
[ MOD EQN : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ,NEWEQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EQN- 1+
MOD EQN
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber directory number or the pilot
directory number of a PBX, to which the PBX Line is assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATION MODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX Line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
NEWEQN NEW EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new equipment number to which the
subscriber/PBX Line will be reconnected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU=
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
b: SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
c: MODULE=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
d: CIRCUIT=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EQN- 2+
MOD EQN
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Input format for addressing a subscriber/PBX Line via EQN.

[ [
[ MOD EQN : EQN= ,NEWEQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number to which the subscriber/
PBX Line is connected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG/DLU=
0...2550, range of decimal numbers
- TSG number (0..7 for a LTG port).
- DLU number (10,20,30...2550 for a DLU port).
b: LTG/SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
- LTG number (1..63 for a LTG port).
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU port).
c: LTU/MODULE=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
- LTU number (0..7 for a LTG port).
- DLU module number (0..15 for a DLU port).
d: CIRCUIT=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
- Circuit number (0..31 for a LTG port)
- Circuit number (0..31 for a DLU port)
NEWEQN NEW EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new equipment number to which the
subscriber/PBX Line will be reconnected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU=
10...2550, range of decimal numbers
b: SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
c: MODULE=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
d: CIRCUIT=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EQN- 3-
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE EQUIPMENT TRAP
This command activates an instant printout for each occurrence of the specified
error codes:
- on a particular port or on the ports
- in a port area of a particular line/trunk unit
- in a particular line/trunk unit
- in a line/trunk unit area of a particular line/trunk group
- in a particular line/trunk group
Incompatibilities:
- The functionality which is activated by the MML commands
ACT TRTRAP and ACT EQTRAP is not supported by the BSSAP LTG.
If either of these MML commands is entered, the correct handling
of the BSSAP protocol at the GSM A-interface cannot be guaranteed.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHALL PRINT ALL HOLD ALL
2. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHNON PRINT ALL HOLD NONE
3. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHSPE PRINT ALL HOLD SPECIFIED
4. ACT EQTRAP - PALLHUSP PRINT ALL HOLD UNSPECIFIED
5. ACT EQTRAP - PSPEHSPE PRINT SPECIFIED HOLD SPECIFIED
6. ACT EQTRAP - PUSPHNON PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD NONE
7. ACT EQTRAP - PUSPHUSP PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD UNSPEC.
1. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD ALL
Input format for activating a printout and the attempt to hold the
connection for the occurrence of any MDII (machine detected interoffice
irregularity).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,HOLD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 1+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any
MDII occurs.
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a connection is to be held for
a port when an error code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Holds a connection for a port when any MDII
occurs.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 2+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD NONE
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of any MDII
(machine detected interoffice irregularity).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any
MDII occurs.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 3+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD SPECIFIED
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all MDIIs
and the attempt to hold the connection for the occurrence of specified
MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any
MDII occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 4+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: ERROR CODE
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E112 US: PARTIAL DIAL ABANDON (INC)
E113 US: PARTIAL DIAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E114 US: EXTRA DIGIT RECEIVED (INC)
E115 US: EXTRA PULSE RECEIVED (INC)
E116 US: MORE THAN ONE MF KP SIGN.
E117 US: MISPLACED ST SIGNAL (INC)
E118 US: MUTILATED DIGIT (INC)
E119 US: NO KP (INC)
E120 US: PERM. SIGNAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E121 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY OFF HOOK
E122 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY ON HOOK
E123 US: WINK START,STEADY ON HOOK
E124 US: WINK START,STEADY OFF HOOK
E125 US: NO EXPECTED STOP
E126 US: POLARITY FAILURE
E127 US: UNEXPECTED STOP
E128 US: STOP SIGNAL TOO LONG
E129 US: T/O WAIT FOR CONNECT
E130 US: T/O WAIT AFTER ANI
E131 US: T/O WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E132 US: T/O WAIT FOR SECOND START
E133 US: O-H WAIT AFTER ANI
E134 US: O-H WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E135 US: O-H WAIT FOR SECOND START
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 5+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E136 US: INVALID TCM LENGTH
E137 US: CCS, IAM SIGNALING ERROR
E138 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL RECEIVED
E139 US: CCS, WAIT FOR CONTINUE
E140 US: CCS, INCOMPLETE ADDRESS
E141 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E142 US: CCS, VACANT CODE
E143 US: CCS, TIME OUT WAITING
E144 US: CCS, ADDRESS INCOMPLETE
E145 US: CCS, CONTINUITY CHECK
E146 US: CCS, CONFUSION SIGNAL
E147 US: CCS, VACANT NATIONAL NUM.
E148 US: CCS, RELEASE GUARD SIGNAL
E149 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL
E150 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E151 US: TIMEOUT WAIT FOR EXM-SIGN.
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E220 US: SIGN. FAIL. / FXS-TRUNK
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
The connection is to be held for a port, when
a certain MDII occurs.
Specifies whether the connection is to be held for
a port when a certain error code occurs.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 6+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
PRINT ALL HOLD UNSPECIFIED
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all MDIIs
and the attempt to hold the connection for the occurrence of all except
the specified MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,HOLD= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any
MDII occurs.
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a connection is to be held for
a port when an error code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERRORCODES
Holds a connection of a port when any other
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 7+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
than the specified MDIIs occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E112 US: PARTIAL DIAL ABANDON (INC)
E113 US: PARTIAL DIAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E114 US: EXTRA DIGIT RECEIVED (INC)
E115 US: EXTRA PULSE RECEIVED (INC)
E116 US: MORE THAN ONE MF KP SIGN.
E117 US: MISPLACED ST SIGNAL (INC)
E118 US: MUTILATED DIGIT (INC)
E119 US: NO KP (INC)
E120 US: PERM. SIGNAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E121 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY OFF HOOK
E122 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY ON HOOK
E123 US: WINK START,STEADY ON HOOK
E124 US: WINK START,STEADY OFF HOOK
E125 US: NO EXPECTED STOP
E126 US: POLARITY FAILURE
E127 US: UNEXPECTED STOP
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 8+
ACT EQTRAP
PALLHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E128 US: STOP SIGNAL TOO LONG
E129 US: T/O WAIT FOR CONNECT
E130 US: T/O WAIT AFTER ANI
E131 US: T/O WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E132 US: T/O WAIT FOR SECOND START
E133 US: O-H WAIT AFTER ANI
E134 US: O-H WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E135 US: O-H WAIT FOR SECOND START
E136 US: INVALID TCM LENGTH
E137 US: CCS, IAM SIGNALING ERROR
E138 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL RECEIVED
E139 US: CCS, WAIT FOR CONTINUE
E140 US: CCS, INCOMPLETE ADDRESS
E141 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E142 US: CCS, VACANT CODE
E143 US: CCS, TIME OUT WAITING
E144 US: CCS, ADDRESS INCOMPLETE
E145 US: CCS, CONTINUITY CHECK
E146 US: CCS, CONFUSION SIGNAL
E147 US: CCS, VACANT NATIONAL NUM.
E148 US: CCS, RELEASE GUARD SIGNAL
E149 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL
E150 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E151 US: TIMEOUT WAIT FOR EXM-SIGN.
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E220 US: SIGN. FAIL. / FXS-TRUNK
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 9+
ACT EQTRAP
PSPEHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
PRINT SPECIFIED HOLD SPECIFIED
Input format for activating a printout and the attempt to hold the
connection for the occurrence of specified MDIIs (machine detected
interoffice irregularity).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 10+
ACT EQTRAP
PSPEHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E112 US: PARTIAL DIAL ABANDON (INC)
E113 US: PARTIAL DIAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E114 US: EXTRA DIGIT RECEIVED (INC)
E115 US: EXTRA PULSE RECEIVED (INC)
E116 US: MORE THAN ONE MF KP SIGN.
E117 US: MISPLACED ST SIGNAL (INC)
E118 US: MUTILATED DIGIT (INC)
E119 US: NO KP (INC)
E120 US: PERM. SIGNAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E121 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY OFF HOOK
E122 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY ON HOOK
E123 US: WINK START,STEADY ON HOOK
E124 US: WINK START,STEADY OFF HOOK
E125 US: NO EXPECTED STOP
E126 US: POLARITY FAILURE
E127 US: UNEXPECTED STOP
E128 US: STOP SIGNAL TOO LONG
E129 US: T/O WAIT FOR CONNECT
E130 US: T/O WAIT AFTER ANI
E131 US: T/O WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E132 US: T/O WAIT FOR SECOND START
E133 US: O-H WAIT AFTER ANI
E134 US: O-H WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E135 US: O-H WAIT FOR SECOND START
E136 US: INVALID TCM LENGTH
E137 US: CCS, IAM SIGNALING ERROR
E138 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL RECEIVED
E139 US: CCS, WAIT FOR CONTINUE
E140 US: CCS, INCOMPLETE ADDRESS
E141 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E142 US: CCS, VACANT CODE
E143 US: CCS, TIME OUT WAITING
E144 US: CCS, ADDRESS INCOMPLETE
E145 US: CCS, CONTINUITY CHECK
E146 US: CCS, CONFUSION SIGNAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 11+
ACT EQTRAP
PSPEHSPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E147 US: CCS, VACANT NATIONAL NUM.
E148 US: CCS, RELEASE GUARD SIGNAL
E149 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL
E150 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E151 US: TIMEOUT WAIT FOR EXM-SIGN.
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E220 US: SIGN. FAIL. / FXS-TRUNK
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
The connection is to be held for a port, when
a certain MDII occurs.
Specifies whether the connection is to be held for
a port when a certain error code occurs.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 12+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD NONE
Input format for activating a printout for the occurrence of all except
the specified MDIIs (machine detected interoffice irregularity).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any other
than the specified MDIIs occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 13+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E112 US: PARTIAL DIAL ABANDON (INC)
E113 US: PARTIAL DIAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E114 US: EXTRA DIGIT RECEIVED (INC)
E115 US: EXTRA PULSE RECEIVED (INC)
E116 US: MORE THAN ONE MF KP SIGN.
E117 US: MISPLACED ST SIGNAL (INC)
E118 US: MUTILATED DIGIT (INC)
E119 US: NO KP (INC)
E120 US: PERM. SIGNAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E121 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY OFF HOOK
E122 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY ON HOOK
E123 US: WINK START,STEADY ON HOOK
E124 US: WINK START,STEADY OFF HOOK
E125 US: NO EXPECTED STOP
E126 US: POLARITY FAILURE
E127 US: UNEXPECTED STOP
E128 US: STOP SIGNAL TOO LONG
E129 US: T/O WAIT FOR CONNECT
E130 US: T/O WAIT AFTER ANI
E131 US: T/O WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E132 US: T/O WAIT FOR SECOND START
E133 US: O-H WAIT AFTER ANI
E134 US: O-H WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E135 US: O-H WAIT FOR SECOND START
E136 US: INVALID TCM LENGTH
E137 US: CCS, IAM SIGNALING ERROR
E138 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL RECEIVED
E139 US: CCS, WAIT FOR CONTINUE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 14+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHNON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E140 US: CCS, INCOMPLETE ADDRESS
E141 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E142 US: CCS, VACANT CODE
E143 US: CCS, TIME OUT WAITING
E144 US: CCS, ADDRESS INCOMPLETE
E145 US: CCS, CONTINUITY CHECK
E146 US: CCS, CONFUSION SIGNAL
E147 US: CCS, VACANT NATIONAL NUM.
E148 US: CCS, RELEASE GUARD SIGNAL
E149 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL
E150 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E151 US: TIMEOUT WAIT FOR EXM-SIGN.
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E220 US: SIGN. FAIL. / FXS-TRUNK
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 15+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
PRINT UNSPECIFIED HOLD UNSPEC.
Input format for activating a printout and the attempt to hold the
connection for the occurrence of all except the specified MDIIs (machine
detected interoffice irregularity).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT EQTRAP : LTG= [,LC=] ,PRINT= ,HOLD= ,ERCO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a printout is required when an error
code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERRORCODES
Activates a printout of a port when any other
than the specified MDIIs occurs.
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter specifies whether a connection is to be held for
a port when an error code occurs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERRORCODES
Holds a connection of a port when any other
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 16+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
than the specified MDIIs occurs.
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E112 US: PARTIAL DIAL ABANDON (INC)
E113 US: PARTIAL DIAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E114 US: EXTRA DIGIT RECEIVED (INC)
E115 US: EXTRA PULSE RECEIVED (INC)
E116 US: MORE THAN ONE MF KP SIGN.
E117 US: MISPLACED ST SIGNAL (INC)
E118 US: MUTILATED DIGIT (INC)
E119 US: NO KP (INC)
E120 US: PERM. SIGNAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E121 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY OFF HOOK
E122 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY ON HOOK
E123 US: WINK START,STEADY ON HOOK
E124 US: WINK START,STEADY OFF HOOK
E125 US: NO EXPECTED STOP
E126 US: POLARITY FAILURE
E127 US: UNEXPECTED STOP
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 17+
ACT EQTRAP
PUSPHUSP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E128 US: STOP SIGNAL TOO LONG
E129 US: T/O WAIT FOR CONNECT
E130 US: T/O WAIT AFTER ANI
E131 US: T/O WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E132 US: T/O WAIT FOR SECOND START
E133 US: O-H WAIT AFTER ANI
E134 US: O-H WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E135 US: O-H WAIT FOR SECOND START
E136 US: INVALID TCM LENGTH
E137 US: CCS, IAM SIGNALING ERROR
E138 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL RECEIVED
E139 US: CCS, WAIT FOR CONTINUE
E140 US: CCS, INCOMPLETE ADDRESS
E141 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E142 US: CCS, VACANT CODE
E143 US: CCS, TIME OUT WAITING
E144 US: CCS, ADDRESS INCOMPLETE
E145 US: CCS, CONTINUITY CHECK
E146 US: CCS, CONFUSION SIGNAL
E147 US: CCS, VACANT NATIONAL NUM.
E148 US: CCS, RELEASE GUARD SIGNAL
E149 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL
E150 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E151 US: TIMEOUT WAIT FOR EXM-SIGN.
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E220 US: SIGN. FAIL. / FXS-TRUNK
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT EQTRAP- 18-
CAN EQTRAP
ALLEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL EQUIPMENT TRAP
This command deactivates the instant printout for the occurrence of the
specified or any error codes:
- on a particular port or on the ports
- in a port area of a particular line/trunk unit
- in a particular line/trunk unit
- in a line/trunk unit area of a particular line/trunk group
- in a particular line/trunk group
- in a line/trunk group area of a particular time switch group
- in a time switch group
- in the complete exchange.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN EQTRAP - ALLEQ ALL EQUIPMENTS
2. CAN EQTRAP - SPECEQ SPECIFIED EQUIPMENTS
1. Input format
ALL EQUIPMENTS

[ [
[ CAN EQTRAP : [ERCO=] [,PRINT=] [,HOLD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
E0 NO ERROR
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E112 US: PARTIAL DIAL ABANDON (INC)
E113 US: PARTIAL DIAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E114 US: EXTRA DIGIT RECEIVED (INC)
E115 US: EXTRA PULSE RECEIVED (INC)
E116 US: MORE THAN ONE MF KP SIGN.
E117 US: MISPLACED ST SIGNAL (INC)
E118 US: MUTILATED DIGIT (INC)
E119 US: NO KP (INC)
E120 US: PERM. SIGNAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E121 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY OFF HOOK
E122 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY ON HOOK
E123 US: WINK START,STEADY ON HOOK
E124 US: WINK START,STEADY OFF HOOK
E125 US: NO EXPECTED STOP
E126 US: POLARITY FAILURE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 1+
CAN EQTRAP
ALLEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E127 US: UNEXPECTED STOP
E128 US: STOP SIGNAL TOO LONG
E129 US: T/O WAIT FOR CONNECT
E130 US: T/O WAIT AFTER ANI
E131 US: T/O WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E132 US: T/O WAIT FOR SECOND START
E133 US: O-H WAIT AFTER ANI
E134 US: O-H WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E135 US: O-H WAIT FOR SECOND START
E136 US: INVALID TCM LENGTH
E137 US: CCS, IAM SIGNALING ERROR
E138 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL RECEIVED
E139 US: CCS, WAIT FOR CONTINUE
E140 US: CCS, INCOMPLETE ADDRESS
E141 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E142 US: CCS, VACANT CODE
E143 US: CCS, TIME OUT WAITING
E144 US: CCS, ADDRESS INCOMPLETE
E145 US: CCS, CONTINUITY CHECK
E146 US: CCS, CONFUSION SIGNAL
E147 US: CCS, VACANT NATIONAL NUM.
E148 US: CCS, RELEASE GUARD SIGNAL
E149 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL
E150 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E151 US: TIMEOUT WAIT FOR EXM-SIGN.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E220 US: SIGN. FAIL. / FXS-TRUNK
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 2+
CAN EQTRAP
ALLEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
The connection is to be held for a port, when
a certain MDII occurs.
Specifies whether the connection is to be held for
a port when a certain error code occurs.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameters HOLD and ERCO
a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports on
that it was activated with this combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERROR CODES
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameter PRINT and
ERCO a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
on that it was activated with this combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERROR CODES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 3+
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIED EQUIPMENTS

[ [
[ CAN EQTRAP : [ERCO=] ,LTG= ,LC= [,PRINT=] [,HOLD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ERCO ERROR CODE
This parameter specifies the MDII.
Notes:
- Only up to 6 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: ERROR CODE
E0 NO ERROR
E1 SEIZE AND RELEASE WITHOUT DIG.
E100 INVALID FORWARD MESSAGE
E101 UNEXPECTED FORWARD MESSAGE
E102 INVALID BACKWARD MESSAGE
E103 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD MESSAGE
E104 ANSWER REC. BEFORE CTC FINISH
E105 NO RECEIVER FOR CTC
E106 UNEXPECTED COT-MSG RECEIVED
E108 MORE THAN 2 SATELLITES IN CON.
E112 US: PARTIAL DIAL ABANDON (INC)
E113 US: PARTIAL DIAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E114 US: EXTRA DIGIT RECEIVED (INC)
E115 US: EXTRA PULSE RECEIVED (INC)
E116 US: MORE THAN ONE MF KP SIGN.
E117 US: MISPLACED ST SIGNAL (INC)
E118 US: MUTILATED DIGIT (INC)
E119 US: NO KP (INC)
E120 US: PERM. SIGNAL TIMEOUT (INC)
E121 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY OFF HOOK
E122 US: DELAY DIAL STEADY ON HOOK
E123 US: WINK START,STEADY ON HOOK
E124 US: WINK START,STEADY OFF HOOK
E125 US: NO EXPECTED STOP
E126 US: POLARITY FAILURE
E127 US: UNEXPECTED STOP
E128 US: STOP SIGNAL TOO LONG
E129 US: T/O WAIT FOR CONNECT
E130 US: T/O WAIT AFTER ANI
E131 US: T/O WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E132 US: T/O WAIT FOR SECOND START
E133 US: O-H WAIT AFTER ANI
E134 US: O-H WAIT AFTER CARRIER ID.
E135 US: O-H WAIT FOR SECOND START
E136 US: INVALID TCM LENGTH
E137 US: CCS, IAM SIGNALING ERROR
E138 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL RECEIVED
E139 US: CCS, WAIT FOR CONTINUE
E140 US: CCS, INCOMPLETE ADDRESS
E141 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E142 US: CCS, VACANT CODE
E143 US: CCS, TIME OUT WAITING
E144 US: CCS, ADDRESS INCOMPLETE
E145 US: CCS, CONTINUITY CHECK
E146 US: CCS, CONFUSION SIGNAL
E147 US: CCS, VACANT NATIONAL NUM.
E148 US: CCS, RELEASE GUARD SIGNAL
E149 US: CCS, RESET SIGNAL
E150 US: CCS, SIGNALING NETW. FAIL.
E151 US: TIMEOUT WAIT FOR EXM-SIGN.
E16 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE
E160 ANALOG CARRIER FAILURE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 4+
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E17 NO PROCEED TO SEND
E176 HANG PROTECT TIMER EXPIRED
E18 NO KP ACKNOWLEDGE
E19 NO WINK SIGNAL RECEIVED
E20 NO WINK END RECEIVED
E200 FAULTY SELECTIVE NUMBER
E201 UNEXPECTED SIGNAL
E202 INVALID SIGNAL COMBINATION
E205 INVALID NATURE OF ADDR IND.
E216 AUTOM. ANSWER SUPERV. TIMEOUT
E220 US: SIGN. FAIL. / FXS-TRUNK
E225 EXTREME CALL DURATION TIME OUT
E227 MESSAGE WITH INCORRECT DIGITS
E228 DISCARDED ISUP MESSAGE
E229 DISCARDED ISUP PARAMETER
E230 TIME OUT WAITING FOR CLEARING
E32 NO FIRST DIGIT NO KP SIGNAL
E33 TRUNK OFFERING SUPERVI TIMEOUT
E34 NO END OF ADDRESS SIGNAL (ST)
E35 UNACCEPTABLE DIAL PULSE
E48 MF 2/6 ERROR NOT TWO TONES
E49 INVALID FORWD REGISTER SIGNAL
E50 CONTINUOUS FORW REGISTER SIGN
E52 UNEXPECTED FORW REGISTER SIGN
E53 LOSS OF FORW REGISTER SIGNAL
E54 CONTINUOUS BACK SIGNAL
E55 NO BACK SIGNAL
E56 UNEXPECTED BACK REGISTER SIGN
E57 INVALID BACK REGISTER SIGNAL
E58 NO PAUSE BETWEEN REGISTER SIGN
E64 INVALID DIGIT RECEIVED
E65 PERMANENT DETECTED INC
E66 PERMANENT DETECTED OUT
E67 PREMATURE ANSWER
E68 PREMATURE MCI
E69 UNEXPECTED BACKWARD LN SIGNAL
E70 NO SECONDARY SIGNAL
E71 NO END OF PRIMARY SIGNAL
E72 INVALID CHARGING INFORMATION
E73 PREMATURE METER PULSE
E74 INVALID METER PULSE
E75 NOT PERMITTED METER PULSE
E76 NO SEIZURE RESPONSE FROM DCME
E77 INVALID ISUP MESSAGE
E78 HOP COUNTER EXHAUSTION
E95 LOSS OF FORWARD MESSAGE
E96 CLF NOT RECEIVED
E97 RLG NOT RECEIVED
E98 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED INC
E99 UNEXPECTED RLG RECEIVED OUT
b: HOLD CONDITION
H HOLD
The connection is to be held for a port, when
a certain MDII occurs.
Specifies whether the connection is to be held for
a port when a certain error code occurs.
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network Multiplexer (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 5+
CAN EQTRAP
SPECEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
LC LINE CONNECTION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b]
a: LINE TRUNK UNIT=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CHANNEL=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PRINT PRINT CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameters HOLD and ERCO
a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports on
that it was activated with this combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERROR CODES
HOLD HOLD CONDITION
This parameter defines together with the parameter PRINT and
ERCO a combination; the instant printout is deactivated on the ports
on that it was activated with this combination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL ERROR CODES
COMP COMPLEMENT OF ERROR CODES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EQTRAP- 6-
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ERROR STATISTIC DATA
This command displays audit or SWSG (software safeguarding)
statistic tables from
- the cycle disk file IA.ERST
- a sequential statistic disk file
- a statistic tape / magneto optical disk file
Prerequisites:
--------------
- A statistic file is:
a) the cycle disk file IA.ERST
b) a sequential file generated by copying the cycle disk
file IA.ERST
(command TRANS FILE)
c) a sequential file generated by copying the sequential file
created with b)
(command TRANS FILE).
- Before copying a statistic file to tape / magneto optical disk,
the tape / magneto optical disk must be initialized
(command INIT MT).
- If data are read from the cycle disk file IA.ERST, the statistic
data available in the IA-buffer (but not yet written into IA.ERST)
are automatically displayed. This means that no transfer of the
IA-buffer to the cycle disk file IA.ERST is necessary before
displaying the statistic tables
(command TRANS BUFFER).
Possible effects:
-----------------
- If no further data applicable to the input parameter are found,
the final message is "NO (MORE) DATA FOR DISPLAY AVAILABLE".
Notes:
------
1) The following audit error tables can be provided:
a) Summary tables, i.e. how many errors were detected by audit?
. number of errors detected by each audit,
in descending order of number of occurrence
. number of errors detected for one given equipment
(DLU number, LTG number, port number)
. number of errors detected by one AUDIT
. number of errors for which an audit correction failed
. all these tables within a given date/time interval
b) Sequential tables, i.e. when were the errors detected by audit?
. all errors detected by audit
. all errors detected by one audit
. all errors detected for one given equipment
. all errors for which an audit correction failed
. all these tables, within a given date/time interval
2) The following SWSG error tables can be provided:
a) Summary tables, i.e. how many errors?
. number of SWSG errors for each module,
in descending order of number of occurrence
. number of SWSG errors for one selected module
. number of SWSG errors for a particular processor
. number of SWSG errors with a given recovery level
. all these tables within a given date/time interval
b) Sequential tables, i.e. when did the errors occur?
. all SWSG errors
. all SWSG errors reported by one selected module
. all SWSG errors with a given module name and error number
. all SWSG errors for a particular processor
. all SWSG errors with a given recovery level
. all these tables, within a given date/time interval
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 1+
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3) All parameter combinations are allowed in this command, but only
the parameters OBJECT and FORM determine the data to be
displayed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP ERRSTDAT- AUDIT AUDIT TABLES
2. DISP ERRSTDAT- SWSG SOFTWARE SAFEGUARGING TABLES
1. Input format
AUDIT TABLES
This path is legal for displaying audit tables from
- the cyclic disk file IA.ERST
- a sequential statistic disk file
- a statistic tape / magneto optical disk file
The cyclic disk file IA.ERST is:
- created with ACT IAFEAT;
- written by: - IA-buffer management
(automatically when a buffer is full)
- the command TRANS BUFFER
Note:
-----
- It is possible that data already copied to tape / magneto optical
disk are displayed if addressing the cyclic disk file IA.ERST.
The command REL CYCFILE does not delete data from a cyclic
disk file but releases the data for overwriting.

[ [
[ DISP ERRSTDAT : TYPE= [,FORM=] [,OBJECT=] [,ERRNO=] [
[ [
[ [,LOADTYPE=] [,PORTTYPE=] [,LTG=] [,LC=] [
[ [
[ [,DATE= [,TIME=]] [,MARK=] [,FILE=] [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF DATA
This parameter specifies the type of the displayed data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AUDIT ERROR DETERMINED BY AUDIT
FORM FORMAT
This parameter specifies the format of the displayed data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEQ SEQUENTIAL TABLE (WHEN)
SUM SUMMARY TABLE(HOW MUCH ERRORS)
OBJECT OBJECT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the object identification.
(audit name or module name)
1 ... 13 characters from the symbolic character set.
Exception: see prerequisites.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 2+
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Symbolic character set consists of:
- letter : A | B | ..... | Y | Z
- digit : 0 | 1 | ..... | 8 | 9
- special values : + | # | * | % | .
The audit name consists of:
- character 1 ... 13 = audit name e.g. ABILREG
The module name consists of:
- character 1 ... 5 = name, e.g. SIPRC
- character 6 ... 7 = variant, e.g. D2
- character 8 = type, e.g. C
- character 9 = separator,
- character 10 ... 13 = version, e.g. 0101
Prerequisites: (for module name only)
--------------
- type : C (source module) or
T (transient data module)
- separator : always dot (.)
- version : . each character must have a value between 0 and 9;
. when entering the version,
"name, variant, type and separator"
must be entered.
e.g. SIPRCD2C.0101
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ERRNO ERROR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the error number.
The errors listed in the table are reduced to the given error number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...999, range of decimal numbers
LOADTYPE LOAD TYPE OF GP
This parameter specifies the GP load type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: TYPE OF LTG
A LTG-A
B LTG-B
C LTG-C
CB LTG-CB
D LTG-D
H LTG-H
b: LOAD TYPE=
0...999, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
PORTTYPE PORT TYPE
This parameter specifies the port type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ANETW ACCESS NETWORK
ANNOU RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
CO CONFERENCE
CONS CONSOLE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 3+
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DLU DIGITAL CONCENTRATOR
DSW DIGITAL SWITCHBOARD
EQUIP EQUIPMENT
IWE INTERWORKING
KEY KEY
LINE LINE
MDN MULTIPLE DN
MPLX MULTIPLEXER
NC NOT CONNECTED
PADCF PRIMARY ACCESS D-CHANNEL FIXED
PANC PRIMARY ACCESS NOT CONNECTED
PBXLN PBX LINE
SUB SUBSCRIBER
TEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TPC TEST PHONE CONTROL
TRUNK TRUNK
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line trunk group of the errors detected
by audit.
Possible values:
----------------
1) Equipment is DLU -> LTG = dlu, shelf
2) Equipment is LTGA/B/C -> LTG = ltgset, ltg
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: DLU OR LTGSET=
0...13020, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: SHELF OR LTG=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
LC LINE CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line connection number of the errors
detected by audit.
Possible values:
----------------
1) Equipment is DLU -> LC = module, circuit
2) Equipment is LTGA/B/C -> LC = ltu, channel
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: MODULE OR LTU=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: CIRCUIT OR CHANNEL=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 4+
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date when the error occurred,
i.e. the date software error treatment was called or the date audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
- The listed errors are reduced to those that occurred within
the given interval. If only one date is entered, the errors
are listed from the given date to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
- This parameter also displays all invalid "errors".
(=date/time insecure)
There is no comparison between insecure date/time in the file and
secure date/time which is entered by the operator.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time the error occurred,
i.e. the time software error treatment was called or the time audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
- The listed errors are reduced to those that occurred within
the given interval. If only one time is entered, the errors
are listed from the given time to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
- This parameter also displays all invalid "errors".
(=date/time insecure)
There is no comparison between insecure date/time in the file and
secure date/time which is entered by the operator.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
MARK MARK OF AUDIT ERROR
This parameter specifies the mark of the error detected by audit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
F AUDIT CORRECTION FAILED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 5+
DISP ERRSTDAT
AUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
S AUDIT CORRECTION SUCCESSFUL
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which the
statistic data are read.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: IA.ERST
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the tape / magneto
optical disk from which the statistic data are read.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 6+
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SOFTWARE SAFEGUARGING TABLES
This path is legal for displaying software safeguarding tables from
- the cyclic disk file IA.ERST
- a sequential statistic disk file
- a statistic tape / magneto optical disk file
The cyclic disk file IA.ERST is:
- created with ACT IAFEAT;
- written by: - IA-buffer management
(automatically when a buffer is full)
- the command TRANS BUFFER
Note:
-----
- It is possible that data already copied to tape / magneto optical
disk are displayed by adressing the cyclic disk file IA.ERST.
The command REL CYCFILE does not delete data from a cyclic
disk file but releases the data for overwriting.

[ [
[ DISP ERRSTDAT : TYPE= [,FORM=] [,OBJECT=] [,ERRNO=] [,PRO=] [
[ [
[ [,REC=] [,DATE= [,TIME=]] [,FILE=] [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF DATA
This parameter specifies the type of the displayed data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SWSG ERROR REPORTED SOFTW.SAFEGUARD
FORM FORMAT
This parameter specifies the format of the displayed data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SEQ SEQUENTIAL TABLE (WHEN)
SUM SUMMARY TABLE(HOW MUCH ERRORS)
OBJECT OBJECT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the object identification.
(audit name or module name)
1 ... 13 characters from the symbolic character set.
Exception: see prerequisites.
Symbolic character set consists of:
- letter : A | B | ..... | Y | Z
- digit : 0 | 1 | ..... | 8 | 9
- special values : + | # | * | % | .
The audit name consists of:
- character 1 ... 13 = audit name e.g. ABILREG
The module name consists of:
- character 1 ... 5 = name, e.g. SIPRC
- character 6 ... 7 = variant, e.g. D2
- character 8 = type, e.g. C
- character 9 = separator,
- character 10 ... 13 = version, e.g. 0101
Prerequisites: (for module name only)
--------------
- type : C (source module) or
T (transient data module)
- separator : always dot (.)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 7+
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- version : . each character must have a value between 0 and 9;
. when entering the version,
"name, variant, type and separator"
must be entered.
e.g. SIPRCD2C.0101
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ERRNO ERROR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the error number.
The errors listed in the table are reduced to the given error number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...999, range of decimal numbers
PRO PROCESSOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the processor for which the errors are to be
displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMP0 ATM PROCESSOR 0
AMP1 ATM PROCESSOR 1
AMP2 ATM PROCESSOR 2
AMP3 ATM PROCESSOR 3
AMP4 ATM PROCESSOR 4
AMP5 ATM PROCESSOR 5
BAPM BASE PROCESSOR / MASTER
BAPS BASE PROCESSOR / SPARE
CAP0 CALL PROCESSOR 0
CAP1 CALL PROCESSOR 1
CAP2 CALL PROCESSOR 2
CAP3 CALL PROCESSOR 3
CAP4 CALL PROCESSOR 4
CAP5 CALL PROCESSOR 5
CAP6 CALL PROCESSOR 6
CAP7 CALL PROCESSOR 7
CAP8 CALL PROCESSOR 8
CAP9 CALL PROCESSOR 9
REC PERFORMED RECOVERY LEVEL
This parameter must be entered when the error tables are to be reduced
to those which occurred with the given recovery level
(performed by SWET).
Notes:
------
- The performed recovery level is the recovery level executed by
SWET (software error treatment). The requested recovery level
is the recovery level entered by SWSG-user.
Normally, the performed recovery level corresponds to the
requested recovery level. Only in case of escalation the requested
level is increased (by SWET) to a higher recovery level (performed).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INSTAL RECOVERY DURING INSTALLATION
ISTART1 NEW LOAD OF CP, NSTART PROCESS
ISTART1B BASIC ISTART1
ISTART2 ISTART1, LOAD PERIPHERY
ISTART2E EMERGENCY RECOVERY
ISTART2F FORCE RECOVERY
ISTART2G GENERATION CHANGE
ISTART2R RELOAD RECOVERY
NSTART0 NEW START OF ALL NOT CALLP
NSTART1 NEW START OF ALL CP PROCESSES
NSTART1B BASIC NSTART1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 8+
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NSTART2 NSTART1, LOAD OF SEMIPERM.DATA
NSTART3 NSTART2, LOAD CODE
PROBRD ONE PROCESSOR BREAKDOWN
SASDAT SAVING SYMPTOM WITHOUT STATIS.
SASDATS SAVING SYMPTOM WITH STATISTIC
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the date when the error occurred,
i.e. the date software error treatment was called or the date audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
- The listed errors are reduced to those that occurred within
the given interval. If only one date is entered, the errors
are listed from the given date to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
- This parameter also displays all invalid "errors".
(=date/time insecure)
There is no comparison between insecure date/time in the file and
secure date/time which is entered by the operator.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the time the error occurred,
i.e. the time software error treatment was called or the time audit
detected the error.
Notes:
------
- The listed errors are reduced to those that occurred within
the given interval. If only one time is entered, the errors
are listed from the given time to the end of the addressed file.
Compatibilities:
----------------
- This parameter also displays all invalid "errors".
(=date/time insecure)
There is no comparison between insecure date/time in the file and
secure date/time which is entered by the operator.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 9+
DISP ERRSTDAT
SWSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which the
statistic data are read.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: IA.ERST
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the tape / magneto
optical disk from which the statistic data are read.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRSTDAT- 10-
CR ERRTRCLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Error Tracer Log
This task creates the Error tracer log with the log ID Q3ETR.
The Event log size can be set by the operator.
Notes:
- The Error tracer log is automatically created during system startup.
Use this task only if the Error tracer log was deleted during system
operation.
Possible Effects:
- It is possible to create the Error tracer log with up to 2 Giga Bytes of
storage capacity. Note that this will reduce the available disk capacity!
Input format

[ [
[ CR ERRTRCLOG : [Event log size=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log size
This parameter specifies the size (storage capacity) of the Error
tracer log in
Kilo Bytes.
It is possible to create the Error tracer log with up to 2 Giga Bytes
of
storage capacity. Note that this will reduce the available disk capacity!
Input Format: RANGE (100 .. 2 000 000)
Default: 4 000
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR ERRTRCLOG- 1-
CAN ERRTRCREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Error Tracer Records
This task cancels Error tracer log records from the Error tracer log. It is
possible to
define a range of the Log record ID or the Logging time attribute of the
Error tracer log
records to be canceled.
Possible Effects:
- Error trace data will be lost, if not saved before executing this task.
- If no input parameter is used, the whole amount of contained
Error tracer log records will be canceled.
Notes:
- To display the stored Error tracer log records, see task DISP ERRTRCREC.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN ERRTRCREC : [Record range=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Record range
This parameter allows the definition of a filter for Error tracer log
records to be canceled.
It is possible to define a Range of either the Logging time
attribute or
the Event log record name itself. The first record of this range is
always
the oldest record in the Error tracer log. Therefore it is only
necessary to
define the last record of this range.
If this parameter is not used, the whole amount of contained
Error tracer log records will be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN ERRTRCREC- 1-
DISP ERRTRCRECF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Error Tracer Records to File
This task returns Error tracer log records stored in the Error Tracer log
that lie
within the specified input parameter boundaries. These boundaries can be chosen as
an interval of Logging time or Log record ID.
Possible Effects:
- If no input parameter is given, the whole amount of contained Error tracer
log records
will be displayed. This may lead to a long running job.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ERRTRCRECF : [Record range=] [,Destination file=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Record range
This parameter allows the definition of a filter for Error tracer log
records to be displayed.
It is possible to define a Range of either the Logging time or the
Event log record
name itself.
If none of both filter parameters is used, the whole amount of contained
Error tracer log records will be displayed. This may lead to a long
running job.
Input Format:
Selection Logging time range:
Begin time: standard values for date and time
End time: standard values for date and time
Selection Record range:
Begin record: RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
End record: RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Destination file
This parameter defines a Windows NT output file for the records
retrieved. The entered value must specify a correct file name
in the Windows NT network.
Input format : Windows NT file name in UNC (Universal Naming
Convention) format:
\\<host name>\<share name>\<file name with
relative path from share>
Default value: If this parameter is omitted, the output is displayed
on terminal.
Note: An existing Windows NT file will be overwritten.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ERRTRCRECF- 1-
CAN EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Event Destination
This Task cancels one Event destination.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EVDEST : Event destination= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination.
Enter its unique name to cancel one single Event destination.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EVDEST- 1-
CR EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Event Destination
This Task creates an Event destination. The Event destination is
used to determine which Event Reports are forwarded to a particular
Destination during specified time periods. A Destination is an
Application running on a remote OS with the capability of receiving
Event Reports. It may also be used to specify the mode (confirm or no -
confirm) an Application has to act on received Event Reports. Each
Event destination may contain a scheduling capability determining the
intervals during which Event Reports are selected for forwarding. Each
Event destination contains an Event filter which specifies the
characteristics an Event Report must satisfy in order to be forwarded.
There is the opportunity to create a new Event destination with an
existing Event destination as reference. All parameter values of the
referenced Event destination will be used.
Parameters that are entered will overwrite the referenced ones.
If the creation by reference is not used the following parameters are
mandatory: Destination, Dest. with backup and Event filter.
The Availability parameter cannot be entered. Its values {-, On, Off}
represents the scheduling states. The value "-" means that no scheduling
parameter was entered, so scheduling has no efect whether the Event
destination is "On" or "Off".
Note:
- The parameters for daily scheduling and weekly scheduling exclude
one another.
- The parameters Destination and Dest. with backup exclude
one another.
- It is not possible to add parameters by the MOD EVDEST Task if they
were omitted in this Task.
Input format

[ [
[ CR EVDEST : Event destination= [,Reference event dest.=] [
[ [
[ [,Destination=] [,Dest. with backup=] [,Conf on receipt=] [
[ [
[ [,Event filter=] [,Administrative state=] [,Start time=] [
[ [
[ [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Reference event dest.
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination
already created. All parameter values of this referenced
Event destination will be used. Parameters that are entered
will be used instead of the referenced values.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Destination
This parameter defines single or multiple Application
Entity Title (AET). An AET represents the address of an
application running on a remote TMN-OS. This application
receives Event Reports routed by this Event destination.
An AET value entered for this parameter must be administrated
in the Layer Management too.
If this parameter is entered the parameter Dest. with backup
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EVDEST- 1+
CR EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
must not be entered.
It is possible to select 2 different types of Destination:
single : only one AET
multiple : up to 6 AET
Input format for AET: 3 Up to 16 numbers separeted by blanks
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Dest. with backup
This parameter defines one active AET and up to 5 BackUp AETs
used in case of communication failure with the active one.
An AET represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS. This application receives Event Reports routed
by this Event destination. An AET value entered for this
parameter must be administrated in the Layer Management too.
Input format for AET: 3 Up to 16 numbers separeted by blanks
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Conf on receipt
This parameter defines if a confirmation on receipt is required.
The value Yes will force the receiving application to confirm
each Event Report routed by this Event destination.
The value No means that the application does not confirm
each Event Report routed by this Event destination.
Input format: Yes confirmation required
No no confirmation required
Event filter
This parameter defines a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be routed by this Event
destination.
Each Event Report consists of three significant attributes.
They are Emitting object class, Emitting object and
Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
Each member of the triplet is optional, but you must enter at
least one of them. The overall number of entered members must
not exceed the amount of 10.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of
a triple the Event Report will be routed to the application
specified with the Destination or Dest. with backUp
parameter.
Administrative state
This parameter is used to suspend and resume Event Report
routing by this Event destination.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be routed by
this Event destination
Locked: Event Reports will not be routed by
this Event destination
Default : Unlocked
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the
Event destination becomes active. If only the Start time
is set the Stop time will be set automatically to
Continuous. The time value is rounded up to a multiple of
5 minutes.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Default value: actual system time
will be set if this parameter is omitted but
Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EVDEST- 2+
CR EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Event destination becomes inactive. If only the Stop time
is set the Start time will be set automatically to actual
system time of the switch.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
will be set if this parameter is omitted but
Start time is set.
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified within which the Event destination
is active. If this parameter is entered the parameter for
weekly scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week. The
Event destination will be inactive on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals selected. At least one
day with one interval must be selected.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for daily
scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled
from the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EVDEST- 3-
DISP EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Disp Event Destination
This Task displays parameters of Event destination. It is possible
to display one Event destination with all parameters or several with
a subset of parameters. The subset of parameters is:
Event destination, Event filter, Administrative state,
Destination, Destin with backUp and Availability.
Omit all parameters to display all Event destination.
Enter Event destination parameter to display one Event destination
Enter Start id to display all Event destination starting with
this name.
Enter End id to display all Event destination up to this name.
Enter Start id and End id to display all Event destination
between these two names.
The Availability parameter cannot be entered. Its values {-, On, Off}
represents the scheduling states. The value "-" means that no scheduling
parameter was entered, so scheduling has no efect whether the Event
destination is "On" or "Off".
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EVDEST : [Event destination=] [,Start id=] [,End id=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination.
Enter a unique name to display one single Event destination
with all parameters.
This parameter is optional and may be omitted if all Event
destination shall be displayed with a subset of parameters.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Start id
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination.
All Event destination will be displayed starting with this
name. If a value for End id is entered all Event destination
between Start id and End id will be displayed.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
End id
This parameter defines a unique Name for an Event destination.
All Event destination up to this name will be displayed. If a
value for Start id is entered all Event destination between
Start id and End id will be displayed.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EVDEST- 1-
MOD EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Event Destination
This Task modifies one Event destination with parameters given by
the user. If a value is omitted the corresponding parameter remains
unchanged.
Note:
- You cannot add parameters if they are not entered previously with
the CR EVNTDEST Task. You may execute DISP EVNTDEST Task to look up
the parameters entered before.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD EVDEST : Event destination= [,Destination=] [,Dest. with backup=] [
[ [
[ [,Event filter=] [,Administrative state=] [,Start time=] [
[ [
[ [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event destination
This parameter defines a unique Name for an existing
Event destination that is to be modified.
Input format : RANGE(-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Destination
This parameter replaces single or multiple Application
Entity Title (AET). An AET represents the address of an
application running on a remote TMN-OS. This application
receives Event Reports routed by this Event destination.
An AET value entered for this parameter must be administrated
in the Layer Management too.
If this parameter is entered the parameter Dest. with backup
must not be entered.
It is possible to select 2 different types of Destination:
single : only one AET
multiple : up to 6 AET
Input format for AET: 3 Up to 16 numbers separeted by blanks
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Dest. with backup
This parameter replaces one active AET and up to 5 BackUp AETs
used in case of communication failure with the active one.
An AET represents the address of an application running on a
remote TMN-OS. This application receives Event Reports routed
by this Event destination. An AET value entered for this
parameter must be administrated in the Layer Management too.
Input format for AET: 3 Up to 16 numbers separeted by blanks
number: RANGE(0 .. +2 147 483 647)
Event filter
This parameter replaces a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be routed by this Event
destination. Each Event Report consists of three significant
attributes. They are Emitting object class, Emitting object
and Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
Each member of the triplet is optional, but you must enter at
least one of them. The overall number of entered members must
not exceed the amount of 10.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of a
triple the Event Report will be routed to the application
specified with the Destination or Dest. with backUp
parameter.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EVDEST- 1+
MOD EVDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Administrative state
This parameter is used to suspend and resume Event Report
routing by this Event destination.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be routed by
this Event destination
Locked: Event Reports will not be routed by
this Event destination
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the Event
destination becomes active. The parameter can be replaced only
if a Start time or Stop time was entered when the Event
destination was created.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the Event
destination becomes inactive. The parameter can be replaced
only if a Start time or Stop time was entered when the
Event destination was created.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces Daily intervals (up to 6), at
which the Event destination is active. The parameter can be
entered only if Daily intervals were entered when the
Event destination was created. The time values are rounded up
to a multiple of 5 minutes. Overlapping intervals are combined
to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces Weekly intervals, at which the
Event destination is active. Only days of the week selected
in the parameter are replaced. The intervals of the days not
selected will not be changed. Enter 0 intervals to disable the
whole day. At least one day with one interval must be active
in the resultant Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is
rejected.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EVDEST- 2-
CAN EVLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Event Log
This task cancels an Event log with all Event log records contained .
Note:
Make sure that an Event log is not canceled before all
Event log records have been retrieved with the DISP EVREC task.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EVLOG : Event log= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log to be deleted.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 18 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, a .. z, 0 .. 9,
!, $, %, &, #, +, -, _,
(, ), ,, /, ;, <, =, >,
@, [, ], {, }, |
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EVLOG- 1-
CR EVLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Event Log
This task creates an Event log, which is used to store Event Reports. Each
Event log contains an Event filter which defines the characteristics for
an Event Report to be selected for storage. An Event Report that is selected
for storage is supplemented with additional information generated as a part
of the storage process to create so called Event log records.
Possible effects:
It is possible to supply all Event log parameters without restriction.
In some cases, this may lead to high system load. For further details,
please refer to the help texts of the specific parameters.
Notes:
- The parameters for Daily intervals and Weekly intervals exclude one
another.
- Note that optional parameters must be selected when the Event log is
created. It is not possible to add opptional parameters later on by the
MOD EVLOG task.
Input format

[ [
[ CR EVLOG : Event log= [,Log size=] [,Log full action=] [
[ [
[ [,Capacity alarm thresholds=] ,Event filter= [
[ [
[ [,Administrative state=] [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log to be created.
This can either be a String a Number.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 18 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, a .. z, 0 .. 9,
!, $, %, &, #, +, -, _,
(, ), ,, /, ;, <, =, >,
@, [, ], {, }, |
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Log size
This parameter specifies the size (storage capacity) of the Event log
in
kilo bytes.
Input format: RANGE (100 .. 2 000 000)
Default: 10 000
Note: Is is possible to create Event logs with a storage capacity of up
to 2 giga bytes. Note however that this will considerably reduce
available
disk space!
Log full action
This paramteter defines overwrite characteristics.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EVLOG- 1+
CR EVLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Halt: The Event log stops record storage when full.
Wrap: The oldest Event log records will be overwritten when new
Event log records are stored.
Default: Wrap
Capacity alarm thresholds
This parameter specifies up to five occupancy levels of an Event log at
which a Capacity alarm event should be initiated.
Input format:
Up to five RANGES (1 .. 100)
Notes:
- The occupancy level is expressed as a percentage.
- The 100% threshold for the Log full action Halt is defined
automatically.
Event filter
This parameter defines a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be stored by this Event
log.
Each Event Report consists of three significant attributes.
They are Emitting object class, Emitting object and
Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
Each member of the triplet is optional, but you must enter at
least one of them. The overall number of entered members must
not exceed the amount of 10.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of
a triple the Event Report will be stored in this Event log.
Administrative state
This parameter is used to suspend and resume Event Report
storage by this Event log.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be stored by
this Event log
Locked: Event Reports will not be stored by
this Event log
Default : unlocked
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time the Event log
becomes active. If only the Start time is set the Stop time
will be set automatically to Continuous. The time value is
rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Default value: actual system time
will be set if this parameter is omitted but
Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time the Event destination
becomes inactive. If only the Stop time is set the
Start time will be set automatically to actual system time
of the switch.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
will be set if this parameter is omitted but
Start time is set.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EVLOG- 2+
CR EVLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified, the Event log is active
within. If this parameter is entered the parameter for weekly
scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week. The
Event log will be inactive on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals selected. At least one
day with one interval must be selected.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for daily
scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled
from the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EVLOG- 3-
DISP EVLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Event Log
This task displays status information of all Event logs for the whole system.
If the
name of a specific Event log is specified, detailed information for this Event
log
will be displayed.
It is also possible to display status information for a subset of Event logs
which
begin with the character string specified. For this case the parameter Event log
subset
is used.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EVLOG : [Event log=] [,Event log subset=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of an Event log for which detailed
information
is requested. If neither the parameter Event log nor the
parameter Event log subset is used, an overview about all Event logs
in the
whole system will be shown.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 18 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, a .. z, 0 .. 9,
!, $, %, &, #, +, -, _,
(, ), ,, /, ;, <, =, >,
@, [, ], {, }, |
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Event log subset
This parameter specifies an initial string for Event logs with names in
String representation. Status information will be displayed for all
Event
logs beginning with this initial string. If neither the parameter
Event log
nor the parameter Event log subset is used, an overview about all
Event logs
of the whole System will be shown.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 18 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, a .. z, 0 .. 9,
!, $, %, &, #, +, -, _,
(, ), ,, /, ;, <, =, >,
@, [, ], {, }, |
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EVLOG- 1-
MOD EVLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Event Log
This task modifies a specific Event log.
If a parameter value is omitted the corresponding parameter remains unchanged.
Note:
- Adding parameters with MOD EVLOG is not possible if they have not been entered
previously with the CR EVLOG task. Use the DISP EVLOG task to check the
parameters
entered before.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD EVLOG : Event log= [,Event filter=] [,Administrative state=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log to be modified.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 18 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, a .. z, 0 .. 9,
!, $, %, &, #, +, -, _,
(, ), ,, /, ;, <, =, >,
@, [, ], {, }, |
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Event filter
This parameter replaces a filter for Event Reports. You may
define which Event Reports should be stored by this Event
log. Each Event Report consists of three significant
attributes. They are Emitting object class, Emitting object
and Emitted event type. You can enter a Set of those triplets.
Each member of the triplet is optional, but you must enter at
least one of them. The overall number of entered members must
not exceed the amount of 10.
If the three attributes of an Event Report matches those of a
triple the Event Report will be stored in this Event log.
Administrative state
This parameter is used to suspend and resume Event Report
storage by this Event log.
Input format: Unlocked: Event Reports will be stored by
this Event log
Locked: Event Reports will not be stored by
this Event log
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time the Event
log becomes active. The parameter can be replaced only
if a Start time or Stop time was entered, when the Event
destination was created.
Input format: standard date and time values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EVLOG- 1+
MOD EVLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time the Event log
becomes inactive. The parameter can be replaced only, if a
Start time or Stop time was entered, when the Event
log was created.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces the Daily intervals (up to 6), the
Event log is active within. The parameter can be
entered only, if Daily intervals were entered when the
Event dlog was created. The time values are rounded up
to a multiple of 5 minutes. Overlapping intervals are combined
to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces the Weekly intervals, the Event
log is active within.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are replaced.
The intervals of the days not selected will not be changed.
Enter 0 intervals to disable the whole day.
At least one day with one interval must be active in the
resultant Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is
rejected.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EVLOG- 2-
CAN EVREC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Event Log Records
This task cancels Event log records of a specific Event log. It is
possible to define a Range of Event log records to be canceled.
Possible effects:
- If the parameter Record range is not used, the whole amount of stored
Event log records will be canceled.
Note:
- Make sure that Event log records are not canceled before they have been
retrieved with the DISP EVREC task.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EVREC : Event log= [,Record range=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log from which Event
log records
are to be canceled.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 18 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, a .. z, 0 .. 9,
!, $, %, &, #, +, -, _,
(, ), ,, /, ;, <, =, >,
@, [, ], {, }, |
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Record range
This parameter allows the definition of a filter for Event log records
to be canceled.
It is possible to define a Range of either the Logging time
attribute or
the Event log record name itself. The first record of this range is
always the
oldest record in the Event log. Therefore it is only necessary to
define
the last Record of this range.
Note:
If this parameter is not used, the whole amount of stored Event log
records
will be canceled.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EVREC- 1-
DISP EVRECF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Event Log Records Into File
This task displays Event log records of a specific Event log. It is
possible to define a Range of Event log records to be displayed. Furthermore
it is possible to reduce the amount of displayed Event log records by using
a Detailed filter of several Event log record attributes.
Possible Effects:
If neither the Record range nor the Detailed filter parameter is used, the
whole amount
of contained Event log records will be displayed. This may lead to a long
running job
with a high amount of output data.
Note:
The output will be in an internal CMIS Syntax Notation format.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EVRECF : Event log= [,Record range=] [,Detailed filter=] [
[ [
[ [,Destination file=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Event log
This parameter specifies the name of the Event log, from which Event
log records
are to be displayed.
Input format:
String:
1 .. 18 characters of the following character set:
A .. Z, a .. z, 0 .. 9,
!, $, %, &, #, +, -, _,
(, ), ,, /, ;, <, =, >,
@, [, ], {, }, |
Number:
RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Record range
This parameter allows the definition of a filter for the Event log
records
to be displayed. It is possible to define a Range of either the
Logging time
attribute or the Event log record name itself.
Input Format:
Selection Logging time range:
Begin time: standard values for date and time
End time: standard values for date and time
Selection Record range:
Begin record: RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
End record: RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Note:
- Searching for specific Event log records using this Record
range filter
is very fast.
- If neither the Record range nor the Detailed filter parameter
is used, the
whole amount of contained Event log records will be displayed.
This may
lead to a long running job with a high amount of output data.
- If also the Detailed filter parameter is used, both filter
conditions are
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EVRECF- 1+
DISP EVRECF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
combined with a logical AND.
Detailed filter
This parameter allows the definition of additional filter conditions for
Event log records
to be displayed. Each Event log record consists of several significant
attributes.
You can enter a set of those attributes. Each member of this set is
optional, but you
must enter at least one of them. The overall number of entered members
must not exceed
the amount of 10.
If the attributes of a Event log record matches those set of attributes
the Event log record will be displayed. Members that are not entered
will always
match the according attribute in the Event log record. It is possible
to define
up to 3 different sets of attributes.
Input Format:
Emitting object class: standard Object class selection
Emitting object: standard Object selection
Emitted event type: standard Event type selection
Record class: standard Object class selection
Notification identifier: RANGE (-2 147 483 648 .. +2 147 483 647)
Perceived severity: possible values:
Indeterminate,
Critical,
Major,
Minor,
Warning,
Cleared
Note:
- Searching for specific Event log records using the Detailed
filter may be
time consuming.
- If neither the Record range nor the Detailed filter parameter
is used, the
whole amount of contained Event log records will be displayed.
This may
lead to a long running job with a high amount of output data.
- If also the Record range parameter is used, both filter
conditions are
combined with a logical AND.
Destination file
This parameter defines a Windows NT output file for the records
retrieved. The entered value must specify a correct file name
in the Windows NT network.
Input format : Windows NT file name in UNC (Universal Naming
Convention) format:
\\<host name>\<share name>\<file name with
relative path from share>
Default value: If this parameter is omitted, the output is displayed
on terminal.
Note: An existing Windows NT file will be overwritten.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EVRECF- 2-
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD EXCHANGE DATA
This command is used to record exchange load and traffic data
of calls carried and rejected due to network management and
internal protection mechanisms.
This measurement includes the following values:
- Processor load (mErl)
- Call processing load (mErl)
- Number of offered seizures
- Number of carried calls
- Number of calls rejected due to Leaky Bucket
- Number of calls rejected due to Trunk Reservation
- Number of calls rejected due to CancelTo
- Number of calls rejected due to All Trunks Busy
- Number of calls rejected due to internal protection mechanisms
- Number of calls with answer
- Congestion level indicator
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- A maximum of 1 job of this type may be entered at the
same time.
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC EXCH : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN. TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EXCH- 1+
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
output in daily files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EXCH- 2+
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &,
except the values NO, WO and HO which
cannot be linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EXCH- 3+
REC EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC EXCH- 4-
STAT EXCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTERFACE DCP TO SSP
THIS COMMAND IS USED FOR STATUS DATA REQUEST FROM DCP.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT EXCH ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT EXCH- 1-
ENTR EXCHID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER EXCHANGE IDENTIFICATION
This command enters the exchange identification and the
system title of the local processor.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,IDNO= [[ [
[ ENTR EXCHID : NAME= [,IDNOWB=[ [,OSYT=] [,NSYT=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the exchange name. The
exchange name is the name of the local processor.
Notes:
- The name of the local processor can be seen after
entering the command DISP PRO and in the header of
each output mask.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
IDNO IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
This parameter defines the exchange identification number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...11 characters from the
symbolic name character set
IDNOWB IDENTIFICATION NO WITH BLANKS
This parameter defines the exchange identification number.
In opposition to the parameter IDNO you can enter also
blanks with this parameter (IDNO allowes only symbolic
names).
Notes:
- Only symbolic names and blanks are allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...11 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OSYT OLD SYSTEM TITLE
This parameter specifies the old value of the
system title.
The system title is a part of the application
entity title. It specifies the processor specific
part.
Notes:
- The system title has to be unique in the DIB.
- The system title has a minimum of two and a
maximum of 16 components.
- For the first component only the values 0, 1 and
2 are allowed.
- For the second component only a value from 0 to
39 is allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR EXCHID- 1+
ENTR EXCHID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
NSYT NEW SYSTEM TITLE
This parameter specifies the new value of the
system title.
The system title is a part of the application
entity title. It specifies the processor specific
part.
Notes:
- The system title has to be unique in the DIB.
- The system title has a minimum of two and a
maximum of 16 components.
- For the first component only the values 0, 1 and
2 are allowed.
- For the second component only a value from 0 to
39 is allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR EXCHID- 2-
DISP EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA
This command displays exchange description data such as:
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EXDDAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EXDDAT- 1-
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER EXCHANGE DESCRIPTION DATA
This command enters exchange description data, such as
Notes:
Following parameters may only be specified during installation
recovery:
- country CNTRY,
- generic type GNTYPE,
- digital exchange type DETYPE,
- entity type ENTITY,
- q3 active sign Q3ACTIVE,
- system configuration CONFIG.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR EXDDAT : <CNTRY= ,GNTYPE= ,DETYPE= ,ENTITY= ,Q3ACTIVE= [
[ [
[ ,CMYSIZE= ,CONFIG=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CNTRY COUNTRY
This parameter specifies the code for country-specific
features.
The parameter may only be entered during installation
recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BRD GERMANY
FIN FINLAND
RSA REP. OF SOUTH AFRICA
LBY LIBYA
GRI GREECE
SWZ SWITZERLAND
OES AUSTRIA
PHI PHILIPPINES
EGY EGYPT
KOL COLUMBIA
OMA OMAN
IDS INDONESIA
ARG ARGENTINA
USA UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
IRN IRAN
BRA BRAZIL
DAN DENMARK
LUX LUXEMBOURG
PAR PARAGUAY
TAI TAIWAN
BGD BANGLADESH
BEL BELGIUM
POR PORTUGAL
SWD SWEDEN
NOR NORWAY
FRR FRANCE
KAM CAMEROON
GBR GREAT BRITAIN
ITL ITALY
SAR SAUDI ARABIA
GNTYPE GENERIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the generic type of exchange.
The parameter may only be entered during installation recovery.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR EXDDAT- 1+
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MOBILE MOBILE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE
DETYPE DIGITAL EXCHANGE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of digital exchange (i.e.
its capacity).
The parameter may only be entered during installation recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DE3 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 3
DE4 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 4
DE51 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 5/1
DE52 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 5/2
DE54 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 5/4
DE60 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/0
DE61 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/1
DE62 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/2
DE63 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/3
DE64 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/4
DE65 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/5
DE66 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/6
DE67 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/7
DE68 DIGITAL EXCHANGE 6/8
ENTITY ENTITY CONFIGURATION
This parameter specifies the type of entity (AC,HLR,MSC,VLR,EIR).
The parameter may only be entered during installation recovery.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AC AUTHENTICATION CENTER
HLR HOME LOCATION REGISTER
VLR VISITOR LOCATION REGISTER
MSC MOBILE SERV SWITCHING CENTER
EIR EQUIPMENT IDENTITY REGISTER
Q3ACTIVE Q3 ACTIVE
This parameter specifies if Q3 - Logging File(s) should
be created automatically (Q3ACTIVE
is YES)
or not (Q3ACTIVE
is NO).
The parameter may only be entered during installation
recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO Q3 IS NOT ACTIVE
YES Q3 IS ACTIVE
CMYSIZE COMMON MEMORY SIZE
This parameter specifies the size of the common memory
(CMY) in megabyte.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
64,80,96...2048, range of decimal numbers
Corresponds to <CMYSize>
CONFIG CONFIGURATION OF APS
This parameter specifies the configuration
of the system. (CP Stand Allone or CP and MP)
The parameter may only be entered during installation
recovery.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR EXDDAT- 2+
ENTR EXDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CPSA COMMUNIC. PROC. STAND ALLONE
CPMP COMMUNIC. PROC. AND MAIN P.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR EXDDAT- 3-
CAN EXTLAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE
This command cancels an external location area code within a foreign mobile
services switching center area (MSC area).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN EXTLAC : LACOD= [,MCC= ,MNC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
MCC MOBILE COUNTRY CODE
This parameter specifies the home country of the mobile subscriber
according to the CCITT Recommendation E.212.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3 digit decimal number
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the home PLMN of the mobile subscriber
according to the CCITT Recommendation E.212.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN EXTLAC- 1-
CR EXTLAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE
This command creates a new location area code within a foreign mobile services
switching center area (MSC area).
Notes:
- If a location area of a foreign PLMN area is to be created, both parameters
MCC and MNC must be entered.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR EXTLAC : LACOD= ,MSCID= [,VLRISD=] [,MCC= ,MNC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
MSCID MSC IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of a mobile services
switching center within the PLMN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6...15 digit decimal number
VLRISD VLR ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the identification of a visitor location
register within the PLMN.
If this parameter is not entered, the MSCID will be used for
the VLRISD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6...15 digit decimal number
MCC MOBILE COUNTRY CODE
This parameter specifies the home country of the mobile subscriber
according to the CCITT Recommendation E.212.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3 digit decimal number
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the home PLMN of the mobile subscriber
according to the CCITT Recommendation E.212.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR EXTLAC- 1-
DISP EXTLAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE
This command displays information of foreign mobile services
switching center areas.
Note:
- If the project requires a structured LACOD only one LACOD per
MSCID will be significant. As the originally input value might be
replaced by the value which actually represents the range for this
MSC (see CR EXTLAC) the output values might be different from the
input.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP EXTLAC : MSCID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSCID MSC IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the identification of a mobile services
switching center within the PLMN.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6...15 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP EXTLAC- 1-
MOD EXTLAC
LACOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY EXTERNAL LOCATION AREA CODE
This command modifies assigned data of an external location area.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD EXTLAC - LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
2. MOD EXTLAC - MSCVLRID MSC/VLR IDENTIFICATION
1. Input format
LOCATION AREA CODE
This input format modifies the location area code of a foreign
location area.

[ [
[ MOD EXTLAC : LACOD= ,NLACOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
NLACOD NEW LOCATION AREA CODE
NLACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EXTLAC- 1+
MOD EXTLAC
MSCVLRID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MSC/VLR IDENTIFICATION
This input format modifies for an external location area either the
mobile services switching center identification or the visitor location
register ISDN number or both.

[ [
[ MOD EXTLAC : LACOD= <,NMSCID= ,NVLRISD=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
NMSCID NEW MSC IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the new identification of a mobile services
switching center within the PLMN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6...15 digit decimal number
NVLRISD NEW VLR ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new identification of a visitor location
register within the PLMN.
If this parameter is not entered, the NMSCID will be used for
the NVLRISD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6...15 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD EXTLAC- 2-
START FCP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START FILE CONTROL PROCESSING
This command starts the file control processes function so that disk and tape
files can be used.
Notes:
This command is only allowed during the installation phase (installation
recovery).
This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into service.
Input format

[ [
[ START FCP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 START FCP- 1-
DISP FCS
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FCS COUNTERS
This command displays the counters for the specified lines.
This command is only legal for basic access.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP FCS - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
2. DISP FCS - LC EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
Input format for directory-number-oriented output.

[ [
[ DISP FCS : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if multiple directory
number volumes exist in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber
line. Up to ten parameters can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FCS- 1+
DISP FCS
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
Input format for equipment-number-oriented output.

[ [
[ DISP FCS : DLU= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the circuit position in a DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FCS- 2-
CAN FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE GROUP
This command deletes file groups from the file group table. Only file
groups created by the user can be deleted.
Prerequisites:
For attribute file groups:
- All attributes must be reset with RSET FGRPATT.
For password file groups:
- All files must be detached from the file group with the
command MOD FGRP.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FGRP : FGRP= [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the file group name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TYPE OF FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the type of the file group
which has to be canceled.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file group for file
attributes is cancelled.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file group for file
passwords is cancelled.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file group
for file attributes is cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FILEATTR FILE ATTRIBUTE TYPE
FILEPW FILE PASSWORD TYPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FGRP- 1-
CR FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FILE GROUP
This command creates an element in the file group table.
It is possible to create an attribute- or a password file group.
It is possible to create an cyclic or a normal file group.
Notes:
- If the parameter TYPE is not entered, an attribute file group
is created.
- If the parameter CYCLIC is not entered, a non cyclic file
group is created. Only attribute file groups can be created
cyclic.
- The file group features for attribute file groups:
threshold upgrades,
threshold downgrades,
threshold features and
maximum copy length
can only be set for cyclic file groups (via SET FGRPATT).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR FGRP : FGRP= [,TYPE=] [,CYCLIC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the file group which is to be
created.
Notes:
- Each file group name can exist not more than twice:
As the name of an attribute file group and as the name
of a password file group.
- Password file group names can be fully or partly
qualified because the name has only symbolic meaning.
- For password file group names there is no hierarchy in
opposition to attribute file group names.
- Attribute file group names can be a subset or a superset
of the already existing file group names.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TYPE OF FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the type of the file group
which has to be created.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file group is created
for file attributes.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file group is created
for file passwords.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file group is
created for file attributes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FILEATTR FILE ATTRIBUTE TYPE
FILEPW FILE PASSWORD TYPE
CYCLIC CYCLIC SELECTION
This parameter specifies if a cyclic or a non cyclic file group is
to be created.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FGRP- 1+
CR FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- Only attribute file groups can be created cyclic.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO CREATE NON CYCLIC FILE GROUP
YES CREATE CYCLIC FILE GROUP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FGRP- 2-
DISP FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE GROUPS
This command displays the file groups. The file groups were
generated automatically or were created by the user with the
command CR FGRP.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FGRP : [FGRP=] [,TYPE=] [,FILELIST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the name of the file group which
has to be displayed.
Notes:
- If X is entered or the parameter is not entered,
all filegroups of the specified type are displayed.
- A file group name can be entered only for password file
group types in combination with FILELIST = YES.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TYPE OF FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the type of the file group
which has to be displayed.
Notes:
- If FILEATTR is entered, the file groups for file
attributes are displayed.
- If FILEPW is entered, the file groups for file
passwords are displayed.
- If ALL is entered, all types of file groups are
displayed.
- If this parameter is not entered, the file groups
for file attributes are displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FILEATTR FILE ATTRIBUTE TYPE
FILEPW FILE PASSWORD TYPE
ALL ALL FILE GROUP TYPES
FILELIST FILELIST
This parameter specifies if a list of the files of
the filegroup has to be displayed.
Notes:
- The filelist can be displayed only for password file
group types.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y DISPLAY FILELIST
YES DISPLAY FILELIST
N DO NOT DISPLAY FILELIST
NO DO NOT DISPLAY FILELIST
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FGRP- 1-
MOD FGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FILE GROUP
With this command files can be attached and detached to/from
password file groups.
Prerequisites:
- The filegroup has to exist.
Notes:
- This command can be entered only by the system
administrator.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,FILE= [ [
[ MOD FGRP : FGRP= ,CFILE= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the file group name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file
which has to be attached to the password file
group.
Notes:
- The file may not yet exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CFILE CANCEL FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file
which has to be detached from the password file
group.
Notes:
- To detach the last file of the file group no
password may exist for this file group.
- If "X" is entered, all files are detached
from the file group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FGRP- 1-
DISP FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command displays all file group features of one file group.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FGRPATT : FGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the group features
are to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: BLANK
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FGRPATT- 1-
RSET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command resets the file group features (set to default
value) of one file group.
Prerequisite:
- The file group must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ RSET FGRPATT : FGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILEGROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the group features
are to be reset.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET FGRPATT- 1-
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE GROUP ATTRIBUTES
This command sets file group features for one attribute
file group.
If there are files belonging to this file group, the
specified features will be changed in the file catalogs, too.
Prerequisites:
- The file group must exist.
- The copy attributes must be compatible with the already
existing attributes.
- A specified copy service process must exist.
- The cyclic attributes THRD, THRU, THRF and MAXCOPLE
cannot be changed in the file catalogs of the files
belonging to this file group if these files are empty and
opened for writing.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ SET FGRPATT : FGRP= <,RETPER= ,SAFCOP= ,COPATT= ,PRNAME= [
[ [
[ ,THRU= ,THRD= ,THRF= ,MAXCOPLE=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the group features
are to be set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD
This parameter specifies the number of days the file is retained
(protected against deleting and overwriting).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...36526, range of decimal numbers
SAFCOP SAFECOPY
This parameter specifies the number of the required
safecopies.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
COPATT COPY ATTRIBUTES
This parameter specifies the following features for copies of files
belonging to this file group: - block size
- retention period
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: BLOCK SIZE=
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
b: RETENTION PERIOD=
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET FGRPATT- 1+
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRNAME PROCESS NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a copy service process.
Notes:
- Only alphanumeric characters are allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
THRU THRESHOLD UPGRADES
This parameter specifies the thresholds of a cyclic file group for
increasing filling capacity.
If a threshold is reached and the threshold feature was set to ALARM,
an alarm will be triggered on the System Panel.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter THRD.
- The second threshold upgrade must be greater than the first one
and the third threshold upgrade must be greater than the second
one, with the following exception:
- The threshold upgrades can be equal if all threshold upgrades
and all threshold downgrades have the value 0.
In this case no threshold control will be performed.
- The threshold upgrades must be greater than or equal to the
threshold downgrades.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD UP 1=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: THRESHOLD UP 2=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
c: THRESHOLD UP 3=
0...100, range of decimal numbers
THRD THRESHOLD DOWNGRADES
This parameter specifies the thresholds of a cyclic file group for
decreasing filling capacity.
If a threshold is reached and the threshold feature was set to ALARM,
the alarm on the System Panel will be reset.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter THRU.
- The second threshold downgrade must be greater than the first one
and the third threshold downgrade must be greater than the second
one, with the following exception:
- The threshold downgrades can be equal if all threshold downgrades
and all threshold upgrades have the value 0.
In this case no threshold control will be performed.
- The threshold downgrades must be lower than or equal to the
threshold upgrades.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD DOWN 1=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: THRESHOLD DOWN 2=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET FGRPATT- 2+
SET FGRPATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: THRESHOLD DOWN 3=
0...100, range of decimal numbers
THRF THRESHOLD FEATURES
This parameter specifies the threshold features for increasing and
decreasing filling capacities.
If a threshold is reached and the threshold feature was set to ALARM,
an alarm will be triggered or reset on the System Panel.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: THRESHOLD FEATURE 1
ALARM DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
NOALARM DONT DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
b: THRESHOLD FEATURE 2
ALARM DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
NOALARM DONT DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
c: THRESHOLD FEATURE 3
ALARM DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
NOALARM DONT DISPLAY ON SYSTEM PANEL
MAXCOPLE MAXIMUM COPY LENGTH
This parameter specifies the maximum copy length
(in PAM-pages) for the cyclic files of the file
group.
Notes:
- This parameter can be entered only for cyclic
file groups.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
50...99999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET FGRPATT- 3-
CAN FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command cancels all assignments of a file group password to the
specified access types for a file group.
The password will be requested by the system and will not be displayed.
The password may have a length from one up to 40 characters.
All characters are allowed.
Upper case and lower case letters count as distinct.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file group name must exist.
- The specified file group password must exist.
- All specified file accesses must be protected by the same password.
- The file group must be entered fully qualified (e.g.: IA.ICAMA).
- Update must be activated.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,CRYPTPW=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the relevant
function is to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed.
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ACCESS FILE ACCESSES
This parameter specifies the access(es) of which the file group
password has to be cancelled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DEL DELETE PROTECTED
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
CN CHANGE FILE NAME PROTECTED
CR CHANGE RETENTION PERIOD PROT.
CRYPTPW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted password that shall be
cancelled.
Note:
- This parameter is only allowed when the command is started from a
command file (COFIP).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...54 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FGRPPW- 1-
RSET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RSET FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command resets all assignments of a file group password to the
specified access types for a file group. The file group password will
be reset to a defined value that must be entered with the command.
The password will be requested by the system and will not be displayed.
The password may have a length from one up to 40 characters.
All characters are allowed.
Upper case and lower case letters count as distinct.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file group name must exist.
- The file group must be entered fully qualified (e.g.: IA.ICAMA).
- All specified accesses must be protected by the same password.
- Update must be activated.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ RSET FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,NCRYPTPW=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the relevant
function has to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ACCESS FILE ACCESSES
This parameter specifies the access(es) of which the file group
password has to be reset.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DEL DELETE PROTECTED
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
CN CHANGE FILE NAME PROTECTED
CR CHANGE RETENTION PERIOD PROT.
NCRYPTPW NEW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted new password that shall replace
the unknown password.
Note:
- This parameter is only allowed when the command is started from a
command file (COFIP).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...54 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET FGRPPW- 1-
SET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE GROUP PASSWORD
This command protects file accesses by a file group password.
It can also be used to rename the file group password and/or to
change the accesses, protected by a file group password.
For changing an existing password the parameter CHANGEPW =
YES has to be entered.
The password(s) will be requested by the system and will not be
displayed.
The password may have a length from one up to 40 characters.
All characters are allowed.
Upper case and lower case letters count as distinct.
Prerequisites:
- The file group must exist.
- In the case of renaming the file group password or changing
the protected accesses, the old password must be correct.
- The file group name must be entered fully qualified
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
- Update must be activated.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ SET FGRPPW : FGRP= ,ACCESS= [,CHANGEPW=] [,NCRYPTPW= [
[ [
[ [,CRYPTPW=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FGRP FILE GROUP
This parameter specifies the file group for which the relevant
function is to be carried out.
Prerequisites:
- Only fully qualified file group names are allowed
(e.g.: IA.ICAMA)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ACCESS FILE ACCESSES
This parameter specifies the access(es) which are to be protected
by a file group password.
Note:
- This parameter is always mandatory, even when renaming a file
group password .
This guarantees that no file group passwords of other users are
renamed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DEL DELETE PROTECTED
RD READ PROTECTED
WR WRITE PROTECTED
CN CHANGE FILE NAME PROTECTED
CR CHANGE RETENTION PERIOD PROT.
CHANGEPW CHANGE PASSWORD
This parameter specifies whether the operator wants to enter a new
password or to change an existing password.
Note:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET FGRPPW- 1+
SET FGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- If a new password is to be entered, the parameter has to be entered
with the value NO.
- If an existing password is to be changed, the parameter has to be
entered with the value YES.
- If the parameter is not given, CHANGEPW=NO is assumed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N ENTER NEW PASSWORD
NO ENTER NEW PASSWORD
Y CHANGE EXISTING PASSWORD
YES CHANGE EXISTING PASSWORD
Default: NO
NCRYPTPW NEW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted new password when the password
is to be changed.
Note:
- This parameter is only allowed when the command is started from a
command file (COFIP).
- The parameter CHANGEPW has to be entered with the value YES.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...54 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
CRYPTPW ENCRYPTED PASSWORD
This parameter specifies the encrypted password that is to be entered
or changed.
Note:
- This parameter is only allowed when the command is started from a
command file (COFIP).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...54 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET FGRPPW- 2-
CAN FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel NE Files
DELETE FILE
This task deletes a file at the Network Element. It
uses FTP/FTAM protocol to delete the file at the
Network Element. The desired protocol and the file
to be deleted are the input parameters
for the task
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FILE : TRANSFER TYPE= ,FILE NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRANSFER TYPE
TRANSFER TYPE
The transfer type identifies the file transfer
server at the Network Element which will be the
partner for this File Transfer. This could be one
of the following values :
- FTAM
- FTP
FILE NAME
FILE NAME
This is the name of the file at the Network Element,
that has to be deleted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FILE- 1-
CAT FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CATALOG FILE
This command modifies the catalog entry of a disk file. The file
can be renamed and the retention period can be changed.
Prerequisites for renaming of files:
- The file must exist.
- The new filename must not already exist.
- The new filename must conform with system conventions.
- The new filename must not contain a protected name segment.
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions or
file group passwords.
- The file must not be protected by a retention period, or the
correct expiration date must be entered via parameter EXPDAT.
- The file must not belong to any generation.
Prerequisites for changing the retention period:
- The file must exist.
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions or
file group passwords.
- The retention period can not be changed if this was already
administered via the command SET FGRPATT.
Nevertheless the execution of the command will be acknowledged
with EXECD.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,RETPER=[[ [
[ CAT FILE : FILE= [,EXPDAT=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk file.
Notes:
The following characters may not be used:
- A succession of periods (...)
- A single period, or a combination ending in a period.
- A single asterisk, or a combination ending in an asterisk.
- A single X.
n
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD
This parameter specifies the number of days the file
is retained (protected against overwriting).
Notes:
- If a value is entered for this parameter, a new retention
period becomes valid (and the old one becomes invalid).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...36526, range of decimal numbers
EXPDAT EXPIRATION DATE
This parameter specifies the expiration date of the file.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAT FILE- 1+
CAT FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- This parameter can only be entered in conjunction with the
parameter FILE for renaming the file.
- The file may not be deleted before this date.
- The file can be renamed if the correct expiration date is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAT FILE- 2-
CR FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FILE
This command creates a file on magnetic disk.
The created file has no protection.
Prerequisites:
- The file name must conform to system conventions.
- The file name must not contain a protected stem.
- The file must not already exist.
- There must be free storage space on the magnetic disk.
- The specified disk must be available.
Input format

[ [
[ CR FILE : FILE= ,TYPE= ,SIZE= [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk file.
Notes:
The following characters must not be used:
- A succession of periods (...)
- A single period, or a combination ending in a period.
- A single asterisk, or a combination ending in an asterisk.
- A single X.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies single or double file type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINGLE SINGLE
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the amount of space to be reserved
on the data carrier.
Notes:
- The maximum amount of space must be specified, because
dynamic file expansion is not possible.
- The size is specified as a number of blocks (PAM pages of
2048 bytes each).
- The maximum value depends on the disk capacity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1,2,3...999999, range of decimal numbers
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the disk.
Note:
- If TYPE = DOUBLE is entered, the parameter VSN will be
ignored and the file will be created as a double file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
VSN000 VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER 000
VSN001 VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER 001
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FILE- 1-
DEL FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DELETE FILE
This command deletes disk files, tape / magneto optical disk
files or all files on tape / magneto optical disk.
Prerequisites:
- The file must be closed.
- The file and the data carrier must exist.
- The expiration date must be passed or entered.
- The file must not be protected by access restrictions.
- The file must not belong to any generation.
Notes:
- The command can be used also for tape / magneto optical disk files.
The specified tape / magneto optical disk file and the following
files cannot be accessed any more. (The FCP will set a section mark
before the specified file, this means that the end of the tape /
magneto optical disk is reached.)
Input format

[ [
[ DEL FILE : FILE= [,VSN=] [,EXPDAT=] [,UNCOND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
In the case of disks, this parameter specifies the name of
the file.
Note:
- Full or partial qualification of the filename is mandatory.
- If a tape / magneto optical disk file is to be deleted, not
only the specified file but also all subsequent files are
deleted.
- When tape / magneto optical disk files are deleted, they
are deleted logically but not physically.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
disk, tape or magneto optical disk on which the file is to
be deleted.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not entered, the file will be
deleted on both disk drives.
-The parameter VSN will be ignored for disk files.
Only if parameter FILE is entered with X (erase all files)
the command will be rejected if parameter VSN wasnt
entered or was set to VSN000 or VSN001.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
EXPDAT EXPIRATION DATE
This parameter allows files to be deleted before their
retention period has expired. This can be done on condition
that the access restrictions permit changes to the retention
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DEL FILE- 1+
DEL FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
period.
Note:
- Deletion of the file is enabled by entering the correct
expiration date, to prove that it is known.
- In the case of tape / magneto optical disk files, an entire
tape / magneto optical disk can only be deleted once the
retention period for the first section of the file expired.
- The retention period can be overwritten in this case by
entering the correct expiration date.
- When tape / magneto optical disk files are deleted, links
to continuation tapes / magneto optical disks are ignored.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL
This parameter allows files to be deleted if they have been
transferred at least once to an external data carrier, even
if backup copies are missing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CHECK OF EXECUTED COPIES
NO CHECK OF EXECUTED COPIES
Y CHECK IF FILE COPIED ONCE
YES CHECK IF FILE COPIED ONCE
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DEL FILE- 2-
DISP FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE
This command displays disk, tape and magneto optical disk files
attributes and comprises the functions:
- List of files on the medium (table of contents) giving the main file
attributes.
- List of all attributes of a file that can be determined from the
disk catalog or the tape / magneto optical disk labels.
- List of mutilated and invalid disk files and disk files in the
process of being copied, with brief information from the catalog.
The execution of the command (output of table of contents) can be
stopped with the STOP DISP command.
Prerequisites:
- The file must exist
- The specified volume must be accessible
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FILE : [FILE= [,ALL=]] [,GEN=] [,VSN=] [,DAM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file for which the
attributes are to be output.
Notes:
- If X is entered here, a table of contents of the relevant
volume containing the main information on the specified
file(s) and the medium is displayed.
- X is illegal in conjunction with the parameter ALL=
YES.
- If an alias file name is entered, only a fully qualified
name is allowed (last character must not be .).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: X
ALL ALL INFORMATION
This parameter specifies that all attributes of a file that can
be determined from the disk catalog or the tape / magneto optical disk
labels are output.
Notes:
- The parameter can only be entered in conjunction
with a fully qualified filename.
N DONT LIST ALL PARAMETERS
NO DONT LIST ALL PARAMETERS
Y LIST ALL PARAMETERS
YES LIST ALL PARAMETERS
Default: N
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation name. It must be
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FILE- 1+
DISP FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
represented by four pairs of characters which correspond
to:
- Function version
- Correction version
- ODAGEN run number
- Checkpoint serial number
Notes:
- To get all attributes of a generation file which does not belong
to the current generation, the name of this generation has to be
entered.
- If the parameter is omitted, all files with or without generation
are displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume (medium) on which the file to
be processed is located.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted, both disk files are accessed.
- The following character strings are reserved for disk devices:
VSN000 for MDD-00 and
VSN001 for MDD-01.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DAM DAMAGED
If this parameter is entered, an extract of the disk catalog
is output with all mutilated and invalid files and files in the
process of being copied. This output includes the associated
generation names.
Notes:
- This parameter is illegal for tape / magneto optical disk files
and in conjunction with parameter ALL.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY ALL FILES
NO DISPLAY ALL FILES
Y DISPLAY ONLY INVALID FILES
YES DISPLAY ONLY INVALID FILES
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FILE- 2-
LIST FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
List NE Files
LIST FILES
This task displays the list of files (and their attributes)
present under a particular directory in the Network Element.
Input format

[ [
[ LIST FILE : DIRECTORY NAME= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DIRECTORY NAME
DIRECTORY NAME
Identifies the directory in the remote system. The format of the
directory name
in the NE is as given below:
logical device name:\pathname -> for files on an archive device
\pathname -> for files on system device
\ -> for files in the root-directory(non-gene
where logical device name= logical name of the backup store. It must be
supplied
only for a removable disk. It can be max. 8 character
path name= Level 1 directory (=generation)It can be max. 8
characters
The attributes of the files in this directory will be listed in the
output of
the task.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 LIST FILE- 1-
RCV FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Receive File from NE
RECEIVE FILE
This task transfers a file from the Network Element to the OS. It
uses FTP/FTNEA/FTAM protocol to receive the file from the
Network Element. The desired protocol is an input parameter
of the task
Input format

[ [
[ RCV FILE : SOURCE FILE NAME= ,TRANSFER TYPE= ,COPY MODE= [
[ [
[ ,DESTINATION FILE NAME= ,FILE WRITING MODE= [
[ [
[ ,RECORD LENGTH= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SOURCE FILE NAME
SOURCE FILE NAME
This is the name of the source file that has to be
received from the Network Element.
logical device name:\pathname\SrcFileName -> for files on an archive
device
pathname\SrcFileName -> for files on system device
SrcFileName -> for files in the root-directory(non-gene
files)
where logical device name= logical name of the backup store. It must be
supplied
only for a removable disk. It can be max. 8 character
path name= Level 1 directory (=generation)It can be max. 8
characters
SrcFileName= Name of the Source File.
TRANSFER TYPE
TRANSFER TYPE
The transfer type specifies which protocol is
to be used for the transfer. One of the following
values is possible:
- FTNEA
- FTAM
- FTP
FTNEA is the standard value.
COPY MODE
COPY MODE
The copy mode specifies, how the file is to be
transferred to the network element. One of the
following values is possible:
- ASCII
File is transferred as text file.
- BINARY
File is transferred as binary file without record structure
- USER
is not supported
- EXTENSION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RCV FILE- 1+
RCV FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The file is transferred transparently (binary). This
parameter is valid only for FTAM and FTNEA.
ASCII is standard value
DESTINATION FILE NAME
DESTINATION FILE NAME
Destination file name: Specifies the UNC name of the
destination file in the NT network. UNC names have
the following format:
\\<MachineName>\<ShareName>\<FileName>
Example:
\\FILESERVER1\XXXBase\UserHomeDir\User1\File.txt
(Where XXX is ENM for ENM V3.2,XXX = NetM for Version > V3.2)
It can be max. 256 characters
FILE WRITING MODE
FILE WRITING MODE
Write mode: Specifies whether, the present destination
file is to be overwritten, extended or remain unchanged.
If the destination file does not exist as yet, it is created.
Possible values are:
- OVERWRITE
If the destination file already exists, it is
overwritten. Otherwise, a new destination file is
created.
- NOOVERWRITE
A non-existing destination file is created newly. If the
destination file exists, no file transfer is executed and
an error messages is displayed in the output window.
- EXTEND
The new file is attached to the existing destination
file.
Standard value is OVERWRITE. This valus is valid
only for the file transfer types FTAM and FTNEA.
RECORD LENGTH
RECORD LENGTH
The parameter is optional and a value that is equal to
or greater than the longest record length of the file,
which is to be transferred, must be specified. When the
record length is incorrect (very small value), an error
message is displayed and no file transfer is executed.
If the field remains empty, transfer occurs automatically
with the correct record length.
Standard value is 1024.
This parameter is valid only for the file transfer types
FTAM and FTNEA.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RCV FILE- 2-
SEND FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Send File to NE
SEND FILE
This task transfers a file to the Network Element. It
uses FTP/FTNEA/FTAM protocol to transfer the file to the
Network Element. The desired protocol is an input parameter
of the task
Input format

[ [
[ SEND FILE : SOURCE FILE NAME= ,TRANSFER TYPE= ,COPY MODE= [
[ [
[ ,DESTINATION FILE NAME= ,FILE WRITING MODE= [
[ [
[ ,RECORD LENGTH= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SOURCE FILE NAME
SOURCE FILE NAME
Source file name: Specifies the UNC name of the
original file, which is to be sent to the network element.
UNC names have the following format:
\\<MachineName>\<ShareName>\<FileName>
Example:
\\FILESERVER1\XXXBase\UserHomeDir\User1\File.txt
(Where XXX is ENM for ENM V3.2,XXX = NetM for Version > V3.2)
It can be max. 256 characters
TRANSFER TYPE
TRANSFER TYPE
Transfer type:The transfer type specifies, which
protocol is to be used for the transfer. One of the
following values is possible.
- FTNEA
- FTAM
- FTP
FTNEA is the standard value.
COPY MODE
COPY MODE
The copy mode specifies, how the file is to be
transferred to the network element. One of the
following values is possible:
- ASCII
File is transferred as text file.
- BINARY
File is transferred as binary file without record structure
- USER
is not supported
- EXTENSION
The file is transferred transparently (binary). This
parameter is valid only for FTAM and FTNEA.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEND FILE- 1+
SEND FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ASCII is standard value
DESTINATION FILE NAME
DESTINATION FILE NAME
Destination file name: Name of the destination file on
the network element.
logical device name:\pathname\DestFileName -> for files on an archive
device
pathname\DestFileName -> for files on system device
DestFileName -> for files in the root-directory(non-gene
files)
where logical device name= logical name of the backup store. It must be
supplied
only for a removable disk. It can be max. 8 character
path name= Level 1 directory (=generation)It can be max. 8
characters
DestFileName= Name of the Destination File
File names are allowed from symbolic character set only up to 17
characters max
Symbolic Character set :
0123456789#%+.
abcdefhghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
.(dot) is not allowed as the last character in file name
Successive ..(more then one dot in succession) not allowed
File name as .(dot) is not allowed
FILE WRITING MODE
FILE WRITING MODE
Write mode: Specifies whether, the present destination
file is to be overwritten, extended or remain unchanged.
If the destination file does not exist as yet, it is created.
Possible values are:
- OVERWRITE
If the destination file already exists, it is
overwritten. Otherwise, a new destination file is
created.
- NOOVERWRITE
A non-existing destination file is created newly. If the
destination file exists, no file transfer is executed and
an error messages is displayed in the output window.
- EXTEND
If the destination file already exists, the new file is
attached to it. Otherwise a new destination file is
created.
Standard value is OVERWRITE. This valus is valid
only for the file transfer types FTAM and FTNEA.
RECORD LENGTH
RECORD LENGTH
The parameter is optional and a value that is equal to
or greater than the longest record length of the file,
which is to be transferred, must be specified. When the
record length is incorrect (very small value), an error
message is displayed and no file transfer is executed.
If the field remains empty, transfer occurs automatically
with the correct record length.
Standard value is 1024.
This parameter is valid only for the file transfer types
FTAM and FTNEA.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEND FILE- 2+
SEND FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEND FILE- 3-
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRANSFER FILE
This command transfers files between data carriers, i.e. hard disk,
floppy disk, optical disk, tape and cartridge. Files can be transferred
- between any local data carriers (local transfer) or
- between a local and a remote data carrier (remote transfer).
Notes:
Three file formats are defined for EWSD:
- The Post-Processing format is defined by the system conventions
for magnetic tape storage based on ISO standards. This format allows
data to be exchanged between processors of different manufacturers
and is used for customer files containing post-processing data.
- The SSW format is an EWSD-specific format. It also fulfills the
system conventions for magnetic tape storage and has an EWSD-specific
internal structure. It is used for creating save copies of EWSD-
system-files on tape/optical disk at the CP and transporting EWSD-
software from HOST to CP by tape.
- The CP format exists only on local disk. Files of data type TEXTCMP
or MMLCMPR contain compressed text data with mask numbers as editing
specification. These files are converted into Post-Processing format
producing target files containing printable text data. Source files
of data type TEXTCMP are only converted into editable files if these
target files have variable records with a maximum record length of
256 bytes. Editable files are always generated from source files of
data type MMLCMPR.
The following table shows the correlation between file format, file
type, data type and data carrier.
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
! File ! File ! Possible ! Possible data carriers !
! format ! type ! data types ! local disk ! local tape/ !
! ! ! ! ! local optical disk/ !
! ! 1) ! 2) ! ! remote data carrier !
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
! Post- ! SAM ! TRANSP ! X ! X !
! Processing ! ! ! ! !
! format ! ! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTNCMP ! X ! X !
! ! ! ! ! !
! SSW format ! SAM ! TRANSP ! ! X !
! ! ! ! ! !
! CP format ! SAM ! TEXTCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! PAM ! TRANSP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! CYC ! TRANSP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTNCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! TEXTCMP ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
! " ! " ! MMLCMPR ! X ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
+-------------+-------+----------------+------------+---------------------+
1) see output parameter type of file of command DISP FILE
2) see output parameter data storage form of command DISP FILE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ TRANS FILE : FILE= [,VSNS=] [,VSNR=] [,PRONAM=] [,USINF=] [
[ [
[ [,REQPSW=] [,SIZE=] [,MODE=] [,COPMOD=] [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 1+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ [,RETPER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file to be transferred. The following
conventions must be observed:
- The new parameter value specifies the target file name, the old
parameter value specifies the source file name.
- If only a fully/partially qualified target file name or value X
is specified, the names of source and target files are identical.
- When copying from local disk to local disk, target and source
file names must neither be identical nor start with the same
partial qualification.
- Value X is only permitted for local transfers from tape/optical
disk.
- If a partially qualified name or value X is specified, all other
parameters apply to all files being copied.
- Partial qualification is only allowed for local transfers and for
remote transfers where CP is initiating and sending processor.
- By appending an * (asterisk) to the target file name, the exchange
code is appended.
- The exchange code can only be appended if the source file is on
local disk and the target file is not on local disk.
- If the target file name already ends with the exchange code, it
is not appended in duplicate.
- Input of * (asterisk) at the end of a fully qualified file name
or as fully qualified file name for local disk is not permissible.
- A . (period) is neither allowed at the end of a fully qualified
file name nor as a fully qualified file name.
- An initial . (period) and .. (successive periods) are not
allowed for files on local disk.
- Target files can only be created on local disk if their name does
not begin with a protected file name segment (see DISP FNS).
Notes:
- If a file at the remote processor is specified, the input of the
corresponding file password is requested after the command was
entered correctly. The following conventions must be observed:
- If the source file is at the remote processor, the password
which authorizes read access must be entered.
- If the target file is at the remote processor, the password
to be entered depends on the intended action.
If MODE = CR is specified, no file password is requested.
The output of the entered file password is suppressed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
n
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSNS VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER SENDER
This parameter specifies the data carrier of the source file.
The following conventions must be observed:
- To access files on data carriers other than on disk, a VSNS
must be specified.
- To access files on disk, a VSNS must be specified for the DCP
but is optional for the CP.
- For direct access to local disk MDD-00 or MDD-01, the associated
VSNS must be specified.
- At the HOST, only public disks can be accessed. If a VSNS is
specified, it is ignored.
- Tapes cannot be accessed at the HOST.
- VSN000 and VSN001 are not permitted as tape/optical disk names.
Default : local disk
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 2+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSNR VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER RECEIVER
This parameter specifies the data carrier of the target file.
The following conventions must be observed:
- To access files on data carriers other than disk, a VSNR must
be specified.
- To access files on disk, a VSNR must be specified for the DCP
but is optional for the CP.
- For direct access to local disk MDD-00 or MDD-01, the associated
VSNR must be specified.
- At the HOST, only public disks can be accessed. If a VSNR is
specified, it is ignored.
- Tapes cannot be accessed at the HOST.
- VSN000 and VSN001 are not permitted as tape/optical disk names.
Default : local disk
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: LIST 1 ELEMENT=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit specifies one of up to five VSN of the
first list of data carriers of the target file. The following
conventions must be observed:
- Only one VSN is permitted for remote transfer or local
transfer to disk.
- If local transfer to tape/optical disk, at least one VSN
and up to four continuation tape/optical disks are to be
specified.
b: LIST 2 ELEMENT=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit specifies one of up to five VSN of the
second list of data carriers of the target file. The following
conventions must be observed:
- This information unit must not be used for remote transfer
or local transfer to disk.
- If local transfer to tape/optical disk, at least one VSN
and up to four continuation tape/optical disks are to be
specified.
PRONAM PROCESSOR NAME
This parameter specifies the receiving and the sending processor via
its symbolic processor name. The following conventions must be
observed:
- The new parameter value specifies the receiving processor, the old
parameter value specifies the sending processor.
Default : local processor/local processor
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
USINF USER INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the user identification and authorization
for the remote processor. The user authorization is composed of the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 3+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
user password and a user account number. The input of the user
password is requested separately after the command was entered
correctly. The output of the entered user password is suppressed.
Notes:
- The parameter may be omitted if a default identification for
file transfer exists and the file is to be processed under this
identity.
- For remote processors, which uses FTAC profiles for identification
and authorization (e.g. UNIX or Windows OS`ses), the transfer
admission of the FTAC profile must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: USER IDENTIFICATION=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
User identification as required by remote processor.
b: USER ACCOUNT NUMBER=
1...40 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
Input of a user account number if required by remote processor.
REQPSW REQUEST PASSWORDS FOR REMOTE
This parameter specifies if passwords have to be requested for remote
processor.
Notes:
- Input and therefore requests for passwords for remote processor are
not necessary, if they are already stored there (e.g. in
FTAC-Profiles at UNIX or Windows OS`ses). The parameter must be
entered with N/NO to avoid the dialog messages explicitely.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
Default: Y
SIZE SIZE OF RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the size of the target file for files on disk
in PAM pages (1 PAM page = 2048 bytes). The following conventions must
be observed:
- At the CP, a target file is reduced to the actual size after
transmission if MODE = CR/CRD is entered.
- At the DCP, the size of the file on disk remains unchanged.
- If the value specified for FILE is a partial qualification or
value X, SIZE applies to every file transferred.
The input is ignored if:
- the source file is in SSW format and the target file was created
on local disk
- the target file is on tape/optical disk
- MODE = OVWR or MODE = EXT
- COPMOD = SSWF.
If no input is made for SIZE, the file transfer determines the
size of the target file, except the following case:
If the source file is in Post-Processing format on tape/optical disk
and the target file is to be created on local disk, the system
attempts to correct the preset value of SIZE as far as possible. If
the difference between actual file size and preset value is too great,
the transfer may be aborted due to lack of space. In this case, the
transfer procedure must be repeated with the correct SIZE value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8388607, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 4+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 100
MODE MODE TO OPEN RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the opening mode of the target file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CR CREATE
Create file before transfer.
CRD CREATE DOUBLE
Create file in duplicate before transfer
(only possible for local disk).
OVWR OVERWRITE
Existing file will be overwritten.
- If the file does not exist, it is created.
If SSW format is decomposed, the information
in the file key block applies.
- The parameter value is not valid for local tape/
optical disk.
- The parameter value is valid for the DCP tape if
the file is the last on the tape.
- If the target file is a CYC file, the parameter
value is not valid.
EXT EXTEND
Existing file will be extended.
- For tape/optical disk this parameter value is
only valid if the target file is the last on
the tape/optical disk.
- For DCP tape this parameter value is only valid
if the tape file is empty.
- The parameter value is not valid if the target
carrier is a tape/optical disk and a partial
qualification has been entered.
- The parameter value is not valid for the DCP
disk.
- The parameter value is not valid if the
target file is a PAM file/ CYC file or if
COPMOD = SSWF.
- If a file transfer with target file on local
disk is aborted due to lack of space and this
parameter value has been entered, the following
options exist:
a) use CR FILE to create a new file with
sufficient capacity,
b) use OVWR to transfer the file that was to
be extended to the newly created file,
c) use EXT to extend the newly created file.
Default: CR
COPMOD COPY MODE OF FILE
This parameter specifies the copy mode (file and/or data reformatting).
Assignment of parameter values to copy direction/default:
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! Copy from .. to .. ! Possible param. values ! Default !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local disk --> ! KEEP ! KEEP !
! local disk ! POST ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local disk --> ! ! !
! local optical disk / ! POST ! POST !
! local tape ! SSWF ! !
! remote data carrier ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
! local optical disk / ! ! !
! local tape --> ! ! !
! local disk / ! BIN ! BIN !
! local optical disk / ! CHAR ! !
! local tape / ! ! !
! remote data carrier ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------!
! remote data ! ! !
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 5+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
! carrier --> ! ! !
! local disk / ! BIN ! BIN
! local optical disk / ! CHAR !
! local tape ! ! !
+-----------------------+------------------------+----------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BIN COPY BINARY DATA
This parameter value enables
1) a file in Post-Processing format containing
binary data to be copied 1:1 in the directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ +--------------+ !
! ! ! local ! !
! ! ! optical disk/! !
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ ! <-+
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The target file attributes are determined
by the source file attributes.
- The data are not reformatted.
- If the target file is on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set,
b) the number of requested copies is set
to 0 (zero).
2) a file in SSW format to be copied in the
directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
! ! ! optical disk/!
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ !
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The SSW format is decomposed.
- By decomposing the SSW format, the file which
was copied with COPMOD = SSWF is
reconstructed.
- The target file attributes are taken from the
file key block, which is output as SSW
INFORMATION in connection with DISP FILE
for the local tape/optical disk.
3) a file in SSW format to be copied in the
directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ !
! local ! !
! optical disk/! !
! local tape/ ! <-+
! remote data !
! carrier !
+--------------+
- The SSW format is not decomposed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 6+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- DISP FILE for a file on local tape/
optical disk specifies whether it has
Post-Processing format or SSW format.
CHAR COPY CHARACTER
This parameter value enables a file in
Post-Processing format containing text data to be
copied 1:1 in the directions
+--------------+
! local !
! optical disk/!
! local tape/ ! --+
! remote data ! !
! carrier ! !
+--------------+ !
!
+--------------+ +--------------+ !
! ! ! local ! !
! ! ! optical disk/! !
! local disk ! <------ ! local tape/ ! <-+
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- The entry is ignored for source files in
SSW format.
- The target file attributes are determined by the
source file attributes.
- The data are recoded and stored on the target
data carrier
EBCDIC tape/
optical disk in EBCDIC.DF.03 code
ASCII tape/
optical disk in ASCII code
Disk in processor internal code.
- If the target file is on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set,
b) the number of required copies is set
to 0 (zero).
SSWF CREATE SUPPORT SOFTWARE FORMAT
This parameter value copies a file from local disk
creating SSW format in the directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
! ! ! optical disk/!
! local disk ! ------> ! local tape/ !
! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! carrier !
+--------------+ +--------------+
- This parameter value is primarily used for
creating save copies on EBCDIC tape/optical
disks.
- This parameter value is not possible for CYC
files and generation files.
- Since the target file is created in SSW format,
the following restrictions apply to the source
file:
a) record size <= 2048 byte, if record format is
variable,
b) record size <= 2040 byte, if record format is
fix.
- The copying information is ignored as the target
file attributes are defined by SSW format.
- The number of performed copies is not increased.
- The source file attributes are stored in the
file key block of the target file, enabling the
source file to be reconstructed when the target
file is recopied to local disk.
Notes:
- EBCDIC tape/optical disks created with this
parameter value can be processed by IMON.
- File copies produced with this parameter value
can be read by the host using SYSUPD.
- Files in SSW format are structured with:
a) file type SAM,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 7+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b) record format FIX,
c) data type TRANSP,
d) record size (block length) 2048 bytes.
KEEP KEEP FILE STRUCTURE
This parameter value creates a 1:1 copy in the
directions
+--------------+
! !
+-- ! local disk !
! ! !
! +--------------+
!
! +--------------+
! ! !
+-> ! local disk !
! !
+--------------+
- The parameter value is not possible for
CYC files.
- File attributes (especially file type and
data type) are retained. For exceptions see
below.
- For the target file on local disk:
a) no access restrictions are set, but the write
protection is adopted from the source file,
b) the number of required copies file is set
to default 0 (zero),
c) the service process of the source file is not
assigned to the target file.
POST CREATE POST PROCESSING FORMAT
This parameter value copies a file creating
Post-Processing format in the directions
+--------------+ +--------------+
! ! ! local !
! ! ! optical disk/!
+-- ! local disk ! ------> ! local tape/ !
! ! ! ! remote data !
! ! ! ! carrier !
! +--------------+ +--------------+
!
! +--------------+
! ! !
+-> ! local disk !
! !
+--------------+
- This parameter value is only allowed for PAM
file if a service process exists.
- The target file is a file in
Post-Processing format with non-compressed data
(SAM/TRANSP or SAM/TEXTNCMP).
- The target file attributes are derived from the
copying information of the source file (see
DISP FILE output block COPY INFORMATION).
- The copy block length determines the block
length for the local tape/optical disk, but not
for a remote tape.
- The number of copies made is incremented by 1 if
the target file is on local tape/local optical
disk/remote data carrier and the number of
requested copies is > 0 (zero).
- If the target file is on local disk, then:
a) no access restrictions are set, but the write
protection is adopted from the source file,
b) the number of requested copies is set
to 0 (zero).
- Reformatting is controlled via the data type or
is performed independently of the data type by a
service process, if one exists (see DISP FILE
output block FILEGROUP INFORMATION).
- The following table provides an overview of
reformatting controlled by data type:
+-------+-------------+--------------------------+
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 8+
TRANS FILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!CP ! ! !
!source ! Data type ! File and/or data !
!file ! 1) ! reformatting !
!-------+-------------+--------------------------!
! SAM ! TRANSP ! No reformatting !
! ! ! (copy of binary data) !
! ! ! !
! ! TEXTNCMP ! No reformatting !
! ! ! Character conversion !
! ! ! (ASCII <--> EBCDIC.DF.03)!
! ! ! dependent on target data !
! ! ! carrier or according to !
! ! ! link protocol !
! ! ! (copy of text data) !
! ! ! !
! ! TEXTCMP ! Data edited into !
! ! ! printable characters !
! ! ! according to the !
! ! ! editing information !
! ! ! stored in the file !
! ! ! and character conversion !
! ! ! (as above) !
! ! ! !
!-------+-------------+--------------------------!
! CYC ! ! Decomposition of cyclic !
! ! ! structure for all data !
! ! ! types !
! ! ! (target file type SAM) !
! ! ! Depending on copy record !
! ! ! size, records in cyclic !
! ! ! files may also be split !
! ! ! !
! ! ! ) !
! ! TRANSP ! ! !
! ! TEXTNCMP ! > data reformatting !
! ! TEXTCMP ! ! all as above !
! ! ! ) !
! ! ! !
! ! MMLCMPR ! As for TEXTCMP but with !
! ! ! addition of conversion !
! ! ! into a format that can !
! ! ! be processed by text !
! ! ! editors !
! ! ! !
+-------+-------------+--------------------------+
1) see output parameter data storage form of
command DISP FILE
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD RECEIVE FILE
This parameter specifies the retention period of the target file
in days. The following conventions must be observed:
- If no input is made for RETPER and COPMOD = POST, the copy
retention period of the source file is adopted implicitly as
retention period of the target file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...36525, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TRANS FILE- 9-
MOD FILEAUT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FILE AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to modify the access restrictions and/or the
number of safe copies in a file catalog.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ MOD FILEAUT : FILE= <,AR= ,SAFCOP=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file whose catalog is to
be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
AR ACCESS RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the type of access restrictions.
Note:
- Any access restrictions not specified are reset
if they are set in the catalog.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NOCN NO CATALOG NAME
NOCR NO CATALOG RETENTION PERIOD
NODEL NO DELETE
NORD NO READ
NOWR NO WRITE
NOAR NO ACCESS RESTRICTION
SAFCOP SAFECOPY
This parameter specifies the number of safe copies
that have already been made.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1,2,3...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FILEAUT- 1-
ACT FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE FILE FEATURES
This commands activates features assigned to a certain file.
Prerequisites:
If the feature was previously not entered, the command will be rejected
The target file specified in the command must exist on the system disk.
Possible effects:
The data in the target file may be lost after this command.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ ACT FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE TARGET FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file for whom a feature will
be activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FEAT FEATURES
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPRESSION
The data in the target file is compressed using
the FLAM algorithm in CX8 mode.
HEADER HEADER
During file transfer a header record is added.
TRAILER TRAILER
During file transfer a trailer record is added.
FORMAT ASN.1 CLIENT RECORD FORMATTING
During file transfer the data in the target file
is reformatted into a client specific format using
an external device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT FILEFEAT- 1-
CAN FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE FEATURES
This command cancels features assigned to a file.
Prerequisites:
The feature to be canceled may not be active.
The target file must exist on the system disk.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE TARGET FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which a feature will
be canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FEAT FEATURES
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPRESSION
The data in the target file is compressed using
the FLAM algorithm in CX8 mode.
HEADER HEADER
During file transfer a header record is added.
TRAILER TRAILER
During file transfer a trailer record is added.
FORMAT ASN.1 CLIENT RECORD FORMATTING
During file transfer the data in the target file
is reformatted into a client specific format using
an external device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FILEFEAT- 1-
DACT FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE FILE FEATURES
This command deactivates features assigned to a certain file.
Prerequisites:
If the feature was previously not active, the command will be rejected.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ DACT FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE TARGET FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file from which a feature will
be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FEAT FEATURES
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPRESSION
The data in the target file is compressed using
the FLAM algorithm in CX8 mode.
HEADER HEADER
During file transfer a header record is added.
TRAILER TRAILER
During file transfer a trailer record is added.
FORMAT ASN.1 CLIENT RECORD FORMATTING
During file transfer the data in the target file
is reformatted into a client specific format using
an external device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT FILEFEAT- 1-
DISP FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE FEATURES
This command displays the different features assigned to a certain
file. Together with the feature and its status, the name of the file
where the results of the assigned DISP FILEFEAT is stored.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FILEFEAT : FILE= [,FEAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE TARGET FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file for which the assigned
DISP FILEFEAT will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FEAT FEATURES
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPRESSION
The data in the target file is compressed using
the FLAM algorithm in CX8 mode.
HEADER HEADER
During file transfer a header record is added.
TRAILER TRAILER
During file transfer a trailer record is added.
FORMAT ASN.1 CLIENT RECORD FORMATTING
During file transfer the data in the target file
is reformatted into a client specific format using
an external device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FILEFEAT- 1-
ENTR FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE FEATURES
This command enters feature(s) and assigns these feature(s) to a
targetfile. The result is stored in another file with the same
characteristics as the target file unless otherwise specified.
The result file name cannot be specified by the operator. It is
system internal defined in following manner "TARGET FILE NAME" + ".FLAM".
Prerequisites:
The file to which a feature is assigned, must already exist.
If the file -read application- is not supported by the system ,
the command will be rejected indicating that the application is
not supported.
Following files - read applications - are supported:
- IA.ICAMA
- IA.ICMCR
- IA.ICINA (both ASN.1 format and internal format)
- IA.ICIAR
- IA.ICIAR1
- IA.ICIAR2
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR FILEFEAT : FILE= ,FEAT= [,ACTION=] [,SIZE=] [,RECF=] [
[ [
[ [,RECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE TARGET FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file for which a feature is
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FEAT FEATURES
This parameter specifies the assigned features
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPRESSION
The data in the target file is compressed using
the FLAM algorithm in CX8 mode.
HEADER HEADER
During file transfer a header record is added.
TRAILER TRAILER
During file transfer a trailer record is added.
FORMAT ASN.1 CLIENT RECORD FORMATTING
During file transfer the data in the target file
is reformatted into a client specific format using
an external device.
ACTION ADDITIONAL ACTIONS
This parameter specifies which additional action is done with the data
in the target file.
Possible effects can be that original data of the file is lost when the
entered feature is activated lateron.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
REL RELEASE EXISTING FILE
The data in the target file is released after
successful feature execution.
NOREL NOT RELEASE EXISTING FILE
The data in the target file is kept after
successful feature execution.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR FILEFEAT- 1+
ENTR FILEFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: REL
SIZE RESULT FILE SIZE
This parameter specifies the size of the result file. The size is
entered in number of PAM pages.
The default value is the size of the target file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65000, range of decimal numbers
RECF RECORD FORMAT RESULT FILE
This parameter specifies the record format of the result file.
The default value is identical to the record format of the target file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
VAR VARIABLE FORMAT
FIX FIXED FORMAT
RECSZ RECORD SIZE RESULT FILE
This parameter specifies the record size of the result file. The record
size can be entered in bytes. The size must be minimum 80 bytes and
maximum 32768 bytes (32K).
The default value is identical to the record size of the target file
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
80...32768, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR FILEFEAT- 2-
ENTR FILEPSW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE PASSWORD
This command enters a session file password.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR FILEPSW ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR FILEPSW- 1-
DISP FILESEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE SECURITY METHOD
This command is used to show the selected File Security
method.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FILESEC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FILESEC- 1-
SET FILESEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET FILE SECURITY METHOD
This command is used to switch between the two methods of File
Security.
File based File Security names the method where per file an
optional password can be administrated for each file access.
Access to files is allowed when no password is set.
This is independently of the initiator who attempts to access
the file.
Initiator based File Security names the method where for each
initiator, defined by a user id, access rights can be set for
single files or a number of files. Access to files is not
allowed for a specific initiator when nothing is administrated
for this initiator.
Note:
- With the File based File Security method passwords have to
be administrated using the commands CR FGRP and SET FGRPPW.
- With the Initiator based File Security method administration
can only be done using Q3 operations.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ SET FILESEC : FILESEC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILESEC FILE SECURITY METHOD
This parameter is always mandatory.
The parameter specifies which File Security method shall be
selected.
The value FBFS stands for the File based File Security
method.
The value IBFS stands for the Initiator based File
Security method.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FBFS FILE BASED FILE SECURITY
IBFS INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET FILESEC- 1-
DISP FILETEXT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILETEXT
This command displays the content of a file.
Prerequisites:
- The specified file must be a sequential dataset with variable
record length.
- The records contain only ASCII characters (see note).
Notes:
- Unprintable characters are substituted by ..
- Continuation lines of a record start with >>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FILETEXT : FILE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter identifies the dataset for display with its
filename.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FILETEXT- 1-
CAN FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE TRANSFERS
This command cancels FTAM file transfer(s).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FILETRF : <JN= ,JST=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a FTAM file
transfer.
Notes:
- If exactly one FTAM filetransfer is specified, the value entered
for JST is checked against the actual jobstate (see output
parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF).
- If X is entered, all FTAM file transfers are cancelled.
If JST is entered additionally, only the corresponding FTAM
jobs are cancelled.
- If no value is entered here, JST has to be specified.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
JST JOB STATE
This parameter specifies an additional selection criterion.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
INTR INTERRUPTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FILETRF- 1-
DISP FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE TRANSFERS
This command displays data of FTAM file transfer(s) and comprises
the functions:
- list of all FTAM file transfers giving main job data.
- list of all job data for one FTAM file transfer.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FILETRF : <JN= ,JST=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a FTAM file
transfer.
Notes:
- If exactly one FTAM filetransfer is specified, the value entered
for JST is ignored.
- If X is entered, a list of all FTAM file transfers is displayed.
If JST is entered additionally, only the corresponding FTAM
jobs are displayed.
- If no value is entered here, JST has to be specified.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
JST JOB STATE
This parameter specifies an additional selection criterion.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
INTR INTERRUPTED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FILETRF- 1-
STOP FILETRF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP FILE TRANSFERS
This command stops FTAM file transfer(s). The jobstate changes to
interrupted (see output parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF).
Prerequisites:
- the interruption of the FTAM file transfer(s) must be possible
(see output parameter interrupt possible of command DISP FILETRF).
- the FTAM file transfer(s) must be activ.
(see output parameter jobstate of command DISP FILETRF)
Input format

[ [
[ STOP FILETRF : JN= [,INTRPER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a FTAM file
transfer.
Notes:
- If X is entered, all FTAM file transfers are stopped
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
INTRPER INTERRUPT PERIOD
This parameter specifies the interrupt period for FTAM file
transfer(s) suggested by the operator. The value is entered
in the form HH-MM (H=Hour, M=Minute). As the value is
transferred in the form 2 to the power of x seconds by the
FTAM protocol, the entered value is calculated in seconds
and rounded up. Due to this exact values cannot be produced.
Default : 10 minutes
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STOP FILETRF- 1-
CAN FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILTER COMMAND
This command deletes the specified filter.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN FILTER : FILTER= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILTER FILTER NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a filter
to be deleted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FILTER- 1-
CR FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FILTER COMMAND
This command creates a new filter that can be used to select only
those mobile subscribers which match the filter criteria.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CR FILTER : FILTER= <,BSV= ,SSV= ,MSUBFT= ,OPRSERV= ,MSCAT= [
[ [
[ ,EXPIRY= ,SELECT= ,QOSPROF= ,NTF= ,PRFMSIN= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NDC= ,LAC= ,VIEW=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILTER FILTER NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the filter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BSV BASIC SERVICE CODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified basic service.
Notes:
- Up to 3 basic services can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FILTER- 1+
CR FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the specified
supplementary service or group of supplementary services.
Notes:
- Up to 3 supplementary services can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CLIP CALLING LINE ID. PRESENTATION
CLIR CALLING LINE ID. RESTRICTION
COLP CONNECTED LINE ID PRESENTATION
COLR CONNECTED LINE ID RESTRICTION
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CALLWAIT CALL WAITING
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
CCBSA CALL COMPLETION BUSY SUBSCR. A
CCBSB CALL COMPLETION BUSY SUBSCR. B
MPTY MULTI PARTY
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
AOCINFO ADVICE OF CHARGE INFORMATION
AOCCHRG ADVICE OF CHARGE CHARGING
ALLCB ALL CALL BARRING SERVICES
CBO CB OF OUTGOING CALLS
CBOC CB OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC CB OF ALL OUTGOING INT. CALLS
CBOICEXH CBOIC EXCEPT TO HPLMN COUNTRY
CBI CB OF INCOMING CALLS
CBIC CB OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT CBIC ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
EMLPP EMLPP SERVICE
ANYLCS ANY LCS PRIVACY EXCEPT. CLASS
UNIVERS UNIVERSAL CLASS
CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
BSLC BASIC SELF LOCATION
ASLC AUTONOMOUS SELF LOCATION
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
USERSIG1 USER TO USER SIGN. SERV. 1
CALLBACK CALL BACK
NATCCBS CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR.
CT CALL TRANSFER
FOLLOWME FOLLOW ME
FROUT FORCED ROUTING
FMSPV FOLLOW ME SUPERVISOR
NATSS01 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 01
NATSS02 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 02
NATSS03 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 03
NATSS04 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 04
NATSS05 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 05
NATSS06 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 06
NATSS07 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 07
NATSS08 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 08
NATSS09 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 09
NATSS10 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 10
NATSS11 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 11
NATSS12 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 12
NATSS13 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 13
NATSS14 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 14
NATSS15 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 15
CFD CF DEFAULT
MSUBFT SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified subscriber-related feature.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FILTER- 2+
CR FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The meaning of the specified feature is project-dependent.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MSUBFT01 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 01
MSUBFT02 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 02
MSUBFT03 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 03
MSUBFT04 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 04
MSUBFT05 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 05
MSUBFT06 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 06
MSUBFT07 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 07
MSUBFT08 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 08
MSUBFT09 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 09
MSUBFT10 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 10
MSUBFT11 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 11
MSUBFT12 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 12
MSUBFT13 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 13
MSUBFT14 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 14
MSUBFT15 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 15
MSUBFT16 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 16
ANYFT ANY SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
OPRSERV OPERATOR SERVICE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified operator service.
Notes:
- Up to 12 operator services can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OPERATOR SERVICE TYPE
OCSI ORIGINATING CSI
TCSI TERMINATING CSI
UCSI USSD CAMEL SUBSCRIPTION INFO
SSCSI SSV CAMEL SUBSCRIPTION INFO
GPRSCSI GPRS CAMEL SUBSCRIPTION INFO
MSP MULTIPLE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
VTCSI VISITED MSC TERMINATING CSI
SMSCSI SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CSI
MCSI MOBILITY MANAGEMENT CSI
DCSI DIALED SERVICES CSI
TIFCSI TRANSLATION INFORM. FLAG CSI
SUBRELRO SUBSCRIBER RELATED ROUTING
INMOC IN MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL
INMTC IN MOBILE TERMINATING CALL
b: OPERATOR SERVICE NAME=
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit specifies the service name as a further
selection criteria.
If X is entered, service name is ignored.
c: CSI STATE
ACT ACTIVATED
DACT DEACTIVATED
This unit specifies the CAMEL subscription
information state as a further selection criteria.
Incompatibilities:
- a = MSP
- a = SUBRELRO
d: CSI NOTIFICATION
ACT ACTIVATED
DACT DEACTIVATED
This unit specifies the CAMEL subscription
information notification as a further selection criteria.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FILTER- 3+
CR FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incompatibilities:
- a = MSP
- a = SUBRELRO
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ORDINSUB ORDINARY CALLING SUBSCRIBER
VERIFSUB VERIFICATION SUBSCRIBER
PRIO1SUB PRIORITY 1 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO2SUB PRIORITY 2 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO3SUB PRIORITY 3 SUBSCRIBER
PPSCSUB PREPAID SUBSCR. WITHOUT RECORD
PPSCSUBR PREPAID SUBSCR. WITH RECORD
OLFRENCH OPERATOR LANGUAGE FRENCH
OLENGLSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE ENGLISH
OLGERMAN OPERATOR LANGUAGE GERMAN
OLRUSSIA OPERATOR LANGUAGE RUSSIAN
OLSPANSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE SPANISH
OLADD1 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 1
OLADD2 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 2
OLADD3 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 3
NATOPER NATIONAL OPERATOR
PRIOSUB PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
DATACALL DATA CALL
TESTCALL TEST CALL
PAYPHONE PAYPHONE
ORDFREE ORDINSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIOFREE PRIOSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
Default: ORDINSUB
EXPIRY EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified expiry date.
Only mobile subscribers whose expiry date matches the input
to this parameter are selected for display.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
SELECT SELECTION MODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers matching
all specified selection modes.
Notes:
- The maximum number of list entries is 8.
Incompatibilities:
- Any combination of the parameter values TEMPLATE,
LMU and PROFILE is not allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MSUBLINK LINKED MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
SIMCCH MSUB WITH SIM CARD CHANGEOVER
IMSITRAC MSUB WITH IMSI TRACE
WLLSUB WLL SUBSCRIBERS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FILTER- 4+
CR FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RSSERV REGIONAL SUBSCR. SERVICE DATA
TEMPLATE TEMPLATE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
EXPIRED EXPIRED MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
LMU LOCATION MEASUREMENT UNIT
PROFILE PROFILE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
OR OPTIMAL ROUTING
QOSPROF QOS PROFILE NAME
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified quality of service profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NTF NOTIFICATION TO CSE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the specified
notification flag. The flag indicates the necessity to notify
the CSE(Camel service environment) of the change of
subscriber data.
Notes:
- Up to 3 notification flags can be specified.
- Combination NONE with other flags is not allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NONE NO NOTIFICATION FLAG
CBSERV CALL BARRING SERVICES
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
ODB OPERATOR DETERMINED BARRING
PRFMSIN PROFILE MSUB IDENTIF. NUMBER
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified profile MSUB identification number.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- If "X" is entered, then the type of profile is ignored.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: TYPE OF PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES PROFILE
X TYPE OF PROFILE IGNORED
b: MSIN OF PROFILE=
1...12 digit decimal number
NDC NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with one of the
specified national destination codes.
Notes:
- Up to 3 national destination codes can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit decimal number
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter selects subscribers with the
specified local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FILTER- 5+
CR FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...5 digit decimal number
VIEW VIEW ON MSUB DATA
This parameter selects the type of view on mobile
subscriber data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NORMAL NORMAL DISPLAY
Display with references to profiles.
PRFEXP PROFILE DATA EXPLODED
Default: NORMAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FILTER- 6-
DISP FILTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILTER COMMAND
This command displays the filter criteria.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP FILTER : FILTER= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILTER FILTER NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a filter to be
displayed.
Notes:
- Up to 50 filter profiles can be specified.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FILTER- 1-
ACT FIXPOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE FIXPOINT
This command activates the automatic creation of fixpoint generations.
The command causes a fixpoint generation to be automatically created on
disk each time a defined threshold number of MML commands with logging
attribute or, if the Q3 interface is active, Q3 requests or
Q3 responses has been entered.
The number of fixpoints simultaneously permitted on disk is limited.
When the maximum number of fixpoints on disk has been reached, the
oldest fixpoint is deleted upon generation of another fixpoint.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT FIXPOINT : [CMDTHRES=] [,Q3REQTHR=] [,Q3RESTHR=] [
[ [
[ [,Q3OPCNT=] [,FIXNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMDTHRES COMMAND THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the number of MML commands with logging
attribute, after input of which an automatic fixpoint generation, that
is, a copy of the current semipermanent database to disk, will be made.
The default of this parameter is the value entered during the last
input of the command ACT FIXPOINT. If the command ACT FIXPOINT is
entered for the first time, this parameter must be specified. This
threshold value specifies the number of subscriber-programmed
entries.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1000...100000, range of decimal numbers
Q3REQTHR Q3 REQUEST THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the number of Q3 Requests with logging
attribute, after input of which an automatic fixpoint generation, that
is, a copy of the current semipermanent database to disk, will be
generated.
The default of this parameter is the value entered during the last
input of the command ACT FIXPOINT. If the command ACT FIXPOINT is
entered for the first time and no value is specified, no fixpoint will
be generated in respect of Q3 Requests.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10000, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
Q3RESTHR Q3 RESPONSE THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the number of Q3 Responses with logging
attribute, after input of which an automatic fixpoint generation, that
is, a copy of the current semipermanent database to disk, will be
generated.
The default of this parameter is the value entered during the last
input of the command ACT FIXPOINT. If the command ACT FIXPOINT is
entered for the first time and no value is specified, the value
defaults to that of CMDTHRES.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
100...100000, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT FIXPOINT- 1+
ACT FIXPOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Q3OPCNT Q3 OPERATION COUNTING
This parameter specifies whether Q3 entries are to be counted or not
i.e, if an automatic fixpoint is to be generated because of
Q3 Responses or Q3 Requests or not.
If the Q3 interface is not active this parameter is ignored.
Default: Q3 operations are counted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES Q3 OPERATION COUNTING
Y Q3 OPERATION COUNTING
NO NO Q3 OPERATION COUNTING
N NO Q3 OPERATION COUNTING
FIXNO MAXIMAL NUMBER OF FIXPOINTS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of fixpoint generations
on disk. The original generation, i.e. that with the same generation
name but with fixpoint counter = 00, and snapshot generations are not
included in this number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT FIXPOINT- 2-
DACT FIXPOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE FIXPOINT
This command deactivates automatic fixpoint generation. This is required
for example, prior to an APS change or REGEN run (see the command
description for EXEC REGEN). If the automatic fixpoint function is
subsequently activated again without entering parameters, the threshold
value is the same as the one before the deactivation.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command
description for COPY GEN.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT FIXPOINT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT FIXPOINT- 1-
DISP FIXPOINT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FIXPOINT
This command displays the following information on automatic fixpoint
creation:
- Status of the fixpoint function
- Threshold number of entered MML commands with logging
attribute, on exceeding of which a fixpoint is to be generated,
- Threshold number of entered Q3 requests with logging
attribute, on exceeding of which a fixpoint is to be generated,
- Threshold number of entered Q3 responses with logging
attribute, on exceeding of which a fixpoint is to be generated,
- Status of Q3 counting, i.e. whether Q3 counting is activated or
not
- Maximum number of fixpoint generations permitted on disk.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command
description for COPY GEN.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FIXPOINT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FIXPOINT- 1-
ACT FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command activates the filename segment protection
for one element or for all elements of the filename
segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must exist.
- The syntax of the filename segment element must be correct.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ ACT FNS : [FNS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FNS FILE NAME SEGMENT
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment
for which the relevant function is to be carried out.
Note:
- Only alphanumeric characters are legal.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT FNS- 1-
CAN FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command cancels elements of the filename segment
table which were created retrospectively.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must be an external element
(created with ENTR FNS).
- The syntax of the filename segment element must be correct.
- Update must be switched on.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FNS : FNS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FNS FILE NAME SEGMENT
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment
for which the relevant function is to be carried out.
Note:
- Only alphanumeric characters are legal.
- The filename segment must be entered as a fully
qualified name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FNS- 1-
DACT FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command deactivates the filename segment protection for
one element or all elements of the filename segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The file name segment element must exist.
- The syntax of the filename segment element must be correct.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ DACT FNS : [FNS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FNS FILE NAME SEGMENT
This parameter specifies the name of the file name segment.
Note:
- Only alphanumeric characters are legal.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT FNS- 1-
DISP FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command displays one or all elements of the filename
segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment element must exist.
- The syntax of the filename segment element must be correct.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FNS : [FNS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FNS FILE NAME SEGMENT
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment
for which the relevant function is to be carried out.
Note:
- Only alphanumeric characters are legal.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FNS- 1-
ENTR FNS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER FILE NAME SEGMENT
This command is used to add new elements to the file name segment table.
Prerequisite:
- The filename segment must be entered as a fully
qualified name.
- The specified element may not exist.
- The table should not be full.
- The syntax of the specified element must be correct.
- Update must be switched on.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR FNS : FNS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FNS FILE NAME SEGMENT
This parameter specifies the name of the filename segment.
Note:
- Only alphanumeric characters are legal.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR FNS- 1-
DISP FOLLOW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Following Files
This task returns following files if the output of DISP DFILE or DISP FOLLOW
has been truncated (indicate the value of the output parameter LAST).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FOLLOW : [MP_ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP_ID
Specifies the Identifier of MP.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FOLLOW- 1-
ACT FPTRC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate Fast Process Trace
This task activates the SPT tracer for Fast Process Switching tracing
on MP platform(s).
This activation job can only be submitted in the state of deactivation,
e.g. no active trace and no trace data dump is just running.
Note:
- If the trace buffer contains data of an previous trace which are
not dumped yet, the parameter Unconditional activation must be set
to Yes.
Otherwise the trace cannot be activated again.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT FPTRC : [MP=] [,Recovery level=] [,Cyclic=] [
[ [
[ [,Unconditional activation=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is used to specify up to 10 MPs on which the
Fast Process Switch Trace should be activated.
If MP is not specified, the trace is activated on all
active platforms.
Recovery level
This parameter specifies up to which recovery level the trace
should survive.
If this parameter is omitted the trace wont survive any recoveries.
Cyclic
This parameter specifies, whether the trace buffer will be
written cyclically - i.e. the content of trace buffer can be
overwritten - or non-cyclically.
If this parameter is omitted the trace buffer will be written
cyclically.
Unconditional activation
This parameter specifies if the acitivation is performed even if
trace data of the prevoius trace are not dumped yet.
The default value is No.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT FPTRC- 1-
DACT FPTRC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Deactivate Fast Process Trace
This command deactivates the current not yet finished trace on
the MP platform(s) that was activated by the previous activation
job task.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT FPTRC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT FPTRC- 1-
DISP FPTRC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Fast Process Trace
This task displays information about the trace status on MP platform(s).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FPTRC : [MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is used to specify up to 10 MPs whose trace
status should be displayed.
If MP is not specified, the status is displayed for all
active platforms.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FPTRC- 1-
DMP FPTRC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump Data of Fast Process Trace
This task displays the trace buffer of the special trace.
It can only be submitted in the state of deactivation, e.g. no
active trace and no trace data dump is just running.
The data can be displayed for all active MPs or for up to 10
specified MPs.
This task can also be used to stop a currently running output of
the trace buffer.
Input format

[ [
[ DMP FPTRC : Action= [,MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Action
This parameter specifies if the trace buffer should be dumped
or if a currently running dump should be stopped.
MP
This parameter is used to specify up to 10 MPs whose trace
data should be dumped.
If MP is not specified, the trace data of all active
platforms are dumped.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP FPTRC- 1-
DISP FSCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security Configuration
This Task displays the File Security Configuration, which defines
the possible Rule restrictions and the Default access rights
provided no Rule applies.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FSCFG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FSCFG- 1-
MOD FSCFG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security Configuration
This Task modifies the File Security Configuration, which defines
the possible Rule restrictions and the Default access rights
provided no Rule applies.
The Rule restriction cannot be changed if this would lead to
inconsistancies with existing Rules.
At least one of the parameters Default access and Rule restriction
has to be specified.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD FSCFG : [Default access=] [,Rule restriction=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Default access
This parameter specifies the Default access rights that are used for
file access check, if no File Security Rule applies.
Input format:
Allow : Allows default access right for the file operation.
Deny : Denies default access right for the file operation.
Select the Default access for the file operations:
Read, Write, Create, Delete, Read attributes
Rule restriction
This parameter can restrict the supported Rule type of the File
Security Rules. Such a restriction may help to get a less complex File
Security system and therefore may help to avoid conflicting Rules.
Prerequisite:
If the Rule restriction is set to Deny rules or Allow rules only,
then no File Security Rule of the other Rule type may exist.
Input format:
Allow rules: Only Rules of Rule type Deny are supported.
Deny rules : Only Rules of Rule type Allow are supported.
All rules : All Rule types are supported.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSCFG- 1-
CAN FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel File Security File Group
This task cancels a File Security File group, which defines a set of file
name patterns and the file operations on these file name patterns.
Prerequisite:
The File group is not canceled, if it is still referenced by a File
Security Rule.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FSFGRP : File group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter specifies the name of the File group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Dependencies:
The File group is not canceled, if it is referebced by a File
Security Rule
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FSFGRP- 1-
CR FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create File Security File Group
This task creates a File Security File group, which defines a set of file
name patterns and the file operations on these file name patterns.
A File group is referenced by one or more File Security Rules in order
to Allow or Deny access rights for the file operations on the file name
patterns.
The set of file name patterns is defined by the File list.
The file operations are defined by the Operations list.
Optionally to each of the file operations a Password can be entered.
The file names within the File list parameter can be fully qualified file
names or file name patterns defined by special characters.
Dependencies:
Passwords are ignored at access checks if this File group is referenced
by a Deny Rule.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have one
of the following reasons:
- There are already too many File groups in the database.
- The maximum number of passwords (200) or file names (400)
is reached.
Input format

[ [
[ CR FSFGRP : File group= ,File list= ,Operations list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter specifies the name of the File group. This name is used
by a File Security Rule to reference the File group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
File list
This parameter specifies a list of file names and file name patterns on
which the file operations specified within Operations list will be
allowed or denied.
Selected elements of this list must not be suplied with an empty string.
Input format:
Set (1-20 elements) of file names.
One element consists of a choice:
File on CP: String (1-17 characters) for CP file names,
only capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#", "%", "+", ".", "*"
and "?" are allowed.
File on MP: String (1-48 characters) for MP file names,
small and capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#" "%" "+" "." "*" "!"
"$" "&" "(" ")" "," ":" "-" "/"
";" "<" ">" "=" "@" "[" "]" ""
"_" "{" "}" "?" "\" are allowed.
For files on MP the device must be specified either by the device
name or by a wildcard.
A file name pattern is defined as follows:
- "Partly qualified" file names are specified by a dot (".") at
the end of the name.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FSFGRP- 1+
CR FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A file name matches this file name pattern, if it contains this
"partly qualified" file name as a prefix including the dot.
- "Fully qualified" file names are given uniquely without any
wild cards.
- One or more question marks ("?") can be entered at any position
of the file name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the file name and
the file name pattern are equal except the character positions
indicated by the question mark within the file name pattern.
One question mark substitutes exactly one character.
- One asterisk ("*") can be entered at any position of the file
name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the part before the
asterisk is contained as a prefix and if the part after the asterisk
is contained as a suffix.
The asterisk substitutes none, one or more characters.
- A question mark can be used in combination with a "partly qualified"
file name and with an asterisk.
- An asterisk cannot be used in combination with a dot as the last
character of the file name pattern.
Examples for files on CP:
- "Partly qualified" file name "SY." matches to
"SY.TASKLIB", "SY.SEMILIB", etc.
"SYSTEM.FILE" does NOT match this pattern.
- The file name pattern "RG.F?.FILE" applies to
"RG.FC.FILE", "RG.FS.FILE", etc.
- The file name pattern "IA.IC*" applies to "IA.IC",
"IA.ICAMA", "IA.ICMAL", etc.
Examples for files on MP:
- The file name pattern "SYS:\ab*" applies to all files on the
system device beginning with the prefix "ab". A generation
beginning with this prefix also matches to this file name pattern.
(e.g. ab, ab0, abC, ... , \ab\systemcode, \abCd\systemfile, ... )
- The file name pattern "SYS:\\def*" applies to all files of the
actual generation on the system device, beginning with the
prefix "def".
- The file name pattern "MOD:\*" applies to all files on the
MOD device.
- The file name pattern "???:\ab*" applies to all files on any
device with 3 letters beginning with the prefix "ab".
Operations list
This parameter specifies a list of file operations that are defined for
this File group.
The Rule that references this File group defines whether these file
operations are allowed or denied.
Optionally to each of this file operations a Password can be entered
for restricted file access.
The Password has to be entered twice for verification.
A Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical
character and one special character.
Dependencies:
- Optionally entered Passwords are ignored at access checks if this
File group is referenced by a Deny Rule.
- For file access via FTP no password may be administrated.
Input format:
Set (1-5) of file operations
One file operation element consists of:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FSFGRP- 2+
CR FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Operation:
Create : Create file operation
Delete : Delete file operation
Read : Read file operation
Write : Write file operation
Read attributes: Read file attributes operation
Password:
String (3-40 characters)
Verify password:
String (3-40 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FSFGRP- 3-
DISP FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security File Group
This task displays one or more File Security File groups, which define a
set of file name patterns and the file operations on these file name patterns.
The following selections are possible:
- One single File Security File group:
--> Enter the File group
- All File Security File groups:
--> Default: Enter no selection parameter
- Selection by filter criteria:
--> Enter Substring for File group name (match at any position).
--> Enter File entry for File list (File name is in the list).
If more than one filter criteria are entered they must be all fulfilled.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FSFGRP : [File group=] [,Substring=] [,File location=] [
[ [
[ [,File name=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter selects one specific File group by its name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if all File groups shall be
selected or Substring or File entry is entered as filter parameter.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the File group name.
The File group name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if a File group is entered.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
File location
This parameter specifies where the file, specified in File name,
is located.
Dependencies:
- This parameter must be entered together with the parameter File name.
File name
This parameter specifies a file name which must be contained in the File
list. It is only looked for exact matches of the given file name and
that
one in the File list.
Dependencies:
- This parameter must be entered together with the parameter File
location.
- It must not be entered, if a File group was entered.
Input format:
File on CP: String (1-17 characters) for CP file names
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FSFGRP- 1+
DISP FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
File on MP: String (1-48 characters) for MP file names
For files on MP the device must be specified either by the device
name or by a wildcard.
A file name pattern is defined as follows:
- "Partly qualified" file names are specified by a dot (".") at
the end of the name.
- "Fully qualified" file names are given uniquely without any
wild cards.
- One or more question marks ("?") can be entered at any position
of the file name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the file name and
the file name pattern are equal except the character positions
indicated by the question mark within the file name pattern.
One question mark substitutes exactly one character.
- One asterisk ("*") can be entered at any position of the file
name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the part before the
asterisk is contained as a prefix and if the part after the asterisk
is contained as a suffix.
The asterisk substitutes none, one or more characters.
- A question mark can be used in combination with a "partly qualified"
file name and with an asterisk.
- An asterisk cannot be used in combination with a dot as the last
character of the file name pattern.
Examples for files on CP:
- "Partly qualified" file name "SY." matches to
"SY.TASKLIB", "SY.SEMILIB", etc.
"SYSTEM.FILE" does NOT match this pattern.
- The file name pattern "RG.F?.FILE" applies to
"RG.FC.FILE", "RG.FS.FILE", etc.
- The file name pattern "IA.IC*" applies to "IA.IC",
"IA.ICAMA", "IA.ICMAL", etc.
Examples for files on MP:
- The file name pattern "SYS:\ab*" applies to all files on the
system device beginning with the prefix "ab". A generation beginning
with this prefix also matches to this file name pattern.
(e.g. ab, ab0, abC, ... , \ab\systemcode,
\abCd\systemfile, ... )
- The file name pattern "SYS:\\def*" applies to all files of the
actual generation on the system device, beginning with the
prefix "def".
- The file name pattern "MOD:\*" applies to all files on the
MOD device.
- The file name pattern "???:\ab*" applies to all files on any device
with 3 letters beginning with the prefix "ab".
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FSFGRP- 2-
MOD FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security File Group
This task modifies a File Security File group, which defines a set of file
name patterns and the file operations on these file name patterns.
Passwords can be entered to an Operation or can be removed with an
Operation.
To remove an Operation with a Password, the Password has to be
specified.
To change an existing Password without affecting the Operation, the
task MOD FSFGRPPW has to be used.
Dependencies:
The parameters Add operations and Remove operations must not be
specified at the same time.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have one
of the following reasons:
- There are already too many File groups in the database.
- The maximum number of passwords (200) or file names (400)
is reached.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD FSFGRP : File group= [,File list=] [,Remove operations=] [
[ [
[ [,Add operations=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter specifies the name of the File group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
File list
This parameter specifies a list of file names that will replace the
existing list of file names of the specified File group.
Selected elements of this list must not be suplied with an empty string.
Input format:
Operation:
REPLACE: Replace File list.
ADD : Add file names in File list to the existing list.
REMOVE : Remove file names in File list from the existing list.
File list :
Set (1..20) of file names.
One list element consists of a choice:
File on CP: String (1-17 characters) for CP file names,
only capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#", "%", "+", ".", "*"
and "?" are allowed.
File on MP: String (1-48 characters) for MP file names,
small and capital letters, numbers and the special
characters "#" "%" "+" "." "*" "!"
"$" "&" "(" ")" "," ":" "-" "/"
";" "<" ">" "=" "@" "[" "]" ""
"_" "{" "}" "?" "\" are allowed.
For files on MP the device must be specified either by the device
name or by a wildcard.
A file name pattern is defined as follows:
- "Partly qualified" file names are specified by a dot (".") at
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSFGRP- 1+
MOD FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the end of the name.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if it contains this
"partly qualified" file name as a prefix including the dot.
- "Fully qualified" file names are given uniquely without any
wild cards.
- One or more question marks ("?") can be entered at any position
of the file name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the file name and
the file name pattern are equal except the character positions
indicated by the question mark within the file name pattern.
One question mark substitutes exactly one character.
- One asterisk ("*") can be entered at any position of the file
name pattern.
A file name matches this file name pattern, if the part before the
asterisk is contained as a prefix and if the part after the asterisk
is contained as a suffix.
The asterisk substitutes none, one or more characters.
- A question mark can be used in combination with a "partly qualified"
file name and with an asterisk.
- An asterisk cannot be used in combination with a dot as the last
character of the file name pattern.
Examples for files on CP:
- "Partly qualified" file name "SY." matches to
"SY.TASKLIB", "SY.SEMILIB", etc.
"SYSTEM.FILE" does NOT match this pattern.
- The file name pattern "RG.F?.FILE" applies to
"RG.FC.FILE", "RG.FS.FILE", etc.
- The file name pattern "IA.IC*" applies to "IA.IC",
"IA.ICAMA", "IA.ICMAL", etc.
Examples for files on MP:
- The file name pattern "SYS:\ab*" applies to all files on the
system device beginning with the prefix "ab". A generation
beginning with this prefix also matches to this file name pattern.
(e.g. ab, ab0, abC, ... , \ab\systemcode, \abCd\systemfile, ... )
- The file name pattern "SYS:\\def*" applies to all files of the
actual generation on the system device, beginning with the
prefix "def".
- The file name pattern "MOD:\*" applies to all files on the
MOD device.
- The file name pattern "???:\ab*" applies to all files on any
device with 3 letters beginning with the prefix "ab".
Remove operations
This parameter specifies a list of Operations that will be removed from
the existing Operations list of the specified File group.
Optionally existing Passwords for the specified Operations must also
be specified.
Input format:
Set (1-5) of file operations
One file operation element consists of:
Operation:
Create : Create file operation
Delete : Delete file operation
Read : Read file operation
Write : Write file operation
Read attributes: Read file attributes operation
Password:
String (3-40 characters)
Add operations
This parameter specifies a list of Operations that will be added to
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSFGRP- 2+
MOD FSFGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the existing Operations list the specified File group.
Optionally a Password can be specified for each of the entered
Operations. The Password has to be entered twice for verification.
A Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical
character and one special character.
Input format:
Set (1-5) of file operations
One file operation element consists of:
Operation:
Create : Create file operation
Delete : Delete file operation
Read : Read file operation
Write : Write file operation
Read attributes: Read file attributes operation
Password:
String (3-40 characters)
Verify password:
String (3-40 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSFGRP- 3-
MOD FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security File Group Password
This task modifies a Password of a File Security File group, which
defines a set of file name patterns and the file operations on these file
name patterns.
If an existing Password is to be changed then this Old password has to
be specified.
If a New password is entered it has to be entered twice for verification.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have the
following reasons:
- The maximum number of passwords (200) is reached.
- M-SET Error: Either the New Password is invalid or the Old Password
is wrong or the Operation you specified is not in the Operations List
of this File Group.
If the passwords are correct, pleas check the Operations List of the
File group with DISP FSFGRP. If the Operation is not in the
Operations List, you can add it with MOD FSFGRP.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD FSFGRPPW : File group= ,Operation= [,Old password=] [
[ [
[ [,New password=] [,Verify password=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter specifies the name of the File group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Operation
This parameter specifies the Operation for which the Password will
be changed.
Input format:
Create : Create file operation
Delete : Delete file operation
Read : Read file operation
Write : Write file operation
Read attributes: Read file attributes operation
Old password
This parameter specifies the Old password of the specified Operation.
Input format:
String (3-40 characters)
New password
This parameter specifies the New password of the specified Operation
to be set.
The Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical character and one special character.
Dependencies:
If this parameter is specified Verify password must also be entered.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSFGRPPW- 1+
MOD FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
String (3-40 characters)
Verify password
This parameter specifies the verification of the New password.
The Passwords entered in New password and in Verify password must
be equal.
This parameter may only be specified, if New password is entered.
Input format:
String (3-40 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSFGRPPW- 2-
RSET FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Reset File Security File Group Password
This task resets or cancels the Password of an Operation of a File
Security File group.
If a New password is entered it has to be entered twice for verification.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have the
following reasons:
- The maximum number of passwords (200) is reached.
- The given password is invalid.
Input format

[ [
[ RSET FSFGRPPW : File group= ,Operation= [,New password=] [
[ [
[ [,Verify password=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
File group
This parameter specifies the name of the File group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Operation
This parameter specifies the Operation for which the Password will
be changed.
Input format:
Create : Create file operation
Delete : Delete file operation
Read : Read file operation
Write : Write file operation
Read attributes: Read file attributes operation
New password
This parameter specifies the New password of the specified Operation
to be set.
The Password must contain at least one alphabetic character, one
numerical character and one special character.
If this parameter is not entered, the existing Password of the
Operation will be canceled.
Dependencies:
If this parameter is specified Verify password must also be entered.
Input format:
String (3-40 characters): The Password will be reset.
Default: The Password will be canceled.
Verify password
This parameter specifies the verification to the New password of the
specified Operation.
This parameter may only be specified, if New password is entered.
Input format:
String (3-40 characters)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET FSFGRPPW- 1+
RSET FSFGRPPW
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET FSFGRPPW- 2-
CAN FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel File Security Initiator Group
This task cancels a File Security Initiator group, which defines a list of
Initiators.
Prerequisite:
The Initiator group is not canceled, if it is referenced by a File Security
Rule.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FSINIGRP : Initiator group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter specifies the name of the Initiator group to be
canceled.
Dependencies:
The Initiator group is not canceled, if it is referenced by a File
Security Rule.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FSINIGRP- 1-
CR FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create File Security Initiator Group
This task creates a File Security Initiator group, which defines a
list of Initiators.
A File Security Initiator group is referenced by one or more File Security
Rules in order to Allow or Deny file access rights to file operations.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have one
of the following reasons:
- There are already too many Initiator groups in the database.
- The maximum number of Initiators (200) is reached.
Input format

[ [
[ CR FSINIGRP : Initiator group= ,Initiator list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter defines the name of the Initiator group. This name is
used by a File Security Rule to reference the Initiator group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Initiator list
This parameter defines a list of Initiators for this File Security
Initiator group. Each Initiator is represented by its name.
Selected elements of this list must not be suplied with an empty string.
Dependencies:
This task does not check if the Initiators exist within Authentication.
Input format:
Set (1..20) of Initiators
One Initiator consists of a String (1-8 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FSINIGRP- 1-
DISP FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security Initiator Group
This task displays one or more File Security Initiator groups, which
define a list of Initiators.
The following selections are possible:
- One single File Security Initiator group:
--> Enter the Initiator group
- All File Security Initiator groups:
--> Default: Enter no selection parameter
- Selection by filter criteria:
--> Enter Substring for Initiator group name (match at any position)
--> Enter Initiator entry for Initiator list (Initiator is in the list)
If both criteria are entered they must be both fulfilled.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FSINIGRP : [Initiator group=] [,Substring=] [,Initiator entry=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter selects one specific Initiator group by its name.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if all Initiator groups shall
be selected or Substring or Initiator entry is entered as filter
parameter.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the Initiator group name.
The Initiator group name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if an Initiator group is entered.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Initiator entry
This parameter specifies an Initiator which must be contained in the
Initiator list.
Dependencies:
- This parameter must not be entered, if an Initiator group was
entered.
- If this parameter is entered together with Substring then all
Initiator groups will be displayed that reference the given
Initiator.
- If the given Initiator is an element of a Initiators list of some
Initiator group, these Initiator group will be displayed.
Input format:
String (1-8 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FSINIGRP- 1-
MOD FSINIGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security Initiator Group
This task modifies a File Security Initiator group, which defines a list
of Initiators that have the same File Security access rights.
The Initiator list of the Initiator group can be replaced or
Initiators may be added to or removed from the list.
Note:
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have one
of the following reasons:
- There are already too many Initiator groups in the database.
- The maximum number of Initiators (200) is reached.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD FSINIGRP : Initiator group= ,Initiator list= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator group
This parameter specifes the name of the File Security Initiator group.
This name is used by a File Security Rule to reference the
Initiator group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Initiator list
This parameter specifies a list of Initiators that will replace, or
will be added to or removed from the existing Initiator list.
Selected elements of this list must not be suplied with an empty string.
Dependencies:
The Initiators must have been created using the Authentication
function.
This task does not check if the Initiators exist within Authentication.
Input format:
Operation
REPLACE: Replace Initiator list.
ADD : Add Initiators of Initiator list to the
existing list.
REMOVE : Remove Initiators in Initiator list from the
existing list.
Initiator list
Set (1..20) of Initiators
One Initiator consists of a String
(1-8 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSINIGRP- 1-
CAN FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel File Security Rule
This task cancels a File Security Rule, which defines the access
rights of a File Security Initiator group on a File Security
File group for the file operations defined by File group.
Depending on the Rule type the cancel operation can remove existing
access rights (Rule type = Allow) or grant new access rights
(Rule type = Deny).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FSRULE : Rule= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter specifies the name of the File Security
Rule.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FSRULE- 1-
CR FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create File Security Rule
This task creates a Rule which defines the access rights of a File
Security Initiator group on files specified within a File Security
File group.
An Allow Rule (Rule type = Allow) allows the file access, as
long as no matching Deny Rule exists. A Deny Rule rejects the
file access (Rule type = Deny).
Rules with an empty Initiator group parameter are Common rules and
apply to all File Security Initiators.
Rules with an empty File group parameter are Global rules and apply
to all files.
Rules with both the Initiator group and the File group parameter
supplied apply only to the File Security Initiators listed in the
referenced Initiator group and only on the files listed in the
referenced File groups.
Optional time dependencies may be defined by scheduling parameters.
The validity of the Rule can be restricted by:
- duration: a Start time and Stop time and/or
- daily scheduling: time intervals for all days (of the week) or
- weekly scheduling: time intervals per individual days of the week.
- Stop time: if Start time is given, Stop time is optional.
Prerequisite:
- The referenced File Security Initiator group and File Security
File group must exist.
- The supported Rule restriction can have been restricted by the task
MOD FSCFG. In this case only Allow Rules or only Deny Rules
can be created.
The administrated restrictions can be displayed using the task
DISP FSCFG.
Note:
- The parameters for daily scheduling and weekly scheduling exclude
each other.
- The scheduling parameters must be selected when the Rule is created.
It is not possible to add scheduling parameters by MOD FSRULE.
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have one
of the following reasons:
- There are already too many Rules in the database.
- Some internal resources exceed their limits
Input format

[ [
[ CR FSRULE : Rule= ,Rule type= [,Initiator group list=] [
[ [
[ [,File group list=] [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [
[ [
[ [,Daily intervals=] [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter specifies the name of the File Security Rule.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Rule type
This parameter specifies the desired action performed if the Rule
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FSRULE- 1+
CR FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
applies to a file access check.
The supported values can be restricted by MOD FSCFG.
Input format:
Allow : Allow file access (if no other matching Deny Rule
exists).
Deny : Deny file access.
Default value : Deny
Initiator group list
This parameter specifies a reference to a list of File Security
Initiator groups. The Rule applies to all Initiators in this
groups.
If no Initiator group is entered, a Common rule is generated,
which is valid for all Initiators.
Prerequisite:
The referenced Initiator group(s) must have been created by CR
FSINIGRP.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) : Reference to an Initiator group
no entry : Common rule
Default value : "" (empty string) : Common rule
File group list
This parameter specifies a reference to a list of File Security
File groups, which define the File lists and the File Security
Operations for this Rule.
If no File group is entered, a Global rule is generated, which
is valid to all files and all Operations within the system for
the referenced Initiator group.
Prerequisite:
The referenced File group(s) must have been created by CR FSFGRP.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) : Reference to a File group
no entry : Common rule
Default value : "" (empty string) : Global rule
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the Rule becomes
active.
If only the Start time is set the Stop time will be set
automatically to Continuous.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Input format:
standard date and time values.
Default value:
Actual system time.
Will be set if this parameter is omitted but Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the Rule becomes
inactive.
If only the Stop time is set the Start time will be set automatically
to the actual system time of the system.
Input format:
option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and time values
Default value:
option Continuous
Will be set if this parameter is omitted but Start time is set.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FSRULE- 2+
CR FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Daily intervals
This parameter defines Daily Intervals (up to 6), within which the
Rule is active.
If this parameter is entered, the parameter for weekly intervals must
not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format:
hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day.
Default:
00:00-00:00 (whole day)
Weekly intervals
This parameter defines weekly intervals within which the Rule is
active. Up to 6 time intervals can be defined for each day of the week.
The Rule will be inactive on days of the week not selected and on
days with no intervals set.
At least one day with one interval must be specified.
If this parameter is entered, the parameter for Daily intervals must
not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format:
hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day.
Default:
Selects all days of the week without any time restriction.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FSRULE- 3-
DISP FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Security Rule
This task displays one or more File Security Rules, which define the
access rights of a File Security Initiator group on files specified
within a File Security File group.
The following selections are possible:
- One single File Security Rule:
--> Enter Rule
- All File Security Rules:
--> Default: Enter no selection parameter
- Selection by filter criteria:
--> Enter Substring for Rule name (match at any position).
--> Enter Rule type (equality)
--> Enter Initiator group (equality)
--> Enter File group (equality)
All entered criteria must be fulfilled for the Rules displayed.
Different output formats are supported for the display of a single
File Security Rule.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FSRULE : [Rule=] ,Output format= [,Substring=] [,Rule type=] [
[ [
[ [,Initiator group=] [,File group=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter selects one specific File Security Rule.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if all File Security Rules shall
be selected or one of the following filter parameters is entered.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Output format
This parameter defines the Output format of the displayed File Security
Rules. Format Compact must be used, if parameter Rule is not
given.
Input format:
Compact displays File Security Rule parameters without
scheduling parameters.
Complete displays all File Security Rule parameters.
Expanded displays all File Security Rule parameters including
the referenced File Security Initiator group and
File Security File group.
Default:
Compact
Substring
This parameter defines a pattern for the Rule name.
The Rule name must contain this pattern at any position.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Rule was specified.
Input format:
String (1-12) characters
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FSRULE- 1+
DISP FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Rule type
This parameter selects the Rule type of the Rules to display.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Rule was specified.
Input format:
Allow Select Allow Rules.
Deny Select Deny Rules.
Initiator group
This parameter selects the referenced Initiator group of the Rules
to display.
Dependencies:
This parameter cannot be entered at the same time with the Rule
parameter.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for Initiator group name.
"" (empty string) selects Common rules (with no
Initiator group).
File group
This parameter selects the referenced File group of the Rules
to display.
Dependencies:
This parameter cannot be entered at the same time with the Rule
parameter.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters) for File group name.
"" (empty string) selects Global rules (with no
File group).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FSRULE- 2-
MOD FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Security Rule
This task modifies a File Security Rule, which defines the access
rights of a File Security Initiator group on files specified within
a File Security File group.
Depending on the parameters specified, the Rule type, the referenced
File group or Initiator group is changed.
Scheduling parameters can be modified as follows:
- Duration: replace Start time and/or Stop time.
- Daily scheduling: replace Daily intervals.
- Weekly scheduling: replace time intervals of single days of the week.
Note:
- It is not possible to change a Common rule (no Initiator group) to
a non Common rule and vice versa.
It is only possible to replace an existing reference to an Initiator group.
- It is not possible to change a Global rule (no File group) to a non
Global rule and vice versa.
It is only possible to replace an existing reference to a File group.
- Only scheduling parameters specified by CR FSRULE can be modified.
- The response Operation not allowed or not possible can have one
of the following reasons:
- There are already too many Rules in the database.
- Some internal resources exceed their limits
Input format

[ [
[ MOD FSRULE : Rule= [,Initiator group list=] [,File group list=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Rule
This parameter specifies the name of the Rule.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Initiator group list
This parameter specifies a list of File Security Initiator groups
that replace the existing reference.
Note:
It is not possible to set a reference to an
Initiator group for a Common rule (no
Initiator group), or to remove the reference to an
Initiator group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
File group list
This parameter specifies a list of File Security File groups
that replace the existing reference.
Note:
It is not possible to set a reference to a File group for a Global
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSRULE- 1+
MOD FSRULE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
rule (no File group), or to remove the reference to a File group.
Input format:
String (1-12 characters)
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the Rule becomes
active.
The parameter can be replaced only if a Start time or Stop time
was specified, when the Rule was created.
Input format:
Standard date and time values.
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the Rule becomes
inactive.
The parameter can be replaced only, if a Start time or Stop time
was specified, when the Rule was created.
Input format:
option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and time values
Default value:
option Continuous
Will be set if this parameter is omitted but Start time is set.
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces the Daily intervals (up to 6) within which
the Rule is active.
The parameter can be entered only if Daily intervals were specified,
when the Rule was created.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes. Overlapping
intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format:
hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces the Weekly intervals within
which the Rule is active.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are
replaced.
The intervals of the days not selected will not be changed.
Enter 0 intervals to disable the whole day.
At least one day with one interval must be active in the
resultant Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is
rejected.
Input format:
hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FSRULE- 2-
TEST FSYS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Test Free Input of FSYS OT Commands
This task allows a free input of any FSYS Online Tool Command.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST FSYS : Command= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Command
FSYS Online Tool Command.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST FSYS- 1-
CAN FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel File Transfer Initiator
This task releases an File transfer initiator.
The required input parameters for an unique Initiator selection are:
1) User identity and
2) Password type
Note:
Cancel File Transfer Initiator removes the specified File transfer initiator
from the authentication database and does not cancel active file transfers.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN FTINI : User identity= ,Password type= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
User identity
This mandatory parameter specifies the unique UserId of an
remote File transfer initiator.
Input format: String (1-8 characters).
Password type
This mandatory parameter defines the type of password
mechanism. It specifies if the initiator should be
authenicated by a simple or by a replay-protected
password.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiator with a replay
protected password
Simple PW : Initiator with a simple
password
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FTINI- 1-
CR FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create File Transfer Initiator
This task creates a FT-Initiator (File transfer initiator) at the
Authentication function with the specified password type.
Possible password types are the "Simple PW" and the "Replay protected PW"
for simple or replay-protected user authentication.
Each FT-Initiator must be specified by its User identity. The system access
can
be restricted to specified FT-Applications (e.g. "ftp") via selection of parameter
File transfer type.
Further it is possible to define time dependencies and restrict the system access
of
each FT-Initiator by following scheduling parameters:
- duration: defines a Start Time and Stop Time and/or
- daily scheduling: time intervals for all days of the week or
- weekly scheduling: time intervals per individual days of the week.
The parameter Availability status indicates if a FT-Initiator with scheduling
parameters is available (On) or not (Off). The output "-" indicates that no
scheduling parameter was entered.
Note:
- The parameters for daily scheduling and weekly scheduling exclude one another.
- The scheduling paramters must be selected when the initiator is created. If not,
then it is not possible to add scheduling parameters later by MOD INI.
If no scheduling parameters created then the FT-Initiator is permanent valid
and can get system access every time.
Input format

[ [
[ CR FTINI : User identity= ,Password type= ,Password= [
[ [
[ ,Verify password= [,ftType=] [,Accept time range=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
User identity
This mandatory parameter specifies the unique UserId of an
remote File transfer initiator.
Input format: String (1-8 characters).
Password type
This mandatory parameter defines the type of password
mechanism. It specifies if the Initiator should
be identified without a password or if it should be
authenticated by a simple or by a replay-protected
password.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiator with a replay
protected password
Simple PW : Initiator with a simple
password
Password
This parameter specifies the password.
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FTINI- 1+
CR FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The password should contain at least a letter, a digit
and a special character and the password length should
be between 4 (minimum) and 24 (maximum) characters.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
Verify password
Please enter password string again.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
ftType
This parameter defines a specific type of File transfer
application where the system access can be restricted to.
If no value is specified, access to all File transfer
types allowed.
Input values:
All : no restrictions,
FTP : access only for FTP-Applications,
FTAM : access only for FTAM-Applications,
FTNEA : access only for FTNEA-Applications.
Accept time range
This parameter is only used for Initiators with
Password type "Replay protected PW" to specify
the accept time range.
This means the maximum time interval between generating
the authentication value at the Initiator and receiving
it at the responder.
If the parameter is not specified for an "replay
protected PW" Initiator then the default value of
5 minutes will be used.
Input format: hh:mm:ss (String )
hh hour (00..23),
mm minute (00..59),
ss second (00..59).
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the
Initiator gets system access.
If only the Start time is set the Stop time will be
set automatically to Continuous.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Default value: actual system time
will be set if this parameter is omitted
but Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the
Initiator loses system access.
If only the Stop time is set the Start time will be
set automatically to the actual system time of the switch.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
will be set if this parameter is omitted
but Start time is set.
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified within the Initiator gets
system access.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for weekly
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FTINI- 2+
CR FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day.
Weekly intervals
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week.
The system access will be denied on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals set. At least one
day with one interval must be selected.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for daily
scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled from
the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FTINI- 3-
DISP FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display File Transfer Initiator
DISP FTINI is used to display the authentication parameters of one or more
File transfer initiators.
The following selection is possible:
- Output of one Initiator:
--> Please enter 1) User identity
and 2) Password type.
- Output of all Initiators:
--> No input necessarry.
- Individual selections:
--> You can do selection by
1) User identity or by User substring
and/or
2) Password type.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP FTINI : [User identity=] [,User substring=] [,Password type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
User identity
This parameter specifies the unique UserId of an remote
File transfer Initiator.
This parameter must not be entered, if User substring
is specified.
Input format: String (1-8 characters)
User substring
This parameter specifies a pattern (substring) for the
User identity. Only Initiators which name contains
this substring at any position will be displayed.
This parameter must not be entered, if User identity
is specified.
Input format: String (1-8 characters)
Password type
This parameter selects Initiators by a specific
password type.
If the parameter is not specified then all File
transfer initiators will be selected, otherwise only
the Initiators with the specified Password Type will
be displayed.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : FT-Initiators with a replay
protected Password
Simple PW : FT-Initiators with a simple
password.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FTINI- 1-
MOD FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify File Transfer Initiator
This task modifies the authentication parameters of an existing File transfer
initiator.
The following parameters are used for an unique Initiator selection and
can not be changed:
1) User indentity and
2) Password type.
Following parameters are changeable:
- Password,
- File transfer type.
- Accept time range
- Scheduling Data
Note: A creation of new scheduling parameters is not possible. Only
scheduling paramters selected when the initiator was created can
be modified in following way:
- duration: replace Start Time and/or Stop Time,
- daily scheduling: replace daily time intervals,
- weekly scheduling: replace time intervals of single days of the week.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD FTINI : User identity= ,Password type= [,Password=] [
[ [
[ [,Verify password=] [,Ft type=] [,Accept time range=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
User identity
This mandatory parameter specifies the unique UserId of an
remote File transfer initiator.
Input format: String (1-8 characters).
Password type
This mandatory parameter is used for an unique Initiator
selection and specifies the type of password mechanism.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiator with a replay
protected password
Simple PW : Initiator with a simple
password
Password
This parameter defines the new password value.
Prerequisites:
The password should contain at least a letter, a digit
and a special character and the password length should
be between 4 (minimum) and 24 (maximum) characters.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
Verify password
Please enter new password string again.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FTINI- 1+
MOD FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Ft type
This parameter defines a specific type of File transfer
application where the system access can be restricted to.
Input values:
all : no restrictions,
ftp : access only for FTP-Applications,
ftam : access only for FTAM-Applications,
ftnea : access only for FTNEA-Applications.
Accept time range
This parameter is only used for Initiators with
Password type "Replay protected PW" to specify
the accept time range.
This means the maximum time interval between generating
the authentication value at the Initiator and receiving
it at the responder.
Input format: hh:mm:ss (String )
hh hour (00..23),
mm minute (00..59),
ss second (00..59).
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the
Initiator gets system access.
The parameter can be replaced only if a Start time or
Stop time was entered, when the Initiator was created.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the
Initiator loses system access.
The parameter can be replaced only, if a Start time or
Stop time was entered, when the Initiator was created.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces the Daily intervals (up to 6)
within the Initiator gets system access.
The parameter can be entered only, if Daily intervals
were entered when the Initiator was created.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces the Weekly intervals within
the Initiator gets system access.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are
replaced. The intervals of the days not selected will
not be changed.
Enter 0 intervals to disable the whole day. At least
one day with one interval must be active in the resultant
Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is rejected.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FTINI- 2+
MOD FTINI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FTINI- 3-
CAN FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This command cancels functional O&M terminals.
Prerequisites:
- the functional O&M terminal must exist.
- the functional O&M terminal must not be assigned to any device group.
- the functional O&M terminal must not be assigned as the output device
of the deactivated output suppression.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN FUOMT : FUOMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a functional O&M terminal.
Notes:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN FUOMT- 1-
CR FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This command creates functional O&M terminals to which a physical O&M
terminal is assigned at the same time; there is the option of assigning
a second O&M terminal as an alternative device.
Prerequisite:
- the functional device may not already exist.
- a physical device must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR FUOMT : FUOMT= ,OMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a functional O&M terminal.
Notes:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter designates a real device or a real device and an
alternate device.
Notes:
- the primary device must not be an alternative device.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR FUOMT- 1-
SEL FUOMT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINALS
This command selects a table of functional O&M terminals.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL FUOMT : OMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a real (physical) terminal or a real
terminal and an alternative terminal.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
If parameter value a is specified, all
O&M terminals are displayed for which the
specified terminal is entered as first or
second O&M terminal.
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
If parameter values a and b are specified,
the O&M terminals are displayed which are
assigned to the terminal stated in the
first information unit as first terminal
and to the terminal stated in the second
information unit as alternative terminal.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL FUOMT- 1-
DISP FUOMTLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS
This command displays a table of functional O&M terminals and their
assignment to physical terminals. A selection of functional terminals or
all functional terminals can be output.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP FUOMTLNK : FUOMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a functional O&M terminal.
Notes:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP FUOMTLNK- 1-
MOD FUOMTLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL LINKS
This command modifies the assignment of physical O&M terminals to
functional O&M terminals. It can be executed for two or more functional
terminals provided that they are assigned the same combination of real
devices.
Prerequisite:
- the functional O&M terminals must exist.
- the physical terminals must exist.
- the specified original combination of physical O&M terminals must be
assigned to the functional O&M terminal.
- the combination of O&M terminals resulting from the modification may not
be identical with the existing one.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD FUOMTLNK : FUOMT= ,OMT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FUOMT FUNCTIONAL O&M TERMINAL
This parameter specifies a functional O&M terminal.
Note:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OMT O&M TERMINAL
This parameter designates a real device or a real device and an
alternate device.
Note:
- the primary device must not be an alternate device.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a[-b]
a: PRIMARY OMT=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: ALTERNATIVE OMT=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD FUOMTLNK- 1-
CAN GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GENERAL CALL SERVICES
This command cancel general call services.
Notes:
- Deactivation of a general call service:
CLIP : result of withdrawal
CLIR : result of withdrawal
COLP : result of withdrawal
COLR : result of withdrawal
CT : result of withdrawal
AOCCHRG : result of withdrawal
AOCINFO : result of withdrawal
HOTBILL : result of withdrawal
CALLHOLD : result of withdrawal
CALLWAIT : result of withdrawal or
separated per command or
per subscriber controlled procedure
MPTY : result of withdrawal
NATCCBS : result of withdrawal
USERSIG1 : result of withdrawal
NATSS01 : result of withdrawal
NATSS02 : result of withdrawal
NATSS03 : result of withdrawal
NATSS04 : result of withdrawal
NATSS05 : result of withdrawal
NATSS06 : result of withdrawal
NATSS07 : result of withdrawal
NATSS08 : result of withdrawal
NATSS09 : result of withdrawal
NATSS10 : result of withdrawal
NATSS11 : result of withdrawal
NATSS12 : result of withdrawal
NATSS13 : result of withdrawal
NATSS14 : result of withdrawal
NATSS15 : result of withdrawal
FOLLOWME : result of withdrawal
FMSPV : result of withdrawal
FROUT : result of withdrawal
EMLPP : result of withdrawal
CCBSA : result of withdrawal
CCBSB : result of withdrawal
UNIVERS : result of withdrawal
CREL : result of withdrawal
CUNREL : result of withdrawal
PLMNOPR : result of withdrawal
BSLC : result of withdrawal
ASLC : result of withdrawal
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
This input format cancel general call services for GSM
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GCSERV : MSIN= ,GCSERV= [,FILTER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GCSERV- 1+
CAN GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
GCSERV GENERAL CALL SERVICE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GENERAL CALL SERVICE
AOCCHRG ADVICE OF CHARGE: CHARGING
AOCINFO ADVICE OF CHARGE: INFORMATION
ASLC AUTONOMOUS SELF LOCATION
BSLC BASIC SELF LOCATION
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
CALLWAIT CALL WAIT
CCBSA CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR. A
CCBSB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR. B
CLIP CALLING LINE ID. PRESENTATION
CLIR CALLING LINE ID. RESTRICTION
COLP CONNECTED L. ID. PRESENTATION
COLR CONNECTED LINE ID. RESTRICTION
CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
CT CALL TRANSFER
CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
EMLPP ENH MULT LEV PREC AND PRE-EMPT
FMSPV FOLLOW ME SUPERVISOR
If FOLLOWME shall be restored, at first the
service FMSPV has to be cancelled and then service
FOLLOWME has to be entered again.
FOLLOWME FOLLOW ME
FROUT FORCED ROUTING
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
MPTY MULTI PARTY
NATCCBS CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR.
NATSS01 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 01
NATSS02 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 02
NATSS03 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 03
NATSS04 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 04
NATSS05 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 05
NATSS06 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 06
NATSS07 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 07
NATSS08 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 08
NATSS09 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 09
NATSS10 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 10
NATSS11 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 11
NATSS12 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 12
NATSS13 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 13
NATSS14 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 14
NATSS15 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 15
PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
UNIVERS UNIVERSAL CLASS
USERSIG1 USER TO USER SIGN. SERV. 1
This parameter unit specifies a general call service.
b: STATUS
ACT ACTIVATION
PROV PROVISION
This parameter unit specifies if withdrawal or deactivation or
deregistration for the general call service is requested.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GCSERV- 2+
CAN GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- a=CALLWAIT (Only PROV or ACT are allowed).
Default: PROV
c: BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
BS40 PAD ACCESS SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS20 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
This parameter unit specifies if a basic service group for the
general call service is requested.
Compatibilities:
- STATUS=ACT
Incompatibilities:
- STATUS=PROV
Default: ALLBSV
FILTER FILTER NAME
This parameter defines the name of the filter, which is used for
modifying only those mobile subscribers that match predefined filter
criteria.
Notes:
- This parameter must not be used in single command mode. It may be
used only in group command mode.
Prerequisites:
- The filter must have been created (CR FILTER).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GCSERV- 3-
ENTR GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GENERAL CALL SERVICES
This command provides/activates general call services.
Notes:
- Activation of a general call service:
CLIP : result of provision
CLIR : result of provision
COLP : result of provision
COLR : result of provision
CT : result of provision
AOCCHRG : result of provision
AOCINFO : result of provision
HOTBILL : result of provision
CALLHOLD : result of provision
CALLWAIT : result of provision or
separated per command or
per subscriber controlled procedure
MPTY : result of provision
NATCCBS : result of provision
USERSIG1 : result of provision
NATSS01 : result of provision
NATSS02 : result of provision
NATSS03 : result of provision
NATSS04 : result of provision
NATSS05 : result of provision
NATSS06 : result of provision
NATSS07 : result of provision
NATSS08 : result of provision
NATSS09 : result of provision
NATSS10 : result of provision
NATSS11 : result of provision
NATSS12 : result of provision
NATSS13 : result of provision
NATSS14 : result of provision
NATSS15 : result of provision
FOLLOWME : result of provision
FROUT : result of provision
EMLPP : result of provision
CCBSA : result of provision
CCBSB : result of provision
FMSPV : result of provision
UNIVERS : result of provision
CREL : result of provision
CUNREL : result of provision
PLMNOPR : result of provision
BSLC : result of provision
ASLC : result of provision
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
This input format enters general call services for GSM.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR GCSERV : MSIN= ,GCSERV= [,CLIPOVR=] [,COLPOVR=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLIRPRES=] [,PRIO=] [,LCS=] [,FILTER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GCSERV- 1+
ENTR GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
GCSERV GENERAL CALL SERVICE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GENERAL CALL SERVICE
AOCCHRG ADVICE OF CHARGE: CHARGING
AOCINFO ADVICE OF CHARGE: INFORMATION
ASLC AUTONOMOUS SELF LOCATION
This parameter value allows the subscriber
to retrieve its own location without interaction
with the PLMN for a predetermined period of time.
BSLC BASIC SELF LOCATION
This parameter value allows the subscriber
to retrieve its own location.
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
CALLWAIT CALL WAIT
CCBSA CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR. A
CCBSB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR. B
CLIP CALLING LINE ID. PRESENTATION
Notes:
- If this value is newly entered for this
subscriber and no CLIPOVR is given,
the initial value of CLIPOVR is NO.
CLIR CALLING LINE ID. RESTRICTION
Notes:
- If this value is newly entered for this
subscriber and no CLIRPRES is given,
the initial value of CLIRPRES is PERM.
COLP CONNECTED L. ID. PRESENTATION
Notes:
- If this value is newly entered for this
subscriber and no COLPOVR is given,
the initial value of COLPOVR is NO.
COLR CONNECTED LINE ID. RESTRICTION
CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
This parameter value allows retrieval of the
current location by any value added LCS client
to which a call is established from the target MS.
Prerequisites:
- LCS is given within this command or was entered
before.
CT CALL TRANSFER
CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
This parameter value allows retrieval of the
current location by a designated external value
added LCS client.
Prerequisites:
- LCS is specified within this command or was
entered before.
EMLPP ENH MULT LEV PREC AND PRE-EMPT
FMSPV FOLLOW ME SUPERVISOR
The parameter value FMSPV specifies a supervisor
for FOLLOWME. If the service FMSPV is entered the
service FOLLOWME is replaced.
FOLLOWME FOLLOW ME
FROUT FORCED ROUTING
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
MPTY MULTI PARTY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GCSERV- 2+
ENTR GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NATCCBS CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR.
NATSS01 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 01
NATSS02 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 02
NATSS03 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 03
NATSS04 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 04
NATSS05 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 05
NATSS06 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 06
NATSS07 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 07
NATSS08 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 08
NATSS09 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 09
NATSS10 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 10
NATSS11 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 11
NATSS12 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 12
NATSS13 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 13
NATSS14 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 14
NATSS15 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 15
PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
This parameter value allows to retrieve the
current location by a designated PLMN operator.
UNIVERS UNIVERSAL CLASS
This parameter value allows to retrieve the
current location by any LCS client.
USERSIG1 USER TO USER SIGN. SERV. 1
This parameter unit specifies a general call service.
b: STATUS
ACT ACTIVATION
PROV PROVISION
This parameter unit specifies whether provision or activation
for the general call service is requested.
Compatibilities:
- a=CALLWAIT
- a=UNIVERS
- a=CREL
- a=CUNREL
- a=PLMNOPR
- a=BSLC
- a=ASLC
Default: PROV
c: BASIC SERVICE GROUP CODE
ALLBS ALL BEARER SERVICES
ALLBSV ALL BASIC SERVICES
ALLTS ALL TELESERVICES
BS20 DATA CIRCUIT DUPLEX ASYN SERV
BS30 DATA CIRCUIT SYN. SERVICES
BS40 PAD ACCESS SERVICES
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS20 SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES
TS60 FACSIMILE SERVICES
This parameter unit specifies basic service group codes.
Compatibilities:
- STATUS=ACT
Incompatibilities:
- STATUS=PROV
- a=UNIVERS
- a=CREL
- a=CUNREL
- a=PLMNOPR
- a=BSLC
- a=ASLC
Default: ALLBSV
CLIPOVR CLIP OVERRIDE CATEGORY
Prerequisites:
- CLIP is given within this command or entered before.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GCSERV- 3+
ENTR GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO OVERRIDE IS NOT POSSIBLE
YES OVERRIDE IS POSSIBLE
COLPOVR COLP OVERRIDE CATEGORY
Prerequisites:
- COLP is given within this command or entered before.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO OVERRIDE IS NOT POSSIBLE
YES OVERRIDE IS POSSIBLE
CLIRPRES CLIR PRESENTATION MODE
Prerequisites:
- CLIR is given within this command or entered before.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PERM PERMANENT
TEMPNRES TEMPORARY PRES. NOT RESTRICTED
TEMPRES TEMPORARY PRES. RESTRICTED
PRIO EMLPP PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the priority of enhanced
Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emtion (eMLPP)
service consisting of MAXIMUM and DEFAULT priority.
Notes:
- The parameter unit value DEFAULT EMLPP PRIORITY has
to be less or equal than MAXIMUM EMLPP PRIORITY.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MAXIMUM EMLPP PRIORITY
PRIO0 HIGHEST EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 0
PRIO1 EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 1
PRIO2 EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 2
PRIO3 EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 3
PRIO4 LOWEST EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 4
This parameter unit indicates the highest priority level the
subscriber is allowed to apply for an outgoing call set-up.
b: DEFAULT EMLPP PRIORITY
PRIO0 HIGHEST EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 0
PRIO1 EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 1
PRIO2 EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 2
PRIO3 EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 3
PRIO4 LOWEST EMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 4
This parameter unit defines the priority level which shall
be assigned to a call if no explicit priority is indicated
during call set-up.
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE
This parameter specifies a location services profile name.
Notes:
One profile name can be specified per location service.
Up to 3 profile names can be specified.
Compatibilities:
- a = CREL
- a = CUNREL
- a = PLMNOPR
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GCSERV- 4+
ENTR GCSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The LCS profile must have been created (CR LCS).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILTER FILTER NAME
This parameter defines the name of the filter, which is used for
modifying only those mobile subscribers that match predefined filter
criteria.
Notes:
- This parameter must not be used in single command mode. It may be
used only in group command mode.
Prerequisites:
- The filter must have been created (CR FILTER).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GCSERV- 5-
MOD GCSMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify GCS on MP
This task modifies the
Generation compatibility sign (GCS) of a MP software
Generation on system disk or on
magneto-optical disk. This task is not available in an
SSNC stand-alone configuration.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD GCSMP : Device Name= ,Generation= ,GCS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device Name
This parameter specifies the
destination device name, which is
either system disk or magneto-optical
disk device.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the modified
Generation.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
GCS
This parameter specifies the
generation compatibility sign. It is
used in an EWSD Innovation system to
indicate the compatibility of two part
APSes, EWSD part and SSNC part. If the
two signs are equal the two parts
belong together and are compatible.
After a new
Generation is created
the signs of the two parts are
assigned an initial and not valid
value (9999). After the creation of a
new Generation the
Generation compatibility sign (GCS)
of both parts must therefore be
assigned a valid value.
Input format: 1...9999, range of
decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GCSMP- 1-
ACT GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE GENERATION
This command activates a blocked file generation.
The generation must have been created by command
ENTR GEN or MOD DBSIZE.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a job with breakpoints. After a breakpoint the job can be
continued with CONT JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT GEN : GEN= [,ACTLEVEL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GEN NAME OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies the file generation
to be activated
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ACTLEVEL ACTIVATION LEVEL
This parameter specifies how to introduce the new
generation into the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOACT NO ACTIVATION
The new generation will not be introduced into
the system. It will be set valid
MINACT MINIMAL ACTIVATION
The new generation will be introduced into
the system without recovery.
LOWACT LOW ACTIVATION LEVEL
The new generation will be set valid and
introduced into the system with the lowest
CP recovery level as possible. Peripheral
units have to be configurated manually
afterwards.
GLOBACT GLOBAL ACTIVATION LEVEL
The new generation will be set valid and
introduced into the system with the
recovery level needed to load all impacted
units.
Default: GLOBACT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT GEN- 1-
CAN GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GENERATION
With this command, file generations stored on disk are deleted logically
and physically. All files of the specified generation are marked as
being not associated with the generation and files which do not belong
to any other generation are physically deleted. Before this is done,
the generation list is specified and an acknowledgment requested.
The list of the physically deleted files is output.
A check is made whether the generation to be deleted is not identical
with the current one and whether it is not the only valid golden
generation.
Log files which belong to a generation are not deleted.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ CAN GEN : GEN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation to be deleted. It is not
permissible to specify the current generation.
Structure of the generation name:
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
ff - APS function version
kk - APS correction version
l - local correction version (special patch status)
o - ODAGEN sequence number
ii - fixpoint sequence number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GEN- 1-
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPY GENERATION
This command copies either all files of a generation or only the
semipermanent files to disk or tape/optical disk. Only the current
generation, i.e. the loaded generation whose phase (code and data) is
active, can be copied to disk. Non-current generations, e.g. safeguarding
generations stored on disk can only be copied to tape / optical disk.
If a generation is copied to tape/optical disk, a modified generation
list (consisting of only one entry for the generation to be saved) is
also transferred to tape/optical disk.
In the following differences/restrictions between CP-standalone (CP/SA) and
CP running with a connected MP (CP/MP) will be marked.
The type of the generation to be created (command parameters TYPE=
GOLDEN,BACKUP) can be administrated.
If all files of a generation are copied, the destination generation is
of type backup (BACKUP) or golden (GOLDEN) and is set to
CP/SA: valid (VALID)
CP/MP: blocked (BLOCKED).
When creating a new generation the generation compatibility sign (GCS) is
set to
CP/SA: 0 and can never be modified
CP/MP: 9999 and can be modified with command MOD GEN
Note:
The GCS is needed when the CP is running with a connected MP. It is
needed by startup to determine compatible generations on both the CP and the MP
(compatible generations: GCS-CP = GCS-MP).
The value GCS=0 is reserved for CP/SA.
The value GCS=9999 indicates an invalid value, which needs to be changed
with the command MOD GEN.
CP/SA: If only the semipermanent data is copied, the destination generation is
of type fixpoint (FIX) and is set to blocked (BLOCKED).
CP/MP: the creation of a generation of type fixpoint (FIX) is not possible.
A generation on tape/optical disk is assigned the same validity status it
has on disk.
The validity flag can be changed with the command MOD GEN.
COPY GEN is an essential part of the system for APS safeguarding: it can
be used to create safeguarding generations on tape/optical disk or disk.
The components of the APS safeguarding system include the MML commands
COPY LOGFILE and TRANS SYFILE which transfer the safeguarding
generations from tape/optical disk or disk to disk for restoration purposes.
For APS safeguarding, a distinction must be made between an initial
installation generation which is created with ENTR INSTGEN, and
a database extension which is performed with MOD DBSIZE. UPD GEN
belongs to the disk debugging procedures.
A generation is a consistent, self-contained subset of the EWSD system files
which are required for the operation of an EWSD switching center. One such
file can be assigned to several generations.
Each generation is assigned a generation name. This generation name is a
character string consisting of 8 digits.
All generations of a switching system are listed in a special system file,
i.e. SY.GENLIST, which is not assigned to any generation. The entries, i.e.
the generations that exist in the system, are in the sequence in which
a fallback, if any, is to take place. In general, new generations precede
elder generations. A maximum of 31 generations can be administrated.
Safeguarding generations are generations which can be created by a special
safeguarding action from the current, i.e. the loaded generation.
The following table indicates which files/file types belong to which type
of safeguarding generation:
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GEN- 1+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
File | Fixpoint | Snapshot | Remarks
(file type) |on disk |on tape / |on disk |on tape /|
| |opt. disk | |opt. disk|
-------------|----------|----------| ---------|---------|--------------------
SY.GENLIST | | * | | * |On tape, the SY.
| | | | |GENLIST has only
| | | | |one entry, no
| | | | |generation file
SY.INSTALL | | | | * |no generation
| | | | |file
SY.SEMILIB | * | * | * | * |
SY.SIMP | * | * | * | * |only in exchanges
| | | | |with CCNC
SY.TASKLIB | z | | * | * |Z: file is merely
SY.LOADLIB.LA| z | | * | * |assigned to safe-
SY.LOADLIB.CA| z | | * | * |guarding generation,
SY.LOADLIB.MA| z | | * | * |and not physically
SY.PSW.T<nnn>| z | | * | * |copied; it also
| | | | |belongs to
| | | | |other generations
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Legend: * = physical copy of file
The following types of safeguarding generations exist:
Fixpoint : Safeguarding generation consists physically only of the
semipermanent data, i.e. of the files SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP;
all other files are identical with those of the current
generation and are only logically assigned to it.
Backup : Safeguarding generation consists of physical copies of all
files of an original generation;
Golden : Safeguarding generation is a backup having been tested with
startup by the operator.
A generation may have one of the validity flags BLOCKED, VALID and
invalid. The validity flag can be modified with the command MOD GEN,
but only from BLOCKED to VALID and vice versa. A generation on tape/
optical disk is assigned the same status it has on disk. With this command,
the type of a safeguarding generation can also be changed from BACKUP to
GOLDEN. This is useful especially in case one wants to adjust a generation
which was retransferred from tape/optical disk with TRANS SYFILE for a
specified purpose.
The validity status determines the startup capability of a generation. It
is of significance for all generation types. Only a valid generation can
be selected for the automatic fallback. A non-valid or blocked generation
is not used for automatic fallbacks.
However, a manual startup with blocked generations is always possible.
Generations which are to be copied to tape/optical disk are initially
copied to disk, if they contain the current semipermanent database
(SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP, if existing). Source generations having such a
property are either the current generation or generations originating from
merging a non-current generation with the current semipermanent database
("semicurrent" generation). The purpose of this procedure is to generate a
fixpoint of the semipermanent database on disk within a short period of time.
In a second step, this intermediate generation is copied to tape/optical disk.
On the other hand, source generations containing a non-current semipermanent
database are copied directly to tape/optical disk without using an
intermediate copy on disk.
In case the intermediate generation is not required to be permanent
(i.e., the source is semipermanent or OUTPUT = TAPMOD has been specified),
this intermediate generation is temporary, i.e. it appears to be an
invalid fixpoint generation.
CP/MP: OUTPUT = TAPMOD is not allowed.
Type and Validity of created generation on tape/optical disk
------------------------------------------------------------
(VSN /= SYSVSN) with COPY GEN
----------------------------
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| | created with
Source generation | Destination generation | command parameters
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GEN- 2+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TYPE / Actuality | TYPE / VALIDITY | OUTPUT / TYPE
--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------
NONE non-current | FIX * | FIX -
NONE non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
FIX non-current | FIX * | FIX -
| |
BACKUP non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
MERGED non-current | BACKUP * | GEN BACKUP
| |
GOLDEN non-current | GOLDEN * | GEN GOLDEN
| |
--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------
arbitrary current | BACKUP VALID | GEN/TAPMOD BACKUP
type | |
arbitrary current | GOLDEN VALID | GEN/TAPMOD GOLDEN
type | |
arbitrary current | FIX BLOCKED | FIX -
type | |
| |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
Legend: * = Validity of copy on tape/optical disk is taken to be the
same as that of source generation
TYPE = TYPE
BACKUP = BACKUP
GOLDEN = GOLDEN
VALIDITY = VALIDITY
VALID = VALID
BLOCKED = BLOCKED
OUTPUT = OUTPUT
GEN = GEN
TAPMOD = TAPMOD
FIX = FIX
MERGED = generated by MERGE GEN
For copy to tape, other OUTPUT/TYPE parameter combinations of the
command COPY GEN than those listed in the third column are not possible.
If the current source generation is specified for COPY GEN, and
OUTPUT = FIX or OUTPUT = GEN, then also a permanent copy on disk
is generated besides the copy on tape/optical disk.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ COPY GEN : OUTPUT= [,VSN=] [,GEN=] [,TYPE=] [,VERIFY=] [
[ [
[ [,RETPER=] [,REWIND=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUTPUT OUTPUT MODE OF COPYGEN
This parameter specifies whether all files of the generation or only
the semipermanent data (SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP) are to be copied or
the total current generation is to be copied directly to tape/optical
disk without generating a permanent copy on disk. If only the
semipermanent data are to be copied, the parameter TYPE is ignored.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIX SAVE SEMILIB/SIMP ONLY
Copies only the semipermanent data.
GEN SAVE WHOLE GENERATION
Copies all files of the generation.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GEN- 3+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TAPMOD SAVE GEN TO TAPE/OPT.DISK ONLY
Copies the current generation to tape/optical disk
immediately.
In contrary to the other possible methods for
creating a copy of the current generation on tape/
optical disk (OUTPUT= FIX/GEN, VSN =
Volume Serial Number of the tape/optical disk
used), no permanent copy of the current generation
on disk prior to the final copy on tape/optical
disk will be made. Only that part of the current
generation which contains its semipermanent data
is put into a temporary copy on disk.
Specification of a generation different from the
current one is not allowed. VSN is mandatory.
With OUTPUT=TAPMOD, it is not possible to
generate a fixpoint (= semipermanent data only)
on tape/optical disk.
The resulting copy on tape/optical disk of
TYPE=BACKUP/GOLDEN is set to VALID.
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER LIST
This parameter list specifies whether the generation is to be copied
on disk (VSN=SYSVSN) or tape/optical disk. Up to 5 tapes/optical
disks can be specified in the list:
VSN = <tape1> & <tape2> & <tape3> & <tape4> & <tape5>
(<tape1>...<tape5>: Volume Serial Number of tapes/optical disks).
It is not allowed to specify both VSN of tapes/optical disks and
SYSVSN in the list described above (VSN list).
The specification of VSNs of several tapes/optical disks before
starting the copy process to tape/optical disk allows COPY GEN
execution with automatic write access to continuation tapes/optical
disks. This is useful if the generation to be saved is very large.
The tapes/optical disks can be mounted on arbitrary tape/optical
disk units; not mounted tapes/optical disks will be requested by the
system. The system will also check if the initialization of the
continuation tapes/optical disks is identical with that of the first
one.
NOTE: for copy to tape/optical disk:
The copy of a generation may only occur either on tape OR on
optical disk (e.g. if copy has been started on tape then the
continuation medium must be tape!).
A compound of both mediums is not allowed!
The first tape/optical disk specified in the VSN list, must be
initialized before the copy to tape/optical disk starts. For this
action one has to use the following command:
For tape:
<INIT MT:VSN=<tape VSN>,CD=EBC,DENS=6250,MTD=<#tape device>;
For optical disk (MOD):
<INIT MO:VSN=<mod VSN>,CD=EBC,MOD=<#mod device>;
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation to be copied. The default
value is the current generation.
Structure of the generation name:
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
ff - APS function version
kk - APS correction version
l - local correction version (special patch status)
o - ODAGEN sequence number
ii - fixpoint sequence number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GEN- 4+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TYPE OF SAVE GENERATION
This parameter can be used (for OUTPUT = GEN or OUTPUT = TAPMOD)
to select whether a backup or golden generation is to be created. The
default value is BACKUP. For OUTPUT = FIX, the parameter TYPE is
not evaluated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BACKUP BACKUP GENERATION
Creates a backup generation.
CP/SA: If the current generation is copied with
OUTPUT = GEN and a permanent backup
generation on disk is created, all other
fixpoint and backup generations on disk are
deleted. A warning is output in this case.
In case that OUTPUT = TAPMOD was specified,
no existing fixpoints or safeguard generations
on disk are deleted.
CP/MP: no automatic deletion of older generations
will occur
GOLDEN GOLDEN GENERATION
Creates a golden generation.
CP/SA:If the current generation is copied with
OUTPUT = GEN and a permanent golden
generation on disk is created, all other
fixpoint, backup and golden generations are
deleted. A warning is output in this case.
In case that OUTPUT = TAPMOD was specified,
no existing fixpoints or safeguard generations
on disk are deleted.
CP/MP: no automatic deletion of generations
will occur.
Default: BACKUP
VERIFY VERIFY CHECKSUM
This parameter specifies whether a checksum audit is to be initiated
during COPY GEN. If a copy on disk is created with this option,
checksum audits are initiated both for the generation files to be
copied and for their copies. In this way, the copying process disk to
disk can be checked. If a copy on tape/optical disk is created,
checksum audits are initiated for the source generation files, and the
calculated checksums, together with the copies, are transferred to
tape/optical disk. When writing to tape/optical disk, the consistency
of the checksum is not checked against the tape/optical disk contents.
This is not possible until the tape/optical disk contents have been
copied back to disk with the aid of command TRANS SYFILE using its
verify function.
If the result of the checksum check is negative, COPY GEN is aborted
with an error message. If, on the one hand, checksum errors are
reported for the source generation, the latter has been found to be
faulty before the start of COPY GEN. If, on the other hand, checksum
errors are reported for the destination generation, errors within
COPY GEN have occurred.
See also the description of the command parameter VERIFY belonging
to the command TRANS SYFILE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES ACTIVATE CHECKSUM
Checksum audit is initiated
Y ACTIVATE CHECKSUM
Checksum audit is initiated
NO DEACTIVATE CHECKSUM
No checksum audit is initiated
N DEACTIVATE CHECKSUM
No checksum audit is initiated
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GEN- 5+
COPY GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RETPER RETENTION PERIOD
This parameter specifies the retention period of the copy on tape/
optical disk in days, taken from the creation date. During this time
period the tape/optical disk copy is protected against erasure. If no
value or 0 days is given, the tape/optical disk copy is not protected
at all. If VSN is not specified or VSN = SYSVSN, i.e. if only a
copy on disk is required, this parameter is ignored.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...36525, range of decimal numbers
REWIND REWIND TAPE
This parameter specifies whether the tape/optical disk should be
rewound/reset after execution of the command COPY GEN or not. The
default value is YES.
If REWIND = YES is specified, the tape/optical disk is rewound/
reset and released after execution of the command COPY GEN. Otherwise
the tape/optical disk is only released and
- subsequent commands (e.g. TRANS FILE) are allowed to continue
writing on the tape/optical disk mounted for COPY GEN
- access of following commands to this tape/optical disk can be
specified either by the tape/optical disk VSN or by the VSN of the
first tape/optical disk used for COPY GEN (File Group Name).
Therefore one is not forced to evaluate the actual VSN for following
commands, but can always refer to the static File Group Name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES REWIND TAPE
Y REWIND TAPE
NO DONT REWIND TAPE
N DONT REWIND TAPE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GEN- 6-
DISP GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GENERATION
This command displays file generation information for specific files or
for file generations.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP GEN : [DISPL=] [,GEN=] [,LIB=] [,VSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DISPL DISPLAY FUNCTION
This parameter specifies the information to be output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GEN GENERATION
Displays the generations with which a file given
in LIB is associated. LIB is mandatory,
GEN and VSN are ignored.
FILES FILES
Displays all files of the generation specified
in GEN. If GEN is not specified, the file
list of the currently loaded generation
is output. LIB and VSN are ignored.
LIST GENERATION LIST
Outputs the entire generation list in edited form
if GEN is not input, otherwise the desired
generation. LIB is ignored.
If VSN is specified and VSN is not identical
with SYSVSN, the information of the generation
list is output from tape/optical disk, otherwise
from disk.
Entries VSN000 and VSN001 are not permissible.
Default: LIST
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation, the information of which is to
be output.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command
description for COPY GEN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies the library (i.e. generation file),
whose generation membership is to be output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies whether either the generation information
of the disk or the tape/optical disk is to be output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GEN- 1-
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GENERATION
This command creates a new file generation. It is part of the file
generation concept of CP113.
A file generation is a summary of all system files of an APS.
This command enables to change or introduce systemfiles. Files that
are not changed will be taken from the current generation to the new.
It is possible to exclude classic GP-files (SY.PSW.nnn).
Depending on the state of the system the new generation will be set
valid and if necessary introduced into the system by recovery
immediately. Or it will be set blocked. The recovery level necessary
for bringing up the new generation will be ascertained automatically.
It results of the changed librarys.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a job with breakpoints. After a breakpoint the job can be
continued with CONT JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR GEN : [LIB=] [,EXCLSMOD=] [,EXCLLMOD=] [,EXCLCPS=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,EXCLLTYP=] [,EXCLLIB=] [,ACTLEVEL=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a library which is to be taken into the new
generation. The library has to be a Core Image format. The type of
the library will be ascertained automatically. This parameter can be
linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode. The maximal number
of inputs is dependent on the type of library:
- resident CP-SW (Tasklib) (1)
- non resident software (Loadlib.L) (1)
- non resident masks (Loadlib.M) (1)
- non resident command descriptions (Loadlib.C) (1)
- loadlib for peripheral software (20)
- GP-Load for MP (1)
- GP-Load for AMX (1)
- GP-Load for IWU (1)
Non resident CP-librarys can be delta or basis libraries.
The libraries have to be available on disk. They have to be doubled
and non generation files. Files names beginning with KS. are not
allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%
EXCLSMOD EXCLUDE SEMIP. DATA MODULE
This parameter specifies a data module of the semilib.
This parameter has a connection to the tasklib that was specified
by the a-parameter.
The data of the specified T/P-module will not be copied to the new
semilib.
This parameter can be linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GEN- 1+
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
up to 50 times.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
EXCLLMOD EXCLUDE LOAD MODULE
This parameter specifies a load module of a CP-loadlib.
This parameter has a connection to the library that was specified by
the a-parameter.
Only allowed if the new library is a delta library.
The specified load module is not taken to the new system loadlib.
This parameter can be linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode
for each CP-loadlib , up to 50 times.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
EXCLCPS EXCLUDE CAPSULE
This parameter specifies a capsule of actual MPULIB.
Only allowed if the new library is a delta library.
The specified capsule will not be taken into the new system
library.
This parameter can be linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode
up to 20 times.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
EXCLLTYP EXCLUDE LOAD TYPE
This parameter specifies a loadtype of actual MPULIB.
Only allowed if the new library is a delta library.
The specified loadtype and all capsules, belonging to this loadtype
only, will not be taken into the new system library.
This parameter can be linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode
up to 20 times.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
EXCLLIB EXCLUDE LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a PSW-Lib of the actual generation that
should not be taken into the new generation.
This parameter can be linked by "&" or repeated by continuation mode
up to 20 times.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%
ACTLEVEL ACTIVATION LEVEL
This parameter specifies how to introduce the new
generation into the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GEN- 2+
ENTR GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOACT NO ACTIVATION
The new generation will not be introduced into
the system. It will be set blocked
MINACT MINIMAL ACTIVATION
The new generation will be introduced into
the system without recovery.
LOWACT LOW ACTIVATION LEVEL
The new generation will be set valid and
introduced into the system with the lowest
CP recovery level as possible. Peripheral
units have to be configured manually
afterwards.
GLOBACT GLOBAL ACTIVATION LEVEL
The new generation will be set valid and
introduced into the system with the
recovery level needed to load all impacted
units.
Default: GLOBACT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GEN- 3-
MERGE GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE GENERATION
This command creates a new generation which contains the code of that
source generation specified as GENTASKL and the semipermanent data
of that one specified as GENSEMIL. The files are solely assigned to
the new generation, that is, they are not copied physically.
Subsequently, the newly created generation is set to blocked.
With command MOD GEN, such a generation can be set to VALID and from
VALID to BLOCKED subsequently.
One of the two source generations must be the loaded generation that
is in operation. The first six characters of the generation names of both
source generations must be identical.
This command can be used to save an APS from backup by (a) combining it with
a saved Semilib in the case of an APS whose Semilib is destroyed but whose
code is O.K., or (b) by combining it with code files in the case of an APS
whose code is destroyed (by patches) but whose Semilib is O.K.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command
description for COPY GEN.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ MERGE GEN : GENTASKL= ,GENSEMIL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GENTASKL FILE GENERATION OF TASKLIB
This parameter is used to specify the generation whose code is to be
transferred into the generation to be newly created, i.e., whose
tasklib, loadlibs and PSWlibs are to be used.
Structure of the generation name:
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
ff - APS function version
kk - APS correction version
l - local correction version (special patch status)
o - ODAGEN sequence number
ii - fixpoint sequence number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GENSEMIL FILE GENERATION OF SEMILIB
This parameter is used to specify the generation whose semipermanent
data are to be transferred into the generation to be newly created,
i.e., whose files SY.SEMILIB and SY.SIMP are to be used.
Structure of the generation name:
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
ff - APS function version
kk - APS correction version
l - local correction version (special patch status)
o - ODAGEN sequence number
ii - fixpoint sequence number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GEN- 1+
MERGE GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GEN- 2-
MOD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GENERATION
This command changes the validity flag and the type of a generation.
The latter is possible only if the specified generation is
of type backup.
If the CP is running with a connected MP (CP/MP) then also the
generation compatibility sign (GCS) can be changed.
Fixpoints and combined (merged) generations are always blocked at the time
they are created (BLOCKED), backups and golden generations always valid
(VALID).
CP/MP: backup (BACKUP) and golden (GOLDEN) generations are always blocked
(BLOCKED) at the time they are created.
Status invalid is exclusively set by the system itself.
The valid flag defines the startup capability of a generation. It is of sig-
nificance for both current and non-current generations as well as for all
generation types. A valid generation can be selected for the automatic fall-
back. An invalid or blocked generation is not used for automatic fallbacks.
A manual startup, however, is also possible with blocked generations.
In the following cases, a required change of validity is rejected:
- The generation is neither blocked nor valid
- The generation is a valid current generation
- The generation is the initial generation
- The generation is the only valid golden generation on the disk
The change of type of generations which are of other type than of
backup is rejected.
The GCS of a generation can only be changed in CP/MP state.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command
description for COPY GEN.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD GEN : GEN= ,VALIDITY= [,TYPE=] [,GCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GEN FILE GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation whose validity flag is to be
changed. The current generation must not be specified.
Structure of the generation name:
|----------|
| ffkkloii |
|----------|
Meaning:
ff - APS function version
kk - APS correction version
l - local correction version (special patch status)
o - ODAGEN sequence number
ii - fixpoint sequence number
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
VALIDITY VALIDITY OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies whether a generation is to be set to blocked
or to valid.
Status invalid is exclusively set by the system itself.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GEN- 1+
MOD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BLOCKED SET GENERATION BLOCKED
The generation will be set to blocked.
VALID SET GENERATION VALID
The generation will be set to valid.
TYPE NEW TYPE OF GENERATION
This parameter can be used to change the type of a generation
simultaneously with its validity. If no value is specified, the type
will be left unchanged.
It is only allowed to specify TYPE = GOLDEN for a generation of
initial type backup.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BACKUP BACKUP GENERATION
This parameter value is not permitted, i.e.
it is not allowed to change a generation of
TYPE = GOLDEN into BACKUP.
GOLDEN GOLDEN GENERATION
A generation of TYPE = BACKUP is changed
to GOLDEN.
GCS GENERATION COMPATIBILITY SIGN
This parameter can only be entered when the CP is running with a
connected MP.
It specifies the generation compatibility sign, i.e. the criterion
to find the compatible generation on the MP.
If this parameter is not entered the GCS will remain unchanged.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9998, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GEN- 2-
UPD GEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE GENERATION
This command is called after a double disk failure or when the Semilib of
the current generation is defective, invalid or no longer exists, in
order to restore an executable generation on disk and to continue system
operations.
UPD GEN can be used for saving the current status of the semipermanent
data during the debugging procedures for disk failures.
If the Semilib exists on disk after a double disk failure, the Semilib is
checked for compatibility with the semipermanent main memory area and is
then overwritten with the contents of the main memory area. If SY.SEMI-
LIB does not exist, it is newly created and overwritten with the contents
of the semipermanent main memory area of the CP (mass update).
UPD GEN does not perform a reconstruction of CCNC-Semilib SY.SIMP. Before
a command is executed, a check is made whether system file SY.SIMP, which
contains semipermanent CCNC data, is compatible with the current status of
the semipermanent main memory area in the CP.
Incompatibility may occur when, after a failure of the exchange, a SY.SIMP
with an old status has been read in with the aid of TRANS SYFILE. The
status of SY.SIMP is obsolete if CCNC commands have been processed between
the dump of this file and the failure. The SY.SIMP used before the failure
thus contains more recent entries which do not exist in the SY.SIMP read
in, but are in accordance with the current status of SY.SEMILIB. The SY.SIMP
read in is then not compatible with the current SY.SEMILIB.
The compatibility check consists of a checksum comparison between the
SY.SIMP read in (old status) and the checksum of the current SY.SIMP
stored in the main memory.
After a forced termination during the reconstruction with a recovery level
higher than a newstart of the processes without code or data reloading,
restoring the SY.SEMILIB is no longer possible. In this case, a recovery
with a safeguarding generation and an off-line disk reconstruction must be
carried out.
For general information on the generation concept, see command descrip-
tion for COPY GEN.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ UPD GEN ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 UPD GEN- 1-
CAN GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Generation on Coupled CP and MP
Cancel Generation on Coupled CP and MP
This task cancels (deletes) generations on the
system disks of CP and MP in coupled CP-MP
systems.
It is possible to cancel compatible generation pairs
on CP and MP, or non-compatible generations that
exist on one side only.
Possible Effects:
- Incautious execution of this task may compromise
the regular operation of the exchange!
Notes:
- Exactly one of the three task parameters must be
specified:
GCS for compatible generation pairs on CP and MP,
CP generation for generations on the CP side only, or
MP generation for generations on the MP side only.
- The loaded generation pair on CP and MP, and
the last GOLDEN generation on CP cannot be
cancelled.
- A confirmation is requested before the generation is
cancelled.
- Log files that belong to a generation are not
cancelled. The task CAN INPLOGFILE can be
used for this purpose.
- This task cancels generations only from the system
disks of CP and MP. The tasks CAN GEN and
CAN GENMP can be used to cancel generations on
magneto-optical disks of CP and MP, respectively.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN GENCPMP : CP generation= ,GCS= ,MP generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CP generation
CP generation
This parameter specifies the non-compatible CP
generation that is cancelled.
Compatible CP generations that have a counterpart on
MP cannot be cancelled via this parameter. Parameter
GCS must be specified in this case to cancel the
generations on both sides.
Input format:
- 8 characters from the symbolic name character set.
- ?
Input values:
- The name of a non-compatible CP generation.
- ? to get a list of names for all non-compatible CP
generations that can be cancelled.
Exactly one of the three task parameter must be
specified.
GCS
Generation compatibility sign
This parameter specifies the pair of compatible
generations on CP and MP that are cancelled.
Non-compatible generations that exist on one side only
cannot be cancelled via this parameter. The generation
name must be specified in this case in parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GENCPMP- 1+
CAN GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CP generation for CP generations, respectively
parameter MP generation for MP generations.
Input format:
- Integer value between 1 and 9998.
- ?
Input values:
- The common GCS of a pair of compatible generations.
- ? to get a list of GCS for all compatible generation
pairs that can be cancelled.
Exactly one of the three task parameters must be
specified.
MP generation
MP generation
This parameter specifies the non-compatible MP
generation that is cancelled.
Compatible MP generations that have a counterpart on
CP cannot be cancelled via this parameter. Parameter
GCS must be specified in this case to cancel the
generations on both sides.
Input format:
- 1..8 characters without space:
letters (also capitals), numbers, and the characters
! . $ % # + - _
- ?
This parameter is case-sensitive.
Input values:
- The name of a non-compatible MP generation.
- ? to get a list of names for all non-compatible MP
generations that can be cancelled.
Exactly one of the three task parameter must be
specified.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GENCPMP- 2-
COPY GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Copy Generation on Coupled CP and MP
Copy Generation on Coupled CP and MP
This task copies the loaded CP and MP generations
in coupled CP-MP systems to safeguarding generations
on the system disks of CP and MP, respectively.
The created CP generation can be a BACKUP or
a GOLDEN generation.
The generation compatibility sign (GCS) of the
created CP and MP generations is set to a common
value to indicate that they are a compatible
generation pair.
The new GCS is defined automatically: the highest
valid GCS found on CP and MP is incremented by 1.
Furthermore, the validity flag of the new CP generation
is set to valid, if it is not a GOLDEN generation.
For GOLDEN generations it is set to blocked.
The open input log file is closed, and a new input log
file is created, because is necessary to change the
input log file when a backup copy of the complete
loaded generation is made.
Prerequisites:
- No invalid generation (GCS=9999) may exist on the
system disk of CP or MP before backup.
- Less than five MP generations may exist on the
MP system disk.
- Enough disk space must be available on the CP
and MP system disk.
- The loaded MP generation must have the highest
generation sequence number.
Notes:
- The prerequisites can be verified by the task
DISP GENCPMP. If the prerequisites are not met,
cancel generations by the task CAN GENCPMP,
or modify the generation sequence number by the
task MOD GENMP.
- This is a long-running task. An information message
is displayed, and the user has to confirm the
execution of the task.
- The task is performed in two phases:
1. Copying the generations
2. Setting the GCS and the validity flag
- If phase 1 fails, rollback is performed to restore the
situation as it was before. This rollback cancels
invalid generations (GCS=9999) on either side.
- If phase 2 fails, the GCS and the validity flag can be
set by the separate task MOD GENCPMP.
- The validity flag of GOLDEN CP generations must be
separately set to valid by the task MOD GEN after
the startup test. A non-valid or blocked generation
is not used for automatic fallbacks, but a manual
startup with blocked generations is always possible.
- This task can be used only to copy generations on
the system disks of CP and MP. There are separate
tasks to copy CP and MP generations to magneto-
optical disks: COPY GEN for CP generations,
COPY GENMP for MP generations.
Input format

[ [
[ COPY GENCPMP : Backup type= ,New MP generation= [
[ [
[ ,New input log file= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Backup type
Type of the new CP generation
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GENCPMP- 1+
COPY GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies whether a BACKUP or GOLDEN
generation is created on CP.
- BACKUP: the safeguarding generation consists of
physical copies of all files of the loaded generation.
This type is used for routine savings.
- GOLDEN: the safeguarding generation is a backup
which must be tested with startup by the operator.
Input format:
- BACKUP or GOLDEN
Default: BACKUP
New MP generation
Name of the new MP generation
This parameter specifies the name of the new MP
generation.
Input format:
- 1..8 characters without space:
letters (also capitals), numbers, and the characters
! . $ % # + - _
- ?
This parameter is case-sensitive.
Input values:
- A new generation name that must end with a number,
e.g. DBXY_34.
- ? to get a proposal for the new MP generation name.
This displays the name that is automatically defined in
the default case.
Default:
The MP generation name is defined automatically: it is
derived from the generation name that ends with the
highest number. This number is incremented by 1.
Example: if DBXY_34 is the generation name with the
highest number, the new MP generation name is
DBXY_35.
Notes:
- The name of the new CP generation cannot be defined
by the user.
New input log file
Logical name of the new input log file
This parameter specifies the logical name of the new
input log file.
The logical name is the part of the full file name which
can be defined by the user, and which is common to all
related log files. For instance, it is the <LogicalName>
part of the full name LG.<LogicalName>.A0.MASTER of
a master log file.
Input format:
- 1..17 characters without space:
letters (also capitals), numbers, and the characters
! $ % & # + - _ ( ) , / ; < = > @ [ ] { } |
This parameter is case-sensitive.
Input values:
- A new log file name.
Default:
The logical name of the new input log file is the date
and time of its creation in the format YYMMDDhhmmss.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GENCPMP- 2-
DISP GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Generation on Coupled CP and MP
Display Generation on Coupled CP and MP
This task displays the list of generations in coupled
CP-MP systems. The listed CP and MP generations
can be located on the system disks or on magneto-
optical disks (MODs) of CP and MP, respectively.
Input:
- Display generations on CP and MP system disk:
Enter MDD into both task parameters (default).
- Display generations on a CP MOD only:
Enter the VSN of the MOD into parameter VSN,
and leave parameter Device name empty.
- Display generations on a MP MOD only:
Enter the device name of the MOD into parameter
Device name, and leave parameter VSN empty.
- Display generations on a CP MOD and a MP MOD:
Enter the VSN and the device name of the MODs
into the corresponding task parameters.
Output:
The output table is divided into three main groups:
GCS: The generation compatibility sign is always
displayed.
CP GENERATIONS: Attributes of CP generations.
This group is present only when CP generations
are displayed. It contains columns for the following
attributes:
- Name: the name of the CP generation
- Creation Date: creation date and time of the CP
generation
- History: indicates the type of the generation
- Validity: the validity flag
MP GENERATIONS: Attributes of MP generations.
This group is present only when MP generations
are displayed. It contains columns for the following
attributes:
- Name: the name of the MP generation
- Creation Date: creation date and time of the
MP generation
- Seq: the generation sequence number
- BAP: the boot area position
- States: a combination of
administrative state: loc=locked, unl=unlocked
usage state: idl=idle, act=active, bus=busy
operational state: dis=disabled, ena=enabled
The output table is sorted according to CP output.
Compatible generations on CP and MP (equal GCS)
appear in the same line. MP generations without a
a counterpart on the CP are appended to the list.
The common generation compatibility sign (GCS) of
the loaded CP and MP generation is shown if
generations on the system disks are listed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP GENCPMP : Device name= ,VSN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device name
Device name of MP disk
This parameter specifies the MP disk from which
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GENCPMP- 1+
DISP GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
generations are listed.
Input format:
- MDD, MOD0 or MOD1
- ?
Input values:
- MDD to display generations on the MP system disk.
In this case parameter VSN must also be set
to MDD.
- The device name of a MP MOD (magneto-optical disk).
Valid device names are MOD0 and MOD1.
In this case parameter VSN must not be set
to MDD.
- ? to get all possible device names.
- Leave this parameter empty to display only generations
on the MP MOD specified by parameter Device name.
Default: MDD
VSN
Volume serial number of CP disk
This parameter specifies the CP disk from which
generations are listed.
Input format:
- MDD
- 1..6 characters from the symbolic name character set.
- ?
Input values:
- MDD to display generations on the CP system disk.
In this case parameter Device name must also
be set to MDD.
- The VSN of a CP MOD (magneto-optical disk).
In this case parameter Device name must not
be set to MDD.
- ? to get all possible VSNs.
- Leave this parameter empty to display only generations
on the MP MOD specified by parameter Device name.
Default: MDD
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GENCPMP- 2-
MOD GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Generation on Coupled CP and MP
Modify Generation on Coupled CP and MP
This task assigns a common generation compatibility
sign (GCS) between 1 and 9998 to a CP and a MP
generation. This forms a compatible generation pair
in a coupled CP-MP system.
Furthermore, the validity flag of the CP generation is
set to valid, if it is not a GOLDEN generation.
For GOLDEN generations it is set to blocked.
Preconditions:
- Exactly one invalid generation (GCS=9999) must
exist on both the CP and the MP system disk. The
common GCS is assigned to these two invalid
generations.
Notes:
- A valid GCS (1..9998) assigned to one CP and one
MP generation indicates that these generations are
compatible.
- The GCS is 9999 if no counterpart is known for a
generation on the other side.
- It is possible that several invalid generations
(GCS=9999) exist on CP and MP, but normally there
should be only compatible generation pairs.
- This task can be used only to define compatible
generation pairs on the system disks of CP and MP.
It can neither modify a valid GCS, nor the GCS on
CP or MP only.
- The GCS can also be modified separately on CP
and MP by the tasks MOD GEN and MOD GCSMP,
respectively.
Caution: The separate modification of the GCS on
CP or MP may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
- The validity flag of GOLDEN CP generations must be
separately set to valid by the task MOD GEN after
the startup test. A non-valid or blocked generation
is not used for automatic fallbacks, but a manual
startup with blocked generations is always possible.
- Other generation attributes can be modified
separately on CP and MP by the tasks MOD GEN
and MOD GENMP, respectively.
- The tasks MOD GEN, MOD GCSMP, and
MOD GENMP mentioned above can modify
attributes on system disk or magneto-optical disk.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD GENCPMP : GCS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
GCS
New generation compatibility sign
This parameter specifies the new generation
compatibility sign (GCS) that is assigned to the CP
and MP generation to define them to be compatible.
Input format:
- Integer value between 1 and 9998.
- ?
Input values:
- A number between 1 and 9998 that is not assigned to
any other generation.
- ? to get a proposal for the new GCS. This displays
the GCS that is automatically assigned in the default
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GENCPMP- 1+
MOD GENCPMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
case.
Default:
The new GCS is defined automatically: the highest valid
GCS found on CP and MP is incremented by 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GENCPMP- 2-
BLD GENINSMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Build Generation First Install on MP
This task builds the loaded software
Generation on the system disk during
first installation.
The system disk must be empty, i.e. labeled.
The Code portion is taken from the
loaded Generation which was loaded during
startUp from MOD.
The Data portion always taken from the loaded
Generation and is added by a
database snapshot.
In an EWSD Innovation system the
Generation compatibility sign (GCS) has to be supplied
with a reasonable value by means of task MOD GCSMP.
Prerequisites:
- This task must not be called before the system reached
the syncronisation point 8 and the recovery
post-procesing is finished (all code files must be
closed).
Notes:
- This task is a long-running operation. The NE issues
begin-, progress- and end event reports.
Input format

[ [
[ BLD GENINSMP : Generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the loaded Generation to
be built on the system disk.
The Generation was loaded
during startup from MOD.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 BLD GENINSMP- 1-
CAN GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Generation on MP
This task cancels a software Generation
on MP. The task deletes a fallback
Generation on system disk (MDD) or on
the magneto-optical disk (MOD), depending on the input
parameter Device name. The loaded
Generation cannot be deleted.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN GENMP : Device name= ,Generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device name
This parameter specifies the
destination device name, which can be
either system disk or magneto-optical
disk device.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the Generation to be
canceled. This cannot be the
Generation currently
loaded.
Input format: 1...8 characters from the
character set without
space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GENMP- 1-
COPY GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Copy Generation on MP
This task copies a software Generation
on MP. There are two functionalities:
1. Copy of the loaded (running)
Generation on system disk (successful
only in a SSNC stand-alone configuration):
The task copies all Code and
Data files into a new
Generation on
Boot area pos. one.
During a running backup copying the input log file
will be changed. The existing one is closed and a new
one will be created. The new input log file name can
be specified with the optional input parameter New
log file name. If not specified, the default name of
the input log file is used.
2. Copy of a fallback Generation on MOD:
The task copies an existing fallback
Generation
(Boot area pos. >= 1) from the system
disk (MDD) to a magneto-optical disk device (MOD). The
name of the new Generation on MOD is
the same as the name as the copied
Generation.
Prerequisites:
for 1 and 2:
- Less than five Generations exist
already on disk
- Enough disk space is available
for 1:
- Loaded (running) Generation should
have the highest Sequence no. of all
Generations on the system disk in
order to ensure its uniqueness. In case it has not the
highest Sequence no., please modify it by
means of the task MOD GENMP.
Notes:
- This is a long-running task. The NE issues
begin-, progress- and end event reports.
Input format

[ [
[ COPY GENMP : Device name= [,Generation=] [,New generation=] [
[ [
[ [,New input log file=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device name
This parameter specifies the
destination device name: system disk
or magneto-optical disk device.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the copied fallback
Generation; it is
relevant only if device = MOD0 or MOD1.
Input format: 1...8 characters from the
character set without
space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GENMP- 1+
COPY GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
New generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the new (backup)
Generation. It is
relevant only if device = MDD
Input format: 1...8 characters from the
character set without
space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
New input log file
This parameter specifies the user
defined part of the new input log
file name. The default file name
consists of the current system date
and time: YYMMDDHHMMSS;
Relevant only if device = MDD.
Input format:
name: 1...17 characters from the
character set
Input values: no restrictions
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY GENMP- 2-
CR GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Generation on MP
This task creates a software Generation.
This is the first step in the System Upgrade/External
Restore task sequence. The next step after the successful
delivery of the Generation files is the
task VAL GENMP.
Prerequisites:
- A valid Upgrade Control Table (UCT) File is required.
- A copy (backup) of the loaded Generation
must have been done before creation of a new
Generation is started during System
Upgrade.
Input format

[ [
[ CR GENMP : New generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
New generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the new Generation to
be created.
Input format: 1...8 characters from the
character set without
space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GENMP- 1-
DISP GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Generation on MP
This task displays a software
Generation on MP.
Depending on the input parameters, the task provides the
following functionalities:
1. Displays a list of all Generations
with or without several attributes from system disk or
magneto-optical disk.
Relevant input parameters:
Device name, Attribute flag
2. Displays one Generation with all
attributes from system disk or magneto-optical disk.
Relevant input parameters:
Device name, Generation
3. Displays a list of all Code or
Data files of a
Generation with several attributes
from system disk or magneto-optical disk. Be aware
that there might be as many as hundred or more
Data files which are part of a
Generation !
Relevant input parameters:
Device name, Generation, File type
4. Displays one Code or
Data file of a
Generation with all attributes from
system disk or magneto-optical disk.
All input parameters are relevant:
Device name, Generation, File type, File
Input format

[ [
[ DISP GENMP : Device name= ,Attribute flag= [,Generation=] [
[ [
[ [,File type=] [,File=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device name
This parameter specifies the
destination device name which is
either system disk or magneto-optical
disk device. It is relevant for all 4
functionalities.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Attribute flag
This parameter specifies whether the list
of Generations
on either system disk or magneto-optical
disk device is displayed with or without
generation attributes.
It is relevant only for functionality 1.
Input values: FALSE, TRUE
Generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the displayed Generation.
It is relevant for functionalities 2,
3, 4.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GENMP- 1+
DISP GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
File type
This parameter specifies whether
Code or
Data file(s) are
displayed. It is relevant for
functionalities 3 and 4.
Be aware that when choosing Data,
several Data files might
be displayed !
Examples for Code files:
SY.MPULIB,
SY.AMXLIB
Examples for Data files:
DBMS.DA.002.00000,
DBMS.DA.002.00024
File
This parameter specifies the name of
the displayed Code or
Data file. It is relevant
only for functionality 4.
Input format: 1...30 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GENMP- 2-
INST GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Install Delivered Generation on MP
This task installs the newly created and validated software
Generation. This is the next
step in the System Upgrade task sequence after the task VAL
GENMP and is followed by the task UTIL GENMP.
This action includes the following:
a. during System Upgrade:
- Prepares the newly created and validated
Generation for activation.
- Loads new code to the peripheral unit (PCP) FEPROMs
while the PCP is still working for the switching
part with the old code in memory.
- Splits all MPs; thus canceling MP redundancy
- Activates the new software
Generation in the nonswitching
part of the MPs.
- Transfers semipermanent data from the switching to
the nonswitching part of the MPs.
b. during External Restore :
- Prepares the newly created and validated
Generation for activation.
- Deletes the Upgrade Control Table (UCT).
Afterwards, a load recovery can be started to load
the new Generation (e.g. by doing a
restore by task REST GENMP).
Prerequisites:
- A valid Upgrade Control Table (UCT) file is required.
- The new Generation has been created
and validated.
Notes:
This task is a long-running operation. The NE issues
begin-, progress- and end event reports.
Input format

[ [
[ INST GENMP : New generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
New generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the new Generation to
be installed.
Input format: 1...8 characters from the
character set without
space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INST GENMP- 1-
MERGE GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Merge Generations on MP
This task builds a new fallback software
Generation on the system disk of the MP.
A merge of the Data files
of one Generation and the
Code files of another
Generation to a new
Generation is carried out. The
parameters Data generation and Code generation
specify the Generations from which the
Data and the Code
portions are copied.
The Code portion can be selected from
any Generation without restrictions. The
Data portion can be selected from any
Generation, except the loaded one.
This is a simple way to copy a
Generation on an MOD back to the system
disk (even with the possibility of implicit renaming). No
LOADREC3 is executed.
In an EWSD Innovation system the
Generation compatibility sign (GCS) has to be supplied
with a reasonable value by means of task MOD GCSMP.
Notes:
- This is a long-running task. The NE issues
begin-, progress- and end event reports.
- In order to use this new Generation,
it has to be restored by task REST GENMP
Input format

[ [
[ MERGE GENMP : New generation= ,Code device= ,Code generation= [
[ [
[ ,Data device= ,Data generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
New generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the new Generationto
be built.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
Code device
This parameter specifies the source of
the Code portion
Generation, which is
either the system disk or the
magneto-optical disk device.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Code generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the Code portion
source
Generation.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GENMP- 1+
MERGE GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
Data device
This parameter specifies the source of
the Data portion
Generation, which is
either the system disk or the
magneto-optical disk device.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Data generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the Data portion source
Generation (not the
loaded one).
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GENMP- 2-
MOD GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Generation on MP
This task modifies one attribute of a software
Generation on MP. The following
Generation attributes can be modified:
1. Patch rev. of the loaded MP
Generation on system disk
2. Admin. state of a fallback MP
Generation (means not the loaded one)
on system disk or an archive
Generation on magneto-optical disk.
3. Sequence no. of a MP
Generation on system disk or an
archive Generation on magneto-optical
disk.
The Generation compatibility sign (GCS) of an MP
Generation can be modified by means of
the task MOD GCSMP, which is however not available in
an SSNC stand-alone system.
Notes:
- Only one Generation attribute can be
modified at a time.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD GENMP : Device name= [,Generation=] [,Patch revision=] [
[ [
[ [,Admin. state=] [,Sequence number=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device name
This parameter specifies the
destination device name, which is
either system disk or magneto-optical
disk device. It is not relevant for
the modification of the
Patch rev..
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the modified
Generation; it is not
relevant for the modification of the
Patch rev..
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
Patch revision
This parameter identifies the revision
of the patch state. It is defined as a
unique number in the range of (0:999)
for a specific version.
The Patch rev. is
initialized during creation of a
Generation with 0.
During backup copy of the loaded
Generation it is
copied from the loaded to the backup
Generation. Usually
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GENMP- 1+
MOD GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the Patch rev. has to
be set from the managing system when a
complete revision has been
incorporated successfully. This
attribute can be modified only for the
loaded Generation,
which is determined within this task.
Input format: 0...999, range of
decimal numbers
Input values: no restrictions
Initial value: 0
Admin. state
This parameter specifies the
administrative state of a
Generation
This attribute cannot be modified for
the loaded
Generation.
Input values: Selection from :
Unlocked
Locked
Sequence number
This parameter specifies the serial
number of a
Generation. It is
defined during creation of a
Generation. During
system upgrade it is initialized with
0; during backup of the loaded
Generation the
Sequence no. of the backup
Generation is copied
from the loaded
Generation (before
the backup is performed) and the value
of the loaded
Generation is
incremented by 1 after the backup is
completed.
Input format: 0...999, range of
decimal numbers
Input values: no restrictions
Initial value: 0
Notes:
The loaded Generation
should have the highest value in
comparison to the other
Generations.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GENMP- 2-
REM GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Remove Generations on MP
This task finalizes the System Upgrade on MP. This step
follows after the task UTIL GENMP and is the last task in
the System Upgrade task sequence.
This task
- deletes all old Generations
- resets upgrade specific flags and tasks.
Prerequisites:
- A valid Upgrade Control Table (UCT) file is required.
- The new Generation has been installed
and utilized.
Input format

[ [
[ REM GENMP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REM GENMP- 1-
REST GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Restore Generation on MP
This task restores an MP Generation from
the system disk or the magneto-optical disk device (MOD).
The task provides 2 functionalities:
1. Restore and activation of a fallback
Generation from the system disk.
2. Restore and activation of a archive
Generation from magneto-optical disk
device (MOD). The Generation is
first copied from MOD onto the system disk before it
is activated.
The restored Generation is activated by
initiating a load recovery (LOADREC3).
Possible Effects:
- The restored fallback Generation from
system disk is activated by a load recovery (LOADREC3).
Notes:
- This is a long-running task. The NE issues the
following event reports:
begin- and progress event reports
restoreActiveNotification
- This task can be used in case the active generation was disabled
and can not be repaired during running operation.
This task can not be used in case of double disk outage or first installation;
therefore tasks REP DDISKOUT and BLD GENINSMP are available.
The system disk must NOT be labeled !
Input format

[ [
[ REST GENMP : Device name= ,Generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device name
This parameter specifies the source
device name, which is either system
disk or magneto-optical disk device.
Input values: MDD, MOD0, MOD1
Generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the Generation which
will be activated.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REST GENMP- 1-
UTIL GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Utilize Installed Generation on MP
This task causes utilization of the installed software
Generation. This is the next step in the
System Upgrade task sequence after the task INST GENMP
and is followed by the task REM GENMP.
This action includes the following:
- Transfers the switching function to those sides of
the split MP units with the new software version
load. All former switching MP units, i.e., those
with the old software version load, are reset. In
addition all peripheral units perform a soft reset
to activate the new software version.
- Merges the MP units; thus complete system
redundancy is re-established.
Prerequisites:
- A valid Upgrade Control Table (UCT) File is required.
- The new Generation has been installed.
Notes:
This task is a long-running operation. The NE issues
begin-, progress- and end event reports.
Input format

[ [
[ UTIL GENMP : New generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
New generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the new Generation to
be utilized.
Input format: 1...8 characters from the
character set without
space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 UTIL GENMP- 1-
VAL GENMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Validate Delivered Generation on MP
This task validates the newly created
Generation, i.e. delivery
of a new Generation or build of the
Generation files during System Upgrade or
External Restore has successfully completed. This task
follows after a Generation has been
created (tasks CR GENMP or BLD GENUPGMP) and the
Generation files are available.
The next step following validation in the System Upgrade /
External Restore task sequence is the task INST GENMP.
Prerequisites:
- A valid Upgrade Control Table (UCT) File is required.
- The new Generation has been created
(tasks CR GENMP or BLD GENUPGMP) and the
Generation files are available.
Input format

[ [
[ VAL GENMP : New generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
New generation
This parameter is the name of the new
Generation to be
validated.
Input format: 1...8 characters from the
character set without
space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 VAL GENMP- 1-
BLD GENUPGMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Build Generation During Upgrade on MP
This task builds a software Generation
on MP during System Upgrade from MOD. This is the first
step in the task sequence for System Upgrade from MOD.
This task is followed by task VAL GENMP.
The Code portion of the new
Generation is taken from any
Generation on any MOD. The specification
of a Data portion is not allowed. The
Data is added later on by online data
transfer from the old to the new
Generation .
Prerequisites:
- A valid Upgrade Control Table (UCT) file is required.
- A copy (backup) of the loaded
Generation must have been done before
build of a new Generation is started
during System Upgrade from MOD.
Notes:
- This task is a long-running operation. The NE issues
begin-, progress- and end event reports.
Input format

[ [
[ BLD GENUPGMP : New generation= ,MOD name= ,Code generation= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
New generation
This parameter specifies the name of
the new Generationto
be built.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
MOD name
This parameter specifies the device
name of the magneto-optical disk
device MOD from which the
Code portion
source generation will be copied.
Input values: MOD0 or MOD1
Code generation
This parameter specifies the name of the
Code portion source
generation.
Input format: 1...8 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 BLD GENUPGMP- 1-
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD GRADE OF SERVICE
This command activates the recording function for grade-of-service data
for the entire exchange.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- Only one measurement job can be started.
- The traffic data are output to MDD file every 15 minutes within
the selected measurement intervals.
UNIT=OMT is not permissible
for the grade-of-service measurement.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC GOS : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GOS- 1+
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
output in daily files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GOS- 2+
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GOS- 3+
REC GOS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GOS- 4-
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD GROUP PROCESSOR
This command activates the recording function for the load data of the GP.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- A maximum of together 8 jobs of REC GP and REC LTG may be
entered at the same time.
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY OR CYCLIC.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC GP : LTG= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of the LTG for which traffic
data have to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all LTG (LTG=X-X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY].
- Measurement of LTGSETS (LTG=n-X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY or CYCLIC] (n = 0 to 31).
Notes:
- A maximum of 16 single LTG may linked per command.
- The single LTG list will be automaticaly expanded if the
single LTG is a Master or Slave LTG.
* LTG = Master
all Slaves will be added
* LTG = Slave
the Master LTG and all other Slaves will be added.
- A maximum of 8 LTGSETS may linked per command.
- It is not possible to combine single LTG and LTGSETS
in one Measurement Job.
- The maximum number of LTGs which can be measured
simultaneously with either job REC LTG or REC GP
is limited depending on the configuration. It is not
possible to start more than one job with LTG=X-X.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the switching network hardware this unit
represents the time stage group (TSG for SNB) or the
switching network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GP- 1+
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the GP number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
CYCLIC CYCLIC TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file. Time
parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full, the newest data
will be lost. This occurs after a period of
two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily, single or cyclic measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GP- 2+
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GP- 3+
REC GP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC GP- 4-
CAN GPRSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
This command deletes a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context
subscription record. The PDP context subscription record
contains the General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) subscription
data of a mobile subscriber.
The command DISP MSUB is used to display the stored
PDP context subscription records of a mobile subscriber.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GPRSERV : MSIN= ,PDPREC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PDPREC PDP RECORD
This parameter specifies a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context
subscription record.
Enter X to delete all PDP records of the selected subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PDPREC1 PDP RECORD ONE
PDPREC2 PDP RECORD TWO
PDPREC3 PDP RECORD THREE
PDPREC4 PDP RECORD FOUR
PDPREC5 PDP RECORD FIVE
PDPREC6 PDP RECORD SIX
PDPREC7 PDP RECORD SEVEN
PDPREC8 PDP RECORD EIGHT
PDPREC9 PDP RECORD NINE
PDPREC10 PDP RECORD TEN
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GPRSERV- 1-
ENTR GPRSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
This command defines a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context
subscription record. The PDP context subscription record
contains the General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) subscription
data of a mobile subscriber. For each subscriber it is possible
to store up to 10 PDP context subscription records.
The command DISP MSUB is used to display the stored
PDP context subscription records of a mobile subscriber.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR GPRSERV : MSIN= ,PDPREC= ,PDPADR= ,QOSPROF= [,APN=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,APNAREA=] [,CHRG=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PDPREC PDP CONTEXT SUBSCRIPT. RECORD
This parameter identifies a Packet Data Protocol (PDP)
context subscription record.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PDPREC1 PDP RECORD ONE
PDPREC2 PDP RECORD TWO
PDPREC3 PDP RECORD THREE
PDPREC4 PDP RECORD FOUR
PDPREC5 PDP RECORD FIVE
PDPREC6 PDP RECORD SIX
PDPREC7 PDP RECORD SEVEN
PDPREC8 PDP RECORD EIGHT
PDPREC9 PDP RECORD NINE
PDPREC10 PDP RECORD TEN
PDPADR PDP ADDRESSTYPE AND ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the Packet Data Protocol (PDP)
address type and address. If no address is entered, dynamic
addressing is used.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ADDRESSTYPE
IPV4 IP VERSION 4 ADDRESS
X25 X.25 ADDRESS
PPP POINT TO POINT PROTOCOL
This information unit specifies the PDP address type.
Incompatibility:
- If the address type is set to PPP, then it is
not allowed to enter an address.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GPRSERV- 1+
ENTR GPRSERV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: ADDRESS=
1...15 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit specifies the PDP address.
X.25 address: Max. 14 digit decimal number.
IPv4 address: The address has to be entered with dots in the
format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
(X= one digit decimal number)
Leading zeros need not be entered
QOSPROF QOS PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the Quality of Service
profile name.
Prerequisites:
- The quality of service profile must be created (CR QOSPROF).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
APN ACCESS POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the access point name.
If no access point name is entered, the default value
"*" is used as wildcard.
Notes:
- A mobile subscriber may have multiple subscription records for the
same PDP type and the same PDP address, but with different APNs.
For each subscriber there should be only one wild card APN at most
for each PDP address (PDPADR).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...62 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
Default: *
APNAREA ACCESS POINT NAME AREA
This parameter specifies the area in which the access point
name is valid.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
ALLPLMN ALL PLMN
Default: HPLMN
CHRG CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the charging characteristics.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
PREPAID PREPAID
NORMAL NORMAL
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GPRSERV- 2-
CAN GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT
This command deletes a GSM bearer capability information element.
Prerequisites:
- All mobile subscribers with reference to this GSM bearer capability
infomation element have to be deleted (CAN MSUB).
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GSMBCIE : BCN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCN BEARER CAPABILITY NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GSMBCIE- 1-
CR GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT
This command creates a new GSM bearer capability information element.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CR GSMBCIE : BCN= <,ITC= ,TRMODE= ,RACHRQ= ,STRUCT= [
[ [
[ ,SIGACP= ,RATEAD= ,SYNCHR= ,USRRAT= ,DATABT= [
[ [
[ ,STOPBT= ,PARITY= ,NICORX= ,NICOTX= ,INTRAT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,MODEMT= ,CONNEL= ,FNUSRRAT= ,UIL2PR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCN BEARER CAPABILITY NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ITC INFO. TRANSFER CAPABILITY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SPEECH SPEECH
AUDIO 3.1 KHZ AUDIO EX PLMN
UDI UNRESTRICTED DIGITAL INFO.
FAX3 FACSIMILE GROUP 3
ASFAX3 ALTERNATE SPEECH/FAX GROUP 3
alternate speech/facsimile group 3
starting with speech
TRMODE TRANSFER MODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CM CIRCUIT MODE
PM PACKET MODE
RACHRQ RADIO CHANNEL REQUIREMENTS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HRCH HALF RATE CHANNEL
FRCH FULL RATE CHANNEL
DHRCH DUAL/HALF RATE CHANNEL PREF.
DFRCH DUAL/FULL RATE CHANNEL PREF.
STRUCT STRUCTURE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SDUI SERVICE DATA UNIT INTEGRITY
UNSTR UNSTRUCTURED
SIGACP SIGNALING ACCESS PROTOCOL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GSMBCIE- 1+
CR GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I440 I.440/450
X21 X.21
X28DPI X.28 DEDICATED PAD INDIV. NUI
X28DPU X.28 DEDICATED PAD UNIV. NUI
X28NDP X.28 NON DEDICATED PAD
X32 X.32
RATEAD RATE ADAPTION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NRA NO RATE ADAPTION
V110 V.110/X.30 RATE ADAPTION
X31 CCITT X.31 FLAG STUFFING
H223H245 RATE ADAPTION H.223 & H.245
SYNCHR SYNCHRONOUS / ASYNCHRONOUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SYN SYNCHRONOUS
ASYN ASYNCHRONOUS
USRRAT USER RATE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
B300 0.3KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B1200 1.2KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B2400 2.4KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B4800 4.8KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B9600 9.6KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B12000 12KBIT/S
B1200B75 1.2KBIT/75BIT/S V.23,X.1,V.110
DATABT NO.OF DATA BITS EX.PARITY BIT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BIT7 7 BITS
BIT8 8 BITS
STOPBT NUMBER OF STOP BITS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BIT1 1 BIT
BIT2 2 BITS
PARITY PARITY INFORMATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ODD ODD
EVEN EVEN
NONE NONE
FT0 FORCED TO 0
FT1 FORCED TO 1
NICORX NETWORK INDEP.CLOCK ON RECEIPT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NIC IS NOT ALLOWED
Cannot accept data with network independent
clock (NIC). This means sender does not support
this optional procedure.
YES NIC IS ALLOWED
Can accept data with network independent
clock (NIC). This means sender supports this
optional procedure.
NICOTX NETWORK INDEP.CLOCK ON TRANSM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GSMBCIE- 2+
CR GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NIC IS NOT REQUIRED
Requires not to send data with NIC.
YES NIC IS REQUIRED
Requires to send data with NIC.
INTRAT INTERMEDIATE RATE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
No intermediate rate.
KBS4 4 KBIT/S
KBS8 8 KBIT/S
KBS16 16 KBIT/S
MODEMT MODEM TYPE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
No modem type.
V21 V.21 MODEM
V22 V.22 MODEM
V22BIS V.22 BIS MODEM
V23 V.23 MODEM
V26TER V.26 TER MODEM
V32 V.32 MODEM
UNDEF UNDEFINED
Modem for undefined interface.
OUTB1 AUTOBAUDING TYPE 1
Autobauding type 1 (used only in conjunction
with "non transparent" connection element).
CONNEL CONNECTION ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TR TRANSPARENT
NONTR NONTRANSPARENT (RLP)
BTR BOTH, TRANSPARENT PREFERRED
BNONTR BOTH, NONTRANSPARENT PREFERRED
FNUSRRAT FIXED NETWORK USER RATE
This parameter is only allowed for basic services
B20GENR, B30GENR, B40GENR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOTPRES NOT PRESENT
NONE NOT APPLICABLE
B9600 9.6KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B14400 14.4KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B19200 19.2KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B28800 28.8KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B38400 38.4KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B48000 48KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B56000 56KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B64000 64KBIT/S BIT TRANSPARENT
UIL2PR USER INFO. LAYER 2 PROTOCOL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
UIL2PR not present
X25 RECOMMENDATION X.25 LINK LEVEL
IA5 IA5
X75 X.75 LAYER 2 MODIFIED, TELETEX
VTX1 VIDEOTEX PROFILE 1
FAX3 FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VTX3 VIDEOTEX PROFILE 3
Default: NONE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GSMBCIE- 3-
DISP GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT
This command displays GSM bearer capability information elements.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP GSMBCIE : BCN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCN BEARER CAPABILITY NAME
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GSMBCIE- 1-
MOD GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD GSM BEARER CAPABILITY INFO ELEMENT
This command modifies a GSM bearer capability information element.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD GSMBCIE : BCN= <,ITC= ,TRMODE= ,RACHRQ= ,STRUCT= [
[ [
[ ,SIGACP= ,RATEAD= ,SYNCHR= ,USRRAT= ,DATABT= [
[ [
[ ,STOPBT= ,PARITY= ,NICORX= ,NICOTX= ,INTRAT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,MODEMT= ,CONNEL= ,FNUSRRAT= ,UIL2PR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BCN BEARER CAPABILITY NAME
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ITC INFO. TRANSFER CAPABILITY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SPEECH SPEECH
AUDIO 3.1 KHZ AUDIO EX PLMN
UDI UNRESTRICTED DIGITAL INFO.
FAX3 FACSIMILE GROUP 3
ASFAX3 ALTERNATE SPEECH/FAX GROUP 3
alternate speech/facsimile group 3
starting with speech
TRMODE TRANSFER MODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CM CIRCUIT MODE
PM PACKET MODE
RACHRQ RADIO CHANNEL REQUIREMENTS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HRCH HALF RATE CHANNEL
FRCH FULL RATE CHANNEL
DHRCH DUAL/HALF RATE CHANNEL PREF.
DFRCH DUAL/FULL RATE CHANNEL PREF.
STRUCT STRUCTURE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SDUI SERVICE DATA UNIT INTEGRITY
UNSTR UNSTRUCTURED
SIGACP SIGNALING ACCESS PROTOCOL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GSMBCIE- 1+
MOD GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I440 I.440/450
X21 X.21
X28DPI X.28 DEDICATED PAD INDIV. NUI
X28DPU X.28 DEDICATED PAD UNIV. NUI
X28NDP X.28 NON DEDICATED PAD
X32 X.32
RATEAD RATE ADAPTION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NRA NO RATE ADAPTION
V110 V.110/X.30 RATE ADAPTION
X31 CCITT X.31 FLAG STUFFING
H223H245 RATE ADAPTION H.223 & H.245
SYNCHR SYNCHRONOUS / ASYNCHRONOUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SYN SYNCHRONOUS
ASYN ASYNCHRONOUS
USRRAT USER RATE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
B300 0.3KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B1200 1.2KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B2400 2.4KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B4800 4.8KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B9600 9.6KBIT/S RECOM. X.1 AND V.110
B12000 12KBIT/S
B1200B75 1.2KBIT/75BIT/S V.23,X.1,V.110
DATABT NO.OF DATA BITS EX.PARITY BIT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BIT7 7 BITS
BIT8 8 BITS
STOPBT NUMBER OF STOP BITS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BIT1 1 BIT
BIT2 2 BITS
PARITY PARITY INFORMATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ODD ODD
EVEN EVEN
NONE NONE
FT0 FORCED TO 0
FT1 FORCED TO 1
NICORX NETWORK INDEP.CLOCK ON RECEIPT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NIC IS NOT ALLOWED
Cannot accept data with network independent
clock (NIC). This means sender does not support
this optional procedure.
YES NIC IS ALLOWED
Can accept data with network independend
clock (NIC). This means sender supports this
optional procedure.
NICOTX NETWORK INDEP.CLOCK ON TRANSM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GSMBCIE- 2+
MOD GSMBCIE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NIC IS NOT REQUIRED
Requires not to send data with NIC.
YES NIC IS REQUIRED
Requires to send data with NIC.
INTRAT INTERMEDIATE RATE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
No intermediate rate.
KBS4 4 KBIT/S
KBS8 8 KBIT/S
KBS16 16 KBIT/S
MODEMT MODEM TYPE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
No modem type.
V21 V.21 MODEM
V22 V.22 MODEM
V22BIS V.22 BIS MODEM
V23 V.23 MODEM
V26TER V.26 TER MODEM
V32 V.32 MODEM
UNDEF UNDEFINED
Modem for undefined interface.
OUTB1 AUTOBAUDING TYPE 1
Autobauding type 1 (used only in conjunction
with "non transparent" connection element).
CONNEL CONNECTION ELEMENT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TR TRANSPARENT
NONTR NONTRANSPARENT (RLP)
BTR BOTH, TRANSPARENT PREFERRED
BNONTR BOTH, NONTRANSPARENT PREFERRED
FNUSRRAT FIXED NETWORK USER RATE
This parameter is only allowed for basic services
B20GENR, B30GENR, B40GENR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOTPRES NOT PRESENT
NONE NOT APPLICABLE
B9600 9.6KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B14400 14.4KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B19200 19.2KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B28800 28.8KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B38400 38.4KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B48000 48KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B56000 56KBIT/S RECOM. X.1,V.110
B64000 64KBIT/S BIT TRANSPARENT
UIL2PR USER INFO. LAYER 2 PROTOCOL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
UIL2PR not present
X25 RECOMMENDATION X.25 LINK LEVEL
IA5 IA5
X75 X.75 LAYER 2 MODIFIED, TELETEX
VTX1 VIDEOTEX PROFILE 1
FAX3 FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VTX3 VIDEOTEX PROFILE 3
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GSMBCIE- 3-
CAN GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command cancels global title translation calling party address
conversion data.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- no calling party address conversion data is entered
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GTCGPACD : TRID= ,FNETW= ,TNETW= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FNETW FROM NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the originating network.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
TNETW TO NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the destinating network.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GTCGPACD- 1-
DISP GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command displays the global title translation calling party address
conversion data of the concerned tree(s).
The command is stoppable with the STOP DISP command.
Notes:
- When no data was found for the query, the message "NO (MORE) DATA FOR
DISPLAY AVAILABLE" will be displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP GTCGPACD : TRID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GTCGPACD- 1-
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER GTT CALLING PARTY ADDR. CONV. DATA
This command enters global title translation calling party address conversion
data for an existing digit tree in a gateway node.
Whenever a SCCP message is transferred to another network (in a gateway node),
it might be necessary to transform the calling party address (e.g. if we, as
gateway node, transfer a message from the national network to the international
network, we have to transform the national global title number to an
international number).
The calling party address depends on the following items:
- Translation type of the calling party address
- Numbering plan of the calling party address
- Nature of address of the calling party address
- The netwerk border to be crossed.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR GTCGPACD : TRID= ,FNETW= ,TNETW= [,TTID=] [,NP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,NA=] [,DICON=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FNETW FROM NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the originating network.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
TNETW TO NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the destinating network.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier for the
modified global title of the calling party address.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GTCGPACD- 1+
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the calling party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the calling party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
NATUSE NATIONAL USE
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GTCGPACD- 2+
ENTR GTCGPACD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
- insertion/append of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=00492134
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR GTCGPACD- 3-
CAN GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command cancels a global title translation code point.
Prerequisites:
- Associated global title translation destinations have to be cancelled
prior to the execution of this command.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- the global title digit pattern does not exist
- there is still a destination assigned to this code point
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GTCPT- 1-
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command creates a global title translation code point.
This code point contains the information required for global title translation
purposes.
This command should be executed prior to the global title translation desti-
nation commands.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- the global digit pattern exists already
- the code point digits or a part of the code point digits already
exist, e.g. :
The code point with GTDIG = 1234 already exists.
An attempt to create a code point with GTDIG = 12 or
GTDIG = 123456 will be rejected.
- a GTT database table is saturated
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [,DICON=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [,TTID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTCPT- 1+
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- replacement of digits
- insertion of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTCPT- 2+
CR GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTCPT- 3-
DISP GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command displays the global title translation code point.
If the GTDIG parameter is omitted, all the code point information of the
requested digit tree(s), identified by the translator identification, will be
displayed.
Notes:
- When no data was found for the query, the message "NO (MORE) DATA FOR
DISPLAY AVAILABLE" will be displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP GTCPT : TRID= [,GTDIG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
If the parameter is omitted, all the code points of the concerned
TRID will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GTCPT- 1-
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MERGE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command merges a global title translation code point.
Parallel code points are code points that have all but their last digit
in common. If such code points ( and their associated destination
information ) exist, merging cancels those parallel code points (
and the associated destination ) and creates a new code point with a new
destination.
Compared with the parallel code points, the new code point has the
parallel code points digit combination, shortened by the last digit.
The digit combination of the new code point is given in the GTDIG
parameter.
The new code point can have one of the following destination types :
- LTG processor number in the own switch
- internal route, i.e. signaling point in the own area
- translator service group
- subsystem group
- retranslation in the own node.
The route parameter decides which optional parameter values should be entered.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must have been created.
- The global title translation code points to be merged must have been created.
- The global title translation destinations of the code points to be
merged, must have been created.
- The particular destination route ( e.g. a translator service group )
must have been created in the SCCP database.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- no parallel code points exist
- one or more parallel code points do not have associated destination
information
- one or more parallel code points have associated destination
information that requires retranslation in the own node
- the particular destination route does not exist in the SCCP
database
- the new code point exists already
- a specific global title translation database table is saturated
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MERGE GTCPT - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
2. MERGE GTCPT - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
3. MERGE GTCPT - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
4. MERGE GTCPT - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
5. MERGE GTCPT - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in the own area
as a global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The specified destination point code must have been created.
- The specified subsystem must have been created.

[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= [
[ [
[ [,SSID=] [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 1+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits of the new code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 2+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
Default: INAT0
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 3+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
- insertion of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 4+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 5+
MERGE GTCPT
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 6+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a LTG processor number as a
global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG has to exist. For this purpose, the CR LTG command has
to be executed prior to the MERGE GTCPT command.

[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,LTGNR= ,NI= [
[ [
[ [,SSID=] [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits of the new code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 7+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTG a message has to be relayed to by
the CP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and upper ones)
Default: 0
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
Default: INAT0
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 8+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
- insertion of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 9+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 10+
MERGE GTCPT
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 11+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a linked code point as a
global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites :
- The specified LTRID must have been created.

[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,DICON=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TTID=] [,ND=] ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits of the new code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
RETRANS RETRANSLATION IN OWN NODE
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
- insertion of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 12+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 13+
MERGE GTCPT
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
LTRID LINKED TRANSLATOR IDENTIF.
This parameter specifies the linked translator identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RDIG RETRANSLATION DIGIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the first digit to be retranslated in the
own node.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 14+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a subsystem group as a
global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The subsystem group must have been created.

[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,SSG= [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [,ND=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits of the new code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 15+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
This parameter specifies the subsystem group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 16+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- insertion of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 17+
MERGE GTCPT
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 18+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a translator service group as a
global title translation destination for the new code point.
Prerequisites:
- The translator service group must have been created.

[ [
[ MERGE GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,TRLG= [
[ [
[ [,SSID=] [,DICON=] [,TTID=] [,NP=] [,NA=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ND=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits of the new code point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 19+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
TRLG TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies the translator service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION CODE
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 20+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- insertion of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to be
inserted or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code,
from the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE IDENTIFICAT.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 21+
MERGE GTCPT
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies if the global title addresses a national or
international subscriber and to which network it belongs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
Default: NATOWN
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MERGE GTCPT- 22-
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command modifies the global title translation code point.
Omitted parameters will not be taken into account, i.e. they keep their
current values.
Prerequisites:
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- the global title digit pattern does not exist
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= <,DICON= ,NP= ,NA= ,TTID= ,ND=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DICON DIGIT CONVERSION
This parameter specifies how the existing global title digits are to be
modified. The following modifications can be made:
- replacement of digits
- insertion of digits
- removal of digits.
The modifications are specified in the form of a mask which consists
of control characters and digits.
Possible digit values : 0..9, *, #, A..F
Possible control characters : X, ., +, R and S
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTCPT- 1+
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The control characters signify the following:
X : The corresponding digit value in the old code remains unchanged.
. : The corresponding digit value in the old code is omitted.
+ : The digit values following this control character are to beinserted
or to be appended in the corresponding position.
R : The digit values following this control character replace the
corresponding digit values in the old code.
S : The conversion is stopped : all digit values in the old code, from
the corresponding position on, are omitted.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=....+0032
The converted GT digits are 003221.
e.g. GTDIG=004921
DICON=..R32XXS
The converted GT digits are 3221.
If the parameter is omitted, no digit conversion will take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...13 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the new numbering plan for the modified global
title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NUMBERING PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMBERING PLAN
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMBERING PLAN
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NA NATURE OF ADDR. INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the new nature of address for the modified
global title of the called party address.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the new translation type identification for
the modified global title of the called party address.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTCPT- 2+
MOD GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
ND NETWORK DISCRIMINATOR
This parameter specifies the new network discriminator.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NATOWN NAT. SUB. & OWN NETWORK
NATFOR NAT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
INTFOR INT. SUB. & FOREIGN NETWORK
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTCPT- 3-
SPLIT GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPLIT GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. CODE POINT
This command splits a global title translation code point.
Starting from an existing code point, NUM new global title code
points will be made. Compared to the old code point, the new code points
all have 1 different extra digit, ranging from 0 to ( NUM - 1 ).
All new code points get the same destination information as was
associated with the old code point.
The old code point - and its associated destination information - is
cancelled.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must be created.
- The global title translation code point to be split must be created.
- The codepoint associated global title translation destination
information must be created.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- the global title digit pattern does not exist
- there is no destination assigned to this code point
- the destination assigned to this code point requires retranslation
in the own node
- a GTT database table is saturated
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ SPLIT GTCPT : TRID= ,GTDIG= [,NUM=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SPLIT GTCPT- 1+
SPLIT GTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NUM NUMBER OF NEW CODEPOINTS
This parameter specifies the number of new codepoints.
It denotes :
- how many ( NUM ) new code points will be created
- the range of the extra digit : 0 to (NUM-1).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
Default: 10
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SPLIT GTCPT- 2-
CAN GTDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command cancels a global title translation destination.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- the global title digit pattern does not exist
- there is no destination assigned to this code point
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN GTDEST- 1-
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command creates a global title translation destination.
Six types of destinations are possible:
- LTG processor number in the own switch
- internal route, i.e. signaling point in the own area
- translator service group
- subsystem group
- retranslation in the own node.
The route parameter decides which optional parameter values should be entered.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must have been created.
- The global title translation code point must have been created.
- The particular objects the route is referring to must have been
created in the SCCP or GTT database.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- the code point does not exist
- the required SCCP or GTT objects are not available
- a destination exists already for this codepoint
- a specific global title translation database table is saturated
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR GTDEST - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
2. CR GTDEST - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
3. CR GTDEST - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
4. CR GTDEST - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
5. CR GTDEST - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a signaling point in the own area
as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The specified destination point code must have been created.
- The specified subsystem must have been created.

[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,DPC= ,NI= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 1+
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 2+
CR GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 3+
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a LTG processor number as a
global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG has to exist. For this purpose, the CR LTG command has
to be executed prior to the CR GTDEST command.

[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,LTGNR= ,NI= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 4+
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTG a message has to be relayed to by
the CP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and upper ones)
Default: 0
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 5+
CR GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 6+
CR GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a linked code point.
Prerequisites :
- The specified LTRID must have been created.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
RETRANS RETRANSLATION IN OWN NODE
LTRID LINKED TRANSLATOR IDENTIF.
This parameter specifies the linked translator identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RDIG RETRANSLATION DIGIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the first digit to be retranslated in the
own node.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 7+
CR GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...24, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 8+
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a subsystem group as a global title
translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The subsystem group must have been created.

[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,SSG= [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 9+
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
This parameter specifies the subsystem group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 10+
CR GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 11+
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for creating a translator service group as
a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The translator service group must have been created.

[ [
[ CR GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] ,TRLG= [,SSID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, the following default value will be used :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 12+
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
TRLG TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies the translator service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 13+
CR GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR GTDEST- 14-
DISP GTDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command displays the global title translation destination information.
If the GTDIG parameter is omitted, all the destination information of the
requested digit tree(s), identified by the translator identification, will be
displayed.
Notes:
- When no data was found for the query, the message "NO (MORE) DATA FOR
DISPLAY AVAILABLE" will be displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP GTDEST : TRID= [,GTDIG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
If the parameter is omitted, the associated destination information
of all codepoints of the concerned TRID will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP GTDEST- 1-
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL. DESTINATION
This command modifies a global title translation destination.
Six types of destinations are possible ( see CR GTDEST ).
Parameters are treated as in the CR GTDEST command :
- all mandatory parameters have to be entered
- the default values as defined will be taken into account.
Prerequisites:
- The global title translation digit tree must have been created.
- The global title translation code point must have been created.
- A global title translation destination must have been created for
the code point.
- The particular objects the route is referring to must have been
created in the SCCP or GTT database.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if:
- the translator identification does not exist
- the code point does not exist
- no destination exists for this codepoint
- the required SCCP or GTT objects are not available
- a specific global title translation database table is saturated
- a data inconsistency in the GTT database occurred.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD GTDEST - INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
2. MOD GTDEST - LTGNR LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
3. MOD GTDEST - RETRANS RETRANSLATION ROUTE
4. MOD GTDEST - SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
5. MOD GTDEST - TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
1. Input format
INTERNAL ROUTE
This input format is used for modifying a signaling point in the own
area as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The specified destination point code must have been created.
- The specified subsystem must have been created.

[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ,DPC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NI= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 1+
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTERNAL INTERNAL ROUTE
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
Standard behaviour :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
CRTGP CANCEL ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences which are to be set
to their default values before ( eventually ) taking into account the
RTGP parameter.
CRTGP=CANGT indicates that the global title will be kept.
CRTGP=PGTT indicates that no global title translation is
required in the next node.
CRTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address does not
contain a signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, it is not taken into account.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 2+
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 3+
MOD GTDEST
INTERNAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 4+
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTG PROCESSOR NUMBER ROUTE
This input format is used for modifying a LTG processor number
as a global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG has to exist. For this purpose, the CR LTG command has
to be executed prior to the MOD GTDEST command.

[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,LTGNR= ,NI= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
Standard behaviour :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 5+
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
CRTGP CANCEL ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences which are to be set
to their default values before ( eventually ) taking into account the
RTGP parameter.
CRTGP=CANGT indicates that the global title will be kept.
CRTGP=PGTT indicates that no global title translation is
required in the next node.
CRTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address does not
contain a signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, it is not taken into account.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
LTGNR LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTG a message has to be relayed to by
the CP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and upper ones)
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
NI NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 6+
MOD GTDEST
LTGNR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 7+
MOD GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
RETRANSLATION ROUTE
This format is used for creating a linked code point.
Prerequisites :
- The specified LTRID must have been created.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= ,LTRID= [,RDIG=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
RETRANS RETRANSLATION IN OWN NODE
LTRID LINKED TRANSLATOR IDENTIF.
This parameter specifies the linked translator identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RDIG RETRANSLATION DIGIT POSITION
This parameter specifies the first digit to be retranslated in the
own node.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 8+
MOD GTDEST
RETRANS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...24, range of decimal numbers
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 9+
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SUBSYSTEM GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for modifying a subsystem group as a global
title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The subsystem group must have been created.

[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] ,SSG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
Standard behaviour :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 10+
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
CRTGP CANCEL ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences which are to be set
to their default values before ( eventually ) taking into account the
RTGP parameter.
CRTGP=CANGT indicates that the global title will be kept.
CRTGP=PGTT indicates that no global title translation is
required in the next node.
CRTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address does not
contain a signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, it is not taken into account.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CANGT CANCEL GLOBAL TITLE
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
SSG SUBSYSTEM GROUP
This parameter specifies the subsystem group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 11+
MOD GTDEST
SSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 12+
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRANSLATOR GROUP ROUTE
This input format is used for modifying a translator service group as a
global title translation destination.
Prerequisites:
- The translator service group must have been created.

[ [
[ MOD GTDEST : TRID= ,GTDIG= ,ROUTE= [,RTGP=] [,CRTGP=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,TRLG= [,SSID=] [,PPN=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TRID TRANSLATOR IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the translator identification, which refers to
a certain digit tree.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the global title digits. Up to 24 global title
digits can be given.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: 8 GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTE ROUTE TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the global title translation
destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TRLG TRANSLATOR GROUP
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences.
RTGP=CANGT indicates that the GT digits should be cancelled.
RTGP=PGTT indicates that another global title translation is
required in the next node.
RTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address contains a
signaling point.
Standard behaviour :
- the global title will be kept ( then the DICON will be taken into
account )
- no global title translation is to be performed in the next node
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 13+
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- no signaling point is included in the new called party address.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
CRTGP CANCEL ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences which are to be set
to their default values before ( eventually ) taking into account the
RTGP parameter.
CRTGP=CANGT indicates that the global title will be kept.
CRTGP=PGTT indicates that no global title translation is
required in the next node.
CRTGP=SPCINC indicates that the new called party address does not
contain a signaling point.
If the parameter is omitted, it is not taken into account.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
PGTT PERFORM GLOBAL TITLE TRANSL.
SPCINC SIGNALING POINT CODE INCLUDED
TRLG TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies the translator service group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
BSSAP BS SYSTEM APPLICATION PART
BSSMA BSSAP MAINTENANCE
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
DBC DEBIT CENTER
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
FUTSS11 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 11
FUTSS12 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 12
FUTSS13 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 13
FUTSS14 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 14
FUTSS15 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 15
FUTSS16 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 16
IGAP IRRIDIUM GATEWAY APPL. PART
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ISS ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
ISUP ISDN USER PART
MAP MOBILE APPLICATION PART
MAPAC MOBILE APPLICATION PART AC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 14+
MOD GTDEST
TRLG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MAPEIR MOBILE APPLICATION PART EIR
MAPHLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART HLR
MAPMSC MOBILE APPLICATION PART MSC
MAPVLR MOBILE APPLICATION PART VLR
OMAP OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ADM.
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
TSTUP TEST USER PART
TV TELEVOTING
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
UPT UNIVERSAL PERSONAL TELECOMM.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK
PPN PORTABILITY PROCESSING NEEDED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
NO NO PORTABILITY PROCESSING
Y PORTABILITY PROCESSING
YES PORTABILITY PROCESSING
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD GTDEST- 15-
REC HLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD HOME LOCATION REGISTER DATA
This command records the home location register related data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- Only 1 measurement job can be started.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB if the time
parameter values allow a continuation of the job.
- This command is only allowed for an HLR.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC HLR : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first be
copied to tape.
Notes:
- Identifier a covers both MDD and MOD.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: FILETYPE
SINGLE SINGLE FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
DAILY DAILY FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to daily files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files (MO...SU) are prepared and created
before the command is accepted.
Time parameters are not permissible for these
measurements.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is automatically
created on disk or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file
for the same day of the week is overwritten.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC HLR- 1+
REC HLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CYCLIC CYCLIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full the newest
data will be overwritten.
This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily files , single measurement or cyclic fiel).
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception : time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily and cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates (in ascending order) may be linked
with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after entry.
- It is not permissible to enter the command after 23:45 hours with a
begin date on the following day.
- The first measurement may not begin later than one month after the
current date. Subsequent measurements may not begin later than one
year after the current date.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year of the begin
date.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month of the begin
date.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day of the begin
date.
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must
be specified.
Exception: time parameters may not be specified for data output
in daily and cyclic files.
Default: the end of the measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC HLR- 2+
REC HLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year in which
recording is to terminate.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month in which
recording is to terminate.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day on which
recording is to terminate.
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a
begin date (BEG).
Incompatibilities:
- Intervals covering more than one day (e.g. 23-00-01-00).
- Intervals separated by a break of less than one hour.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval begins.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval begins.
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval terminates.
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval terminates.
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data are to be
recorded.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date (TER).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC HLR- 3+
REC HLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC HLR- 4-
ACT HLRCHP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE HLR CHECKPOINT
This command blocks all HLR subscriber commands and starts the checkpointing
process. It is allowed only for Installation recovery mode. The command is
rejected if the checkpointing is already active. This command stores date and
time of the checkpointing activation.
This command is normally logged.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT HLRCHP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT HLRCHP- 1-
DACT HLRCHP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE HLR CHECKPOINT
This command allows HLR commands again. Deactivation of HLR Checkpoint is
automatically executed at the end of Installation recovery or after finishing
HLR Split process.
This command is normally logged.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT HLRCHP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT HLRCHP- 1-
DISP HLRCHP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HLR CHECKPOINT
This command shows the current status (ALLOWED/BLOCKED), date and time
of start of the current checkpointing process for status = BLOCKED.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP HLRCHP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP HLRCHP- 1-
CAN HLRID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL HLR IDENTIFICATION
This command cancels Home Location Register identifications.
Prerequisites:
- All mobile subscribers created for this HLR identification
have to be deleted (CAN MSUB).
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN HLRID : HLRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HLRID HLR IDENTIFICATION
HLRID = a: 2 Digits
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...3 digit decimal number
The length is fixed and depends on project specific data.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN HLRID- 1-
CR HLRID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE HLR IDENTIFICATION
This command creates valid Home Location Register identifications for
the mobile subscriber number IMSI.
This command has to be executed prior to the CR MSUB commands.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR HLRID : HLRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HLRID HOME LOCATION REGISTER ID.
HLRID = a: 2 Digits
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...3 digit decimal number
The length is fixed and depends on project specific data.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR HLRID- 1-
DISP HLRID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HLR IDENTIFICATION
This command displays all created HLR identifications with the number
of mobile subscribers created per HLR identification.
Also the total number of mobile subscribers created in the HLR is
displayed.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP HLRID ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP HLRID- 1-
ACT HLRUPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE HOME LOCATION REGISTER UPDATE
This command activates a map message reset to a given VLR, a given
SGSN or to all internally known VLRs and SGSNs of the HLR-internal
address list, dependent on the given parameters. This list contains
all VLRs and SGSNs in whose area at least one subscriber of the HLR
is roaming. The VLR or SGSN which receives a reset message
will mark all subscribers associated with the HLR. After receiving a
subscriber request the VLR will send a location update message
and the SGSN will send a gprs location update message for the marked
subscriber in order to update the HLR.
After initiating the reset message(s), the addressing number(s)
and an information as to whether it was possible to send the message
to the VLR or the SGSN are displayed.
Sending a reset message can also be initiated by an ISTART2
recovery. In this case this command cannot be used before all
reset messages have been sent.
If the reset messages are activated by a recovery, there will be no
display of the above described information.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT HLRUPD : VLRISD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VLRISD VLR INTERNAL ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the internal ISDN number from a VLR or a
SGSN which is to update the HLR,
i.e. the VLR or SGSN to which a map message reset should be sent.
The second unit of the parameter determines if it is a VLR or a SGSN
which is addresssed.
VLRISD = isdn_number-VLR : VLR is addressed
VLRISD = isdn_number-SGSN : SGSN is addressed
If no second unit is entered a VLR will be addressed by default.
Note: If VLRISD=X is entered, map message reset will be sent
to all internally known VLRs and SGSNs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: VLR INTERNAL ISDN NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: ENTITY INDICATOR
VLR VISITOR LOCATION REGISTER
SGSN SERVING GPRS SUPPORT NODE
Default: VLR
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT HLRUPD- 1-
DISP HLRUPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HOME LOCATION REGISTER UPDATE
The command displays the status of the HLR update, i.e. it displays
whether the HLR will be updated by the VLR(s) or the SGSN(s) caused by
map message(s) reset.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP HLRUPD ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP HLRUPD- 1-
DISP HMSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HEAP MANAGEMENT STATISTICS
This command outputs statistic tables.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP HMSTAT : DATA= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DATA DATA
This parameter specifies which table is to be output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TIMCOUNT TIMER COUNTER
This parameter value outputs the time
administration statistic counter.
LOADSUB LOADED SUBSYSTEMS
This parameter value specifies the process
names of the loaded non-resident subsystems.
STATTAB STATISTIC TABLE
This parameter value outputs the statistic
table.
FREEBLOC FREE BLOCKS
This parameter value outputs the heap management
free blocks.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP HMSTAT- 1-
START HMSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
START HEAP MANAGEMENT STATISTICS
This command starts heap management statistics recording.
The table elements are initialized by setting them to zero,
except for the table element for the number of blocks, which
are set to the current number of free blocks.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ START HMSTAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 START HMSTAT- 1-
STOP HMSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP HEAP MANAGEMENT STATISTICS
This command stops heap management statistics recording
in order to reduce the dynamic workload.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ STOP HMSTAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STOP HMSTAT- 1-
CAN HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL HOLIDAY
This command cancels one holiday.
The holiday can either be specified by DATE only or by DATE and
WDCAT.
Even if there are several entries for a date in the holiday table,
only one existing entry is canceled with each CAN HOLIDAY command.
If the date is to be canceled completely the command must be entered
several times.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN HOLIDAY : DATE= [,WDCAT=] [,FEAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DATE DATE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Notes:
- X means fix holidays.
- The value 0 represents the year 2000.
- Dates in the past are not allowed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the charging feature of the calendar group for
which a holiday calendar is to be canceled.
For fix networks this parameter is optional, for mobile networks it can
be optional depending on the released features. As a default COMMON
will be taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMMON FIX NET CHARGING
MCHARGE MOBILE CHARGING
Default: COMMON
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN HOLIDAY- 1-
DISP HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY HOLIDAY
This command displays holidays.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP HOLIDAY : [FEAT=] [,YEAR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the charging feature of the calendar group for
which a holiday calendar is to be displayed.
For fix networks this parameter is optional, for mobile networks it can
be optional depending on the released features. As a default COMMON
will be taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMMON FIX NET CHARGING
MCHARGE MOBILE CHARGING
Default: COMMON
YEAR CALENDAR YEAR
This parameter specifies the year of the calendar group for
which a holiday calendar is to be displayed.
Notes:
- If "X" is entered for the year, a holiday calendar is displayed
which contains holiday dates fixed for every year (e.g.
Christmas). If the year is entered, a holiday calendar is
displayed which contains the specific holiday dates for that
year (e.g. Easter).
- Fixed holiday dates can also be displayed in the year specific
holiday calendars.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Notes:
- The value 0 represents the year 2000.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP HOLIDAY- 1-
ENTR HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER HOLIDAY
This command enters holidays.
Prerequisites:
- The time must be secure.
Following types of holidays can be entered:
- 13 fixed international half holidays (category HH).
- 13 fixed international full holidays (category HO).
- 13 fixed national full holidays (category HN).
- 16 movable international full holidays per year (category HO)
for 30 years in advance.
- 16 movable national full holidays per year (category HN)
for 30 years in advance.
Notes:
- When <year> = X is entered, the date entered is interpreted as
a fixed holiday applicable for every year and the date does
not change from year to year.
- When <year> is entered, the date is interpreted as a movable
holiday only applicable in the specified year.
- Movable holidays must be specified each year and the date
changes from year to year.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR HOLIDAY : DATE= ,WDCAT= [,FEAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DATE DATE
Notes:
- Up to 16 parameter values can be linked with &.
- Dates in the past are not allowed.
- All linked parameters must be for same year.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Notes:
- The value 0 represents the year 2000.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HH HALF HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HO FULL HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR HOLIDAY- 1+
ENTR HOLIDAY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HN FULL HOLIDAY NATIONAL
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the charging feature of the calendar group for
which a holiday calendar is to be created.
For fix networks this parameter is optional, for mobile networks it can
be optional depending on the released features. As a default COMMON
will be taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
COMMON FIX NET CHARGING
MCHARGE MOBILE CHARGING
Default: COMMON
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR HOLIDAY- 2-
CAN HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Hop Feature for IP
This task cancels one or more Hot Operation feature(s).
Notes:
When the parameter HOP buffer type is omitted, all created Hot Operation
features are cancelled.
This task is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN HOPFEATIP : [HOP buffer type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HOP buffer type
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the buffer identification.
HOP small buffer 1 and HOP small buffer 2 are buffers designed for
real-time applications.
HOP large buffer 1 and HOP large buffer 2 are buffers designed for
near-real-time applications.
Emergency Call Trace buffer,Imsi Trace buffer and Mobile Call
Record buffer are buffers
designed for the General Data Collection Service (GDCS).
Possible values:
- HOP small buffer 1
- HOP small buffer 2
- HOP large buffer 1
- HOP large buffer 2
- Emergency Call Trace buffer
- Imsi Trace buffer
- Mobile Call Record buffer
Notes:
This parameter may be omitted in order to cancel all created Hot
Operation features.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN HOPFEATIP- 1-
CR HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Hop Feature for IP
This task creates a Hot Operation feature.
This feature enables the spontaneous transmission of data to a remote
destination. The transmission is done by
means of a proprietary protocol, denoted as HOP (Hot Operation Protocol).
The Hot Operation feature can be used for real-time applications, near-real-time
applications and
the General Data Collection Service (GDCS).
When using real-time Hot Operation, the data are sent within a few seconds;
near-real-time Hot Operation sends the
data within a few minutes.
Real-time and GDCS Hot Operation can be Usage-sensitive or
Non-usage-sensitive.
In case the Hot Operation is used for the General Data Collection Service (GDCS),
Usage-sensitive Hot Operation
indicates that only data that has not been successfully transfered via the Hot
Operation Protocol will be stored
on the disk belonging to that data ( Files IA.ICMCR or IA.ICITR ), with an
indication of the unsuccesful transfer.
Non-usage sensitive means that all data will be stored additionally on the disk
belonging to that data
( Files IA.ICMCR or IA.ICITR ), with an indication if the transfer has been
successful or unsuccessful.
In case of real-time Hot Operation, Usage-sensitive indicates that the remote
partner absolutely needs all data.
When the connection between the network node and the remote partner is
temporarily out of service, the generated
data are stored on a backup file on the network node. After the link is restored,
the backup file can be sent to
the remote partner with a manual request. Data which have been successfully sent
to the remote partner,
are not kept on the network node side.
For Non-usage-sensitive real-time Hot Operation, ticket data which could not be
sent immediately to the remote
partner (e.g. due to link outage), are marked as unsuccessful. Ticket data which
have been successfully sent
are marked as successful. The further treatment of both successfully and
unsuccessfully sent ticket data depends
on the setting of the Ticket Distributor. The data are either stored on disk,
or sent via another, near-real-time
Hot Operation feature to another destination.
Near-real-time Hot Operation however is always Usage-sensitive.
Prerequisites:
- The Hot Operation feature can only be successfully applied, when the
proprietary Hot Operation Protocol is also
implemented at the remote destination.
- In case the Hot Operation feature is used for real-time, Non-usage-sensitive
applications,
the Ticket Distributor with parameter Ticket type equal to AMA and
the Ticket Distributor with parameter Ticket type equal to INA
have to be created first with the Task CR TICKDISTR
Remark:
_ In case of usage of the Hot Operation feature with General Data Collection
Servive (GDCS), only the following
parameters have any significance: HOP buffer type, HOP application name,
Application id., Output timer,
Primary destination and HOP quality.
This task is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR HOPFEATIP : HOP buffer type= ,HOP application name= [
[ [
[ ,Application id.= ,Output timer= [
[ [
[ ,Primary destination= [,Secondary destination=] [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR HOPFEATIP- 1+
CR HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ [,HOP quality=] [,File buffer id.=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HOP buffer type
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the buffer identification.
HOP small buffer 1 and HOP small buffer 2 are buffers designed for
real-time applications.
HOP large buffer 1 and HOP large buffer 2 are buffers designed for
near-real-time applications.
Emergency Call Trace,Imsi Trace and Mobile Call Record are buffers
designed for
the General Data Collection Service (GDCS).
Possible values:
- HOP small buffer 1
- HOP small buffer 2
- HOP large buffer 1
- HOP large buffer 2
- Emergency Call Trace buffer
- Imsi Trace buffer
- Mobile Call Record buffer
HOP application name
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the Hot Operation feature.
This Hot Operation feature name can be
common to several applications. It can only be assigned once to a HOP
buffer type.
The same symbolic name has to be used as in the corresponding MML
command on the CP side.
Input format:
1...25 characters:
A...Z, a...z, 0 ..9,
!, %, &, /, (, ), =, #, +, .,
_, -, ,, >, <, :, @, [, ], |, {, }, ;
Application id.
This parameter specifies a numeric value, which identifies the
application, using the Hot Operation feature.
Input format:
0...255, range of decimal numbers
Output timer
This parameter specifies the time period for the periodic saving of the
Hot Operation buffer to the remote
partner.
In case of real-time Hot Operation features (characterized by the use of
small buffers), the minimum value is 5 seconds.
In case of near-real-time Hot Operation features (characterized by the
use of large buffers), the minimum value
is 40 seconds.
In case the General Data Collection Service (GDCS) is used
(characterized by the use of the GDCS specific buffers),
the minimum value is 1 second.
Input format:
minutes: 0...15, range of decimal numbers
seconds: 0...59, range of decimal numbers
Primary destination
This parameter specifies the address of the Primary Destination. The
address can be indicated in IPV4 (Internet Protocol
Version 4) format, or in IPV6 (Internet Protocol Version 6) format.
Input format:
IPV4 format:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR HOPFEATIP- 2+
CR HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
size: 4 numbers
of: 0...255, range of decimal numbers
Or
IPV6 format:
size: 8 numbers
of: 0...65535, range of decimal numbers
Restrictions:
IPV4 format value (0.0.0.0) and IPV6 format value (0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0)
are not allowed.
In case that the General Data Collection Service (GDCS) is used, usage
of IPV4 address format is recommended.
Secondary destination
This parameter specifies the address of the Secondary Destination. The
address can be indicated in IPV4 (Internet Protocol
Version 4) format, or in IPV6 (Internet Protocol Version 6) format.
This parameter is not to be entered when using the General Data
Collection Service (GDCS).
Input format:
IPV4 format:
size: 4 numbers
of: 0...255, range of decimal numbers
Or
IPV6 format:
size: 8 numbers
of: 0...65535, range of decimal numbers
Restrictions:
IPV4 format value (0.0.0.0) and IPV6 format value (0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0)
are not allowed.
HOP quality
This parameter is only relevant in case the Hot Operation feature is
used for real-time applications (characterized
by the use of small buffers) or for the General Data Collection service
(GDCS) (characterized by the use of the
GDCS specific buffers).
In case the Hot Operation is used for the General Data Collection
Service (GDCS), Usage-sensitive Hot Operation
indicates that only data that has not been successfully transfered via
the Hot Operation Protocol will be stored
on the disk belonging to that data ( Files IA.ICMCR or IA.ICITR ), with
an indication of the unsuccesful transfer.
Non-usage sensitive means that all data offered to the HOP for
transfer will be stored additionally on the disk
belonging to that data ( Files IA.ICMCR or IA.ICITR ), with an
indication if the transfer has been successful or
unsuccessful.
In case of real-time Hot Operation, Usage-sensitive indicates that
the remote partner absolutely needs all data.
When the connection between the network node and the remote partner is
temporarily out of service, the generated
data are stored on a backup file on the network node. After the link is
restored, the backup file can be sent to
the remote partner with a manual request. Data which have been
successfully sent to the remote partner,
are not kept on the network node side.
For Non-usage-sensitive real-time Hot Operation, ticket data which
could not be sent immediately to the remote
partner (e.g. due to link outage), are marked as unsuccessful. Ticket
data which have been successfully sent
are marked as successful. The further treatment of both successfully and
unsuccessfully sent ticket data depends
on the setting of the Ticket Distributor. The data are either stored
on disk, or sent via another, near-real-time
Hot Operation feature to another destination.
In case the Hot Operation feature is used for near-real-time
applications, the parameter HOP quality should
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR HOPFEATIP- 3+
CR HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be set on Usage-sensitive. The data which are successfully sent to the
remote partner are not kept on the
network node side. The data which could not be sent immediately to the
remote partner are written into a file on the
network node, without a mark for successful or unsuccessful transfer.
Possible values:
- Usage-sensitive
- Non-usage-sensitive
File buffer id.
This parameter specifies the used buffer for the backup file.
This parameter is mandatory, in case the Hot Operation feature is used
for real-time applications and the parameter
HOP quality is set on usage-sensitive.
This parameter is not to be entered when using the General Data
Collection Service (GDCS).
The names of the SAMAR file are fixed for GDCS and depend on the chosen
HOP buffer type:
- Emergency Call Trace buffer = IA.ICMCR
- Imsi Trace buffer = IA.ICITR
- Mobile Call Record buffer = IA.ICMCR
Prerequisites:
The backup file must have a variable Record Format with a minimum Record
Size of 56 Kbyte.
Possible values:
- Buffer 1
- Buffer 2
- Buffer 3
- Buffer 4
- Buffer 5
- Buffer 6
- Buffer 7
Restrictions:
The value No buffer is not allowed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR HOPFEATIP- 4-
DISP HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Hop Feature for IP
This task displays one or more Hot Operation feature(s).
Notes:
- When the parameter HOP buffer type is omitted, all created Hot Operation
features are displayed.
- In case of usage of the Hot Operation feature with General Data Collection
Servive (GDCS), only the following
parameters have any significance: HOP buffer type, HOP application name,
Application id., Output timer,
Primary destination and HOP quality.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP HOPFEATIP : [HOP buffer type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HOP buffer type
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the buffer identification.
HOP small buffer 1 and HOP small buffer 2 are buffers designed for
real-time applications.
HOP large buffer 1 and HOP large buffer 2 are buffers designed for
near-real-time applications.
Emergency Call Trace,Imsi Trace and Mobile Call Record are buffers
designed for
the General Data Collection Service (GDCS).
Possible values:
- HOP small buffer 1
- HOP small buffer 2
- HOP large buffer 1
- HOP large buffer 2
- Emergency Call Trace
- Imsi Trace
- Mobile Call Record
Notes:
This parameter may be omitted in order to display all created Hot
Operation features.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP HOPFEATIP- 1-
MOD HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Hop Feature for IP
This task can modify the Output timer of a Hot Operation feature.
In case the Hot Operation feature is used with the General Data Collecting
Service (GDCS),
also the Primary destination and the HOP quality can be modified.
This task is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD HOPFEATIP : HOP buffer type= [,Output timer=] [
[ [
[ [,Primary destination=] [,HOP quality=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HOP buffer type
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the buffer identification.
HOP small buffer 1 and HOP small buffer 2 are buffers designed for
real-time applications.
HOP large buffer 1 and HOP large buffer 2 are buffers designed for
near-real-time applications.
Emergency Call Trace,Imsi Trace and Mobile Call Record are buffers
designed for
the General Data Collection Service (GDCS).
Possible values:
- HOP small buffer 1
- HOP small buffer 2
- HOP large buffer 1
- HOP large buffer 2
- Emergency Call Trace
- Imsi Trace
- Mobile Call Record
Output timer
This parameter specifies the time period for the periodic saving of the
Hot Operation buffer to the remote
partner.
In case of real-time Hot Operation features (characterized by the use of
small buffers), the minimum value is 5 seconds.
In case of near-real-time Hot Operation features (characterized by the
use of large buffers), the minimum value
is 40 seconds.
In case the General Data Collection Service (GDCS) is used
(characterized by the use of the GDCS specific buffers),
the minimum value is 1 second.
Input format:
minutes: 0...15, range of decimal numbers
seconds: 0...59, range of decimal numbers
Primary destination
This parameter can only be entered in case the General Data Collection
Service (GDCS) is used.
This parameter specifies the address of the Primary Destination. The
address can be indicated in IPV4 (Internet Protocol
Version 4) format, or in IPV6 (Internet Protocol Version 6) format.
Input format:
IPV4 format:
size: 4 numbers
of: 0...255, range of decimal numbers
Or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD HOPFEATIP- 1+
MOD HOPFEATIP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IPV6 format:
size: 8 numbers
of: 0...65535, range of decimal numbers
Restrictions:
IPV4 format value (0.0.0.0) and IPV6 format value (0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0)
are not allowed.
In case that the General Data Collection Service (GDCS) is used, usage
of IPV4 address format is recommended.
HOP quality
This parameter can only be entered in case the General Data Collection
Service (GDCS) is used.
For the General Data Collection Service (GDCS), Usage-sensitive Hot
Operation indicates that only data which have not been
transferred succesfully will be stored on disk. The data will be stored
with an indication of the unsuccessful transfer.
Non-usage-sensitive means that all data is stored on disk with an
indication if the hot-operation transfer has been
successfull or unsuccessfull.
Possible values:
- Usage-sensitive
- Non-usage-sensitive
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD HOPFEATIP- 2-
DEF HWTPCOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Define Hardware Code Tracepoint
This script defines a SWT hardware tracepoint.
You have to provide an ID name (max. 17 chars) and
the trace address itself (may consist of a single address
or up to four addresses, each address max. 72 chars).
You can provide the capsule of the trace address (8 chars).
Input format

[ [
[ DEF HWTPCOD : SWTid= [,SWTcps=] ,SWThwAddr= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SWTid
Name of ID (max. 17 chars)
SWTcps
Capsule of the trace address (8 chars)
SWThwAddr
may consist of a single address or up to four
addresses (each address max. 72 chars).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DEF HWTPCOD- 1-
DEF HWTPDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Define Hardware Data Tracepoint
This script defines a SWT hardware data tracepoint.
You have to provide an ID name (max. 17 chars),
the data address itself (may consist of a single address
or up to four addresses, each address max. 72 chars),
the data access type (write/read & write),
and data access length (1 byte/2 bytes/4 bytes).
You can provide the capsule of the data address (8 chars)
and the Code Range of the traced address.
Input format

[ [
[ DEF HWTPDATA : SWTid= [,SWTcps=] ,SWThwaddr= ,SWThwtype= [
[ [
[ ,SWThwlen= [,SWTcoderange=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SWTid
Name of ID (max. 17 chars)
SWTcps
Capsule of the trace address (8 chars)
SWThwaddr
May consist of a single address or up
to five address ranges (each address max. 72 chars)
SWThwtype
The HW tracepoint type can be Write or Read & write.
SWThwlen
The HW tracepoint length can be 1 byte, 2 bytes or 4 bytes.
SWTcoderange
The coderage of the tracepoint can be ID inside code range or
outside code range.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DEF HWTPDATA- 1-
CONT HWUPGMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Continue HW Upgrade on MP
This task is part of the HW Upgrade task sequence,
which differs from the regular System Upgrade task sequence only in this task.
This task continues the HW Upgrade on MP after it was interrupted
for the purpose of an MP exchange.
The task is to be entered:
a) during the task INST GENMP is running - on the non-switching side 1
b) during the task UTIL GENMP is running - on the switching side 0
Description:
The event report readyForMpExchangeOrContinue is issued when the system is
ready for MPU exchange. It indicates to the operator that one or several of
the MPUs may now be replaced. The operator afterwards continues
the HW Upgrade sequence by entering this task as described above.
MPU exchange: A red LED on the front panel of the MPU board
indicates which of the MP boards (one per pair, always on the same side,
either 0 or 1) are ready to be replaced.
The operator may change some of the units, or all of them.
The first side of MPUs can be replaced, when the event report
readyForMpExchangeOrContinue is received during the INST GENMP task.
The corresponding MPU boards of the other side of MPUs can be replaced,
when this event report is received during the UTIL GENMP task.
If replacement of the MPU-SA is required, the operator has to enter the
relevant office data and the HW indication flag in the MPU boot dialog.
As soon as the MPU-SA has reached active state (SP8 reached), the operator
again receives the event report readyforMpExchangeorContinue, meaning that now
this task can be entered to continue the HW- Upgrade sequence.
Prerequisites:
- A valid Upgrade Control Table (UCT) file is required.
Input format

[ [
[ CONT HWUPGMP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONT HWUPGMP- 1-
CAN IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IACHASTA OBJECT
This command cancels an IACHASTA object for a trunk group, a directory
number block, an announcement group, a private branch exchange,
a digital line unit, a V5 interface, a destination or a statistic index.
Notes:
For the canceling of an object, several cases can occur:
1/ There are other call processing elements (trunk groups, DN-blocks, etc.)
for the same object:
In this case, the IACHASTA object itself is not deleted. Only the connection
between the specified element and the object is canceled.
2/ No further elements exist for the object and the object does not participate
(i.e. as the origin, destination or destination classification) in an active
IACHASTA registration point. In this case, the object is immediately canceled.
3/ No further elements exist for the object but the object still participates
in an active registration point.
The command is rejected. All registration points for this object must be
canceled before the object itself can be canceled.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. CAN IACOBJ - DEST DESTINATION
3. CAN IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
4. CAN IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
5. CAN IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
6. CAN IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
7. CAN IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
8. CAN IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a recorded
announcement group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,ANGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This parameter specifies a recorded announcement group.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 1+
CAN IACOBJ
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a destination.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies a destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 2+
CAN IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a digital line unit.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DLU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies a digital line unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2550, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 3+
CAN IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a directory number block.
The parameter DN refers to the first directory number of the directory
number block.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 4+
CAN IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a private branch exchange.
The parameter DN refers to the pilot directory number of the private
branch exchange.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES YES (PBX)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 5+
CAN IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a statistic index
assigned to a zone point.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,STAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STAT STATISTIC INDEX
This parameter specifies a statistic index assigned to a zone point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 6+
CAN IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a trunk group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 7+
CAN IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format cancels an IACHASTA object for a V5 interface.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACOBJ : OBJ= ,V5IF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
This parameter specifies a V5 interface.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6000...8999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACOBJ- 8-
CR IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IACHASTA OBJECT
This command creates an IACHASTA object for a trunk group, a directory
number block, an announcement group, a private branch exchange,
a digital line unit, a V5 interface, a destination or a statistic index.
This object can then be used as the origin or destination of an
IACHASTA registration point. The same object name can be used for
multiple call processing elements of the same or a different type.
Exception: objects created for a destination, with the additional
destination classification unit can only be used for multiple
call processing elements of the same kind, i.e. destinations.
If the object is created for a destination with the additional unit for
destination classification, then the object can additionally be used
for destination classification of an IACHASTA registration point.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. CR IACOBJ - DEST DESTINATION
3. CR IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
4. CR IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
5. CR IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
6. CR IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
7. CR IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
8. CR IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a recorded
announcement group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,ANGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This parameter specifies a recorded announcement group.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 1+
CR IACOBJ
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a destination.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DEST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies a destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: DESTINATION=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter unit specifies whether the object is created as
a destination classification object. If so, only destinations
can be assigned to it and it can be used for the creation of
registration points with destination classification.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 2+
CR IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a digital line unit.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,DLU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies a digital line unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2550, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 3+
CR IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a directory number block.
The parameter DN refers to the first directory number of the directory
number block.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 4+
CR IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a private branch exchange.
The parameter DN refers to the pilot directory number of the private
branch exchange.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES YES (PBX)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 5+
CR IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a statistic index
assigned to a zone point.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,STAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STAT STATISTIC INDEX
This parameter specifies a statistic index assigned to a zone point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 6+
CR IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a trunk group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,TGNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 7+
CR IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format creates an IACHASTA object for a V5 interface.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACOBJ : OBJ= ,V5IF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA object name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
This parameter specifies a V5 interface.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6000...8999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACOBJ- 8-
DISP IACOBJ
ANGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA OBJECT
This command displays IACHASTA objects. The output depends
on the input format used.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP IACOBJ - ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
2. DISP IACOBJ - DEST DESTINATION
3. DISP IACOBJ - DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
4. DISP IACOBJ - DNBLOCK DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
5. DISP IACOBJ - OBJ OBJECT
6. DISP IACOBJ - PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
7. DISP IACOBJ - STAT STATISTIC INDEX
8. DISP IACOBJ - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
9. DISP IACOBJ - V5IF V5 INTERFACE
1. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a recorded announcement
group.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : ANGRP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANGRP ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP
This parameter specifies a recorded announcement group.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 1+
DISP IACOBJ
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a destination.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : DEST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies a destination.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 2+
DISP IACOBJ
DLU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a digital line unit.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : DLU= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies a digital line unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2550, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 3+
DISP IACOBJ
DNBLOCK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER BLOCK
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a directory number block.
The parameter DN refers to the first directory number of the directory
number block.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : LAC= ,DN= [,PBX=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO (NO PBX)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 4+
DISP IACOBJ
OBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
OBJECT
When a specific IACHASTA object name is entered, this input format
displays all elements (trunk groups, directory number blocks, ...)
connected to that object.
When the value "X" is entered for parameter OBJ, an alphabetical
list of all existing IACHASTA objects (i.e. names) is displayed.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : OBJ= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJ OBJECT
This parameter specifies an IACHASTA object name.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 5+
DISP IACOBJ
PBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a private branch exchange.
The parameter DN refers to the pilot directory number of the private
branch exchange.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : LAC= ,DN= ,PBX= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies a local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies a directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
This parameter refers to a private branch exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES YES (PBX)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 6+
DISP IACOBJ
STAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
STATISTIC INDEX
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a statistic index
assigned to a zone point.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : STAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
STAT STATISTIC INDEX
This parameter specifies a statistic index assigned to a zone point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 7+
DISP IACOBJ
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a trunk group.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies a trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 8+
DISP IACOBJ
V5IF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
V5 INTERFACE
This input format displays the IACHASTA object of a V5 interface.

[ [
[ DISP IACOBJ : V5IF= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
V5IF V5 INTERFACE
This parameter specifies a V5 interface.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6000...8999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACOBJ- 9-
ACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command activates an IACHASTA registration immediately or at the specified
date and time. The registration will be deactivated automatically if a
termination time is specified.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT IACRG - AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
2. ACT IACRG - MET METERING REGISTRATION
1. Input format
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This input format activates a ticketing registration.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT IACRG : OUT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type. When metering is chosen,
the call data are added on counters. When ticketing is chosen,
the call data are written in separate tickets.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
BEG BEGIN DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the activation time for the registration.
If the parameter is omitted, the registration is activated
immediately.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
d: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the deactivation date and time for
a registration. If the parameter is omitted, continuous
registration is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IACRG- 1+
ACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
d: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IACRG- 2+
ACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERING REGISTRATION
This input format activates a metering registration.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT IACRG : OUT= ,RGPTTYPE= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,FILEEXT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type. When metering is chosen,
the call data are added on counters. When ticketing is chosen,
the call data are written in separate tickets.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MET METERING
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided or
double sided or mixed single/double sided) for which the registration
is activated.
It must be identical to the value that was used for activation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
MIXED MIXED
SINGLE SINGLE
BEG BEGIN DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the activation time for the registration.
If the parameter is omitted, the registration is activated
immediately.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
d: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE AND TIME
This parameter specifies the deactivation date and time for
a registration. If the parameter is omitted, continuous
registration is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IACRG- 3+
ACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
d: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
FILEEXT FILE EXTENSION
This parameter specifies the file extension. It offers the
possibility of labeling the account files made for the activated
meter registrations.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IACRG- 4-
DACT IACRG
AMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command deactivates an IACHASTA registration.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DACT IACRG - AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
2. DACT IACRG - MET METERING REGISTRATION
1. Input format
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
This input format deactivates a ticketing registration.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT IACRG : OUT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT IACRG- 1+
DACT IACRG
MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERING REGISTRATION
This input format deactivates a metering registration.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT IACRG : OUT= ,RGPTTYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MET METERING
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided or
double sided or mixed single/double sided) for which the registration
is deactivated. It must be identical to the value that was used for
activation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
MIXED MIXED
SINGLE SINGLE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT IACRG- 2-
DISP IACRG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION
This command displays the status and characteristics of all activated
IACHASTA registrations.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IACRG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACRG- 1-
CAN IACRGPT
ANONYM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command cancels an anonymous or named IACHASTA registration point
or removes an origin/destination/destination classification object
combination from a named registration point.
Notes:
For the canceling of a registration point, several cases can occur:
1/ There are other origin/destination/destination classification object
combinations created for the same named registration point.
In this case, the link with the named registration point is canceled,
the registration point itself is not deleted.
2/ No further origin/destination/destination classification object
combinations exist and no registration is active for the specified
registration point.
In this case, the registration point is immediately canceled.
3/ No further origin/destination/destination classification object
combinations exist and a registration is active for the specified
registration point.
In this case, the registration point is placed in an inactive status.
The registration point remains inactive until accounting (automatic or
forced by MML) for the registration has taken place. The registration
point is then canceled automatically.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN IACRGPT - ANONYM ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
2. CAN IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
1. Input format
ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
This input format cancels an anonymous registration point.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACRGPT- 1+
CAN IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
This input format cancels a named registration point.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [,DESTCLSF=] ,RGPT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination classification
object for the definition of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IACRGPT- 2-
CR IACRGPT
AMAANON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command creates an IACHASTA registration point.
In general this means that an output type (AMA and/or metering)
is assigned to the specified combination of origin and/or
destination objects and eventually a destination classification
object.The specified combination can be a single registration point
(OBJORIG specified OR OBJDEST specified), which means that
only traffic is registered with IACHASTA, routed over the specified
object(s). The specified combination can also be a double registration
point (OBJORIG specified AND OBJDEST specified), which means
that only traffic is registered with IACHASTA, routed over the specified
origin object AND the specified destination object.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR IACRGPT - AMAANON IACAMA ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
2. CR IACRGPT - AMARGPT IACAMA NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
3. CR IACRGPT - METANON IACMET ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
4. CR IACRGPT - METRGPT IACMET NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
1. Input format
IACAMA ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates an anonymous registration point
for ticketing.
This means that the point has no name of its own.
It is identified by the unique combination of origin
and/or destination object and output type.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,OUT= [,SUCCONLY=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type, i.e. whether call data must
be added to counters or written in a ticket.
This value must be compatible with the stored value if a registration
point with the same name already exists.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACRGPT- 1+
CR IACRGPT
AMAANON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUCCONLY SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
This parameter specifies that only successful
calls must be registered for IACAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
NO NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Y SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
YES SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACRGPT- 2+
CR IACRGPT
AMARGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IACAMA NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates a named registration point for ticketing.
This means that the point has its own name and that different
origin/destination/destination classification object combinations
with the same output type can be assigned to it.
Note: Any given origin/destination/destination classification
output type combination can only exist once in the system.

[ [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [,DESTCLSF=] [,SUCCONLY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,OUT= ,RGPT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination classification
object for the definition of the registration point.
Every other combination of origin- and/or destination objects
(standard objects) can be combined with a destination
classification object. In this case, a registration only takes
place, if these standard objects AND the destination
classification object are part of the connection.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SUCCONLY SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
This parameter specifies that only successful
calls must be registered for IACAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
NO NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Y SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
YES SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Default: NO
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type, i.e. whether call data must
be added to counters or written in a ticket.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACRGPT- 3+
CR IACRGPT
AMARGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value must be compatible with the stored value if a registration
point with the same name already exists.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name. When a
registration point name is specified, and the registration
point name already exists, the output type (AMA or MET) must
be the same as the registration point(s) available in the IACHASTA
registration point database under the same registration point name.
The kind of registration point(s) under the same registration point
name must also have the same point type (single-sided (only OBJORIG or
OBJDEST specified) or double-sided (both OBJORIG and OBJDEST
specified)).
When a named registration point is created with SUCCONLY=YES,
all subsequent additions of object combinations for this named
registration point have to be specified with SUCCONLY=YES too.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACRGPT- 4+
CR IACRGPT
METANON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IACMET ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates an anonymous registration point
for metering.
This means that the point has no name of its own.
It is identified by the unique combination of origin
and/or destination and output type.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,OUT= ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type, i.e. whether call data must
be added to counters or written in a ticket.
This value must be compatible with the stored value if a registration
point with the same name already exists.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MET METERING
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule that should be used for
the metering registration point to split up the call data
in different time groups.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACRGPT- 5+
CR IACRGPT
METRGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IACMET NAMED REGISTRATION POINT
This input format creates a named registration point for metering.
This means that the point has its own name and that different
origin/destination/destination classification object combinations
with the same output type can be assigned to it.
Note: Any given origin/destination/destination classification
output type combination can only exist once in the system.

[ [
[ CR IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> [,DESTCLSF=] ,OUT= ,RGPT= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination classification
object for the definition of the registration point.
Every other combination of origin- and/or destination objects
(standard objects) can be combined with a destination
classification object. In this case, a registration only takes
place, if these standard objects AND the destination
classification object are part of the connection.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OUT OUTPUT TYPE
This parameter specifies the output type, i.e. whether call data must
be added to counters or written in a ticket.
This value must be compatible with the stored value if a registration
point with the same name already exists.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MET METERING
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name. When a
registration point name is specified, and the registration
point name already exists, the output type (AMA or MET) must
be the same as the registration point(s) available in the IACHASTA
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACRGPT- 6+
CR IACRGPT
METRGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
registration point database under the same registration point name.
The kind of registration point(s) under the same registration point
name must also have the same point type (single-sided (only OBJORIG or
OBJDEST specified) or double-sided (both OBJORIG and OBJDEST
specified)).
When a named registration point is created with SUCCONLY=YES,
all subsequent additions of object combinations for this named
registration point have to be specified with SUCCONLY=YES too.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule that should be used for
the metering registration point to split up the call data
in different time groups.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IACRGPT- 7-
DISP IACRGPT
OBJDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command displays IACHASTA registration points. The output depends
on the input format used.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP IACRGPT - OBJDEST SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJDEST
2. DISP IACRGPT - OBJORIG SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJORIG
3. DISP IACRGPT - OTHER OTHER REGISTRATION POINTS
4. DISP IACRGPT - RGPT NAMED REGISTRATION POINTS
1. Input format
SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJDEST
This input format displays the single sided registration points for the
specified destination object. The following table gives an overview of
the allowed parameter combinations and their results. Both named and
anonymous registration points are displayed with this input format.
OBJORIG OBJDEST DESTCLSF Result
- value value single sided registration points with
OBJDEST=value, DESTCLSF=value and no OBJORIG
- value - single sided registration points with
OBJDEST=value, no OBJORIG and no DESTCLSF
- value X single sided registration points with
OBJDEST=value, no OBJORIG and any DESTCLSF

[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : OBJDEST= [,DESTCLSF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination classification
object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 1+
DISP IACRGPT
OBJORIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SINGLE SIDED REGISTR. POINTS FOR OBJORIG
This input format displays the single sided registration points for
the specified origin object. The following table gives an overview of
the allowed parameter combinations and their results. Both named and
anonymous registration points are displayed with this input format.
OBJORIG OBJDEST DESTCLSF Result
value - value single sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, DESTCLSF=value and no OBJDEST
value - - single sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, no OBJDEST and no DESTCLSF
value - X single sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, no OBJDEST and any DESTCLSF

[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : OBJORIG= [,DESTCLSF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination classification
object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 2+
DISP IACRGPT
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
OTHER REGISTRATION POINTS
This input format displays the registration points for the specified
input parameters. The following table gives an overview of the allowed
parameter combinations and their results. Both named and anonymous
registration points are displayed with this input format.
OBJORIG OBJDEST DESTCLSF Result
value value value double sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, OBJDEST=value and DESTCLSF=value
value value - double sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, OBJDEST=value and no DESTCLSF
value value X double sided registration points with
OBJORIG=value, OBJDEST=value and any DESTCLSF
value X value registration points with OBJORIG=value,
DESTCLSF=value and any OBJDEST
value X - registration points with OBJORIG=value,
any OBJDEST and no DESTCLSF
value X X registration points with OBJORIG=value,
any OBJDEST and any DESTCLSF
X value value registration points with OBJDEST=value,
DESTCLSF=value and any OBJORIG
X value - registration points with OBJDEST=value,
any OBJORIG and no DESTCLSF
X value X registration points with OBJDEST=value,
any OBJORIG and any DESTCLSF
X X - ALL registration points
(any OBJORIG, any OBJDEST and ANY DESTCLSF)
X X X ALL registration points
(any OBJORIG, any OBJDEST and any DESTCLSF)

[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST= [,DESTCLSF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DESTCLSF DESTINATION CLASSIFICATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination classification
object.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 3+
DISP IACRGPT
RGPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINTS
This input format displays named registration points.
When a name is specified, all the information of the registration
point is displayed. When the value "X" is entered, an
alphabetical list of all the named registration points is displayed.

[ [
[ DISP IACRGPT : RGPT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACRGPT- 4-
MOD IACRGPT
ANAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA REGISTRATION POINT
This command modifies the schedule that is to be used for the
specified IACHASTA metering registration point. Furthermore,
this command modifies if IACAMA tickets must be generated only
for successful calls or for unsuccessful calls too.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD IACRGPT - ANAMA ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
2. MOD IACRGPT - ANMET ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
3. MOD IACRGPT - RGPTAMA NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
4. MOD IACRGPT - RGPTMET NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
1. Input format
ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
This input format modifies the call type (successful
calls only or not) of an anonymous registration point
for IACAMA.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,SUCCONLY= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the modified registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the modified registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SUCCONLY SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
This parameter specifies that only successful
calls must be registered for IACAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
NO NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Y SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
YES SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 1+
MOD IACRGPT
ANMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ANONYMOUS REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
This input format modifies the schedule of an anonymous registration point
for IACMET.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : <OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST=> ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA origin object for the definition
of the modified registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the IACHASTA destination object for the
definition of the modified registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule which becomes valid.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 2+
MOD IACRGPT
RGPTAMA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACAMA
This input format modifies the call type (successful calls
only or not) of a named registration point for IACAMA.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : RGPT= ,SUCCONLY= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SUCCONLY SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
This parameter specifies that only successful
calls must be registered for IACAMA.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
NO NO SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Y SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
YES SUCCESSFUL CALLS ONLY
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 3+
MOD IACRGPT
RGPTMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
NAMED REGISTRATION POINT FOR IACMET
This input format modifies the schedule of a named registration point
for IACMET.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACRGPT : RGPT= ,SCHED= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT NAME
This parameter specifies the registration point name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule which becomes valid.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACRGPT- 4-
DISP IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA SCHEDULE
This command displays the specified IACHASTA schedule for metering registration.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IACSCHED : SCHED= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACSCHED- 1-
MOD IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA SCHEDULE
This command modifies an IACHASTA schedule for metering registration.
The schedules contain sequences of valid time groups per weekday category.
This makes it possible to split the data collected for a registration
point across different time groups based on the time and weekday category.
In the default configuration, the schedules use time group 1 for all
weekday categories from 0 until 24 hours.
Using this command it is possible, for one schedule, to enter up to three
periods for one time group, for all weekday categories indicated.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACSCHED : SCHED= ,TIMGRP= ,TIME= [,WDCAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCHED SCHEDULE
This parameter specifies the schedule.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
TIMGRP TIME GROUP
This parameter specifies the time group for which the entered
periods are valid.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the valid time periods (i.e. intervals)
for the time group. The specified time group then becomes valid
for the entered time interval.
Time periods can only be entered in whole 15-minute increments.
Up to 3 time intervals can be linked
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
a-b
a: HOUR (0..24)=
0...24, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTES (ONLY 00-15-30-45 ALLOWED)=
0...45, range of decimal numbers
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday category for which the
schedule is modified.
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HO , HH > EF , EH > HN , WO
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACSCHED- 1+
MOD IACSCHED
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
EH WEEKEND HALF
EF WEEKEND FULL
Default: HO, HH, EF, EH, HN, WO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACSCHED- 2-
DISP IACSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA SETTINGS
This command displays the current settings for IACHASTA meters.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IACSET ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACSET- 1-
ENTR IACSET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IACHASTA SETTINGS
This command enters the settings for IACHASTA meters. These settings define
the meter layout (i.e. how large it must be), by specifying the number of
traffic distinction groups and the number of time groups that are used for
IACHASTA metering registration. Furthermore the counter behaviour of the
IACHASTA meters is defined with this command. It can be chosen between reset
counters (default) and cyclic counters.
The command overwrites the existing values with the entered parameter values.
The command is rejected when registration points with meters or active
registrations exist.
The command is also rejected when the new values are incompatible with the
existing traffic distinction groups and schedules as entered with the
MOD IACTRADI and MOD IACSCHED commands.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR IACSET : TIMGRPMX= ,TRAGRPMX= [,CYCLCNTR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TIMGRPMX TIME GROUPS MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the highest time group that
will be used in an IACHASTA metering schedule.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
TRAGRPMX TRAFFIC GROUPS MAXIMUM
This parameter specifies the highest traffic distinction
group that will be used for IACHASTA metering registration.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4, range of decimal numbers
CYCLCNTR CYCLIC COUNTERS
This parameter specifies if cyclic counters will be used
for IACHASTA metering registration.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO CYCLIC COUNTERS
YES CYCLIC COUNTERS
N NO CYCLIC COUNTERS
Y CYCLIC COUNTERS
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IACSET- 1-
DISP IACTRADI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION
This command displays the IACHASTA traffic distinction criteria
for metering registration.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IACTRADI ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IACTRADI- 1-
MOD IACTRADI
CHRGTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IACHASTA TRAFFIC DISTINCTION
This command modifies the traffic distinction for the specified IACHASTA
meter registration point type. The traffic groups make it possible to split
the collected call data according to line category, transmission medium
requirement or charge type.
In the default situation, no distinction is made between traffic types.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD IACTRADI - CHRGTYPE CHARGE TYPE
2. MOD IACTRADI - LINECAT LINE CATEGORY
3. MOD IACTRADI - NONE NONE
4. MOD IACTRADI - TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
1. Input format
CHARGE TYPE
This input format is entered when traffic distinction according to
charge type is required.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided
or double sided) for which the traffic distinction groups are entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
DISTINCT DISTINCTION
This parameter specifies the distinction criterion.
Notes:
If differentiation according to traffic distinction has already been
modified before, a reset is possible with parameter value NONE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CHRGTYPE CHARGE TYPE
This parameter value refers to the charge type.
TRAGRP1 TRAFFIC GROUP 1
This parameter specifies the traffic group 1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CHARGE CHARGE
NOCHARGE NO CHARGE
TRAGRP2 TRAFFIC GROUP 2
This parameter specifies the traffic group 2.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CHARGE CHARGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 1+
MOD IACTRADI
CHRGTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NOCHARGE NO CHARGE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 2+
MOD IACTRADI
LINECAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LINE CATEGORY
This input format is entered when traffic distinction according to
line category is required.

[ [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TRAGRP3=]] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided
or double sided) for which the traffic distinction groups are entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
DISTINCT DISTINCTION
This parameter specifies the distinction criterion.
Notes:
If differentiation according to traffic distinction has already been
modified before, a reset is possible with parameter value NONE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LINECAT LINE CATEGORY
This parameter value refers to the line category.
TRAGRP1 TRAFFIC GROUP 1
This parameter specifies the traffic group 1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
TRAGRP2 TRAFFIC GROUP 2
This parameter specifies the traffic group 2.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
TRAGRP3 TRAFFIC GROUP 3
This parameter specifies the traffic group 3.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
COINBOX COINBOX
NORMAL NORMAL
OFFICE OFFICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 3+
MOD IACTRADI
NONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
NONE
This input format is entered when no traffic distinction is required.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided
or double sided) for which the traffic distinction groups are entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
DISTINCT DISTINCTION
This parameter specifies the distinction criterion.
Notes:
If differentiation according to traffic distinction has already been
modified before, a reset is possible with parameter value NONE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
This parameter refers to the default installation
(no traffic distinction criterion)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 4+
MOD IACTRADI
TMR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
This input format is entered when traffic distinction according to
transmission medium requirement is required.

[ [
[ MOD IACTRADI : RGPTTYPE= ,DISTINCT= ,TRAGRP1= [,TRAGRP2= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TRAGRP3= [,TRAGRP4=]]] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type (single sided
or double sided) for which the traffic distinction groups are entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DOUBLE DOUBLE
SINGLE SINGLE
DISTINCT DISTINCTION
This parameter specifies the distinction criterion.
Notes:
If differentiation according to traffic distinction has already been
modified before, a reset is possible with parameter value NONE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement.
TRAGRP1 TRAFFIC GROUP 1
This parameter specifies the traffic group 1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALL BACK CAPAB.
SPEECH SPEECH
TRAGRP2 TRAFFIC GROUP 2
This parameter specifies the traffic group 2.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALL BACK CAPAB.
SPEECH SPEECH
TRAGRP3 TRAFFIC GROUP 3
This parameter specifies the traffic group 3.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALL BACK CAPAB.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 5+
MOD IACTRADI
TMR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SPEECH SPEECH
TRAGRP4 TRAFFIC GROUP 4
This parameter specifies the traffic group 4.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
A3KHZ1 3.1KHZ AUDIO
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALL BACK CAPAB.
SPEECH SPEECH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IACTRADI- 6-
ACT IAFEAT
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE
This command activates call data recording for the specified feature
type.
Prerequisites :
- The specified feature type must not yet be active (advisory and
command rejection).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT IAFEAT - CDR COMMON CALL DETAIL RECORD
2. ACT IAFEAT - FIXFORM DISK FEATURES WITH FIXED RECORD FORMAT
3. ACT IAFEAT - HOPFEAT HOT OPERATION FEATURE
4. ACT IAFEAT - IOFEAT IMMEDIATE OUTPUT FEATURES
5. ACT IAFEAT - MP DISK FEATURES FOR MAIN PROCESSOR
6. ACT IAFEAT - NUMFILES DISK FEATURES WITH ONE OR TWO FILES
7. ACT IAFEAT - VARFORM DISK FEAT. WITH VARIABLE RECORD FORMAT
1. Input format
COMMON CALL DETAIL RECORD
This input format activates the CDR disk feature.
Note :
- The specified recording types (parameter REC) must not already be activated
via their corresponding feature type (parameter TYPE).
The following activations are mutually exclusive:
TYPE= TYPE= REC=
AMA and CDR, AMA;
IARA and CDR, IACAMA;
DNOB and CDR, DNOBS;
TRST and CDR, TRST;

[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,REC= [,SIZE=] [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the recording types to be activated
with the feature type CDR.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
DNOBS DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
TRST TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the CP disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 1+
ACT IAFEAT
CDR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
ITR 40000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
OME 10000
TST 2500
TOB 2500
UAM 15000
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
MCR 15000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
LIR 600
- For TYPE=UAM, the maximum range is 747557
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16777215, range of decimal numbers
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA, CDR or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/CDR/INA variable
records and possibly a filler record in order to fill up the file
record completely.
This parameter is not allowed in combination with the parameter
RECFORM = FIX1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 2+
ACT IAFEAT
FIXFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DISK FEATURES WITH FIXED RECORD FORMAT
This input format activates a disk feature with the fixed record format
defined by DT or project specific.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if there is sufficient
storage capacity on the system disk (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file is not deleted before the disk feature is reactivated
and the previous activation was carried out with another record format,
the feature will not be activated (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file is not deleted before the disk feature is reactivated
with the same record format, the existing disk file with the same size
and contents is restored (advisory and command execution).

[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,RECFORM= [,SIZE=] [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
[IARA [ INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
RECFORM RECORD FORMAT
This parameter specifies the fixed record format defined
by DT or project specific.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIX1 FIXED FORMAT 1 (DT)
FIX2 FIXED FORMAT 2 (project spec.)
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the CP disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
ITR 40000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
OME 10000
TST 2500
TOB 2500
UAM 15000
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
MCR 15000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
LIR 600
- For TYPE=UAM, the maximum range is 747557
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16777215, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 3+
ACT IAFEAT
FIXFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA, CDR or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/CDR/INA variable
records and possibly a filler record in order to fill up the file
record completely.
This parameter is not allowed in combination with the parameter
RECFORM = FIX1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 4+
ACT IAFEAT
HOPFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
HOT OPERATION FEATURE
This input format activates a feature type for output
via hot operation.

[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,HOPFEAT= [,REC=] [,FILEAR=] [,FILRECSZ=] [
[ [
[ [,SIZE=] [,NUMFILES=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
AMAI AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. IMMED.
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
INAI INTELL. NETWORK AMA IMMEDIATE
MCR MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
MCRI MOBILE SUBSC. CALL REC. IMMED.
HOPFEAT HOT OPERATION FEATURE NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of the hot operation
feature. The same hot operation feature can be used for several
feature types.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the recording types to be activated
with the feature type CDR.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
DNOBS DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
TRST TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
FILEAR FILE ARRAY ON MP
This parameter specifies the name of the SAM file array on the MP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA, CDR or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/CDR/INA variable
records and possibly a filler record in order to fill up the file
record completely.
This parameter is not allowed in combination with the parameter
RECFORM = FIX1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 5+
ACT IAFEAT
HOPFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the CP disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
ITR 40000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
OME 10000
TST 2500
TOB 2500
UAM 15000
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
MCR 15000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
LIR 600
- For TYPE=UAM, the maximum range is 747557
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16777215, range of decimal numbers
NUMFILES NUMBER OF FILES
This parameter specifies the number of files.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 6+
ACT IAFEAT
IOFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IMMEDIATE OUTPUT FEATURES
This input format activates an immediate output feature.
Prerequisites :
- Immediate output features can only be activated if the APS
contains the relevant subsystems (advisory and command rejection).

[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMAI AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. IMMED.
[CTEI [ CENTRAL TEST EQUIPMENT IMMED.
MALI MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
[MCRI [ MOBILE SUBSC. CALL REC. IMMED.
[MOBI [ METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
[OMEI [ OBSERVED MOB. EQP. IMMEDIATE
PMOBI PREVENTIVE METER OBSERV. IMM.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 7+
ACT IAFEAT
MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
DISK FEATURES FOR MAIN PROCESSOR
This input format activates a disk feature for the main processor.
The types AMA, IARA, CDR, INA, MCR, ITR and LIR
are allowed. The other types are possibly subject to further
stipulations.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if the main processor is
available.

[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,FILEAR= [,REC=] [,FILRECSZ=] [,RECFORM=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
ITR IMSI TRACE RECORDING
LIR LAWFUL INTERCEPT RECORDING
MCR MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
UAM US AUTOMATIC MSG ACCOUNTING
FILEAR FILE ARRAY ON MP
This parameter specifies the name of the SAM file array on the MP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the recording types to be activated
with the feature type CDR.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
DNOBS DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
TRST TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA, CDR or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/CDR/INA variable
records and possibly a filler record in order to fill up the file
record completely.
This parameter is not allowed in combination with the parameter
RECFORM = FIX1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
RECFORM RECORD FORMAT
This parameter specifies the fixed record format defined
by DT or project specific.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 8+
ACT IAFEAT
MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIX1 FIXED FORMAT 1 (DT)
FIX2 FIXED FORMAT 2 (project spec.)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 9+
ACT IAFEAT
NUMFILES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
DISK FEATURES WITH ONE OR TWO FILES
This input format activates a disk feature with the possibility to
provide one or two files.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if there is sufficient
storage capacity on the system disk (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file(s) is (are) not deleted before the disk feature is
reactivated and the previous activation was carried out with another
record format, the feature will not be activated (advisory and command
rejection).
- If the disk file(s) is (are) not deleted before the disk feature is
reactivated with the same record format, the existing disk file(s)
with the same size and contents is (are) restored (advisory and
command execution).

[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= ,NUMFILES= [,REC=] [,SIZE=] [,RECFORM=] [
[ [
[ [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
NUMFILES NUMBER OF FILES
This parameter specifies the number of files.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2, range of decimal numbers
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the recording types to be activated
with the feature type CDR.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
DNOBS DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
TRST TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the CP disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
ITR 40000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
OME 10000
TST 2500
TOB 2500
UAM 15000
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 10+
ACT IAFEAT
NUMFILES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ERS 90
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
MCR 15000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
LIR 600
- For TYPE=UAM, the maximum range is 747557
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16777215, range of decimal numbers
RECFORM RECORD FORMAT
This parameter specifies the fixed record format defined
by DT or project specific.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIX1 FIXED FORMAT 1 (DT)
FIX2 FIXED FORMAT 2 (project spec.)
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA, CDR or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/CDR/INA variable
records and possibly a filler record in order to fill up the file
record completely.
This parameter is not allowed in combination with the parameter
RECFORM = FIX1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 11+
ACT IAFEAT
VARFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
DISK FEAT. WITH VARIABLE RECORD FORMAT
This input format activates a disk feature with a variable record format.
Prerequisites :
- The disk feature can only be activated if there is sufficient
storage capacity on the system disk (advisory and command rejection).
- If the disk file is not deleted before the disk feature is reactivated,
the existing disk file with the same size and contents is restored
(advisory and command execution).

[ [
[ ACT IAFEAT : TYPE= [,REC=] [,SIZE=] [,FILRECSZ=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
[CDR [ CALL DETAIL RECORDING
[DNOB [ DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
[ERS [ ERROR STATISTICS
[FIR [ FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
[IARA [ INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
[INA [ INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
ITR IMSI TRACE RECORDING
[LIR [ LAWFUL INTERCEPT RECORDING
[MAL [ MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
[MCR [ MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
[MOB [ METER OBSERVATION
[OME [ OBSERVED MOB. EQP. RECORDING
[PMOB [ PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
[TOB [ TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
[TST [ TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT
UAM US AUTOMATIC MSG ACCOUNTING
REC RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the recording types to be activated
with the feature type CDR.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
DNOBS DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
IACAMA IACHASTA WITH AMA
TRST TRAFFIC STRUCTURE MEASUREMENT
SIZE DISK FILE SIZE IN PAM PAGES
This parameter specifies the size of the CP disk file in PAM pages.
Notes :
- The disk file must have a certain minimum size (advisory
with the required minimum disk size and command rejection).
- Determination of default values with reference to the
input of the parameter TYPE.
Parameter: TYPE SIZE
AMA 15000
ITR 40000
MOB 2000
MAL 100
OME 10000
TST 2500
TOB 2500
UAM 15000
ERS 90
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 12+
ACT IAFEAT
VARFORM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PMOB 2000
DNOB 1000
MCR 15000
FIR 1000
IARA 15000
INA 15000
CDR 15000
LIR 600
- For TYPE=UAM, the maximum range is 747557
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...16777215, range of decimal numbers
FILRECSZ FILE RECORD SIZE
This value defines the length of one record of the cyclic file for
AMA, IARA, CDR or INA.
Such a file record contains several AMA/IARA/CDR/INA variable
records and possibly a filler record in order to fill up the file
record completely.
This parameter is not allowed in combination with the parameter
RECFORM = FIX1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2048,4096,8192, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAFEAT- 13-
CAN IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE
This command cancels the individual call data recording for the
specified feature type.
For feature types with disk file, the associated disk file is
retained, but the writing of new records is prevented.
Before the command is executed, all data of the specified type still
present in the CP buffer are automatically transferred to the
appropriate disk files. The file access permission is changed,
allowing the system operator to delete this file. Files named
IA.XXXXX may not be deleted until the file contents have been saved.
Notes :
- IA data type MOB may not be canceled unless all meter observation
requests for subscribers have been deactivated.
- This command should only be used in special cases, for instance
APS change, ODAGEN run or change of disk file size.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ CAN IAFEAT : TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE INDIV. CALL DATA FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
MCR MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
UAM US AUTOMATIC MSG ACCOUNTING
ITR IMSI TRACE RECORDING
LIR LAWFUL INTERCEPT RECORDING
MOB METER OBSERVATION
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
MAL MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
OME OBSERVED MOB. EQP. RECORDING
FIR FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
DNOB DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
TOB TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
TST TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT
ERS ERROR STATISTICS
AMAI AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. IMMED.
MCRI MOBILE SUBSC. CALL REC. IMMED.
MOBI METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
PMOBI PREVENTIVE METER OBSERV. IMM.
MALI MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
OMEI OBSERVED MOB. EQP. IMMEDIATE
CTEI CENTRAL TEST EQUIPMENT IMMED.
INAI INTELLIGENT NETW. AMA IMMED.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IAFEAT- 1-
DISP IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURES
This command displays the activated individual call data feature
types.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IAFEAT : [TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE FEATURE TYPE
This parameter specifies the individual call data feature type.
When feature type is entered, all information upon the feature type
is displayed. When the the parameter is omitted, a list of all
activated feature types and their registration method is displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
MCR MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
IARA INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
CDR CALL DETAIL RECORDING
UAM US AUTOMATIC MSG ACCOUNTING
ITR IMSI TRACE RECORDING
LIR LAWFUL INTERCEPT RECORDING
MOB METER OBSERVATION
PMOB PREVENTIVE METER OBSERVATION
MAL MALICIOUS CALL TRACING
OME OBSERVED MOB. EQP. RECORDING
FIR FACILITY INPUT RECORDING
DNOB DIRECTORY NUMBER OBSERVATION
TOB TRAFFIC OBSERVATION
TST TRAFFIC STRUCT. MEASUREMENT
ERS ERROR STATISTICS
AMAI AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCT. IMMED.
MCRI MOBILE SUBSC. CALL REC. IMMED.
MOBI METER OBSERVATION IMMEDIATE
PMOBI PREVENTIVE METER OBSERV. IMM.
MALI MALICIOUS CALL TRACING IMMED.
OMEI OBSERVED MOB. EQP. IMMEDIATE
CTEI CENTRAL TEST EQUIPMENT IMMED.
INAI INTELL. NETWORK AMA IMMEDIATE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IAFEAT- 1-
MOD IAFEAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY INDIVIDUAL CALL DATA FEATURE
This command modifies the individual call data recording for
the specified feature type.
Prerequisites :
- The specified feature type must be active.
(advisory and command rejection)
This input format modifies the saving timer
for the specified feature type.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD IAFEAT : TYPE= ,SAVTIMER= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE CALL DATA RECORDING TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of call data recording.
The types AMA, IARA, CDR, INA, MCR, ITR, LIR and OME are allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AMA AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ACCOUNTING
[CDR [ CALL DETAIL RECORDING
[IARA [ INTERADMIN. REVENUE ACCOUNTING
INA INTELLIGENT NETWORK AMA
[ITR [ IMSI TRACE RECORDING
[LIR [ LAWFUL INTERCEPT RECORDING
[MCR [ MOBILE SUBSC. CALL RECORDING
OME OBSERVED MOB. EQP. RECORDING
SAVTIMER SAVING TIMER PERIOD IN MINUTES
This parameter specifies the time period for the
periodic saving of the buffer data to disk.
It can be entered and changed for activated recordings.
Notes :
- The default value is 0. When 0, periodic saving
to disk takes place every 2 minutes if the
amount of the buffer data is equal to the block size
(= 2K or 4K or 8K).
- When the value of SAVTIMER is not equal to 0,
saving of all the buffer data to disk takes place
periodically according to the entered value.
All data is guaranteed to be available on disk within
a maximum of (2 + SAVTIMER) minutes.
An incomplete block is filled up with zeros. Due to
the periodic saving, it is possible to have a high amount
of filled up zeros.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0,2,4...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IAFEAT- 1-
ACT IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command is used to activate the generation and output to disk of
special optional record types and to block the buffering of
administrative records.
The special optional record types can only be generated for activated
IA features with disk output. They are used to evaluate the following
information:
- BRD = Recovery level and restoral time after a system failure
(breakdown)
- DTC = Date/time change due to error or change of summer/winter time
- OVF = Start and end time of buffer overflow and number of records lost
due to overflow
Storage of feature-specific call data records is suppressed if the buffer
input block is set. This acts as a safeguard against multiple billing of
special subscriber services.
The block must be set before the REGEN command file is processed and
then reset immediately after processing.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [SPREC= [ [
[ ACT IAOPT : BLBUFR= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SPREC SPECIAL OPTIONAL RECORD TYPE
This parameter specifies the special optional record types.
The activated optional special data records are not related
to data types TOB and UAM, consequently no administrative
data records are entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DTC DATE TIME CHANGE
BRD BREAKDOWN
OVF OVERFLOW
BLBUFR BLOCKING OF BUFFER INPUTS
This parameter specifies the call data record type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMREC ADMINISTRATIVE RECORDS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IAOPT- 1-
CAN IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command is used to cancel the generation and output to disk of
special optional record types and to cancel the buffer input block
for individual call data administration records.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [SPREC= [ [
[ CAN IAOPT : BLBUFR= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SPREC SPECIAL OPTIONAL RECORD TYPE
This parameter specifies the special optional record types.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
DTC DATE TIME CHANGE
BRD BREAKDOWN
OVF OVERFLOW
BLBUFR BLOCKING OF BUFFER INPUTS
This parameter specifies the call data record type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ADMREC ADMINISTRATIVE RECORDS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IAOPT- 1-
DISP IAOPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDIV. CALL DATA ADMIN. OPTIONS
This command displays the activated special optional record types and
states whether buffers are blocked.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IAOPT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IAOPT- 1-
COPY IARACCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPY IARACCOUNT
This command copies call data to a post processing file. Such a
saving is permitted both during time limited registration and during
continuous registration. It has to be performed whenever the registration
counters are expected to overflow. The command cannot be entered
immediately after a full hour, because at that time, the hourly saving
of the counters is executed, and the data to be saved are not static.
A new phase of the registration period begins after the saving, i.e.:
- All registration counters of the specified type are cleared.
- The values registered up to the end of the registration period are
stored in a new post processing file containing the save date in its
name.
- The job number of the registration job is not changed by saving.
The end time of the saved registration is the same as the start time
of the newly started registration.
- No registered data are lost when saving is initiated by this command.
Input format

[ [
[ COPY IARACCT : MTYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY IARACCT- 1-
CAN IARCON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IARSTAT CONNEC.GROUP ASSIGNMENTS
This command cancels connection group assignments in the connection
group conversion table for combinations of connection types and
transmission medium requirement values, i.e. assignments of connection
groups to combinations of connection types and transmission medium
requirement values are deleted.
By cancelling a connection group assignment in the connection group
conversion table, calls with that specific combination of connection
type and transmission medium requirement value are no longer registered.
Notes:
- The command is rejected, when one or more of the specified assigments
dont exist in the conversion table (see DISP IARCON command).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARCON : IARGRP= ,CONTYP= ,TMR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IARGRP IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the connection group defined with
the command CR IARGRP.
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
- Only alphanumerical characters are permitted for this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CONTYP TYPES OF CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the connection types.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AUTO AUTOMATIC CALL
This parameter value refers to automatic calls.
OSSP OSS PERSON TO PERSON
This parameter value refers to operator
assisted calls (person-person).
OSSS OSS STATION TO STATION
This parameter value refers to operator
assisted calls (station-station).
DAUT DISTANT OPERATOR AUTOMATIC
This parameter value refers to automatic calls
switched by the distant operator.
DOSP DISTANT OPERATOR PERSON/PERSON
This parameter value refers to long distance
operator assisted calls (person-person).
DOSS DIST.OPERATOR STATION/STATION
This parameter value refers to long distance
operator assisted calls (station-station).
TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
This parameter specifies the transmission medium requirement values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARCON- 1+
CAN IARCON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : 3.1 kHz audio (for voice or
voiceband data up to 9.6 kbit/s).
SPEECH SPEECH
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : speech (for voice).
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : 64 kbit/s unrestricted
(voice and/or high speed data).
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALLBACK CAPABILITY
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : 64 kbit/s unrestricted
with fallback capability (voice and/or high
speed data).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARCON- 2-
DISP IARCON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARSTAT CONNEC.GROUP ASSIGNMENTS
This command displays the complete connection group conversion table,
i.e. all assignments of connection groups to combinations of connection
types and transmission medium requirement values, entered with the
command ENTR IARCON are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IARCON ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARCON- 1-
ENTR IARCON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IARSTAT CONNEC.GROUP ASSIGNMENTS
This command enters connection groups in the conversion table for
combinations of connection types and transmission medium requirement
values, i.e. an assignment of connection groups to combinations of
connection types and transmission medium requirement values is done.
Notes:
- The command is rejected when :
1. the assigment overlaps with previously entered assigments
(see DISP IARCON command);
2. the connection group does not exist (see DISP IARGRP command).
- From the parameters CONTYP and TMR, at least one should be entered.
- The specified connection group is entered in the conversion table for
all combinations of the entered parameter values.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR IARCON : IARGRP= <,CONTYP= ,TMR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IARGRP IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the connection group defined with
the command CR IARGRP.
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
- Only alphanumerical characters are permitted for this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CONTYP TYPES OF CONNECTION
This parameter specifies the connection types.
Notes:
- When this parameter is omitted, the connection group is entered in
the conversation table for all possible connection types,
i.e. registration will be done independent of this parameter.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
AUTO AUTOMATIC CALL
This parameter value refers to automatic calls.
OSSP OSS PERSON TO PERSON
This parameter value refers to operator
assisted calls (person-person).
OSSS OSS STATION TO STATION
This parameter value refers to operator
assisted calls (station-station).
DAUT DISTANT OPERATOR AUTOMATIC
This parameter value refers to automatic calls
switched by the distant operator.
DOSP DISTANT OPERATOR PERSON/PERSON
This parameter value refers to long distance
operator assisted calls (person-person).
DOSS DIST.OPERATOR STATION/STATION
This parameter value refers to long distance
operator assisted calls (station-station).
Default: AUTO, OSSP, OSSS, DAUT, DOSP, DOSS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARCON- 1+
ENTR IARCON
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TMR TRANSMISS. MEDIUM REQUIREMENT
This parameter specifies the transmission medium requirement values.
Notes:
- When this parameter is omitted, the connection group is entered in
the conversion table for all possible transmission medium requirement
values, i.e. registration will be done independent of this parameter.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
A3KHZ1 3.1 KHZ AUDIO
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : 3.1 kHz audio (for voice or
voiceband data up to 9.6 kbit/s).
SPEECH SPEECH
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : speech (for voice).
KBIT64 64 KBIT/S UNRESTRICTED
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : 64 kbit/s unrestricted
(voice and/or high speed data).
KBIT64FB 64 KBIT/S FALLBACK CAPABILITY
This parameter value refers to the transmission
medium requirement : 64 kbit/s unrestricted
with fallback capability (voice and/or high
speed data).
Default: A3KHZ1, SPEECH, KBIT64, KBIT64FB
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARCON- 2-
DISP IARDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS DATA
This command displays the IARSTAT destination or origin names
for a measurement type and the associated state. It is also possible to
display the number of IARSTAT destination and origin names that
are free or in use for a measurement type.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,DNAME=[[ [
[ DISP IARDAT : MTYPE= [,ONAME=[ [,STATUS=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
Notes:
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Notes:
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARDAT- 1+
DISP IARDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
STATUS STATUS
This parameter specifies the state of the IARSTAT name. If one of the
states is specified, only the names with this state are displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
INACT INACTIVE
While registration was active, the name is
removed from all objects to which it was
assigned, using the commands CAN IARNAME
or MOD IARNAME.
The name itself will be deleted after the
next saving of the IARSTAT counter data
to a post processing file.
ACT ACTIVE
The name was assigned to at least one object
using ENTR IARNAME/MOD IARNAME.
The name can additionally be assigned to other
objects.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARDAT- 2-
MOD IARDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IARA STATISTICS DATA
This command modifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names.
The command is used for editorial changes of the names.
The assignment to the objects, as defined by the command ENTR IARNAME,
is not modified. The new name must not yet have been assigned for the
specified measurement type. The modification comes into effect immediately;
the system will no longer recognize the old name.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,DNAME=[ ; [
[ MOD IARDAT : MTYPE= ,ONAME= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
Parameter values should be entered in the form:
first parameter unit <name:new>, then <name:old>.
Notes:
- Input of a single X is not accepted.
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Parameter values should be entered in the form:
first parameter unit <name:new>, then <name:old>.
Notes:
- Input of a single X is not accepted.
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARDAT- 1+
MOD IARDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARDAT- 2-
DISP IARFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARA MEASUREMENT FILE
This command displays an IARA meter measurement file list on OMT.
The file type depends on the chosen measurement method within the
mobile services switching center. The chosen measurement method
could be either IACHASTA with meters (IACMET) or IARSTAT with
meters (IARMET).
IACMET : CR.IR.rddds.fffff
IARMET : IR.Aryymmnn
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IARFILE : [MEASTYP=] [,STATUS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MEASTYP MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type of the data contained
by the file. A list of files containing this type of data are
displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL TYPES (IACMET/IARMET)
IARSTAT1 TYPE 1 (ONLY IARMET)
IARSTAT2 TYPE 2 (ONLY IARMET)
IARSTAT3 TYPE 3 (ONLY IARMET)
IARSTAT4 TYPE 4 (ONLY IARMET)
STATUS FILE STATUS
This parameter specifies the file status. All files with this
status are displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL RESULT FILES
RUN RUNNING RESULT FILES
TER TERMINATED RESULT FILES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARFILE- 1-
CAN IARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUPS
This command cancels a previously installed connection group in
the connection group names table (see CR IARGRP command).
Notes:
- The command is not allowed when :
1. the connection group doesnt exist (see DISP IARGRP command);
2. assigments for the specified connection group exist (,see
DISP IARCON command);
3. a registration is active (see DISP IARJOB command);
4. matrix points are still active (see DISP IARMPT command).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARGRP : IARGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IARGRP IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the connection group.
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
- Only alphanumeric characters are permitted for this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARGRP- 1-
CR IARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUPS
This command installs a new connection group in the connection group
names table.
Notes:
- When the first CR IARGRP command for the actual APS is entered
before the commands CAN IARGRP resp. CAN IARCON are entered,
the default configuration of the connection group database is
overwritten. The names of the connection groups and their assignment
to combinations of connection types and transmission medium
requirements can then freely be chosen.
- When the commands CAN IARGRP resp. CAN IARCON are entered before
the command CR IARGRP, the default configuration is not overwritten
and the connection group is added to the existing groups. The default
configuration can then only be deleted by separate CAN IARGRP and
CAN IARCON commands.
- The command is rejected when :
1. the connection group already exists (see DISP IARGRP command);
2. the connection group names table is full (max. 7 connection groups
can be installed) (see DISP IARGRP command);
3. a registration is active (see DISP IARJOB command);
4. matrix points for counters are active (see DISP IARMPT command).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IARGRP : IARGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IARGRP IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUP NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the connection group.
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
- Only alphanumerical characters are permitted for this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IARGRP- 1-
DISP IARGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARSTAT CONNECTION GROUPS
This command displays the complete connection group names table,
i.e. all connection group names (max. 7) entered with the command
CR IARGRP are displayed.
When the CR IARGRP command has been entered earlier on, the
default configuration (connection group = connection type) is
displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IARGRP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARGRP- 1-
DISP IARJOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS JOB
This command displays the following information for all registration
jobs of all measurement types:
- begin- and end-time (in case of a time limited job)
- the post processing file name
- the job number
- the job state.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IARJOB ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARJOB- 1-
CAN IARMPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IARSTAT MATRIX POINT
This command cancels a matrix point for the specified measurement type and
origin name / destination name combination. The matrix point is cancelled
for the counter method or for the ticket method. The command can be
used for one matrix point only.
When cancelling the matrix point, the following three cases can occur:
- For the specified measurement type a measurement job is active. The
matrix point immediately becomes inactive, so that no more call data are
added to the assigned measurement counters or no more tickets are generated.
The inactive status is necessary to hold the information needed for the
post processing file (in case of the counter method) or for the optional
data packages of already started calls (in case of the ticket method).
The matrix point remains in the inactive status until the next saving into
the associated post processing file or until the end of the measurement job.
The matrix point is then cancelled and (in case of the counter method)
the counters are made available to the pool of free counters.
- For the specified measurement type no measurement job is active.
The matrix point is cancelled immediately and (in case of the counter method)
the assigned measurement counters are immediately made available to the pool
of free counters.
- The specified origin name or the specified destination name is inactive.
The command is rejected, as there are either only matrix points which are
inactive or none at all.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARMPT : MTYPE= ,DNAME= ,ONAME= <,CNTRS= ,TICKET=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARMPT- 1+
CAN IARMPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
CNTRS IARA WITH COUNTERS
This parameter is used to deactivate the registration counters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO CANCEL NO IARA WITH COUNTERS
YES CANCEL IARA WITH COUNTERS
TICKET IARA WITH AMA TICKET
This parameter is used to deactivate the registration on
AMA-tickets.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO CANCEL NO IARA WITH AMA TICKET
YES CANCEL IARA WITH AMA TICKET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARMPT- 2-
CR IARMPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IARSTAT MATRIX POINT
This command creates a matrix point for the specified measurement type
and the specified origin name and destination name combination.
Depending on the further parameters, the counter method and/or the
ticket method are used for the registration of the call data for this
matrix point.
When the ticket method is chosen, for each call of the specified
origin name/destination name combination, an automatic message
accounting ticket is produced.
When the counter method is chosen, as many counters of the counter
pool, as there are connection groups to be measured separately, are
linked to the matrix point.
The matrix point is given the state active for counters and/or for
tickets.
Notes:
- Only one measurement type, one origin name and one destination/route
name may be specified at one time.
- The names must first be assigned to the objects, using the commands
ENTR IARNAME or MOD IARNAME.
- When the default connection group database is not used, i.e. when
separated registration pro transmission medium requirement is wanted,
the connection groups must first be created (command CR IARGRP) and
assigned to combinations of connection types and transmission medium
requirement values (command ENTR IARCON).
- When no registration is active for a measurement type, no call data
are registered for the matrix points of that particular measurement.
Activation of measurements is done with the command REC IARSTAT and
the activated measurements are displayed with the command
DISP IARJOB.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR IARMPT : MTYPE= ,DNAME= ,ONAME= [,CNTR1= [,CNTR2= [
[ [
[ [,CNTR3= [,CNTR4= [,CNTR5= [,CNTR6= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CNTR7=]]]]]]] [,TICKET=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IARMPT- 1+
CR IARMPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
- Only alphanumeric characters are permitted for this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Notes:
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
- Only alphanumeric characters are permitted for this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CNTR1 CONNECTION GROUPS COUNTER 1
This parameter enables the specified connection groups to be measured
separately or in any combination. When a connection group is assigned
to a particular counter, all call data for this matrix point and this
connection group are recorded in this counter. A maximum of 7 counters
can be used for one matrix point.
Notes:
- CAUTION: If a connection group is not specified in any counter,
call data for this connection group are not recorded.
- The parameter values are the previously defined connection groups
(see command CR IARGRP), eventually chained with &.
- The call data for the specified connection groups in one counter
are all added to the same measurement counter.
- It is also possible to enter the identifier ALL for parameter
CNTR1. The call data of all existing connection groups are
then added to one counter. In this case parameter CNTR2 to
parameter CNTR7 are not allowed.
- A single X is not accepted for the input.
- Only alphanumerical characters are permitted for this parameter.
- Multiple use of the same connection groups in different counter
parameters is not permitted.
- Parameters CNTR1 to CNTR7 may only be used in increasing
order.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CNTR2 CONNECTION GROUPS COUNTER 2
For parameter description, see parameter CNTR1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CNTR3 CONNECTION GROUPS COUNTER 3
For parameter description, see parameter CNTR1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CNTR4 CONNECTION GROUPS COUNTER 4
For parameter description, see parameter CNTR1.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IARMPT- 2+
CR IARMPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CNTR5 CONNECTION GROUPS COUNTER 5
For parameter description, see parameter CNTR1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CNTR6 CONNECTION GROUPS COUNTER 6
For parameter description, see parameter CNTR1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CNTR7 CONNECTION GROUPS COUNTER 7
For parameter description, see parameter CNTR1.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TICKET IARSTAT WITH AMA TICKET
This parameter specifies whether automatic message accounting
tickets are wanted for call data of this matrix point or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO NO IARSTAT WITH AMA TICKET
YES IARSTAT WITH AMA TICKET
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IARMPT- 3-
DISP IARMPT
MTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARSTAT MATRIX POINT
This command displays
1. when only the parameter MTYPE is entered:
- the number of used and free matrix points of the specified
measurement type;
- the number of used and free measurement counters in the common
counter pool for all four measurement types;
or
2. when all parameters are entered:
- the assignment of the connection groups to the counters for all
specified matrix points.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP IARMPT - MTYPE OVERVIEW PER MEASUREMENT TYPE
2. DISP IARMPT - OTHER SPECIFIC MATRIX POINT DISPLAY
1. Input format
OVERVIEW PER MEASUREMENT TYPE
This input format displays an overview of the free and
used matrix points for counters for the entered
measurement type and the number of free and used counters
of the whole counterpool.

[ [
[ DISP IARMPT : MTYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARMPT- 1+
DISP IARMPT
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SPECIFIC MATRIX POINT DISPLAY
This input format displays the status of the matrix point
for counters and AMA ticket and the connection groups
assigned to the registration counters.

[ [
[ DISP IARMPT : MTYPE= ,DNAME= ,ONAME= <,CNTRS= ,TICKET=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not specified, all associated parameter values
are accessed.
- A maximum of 10 individual names and/or intervals can be linked.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Notes:
- If the parameter is not specified, all associated parameter values
are accessed.
- A maximum of 10 individual names and/or intervals can be linked.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARMPT- 2+
DISP IARMPT
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CNTRS IARA WITH COUNTERS
This parameter specifies the counter status of the matrix points to be
displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT STATUS: ACTIVE
The matrix point is created with counters using
CR IARMPT.
INACT STATUS: INACTIVE
The matrix point was cancelled for counters using
CAN IARMPT, while registration was active.
It will retain this status until the next
time call data are saved in a post processing
file for the measurement type of the matrix point.
NOUSE STATUS: NOT USED
The matrix point is not created for counters
using CR IARMPT.
TICKET IARA WITH AMA TICKET
This parameter specifies the ticket status of the matrix points to be
displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT STATUS : ACTIVE
The matrix point is created for automatic
message accounting ticket using CR IARMPT.
INACT STATUS : INACTIVE
The matrix point was cancelled for automatic
message accounting ticket using the command
CAN IARMPT, while a registration was active.
It will retain this status until the end of the
registration or until the next saving of the
call data in post processing file for the
measurement type of the matrix point.
NOUSE STATUS : NOT USED
The matrix point is not created for automatic
message accounting ticket using CR IARMPT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARMPT- 3-
CAN IARNAME
COUTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IARA STATISTICS NAME
This command cancels IARSTAT origin or destination names in the IARSTAT
database for the entered object. i.e. an assignment of IARSTAT origin
or destination names to the entered object is deleted.
Notes:
- The IARSTAT names can be cancelled simultaneously for the four possible
measurement types.
- The deletion is immediately active.
- IARSTAT names cannot be assigned to test equipment, switchboards,
nailed-up connections (NUC) or local network trunk group.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN IARNAME - COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
2. CAN IARNAME - DEST DESTINATION
3. CAN IARNAME - LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
4. CAN IARNAME - LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
5. CAN IARNAME - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This input format cancels IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a conference unit type.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARNAME : COUTYP= ,DIR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the conference unit type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
MEETME MEET ME
PHONMEET TELEPHONE MEETING
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the direction for which the entered IARSTAT
names are meant. i.e. the parameter specifies whether origin or
destination names are cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 1+
CAN IARNAME
COUTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 2+
CAN IARNAME
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format cancels IARSTAT destination names for a
destination/route combination.

[ [
[ [
[ [,RTNO=[ ; [
[ CAN IARNAME : DEST= ,TGNO= ,NAME= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area name.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
RTNO ROUTE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the position (route number) in the search
order of the route reference in the destination area data table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 3+
CAN IARNAME
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 4+
CAN IARNAME
LAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE
This input format cancels IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a local area code.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARNAME : LAC= ,DIR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the direction for which the entered IARSTAT
names are meant. i.e. the parameter specifies whether origin or
destination names are cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 5+
CAN IARNAME
LAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 6+
CAN IARNAME
LACOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This input format cancels IARSTAT origin names for a
local area code originating.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARNAME : LACOR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 7+
CAN IARNAME
LACOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 8+
CAN IARNAME
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format cancels IARSTAT origin names for a
trunk group number.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARNAME : TGNO= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 9+
CAN IARNAME
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARNAME- 10-
DISP IARNAME
COUTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS NAME
This command displays IARSTAT origin or destination names in the IARSTAT
database for the entered objects, i.e. an assignment of IARSTAT origin
or destination names to the entered objects is displayed.
Notes:
- Only names in status ACTIVE are displayed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP IARNAME - COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
2. DISP IARNAME - DEST DESTINATION
3. DISP IARNAME - LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
4. DISP IARNAME - LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
5. DISP IARNAME - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This input format displays IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a conference unit type.

[ [
[ DISP IARNAME : COUTYP= ,DIR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the conference unit type.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
MEETME MEET ME
PHONMEET TELEPHONE MEETING
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies whether the IARSTAT origin or
destination names are to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARNAME- 1+
DISP IARNAME
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format displays IARSTAT destination names for a
destination.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,RTNO=[[ [
[ DISP IARNAME : DEST= [,TGNO=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area name.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
RTNO ROUTE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the position (route number) in the search
order of the route reference in the destination area data table.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARNAME- 2+
DISP IARNAME
LAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE
This input format displays IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a local area code.

[ [
[ DISP IARNAME : LAC= ,DIR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies whether the IARSTAT origin or
destination names are to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARNAME- 3+
DISP IARNAME
LACOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This input format displays IARSTAT origin names for a
local area code originating.

[ [
[ DISP IARNAME : LACOR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARNAME- 4+
DISP IARNAME
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format displays IARSTAT origin names for a
trunk group number.

[ [
[ DISP IARNAME : TGNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARNAME- 5-
ENTR IARNAME
COUTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IARA STATISTICS NAME
This command enters IARSTAT origin or destination names in the IARSTAT
database for the entered object. i.e an assignment of IARSTAT origin
or destination names to the entered object is done.
Notes:
- The IARSTAT names can be entered simultaneously for the four possible
measurement types.
- The entry is immediately active.
- IARSTAT names cannot be assigned to test equipment, switchboards,
nailed-up connections (NUC) or local network trunk groups.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR IARNAME - COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
2. ENTR IARNAME - DEST DESTINATION
3. ENTR IARNAME - LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
4. ENTR IARNAME - LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
5. ENTR IARNAME - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This input format enters IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a conference unit type.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR IARNAME : COUTYP= ,DIR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the conference unit type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
MEETME MEET ME
PHONMEET TELEPHONE MEETING
DIR DIRECTION TYPE
This parameter specifies the direction for which the entered IARSTAT
names are meant. i.e. the parameter specifies whether origin or
destination names are entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 1+
ENTR IARNAME
COUTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 2+
ENTR IARNAME
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format enters IARSTAT destination names for a
destination/route combination.

[ [
[ [
[ [,RTNO=[ ; [
[ ENTR IARNAME : DEST= ,TGNO= ,NAME= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area name.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
RTNO ROUTE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the position (route number) in the search
order of the route reference in the destination area data table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 3+
ENTR IARNAME
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 4+
ENTR IARNAME
LAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE
This input format enters IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a local area code.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR IARNAME : LAC= ,DIR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DIR DIRECTION TYPE
This parameter specifies the direction for which the entered IARSTAT
names are meant. i.e. the parameter specifies whether origin or
destination names are entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 5+
ENTR IARNAME
LAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 6+
ENTR IARNAME
LACOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This input format enters IARSTAT origin names for a local area
code originating.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR IARNAME : LACOR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 7+
ENTR IARNAME
LACOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 8+
ENTR IARNAME
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format enters IARSTAT origin names for a trunk group
number.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR IARNAME : TGNO= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered in the IARSTAT
database for a particular object, dependent on the other parameters
of the command.
Notes:
- Name: 1-2-3-4. If entry of a name is not desired for a
measurement type, either a 0 or the number sign # must be
entered.
0 means: no name stored
# means: stored value is ignored
- The IARSTAT names can be new names or names already assigned
to other objects (grouping of registration).
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 9+
ENTR IARNAME
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARNAME- 10-
MOD IARNAME
COUTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IARA STATISTICS NAME
This command modifies IARSTAT origin or destination names in the
IARSTAT database for the entered object, i.e. an assignment of
IARSTAT origin or destination names to the entered object is changed.
Notes:
- The IARSTAT names can be changed simultaneously for the four possible
measurement types.
- The modification is immediately active.
- IARSTAT names cannot be assigned to test equipment, switchboards,
nailed-up connections (NUC) or local network trunk groups.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD IARNAME - COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
2. MOD IARNAME - DEST DESTINATION
3. MOD IARNAME - LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
4. MOD IARNAME - LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
5. MOD IARNAME - TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
1. Input format
CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This input format modifies IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a conference unit type.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IARNAME : COUTYP= ,DIR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
COUTYP CONFERENCE UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies the conference unit type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONFL LARGE CONFERENCE
MEETME MEET ME
PHONMEET TELEPHONE MEETING
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the direction for which the entered IARSTAT
names are meant, i.e. the parameter specifies whether origin or
destination names are modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered, modified or
cancelled in the IARSTAT database for a particular object,
dependent on the other parameters of the command.
Notes:
This parameter must be entered in the following form:
- Enter names : new1-new2-new3-new4/
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 1+
MOD IARNAME
COUTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Instead of newx, the sign # may be entered. In this
case, the value available in the memory must not be
considered.
- Cancel names : /old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of oldx, the sign # may be entered. In this case,
the value available in the memory must not be considered.
- Modify names : new1-new2-new3-new4/old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of newx or oldx, the sign 0 or # may be entered.
0 instead of newx means that the value in memory must be
cancelled.
When a new name is entered with newx, a 0 must be entered
instead of oldx.
For this registration, for wich no changes may take plays,
# must be entered instead of both newx and oldx.
Combinations without any sense are rejected.
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- If the maximum number of names is reached, modifying can
only be done by cancelling the old name and entering the
new name again.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 2+
MOD IARNAME
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DESTINATION
This input format modifies IARSTAT destination names for a
destination/route combination.

[ [
[ [
[ [,RTNO=[ ; [
[ MOD IARNAME : DEST= ,TGNO= ,NAME= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEST DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination area name.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
RTNO ROUTE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the position (route number) in the search
order of the route reference in the destination area data table.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered, modified or
cancelled in the IARSTAT database for a particular object,
dependent on the other parameters of the command.
Notes:
This parameter must be entered in the following form:
- Enter names : new1-new2-new3-new4/
Instead of newx, the sign # may be entered. In this
case, the value available in the memory must not be
considered.
- Cancel names : /old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of oldx, the sign # may be entered. In this case,
the value available in the memory must not be considered.
- Modify names : new1-new2-new3-new4/old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of newx or oldx, the sign 0 or # may be entered.
0 instead of newx means that the value in memory must be
cancelled.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 3+
MOD IARNAME
DEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
When a new name is entered with newx, a 0 must be entered
instead of oldx.
For this registration, for wich no changes may take plays,
# must be entered instead of both newx and oldx.
Combinations without any sense are rejected.
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- If the maximum number of names is reached, modifying can
only be done by cancelling the old name and entering the
new name again.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 4+
MOD IARNAME
LAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE
This input format modifies IARSTAT origin or destination names
for a local area code.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IARNAME : LAC= ,DIR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DIR DIRECTION
This parameter specifies the direction for which the entered IARSTAT
names are meant, i.e. the parameter specifies whether origin or
destination names are modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DEST DESTINATION
ORIG ORIGIN
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered, modified or
cancelled in the IARSTAT database for a particular object,
dependent on the other parameters of the command.
Notes:
This parameter must be entered in the following form:
- Enter names : new1-new2-new3-new4/
Instead of newx, the sign # may be entered. In this
case, the value available in the memory must not be
considered.
- Cancel names : /old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of oldx, the sign # may be entered. In this case,
the value available in the memory must not be considered.
- Modify names : new1-new2-new3-new4/old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of newx or oldx, the sign 0 or # may be entered.
0 instead of newx means that the value in memory must be
cancelled.
When a new name is entered with newx, a 0 must be entered
instead of oldx.
For this registration, for wich no changes may take plays,
# must be entered instead of both newx and oldx.
Combinations without any sense are rejected.
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- If the maximum number of names is reached, modifying can
only be done by cancelling the old name and entering the
new name again.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
n/o
n/
/o
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 5+
MOD IARNAME
LAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 6+
MOD IARNAME
LACOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This input format modifies IARSTAT origin names for a
local area code originating.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IARNAME : LACOR= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOR LOCAL AREA CODE ORIGINATING
This parameter specifies the local area code originating.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered, modified or
cancelled in the IARSTAT database for a particular object,
dependent on the other parameters of the command.
Notes:
This parameter must be entered in the following form:
- Enter names : new1-new2-new3-new4/
Instead of newx, the sign # may be entered. In this
case, the value available in the memory must not be
considered.
- Cancel names : /old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of oldx, the sign # may be entered. In this case,
the value available in the memory must not be considered.
- Modify names : new1-new2-new3-new4/old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of newx or oldx, the sign 0 or # may be entered.
0 instead of newx means that the value in memory must be
cancelled.
When a new name is entered with newx, a 0 must be entered
instead of oldx.
For this registration, for wich no changes may take plays,
# must be entered instead of both newx and oldx.
Combinations without any sense are rejected.
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- If the maximum number of names is reached, modifying can
only be done by cancelling the old name and entering the
new name again.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 7+
MOD IARNAME
LACOR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 8+
MOD IARNAME
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This input format modifies IARSTAT origin names for a
trunk group number.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IARNAME : TGNO= ,NAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
NAME NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin or destination names for
the 4 IARSTAT measurement types. They are entered, modified or
cancelled in the IARSTAT database for a particular object,
dependent on the other parameters of the command.
Notes:
This parameter must be entered in the following form:
- Enter names : new1-new2-new3-new4/
Instead of newx, the sign # may be entered. In this
case, the value available in the memory must not be
considered.
- Cancel names : /old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of oldx, the sign # may be entered. In this case,
the value available in the memory must not be considered.
- Modify names : new1-new2-new3-new4/old1-old2-old3-old4
Instead of newx or oldx, the sign 0 or # may be entered.
0 instead of newx means that the value in memory must be
cancelled.
When a new name is entered with newx, a 0 must be entered
instead of oldx.
For this registration, for wich no changes may take plays,
# must be entered instead of both newx and oldx.
Combinations without any sense are rejected.
- A name in INACTIVE cannot be used for new entries.
- If the maximum number of names is reached, modifying can
only be done by cancelling the old name and entering the
new name again.
- This parameter allows only alphanumeric characters.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b-c-d
a: IARSTAT NAME 1=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 9+
MOD IARNAME
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following characters are not permitted:
.
b: IARSTAT NAME 2=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
c: IARSTAT NAME 3=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
d: IARSTAT NAME 4=
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARNAME- 10-
CAN IARSAVDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IARSTAT SAVING DATE
This command resets the time at which IARSTAT continuous
registrations are saved to the default values,
i.e. to the first day of the month at 0 a.m.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARSAVDA [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARSAVDA- 1-
DISP IARSAVDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARSTAT SAVING DATE
This command displays hour and day for the automatic monthly saving
of the permanent IARSTAT measurements jobs in a post processing file.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP IARSAVDA [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARSAVDA- 1-
ENTR IARSAVDA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IARSTAT SAVING DATE
This command enters a new time for the monthly automatic saving of
data of IARSTAT continuous registrations. The command is only
executed after a check has been made to ensure that no other time is
installed (except for the default: first day of the month at 0 a.m.).
If a time is already installed earlier on, it must first be reset
to the default value using the cancel command.
Automatic saving of data of continuous registration to a post processing
file is only carried out once a month. The user receives a message
acknowledging that the saving has been executed.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,DAYNUM=[ ; [
[ ENTR IARSAVDA : HOUR= ,DAYTYP= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
HOUR HOUR OF DAILY SCHEDULED REPORT
This parameter specifies the hour at which the monthly
automatic saving of continuously registered data is
to take place.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...23, range of decimal numbers
DAYNUM DAY NUMBER OF SAVING DATE
This parameter specifies the day on which the automatic monthly
saving of the continuous registration is to be done. If the day of
the desired saving does not lie within the range, 1-28, entered
with this parameter, the parameter DAYTYP must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...28, range of decimal numbers
DAYTYP DAY TYPE FOR SAVING DATE
This parameter specifies the type of day on which the monthly
automatic saving of continuously registered data is to take
place. It is only used in cases where the day number exceeds 28
(parameter DAYNUM).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LAST LAST DAY
PREV PREVIOUS DAY
PREV2 DAY BEFORE PREVIOUS DAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARSAVDA- 1-
DISP IARSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS
This command displays the IARSTAT counter data for a running or completed
registration job.
Only the registered data of origin and destination names which have
been combined to active matrix points are displayed.
Display of call data during a registration:
This is done by entering the measurement type parameter.
For time limited registrations, the displayed counters contain the call
data registered from the start of the registration until the last full hour;
i.e. the transient counters containing the values received during the
current hour are not included until the next full hour.
For a continuous registration job, the displayed counters contain the call
data registered from the last intermediate saving of the registration, until
the last full hour.
Remark: display is not possible during the saving of the transient counters
at the full hour.
Display of a post processing file:
The post processing file must be specified.
A display of the registered call data is only possible from the
unconverted file IR.Aryymmnn on disk. Copying the disk file to tape /
optical disk by TRANS FILE for post processing converts the data
into a format, which can no longer be displayed by DISP IARSTAT.
The disk file IR.Aryymmnn itself remains displayable.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [MTYPE=[ [
[ DISP IARSTAT : FILE= [,DNAME=] [,ONAME=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the post processing file on disk.
The name of the post processing file is structured as follows:
IR.Aryymmnn
with r = measurement type number (1...4)
yy = year (begin registration)
mm = month (begin registration)
nn = serial number (01...99) within a measurement type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARSTAT- 1+
DISP IARSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
If the parameter is omitted, all possible parameter values
are taken into account.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in
alphabetical order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
If the parameter is omitted, all possible parameter values
are taken into account.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in
alphabetical order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARSTAT- 2-
REC IARSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD IARA STATISTICS
This command defines the start and end time of a registration job for
a measurement type. A post processing file for the saving of the recorded
call data for this measurement type is then created. When a post processing
file could not be created before the start time of the registration,
e.g. due to lack of space on disk, the registration will still be started.
Each full hour, the system will try to create the missing post processing
file.
The name of the post processing file is structured as follows:
IR.Aryymmnn
with r = measurement type number (1...4)
yy = year (begin registration)
mm = month (begin registration)
nn = serial number (01...99) within a measurement type
Notes:
The input parameters are checked for compliance with the following rules:
- A registration job can not be started earlier than the beginning of the
next hour or later than 31 days from now.
- The interval between start and end time may not be less than one hour
and may not exceed 35 days.
- Per measurement type, maximum 2 registration jobs can be installed.
Their time intervals may not overlap.
For time limited registrations, the registered data are saved on
post processing file at the end of the registration.
For long term registrations, a monthly saving on post processing file is
automatically executed. Without any input from the operator, this saving
takes place on the first day of each month at 0 a.m.
This saving time is changeable by the command ENTR IARSAVDA.
At the same time a new file is created to collect the data for the next month.
Furthermore it is always possible to start an intermediate saving by using
the command COPY IARACCT. In this case, also a new post processing
file is created.
The post processing file is created when REC IARSTAT is entered and it is
given write and delete protection. The name cannot be changed either. After
call data have been written to the file, the delete protection is cancelled.
Before transferring the post processing file from disk to magnetic tape /
optical disk, the IRCPP copying process must first be associated with
the command SET FGRPATT.
If the command is issued from a COFIP command file, the corresponding COFIP
parameters must be set to allow process messages to be output on the
printer terminal, otherwise all messages associated with the command are
suppressed.
If the command is started from a command file generated by REGEN, it is
possible that the begin time for a registration job has already been passed.
The job must then be re-entered manually with appropriate corrections
by the operating personnel.
If software errors occur during the saving of registered data to the
post processing file, registration is not interrupted, but changes to a new
status and can be stopped using the command CAN JOB. If software errors
occur again, call data may be lost, because the use of CAN JOB causes the
registration job to be stopped in all cases.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ REC IARSTAT : MTYPE= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC IARSTAT- 1+
REC IARSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter defines the begin time for a registration job. If
the registration job is to start at the next hour on the hour,
it is not necessary to enter this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
d: HOUR OF BEGIN TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter defines the termination time for a registration job.
If registration is to be continuous, it is not necessary to enter
this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
d: HOUR OF TERMINATION TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC IARSTAT- 2-
CAN IARTMPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IARSTAT TIME PERIOD
This command cancels an IARSTAT tariff switching time assigned to one
IARSTAT tariff zone. All other switching times remain effective.
Notes:
- When no weekday categories are specified, the tariff switching time is
cancelled for all possible weekday categories. This command is rejected,
when the tariff switching time does not exist for all weekday categories.
- When the last tariff switch of a tariff zone is cancelled, the call data
are added to the day counters.
- The command takes effect immediately.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARTMPD : TZONE= ,TARIFF= ,TIME= [,WDCAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TZONE IARSTAT TARIFF ZONE
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff zone, for which the
tariff switch is cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
TARIFF IARSTAT TARIFF
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff, to which will be switched.
Each tariff has its own counter. A tariff switch implies that the
registered data are added to another counter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DAY DAY TARIFF
EVE EVENING TARIFF
NIGHT NIGHT TARIFF
TIME TIME FOR TARIFF SWITCH
This parameter specifies the time for the tariff switch.
Tariff switches are only possible at the full hour.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
a decimal number
This parameter unit value must be zero (0), since tariff
switching times can only be entered for the full hour.
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday categories for the tariff switch.
When the parameter is omitted, the tariff switch is cancelled for all
possible weekday categories.
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HO , HH > EF , EH > HN , WO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARTMPD- 1+
CAN IARTMPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
Default: WO, HH, HO, HN, EH, EF
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARTMPD- 2-
CR IARTMPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IARSTAT TIME PERIOD
This command creates an IARSTAT tariff switching time for one IARSTAT
tariff zone. Up to 255 switching times can be created for the whole 99
tariff zones.
The following rules apply to the splitting of call data for a call that
extends on both sides of a tariff switching time:
- Holding times A-side and B-side and the conversation time are split
between the tariff counters before and after the switching time in
accordance with the actual time.
- The number of call attempts and calls answered are added to the
tariff counters valid after the tariff switching time.
- The switching times can be installed per weekday category. When no
weekday categories are specified, the tariff switching time is valid
for all possible weekday categories.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IARTMPD : TZONE= ,TARIFF= ,TIME= [,WDCAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TZONE IARSTAT TARIFF ZONE
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff zone, for which the
tariff switch is created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
TARIFF IARSTAT TARIFF
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff, to which will be switched.
Each tariff has its own counter. A tariff switch implies that the
registered data are added to another counter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DAY DAY TARIFF
EVE EVENING TARIFF
NIGHT NIGHT TARIFF
TIME TIME FOR TARIFF SWITCH
This parameter specifies the time for the tariff switch.
Tariff switches are only possible at the full hour.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
a decimal number
This parameter unit value must be zero (0), since tariff
switching times can only be entered for the full hour.
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday categories for the tariff switch.
When the parameter is omitted, the tariff switch is created for all
possible weekday categories.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IARTMPD- 1+
CR IARTMPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HO , HH > EF , EH > HN , WO
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
Default: WO, HH, HO, HN, EH, EF
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IARTMPD- 2-
DISP IARTMPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARA TIME PERIOD
This command displays the IARSTAT tariff switching times for
one or all IARSTAT tariff zones.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IARTMPD : TZONE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TZONE TARIFF ZONE
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff zone, to which a day
tariff, an evening tariff and a night tariff can be assigned.
Notes:
- Linking of tariff zones for output is not permitted.
- Input of a single X is permitted.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARTMPD- 1-
MOD IARTMPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IARSTAT TIME PERIOD
This command modifies, cancels or creates tariff switching times assigned
to one IARSTAT tariff zone.
This command combines the actions of commands CR IARTMPD and CAN IARTMPD.
To create or cancel switching times with this command, the conditions
described for the above mentioned commands apply without restriction.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IARTMPD : TZONE= ,TARIFF= ,TIME= [,WDCAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TZONE IARSTAT TARIFF ZONE
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff zone, for which the
tariff switch is modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
TARIFF IARSTAT TARIFF
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff, to which will be switched.
Each tariff has its own counter. A tariff switch implies that the
registered data are added to another counter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DAY DAY TARIFF
EVE EVENING TARIFF
NIGHT NIGHT TARIFF
TIME TIME FOR TARIFF SWITCH
This parameter specifies the time for the tariff switch.
Tariff switches are only possible at the full hour.
n/o
n/
/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
a decimal number
This parameter unit value must be zero (0), since tariff
switching times can only be entered for the full hour.
WDCAT WEEKDAY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the weekday categories for the tariff switch.
When the parameter is omitted, the tariff switch is modified for all
possible weekday categories.
The priority assignment for the individual weekday
categories is as follows:
HO , HH > EF , EH > HN , WO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARTMPD- 1+
MOD IARTMPD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
WO WORKDAY
HH HOLIDAY HALF INTERNATIONAL
HO HOLIDAY FULL INTERNATIONAL
HN HOLIDAY FULL NATIONAL
EH HALF WEEKEND DAY
EF FULL WEEKEND DAY
Default: WO, HH, HO, HN, EH, EF
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARTMPD- 2-
CAN IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IARA STATISTICS ZONE
This command cancels the assignment of one or more matrix points
to an IARSTAT tariff zone. The matrix points are identified by their
IARSTAT origin and destination names. The command takes immediate effect.
Caution:
If the tariff zone specified for one or more of the origin-destination
relations specified in the command is incorrect, the incorrectly specified
entry is not cancelled but all correct entries are cancelled. After the
assignment of an origin-destination relation to a tariff zone has
been cancelled, call data received are added to the day counters. If
destination names and/or origin names are specified for which no
matrix point has been created, the command is rejected (also if parameters
are linked with &). If, however, parameters are linked with &&, or X is
specified for origin and/or destination/route name, the assignment is
cancelled for those matrix points that are created.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IARZONE : MTYPE= ,TZONE= ,DNAME= ,ONAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
TZONE TARIFF ZONE
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff zone.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in alphabetical order
between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARZONE- 1+
CAN IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in alphabetical
order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IARZONE- 2-
DISP IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IARA STATISTICS ZONE
This command displays the IARSTAT tariff zones assigned to one
or more matrix points. The matrix points are identified by their IARSTAT
origin and destination names. If no tariff zone is assigned to a matrix
point, a blank is output for the zone.
Notes: If origin and/or destination names are specified
for which no matrix point has been created, only the zones
assigned to created matrix points are displayed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IARZONE : MTYPE= [,DNAME=] [,ONAME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registrations jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
If the parameter is omitted, all associated parameter
values are adressed.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in
alphabetical order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
If the parameter is omitted, all associated parameter
values are addressed.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in
alphabetical order between the two specified names.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARZONE- 1+
DISP IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IARZONE- 2-
ENTR IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IARA STATISTICS ZONE
This command enters IARSTAT tariff zones to one or more matrix points for
counters. The matrix points are identified by their IARSTAT origin and
destination name.
The entered tariff zone applies immediately.
Caution: If a tariff zone has already been assigned to one of the IARSTAT
matrixpoints specified in the command, no part of the command
is executed.
If destination and/or origin names are specified for which no matrix
point has been created, the command is rejected (also if parameters
are linked with &). If, however, parameters are linked with &&, or X is
specified for origin and/or destination/route names, the tariff zone is
assigned to the created matrix points.
If the registered data for an origin-destination relation are not to be
split up in different tariffs, there is no need to use this command. The
registered data are then added to the day counters.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR IARZONE : MTYPE= ,TZONE= ,DNAME= ,ONAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
TZONE TARIFF ZONE
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff zone.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99, range of decimal numbers
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in
alphabetical order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARZONE- 1+
ENTR IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in alphabetical
order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IARZONE- 2-
MOD IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IARA STATISTICS ZONE
This command modifies the assignment of an IARSTAT tariff zone to one or
more matrix points. The matrix points are identified by their origin-
destination names. The new tariff zone applies immediately.
Caution:
If the old tariff zone specified in the command for one of the origin-
destination names is incorrect, then the entire command is not executed.
If destination and/or origin names are specified for which no
matrix point has been created, the command is rejected (also if parameters
are linked with &). If parameters are linked with &&, or X is specified for
origin and/or destination name, the modification is executed for the
created matrix points.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IARZONE : MTYPE= ,TZONE= ,DNAME= ,ONAME= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTYPE MEASUREMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the measurement type, which is used for
separate registration jobs.
The choice of the meaning of the measurement types is free.
Nevertheless the database configuration (i.e. number of origin names
and destination names) leads to the following recommendation:
- IARSTAT1: Registration of international outgoing traffic.
- IARSTAT2: Registration of international incoming traffic.
- IARSTAT3: Registration of international transit traffic.
- IARSTAT4: Registration for statistical reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IARSTAT1 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 1
IARSTAT2 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 2
IARSTAT3 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 3
IARSTAT4 IARSTAT MEASUREMENT TYPE 4
TZONE TARIFF ZONE
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT tariff zone. It may only
be entered in the form new/old.
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...99, range of decimal numbers
DNAME DESTINATION NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT destination name.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in
alphabetical order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARZONE- 1+
MOD IARZONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
ONAME ORIGIN NAME
This parameter specifies the IARSTAT origin name.
Notes:
- Up to 10 individual names and/or ranges can be linked.
- Linking with && covers the range of all names in alphabetical
order between the two specified names.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IARZONE- 2-
ACT IBFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY
This command is used to re-activate the Initiator based File
Security mechanism for all MML-Userids.
Note:
- When this command is entered then all MML-Userids that were
deactivated with the command DACT IBFS will be deleted from
the list of deactivated Userids.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ ACT IBFS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IBFS- 1-
DACT IBFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE INITIATOR BASED FILE SECURITY
This command deactivates the Initiator based File Security method for up
to five MML-UserIds.
From this moment the File Security checks will not be done for the entered
MML-UserIds as long as the MP:OA&M is not available.
Note:
- On CP an InitiatorId is equal to a MML-UserId.
- The command may only be entered when the system is running in Innovation
together with a MP:OA&M.
- When the MP:OA&M is not available then the File Security checks will not
be done for the (previously) entered UserId(s).
- When the MP:OA&M is available then the File Security checks will be done
for all users and initiators and the deactivation for the entered
UserId(s) will be ignored.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ DACT IBFS : USERID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
USERID USER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT IBFS- 1-
DISP IBFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INITIATOR BASED FILE SEC. STATUS
This command can be used to display the actual status of the
Initiator based File Security mechanism.
The status can be changed with the commands DACT IBFS and
ACT IBFS.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IBFS ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IBFS- 1-
STAT ILAYER1
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LAYER 1 FOR ISDN PORTS
This command displays the saved status of the layer 1 activation
procedure.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing ISDN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. STAT ILAYER1 - DN DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
2. STAT ILAYER1 - LC EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
1. Input format
DIRECTORY NUMBER ORIENTED
Input format for directory-number-oriented output.

[ [
[ STAT ILAYER1 : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
The parameter is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber.
Up to ten parameters can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT ILAYER1- 1+
STAT ILAYER1
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT NUMBER ORIENTED
Input format for equipment-number-oriented output.

[ [
[ STAT ILAYER1 : DLU= ,LC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10,20,30...2550, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the circuit position in a DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
c: CIRCUIT NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT ILAYER1- 2-
CAN IMEI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INTERNAT. MOBILE EQUIPMENT ID.
This command deletes a single IMEI (International Mobile Equipment
Identity) or range of IMEIs from one of the three lists (white, grey,
black) of the Equipment Identity Register (EIR) database.
Notes:
- An IMEI consists of 15 digits : TAC-FAC-SNR-SPA
with TAC : type approval code ( 6 digits ),
FAC : final assembly code ( 2 digits ),
SNR : serial number ( 6 digits ),
SPA : spare ( 1 digit ).
No input parameter is defined for the spare digit.
- A range of IMEIs consists of IMEIs with fixed TAC, fixed FAC
and consecutive SNRs.
- A single IMEI can only be deleted from a list if it was previously
created as a single IMEI on that list.
- A range of IMEIs can only be deleted from a list if exactly
the same range was previously created on that list.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if an equipment identification
register (EIR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IMEI : TAC= ,FAC= ,SNR= ,LIST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TAC TYPE APPROVAL CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FAC FINAL ASSEMBLY CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SNR SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the serial number of the international mobile
equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SINGLE SNR OR LOWER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies either a
single serial number or the lower bound
of a range of serial numbers.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IMEI- 1+
CAN IMEI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: UPPER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies the upper
bound of a range of serial numbers.
LIST EQUIPMENT LIST
This parameter specifies the equipment list of the EIR database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
WHITE WHITE EQUIPMENT LIST
BLACK BLACK EQUIPMENT LIST
GREY GREY EQUIPMENT LIST
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IMEI- 2-
CR IMEI
BLACK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INTERNAT. MOBILE EQUIPMENT ID.
This command creates a single IMEI (International Mobile Equipment)
Identity) or range of IMEIs on one of the three lists (white, grey,
black) of the Equipment Identity Register (EIR) database.
If the IMEI or range of IMEIs is created on the grey or black list,
the reason has to be specified.
Notes:
- An IMEI consists of 15 digits : TAC-FAC-SNR-SPA
with TAC : type approval code ( 6 digits ),
FAC : final assembly code ( 2 digits ),
SNR : serial number ( 6 digits ),
SPA : spare ( 1 digit ).
No input parameter is defined for the spare digit.
- A range of IMEIs consists of IMEIs with fixed TAC, fixed FAC
and consecutive SNRs.
- A single IMEI can only be created on a list if it is not yet
present on that list.
- A range of IMEIs can only be created on a list if none
of the specified IMEIs is present on that list.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if an equipment identification
register (EIR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR IMEI - BLACK BLACK LIST
2. CR IMEI - GREY GREY LIST
3. CR IMEI - WHITE WHITE LIST
1. Input format
BLACK LIST
A single IMEI or range of IMEIs is created on the black list for
the following reasons:
- the equipment is illegal,
- the equipment is stolen,
- the equipment is faulty,
- ... .

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IMEI : TAC= ,FAC= ,SNR= ,LIST= ,REASON= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TAC TYPE APPROVAL CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FAC FINAL ASSEMBLY CODE
This parameter specifies the final assembly code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IMEI- 1+
CR IMEI
BLACK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SNR SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the serial number of the international mobile
equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SINGLE IMEI OR LOWER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies either a
single serial number or the lower bound
of a range of serial numbers.
b: UPPER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies the upper
bound of a range of serial numbers.
LIST EQUIPMENT LIST
This parameter specifies the equipment list of the EIR database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BLACK BLACK EQUIPMENT LIST
REASON REASON FOR BEING ON EQ. LIST
This parameter specifies the reason for being on the grey or black
equipment list.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FLTEQ FAULTY EQUIPMENT
ILLEQ ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
REBLEQ04 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 4
REBLEQ05 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 5
REBLEQ06 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 6
REBLEQ07 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 7
REBLEQ08 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 8
REBLEQ09 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 9
REBLEQ10 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 10
REBLEQ11 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 11
REBLEQ12 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 12
REBLEQ13 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 13
REBLEQ14 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 14
REBLEQ15 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 15
REBLEQ16 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 16
STOLENEQ STOLEN EQUIPMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IMEI- 2+
CR IMEI
GREY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GREY LIST
A single IMEI or range of IMEIs is created on the grey list for
the following reasons:
- the equipment is new,
- the equipment is possibly faulty,
- the equipment is possibly illegal,
- the equipment is temporarily approved,
- the equipment is traceable,
- the equipment is in test,
- ... .

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IMEI : TAC= ,FAC= ,SNR= ,LIST= ,REASON= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TAC TYPE APPROVAL CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FAC FINAL ASSEMBLY CODE
This parameter specifies the final assembly code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SNR SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the serial number of the international mobile
equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SINGLE IMEI OR LOWER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies either a
single serial number or the lower bound
of a range of serial numbers.
b: UPPER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies the upper
bound of a range of serial numbers.
LIST EQUIPMENT LIST
This parameter specifies the equipment list of the EIR database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GREY GREY EQUIPMENT LIST
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IMEI- 3+
CR IMEI
GREY
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REASON REASON FOR BEING ON EQ. LIST
This parameter specifies the reason for being on the grey or black
equipment list.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEWEQ NEW EQUIPMENT
POSFLTEQ POSSIBLY FAULTY EQUIPMENT
POSILLEQ POSSIBLY ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
REGREQ07 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 7
REGREQ08 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 8
REGREQ09 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 9
REGREQ10 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 10
REGREQ11 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 11
REGREQ12 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 12
REGREQ13 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 13
REGREQ14 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 14
REGREQ15 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 15
REGREQ16 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 16
TEMAPEQ TEMPORARILY APPROVED EQUIPMENT
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TRACEQ TRACEABLE EQUIPMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IMEI- 4+
CR IMEI
WHITE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
WHITE LIST
A single IMEI or range of IMEIs is created on the white list when the
equipment is approved.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IMEI : TAC= ,FAC= ,SNR= ,LIST= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TAC TYPE APPROVAL CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FAC FINAL ASSEMBLY CODE
This parameter specifies the final assembly code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SNR SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the serial number of the international mobile
equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SINGLE IMEI OR LOWER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies either a
single serial number or the lower bound
of a range of serial numbers.
b: UPPER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies the upper
bound of a range of serial numbers.
LIST EQUIPMENT LIST
This parameter specifies the equipment list of the EIR database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
WHITE WHITE EQUIPMENT LIST
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IMEI- 5-
DISP IMEI
TFSPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INTERNAT. MOBILE EQUIPMENT ID.
This command displays information related to all single IMEIs
(International Mobile Equipment Identity) and/or all ranges of
IMEIs, which satisfy the input criteria.
Single IMEIs and ranges of IMEIs are displayed as they were
previously created.
Notes:
- An IMEI consists of 15 digits : TAC-FAC-SNR-SPA
with TAC : type approval code ( 6 digits ),
FAC : final assembly code ( 2 digits ),
SNR : serial number ( 6 digits ),
SPA : spare ( 1 digit ).
No input parameter is defined for the spare digit.
- The information related to a single IMEI will be displayed when
the single IMEI either equals the specified IMEI, or when it is
contained in the specified range of IMEIs.
- The information related to a range of IMEIs is displayed when this
range contains the specified IMEI, or when it contains at least
one IMEI of the specified range.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if an equipment identification
register (EIR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP IMEI - TFSPEC TAC AND FAC(S) SPECIFIED
2. DISP IMEI - TFSSPEC TAC, FAC AND SNR(S) SPECIFIED
3. DISP IMEI - TSPEC TAC(S) SPECIFIED
1. Input format
TAC AND FAC(S) SPECIFIED

[ [
[ [
[ [,LIST= [ [
[ DISP IMEI : TAC= ,FAC= ,REASON= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TAC TYPE APPROVAL CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FAC FINAL ASSEMBLY CODE
This parameter specifies the final assembly code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IMEI- 1+
DISP IMEI
TFSPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LIST EQUIPMENT LIST
This parameter specifies the equipment list of the EIR database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BLACK BLACK EQUIPMENT LIST
GREY GREY EQUIPMENT LIST
WHITE WHITE EQUIPMENT LIST
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
REASON REASON FOR BEING ON EQ. LIST
This parameter specifies the reason for being on the grey or black
equipment list.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FLTEQ FAULTY EQUIPMENT
ILLEQ ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
NEWEQ NEW EQUIPMENT
POSFLTEQ POSSIBLY FAULTY EQUIPMENT
POSILLEQ POSSIBLY ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
REBLEQ04 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 4
REBLEQ05 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 5
REBLEQ06 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 6
REBLEQ07 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 7
REBLEQ08 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 8
REBLEQ09 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 9
REBLEQ10 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 10
REBLEQ11 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 11
REBLEQ12 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 12
REBLEQ13 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 13
REBLEQ14 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 14
REBLEQ15 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 15
REBLEQ16 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 16
REGREQ07 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 7
REGREQ08 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 8
REGREQ09 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 9
REGREQ10 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 10
REGREQ11 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 11
REGREQ12 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 12
REGREQ13 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 13
REGREQ14 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 14
REGREQ15 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 15
REGREQ16 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 16
STOLENEQ STOLEN EQUIPMENT
TEMAPEQ TEMPORARILY APPROVED EQUIPMENT
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TRACEQ TRACEABLE EQUIPMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IMEI- 2+
DISP IMEI
TFSSPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TAC, FAC AND SNR(S) SPECIFIED

[ [
[ [
[ [,LIST= [ [
[ DISP IMEI : TAC= ,FAC= ,SNR= ,REASON= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TAC TYPE APPROVAL CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FAC FINAL ASSEMBLY CODE
This parameter specifies the final assembly code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SNR SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the serial number of the international mobile
equipment identity.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SINGLE SNR OR LOWER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies either a
single serial number or the lower bound
of a range of serial numbers.
b: UPPER BOUND OF SNR RANGE=
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This information unit specifies the upper
bound of a range of serial numbers.
LIST EQUIPMENT LIST
This parameter specifies the equipment list of the EIR database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BLACK BLACK EQUIPMENT LIST
GREY GREY EQUIPMENT LIST
WHITE WHITE EQUIPMENT LIST
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
REASON REASON FOR BEING ON EQ. LIST
This parameter specifies the reason for being on the grey or black
equipment list.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IMEI- 3+
DISP IMEI
TFSSPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FLTEQ FAULTY EQUIPMENT
ILLEQ ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
NEWEQ NEW EQUIPMENT
POSFLTEQ POSSIBLY FAULTY EQUIPMENT
POSILLEQ POSSIBLY ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
REBLEQ04 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 4
REBLEQ05 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 5
REBLEQ06 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 6
REBLEQ07 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 7
REBLEQ08 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 8
REBLEQ09 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 9
REBLEQ10 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 10
REBLEQ11 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 11
REBLEQ12 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 12
REBLEQ13 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 13
REBLEQ14 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 14
REBLEQ15 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 15
REBLEQ16 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 16
REGREQ07 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 7
REGREQ08 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 8
REGREQ09 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 9
REGREQ10 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 10
REGREQ11 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 11
REGREQ12 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 12
REGREQ13 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 13
REGREQ14 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 14
REGREQ15 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 15
REGREQ16 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 16
STOLENEQ STOLEN EQUIPMENT
TEMAPEQ TEMPORARILY APPROVED EQUIPMENT
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TRACEQ TRACEABLE EQUIPMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IMEI- 4+
DISP IMEI
TSPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TAC(S) SPECIFIED

[ [
[ [
[ [,LIST= [ [
[ DISP IMEI : TAC= ,REASON= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TAC TYPE APPROVAL CODE
This parameter specifies the type approval code of the international
mobile equipment identity.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LIST EQUIPMENT LIST
This parameter specifies the equipment list of the EIR database.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BLACK BLACK EQUIPMENT LIST
GREY GREY EQUIPMENT LIST
WHITE WHITE EQUIPMENT LIST
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
REASON REASON FOR BEING ON EQ. LIST
This parameter specifies the reason for being on the grey or black
equipment list.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FLTEQ FAULTY EQUIPMENT
ILLEQ ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
NEWEQ NEW EQUIPMENT
POSFLTEQ POSSIBLY FAULTY EQUIPMENT
POSILLEQ POSSIBLY ILLEGAL EQUIPMENT
REBLEQ04 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 4
REBLEQ05 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 5
REBLEQ06 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 6
REBLEQ07 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 7
REBLEQ08 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 8
REBLEQ09 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 9
REBLEQ10 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 10
REBLEQ11 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 11
REBLEQ12 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 12
REBLEQ13 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 13
REBLEQ14 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 14
REBLEQ15 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 15
REBLEQ16 REASON BLACK EQUIPMENT 16
REGREQ07 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 7
REGREQ08 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 8
REGREQ09 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 9
REGREQ10 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 10
REGREQ11 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 11
REGREQ12 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 12
REGREQ13 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 13
REGREQ14 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 14
REGREQ15 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 15
REGREQ16 REASON GREY EQUIPMENT 16
STOLENEQ STOLEN EQUIPMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IMEI- 5+
DISP IMEI
TSPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEMAPEQ TEMPORARILY APPROVED EQUIPMENT
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
TRACEQ TRACEABLE EQUIPMENT
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IMEI- 6-
ACT IMSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IMSI TRACING
This command activates the IMSI tracing for a subscriber.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT IMSITRAC : MSIN= ,REF= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
REF TRACE REFERENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a reference to a trace job.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
TYPE TRACE TYPE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CSMSNORM CALLS INCL. SMS NORMAL TRACE
CSMSPRIO CALLS INCL. SMS PRIORITY TRACE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IMSITRAC- 1-
DACT IMSITRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IMSI TRACING
This command deactivates the IMSI tracing for a subscriber.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT IMSITRAC : MSIN= ,REF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
REF TRACE REFERENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies a reference to a trace job.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...32767, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT IMSITRAC- 1-
CAN INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN AUTHORIZATION
This command removes the IN authorization for a subscriber identified
by its A-number id (ANI long form, ANI short form), B-number id (BNI)
or by a specific authentication code id (ACI).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ ; [
[ CAN INAUTH : ACI= [
[ [BNI=[ ! [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the A-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization must be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
ANS A-NUMBER ID SHORT
This parameter specifies the A-number identification in short form
of the subscriber for which the IN authorization must be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
ACI AUTHENTICATION CODE ID
This parameter specifies the authentication code (= personal
identification number) of the subscriber for which the IN
authorization must be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
BNI B-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the B-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization must be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INAUTH- 1-
CR INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to give a subscriber identified by its number id
(ANI long form/ANS short form/BNI) or by a specific authentication
code id (ACI), the authorization to make use of an IN service specified
by the parameter PRID.
In case that the subscriber identified by ANI/ANS/BNI or ACI is a transit
exchange subscriber (TXS), this command is also used to identify the TXS
feature data.
Notice that TXS features are realized as "integrated service logic (ISL)
services".
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have been
created by the command CR INTRIG.
- The service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have
been created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the TXS profile referenced by the
parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB (with
CAT=TXS).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ ; [
[ CR INAUTH : ACI= [,PRID= ,SCMID=] [,TXSPROF=] [
[ [BNI=[ ! [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the A-number identification of the
subscriber for which IN authorization is given.
At least TXSPROF or the combination of SCMID and PRID
must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
ANS A-NUMBER ID SHORT
This parameter specifies the A-number identification of the
subscriber for which IN authorization is given in a short form.
At least TXSPROF or the combination of SCMID and PRID
must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
ACI AUTHENTICATION CODE ID
This parameter specifies the authentication code (= personal
identification number) of the subscriber for which IN
authorization is given.
At least TXSPROF or the combination of SCMID and PRID
must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INAUTH- 1+
CR INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BNI B-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the B-number identification of the
subscriber for which IN authorization is given.
Parameters PRID and SCMID are mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile
which is used for the IN service for which authorization
is given.
This parameter is mandatory for BNI.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the corresponding IN
service class mark which is used for the triggering of the
subscriber calls.
This parameter is mandatory for BNI.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the virtual subscriber that contains
the TXS feature data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...6 digit decimal number
b: DIRECTORY NUMBER=
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INAUTH- 2-
DISP INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN AUTHORIZATION
This command is used to display the IN authorization data of a subscriber
identified by its number id (ANI long form/ANS short form/BNI) or by
a specific authentication code id (ACI).
For transit exchange subscribers (TXS), this command can also be used to
display the corresponding TXS profile.
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have been created
by the command CR INTRIG.
- The service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have been
created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the TXS profile referenced by the
parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB (with
CAT=TXS).
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ [
[ DISP INAUTH : ACI= [,PRID=] [,SCMID=] [,TXSPROF=] ; [
[ [BNI=[ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the A-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The ANI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit decimal number
ANS A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the short form of A-number identification
of the subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
displayed.
Note:
- The ANI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit decimal number
ACI AUTHENTICATION CODE ID
This parameter specifies the authentication code (= personal
identification number) of the subscriber for which the IN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INAUTH- 1+
DISP INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The ACI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit decimal number
BNI B-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the B-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be displayed.
Note:
- The BNI can either be a partly defined number (starting digits) or
a complete number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit decimal number
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN trigger profile to be
used as a selection criterion for the display.
Only the IN authorization entries (ANI/ANS/ACI/BNI) with
the specified IN service will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark to be
used as a selection criterion for the display.
Only the IN authorization entries (ANI/ANS/ACI/BNI) with
the specified IN service class mark will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the TXS profile to be used as a selection
criterion for the display.
Only the IN authorization entries (ANI/ANS/ACI/BNI) with
the specified TXS profile will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...6 digit decimal number
b: DIRECTORY NUMBER=
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INAUTH- 2-
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN AUTHORIZATION
This command modifies the IN authorization data for a subscriber
identified by its number id (ANI long form/ANS short form/BNI)
or by a specific authentication code id (ACI).
Prerequisites:
- The new trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID must have
been created by the command CR INTRIG.
- The new service class mark referenced by the parameter SCMID must have
been created by the command CR INSCM.
- For transit exchange subscribers, the new TXS profile referenced by
the parameter TXSPROF must have been created by the command CR SUB
(with CAT=TXS).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ANI=[ [
[ [ANS=[ [
[ MOD INAUTH : ACI= <,PRID= ,SCMID= ,TXSPROF= ,CTXSPROF= [
[ [BNI=[ [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CSCMID=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ANI A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the A-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
ANS A-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the short form of A-number identification
of the subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
ACI AUTHENTICATION CODE ID
This parameter specifies the authentication code (= personal
identification number) of the subscriber for which the IN
authorization data must be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...24 digit decimal number
BNI B-NUMBER ID
This parameter specifies the B-number identification of the
subscriber for which the IN authorization data must be
modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INAUTH- 1+
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2...24 digit decimal number
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new trigger profile
which is used for the IN service for which authorization is
given.
When the PRID is newly added, the SCMID must also be entered.
Incompatibilities:
- Cannot be entered together with CSCMID.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new corresponding IN
service class mark which is used for the triggering of the
subscriber calls.
When the SCMID is newly added, the PRID must also be entered.
Incompatibilities:
- Cannot be entered together with CSCMID.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TXSPROF TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies the virtual subscriber that contains
the new TXS feature data.
Incompatibilities:
- CTXSPROF may not have been entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LOCAL AREA CODE=
1...6 digit decimal number
b: DIRECTORY NUMBER=
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CTXSPROF CANCEL TXS PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the TXS profile must be removed for
the subscriber or not.
Incompatibilities:
- TXSPROF may not have been entered.
- for ANI or ACI only allowed when PRID and SCMID exist.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N TXS PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO TXS PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL TXS PROFILE
YES CANCEL TXS PROFILE
Default: N
CSCMID CANCEL SCMID
When CSCMID is entered, the PRID is also cancelled.
Incompatibilities:
- Cannot be entered together with SCMID or PRID
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INAUTH- 2+
MOD INAUTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Cannot be entered together with BNI
- for ANI or ACI only allowed when TXSPROF exists.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N SCMID & PRID REMAIN UNCHANGED
NO SCMID & PRID REMAIN UNCHANGED
Y SCMID & PRID ARE CANCELLED
YES SCMID & PRID ARE CANCELLED
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INAUTH- 3-
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INTERCEPT
This command cancels the data entered for the specified intercept identification
and applies an intercept tone coded in the GP if the intercept is accessed by
call processing.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INC : INCEPT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which the data are to
be canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OACSU D900 OFF AIR CALL SETUP
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CCBSMOB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUB. (NAT)
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
MOBSUBAB MOBILE SUBSCRIBER ABSENT
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INC- 1+
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
LOOPTMC LOOP TRUNK MONITORING CENTER
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
I1TR6IN INTERWORKING 1TR6 TO IN
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
MOBMLOOP MOBILE MONITORING LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
RCFNRNET NO ROUTE TO SPEC NETWORK
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPREEM PREEMPTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INC- 2+
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RCFFACRJ FACILITY REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNCHAV NO CHANNEL AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFTMPFA TEMPORARY FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSWEQC SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRCHNA REQUESTED CHANNEL NOT AVAIL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPRBLO PRECEDENCE CALL BLOCKED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRUNAV RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE UNSPEC
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNSB REQ FACILITY NOT SUBSCRIBED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFBCNIM BC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNIM REQ FAC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSVNIM SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNMCUG USER NOT MEMBER OF CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFCTLEX CONV TIME LIMIT EXPIRED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRALOS RADIO LINK LOSS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFABSUB ABSENT SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFALNAN ALERTING NO ANSWER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB1 INVALID NUMBER FORMAT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB2 DIGITS NOT RECEIVED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB3 DIGIT TIMEOUT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
OVL2 OVERLOAD SITUATION 2
OVL3 OVERLOAD SITUATION 3
OVL4 OVERLOAD SITUATION 4
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM CALLBACK
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
MOTFC1 CALL SETUP CONTROL 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC2 CALL SETUP CONTROL 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIC ODB. OUTGOING INTERNAT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIE ODB. OG. INT. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPI ODB. OG. PREM. RATE INF. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPE ODB. OG. PREM. RATE ENT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTADBAR MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOTAIC MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. INC.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC3 CALL SETUP CONTROL 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC4 CALL SETUP CONTROL 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INC- 3+
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOTFC5 CALL SETUP CONTROL 5
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB1 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB2 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB3 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB4 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MTTABSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. ABSENT SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTNOPAG MOB. TERM. TRAF. NO PAG. RESP.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTSUBNC MOB. TERM. TRAF. SUB. NUM. CH.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTUNSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. UNKNOWN SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTADBAR MOB. TERM. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTINDIA MOB. TERM. TRAF. INCOMP. DIAL.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
CFWUNCO CALL FORW. UNCONDITIONAL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNDUB CALL FORW. NET. DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUDUB CALL FORW. USER DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOREP CALL FORW. NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOPAG CALL FORW. NO PAGING RESPONSE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWRADCO CALL FORW. RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWVIOLA CALL FORW. FORWARD VIOLATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWIMDET CALL FORW. IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBBUSY CALL BACK ON BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOREP CALL BACK ON NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOPAG CALL BACK ON NO PAGING RESP
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBRADCO CALL BACK ON RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBIMDET CALL BACK ON IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
BAOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOIC BARRING OF ALL OUT. INT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOCEXHP BAR. OF OUTG. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
MOBQUEUE MOBILE CALL QUEUED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCW SERVICE ANNOUNCE. CALL WAITING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCH SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYINV MULTI PARTY INVOCATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEXT MULTI PARTY EXTENSION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEALL MULTI PARTY EXTENSION ALL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEIND MULTI PARTY EXTENSION INDIVID.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYHOLD MULTI PARTY ON HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MAPSYSFA SYSTEM FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPDATMI DATA MISSING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INC- 4+
CAN INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MAPUNDAT UNEXPECTED DATA VALUE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPFACNT FACILITY NOT SUPPORTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNSUB UNIDENTIFIED SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPBSNPR BS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPTSNPR TS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPCUGR CUG REJECT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSNCUG SUBSCRIBER NOT MEMBER CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPIBCUG INCOMING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPOBCUG OUTGOING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...250, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INC- 5-
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INTERCEPT
This command defines how a call is to be handled if call processing diverts it
to an intercept code.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR INC - IGNORE IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
2. CR INC - NEWCB1NL NEW CODE B1 NUMBER NO LAC
3. CR INC - NEWCODE ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
4. CR INC - NEWDEST RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
5. CR INC - TONE SUPPLY WITH A TONE
1. Input format
IGNORE INTERCEPT REASON
Input format for creating an intercept code which, when accessed, causes
the originally required connection to be set up after all.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which data are to
be created.
This parameter is subdivided into functional blocks.
This subdivision is explained in parameter INTYP
of the command DISP INC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
If an A-party has the feature CLIR (see CR SUB)
and the B-party has the feature ACTACREJ (see
CR SUB), the call will be rejected. The A-party
will be informed about this by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
If an office-specific Whitelist or Blacklist
feature is active and the number of the A-party
is not available, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is informed about this with this
intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
Sequencing is not allowed.
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
When a B-party has the automatic recall feature
and does not answer an incoming call or is busy,
the number of the A-party is stored by the system.
The B-party can initiate a recall by keying in
an access code. The B-party is informed by this
intercept about the stored A-party number.
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
When going off hook, the A-party will get an
announcement before the dial tone is applied.
The intercept is used to address the announcement
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 1+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
Sequencing is not allowed.
BAIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOCEXHP BAR. OF OUTG. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOIC BARRING OF ALL OUT. INT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
An A party that has been blocked by "Hacker
Detection" will be informed by the intercept
that access is denied.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
Incoming calls are checked against an office-
specific Blacklist or Whitelist. If the A-party
number is in the Blacklist or missing in the
Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The A-party
is then informed about this via this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
When the B-party is busy and the station is not
equipped for call-waiting or preemption, the
A-party is informed accordingly by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
If an A-party is not authorized to dial a carrier
access code, the call will be rejected. The system
reaction for the A-party is administered with this
intercept.
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
When an A-party dials a number with a carrier
access code, but access to the destination via
this carrier is not possible or allowed, either
the carrier access code for routing may be ignored
or the call may be rejected.
If the call is to be rejected, the appropriate
system reaction for A-party handling is
administered with this intercept.
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CBBUSY CALL BACK ON BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBIMDET CALL BACK ON IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOPAG CALL BACK ON NO PAGING RESP
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOREP CALL BACK ON NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBRADCO CALL BACK ON RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CCBSMOB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUB. (NAT)
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a ACTCCS Operator (see
CR SUB). The intercept SUSVICCS must also be
created to enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CFWIMDET CALL FORW. IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNDUB CALL FORW. NET. DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOPAG CALL FORW. NO PAGING RESPONSE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOREP CALL FORW. NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWRADCO CALL FORW. RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUDUB CALL FORW. USER DET. USER BUSY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 2+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUNCO CALL FORW. UNCONDITIONAL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWVIOLA CALL FORW. FORWARD VIOLATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
An A-party with the Credit Limit Supervision
feature who wants to set up a call, will first get
an announcement and afterwards the dialtone
depending on the status of his account. This
announcement can be a warning (credit limit almost
reached) or a blocking (credit limit reached)
announcement. This intercept is used to address
the announcement machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a UI-LTG for user interaction.
At least one of the intercepts SUSCI or SUSCICTX
must also be created to address the service user.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM CALLBACK
Sequencing is not allowed.
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
Sequencing is not allowed.
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
If an IN call wants to reach a 1TR6-subscriber,
a SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
If ISUP is not recognized on the A-side the
ISUP HW loop will be initiated via this
intercept before the remote intercom number
is code processed.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
I1TR6IN INTERWORKING 1TR6 TO IN
As an 1TR6 subscriber is not able to handle IN, a
SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should only be combined with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was successful.
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was not successful.
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
This intercept is used to address a loop-LTG for
the call identification recording feature (see
CR SUB). This feature enables the recording of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 3+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
malicious call data.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
LOOPTMC LOOP TRUNK MONITORING CENTER
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MAPBSNPR BS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPCUGR CUG REJECT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPDATMI DATA MISSING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPFACNT FACILITY NOT SUPPORTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPIBCUG INCOMING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPOBCUG OUTGOING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSNCUG SUBSCRIBER NOT MEMBER CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSYSFA SYSTEM FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPTSNPR TS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNDAT UNEXPECTED DATA VALUE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNSUB UNIDENTIFIED SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MOBMLOOP MOBILE MONITORING LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MOBQUEUE MOBILE CALL QUEUED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MOTADBAR MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC1 CALL SETUP CONTROL 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC2 CALL SETUP CONTROL 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC3 CALL SETUP CONTROL 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC4 CALL SETUP CONTROL 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC5 CALL SETUP CONTROL 5
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIC ODB. OUTGOING INTERNAT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIE ODB. OG. INT. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPE ODB. OG. PREM. RATE ENT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPI ODB. OG. PREM. RATE INF. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB1 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB2 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB3 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB4 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOTAIC MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. INC.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MPTYEALL MULTI PARTY EXTENSION ALL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEIND MULTI PARTY EXTENSION INDIVID.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEXT MULTI PARTY EXTENSION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYHOLD MULTI PARTY ON HOLD
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 4+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYINV MULTI PARTY INVOCATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MTTABSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. ABSENT SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTADBAR MOB. TERM. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTINDIA MOB. TERM. TRAF. INCOMP. DIAL.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTNOPAG MOB. TERM. TRAF. NO PAG. RESP.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTSUBNC MOB. TERM. TRAF. SUB. NUM. CH.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTUNSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. UNKNOWN SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
If an A-party has the feature MWI (see CR SUB),
the A-party is informed by this intercept about
messages in the mailbox.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
OACSU D900 OFF AIR CALL SETUP
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL2 OVERLOAD SITUATION 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL3 OVERLOAD SITUATION 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL4 OVERLOAD SITUATION 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
This intercept is used to warn the subscriber
that the PIN Code entered is wrong.
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
If a priority A-party wants to make a call and all
trunks are busy, the call will be queued in a
priority queue. The A-party is informed about this
by the intercept.
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
RCFABSUB ABSENT SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFALNAN ALERTING NO ANSWER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFBCNIM BC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFCTLEX CONV TIME LIMIT EXPIRED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFFACRJ FACILITY REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNCHAV NO CHANNEL AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNMCUG USER NOT MEMBER OF CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNRNET NO ROUTE TO SPEC NETWORK
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPRBLO PRECEDENCE CALL BLOCKED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPREEM PREEMPTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRALOS RADIO LINK LOSS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRCHNA REQUESTED CHANNEL NOT AVAIL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNIM REQ FAC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNSB REQ FACILITY NOT SUBSCRIBED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 5+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRUNAV RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE UNSPEC
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSVNIM SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSWEQC SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFTMPFA TEMPORARY FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB1 INVALID NUMBER FORMAT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB2 DIGITS NOT RECEIVED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB3 DIGIT TIMEOUT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
When a call is forwarded, the B2-party may have
the feature ACTRJDIV (see CR SUB), which means
that the B2-subscriber does not accept forwarded
calls. The A-party will be informed about this by
the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SANNCH SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCW SERVICE ANNOUNCE. CALL WAITING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
This intercept leads to an announcement to
confirm that entry of the new subscriber
credit limit has been successful.
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
This intercept leads to an announcement saying
that entry of the new subscriber credit limit
has failed.
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
This intercept leads to an announcement to inform
the subscriber about the current subscriber credit
limit.
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
If an A-party has the feature SCOACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCOREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an outgoing call is checked as to
whether the called number is in the Blacklist
or not present in the Whitelist. If so, the call
is rejected. The A-party is then informed
accordingly by this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
If a B-party has the feature SCTACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCTREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an incoming call will be checked. If
the A-party number is in the Blacklist or not in
the Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is then informed accordingly.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect an ordinary
subscriber to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect a CENTREX subscriber
to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 6+
CR INC
IGNORE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
This intercept is used to redirect an A-party to
a service user if the B-party has the feature
SVI (SERVICE INTERCEPTION) or ACTCCS (COLLECT
CALL SCREENING) (see CR SUB).
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to an SVI Operator (see CR SUB).
The intercept SUSVICCS must also be created to
enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
If no resources are available for the requested
time interval, the weekly wakeup request is
shifted to the previous interval. The subscriber
is informed about this by the intercept.
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
If an A-party number is not in the IN
Authorization Database, this non-registered caller
is routed to an operator or to an announcement via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...250, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
INRES INTERCEPT ADDITIONAL RESULT
This parameter specifies the response which is to be triggered when
the intercept code is accessed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IGNORE IGNORE REASON FOR TERMINATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 7+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
NEW CODE B1 NUMBER NO LAC
Input format to create an intercept code via which the digit translator is
re-accessed. Only the dialled number will be sent. (The Local Area Code will
not be appended to the number if it was not dialled by the subscriber.)
An intercept code of this type serves to access an announcement or an operator.
To hear an announcement the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
(For the complete command syntax see the corresponding CML.)
- Create a standard destination
CR DEST:DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create an announcement group
CR ANGRP:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create (an) announcement line(s)
CR ANLN:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a route to the announcement device
CR ROUTE:DEST=<ANNOU1>,TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a code point
CR CPT:CODE=<123456789>,DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create a zone point (for announcements that can be dialled directly too)
CR ZOPT:CODE=<123456789>,ZOCHA=NOPULSE,...
- Create an intercept
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWCB1NL,CODE=<123456789>;
To access an operator the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
(For the complete command syntax see the corresponding CML.)
- Create an intercept (with the common service group number)
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWCB1NL,CODE=<012345>;
- Create an intercept (with the calltype number)
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWCB1NL,CODE=<016789>;

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,CODE= [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which data are to
be created.
This parameter is subdivided into functional blocks.
This subdivision is explained in parameter INTYP
of the command DISP INC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
If an A-party has the feature CLIR (see CR SUB)
and the B-party has the feature ACTACREJ (see
CR SUB), the call will be rejected. The A-party
will be informed about this by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
If an office-specific Whitelist or Blacklist
feature is active and the number of the A-party
is not available, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is informed about this with this
intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
Sequencing is not allowed.
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 8+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
When a B-party has the automatic recall feature
and does not answer an incoming call or is busy,
the number of the A-party is stored by the system.
The B-party can initiate a recall by keying in
an access code. The B-party is informed by this
intercept about the stored A-party number.
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
When going off hook, the A-party will get an
announcement before the dial tone is applied.
The intercept is used to address the announcement
machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
Sequencing is not allowed.
BAIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOCEXHP BAR. OF OUTG. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOIC BARRING OF ALL OUT. INT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
An A party that has been blocked by "Hacker
Detection" will be informed by the intercept
that access is denied.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
Incoming calls are checked against an office-
specific Blacklist or Whitelist. If the A-party
number is in the Blacklist or missing in the
Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The A-party
is then informed about this via this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
When the B-party is busy and the station is not
equipped for call-waiting or preemption, the
A-party is informed accordingly by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
If an A-party is not authorized to dial a carrier
access code, the call will be rejected. The system
reaction for the A-party is administered with this
intercept.
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
When an A-party dials a number with a carrier
access code, but access to the destination via
this carrier is not possible or allowed, either
the carrier access code for routing may be ignored
or the call may be rejected.
If the call is to be rejected, the appropriate
system reaction for A-party handling is
administered with this intercept.
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CBBUSY CALL BACK ON BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBIMDET CALL BACK ON IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOPAG CALL BACK ON NO PAGING RESP
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOREP CALL BACK ON NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBRADCO CALL BACK ON RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CCBSMOB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUB. (NAT)
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a ACTCCS Operator (see
CR SUB). The intercept SUSVICCS must also be
created to enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CFWIMDET CALL FORW. IMSI DETACH
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 9+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNDUB CALL FORW. NET. DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOPAG CALL FORW. NO PAGING RESPONSE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOREP CALL FORW. NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWRADCO CALL FORW. RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUDUB CALL FORW. USER DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUNCO CALL FORW. UNCONDITIONAL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWVIOLA CALL FORW. FORWARD VIOLATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
An A-party with the Credit Limit Supervision
feature who wants to set up a call, will first get
an announcement and afterwards the dialtone
depending on the status of his account. This
announcement can be a warning (credit limit almost
reached) or a blocking (credit limit reached)
announcement. This intercept is used to address
the announcement machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a UI-LTG for user interaction.
At least one of the intercepts SUSCI or SUSCICTX
must also be created to address the service user.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM CALLBACK
Sequencing is not allowed.
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
Sequencing is not allowed.
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
If an IN call wants to reach a 1TR6-subscriber,
a SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
If ISUP is not recognized on the A-side the
ISUP HW loop will be initiated via this
intercept before the remote intercom number
is code processed.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
I1TR6IN INTERWORKING 1TR6 TO IN
As an 1TR6 subscriber is not able to handle IN, a
SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should only be combined with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 10+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was successful.
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was not successful.
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
This intercept is used to address a loop-LTG for
the call identification recording feature (see
CR SUB). This feature enables the recording of
malicious call data.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
LOOPTMC LOOP TRUNK MONITORING CENTER
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MAPBSNPR BS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPCUGR CUG REJECT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPDATMI DATA MISSING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPFACNT FACILITY NOT SUPPORTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPIBCUG INCOMING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPOBCUG OUTGOING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSNCUG SUBSCRIBER NOT MEMBER CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSYSFA SYSTEM FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPTSNPR TS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNDAT UNEXPECTED DATA VALUE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNSUB UNIDENTIFIED SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MOBMLOOP MOBILE MONITORING LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MOBQUEUE MOBILE CALL QUEUED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MOTADBAR MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC1 CALL SETUP CONTROL 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC2 CALL SETUP CONTROL 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC3 CALL SETUP CONTROL 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC4 CALL SETUP CONTROL 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC5 CALL SETUP CONTROL 5
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIC ODB. OUTGOING INTERNAT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIE ODB. OG. INT. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPE ODB. OG. PREM. RATE ENT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPI ODB. OG. PREM. RATE INF. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB1 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB2 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB3 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB4 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 4
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 11+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOTAIC MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. INC.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MPTYEALL MULTI PARTY EXTENSION ALL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEIND MULTI PARTY EXTENSION INDIVID.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEXT MULTI PARTY EXTENSION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYHOLD MULTI PARTY ON HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYINV MULTI PARTY INVOCATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MTTABSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. ABSENT SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTADBAR MOB. TERM. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTINDIA MOB. TERM. TRAF. INCOMP. DIAL.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTNOPAG MOB. TERM. TRAF. NO PAG. RESP.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTSUBNC MOB. TERM. TRAF. SUB. NUM. CH.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTUNSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. UNKNOWN SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
If an A-party has the feature MWI (see CR SUB),
the A-party is informed by this intercept about
messages in the mailbox.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
OACSU D900 OFF AIR CALL SETUP
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL2 OVERLOAD SITUATION 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL3 OVERLOAD SITUATION 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL4 OVERLOAD SITUATION 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
This intercept is used to warn the subscriber
that the PIN Code entered is wrong.
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
If a priority A-party wants to make a call and all
trunks are busy, the call will be queued in a
priority queue. The A-party is informed about this
by the intercept.
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
RCFABSUB ABSENT SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFALNAN ALERTING NO ANSWER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFBCNIM BC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFCTLEX CONV TIME LIMIT EXPIRED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFFACRJ FACILITY REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNCHAV NO CHANNEL AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNMCUG USER NOT MEMBER OF CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNRNET NO ROUTE TO SPEC NETWORK
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPRBLO PRECEDENCE CALL BLOCKED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPREEM PREEMPTION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 12+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRALOS RADIO LINK LOSS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRCHNA REQUESTED CHANNEL NOT AVAIL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNIM REQ FAC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNSB REQ FACILITY NOT SUBSCRIBED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRUNAV RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE UNSPEC
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSVNIM SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSWEQC SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFTMPFA TEMPORARY FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB1 INVALID NUMBER FORMAT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB2 DIGITS NOT RECEIVED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB3 DIGIT TIMEOUT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
When a call is forwarded, the B2-party may have
the feature ACTRJDIV (see CR SUB), which means
that the B2-subscriber does not accept forwarded
calls. The A-party will be informed about this by
the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SANNCH SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCW SERVICE ANNOUNCE. CALL WAITING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
This intercept leads to an announcement to
confirm that entry of the new subscriber
credit limit has been successful.
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
This intercept leads to an announcement saying
that entry of the new subscriber credit limit
has failed.
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
This intercept leads to an announcement to inform
the subscriber about the current subscriber credit
limit.
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
If an A-party has the feature SCOACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCOREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an outgoing call is checked as to
whether the called number is in the Blacklist
or not present in the Whitelist. If so, the call
is rejected. The A-party is then informed
accordingly by this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
If a B-party has the feature SCTACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCTREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an incoming call will be checked. If
the A-party number is in the Blacklist or not in
the Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is then informed accordingly.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 13+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
intercept is used to redirect an ordinary
subscriber to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect a CENTREX subscriber
to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
This intercept is used to redirect an A-party to
a service user if the B-party has the feature
SVI (SERVICE INTERCEPTION) or ACTCCS (COLLECT
CALL SCREENING) (see CR SUB).
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to an SVI Operator (see CR SUB).
The intercept SUSVICCS must also be created to
enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
If no resources are available for the requested
time interval, the weekly wakeup request is
shifted to the previous interval. The subscriber
is informed about this by the intercept.
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
If an A-party number is not in the IN
Authorization Database, this non-registered caller
is routed to an operator or to an announcement via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...250, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 14+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES INTERCEPT ADDITIONAL RESULT
This parameter specifies the response which is to be triggered when
the intercept code is accessed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEWCB1NL NEW CODE SEND B1 NUMBER NO LAC
CODE NEW CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: DIGITS FOR NEW CODE=
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This unit specifies the digit sequence to be used for
retranslation.
b: CATEGORY FOR NEW CODE
CATAC CATEGORY OF ACTUAL CONNECTION
This unit specifies the new class to be used for digit
translation. Translation with another class allows the
accessibility of a destination to be restricted
(e.g. in order to prevent the destination being dialed
directly).
Default: CATAC
TONE TONE AND TONE TIME DURATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
ACKNTNEG ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE NEGATIVE
ACKNTPOS ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE POSITIVE
CONGTONE ALL TRUNKS BUSY TONE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
This value is not allowed for SEQ=1.
If this value is entered, no further sequence is
allowed.
Unit b cannot be specified for this value.
INFOTONE SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NOTONE NO TONE
NUTONE NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE TONE
RNGTONE RINGING TONE
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY TONE
This unit specifies the tone which is to be applied if the
intercept code is accessed.
If the INRES parameter is also specified for the intercept
code, the tone is only applied if the response specified
by INRES (e.g. access an announcement) is not possible.
b: TONE TIME DURATION=
0...2047, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies how long (in seconds) the tone is
to be applied.
Value 0 means endless tone time duration.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 15+
CR INC
NEWCB1NL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies the position in which the response
created by this command is located if several responses are created
for one intercept code. This value must start with 1 and be entered
without gaps.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 16+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ANNOUNCEMENT VIA NEW CODE
Input format to create an intercept code via which the digit translator is
re-accessed. An intercept code of this type serves to access an announcement or
an operator.
To hear an announcement the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
(For the complete command syntax see the corresponding CML.)
- Create a standard destination
CR DEST:DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create an announcement group
CR ANGRP:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create (an) announcement line(s)
CR ANLN:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a route to the announcement device
CR ROUTE:DEST=<ANNOU1>,TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a code point
CR CPT:CODE=<123456789>,DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create a zone point (for announcements that can be dialled directly too)
CR ZOPT:CODE=<123456789>,ZOCHA=NOPULSE,...
- Create an intercept
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWCOD/NEWCB1,CODE=<123456789>;
To access an operator the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
(For the complete command syntax see the corresponding CML.)
- Create an intercept (with the common service group number)
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWCOD/NEWCB1,CODE=<012345>;
- Create an intercept (with the calltype number)
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWCOD/NEWCB1,CODE=<016789>;

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,CODE= [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which data are to
be created.
This parameter is subdivided into functional blocks.
This subdivision is explained in parameter INTYP
of the command DISP INC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
If an A-party has the feature CLIR (see CR SUB)
and the B-party has the feature ACTACREJ (see
CR SUB), the call will be rejected. The A-party
will be informed about this by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
If an office-specific Whitelist or Blacklist
feature is active and the number of the A-party
is not available, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is informed about this with this
intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
Sequencing is not allowed.
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
When a B-party has the automatic recall feature
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 17+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
and does not answer an incoming call or is busy,
the number of the A-party is stored by the system.
The B-party can initiate a recall by keying in
an access code. The B-party is informed by this
intercept about the stored A-party number.
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
When going off hook, the A-party will get an
announcement before the dial tone is applied.
The intercept is used to address the announcement
machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
Sequencing is not allowed.
BAIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOCEXHP BAR. OF OUTG. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOIC BARRING OF ALL OUT. INT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
An A party that has been blocked by "Hacker
Detection" will be informed by the intercept
that access is denied.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
Incoming calls are checked against an office-
specific Blacklist or Whitelist. If the A-party
number is in the Blacklist or missing in the
Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The A-party
is then informed about this via this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
When the B-party is busy and the station is not
equipped for call-waiting or preemption, the
A-party is informed accordingly by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
If an A-party is not authorized to dial a carrier
access code, the call will be rejected. The system
reaction for the A-party is administered with this
intercept.
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
When an A-party dials a number with a carrier
access code, but access to the destination via
this carrier is not possible or allowed, either
the carrier access code for routing may be ignored
or the call may be rejected.
If the call is to be rejected, the appropriate
system reaction for A-party handling is
administered with this intercept.
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CBBUSY CALL BACK ON BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBIMDET CALL BACK ON IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOPAG CALL BACK ON NO PAGING RESP
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOREP CALL BACK ON NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBRADCO CALL BACK ON RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CCBSMOB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUB. (NAT)
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a ACTCCS Operator (see
CR SUB). The intercept SUSVICCS must also be
created to enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CFWIMDET CALL FORW. IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 18+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CFWNDUB CALL FORW. NET. DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOPAG CALL FORW. NO PAGING RESPONSE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOREP CALL FORW. NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWRADCO CALL FORW. RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUDUB CALL FORW. USER DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUNCO CALL FORW. UNCONDITIONAL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWVIOLA CALL FORW. FORWARD VIOLATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
An A-party with the Credit Limit Supervision
feature who wants to set up a call, will first get
an announcement and afterwards the dialtone
depending on the status of his account. This
announcement can be a warning (credit limit almost
reached) or a blocking (credit limit reached)
announcement. This intercept is used to address
the announcement machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a UI-LTG for user interaction.
At least one of the intercepts SUSCI or SUSCICTX
must also be created to address the service user.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM CALLBACK
Sequencing is not allowed.
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
Sequencing is not allowed.
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
If an IN call wants to reach a 1TR6-subscriber,
a SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
If ISUP is not recognized on the A-side the
ISUP HW loop will be initiated via this
intercept before the remote intercom number
is code processed.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
I1TR6IN INTERWORKING 1TR6 TO IN
As an 1TR6 subscriber is not able to handle IN, a
SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should only be combined with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 19+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Kick-Out list was successful.
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was not successful.
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
This intercept is used to address a loop-LTG for
the call identification recording feature (see
CR SUB). This feature enables the recording of
malicious call data.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
LOOPTMC LOOP TRUNK MONITORING CENTER
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MAPBSNPR BS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPCUGR CUG REJECT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPDATMI DATA MISSING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPFACNT FACILITY NOT SUPPORTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPIBCUG INCOMING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPOBCUG OUTGOING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSNCUG SUBSCRIBER NOT MEMBER CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSYSFA SYSTEM FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPTSNPR TS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNDAT UNEXPECTED DATA VALUE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNSUB UNIDENTIFIED SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MOBMLOOP MOBILE MONITORING LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MOBQUEUE MOBILE CALL QUEUED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MOTADBAR MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC1 CALL SETUP CONTROL 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC2 CALL SETUP CONTROL 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC3 CALL SETUP CONTROL 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC4 CALL SETUP CONTROL 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC5 CALL SETUP CONTROL 5
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIC ODB. OUTGOING INTERNAT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIE ODB. OG. INT. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPE ODB. OG. PREM. RATE ENT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPI ODB. OG. PREM. RATE INF. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB1 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB2 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB3 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB4 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 20+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOTOTAIC MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. INC.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MPTYEALL MULTI PARTY EXTENSION ALL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEIND MULTI PARTY EXTENSION INDIVID.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEXT MULTI PARTY EXTENSION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYHOLD MULTI PARTY ON HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYINV MULTI PARTY INVOCATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MTTABSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. ABSENT SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTADBAR MOB. TERM. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTINDIA MOB. TERM. TRAF. INCOMP. DIAL.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTNOPAG MOB. TERM. TRAF. NO PAG. RESP.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTSUBNC MOB. TERM. TRAF. SUB. NUM. CH.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTUNSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. UNKNOWN SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
If an A-party has the feature MWI (see CR SUB),
the A-party is informed by this intercept about
messages in the mailbox.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
OACSU D900 OFF AIR CALL SETUP
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL2 OVERLOAD SITUATION 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL3 OVERLOAD SITUATION 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL4 OVERLOAD SITUATION 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
This intercept is used to warn the subscriber
that the PIN Code entered is wrong.
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
If a priority A-party wants to make a call and all
trunks are busy, the call will be queued in a
priority queue. The A-party is informed about this
by the intercept.
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
RCFABSUB ABSENT SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFALNAN ALERTING NO ANSWER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFBCNIM BC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFCTLEX CONV TIME LIMIT EXPIRED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFFACRJ FACILITY REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNCHAV NO CHANNEL AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNMCUG USER NOT MEMBER OF CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNRNET NO ROUTE TO SPEC NETWORK
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPRBLO PRECEDENCE CALL BLOCKED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPREEM PREEMPTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 21+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RCFRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRALOS RADIO LINK LOSS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRCHNA REQUESTED CHANNEL NOT AVAIL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNIM REQ FAC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNSB REQ FACILITY NOT SUBSCRIBED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRUNAV RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE UNSPEC
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSVNIM SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSWEQC SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFTMPFA TEMPORARY FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB1 INVALID NUMBER FORMAT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB2 DIGITS NOT RECEIVED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB3 DIGIT TIMEOUT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
When a call is forwarded, the B2-party may have
the feature ACTRJDIV (see CR SUB), which means
that the B2-subscriber does not accept forwarded
calls. The A-party will be informed about this by
the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SANNCH SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCW SERVICE ANNOUNCE. CALL WAITING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
This intercept leads to an announcement to
confirm that entry of the new subscriber
credit limit has been successful.
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
This intercept leads to an announcement saying
that entry of the new subscriber credit limit
has failed.
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
This intercept leads to an announcement to inform
the subscriber about the current subscriber credit
limit.
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
If an A-party has the feature SCOACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCOREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an outgoing call is checked as to
whether the called number is in the Blacklist
or not present in the Whitelist. If so, the call
is rejected. The A-party is then informed
accordingly by this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
If a B-party has the feature SCTACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCTREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an incoming call will be checked. If
the A-party number is in the Blacklist or not in
the Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is then informed accordingly.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect an ordinary
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 22+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
subscriber to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect a CENTREX subscriber
to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
This intercept is used to redirect an A-party to
a service user if the B-party has the feature
SVI (SERVICE INTERCEPTION) or ACTCCS (COLLECT
CALL SCREENING) (see CR SUB).
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to an SVI Operator (see CR SUB).
The intercept SUSVICCS must also be created to
enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
If no resources are available for the requested
time interval, the weekly wakeup request is
shifted to the previous interval. The subscriber
is informed about this by the intercept.
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
If an A-party number is not in the IN
Authorization Database, this non-registered caller
is routed to an operator or to an announcement via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...250, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 23+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES INTERCEPT ADDITIONAL RESULT
This parameter specifies the response which is to be triggered when
the intercept code is accessed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEWCB1 NEW CODE AND SEND B1 NUMBER
NEWCOD NEW CODE
CODE NEW CODE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: DIGITS FOR NEW CODE=
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This unit specifies the digit sequence to be used for
retranslation.
b: CATEGORY FOR NEW CODE
CATAC CATEGORY OF ACTUAL CONNECTION
This unit specifies the new class to be used for digit
translation. Translation with another class allows the
accessibility of a destination to be restricted
(e.g. in order to prevent the destination being dialed
directly).
Default: CATAC
TONE TONE AND TONE TIME DURATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
ACKNTNEG ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE NEGATIVE
ACKNTPOS ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE POSITIVE
CONGTONE ALL TRUNKS BUSY TONE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
This value is not allowed for SEQ=1.
If this value is entered, no further sequence is
allowed.
Unit b cannot be specified for this value.
INFOTONE SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NOTONE NO TONE
NUTONE NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE TONE
RNGTONE RINGING TONE
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY TONE
This unit specifies the tone which is to be applied if the
intercept code is accessed.
If the INRES parameter is also specified for the intercept
code, the tone is only applied if the response specified
by INRES (e.g. access an announcement) is not possible.
b: TONE TIME DURATION=
0...2047, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies how long (in seconds) the tone is
to be applied.
Value 0 means endless tone time duration.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 24+
CR INC
NEWCODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies the position in which the response
created by this command is located if several responses are created
for one intercept code. This value must start with 1 and be entered
without gaps.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 25+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
RESOURCES VIA DESTINATION
Input format for creating an intercept code reached via a destination area to
incorporate resources (e.g. pool echo suppressors) into the connection. An
intercept code of this type can also serve to access an announcement device.
To incorporate resources into the connection the following actions (MML-
commands) are necessary:
(For the complete command syntax see the corresponding CML.)
- Create a standard destination
CR DEST:DEST=<RESOU1>,...
- Create a trunk group
CR TGRP:TGNO=<RS001>,GCOS=ECDPGRP,...
- Create (a) trunk(s)
CR TRUNK:TGNO=<RS001>,...
- Create a route to the destination
CR ROUTE:DEST=<RESOU1>,TGNO=<RS001>,...
- Create an intercept
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWDEST,DEST=<RESOU1>;
To hear an announcement the following actions (MML-commands) are necessary:
(For the complete command syntax see the corresponding CML.)
- Create a standard destination
CR DEST:DEST=<ANNOU1>,...
- Create an announcement group
CR ANGRP:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create (an) announcement line(s)
CR ANLN:TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create a route to the announcement device
CR ROUTE:DEST=<ANNOU1>,TGNO=<A001>,...
- Create an intercept
CR INC:INCEPT=<########>,INRES=NEWDEST,DEST=<ANNOU1>;

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,INRES= ,DEST= [,TONE=] [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which data are to
be created.
This parameter is subdivided into functional blocks.
This subdivision is explained in parameter INTYP
of the command DISP INC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
If an A-party has the feature CLIR (see CR SUB)
and the B-party has the feature ACTACREJ (see
CR SUB), the call will be rejected. The A-party
will be informed about this by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
If an office-specific Whitelist or Blacklist
feature is active and the number of the A-party
is not available, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is informed about this with this
intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 26+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Sequencing is not allowed.
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
When a B-party has the automatic recall feature
and does not answer an incoming call or is busy,
the number of the A-party is stored by the system.
The B-party can initiate a recall by keying in
an access code. The B-party is informed by this
intercept about the stored A-party number.
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
When going off hook, the A-party will get an
announcement before the dial tone is applied.
The intercept is used to address the announcement
machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
Sequencing is not allowed.
BAIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOCEXHP BAR. OF OUTG. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOIC BARRING OF ALL OUT. INT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
An A party that has been blocked by "Hacker
Detection" will be informed by the intercept
that access is denied.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
Incoming calls are checked against an office-
specific Blacklist or Whitelist. If the A-party
number is in the Blacklist or missing in the
Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The A-party
is then informed about this via this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
When the B-party is busy and the station is not
equipped for call-waiting or preemption, the
A-party is informed accordingly by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
If an A-party is not authorized to dial a carrier
access code, the call will be rejected. The system
reaction for the A-party is administered with this
intercept.
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
When an A-party dials a number with a carrier
access code, but access to the destination via
this carrier is not possible or allowed, either
the carrier access code for routing may be ignored
or the call may be rejected.
If the call is to be rejected, the appropriate
system reaction for A-party handling is
administered with this intercept.
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CBBUSY CALL BACK ON BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBIMDET CALL BACK ON IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOPAG CALL BACK ON NO PAGING RESP
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOREP CALL BACK ON NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBRADCO CALL BACK ON RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CCBSMOB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUB. (NAT)
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a ACTCCS Operator (see
CR SUB). The intercept SUSVICCS must also be
created to enable addressing of the service user.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 27+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Sequencing is not allowed.
CFWIMDET CALL FORW. IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNDUB CALL FORW. NET. DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOPAG CALL FORW. NO PAGING RESPONSE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOREP CALL FORW. NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWRADCO CALL FORW. RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUDUB CALL FORW. USER DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUNCO CALL FORW. UNCONDITIONAL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWVIOLA CALL FORW. FORWARD VIOLATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
An A-party with the Credit Limit Supervision
feature who wants to set up a call, will first get
an announcement and afterwards the dialtone
depending on the status of his account. This
announcement can be a warning (credit limit almost
reached) or a blocking (credit limit reached)
announcement. This intercept is used to address
the announcement machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a UI-LTG for user interaction.
At least one of the intercepts SUSCI or SUSCICTX
must also be created to address the service user.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM CALLBACK
Sequencing is not allowed.
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
Sequencing is not allowed.
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
If an IN call wants to reach a 1TR6-subscriber,
a SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
If ISUP is not recognized on the A-side the
ISUP HW loop will be initiated via this
intercept before the remote intercom number
is code processed.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
I1TR6IN INTERWORKING 1TR6 TO IN
As an 1TR6 subscriber is not able to handle IN, a
SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should only be combined with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 28+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was successful.
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was not successful.
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
This intercept is used to address a loop-LTG for
the call identification recording feature (see
CR SUB). This feature enables the recording of
malicious call data.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
LOOPTMC LOOP TRUNK MONITORING CENTER
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MAPBSNPR BS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPCUGR CUG REJECT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPDATMI DATA MISSING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPFACNT FACILITY NOT SUPPORTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPIBCUG INCOMING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPOBCUG OUTGOING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSNCUG SUBSCRIBER NOT MEMBER CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSYSFA SYSTEM FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPTSNPR TS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNDAT UNEXPECTED DATA VALUE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNSUB UNIDENTIFIED SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MOBMLOOP MOBILE MONITORING LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MOBQUEUE MOBILE CALL QUEUED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MOTADBAR MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC1 CALL SETUP CONTROL 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC2 CALL SETUP CONTROL 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC3 CALL SETUP CONTROL 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC4 CALL SETUP CONTROL 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC5 CALL SETUP CONTROL 5
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIC ODB. OUTGOING INTERNAT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIE ODB. OG. INT. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPE ODB. OG. PREM. RATE ENT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPI ODB. OG. PREM. RATE INF. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB1 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB2 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB3 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 29+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB4 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOTAIC MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. INC.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MPTYEALL MULTI PARTY EXTENSION ALL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEIND MULTI PARTY EXTENSION INDIVID.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEXT MULTI PARTY EXTENSION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYHOLD MULTI PARTY ON HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYINV MULTI PARTY INVOCATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MTTABSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. ABSENT SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTADBAR MOB. TERM. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTINDIA MOB. TERM. TRAF. INCOMP. DIAL.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTNOPAG MOB. TERM. TRAF. NO PAG. RESP.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTSUBNC MOB. TERM. TRAF. SUB. NUM. CH.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTUNSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. UNKNOWN SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
If an A-party has the feature MWI (see CR SUB),
the A-party is informed by this intercept about
messages in the mailbox.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
OACSU D900 OFF AIR CALL SETUP
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL2 OVERLOAD SITUATION 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL3 OVERLOAD SITUATION 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL4 OVERLOAD SITUATION 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
This intercept is used to warn the subscriber
that the PIN Code entered is wrong.
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
If a priority A-party wants to make a call and all
trunks are busy, the call will be queued in a
priority queue. The A-party is informed about this
by the intercept.
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
RCFABSUB ABSENT SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFALNAN ALERTING NO ANSWER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFBCNIM BC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFCTLEX CONV TIME LIMIT EXPIRED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFFACRJ FACILITY REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNCHAV NO CHANNEL AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNMCUG USER NOT MEMBER OF CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNRNET NO ROUTE TO SPEC NETWORK
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPRBLO PRECEDENCE CALL BLOCKED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 30+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPREEM PREEMPTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRALOS RADIO LINK LOSS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRCHNA REQUESTED CHANNEL NOT AVAIL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNIM REQ FAC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNSB REQ FACILITY NOT SUBSCRIBED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRUNAV RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE UNSPEC
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSVNIM SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSWEQC SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFTMPFA TEMPORARY FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB1 INVALID NUMBER FORMAT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB2 DIGITS NOT RECEIVED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB3 DIGIT TIMEOUT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
When a call is forwarded, the B2-party may have
the feature ACTRJDIV (see CR SUB), which means
that the B2-subscriber does not accept forwarded
calls. The A-party will be informed about this by
the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SANNCH SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCW SERVICE ANNOUNCE. CALL WAITING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
This intercept leads to an announcement to
confirm that entry of the new subscriber
credit limit has been successful.
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
This intercept leads to an announcement saying
that entry of the new subscriber credit limit
has failed.
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
This intercept leads to an announcement to inform
the subscriber about the current subscriber credit
limit.
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
If an A-party has the feature SCOACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCOREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an outgoing call is checked as to
whether the called number is in the Blacklist
or not present in the Whitelist. If so, the call
is rejected. The A-party is then informed
accordingly by this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
If a B-party has the feature SCTACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCTREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an incoming call will be checked. If
the A-party number is in the Blacklist or not in
the Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is then informed accordingly.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 31+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect an ordinary
subscriber to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect a CENTREX subscriber
to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
This intercept is used to redirect an A-party to
a service user if the B-party has the feature
SVI (SERVICE INTERCEPTION) or ACTCCS (COLLECT
CALL SCREENING) (see CR SUB).
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to an SVI Operator (see CR SUB).
The intercept SUSVICCS must also be created to
enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
If no resources are available for the requested
time interval, the weekly wakeup request is
shifted to the previous interval. The subscriber
is informed about this by the intercept.
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
If an A-party number is not in the IN
Authorization Database, this non-registered caller
is routed to an operator or to an announcement via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...250, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 32+
CR INC
NEWDEST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INRES INTERCEPT ADDITIONAL RESULT
This parameter specifies the response which is to be triggered when
the intercept code is accessed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEWDEST NEW DESTINATION
DEST DESTINATION AREA NAME
This parameter specifies the destination area to be accessed by the
intercept code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TONE TONE AND TONE TIME DURATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
ACKNTNEG ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE NEGATIVE
ACKNTPOS ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE POSITIVE
CONGTONE ALL TRUNKS BUSY TONE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
This value is not allowed for SEQ=1.
If this value is entered, no further sequence is
allowed.
Unit b cannot be specified for this value.
INFOTONE SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NOTONE NO TONE
NUTONE NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE TONE
RNGTONE RINGING TONE
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY TONE
This unit specifies the tone which is to be applied if the
intercept code is accessed.
If the INRES parameter is also specified for the intercept
code, the tone is only applied if the response specified
by INRES (e.g. access an announcement) is not possible.
b: TONE TIME DURATION=
0...2047, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies how long (in seconds) the tone is
to be applied.
Value 0 means endless tone time duration.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies the position in which the response
created by this command is located if several responses are created
for one intercept code. This value must start with 1 and be entered
without gaps.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 33+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
SUPPLY WITH A TONE
Input format to create an intercept code via which an intercept tone is
accessed.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INC : INCEPT= ,TONE= [,SEQ=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which data are to
be created.
This parameter is subdivided into functional blocks.
This subdivision is explained in parameter INTYP
of the command DISP INC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
If an A-party has the feature CLIR (see CR SUB)
and the B-party has the feature ACTACREJ (see
CR SUB), the call will be rejected. The A-party
will be informed about this by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
If an office-specific Whitelist or Blacklist
feature is active and the number of the A-party
is not available, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is informed about this with this
intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
Sequencing is not allowed.
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
When a B-party has the automatic recall feature
and does not answer an incoming call or is busy,
the number of the A-party is stored by the system.
The B-party can initiate a recall by keying in
an access code. The B-party is informed by this
intercept about the stored A-party number.
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
When going off hook, the A-party will get an
announcement before the dial tone is applied.
The intercept is used to address the announcement
machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
Sequencing is not allowed.
BAIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOCEXHP BAR. OF OUTG. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOIC BARRING OF ALL OUT. INT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
An A party that has been blocked by "Hacker
Detection" will be informed by the intercept
that access is denied.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 34+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Incoming calls are checked against an office-
specific Blacklist or Whitelist. If the A-party
number is in the Blacklist or missing in the
Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The A-party
is then informed about this via this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
When the B-party is busy and the station is not
equipped for call-waiting or preemption, the
A-party is informed accordingly by the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
If an A-party is not authorized to dial a carrier
access code, the call will be rejected. The system
reaction for the A-party is administered with this
intercept.
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
When an A-party dials a number with a carrier
access code, but access to the destination via
this carrier is not possible or allowed, either
the carrier access code for routing may be ignored
or the call may be rejected.
If the call is to be rejected, the appropriate
system reaction for A-party handling is
administered with this intercept.
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CBBUSY CALL BACK ON BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBIMDET CALL BACK ON IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOPAG CALL BACK ON NO PAGING RESP
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOREP CALL BACK ON NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBRADCO CALL BACK ON RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CCBSMOB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUB. (NAT)
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a ACTCCS Operator (see
CR SUB). The intercept SUSVICCS must also be
created to enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CFWIMDET CALL FORW. IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNDUB CALL FORW. NET. DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOPAG CALL FORW. NO PAGING RESPONSE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOREP CALL FORW. NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWRADCO CALL FORW. RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUDUB CALL FORW. USER DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUNCO CALL FORW. UNCONDITIONAL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWVIOLA CALL FORW. FORWARD VIOLATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
Sequencing is not allowed.
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
An A-party with the Credit Limit Supervision
feature who wants to set up a call, will first get
an announcement and afterwards the dialtone
depending on the status of his account. This
announcement can be a warning (credit limit almost
reached) or a blocking (credit limit reached)
announcement. This intercept is used to address
the announcement machine (UI-LTG).
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 35+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to a UI-LTG for user interaction.
At least one of the intercepts SUSCI or SUSCICTX
must also be created to address the service user.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM CALLBACK
Sequencing is not allowed.
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
Sequencing is not allowed.
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
If an IN call wants to reach a 1TR6-subscriber,
a SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
If ISUP is not recognized on the A-side the
ISUP HW loop will be initiated via this
intercept before the remote intercom number
is code processed.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
I1TR6IN INTERWORKING 1TR6 TO IN
As an 1TR6 subscriber is not able to handle IN, a
SW-loop is required. This loop is addressed via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should only be combined with
INRES=NEWCB1.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was successful.
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
This intercept leads to an announcement after
storing of an undesirable A-party number to the
Kick-Out list was not successful.
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
This intercept is used to address a loop-LTG for
the call identification recording feature (see
CR SUB). This feature enables the recording of
malicious call data.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
LOOPTMC LOOP TRUNK MONITORING CENTER
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
This value should not be combined with TONE.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MAPBSNPR BS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPCUGR CUG REJECT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPDATMI DATA MISSING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPFACNT FACILITY NOT SUPPORTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPIBCUG INCOMING CALLS BARRED CUG
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 36+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPOBCUG OUTGOING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSNCUG SUBSCRIBER NOT MEMBER CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSYSFA SYSTEM FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPTSNPR TS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNDAT UNEXPECTED DATA VALUE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNSUB UNIDENTIFIED SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MOBMLOOP MOBILE MONITORING LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
This value should be combined only with
INRES=NEWDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
MOBQUEUE MOBILE CALL QUEUED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MOTADBAR MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC1 CALL SETUP CONTROL 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC2 CALL SETUP CONTROL 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC3 CALL SETUP CONTROL 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC4 CALL SETUP CONTROL 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC5 CALL SETUP CONTROL 5
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIC ODB. OUTGOING INTERNAT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIE ODB. OG. INT. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPE ODB. OG. PREM. RATE ENT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPI ODB. OG. PREM. RATE INF. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB1 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB2 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB3 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB4 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOTAIC MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. INC.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MPTYEALL MULTI PARTY EXTENSION ALL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEIND MULTI PARTY EXTENSION INDIVID.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEXT MULTI PARTY EXTENSION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYHOLD MULTI PARTY ON HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYINV MULTI PARTY INVOCATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MTTABSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. ABSENT SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTADBAR MOB. TERM. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTINDIA MOB. TERM. TRAF. INCOMP. DIAL.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTNOPAG MOB. TERM. TRAF. NO PAG. RESP.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTSUBNC MOB. TERM. TRAF. SUB. NUM. CH.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTUNSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. UNKNOWN SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
If an A-party has the feature MWI (see CR SUB),
the A-party is informed by this intercept about
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 37+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
messages in the mailbox.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
OACSU D900 OFF AIR CALL SETUP
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL2 OVERLOAD SITUATION 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL3 OVERLOAD SITUATION 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
OVL4 OVERLOAD SITUATION 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
This intercept is used to warn the subscriber
that the PIN Code entered is wrong.
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
If a priority A-party wants to make a call and all
trunks are busy, the call will be queued in a
priority queue. The A-party is informed about this
by the intercept.
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
RCFABSUB ABSENT SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFALNAN ALERTING NO ANSWER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFBCNIM BC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFCTLEX CONV TIME LIMIT EXPIRED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFFACRJ FACILITY REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNCHAV NO CHANNEL AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNMCUG USER NOT MEMBER OF CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNRNET NO ROUTE TO SPEC NETWORK
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPRBLO PRECEDENCE CALL BLOCKED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPREEM PREEMPTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRALOS RADIO LINK LOSS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRCHNA REQUESTED CHANNEL NOT AVAIL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNIM REQ FAC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNSB REQ FACILITY NOT SUBSCRIBED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRUNAV RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE UNSPEC
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSVNIM SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSWEQC SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFTMPFA TEMPORARY FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB1 INVALID NUMBER FORMAT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB2 DIGITS NOT RECEIVED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB3 DIGIT TIMEOUT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
When a call is forwarded, the B2-party may have
the feature ACTRJDIV (see CR SUB), which means
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 38+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
that the B2-subscriber does not accept forwarded
calls. The A-party will be informed about this by
the intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SANNCH SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCW SERVICE ANNOUNCE. CALL WAITING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
This intercept leads to an announcement to
confirm that entry of the new subscriber
credit limit has been successful.
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
This intercept leads to an announcement saying
that entry of the new subscriber credit limit
has failed.
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
This intercept leads to an announcement to inform
the subscriber about the current subscriber credit
limit.
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
If an A-party has the feature SCOACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCOREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an outgoing call is checked as to
whether the called number is in the Blacklist
or not present in the Whitelist. If so, the call
is rejected. The A-party is then informed
accordingly by this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
If a B-party has the feature SCTACC (Selective
Call Acceptance) or SCTREJ (Selective Call
Rejection), an incoming call will be checked. If
the A-party number is in the Blacklist or not in
the Whitelist, the call will be rejected. The
A-party is then informed accordingly.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
Sequencing is not allowed.
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect an ordinary
subscriber to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
For help on subscriber controlled input, this
intercept is used to redirect a CENTREX subscriber
to the service user for SCI.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
This intercept is used to redirect an A-party to
a service user if the B-party has the feature
SVI (SERVICE INTERCEPTION) or ACTCCS (COLLECT
CALL SCREENING) (see CR SUB).
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
This intercept is used to redirect a call from
the service user to an SVI Operator (see CR SUB).
The intercept SUSVICCS must also be created to
enable addressing of the service user.
Sequencing is not allowed.
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
If no resources are available for the requested
time interval, the weekly wakeup request is
shifted to the previous interval. The subscriber
is informed about this by the intercept.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 39+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
If an A-party number is not in the IN
Authorization Database, this non-registered caller
is routed to an operator or to an announcement via
this intercept.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE12 SCREENED INTERCEPT
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...250, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
TONE TONE AND TONE TIME DURATION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: TONE TYPE
ACKNTNEG ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE NEGATIVE
ACKNTPOS ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TONE POSITIVE
CONGTONE ALL TRUNKS BUSY TONE
DIALTONE DIAL TONE
This value is not allowed for SEQ=1.
If this value is entered, no further sequence is
allowed.
Unit b cannot be specified for this value.
INFOTONE SPECIAL INFORMATION TONE
NOTONE NO TONE
NUTONE NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE TONE
RNGTONE RINGING TONE
SUBBUSY SUBSCRIBER BUSY TONE
This unit specifies the tone which is to be applied if the
intercept code is accessed.
If the INRES parameter is also specified for the intercept
code, the tone is only applied if the response specified
by INRES (e.g. access an announcement) is not possible.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 40+
CR INC
TONE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: TONE TIME DURATION=
0...2047, range of decimal numbers
This parameter unit specifies how long (in seconds) the tone is
to be applied.
Value 0 means endless tone time duration.
Defaults:
ACKNTNEG = 120
ACKNTPOS = 24
CONGTONE = 30
INFOTONE = 0
NOTONE = 18
NUTONE = 30
RNGTONE = 24
SUBBUSY = 120
SEQ SEQUENCE INDEX
This parameter specifies the position in which the response
created by this command is located if several responses are created
for one intercept code. This value must start with 1 and be entered
without gaps.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INC- 41-
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INTERCEPT
This command displays the created data for the specified intercept code.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP INC : <INCEPT= ,INTYP=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
INCEPT INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the intercept code for which the data are
to be displayed.
Up to 34 intercept identifiers may be linked.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: INTERCEPT IDENTIFICATION
ANNPDIAL ANN. PRIOR TO DIAL TONE
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
MWI MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OCUB OUTGOING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
SCLSTO REJECT BY SCREENING LIST ORIG.
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
TXSCASU TXS CASUAL USER
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
OACSU D900 OFF AIR CALL SETUP
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CREDLIMS CREDIT LIMIT SUPERVISION
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
CCBSMOB CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUB. (NAT)
This value belongs to INTYP=ORIG.
NOSERV SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
CHANGEDN CHANGED DIRECTORY NUMBER
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
UNOBDN DIRECTORY NUMBER UNOBTAINABLE
This value belongs to INTYP = TERM.
ICUB INCOMING CALLS BARRED IN CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
SCLSTT REJECT BY SCREENING LIST TERM.
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
REJDIV REJECTION OF DIVERTED CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
ACREJ ANONYMOUS CALL REJECTION
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
BUSYNFEA BUSY NO FEATURE ANNOUNCEMENT
This value belongs to INTYP=TERM.
UNOBDE0 VACANT CODE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE1 VACANT CODE NO OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE2 VACANT CODE WITH OPERATOR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE3 NO WORKING EMERGENCY
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE4 PREFIX ONE NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE5 PREFIX ZERO NOT DIALED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE6 PREFIX ONE IN ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE7 PREFIX ZERO NOT ALLOWED
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INC- 1+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UNOBDE8 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 08
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE9 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 09
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE10 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 10
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE11 UNOBTAINABLE DESTINATION 11
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNALLROU UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
ILLDEST INCOMPATIBLE CALL DESTINATION
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
UNOBDE13 PARTIAL DIAL
This value belongs to INTYP=DIZO.
ANNARDN ANNOUNCEMENT AUTO RECALL DN
SWUPWEEK SHIFT WAKE UP WEEKLY
PINERR PIN INPUT ERROR
SCLIMACC SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ACCEPT
SCLIMERR SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT ERROR
SCLIMINF SUBSCRIBER CREDIT LIMIT INFO
KONSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER SUCCESSFUL
KONUNSUC KICK-OUT NUMBER UNSUCCESSFUL
CCSOPR COLLECT CALL SCREENING OPR.
SVIOPR SERVICE INTERCEPTION OPERATOR
NOROUTE UNALLOCATED ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
NOALTROU NO ALTERNATE ROUTE
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ALLROUBA ALL ROUTES BARRED
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
ANIFLIST ANI FAILURE LIST
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLOCKLST BLOCKED BY LIST
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
BLKWINFO BLOCKING WITH INFORMATION
This value belongs to INTYP=ROUTING.
CALLREJ CALL REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
CAUSE1 CAUSE 1
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
USNRESP NO USER RESPONDING
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
PROTERR PROTOCOL ERROR
This value belongs to INTYP=BASICAUS.
SUSCI SERVICE USER FOR SCI
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
SUSCICTX SERVICE USER FOR SCI CTX
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
LOOPTMC LOOP TRUNK MONITORING CENTER
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
INI1TR6 IN INTERWORKING WITH 1TR6
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
FCOFFUI FCOFF USER INTERACTION
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
SUSVICCS SERVICE USER FOR SVI & CCS
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
LOOPCIDR LOOP CALL IDENTIFICATION REC.
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
I1TR6IN INTERWORKING 1TR6 TO IN
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
ISUPLOOP ISUP LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
MOBMLOOP MOBILE MONITORING LOOP
This value belongs to INTYP=COMDEST.
CACNEXEC CAC NOT EXECUTING
CACNAUTH CAC NOT AUTHORIZED
BLOTRA0 BLOCKAGE TRAFFIC TYPE 0
RCFNRNET NO ROUTE TO SPEC NETWORK
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPREEM PREEMPTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFFACRJ FACILITY REJECTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNCHAV NO CHANNEL AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFTMPFA TEMPORARY FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INC- 2+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RCFSWEQC SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRCHNA REQUESTED CHANNEL NOT AVAIL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFPRBLO PRECEDENCE CALL BLOCKED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRUNAV RESOURCE UNAVAILABLE UNSPEC
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNSB REQ FACILITY NOT SUBSCRIBED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFBCNIM BC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRFNIM REQ FAC NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFSVNIM SERVICE NOT IMPLEMENTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFNMCUG USER NOT MEMBER OF CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFCTLEX CONV TIME LIMIT EXPIRED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRALOS RADIO LINK LOSS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFABSUB ABSENT SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB1 INVALID NUMBER FORMAT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB2 DIGITS NOT RECEIVED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFUNOB3 DIGIT TIMEOUT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
RCFRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBRCFC
PRIOQ PRIORITY QUEUEING
ANNQINFO ANN. OF QUEUE INFORMATION
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
OVL1 OVERLOAD SITUATION 1
OVL2 OVERLOAD SITUATION 2
OVL3 OVERLOAD SITUATION 3
OVL4 OVERLOAD SITUATION 4
INV1 INVALID VOTE 1
INV2 INVALID VOTE 2
INANIF IN ANI FAILURE
IACB INTERNATIONAL AUTOM CALLBACK
ANN INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNOUNCEM.
Unit b is required.
MOTFC1 CALL SETUP CONTROL 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC2 CALL SETUP CONTROL 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIC ODB. OUTGOING INTERNAT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBIE ODB. OG. INT. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPI ODB. OG. PREM. RATE INF. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTODBPE ODB. OG. PREM. RATE ENT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTADBAR MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOTAIC MOB. ORIG. TRAF. ADMIN. INC.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC3 CALL SETUP CONTROL 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC4 CALL SETUP CONTROL 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTFC5 CALL SETUP CONTROL 5
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB1 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 1
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB2 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 2
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MOTOSB3 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 3
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INC- 3+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOTOSB4 OPERATOR SPEC BARRING 4
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBORIG.
MTTABSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. ABSENT SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTNOPAG MOB. TERM. TRAF. NO PAG. RESP.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTSUBNC MOB. TERM. TRAF. SUB. NUM. CH.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTUNSUB MOB. TERM. TRAF. UNKNOWN SUB.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTADBAR MOB. TERM. TRAF. ADMIN. BAR.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
MTTINDIA MOB. TERM. TRAF. INCOMP. DIAL.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBTERM.
CFWUNCO CALL FORW. UNCONDITIONAL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNDUB CALL FORW. NET. DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWUDUB CALL FORW. USER DET. USER BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOREP CALL FORW. NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWNOPAG CALL FORW. NO PAGING RESPONSE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWRADCO CALL FORW. RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWVIOLA CALL FORW. FORWARD VIOLATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CFWIMDET CALL FORW. IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBBUSY CALL BACK ON BUSY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOREP CALL BACK ON NO REPLY
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBNOPAG CALL BACK ON NO PAGING RESP
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBRADCO CALL BACK ON RADIO CONGESTION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
CBIMDET CALL BACK ON IMSI DETACH
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCFWD
BAOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOIC BARRING OF ALL OUT. INT. CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAOCEXHP BAR. OF OUTG. CALLS EXC. HPLMN
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
BAIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBCRES
MOBQUEUE MOBILE CALL QUEUED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCW SERVICE ANNOUNCE. CALL WAITING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
SANNCH SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT CALL HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYINV MULTI PARTY INVOCATION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEXT MULTI PARTY EXTENSION
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEALL MULTI PARTY EXTENSION ALL
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYEIND MULTI PARTY EXTENSION INDIVID.
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MPTYHOLD MULTI PARTY ON HOLD
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBSANN
MAPSYSFA SYSTEM FAILURE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPDATMI DATA MISSING
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNDAT UNEXPECTED DATA VALUE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPFACNT FACILITY NOT SUPPORTED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPUNSUB UNIDENTIFIED SUBSCRIBER
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPBSNPR BS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INC- 4+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MAPTSNPR TS NOT PROVISIONED
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPRACON NO RADIO RESOURCE AVAILABLE
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPCUGR CUG REJECT
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPSNCUG SUBSCRIBER NOT MEMBER CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPIBCUG INCOMING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
MAPOBCUG OUTGOING CALLS BARRED CUG
This value belongs to INTYP=MOBMAPC
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...250, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
For ANN only value 1..127 is permitted.
INTYP INTERCEPT TYPE
This parameter restricts data display to the specified intercept type.
An intercept type contains all intercept codes which are accessed for
similar reasons.
For example, if the DIZO intercept type is specified, the data are
displayed for all created intercept codes that are accessed if call set
up fails because of problems in digit translation or zoning.
This parameter is only allowed with INCEPT=X.
Division of intercept codes into groups:
ORIG:
ANNPDIAL
MWI
OCUB
SCLSTO
TXSCASU
OACSU
CREDLIMS
CCBSMOB
TERM:
NOSERV
CHANGEDN
UNOBDN
ICUB
SCLSTT
REJDIV
ACREJ
BUSYNFEA
DIZO:
UNOBDE0
UNOBDE1
UNOBDE2
UNOBDE3
UNOBDE4
UNOBDE5
UNOBDE6
UNOBDE7
UNOBDE8
UNOBDE9
UNOBDE10
UNOBDE11
UNALLROU
ILLDEST
UNOBDE13
ANNARDN
SWUPWEEK
PINERR
SCLIMACC
SCLIMERR
SCLIMINF
KONSUC
KONUNSUC
CCSOPR
SVIOPR
ROUTING:
NOROUTE
NOALTROU
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INC- 5+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLROUBA
ANIFLIST
BLOCKLST
BLKWINFO
BASICAUS:
CALLREJ
CAUSE1
USNRESP
PROTERR
COMDEST:
SUSCI
SUSCICTX
LOOPTMC
INI1TR6
FCOFFUI
SUSVICCS
LOOPCIDR
I1TR6IN
ISUPLOOP
MOBMLOOP
CACNEXEC
CACNAUTH
BLOTRA0
MOBRCFC:
RCFNRNET
RCFPREEM
RCFFACRJ
RCFNCHAV
RCFTMPFA
RCFSWEQC
RCFRCHNA
RCFPRBLO
RCFRUNAV
RCFRFNSB
RCFBCNIM
RCFRFNIM
RCFSVNIM
RCFNMCUG
RCFCTLEX
RCFRALOS
RCFABSUB
RCFUNOB1
RCFUNOB2
RCFUNOB3
RCFRACON
PRIOQ
ANNQINFO
SNA0
SNA1
SNA2
SNA3
SNA4
OVL1
OVL2
OVL3
OVL4
INV1
INV2
INANIF
IACB
ANN
MOBORIG:
MOTFC1
MOTFC2
MOTODBIC
MOTODBIE
MOTODBPI
MOTODBPE
MOTADBAR
MOTOTAIC
MOTFC3
MOTFC4
MOTFC5
MOTOSB1
MOTOSB2
MOTOSB3
MOTOSB4
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INC- 6+
DISP INC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOBTERM:
MTTABSUB
MTTNOPAG
MTTSUBNC
MTTUNSUB
MTTADBAR
MTTINDIA
MOBCFWD:
CFWUNCO
CFWNDUB
CFWUDUB
CFWNOREP
CFWNOPAG
CFWRADCO
CFWVIOLA
CFWIMDET
CBBUSY
CBNOREP
CBNOPAG
CBRADCO
CBIMDET
MOBCRES:
BAOC
BAOIC
BAOCEXHP
BAIC
MOBSANN:
MOBQUEUE
SANNCW
SANNCH
MPTYINV
MPTYEXT
MPTYEALL
MPTYEIND
MPTYHOLD
MOBMAPC:
MAPSYSFA
MAPDATMI
MAPUNDAT
MAPFACNT
MAPUNSUB
MAPBSNPR
MAPTSNPR
MAPRACON
MAPCUGR
MAPSNCUG
MAPIBCUG
MAPOBCUG
Up to 34 intercept types may be linked.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ORIG ORIGINATING TRAFFIC
TERM TERMINATING TRAFFIC
DIZO DIGIT TRANSLATION ZONING
ROUTING ROUTING
BASICAUS BACKWARD SIGNALED CAUSES
COMDEST COMMON DESTINATIONS
MOBRCFC MOBILE RCF ADD CAUSES
MOBORIG MOBILE ORIGINATING TRAFFIC
MOBTERM MOBILE TERMINATING TRAFFIC
MOBCFWD MOBILE CALL FORWARDING
MOBCRES MOBILE CALL RESTRICTION
MOBSANN MOBILE SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT
MOBMAPC MOBILE MAP ADD CAUSES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INC- 7-
DISP INDIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INDICATION STATUS
This command displays all functional units out of service, all blocked
trunks and all catastrophe conditions. The status information appears
as a continuous message.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP INDIC : [OBJECT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
OBJECT INDICATION OBJECT
This parameter specifies the object for an indication.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
SN SWITCHING NETWORK
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING
SIGLBL SIGNALING LINK BLOCKED
SYP SYSTEM PANEL
CU CENTRAL UNITS
TGBL TRUNK GROUP BLOCKED
CAT1 CATASTROPHE CONDITION 1
CAT2 CATASTROPHE CONDITION 2
TOLLCAT TOLL CATASTROPHE
ALDSUP ALARM DISPLAY SUPPRESSION
ATMF ATM FABRIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INDIC- 1-
DISP INEXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA
This command displays specific data of the home exchange concerning Intelligent
Network services.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP INEXDATA ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INEXDATA- 1-
ENTR INEXDATA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK EXCHANGE DATA
This command creates exchange specific data concerning the Intelligent Network
service execution on the home exchange.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR INEXDATA : <LAC= ,TDDIG= ,LCCODE=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the Service Switching
Point in the Intelligent Network.
If it will be used as zoning destination, the command CR ZOPT has to
be entered with the local area code specified in the CODE parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
TDDIG TRAFFIC DISCRIMINATION DIGITS
This parameter specifies the traffic discrimination digits that will
be used for all Intelligent Network application protocols for which
Service Filtering may be executed in the update mode (e.g. protocol
type SINAP1). It has to be specified in order to complete the vote
directory number given in the Update operation. In the corresponding
ENTR INSLDAT command the traffic discrimination digits are part of
the vote directory number.
Default: 01.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit decimal number
LCCODE LEG CONTROLLER CODE
This parameter specifies the code for the selection of a Leg
Controller LTG. The code must be created with command CR CPT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INEXDATA- 1-
CAN INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Initiator
This task cancels an Initiator.
The required input parameters for an unique Initiator selection are:
1) Initiator AET or alternativly Initiator name
2) and Password type
Note:
Cancel Initiator removes the specified Initiator from the Q3 authentication
database and does not cancel an existing association.
The operation will be not executed, if no further (unrestricted) system access
possible.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN INI : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] ,Password type= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
This parameter specifies an remote Initiator (OS
application) by the application entity title (AET).
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator name
is specified.
Input format: {nn nn nn ... }
Initiator name
This parameter defines the unique initiator name within
the specified password type.
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator AET
is specified.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Password type
This mandatory parameter is used for an unique Initiator
selection and specifies the type of password mechanism.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiator with a replay
protected password
Simple PW : Initiator with a simple password
No PW : Initiator without a password
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INI- 1-
CR INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Initiator
This task creates an Initiator, at Q3 Authentication function with the specified
password type.
Possible password types are the "Simple PW" and the "Replay protected PW"
for simple or replay-protected authentication and type "No PW" (without password)
which supports only an identification.
Each Initiator must be specified by its AET (application entity title), except
one "Simple PW" Initiator can be defined without an AET specification.
This Initiator is then called Default "Simple PW" Initiator, which allows all
unknown Initiators system access via the specified (default) simple password.
Further it is possible to define time dependencies and restrict the system access
of
each Initiator by following scheduling parameters:
- duration: defines a Start Time and Stop Time and/or
- daily scheduling: time intervals for all days of the week or
- weekly scheduling: time intervals per individual days of the week.
The parameter Availability status indicates if a Initiator with scheduling
parameters is available (On) or not (Off). The output "-" indicates that no
scheduling parameter was entered.
Note:
- The parameters for daily scheduling and weekly scheduling exclude one another.
- The scheduling paramters must be selected when the initiator is created. If not,
then it is not possible to add scheduling parameters later by MOD INI.
If no scheduling parameters created then the Initiator is permanent valid and
can get system access every time.
Input format

[ [
[ CR INI : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] ,Password type= [
[ [
[ [,Password=] [,Verify password=] [,Accept time range=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
This parameter specifies an remote Initiator (OS
application) by the application entity title (AET).
This parameter is mandatory, except one "Simple PW"
Initiator can be defined without an AET entry to allow
all unknown Initiators system access via the specified
(default) simple password.
Input format: {nn nn nn ... }
Initiator name
This parameter defines the unique initiator name within
the specified password type.
If this optional parameter is not specified, the system
generates automatically a name:
AUTHNULLnnnn : for initiators without passwords
("No PW") types
AUTHRPPWnnnn : for "Replay protected PW" initiators,
AUTHSIPWnnnn : for "Simple PW" initiators.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Password type
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INI- 1+
CR INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This mandatory parameter defines the type of password
mechanism. It specifies if the Initiator should
be identified without a password or if it should be
authenticated by a simple or by a replay-protected
password.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiator with a replay
protected password
Simple PW : Initiator with a simple password
No PW : Initiator without a password
Password
This parameter specifies the password.
Prerequisites:
The password should contain at least a letter, a digit
and a special character and the password length should
be between 4 (minimum) and 24 (maximum) characters.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
Verify password
Please enter password string again.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
Accept time range
This parameter is only used for Initiators with
Password type "Replay protected PW" to specify
the accept time range.
This means the maximum time interval between generating
the authentication value at the Initiator and receiving
it at the responder.
If the parameter is not specified for an "replay
protected PW" Initiator then the default value of
5 minutes will be used.
Input format: hh:mm:ss (String )
hh hour (00..23),
mm minute (00..59),
ss second (00..59).
Start time
This parameter defines the Start time at which the
Initiator gets system access.
If only the Start time is set the Stop time will be
set automatically to Continuous.
The time value is rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Default value: actual system time
will be set if this parameter is omitted
but Stop time is set.
Stop time
This parameter defines the Stop time at which the
Initiator loses system access.
If only the Stop time is set the Start time will be
set automatically to the actual system time of the switch.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
will be set if this parameter is omitted
but Start time is set.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INI- 2+
CR INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified within the Initiator gets
system access.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for weekly
scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day.
Weekly intervals
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week.
The system access will be denied on days of the week not
selected and on days with 0 intervals set. At least one
day with one interval must be selected.
If this parameter is entered the parameter for daily
scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled from
the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INI- 3-
DISP INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Initiator
This task is used to display the attributes of one or more Initiators.
The following selection is possible:
- Output of one Initiator:
--> Please enter 1) Initiator AET or Initiator name
and 2) Password type.
- Output of all Initiators:
--> No input necessarry.
- Idividual selections:
--> You can do selection by
1) Initiator AET or Initiator name or Name substring
and/or
2) Password type.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP INI : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] [,Name substring=] [
[ [
[ [,Password type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
This parameter specifies an remote Initiator (OS
application) by the application entity title (AET).
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator name
or Name substring is specified.
Input format: {nn nn nn ... }
Initiator name
This parameter selects a initiator by a name string.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator AET
or Name Substring is specified.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Name substring
This parameter specifies a pattern (Substring) for the
Initiator name. Only Initiators which name contains
this Substring at any position will be displayed.
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator AET
or Initiator name is specified.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Password type
This parameter selects Initiators by a specific password
type. If the parameter is omitted then all Initiators,
otherwise only the Initiators with the specified Password
type will be displayed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INI- 1+
DISP INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiators with a replay
protected password
Simple PW : Initiators with a simple password
No PW : Initiators without a password
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INI- 2-
MOD INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Initiator
This task modifies the authentication parameters of an existing Initiator.
The following parameters are used for an unique Initiator selection and
can not be changed:
1) Initiator AET or alternativly Initiator name and
2) Password type.
Following parameters are changeable:
- Password,
- Accept time range
- Scheduling data
Note: A creation of new scheduling parameters is not possible. Only
scheduling paramters selected when the initiator was created can
be modified in the following way:
- duration: replace Start Time and/or Stop Time,
- daily scheduling: replace daily intervals,
- weekly scheduling: replace time intervals of single days of the week.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD INI : [Initiator AET=] [,Initiator name=] ,Password type= [
[ [
[ [,Password=] [,Verify password=] [,Accept time range=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Initiator AET
This parameter specifies an remote Initiator (OS
application) by the application entity title (AET).
Dependencies:
This parameter must not be entered, if Initiator name
is specified.
Input format: {nn nn nn ... }
Initiator name
This parameter defines the unique initiator name within
the specified password type.
This parameter must not be entered, if the Initiator AET
is specified.
Input format: String (1-12 characters)
Password type
This mandatory parameter is used for an unique Initiator
selection and specifies the type of password mechanism.
Input values:
Replay protected PW : Initiator with a replay
protected password
Simple PW : Initiator with a simple password
No PW : Initiator without a password
Password
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INI- 1+
MOD INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter defines the new password value.
Prerequisites:
The password should contain at least a letter, a digit
and a special character and the password length should
be between 4 (minimum) and 24 (maximum) characters.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
Verify password
Please enter new password string again.
Input format: String (4-24 characters).
Accept time range
This parameter is only used for Initiators with
Password type "Replay protected PW" to specify
the accept time range.
This means the maximum time interval between generating
the authentication value at the Initiator and receiving
it at the responder.
Input format: hh:mm:ss (String )
hh hour (00..23),
mm minute (00..59),
ss second (00..59).
Start time
This parameter replaces the Start time at which the
Initiator gets system access.
The parameter can be replaced only if a Start time or
Stop time was entered, when the Initiator was created.
Input format: standard date and time values.
Stop time
This parameter replaces the Stop time at which the
Initiator loses system access.
The parameter can be replaced only, if a Start time or
Stop time was entered, when the Initiator was created.
Input format: option Continuous
option Specific : standard date and
time values
Default value: option Continuous
Daily intervals
This parameter replaces the Daily intervals (up to 6)
within the Initiator gets system access.
The parameter can be entered only, if Daily intervals
were entered when the Initiator was created.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter replaces the Weekly intervals within
the Initiator gets system access.
Only days of the week selected in the parameter are
replaced. The intervals of the days not selected will
not be changed.
Enter 0 intervals to disable the whole day. At least
one day with one interval must be active in the resultant
Weekly intervals; otherwise the parameter is rejected.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INI- 2+
MOD INI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INI- 3-
CAN INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command removes the Congestion Control data.
Note:
Some guidelines have to be taken into account using the following
parameters:
- using CLGPTY : SKEY is mandatory,
LOCNO and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using LOCNO : SKEY is mandatory,
CLGPTY and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using CLDPTY : CLGPTY and LOCNO are incompatible.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INOVLCO : <CLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO= ,SKEY=> [,CTRLTYPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party number for
which the Congestion Control data will be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party number for
which the Congestion Control data will be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number for
which the Congestion Control data will be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the service key for which
Congestion Control data have to be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CTRLTYPE CONTROL TYPE
This parameter specifies the originator of the Congestion
Control data, which have to be deleted.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INOVLCO- 1+
CAN INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SSPOP SSP OPERATOR
SCPOP SCP OPERATOR
SCPAUT SCP AUTOMATIC
Default: SSPOP
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INOVLCO- 2-
DISP INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command displays data concerning specified or all Intelligent Network
Congestion Control data. These data can be the parameters or the statistics
about Congestion Control. It is also possible to distinguish between SCP
originated or operator originated Congestion Control data.
Note:
Some guidelines have to be taken into account using the following
parameters:
- using CLGPTY : SKEY is mandatory,
LOCNO and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using LOCNO : SKEY is mandatory,
CLGPTY and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using CLDPTY : CLGPTY and LOCNO are incompatible.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP INOVLCO : <CLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO= ,SKEY=> [,FORMAT=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CTRLTYPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the called party number for which
Congestion Control data have to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party number for which
Congestion Control data have to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number for which
Congestion Control data have to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the service key for which
Congestion Control data have to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INOVLCO- 1+
DISP INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
FORMAT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the kind of data which has to be displayed:
- PA has to be used for the selection of control data for a
specified SKEY, CLDPTY, CLGPTY or LOCNO.
- ST has to be used for the selection of SKEY, CLDPTY,
CLGPTY or LOCNO specific statistic data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PA DISPLAY CONTROL PARAMETERS
ST DISPLAY CONTROL STATISTICS
This parameter determines whether to display statistics
or the parameters of Congestion Control.
Default: PA
CTRLTYPE CONTROL TYPE
This parameter specifies the originator of the Congestion
Control data, which have to be displayed.
If no value is entered the data of all origins will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SSPOP SSP OPERATOR
SCPOP SCP OPERATOR
SCPAUT SCP AUTOMATIC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INOVLCO- 2-
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IN OVERLOAD CONTROL DATA
This command enters the control data to prevent the SCP
from overload. This will be done for a control criterion,
i.e. either for a given service key SKEY, called party
number CLDPTY, calling party number CLGPTY or location
number LOCNO. The maximal number of controlled and allowed
requests to the SCP concerning the control criterion is
specified by the parameter BURST. The decrease value
DECVAL is expected to be the number of requests answered in
the decrease time DECTIME.
Prerequisites:
- a service key must have been created with the command
CR INTRIG.
Note:
Some guidelines have to be taken into account using the following
parameters:
- using CLGPTY : SKEY is mandatory,
LOCNO and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using LOCNO : SKEY is mandatory,
CLGPTY and CLDPTY are incompatible,
- using CLDPTY : CLGPTY and LOCNO are incompatible.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR INOVLCO : CODURA= ,BURST= ,DECVAL= <,SKEY= ,CLDPTY= [
[ [
[ ,CLGPTY= ,LOCNO=> [,DECTIME=] [,RELCA=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,TREAT=] [,DURA=] [,ANNCYC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODURA CONTROL DURATION
This parameter specifies the control duration in seconds.
A value greater than 86400 means an infinite duration.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...99999, range of decimal numbers
BURST BURST OF ALL. SIMUL. CALLS
This parameter specifies the maximal number of controlled and
simultaneous allowed requests to the SCP concerning the
control criterion.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
DECVAL DECREASE VALUE
This parameter specifies the decrease value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INOVLCO- 1+
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter is used to specify the control criterion, i.e.
the IN service for which overload control data will be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter is used to specify the control criterion, i.e.
the called party number for which overload control data will be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter is used to specify the control criterion, i.e.
the calling party number for which overload control data will be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter is used to specify the control criterion, i.e.
the location number for which overload control data will be
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DECTIME DECREASE TIME
This parameter specifies the decrease time in milliseconds.
There is a different handling for the decrease time
between Callgapping for ETSI and BELLCORE-IN:
ETSI:
A value greater than 60000 means an infinite decrease time.
Incompatibilities:
- if BURST greater than 0,
this parameter value must not be greater than 60000
BELLCORE:
A value greater than 300000 is blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...999999, range of decimal numbers
Default: 100
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to control the call release and intercept treatment. It is related
to the announcement determined by the TREAT parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LOCATION
USER USER
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INOVLCO- 2+
ENTR INOVLCO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
Default: PUL
b: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Default: 42
TREAT CALL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies the intercept code for blocked IN calls.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: ANNOUNCEMENT IDENTIFICATION
TONE SCP TONE
ANN SCP ANNOUNCEMENT
Default: TONE
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
1...126, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
- For TONE identifier this value is of range (1..31).
Default: 4
DURA ANNOUNCEMENT / TONE DURATION
This parameter specifies the time limitation of the entered tone or
announcement. It is related to the tone / announcement determined
by the TREAT parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
Default: 40
ANNCYC ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of cycles of the entered
announcement. It is related to the announcement determined by the
TREAT parameter.
Incompatibilities:
- if TREAT = TONE, this parameter is not allowed
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INOVLCO- 3-
RSET INPLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Reset Input Log Function
This task resets the Input Log Function. The log files
are closed (Master, Q3 binary and text file, and, in
where applicable, an MML log file). This procedure may
take longer than expected, as already started data base
changes must all be finished. The user defined part of
the log file names which was entered with Log file
name, and a separate message with the fully specified
file name of the Master file, are returned to the user.
Use FTP to save the files belonging to the currently
closed master file , or have them executed by the Log
Executor (relevant file names are contained in the
Master file). If, however the Input Log Function is
already reset, a message is displayed but no other
information is returned.
This task does not mean just interrupting the logging
procedure, it generally resets the whole function. I.e.
it is not possible to continue with logging using the
same log files.
Input format

[ [
[ RSET INPLOG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET INPLOG- 1-
SET INPLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Set Input Log Function
This task activates the Input Log Function to log
database changes. New log files are created. These are
the Master, Q3 binary and text file, and, where
applicable, an MML log file. The input parameter
Log file name specifies the user defined part of
the log file names. This means that if this part is
TEST, files with the following file names are created:
\LG.TEST.A0.MASTER, \LG.TEST.A1.Q3B, \LG.TEST.A1.Q3T
(and \LG.TEST.A1.MML). Additionally the Swap file size
can be specified to limit the log file sizes so that
they fit on a single MOD. When reaching the limit,
the old log files are closed and new ones are created
with an incremented Extension part (A1..A9, B1..B9,
..Z1..Z9). The Log file name that has actually been
used and the current Swap file size are returned
to the user
Input format

[ [
[ SET INPLOG : [Log file name=] [,Swap file size=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Log file name
This parameter specifies the user defined part of the
log file names. File names are structured as follows:
\LG.<user def. part>.<Extension>.<type>. Extension
and type are automatically filled in. File names must
be unique, i.e. user parts that are currently used on
disk, are not allowed to be used.
Input format: String of 1..17 characters valid in file
names. The following characters are allowed
A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,
N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,
n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x,y,z,
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,
!,$,%,&,#,+,-,_,(,),,,/,
;,<,=,>,@,[,],{,},|.
Default value: current date and time as string.
Swap file size
This parameter specifies a threshold limit in bytes. If
the sum of the sizes of the two (three) log files (not
counting the master file) reaches this value, the log
files are automatically closed, and new ones with an
incremented Extension are created. The master log
file is not replaced but new references to the new log
files will be appended.
If an out-of-range value is specified, it will be
automatically corrected to the nearest limit without
error indication. If not specified, the value used
previously is kept, or, if not appropriate, a default
value (20000 kB) is used internally.
Input format: Range 1000..10000 kB.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET INPLOG- 1-
STAT INPLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Status of Input Log Function
This task displays the status of the Input Log
Function. After successful execution the following
attributes are displayed:
Log file name: user part of the currently used
log file names;
Extension: index part of the file names;
Administrative state: indicates whether ILG is active
or not;
Operational state: indicates whether ILG is
functioning properly;
Procedural status: if filled in, it indicates a
temporary condition. Value Initialising means being
activated, Terminating means being reset (running
jobs are awaited, new jobs are rejected. Log files
are not yet closed);
Swap file size : threshold limit size for internal
file swapping;
Reason for error: additional information if
Operational state is disabled;
Blocked state : indicates a database lock initiated
by Software Management
Input format

[ [
[ STAT INPLOG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT INPLOG- 1-
ACT INPLOGEX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate Input Log Execution
This task starts the incorporation of Input Log files.
One master file can be incorporated by this task.
A Start number both for Q3 requests and
MML commands saved in input logging files and a Stop
number can be specified. The Device name is to specify
where the logging files are available. If the execution is to
start at the first Q3 entry in the master, you do not
need to specify a Start Q3 number and similary, if
the execution is to start at the first MML entry in the master,
you do not need to specify a Start MML number. If
the execution is to stop at the last entry, no
Stop number needs to be specified.
The response will idicate, whether the execution was sucessful. If
the requested files could not be executed completely, then the
following error protocol files will be created:
(in the following file names the double backslashes are only simple,
but the script language does not allow simple backslash)
\LG.<File name>.LEXERR.nnn : a list of all problems,
which are occured during
the log execution,
\LG.<File name>.LEXLMR.nnn : a copy of \NET.RESULT file,
if a Layer Management config
file could not be incorporated,
LG.LEXOUT.nnn : (located on the CP disc!)
The error responses of MML
applications.
You can stop the Input Log Execution by the task Deactivate
Input Log Execution and request the status of Input Log Execution
by the task Display Status of Input Log Execution.
Do not start this task before your previous Activate
Input Log Execution task has finished. No multiple start allowed.
WARNING: Execution of this task may take a long time!
Input format

[ [
[ ACT INPLOGEX : Device name= ,File name= [,Start MML number=] [
[ [
[ [,Start Q3 number=] [,Stop number=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Device name
This parameter defines the
name of device, where the
input logging files stored.
Input format: SYS, MOD0, MOD1.
File name
This parameter defines the name
of the master file to be executed.
Input format: String (1-17 characters)
valid in file names.
Start MML number
This parameter specifies, at which
sequence number the execution of MML
commandos in the master file is to
begin.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INPLOGEX- 1+
ACT INPLOGEX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If the execution is to start at the
first entry in the file, no sequence
number needs to be specified.
Input format : Integer
Start Q3 number
This parameter specifies, at which
sequence number the execution of Q3
requests in the master file is to
begin.
If execution is to start at the first
entry in the file, no sequence number
needs to be specified.
Input format : Integer
Stop number
This parameter specifies, at which
sequence number the execution is to
finish.
If the execution is to stop at the last
entry in the file, no sequence number
has to be specified.
Input format : Integer
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INPLOGEX- 2-
DACT INPLOGEX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Deactivate Input Log Execution
This task deactivates Input Log Execution.
The task displays the following information: confirmation
about termination, the file name and the sequence number of the
MML command, SCI counter, Q3 request or Q3 linked request
which was incorporated last.
After a stop the execution is to start at the first entry,
which was not incorporated yet. If the excution stopped at a
Q3 linked entry or at an SCI, then it is to decide, whether
the Q3T or the MML file has to be edited.
No deactivation is possible, if the Input Log Execution was not
activated before.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT INPLOGEX ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INPLOGEX- 1-
STAT INPLOGEX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Status of Input Log Execution
Purpose of this task is to display the status of Input Log
Execution.
The task displays the following information: status of the
Input Log Execution (running or not running), the currently
used file name, the sequence number of the
MML command, SCI counter, Q3 request or Q3 linked request
which was incorporated last.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT INPLOGEX ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT INPLOGEX- 1-
CAN INPLOGFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Input Log File
Cancel Input Log File
This task cancels (deletes) input log files on the MP.
It can be used for SSNC standalone and also for
coupled CP-MP systems, because in coupled systems
log files are located on the MP side only.
Log files can be cancelled on the MP system disk or
on a magneto-optical MP disk (MOD).
All log files of a swap extension are always cancelled
together. The swap extensions that should be
cancelled must be specified in parameter
Swap extensions.
Output:
The output of this task shows:
- Files that are successfully cancelled.
- Files that are not cancelled because of an error.
- Files that are not closed, which cannot be cancelled
for this reason.
- Swap extensions specified in the input string which
do not exist.
Only those categories which are not empty are shown in
the output.
The entities listed in the output are swap extensions and
the master log file, which is represented by the logical
log file name.
Notes:
- Only closed log files can be cancelled. The master
log file can only be cancelled when all its log files
are closed.
- A confirmation is requested before the log files are
cancelled.
- When one log file of a swap extension cannot be
cancelled, the task tries to cancel remaining log files
of the swap extension. The output string will indicate
that this swap extension was not successfully
cancelled.
- If the master log file is not cancelled itself, it is
modified: All references to successfully and not
successfully cancelled swap extensions are
removed. This is necessary, because a problem
would arise if the MP could not find cancelled
log files that are still listed in the master log file. Not
successfully cancelled swap extensions are also removed
from the master, because some of their log files
could have been cancelled.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN INPLOGFILE : Swap extensions= ,Device name= ,Log file name= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Swap extensions
Swap extensions to be cancelled
This parameter specifies the entities that are cancelled.
Possible entities are swap extensions and the master
log file.
Input format:
- String without any restriction of length.
- ?
Input values:
- A blank-delimited string of entities, e.g.
"InputLog1 .A1 .A2 .A3". The logical log file name
("InputLog1" in this example) represents the master
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INPLOGFILE- 1+
CAN INPLOGFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
log file. Specified swap extensions that are not defined
in the master log file are ignored.
- ? to get such a string containing all entities that can
be cancelled, i.e. all closed swap extensions and the
logical log file name (representing the master log file;
all swap extension must be closed to cancel the
master log file). The string can be used as input to
this parameter.
This parameter must be specified, except when ? is entered
to one of the other two parameters.
Device name
Device name of MP disk
This parameter specifies the MP system disk or
MP MOD (magneto-optical disk) from which the log files
are cancelled.
Input format:
- MDD, MOD0 or MOD1
- ?
Input values:
- MDD to cancel log files on the MP system disk.
- The device name of a MP MOD. Valid device names
are MOD0 and MOD1.
- ? to get the names of all available MP disks.
Default: MDD
Log file name
Logical log file name
This parameter specifies the logical name of the log
files that are cancelled.
The logical name is the part of the full file name which
can be defined by the user, and which is common to all
related log files. For instance, it is the <LogicalName>
part of the full name LG.<LogicalName>.A0.MASTER of
a master log file.
The log files must be located on the MP system disk, if
parameter Device name is MDD, or on the MP MOD
specified by parameter Device name.
Input format:
- 1..17 characters without space:
letters (also capitals), numbers, and the characters
! $ % & # + - _ ( ) , / ; < = > @ [ ] { } |
- ?
This parameter is case-sensitive.
Input values:
- An existing logical log file name.
- ? to get a list of all logical log file names on the
specified MP device.
This parameter must be specified, except when ? is entered
to parameter Device name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INPLOGFILE- 2-
COPY INPLOGFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Copy Input Log File
Copy Input Log File
This task copies input log files from the MP system
disk to a MP MOD (magneto-optical disk).
It can be used for SSNC standalone and also for
coupled CP-MP systems, because in coupled systems
log files are located on the MP side only.
It is possible to copy all closed log files mentioned in
the master log file, or to specify particular swap
extensions that are copied.
All log files of a swap extension are always copied
together.
The master log file is always copied.
Output:
The output of this task shows:
- Files that are successfully copied.
- Files that are not copied because of an error,
e.g. if the destination disk is full.
- Files that are not closed, which cannot be copied
for this reason.
- Swap extensions specified in the input string which
do not exist.
Only those categories which are not empty are shown in
the output.
The entities listed in the output are swap extensions and
the master log file, which is represented by the logical
log file name.
If parameter Swap extensions is empty, all closed swap
extensions are copied and appear in the output.
Preconditions:
- There must be enough free disk space on the
destination MOD. The available disk space is
checked before a swap extension is copied. If there
is not enough space for all the log files of the swap
extension, these log files are not copied. The output
indicates that this swap extension is not copied.
Further swap extensions are copied if there is
enough disk space available for them. In the same
way, the master input log file is copied only if there
is enough free disk space for it. It is the last file
that is copied.
Possible Effects:
- It is not checked if log files have already been copied
to the destination disk before. Log files on the
destination disk are overwritten without a warning
message.
- When one log file of a swap extension cannot be
copied, the whole swap extension is not copied. All
its remaining log files found on the destination disk
are cancelled. The output indicates that this
swap extension is not successfully copied.
Input format

[ [
[ COPY INPLOGFILE : Swap extensions= ,Device name= ,Log file name= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Swap extensions
Swap extensions to be copied
This parameter specifies the swap extensions that are
copied.
The master log file is always copied.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY INPLOGFILE- 1+
COPY INPLOGFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- String without any restriction of length.
- ?
Input values:
- A blank-delimited string of swap extensions, e.g.
".A1 .A2 .A3". Specified swap extensions that are
not defined in the master log file are ignored.
- ? to get such a string containing all swap extensions
that can be copied, i.e. all closed swap extensions.
The string can be used as input to this parameter.
Default:
All closed swap extensions are copied.
Device name
Device name of MP MOD
This parameter specifies the magneto-optical MP disk
(MOD) to which the log files are copied.
Input format:
- MOD0 or MOD1
- ?
Input values:
- The device name of a MP MOD. Valid device names
are MOD0 and MOD1.
- ? to get the names of all available MP MODs.
This parameter must be specified, except when ? is entered
to one of the other two parameters.
Log file name
Logical log file name
This parameter specifies the logical name of the log
files that are copied.
The logical name is the part of the full file name which
can be defined by the user, and which is common to all
related log files. For instance, it is the <LogicalName>
part of the full name LG.<LogicalName>.A0.MASTER of
a master log file.
The log files must be located on the MP system disk.
Input format:
- 1..17 characters without space:
letters (also capitals), numbers, and the characters
! $ % & # + - _ ( ) , / ; < = > @ [ ] { } |
- ?
This parameter is case-sensitive.
Input values:
- An existing logical log file name.
- ? to get a list of all logical log file names on the
MP system disk.
This parameter must be specified, except when ? is entered
to parameter Device name.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY INPLOGFILE- 2-
MOD INPLOGFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Input Log Files
This task changes active log files created by the Input
Log Function. The old log files are closed (Master, Q3
binary and text file, and, where applicable, an MML log
file). This procedure may take longer than expected, as
already started data base changes must all be finished.
After finishing this task, the user defined part of the
old log file names and a separate message with the fully
specified file name of the old Master file are returned
to the user. Use FTP to save the files belonging to the
currently closed master file, or have them executed by
the Log Executor (relevant file names are contained in
the Master file). Then the new log files (similar to the
closed ones: new Master, Q3 binary and text file, and,
where applicable, an MML log file), specified by input
parameters are created. The input parameter New log file
name specifies the user defined part of the new log file
names. This means that if this part is specified as
TEST, files with the following file names are created:
\LG.TEST.A0.MASTER, \LG.TEST.A1.Q3B, \LG.TEST.A1.Q3T
(and \LG.TEST.A1.MML). Additionally the Swap file size
can be modified which limits the log file sizes so that
they fit on a single MOD. The new log file name that has
actually been used and the current Swap file size are
also returned to the user
Input format

[ [
[ MOD INPLOGFILE : [New log file name=] [,Swap file size=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
New log file name
This parameter specifies the user defined part of log
file names. File names are structured as follows:
\LG.<user def. Part>.<Extension>.<type>. Extension
and type are automatically filled in. File names must
be unique, i.e. user parts that are currently used on
disk, are not allowed to be used.
Input format: String of 1..17 characters valid in file
names. The following characters are allowed
A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,
N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,
a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,
n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x,y,z,
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,
!,$,%,&,#,+,-,_,(,),,,/,
;,<,=,>,@,[,],{,},|.
Default value: current date and time as string.
Swap file size
This parameter specifies a threshold limit in bytes.
If the sum of the sizes of the two (three) log files
(not counting the master file) reaches this value,
the log files are automatically closed, and new ones
with an incremented Extension are created. The
master log file is not replaced but new references to
the new log files will be appended.
If an out-of-range value is specified, it will be
automatically corrected to the nearest limit without
error indication. If not specified, the value used
previously is kept.
Input format: Range 1000..10000 kB.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INPLOGFILE- 1-
CAN INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command removes an IN service class mark.
Prerequisites:
- No IN service class mark reference (assigned with the MML command
CR INSCMREF) and no IN authorization (assigned with the MML command
CR INAUTH) may exist which refer to this IN service class.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCM : SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be removed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCM- 1-
CR INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command creates an INSCM that is used for the installation
of trigger detection points (TDP) of several types.
The following types of trigger detection points can be controlled
with IN service class marks:
TDP1 - Originating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the A-side seizure processing when the
off-hook for a certain object is detected.
TDP2 - Collected Information:
This trigger is detected when the A-side wants to setup a call and
a specified number of digits is collected.
TDP3 - Analyzed Information:
This trigger is detected during the IN specific analysis of the
called party number, the calling party number or its category.
TDP4 - Route Select Failure:
This trigger is detected when the indication was received that no
route to the required destination can be found.
TDP5 - Originating Busy:
This trigger is detected when the originating call party receives
an indication of user busy from the terminating call party.
TDP6 - Originating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the A-side processing when the B-side
does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
TDP5O6 - Combines TDP5 and TDP6.
TDP12 - Terminating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
the call setup to a certain object was detected.
TDP13 - Terminating Busy:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
B-party is busy.
TDP14 - Terminating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
B-side does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
TDP13O14 - Combines TDP13 and TDP14.
Precondition for the use of a trigger detection point is the creation
and the activation of an INSCM reference (respectively by the CR INSCMREF
and ACT INSCMREF command) or the creation of an IN authorization
(by means of the command CR INAUTH)
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID has to
be created by command CR INTRIG.
- SSF type must be NORMAL.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR INSCM - TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
2. CR INSCM - TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
3. CR INSCM - TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
4. CR INSCM - TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
5. CR INSCM - TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
6. CR INSCM - TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
7. CR INSCM - TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
8. CR INSCM - TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
9. CR INSCM - TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
10. CR INSCM - TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
11. CR INSCM - TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 1+
CR INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP1.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 2+
CR INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP12.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLDPTY=] [,NCLDPTY=] [,CLGPTY=] [,PROP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 3+
CR INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PROP PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<CNAM > CALLING NAME NOT PRESENT
< > This parameter value specifies an extra trigger
< > condition. It is used to detect an IN service
< > request depending on the unavailability of the
< > calling name.
<PROP3 > PROPERTY 3
<PROP4 > PROPERTY 4
<PROP5 > PROPERTY 5
<PROP6 > PROPERTY 6
<PROP7 > PROPERTY 7
<PROP8 > PROPERTY 8
<PROP9 > PROPERTY 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 4+
CR INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP13.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,CLGPTY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,RELCA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 5+
CR INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 6+
CR INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP13O14.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 7+
CR INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 8+
CR INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP14.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLGPTY=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 9+
CR INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 10+
CR INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP2.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,COLDIG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,ESCAPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
ESCAPE ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies the escape code to be used in case
of TDP2 for the setup of a normal non-IN call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 11+
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP3.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= [,PRID=] [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [,CAT=] [,NCAT=] [,PROP=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 12+
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CAT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is
used to restrict the IN-triggering to a specific category of
calling parties.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as NCAT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 13+
CR INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category of the calling party.
NCAT NOT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is used
to restrict the IN-triggering to calling parties which are NOT of
the entered category.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as a.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category of the calling party.
PROP PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ETRIND EVALUATE RETRIGGER INDICATION
This parameter value specifies that the retrigger
indication "IN Triggering Inhibited After Connect"
delivered by the IN service logic will be
evaluated.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 14+
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP4.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,COLDIG=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 15+
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 16+
CR INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 17+
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP5.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] [,NCLDPTY=[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 18+
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 19+
CR INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 20+
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP5O6.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [,RELCA=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 21+
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 22+
CR INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 23+
CR INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
Creation of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP6.

[ [
[ CR INSCM : SCMID= ,TYPE= ,PRID= [,PREFIX=] ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLDPTY= [[ ; [
[ [,NCLDPTY=[ [,CLGPTY=] [
[ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 24+
CR INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCM- 25-
DISP INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command displays the data concerning a specified or all
IN service class marks.
Depending on the TYPE parameter only service class marks of
special type will be displayed.
Depending on the PRID parameter only service class mark using
this profile identifier will be displayed.
Depending on the FORMAT parameter specific data of the service
class mark related to the trigger condition or trigger profile
will be displayed.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCM : SCMID= [,TYPE=] [,PRID=] [,FORMAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
for which the IN service class mark shall be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
for which the IN service class mark shall be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION FOR DISPLAY
This parameter specifies the kind of data which has to be displayed
for an Service Class Mark:
- PA has to be used to display the specific trigger conditions.
- CT has to be used to display the profile identification of the SCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCM- 1+
DISP INSCM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PA PARAMETERS TRIGGER CONDITIONS
CT CALL TREATMENT
Default: PA
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCM- 2-
MOD INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK
This command modifies an IN service class mark that is used for
the triggering at the following trigger detection points:
TDP1 - Originating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the A-side seizure processing when the
off-hook for a certain object was detected.
TDP2 - Collected Information:
This trigger is detected when the A-side wants to setup a call and
a specified number of digits was collected.
TDP3 - Analyzed Information:
This trigger is detected during the IN specific analysis of the
called party number, the calling party number or its category.
TDP4 - Route Select Failure:
This trigger is detected when the indication was received that no
route to the required destination can be found.
TDP5 - Originating Busy:
This trigger is detected when the originating call party receives
an indication of user busy from the terminating call party.
TDP6 - Originating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the A-side processing when the B-side
does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
TDP5O6 - Combines TDP5 and TDP6.
TDP12 - Terminating Attempt Authorized:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
the call setup to a certain object was detected.
TDP13 - Terminating Busy:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
B-party is busy.
TDP14 - Terminating No Answer:
This trigger is detected in the B-side seizure processing when the
B-side does not answer and the no-answer timer is expired.
TDP13O14 - Combines TDP13 and TDP14.
Notes:
- The type of service class mark must not be changed.
- The MOD command allows to overwrite existing parameter values.
- Removal of trigger conditions is only allowed for an escape code.
Prerequisites:
- The trigger profile referenced by the parameter PRID has to
be created by command CR INTRIG.
- SSF type must be NORMAL.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD INSCM - TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
2. MOD INSCM - TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
3. MOD INSCM - TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
4. MOD INSCM - TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
5. MOD INSCM - TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
6. MOD INSCM - TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
7. MOD INSCM - TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
8. MOD INSCM - TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4.
9. MOD INSCM - TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5.
10. MOD INSCM - TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
11. MOD INSCM - TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 1+
MOD INSCM
TDP1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point
of type TDP1.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 2+
MOD INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP12.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,COLDIG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,PROP= ,CPROP=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 3+
MOD INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PROP PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties to be
added to the already existing values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<CNAM > CALLING NAME NOT PRESENT
< > This parameter value specifies an extra trigger
< > condition. It is used to detect an IN service
< > request depending on the unavailability of the
< > calling name.
<PROP3 > PROPERTY 3
<PROP4 > PROPERTY 4
<PROP5 > PROPERTY 5
<PROP6 > PROPERTY 6
<PROP7 > PROPERTY 7
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 4+
MOD INSCM
TDP12
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
<PROP8 > PROPERTY 8
<PROP9 > PROPERTY 9
CPROP CANCEL SCM PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties to be
canceled from the already existing values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
<CNAM > CALLING NAME NOT PRESENT
< > This parameter value specifies an extra trigger
< > condition. It is used to detect an IN service
< > request depending on the unavailability of the
< > calling name.
<PROP3 > PROPERTY 3
<PROP4 > PROPERTY 4
<PROP5 > PROPERTY 5
<PROP6 > PROPERTY 6
<PROP7 > PROPERTY 7
<PROP8 > PROPERTY 8
<PROP9 > PROPERTY 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 5+
MOD INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP13.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLGPTY= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 6+
MOD INSCM
TDP13
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 7+
MOD INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP13O14.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 8+
MOD INSCM
TDP13O14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 9+
MOD INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP14.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLGPTY=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 10+
MOD INSCM
TDP14
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 11+
MOD INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP2.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,COLDIG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,ESCAPE= ,CESCAPE=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
ESCAPE ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies the modified escape code to be used in case
of TDP2 for the setup of a normal non-IN call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 12+
MOD INSCM
TDP2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...2 digit decimal number
CESCAPE CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
This parameter specifies if the escape code has to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N ESCAPE CODE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO ESCAPE CODE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
YES CANCEL ESCAPE CODE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 13+
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP3.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,COLDIG= [
[ [
[ ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,CAT= ,NCAT= ,PROP= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CPROP=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 14+
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CAT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is
used to restrict the IN-triggering to a specific category of
calling parties.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as NCAT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 15+
MOD INSCM
TDP3
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category of the calling party.
NCAT NOT CALLING PARTY CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the category of calling party. It is used
to restrict the IN-triggering to calling parties which are NOT of
the entered category.
Notes:
- This parameter has the opposite effect as CAT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category of the calling party.
PROP PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties to be
added to the already existing values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ETRIND EVALUATE RETRIGGER INDICATION
This parameter value specifies that the retrigger
indication "IN Triggering Inhibited After Connect"
delivered by the IN service logic will be
evaluated.
CPROP CANCEL SCM PROPERTY
This parameter specifies the SCM properties to be
canceled from the already existing values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ETRIND EVALUATE RETRIGGER INDICATION
This parameter value specifies that the retrigger
indication "IN Triggering Inhibited After Connect"
delivered by the IN service logic will be
evaluated.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 16+
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4.
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP4.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,COLDIG= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of called party digits to be
collected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 17+
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 18+
MOD INSCM
TDP4
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 19+
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
9. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5.
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP5.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX= ,CLDPTY= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 20+
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 21+
MOD INSCM
TDP5
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 22+
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP5O6.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY= ,RELCA=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 23+
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to trigger IN depending on the call release.
It can be entered for the trigger types TDP4, TDP5, TDP5O6, TDP13
or TDP13O14.
Notes:
- Up to 3 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 24+
MOD INSCM
TDP5O6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LOCATION
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
PRL PRIV. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PRR PRIV.NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
PUL PUB. NETW. SERVING LOCAL USER
PUR PUB. NETW. SERVING REMOTE USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
USER USER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 25+
MOD INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11. Input format
TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
Modification of a service class mark for a trigger detection point of
type TDP6.

[ [
[ MOD INSCM : SCMID= <,PRID= ,PREFIX= ,CPREFIX=> ,NOANST= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ <,CLDPTY= ,NCLDPTY= ,CLGPTY=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the service class mark
to be modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile,
the data of which has to be used when the trigger was
detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be set in front
of the called party number when the dialogue to the SCP has to
be started.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CPREFIX CANCEL PREFIX
This parameter specifies if the prefix digits have to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PREFIX REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PREFIX
YES CANCEL PREFIX
NOANST NO ANSWER TIME
This parameter specifies the value of the NO-ANSWER timer
for TDP6, TDP5O6, TDP14 or TDP13O14
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
CLDPTY CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of a dialled
digit combination.
- Either it can be used to detect an IN service request for destination
numbers starting with the entered digits.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 26+
MOD INSCM
TDP6
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Or it can be used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service
request for a destination number if the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database (see CR INAUTH).
In this case only a single parameter value equal to "*" must be
administered.
Compatibilities:
If used for terminating triggers to detect an IN service request
for a destination number when the complete number is entered as
B-number in the IN-authorization database following rules are
valid :
- only allowed for TDP12.
- the parameter PRID must not be entered.
- the parameter NCLDPTY may be entered. Numbers entered with this
parameter are not triggered.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NCLDPTY NOT CALLED PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition of
a NOT dialled digit combination. It is used to detect an
IN service request for destination numbers NOT starting
with the entered digits.
Compatibities:
- CLDPTY=*. See parameter CLDPTY for more information.
This parameter can have up to 3 parameter values linked together
with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the extra trigger condition for a
calling party number. It is used to detect an IN service request
depending on the origin of a call.
Notes:
- For txs (transit exchange subscribers) features this parameter
must be equal "*". In this case PRID may not be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCM- 27-
ACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command activates an IN service class mark assigned to a subscriber,
PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a CENTREX group, a common service group,
a call type or a digit code.
Prerequisites :
- The corresponding INSCMREF must have been created with the command
CR INSCMREF.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. ACT INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. ACT INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. ACT INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. ACT INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. ACT INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. ACT INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to
a digit combination (code).

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 1+
ACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 2+
ACT INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a call type or
a common service group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 3+
ACT INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned
to a CENTREX group and code.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 4+
ACT INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 5+
ACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
Activate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= [,OPMODE=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 6+
ACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 7+
ACT INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
Activate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a subscriber or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 8+
ACT INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Activate an IN service class mark already assigned to a trunk group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INSCMREF : TGNO= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be realized with this IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSCMREF- 9-
CAN INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command cancels the assignment of an IN service class mark reference
to a subscriber, a PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a CENTREX group, a
call type, a common service group or a digit code.
Notes :
- The SCMREF must be deactivated before it may be cancelled.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. CAN INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. CAN INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. CAN INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. CAN INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. CAN INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. CAN INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference to a digit combination
(for office based IN-triggering).

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 1+
CAN INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assigned to a call type
or a common service group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 2+
CAN INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assigned
to a CENTREX group and code.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 3+
CAN INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 4+
CAN INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assignment to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 5+
CAN INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference assignment to
a subscriber or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 6+
CAN INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Cancellation of an IN service class mark reference to a trunk group
(for trunk group based IN-triggering).

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
whose reference with subscriber, PBX, PBXLN, a trunk group or a
digit code must be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSCMREF- 7-
CR INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command assigns an IN service class mark to a subscriber, PBX,
PBX line, a trunkgroup, a CENTREX group, a call type, a common service
group or a digit code.
Prerequisites :
- The INSCM specified in parameter SCMID must have been created
with command CR INSCM.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. CR INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. CR INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. CR INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. CR INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. CR INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. CR INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a digit combination (for office based
IN-triggering).

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code) to
which the IN service class mark is assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
to be assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 1+
CR INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 2+
CR INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a call type or a common service group.
Prerequisites :
Incompatibilities :
- An INSCM may only be assigned to CENTREX common service groups or
to call types for a CENTREX common service groups.
- Only INSCMs of type TDP12 can be assigned.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
to be assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 3+
CR INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a CENTREX group and code.
Prerequisites :
Incompatibilities :
- Only INSCMs of type TDP3 can be assigned.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group
to which the IN service class mark is assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code) to
which the IN service class mark is assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
to be assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 4+
CR INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a CENTREX group.
Prerequisites :
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group
to which the IN service class mark is assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
to be assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 5+
CR INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a PBX line.
Prerequisites:
- The parameters LAC, DN, OPMODE and LNO must address a PBX line
previously created with command CR PBXLN.
- Terminating IN service class marks may only be assigned to PBX lines with
COS = DCANORM.
Incompatibilities :
- Originating INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the
same object simultaneously.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a PBX line, no reference to an
originating INSCM must already exist for the PBX line and no
reference to an INSCM of incompatible TYPE must exist for the
belonging PBX.
- To assign a terminating INSCM to a PBX line, no terminating INSCM must
already be assigned to the PBX line.
- INSCMs are incompatible with:
- OPMODE = IIC1TR6
= IBW1TR6
= IOG1TR6
- Originating INSCMs are incompatible with
OPMODE = IOG
= AOG.
- Terminating INSCMs are incompatible with
OPMODE = IIC
= AIC.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to a PBX line if the line itself
or the PBX is assigned :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
Notes:
- In case an IN service class mark is also assigned to the PBX, the IN service
class mark assigned to the PBX line will take precedence.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 6+
CR INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
to be assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 7+
CR INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a subscriber or a PBX.
Prerequisites :
- The parameters LAC, DN must address a subscriber or a PBX
previously created respectively with commands CR SUB or CR PBX.
- Originating INSCMs may only be assigned to a PBX having at least
one of the following OPMODEs : IIC, AIC, IBW, ABW.
- Terminating INSCMs may only be assigned to a PBX having at least
one of the following OPMODEs: IOG, AOG, IBW, ABW.
Incompatibilities :
- Originating INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the
same object simultaneously.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a subscriber, no reference to
an originating INSCM must already exist for the subscriber.
- To assign an originating INSCM to a PBX, no reference to an
originating INSCM must already exist for the PBX and no reference
to an INSCM of incompatible TYPE must exist for the PBX lines
belonging to that PBX.
- To assign a terminating INSCM to a subscriber or a PBX, no terminating
INSCM must already be assigned to the subscriber or PBX.
- INSCMs may not be assigned to:
- subscribers with CAT = COINB1
= COINB2
= COINB3
= TPLRNG
= TPLTIP
= TESTNO
= IDSB
= ECS
= ECSP
- subscribers with LNATT = ISDN1TR6
- PBX with TYPE = FRAMEHD
= PHI
- PBX with OPMODE = IIC1TR6
= IBW1TR6
= IOG1TR6
- Originating INSCMs may not be assigned subscribers with CAT = VIRTSUB.
- Terminating INSCMs, except of type TDP12, may not be assigned to CENTREX
users.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to subscribers with :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.
- INSCMs of type TDP1 may not be assigned to a PBX if the PBX itself or
one of its lines is assigned :
TRARSTR = TRACLACT
= TRACLMOD.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 8+
CR INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
to be assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 9+
CR INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Assignment of an IN service class mark to a trunk group (for trunk group
based IN-triggering).
Prerequisites :
- The parameter TGNO must address a trunk group, previously created with
the command CR TGRP.
Incompatibilities :
- INSCMs of different types must not be assigned to the same object
simultaneously.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number to which the
IN service class mark is assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the IN service class mark
to be assigned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INSCMREF- 10-
DACT INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REF.
This command deactivates an IN service class mark previously activated.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DACT INSCMREF- CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT CODE
2. DACT INSCMREF- CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. DACT INSCMREF- CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. DACT INSCMREF- CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. DACT INSCMREF- PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. DACT INSCMREF- SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. DACT INSCMREF- TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT CODE
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned
to a digit combination (code).

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 1+
DACT INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a call type or
a common service group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 2+
DACT INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned
to a CENTREX group and code.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 3+
DACT INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 4+
DACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
Deactivate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= [,OPMODE=] ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 5+
DACT INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 6+
DACT INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
Deactivate an IN Service Class Mark already assigned to a subscriber or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
TDP12 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 12
TDP13 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13
TDP13O14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 13O14
TDP14 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 14
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 7+
DACT INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Deactivate an IN service class mark already assigned to a trunk group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INSCMREF : TGNO= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TYPE TRIGGER DETECTION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of trigger detection point
to be deactivated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
TDP1 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 1
TDP2 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 2
TDP3 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 3
TDP4 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 4
TDP5 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5
TDP5O6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 5O6
TDP6 TRIGGER DETECTION POINT 6
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSCMREF- 8-
DISP INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command displays references of subscribers, PBXs, PBX lines, trunk
groups, CENTREX groups, call types, common service groups and digit
codes to IN service class marks.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP INSCMREF- CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. DISP INSCMREF- CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
3. DISP INSCMREF- CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
4. DISP INSCMREF- DN IN SCM REFERENCE ASSIOCIATED TO DN
5. DISP INSCMREF- TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
Displays references of digit combinations (codes) to IN service class marks.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of an IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service whose data has to be displayed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 1+
DISP INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 2+
DISP INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
Displays references of CENTREX groups and code to IN service class marks.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of an IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service whose data has to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 3+
DISP INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Displays references of CENTREX groups to IN service class marks.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : CXGRP= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of an IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service whose data has to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 4+
DISP INSCMREF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE ASSIOCIATED TO DN
Displays references of subscribers, PBXs, PBX lines, call types or
common service groups to IN service class marks.

[ [
[ DISP INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OTPTYPE=] [,LNO=] [,OPMODE=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number.
Notes:
- If LAC=X is entered, DN=X has to be entered, too.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OTPTYPE ORIG./TERM. PARTY TYPE
This parameter specifies the type for orginating or terminating
party.
Notes:
- If it is not entered, all types of originating or terminating
party are displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CSGRP COMMON SERVICE GROUP
CTYPE CALL TYPE
PBX PBX
PBXLN PBX LINE
SUB SUBSCRIBER
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 5+
DISP INSCMREF
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of an IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service whose data has to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 6+
DISP INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Displays references of trunk groups to IN service class marks.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP INSCMREF : TGNO= [,SCMID=] [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of an IN service class mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service whose data has to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSCMREF- 7-
MOD INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IN SERVICE CLASS MARK REFERENCE
This command permits to replace an IN service class mark assigned to a
subscriber, a PBX, a PBX line, a trunk group, a CENTREX group, a call type,
a common service group or a digit code by another IN service class mark.
Prerequisites :
- The IN service class mark specified in parameter SCMID must have been
created with command CR INSCM.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD INSCMREF - CODE IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
2. MOD INSCMREF - CTORCSG IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
3. MOD INSCMREF - CXGACODE IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
4. MOD INSCMREF - CXGRP IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
5. MOD INSCMREF - PBXLN IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
6. MOD INSCMREF - SUBORPBX IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
7. MOD INSCMREF - TGNO IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
1. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR DIGIT COMBINATION
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a digit combination
(for office based IN-triggering).

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the
destination digits are evaluated.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal numberDEF
may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 1+
MOD INSCMREF
CODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 2+
MOD INSCMREF
CTORCSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CALL TYPE OR CSGRP
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a call type or
a common service group.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 3+
MOD INSCMREF
CXGACODE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
IN SCM REF. FOR CENTREX GROUP AND CODE
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a CENTREX group and code.
Incompatibilities :
- Only INSCMs of type TDP3 can be assigned.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,CODE= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the digit combination (code).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 4+
MOD INSCMREF
CXGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR CENTREX GROUP
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a CENTREX group.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : CXGRP= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CXGRP CENTREX GROUP
This parameter specifies a number that identifies the CENTREX group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit decimal number
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 5+
MOD INSCMREF
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR PBX LINE
Replacement of the IN service class mark assigned to a PBX line.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the PBX line.
Incoming lines are lines coming to the switch from the PBX.
Outgoing lines are lines going from the switch to the PBX.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory if several OPMODE values are assigned
to the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 6+
MOD INSCMREF
SUBORPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR SUB OR PBX
Replacement of the IN service class mark assigned to a subscriber
or a PBX.
Incompatibilities :

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : [LAC=] ,DN= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the addressed
object.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 7+
MOD INSCMREF
TGNO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
7. Input format
IN SCM REFERENCE FOR TRUNK GROUP
Replacement of an IN service class mark assigned to a trunk group
(for trunk group based IN-triggering).

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD INSCMREF : TGNO= ,SCMID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SCMID SERVICE CLASS MARK IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the new INSCM
to be assigned.
Compatibilities:
- The INSCM must be of the same TYPE as the old INSCM.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INSCMREF- 8-
ACT INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command will be used for the activation of the service with the
feature Service Filtering for the specified Intelligent Network subscriber
which was deactivated by the operator before.
Prerequisites:
- The subscriber activated by the partner Service Control Point has been
deactivated by the DACT INSLDAT command.
Notes:
- Generally the activation of the subscriber will be done by the Service
Control Point.
- At this activation the counter for valid votes will not be reset.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [VOTEDN=[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ ; [
[ ACT INSLDAT : SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [
[ [ [ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VOTEDN VOTE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number for which Service
Filtering has to be executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service for which
Service Filtering has to be executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INSLDAT- 1-
CAN INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command removes the service logic data that are necessary for the
feature Service Filtering of an Intelligent Network vote directory
number.
Prerequisites:
- The status of Service Filtering for the specified vote directory
number has to be inactive.
Notes:
- Generally Service Filtering will be deactivated by an administration
message from the partner Service Control Point. If it is not able to
send this message, the DACT INSLDAT command may be used.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [VOTEDN=[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ ; [
[ CAN INSLDAT : SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [
[ [ [ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VOTEDN VOTE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number for which Service
Filtering has to be executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service for which
Service Filtering has to be executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INSLDAT- 1-
DACT INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command deactivates the feature Service Filtering of an Intelligent
Network service subscriber. Generally Service Filtering will be deactivated
by an administration message from the partner Service Control Point or a timer.
If it is not able to send such a message, this command may be used. It can be
used in case of canceling an element, if the Service Control Point is not able
to do it.
Prerequisites:
- The status of Service Filtering for the specified subscriber identifier
has to be active.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [VOTEDN=[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ ; [
[ DACT INSLDAT : SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [
[ [ [ [[ [[ ! [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VOTEDN VOTE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number for which Service
Filtering has to be executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service for which
Service Filtering has to be executed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INSLDAT- 1-
DISP INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command displays data concerning specified or all Intelligent Network
numbers for the feature Service Filtering. In order to select a vote
directory number (possibly in connection with an origin)
also the protocol type has to be entered. Depending on the FORMAT
parameter specific data for the control of Service Filtering related to a
vote directory number, for the treatment of filtered calls, a SCP address
description or specific statistics (counter) will be displayed. A further
choice can be reached by means of the parameters STATUS, SKEY and
MODE to select all active or inactive Service Filtering entities, all
entities related to a service or all entities related to a control mode,
respectively.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ [
[ DISP INSLDAT : <VOTEDN= ,SKEY=> [,LOCNO= [ [,PROT=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,FORMAT=] [,STATUS=] [,MODE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VOTEDN VOTE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number for which Service
Filtering has to be executed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service for which
Service Filtering entities have to be displayed:
Notice:
- If SKEY and VOTEDN are entered all Service Filtering entities
with the specified SKEY and VOTEDN will be displayed.
- If the SKEY is entered without the VOTEDN, only these Service
Filtering entities will be displayed, which have the specified
SKEY as filter criteria.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party
in case of origin dependent counting.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSLDAT- 1+
DISP INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number
in case of origin dependent counting.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent
Network application protocol the service execution is
based on.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
CS2 CS2 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION FOR DISPLAY
This parameter specifies the kind of data which has to be displayed
for an Intelligent Network service subscriber on the own exchange:
- PA has to be used for the selection of control data for the
specified directory number.
- CT has to be used for the selection of information about the
treatment of filtered calls.
- AD has to be used for the selection of an address description
of the partner Service Control Point.
- ST has to be used for the selection of directory number
specific statistic data (counter).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PA DISPLAY CONTROL PARAMETER
CT DISPLAY CALL TREATMENT
AD ADDRESS DESCRIPTION
ST STATUS OF COUNTER
Default: PA
STATUS STATUS OF SUBSCRIBER
This parameter specifies the state of the Service Filtering entities
which are selected to display. Omitting this parameter the active
and inactive entities are displayed. If a vote directory number is
specified, the STATUS parameter should be omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INACT INACTIVE SUBSCRIBER
ACT ACTIVE SUBSCRIBER
MODE CONTROL MODE
This parameter specifies the mode of Service Filtering control
to be selected for the display.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UP UPDATE CONTROLLED
TI TIME CONTROLLED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INSLDAT- 2-
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTR INTELL.NETWORK SERVICE LOGIC DATA
This command will be used for the regeneration of Service Filtering
feature data for Intelligent Network subscriber. The execution of
this command includes the activation of the feature Service Filtering
for this subscriber. All counters assigned to the subscriber entities
(the subscriber with VOTEDN and all with SELCODES entered
consecutive numbered directory numbers). In case of expired TERDATE
and TERTIME, the subscriber will be canceled.
Entering this command not for the purpose of data regeneration but for
the creation, modification or cancelation purpose, a conflict for the
partner Service Control Point could be caused.
Prerequisites:
1. General:
- There must be created a trigger profile for the SKEY by the command
CR INTRIG.
- The Service Filtering subscribers and all consecutive numbers
must belong to the same by CR CPT created Code Point.
The Code Points which are relevant for Service Filtering subscribers
may not contain the optional parameters LAC, MFCAT, ZDIG or
ROUTYP.
2. In case of a CCNC configuration:
Notes:
- The specified data correspond to the data sent by the Service Control
Point.
- If MODE = TI, all counters are sent to the Service Control Point
in case of modification or cancellation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [[,CLGPTY=[[ [
[ ENTR INSLDAT : [VOTEDN=] ,SKEY= [,LOCNO= [ [,CHARIND=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ,TREAT= [,PROT=] [,ACNSEL=] [,SELCODES=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [,PRECVAL=[ [
[ [,SCLENGTH=] [,MODE=] ,INTERV= [,BEGDATE= [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ ,BEGTIME=] [,CODURA=] [,TERDATE= ,TERTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,RELCA=] [,DURA=] [,ANNCYC=] [,RTGP=] [
[ [
[ [
[ [,NETIND= [ [
[ ,NETNAME= [,TTID= ,NA= ,NP= ,GTDIG=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,DPC=] [,SSID=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 1+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
VOTEDN VOTE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number for which Service
Filtering has to be executed.
Notes:
- If PROT = SINAP1 this parameter does not contain the
selection code digits. Otherwise the directory number contains
the first selection code.
- The last two digits have to be entered as decimal
numbers
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service
to be installed on the home exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CLGPTY CALLING PARTY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the calling party
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LOCNO LOCATION NUMBER
This parameter specifies the location number
in case of origin dependent counting.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CHARIND CHARGE INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the kind of charging for calls to all IN
numbers, assigned to this subscriber.
A not entered parameter will be interpreted as invalid charging
indicator.
Note:
- Up to two parameter values can be linked with &.
The parameter values PLSATT and PLSSUP can be
entered together.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INDICATOR
NOCHAR NOT TO BE CHARGED
ZONE CHARGED BY ZONE
NOACTR NO SPECIFIC ACTION REQUIRED
PLSATT PULSE CALL ATTEMPT TARIFF
Compatibilities:
- PLSSUP
PLSSUP PULSE SET-UP TARIFF AT ANSWER
Compatibilities:
- PLSATT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 2+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: ZONE NUMBER / TARIFF=
0...511, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
- If CHARIND = ZONE, PLSATT or PLSSUP this parameter value
is mandatory.
TREAT CALL TREATMENT
This parameter specifies the intercept code to confirm a counted call
for a valid selection code while executing Service Filtering.
Compatibilities:
- For TONE identifier the b is of range (1..31).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TONE/ANNOUNCEMENT IDENTIFICATION
TONE SCP TONE
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1
ANN SCP ANNOUNCEMENT
b: ADDITIONAL NUMERIC VALUE=
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent
Network application protocol the service execution is
based on.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
CS2 CS2 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
Default: CS1
ACNSEL APPLIC. CONTEXT NAME SELECTOR
ACNSEL=3 : SINAP5M
ACNSEL=5 : SINAP5M+
ACNSEL=6 : SINAP5M++
ACNSEL=7 : 163TR78
ACNSEL=8 : TINAP2001
ACNSEL=10: CAP Version 1
ACNSEL=11: CAP Version 2
ACNSEL=12: CAP Version 3
ACNSEL=13: CAP Version 3 SMS-MO
ACNSEL=14: SINAP7M
ACNSEL=15: SINAP7M+
ACNSEL=20: SINAP6NP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...31, range of decimal numbers
SELCODES LIMIT OF SELECTION CODES
This parameter specifies the number of selection codes that will be
created for the subscriber.
Compatibilities:
- Only in case of whitebook SCCP 100 selection codes will be
supported. If bluebook SCCP is used in the network, the number
of selection codes is limited to 30.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...100, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 3+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 1
SCLENGTH SELECTION CODE LENGTH
This parameter specifies the number of digits, specifying the
selection codes for a service filtering entity.
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2, range of decimal numbers
MODE CONTROL MODE
This parameter specifies the mode of Service Filtering control
to be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UP UPDATE CONTROLLED
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TI TIME CONTROLLED
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
Default: TI
PRECVAL PRECOUNT VALUE
This parameter specifies the number of calls for valid selection codes
that have to be counted until a request to the partner Service Control
Point has to be initiated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
INTERV PRECOUNT INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the time interval in seconds during which the
calls with valid selection code have to be counted. After expiration
a request to the partner Service Control Point has to be initiated.
Incompatibilities:
- If PROT = SINAP1 this parameter is not allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3600, range of decimal numbers
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
Default: current date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 4+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
Default: current time
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b[-c]
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
CODURA CONTROL DURATION
This parameter specifies the time (in seconds) service filtering
will be performed for this entity after the BEGDATE / BEGTIME.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI .
Incompatibilities:
- If no value was entered, the TERDATE and TERTIME has to be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...86400, range of decimal numbers
TERDATE TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the stop date of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
In this case either CODURA or this parameter has to be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TERTIME TERMINATING TIME
This parameter specifies the stop time of Service Filtering for
an entity.
Prerequisites:
- MODE = TI.
In this case either CODURA or this parameter has to be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 5+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b[-c]
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
RELCA RELEASE CAUSE
This parameter specifies the release cause, which will be used
to control the call release and intercept treatment.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LOCATION
USER USER
PRL PRIVATE NETWORK LOCAL USER
PUL PUBLIC NETWORK LOCAL USER
TRN TRANSIT NETWORK
PUR PUBLIC NETWORK REMOTE USER
PRR PRIVATE NETWORK REMOTE USER
INTN INTERNATIONAL NETWORK
IWP BEYOND AN INTERWORKING POINT
Default: PUL
b: CAUSE VALUE=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
Default: 31
DURA TONE/ANNOUNCEMENT DURATION
This parameter specifies the time limitation (in seconds) of the
entered tone or announcement.
Compatibilities:
- If the PROT = SINAP1 this parameter is mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
Default: 40
ANNCYC NUMBER OF ANNOUNCEMENT CYCLES
This parameter specifies the number of cycles of the entered
announcement . It is related to the announcement determined by the
TREAT parameter.
Compatibilities:
- If PROT = SINAP1 this parameter is mandatory.
Incompatibilities:
- TREAT = TONE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 6+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences for the
delivery of a Signalling Connection Control Part message
to the Service Control Point.
Incompatibilities:
- MODE = UP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SPC ROUTE BY SPC AND SSN
GT ROUTE BY GT
Default: SPC
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network of the
Service Switching Point.
Incompatibilities:
- MODE = UP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signalling network in which
the destination point is existing by its name. This parameter
is mandatory if the feature multiple networks is activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier
of the global title.
Incompatibilities:
- MODE = UP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title.
Incompatibilities:
- MODE = UP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 7+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title.
Incompatibilities:
- MODE = UP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title. The digits can
be input in a structured format.
Incompatibilities:
- MODE = UP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 8+
ENTR INSLDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the service
specific application part on the partner Service Control Point.
Incompatibilities:
- MODE = UP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IN2 IN APPLICATION 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION 4
If a destination point code which specifies an
EWSD node is entered together with this subsystem
identifier then the LNP (local number portability)
server function on that EWSD node is addressed.
IN5 IN APPLICATION 5
If a destination point code which specifies the
own EWSD node is entered together with this
subsystem identifier then the internal SCF on the
own node is addressed.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSLDAT- 9-
END INSTALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
END INSTALLATION RECOVERY
This command terminates the installation phase.
As a result of this command, normal handling of software faults via SW error
treatment and recovery action groups is possible.
Notes:
During the installation phase software faults cause a processor stop.
This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into service.
Input format

[ [
[ END INSTALL ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 END INSTALL- 1-
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD INTELLIGENT NETWORK STATISTIC
This command starts the recording of IN statistic measurement.
To store the data on disk a measurement file will be created and
the name of the file will be displayed at the OMT. A maximum of
2 commands can be entered.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ REC INSTAT : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data are output
every 15 minutes throughout the specified
measurement period.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first
be copied to a removable medium.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended, an
advisory is output to the OMT.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to day files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7 daily
files (MO...SU) are prepared and created before
the command is accepted.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data
are output. Time parameters are not permissible
for these measurements.
A day file is closed at the end of the day and a
new file for the next day is automatically created
on the disk, or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the
file for the same day of the week is
overwritten.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC INSTAT- 1+
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(day file or single measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output unit = MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in day files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates may be linked with &. In case of
linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command entry.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement time termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after command
entry.
- Throughout the specified recording period, the measurement data
are called down every 15 minutes and output on the relevant output
device.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in day files.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates the daily measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a begin date
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC INSTAT- 2+
REC INSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
(BEG).
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE OF BEGIN DATE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: HOUR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: MINUTE OF TERMINATION DATE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data are to be recorded.
Notes:
- Up to 6 weekdays (MO..SU) may be linked with &.
The categories of weekdays (NO, WO, HO) may be entered alone.
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with a
termination date (TER).
- If the value HO is selected all sundays, national holidays
and international holidays will be measured.
- The parameter values NO, HO and WO are not usable in
combination with other parameter values.
- Exception: Time parameter may not be specified for the data
output in daily files.
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
No input means measurement on all days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO EVERY DAY
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
HO HOLIDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC INSTAT- 3-
ENTR INSTGEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER INSTALLATION GENERATION
This command creates an initial installation generation as part of the
initial installation of an application program system (APS) in a
switching processor.
A differentiation must be made between initial installation of an APS and
re-installation of a previously active APS and the associated files. For
this purpose, commands UPD GEN, COPY GEN, TRANS SYFILE and ENTR GEN
as well as auxiliary commands such as MOD GEN, CAN GEN, ACT FIXPOINT
and DACT FIXPOINT can be used.
Another differentiation must be made between the initial installation of an
APS and database extension for this APS. Once the initial installation
procedure has been performed, database extension is possible. For this
purpose, the commands MOD DBSIZE and DISP DBSIZE are used.
For creating the initial installation generation, the system files read in
from tape/optical disk are combined to form a file generation. The name of
the generation to be created is taken from the Tasklib. File SY.SEMILIB
(semipermanent database) is extracted from the Tasklib. File SY.SIMP is
extracted from file SY.PSW.T098, provided the latter exists. All these
starting files (production system files) are delivered as non-generation
files by the manufacturer on tape/optical disk. Only in course of
ENTR INSTGEN they are assigned to the generation to be introduced. The
loadlibs are attached and connected and update is activated.
If no files or not all of the files required for creating the initial
installation are specified, the disk is searched for the missing production
system files. Only those files that conform to the conventions for system
files and, of these, only the first file found in each case are used.
A precondition for creating the initial installation generation is that
the complete production system files exist (at least one PSW Lib must exist)
and that they do not belong to different APSs.
The specified file name need not be in accordance with the name conventions
for EWSD system files; if required, the name of the file is automatically
changed to a file name that is in accordance with the EWSD conventions,
when the file is introduced in the initial installation generation.
The name of the initial installation generation is formed as follows:
|---------------|
| ff kk 00 00 |
|---------------|
The command is rejected if a generation exists already.
For information about the generation concept see the command description
for COPY GEN.
This command is only permitted when an exchange is first being put into service.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR INSTGEN : [LIB=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIB LIBRARY
This parameter specifies a library in the SSP LIB113D format. Only
TASKLIB, SEMILIB, LOADLIB.LA, LOADLIB.MA, LOADLIB.CA type files and
PSW libraries are accepted. The parameter can be used in the
continuation mode, i.e. several libraries can be specified one after
the other. If the library name is not a system file name, it will be
renamed.
This parameter is used to specify the system files that are to be
incorporated in the installation generation. The specified file must
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSTGEN- 1+
ENTR INSTGEN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
be without generation,i.e., it must be a production system file read
in from the production tape/optical disk. Accordingly, it is not
permissible to specify a CP-Semilib or Simp-Semilib; these are not
automatically created from the production Tasklib until the initial
installation generation is created. In continuation mode, some or
all production files can be specified one after the other.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR INSTGEN- 2-
CAN INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INTERNAL CELL
This command cancels an internal cell within the mobile services
switching center area (MSC area).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN INTCELL : LACOD= ,CI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single
base station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INTCELL- 1-
CR INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INTERNAL CELL
This command creates an internal cell within the mobile services
switching center area (MSC area).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CR INTCELL : LACOD= ,CI= ,BSCSPC= ,NETIND= ,RC= ,LMN= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,LCSCAP=] [,GAD=] [,ORIG2=] [,LOCNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single
base station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
BSCSPC BASE STATION CONTROLLER SPC
BSCSPC a: = 1..15
b: = 1..7
c: = 1..15
d: = 1..7
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTCELL- 1+
CR INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
RC RADIO CONTROLLER
This parameter specifies the type of the radio system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BSC GSM BASE STATION CONTROLLER
RNC UMTS RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER
LMN LOCATION MARK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the emergency center
to which emergency calls are routed.
If the Hex-digit F is used in the location mark number, this digit
will be replaced by the dialed digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LCSCAP LOCATION SERVICES CAPABILITY
This parameter specifies the type of location services (LCS)
which the radio network controller (RNC) supports. It only
applies if the radio controller is an RNC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NO LOCATION SERVICES
GEOGRAPH GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
SAI SERVICE AREA IDENTIFICATION
Default: NONE
GAD GEOGRAPHICAL AREA DESCRIPTION
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: LATITUDE=
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: LONGITUDE=
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: UNCERTAINTY CODE=
1...2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
The following values are allowed:
- 01...7F, range of hexadecimal numbers
ORIG2 ORIGINATING MARK 2
This parameter specifies the originating mark of a call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...252, range of decimal numbers
LOCNO LOCATION NUMB ORIG FOR IN APPL
This parameter specifies the geographic area for IN services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTCELL- 2-
DISP INTCELL
BSCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INTERNAL CELL
This command displays data of created internal cells of a mobile
services switching center area (MSC area).
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP INTCELL - BSCAREA BSC AREA DATA
2. DISP INTCELL - CELL CELL DATA
3. DISP INTCELL - LOCAREA LOCATION AREA DATA
4. DISP INTCELL - ORIGMARK ORIGIN CLASS DATA
1. Input format
BSC AREA DATA
This input format displays information of a specified BSC or RNC area.

[ [
[ DISP INTCELL : BSCSPC= ,NETIND= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
BSCSPC BASE STATION CONTROLLER SPC
BSCSPC a: = 1..15
b: = 1..7
c: = 1..15
d: = 1..7
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network type concerned.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INTCELL- 1+
DISP INTCELL
CELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CELL DATA
This input format displays information of a specified cell.

[ [
[ DISP INTCELL : LACOD= ,CI= [,DATAKD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single
base station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
DATAKD DATA KIND
This parameter specifies the kind of data to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GENRDATA GENERAL DATA
INDATA INTELLIGENT NETWORK DATA
LCSDATA LOCATION SERVICES DATA
Default: GENRDATA
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INTCELL- 2+
DISP INTCELL
LOCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LOCATION AREA DATA
This input format displays information of a specified location area
or all location area codes depending on value of LACOD.

[ [
[ DISP INTCELL : LACOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INTCELL- 3+
DISP INTCELL
ORIGMARK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
ORIGIN CLASS DATA
This input format displays cells assigned to mobile charging zones.

[ [
[ DISP INTCELL : ORIG2= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ORIG2 ORIGINATING MARK 2
This parameter specifies the originating mark of a call.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...252, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INTCELL- 4-
MOD INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY INTERNAL CELL
This command modifies assigned data of an internal cell.
Notes:
- Only one of the optional parameters may be entered at one time.
Exceptions are mentioned in the parameter description.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD INTCELL : LACOD= ,CI= <,NLACOD= ,NCI= ,NORIG2= ,NLOCNO= [
[ [
[ ,CLOCNO= ,NLCSCAP= ,NGAD= ,CGAD=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single
base station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
NLACOD NEW LOCATION AREA CODE
NLACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
NCI NEW CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the new geographical area in which a single
base station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
NORIG2 NEW ORIGINATING MARK 2
This parameter specifies the new originating mark of a call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...252, range of decimal numbers
NLOCNO NEW LOC NUMB ORIG FOR IN APPL
This parameter specifies the new geographic area for IN services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTCELL- 1+
MOD INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CLOCNO CAN LOC NUMB ORIG FOR IN APPL
This parameter specifies the existing geographic area for IN services
to be deleted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
NLCSCAP NEW LOCATION SERV. CAPABILITY
This parameter specifies the new type of location services (LCS) which
the radio network controller (RNC) supports. It only applies if the
radio controller is an RNC.
Compatibilities:
- If you enter NLCSCAP=SAI, the parameter NGAD can also be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NO LOCATION SERVICES
GEOGRAPH GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION
SAI SERVICE AREA IDENTIFICATION
Default: NONE
NGAD NEW GEOGR. AREA DESCRIPTION
This parameter specifies the new geographical area description.
Compatibilities:
- Can be entered with parameter a=SAI.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: LATITUDE=
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: LONGITUDE=
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: UNCERTAINTY CODE=
1...2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CGAD CANCEL GEOGR. AREA DESCRIPTION
This parameter specifies the existing geographical area description
to be deleted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: LATITUDE=
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: LONGITUDE=
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: UNCERTAINTY CODE=
1...2 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTCELL- 2-
REC INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD INTERNAL CELL
This command records the internal cell related data or the handover
traffic flow structure data depending on the entered STOP JOB.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The measurement can be stopped with DTYPE if the time
parameter values allow a continuation of the job.
- Only the measurement of internal cells is allowed.
- This command is only allowed for an MSC.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC INTCELL : UNIT= ,DTYPE= [,INTCELL=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [
[ [
[ [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first be
copied to tape.
Notes:
- Identifier a covers both MDD and MOD.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: FILETYPE
SINGLE SINGLE FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
DAILY DAILY FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to daily files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files (MO...SU) are prepared and created
before the command is accepted.
Time parameters are not permissible for these
measurements.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is automatically
created on disk or the existing file is replaced.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC INTCELL- 1+
REC INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file
for the same day of the week is overwritten.
CYCLIC CYCLIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full the newest
data will be lost.
This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily files, single or cyclic measurement files).
DTYPE DATATYPE
This parameter specifies the kind of data that is to be measured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTCREL INTERNAL CELL RELATED MEAS
HOTRFS HANDOVER TRAFFIC FLOW STRUCT
INTCELL INTERNAL CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the internal cell.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: LOCATION AREA CODE=
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the
location area code.
b: CELL IDENTIFICATION=
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the
cell identification.
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception : time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily and cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates (in ascending order) may be linked
with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after entry.
- It is not permissible to enter the command after 23:45 hours with a
begin date on the following day.
- The first measurement may not begin later than one month after the
current date. Subsequent measurements may not begin later than one
year after the current date.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year of the begin
date.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC INTCELL- 2+
REC INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month of the begin
date.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day of the begin
date.
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must
be specified.
Exception: time parameters may not be specified for data output
in daily and cyclic files.
Default: the end of the measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year in which
recording is to terminate.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month in which
recording is to terminate.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day on which
recording is to terminate.
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a
begin date (BEG).
Incompatibilities:
- Intervals covering more than one day (e.g. 23-00-01-00).
- Intervals separated by a break of less than one hour.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC INTCELL- 3+
REC INTCELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval begins.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval begins.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval terminates.
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval terminates.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which
recording is to take place.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date (TER).
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC INTCELL- 4-
ACT INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command activates an already created Intelligent Network service.
Precondition for the use of this service is the creation of specific
code points by means of CR CPT, of specific zone points by means of
CR ZOPT, or of line triggers by the commands CR INSCM, CR INSCMREF
and ACT INSCMREF.
For the use of CAMEL profiles no other preconditions exist.
Prerequisites:
- A trigger profile for the specified profile identifier must exist.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT INTRIG : PRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile the
Intelligent Network service of which has to be activated on
the home exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT INTRIG- 1-
CAN INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command removes an Intelligent Network service.
Prerequisites:
- The service has to be in inactive status.
- For this trigger profile no related Service Filtering data administered
by a partner SCP or per MML by command ENTR INSLDAT must exist.
- No IN Service Class Marks administered by command CR INSCM and
referring to this trigger profile must exist.
- No specific code or zone points for this trigger profile must exist.
- The USSD COUNTER of this trigger profile must be zero.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN INTRIG : PRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile
to be removed from the home exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN INTRIG- 1-
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command creates a trigger profile which is used to install an
Intelligent Network (IN) service on an exchange.
Precondition for the use of this service is the creation of IN
specific code points by means of CR CPT, of specific zone points
by means of CR ZOPT or of line trunk group specific or office
based triggers by the commands CR INSCM, CR INSCMREF
and ACT INSCMREF.
For administration of CAMEL profiles no preconditions exists.
The service has to be activated by ACT INTRIG.
Prerequisites:
1. General:
- The intercept identifier values specified by the parameters DACTINC,
OVLINC and INVINC must have been created by the command CR INC.
- For a zone number specified by the parameter CHGINF a tariff has to be
entered by command ENTR TAR.
- No trigger table entry with CAMEL = YES and the same service key,
the same SCP address and the same CSITYPE must exist.
2. In the case of an CCNC configuration:
3. In the case of an SSNC configuration:
- Equivalent preconditions as mentioned for the CCNC configuration are valid.
These conditions cannot be checked by the system since they are
administrated by means of Q3 tasks instead of MML commands.
Compatibilities:
- The parameter OVLINC and INVINC may only be entered for protocol
type SINAP1.
- Only special property values (PROP24..PROP39) of parameter
GENPROP may be specified for SSFTYPE=ASST.
Incompatibilities:
- A global title must not be entered together with a DPC.
- For SSFTYPE=ASST the parameters SKEY, TRAT, INCAT, RELEASE,
CHGINF, CHGPROF, OVLINC, INVINC and EODRAN must not be entered.
- In case of parameter CAMEL = NO only USSDPRID = NONE is allowed.
- In case of parameter CAMEL = NO only CDPAPFX = NONE is allowed.
- In case of parameter CAMEL = NO no CSITYPE must be entered.
- No trigger table entry with CAMEL = YES and the same service key,
the same SCP address and the same CSITYPE must exist.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR INTRIG - GT PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
2. CR INTRIG - SPC PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
1. Input format
PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to create a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a global title and any combination of
a translator service group and a subsystem identifier.

[ [
[ [
[ [,NETIND= [ [
[ CR INTRIG : PRID= ,NETNAME= ,RTGP= ,TTID= [,NP= ,NA=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 1+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [
[ [
[ [[,GTDIG= [[ [
[ [,PREFIX=[ [,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ ,ORGTDIG=] [,PROT=] [,ACNSEL=] [,SSFTYPE=] [
[ [
[ [,SKEY=] [,CAMEL=] [,CSITYPE=] [,USSDPRID=] [
[ [
[ [,IPAVAIL=] [,IPSSPCA=] [,CDPAPFX=] [,CGAC=] [
[ [
[ [,TRLG=] [,SSID=] [,SSPGT=] [,TRAT=] [,INCAT=] [
[ [
[ [,GENPROP=] [,MOBPROP=] [,EODRAN=] [,IWRULE=] [
[ [
[ [,RELEASE=] [,CHGINF=] [,CHGPROF=] [,DACTINC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SSFTIMER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile for the
installation of an Intelligent Network service on the home exchange.
Since the service logic may be distributed on several Service Control
Points, for one service different trigger profiles may be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network of the SSP.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
This parameter is mandatory in a configuration with CCNC;
in a configuration with SSNC this parameter is only mandatory when
the feature "multiple networks" is not activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signaling network in which
the destination point is existing by its name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences for the
delivery of a SCCP message to the SCP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GT ROUTE BY GT
Default: SPC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 2+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the global
title.
If it was specified with INPPDD the parameter PREFIX has to
be entered instead of the parameter GTDIG. If it was specified
with INCGPA or INDD the parameters GTDIG, PREFIX, NP and
NA must not be entered. The corresponding values will be determined
from the calling party address or the called party address,
respectively.
For all other values of this parameter GTDIG, NP and NA must
be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
Incompatibilities:
- PREFIX, GTDIG, NP and NA.
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
Incompatibilities:
- PREFIX, GTDIG, NP and NA.
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
Compatibilities:
- PREFIX.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 3+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title. The digits can
be input in a structured format.
For IN triggering with CSI only 16 digits are evaluated.
For CAMEL profiles it is possible to enter the SCP address partly.
For example, only a few trigger profiles are necessary for roaming
subscribers if created this way.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be used to assemble a
global title dynamically together with the digit information of the
called party number. This means that the global title is composed of
the prefix digits and the address signals of the called party number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORTTID ORIG. TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
ORSSID ORIGINATOR SUBSYSTEM ID.
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the IN application
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 4+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ORNP ORIGINATOR NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
ORNA ORIGINATOR NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 5+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORGTDIG ORIG. GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title in the calling
party address of the SSP. The digits can be input in a structured
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent Network
application protocol the service execution is based on.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
CS2 CS2 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
Default: CS1
ACNSEL APPLIC. CONTEXT NAME SELECTOR
ACNSEL=3 : SINAP5M
ACNSEL=5 : SINAP5M+
ACNSEL=6 : SINAP5M++
ACNSEL=7 : 163TR78
ACNSEL=8 : TINAP2001
ACNSEL=10: CAP Version 1
ACNSEL=11: CAP Version 2
ACNSEL=12: CAP Version 3
ACNSEL=13: CAP Version 3 SMS-MO
ACNSEL=14: SINAP7M
ACNSEL=15: SINAP7M+
ACNSEL=20: SINAP6NP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...31, range of decimal numbers
SSFTYPE SERVICE SWITCHING FUNCT. TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Service Switching
Function for which the trigger profile was created. If an
IN trigger was detected the SSF can act as initiating
(normal) or assisting SSF.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ASST ASSISTING
BU2CUSF BEARER UNRELATED TO CUSF
BU2SSF BEARER UNRELATED TO SSF
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 6+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NORM NORMAL
Default: NORM
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service to be
installed on the home exchange. The same service key may occur in
different trigger profiles.
Notes:
The SKEY=0 is used as master key in case of Call Gap. So, if a
trigger profile is entered with SKEY=0 it is not possible to gap
service requests with this service key individually.
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8 if PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
CAMEL CAMEL TRIGGERING
This parameter indicates whether the profile
can be used for triggering with CSI.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO CSI-TRIGGERING
NO NO CSI-TRIGGERING
Y CSI-TRIGGERING POSSIBLE
YES CSI-TRIGGERING POSSIBLE
Default: NO
CSITYPE CSI TYPE
This parameter specifies for which kind of CSI
the trigger profile can be used. It is used
to distinguish between two CAMEL trigger profiles
with the same service key and SCP address.
Up to 5 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- ALLCSI must not be linked with another CSI.
- In case of default service key or default SCP
address only CSITYPE = ALLCSI is allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLCSI ALL CSI TYPES
DCSI DIALLED SERVICE CSI
OCSI ORIGINATING CSI
SMSCSI SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CSI
TCSI TERMINATING CSI
VTCSI VMSC TERMINATING CSI
Default: ALLCSI
USSDPRID USSD PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter points to another trigger table
element which must be used for USSD calltype.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Input NONE for USSDPRID means no USSDPRID.
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 7+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IPAVAIL IP AVAILABLE
This parameter indicates whether Intelligent
Peripherie (IP) capabilities are available and
are to be transfered to the SCP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
NO NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Y IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
YES IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Default: NO
IPSSPCA IPSSP CAPABILITIES
This parameter indicates the IP capabilities of the SSP.
Up to 7 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GENVA GEN. OF VOICE ANN. FROM TEXT
Generation of voice announcements from text
is supported.
IPRAD IP ROUTING ADDRESS SUPPORTED
IP Routing Address is supported.
RES1 RESERVED1
Reserved for future enhancements 1.
RES2 RESERVED2
Reserved for future enhancements 2.
VOICEBA VOICEBACK SUPPORTED
VoiceBack is supported.
VOICESPR VOICE INF. WITH SPEECH RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via speech
recognition.
VOICEVR VOICE INF. WITH VOICE RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via voice
recognition.
CDPAPFX CALLED PARTY ADDRESS PREFIX
This parameter specifies the digits to be
prefixed to the called party address before
the address is sent to SCP or used
for re-routing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Input NONE for CDPAPFX means no CDPAPFX.
CGAC CALL GAP ACCEPTANCE
This parameter specifies whether an operation call gap
from the SCP is accepted or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCG ACCEPT OPERATION CALL GAP
ACSCFID ACCEPT CG WITH SCFID ONLY
CGRES CALL GAP RESERVED
Reserved for future enhancements.
IGNCG IGNORE OPERATION CALL GAP
Default: ACCG
TRLG TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a translator service group which performs
the global title translation if the translation is not executed in
the SSP.
Prerequisites:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 8+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- In the case of a CCNC configuration the translator service group
must have been created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFIER
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
INMP1 IN APPLICATION 1 ON MP
If a destination point code which specifies a
node containing a SSNC-based Number Portability
Server is entered together with this subsystem
identifier then the LNP (local number portability)
server function on that node (Stand-alone STP or
with EWSD as host) is addressed.
INMP2 IN APPLICATION 2 ON MP
INMP3 IN APPLICATION 3 ON MP
INMP4 IN APPLICATION 4 ON MP
INMP5 IN APPLICATION 5 ON MP
IN2 IN APPLICATION 2
Used for CAP protocols.
IN3 IN APPLICATION 3
Used for national INAP protocols.
IN4 IN APPLICATION 4
Used for number portability.
IN5 IN APPLICATION 5
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TV TELEVOTING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UPT UNIV PERSONAL TELECOMMUNICAT
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
SSPGT SSP GT REQUIRED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 9+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
NO SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
Y SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
YES SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
Default: NO
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies a traffic type assigned to the Intelligent
Network service in the trigger profile. The traffic type is
evaluated after detection of an IN trigger.
Default: NOBLOCK.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCAT IN CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories for the digit translation.
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
GENPROP GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to
the Intelligent Network service execution.
Up to 40 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADPBIN ABBREV. DIALLING PROC. BY IN
[CLIREQ [ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[CONINH [ CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
[DPINH [ DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
[ [ The activation of internal detection points is
[ [ not allowed for the current service key. This
[ [ property is only relevant for the execution of
[ [ special services, e.g. international calls.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 10+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ENACPH [ ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
[EODREQ [ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
[FTALLOW [ FEATURE TRANSPARENCY ALLOWED
[FTRINH [ FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
[ [ Notes:
[ [ - For the protocol type SINAP1 this value
[ [ is set automatically.
[MCIHLD [ MCI HOLD REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MCIPRE [ MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MHNCLI [ MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ONLCHG [ ONLINE CHARGING
[PASSBA [ PASS B PTY CHARGE MSG TO A PTY
[PCNCHG [ PER CONNECTION CHARGING
[PROP18 [ PROPERTY 18
[ [ PPS Indication. It is evaluated to realize the
[ [ follwowing functionality:
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile indicates a PPS.
[ [ FALSE: In case of interworking between PPS and
[ [ CFNRc (detected after 2nd HLR
[ [ interrogation)
[ [ the T-CSI dialogue will be terminated.
[PROP19 [ PROPERTY 19
[ [ Changing from T-BCSM to O-BCSM
[ [ TRUE: Changing the BCSM is allowed.
[ [ FALSE: Changing the BCSM is not allowed.
[PROP20 [ PROPERTY 20
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile TDP12-
[ [ related profile. PROP20 is necessary to
[ [ distinguish between "Basic IN Services" and "IN
[ [ User subscribt Services" because both are triggert
[ [ via digit analysis.
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribed IN-MTC service, i.e. TDP12 is
[ [ send in the OP:IDP to the SCP (mapping of
[ [ TDP3 to TDP12).
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP21 [ PROPERTY 21
[ [ Cross phase compatibility between MAP- and CAP-
[ [ interface
[ [ TRUE: The protocol version is determined
[ [ according to the CAMEL phase supported on
[ [ the MAP interface.
[ [ FALSE: the protocol version is determined by the
[ [ ACN selector (parameter ACNSEL).
[PROP22 [ PROPERTY 22
[ [ Fall Back to Basic SMS MO
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile is used for SMS MO
[ [ and MOC.
[ [ FALSE: The trigger profile used for MOC only.
[PROP23 [ PROPERTY 23
[ [
[ [ Usage of CdPA or SMSC-address in Op:I_DP for SMS
[ [ MO
[ [ TRUE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMSC-
[ [ address as Called Party Address.
[ [ FALSE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMS
[ [ receiver address as Called Party Address.
[ [ (This property to be used with only if
[ [ PROP22 together)
[PROP24 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 24
[ [ Control of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: Tickets should not be generated.
[ [ FALSE: Tickets should be generated.
[PROP25 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 25
[ [ Prefixing of CdPA with CAC digits
[ [ TRUE: The digits received from A-side GP shall be
[ [ Prefixed with the received CAC (if any) and
[ [ the appropiate prefix for CAC dialing
[ [ FALSE: The digits received from A-side GP are send
[ [ unchanged in the C:IN_DATA to the BSSAP
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 11+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[PROP26 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 26
[ [ Using of default zoning
[ [ TRUE: The ZONDA is called with the received
[ [ Digits to determine the charging zone or a
[ [ No charge indication (but not to overwrite
[ [ The AMA parameter)
[ [ False: The default zone from trigger profile
[ [ Is set in the CPB as local zoning result or
[ [ Chargefree indication is evaluated.
[PROP27 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 27
[ [
[ [ Interworking IN/CAMEL with CF
[ [ True: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Allowed.
[ [ False: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Not allowed.
[ [ The network provider can support the interworking
[ [ of CF with IN MOC service by setting General
[ [ Property 27 in the trigger profile of the IN MOC
[ [ service.
[PROP28 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 28
[ [ Fallback from CAP Ph3, CAP PH2 to CAP Ph1
[ [ TRUE: The AC negotioation on the CAP interface is
[ [ supported.
[ [ FALSE: AC negotiation on the CAP interface is not
[ [ possible.
[PROP29 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 29
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile as TDP2-
[ [ related profile
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribt IN-MOC service, i.e TDP2 is send
[ [ in the OP:IDP to the SCP
[ [ FALSE: else
[ [ PROP29 is necessary for Overlay networks as it is
[ [ not possible to distinguish between "Basic IN-
[ [ Services" and "IN User Subscribed Services".
[PROP30 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 30
[ [ GSM-BC or ISDN-BC in Op:I_DP
[ [ TRUE: The ISUP Bearer Capability (BC) is used in
[ [ Op:Initial_DP.
[ [ FALSE: The GSM BC is used.
[PROP31 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 31
[ [ Ticket control by suppression of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: The SCP is allowed to suppress ticket
[ [ generation by sending "SuppressCITicket" in
[ [ The OP:SendChargingInfo
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP32 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 32
[ [ CAMEL Overlay. Possibility to to administrate a
[ [ prefix with MML CR INTRIG parameter CDAPRFX.
[ [ TRUE: (and CDPAPFX not empty) IN handling is
[ [ stopped, CAMEL relevant data is reset and a
[ [ digit anlaysis with the prefixed Called
[ [ Party Number is started
[ [ FALSE: Continiue normal IN handling
[PROP33 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 33
[ [ Mapping of Calling Party Number
[ [ True: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Calling Party Number ISUP o/g
[ [ IAM (only valid for ISUP-LTG)
[ [ False: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Generic Number (additional
[ [ Calling number) in ISUP o/g IAM
[PROP34 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 34
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ (see PROP35)
[PROP35 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 35
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 False: If CAC is dialed
[ [ Call is released
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 False: CAC will be ignored
[ [ For routing
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 True: Call will be
[ [ Rerouted via
[ [ Carrier network
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 True: PROP35 has priority
[PROP36 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 36
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 12+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ Suppression of DAS Announcement for PNS and
[ [ SNP/NTS
[ [ TRUE: PNS or SNP/NTS is active
[ [ FALSE: PNS or SNP/NTS is not active
[PROP37 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 37
[ [ Supply of Location Number
[ [ True: Supply the Location Number from ATD
[ [ False: Supply the Location Number from VLR number
[PROP38 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 38
[ [ Other Party Long_Number in MOC Record
[ [ True: Write "rerouted number" (from SCP) as other
[ [ party long number in MOC Record
[ [ False: Write "dialled number" as other party long
[ [ number in MOC Record
[PROP39 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 39
[RCNCLI [ REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
[ [ Prerequisites:
[ [ - The intercept identifier INANIF must have
[ [ been created by the command CR INC.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[SFINH [ SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
!UINCAT - USE IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- INCAT must be specified.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
MOBPROP MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the mobile specific properties
related to the Intelligent Network service execution.
It is divided into common properties (0-23) and
project properties (24-31).
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFCPPPS CHARGE FREE CALL PHASE FOR PPS
This property is intended Prepaid
Services (PPS). Setting of this property will
inform the SCP, that the actual call phase has
lasted 0 seconds. This means that the call phase
in question is held free of charge.
This behaviour is available for SINAP and CAP
protocol.
TRUE - Actual call phase is held free of charge
FALSE - Actual call phase is not held free of charg
DEFCOMZO DEFAULT COMMON ZONING
If this property is set, zoning with
new digits from SCP is performed for
CAP protocol.
ENHACAP3 ENHANCED TDP3 HANDL. FOR CAP3
Allow ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM. The Camel Ph3 standard
3GPP 23.078 does not allow the operations
ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM for IN-dialogues triggered via
a D-CSI or N-CSI (TriggerDetectionPoint TDP3).
I.e. after reception of a Connect or a Continue
or ContinueWithArgument operation from the
SCP, D-CSI or N-CSI dialogue has to be closed.
Our SSP shall allow the usage of the above
mentioned operations also on a D-CSI or N-CSI
dialogue. Whether these operations are allowed or
not, shall be controllable with this Trigger
Profile Property. This property is checked
only if the CAP Ph3 protocol is used in case of
D-CSI or N-CSI triggered IN dialogues.
TRUE - allow operations
FALSE - inhibit operations
INPASS IN PARALLEL TO MOC ASSIGNMENT
If this property is set, the channel
assignment for MOC and IN-Dialogue are set up in
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 13+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
parallel.
MPROP08 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 8
MPROP09 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 9
MPROP10 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 10
MPROP11 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 11
MPROP12 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 12
MPROP13 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 13
MPROP14 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 14
MPROP15 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 15
MPROP16 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 16
MPROP17 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 17
MPROP18 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 18
MPROP19 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 19
MPROP20 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 20
MPROP21 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 21
MPROP22 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 22
MPROP23 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 23
NOEXTPAR NO EXT PARAM SENT BY SSP
If this property is set, the SSP sends
INAP-operations without Extension Parameters.
Notes:
- This property has no influence on Extension
Parameters sent by the SCP.
- If this property is not set, SCCP segmentation
has to be switched on.
PPROP00 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 0
SDDPFC Interworking, supply LOCNO from SCP-Address
in case of MOC:
True: Copy SCP-Address of SDDPFC Interface.
False: Dont copy.
PPROP01 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 1
PPROP02 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 2
PPROP03 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 3
PPROP04 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 4
PPROP05 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 5
PPROP06 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 6
PPROP07 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 7
SCPNSMSC SEND CLD PTY NO AND SMSC ADDR
The SSP provides the SMS Service Center Address
and Called Party Address for SMS MO Trigger
Feature with CAP Phase 1 to the SCP.
GENPROP = PROP23 determines, which parameters
are used to transmit the addresses.
SUPACMSG SUPPRESS ANSWER/CONNECT MSG
If this property is set, any ANSWER/CONNECT
message for that call section to Calling Party
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
SUPCHART SUPPRESS CHARGING TICKET
If this property is set, MOC/CF Charging Ticket
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
EODRAN END OF DIALLING RANGE
This parameter specifies a minimal number of dialled digits
and a maximal number of dialled digits to have a general
end of dialling condition.
This parameter is evaluated only if GENPROP=EODREQ is set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MIN=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 14+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MAX=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 28
IWRULE INTERWORKING RULE
This parameter is used to control the interworking of IN
with basic network features. The first unit addresses the set
of default values for the Service Interaction Indicator (SII)
to be applied if the SCP did not send any. The second unit
specifies the interaction level which is applied for the
control of the SIIs influence on this interworking
(project specific).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SERVICE INTERACTION INDICATOR INDEX=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: INTERACTION LEVEL=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
RELEASE RELEASE REQUIRED INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a value to decide whether an Intelligent
Network call has to be released in the case that a protocol
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
NO RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
YES RELEASE REQUIRED
Default: YES
CHGINF DEFAULT CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the charging information in case no
information about how to charge an Intelligent Network call
was sent by the partner SCP.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INFORMATION
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
NOINTV NO INTERVENTION BY IN
REJECT REJECT THE CALL
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
Default: NOINTV
b: ZONE NUMBER=
0...511, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
- ZONE is entered for the first unit.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 15+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CHGPROF CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies the charging profile that is applied
when an IN service request was detected with an originating
line trigger.
The charging profile determines the billing registration
method and - in the case of metering - the subscriber charge
counters CNTR1 .. CNTR5.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
No billing registration.
PROF1 PROFILE 1
Automatic Message Accounting.
PROF10 PROFILE 10
Metering on charge counters 1&5.
PROF11 PROFILE 11
Metering on charge counters 2&3.
PROF12 PROFILE 12
Metering on charge counters 2&4.
PROF13 PROFILE 13
Metering on charge counters 2&5.
PROF14 PROFILE 14
Metering on charge counters 3&4.
PROF15 PROFILE 15
Metering on charge counters 3&5.
PROF16 PROFILE 16
Metering on charge counters 4&5.
PROF17 PROFILE 17
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3.
PROF18 PROFILE 18
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4.
PROF19 PROFILE 19
Metering on charge counters 1&2&5.
PROF2 PROFILE 2
Metering on charge counter 1.
PROF20 PROFILE 20
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4.
PROF21 PROFILE 21
Metering on charge counters 1&3&5.
PROF22 PROFILE 22
Metering on charge counters 1&4&5.
PROF23 PROFILE 23
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4.
PROF24 PROFILE 24
Metering on charge counters 2&3&5.
PROF25 PROFILE 25
Metering on charge counters 2&4&5.
PROF26 PROFILE 26
Metering on charge counters 3&4&5.
PROF27 PROFILE 27
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4.
PROF28 PROFILE 28
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&5.
PROF29 PROFILE 29
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4&5.
PROF3 PROFILE 3
Metering on charge counter 2.
PROF30 PROFILE 30
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4&5.
PROF31 PROFILE 31
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4&5.
PROF32 PROFILE 32
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4&5.
PROF4 PROFILE 4
Metering on charge counter 3.
PROF5 PROFILE 5
Metering on charge counter 4.
PROF6 PROFILE 6
Metering on charge counter 5.
PROF7 PROFILE 7
Metering on charge counters 1&2.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 16+
CR INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF8 PROFILE 8
Metering on charge counters 1&3.
PROF9 PROFILE 9
Metering on charge counters 1&4.
DACTINC DEACTIV. SERV. INTERCEPT ID.
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected in case the
Intelligent Network service is in status inactive.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
Default: SNA0
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
This parameter specifies the time, in which the answer
from SCP/SCF is expected in steps of 100ms.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
Default: 100
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 17+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to create a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a destination point code and a
subsystem identifier.

[ [
[ [
[ [,NETIND= [ [
[ CR INTRIG : PRID= ,NETNAME= [,RTGP=] ,SSID= ,DPC= [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,ORTTID= ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG=] [
[ [
[ [,PROT=] [,ACNSEL=] [,SSFTYPE=] [,SKEY=] [
[ [
[ [,IPAVAIL=] [,IPSSPCA=] [,CGAC=] [,SSPGT=] [
[ [
[ [,TRAT=] [,INCAT=] [,GENPROP=] [,MOBPROP=] [
[ [
[ [,EODRAN=] [,IWRULE=] [,RELEASE=] [,CHGINF=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,CHGPROF=] [,DACTINC=] [,SSFTIMER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile for the
installation of an Intelligent Network service on the home exchange.
Since the service logic may be distributed on several Service Control
Points, for one service different trigger profiles may be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network of the SSP.
The value corresponding to this indicator is used in the network
indicator field of the message signalling units sent between two
exchanges.
This parameter is mandatory in a configuration with CCNC;
in a configuration with SSNC this parameter is only mandatory when
the feature "multiple networks" is not activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signaling network in which
the destination point is existing by its name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences for the
delivery of a SCCP message to the SCP.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 18+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SPC ROUTE BY SPC AND SSN
Default: SPC
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFIER
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
INMP1 IN APPLICATION 1 ON MP
If a destination point code which specifies a
node containing a SSNC-based Number Portability
Server is entered together with this subsystem
identifier then the LNP (local number portability)
server function on that node (Stand-alone STP or
with EWSD as host) is addressed.
INMP2 IN APPLICATION 2 ON MP
INMP3 IN APPLICATION 3 ON MP
INMP4 IN APPLICATION 4 ON MP
INMP5 IN APPLICATION 5 ON MP
IN2 IN APPLICATION 2
Used for CAP protocols.
IN3 IN APPLICATION 3
Used for national INAP protocols.
IN4 IN APPLICATION 4
Used for number portability.
IN5 IN APPLICATION 5
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TV TELEVOTING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UPT UNIV PERSONAL TELECOMMUNICAT
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 19+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
ORTTID ORIG. TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
ORSSID ORIGINATOR SUBSYSTEM ID.
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the IN application
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ORNP ORIGINATOR NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 20+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
ORNA ORIGINATOR NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title
of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
ORGTDIG ORIG. GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title in the calling
party address of the SSP. The digits can be input in a structured
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 21+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent Network
application protocol the service execution is based on.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
CS2 CS2 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
Default: CS1
ACNSEL APPLIC. CONTEXT NAME SELECTOR
ACNSEL=3 : SINAP5M
ACNSEL=5 : SINAP5M+
ACNSEL=6 : SINAP5M++
ACNSEL=7 : 163TR78
ACNSEL=8 : TINAP2001
ACNSEL=10: CAP Version 1
ACNSEL=11: CAP Version 2
ACNSEL=12: CAP Version 3
ACNSEL=13: CAP Version 3 SMS-MO
ACNSEL=14: SINAP7M
ACNSEL=15: SINAP7M+
ACNSEL=20: SINAP6NP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...31, range of decimal numbers
SSFTYPE SERVICE SWITCHING FUNCT. TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Service Switching
Function for which the trigger profile was created. If an
IN trigger was detected the SSF can act as initiating
(normal) or assisting SSF.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ASST ASSISTING
BU2CUSF BEARER UNRELATED TO CUSF
BU2SSF BEARER UNRELATED TO SSF
NORM NORMAL
Default: NORM
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service to be
installed on the home exchange. The same service key may occur in
different trigger profiles.
Notes:
The SKEY=0 is used as master key in case of Call Gap. So, if a
trigger profile is entered with SKEY=0 it is not possible to gap
service requests with this service key individually.
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8 if PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
IPAVAIL IP AVAILABLE
This parameter indicates whether Intelligent
Peripherie (IP) capabilities are available and
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 22+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
are to be transfered to the SCP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
NO NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Y IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
YES IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Default: NO
IPSSPCA IPSSP CAPABILITIES
This parameter indicates the IP capabilities of the SSP.
Up to 7 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GENVA GEN. OF VOICE ANN. FROM TEXT
Generation of voice announcements from text
is supported.
IPRAD IP ROUTING ADDRESS SUPPORTED
IP Routing Address is supported.
RES1 RESERVED1
Reserved for future enhancements 1.
RES2 RESERVED2
Reserved for future enhancements 2.
VOICEBA VOICEBACK SUPPORTED
VoiceBack is supported.
VOICESPR VOICE INF. WITH SPEECH RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via speech
recognition.
VOICEVR VOICE INF. WITH VOICE RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via voice
recognition.
CGAC CALL GAP ACCEPTANCE
This parameter specifies whether an operation call gap
from the SCP is accepted or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCG ACCEPT OPERATION CALL GAP
ACSCFID ACCEPT CG WITH SCFID ONLY
CGRES CALL GAP RESERVED
Reserved for future enhancements.
IGNCG IGNORE OPERATION CALL GAP
Default: ACCG
SSPGT SSP GT REQUIRED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
NO SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
Y SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
YES SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
Default: NO
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies a traffic type assigned to the Intelligent
Network service in the trigger profile. The traffic type is
evaluated after detection of an IN trigger.
Default: NOBLOCK.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 23+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INCAT IN CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories for the digit translation.
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
GENPROP GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to
the Intelligent Network service execution.
Up to 40 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADPBIN ABBREV. DIALLING PROC. BY IN
[CLIREQ [ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[CONINH [ CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
[DPINH [ DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
[ [ The activation of internal detection points is
[ [ not allowed for the current service key. This
[ [ property is only relevant for the execution of
[ [ special services, e.g. international calls.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ENACPH [ ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
[EODREQ [ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
[FTALLOW [ FEATURE TRANSPARENCY ALLOWED
[FTRINH [ FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
[ [ Notes:
[ [ - For the protocol type SINAP1 this value
[ [ is set automatically.
[MCIHLD [ MCI HOLD REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MCIPRE [ MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MHNCLI [ MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ONLCHG [ ONLINE CHARGING
[PASSBA [ PASS B PTY CHARGE MSG TO A PTY
[PCNCHG [ PER CONNECTION CHARGING
[PROP18 [ PROPERTY 18
[ [ PPS Indication. It is evaluated to realize the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 24+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ follwowing functionality:
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile indicates a PPS.
[ [ FALSE: In case of interworking between PPS and
[ [ CFNRc (detected after 2nd HLR
[ [ interrogation)
[ [ the T-CSI dialogue will be terminated.
[PROP19 [ PROPERTY 19
[ [ Changing from T-BCSM to O-BCSM
[ [ TRUE: Changing the BCSM is allowed.
[ [ FALSE: Changing the BCSM is not allowed.
[PROP20 [ PROPERTY 20
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile TDP12-
[ [ related profile. PROP20 is necessary to
[ [ distinguish between "Basic IN Services" and "IN
[ [ User subscribt Services" because both are triggert
[ [ via digit analysis.
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribed IN-MTC service, i.e. TDP12 is
[ [ send in the OP:IDP to the SCP (mapping of
[ [ TDP3 to TDP12).
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP21 [ PROPERTY 21
[ [ Cross phase compatibility between MAP- and CAP-
[ [ interface
[ [ TRUE: The protocol version is determined
[ [ according to the CAMEL phase supported on
[ [ the MAP interface.
[ [ FALSE: the protocol version is determined by the
[ [ ACN selector (parameter ACNSEL).
[PROP22 [ PROPERTY 22
[ [ Fall Back to Basic SMS MO
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile is used for SMS MO
[ [ and MOC.
[ [ FALSE: The trigger profile used for MOC only.
[PROP23 [ PROPERTY 23
[ [
[ [ Usage of CdPA or SMSC-address in Op:I_DP for SMS
[ [ MO
[ [ TRUE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMSC-
[ [ address as Called Party Address.
[ [ FALSE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMS
[ [ receiver address as Called Party Address.
[ [ (This property to be used with only if
[ [ PROP22 together)
[PROP24 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 24
[ [ Control of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: Tickets should not be generated.
[ [ FALSE: Tickets should be generated.
[PROP25 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 25
[ [ Prefixing of CdPA with CAC digits
[ [ TRUE: The digits received from A-side GP shall be
[ [ Prefixed with the received CAC (if any) and
[ [ the appropiate prefix for CAC dialing
[ [ FALSE: The digits received from A-side GP are send
[ [ unchanged in the C:IN_DATA to the BSSAP
[PROP26 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 26
[ [ Using of default zoning
[ [ TRUE: The ZONDA is called with the received
[ [ Digits to determine the charging zone or a
[ [ No charge indication (but not to overwrite
[ [ The AMA parameter)
[ [ False: The default zone from trigger profile
[ [ Is set in the CPB as local zoning result or
[ [ Chargefree indication is evaluated.
[PROP27 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 27
[ [
[ [ Interworking IN/CAMEL with CF
[ [ True: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Allowed.
[ [ False: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Not allowed.
[ [ The network provider can support the interworking
[ [ of CF with IN MOC service by setting General
[ [ Property 27 in the trigger profile of the IN MOC
[ [ service.
[PROP28 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 28
[ [ Fallback from CAP Ph3, CAP PH2 to CAP Ph1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 25+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ TRUE: The AC negotioation on the CAP interface is
[ [ supported.
[ [ FALSE: AC negotiation on the CAP interface is not
[ [ possible.
[PROP29 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 29
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile as TDP2-
[ [ related profile
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribt IN-MOC service, i.e TDP2 is send
[ [ in the OP:IDP to the SCP
[ [ FALSE: else
[ [ PROP29 is necessary for Overlay networks as it is
[ [ not possible to distinguish between "Basic IN-
[ [ Services" and "IN User Subscribed Services".
[PROP30 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 30
[ [ GSM-BC or ISDN-BC in Op:I_DP
[ [ TRUE: The ISUP Bearer Capability (BC) is used in
[ [ Op:Initial_DP.
[ [ FALSE: The GSM BC is used.
[PROP31 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 31
[ [ Ticket control by suppression of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: The SCP is allowed to suppress ticket
[ [ generation by sending "SuppressCITicket" in
[ [ The OP:SendChargingInfo
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP32 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 32
[ [ CAMEL Overlay. Possibility to to administrate a
[ [ prefix with MML CR INTRIG parameter CDAPRFX.
[ [ TRUE: (and CDPAPFX not empty) IN handling is
[ [ stopped, CAMEL relevant data is reset and a
[ [ digit anlaysis with the prefixed Called
[ [ Party Number is started
[ [ FALSE: Continiue normal IN handling
[PROP33 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 33
[ [ Mapping of Calling Party Number
[ [ True: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Calling Party Number ISUP o/g
[ [ IAM (only valid for ISUP-LTG)
[ [ False: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Generic Number (additional
[ [ Calling number) in ISUP o/g IAM
[PROP34 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 34
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ (see PROP35)
[PROP35 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 35
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 False: If CAC is dialed
[ [ Call is released
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 False: CAC will be ignored
[ [ For routing
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 True: Call will be
[ [ Rerouted via
[ [ Carrier network
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 True: PROP35 has priority
[PROP36 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 36
[ [ Suppression of DAS Announcement for PNS and
[ [ SNP/NTS
[ [ TRUE: PNS or SNP/NTS is active
[ [ FALSE: PNS or SNP/NTS is not active
[PROP37 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 37
[ [ Supply of Location Number
[ [ True: Supply the Location Number from ATD
[ [ False: Supply the Location Number from VLR number
[PROP38 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 38
[ [ Other Party Long_Number in MOC Record
[ [ True: Write "rerouted number" (from SCP) as other
[ [ party long number in MOC Record
[ [ False: Write "dialled number" as other party long
[ [ number in MOC Record
[PROP39 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 39
[RCNCLI [ REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
[ [ Prerequisites:
[ [ - The intercept identifier INANIF must have
[ [ been created by the command CR INC.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 26+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[SFINH [ SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
!UINCAT - USE IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- INCAT must be specified.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
MOBPROP MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the mobile specific properties
related to the Intelligent Network service execution.
It is divided into common properties (0-23) and
project properties (24-31).
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFCPPPS CHARGE FREE CALL PHASE FOR PPS
This property is intended Prepaid
Services (PPS). Setting of this property will
inform the SCP, that the actual call phase has
lasted 0 seconds. This means that the call phase
in question is held free of charge.
This behaviour is available for SINAP and CAP
protocol.
TRUE - Actual call phase is held free of charge
FALSE - Actual call phase is not held free of charg
DEFCOMZO DEFAULT COMMON ZONING
If this property is set, zoning with
new digits from SCP is performed for
CAP protocol.
ENHACAP3 ENHANCED TDP3 HANDL. FOR CAP3
Allow ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM. The Camel Ph3 standard
3GPP 23.078 does not allow the operations
ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM for IN-dialogues triggered via
a D-CSI or N-CSI (TriggerDetectionPoint TDP3).
I.e. after reception of a Connect or a Continue
or ContinueWithArgument operation from the
SCP, D-CSI or N-CSI dialogue has to be closed.
Our SSP shall allow the usage of the above
mentioned operations also on a D-CSI or N-CSI
dialogue. Whether these operations are allowed or
not, shall be controllable with this Trigger
Profile Property. This property is checked
only if the CAP Ph3 protocol is used in case of
D-CSI or N-CSI triggered IN dialogues.
TRUE - allow operations
FALSE - inhibit operations
INPASS IN PARALLEL TO MOC ASSIGNMENT
If this property is set, the channel
assignment for MOC and IN-Dialogue are set up in
parallel.
MPROP08 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 8
MPROP09 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 9
MPROP10 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 10
MPROP11 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 11
MPROP12 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 12
MPROP13 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 13
MPROP14 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 14
MPROP15 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 15
MPROP16 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 16
MPROP17 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 17
MPROP18 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 18
MPROP19 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 19
MPROP20 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 20
MPROP21 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 21
MPROP22 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 22
MPROP23 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 23
NOEXTPAR NO EXT PARAM SENT BY SSP
If this property is set, the SSP sends
INAP-operations without Extension Parameters.
Notes:
- This property has no influence on Extension
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 27+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Parameters sent by the SCP.
- If this property is not set, SCCP segmentation
has to be switched on.
PPROP00 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 0
SDDPFC Interworking, supply LOCNO from SCP-Address
in case of MOC:
True: Copy SCP-Address of SDDPFC Interface.
False: Dont copy.
PPROP01 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 1
PPROP02 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 2
PPROP03 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 3
PPROP04 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 4
PPROP05 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 5
PPROP06 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 6
PPROP07 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 7
SCPNSMSC SEND CLD PTY NO AND SMSC ADDR
The SSP provides the SMS Service Center Address
and Called Party Address for SMS MO Trigger
Feature with CAP Phase 1 to the SCP.
GENPROP = PROP23 determines, which parameters
are used to transmit the addresses.
SUPACMSG SUPPRESS ANSWER/CONNECT MSG
If this property is set, any ANSWER/CONNECT
message for that call section to Calling Party
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
SUPCHART SUPPRESS CHARGING TICKET
If this property is set, MOC/CF Charging Ticket
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
EODRAN END OF DIALLING RANGE
This parameter specifies a minimal number of dialled digits
and a maximal number of dialled digits to have a general
end of dialling condition.
This parameter is evaluated only if GENPROP=EODREQ is set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MIN=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: MAX=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 28
IWRULE INTERWORKING RULE
This parameter is used to control the interworking of IN
with basic network features. The first unit addresses the set
of default values for the Service Interaction Indicator (SII)
to be applied if the SCP did not send any. The second unit
specifies the interaction level which is applied for the
control of the SIIs influence on this interworking
(project specific).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SERVICE INTERACTION INDICATOR INDEX=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 28+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Default: 0
b: INTERACTION LEVEL=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
RELEASE RELEASE REQUIRED INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a value to decide whether an Intelligent
Network call has to be released in the case that a protocol
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
NO RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
YES RELEASE REQUIRED
Default: YES
CHGINF DEFAULT CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the charging information in case no
information about how to charge an Intelligent Network call
was sent by the partner SCP.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INFORMATION
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
NOINTV NO INTERVENTION BY IN
REJECT REJECT THE CALL
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
Default: NOINTV
b: ZONE NUMBER=
0...511, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
- ZONE is entered for the first unit.
CHGPROF CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies the charging profile that is applied
when an IN service request was detected with an originating
line trigger.
The charging profile determines the billing registration
method and - in the case of metering - the subscriber charge
counters CNTR1 .. CNTR5.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
No billing registration.
PROF1 PROFILE 1
Automatic Message Accounting.
PROF10 PROFILE 10
Metering on charge counters 1&5.
PROF11 PROFILE 11
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 29+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Metering on charge counters 2&3.
PROF12 PROFILE 12
Metering on charge counters 2&4.
PROF13 PROFILE 13
Metering on charge counters 2&5.
PROF14 PROFILE 14
Metering on charge counters 3&4.
PROF15 PROFILE 15
Metering on charge counters 3&5.
PROF16 PROFILE 16
Metering on charge counters 4&5.
PROF17 PROFILE 17
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3.
PROF18 PROFILE 18
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4.
PROF19 PROFILE 19
Metering on charge counters 1&2&5.
PROF2 PROFILE 2
Metering on charge counter 1.
PROF20 PROFILE 20
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4.
PROF21 PROFILE 21
Metering on charge counters 1&3&5.
PROF22 PROFILE 22
Metering on charge counters 1&4&5.
PROF23 PROFILE 23
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4.
PROF24 PROFILE 24
Metering on charge counters 2&3&5.
PROF25 PROFILE 25
Metering on charge counters 2&4&5.
PROF26 PROFILE 26
Metering on charge counters 3&4&5.
PROF27 PROFILE 27
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4.
PROF28 PROFILE 28
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&5.
PROF29 PROFILE 29
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4&5.
PROF3 PROFILE 3
Metering on charge counter 2.
PROF30 PROFILE 30
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4&5.
PROF31 PROFILE 31
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4&5.
PROF32 PROFILE 32
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4&5.
PROF4 PROFILE 4
Metering on charge counter 3.
PROF5 PROFILE 5
Metering on charge counter 4.
PROF6 PROFILE 6
Metering on charge counter 5.
PROF7 PROFILE 7
Metering on charge counters 1&2.
PROF8 PROFILE 8
Metering on charge counters 1&3.
PROF9 PROFILE 9
Metering on charge counters 1&4.
DACTINC DEACTIV. SERV. INTERCEPT ID.
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected in case the
Intelligent Network service is in status inactive.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
Default: SNA0
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 30+
CR INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
This parameter specifies the time, in which the answer
from SCP/SCF is expected in steps of 100ms.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
Default: 100
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR INTRIG- 31-
DACT INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DACT INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command deactivates an Intelligent Network service.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT INTRIG : PRID= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile the
Intelligent Network service of which has to be deactivated
on the home exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT INTRIG- 1-
DISP INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command displays data concerning specified or all Intelligent Network
trigger profiles. Depending on the FORMAT parameter the data for the
installation of a service, a description of the address of the partner
Service Control Point and, if available in the IN application, the own
address or, for PROT = SINAP1 service specific statistics will be
displayed. A further choice can be reached by the parameters STATUS
to select all active or inactive services, SKEY to select all profiles
related to the specified service key and PROT to select a single protocol
type, respectively.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP INTRIG : PRID= [,FORMAT=] [,SKEY=] [,PROT=] [,SSFTYPE=] [
[ [
[ [,STATUS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile to be
displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FORMAT FORMAT SELECTION
This parameter specifies the kind of data which is displayed
for an Intelligent Network service on the own exchange:
- PA is used for the selection of installation data,
- CT is used for the selection of call treatment data,
- AD is used for the selection of address description data,
- ST is used for the selection of service specific statistics.
Only data of trigger profiles with protocol type SINAP1 and a
service key in the range of 1 to 8 will be displayed,
- MS is used for the selection of mobile specific data.
- CA is used for the selection of CAMEL specific data.
Compatibilities:
- If FORMAT = ST only a profile identifier may be specified. The
service key and the SCP address available in the trigger profile will
be used to select the service specific statistic. If any Service Con-
trol Point concerning the selected service is addressed by a global
title no address may be specified in the corresponding output mask.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PA TRIGGER PROFILE PARAMETER
CT DISPLAY CALL TREATMENT
Incompatibilities:
- SSFTYPE = ASST.
AD SCP AND SSP ADDRESSES
ST STATISTICS OF INTELL.NETWORK
Incompatibilities:
- The parameters PROT, STATUS and SKEY must not
be specified.
MS MOBILE SPECIFIC DATA
CA CAMEL SPECIFIC DATA
Default: PA
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INTRIG- 1+
DISP INTRIG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service to be
displayed.
Incompatibilities:
- The SKEY parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent Network
application protocol the service execution is based on.
Incompatibilities:
- The PROT parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
CS2 CS2 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
SSFTYPE SERVICE SWITCHING FUNCT. TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of Service Switching
Function for which the trigger profile was created. If an
IN trigger was detected the SSF can act as initiating
(normal) or assisting SSF.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NORM NORMAL
ASST ASSISTING
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
STATUS ACTIVITY STATUS
This parameter specifies the status of the Intelligent Network
service the data of which has to be displayed.
Incompatibilities:
- The STATUS parameter must not be entered if FORMAT = ST.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INACT SERVICE IS NOT ACTIVE
ACT SERVICE IS ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP INTRIG- 2-
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD INTELL.NETWORK TRIGGER PROFILE
This command modifies the trigger profile data of an Intelligent
Network service on an exchange, independent of the status of the
service. All parameters except the profile identifier and the
SSF type may be changed.
If the network indicator will be modified, a complete SCP address and - if
already available - the SSP address also has to be entered for Non-CAMEL
profiles. If the routing preferences for the SCP or the SSP address will be
modified, i.e. if a physical address has to be replaced by a logical or
vice versa, then the new address has to be entered completely.
In case the translation type identifier of the SCP address shall be
modified, then also a complete address including routing preferences has
to be specified.
If the translator service group of the SCP address shall be omitted, then a
complete address including routing preferences has to be entered.
Furthermore single parameter values of an already existing logical or
physical address (e.g. the global title digits or the
destination point code) may be modified.
If the protocol type will be changed from SINAP1 to another protocol type
the overload and invalid vote intercept id in the data base will be ignored.
If the protocol type will be changed from another protocol type to SINAP1,
then the overload resp. the invalid vote intercept id have to be entered.
The subsystem identifier has to be changed accordingly. In addition the
parameter GENPROP = FTRINH is set automatically.
For administration of CAMEL profiles no preconditions exists.
Prerequisites:
1. General:
- If the protocol type will be changed Service Filtering entities must not
exist for this trigger profile.
- For a zone number specified by the parameter CHGINF a tariff has to be
entered by command ENTR TAR.
- The intercept identifier values specified by the parameters DACTINC,
OVLINC and INVINC must have been created by the command CR INC.
- If GENPROP = SFINH will be entered Service Filtering entities must
not exist for this trigger profile.
- No trigger table entry with CAMEL = YES and the same service key,
the same SCP address and the same CSITYPE must exist.
2. In case of an CCNC configuration:
3. In the case of an SSNC configuration:
- Equivalent preconditions as mentioned for the CCNC configuration are valid.
These conditions cannot be checked by the system since they are
administrated by means of Q3 tasks instead of MML commands.
Compatibilities:
- The parameters OVLINC and INVINC may only be entered for protocol
type SINAP1.
- Only special property values (PROP24..PROP39) of parameter
GENPROP may be specified for SSFTYPE=ASST.
Incompatibilities:
- A global title must not be entered together with a DPC.
- For SSFTYPE=ASST the parameters TRAT, INCAT, RELEASE,
CHGINF, CHGPROF, OVLINC, INVINC and EODRAN must not be entered.
- In case of parameter CAMEL = NO only USSDPRID = NONE is allowed.
- In case of parameter CAMEL = NO only CDPAPFX = NONE is allowed.
- In case of parameter CAMEL = NO no CSITYPE must be entered.
- No trigger table entry with CAMEL = YES and the same service key,
the same SCP address and the same CSITYPE must exist.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing IN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD INTRIG - GT PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
2. MOD INTRIG - SPC PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 1+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1. Input format
PROFILE WITH LOGICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format has to be used to modify a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a global title and any combination of
a translator service group and a subsystem identifier.

[ [
[ MOD INTRIG : PRID= <,SKEY= ,NETIND= ,NETNAME= ,RTGP= [
[ [
[ ,CAMEL=> [,CSITYPE=] [,CCSITYPE=] <,USSDPRID= [
[ [
[ ,IPAVAIL= ,IPSSPCA= ,CIPSSPCA= ,CDPAPFX=> [
[ [
[ [,CGAC=] <,TTID= ,NP= ,NA= ,GTDIG= ,PREFIX= [
[ [
[ ,TRLG= ,SSID= ,PROT= ,ACNSEL= ,SSPGT= ,ORTTID= [
[ [
[ ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG= ,TRAT= [
[ [
[ ,INCAT=> [,GENPROP=] [,CGENPROP=] [,MOBPROP=] [
[ [
[ [,CMOBPROP=] <,EODRAN= ,IWRULE= ,RELEASE= [
[ [
[ ,CHGINF= ,CHGPROF= ,CCHGPROF= ,DACTINC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SSFTIMER=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile to be
modified. Since the service logic may be distributed on several
Service Control Points, for one service different trigger
profiles may be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service to be
installed on the home exchange. The same service key may occur in
different trigger profiles.
Notes:
The SKEY=0 is used as master key in case of Call Gap. So, if a
trigger profile is entered with SKEY=0 it is not possible to gap
service requests with this service key individually.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network of the SSP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signaling network in which
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 2+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the destination point is existing by its name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences for the
delivery of a SCCP message to the SCP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GT ROUTE BY GT
CAMEL CAMEL TRIGGERING
This parameter indicates whether the profile
can be used for triggering by CSI.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO CSI-TRIGGERING
NO NO CSI-TRIGGERING
Y CSI-TRIGGERING POSSIBLE
YES CSI-TRIGGERING POSSIBLE
Default: NO
CSITYPE CSI TYPE
This parameter adds CSI-Types for which the trigger profile
could be used to the already existing values. CSITYPE is
used to distinguish between two CAMEL trigger profiles with
the same service key and SCP address.
Up to 5 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- ALLCSI cannot be linked with another CSI.
- Adding parameter values deletes an existing CSITYPE = ALLCSI
- Adding ALLCSI deletes existing parameter values.
- In case of default service key or default SCP address only
CSITYPE = ALLCSI is allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLCSI ALL CSI TYPES
DCSI DIALLED SERVICE CSI
OCSI ORIGINATING CSI
SMSCSI SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CSI
TCSI TERMINATING CSI
VTCSI VMSC TERMINATING CSI
CCSITYPE CANCELED CSI TYPE
This parameter cancels CSI-Types for which the trigger
profile could be used from the already existing parameter
values. Up to 5 parameter values can be linked with &.
Notes:
- If all existing parameter values are canceled then
CSITYPE = ALLCSI will be assigned to the CAMEL trigger
profile (DEFAULT value).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLCSI ALL CSI TYPES
DCSI DIALLED SERVICE CSI
OCSI ORIGINATING CSI
SMSCSI SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CSI
TCSI TERMINATING CSI
VTCSI VMSC TERMINATING CSI
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 3+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USSDPRID USSD PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter points to another trigger table
element which must be used for USSD calltype.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Input NONE for USSDPRID means no USSDPRID.
IPAVAIL IP AVAILABLE
This parameter indicates whether Intelligent
Peripherie (IP) capabilities are available and
are to be transfered to the SCP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
NO NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Y IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
YES IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Default: NO
IPSSPCA IPSSP CAPABILITIES
This parameter indicates the IP capabilities of the SSP
to be added to the already existing values.
Up to 7 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GENVA GEN. OF VOICE ANN. FROM TEXT
Generation of voice announcements from text
is supported.
IPRAD IP ROUTING ADDRESS SUPPORTED
IP Routing Address is supported.
RES1 RESERVED1
Reserved for future enhancements 1.
RES2 RESERVED2
Reserved for future enhancements 2.
VOICEBA VOICEBACK SUPPORTED
VoiceBack is supported.
VOICESPR VOICE INF. WITH SPEECH RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via speech
recognition.
VOICEVR VOICE INF. WITH VOICE RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via voice
recognition.
CIPSSPCA CANCELED IPSSP CAPABILITIES
This parameter specifies the IP capabilities of the SSP
to be canceled from the existing trigger profile.
Up to 7 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GENVA GEN. OF VOICE ANN. FROM TEXT
Generation of voice announcements from text
is canceled.
IPRAD IP ROUTING ADDRESS CANCELED
IP Routing Address is canceled.
RES1 RESERVED1
Reserved for future enhancements 1.
RES2 RESERVED2
Reserved for future enhancements 2.
VOICEBA VOICEBACK CANCELED
VoiceBack is canceled.
VOICESPR VOICE INF. WITH SPEECH RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is canceled via speech
recognition.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 4+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VOICEVR VOICE INF. WITH VOICE RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is canceled via voice
recognition.
CDPAPFX CALLED PARTY ADDRESS PREFIX
This parameter specifies the digits to be
prefixed to the called party address before
the address is sent to SCP or used
for re-routing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Input NONE for CDPAPFX means no CDPAPFX.
CGAC CALL GAP ACCEPTANCE
This parameter specifies whether an operation call gap
from the SCP is accepted or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCG ACCEPT OPERATION CALL GAP
ACSCFID ACCEPT CG WITH SCFID ONLY
CGRES CALL GAP RESERVED
Reserved for future enhancements.
IGNCG IGNORE OPERATION CALL GAP
TTID TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the global
title.
If it was specified with INPPDD the parameter PREFIX has to
be entered instead of the parameter GTDIG. If it was specified with
INCGPA or INDD the parameters GTDIG, PREFIX, NP and NA
must not be entered. The corresponding values will be determined from
the calling party address or the called party address, respectively.
For all other values of this parameter GTDIG, NP and NA
must be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
Incompatibilities:
- PREFIX, GTDIG, NP and NA.
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
Incompatibilities:
- PREFIX, GTDIG, NP and NA.
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
Compatibilities:
- PREFIX.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
NP NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global title.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 5+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
NA NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global title.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
GTDIG GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title. The digits can
be input in a structured format.
For IN triggering with CSI only 16 digits are evaluated.
For CAMEL profiles it is possible to enter the SCP address partly.
For example, only a few trigger profiles are necessary for roaming
subscribers if created this way.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PREFIX PREFIX DIGITS
This parameter specifies the prefix digits to be used to assemble a
global title dynamically together with the digit information of the
called party number. This means that the global title is composed of
the prefix digits and the address information of the called party
number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 6+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TRLG TRANSLATOR SERVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a translator service group which performs
the global title translation if the translation is not executed in
the SSP.
Prerequisites:
- In the case of a CCNC configuration the translator service group
must have been created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFIER
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
INMP1 IN APPLICATION 1 ON MP
If a destination point code which specifies a
node containing a SSNC-based Number Portability
Server is entered together with this subsystem
identifier then the LNP (local number portability)
server function on that node (Stand-alone STP or
with EWSD as host) is addressed.
INMP2 IN APPLICATION 2 ON MP
INMP3 IN APPLICATION 3 ON MP
INMP4 IN APPLICATION 4 ON MP
INMP5 IN APPLICATION 5 ON MP
IN2 IN APPLICATION 2
Used for CAP protocols.
IN3 IN APPLICATION 3
Used for national INAP protocols.
IN4 IN APPLICATION 4
Used for number portability.
IN5 IN APPLICATION 5
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TV TELEVOTING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UPT UNIV PERSONAL TELECOMMUNICAT
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 7+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent Network
application protocol the service execution is based on.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
CS2 CS2 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
ACNSEL APPLIC. CONTEXT NAME SELECTOR
ACNSEL=3 : SINAP5M
ACNSEL=5 : SINAP5M+
ACNSEL=6 : SINAP5M++
ACNSEL=7 : 163TR78
ACNSEL=8 : TINAP2001
ACNSEL=10: CAP Version 1
ACNSEL=11: CAP Version 2
ACNSEL=12: CAP Version 3
ACNSEL=13: CAP Version 3 SMS-MO
ACNSEL=14: SINAP7M
ACNSEL=15: SINAP7M+
ACNSEL=20: SINAP6NP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...31, range of decimal numbers
SSPGT SSP GT REQUIRED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
NO SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
Y SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
YES SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
ORTTID ORIG. TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the
global title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
ORSSID ORIGINATOR SUBSYSTEM ID.
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the IN application
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address. It depends on the
entered protocol type.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 8+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ORNP ORIGINATOR NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
ORNA ORIGINATOR NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 9+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORGTDIG ORIG. GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title in the calling
party address of the SSP. The digits can be input in a structured
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies a traffic type assigned to the Intelligent
Network service in the trigger profile. The traffic type is
evaluated after detection of an IN trigger.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCAT IN CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories for the digit translation.
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
GENPROP GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to the
Intelligent Network service execution to be added to the already
existing values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 10+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Up to 40 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADPBIN ABBREV. DIALLING PROC. BY IN
[CLIREQ [ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[CONINH [ CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
[DPINH [ DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
[ [ The activation of internal detection points is
[ [ not allowed for the current service key. This
[ [ property is only relevant for the execution of
[ [ special services, e.g. international calls.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ENACPH [ ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
[EODREQ [ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
[FTALLOW [ FEATURE TRANSPARENCY ALLOWED
[FTRINH [ FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
[ [ Notes:
[ [ - For the protocol type SINAP1 this value
[ [ is set automatically.
[MCIHLD [ MCI HOLD REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MCIPRE [ MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MHNCLI [ MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ONLCHG [ ONLINE CHARGING
[PASSBA [ PASS B PTY CHARGE MSG TO A PTY
[PCNCHG [ PER CONNECTION CHARGING
[PROP18 [ PROPERTY 18
[ [ PPS Indication. It is evaluated to realize the
[ [ follwowing functionality:
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile indicates a PPS.
[ [ FALSE: In case of interworking between PPS and
[ [ CFNRc (detected after 2nd HLR
[ [ interrogation)
[ [ the T-CSI dialogue will be terminated.
[PROP19 [ PROPERTY 19
[ [ Changing from T-BCSM to O-BCSM
[ [ TRUE: Changing the BCSM is allowed.
[ [ FALSE: Changing the BCSM is not allowed.
[PROP20 [ PROPERTY 20
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile TDP12-
[ [ related profile. PROP20 is necessary to
[ [ distinguish between "Basic IN Services" and "IN
[ [ User subscribt Services" because both are triggert
[ [ via digit analysis.
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribed IN-MTC service, i.e. TDP12 is
[ [ send in the OP:IDP to the SCP (mapping of
[ [ TDP3 to TDP12).
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP21 [ PROPERTY 21
[ [ Cross phase compatibility between MAP- and CAP-
[ [ interface
[ [ TRUE: The protocol version is determined
[ [ according to the CAMEL phase supported on
[ [ the MAP interface.
[ [ FALSE: the protocol version is determined by the
[ [ ACN selector (parameter ACNSEL).
[PROP22 [ PROPERTY 22
[ [ Fall Back to Basic SMS MO
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile is used for SMS MO
[ [ and MOC.
[ [ FALSE: The trigger profile used for MOC only.
[PROP23 [ PROPERTY 23
[ [
[ [ Usage of CdPA or SMSC-address in Op:I_DP for SMS
[ [ MO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 11+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ TRUE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMSC-
[ [ address as Called Party Address.
[ [ FALSE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMS
[ [ receiver address as Called Party Address.
[ [ (This property to be used with only if
[ [ PROP22 together)
[PROP24 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 24
[ [ Control of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: Tickets should not be generated.
[ [ FALSE: Tickets should be generated.
[PROP25 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 25
[ [ Prefixing of CdPA with CAC digits
[ [ TRUE: The digits received from A-side GP shall be
[ [ Prefixed with the received CAC (if any) and
[ [ the appropiate prefix for CAC dialing
[ [ FALSE: The digits received from A-side GP are send
[ [ unchanged in the C:IN_DATA to the BSSAP
[PROP26 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 26
[ [ Using of default zoning
[ [ TRUE: The ZONDA is called with the received
[ [ Digits to determine the charging zone or a
[ [ No charge indication (but not to overwrite
[ [ The AMA parameter)
[ [ False: The default zone from trigger profile
[ [ Is set in the CPB as local zoning result or
[ [ Chargefree indication is evaluated.
[PROP27 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 27
[ [
[ [ Interworking IN/CAMEL with CF
[ [ True: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Allowed.
[ [ False: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Not allowed.
[ [ The network provider can support the interworking
[ [ of CF with IN MOC service by setting General
[ [ Property 27 in the trigger profile of the IN MOC
[ [ service.
[PROP28 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 28
[ [ Fallback from CAP Ph3, CAP PH2 to CAP Ph1
[ [ TRUE: The AC negotioation on the CAP interface is
[ [ supported.
[ [ FALSE: AC negotiation on the CAP interface is not
[ [ possible.
[PROP29 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 29
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile as TDP2-
[ [ related profile
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribt IN-MOC service, i.e TDP2 is send
[ [ in the OP:IDP to the SCP
[ [ FALSE: else
[ [ PROP29 is necessary for Overlay networks as it is
[ [ not possible to distinguish between "Basic IN-
[ [ Services" and "IN User Subscribed Services".
[PROP30 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 30
[ [ GSM-BC or ISDN-BC in Op:I_DP
[ [ TRUE: The ISUP Bearer Capability (BC) is used in
[ [ Op:Initial_DP.
[ [ FALSE: The GSM BC is used.
[PROP31 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 31
[ [ Ticket control by suppression of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: The SCP is allowed to suppress ticket
[ [ generation by sending "SuppressCITicket" in
[ [ The OP:SendChargingInfo
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP32 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 32
[ [ CAMEL Overlay. Possibility to to administrate a
[ [ prefix with MML CR INTRIG parameter CDAPRFX.
[ [ TRUE: (and CDPAPFX not empty) IN handling is
[ [ stopped, CAMEL relevant data is reset and a
[ [ digit anlaysis with the prefixed Called
[ [ Party Number is started
[ [ FALSE: Continiue normal IN handling
[PROP33 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 33
[ [ Mapping of Calling Party Number
[ [ True: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Calling Party Number ISUP o/g
[ [ IAM (only valid for ISUP-LTG)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 12+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ False: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Generic Number (additional
[ [ Calling number) in ISUP o/g IAM
[PROP34 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 34
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ (see PROP35)
[PROP35 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 35
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 False: If CAC is dialed
[ [ Call is released
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 False: CAC will be ignored
[ [ For routing
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 True: Call will be
[ [ Rerouted via
[ [ Carrier network
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 True: PROP35 has priority
[PROP36 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 36
[ [ Suppression of DAS Announcement for PNS and
[ [ SNP/NTS
[ [ TRUE: PNS or SNP/NTS is active
[ [ FALSE: PNS or SNP/NTS is not active
[PROP37 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 37
[ [ Supply of Location Number
[ [ True: Supply the Location Number from ATD
[ [ False: Supply the Location Number from VLR number
[PROP38 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 38
[ [ Other Party Long_Number in MOC Record
[ [ True: Write "rerouted number" (from SCP) as other
[ [ party long number in MOC Record
[ [ False: Write "dialled number" as other party long
[ [ number in MOC Record
[PROP39 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 39
[RCNCLI [ REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
[ [ Prerequisites:
[ [ - The intercept identifier INANIF must have
[ [ been created by the command CR INC.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[SFINH [ SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
!UINCAT - USE IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- INCAT must be specified.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CGENPROP CANCELED GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to the
Intelligent Network service execution to be canceled from the
existing trigger profile.
Up to 40 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADPBIN ABBREV. DIALLING PROC. BY IN
[CLIREQ [ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[CONINH [ CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
[DPINH [ DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
[ [ The activation of internal detection points is
[ [ not allowed for the current service key. This
[ [ property is only relevant for the execution of
[ [ special services, e.g. international calls.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ENACPH [ ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
[EODREQ [ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
[FTALLOW [ FEATURE TRANSPARENCY ALLOWED
[FTRINH [ FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - FTRINH = FTRINH.
[MCIHLD [ MCI HOLD REQUESTED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 13+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MCIPRE [ MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MHNCLI [ MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ONLCHG [ ONLINE CHARGING
[PASSBA [ PASS B PTY CHARGE MSG TO A PTY
[PCNCHG [ PER CONNECTION CHARGING
[PROP18 [ PROPERTY 18
[ [ PPS Indication. It is evaluated to realize the
[ [ follwowing functionality:
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile indicates a PPS.
[ [ FALSE: In case of interworking between PPS and
[ [ CFNRc (detected after 2nd HLR
[ [ interrogation)
[ [ the T-CSI dialogue will be terminated.
[PROP19 [ PROPERTY 19
[ [ Changing from T-BCSM to O-BCSM
[ [ TRUE: Changing the BCSM is allowed.
[ [ FALSE: Changing the BCSM is not allowed.
[PROP20 [ PROPERTY 20
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile TDP12-
[ [ related profile. PROP20 is necessary to
[ [ distinguish between "Basic IN Services" and "IN
[ [ User subscribt Services" because both are triggert
[ [ via digit analysis.
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribed IN-MTC service, i.e. TDP12 is
[ [ send in the OP:IDP to the SCP (mapping of
[ [ TDP3 to TDP12).
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP21 [ PROPERTY 21
[ [ Cross phase compatibility between MAP- and CAP-
[ [ interface
[ [ TRUE: The protocol version is determined
[ [ according to the CAMEL phase supported on
[ [ the MAP interface.
[ [ FALSE: the protocol version is determined by the
[ [ ACN selector (parameter ACNSEL).
[PROP22 [ PROPERTY 22
[ [ Fall Back to Basic SMS MO
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile is used for SMS MO
[ [ and MOC.
[ [ FALSE: The trigger profile used for MOC only.
[PROP23 [ PROPERTY 23
[ [
[ [ Usage of CdPA or SMSC-address in Op:I_DP for SMS
[ [ MO
[ [ TRUE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMSC-
[ [ address as Called Party Address.
[ [ FALSE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMS
[ [ receiver address as Called Party Address.
[ [ (This property to be used with only if
[ [ PROP22 together)
[PROP24 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 24
[ [ Control of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: Tickets should not be generated.
[ [ FALSE: Tickets should be generated.
[PROP25 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 25
[ [ Prefixing of CdPA with CAC digits
[ [ TRUE: The digits received from A-side GP shall be
[ [ Prefixed with the received CAC (if any) and
[ [ the appropiate prefix for CAC dialing
[ [ FALSE: The digits received from A-side GP are send
[ [ unchanged in the C:IN_DATA to the BSSAP
[PROP26 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 26
[ [ Using of default zoning
[ [ TRUE: The ZONDA is called with the received
[ [ Digits to determine the charging zone or a
[ [ No charge indication (but not to overwrite
[ [ The AMA parameter)
[ [ False: The default zone from trigger profile
[ [ Is set in the CPB as local zoning result or
[ [ Chargefree indication is evaluated.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 14+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[PROP27 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 27
[ [
[ [ Interworking IN/CAMEL with CF
[ [ True: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Allowed.
[ [ False: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Not allowed.
[ [ The network provider can support the interworking
[ [ of CF with IN MOC service by setting General
[ [ Property 27 in the trigger profile of the IN MOC
[ [ service.
[PROP28 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 28
[ [ Fallback from CAP Ph3, CAP PH2 to CAP Ph1
[ [ TRUE: The AC negotioation on the CAP interface is
[ [ supported.
[ [ FALSE: AC negotiation on the CAP interface is not
[ [ possible.
[PROP29 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 29
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile as TDP2-
[ [ related profile
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribt IN-MOC service, i.e TDP2 is send
[ [ in the OP:IDP to the SCP
[ [ FALSE: else
[ [ PROP29 is necessary for Overlay networks as it is
[ [ not possible to distinguish between "Basic IN-
[ [ Services" and "IN User Subscribed Services".
[PROP30 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 30
[ [ GSM-BC or ISDN-BC in Op:I_DP
[ [ TRUE: The ISUP Bearer Capability (BC) is used in
[ [ Op:Initial_DP.
[ [ FALSE: The GSM BC is used.
[PROP31 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 31
[ [ Ticket control by suppression of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: The SCP is allowed to suppress ticket
[ [ generation by sending "SuppressCITicket" in
[ [ The OP:SendChargingInfo
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP32 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 32
[ [ CAMEL Overlay. Possibility to to administrate a
[ [ prefix with MML CR INTRIG parameter CDAPRFX.
[ [ TRUE: (and CDPAPFX not empty) IN handling is
[ [ stopped, CAMEL relevant data is reset and a
[ [ digit anlaysis with the prefixed Called
[ [ Party Number is started
[ [ FALSE: Continiue normal IN handling
[PROP33 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 33
[ [ Mapping of Calling Party Number
[ [ True: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Calling Party Number ISUP o/g
[ [ IAM (only valid for ISUP-LTG)
[ [ False: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Generic Number (additional
[ [ Calling number) in ISUP o/g IAM
[PROP34 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 34
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ (see PROP35)
[PROP35 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 35
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 False: If CAC is dialed
[ [ Call is released
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 False: CAC will be ignored
[ [ For routing
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 True: Call will be
[ [ Rerouted via
[ [ Carrier network
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 True: PROP35 has priority
[PROP36 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 36
[ [ Suppression of DAS Announcement for PNS and
[ [ SNP/NTS
[ [ TRUE: PNS or SNP/NTS is active
[ [ FALSE: PNS or SNP/NTS is not active
[PROP37 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 37
[ [ Supply of Location Number
[ [ True: Supply the Location Number from ATD
[ [ False: Supply the Location Number from VLR number
[PROP38 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 38
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 15+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ Other Party Long_Number in MOC Record
[ [ True: Write "rerouted number" (from SCP) as other
[ [ party long number in MOC Record
[ [ False: Write "dialled number" as other party long
[ [ number in MOC Record
[PROP39 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 39
[RCNCLI [ REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
[ [ Prerequisites:
[ [ - The intercept identifier INANIF must have
[ [ been created by the command CR INC.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[SFINH [ SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
!UINCAT - USE IN CATEGORY
Notes:
- If this value is specified the parameter UINCAT
will be initialized.
MOBPROP MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the mobile specific properties
related to the Intelligent Network service execution
to be added to the already existing values.
It is divided into common properties (0-23) and
project properties (24-31).
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFCPPPS CHARGE FREE CALL PHASE FOR PPS
This property is intended Prepaid
Services (PPS). Setting of this property will
inform the SCP, that the actual call phase has
lasted 0 seconds. This means that the call phase
in question is held free of charge.
This behaviour is available for SINAP and CAP
protocol.
TRUE - Actual call phase is held free of charge
FALSE - Actual call phase is not held free of charg
DEFCOMZO DEFAULT COMMON ZONING
If this property is set, zoning with
new digits from SCP is performed for
CAP protocol.
ENHACAP3 ENHANCED TDP3 HANDL. FOR CAP3
Allow ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM. The Camel Ph3 standard
3GPP 23.078 does not allow the operations
ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM for IN-dialogues triggered via
a D-CSI or N-CSI (TriggerDetectionPoint TDP3).
I.e. after reception of a Connect or a Continue
or ContinueWithArgument operation from the
SCP, D-CSI or N-CSI dialogue has to be closed.
Our SSP shall allow the usage of the above
mentioned operations also on a D-CSI or N-CSI
dialogue. Whether these operations are allowed or
not, shall be controllable with this Trigger
Profile Property. This property is checked
only if the CAP Ph3 protocol is used in case of
D-CSI or N-CSI triggered IN dialogues.
TRUE - allow operations
FALSE - inhibit operations
INPASS IN PARALLEL TO MOC ASSIGNMENT
If this property is set, the channel
assignment for MOC and IN-Dialogue are set up in
parallel.
MPROP08 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 8
MPROP09 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 9
MPROP10 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 10
MPROP11 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 11
MPROP12 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 12
MPROP13 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 13
MPROP14 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 14
MPROP15 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 15
MPROP16 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 16
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 16+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MPROP17 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 17
MPROP18 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 18
MPROP19 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 19
MPROP20 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 20
MPROP21 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 21
MPROP22 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 22
MPROP23 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 23
NOEXTPAR NO EXT PARAM SENT BY SSP
If this property is set, the SSP sends
INAP-operations without Extension Parameters.
Notes:
- This property has no influence on Extension
Parameters sent by the SCP.
- If this property is not set, SCCP segmentation
has to be switched on.
PPROP00 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 0
SDDPFC Interworking, supply LOCNO from SCP-Address
in case of MOC:
True: Copy SCP-Address of SDDPFC Interface.
False: Dont copy.
PPROP01 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 1
PPROP02 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 2
PPROP03 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 3
PPROP04 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 4
PPROP05 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 5
PPROP06 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 6
PPROP07 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 7
SCPNSMSC SEND CLD PTY NO AND SMSC ADDR
The SSP provides the SMS Service Center Address
and Called Party Address for SMS MO Trigger
Feature with CAP Phase 1 to the SCP.
GENPROP = PROP23 determines, which parameters
are used to transmit the addresses.
SUPACMSG SUPPRESS ANSWER/CONNECT MSG
If this property is set, any ANSWER/CONNECT
message for that call section to Calling Party
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
SUPCHART SUPPRESS CHARGING TICKET
If this property is set, MOC/CF Charging Ticket
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
CMOBPROP CANCEL MOBSPECIFIC PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the mobile specific properties
related to the Intelligent Network service execution
to be canceled from the already existing values.
It is divided into common properties (0-23)
and project properties (24-31).
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFCPPPS CHARGE FREE CALL PHASE FOR PPS
This property is intended Prepaid
Services (PPS). Setting of this property will
inform the SCP, that the actual call phase has
lasted 0 seconds. This means that the call phase
in question is held free of charge.
This behaviour is available for SINAP and CAP
protocol.
TRUE - Actual call phase is held free of charge
FALSE - Actual call phase is not held free of charg
DEFCOMZO DEFAULT COMMON ZONING
If this property is set, zoning with
new digits from SCP is performed for
CAP protocol.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 17+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENHACAP3 ENHANCED TDP3 HANDL. FOR CAP3
Allow ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM. The Camel Ph3 standard
3GPP 23.078 does not allow the operations
ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM for IN-dialogues triggered via
a D-CSI or N-CSI (TriggerDetectionPoint TDP3).
I.e. after reception of a Connect or a Continue
or ContinueWithArgument operation from the
SCP, D-CSI or N-CSI dialogue has to be closed.
Our SSP shall allow the usage of the above
mentioned operations also on a D-CSI or N-CSI
dialogue. Whether these operations are allowed or
not, shall be controllable with this Trigger
Profile Property. This property is checked
only if the CAP Ph3 protocol is used in case of
D-CSI or N-CSI triggered IN dialogues.
TRUE - allow operations
FALSE - inhibit operations
INPASS IN PARALLEL TO MOC ASSIGNMENT
If this property is set, the channel
assignment for MOC and IN-Dialogue are set up in
parallel.
MPROP08 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 8
MPROP09 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 9
MPROP10 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 10
MPROP11 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 11
MPROP12 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 12
MPROP13 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 13
MPROP14 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 14
MPROP15 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 15
MPROP16 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 16
MPROP17 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 17
MPROP18 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 18
MPROP19 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 19
MPROP20 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 20
MPROP21 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 21
MPROP22 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 22
MPROP23 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 23
NOEXTPAR NO EXT PARAM SENT BY SSP
If this property is set, the SSP sends
INAP-operations without Extension Parameters.
Notes:
- This property has no influence on Extension
Parameters sent by the SCP.
- If this property is not set, SCCP segmentation
has to be switched on.
PPROP00 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 0
SDDPFC Interworking, supply LOCNO from SCP-Address
in case of MOC:
True: Copy SCP-Address of SDDPFC Interface.
False: Dont copy.
PPROP01 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 1
PPROP02 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 2
PPROP03 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 3
PPROP04 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 4
PPROP05 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 5
PPROP06 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 6
PPROP07 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 7
SCPNSMSC SEND CLD PTY NO AND SMSC ADDR
The SSP provides the SMS Service Center Address
and Called Party Address for SMS MO Trigger
Feature with CAP Phase 1 to the SCP.
GENPROP = PROP23 determines, which parameters
are used to transmit the addresses.
SUPACMSG SUPPRESS ANSWER/CONNECT MSG
If this property is set, any ANSWER/CONNECT
message for that call section to Calling Party
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
SUPCHART SUPPRESS CHARGING TICKET
If this property is set, MOC/CF Charging Ticket
will be suppressed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 18+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
EODRAN END OF DIALLING RANGE
This parameter specifies a minimal number of dialled digits
and a maximal number of dialled digits to have a general
end of dialling condition.
This parameter is evaluated only if GENPROP=EODREQ is set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MIN=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: MAX=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 28
IWRULE INTERWORKING RULE
This parameter is used to control the interworking of IN
with basic network features. The first unit addresses the set
of default values for the Service Interaction Indicator (SII)
to be applied if the SCP did not send any. The second unit
specifies the interaction level which is applied for the
control of the SIIs influence on this interworking
(project specific).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SERVICE INTERACTION INDICATOR INDEX=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: INTERACTION LEVEL=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
RELEASE RELEASE REQUIRED INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a value to decide whether an Intelligent
Network call has to be released in the case that a protocol
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
NO RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
YES RELEASE REQUIRED
CHGINF DEFAULT CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the charging information in case no
information about how to charge an Intelligent Network call
was sent by the partner SCP.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 19+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INFORMATION
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
NOINTV NO INTERVENTION BY IN
REJECT REJECT THE CALL
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
b: ZONE NUMBER=
0...511, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
- ZONE is entered for the first unit.
CHGPROF CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies the charging profile that is applied
when an IN service request was detected with an originating
line trigger.
The charging profile determines the billing registration
method and - in the case of metering - the subscriber charge
counters CNTR1 .. CNTR5.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
No billing registration.
PROF1 PROFILE 1
Automatic Message Accounting.
PROF10 PROFILE 10
Metering on charge counters 1&5.
PROF11 PROFILE 11
Metering on charge counters 2&3.
PROF12 PROFILE 12
Metering on charge counters 2&4.
PROF13 PROFILE 13
Metering on charge counters 2&5.
PROF14 PROFILE 14
Metering on charge counters 3&4.
PROF15 PROFILE 15
Metering on charge counters 3&5.
PROF16 PROFILE 16
Metering on charge counters 4&5.
PROF17 PROFILE 17
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3.
PROF18 PROFILE 18
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4.
PROF19 PROFILE 19
Metering on charge counters 1&2&5.
PROF2 PROFILE 2
Metering on charge counter 1.
PROF20 PROFILE 20
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4.
PROF21 PROFILE 21
Metering on charge counters 1&3&5.
PROF22 PROFILE 22
Metering on charge counters 1&4&5.
PROF23 PROFILE 23
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4.
PROF24 PROFILE 24
Metering on charge counters 2&3&5.
PROF25 PROFILE 25
Metering on charge counters 2&4&5.
PROF26 PROFILE 26
Metering on charge counters 3&4&5.
PROF27 PROFILE 27
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4.
PROF28 PROFILE 28
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&5.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 20+
MOD INTRIG
GT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF29 PROFILE 29
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4&5.
PROF3 PROFILE 3
Metering on charge counter 2.
PROF30 PROFILE 30
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4&5.
PROF31 PROFILE 31
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4&5.
PROF32 PROFILE 32
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4&5.
PROF4 PROFILE 4
Metering on charge counter 3.
PROF5 PROFILE 5
Metering on charge counter 4.
PROF6 PROFILE 6
Metering on charge counter 5.
PROF7 PROFILE 7
Metering on charge counters 1&2.
PROF8 PROFILE 8
Metering on charge counters 1&3.
PROF9 PROFILE 9
Metering on charge counters 1&4.
CCHGPROF CANCEL CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the charging profile shall be
cancelled.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PROFILE
YES CANCEL PROFILE
DACTINC DEACTIV. SERV. INTERCEPT ID.
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected in case the
Intelligent Network service is in status inactive.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
This parameter specifies the time, in which the answer
from SCP/SCF is expected, in steps of 100ms.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
Default: 100
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 21+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PROFILE WITH PHYSICAL SCP ADDRESSING
This input format is to be used to modify a trigger profile with
a SCP address consisting of a destination point code and a
subsystem identifier.

[ [
[ MOD INTRIG : PRID= <,NETIND= ,NETNAME= ,RTGP= ,DPC= [
[ [
[ ,IPAVAIL= ,IPSSPCA= ,CIPSSPCA=> [,CGAC=] <,SKEY= [
[ [
[ ,SSID= ,PROT= ,ACNSEL= ,SSPGT= ,ORTTID= [
[ [
[ ,ORSSID= ,ORNP= ,ORNA= ,ORGTDIG= ,TRAT= [
[ [
[ ,INCAT=> [,GENPROP=] [,CGENPROP=] [,MOBPROP=] [
[ [
[ [,CMOBPROP=] <,EODRAN= ,IWRULE= ,RELEASE= [
[ [
[ ,CHGINF= ,CHGPROF= ,CCHGPROF= ,DACTINC= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,SSFTIMER=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRID PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the name of the trigger profile to be
modified. Since the service logic may be distributed on several
Service Control Points, for one service different trigger
profiles may be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the network of the SSP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NET 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NET 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NET 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NET 1
NETNAME NETWORK NAME
This parameter identifies the signaling network in which
the destination point is existing by its name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RTGP ROUTING PREFERENCES
This parameter specifies the routing preferences for the
delivery of a SCCP message to the SCP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SPC ROUTE BY SPC AND SSN
DPC DESTINATION POINT CODE
Network Indicator = NAT0 Units = 4-3-4-3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 22+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Network Indicator = INAT0 Units = 3-8-3
Network Indicator = NAT1 Units = 4-3-4-3
Network Indicator = INAT1 Units = 3-8-3
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
c: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
d: DESTINATION POINT CODE - UNIT 4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
IPAVAIL IP AVAILABLE
This parameter indicates whether Intelligent
Peripherie (IP) capabilities are available and
are to be transfered to the SCP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
NO NO IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Y IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
YES IP CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE
Default: NO
IPSSPCA IPSSP CAPABILITIES
This parameter indicates the IP capabilities of the SSP
to be added to the already existing values.
Up to 7 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GENVA GEN. OF VOICE ANN. FROM TEXT
Generation of voice announcements from text
is supported.
IPRAD IP ROUTING ADDRESS SUPPORTED
IP Routing Address is supported.
RES1 RESERVED1
Reserved for future enhancements 1.
RES2 RESERVED2
Reserved for future enhancements 2.
VOICEBA VOICEBACK SUPPORTED
VoiceBack is supported.
VOICESPR VOICE INF. WITH SPEECH RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via speech
recognition.
VOICEVR VOICE INF. WITH VOICE RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is supported via voice
recognition.
CIPSSPCA CANCELED IPSSP CAPABILITIES
This parameter specifies the IP capabilities of the SSP
to be canceled from the existing trigger profile.
Up to 7 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
GENVA GEN. OF VOICE ANN. FROM TEXT
Generation of voice announcements from text
is canceled.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 23+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IPRAD IP ROUTING ADDRESS CANCELED
IP Routing Address is canceled.
RES1 RESERVED1
Reserved for future enhancements 1.
RES2 RESERVED2
Reserved for future enhancements 2.
VOICEBA VOICEBACK CANCELED
VoiceBack is canceled.
VOICESPR VOICE INF. WITH SPEECH RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is canceled via speech
recognition.
VOICEVR VOICE INF. WITH VOICE RECOGN.
VoiceInformation is canceled via voice
recognition.
CGAC CALL GAP ACCEPTANCE
This parameter specifies whether an operation call gap
from the SCP is accepted or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCG ACCEPT OPERATION CALL GAP
ACSCFID ACCEPT CG WITH SCFID ONLY
CGRES CALL GAP RESERVED
Reserved for future enhancements.
IGNCG IGNORE OPERATION CALL GAP
SKEY SERVICE KEY
This parameter specifies the Intelligent Network service to be
installed on the home exchange. The same service key may occur in
different trigger profiles.
Notes:
The SKEY=0 is used as master key in case of Call Gap. So, if a
trigger profile is entered with SKEY=0 it is not possible to gap
service requests with this service key individually.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
SSID SUBSYSTEM IDENTIFIER
*FUTSS01:
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACC ACCOUNT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
AWC AREA WIDE CENTREX
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
CCC CREDIT CARD CALLING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FPH FREEPHONE SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
INMP1 IN APPLICATION 1 ON MP
If a destination point code which specifies a
node containing a SSNC-based Number Portability
Server is entered together with this subsystem
identifier then the LNP (local number portability)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 24+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
server function on that node (Stand-alone STP or
with EWSD as host) is addressed.
INMP2 IN APPLICATION 2 ON MP
INMP3 IN APPLICATION 3 ON MP
INMP4 IN APPLICATION 4 ON MP
INMP5 IN APPLICATION 5 ON MP
IN2 IN APPLICATION 2
Used for CAP protocols.
IN3 IN APPLICATION 3
Used for national INAP protocols.
IN4 IN APPLICATION 4
Used for number portability.
IN5 IN APPLICATION 5
PN PERSONAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TIS TELEINFO SERVICE
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
TV TELEVOTING
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UN UNIVERSAL NUMBER
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
UPT UNIV PERSONAL TELECOMMUNICAT
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
VPN VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
PROT PROTOCOL TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the Intelligent Network
application protocol the service execution is based on.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CS1 CS1 CONFORM INAP
CS2 CS2 CONFORM INAP
PROT4 PROTOCOL TYPE 4
SINAP1 SIEMENS INAP 1
Compatibilities:
- SKEY = 1..8.
ACNSEL APPLIC. CONTEXT NAME SELECTOR
ACNSEL=3 : SINAP5M
ACNSEL=5 : SINAP5M+
ACNSEL=6 : SINAP5M++
ACNSEL=7 : 163TR78
ACNSEL=8 : TINAP2001
ACNSEL=10: CAP Version 1
ACNSEL=11: CAP Version 2
ACNSEL=12: CAP Version 3
ACNSEL=13: CAP Version 3 SMS-MO
ACNSEL=14: SINAP7M
ACNSEL=15: SINAP7M+
ACNSEL=20: SINAP6NP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...31, range of decimal numbers
SSPGT SSP GT REQUIRED
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
NO SSP GLOBAL TITLE NOT REQUIRED
Y SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
YES SSP GLOBAL TITLE REQUIRED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 25+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORTTID ORIG. TRANSLATION TYPE ID.
This parameter specifies the translation type identifier of the
global title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
IEESS ISDN END-TO-END SUPPL. SERV.
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUB. ID.
ITCC INT. TELECOMM. CHARGE CARD
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
ORSSID ORIGINATOR SUBSYSTEM ID.
This parameter specifies the subsystem identifier of the IN application
part on the SSP as part of the calling party address. It depends on the
entered protocol type.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FUTSS01 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 01
FUTSS02 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 02
FUTSS03 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 03
FUTSS04 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 04
FUTSS05 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 05
FUTSS06 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 06
FUTSS07 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 07
FUTSS08 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 08
FUTSS09 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 09
FUTSS10 FUTURE SUBSYSTEM 10
IN IN APPLICATION IN SSP
Compatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
IN2 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 2
IN3 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 3
IN4 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 4
IN5 IN APPLICATION IN SSP 5
ORNP ORIGINATOR NUMBERING PLAN
This parameter specifies the numbering plan of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATANP DATA NUMBERING PLAN
ISDNMNP ISDN MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
ISDNTNP ISDN TELEPHONY NUMB. PLAN
LMNP LAND MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
MMNP MARITIME MOBILE NUMB. PLAN
NP10 NUMBERING PLAN 10
NP11 NUMBERING PLAN 11
NP12 NUMBERING PLAN 12
NP13 NUMBERING PLAN 13
NP15 NUMBERING PLAN 15
NP2 NUMBERING PLAN 2
NP8 NUMBERING PLAN 8
NP9 NUMBERING PLAN 9
PNP PRIVATE NUMBERING PLAN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 26+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TELEXNP TELEX NUMBERING PLAN
UNKNOWN NUMB. PLAN UNKNOWN
ORNA ORIGINATOR NATURE OF ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the nature of address of the global
title of the SSP.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTNO INTERNATIONAL NUMBER
NATNO NATIONAL SIGNIFICANT NUMBER
NATUSE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE
NA10 NATURE OF ADDRESS 10
NA11 NATURE OF ADDRESS 11
NA12 NATURE OF ADDRESS 12
NA13 NATURE OF ADDRESS 13
NA14 NATURE OF ADDRESS 14
NA15 NATURE OF ADDRESS 15
NA5 NATURE OF ADDRESS 5
NA6 NATURE OF ADDRESS 6
NA7 NATURE OF ADDRESS 7
NA8 NATURE OF ADDRESS 8
NA9 NATURE OF ADDRESS 9
SUBNO SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
UNKNOWN NATURE OF ADDRESS UNKNOWN
ORGTDIG ORIG. GLOBAL TITLE DIGITS
This parameter specifies the digits of the global title in the calling
party address of the SSP. The digits can be input in a structured
format.
Compatibilities:
- SSPGT = YES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b[-c]]
a: GT DIGITS FIRST PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
b: GT DIGITS SECOND PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
c: GT DIGITS THIRD PART=
1...8 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies a traffic type assigned to the Intelligent
Network service in the trigger profile. The traffic type is
evaluated after detection of an IN trigger.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INCAT IN CATEGORY
This parameter specifies branch categories for the digit translation.
Compatibilities:
- GENPROP=UINCAT.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 27+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CAT11 CATEGORY 11
own mobile subscriber
CAT12 CATEGORY 12
foreign mobile subscriber
CAT13 CATEGORY 13
fixed mobile subscriber
CAT14 CATEGORY 14
CAT15 CATEGORY 15
COINB COIN BOX
DATAINAT DATA XMISSION INTERNATIONAL
DATRANS DATA XMISSION NATIONAL
OPOS OPERATORS POSITION
OPOSINAT OPERATORS POS. INTERNATIONAL
SUBINAT ORDINARY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBORD ORDINARY SUBSCRIBER
SUBPINAT PRIORITY SUB INTERNATIONAL
SUBPRIOR PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTEQ TEST EQUIPMENT
This unit specifies the category for which the destination is
addressed.
GENPROP GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to the
Intelligent Network service execution to be added to the already
existing values.
Up to 40 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADPBIN ABBREV. DIALLING PROC. BY IN
[CLIREQ [ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[CONINH [ CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
[DPINH [ DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
[ [ The activation of internal detection points is
[ [ not allowed for the current service key. This
[ [ property is only relevant for the execution of
[ [ special services, e.g. international calls.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ENACPH [ ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
[EODREQ [ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
[FTALLOW [ FEATURE TRANSPARENCY ALLOWED
[FTRINH [ FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
[ [ Notes:
[ [ - For the protocol type SINAP1 this value
[ [ is set automatically.
[MCIHLD [ MCI HOLD REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MCIPRE [ MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MHNCLI [ MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ONLCHG [ ONLINE CHARGING
[PASSBA [ PASS B PTY CHARGE MSG TO A PTY
[PCNCHG [ PER CONNECTION CHARGING
[PROP18 [ PROPERTY 18
[ [ PPS Indication. It is evaluated to realize the
[ [ follwowing functionality:
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile indicates a PPS.
[ [ FALSE: In case of interworking between PPS and
[ [ CFNRc (detected after 2nd HLR
[ [ interrogation)
[ [ the T-CSI dialogue will be terminated.
[PROP19 [ PROPERTY 19
[ [ Changing from T-BCSM to O-BCSM
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 28+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ TRUE: Changing the BCSM is allowed.
[ [ FALSE: Changing the BCSM is not allowed.
[PROP20 [ PROPERTY 20
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile TDP12-
[ [ related profile. PROP20 is necessary to
[ [ distinguish between "Basic IN Services" and "IN
[ [ User subscribt Services" because both are triggert
[ [ via digit analysis.
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribed IN-MTC service, i.e. TDP12 is
[ [ send in the OP:IDP to the SCP (mapping of
[ [ TDP3 to TDP12).
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP21 [ PROPERTY 21
[ [ Cross phase compatibility between MAP- and CAP-
[ [ interface
[ [ TRUE: The protocol version is determined
[ [ according to the CAMEL phase supported on
[ [ the MAP interface.
[ [ FALSE: the protocol version is determined by the
[ [ ACN selector (parameter ACNSEL).
[PROP22 [ PROPERTY 22
[ [ Fall Back to Basic SMS MO
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile is used for SMS MO
[ [ and MOC.
[ [ FALSE: The trigger profile used for MOC only.
[PROP23 [ PROPERTY 23
[ [
[ [ Usage of CdPA or SMSC-address in Op:I_DP for SMS
[ [ MO
[ [ TRUE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMSC-
[ [ address as Called Party Address.
[ [ FALSE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMS
[ [ receiver address as Called Party Address.
[ [ (This property to be used with only if
[ [ PROP22 together)
[PROP24 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 24
[ [ Control of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: Tickets should not be generated.
[ [ FALSE: Tickets should be generated.
[PROP25 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 25
[ [ Prefixing of CdPA with CAC digits
[ [ TRUE: The digits received from A-side GP shall be
[ [ Prefixed with the received CAC (if any) and
[ [ the appropiate prefix for CAC dialing
[ [ FALSE: The digits received from A-side GP are send
[ [ unchanged in the C:IN_DATA to the BSSAP
[PROP26 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 26
[ [ Using of default zoning
[ [ TRUE: The ZONDA is called with the received
[ [ Digits to determine the charging zone or a
[ [ No charge indication (but not to overwrite
[ [ The AMA parameter)
[ [ False: The default zone from trigger profile
[ [ Is set in the CPB as local zoning result or
[ [ Chargefree indication is evaluated.
[PROP27 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 27
[ [
[ [ Interworking IN/CAMEL with CF
[ [ True: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Allowed.
[ [ False: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Not allowed.
[ [ The network provider can support the interworking
[ [ of CF with IN MOC service by setting General
[ [ Property 27 in the trigger profile of the IN MOC
[ [ service.
[PROP28 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 28
[ [ Fallback from CAP Ph3, CAP PH2 to CAP Ph1
[ [ TRUE: The AC negotioation on the CAP interface is
[ [ supported.
[ [ FALSE: AC negotiation on the CAP interface is not
[ [ possible.
[PROP29 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 29
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile as TDP2-
[ [ related profile
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 29+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ subscribt IN-MOC service, i.e TDP2 is send
[ [ in the OP:IDP to the SCP
[ [ FALSE: else
[ [ PROP29 is necessary for Overlay networks as it is
[ [ not possible to distinguish between "Basic IN-
[ [ Services" and "IN User Subscribed Services".
[PROP30 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 30
[ [ GSM-BC or ISDN-BC in Op:I_DP
[ [ TRUE: The ISUP Bearer Capability (BC) is used in
[ [ Op:Initial_DP.
[ [ FALSE: The GSM BC is used.
[PROP31 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 31
[ [ Ticket control by suppression of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: The SCP is allowed to suppress ticket
[ [ generation by sending "SuppressCITicket" in
[ [ The OP:SendChargingInfo
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP32 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 32
[ [ CAMEL Overlay. Possibility to to administrate a
[ [ prefix with MML CR INTRIG parameter CDAPRFX.
[ [ TRUE: (and CDPAPFX not empty) IN handling is
[ [ stopped, CAMEL relevant data is reset and a
[ [ digit anlaysis with the prefixed Called
[ [ Party Number is started
[ [ FALSE: Continiue normal IN handling
[PROP33 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 33
[ [ Mapping of Calling Party Number
[ [ True: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Calling Party Number ISUP o/g
[ [ IAM (only valid for ISUP-LTG)
[ [ False: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Generic Number (additional
[ [ Calling number) in ISUP o/g IAM
[PROP34 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 34
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ (see PROP35)
[PROP35 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 35
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 False: If CAC is dialed
[ [ Call is released
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 False: CAC will be ignored
[ [ For routing
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 True: Call will be
[ [ Rerouted via
[ [ Carrier network
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 True: PROP35 has priority
[PROP36 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 36
[ [ Suppression of DAS Announcement for PNS and
[ [ SNP/NTS
[ [ TRUE: PNS or SNP/NTS is active
[ [ FALSE: PNS or SNP/NTS is not active
[PROP37 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 37
[ [ Supply of Location Number
[ [ True: Supply the Location Number from ATD
[ [ False: Supply the Location Number from VLR number
[PROP38 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 38
[ [ Other Party Long_Number in MOC Record
[ [ True: Write "rerouted number" (from SCP) as other
[ [ party long number in MOC Record
[ [ False: Write "dialled number" as other party long
[ [ number in MOC Record
[PROP39 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 39
[RCNCLI [ REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
[ [ Prerequisites:
[ [ - The intercept identifier INANIF must have
[ [ been created by the command CR INC.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[SFINH [ SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
!UINCAT - USE IN CATEGORY
Compatibilities:
- INCAT must be specified.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 30+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CGENPROP CANCELED GENERAL PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the general properties related to the
Intelligent Network service execution to be canceled from the
existing trigger profile.
Up to 40 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ADPBIN ABBREV. DIALLING PROC. BY IN
[CLIREQ [ CALLING LINE ID. REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[CONINH [ CONGESTION CONTROL INHIBITED
[DPINH [ DETECTION POINTS INHIBITED
[ [ The activation of internal detection points is
[ [ not allowed for the current service key. This
[ [ property is only relevant for the execution of
[ [ special services, e.g. international calls.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ENACPH [ ENABLE CALL PARTY HANDLING
[EODREQ [ END OF DIALLING REQUESTED
[FTALLOW [ FEATURE TRANSPARENCY ALLOWED
[FTRINH [ FURTHER TRIGGERING INHIBITED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - FTRINH = FTRINH.
[MCIHLD [ MCI HOLD REQUESTED
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MCIPRE [ MALIC. CALL ID. PREP. REQ.
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[MHNCLI [ MCI HOLD IF NO CLI AVAILABLE
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[ONLCHG [ ONLINE CHARGING
[PASSBA [ PASS B PTY CHARGE MSG TO A PTY
[PCNCHG [ PER CONNECTION CHARGING
[PROP18 [ PROPERTY 18
[ [ PPS Indication. It is evaluated to realize the
[ [ follwowing functionality:
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile indicates a PPS.
[ [ FALSE: In case of interworking between PPS and
[ [ CFNRc (detected after 2nd HLR
[ [ interrogation)
[ [ the T-CSI dialogue will be terminated.
[PROP19 [ PROPERTY 19
[ [ Changing from T-BCSM to O-BCSM
[ [ TRUE: Changing the BCSM is allowed.
[ [ FALSE: Changing the BCSM is not allowed.
[PROP20 [ PROPERTY 20
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile TDP12-
[ [ related profile. PROP20 is necessary to
[ [ distinguish between "Basic IN Services" and "IN
[ [ User subscribt Services" because both are triggert
[ [ via digit analysis.
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribed IN-MTC service, i.e. TDP12 is
[ [ send in the OP:IDP to the SCP (mapping of
[ [ TDP3 to TDP12).
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP21 [ PROPERTY 21
[ [ Cross phase compatibility between MAP- and CAP-
[ [ interface
[ [ TRUE: The protocol version is determined
[ [ according to the CAMEL phase supported on
[ [ the MAP interface.
[ [ FALSE: the protocol version is determined by the
[ [ ACN selector (parameter ACNSEL).
[PROP22 [ PROPERTY 22
[ [ Fall Back to Basic SMS MO
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile is used for SMS MO
[ [ and MOC.
[ [ FALSE: The trigger profile used for MOC only.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 31+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[PROP23 [ PROPERTY 23
[ [
[ [ Usage of CdPA or SMSC-address in Op:I_DP for SMS
[ [ MO
[ [ TRUE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMSC-
[ [ address as Called Party Address.
[ [ FALSE: the InitialDP for SMS MO contains the SMS
[ [ receiver address as Called Party Address.
[ [ (This property to be used with only if
[ [ PROP22 together)
[PROP24 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 24
[ [ Control of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: Tickets should not be generated.
[ [ FALSE: Tickets should be generated.
[PROP25 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 25
[ [ Prefixing of CdPA with CAC digits
[ [ TRUE: The digits received from A-side GP shall be
[ [ Prefixed with the received CAC (if any) and
[ [ the appropiate prefix for CAC dialing
[ [ FALSE: The digits received from A-side GP are send
[ [ unchanged in the C:IN_DATA to the BSSAP
[PROP26 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 26
[ [ Using of default zoning
[ [ TRUE: The ZONDA is called with the received
[ [ Digits to determine the charging zone or a
[ [ No charge indication (but not to overwrite
[ [ The AMA parameter)
[ [ False: The default zone from trigger profile
[ [ Is set in the CPB as local zoning result or
[ [ Chargefree indication is evaluated.
[PROP27 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 27
[ [
[ [ Interworking IN/CAMEL with CF
[ [ True: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Allowed.
[ [ False: The interworking of CF with IN/CAMEL is
[ [ Not allowed.
[ [ The network provider can support the interworking
[ [ of CF with IN MOC service by setting General
[ [ Property 27 in the trigger profile of the IN MOC
[ [ service.
[PROP28 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 28
[ [ Fallback from CAP Ph3, CAP PH2 to CAP Ph1
[ [ TRUE: The AC negotioation on the CAP interface is
[ [ supported.
[ [ FALSE: AC negotiation on the CAP interface is not
[ [ possible.
[PROP29 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 29
[ [ Identification of the trigger profile as TDP2-
[ [ related profile
[ [ TRUE: The trigger profile corresponds to an user
[ [ subscribt IN-MOC service, i.e TDP2 is send
[ [ in the OP:IDP to the SCP
[ [ FALSE: else
[ [ PROP29 is necessary for Overlay networks as it is
[ [ not possible to distinguish between "Basic IN-
[ [ Services" and "IN User Subscribed Services".
[PROP30 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 30
[ [ GSM-BC or ISDN-BC in Op:I_DP
[ [ TRUE: The ISUP Bearer Capability (BC) is used in
[ [ Op:Initial_DP.
[ [ FALSE: The GSM BC is used.
[PROP31 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 31
[ [ Ticket control by suppression of ticket generation
[ [ TRUE: The SCP is allowed to suppress ticket
[ [ generation by sending "SuppressCITicket" in
[ [ The OP:SendChargingInfo
[ [ FALSE: else
[PROP32 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 32
[ [ CAMEL Overlay. Possibility to to administrate a
[ [ prefix with MML CR INTRIG parameter CDAPRFX.
[ [ TRUE: (and CDPAPFX not empty) IN handling is
[ [ stopped, CAMEL relevant data is reset and a
[ [ digit anlaysis with the prefixed Called
[ [ Party Number is started
[ [ FALSE: Continiue normal IN handling
[PROP33 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 33
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 32+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [ Mapping of Calling Party Number
[ [ True: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Calling Party Number ISUP o/g
[ [ IAM (only valid for ISUP-LTG)
[ [ False: Mapping of Calling Party Number from INAP
[ [ OP:CONNECT to Generic Number (additional
[ [ Calling number) in ISUP o/g IAM
[PROP34 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 34
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ (see PROP35)
[PROP35 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 35
[ [ CAC Handling for Prepaid Subscribers
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 False: If CAC is dialed
[ [ Call is released
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 False: CAC will be ignored
[ [ For routing
[ [ PROP34 False and PROP35 True: Call will be
[ [ Rerouted via
[ [ Carrier network
[ [ PROP34 True and PROP35 True: PROP35 has priority
[PROP36 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 36
[ [ Suppression of DAS Announcement for PNS and
[ [ SNP/NTS
[ [ TRUE: PNS or SNP/NTS is active
[ [ FALSE: PNS or SNP/NTS is not active
[PROP37 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 37
[ [ Supply of Location Number
[ [ True: Supply the Location Number from ATD
[ [ False: Supply the Location Number from VLR number
[PROP38 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 38
[ [ Other Party Long_Number in MOC Record
[ [ True: Write "rerouted number" (from SCP) as other
[ [ party long number in MOC Record
[ [ False: Write "dialled number" as other party long
[ [ number in MOC Record
[PROP39 [ SPECIAL PROPERTY 39
[RCNCLI [ REL. CALL IF NO CLI RETRIEVED
[ [ Prerequisites:
[ [ - The intercept identifier INANIF must have
[ [ been created by the command CR INC.
[ [
[ [ Incompatibilities:
[ [ - PROT = SINAP1.
[SFINH [ SERVICE FILTERING INHIBITED
!UINCAT - USE IN CATEGORY
Notes:
- If this value is specified the parameter UINCAT
will be initialized.
MOBPROP MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the mobile specific properties
related to the Intelligent Network service execution
to be added to the already existing values.
It is divided into common properties (0-23) and
project properties (24-31).
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFCPPPS CHARGE FREE CALL PHASE FOR PPS
This property is intended Prepaid
Services (PPS). Setting of this property will
inform the SCP, that the actual call phase has
lasted 0 seconds. This means that the call phase
in question is held free of charge.
This behaviour is available for SINAP and CAP
protocol.
TRUE - Actual call phase is held free of charge
FALSE - Actual call phase is not held free of charg
DEFCOMZO DEFAULT COMMON ZONING
If this property is set, zoning with
new digits from SCP is performed for
CAP protocol.
ENHACAP3 ENHANCED TDP3 HANDL. FOR CAP3
Allow ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 33+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RequestReportBCSM. The Camel Ph3 standard
3GPP 23.078 does not allow the operations
ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM for IN-dialogues triggered via
a D-CSI or N-CSI (TriggerDetectionPoint TDP3).
I.e. after reception of a Connect or a Continue
or ContinueWithArgument operation from the
SCP, D-CSI or N-CSI dialogue has to be closed.
Our SSP shall allow the usage of the above
mentioned operations also on a D-CSI or N-CSI
dialogue. Whether these operations are allowed or
not, shall be controllable with this Trigger
Profile Property. This property is checked
only if the CAP Ph3 protocol is used in case of
D-CSI or N-CSI triggered IN dialogues.
TRUE - allow operations
FALSE - inhibit operations
INPASS IN PARALLEL TO MOC ASSIGNMENT
If this property is set, the channel
assignment for MOC and IN-Dialogue are set up in
parallel.
MPROP08 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 8
MPROP09 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 9
MPROP10 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 10
MPROP11 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 11
MPROP12 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 12
MPROP13 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 13
MPROP14 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 14
MPROP15 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 15
MPROP16 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 16
MPROP17 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 17
MPROP18 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 18
MPROP19 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 19
MPROP20 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 20
MPROP21 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 21
MPROP22 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 22
MPROP23 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 23
NOEXTPAR NO EXT PARAM SENT BY SSP
If this property is set, the SSP sends
INAP-operations without Extension Parameters.
Notes:
- This property has no influence on Extension
Parameters sent by the SCP.
- If this property is not set, SCCP segmentation
has to be switched on.
PPROP00 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 0
SDDPFC Interworking, supply LOCNO from SCP-Address
in case of MOC:
True: Copy SCP-Address of SDDPFC Interface.
False: Dont copy.
PPROP01 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 1
PPROP02 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 2
PPROP03 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 3
PPROP04 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 4
PPROP05 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 5
PPROP06 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 6
PPROP07 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 7
SCPNSMSC SEND CLD PTY NO AND SMSC ADDR
The SSP provides the SMS Service Center Address
and Called Party Address for SMS MO Trigger
Feature with CAP Phase 1 to the SCP.
GENPROP = PROP23 determines, which parameters
are used to transmit the addresses.
SUPACMSG SUPPRESS ANSWER/CONNECT MSG
If this property is set, any ANSWER/CONNECT
message for that call section to Calling Party
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
SUPCHART SUPPRESS CHARGING TICKET
If this property is set, MOC/CF Charging Ticket
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 34+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
CMOBPROP CANCEL MOBSPECIFIC PROPERTIES
This parameter specifies the mobile specific properties
related to the Intelligent Network service execution
to be canceled from the already existing values.
It is divided into common properties (0-23)
and project properties (24-31).
Up to 32 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CFCPPPS CHARGE FREE CALL PHASE FOR PPS
This property is intended Prepaid
Services (PPS). Setting of this property will
inform the SCP, that the actual call phase has
lasted 0 seconds. This means that the call phase
in question is held free of charge.
This behaviour is available for SINAP and CAP
protocol.
TRUE - Actual call phase is held free of charge
FALSE - Actual call phase is not held free of charg
DEFCOMZO DEFAULT COMMON ZONING
If this property is set, zoning with
new digits from SCP is performed for
CAP protocol.
ENHACAP3 ENHANCED TDP3 HANDL. FOR CAP3
Allow ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM. The Camel Ph3 standard
3GPP 23.078 does not allow the operations
ApplyCharging, CallInformationRequest and
RequestReportBCSM for IN-dialogues triggered via
a D-CSI or N-CSI (TriggerDetectionPoint TDP3).
I.e. after reception of a Connect or a Continue
or ContinueWithArgument operation from the
SCP, D-CSI or N-CSI dialogue has to be closed.
Our SSP shall allow the usage of the above
mentioned operations also on a D-CSI or N-CSI
dialogue. Whether these operations are allowed or
not, shall be controllable with this Trigger
Profile Property. This property is checked
only if the CAP Ph3 protocol is used in case of
D-CSI or N-CSI triggered IN dialogues.
TRUE - allow operations
FALSE - inhibit operations
INPASS IN PARALLEL TO MOC ASSIGNMENT
If this property is set, the channel
assignment for MOC and IN-Dialogue are set up in
parallel.
MPROP08 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 8
MPROP09 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 9
MPROP10 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 10
MPROP11 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 11
MPROP12 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 12
MPROP13 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 13
MPROP14 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 14
MPROP15 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 15
MPROP16 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 16
MPROP17 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 17
MPROP18 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 18
MPROP19 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 19
MPROP20 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 20
MPROP21 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 21
MPROP22 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 22
MPROP23 MOBILE SPECIFIC PROPERTY 23
NOEXTPAR NO EXT PARAM SENT BY SSP
If this property is set, the SSP sends
INAP-operations without Extension Parameters.
Notes:
- This property has no influence on Extension
Parameters sent by the SCP.
- If this property is not set, SCCP segmentation
has to be switched on.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 35+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PPROP00 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 0
SDDPFC Interworking, supply LOCNO from SCP-Address
in case of MOC:
True: Copy SCP-Address of SDDPFC Interface.
False: Dont copy.
PPROP01 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 1
PPROP02 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 2
PPROP03 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 3
PPROP04 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 4
PPROP05 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 5
PPROP06 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 6
PPROP07 MOBILE PROJECT PROPERTY 7
SCPNSMSC SEND CLD PTY NO AND SMSC ADDR
The SSP provides the SMS Service Center Address
and Called Party Address for SMS MO Trigger
Feature with CAP Phase 1 to the SCP.
GENPROP = PROP23 determines, which parameters
are used to transmit the addresses.
SUPACMSG SUPPRESS ANSWER/CONNECT MSG
If this property is set, any ANSWER/CONNECT
message for that call section to Calling Party
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
SUPCHART SUPPRESS CHARGING TICKET
If this property is set, MOC/CF Charging Ticket
will be suppressed.
Prerequisites:
- SCP (CAP or SINAP7M+ prot) has to send in OP:CTR
OP:ETC the BothwayThroughConnectIndicator (BTCI)
= NOT_REQUIRED. BTCI is an subparameter of
SIITwo (ServiceInteractionIndicator 2).
EODRAN END OF DIALLING RANGE
This parameter specifies a minimal number of dialled digits
and a maximal number of dialled digits to have a general
end of dialling condition.
This parameter is evaluated only if GENPROP=EODREQ is set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: MIN=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: MAX=
0...28, range of decimal numbers
Default: 28
IWRULE INTERWORKING RULE
This parameter is used to control the interworking of IN
with basic network features. The first unit addresses the set
of default values for the Service Interaction Indicator (SII)
to be applied if the SCP did not send any. The second unit
specifies the interaction level which is applied for the
control of the SIIs influence on this interworking
(project specific).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SERVICE INTERACTION INDICATOR INDEX=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 36+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: INTERACTION LEVEL=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
RELEASE RELEASE REQUIRED INDICATOR
This parameter specifies a value to decide whether an Intelligent
Network call has to be released in the case that a protocol
abnormality occurs.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
NO RELEASE NOT REQUIRED
Y RELEASE REQUIRED
YES RELEASE REQUIRED
CHGINF DEFAULT CHARGING INFORMATION
This parameter specifies the charging information in case no
information about how to charge an Intelligent Network call
was sent by the partner SCP.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CHARGE INFORMATION
NOCHAR NO CHARGE
NOINTV NO INTERVENTION BY IN
REJECT REJECT THE CALL
ZONE CHARGE BY ZONE
unit b is required
b: ZONE NUMBER=
0...511, range of decimal numbers
Compatibilities:
- ZONE is entered for the first unit.
CHGPROF CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies the charging profile that is applied
when an IN service request was detected with an originating
line trigger.
The charging profile determines the billing registration
method and - in the case of metering - the subscriber charge
counters CNTR1 .. CNTR5.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PROF0 PROFILE 0
No billing registration.
PROF1 PROFILE 1
Automatic Message Accounting.
PROF10 PROFILE 10
Metering on charge counters 1&5.
PROF11 PROFILE 11
Metering on charge counters 2&3.
PROF12 PROFILE 12
Metering on charge counters 2&4.
PROF13 PROFILE 13
Metering on charge counters 2&5.
PROF14 PROFILE 14
Metering on charge counters 3&4.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 37+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PROF15 PROFILE 15
Metering on charge counters 3&5.
PROF16 PROFILE 16
Metering on charge counters 4&5.
PROF17 PROFILE 17
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3.
PROF18 PROFILE 18
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4.
PROF19 PROFILE 19
Metering on charge counters 1&2&5.
PROF2 PROFILE 2
Metering on charge counter 1.
PROF20 PROFILE 20
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4.
PROF21 PROFILE 21
Metering on charge counters 1&3&5.
PROF22 PROFILE 22
Metering on charge counters 1&4&5.
PROF23 PROFILE 23
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4.
PROF24 PROFILE 24
Metering on charge counters 2&3&5.
PROF25 PROFILE 25
Metering on charge counters 2&4&5.
PROF26 PROFILE 26
Metering on charge counters 3&4&5.
PROF27 PROFILE 27
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4.
PROF28 PROFILE 28
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&5.
PROF29 PROFILE 29
Metering on charge counters 1&2&4&5.
PROF3 PROFILE 3
Metering on charge counter 2.
PROF30 PROFILE 30
Metering on charge counters 1&3&4&5.
PROF31 PROFILE 31
Metering on charge counters 2&3&4&5.
PROF32 PROFILE 32
Metering on charge counters 1&2&3&4&5.
PROF4 PROFILE 4
Metering on charge counter 3.
PROF5 PROFILE 5
Metering on charge counter 4.
PROF6 PROFILE 6
Metering on charge counter 5.
PROF7 PROFILE 7
Metering on charge counters 1&2.
PROF8 PROFILE 8
Metering on charge counters 1&3.
PROF9 PROFILE 9
Metering on charge counters 1&4.
CCHGPROF CANCEL CHARGING PROFILE
This parameter specifies if the charging profile shall be
cancelled.
Incompatibilities:
- PROT = SINAP1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
NO PROFILE REMAINS UNCHANGED
Y CANCEL PROFILE
YES CANCEL PROFILE
DACTINC DEACTIV. SERV. INTERCEPT ID.
This parameter specifies the intercept code selected in case the
Intelligent Network service is in status inactive.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SNA0 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 0
SNA1 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 1
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 38+
MOD INTRIG
SPC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SNA2 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 2
SNA3 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 3
SNA4 SERVICE NOT ACTIVE 4
SSFTIMER SSF TIMER
This parameter specifies the time, in which the answer
from SCP/SCF is expected, in steps of 100ms.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
Default: 100
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD INTRIG- 39-
TEST IO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT SYSTEM
This command tests all input/output processors and O&M equipment
which are active.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST IO : [SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST IO- 1-
CAN IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command cancels the input/output controllers IOC-2 and IOC-3.
Prerequisites:
- Both input/output controllers must be PLA.
- All input/output processors must be cancelled first.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN IOC : IOC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This parameter specifies one of the input/output controllers to be
cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IOC- 1-
CONF IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command configures an input/output controller.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL and the configuration from
MBL or UNA to ACT is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF IOC : IOC= ,OST= [,DIAG=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be
configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
DIAG DIAGNOSIS
This parameter allows diagnosis of the input/output controller
before configuring it from MBL or UNA to ACT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
NO CONFIGURE WITHOUT DIAGNOSIS
Y CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
YES CONFIGURE WITH DIAGNOSIS
Default: YES
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF IOC- 1-
CR IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command creates a second pair of input/output controllers (IOC-2/3).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR IOC : IOC= ,PBI= ,IOCR= ,PBIR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3, range of decimal numbers
PBI PHYSICAL BUS INTERFACE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
input/output controller.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location
of the input/output controller specified by parameter IOC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...15, range of decimal numbers
IOCR REDUNDANT IOC
This parameter specifies the redundant input/output controller to be
created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3, range of decimal numbers
PBIR PBI OF REDUNDANT IOC
This parameter specifies the physical bus interface number of the
redundant input/output processor.
Notes:
- The physical bus interface number depends on the mounting location of
the redundant input/output controller specified by parameter IOCR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...15, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IOC- 1-
DIAG IOC
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for an input/output controller.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output controller must be MBL.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG IOC - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG IOC - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an input/output controller.
The diagnosis includes a BCMY interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG IOC : IOC= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG IOC- 1+
DIAG IOC
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for an
input/output controller. The diagnosis does not include a BCMY
interface test.

[ [
[ DIAG IOC : IOC= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG IOC- 2-
DISP IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command displays all input/output processors attached
to the input/output controller and their associated bus
connection numbers.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IOC : IOC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOC- 1-
TEST IOC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
This command tests an input/output controller.
Prerequisites:
-
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST IOC : [IOC=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active input/output
processors are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST IOC- 1-
CAN IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command cancels an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
-
- All devices on this input/output processor must be cancelled.
Notes:
- IOPUNI-0/1 with the initial loading devices can neither
be created nor cancelled.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPAUC IOP FOR AUTHENTICATION CENTER
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IOP- 1-
CONF IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command configures an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
- The input/output processor must have been created.
- Load file SY.PSW.Tnnn (nnn = load type) must exist
on disk if IOPLAU or IOPUNI is to be entered subsequently.
Notes:
-
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF IOP : IOP= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the type and number of the processor
to be configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMDD IOP FOR MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPTA IOP FOR TIMER AND ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPAUC IOP FOR AUTHENTICATION CENTER
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state of the input/output
processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF IOP- 1-
CR IOP
IOPAUC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command creates a new input/output processor.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR IOP - IOPAUC CREATE IOPAUC
2. CR IOP - IOPLAU CREATE IOPLAU
3. CR IOP - IOPMB CREATE IOPMB
4. CR IOP - IOPUNI CREATE IOPUNI
5. CR IOP - SPEC CREATE IOPMTD,IOPSCDV,IOPSCDX
1. Input format
CREATE IOPAUC
This input creates an input/output processor for
an Authentication Center.

[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller number
associated with the input/output processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
BIOC IOC BUS CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter assigns the input/output processor to the bus
connection number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor connected
to the input/output controller.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPAUC IOP FOR AUTHENTICATION CENTER
b: IOP NUMBER=
0,1,2...11, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IOP- 1+
CR IOP
IOPLAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE IOPLAU
This input creates an input/output processor for a link
adaption unit

[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ,IOPR= ,BIOCR= [,LOADTP=] [
[ [
[ [,LDPRTY=] [,EAI=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller number
associated with the input/output processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
BIOC IOC BUS CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter assigns the input/output processor to the bus
connection number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor connected
to the input/output controller.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
b: IOP NUMBER=
0,1,2...11, range of decimal numbers
IOPR REDUNDANT IOP
This parameter specifies the number of the redundant input/output
processor for a redundant input/output processor.
Notes:
- This input/output processor must be connected to the redundant
input/output controller specified by the IOC parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TYPE OF REDUNDANT IOP
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
b: NUMBER OF REDUNDANT IOP=
0,1,2...11, range of decimal numbers
BIOCR REDUNDANT B:IOC CONNECTION NO.
This parameter assigns the redundant input/output processor
to the bus connection number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IOP- 2+
CR IOP
IOPLAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0...15, range of decimal numbers
LOADTP LOAD TYPE
This parameter defines the load file name.
Notes:
- The file name SY.PSW.TNNN is derived from load type NNN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
100,101,102...120, range of decimal numbers
Default: 100
LDPRTY LOAD PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the load priority.
Notes:
- The load priority specifies the moment during system recovery
(initial start with reloading of the LTGs) at which the IOPLAU
is loaded.
The loading of a high priority IOPLAU delays the start of call
processing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HIGH HIGH LOAD PRIORITY
Loading of high priority IOPLAUs
before or during loading of LTGs.
LOW LOW LOAD PRIORITY
Loading of low priority IOPLAUs
after loading of LTGs and start of
call processing.
Default: LOW
EAI EMERGENCY ACTION INTERFACE
This Parameter assigns the functionality "Emergency Action Interface"
to an input/output processor.
Notes:
- Only one pair of IOPLAU can have the EAI ability.
- The IOP for EAI can only be created at the B:IOC number 11
(parameter BIOC) of IOC-0/1.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO EAI FUNCTIONALITY
NO NO EAI FUNCTIONALITY
Y EAI FUNCTIONALITY
YES EAI FUNCTIONALITY
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IOP- 3+
CR IOP
IOPMB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CREATE IOPMB
This input creates an input/output processor
for a message buffer.

[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ,SUBST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller number
associated with the input/output processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
BIOC IOC BUS CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter assigns the input/output processor to the bus
connection number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor connected
to the input/output controller.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
b: IOP NUMBER=
0,1,2...43, range of decimal numbers
SUBST SUBSTITUTE FOR IOP MSG BUFFER
This parameter specifies the substitute input/output processor
for the message buffer.
Notes:
- This parameter must only be specified in connection with this
processor type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
b: IOP NUMBER=
0,1,2...43, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IOP- 4+
CR IOP
IOPUNI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CREATE IOPUNI
This input creates an input/output processor unified for O&M devices.
Notes:
- IOPUNI-0/1 with the initial loading devices can neither be
created nor be cancelled.

[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= [,LOADTP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller number
associated with the input/output processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
BIOC IOC BUS CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter assigns the input/output processor to the bus
connection number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor connected
to the input/output controller.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
b: IOP NUMBER=
2,3,4...7, range of decimal numbers
LOADTP LOAD TYPE
This parameter defines the load file name.
Notes:
- The file name SY.PSW.TNNN is derived from load type NNN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
121,122,123...140, range of decimal numbers
Default: 121
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IOP- 5+
CR IOP
SPEC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
CREATE IOPMTD,IOPSCDV,IOPSCDX
This input creates an input/output processor for:
- an OMT/operator terminal
- an operator terminal
- a MTD

[ [
[ CR IOP : IOC= ,BIOC= ,IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the input/output controller number
associated with the input/output processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
BIOC IOC BUS CONNECTION NUMBER
This parameter assigns the input/output processor to the bus
connection number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor connected
to the input/output controller.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
b: IOP NUMBER=
0,1,2...5, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IOP- 6-
DIAG IOP
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for an input/output processor.
Prerequisites:
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG IOP - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG IOP - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for an input/output processor.

[ [
[ DIAG IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPAUC IOP FOR AUTHENTICATION CENTER
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP FOR MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
Prerequisites:
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring
must be inserted in the magnetic tape device.
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPTA IOP FOR TIMER AND ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG IOP- 1+
DIAG IOP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for an
input/output processor.

[ [
[ DIAG IOP : IOP= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPAUC IOP FOR AUTHENTICATION CENTER
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPMDD IOP FOR MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
Prerequisites:
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring
must be inserted in the magnetic tape device.
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPTA IOP FOR TIMER AND ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- If the parameter is omitted there is no statistic output.
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG IOP- 2+
DIAG IOP
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG IOP- 3-
DISP IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command displays the operating state of the specified input/output
processor, the associated input/output controller, the connection number on
the B:IOC, the connected devices and the redundant partner for an IOPMB.
Additional information for IOPLAU: number and operating state of the
link adaption unit, load type and load priority of the IOPLAU and
the number of the redundant input/output processor.
Additional information for IOPUNI: load type and information whether
system or init part of the flash memory is used. During normal operation
code of system part is used. Code of init part is used during hardware
recovery of CP (basic input/output function) or in case of a missing or
destroyed system part.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMDD IOP FOR MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPTA IOP FOR TIMER AND ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPAUC IOP FOR AUTHENTICATION CENTER
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOP- 1-
TEST IOP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This command tests one or all input/output processors of one
type.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST IOP : IOP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to be tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPSCDV IOP FOR OMT/CSC
IOPSCDX IOP FOR CSC
IOPMDD IOP FOR MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
IOPMB IOP FOR MESSAGE BUFFER
IOPTA IOP FOR TIMER AND ALARM
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPAUC IOP FOR AUTHENTICATION CENTER
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST IOP- 1-
CONF IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE IOP GROUP
This command configures the input/output processor group belonging to
the specified input/output controller.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF IOPG : IOC= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state of the input/output
processor group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF IOPG- 1-
DIAG IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE IOP GROUP
This command initiates diagnosis of the input/output processor group
belonging to the specified input/output controller.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG IOPG : IOC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG IOPG- 1-
TEST IOPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST IOP GROUP
This command tests an input/output processor group on the specified
input/output controller. All active input/output processors are tested.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST IOPG : IOC= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOC INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST IOPG- 1-
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP IOP MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of IOP
platforms or of the corresponding load library on system disk.
If UNIT = DISK is entered, the specified address range to be
dumped will be read from load library.
To dump contents of a platforms memory, select the appropriate
platform using parameter PLF.
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [PLF= [ [
[ DMP IOPIMDMP : UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the platform number.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
This parameter specifies the system unit.
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the IOP loadlib
at the specified address range will be performed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISK REQUEST READ FROM DISK
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter defines the address (range) of the memory
content to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either an address range is entered with ADDR,
or, if only the start address is given, you have to specify
the length of the dump using parameter LENGTH.
Following inputs are possible:
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e capsule,
SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters each), plus a
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP- 1+
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
distance within the module
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter "H" and a
single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
Notes:
module names have to be entered always in combination with
the corresponding SPU names.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name (i.e.
the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
- Address ranges must be specified by entering the start address
and the upper limit, separated by "&&".
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The capsule name has to be entered with the start address only and
must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
The upper limit of an address range may be specified in
relation to the lower limit in the following way:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HCF"
The second address is interpreted as number of bytes to be dumped if
it begins with the character plus ("+").
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label is
preceded by the letter "L" and a single quote:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0"&&"+H28"
Up to 5 different address ranges may be entered, concatenated by "&".
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
This parameter provides the length of a single chained
element of a linked list, or, in case of a linear dump,
the number of bytes which shall be dumped if only a start
address is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP- 2+
DMP IOPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the format type of the output.
If HEX is chosen an output in hexadecimal form will be
produced, in case of ASCII the output will contain ASCII
characters additionally to the hex output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HEX HEXADECIMAL OUTPUT
SYMBOL SYMBOLIC OUTPUT
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP IOPIMDMP- 3-
ACT IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action AM (Activate in Memory) in
parallel on all respective platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT IOPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IOPPRPCH- 1-
CAN IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IOP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Permanent
Patches on disk implicitly deactivating them in the memory on all
platforms in operation. Successful execution of the command
results in execution of the atomic actions DUD
(Deupdate on Disk), DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CD (Cancel
on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN IOPPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IOPPRPCH- 1-
DACT IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic actions DUD (Deupdate on Disk) and
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) in parallel on all respective
platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT IOPPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT IOPPRPCH- 1-
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IOP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on disk and patch states concerning
Permanent Patches for all platform(s) in operation specified
by parameter PLF.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
If ID = X is entered, parameter LIB is also required.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ID= [ [
[ DISP IOPPRPCH : ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified capsule and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname" or
ID="capsname.*" or
ID="capsname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPPRPCH- 1+
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPPRPCH- 2+
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPPRPCH- 3+
DISP IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOTENTER NEITHER ENTERING NOR ENTERED
HIT HIT
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
NOTUPD OTHER THAN UPDATED
PARTACT PARTLY ACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
UPD UPDATED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPPRPCH- 4-
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IOP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Permanent Patch into the
patch administration on disk. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic action ED (Enter on
Disk).
With each ENTR IOPPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatch types can be entered:
- Insert Rucksack Subpatches using parameter INSRADDR
- Replace Subpatches using parameter REPADDR
- Insert Procedure Subpatches using parameter INSPREF
- Insert Variable Subpatches using parameter INSVREF
The subpatch types can be entered in the form of subpatches
belonging to a specified Patch ID. Under one specified Patch ID
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR IOPPRPCH command is
necessary.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO.
All Subpatches with the exception of Insert Variable can be
entered in subpatch parts for each part using an individual
ENTR IOPPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Procedure Subpatches are referred to the same patch address.
The concatenation of those subpatch parts is supported by
means of parameter SUBPPART.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,INSRADDR=[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR IOPPRPCH : ID= ,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= [
[ [,INSVREF= [ [
[ [,SUBPCHNO=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
subpatch part is entered for a certain patch the identifier
must be identical.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSRADDR INSERT RUCKSACK SUBPATCH ADDR.
This parameter provides the insert rucksack subpatch
address. The address format is an interval within the
module boundaries in the form of begin address and end
address (linked by &&) whereby the latter may be given as a
distance relative to the begin address. At the begin address
the instruction is replaced by a branch instruction for jumping
to the respective rucksack. The end address serves as
continuation address from which the program will continue
after the rucksack code has been executed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH- 1+
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The old instruction (6 Byte), overwritten by the branch
instruction, is at users own risk to add to the rucksack
or not.
An address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
INSRADDR="offset+distance" or
INSRADDR="label+distance",
&&"spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"label+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address, where address can
be specified in the same way as described for the first part
of INSRADDR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSPREF INSERT PROCED. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert procedure subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert procedure.
The inserted procedure is only visible within the defining
patch. The number <n> serves to address the inserted
procedure within other subpatches of the defining patch.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSVREF INSERT VARIAB. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert variable subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert variable and the length of the variable in bytes.
The inserted variable is only visible within the defining
patch.
e.g.: INSVREF="IV5"-50
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: "INSERT VARIABLE" SUBPATCH REFERENCE=
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH- 2+
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit serves to address the inserted variable
within other subpatches of the defining patch.
b: LENGTH OF INSERT VARIABLE IN BYTES=
1...4096, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the length of the variable to be
declared.
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR IOPPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...59, range of decimal numbers
SUBPPART ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART
This parameter characterizes a part of a subpatch. A subpatch
of a Permanent Patch may, for some reason, have more than one
part in the case of Insert Rucksack Subpatch, Permanent
Replace Subpatch, or Insert Procedure Subpatch.
e.g.: SUBPPART="partcounter-lastsign"
The partcounter denotes the subpatch part sequence number
and serves as concatenation controller.
The lastsign denotes either the last or not last part of a
subpatch.
If SUBPPART is omitted, e.g., typical proceeding in case
of a short subpatch consisting of only one part, the default
value 1-LAST is assumed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART TO BE ENTERED=
1...999, range of decimal numbers
This unit denotes the subpatch part sequence number.
b: INDICATOR THAT LAST PART OF SUBPATCH IS ENTERED
NOTLAST NOT LAST SUBPATCH PART
LAST LAST SUBPATCH PART
This unit denotes either last or not last part.
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
Must not be used for Insert Variable or Insert Procedure
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH- 3+
ENTR IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IOPPRPCH- 4-
UPD IOPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE IOP PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can update one or more Permanent
Patches on disk, whereby they are implicitly activated in
memory on all active platforms. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic actions
AM (Activate in Memory) and UD (Update on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ UPD IOPPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 UPD IOPPRPCH- 1-
ACT IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
AM (Activate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT IOPTRPCH- 1-
CAN IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform by implicitly
deactivating them in the memory on this platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution of
the atomic actions DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CM (Cancel
in Memory) on the respective platform in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IOPTRPCH- 1-
DACT IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT IOPTRPCH- 1-
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on the individual platform and patch
states concerning Transient Patches for a specified platform in
operation.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
If ID = X is entered, parameter LIB is also required.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,ID= [ [
[ DISP IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified capsule and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname" or
ID="capsname.*" or
ID="capsname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPTRPCH- 1+
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPTRPCH- 2+
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPTRPCH- 3+
DISP IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IOPTRPCH- 4-
ENTR IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER IOP TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Transient Patch into the
patch administration on a platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action EM (Enter into Memory) on the
respective platform in operation.
With each ENTR IOPTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
Subpatch can be entered by using parameter REPADDR.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO. For each subpatch of a patch a new
ENTR IOPTRPCH command is necessary.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR IOPTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the IOP platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: PLATFORM TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
IOPLAU IOP FOR LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...43, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the IOP number.
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
entered for a certain patch the identifier must be
identical.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address.
e.g.: REPADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
REPADDR="offset+distance" or
REPADDR="label+distance",
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IOPTRPCH- 1+
ENTR IOPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR IOPTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...118, range of decimal numbers
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR IOPTRPCH- 2-
CAN IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL AN IP-ADDRESS
This command cancels an IP-address which has been created
by CR IPADR
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN IPADR : ADRNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of an IP-address.
Note:
- The first three characters must be IPA.
Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IPADR- 1-
CR IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE AN IP-ADDRESS
This command creates a new IP-address.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR IPADR : ADRNAM= [,IPADR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of an IP-address.
Note:
- The first three characters must be IPA.
Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
IPADR ADDRESS VALUE
This parameter specifies the value of the remote IP-address.
Note:
- The parameter IPADR is defined in that way that either an
IPv4 or an IPv6 value can be entered.
- An IPv4 address has four units : V1-V2-V3-V4, where each
Vx (x=1..4) is defined as a range of 0..255. Always all
four units must be entered.
- For an IPv6 address only the first unit can be entered.
- An IPv6 address consist of 8 components with the following
format : V1&V2&V3&V4&V5&V6&V7&V8 where each Vx (x=1..8) is
defined as a range of 0..FFFF. Always all eight components
must be entered.
- In case of a local IP address no IPADR can be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: ADDRESS VALUE1=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: ADDRESS VALUE2=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
c: ADDRESS VALUE3=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
d: ADDRESS VALUE4=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IPADR- 1-
DISP IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY IP-ADDRESSES
This command displays information about one or all defined
IP-address(es).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IPADR : ADRNAM= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of an IP-address.
Note:
- If x is entered the information of all IP-addresses is
displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IPADR- 1-
MOD IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY IP-ADDRESS
This command modifies a remote IP-address which has been created
by CR IPADR.
Note:
- A local IP-address cannot be modified.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD IPADR : ADRNAM= ,OIPADR= ,NIPADR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ADRNAM ADDRESS NAME
This parameter specifies the symbolic name of an IP-address.
Note:
- The first three characters must be IPA.
Any characters can be chosen for the rest of the name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OIPADR OLD ADDRESS VALUE
This parameter specifies the old value of the remote IP-address.
Notes:
- The parameter OIPADR allows a value of format IPv4 or IPv6.
- An IPv4 address has four units : V1-V2-V3-V4, where each
Vx (x=1..4) is defined as a range of 0..255. Always all
four units must be entered.
- For an IPv6 address only the first unit can be entered.
- An IPv6 address consist of 8 components with the following
format : V1&V2&V3&V4&V5&V6&V7&V8 where each Vx (x=1..8) is
defined as a range of 0..FFFF. Always all eight components
must be entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OLD ADDRESS VALUE1=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: OLD ADDRESS VALUE2=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
c: OLD ADDRESS VALUE3=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
d: OLD ADDRESS VALUE4=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
NIPADR NEW ADDRESS VALUE
This parameter specifies the new value of the remote IP-address.
Note:
- The parameter NIPADR allows a value of format IPv4 or IPv6.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IPADR- 1+
MOD IPADR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: NEW ADDRESS VALUE1=
1...4 characters from the
symbolic name character set
b: NEW ADDRESS VALUE2=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
c: NEW ADDRESS VALUE3=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
d: NEW ADDRESS VALUE4=
0...255, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IPADR- 2-
CAN IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT
This command cancels an Interworking Equipment.
Prerequisites:
- An Interworking Equipment must be allocated at the specified location.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN IWE : DLU= ,MOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IWE- 1-
CR IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT
This command creates an Interworking Equipment.
Prerequisites:
- The module must be created (see CR DLUMOD).
- No Interworking Equipment has been created at this location yet.
Compatibilities:
- Up to 500 Interworking Equipments can be created.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR IWE : DLU= ,MOD= ,CONNTYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
CONNTYPE CONNECTION TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of connection types
which are supported by the Interworking Equipment.
Compatibilities:
- For the module type IWEA only the following
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IWE- 1+
CR IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DNA48
DNA96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
- For the module type IWEB only the following
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
- For the module type IWEC only the following
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
ANS12
ANS24
ANS48
ANS96
ANA03A
ANA12A
ANA24A
ANA48A
ANA96A
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
DNS12
DNS24
DNS48
DNS96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
- For the module type IWED only the following
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IWE- 2+
CR IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
ANS12
ANS24
ANS48
ANS96
ANA03A
ANA12A
ANA24A
ANA48A
ANA96A
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
DNS12
DNS24
DNS48
DNS96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
- For the module type IWEE only the following
connection types are allowed:
AAH2
ATA03
ATA12
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
ANS12
ANS24
ANS48
ANS96
ANA03A
ANA12A
ANA24A
ANA48A
ANA96A
DAH2
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IWE- 3+
CR IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DNS12
DNS24
DNS48
DNS96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ATA03 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 300 BIT/S
ATA12 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
ATA1275 ANALOG TRANS ASY 1200/75 BIT/S
ATA24 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
ATA48 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
ATA96 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
ANA03 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 300 BIT/S
ANA12 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
ANA1275 ANALOG NONTR ASY 1200/75 BIT/S
ANA24 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
ANA48 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
ANA96 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
ANS12 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 1200 BIT/S
ANS24 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 2400 BIT/S
ANS48 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 4800 BIT/S
ANS96 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 9600 BIT/S
ANA03A ANA 300 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA12A ANA 1200 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA24A ANA 2400 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA48A ANA 4800 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA96A ANA 9600 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
DTA03 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 300 BIT/S
DTA12 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
DTA24 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
DTA48 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
DTA96 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
DNA03 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 300 BIT/S
DNA12 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
DNA24 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
DNA48 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
DNA96 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
DNS12 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 1200 BIT/S
DNS24 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 2400 BIT/S
DNS48 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 4800 BIT/S
DNS96 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 9600 BIT/S
F3T24 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 2400 BIT/S
F3T48 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 4800 BIT/S
F3T96 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 9600 BIT/S
AAH2 ANALOG ASYNC HSCSD 2 TCH
DAH2 DIGITAL ASYNC HSCSD 2 TCH
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IWE- 4-
DISP IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT
This command displays one or more Interworking Equipments.
Prerequisites:
- If the command is entered to display only one IWE, then an
Interworking Equipment must be allocated at the specified location.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP IWE : DLU= ,MOD= [,CONNTYPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies the DLU.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
CONNTYPE CONNECTION TYPE
This parameter specifies a set of connection types. Only the
IWEs with at least one of the specified connection types will be
displayed.
If the connection type is not entered, then all IWEs in the
specified range are displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ATA03 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 300 BIT/S
ATA12 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
ATA1275 ANALOG TRANS ASY 1200/75 BIT/S
ATA24 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
ATA48 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
ATA96 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IWE- 1+
DISP IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ANA03 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 300 BIT/S
ANA12 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
ANA1275 ANALOG NONTR ASY 1200/75 BIT/S
ANA24 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
ANA48 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
ANA96 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
ANS12 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 1200 BIT/S
ANS24 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 2400 BIT/S
ANS48 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 4800 BIT/S
ANS96 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 9600 BIT/S
ANA03A ANA 300 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA12A ANA 1200 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA24A ANA 2400 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA48A ANA 4800 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA96A ANA 9600 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
DTA03 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 300 BIT/S
DTA12 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
DTA24 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
DTA48 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
DTA96 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
DNA03 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 300 BIT/S
DNA12 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
DNA24 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
DNA48 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
DNA96 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
DNS12 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 1200 BIT/S
DNS24 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 2400 BIT/S
DNS48 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 4800 BIT/S
DNS96 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 9600 BIT/S
F3T24 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 2400 BIT/S
F3T48 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 4800 BIT/S
F3T96 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 9600 BIT/S
AAH2 ANALOG ASYNC HSCSD 2 TCH
DAH2 DIGITAL ASYNC HSCSD 2 TCH
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IWE- 2-
MOD IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT
This command modifies an Interworking Equipment.
Prerequisites:
- An Interworking Equipment must be allocated at the specified location.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD IWE : DLU= ,MOD= ,CONNTYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies the DLU.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
CONNTYPE CONNECTION TYPE
This parameter specifies the set of connection types
which are supported by the Interworking Equipment.
Compatibilities:
- For the module type IWEA only the following
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
F3T24
F3T48
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IWE- 1+
MOD IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
F3T96
- For the module type IWEB only the following
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
- For the module type IWEC only the following
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
ANS12
ANS24
ANS48
ANS96
ANA03A
ANA12A
ANA24A
ANA48A
ANA96A
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
DNS12
DNS24
DNS48
DNS96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
- For the module type IWED only the following
connection types are allowed:
ATA03
ATA12
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IWE- 2+
MOD IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
ANS12
ANS24
ANS48
ANS96
ANA03A
ANA12A
ANA24A
ANA48A
ANA96A
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
DNS12
DNS24
DNS48
DNS96
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
- For the module type IWEE only the following
connection types are allowed:
AAH2
ATA03
ATA12
ATA1275
ATA24
ATA48
ATA96
ANA03
ANA12
ANA1275
ANA24
ANA48
ANA96
ANS12
ANS24
ANS48
ANS96
ANA03A
ANA12A
ANA24A
ANA48A
ANA96A
DAH2
DTA03
DTA12
DTA24
DTA48
DTA96
DNA03
DNA12
DNA24
DNA48
DNA96
DNS12
DNS24
DNS48
DNS96
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IWE- 3+
MOD IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
F3T24
F3T48
F3T96
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ATA03 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 300 BIT/S
ATA12 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
ATA1275 ANALOG TRANS ASY 1200/75 BIT/S
ATA24 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
ATA48 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
ATA96 ANALOG TRANSP ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
ANA03 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 300 BIT/S
ANA12 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
ANA1275 ANALOG NONTR ASY 1200/75 BIT/S
ANA24 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
ANA48 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
ANA96 ANALOG NONTRA ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
ANS12 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 1200 BIT/S
ANS24 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 2400 BIT/S
ANS48 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 4800 BIT/S
ANS96 ANALOG NONTRA SYNCH 9600 BIT/S
ANA03A ANA 300 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA12A ANA 1200 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA24A ANA 2400 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA48A ANA 4800 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
ANA96A ANA 9600 BIT/S AUTOBAUD TYPE 1
DTA03 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 300 BIT/S
DTA12 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
DTA24 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
DTA48 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
DTA96 DIGITA TRANSP ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
DNA03 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 300 BIT/S
DNA12 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 1200 BIT/S
DNA24 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 2400 BIT/S
DNA48 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 4800 BIT/S
DNA96 DIGITA NONTRA ASYNC 9600 BIT/S
DNS12 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 1200 BIT/S
DNS24 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 2400 BIT/S
DNS48 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 4800 BIT/S
DNS96 DIGITA NONTRA SYNCH 9600 BIT/S
F3T24 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 2400 BIT/S
F3T48 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 4800 BIT/S
F3T96 FAX GROUP 3 TRANSP 9600 BIT/S
AAH2 ANALOG ASYNC HSCSD 2 TCH
DAH2 DIGITAL ASYNC HSCSD 2 TCH
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IWE- 4-
REC IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT FUNCTION
This command records the interworking equipment function related data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- Only 1 measurement job can be started.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB if the time
parameter values allow a continuation of the job.
- This command is only allowed for an MSC.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC IWE : UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first be
copied to tape.
Notes:
- Identifier a covers both MDD and MOD.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: FILETYPE
SINGLE SINGLE FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
DAILY DAILY FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to daily files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files (MO...SU) are prepared and created
before the command is accepted.
Time parameters are not permissible for these
measurements.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is automatically
created on disk or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file
for the same day of the week is overwritten.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC IWE- 1+
REC IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CYCLIC CYCLIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full the newest
data will be lost.
This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily files, single or cyclic measurement files).
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception : time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily and cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates (in ascending order) may be linked
with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after entry.
- It is not permissible to enter the command after 23:45 hours with a
begin date on the following day.
- The first measurement may not begin later than one month after the
current date. Subsequent measurements may not begin later than one
year after the current date.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year of the begin
date.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month of the begin
date.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day of the begin
date.
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must
be specified.
Exception: time parameters may not be specified for data output
in daily and cyclic files.
Default: the end of the measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC IWE- 2+
REC IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year in which
recording is to terminate.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month in which
recording is to terminate.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day on which
recording is to terminate.
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a
begin date (BEG).
Incompatibilities:
- Intervals covering more than one day (e.g. 23-00-01-00).
- Intervals separated by a break of less than one hour.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval begins.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval begins.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval terminates.
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval terminates.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC IWE- 3+
REC IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
recording is to take place.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date (TER).
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC IWE- 4-
STAT IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF INTERWORKING EQUIPMENT
This command displays the transient data (individual for each port)
for one/several Interworking Equipments.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT IWE : DLU= ,MOD= [,STATUS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This parameter specifies the DLU.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
MOD MODULE
This parameter specifies the mounting location of the DLU module.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: SHELF NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the number of the DLU shelf.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MODULE NUMBER=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the module number in the DLU shelf.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
STATUS STATE OF IWE
This parameter specifies the transient status of an Interworking
Equipment.
Default value of this parameter is X.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
BUSY BUSY
IDLE IDLE STATUS
AUD AUDIT CHECK RUNNING
AUIDL AUDIT IDLE LIST FLAG
BBAC BLOCKED BACKWARD
BPRM BLOCKED PERMANENT
BPCN BLOCKING PREPARED CANCEL
DLUX DLU SWITCH X-WAY
DLUY DLU SWITCH Y-WAY
DLUF DLU SWITCH FREE WAY
NDLU NOT ACCESSIBLE DLU
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT IWE- 1+
STAT IWE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MBLM MAINTENANCE BLOCKED MODULE
CBLM CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED MODULE
NXSYS NOT ACCESSIBLE X-SYS
NXWAY NOT ACCESSIBLE X-WAY
CBLXS CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED X-SYS
NYSYS NOT ACCESSIBLE Y-SYS
NYWAY NOT ACCESSIBLE Y-WAY
CBLYS CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED Y-SYS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT IWE- 2-
CAN IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Interworking Point for SS7
This task cancels an interworking point IWP.
Prerequisites:
- the IWP must not be used by a Signaling data link
Inputparameter :
- IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN IWPSS7 : IWP ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN IWPSS7- 1-
CR IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Interworking Point for SS7
This task creates an interworking point IWP which can be used by a
Signaling data link to connect to a narrowband port.
It returns the IWP ID as a reference to the IWP.
The IWP consists of the objects
- Interworking point
- Interworking point VC
This object represents the VC level of an endpoint of a
narrowband connection in the ATM Layer.
This object is responsible for generating Comm. alarm
notifications if
- a buffer overflow or underflow occurs
- a VC-AIS or VC-RDI failure is detected
In case of VC-AIS or VC-RDI failure the value of the Probable cause
parameter is set to AIS or Far end receiver failure, respectively.
Prerequisites:
- the LIC port object must exist, either LICPRTE1 or LICPRTDS1
- the LIC port must be configured for STM traffic
- the LIC port must not be already assigned to another IWP
Inputparamter :
- LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
- LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port beginning with 1.
- Time slot
This Parameter specifies the time slot TS, with which the IWP will be
connected.
Possible values are 1..31 for E1 and 1..24 for DS1.
- IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
If it is omitted, a value will be chosen by the node.
- Admin. state
This parameter may be used to inhibit (lock) and allow (unlock)
the flow of cells through the IWP.
- Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IWPSS7- 1+
CR IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Outputparameters :
- IWP ID
- LIC
- LIC port
- Time Slot
- Admin. state
- Operational state
- Alarm status
- Current problem list
- Alarm profile MP
Input format

[ [
[ CR IWPSS7 : LIC= ,LIC port= ,Time Slot= [,IWP ID=] [
[ [
[ ,Admin. state= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port beginning with 1.
Time Slot
This Parameter specifies the time slot TS, with which the IWP will be
connected.
Input format :
1..31 for E1, range of decimal numbers
1..24 for DS1, range of decimal numbers
IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
If it is omitted, a value will be chosen by the node.
Admin. state
This parameter may be used to inhibit (lock) and allow (unlock)
the flow of cells through the IWP.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IWPSS7- 2+
CR IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR IWPSS7- 3-
DISP IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Interworking Point for SS7
This task displays one specified or all interworking points IWP of the
Managed element R1.
If the IWP is specified by the IWP ID, all parameters of this IWP will be
displayed.
Otherwise a list of all IWP will be displayed.
Inputparameter :
- IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
Outputparameter :
for a single IWP
- IWP ID
- LIC
- LIC port
- Time Slot
- Admin. state
This parameter may be used to inhibit (lock) and allow (unlock)
the flow of cells through the IWP.
- Operational state
This parameter describes the operability of a resource.
It is read-only and can have one of the following values:
Disabled The resource is totally inoperable and unable to provide
service to the user(s).
Enabled The resource is partially or fully operable and
available for use.
- Alarm status
- Current problem list
- Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
for a list of IWP
- IWP ID
- LIC
- LIC port
- Time Slot
- Admin. state
- Operational state
- Alarm status
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IWPSS7- 1+
DISP IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format

[ [
[ DISP IWPSS7 : [IWP ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
If it is omitted, all interworking points will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP IWPSS7- 2-
MOD IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Interworking Point for SS7
This Task modifies an interworking point IWP.
Prerequisites:
A IWP shall not be administratively locked if it
is referenced by a Signaling data link object which is not
administratively locked.
Inputparameter :
- IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
- Admin. state
This parameter may be used to inhibit (lock) and allow (unlock)
the flow of cells through the IWP.
- Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD IWPSS7 : IWP ID= [,Admin. state=] [,Alarm profile MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IWP ID
This parameter identifies the interworking point (IWP).
Admin. state
This parameter may be used to inhibit (lock) and allow (unlock)
the flow of cells through the IWP.
Alarm profile MP
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IWPSS7- 1+
MOD IWPSS7
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD IWPSS7- 2-
CAN JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL JOB
This command cancels semipermanent jobs. Timer jobs scheduled
for predetermined times can be cancelled. Time jobs which are
running must first be stopped before they can be cancelled.
Notes:
- This command may not be entered from command files.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN JOB : JN= ,CMDCOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a job.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies the command code of the job to be canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN JOB- 1-
CONT JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONTINUE JOB
This command reactivates user processes which were started by commands
with the attribute CONTINUE.
Prerequisite:
- This command may not be entered from command files.
Input format

[ [
[ CONT JOB : JN= [,STEP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a job.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
STEP STEP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the logical step up to which the job
should be processed.
Note:
With some processes this parameter is mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...998, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONT JOB- 1-
DISP JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY JOB
This command displays job data for one job or all jobs.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP JOB : [JN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a job.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP JOB- 1-
STOP JOB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP JOB
This command stops transient jobs or part-jobs which have the command
attribute STOP.
Notes:
- This command may not be entered from command files.
Input format

[ [
[ STOP JOB : JN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
JN JOB NUMBER
This parameter specifies the job number assigned to a job.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STOP JOB- 1-
DISP JOSITDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY JOSIT DATA
This command displays internal tracer data specified by the parameter
SELECT.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP JOSITDAT : [SELECT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SELECT SELECTION
This parameter determines the displayed tracer data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
X ALL AVAILABLE SS DATA
COLLECT PARAM VALUES OF LAST ACTOSITRA
Parameter values of the last ACT OSITRAC command.
TSTATE ACTUAL TRACER STATUS
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP JOSITDAT- 1-
DISP JOSITDATMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display OSI Tracer State MP
This task displays the state and activation parameter of the specified
OSI Tracer.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP JOSITDATMP : Tracer selection= ,MP ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Tracer selection
The OSI Tracer consists of five independant trace
utilities. This parameter specifies the Tracer of
which the state and activation parameter are to be
output.
Possible selections:
- FTP (Layer L7F, X)
- OSI (Layers L4, L5, L6, L7A, L7C,
L7MO, L7NE, L7Q, L7R, X)
- TCP (Layers L3IP, L4TC, X)
- PRH (Layers UDP , SCTP, M3UA, X)
- OAMD (Layers HOP, X)
MP ID
This parameter defines the number of the
hardware platform (MP), where the tracer is started.
Format: (1..128 decimal integers)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP JOSITDATMP- 1-
CAN KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL KEYWORD
This command cancels keyword-specific data for a subscriber, a PBX line, a PBX
or a Subscriber Profile.
Notes:
- If applicable an AMA-ticket can be generated.
- If applicable an FIR-ticket can be generated.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN KEYWORD - PBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
2. CAN KEYWORD - PROFILE KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
3. CAN KEYWORD - SUBPBX KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
1. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= [,PURPOSE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber,
PBX-line or PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX / MOD PBX /
CR PBXLN.
Notes:
- This parameter is ommissible if only one OPMODE exists for the
chosen PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
[AIC [ ANALOG INCOMING
[IBW [ ISDN BOTHWAY
[IBW1TR6 [ ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
[IIC [ ISDN INCOMING
!IIC1TR6 - ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 1+
CAN KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
PURPOSE PURPOSE OF CANCELING
This parameter specifies the keyword-specific data which should
be cancelled.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not entered, then KEY, INTKEY and
KEYPRF will be cancelled.
- If this parameter is entered, then the according keyword-speicifc
data will be cancelled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
INTKEY INTERNET KEYWORD
[KEY [ KEYWORD
!KEYPRF - KEYWORD PROFILE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 2+
CAN KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN KEYWORD : PRFID= [,PURPOSE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRFID PROFILE IDENTIFICATION
Specifies the profile identification (see command CR SUBPRFID),
for which a keyword should be canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...200, range of decimal numbers
PURPOSE PURPOSE OF CANCELING
This parameter specifies the keyword-specific data which should
be cancelled.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not entered, then KEY, INTKEY and
KEYPRF will be cancelled.
- If this parameter is entered, then the according keyword-speicifc
data will be cancelled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
KEY KEYWORD
!KEYPRF - KEYWORD PROFILE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 3+
CAN KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,PURPOSE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber,
PBX-line or PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PURPOSE PURPOSE OF CANCELING
This parameter specifies the keyword-specific data which should
be cancelled.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not entered, then KEY, INTKEY and
KEYPRF will be cancelled.
- If this parameter is entered, then the according keyword-speicifc
data will be cancelled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
INTKEY INTERNET KEYWORD
[KEY [ KEYWORD
!KEYPRF - KEYWORD PROFILE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN KEYWORD- 4-
DISP KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY KEYWORD
This command displays keyword-specific data of a subscriber, a PBX line, a
PBX or a subscriber profile.
Keyword-specific data may be displayed for:
- a single subscriber,
- a single PBX line,
- a single PBX,
- a single subscriber profile,
- a range of directory numbers,
- a range of subscriber profiles,
- all directory numbers in an exchange,
- all subscriber profiles in an exchange.
Keyword-specific data include:
- the normal keyword
- information, if the normal keyword is a security keyword or not
- information about the existence of an internet keyword
- the keyword profile
Notes:
- The Parameter KEY will not be displayed if it is a security keyword.
- An information will be given, if an Internet Keyword is existing but the
Internet Keyword itself will not be displayed.
- A selective display is possible with input of DN=X (or interval) or
PRFID=X (or interval) and parameter KEYPRF.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted for a local exchange.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP KEYWORD - PROFILE KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
2. DISP KEYWORD - SUBPBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX/PBXLN
1. Input format
KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
Input format for display of keyword specific data for Subscriber Profiles.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP KEYWORD : PRFID= [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRFID PROFILE IDENTIFICATION
Specifies the profile identification (see command CR SUBPRFID),
for which data should be displayed.
Notes:
- Together with parameter KEYPRF only the input of PRFID=X
is allowed.
Incompatibilities:
- LAC
- OPMODE
- LNO
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 1+
DISP KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...200, range of decimal numbers
KEYPRF KEYWORD PROFILE
Specifies the keyword profile identification, which should be
searched for.
Prerequisites:
- Input of DN=X (or interval) or PRFID=X (or interval).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PRF1 KEYWORD PROFILE 1
[[PRF10 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 10
[[PRF11 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 11
[[PRF12 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 12
[[PRF13 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 13
[[PRF14 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 14
[[PRF15 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 15
[PRF16 [ KEYWORD PROFILE 16
[[PRF2 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 2
[[PRF3 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 3
[[PRF4 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 4
[[PRF5 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 5
[[PRF6 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 6
[[PRF7 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 7
[[PRF8 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 8
!PRF9 - KEYWORD PROFILE 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 2+
DISP KEYWORD
SUBPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX/PBXLN
Input format for display of keyword specific data for Subscriber, PBX
or PBX Lines.
Notes:
- If data for a specific PBX Line should be displayed, then parameter
LNO has to be entered too.
- If DN=X (or interval) is entered, then the keyword data for all
existing objects (resp. all existing objects within this interval)
are displayed.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LNO=] [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
- If LAC=X is entered, DN=X has to be entered, too.
- Together with parameter KEYPRF only the input of LAC=X is
allowed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the
subscriber/PBX-line/PBX.
Notes:
- If LAC=X is entered, DN=X has to be entered, too.
- Together with parameter KEYPRF only the input of DN=X or
a DN-interval is allowed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX and MOD PBX.
Notes:
- Keyword and Keyword Profile are not allowed for IOG,
AOG and IOG1TR6 lines.
- If OPMODE is specified, LNO must be entered too.
- This parameter is ommissible if only one OPMODE exists for the
chosen PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
[AIC [ ANALOG INCOMING
[IBW [ ISDN BOTHWAY
[IBW1TR6 [ ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
[IIC [ ISDN INCOMING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 3+
DISP KEYWORD
SUBPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!IIC1TR6 - ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
KEYPRF KEYWORD PROFILE
Specifies the keyword profile identification, which should be
searched for.
Prerequisites:
- Input of DN=X (or interval) or PRFID=X (or interval).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PRF1 KEYWORD PROFILE 1
[[PRF10 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 10
[[PRF11 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 11
[[PRF12 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 12
[[PRF13 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 13
[[PRF14 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 14
[[PRF15 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 15
[PRF16 [ KEYWORD PROFILE 16
[[PRF2 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 2
[[PRF3 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 3
[[PRF4 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 4
[[PRF5 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 5
[[PRF6 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 6
[[PRF7 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 7
[[PRF8 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 8
!PRF9 - KEYWORD PROFILE 9
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP KEYWORD- 4-
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER KEYWORD
This command enters a keyword for
- a subscriber (categories main station,ISDN basic access, ISDN digital
switch board, two party line, coinbox and cordless terminal mobility)
- a PBX line (bothway or incoming to the switch; categories main station,
ISDN basic access, B-channel of ISDN primary access fixed and cordless
terminal mobility)
- a PBX
- a Subscriber Profile
via parameter KEY.
For some subscriber classes of service administered via SCI
(subscriber controled input) a keyword is mandatory.
Only Subscribers with security keyword are allowed to modify keyword per SCI.
This command enters an internet keyword for
- a subscriber (categories main station,ISDN basic access, ISDN digital
switch board, two party line, coinbox and cordless terminal mobility)
- a PBX line (bothway or incoming to the switch; categories main station,
ISDN basic access, B-channel of ISDN primary access fixed and cordless
terminal mobility)
- a PBX
(for TYPE = PBX, MLHG, PASLAVE, SHG, PBXDDINO, PA,
or no special PBX-TYPE)
via parameter INTKEY.
This command enters a keyword profile for
- a subscriber (categories main station,ISDN basic access, ISDN digital
switch board, two party line, coinbox and cordless terminal mobility)
- a PBX line (bothway or incoming to the switch; categories main station,
ISDN basic access, B-channel of ISDN primary access fixed and cordless
terminal mobility)
- a PBX
- a Subscriber Profile
via parameter KEYPRF.
Notes:
- A secure Keyword is stored and logged in coded form.
- An Internet Keyword and a not secure keyword is stored and logged in uncoded
form.
- If applicable an AMA-ticket can be generated except for an Internet Keyword.
- If applicable a FIR-ticket can be generated except for an Internet Keyword.
- If no Keyword is entered, a default value may be set (for detailed
description about setting of default values see parameter KEY and
INTKEY, for the default Keyword and Internet Keyword see command
DISP CALLPOPT).
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR KEYWORD - PBXLN KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
2. ENTR KEYWORD - PROFILE KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
3. ENTR KEYWORD - SUBPBX KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
1. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN PBXLN
Input format for assigning a keyword, internet keyword or keyword profile to a
PBX line.
Notes:
- If parameter SECURE is not entered, then NO will be set as default
if a keyword is entered.

[ [
[ ENTR KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE=] ,LNO= [,KEY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,SECURE=] [,INTKEY=] [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 1+
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- For PBX-lines the pilot directory number of the
relevant PBX must be entered within this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line.
It is administered with the commands CR PBX / MOD PBX /
CR PBXLN.
Notes:
- Keyword is not allowed for IOG, AOG and IOG1TR6 lines.
- This parameter is ommissible if only one OPMODE exists for the
chosen PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
[AIC [ ANALOG INCOMING
[IBW [ ISDN BOTHWAY
[IBW1TR6 [ ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
[IIC [ ISDN INCOMING
!IIC1TR6 - ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
KEY KEYWORD
Notes:
- If no keyword is entered, a default value will be set
except when parameter INTKEY or KEYPRF is entered and
parameter SECURE is not entered.
(see command DISP CALLPOPT)
- If the keyword (personal identification number) specified during
SCI does not correspond to the keyword stored for the subscriber
then SCI is rejected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...12 digit decimal number
SECURE SECURITY KEYWORD
A security keyword may be modified by SCI. A normal keyword
may not be modified by SCI.
Notes:
- A security keyword can not be displayed.
- A security keyword is logged in enciphered format.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 2+
ENTR KEYWORD
PBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NORMAL KEYWORD
[NO [ NORMAL KEYWORD
[[Y [[ SECURITY KEYWORD
!YES - SECURITY KEYWORD
INTKEY INTERNET KEYWORD
Keyword used for Internet sessions.
Notes:
- If none of the parameters INTKEY, KEY, KEYPRF
or SECURE is entered, then a default keyword for KEY and
INTKEY will be set.
(see command DISP CALLPOPT)
- If parameter INTKEY is not entered and parameter KEY and/or
parameter SECURE and/or parameter KEYPRF is entered, then no
default value for INTKEY will be set.
- If the parameters KEY is not entered and parameter INTKEY is
entered, then a default value for KEY will only be set, when
parameter SECURE is entered too.
- If the internet keyword specified during login into an internet
session does not correspond to the internet keyword stored for the
subscriber then login is rejected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...12 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
KEYPRF KEYWORD PROFILE
Specifies the keyword profile identification, which should be
assigned. The keyword profile includes a set of features. For using
these features the input of a keyword is mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PRF1 KEYWORD PROFILE 1
[[PRF10 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 10
[[PRF11 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 11
[[PRF12 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 12
[[PRF13 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 13
[[PRF14 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 14
[[PRF15 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 15
[PRF16 [ KEYWORD PROFILE 16
[[PRF2 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 2
[[PRF3 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 3
[[PRF4 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 4
[[PRF5 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 5
[[PRF6 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 6
[[PRF7 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 7
[[PRF8 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 8
!PRF9 - KEYWORD PROFILE 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 3+
ENTR KEYWORD
PROFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
KEY F. SUBSCRIBER PROFILES
Input format for assigning a keyword or a keyword profile to a subscriber
profile.

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR KEYWORD : PRFID= [,SECURE=] [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PRFID PROFILE IDENTIFICATION
Specifies the profile identification (see command CR SUBPRFID),
for which a keyword and/or a keyword profile should be entered.
Notes:
- The specified profile has to be an existing CREATE-profile.
- For entering a keword for subscriber profiles SECURE=YES
has to be entered without input of parameter KEY, so that the
default keyword will be written.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...200, range of decimal numbers
SECURE SECURITY KEYWORD
A security keyword may be modified by SCI. A normal keyword
may not be modified by SCI.
Notes:
- A security keyword can not be displayed.
- A security keyword is logged in enciphered format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
Y SECURITY KEYWORD
!YES - SECURITY KEYWORD
KEYPRF KEYWORD PROFILE
Specifies the keyword profile identification, which should be
assigned. The keyword profile includes a set of features. For using
these features the input of a keyword is mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PRF1 KEYWORD PROFILE 1
[[PRF10 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 10
[[PRF11 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 11
[[PRF12 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 12
[[PRF13 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 13
[[PRF14 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 14
[[PRF15 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 15
[PRF16 [ KEYWORD PROFILE 16
[[PRF2 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 2
[[PRF3 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 3
[[PRF4 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 4
[[PRF5 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 5
[[PRF6 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 6
[[PRF7 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 7
[[PRF8 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 8
!PRF9 - KEYWORD PROFILE 9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 4+
ENTR KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
KEY F. ANALOG/ISDN SUB/PBX
Input format for assigning a keyword, internet keyword or keyword profile to a
subscriber or a PBX.
Notes:
- If parameter SECURE is not entered, then NO will be set as default,
if a keyword is entered.

[ [
[ ENTR KEYWORD : [LAC=] ,DN= [,KEY=] [,SECURE=] [,INTKEY=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,KEYPRF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Notes:
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple DN volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the
subscriber/PBX.
Notes:
- For PBX-lines the pilot directory number of the
relevant PBX must be entered within this parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
KEY KEYWORD
Notes:
- If no keyword is entered, a default value will be set
except when parameter INTKEY or KEYPRF is entered and
parameter SECURE is not entered.
(see command DISP CALLPOPT)
- If the keyword (personal identification number) specified during
SCI does not correspond to the keyword stored for the subscriber
then SCI is rejected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...12 digit decimal number
SECURE SECURITY KEYWORD
A security keyword may be modified by SCI. A normal keyword
may not be modified by SCI.
Notes:
- A security keyword can not be displayed.
- A security keyword is logged in enciphered format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NORMAL KEYWORD
[NO [ NORMAL KEYWORD
[[Y [[ SECURITY KEYWORD
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 5+
ENTR KEYWORD
SUBPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
!YES - SECURITY KEYWORD
INTKEY INTERNET KEYWORD
Keyword used for Internet sessions.
Notes:
- If none of the parameters INTKEY, KEY, KEYPRF
or SECURE is entered, then a default keyword for KEY and
INTKEY will be set.
(see command DISP CALLPOPT)
- If parameter INTKEY is not entered and parameter KEY and/or
parameter SECURE and/or parameter KEYPRF is entered, then no
default value for INTKEY will be set.
- If the parameters KEY is not entered and parameter INTKEY is
entered, then a default value for KEY will only be set, when
parameter SECURE is entered too.
- If the internet keyword specified during login into an internet
session does not correspond to the internet keyword stored for the
subscriber then login is rejected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...12 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
KEYPRF KEYWORD PROFILE
Specifies the keyword profile identification, which should be
assigned. The keyword profile includes a set of features. For using
these features the input of a keyword is mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PRF1 KEYWORD PROFILE 1
[[PRF10 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 10
[[PRF11 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 11
[[PRF12 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 12
[[PRF13 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 13
[[PRF14 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 14
[[PRF15 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 15
[PRF16 [ KEYWORD PROFILE 16
[[PRF2 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 2
[[PRF3 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 3
[[PRF4 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 4
[[PRF5 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 5
[[PRF6 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 6
[[PRF7 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 7
[[PRF8 [[ KEYWORD PROFILE 8
!PRF9 - KEYWORD PROFILE 9
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR KEYWORD- 6-
ACT L1LNKUPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate L1 Link Upgrade
This task starts the upgrade for Signaling link
Input format

[ [
[ ACT L1LNKUPG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT L1LNKUPG- 1-
CONF LAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This command configures a LAU.
The LAU is activated without test.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF LAU : LAU= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...11, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
Because of its influence on the X25LINKs,
configuration of a LAU from ACT to MBL is
considered as dangerous. A dialog mask is output.
The operating personnel must decide, by entering
+ or -, whether the command should
be executed.
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF LAU- 1-
DIAG LAU
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a link adaption unit.
Prerequisites:
- The link adaption unit must be MBL.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG LAU - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG LAU - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a link adaption unit.

[ [
[ DIAG LAU : LAU= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...11, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG LAU- 1+
DIAG LAU
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a link
adaption unit.

[ [
[ DIAG LAU : LAU= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...11, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPTION
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between
statistic outputs in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the
DISP DIAGSTAT command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG LAU- 2-
TEST LAU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This command tests LAUs. The interface to the IOPLAU
is tested, and also X25LINK specific HW parts of the LAU
in case a X25LINK is not ACT.
Prerequisite:
- The units which are to be tested must be ACT.
- The IOP must be active.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST LAU : [LAU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAU LINK ADAPTION UNIT
This parameter specifies the link adaption unit to be tested.
Note:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active
link adaption units are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...11, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST LAU- 1-
CAN LCS
CREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCATION SERVICES
This command deletes Location Services Profile data in the HLR.
If only parameter LCS is entered then the entire profile is deleted.
If the parameters CLNT, GMLC or CLNTYPE are entered, the corresponding
entries are deleted from the profile.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN LCS - CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
2. CAN LCS - CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
3. CAN LCS - PLMNOPR PLMNOPR OPERATOR CLASS
1. Input format
CALL RELATED CLASS
This input format is used to delete an LCS profile for the call related class.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LCS : LCS= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LCS- 1+
CAN LCS
CUNREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CALL UNRELATED CLASS
This input format is used to delete an LCS profile for the call unrelated class
or to delete a CLNT or GMLC from such a profile.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LCS : LCS= [,CLNT=] [,GMLC=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CLNT CLIENT
This parameter specifies the address of an LCS Client
to be deleted from the LCS profile.
This is the global title address according to E.164.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...15 digit decimal number
GMLC GMLC ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of a GMLC to
be deleted from the LCS profile.
This is the global title address according to E.164.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...15 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LCS- 2+
CAN LCS
PLMNOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PLMNOPR OPERATOR CLASS
This input format is used to delete an LCS profile for the PLMN operator class
or to delete a CLNTYPE from such a profile.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LCS : LCS= [,CLNTYPE=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CLNTYPE CLIENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the PLMN Client types to
be deleted from the LCS profile.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ANONYM ANONYMOUS LOCATION INFO
BRDCAST BROADCASTING LOCATION REL.INFO
OMHPLMN O&M LCS CLIENT IN HPLMN
OMVPLMN O&M LCS CLIENT IN VPLMN
TMSUBS TARGET MS SUBSCRIBED SERVICE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LCS- 3-
CR LCS
CREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LOCATION SERVICES
This command creates a new Location Services Profile.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR LCS - CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
2. CR LCS - CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
3. CR LCS - PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
1. Input format
CALL RELATED CLASS
This input format is used to create an LCS Profile for the call related class.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LCS : LCS= ,SSV= ,NTF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies a supplementary service for the
Location Services Profile (LCS).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
NTF NOTIFICATION TO MS USER
This parameter specifies the notification to the MS user.
For the call unrelated class the client-specific NTF of parameter
CLNT overrides this general NTF.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ANORSP ALLOWED IF NO RESPONSE
AWONOT ALLOWED WITHOUT NOTIFICATION
For the call unrelated class this value means
"positioning not allowed".
AWTNOT ALLOWED WITH NOTIFICATION
NONRSP RESTRICTED IF NO RESPONSE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LCS- 1+
CR LCS
CUNREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CALL UNRELATED CLASS
This input format is used to create an LCS Profile for the call unrelated class.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LCS : LCS= ,SSV= [,CLNT=] [,GMLC=] [,NTF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies a supplementary service for the
Location Services Profile (LCS).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
CLNT CLIENT
This parameter specifies the address of an LCS Client,
a notification to MS user and a GMLC restriction.
This is the global title address according to E.164.
The maximum number of entries is 5.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: LCS CLIENT ADDRESS=
1...15 digit decimal number
b: NOTIFICATION TO MS USER
ANORSP ALLOWED IF NO RESPONSE
AWONOT ALLOWED WITHOUT NOTIFICATION
AWTNOT ALLOWED WITH NOTIFICATION
NONRSP RESTRICTED IF NO RESPONSE
Default: AWONOT
c: GMLC RESTRICTION
AGMLC ANY GMLC IN ANY COUNTRY
HGMLC ANY GMLC IN THE HOME COUNTRY
IGMLC IDENTIFIED GMLC ONLY
Default: AGMLC
GMLC GMLC ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of a GMLC.
If c is entered as GMLC restriction in parameter
CLNT, at least one address must be entered.
This is the global title address according to E.164.
The maximum number of entries is 5.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LCS- 2+
CR LCS
CUNREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...15 digit decimal number
NTF NOTIFICATION TO MS USER
This parameter specifies the notification to the MS user.
For the call unrelated class the client-specific NTF of parameter
CLNT overrides this general NTF.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ANORSP ALLOWED IF NO RESPONSE
AWONOT ALLOWED WITHOUT NOTIFICATION
For the call unrelated class this value means
"positioning not allowed".
AWTNOT ALLOWED WITH NOTIFICATION
NONRSP RESTRICTED IF NO RESPONSE
Default: AWONOT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LCS- 3+
CR LCS
PLMNOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
This input format is used to create an LCS Profile for the PLMN operator class.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LCS : LCS= ,SSV= ,CLNTYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies a supplementary service for the
Location Services Profile (LCS).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
CLNTYPE CLIENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the PLMN Client types.
The maximum number of entries is 5.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ANONYM ANONYMOUS LOCATION INFO
BRDCAST BROADCASTING LOCATION REL.INFO
OMHPLMN O&M LCS CLIENT IN HPLMN
OMVPLMN O&M LCS CLIENT IN VPLMN
TMSUBS TARGET MS SUBSCRIBED SERVICE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LCS- 4-
DISP LCS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCATION SERVICES
This command displays information on LCS Profiles.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LCS : [LCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the names of the LCS Profiles to be displayed.
A list of up to 10 profile names may be entered. If the parameter is
omitted, all profiles will be displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LCS- 1-
MOD LCS
CREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOCATION SERVICES
This command modifies a Location Services Profile in the HLR.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD LCS - CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
2. MOD LCS - CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
3. MOD LCS - PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
1. Input format
CALL RELATED CLASS
This input format is used to modify an LCS Profile for the call related class.
Only parameter NTF can be modified.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LCS : LCS= ,SSV= ,NTF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies a supplementary service for the
Location Services Profile (LCS).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
NTF NOTIFICATION TO MS USER
This parameter specifies the notification to the MS user.
For the call unrelated class the client-specific NTF of parameter
CLNT overrides this general NTF.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ANORSP ALLOWED IF NO RESPONSE
AWONOT ALLOWED WITHOUT NOTIFICATION
For the call unrelated class this value means
"positioning not allowed".
AWTNOT ALLOWED WITH NOTIFICATION
NONRSP RESTRICTED IF NO RESPONSE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LCS- 1+
MOD LCS
CUNREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CALL UNRELATED CLASS
This input format is used to modify an LCS Profile for the call unrelated class.
For the parameter CLNT the values for NTF and GMLC restriction of an existing
client address can be modified. A new client can be added.
For the parameter GMLC values can be added.
The parameter NTF can be modified.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LCS : LCS= ,SSV= [,CLNT=] [,GMLC=] [,NTF=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies a supplementary service for the
Location Services Profile (LCS).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
CLNT CLIENT
This parameter specifies the address of an LCS Client,
a notification to MS user and a GMLC restriction.
This is the global title address according to E.164.
The maximum number of entries is 5.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c]]
a: LCS CLIENT ADDRESS=
1...15 digit decimal number
b: NOTIFICATION TO MS USER
ANORSP ALLOWED IF NO RESPONSE
AWONOT ALLOWED WITHOUT NOTIFICATION
AWTNOT ALLOWED WITH NOTIFICATION
NONRSP RESTRICTED IF NO RESPONSE
Default: AWONOT
c: GMLC RESTRICTION
AGMLC ANY GMLC IN ANY COUNTRY
HGMLC ANY GMLC IN THE HOME COUNTRY
IGMLC IDENTIFIED GMLC ONLY
Default: AGMLC
GMLC GMLC ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address of a GMLC.
This is the global title address according to E.164.
If IGMLC is entered as GMLC restriction in parameter
CLNT, at least one address must be entered.
The maximum number of entries is 5.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LCS- 2+
MOD LCS
CUNREL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...15 digit decimal number
NTF NOTIFICATION TO MS USER
This parameter specifies the notification to the MS user.
For the call unrelated class the client-specific NTF of parameter
CLNT overrides this general NTF.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ANORSP ALLOWED IF NO RESPONSE
AWONOT ALLOWED WITHOUT NOTIFICATION
For the call unrelated class this value means
"positioning not allowed".
AWTNOT ALLOWED WITH NOTIFICATION
NONRSP RESTRICTED IF NO RESPONSE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LCS- 3+
MOD LCS
PLMNOPR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
This input format is used to modify an LCS Profile for the PLMN operator class.
The entered values of CLNTYPE will be added to the existing values.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LCS : LCS= ,SSV= ,CLNTYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LCS LOCATION SERVICES PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of an LCS Profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies a supplementary service for the
Location Services Profile (LCS).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
CLNTYPE CLIENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the PLMN Client types.
The maximum number of entries is 5.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ANONYM ANONYMOUS LOCATION INFO
BRDCAST BROADCASTING LOCATION REL.INFO
OMHPLMN O&M LCS CLIENT IN HPLMN
OMVPLMN O&M LCS CLIENT IN VPLMN
TMSUBS TARGET MS SUBSCRIBED SERVICE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LCS- 4-
CAN LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Line Interface Card
This task deletes one ]LIC] of the platform 190.
To delete ]LIC] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
Prerequisite:
- In case of deleting a ]LIC] in a ]LIC red. group] following must be regarded:
The working ]LIC] must be deleted first. Then the redundant ]LIC] must be
deleted.
+ ------------------------------ +
! redundant ]LIC| working ]LIC] !
! (]Pitch]) | (]Pitch]) !
+ ------------------------------ +
! 115 | 103 !
! 139 | 127 !
! 163 | 151 !
! 187 | 175 !
! 303 | 291 !
! 327 | 315 !
! 351 | 339 !
! 375 | 363 !
+ ------------------------------ +
Input format

[ [
[ CAN LIC : LIC= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LIC- 1-
CONF LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Configure Line Interface Card
This task configures a ]LIC] of the platform 190.
To configure ]LIC] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
There is a choice between the ]Admin. state] ]locked], ]unlocked],
]reserved] and ]underRepair].
If the input of ]Admin. state] is ]locked] then ]Hazard check]
can be performed. Performing the ]Hazard check] means that in case
a hazard is detected, the configuration will not be executed and actual
effects are displayed in the output table. Not performing the ]Hazard check]
means that the configuration will be executed always and detected hazards
are displayed in the output table.
Notes:
- If ]Admin. state] is not ]locked] the input parameter ]Hazard check]
is not used.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF LIC : LIC= ,Hazard check= ,Admin. state= [,Load information=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
Hazard check
If this parameter is Yes, ]Hazard check] is started at
the deactivation of a unit.
Admin. state
This parameter is used to select the kind of configuration.
Load information
This parameter specifies if the code portion should be loaded by force
or only if necessary.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF LIC- 1-
CR LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Line Interface Card
This task is used to create a ]LIC] of the platform 190.
To create ]LIC] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
Prerequisites:
- A ]Shelf] must exist.
- An ]AMX] in this ]Shelf] must exist.
- A ]LIC red. group] must exist.
- In one ]LIC red. group] the same ]Signal mode] must exist.
- In case of creating a ]LIC] in a ]LIC red. group] following must be regarded:
The redundant ]LIC] must be created first. Then the working ]LIC] must be
created.
+--------------------------------+
! redundant ]LIC| working ]LIC] !
! (]Pitch]) | (]Pitch]) !
+--------------------------------+
! 115 | 103 !
! 139 | 127 !
! 163 | 151 !
! 187 | 175 !
! 303 | 291 !
! 327 | 315 !
! 351 | 339 !
! 375 | 363 !
+--------------------------------+
Following combinations are allowed:
+------------------------------------------------------+
! ]Board type] | ]Signal mode] | ]Load type] !
+------------------------------------------------------+
! ]LIC2A / LIC2a-P] | ]E1] | ]CLIC0011] !
! ]LIC1-5A] | ]DS1] | ]CLIC0011] !
! ]LIC34A] | ]E3] | ]CLIC0021] !
! ]LIC34A-P] | ]E3] | ]CLIC0181] !
! ]LIC45A] | ]DS3] | ]CLIC0031] !
! ]LIC155A] | ]STM-1] | ]CLIC0041] !
! ]LIC155D-P] | ]STM-1] | ]CLIC0141] !
! ]LIC155B] | ]STM-1] | ]CLIC0041] !
! ]LIC155E-P] | ]STM-1] | ]CLIC0141] !
! ]LIC155C] | ]STM1] | ]CLIC0041] !
! ]LIC155F-P] | ]STM-1] | ]CLIC0141] !
! ]LICTSC2A-P] | ]E1] | ]CLIC0161] !
! ]A2SC] | ] ] | ]CLIC0171] !
+------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ CR LIC : LIC= ,Signal mode= ,Board type= ,Rack= ,Shelf= [
[ [
[ ,Pitch= [,Load type=] ,Alarm profile MP= [
[ [
[ [,LIC red. group=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of a ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
Signal mode
This parameter specifies the ]Signal mode] of a ]LIC].
Board type
This parameter describes the type of the board.
Rack
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LIC- 1+
CR LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter is the name of an existing ]Rack].
Allowed values are symbolic names of exactly 8 characters.
Shelf
This parameter is the number of an existing ]Shelf].
Pitch
This parameter is the number of a ]Pitch].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...400.
Load type
This parameter is used to specify the ]Load type] of the ]LIC] to be
created.
The allowed values are CLIC0011, CLIC0021, CLIC0181, CLIC0031, CLIC0141,
CLIC0111, CLIC0161, CLIC0171.
+--------------------------------+
! ]Load type] | ]Board type] !
+--------------------------------+
! ]CLIC0011] | ]LIC2A / LIC2a-P]!
! ]CLIC0011] | ]LIC1-5A] !
! ]CLIC0021] | ]LIC34A] !
! ]CLIC0181] | ]LIC34A-P] !
! ]CLIC0031] | ]LIC45A] !
! ]CLIC0041] | ]LIC155A] !
! ]CLIC0141] | ]LIC155D-P] !
! ]CLIC0041] | ]LIC155B] !
! ]CLIC0041] | !
! ]CLIC0141] | ]LIC155E-P] !
! ]CLIC0141] | !
! ]CLIC0041] | ]LIC155C] !
! ]CLIC0041] | !
! ]CLIC0141] | ]LIC155F-P] !
! ]CLIC0141] | !
! ]CLIC0111] | ]LICTSC2A] !
! ]CLIC0161] | ]LICTSC2A-P] !
! ]CLIC0171] | ]A2SC] !
+--------------------------------+
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LIC- 2+
CR LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
LIC red. group
This parameter specifies an existing ]LIC red. group].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...512.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LIC- 3-
DIAG LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Diagnose Line Interface Card
This task starts diagnosis of a ]LIC] of the platform 190.
To diagnose ]LIC] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG LIC : LIC= ,Kind of diagnosis= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
Kind of diagnosis
This parameter specifies the kind of diagnosis.
Following values are allowed:
]Self diagnosis]:
Base test for the unit.
It checks the availability and the workability of
the components .
Resets unit and becomes ]Self diagnosis].
No further tests are performed.
]Quick diagnosis]:
Performs a more comprehensive test than ]Self
diagnosis].
It includes all diagnosis tests without long
running
tests.
It must include testing of those hardware parts
which
are tested during normal operation.
]Complete diagnosis]:
This option performs full testing of all the
object functions, including tests which take a
long time
to complete such as memory tests.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG LIC- 1-
DISP LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Line Interface Card
This task displays one or all ]LICs] of the platform 190. The input parameter is
the number
identifying a ]LIC]. If there is no input of the ]LIC] then the output
will be all ]LICs] of the platform 190 within the system.
To display ]LICs] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LIC : [LIC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LIC- 1-
MOD LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Line Interface Card
This task changes the value of the ]Alarm profile MP] of the
]LIC] of the platform 190.
To modify ]LIC] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
Input format

[ [
[ MOD LIC : LIC= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LIC- 1+
MOD LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LIC- 2-
RECOV LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Recover Line Interface Card
This task recovers a ]LIC] of the platform 190.
To recover ]LIC] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
Allowed parameters for recovery of the ]LIC] are:
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
! ]Scope] ]Depth] ]Measures] !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
!LOADREC2: ]Platform] ]Cold start] ]Loading of code and data] !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ RECOV LIC : LIC= ,Scope= ,Depth= ,Measures= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
Scope
This parameter specifies that only the adressed platform is recovered.
Depth
This parameter specifies that the recovery is a coldstart recovery.
Measures
This parameter specifies that code and data are reloaded.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RECOV LIC- 1-
STAT LIC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STAT Line Interface Card
This task displays the state of one or all ]LICs] of the platform 190.
The input parameter is the number identifying a ]LIC].
If there is no input then the output will be the states of all
]LICs] of the platform 190 within the system.
To display state of ]LICs] of the platform 140 use local craft terminal (LCT).
Input format

[ [
[ STAT LIC : [LIC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...1024.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT LIC- 1-
CAN LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel LIC Port of Type DS1
This task cancels a LIC port of type DS1 (LICPRTDS1).
Prerequisites:
No ATM layer objects may exist for the given LICPRTDS1.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN LICPRTDS1 : LIC= ,LIC port= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LICPRTDS1- 1-
CR LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create LIC Port of Type DS1
This task creates a LIC port of type DS1 (LICPRTDS1).
ATTENTION :
If the script can not finish execution ( e.g. connection between
Net Manager and node is broken ) then use the following procedure :
- First use CAN LICPRTDS1 and then try to create this LICPRTDS1
again.
The LICPRTDS1 consists of the objects
- DS1 line TTP
This managed object represents a termination point where the
digital DS1 signal (1.544 Mbps) is originated and terminated.
A Comm. alarm notification shall be emitted if a
Loss of signal (LOS) condition is detected. The Probable cause
parameter of the notification shall indicate LOS.
- DS1 CTP
This managed object represents a termination point where the
DS1 link connection is originated and terminated.
- DS1 path TTP
This managed object represents a termination point where the
DS1 frame path trail is terminated, i.e.,the DS1 path overhead
is generated and added to the outgoing signal,
and is removed from the incoming signal and processed.
A Comm. alarm notification shall be emitted if
- a Loss of Frame (LOF)
- a DS1 path Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
condition is detected.
- DS0 time slot (24 instances, only for Traffic type STM)
This managed object represents a termination point where the DS0 link
connection is terminated.
- TC adaptor (only for Traffic type ATM)
This object represents a point in the managed system where the
adaptation of the ATM Layer to the underlying physical infrastructure
(e.g., SDH or PDH transport network) takes place.
Prerequisites:
- LIC must exist.
- LIC must support DS1.
Input format

[ [
[ CR LICPRTDS1 : LIC= ,LIC port= [,Redundant LIC=] ,Traffic type= [
[ [
[ ,Admin. state= ,Alarm profile MP= ,Timing source= [
[ [
[ ,Line build out= ,DS1 line code= ,DS1 frame format= [
[ [
[ ,DS1 data link= ,RAI format= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
Redundant LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC number of the redundant LIC.
This parameter is mandatory if the active LIC is configured
for 1+1 board redundancy, otherwise it must be empty.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LICPRTDS1- 1+
CR LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
Traffic type
This parameter determines the type of traffic on the physical interface.
Input format:
Selection from:
ATM broadband
STM narrowband, access to timeslots
Admin. state
This parameter describes the administration of a resource.
Input format:
Selection from:
Locked The resource is administratively prohibited from
performing services for its users.
Unlocked The resource is administratively permitted to perform
services for its users. This is independent of its
inherent operability.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
Timing source
This parameter selects the clock source for the transmitted
line signal. This is only valid for non-ATM traffic.
Input format:
Selection from:
System time the internal clock from the ACCG is used.
Loop the incoming line clock is used.
Line build out
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LICPRTDS1- 2+
CR LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter is used to indicate the line build out setting (i.e.
equalization setting) of
the transmission line at the line termination.
Input format:
Selection from:
1 0..35 m
2 25..65 m
3 55..95 m
4 85..125 m
5 115..155 m
6 145..185 m
7 175..210 m
length for a PULB 22AWG cable.
DS1 line code
This parameter selects the DS1 line code.
Input format:
Selection from:
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion (bipolar) without zero code
suppression.
AMIZCS Alternate Mark Inversion (bipolar) with zero code
suppression.
B8ZS Alternate Mark Inversion (bipolar) with 8-zero
substitution.
Compatibilities:
For Traffic type = ATM the only possible value is B8ZS.
DS1 frame format
This parameter identifies the DS1 frame format.
Input format:
Selection from:
SF Superframe format
ESF Extended superframe format
Compatibilities:
For Traffic type = ATM the only possible value is ESF.
DS1 data link
This parameter specifies whether the DS1 data link is enabled or not.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE enabled
FALSE disabled
Compatibilities:
If the interface is used as clock source, only the value TRUE is
possible.
RAI format
This parameter defines the Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) format.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE set bit 2 to 0 in every channel.
FALSE set FS bit of frame 12.
Compatibilities:
For Traffic type = ATM the only possible value is TRUE.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LICPRTDS1- 3-
DISP LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display LIC Port of Type DS1
This task displays one specific LIC port of type DS1 (LICPRTDS1), all
LICPRTDS1 of a given LIC
or all LICPRTDS1 which meet the filter condition.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LICPRTDS1 : [LIC=] [,LIC port=] [,DS1 line TTP ID=] [
[ [
[ [,DS1 path TTP ID=] [,Admin. state=] [
[ [
[ [,Operational state=] [,Traffic type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
If this parameter is ommitted, all LICPRTDS1 which meet the filter
condition are displayed.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
If this parameter is ommitted, all LICPRTDS1 of the LIC are
displayed.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
DS1 line TTP ID
This parameter specifies a component of the LICPRTDS1 which can emit
alarms.
It can be used as an alternate key for the LICPRTDS1 instead of the
parameters
LIC and LIC port.
If LIC is assigned, DS1 line TTP ID will be ignored.
DS1 path TTP ID
This parameter specifies a component of the LICPRTDS1 which can emit
alarms.
It can be used as an alternate key for the LICPRTDS1 instead of the
parameters
LIC and LIC port.
If LIC or DS1 line TTP ID are assigned, DS1 path TTP ID
will be ignored.
Admin. state
This parameter specifies the Admin. state for the filter condition.
If LIC, DS1 line TTP ID or DS1 path TTP ID are assigned,
Admin. state will be ignored.
Input format:
Selection from:
Locked The resource is administratively prohibited from
performing services for its users.
Unlocked The resource is administratively permitted to perform
services for its users. This is independent of its
inherent operability.
Operational state
This parameter specifies the Operational state for the filter
condition.
If LIC, DS1 line TTP ID or DS1 path TTP ID are assigned,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LICPRTDS1- 1+
DISP LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Operational state will be ignored.
Input format:
Selection from:
Disabled The resource is totally inoperable and unable to provide
service to the user(s).
Enabled The resource is partially or fully operable and
available for use.
Traffic type
This parameter specifies the Traffic type for the filter condition.
If LIC, DS1 line TTP ID or DS1 path TTP ID are assigned,
Traffic type will be ignored.
Input format:
Selection from:
ATM broadband
STM narrowband, access to timeslots
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LICPRTDS1- 2-
MOD LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify LIC Port of Type DS1
This task modifies a LIC port of type DS1 (LICPRTDS1).
Possible Effects:
If the Admin. state is unlocked, it will temporarily be locked
during the modify operation. This will cause a service interruption.
Changing the line coding or the framing format is a service-affecting
operation.
If the Admin. state is set to locked, the port is disabled.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD LICPRTDS1 : LIC= ,LIC port= [,Admin. state=] [
[ [
[ [,Alarm profile MP=] [,Timing source=] [
[ [
[ [,Line build out=] [,DS1 line code=] [
[ [
[ [,DS1 frame format=] [,DS1 data link=] [,RAI format=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
Admin. state
This parameter describes the administration of a resource.
Input format:
Selection from:
Locked The resource is administratively prohibited from
performing services for its users.
Unlocked The resource is administratively permitted to perform
services for its users. This is independent of its
inherent operability.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LICPRTDS1- 1+
MOD LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
Timing source
This parameter selects the clock source for the transmitted
line signal. This is only valid for non-ATM traffic.
Input format:
Selection from:
System time the internal clock from the ACCG is used.
Loop the incoming line clock is used.
Line build out
This parameter is used to indicate the line build out setting (i.e.
equalization setting) of
the transmission line at the line termination.
Input format:
Selection from:
1 0..35 m
2 25..65 m
3 55..95 m
4 85..125 m
5 115..155 m
6 145..185 m
7 175..210 m
length for a PULB 22AWG cable.
DS1 line code
This parameter selects the DS1 line code.
Input format:
Selection from:
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion (bipolar) without zero code
suppression.
AMIZCS Alternate Mark Inversion (bipolar) with zero code
suppression.
B8ZS Alternate Mark Inversion (bipolar) with 8-zero
substitution.
Compatibilities:
For Traffic type = ATM the only possible value is B8ZS.
DS1 frame format
This parameter identifies the DS1 frame format.
Input format:
Selection from:
SF Superframe format
ESF Extended superframe format
Compatibilities:
For Traffic type = ATM the only possible value is ESF.
DS1 data link
This parameter specifies whether the DS1 data link is enabled or not.
Input format:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LICPRTDS1- 2+
MOD LICPRTDS1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Selection from:
TRUE enabled
FALSE disabled
Compatibilities:
If the interface is used as clock source, only the value TRUE is
possible.
RAI format
This parameter defines the Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) format.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE set bit 2 to 0 in every channel.
FALSE set FS bit of frame 12.
Compatibilities:
For Traffic type = ATM the only possible value is TRUE.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LICPRTDS1- 3-
CAN LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel LIC Port of Type E1
This task cancels a LIC port of type E1 (LICPRTE1).
Prerequisites:
No ATM layer objects may exist for the given LICPRTE1.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN LICPRTE1 : LIC= ,LIC port= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LICPRTE1- 1-
CR LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create LIC Port of Type E1
This task creates a LIC port of type E1 (LICPRTE1).
ATTENTION :
If the script can not finish execution ( e.g. connection between
Net Manager and node is broken ) then use the following procedure :
- First use CAN LICPRTE1 and then try to create this LICPRTE1
again.
The LICPRTE1 consists of the objects
- PPI TTP
This managed object class represents the point where the internal
logic level and the timing is converted into a line signal,
and the incoming interface signal is converted into an internal logic
level and the timing is recovered from the line signal.
A Comm. alarm notification shall be issued if a
Loss of signal (LOS) is detected. The Probable cause
parameter of the notification shall indicate LOS.
The Operational state is Disabled if a LOS is detected
- E1 alarm TTP
This object class originates and terminates a PDH hierarchy trail.
This object class includes the AIS monitoring function.
A Comm. alarm notification shall be issued if
- a Loss of Frame (LOF)
- a Far end receiver failure (FERF)
- an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
is detected.
The Operational state is Disabled when a LOF, FERF or
AIS is detected.
- E0 time slot (31 instances, only for Traffic type STM)
An instance of this object class originates and terminates a 64 kbit/s
connection.
- TC adaptor (only for Traffic type ATM)
This object represents a point in the managed system where the
adaptation of the ATM Layer to the underlying physical infrastructure
takes place.
Prerequisites:
- LIC must exist.
- LIC must support E1.
Input format

[ [
[ CR LICPRTE1 : LIC= ,LIC port= [,Redundant LIC=] ,Traffic type= [
[ [
[ ,Admin. state= ,Alarm profile MP= ,Timing source= [
[ [
[ ,E-bit= ,E-bit polarity= ,National bit= [
[ [
[ ,E1 frame format= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
Redundant LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC number of the redundant LIC.
This parameter is mandatory if the active LIC is configured
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LICPRTE1- 1+
CR LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for 1+1 board redundancy, otherwise it must be empty.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
Traffic type
This parameter determines the type of traffic on the physical interface.
Input format:
Selection from:
ATM broadband
STM narrowband, access to timeslots
Admin. state
This parameter describes the administration of a resource.
Input format:
Selection from:
Locked The resource is administratively prohibited from
performing services for its users.
Unlocked The resource is administratively permitted to perform
services for its users. This is independent of its
inherent operability.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
Timing source
This parameter selects the clock source for the transmitted
line signal. This is only valid for non-ATM traffic.
Input format:
Selection from:
System time the internal clock from the ACCG is used.
Loop the incoming line clock is used.
E-bit
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LICPRTE1- 2+
CR LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter enables or disables the evaluation of the E-bit
in the E1 CRC multiframe.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE the E-bit is enabled
FALSE the E-bit is disabled
E-bit polarity
This parameter sets the expected E-bit polarity for an accepted
multiframe.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE error free submultiframe: E-bit=1 (according to ITU-T
G704)
FALSE error free submultiframe: E-bit=0 (according to M.3604)
National bit
This parameter determines whether default pattern or national
bit default pattern is sent.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE national bit default pattern
FALSE default pattern
E1 frame format
This parameter identifies the E1 frame format.
Input format:
Selection from:
Double used for older systems
CRC
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LICPRTE1- 3-
DISP LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display LIC Port of Type E1
This task displays one specific LIC port of type E1 (LICPRTE1),
all LICPRTE1 of a given LIC or all LICPRTE1 which meet the filter condition.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LICPRTE1 : [LIC=] [,LIC port=] [,PPI TTP ID=] [,Admin. state=] [
[ [
[ [,Operational state=] [,Traffic type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
If this parameter is ommitted, all LICPRTE1 which meet the filter
condition are displayed.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
If this parameter is ommitted, all LICPRTE1 of the LIC are displayed.
If LIC is not assigned, LIC port will be ignored.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
PPI TTP ID
This parameter specifies a component of the LICPRTE1 which can emit
alarms.
It can be used as an alternative key for the LICPRTE1 instead of the
parameters
LIC and LIC port.
If LIC is assigned, PPI TTP ID will be ignored.
Admin. state
This parameter specifies the Admin. state for the filter condition.
If LIC or PPI TTP ID are assigned,
Admin. state will be ignored.
Input format:
Selection from:
Locked The resource is administratively prohibited from
performing services for its users.
Unlocked The resource is administratively permitted to perform
services for its users. This is independent of its
inherent operability.
Operational state
This parameter specifies the Operational state for the filter
condition.
If LIC or PPI TTP ID are assigned,
Operational state will be ignored.
Input format:
Selection from:
Disabled The resource is totally inoperable and unable to provide
service to the user(s).
Enabled The resource is partially or fully operable and
available for use.
Traffic type
This parameter specifies the Traffic type for the filter condition.
If LIC or PPI TTP ID are assigned,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LICPRTE1- 1+
DISP LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Traffic type will be ignored.
Input format:
Selection from:
ATM broadband
STM narrowband, access to timeslots
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LICPRTE1- 2-
MOD LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify LIC Port of Type E1
This task modifies a LIC port of type E1.
Possible Effects:
If the Admin. state is unlocked, it will temporarily be locked
during the modify operation. This will cause a service interruption.
If the Admin. state is set to locked, the port is disabled.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD LICPRTE1 : LIC= ,LIC port= [,Admin. state=] [
[ [
[ [,Alarm profile MP=] [,E1 frame format=] [,E-bit=] [
[ [
[ [,E-bit polarity=] [,National bit=] [,Timing source=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC
This parameter specifies the LIC.
Input format:
1..32767, range of decimal numbers
LIC port
This parameter specifies the LIC port.
Input format:
1..8, range of decimal numbers
Admin. state
This parameter describes the administration of a resource.
Input format:
Selection from:
Locked The resource is administratively prohibited from
performing services for its users.
Unlocked The resource is administratively permitted to perform
services for its users. This is independent of its
inherent operability.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP for a unit.
The Alarm Profile MP contains the Probable cause values.
For each Probable cause an alarm priority is assigned.
On the MP the following standardised Alarm Profile MPs
are available:
ALSUPP:
The alarm priority of all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is suppressed.
WARNING:
This is no alarm, but a warning. The alarm priority of all
Probable cause values indicates a warning.
MINNOESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates
that the alarm is of minor importance and will not escalate.
MINESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is minor,
if the service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
In case the service is affected the priority will escalate to
critical.
MAJNOESC:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LICPRTE1- 1+
MOD LICPRTE1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate.
MAJESC:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values indicates that
the alarm is of major importance but will not escalate, if the
service of the alarmed unit is not affected.
If service is affected, the priority will escalate to critical.
CRITICAL:
The alarm priority for all Probable cause values is critical,
i.e. service is affected.
E1 frame format
This parameter identifies the E1 frame format.
Input format:
Selection from:
Double used for older systems
CRC
E-bit
This parameter enables or disables the evaluation of the E-bit
in the E1 CRC multiframe.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE the E-bit is enabled
FALSE the E-bit is disabled
E-bit polarity
This parameter sets the expected E-bit polarity for an accepted
multiframe.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE error free submultiframe: E-bit=1 (according to ITU-T
G704)
FALSE error free submultiframe: E-bit=0 (according to M.3604)
National bit
This parameter determines whether default pattern or national
bit default pattern is sent.
Input format:
Selection from:
TRUE national bit default pattern
FALSE default pattern
Timing source
This parameter selects the clock source for the transmitted
line signal. This is only valid for non-ATM traffic.
Input format:
Selection from:
System time the internal clock from the ACCG is used.
Loop the incoming line clock is used.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LICPRTE1- 2-
CAN LICREDG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Line Interface Card Red. Group
This task deletes a ]LIC red. group].
Prerequisites:
- No ]LIC] exists in this ]LIC red. group].
Input format

[ [
[ CAN LICREDG : LIC red. group= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC red. group
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC red. group].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...512.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LICREDG- 1-
CR LICREDG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Line Interface Card Red. Group
This task creates a ]LIC red. group].
Input format

[ [
[ CR LICREDG : LIC red. group= ,Protection type= [,Spare unit revert.=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC red. group
This parameter is the number of a ]LIC red. group].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...512.
Protection type
This parameter determines the redundancy principle for a LIC.
Spare unit revert.
This parameter decides, if after a protection switch from one unit to a
redundant unit, a switch back should be carried out, if the first unit
is able to provide service again.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LICREDG- 1-
DISP LICREDG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Line Interface Card Red. Group
This task displays one or all ]LIC red. groups].
The input parameter is the number identifying a ]LIC red. group].
If there is no input of the ]LIC red. group] then the output will be all
]LIC red. groups] within the system.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LICREDG : [LIC red. group=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LIC red. group
This parameter is the number of an existing ]LIC red. group].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...512.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LICREDG- 1-
STAT LINE
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY ENHANCED STATUS OF SUB AND PBXLN
This command displays the enhanced status of a subscriber or of PBX lines. In
case of PBX lines this status is displayed also for the operating mode and the
PBX, to which the lines belong.
The enhanced status consists of both the transient and the semipermanent data
indicating the busy/idle status or any kind of blocking. In case of an ISDN
basic access the busy/idle information contains the number of busy B-channels.
More information about the basic access can be obtained by the command
STAT BA.
This command also displays the total number of lines of a PBX and the number
of lines blocked for administrative and maintenance reasons.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. STAT LINE - DN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA DN
2. STAT LINE - EQN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA EQN
3. STAT LINE - LSN ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LSN
1. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA DN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via directory number.

[ [
[ ; [
[ STAT LINE : [LAC=] ,DN= [,OPMODE= [,LNO=]] [,FORMAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more than one
local network connected to an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the subscriber or the
pilot directory number of the PBX with the line to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of a PBX line. AIC, IIC
and IIC1TR6 refer to lines coming to the switch from the PBX. AOG,
IOG and IOG1TR6 refer to lines going from the switch to the PBX.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT LINE- 1+
STAT LINE
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number of the PBX line to be
displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
FORMAT OUTPUT MASK FORM
This parameter displays a table with the total number
of lines of a PBX and the number of lines blocked for
administrative and maintenance reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BLOCKED BLOCKED PBX LINES
This identifier outputs the total number of
lines of a PBX and the number of lines blocked
for administrative and maintenance reasons.
The number of PBX lines will be listed
separately per each category and operating mode.
Incompatibilities:
Parameter:
OPMODE
LNO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT LINE- 2+
STAT LINE
EQN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA EQN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via equipment number.

[ [
[ ; [
[ STAT LINE : EQN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of the port, connected to
the subcriber or PBX line to be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: TSG / DLU / V5IF=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
- TSG number (0..7 for a LTG port)
- DLU number (10,20,30..2550 for a DLU port)
- V5IF number (6000..8999 for a V5 port )
b: LTG / SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
- LTG number (1..63 for a LTG port )
- Shelf number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..3 for a DLU16 port)
- (0 for a V5 port )
c: LTU / MODULE=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
- LTU number (0..7 for a LTG port)
- Module number (0..15 for a DLU port)
- V5 port number (0 for a V51 port,
0..20 for a V52 port)
d: CHANNEL / CIRCUIT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
- Channel number (0..31 for a LTG port )
- Circuit number (0..7 for a DLU8 port,
0..15 for a DLU16 port)
- V5 port number (0..31 for a V51 port,
0..99 for a V52 port )
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT LINE- 3+
STAT LINE
LSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ADDRESSING OBJECT VIA LSN
Input format for addressing the object to be displayed via line service number.
This format can be used only for PBX lines with a line service number
associated.

[ [
[ ; [
[ STAT LINE : [LAC=] ,LSN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more than one
local network connected to an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LSN LINE SERVICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line service number of a PBX line to be
displayed. A line service number is a number associated with a
PBX line to make this line direct dialable or for billing purposes.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT LINE- 4-
DISP LINEDATA
COSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE DATA
This command displays alternatively
- the International Portable User Identities (IPUI)
of Cordless Terminal Mobilities (CTM) SUB or PBXLN
- the public Business Group Identifications (BGID)
of SUB or PBX
- the ported-in number (PN=<n1>(-<ddrn>))
- the Unique Identification (UNIQUEID) of SUB, PBX
or PBXLN
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP LINEDATA- COSDAT CLASS OF SERVICE WITH DATA
2. DISP LINEDATA- PN PORTED-IN NUMBER
3. DISP LINEDATA- UNIQUEID UNIQUE IDENTIFICATION
1. Input format
CLASS OF SERVICE WITH DATA
This command displays alternatively
- the International Portable User Identities (IPUI)
of Cordless Terminal Mobilities (CTM) SUB or PBXLN
- the public Business Group Identifications (BGID)
of SUB or PBX.

[ [
[ DISP LINEDATA : COSDAT= [,LAC=] [,DN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
COSDAT CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
This parameter selects the display of the International Portable User
Identities or Business Group Identifications.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: CLASSES OF SERVICE WITH DATA
BGID BUSINESS GROUP IDENTIFICATION
IPUI INTERNATIONAL PORTABLE USER ID
b: NUMBER=
1...25 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Following values are allowed:
IPUI 1..25 digits hexadecimal
BGID 2..16777215 range of decimal numbers
Note:
- If no value is entered, it represents the
entire range of unit values.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is only possible together with parameter DN or LSN.
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LINEDATA- 1+
DISP LINEDATA
COSDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER (SDN/PDN)
Note:
- Input of a directory number is only allowed if no
number in parameter COSDAT or UNIQUEID=X is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LINEDATA- 2+
DISP LINEDATA
PN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
PORTED-IN NUMBER
This command selects the display of the number portability composed
of a routing number (N2), an additional dialled/ported number (N1)
and a flag if the routing number is to dial (DDRN).
The following input is allowed:
- PN = N1
- PN = N1-DDRN.

[ [
[ DISP LINEDATA : PN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PN PORTED-IN NUMBER
This parameter selects the display of the number portabilitycomposed
of a routing number (N2), an additional dialled/ported number (N1)
and a flag if the routing number is to dial (DDRN).
The following input is allowed:
- PN = N1
- PN = N1-DDRN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: PORTED-IN NUMBER=
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
Following values are allowed:
PN=N1 1..12 digits or X
Note:
- A complete or partly qualified number may
entered.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: ROUTING NUMBER DIALLING ALLOWED
NO ROUTING NUMBER NOT DIALLABLE
YES ROUTING NUMBER DIALLABLE
Following values are allowed:
DDRN YES/NO.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LINEDATA- 3+
DISP LINEDATA
UNIQUEID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
UNIQUE IDENTIFICATION
This command displays the Unique Identification (UNIQUEID)
of SUB, PBX or PBXLN.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,DN= [[ [
[ DISP LINEDATA : UNIQUEID= [,LAC=] [,LSN=[ [,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIQUEID UNIQUE IDENTIFICATION
This parameter selects the display of the Unique Identification.
The Unique Identification consists of the Main Key and the
Supplementary Key.
The Supplementary Key includes a flag, it is the first digit and
called Oobject Class, which is 0 for subscriber/PBX/customerProfile
or 1 for PBX-line/SHG-member/customized Resources.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: MAINKEY=
1...327680, range of decimal numbers
The Main Key represents a unique identification for a specified
Object Class.
Note:
For Object Class 0 the defined range is 1...327680, and
for Object Class 1 the defined range is 1...262143.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: SUPPLKEY=
8 digit decimal number
The Supplementary Key takes care for uniqueness of a
uniqueId in a specified time interval. It contains the
Object Class and a counter which is increased every time a
new creation command is executed.
Note:
- First digit, the Object Class, must be 0 or 1!
- For the Object Class 0 the values between
00000001 and 08388607 are allowed.
- For the Object Class 1 the values between
10000001 and 18388607 are allowed.
- If entered Main Key is X, the entry of the supplementary key
is not allowed.
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is only possible together with parameter DN or LSN.
- Input is mandatory for an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER (SDN/PDN)
Note:
- Input of a directory number is only allowed if no
number in parameter COSDAT or UNIQUEID=X is entered.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LINEDATA- 4+
DISP LINEDATA
UNIQUEID
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LSN LINE SERVICE NUMBER
Note:
- Input of a Line Service Number is only allowed if UNIQUEID=X
is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
Note:
- Input of an Operation Mode is only allowed if UNIQUEID=X and
DN are also entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
LNO LINE NUMBER
Note:
- Input of a Line Number is only allowed if UNIQUEID=X and DN
are also entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LINEDATA- 5-
DISP LINETHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP LINE THRESHOLDS
This command displays thresholds for monitoring individual and
PBX lines. These thresholds must have been entered with the
command ENTR LINETHR.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LINETHR ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LINETHR- 1-
ENTR LINETHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LINE THRESHOLDS
This command is used to enter the thresholds for monitoring
individual or PBX lines in an exchange.
- Individual lines are monitored for over long events and for
port faults. If the threshold is exceeded, the alarm unnecessary
seizure appears on the system panel.
- PBX groups are monitored for the number of disturbed and seized
lines in the group. If for a group the disturbed lines exceed
the threshold, the alarm PBX group alarm appears on the system panel.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR LINETHR : <LNLOCKAL= ,PGATHR=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNLOCKAL LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
This parameter specifies the threshold for individual lines.
Note:
- The threshold for individual lines is entered as the maximum
number of disturbed lines.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...262143, range of decimal numbers
Default: 5
PGATHR PBX GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD
This parameter specifies the threshold for PBX trunks.
Note:
- All trunks (bothway, outgoing and incoming) of all PBXs are
monitored.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: PBX GROUP ALARM THRESHOLD=
0...100, range of decimal numbers
The threshold for PBX trunks is entered as minimum availability
in percent.
Default: 50
b: MINIMUM NUMBER OF LINES IN PBX GROUP FOR THRESHOLD=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
Monitoring is started for a PBX trunk when this minimum number
of lines is reached.
Default: 10
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LINETHR- 1-
DISP LISTTOAN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LISTENER TO ANNOUNCEMENT
This command displays the transient announcement lists for
one, anyone or all lines of one or all announcement trunk groups.
Notes:
- The command can only display announcements which use
broadcasting.
- Announcements installed as normal trunks are
not displayed by this command.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LISTTOAN : TGNO= [,LNO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TGNO TRUNK GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the trunk group number.
Notes:
- For this parameter the value X is allowed to display the
announcement lists of all announcement trunk groups.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the line number within the recorded
announcement group.
Notes:
- up to 32 line numbers can be linked.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1,2,3...4095, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LISTTOAN- 1-
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKMD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
This command cancels a call processing block for a PBX, a PBX line group,
a PBX line, a subscriber or a port with several different directory numbers.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKMD CANCEL BLOCKED PORT MULTIP. DN
2. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKPB CANCEL BLOCKED PBX
3. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKPG CANCEL BLOCKED PBX GROUP
4. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKPL CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE
5. CAN LMBLK - CANBLKSB CANCEL BLOCKED SUBSCRIBER
1. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PORT MULTIP. DN
Input format for canceling blocked port with several different
directory numbers (all directory numbers of a specific equipment number
are unblocked).

[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the blocked port.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MDN PORT WITH FEATURE MULTIPLE DN
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
Note:
- If the equipment type (LTG, DLU or V5IF) is selected, the
following subdivision of the equipment number is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...7 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
! c = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...31 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V52IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 1+
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKMD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG/SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LTU/MODULE/TH V52PORT=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 2+
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX.

[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,LAC= ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the blocked port.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 3+
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX GROUP
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX line group.

[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,LAC= ,DN= ,OPMODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the blocked port.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PBXGRP PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE GROUP
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the trunk group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 4+
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED PBX LINE
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a PBX line.

[ [
[ [
[ [,EQN=[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,LAC= [,DN= ,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the blocked port.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PBXLN PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE LINE
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
Note:
- If the equipment type (LTG, DLU or V5IF) is selected, the
following subdivision of the equipment number is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...7 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
! c = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...31 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V52IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG/SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LTU/MODULE/TH V52PORT=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 5+
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the trunk group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number associated with a PBX line.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 6+
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKSB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
CANCEL BLOCKED SUBSCRIBER
Input format for canceling the maintenance blocking of a subscriber line

[ [
[ [
[ [,EQN=[ [
[ CAN LMBLK : TYPE= ,LAC= [,DN=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the blocked port.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MDN PORT WITH FEATURE MULTIPLE DN
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
PBXGRP PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE GROUP
PBXLN PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE LINE
SUB SUBSCRIBER
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
Note:
- If the equipment type (LTG, DLU or V5IF) is selected, the
following subdivision of the equipment number is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...7 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
! c = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...31 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V52IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG/SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LTU/MODULE/TH V52PORT=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 7+
CAN LMBLK
CANBLKSB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LMBLK- 8-
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LINE MAINTENANCE BLOCKING
This command creates a call processing blocking for a PBX, a PBX line group,
a PBX line, a subscriber or a port with several different directory
numbers. Calls are diverted to a recorded announcement. If a blocking already
exists, it is overwritten when the new blocking is entered.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBX BLOCKING A PBX
2. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXGR BLOCKING A PBX GROUP
3. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPBXLN BLOCKING A PBX LINE
4. ENTR LMBLK - BLKPMUDN BLOCKING PORT WITH MULTIPLE DN
5. ENTR LMBLK - BLKSUB BLOCKING A SUBSCRIBER
1. Input format
BLOCKING A PBX
Input format for blocking a PBX.

[ [
[ ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,LAC= ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the port
to be blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PBX PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the type of call processing block.
Note:
- The meaning of the parameter values is country specific.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MAINT BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 0
MAINT1 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 1
MAINT2 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 2
MAINT3 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 3
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 1+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBXGR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
BLOCKING A PBX GROUP
Input format for blocking a PBX group.

[ [
[ ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,LAC= ,DN= ,OPMODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the port
to be blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PBXGRP PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE GROUP
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the type of call processing block.
Note:
- The meaning of the parameter values is country specific.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MAINT BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 0
MAINT1 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 1
MAINT2 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 2
MAINT3 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 3
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the trunk group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 2+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
BLOCKING A PBX LINE
Input format for blocking a PBX line.

[ [
[ [
[ [,EQN=[ [
[ ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,LAC= [,DN= ,OPMODE= ,LNO=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the port
to be blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
PBXLN PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE LINE
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the type of call processing block.
Note:
- The meaning of the parameter values is country specific.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MAINT BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 0
MAINT1 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 1
MAINT2 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 2
MAINT3 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 3
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
Note:
- If the equipment type (LTG, DLU or V5IF) is selected, the
following subdivision of the equipment number is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...7 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
! c = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...31 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V52IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 3+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPBXLN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG/SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LTU/MODULE/TH V52PORT=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the trunk group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number associated with a PBX line.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 4+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPMUDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
BLOCKING PORT WITH MULTIPLE DN
Input format for blocking a port with several different directory numbers
(all directory numbers of a specific equipment number are blocked).

[ [
[ ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the port
to be blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MDN PORT WITH FEATURE MULTIPLE DN
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the type of call processing block.
Note:
- The meaning of the parameter values is country specific.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MAINT BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 0
MAINT1 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 1
MAINT2 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 2
MAINT3 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 3
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
Note:
- If the equipment type (LTG, DLU or V5IF) is selected, the
following subdivision of the equipment number is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...7 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
! c = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...31 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V52IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 5+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKPMUDN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LTG/SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LTU/MODULE/TH V52PORT=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 6+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
BLOCKING A SUBSCRIBER
Input format for blocking a subscriber.

[ [
[ [
[ [,EQN=[ [
[ ENTR LMBLK : TYPE= ,BLK= ,LAC= [,DN=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE OF PORT
This parameter specifies the termination type of the port
to be blocked.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SUB SUBSCRIBER
BLK BLOCKING
This parameter specifies the type of call processing block.
Note:
- The meaning of the parameter values is country specific.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MAINT BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 0
MAINT1 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 1
MAINT2 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 2
MAINT3 BLOCKING ANNOUNCEMENT 3
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number.
Note:
- If the equipment type (LTG, DLU or V5IF) is selected, the
following subdivision of the equipment number is expected.
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! LTG Unit : a = 0...7 time stage group !
! b = 1...63 line trunk group !
! c = 0...7 line trunk unit !
! d = 0...31 channel !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! DLU Unit : a = 10,20...2550 DLU number !
! b = 0...7 shelf number !
! c = 0...15 module number !
! d = 0...31 circuit number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V51IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 0 module number !
! d = 0...31 V5port number !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! V52IF Unit : a = 6000...8999 V5IF number !
! b = 0 shelf number !
! c = 00...20 THv5port number !
! d = 00...99 TUv5port number !
! !
! Max : V5port is limited to the number 2047 !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c-d
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 7+
ENTR LMBLK
BLKSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: DLU/TSG/V5IF=
0...8999, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG/SHELF=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
c: LTU/MODULE/TH V52PORT=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
d: CHANNEL/CIRCUIT/V5PORT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code in an exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber or PBX directory number. The
directory number must be within the created DN-interval.
1...9,A...F hexadecimal value is specified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LMBLK- 8-
DISP LMN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCATION MARK NUMBER
This command displays :
- all location mark numbers of a MSC area (LMN = X),
- all cells corresponding to the specified location mark number.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LMN : LMN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LMN LOCATION MARK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the emergency center
to which emergency calls have to be routed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LMN- 1-
MOD LMN
CELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOCATION MARK NUMBER
This command modifies a location mark number, which is allocated by
the command CR INTCELL. It is possible to modify:
- the location mark number of a particular cell
- the location mark number of an emergency center
Prerequisites:
The associated cell has to be created within the MSC area by using
the command CR INTCELL.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD LMN - CELL MOD LMN OF A PARTICULAR CELL
2. MOD LMN - CENTER MOD LMN OF AN EMERGENCY CENTER
1. Input format
MOD LMN OF A PARTICULAR CELL
This input format modifies the location mark number of a particular
cell.

[ [
[ MOD LMN : LACOD= ,CI= ,NLMN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single
base station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
NLMN NEW LOCATION MARK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new directory number of the emergency
center to which emergency calls have to be routed.
If the Hex-digit F is used in the location mark number, this digit
will be replaced by the dialed digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LMN- 1+
MOD LMN
CENTER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MOD LMN OF AN EMERGENCY CENTER
This input format modifies the location mark number of an emergency
center.

[ [
[ MOD LMN : LMN= ,NLMN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LMN LOCATION MARK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of the emergency center
to which emergency calls are routed.
If the Hex-digit F is used in the location mark number, this digit
will be replaced by the dialed digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NLMN NEW LOCATION MARK NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new directory number of the emergency
center to which emergency calls have to be routed.
If the Hex-digit F is used in the location mark number, this digit
will be replaced by the dialed digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LMN- 2-
DISP LNLCKOUT
CONSOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE LOCKOUT
This command displays faulty subscriber, PBX lines, emergency call
stations or consoles.
If faulty elements have been found in the specified originator group,
they are displayed in tabular form.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP LNLCKOUT- CONSOLE ISDN DSB CONSOLE
2. DISP LNLCKOUT- OTHER DN ORIENTED
1. Input format
ISDN DSB CONSOLE
This format specifies the input parameters for faulty ISDN DSB console.

[ [
[ DISP LNLCKOUT : LNTYPE= ,EQN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNTYPE LINE TYPE
This parameter restricts the search for line lockout to a specified
line type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONSOLE ISDN DSB CONSOLE
ECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
PBX PBX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
EQN EQUIPMENT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the equipment number of ISDN digital
switchboard console.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: DLU=
0...2550, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: MODULE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: CIRCUIT=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNLCKOUT- 1+
DISP LNLCKOUT
CONSOLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNLCKOUT- 2+
DISP LNLCKOUT
OTHER
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
DN ORIENTED
This input format specifies the input parameters for faulty
subscribers, PBX and emergency call station.

[ [
[ DISP LNLCKOUT : LNTYPE= ,DN= [,OPMODE=] [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LNTYPE LINE TYPE
This parameter restricts the search for line lockout to a specified
line type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONSOLE ISDN DSB CONSOLE
ECS EMERGENCY CALL STATION
PBX PBX
SUB SUBSCRIBER
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number of subscriber,
PBX or emergency call station.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
OPMODE OPERATION MODE
This parameter restricts the search for faulty analog PBX lines to
the specified operating mode.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more than one
local network in the exchange.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNLCKOUT- 3-
CAN LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command cancels one data entry in the local number portability
database.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LNPDAT : PORTEDN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PORTEDN PORTED NUMBER
This number must be entered as national number (national prefix
included).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LNPDAT- 1-
DISP LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command displays the new routing number and status for a ported
number in the local number portability database.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LNPDAT : PORTEDN= [,ROUTN=] [,STATUS=] [,DISPOPT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PORTEDN PORTED NUMBER
This number must be entered as national number (national prefix
included). The number may be specified partially.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTN ROUTING NUMBER
If this number is specified, only the entries for which the routing
number begins with this specified number will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
STATUS STATUS OF PORTED NUMBER
If one of the following states is specified, only the entries with
this state will be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INACT INACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
DISPOPT DISPLAY OPTIONS
This parameter specifies the kind of output.
Default: ALL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINGLE SINGLE OUTPUT
Only one ported number will be displayed.
Incompatible parameters:
- ROUTN
- STATUS
Incompatible parameter value:
- PORTEDN = X
ALL ALL OUTPUT
A list of ported numbers beginning
with the digits specified by parameter
PORTEDN will be displayed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNPDAT- 1-
ENTR LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command enters the new routing number and status for a ported
number in the local number portability database.
For the parameter PORTEDN there is no need to determine exactly one
directory number, this means, it is also possible to enter the
beginning digits of a group of directory numbers. Furthermore you
are allowed to enter ambiguous digit chains (e.g., the digit
combinations 01234 and 01234567 may exist both at the same time).
Consequently, evaluating a given digit combination will lead to the
result, that belongs to an active digit combination in the database
corresponding with most of the beginning digits.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR LNPDAT : PORTEDN= ,ROUTN= [,STATUS=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PORTEDN PORTED NUMBER
This number must be entered as national number (national prefix
included).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTN ROUTING NUMBER
This number must contain the Porting Id (identifer for new operator/
location) and the full ported number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
STATUS STATUS OF PORTED NUMBER
Default: INACT
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INACT INACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LNPDAT- 1-
MOD LNPDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOCAL NUMBER PORTABILITY DATA
This command modifies the routing number and/or status for a ported
number in the local number portability database.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LNPDAT : PORTEDN= <,ROUTN= ,STATUS=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PORTEDN PORTED NUMBER
This number must be entered as national number (national prefix
included).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ROUTN ROUTING NUMBER
This number must contain the Porting ID (identifier for new operator/
location) and the full ported number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...22 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
STATUS STATUS OF PORTED NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INACT INACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LNPDAT- 1-
CAN LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command cancels an existing number portability trigger code point.
The used trigger profile is replaced.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies exactly a digit combination for which a local
number portability trigger exists.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the trigger
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
This parameter must match exactly an existing entry for the given
CODE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LNPTCPT- 1-
CR LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command defines a code point that initiates a trigger of evaluation of
number portability data. The trigger method used depends on the referred number
portability trigger profile.
All LNP trigger code points change their behaviour immediately when the trigger
profile attributes are modified with MOD LNPTPROF or when the profile status
is changed with ACT LNPTPROF or DACT LNPTPROF.
By default no LNP triggering is done. LNP triggering happens when
- the complete CODE of one LNP trigger code point is translated, and
- this trigger code point uses an active user-defined TPROF.
CODE is usually partly qualified compared to the complete called party
number, e.g. the local area code. The trigger code point is valid for all digit
combinations that begin with CODE.
It is possible to have a two or more trigger code points with CODE
parameters that share the initial digits. The longest CODE that matches
with the called party number determines which trigger is used for the set up of
the call.
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name "NOTRIG" allows to
suppress LNP triggering for more specific CODE if a shorter CODE
uses an active trigger.
The "NOTRIG" profile has no effect on call processing if it is assigned to a
CODE that has no shorter active trigger.
Example:
CR LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD1, TTYP=QOD, SRVLOC=INTERN;
CR LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD2, TTYP=QOR, SRVLOC=INTERN;
ACT LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD1;
ACT LNPTPROF: TPROF=EWSD2;
CR LNPTCPT: CODE=089, TPROF=EWSD1;
CR LNPTCPT: CODE=0891, TPROF=NOTRIG;
CR LNPTCPT: CODE=08972, TPROF=EWSD2;
Given this data base these LNP triggers are executed for the following
called party numbers: 089 4xxxxx trigger profile EWSD1 is used,
089 71xxxx trigger profile EWSD1 is used,
089 722 61 trigger profile EWSD2 is used,
089 1xxxxx no trigger is done.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] ,TPROF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination for which a local number
portability trigger is created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the trigger
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
This hexadecimal number DEF identifies the "default ORIG1".
This value represents all ORIG1 values that are not explicitely
entered.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LNPTCPT- 1+
CR LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the LNP trigger profile that is used by this
trigger code point.
This value must equal either a user-defined TPROF that was
created with CR LNPTPROF or the current name of the predefined
"NOTRIG" profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LNPTCPT- 2-
DISP LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command displays the data of some or all number portability trigger code
points.
All trigger code points are displayed if CODE = X is entered.
The input of optional parameters has the effect of an output filter. The filter
works like a logical "AND" if two or more optional parameters are entered. Only
those data are displayed that meet all selected criteria.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] [,TPROF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies the digit combination for which local number
portability trigger code points are displayed.
The entry is interpreted as a partly qualified input, i.e. all digit
combinations that start with the entered CODE are shown.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger code
points are displayed that use the entered originating mark.
Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal number DEF
may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger code
points are displayed that use the entered trigger profile(s).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNPTCPT- 1-
MOD LNPTCPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER CODE POINT
This command modifies an existing number portability trigger code point.
The used trigger profile is replaced.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LNPTCPT : CODE= [,ORIG1=] <,TPROF=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CODE DIGIT COMBINATION
This parameter specifies exactly a digit combination for which a local
number portability trigger exists.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
ORIG1 ORIGINATING MARK 1
This parameter specifies the originating code for which the trigger
is addressed. Only decimal numbers, range 0..3839, and the hexadecimal
number DEF may be entered.
This parameter must match exactly an existing entry for the given
CODE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the LNP trigger profile that is used by this
trigger code point.
This value must equal either a user-defined TPROF that was created
with CR LNPTPROF or the current name of the predefined "NOTRIG"
profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LNPTCPT- 1-
ACT LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command activates user-defined number portability trigger profile(s).
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name name "NOTRIG" is always
active. It need not and must not be activated.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ACT LNPTPROF : TPROF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter identifies one or more number portability trigger
profile(s) that are activated.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT LNPTPROF- 1-
CAN LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command cancels an user-defined number portability trigger profile.
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name name "NOTRIG" exists
always. It must not be canceled.
- Prerequisite: The trigger profile is not in use, i.e. no other object has a
reference to this profile.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LNPTPROF : TPROF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter identifies the number portability trigger profile that
is canceled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LNPTPROF- 1-
CR LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command defines a trigger profile that is used to route queries related to
number portability.
These number portability trigger profiles are referred to by number portability
trigger points. The usage of trigger profiles allows to modify easily the
routing of queries when the amount and/or location of number portability servers
is changed. It allows also to modify the query method (trigger type) with a
single action.
All LNP trigger profiles are deactive upon creation.
They have to be activated with ACT LNPTPROF to become operational.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR LNPTPROF : TPROF= ,TTYP= [,COLDIG=] ,SRVLOC= [,PRID=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,PRIDLP=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies a unique name for a number portability trigger
profile. The user may specify any name not yet used in the system for a
number portability trigger profile.
This name is the key that identifies the profile. Therefore it is
assigned to the profile until the profile is canceled and must not be
changed.
One predefined trigger profile exists in the data base. This exists by
default. It need not and may not be created by any MML command. This
predefined trigger profile refers to the function "no trigger". It has
the initial name "NOTRIG" assigned. This name can be modified by MML
command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies the trigger type that is used when a query for
number portability is issued. This trigger type defines the call state
when a query may be issued.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
QOD QUERY ON DIGIT ANALYSIS
This trigger type sends always a query to a number
portability server during the initial routing.
This trigger is executed during a call only if it
was activated for the exchange with
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOD;
QOR QUERY ON RELEASE
This trigger type sends a query to a number
portability server only if the first routing
attempt failed.
This trigger is executed during a call only if it
was activated for the exchange with
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOR;
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LNPTPROF- 1+
CR LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits which are to be collected
additionally as soon as a call uses this LNP trigger profile.
The value "0" (zero) is used if this parameter is omitted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...24, range of decimal numbers
SRVLOC SERVER LOCATION
This parameter defines the location of the portability data server that
is accessed with this trigger profile.
This location is described relative to the exchange where this command
is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTERN INTERNAL SERVER
The server is located internally of this exchange.
The addressing needs no additional data.
Therefore the parameters PRID or PRIDLP
are not to be entered for this identifier.
EXTERN EXTERNAL SERVER
The server is located at another site.
The address parameters to access this server are
stored in a IN TRIGGER PROFILE IDENTIFIER.
Therefore at least one of the parameters PRID
or PRIDLP is mandatory with this identifier.
PRID IN TRIGGER PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies the identifier of a intelligent network
trigger profile. That profile contains address parameters to access
a server via an INAP interface.
The PRID must exist before it may be referred by this command.
It can be created with CR INTRIG.
This parameter is mandatory for SRVLOC = EXTERN.
It is incompatible with SRVLOC = INTERN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRIDLP IN TRIGGER LOCATION PORTAB.
This parameter specifies the identifier of an intelligent network
trigger profile. That profile contains address parameters to access
a server via an INAP interface. The trigger profile is project-
specific and addresses a server only for the purpose of location
portability.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LNPTPROF- 2-
DACT LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command deactivates user-defined number portability trigger profile(s).
The predefined trigger profile with the initial name name "NOTRIG" is always
active. It must not be deactivated.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DACT LNPTPROF : TPROF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter identifies one or more number portability trigger
profile(s) that are deactivated.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT LNPTPROF- 1-
DISP LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command displays the data of some or all number portability trigger
profiles.
All trigger profiles are displayed if TTYP = X is entered.
The input of optional parameters has the effect of an output filter. The filter
works like a logical "AND" if two or more optional parameters are entered. Only
those data are displayed that meet all selected criteria.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LNPTPROF : TPROF= [,TTYP=] [,SRVLOC=] [,PRID=] [
[ [
[ [,PRIDLP=] [,STATUS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter identifies the number portability trigger profile(s)
that are displayed.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger profiles
are displayed that use the entered trigger type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
QOD QUERY ON DIGIT ANALYSIS
QOR QUERY ON RELEASE
SRVLOC SRVLOC LOCATION
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger profiles
are displayed that use the entered server location.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INTERN ACCESS TO INTERNAL SRVLOC
EXTERN ACCESS TO EXTERNAL SRVLOC
PRID IN TRIGGER PROFILE IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger profiles
are displayed that refer to the entered IN trigger profile
identifier.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRIDLP IN TRIGGER LOCATION PORTAB.
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger profiles
are displayed that refer to the entered IN trigger profile
identifier.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNPTPROF- 1+
DISP LNPTPROF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
STATUS STATUS OF TRIGGER PROFILE
This parameter specifies an output filter. Only those trigger profiles
are displayed that have the entered activation status.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DACT DEACTIVE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
ACT ACTIVE LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNPTPROF- 2-
MOD LNPTPROF
PREDEFNA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LNP TRIGGER PROFILE
This command modifies a number portability trigger profile. The modification has
immediate relevance for all number portability trigger points that refer to this
trigger profile.
The attributes of all user-defined trigger profiles - those that were created
with CR LNPTPROF - can be modified.
The predefined "no trigger" profile may be renamed only. No attributes may be
assigned to this trigger profile.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD LNPTPROF - PREDEFNA PREDEFINED PROFILE MODIFY TPROF NAME
2. MOD LNPTPROF - USERATTR USER-DEFINED PROFILES MODIFY ATTRIBUTES
1. Input format
PREDEFINED PROFILE MODIFY TPROF NAME
This path is used to modify the name of the predefined LNP trigger profile.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LNPTPROF : TPROF= ,NTPROF= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a number portability trigger
profile that is being modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NTPROF NEW TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies a new name for the predefined trigger profile
that exists by default in the data base. The user may specify any name
not yet used in the system for a LNP trigger profile.
The initial name "NOTRIG" can be changed with
MOD LNPTPROF: TPROF = NOTRIG, NTPROF = new profile name;
if a different name is to be used.
The names of the user-defined trigger profiles must not be changed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LNPTPROF- 1+
MOD LNPTPROF
USERATTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
USER-DEFINED PROFILES MODIFY ATTRIBUTES
This path is used to modify the attributes of the user-defined LNP trigger
profiles.

[ [
[ MOD LNPTPROF : TPROF= <,TTYP= ,COLDIG= ,SRVLOC= ,PRID= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,PRIDLP=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TPROF TRIGGER PROFILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of a number portability trigger
profile that is being modified.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies the trigger type that is used when a query for
number portability is issued. This trigger type defines the call state
when a query may be issued.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
QOD QUERY ON DIGIT ANALYSIS
This trigger type sends always a query to a number
portability server during the initial routing.
This trigger is executed during a call only if it
was activated for the exchange with
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOD;
QOR QUERY ON RELEASE
This trigger type sends a query to a number
portability server only if the first routing
attempt failed.
This trigger is executed during a call only if it
was activated for the exchange with
ACT LNPTTYP: TTYP = QOR;
COLDIG COLLECT DIGITS
This parameter specifies the number of digits which are to be collected
additionally as soon as a call uses this LNP trigger profile.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...24, range of decimal numbers
SRVLOC SERVER LOCATION
This parameter defines the location of the portability data server that
is accessed with this trigger profile. This location is described
relative to the exchange where this command is entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EXTERN EXTERNAL SERVER
The server is located at another site.
The address parameters to access this server are
stored in a IN TRIGGER PROFILE ID..
Therefore at least one of the parameters
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LNPTPROF- 2+
MOD LNPTPROF
USERATTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PRID or PRIDLP is mandatory with this
identifier.
INTERN INTERNAL SERVER
The server is located internally of this exchange.
The addressing needs no additional data.
Therefore the parameter PRID is not to be
entered for this identifier. An existing
PRID or PRIDLP entry is removed from the
trigger profile when the server location is
changed to internal.
PRID IN TRIGGER PROFILE ID.
This parameter specifies the identifier of a intelligent network
trigger profile. That profile contains address parameters to access
a server via an INAP interface.
The PRID must exist before it may be referred by this command.
It can be created with CR INTRIG.
This parameter is mandatory if SRVLOC is changed to EXTERN
with this command. It defines in this case the IN trigger profile to be
used.
This parameter is optional if SRVLOC has already the value
EXTERN. It modifies in this case the IN trigger profile to be
used.
This parameter is incompatible with SRVLOC = INTERN, not
regarding of this command or an earlier entered command define the
internal server location.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRIDLP IN TRIGGER PROFILE ID.
This parameter specifies the identifier of an intelligent network
trigger profile. That profile contains address parameters to access
a server via an INAP interface. The trigger profile is project-
specific and addresses a server only for the purpose of location
portability.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LNPTPROF- 3-
ACT LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE
This command activates a trigger type for local number portability. A newly
entered trigger type is added to the already active trigger type(s). The initial
state is that all trigger types are deactive.
More than one trigger type may be active at the same time for one exchange. The
trigger that is actually used to set up calls to ported numbers depends on data
specified with other commands.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT LNPTTYP : TTYP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies a trigger type that becomes active in the
exchange.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
REDIRECT CALL REDIRECTION
This trigger type is based on distributed data. It
equals the method that was introduced into EWSD
version 11.
The call is routed initially to that exchange
where the called directory number is originally
located. The directory number data base of that
exchange shows if a number is ported.
A ported number is administered with
CAN SUB: ..., INCEPT = PORTEDDN.
The second unit NUMBER
of parameter INCEPT contains routing
information to address the new location of the
ported directory number including the directory
number itself.
This number replaces the dialed directory number
completely if this trigger type is active. A
second routing is performed using the supplemented
number. The result is a "redirected call".
Redirected calls are similar to transit calls as
these calls have only a single call leg.
QOD QUERY ON DIGIT ANALYSIS
This trigger type sends always a query to a number
portability server during the initial routing.
The query result for a ported directory number is
a new routing information. This may adress for
example the recipient network or the recipient
exchange, i.e. the new exchange where a number is
located after being ported. The actual content
depends on the project specific interconnection
standards that are the base for the administration
of the portability server.
A positive query result enables routing towards
the physical location where the called directory
number is connected to.
A query result indicating that the directory
number is not known by the server results in
normal routing of the call. This occurs for
unported numbers and for not connected numbers.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT LNPTTYP- 1+
ACT LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This trigger type works most efficient in a
network with a high degree of ported numbers,
because the queries generate less network load
than the unsuccessful routing attempts to the
donor networks or the donor exchanges (those
networks or exchanges where the numbers were
located before ever being ported) of ported
numbers would do.
QOR QUERY ON RELEASE
This trigger type sends a query to a number
portability server only if the first routing
attempt failed.
The call is routed at first to that exchange where
the called directory number is originally located.
A query is sent to a number portability server if
a "release" message is returned. This happens if
the addressed exchange was not able to put the
call through to the called directory number. No
distinction is made between ported numbers and not
connected numbers.
The query returns new routing information for
ported directory numbers. A second routing is
performed using this data.
The query result for not connected numbers
indicates that the directory number is not known
by the server. The call is released in this case.
This trigger type works most efficient in a
network with a low degree of ported numbers,
because the unsuccessful routing attempts to
ported numbers cause less network load than one
query for every call would do.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT LNPTTYP- 2-
DACT LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LNP TRIGGER TYPE
This command deactivates a trigger type for local number portability.
Other active trigger type(s) stay active if this command is executed.
Number portability works only if at least one trigger type is active.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT LNPTTYP : TTYP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TTYP TRIGGER TYPE
This parameter specifies a trigger type that is removed from service.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
REDIRECT CALL REDIRECTION
Deactivating this trigger type is meaningful if a
trigger is prepared that works with a centralized
data base.
The deactivation of this trigger type removes the
distributed routing data from service, i.e. the
unit NUMBER of parameter
INCEPT of CAN SUB: ..., INCEPT =
PORTEDDN is not used by call processing any
more. These data may be removed later when the
centralized trigger works correctly.
The deactivation of these distributed data can be
reversed by activating this trigger type again.
This is useful if the change over to a centralized
trigger fails.
QOD QUERY ON DIGIT ANALYSIS
Calls are routed to that exchange where the called
directory number is originally located without a
query if this trigger type becomes deactive.
QOR QUERY ON RELEASE
Calls are released if the first routing attempt
fails if this trigger type becomes deactive.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT LNPTTYP- 1-
DISP LNPTTYP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LNP TRIGGER TYPE
This command displays the status of all trigger types that exist for local
number portability.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LNPTTYP ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LNPTTYP- 1-
INST LOADTYPE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Install New LoadType on PCP
This task installs a Load type by loading
patch updates into the FEPROM of the PCPs. The task is
used by a managing system during the patch sequence.
The name of the Load type can be displayed by
means of the tasks DISP LIC, DISP AMX or DISP ASN.
Input format

[ [
[ INST LOADTYPE : Load type= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Load type
This parameter specifies the name of
the Load type to be
installed.
Input format: 1...30 characters from
the character set
without space
Input values: alphabetic characters
(also capitals),
numbers and the
following characters:
! $ % # + - _ .
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INST LOADTYPE- 1-
REC LOCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD LOCATION AREA
This command records the location area related data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- Only 1 measurement job can be started.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB if the time
parameter values allow a continuation of the job.
- This command is only allowed for an MSC/VLR.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC LOCAREA : UNIT= [,LACOD=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [
[ [
[ [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first be
copied to tape.
Notes:
- Identifier a covers both MDD and MOD.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: FILETYPE
SINGLE SINGLE FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
DAILY DAILY FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to daily files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files (MO...SU) are prepared and created
before the command is accepted.
Time parameters are not permissible for these
measurements.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is automatically
created on disk or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LOCAREA- 1+
REC LOCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
for the same day of the week is overwritten.
CYCLIC CYCLIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full the newest
data will be overwritten.
This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily files, single or cyclic measurement files).
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception : time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily and cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates (in ascending order) may be linked
with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after entry.
- It is not permissible to enter the command after 23:45 hours with a
begin date on the following day.
- The first measurement may not begin later than one month after the
current date. Subsequent measurements may not begin later than one
year after the current date.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year of the begin
date.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month of the begin
date.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day of the begin
date.
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must
be specified.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LOCAREA- 2+
REC LOCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Exception: time parameters may not be specified for data output
in daily and cyclic files.
Default: the end of the measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year in which
recording is to terminate.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month in which
recording is to terminate.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day on which
recording is to terminate.
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a
begin date (BEG).
Incompatibilities:
- Intervals covering more than one day (e.g. 23-00-01-00).
- Intervals separated by a break of less than one hour.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval begins.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval begins.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval terminates.
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LOCAREA- 3+
REC LOCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval terminates.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which
recording is to take place.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date (TER).
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LOCAREA- 4-
DISP LOCDIAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT
This command displays the local dialing format, i.e. whether
subscriber directory numbers in their own local area may be accessed
with their local area code.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LOCDIAL ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LOCDIAL- 1-
ENTR LOCDIAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCAL DIALLING FORMAT
This command specifies whether a directory number can be dialed from the
local area code as prefix.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR LOCDIAL : DIAL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DIAL DIALLING FORMAT
This parameter defines the local dialing format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LACDN DN WITH LOCAL AREA CODE ALLOW.
DN ONLY DN ALLOWED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LOCDIAL- 1-
CAN LOCKRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOCKING RESTRICTION
This command cancels the lock function exceptions entered with
command ENTR LOCKRST.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LOCKRST : PROAPPL= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PROAPPL PROCESSOR AND APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the processor(s)/application(s) which
should be canceled from the table of lock function exceptions.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
b: APPLICATION=
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LOCKRST- 1-
DISP LOCKRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOCKING RESTRICTION
This command displays the processor(s)/application(s) which are
excepted from lock function.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LOCKRST ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LOCKRST- 1-
ENTR LOCKRST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOCKING RESTRICTION
This command enters restrictions of the lock function for
processor(s)/application(s).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR LOCKRST : PROAPPL= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PROAPPL PROCESSOR AND APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the processor(s)/application(s) which
should be excepted from the lock function.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
b: APPLICATION=
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LOCKRST- 1-
RSET LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET LOG FUNCTION
This command resets the log function. The log function returns to
its basic off status if all log commands entered prior to RSET LOG are
already registered in the log file. Thereafter, no other commands will be
entered in the current log file. From this point of time onward, it is
available as input file for the command file processor (COFIP).
Notes:
- The LOG function can also be reset with the general command for
cancelling semipermanent jobs, CAN JOB.
- The command will be rejected if the log function is already
deactivated.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ RSET LOG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET LOG- 1-
SET LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET LOG FUNCTION
This command sets the log function with the given log file code.
If the SET LOG or MOD LOGFILE command is entered, the
following log files are opened:
the collect log file with the file name stem LG and the index A0
which contains the EXEC CMDFILE command to start the index A1
log file,
the MML log file with the file name stem LG and the index A1 in which
all log commands are written and
the Q3 log file with the file name stem LQ and the index A1 in which
all Q3 log requests are written.
Notes:
- If the index A1 file is filled (end of file is reached), the file will
be automaticly expanded or a continuation file with index A2 will be
opened and the collect log-file gets a further EXEC CMDFILE command
to start the index A2 continuation file.
- If the command was entered without errors, the log function state is
changed from OFF to ON and from then on all log commands, or
all Q3 Requests which have been executed without errors, are entered
in the log file.
- The command is rejected if the log function is already activated.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ SET LOG : FILE= [,SIZE=] [,ERASE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies that part of the name of the log file that
can be defined by the user.
Notes:
- The name of a log file begins with a function identifier
(stem of file name: LG resp. LQ) and ends with an index (A0 -Z9).
In between there is a user-definable part to distinguish between
different log files.
- If the fixpoint function has been switched on the user-definable
part of the file name must be in accordance with the name conventions
of the fixpoint function, in other cases it may be chosen between the
normal file code or the file code according to the name conventions of
the fixpoint function.
- Formal definition of the name of a log file:
<name of log file> ::= <stem of file name>.<file identification>
<stem of file name> ::= LG/LQ
<file identification> ::= <file code>.<index>
<index> ::= A0..Z9
<file code> ::= fixpoint-file code / normal-file code
(user definable part of the name of a log file)
<normal-file code> ::= letter letter/digit (maximum of 4)
<fixpoint-file code> ::= FIX<name of generation>
<name of generation> ::= ffkkloii
ff ... function version of APS
kk ... correction version of APS
l ... local correction version
o ... ODAGEN counter
ii ... fixpoint counter
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...11 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET LOG- 1+
SET LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the desired size of the log file. The
continuation files have the same size as the first log file
(index A1).
Default: 3 PAM blocks.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
ERASE ERASE
This parameter specifies whether existing files with the same file
code are to be erased.
If the parameter value is Y, all log files with the file code
as specified in the FILE will be erased.
If the parameter value is N and the filename is identical with
that of an existing log file, the latter will not be erased
and the command will be rejected with an error message.
The log files are protected so as to prevent the log function
from being interrupted by a user error. File protection is
provided by:
a) the use of a protected stem (LG/LQ) for the names of log files,
b) the assignment of protection attributes for users.
Log files are protected against
- write access,
- deletion by the user,
- filename changes by the user.
A log file is protected by these protection attributes until the
log function is reset or the log file is changed.
The read access to log files (e.g. with EDTS8) and the changing of
restriction periods for log files is always possible.
N DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
NO DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
Y OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
YES OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET LOG- 2-
STAT LOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF LOG
This command displays the current status of the log function and the name
of the current log file.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT LOG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT LOG- 1-
DISP LOGATT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOG ATTRIBUTES
This command displays the log attributes of specific or of all MML commands.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP LOGATT : [CMDCOD=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
CMDCOD COMMAND CODE
This parameter specifies the command codes whose log attributes
are to be displayed. Only valid command codes may be entered.
Up to 34 command codes can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LOGATT- 1-
CAN LOGEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOGGING EVENTS
This command deletes the event(s) which are selected with command
ENTR LOGEVENT.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LOGEVENT : LOGEVENT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LOGEVENT LOGGING EVENTS
This parameter specifies the event(s) which should not be logged.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
X ALL EVENTS
POSLOGIN POSITIVE LOGIN
NEGLOGIN NEGATIVE LOGIN
UACMDIA UNAUTHORIZED CMD/INTERACTION
UAFAC UNAUTHORIZED FILE ACCESS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LOGEVENT- 1-
DISP LOGEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOGGING EVENT
This command displays the event(s) which are selected for
security logging.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LOGEVENT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LOGEVENT- 1-
ENTR LOGEVENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOGGING EVENTS
This command selects the event(s) which should be logged in the
security logging file "OP.ACTION".
Notes:
- The security logging objects must be adequately selected
in order that the selected event(s) can be surely logged.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR LOGEVENT : LOGEVENT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LOGEVENT LOGGING EVENTS
This parameter specifies the event(s) which should be logged.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
X ALL EVENTS
POSLOGIN POSITIVE LOGIN
NEGLOGIN NEGATIVE LOGIN
UACMDIA UNAUTHORIZED CMD/INTERACTION
UAFAC UNAUTHORIZED FILE ACCESS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LOGEVENT- 1-
COPY LOGFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
COPY LOG FILE
This command is used for copying log files from disk to tape/optical disk.
All log files of safeguarding generations which belong to the current
generation or which share the history (APS change, Odagen) with the current
generation are copied. Only log files with the name structure
LG.FIX<xxxxxxxx>.<index>
and, if the Q3 interface is active
LQ.FIX<xxxxxxxx>.<index>
can be copied. <xxxxxxxx> designates the name of the associated safeguarding
generation and <index> the continuation numbers A0..Z9 by which the log
files associated with this safeguard are numbered consecutively.
This command must be called to economize space on a disk at the times of
APS safeguarding.
The log files are named (i.e. the safeguarding generations to which they
belong are indicated) according to the following principle: The generation
name component of the log files does not refer to the generation that was
active at the time of the input of the logged MML commands, but to the last
safeguard created before the log file was created. After a fallback to a
defined safeguarding generation, all log files belonging to this generation
and all log files which were created at a more recent time are incorporated
in the APS. During a safeguard procedure, the log file used so far is closed
and a new log file with the name of the safeguarding generation is opened
which will be the current log file. With the aid of this method, the
database contents before the fallback can be restored.
The current log files, i.e. the log files whose names are in accordance
with the name of the last safeguarding generation created are not copied.
Files already stored on the tape/optical disk are not copied either.
For general information on the generation concept, see the command descrip-
tion for COPY GEN.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ COPY LOGFILE : VSN= [,ERASE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the tape/
optical disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ERASE ERASE LOG FILES ON DISK
This parameter specifies whether log files are to be erased on the
disks after they have been copied to tape/optical disk. Log files
which were on tape/optical disk before command execution will also
be erased.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES ERASE LOG FILES ON DISK
Log files will be erased.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY LOGFILE- 1+
COPY LOGFILE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Y ERASE LOG FILES ON DISK
Log files will be erased.
NO DO NOT ERASE LOG FILES ON DISK
Log files will not be erased.
N DO NOT ERASE LOG FILES ON DISK
Log files will not be erased.
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 COPY LOGFILE- 2-
MOD LOGFILE
FNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LOG FILE
This command modifies the name and the size of the current log file(s).
There are two different ways to use this command: Firstly,
by using the FILE and optionally the SIZE and ERASE
parameter, the user can close the current log file(s) and
define a new one;
Secondly, the user can use the parameter NFILE to close
the current log file(s) and rename it as the file name
specified by NFILE.
Then new log file(s) are created with the same file name which was used
before the log file(s) was renamed.
This parameter should be used if the fixpoint function has been
switched on and the state of the log function is locked.
After successful execution of the command, all commands to be recorded
are written to the new log file. There is no interruption of the log
function for the user.
Notes:
- The command will be rejected if the log function is not activated.
- The command will be rejected if a switch is made to the log file that
is current at the time of entry.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD LOGFILE - FNAME
2. MOD LOGFILE - NEWFNAME
1. Input format

[ [
[ MOD LOGFILE : FILE= [,SIZE=] [,ERASE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the part of the name of the log file that
can be defined by the user. With this file name the new log files are
created.
Notes:
- The name of a log file begins with a function identifier
(stem of file name: LG/LQ) and ends with an index (A0 -Z9).
In between there is a user-definable part to distinguish between
different log files.
- If the fixpoint function has been switched on, the user-definable
part of the file name must be in accordance with the name conventions
of the fixpoint function, in other cases it may be chosen between the
normal file code or the file code according to the name conventions
of the fixpoint function.
- Formal definition of the name of a log file:
<name of log file> ::= <stem of file name>.<file identification>
<stem of file name> ::= LG/LQ
<file identification> ::= <file code>.<index>
<index> ::= A0..Z9
<file code> ::= fixpoint-file code / normal-file code
(user definable part of the name of a log file)
<normal-file code> ::= letter letter/digit (maximum of 4)
<fixpoint-file code> ::= FIX<name of generation>
<name of generation> ::= ffkkloii
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LOGFILE- 1+
MOD LOGFILE
FNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ff ... function version of APS
kk ... correction version of APS
l ... local correction version
o ... ODAGEN counter
i ... fixpoint counter
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...11 characters from the
symbolic name character set
SIZE SIZE
This parameter specifies the desired size of the MML log file.
The size of the Q3 log file is 15 times that of the MML log file.
Continuation files are the same size as the first log file
(index A1).
Default value: 3 PAM blocks.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24, range of decimal numbers
ERASE ERASE
This parameter specifies whether existing files with the same file
code are to be deleted.
If the parameter value is Y, all log files with the file code
as specified in the FILE will be deleted.
If the parameter value is N and the file name is identical to
that of an existing log file, the latter will not be deleted
and the command will be rejected with an error message.
The log files are protected so as to prevent the log function
from being interrupted by a user error. File protection is
provided by:
a) the use of a protected stem (LG/LQ) for the names of log files,
b) the assignment of protection attributes for users.
Log files are protected against
- write access,
- deletion by the user,
- file name changes by the user.
A log file is protected by these protection attributes until the
log function is reset or the log file is changed.
The read access to log files (e.g. with EDTS8) and the changing of
restriction periods for log files is always possible.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
NO DONT OVERWRITE EXIST. LOGFILE
Y OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
YES OVERWRITE EXISTING LOGFILE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LOGFILE- 2+
MOD LOGFILE
NEWFNAME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format

[ [
[ MOD LOGFILE : NFILE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
NFILE NEW FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the part of the name of the log file
that can be defined by the user. All current log files are renamed
as this file name.
Notes:
- The name of a log file begins with a function identifier
(stem of file name: LG/LQ) and ends with an index (A0 -Z9).
In between there is a user-definable part to distinguish between
different log files.
- If the fixpoint function has been switched on, the user-definable
part of the file name must be in accordance with the name conventions
of the fixpoint function, in other cases it may be chosen between the
normal file code or the file code according to the name conventions
of the fixpoint function.
- Formal definition of the name of a log file:
<name of log file> ::= <stem of file name>.<file identification>
<stem of file name> ::= LG/LQ
<file identification> ::= <file code>.<index>
<index> ::= A0..Z9
<file code> ::= fixpoint-file code / normal-file code
(user definable part of the name of a log file)
<normal-file code> ::= letter letter/digit (maximum of 4)
<fixpoint-file code> ::= FIX<name of generation>
<name of generation> ::= ffkkloii
ff ... function version of APS
kk ... correction version of APS
l ... local correction version
o ... ODAGEN counter
i ... fixpoint counter
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...11 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LOGFILE- 3-
CAN LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT
This command cancels the security logging object(s) selected
explicitly with command ENTR LOGOBJ.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LOGOBJ : <USERID= ,REMDEV= ,LOCDEV=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
USERID USER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the user identification(s) which should
be canceled from the security logging objects list.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
4...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
REMDEV REMOTE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the remote device(s) which should be
canceled from the security logging objects list.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
b: NAME OF REMOTE DEVICE=
1...9 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter specifies the local device(s) which should be
canceled from the security logging objects list.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: DEVICE TYPE
OMT O&M TERMINAL
DSB DIGITAL SWITCHING BOARD
WST WORKSTATION
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LOGOBJ- 1-
DISP LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT
This command displays the scope of validity of security logging,
and also the explicitly selected security logging objects, if
the parameter SELLIST is entered with YES or Y, or if the
parameter is omitted and the security logging scope has the value
SELOBJ.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LOGOBJ : [SELLIST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SELLIST INCLUDING SELECTION LIST
This parameter specifies whether the explicitly selected objects
should also be displayed, independent on the value of SCOPE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES SELECTION LIST IS INCLUDED
Y SELECTION LIST IS INCLUDED
NO SELECTION LIST IS NOT INCLUDED
N SELECTION LIST IS NOT INCLUDED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LOGOBJ- 1-
ENTR LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LOGGING-RESTRICTION OBJECT
This command determines, on the one hand, the general scope of
validity of the security logging function, and on the other hand
explicitly selects user identifications and/or devices/processors
as objects.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR LOGOBJ : <SCOPE= ,USERID= ,REMDEV= ,LOCDEV=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SCOPE SCOPE OF SECURITY LOGGING
This parameter specifies the scope of validity of security logging.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLOBJ ALL OBJECTS
SELOBJ SELECTED OBJECTS
NOOBJ NO OBJECT
USERID USER IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the user identification(s) which should
be selected as security logging object(s).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
4...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
REMDEV REMOTE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the remote device(s) which should be
selected as security logging object(s).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: PROCESSOR NAME=
1...8 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
b: NAME OF REMOTE DEVICE=
1...9 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LOCDEV LOCAL DEVICE
This parameter specifies the local device(s) which should be
selected as security logging object(s).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LOGOBJ- 1+
ENTR LOGOBJ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b
a: DEVICE TYPE
OMT O&M TERMINAL
DSB DIGITAL SWITCHING BOARD
WST WORKSTATION
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LOGOBJ- 2-
TEST LOOPBA
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LOOPBACK TEST OF ISDN BA SUBSCRIBER
This command initiates the loopback test when a demand test is done
or when localizing faults.
This command is only permitted for an exchange providing ISDN.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. TEST LOOPBA - DN DN ORIENTED LOOP TEST
2. TEST LOOPBA - LC EQUIPMENT ORIENTED LOOP TEST
1. Input format
DN ORIENTED LOOP TEST
Input format for directory number oriented loopback testing.

[ [
[ TEST LOOPBA : [UNCOND=] ,DN= [,LAC=] [,LOOPNO=] [,SWITCH=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL
This parameter is only valid for SLMI:SDSL and for a single test
object.It allows overriding the Busy status of the HBR (High Bit
Rate) part of the line. So execution of the test depends only on
status of the LBR (Low Bit Rate).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
NO NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
Y YES
YES YES
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number on which the
loopback test is to be run.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code if there is more
than one local network connected to the exchange.
LAC may only be used if parameter DN was input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LOOPNO NUMBER OF LOOPBACK TEST
This parameter specifies the number of the loopback test which is to
be run. The following are possible:
1 = loop 1 LT-loop, line termination on SLMD.
2 = loop 2 NT-loop in the network termination.
4 = loop 4 buffer register-loop in the intermediate generator
11 = loop 11 Line Unit (near end).
12 = loop 12 Line Unit (far end).
The loop 11 and loop 12, are only valid for SLMDB, SLMDQFB and
SLMDTFB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST LOOPBA- 1+
TEST LOOPBA
DN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...12, range of decimal numbers
Default: 2
SWITCH SWITCH COMMAND FOR LOOPBACK
This parameter specifies whether loopback test is to be switched or
released.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OFF LOOP SWITCH OFF
ON LOOP SWITCH ON
Default: ON
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST LOOPBA- 2+
TEST LOOPBA
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
EQUIPMENT ORIENTED LOOP TEST
Input format for circuit position oriented loopback testing.

[ [
[ TEST LOOPBA : [UNCOND=] ,DLU= ,LC= [,LOOPNO=] [,SWITCH=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNCOND UNCONDITIONAL
This parameter is only valid for SLMI:SDSL and for a single test
object.It allows overriding the Busy status of the HBR (High Bit
Rate) part of the line. So execution of the test depends only on
status of the LBR (Low Bit Rate).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
NO NO ( DEFAULT VALUE )
Y YES
YES YES
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the DLU number on which the test is to be
run.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
10...2553, range of decimal numbers
LC LINE CIRCUIT
This parameter specifies the circuit position in a DLU.
LC may only be used if parameter DLU was input.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: SHELF=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
c: CIRCUIT=
0...15, range of decimal numbers
LOOPNO NUMBER OF LOOPBACK TEST
This parameter specifies the number of the loopback test which is to
be run. The following are possible:
1 = loop 1 LT-loop, line termination on SLMD.
2 = loop 2 NT-loop in the network termination.
4 = loop 4 buffer register-loop in the intermediate generator
11 = loop 11 Line Unit (near end).
12 = loop 12 Line Unit (far end).
The loop 11 and loop 12, are only valid for SLMDB, SLMDQFB and
SLMDTFB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12, range of decimal numbers
Default: 2
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST LOOPBA- 3+
TEST LOOPBA
LC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SWITCH SWITCH COMMAND FOR LOOPBACK
This parameter specifies whether loopback test is to be switched or
released.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
OFF LOOP SWITCH OFF
ON LOOP SWITCH ON
Default: ON
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST LOOPBA- 4-
CAN LRNNP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LRN FOR NUMBER PORTABILITY
This command cancels a location routing number for number portability of
mobile and wireline subscriber as well as PBX.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LRNNP : LRN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LRN LOCATION ROUTING NUMBER
This parameter specifies (the leading digits of) the location routing
number to identify a switch uniquely.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LRNNP- 1-
CR LRNNP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LRN FOR NUMBER PORTABILITY
This command creates a location routing number for number portability of
mobile and wireline subscriber as well as PBX.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LRNNP : LRN= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LRN LOCATION ROUTING NUMBER
This parameter specifies (the leading digits of) the location routing
number to identify a switch uniquely.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
TYPE TYPE OF LRN
This parameter specifies the type of location routing number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FOREIGN FOREIGN PLMN
Location routing number of a foreign switch
(other switch of same network or another
network).
OWNWIRED WIRED SUBSCRIBER OF OWN PLMN
Location routing number identifies all wireline
subscriber connected to this switch.
OWNMOB MOBILE SUBSCRIBER OF OWN PLMN
Location routing number is used to start
interrogation to the HLR in this switch
(for ported mobile subscriber).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LRNNP- 1-
DISP LRNNP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LRN FOR NUMBER PORTABILITY
This command displays location routing number data for number portability of
mobile and wireline subscriber as well as PBX.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP LRNNP [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LRNNP- 1-
CAN LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LTG
This command cancels an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- The associated LTG must exist.
- Its ports must not be in service.
- All LTUs and code receivers of the specified LTG must
be cancelled.
- The LTG must be PLA.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LTG : LTG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LTG- 1-
CONF LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command configures the LTG.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF LTG : LTG= ,OST= [,OLDOST=] [,SUP=] [,LOAD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of the LTG to be configured.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
Compatibilities:
+------------+-----------------------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL CBL PLA !
+------------+-----------------------------+
! ACT ! - !! + - !
! MBL ! + - + + !
! CBL ! + + - - !
! NAC ! - + - - !
! UNA ! + + + - !
! PLA ! - + - - !
! SEZ ! * * * * !
+------------+-----------------------------+
+ : legal state transition
- : illegal state transition
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or loss of
calls.
* : The unit to be configured is reserved for another
safeguarding process and therefore cannot be configured.
The command is rejected with an appropriate fault message.
The occupying process automatically releases the unit in
question.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF LTG- 1+
CONF LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OLDOST OLD OPERATING STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CBL CONDITIONALLY BLOCKED
NAC NOT ACCESSABLE
X ALL VALUES
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
UNA UNAVAILABLE
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs. If SUP= Y
is specified, messages from the periphery are suppressed during
command execution.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Displays all test progress and fault messages.
NO NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Y SUPPRESSION
Suppresses all test progress and fault message
displays.
YES SUPPRESSION
LOAD LOAD OF CODE
This parameter is used to load the LTG with code. If LOAD = YES
is specified, the LTG is loaded with code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO LOAD OF LTG CODE (DEFAULT)
The LTG is configured without loading code.
NO NO LOAD OF LTG CODE (DEFAULT)
Y LOAD OF LTG CODE
If an LTG is to be activated, the LTG is loaded
with code.
YES LOAD OF LTG CODE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF LTG- 2-
CR LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command creates an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- Memory space for the LTG must be provided in the database.
- The capacity stage of the two switching network sides must
permit the connection of a further LTG.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LTG : LTG= ,TYPE= ,LDPARP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
TYPE LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE
This parameter specifies the LTG type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LTGB LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE B
LTGC LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE C
LTGD LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE D
LTGH LINE TRUNK GROUP TYPE H
LDPARP LOADING PARAMETER FOR GP PROGR
This parameter specifies the load module with which
the LTG is to be loaded when it is configured to
ACT.
If the message buffer is of the type MBB, only
48 LTGs capable of handling V5.2 interfaces can be
created within one LTGSET.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LTG- 1-
DIAG LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE LTG
This command diagnoses LTG errors.
Prerequisite:
- The LTG to be tested must be in operating status MBL.
- There may not be another diagnosis.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG LTG : LTG= ,TA= [,LOAD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter indicates the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
TA TEST AREA
This parameter specifies what is to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL COMPLETE LTG
CENTRAL TESTS CENTRAL PARTS OF LTG
LOAD LOAD LTG
This parameter specifies wether the LTG has to be loaded.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES LOAD UNCONDITIONALLY
NO LOAD CONDITIONALLY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG LTG- 1-
DISP LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG
This command displays the data for one, several or all created LTGs
in an exchange.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LTG : LTG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG. Depending on the value entered
the following options are possible:
1. <ltgset> - <ltg>
The specified LTG is displayed.
2. <ltgset> - <ltg> && <ltgset> - <ltg>
All LTGs in the specified range are displayed.
The first limit must be lower than the second limit.
3. <ltgset> - X
The LTGs for the specified LTGSET are displayed.
4. X - X
All LTGs in the exchange are displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTG- 1-
MOD LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command modifies the parameter specifying the program
that has to be loaded to the LTG.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be PLA or MBL.
- If the new LTG program is not as powerful as the one
already assigned, all LTUs and code receivers of the
specified LTG must be cancelled.
The capabilities of an LTG program can be displayed via
the command DISP LTGRES.
Notes:
Whenever an LTG has been modified, a subsequent
configuration of this LTG (command CONF LTG) has to be
done with parameter LOAD = YES.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD LTG : LTG= ,LDPARP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
LDPARP LOADING PARAMETER FOR GP PROGR
This parameter specifies the load module with which
the LTG is to be loaded when it is configured to
ACT.
If the message buffer is of the type MBB, only
48 LTGs capable of handling V5.2 interfaces can be
created within one LTGSET.
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
0...255, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD LTG- 1-
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command activates the recording function for the GP and LTG
traffic data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The name of the measurement file is displayed on the OMT
if disk output of traffic data is requested.
- A maximum of together 8 jobs of REC GP and REC LTG may be
entered at the same time.
- The traffic data are output every 15 minutes within the
selected measurement intervals.
At least 15 minutes elapse before the first data are output
with immediate start.
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB, except
jobs with UNIT=MDD-DAILY or CYCLIC.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC LTG : LTG= ,UNIT= [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] [
[ [
[ [,CRDATA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the number of the LTG for which traffic
data have to be recorded.
Prerequisites:
- Measurement of all LTG (LTG=X-X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY].
- Measurement of LTGSETS (LTG=n-X) is only possible if
output UNIT=MDD[SINGLE or DAILY or CYCLIC] (n = 0 to 31).
Notes:
- A maximum of 16 single LTG may linked per command.
- The single LTG list will be automaticaly expanded if the
single LTG is a Master or Slave LTG.
* LTG = Master
all Slaves will be added
* LTG = Slave
the Master LTG and all other Slaves will be added.
- A maximum of 8 LTGSETS may linked per command.
- It is not possible to combine single LTG and LTGSETS
in one Measurement Job.
- The maximum number of LTGs which can be measured
simultaneously with either job REC LTG or REC GP
is limited depending on the configuration. It is not
possible to start more than one job with LTG=X-X.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the switching network hardware this unit
represents the time stage group (TSG for SNB) or the
switching network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and
upper ones).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LTG- 1+
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the LTG number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
UNIT OUTPUT UNIT AND MODE
This parameter specifies the output unit and the mode of
output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: OUTPUT UNIT
OMT OPERATION AND MAIN.TERMINAL
If this option is selected, data are output
to the OMT.
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the traffic data are output to
this file. The start and the finish message
include the name of the file in which the
traffic data are available for postprocessing.
Notes :
- If a file is destroyed or cannot be extended,
an advisory is sent to the OMT.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: OUTPUT MODE
SINGLE SINGLE TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to a single measurement file.
DAILY DAILY TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are output
to daily files. The measurement starts
immediately and has no defined end. Time
parameters are not permitted.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files are prepared and created at the
start of measurement.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is
automatically created, or the existing file is
replaced.
Daily files will be overwritten in the
following week on the same weekday.
CYCLIC CYCLIC TRAFFIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file
Time parameters are not permitted for
these measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full, the newest
data will be lost. This occurs
after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output
mode (daily, single or cyclic measurement file).
It is only permissible in connection with output
UNIT=MDD.
BEG BEGIN DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement begin date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters cannot be specified for data
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LTG- 2+
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
output in daily or cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates in chronological order may
be linked with &. In the case of linked BEG dates, TER
is not permitted.
If no TER is selected, the measurement is active on the
specified BEG days only.
- The earliest possible begin date BEG is the day after
command input.
- The first BEG date must be within an interval of one
month starting from the current date.
- The other BEG dates must be within an interval of
one year starting from the current date.
- The measurement on the actual BEG day can be stopped
with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped on the
last BEG day, it will be finished.
Default: the begin of measurement is the current date.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF BEGIN DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF BEGIN DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF BEGIN DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TER TERMINATION DATE
This parameter indicates the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Either the begin date BEG or the termination date TER
must be specified.
Exception: Time parameters may not be specified for data
output in daily or cyclic files.
- Only one termination date may be entered.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after
command input.
- The measurement duration must not exceed one year.
- If no BEG parameter is entered, recording starts
immediately.
Default: the end of measurement is determined by the last
single day (BEG).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR OF TERMINATION DATE=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY OF TERMINATION DATE=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter indicates interval times of the measurement.
Notes:
- Interval times IV are only permitted if at least one
begin date BEG is selected.
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals in chronological
order may be linked with &. Linked intervals have to be
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LTG- 3+
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
at least 30 minutes apart except for measurements over
midnight.
- An interval may not include midnight, e.g. IV =
23-00-01-00 is not permitted.
A measurement over midnight requires the input of two
interval times, e.g. IV = 00-00-01-00&23-00-00-00.
- The measurement is active during the specified interval
times only.
- The measurement can be stopped during the actual interval
IV with STOP JOB. If the measurement is stopped
during the last interval IV, it will be finished.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
c: TERMINATION HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
d: TERMINATION MINUTE=
0,15,30,45, range of decimal numbers
PER PERIODIC WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the weekdays on which data
have to be recorded.
Notes:
- Input of weekdays is only permissible in
connection with a termination date (TER).
- Up to 6 of the values may be linked with &, except
the values NO, WO and HO which cannot be
linked with other values.
Default: measurement every day during the measurement
period
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NO NO SPECIFIED PERIOD
Measurement every day
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
Days which are full working days
HO HOLIDAY
Full national and international holidays are
included.
The full weekend day (the day marked EF
in the DISP WDCAT output mask) is included.
Half holidays are not included.
CRDATA CODE RECEIVER DATA
This parameter specifies the output of code receiver data.
Default: output of all data (code receiver data inclusive).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LTG- 4+
REC LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO NO CODE RECEIVER DATA
ONLY ONLY CODE RECEIVER DATA
YES WITH CODE RECEIVER DATA
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC LTG- 5-
STAT LTG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATE OF LTG
This command displays LTG operating states.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT LTG : LTG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If omitted, the default is all possible values.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT LTG- 1-
ALLOW LTGFRPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALLOW LTG FAULT REPORT
This command resets the detection bits in the LTG fault list, enabling fault
analysis FA:LTG to be restarted.
A detection bit is set in the LTG fault list and fault analysis FA:LTG is
activated whenever a fault occurs for the first time in a LTG. If the same
fault recurs after the detection bit has been set, fault analysis is not
started again. Fault analysis restart requires detection bit reset.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be ACT or CBL.
Input format

[ [
[ ALLOW LTGFRPT : LTG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG number to be reset.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ALLOW LTGFRPT- 1-
DMP LTGIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP LTG MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of memory contents of LTG
platforms or of the corresponding load library on system disk.
If UNIT = DISK is entered, the specified address range to be
dumped will be read from load library.
To dump contents of a platforms memory, select the appropriate
platform using parameter PLF.
You can specify up to five different address ranges to be dumped.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [PLF= [ [
[ DMP LTGIMDMP : UNIT= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
UNIT SYSTEM UNIT
This parameter specifies the system unit.
If disk is selected a linear dump of the content of the LTG loadlib
at the specified address range will be performed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISK REQUEST READ FROM DISK
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter defines the address (range) of the memory
content to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either an address range is entered with ADDR,
or, if only the start address is given, you have to specify
the length of the dump using parameter LENGTH.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP LTGIMDMP- 1+
DMP LTGIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Following inputs are possible:
- Address is specified relative to a module begin, i.e capsule,
SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters each), plus a
distance within the module
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F"
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter "H" and a
single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
Notes:
module names have to be entered always in combination with
the corresponding SPU names.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name (i.e.
the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4"
- Address ranges must be specified by entering the start address
and the upper limit, separated by "&&".
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C.SYMBOLA0+HF4"
The capsule name has to be entered with the start address only and
must be omitted with the upper limit of the address range.
The upper limit of an address range may be specified in
relation to the lower limit in the following way:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&"+H21"
shorthand for
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HAF"&&
"SPU00A0A.MODULE0C+HCF"
The second address is interpreted as number of bytes to be dumped if
it begins with the character plus ("+").
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label is
preceded by the letter "L" and a single quote:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF"
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000" or
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4"
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000"
instead of
ADDR="CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000".
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF"&&"+H28"
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: ADDR="LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0"&&"+H28"
Up to 5 different address ranges may be entered, concatenated by "&".
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
This parameter provides the number of bytes which shall
be dumped if only a start address is entered.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP LTGIMDMP- 2+
DMP LTGIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65536, range of decimal numbers
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the format type of the output.
If HEX is chosen an output in hexadecimal form will be
produced, in case of ASCII the output will contain ASCII
characters additionally to the hex output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HEX HEXADECIMAL OUTPUT
SYMBOL SYMBOLIC OUTPUT
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP LTGIMDMP- 3-
ACT LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action AM (Activate in Memory) in parallel on all
respective platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT LTGPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT LTGPRPCH- 1-
CAN LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LTG PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Permanent
Patches on disk implicitly deactivating them in the memory on all
platforms in operation. Successful execution of the command
results in execution of the atomic actions DUD
(Deupdate on Disk), DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CD (Cancel
on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN LTGPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LTGPRPCH- 1-
DACT LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Permanent
Patches in the memory of those platforms indicated under parameter
PLF. Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic actions DUD (Deupdate on Disk) and
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) in parallel on all respective
platforms in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT LTGPRPCH : ID= [,PLF=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT LTGPRPCH- 1-
DISP LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on disk and patch states concerning
Permanent Patches for all platform(s) in operation specified
by parameter PLF.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
If ID = X is entered, parameter LIB is also required.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [ID= [ [
[ DISP LTGPRPCH : ADDR= [,PLF=] [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,BEGTIME=] [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [
[ [
[ [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified capsule and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname" or
ID="capsname.*" or
ID="capsname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGPRPCH- 1+
DISP LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
PLF LIST OF PLATFORMS
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Permanent
Patch is to be processed.
If the parameter is omitted the command concerns all
platforms in operation.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGPRPCH- 2+
DISP LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGPRPCH- 3+
DISP LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOTENTER NEITHER ENTERING NOR ENTERED
HIT HIT
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
NOTUPD OTHER THAN UPDATED
PARTACT PARTLY ACTIVE
ACT ACTIVE
UPD UPDATED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGPRPCH- 4-
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LTG PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Permanent Patch into the
patch administration on disk. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic action ED (Enter on
Disk).
With each ENTR LTGPRPCH command one of the four different
subpatch types can be entered:
- Insert Rucksack Subpatches using parameter INSRADDR
- Replace Subpatches using parameter REPADDR
- Insert Procedure Subpatches using parameter INSPREF
- Insert Variable Subpatches using parameter INSVREF
The subpatch types can be entered in the form of subpatches
belonging to a specified Patch ID. Under one specified Patch ID
subpatches of different types can be inserted into the
system.
For each subpatch of a patch a new ENTR LTGPRPCH command is
necessary.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO.
All Subpatches with the exception of Insert Variable can be
entered in subpatch parts for each part using an individual
ENTR LTGPRPCH command. All subpatch parts except Insert
Procedure Subpatches are referred to the same patch address.
The concatenation of those subpatch parts is supported by
means of parameter SUBPPART.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,INSRADDR=[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR LTGPRPCH : ID= ,INSPREF= [,SUBPPART=] [,NEWCNT= [
[ [,INSVREF= [ [
[ [,SUBPCHNO=[ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch or
subpatch part is entered for a certain patch the identifier
must be identical.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSRADDR INSERT RUCKSACK SUBPATCH ADDR.
This parameter provides the insert rucksack subpatch
address. The address format is an interval within the
module boundaries in the form of begin address and end
address (linked by &&) whereby the latter may be given as a
distance relative to the begin address. At the begin address
the instruction is replaced by a branch instruction for jumping
to the respective rucksack. The end address serves as
continuation address from which the program will continue
after the rucksack code has been executed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LTGPRPCH- 1+
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The old instruction (5 Byte), overwritten by the branch
instruction, is at users own risk to add to the rucksack
or not.
An address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: INSRADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
INSRADDR="offset+distance" or
INSRADDR="label+distance",
&&"spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
&&"label+distance" or
&&"+offset" ,where
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address, where address can
be specified in the same way as described for the first part
of INSRADDR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSPREF INSERT PROCED. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert procedure subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert procedure.
The inserted procedure is only visible within the defining
patch. The number <n> serves to address the inserted
procedure within other subpatches of the defining patch.
e.g.: INSPREF="IP5"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
INSVREF INSERT VARIAB. SUBPATCH REFER.
This parameter provides the insert variable subpatch
reference as a mnemonic including the number <n> of the
insert variable and the length of the variable in bytes.
The inserted variable is only visible within the defining
patch.
e.g.: INSVREF="IV5"-50
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: "INSERT VARIABLE" SUBPATCH REFERENCE=
4...6 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LTGPRPCH- 2+
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit serves to address the inserted variable
within other subpatches of the defining patch.
b: LENGTH OF INSERT VARIABLE IN BYTES=
1...4096, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the length of the variable to be
declared.
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR LTGPRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...59, range of decimal numbers
SUBPPART ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART
This parameter characterizes a part of a subpatch. A subpatch
of a Permanent Patch may, for some reason, have more than one
part in the case of Insert Rucksack Subpatch, Permanent Replace
Subpatch, or Insert Procedure Subpatch.
e.g.: SUBPPART="partcounter-lastsign"
The partcounter denotes the subpatch part sequence number
and serves as concatenation controller.
The lastsign denotes either the last or not last part of a
subpatch.
If SUBPPART is omitted, e.g., typical proceeding in case
of a short subpatch consisting of only one part, the default
value 1-LAST is assumed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: ACTUAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCH PART TO BE ENTERED=
1...999, range of decimal numbers
This unit denotes the subpatch part sequence number.
b: INDICATOR THAT LAST PART OF SUBPATCH IS ENTERED
NOTLAST NOT LAST SUBPATCH PART
LAST LAST SUBPATCH PART
This unit denotes either last or not last part.
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
Must not be used for Insert Variable or Insert Procedure
subpatches.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LTGPRPCH- 3+
ENTR LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LTGPRPCH- 4-
UPD LTGPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UPDATE LTG PERMANENT PATCH
With this command you can update one or more Permanent
Patches on disk, whereby they are implicitly activated in
memory on all active platforms. Successful execution of the
command results in execution of the atomic actions
AM (Activate in Memory) and UD (Update on Disk).
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ UPD LTGPRPCH : ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 UPD LTGPRPCH- 1-
DISP LTGRES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG RESOURCES
This command displays either limits and features of a
specified LTG load type or features, limits and available
resources of specified LTGs.
The LTG load type is specified via the parameter LDPARP.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [LTG= [ ; [
[ DISP LTGRES : LDPARP= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTG equipment number.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
LDPARP LOAD PARAMETER
This parameter specifies the load parameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGRES- 1-
ACT LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can activate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
AM (Activate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT LTGTRPCH- 1-
CAN LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can cancel one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform by implicitly
deactivating them in the memory on this platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution of
the atomic actions DAM (Deactivate in Memory) and CM (Cancel
in Memory) on the respective platform in operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LTGTRPCH- 1-
DACT LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can deactivate one or more Transient
Patches in the memory on one platform. Successful execution of
the command results in execution of the atomic action
DAM (Deactivate in Memory) on the respective platform in
operation.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT LTGTRPCH- 1-
DISP LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can display patch data kept in the
patch administration on the individual platform and patch
states concerning Transient Patches for a specified platform in
operation.
The patch selection can be performed either by patch identifier(s)
using parameter ID or by logical address ranges affected by
the patches, using parameter ADDR.
In case of using parameter ADDR, the filling levels of the
Patch Area and the Patch Administration are displayed
additionally.
If ID = X is entered, parameter LIB is also required.
To limit the list of patch IDs, it is possible to specify
combinations of following parameters:
BEGDATE, BEGTIME, ENDDATE, ENDTIME and PATSTATE
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,ID= [ [
[ DISP LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LIB=] [,BEGDATE=] [,BEGTIME=] [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
[ [,ENDDATE=] [,ENDTIME=] [,PATSTATE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
ID LIST OF PATCH IDENTIFIERS
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name.
It is also possible to use wildcard signs (*) or (?) as part
of the patchname. In this case all patches found within the
specified capsule and fulfilling the wildcard criteria will
be displayed.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname" or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGTRPCH- 1+
DISP LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ID="capsname.*" or
ID="capsname.A?CD*EF"
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
10...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed. An address can be specified
either in hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or
symbolically.
e.g.: ADDR="capname.address"&&"address" or
ADDR="capname.address"&&"+distance"
where address may have one of the following
structures:
"spuname.modname+offset+distance", or
"spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance", or
"label+offset+distance", or
"offset+distance", where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address of an interval may be omitted. If it is
omitted in the case of capsule or module the entire address
range of the unit is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of
symbol or offset the search range is that byte only.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LIB LIBRARY NAME
This parameter represents the name of the library associated
with the platform to be patched.
If the parameter is omitted, the library specified via
parameter ID is taken.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...32 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BEGDATE BEGIN DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGTIME,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGDATE: 2000:01:01
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGTRPCH- 2+
DISP LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
BEGTIME BEGIN TIME
This parameter specifies the begin time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
ENDDATE and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter BEGTIME: 00:00:00
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
ENDDATE END DATE
This parameter specifies the end date of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDTIME.
Default value of parameter ENDDATE: actual date
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
ENDTIME END TIME
This parameter specifies the end time of the display interval,
i.e., the time period for which patch data are to be displayed.
Notes:
- This parameter can be used in combination with BEGDATE,
BEGTIME and ENDDATE.
Default value of parameter ENDTIME: 23:59:59
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGTRPCH- 3+
DISP LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
PATSTATE PATCH STATE
This parameter is used to limit the list of patch IDs
displayed to those patches having the entered PATSTATE.
If this parameter is omitted, every patch will be displayed
regardless of its state in the system.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ENTRG ENTERING
ENTRD ENTERED
ACT ACTIVE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTGTRPCH- 4-
ENTR LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER LTG TRANSIENT PATCH
With this command you can enter a Transient Patch into the
patch administration on a platform.
Successful execution of the command results in execution
of the atomic action EM (Enter into Memory) on the
respective platform in operation.
With each ENTR LTGTRPCH command the subpatch type Replace
Subpatch can be entered by using parameter REPADDR.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter SUBPCHNO. For each subpatch of a patch a new
ENTR LTGTRPCH command is necessary.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,REPADDR= [ [
[ ENTR LTGTRPCH : PLF= ,ID= ,SUBPCHNO= [,NEWCNT= [,OLDCNT=]] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the LTG platform where a Transient
Patch is to be processed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: PLATFORM TYPE
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This unit specifies the platform type.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...127, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group set.
c: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the line trunk group number.
ID PATCH IDENTIFIER
This parameter serves for the unambiguous identification of
an individual patch at the switch. It is defined by the
capsule name and a patch name. Whenever a subpatch is
entered for a certain patch the identifier must be
identical.
e.g.: ID="capsname.patchname"
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
11...25 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
REPADDR REPLACE SUBPATCH ADDRESS
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address. The
address format is a replacement address.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LTGTRPCH- 1+
ENTR LTGTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
e.g.: REPADDR="spuname.modname.symbol+distance" or
REPADDR="offset+distance" or
REPADDR="label+distance",
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter ID.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
SUBPCHNO TOTAL NUMBER OF SUBPATCHES
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a Patch ID. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTR LTGTRPCH command with the parameters ID and
SUBPCHNO, whereby the latter one corresponds to the number
of patches, entered under the same ID.
This command causes the transition of the patch state from
ENTRG to ENTRD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...118, range of decimal numbers
NEWCNT NEW CONTENT OF SUBPATCH
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter OLDCNT.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
OLDCNT OLD CONTENT AT SUBPATCH LOCAT.
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR LTGTRPCH- 2-
CAN LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command cancels a created LTU.
Prerequisites:
- The ports of the associated LTU must not be in service.
- The LTU must be PLA.
- The last LTU of type U07 or U08 in the specified LTG
must not be cancelled if an OCANEQ variant still exists.
- If cancelling the LTU of type U08 with LTU number 3 no
other LTU of this type may exist within this LTG.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN LTU : LTG= ,LTU= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
Notes:
If the LTU data and/or port data cannot be sent to the GP even
though the LTG is operational, it is possible to configure the
associated LTG to MBL. If the LTG is configured from this
state to ACT, the LTG receives the data stored in the CP.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN LTU- 1-
CR LTU
D24D30
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command creates an LTU in an LTG.
Prerequisites:
- LTU type, LTG type, load type, application and LTU mounting location
must be compatible.
- No LTU may be created in the specified mounting location.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR LTU - D24D30 DIU24 DIU30
2. CR LTU - NOAPPL LTU TYPES WITH NO APPLICATION
1. Input format
DIU24 DIU30
In this path the LTU types D24 and D30 can be created.
An entry must be made in APPLIC .

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LTU : LTG= ,LTU= ,TYPE= ,APPLIC= [,MODVAR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
The exchange configuration data of the 32 ports correspond to the
specified LTU type and the module variants entered.
Notes:
Available mounting locations are to be determined from the exchange
documents. These documents should be kept up to date.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
TYPE LINE TRUNK UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies an LTU type according to the exchange
configuration documentation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
D24 LTU TYPE D24
D30 LTU TYPE D30
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LTU- 1+
CR LTU
D24D30
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
APPLIC APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the application of a DIU.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter is only allowed for LTU type
D24 and
D30.
- The entry for TYPE and APPLIC values is LTG-type dependent.
+------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+
! ! LTGB ! LTGC ! LTGD ! LTGH !
+------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+
! TYPE (1) ! ! ! ! !
! D24 ! x ! x ! - ! - !
! D30 ! x ! x ! x ! - !
+------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------!
! APPLIC ! ! ! ! !
! no applic. ! - ! - ! - ! x !
! CASCAS ! x ! x ! x ! - !
! CCSCCS ! x ! x ! x ! - !
! CCSCAS ! x ! x ! x ! - !
! NO5CCS ! - ! - ! x ! - !
! NO5CAS ! - ! - ! x ! - !
! CCSPA ! x ! - ! - ! - !
! EXTPA ! x ! - ! - ! - !
! CCSDLU ! x ! - ! - ! - !
! EXTDLU ! x ! - ! - ! - !
! CCSLDI ! x ! - ! - ! - !
! EXTLDI ! x ! - ! - ! - !
! CASRCA ! x ! x ! - ! - !
! V52IF ! x ! - ! - ! - !
+------------------+-------+-------+-------+-------+
(1) Other LTU types than
D24 and
D30
are not considered in this context.
(2) If the application is assigned to CCSLDI or EXTLDI,
the value D30 may be entered for the parameter TYPE.
x Parameter value may be entered.
- Parameter value is not legal for this LTG type.
- The entry for APPLIC is LTG-type dependent.
If type D24 or D30 is entered with the CR LTU command,
a value for application is always requested.
+----------------------+-----+-----+
! Values allowed for ! D24 ! D30 !
+----------------------+-----+-----+
! APPLIC ! ! !
! no applic. ! - ! - !
! CASCAS ! x ! x !
! CCSCCS ! x ! x !
! CCSCAS ! x ! x !
! NO5CCS ! - ! x !
! NO5CAS ! - ! x !
! CCSPA ! x ! x !
! EXTPA ! x ! x !
! CCSDLU ! x ! x !
! EXTDLU ! x ! x !
! CCSLDI ! x ! x !
! EXTLDI ! x ! x !
! CASRCA ! x ! x !
! V52IF ! - ! x !
+----------------------+-----+-----+
x parameter value is legal
- parameter value is not legal
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CASCAS CASDIU FOR TRUNK CAS
CASRCA RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT
CCSCAS CASDIU FOR TRUNK CAS AND CCS
CCSCCS CCSDIU FOR TRUNK CCS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LTU- 2+
CR LTU
D24D30
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CCSDLU DLU WITH CCS
CCSLDI LOCAL DLU INTERFACE WITH CCS
CCSPA PRIMARY ACCESS WITH CCS
EXTDLU DLU EXTENSION
EXTLDI LOCAL DLU INTERFACE EXTENSION
EXTPA PRIMARY ACCESS EXTENSION
NO5CAS CASDIU FOR TRUNK NO5
NO5CCS CCSDIU FOR TRUNK NO5
V52IF V5.2 INTERFACE
MODVAR MODULE VARIANT
This parameter identifies the variants with reference to the
corresponding mounting locations (see exchange specific
documentation).
Syntax: (MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..)))
Up to 6 values can be assigned to the corresponding module variants.
Notes:
The module functions are specified by the input value (1, 2
or 3) and are dependent on the module types. The value 0
must be entered for non-addressable ports of the LTU
(module not inserted).
Incompatibilities:
This parameter is not allowed for the following LTU types:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
FHM
INS
MCT
PMA
U06
U07
V15
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
0...6, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE VARIANT=
0...3, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LTU- 3+
CR LTU
NOAPPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LTU TYPES WITH NO APPLICATION
In this path all LTU types excluding D24 and D30 can be created.
No application may be entered.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR LTU : LTG= ,LTU= ,TYPE= [,MODVAR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
The exchange configuration data of the 32 ports correspond to the
specified LTU type and the module variants entered.
Notes:
Available mounting locations are to be determined from the exchange
documents. These documents should be kept up to date.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
TYPE LINE TRUNK UNIT TYPE
This parameter specifies an LTU type according to the exchange
configuration documentation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ATE LTU TYPE ATE
ATM LTU TYPE ATM
FHM LTU TYPE FHM
INS LTU TYPE INTEGRATED SILC
MCT LTU TYPE MID CALL TRIGGER
PMA LTU TYPE PROT. HANDLER MOD. A
U06 LTU TYPE U06
U07 LTU TYPE U07
U08 LTU-TYPE U08
VP0 VOICE PROCESSING UNIT 0
VP1 VOICE PROCESSING UNIT 1
V01 LTU TYPE V01
V02 LTU TYPE V02
V03 LTU TYPE V03
V04 LTU TYPE V04
V05 LTU TYPE V05
V06 LTU TYPE V06
V07 LTU TYPE V07
V08 LTU TYPE V08
V09 LTU TYPE V09
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LTU- 4+
CR LTU
NOAPPL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
V10 LTU TYPE V10
V11 LTU TYPE V11
V12 LTU TYPE V12
V13 LTU TYPE V13
V14 LTU TYPE V14
V15 LTU TYPE V15
V21 LTU TYPE V21
V22 LTU TYPE V22
V23 LTU TYPE V23
V25 LTU TYPE V25
V26 LTU TYPE V26
V27 LTU TYPE V27
V28 LTU TYPE V28
V30 LTU TYPE V30
V31 LTU TYPE V31
V32 LTU TYPE V32
V35 LTU TYPE V35
Y21 LTU TYPE Y21
Y22 LTU TYPE Y22
Y23 LTU TYPE Y23
Y24 LTU TYPE Y24
Y25 LTU TYPE Y25
MODVAR MODULE VARIANT
This parameter identifies the variants with reference to the
corresponding mounting locations (see exchange specific
documentation).
Syntax: (MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..)))
Up to 6 values can be assigned to the corresponding module variants.
Notes:
The module functions are specified by the input value (1, 2
or 3) and are dependent on the module types. The value 0
must be entered for non-addressable ports of the LTU
(module not inserted).
Incompatibilities:
This parameter is not allowed for the following LTU types:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
FHM
INS
MCT
PMA
U06
U07
V15
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
0...6, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE VARIANT=
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR LTU- 5-
DISP LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command displays the LTU data of one, several or all created LTUs.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP LTU : LTG= [,LTU=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG. Depending on the value entered
the following options are possible:
1. <ltgset> - <ltg>
The specified LTUs of one LTG are displayed.
2. <ltgset> - <ltg> && <ltgset> - <ltg>
All LTUs for the specified range of LTG numbers are displayed.
The first limit must be lower than the second limit.
3. <ltgset> - X
The LTUs of all LTGs for the specified LTGSET are displayed.
4. X - X
All LTUs of the exchange are displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
Default value: All LTUs are displayed
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP LTU- 1-
EXT LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXTEND LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command enables a partially extended LTU to be extended further.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG must exist.
- The LTU to be extended must exist.
- The module variant must not already have been extended (value 0).
- At least one module variant must be specified.
Incompatibilities:
- LTUs of the following types cannot be extended:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
FHM
INS
MCT
PMA
U06
U07
V15
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ EXT LTU : LTG= ,LTU= [,MODVAR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
MODVAR MODULE VARIANT
This parameter identifies the module variants with reference to
the corresponding mounting locations (see exchange-specific
documentation).
Syntax: MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..))
Up to 6 values can be assigned to the corresponding module variants.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXT LTU- 1+
EXT LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
The module functions are specified by the input value (1, 2 or 3)
and are dependent on the module type. The value 0 must be entered
for non-addressable ports of the LTU (module not inserted).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
0...6, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE VARIANT=
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EXT LTU- 2-
RED LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REDUCE LINE TRUNK UNIT
This command cancels certain modules for an LTU. The module variants
to be canceled must be specified with 0.
Prerequisites:
- The specified LTG must have been created.
- The specified LTU must be created.
- The ports to be downgraded must not be in service.
These ports must be PLA.
- At least one module variant must have been specified.
- The variant value of the module to be cancelled is not 0.
Incompatibilities:
- LTUs of the following types cannot be reduced:
ATE
ATM
D24
D30
FHM
INS
MCT
PMA
U06
U07
V15
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ RED LTU : LTG= ,LTU= [,MODVAR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter specifies the LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTGSET number.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the LTG number.
LTU LINE TRUNK UNIT NUMBER
This parameter specifies the LTU number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
MODVAR MODULE VARIANT
This parameter specifies the LTU variants with reference to the
corresponding mounting locations (see exchange-specific documentation).
syntax: MODVAR = <mod>-<var>(&<mod>-<var>(..6..))
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RED LTU- 1+
RED LTU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Up to 6 values can be assigned to the corresponding module variants.
Notes:
The module functions are specified by the input value (1, 2
or 3) and are dependent on the module type. The value 0
must be entered for non-addressable ports of the LTU
(module not inserted).
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: MODULE NUMBER=
0...6, range of decimal numbers
b: MODULE VARIANT=
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RED LTU- 2-
ACT MATRAC
BOTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE MOBILE A-INTERFACE TRACER
This command activates the event reporting of call irregularities in the Direct
Transfer Application Part (DTAP) or BSS Management Application Part (BSSMAP).
Both application parts are related to the GSM-A Interface.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT MATRAC - BOTH BOTH APPLICATIONS
2. ACT MATRAC - BSSMAP ACTIVATE BSSMAP
3. ACT MATRAC - DTAP ACTIVATE DTAP
1. Input format
BOTH APPLICATIONS

[ [
[ ACT MATRAC : [AP=] [,NETIND=] [,BSCSPC=] [,EVENT=] [
[ [
[ [,EXCLUDE=] [,INTTIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AP APPLICATION PART
This parameter specifies which application part should be activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH BOTH APPLICATION PARTS
Call irregularity event reporting related to the
Direct Transfer Application Part (DTAP) and BSS
Management Application Part (BSSMAP) should be
activated.
Default: BOTH, BOTH
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
Indicator to identify the network where the Base Station
Controller (BSC) is located.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
[INAT1 [ INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
[NAT0 [ NATIONAL NETWORK 0
!NAT1 - NATIONAL NETWORK 1
Default: NAT0
BSCSPC BASE STATION CONTROLLER SPC
BSCSPC a: = 1..15
b: = 1..7
c: = 1..15
d: = 1..7
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MATRAC- 1+
ACT MATRAC
BOTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
EVENT EVENT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies which events should be traced.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
E101 UNEXPECTED DTAP MSG RECEIVED
E102 INVALID DTAP MSG CONTENT
E103 NO RESP TO IDENTITY REQUEST
E104 NO RESP TO TMSI-CMD
E105 NO RESP TO AUTH-REQ
E106 NO RESP TO LUPD-ACC(TMSI REAL)
E107 NO RESP TO CONNECT
E108 NO RESP TO SETUP
E109 NO RESP TO DISCONNECT
E110 NO RESP TO RELEASE
E111 NO RESP TO STATUS-ENQ
E112 NO RESP TO MODIFY
E113 UNKNOWN TRANSACTION IDENTIFIER
E114 MISSING SETUP
E115 MISSING EMERGENCY SETUP
E116 MISSING ALERT/CONNECT
E117 MISSING REGISTER
E118 MISSING FACILITY
E119 SMS-MO: MISSING CP-DATA
E120 SMS-MO: MISSING CP-ACK
E121 SMS-MT: MISSING CP-DATA
E122 SMS-MT: MISSING CP-ACK
E201 UNEXPECTED BSSMAP MSG RECEIVED
E202 INVALID BSSMAP MSG CONTENT
E203 NO RESP TO ASS-REQ
E204 NO RESP TO HND-REQ
E205 NO RESP TO HND-CMD
E206 NO RESP TO CLR-CMD
E207 NO RESP TO CIPH-CMD
Default: E101, E102, E103, E104, E105, E105, E107, E108, E109
, E110, E111, E112, E113, E114, E115, E116, E117
, E118, E119, E120, E121, E122, E201, E202, E203
, E204, E205, E206, E207
EXCLUDE EXCLUDE EVENTS
This parameter specifies whether events should be excluded or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO DO NOT EXCLUDE EVENTS
Only these call irregularity events are reported
which are specified in parameter EVENT.
YES EXCLUDE EVENTS
All call irregularity events except those speci-
fied in parameter EVENT are reported.
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MATRAC- 2+
ACT MATRAC
BOTH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTTIME INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two reports
from one LTG. If more than one error occurs in the specified time
interval, the first error is reported and all others are counted.
An entered value less than 10 seconds is set to 10 seconds.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TIME IN MINUTES=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: TIME IN SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
Default: 30
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MATRAC- 3+
ACT MATRAC
BSSMAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ACTIVATE BSSMAP

[ [
[ ACT MATRAC : AP= [,NETIND=] [,BSCSPC=] [,EVENT=] [,EXCLUDE=] [
[ [
[ [,INTTIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AP APPLICATION PART
This parameter specifies which application part should be activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
[BSSMAP ] BSS MANAGEMENT APP. PART
Call irregularity event reporting related to the
BSS Management Application Part (BSSMAP) should
be activated.
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
Indicator to identify the network where the Base Station
Controller (BSC) is located.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
[INAT1 [ INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
[NAT0 [ NATIONAL NETWORK 0
!NAT1 - NATIONAL NETWORK 1
Default: NAT0
BSCSPC BASE STATION CONTROLLER SPC
BSCSPC a: = 1..15
b: = 1..7
c: = 1..15
d: = 1..7
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MATRAC- 4+
ACT MATRAC
BSSMAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EVENT EVENT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies which events should be traced.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
E201 UNEXPECTED BSSMAP MSG RECEIVED
E202 INVALID BSSMAP MSG CONTENT
E203 NO RESP TO ASS-REQ
E204 NO RESP TO HND-REQ
E205 NO RESP TO HND-CMD
E206 NO RESP TO CLR-CMD
E207 NO RESP TO CIPH-CMD
Default: E201, E202, E203, E204, E205, E206, E207
EXCLUDE EXCLUDE EVENTS
This parameter specifies whether events should be excluded or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO DO NOT EXCLUDE EVENTS
Only these call irregularity events are reported
which are specified in parameter EVENT.
YES EXCLUDE EVENTS
All call irregularity events except those speci-
fied in parameter EVENT are reported.
Default: NO
INTTIME INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two reports
from one LTG. If more than one error occurs in the specified time
interval, the first error is reported and all others are counted.
An entered value less than 10 seconds is set to 10 seconds.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TIME IN MINUTES=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: TIME IN SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
Default: 30
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MATRAC- 5+
ACT MATRAC
DTAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
ACTIVATE DTAP

[ [
[ ACT MATRAC : AP= [,NETIND=] [,BSCSPC=] [,EVENT=] [,EXCLUDE=] [
[ [
[ [,INTTIME=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AP APPLICATION PART
This parameter specifies which application part should be activated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DTAP DIRECT TRANSFER APP. PART
Call irregularity event reporting related to the
Direct Transfer Application Part (DTAP) should be
activated.
NETIND NETWORK INDICATOR
Indicator to identify the network where the Base Station
Controller (BSC) is located.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
INAT0 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 0
INAT1 INTERNATIONAL NETWORK 1
NAT0 NATIONAL NETWORK 0
NAT1 NATIONAL NETWORK 1
Default: NAT0
BSCSPC BASE STATION CONTROLLER SPC
BSCSPC a: = 1..15
b: = 1..7
c: = 1..15
d: = 1..7
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 1=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
b: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 2=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 3=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
d: SIGNALING POINT CODE UNIT 4=
0...16383, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MATRAC- 6+
ACT MATRAC
DTAP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EVENT EVENT IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies which events should be traced.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
E101 UNEXPECTED DTAP MSG RECEIVED
E102 INVALID DTAP MSG CONTENT
E103 NO RESP TO IDENTITY REQUEST
E104 NO RESP TO TMSI-CMD
E105 NO RESP TO AUTH-REQ
E106 NO RESP TO LUPD-ACC(TMSI REAL)
E107 NO RESP TO CONNECT
E108 NO RESP TO SETUP
E109 NO RESP TO DISCONNECT
E110 NO RESP TO RELEASE
E111 NO RESP TO STATUS-ENQ
E112 NO RESP TO MODIFY
E113 UNKNOWN TRANSACTION IDENTIFIER
E114 MISSING SETUP
E115 MISSING EMERGENCY SETUP
E116 MISSING ALERT/CONNECT
E117 MISSING REGISTER
E118 MISSING FACILITY
E119 SMS-MO: MISSING CP-DATA
E120 SMS-MO: MISSING CP-ACK
E121 SMS-MT: MISSING CP-DATA
E122 SMS-MT: MISSING CP-ACK
Default: E101, E102, E103, E104, E105, E105, E107, E108, E109
, E110, E111, E112, E113, E114, E115, E116, E117
, E118, E119, E120, E121, E122
EXCLUDE EXCLUDE EVENTS
This parameter specifies whether events should be excluded or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO DO NOT EXCLUDE EVENTS
Only these call irregularity events are reported
which are specified in parameter EVENT.
YES EXCLUDE EVENTS
All call irregularity events except those speci-
fied in parameter EVENT are reported.
Default: NO
INTTIME INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two reports
from one LTG. If more than one error occurs in the specified time
interval, the first error is reported and all others are counted.
An entered value less than 10 seconds is set to 10 seconds.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: TIME IN MINUTES=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: TIME IN SECONDS=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
Default: 30
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MATRAC- 7-
DACT MATRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE A-INTERFACE TRACER
This command deactivates the event reporting of call irregularities in the
Direct Transfer Application Part (DTAP) and BSS Management Application Part
(BSSMAP). Both application parts are related to the GSM-A interface.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT MATRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT MATRAC- 1-
DISP MATRAC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY A-INTERFACE TRACER STATUS
This command displays the status of the event reporting of call irregularities
in the Direct Transfer Application Part (DTAP) or BSS Management Application
Part (BSSMAP). Both application parts are related to the GSM-A interface.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MATRAC ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MATRAC- 1-
CONF MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB
This command configures the message buffer (MB).
Prerequisites:
- All MB units must be in the same state (except PLA).
This is only valid for DE4 and DE5 since there is no classification
of the MB in configurable subunits for DE3.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MB : MB= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer side.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating states.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs.
If SUP = Y is specified, messages from the periphery are
suppressed during command execution.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MB- 1-
DIAG MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER
This command diagnoses the message buffer of a system side.
Prerequisites:
- The SN must be of the capacity stages SN:31LTG or SN:63LTG.
- The message buffer to be diagnosed must be MBL.
- No other diagnostic or test process should be running in the message buffer.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MB : MB= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system in
which the diagnosis is to be done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MB- 1-
DISP MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MESSAGE BUFFER
This command displays the data for both message buffer sides.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MB ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MB- 1-
MOD MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MESSAGE BUFFER
This command modifies the data of the message buffer.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD MB : MB= <,MBTYPE= ,NUMMBIA= ,ALPROF=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer
which should be changed. Currently only the value X is
allowed
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBTYPE MESSAGE BUFFER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the message buffer.
Prerequisites:
-To change the message buffer type, all message buffer
units to ATM (MBIA) must be in operating status
PLA, and all other message buffer units must be
in operating status PLA or MBL.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MBB MESSAGE BUFFER TYPE B
MBD MESSAGE BUFFER TYPE D
NUMMBIA NUMBER OF MB INTERF. FOR ATM
This parameter specifies the number of
message buffer interfaces to ATM.
Prerequisites:
- The entered value must differ from the
already existing value.
- This parameter may only be entered if
the message buffer type is MBD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5, range of decimal numbers
ALPROF ALARM-PROFILE
This parameter specifies the alarm profile.
Valid profiles are:
MAJESC major with escalation
MINESC minor with escalation
MAJNOESC major no escalation
MINNOESC minor no escalation
CRITICAL critical
If the message buffer type changes to
MBD, the alarm profile MAJESC will be
used by default if this parameter is
omitted.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MB- 1+
MOD MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Prerequisites:
- The specified alarm profile must exist.
- This parameter may only be entered, if
the message buffer is of the type MBD.
- The entered value must differ from the
already existing one.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MB- 2-
STAT MB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF MESSAGE BUFFER
This command displays the MB operating state.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT MB ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT MB- 1-
CONF MBIA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB ATM INTERFACE
This command configures the message buffer unit for the
interface to ATM.
Possible effects: During the execution of this command
simultaneously to high traffic-load
a minimal loss of messages is possible.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MBIA : MB= ,MBIA= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer (MB) side.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBIA MESSAGE BUFFER ATM INTERFACE
This parameter specifies the MBIA number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating states.
Compatibilities:
+------------+----------------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL PLA !
+------------+----------------------+
! ACT ! - !! - !
! MBL ! + - 3 !
! UNA ! + + - !
! NAC ! - + - !
! PLA ! - + - !
+------------+----------------------+
+ : legal operating state transition
- : illegal operating state transition
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or lost calls.
This operating state transition is only permitted, if there is
redundance.
3 : This state transition is only possible if MBIA-0-x and MBIA-1-x
have the same operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs.
If SUP= YES is specified, messages from the periphery
are suppressed during command execution.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MBIA- 1+
CONF MBIA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Displays all test progress and fault messages.
NO NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Y SUPPRESSION
Suppresses all test progress
and fault message displays.
YES SUPPRESSION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MBIA- 2-
DIAG MBIA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER ATM INTERFACE
This command diagnoses the message buffer ATM interface.
Prerequisites:
- The MBIA to be diagnosed must be MBL
- No other diagnostic or test process may be running in
the message buffer.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MBIA : MB= ,MBIA= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system
in which the diagnosis is to be done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBIA MESSAGE BUFFER ATM INTERFACE
Restrictions for different MBIA capacity stages
The command DISP MB shows the number of available MBIA
The command STAT MB displays the operating state
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...4, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MBIA- 1-
CONF MBIH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB HDLC INTERFACE
This command configures the message buffer unit for
interface to HDLC.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MBIH : MB= ,MBIH= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer (MB) side.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBIH MESSAGE BUFFER HDLC INTERFACE
This parameter specifies the MBIH number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating states.
Compatibilities:
+------------+----------------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL PLA !
+------------+----------------------+
! ACT ! - !! - !
! MBL ! + - 3 !
! UNA ! + + - !
! NAC ! - + - !
! PLA ! - + - !
+------------+----------------------+
+ : legal operating state transition
- : illegal operating state transition
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or lost calls.
This operating state transition is only permitted, if there is
redundance.
3 : This state transition is only possible if MBIH-0-x and MBIH-1-x
(x=0..7) and TSG-0-y and TSG-1-y (y=4x..4x+3) and SSG-0-z
and SSG1-z (z=2x..2x+1) and all subordinated LTGs have
the same operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs.
If SUP= Y is specified, messages from the periphery
are suppressed during command execution.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MBIH- 1+
CONF MBIH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
N NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Displays all test progress and fault messages
NO NO SUPPRESSION (DEFAULT)
Y SUPRESSION
Suppresses all test progress
and fault message displays.
YES SUPRESSION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MBIH- 2-
DIAG MBIH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MESSAGE BUFFER HDLC INTERFACE
This command diagnoses the message buffer HDLC interface.
Prerequisites:
- The MBIH to be diagnosed must be MBL
- No other diagnostic or test process may be running in
the message buffer.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MBIH : MB= ,MBIH= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system
in which the diagnosis is to be done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBIH MESSAGE BUFFER HDLC INTERFACE
This parameter specifies the MBIH number in which the
diagnosis is to be done.
Compatibilities:
Restrictions for different MBIH capacity stages.
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! !SN:31LTG!SN:63LTG!SN:126LTG!SN:252LTG!SN:504LTG!
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! MBIH ! 0 ! 0 ! 0 ! 0 ! 0..1 !
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MBIH- 1-
CONF MBUL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB UNIT LTG
This command configures the message buffer unit for line/trunk groups.
This command is only relevant for DE4 and DE5.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MBUL : MB= ,MBUL= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer side.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR LTG
This parameter specifies the number of the TSG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating states.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs.
If SUP = Y is specified, messages from the periphery are
suppressed during command execution.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MBUL- 1-
DIAG MBUL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MB UNIT FOR LINE TRUNK GROUP
This command diagnoses a message buffer unit for LTG (MBU:LTG).
Prerequisites:
- The MBU:LTG to be diagnosed must be MBL.
- No other diagnostic or test process may be running in the message buffer.
- The associated MBU:SGC must be ACT.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MBUL : MB= ,MBUL= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system in which
the diagnosis is to be done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBUL MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR LTG
This parameter specifies the MBU:LTG in which the diagnosis is to be
done.
Compatibilities:
Restrictions for different DE capacity stages
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! !SN:31LTG!SN:63LTG!SN:126LTG!SN:252LTG!SN:504LTG!
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! MBUL ! 0 ! 0 ! 0,1 ! 0...3 ! 0...7 !
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MBUL- 1-
CONF MBUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MB UNIT SPACE GROUP CONTROL
This command configures the message buffer unit for the switch group
controls in the switching network.
This command is only relevant for DE4 and DE5.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MBUS : MB= ,MBUS= ,OST= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the message buffer (MB) side.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR SGC
This parameter specifies the number of the SSG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating states.
Compatibilities:
+------------+----------------------+
! from / to ! ACT MBL PLA !
+------------+----------------------+
! ACT ! - !! - !
! MBL ! + - 3 !
! UNA ! + + - !
! NAC ! - + - !
! PLA ! - + - !
+------------+----------------------+
+ : legal operating state transition
- : illegal operating state transition
!!: dangerous configuration: may cause system failure or lost calls.
This operating state transition is only permitted, if there is
redundance.
3 : This state transition is only possible if MBUS-0-x and MBUS-1-x
and SSG-0-x and SSG-1-x have the same operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter is used to suppress runtime outputs.
If SUP= YES is specified, messages from the periphery
are suppressed during command execution.
N NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MBUS- 1+
CONF MBUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NO
Y YES
YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MBUS- 2-
DIAG MBUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE UNIT SWITCH GROUP CONTROL
This command diagnoses a message buffer unit for SGC (MBU:SGC).
Prerequisites:
- The MBU:SGC to be diagnosed must be MBL.
- No other diagnostic or test process may be running in the message buffer.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MBUS : MB= ,MBUS= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MB MESSAGE BUFFER
This parameter specifies the side of the message buffer system in which
the diagnosis is to be done.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
MBUS MESSAGE BUFFER UNIT FOR SGC
This parameter specifies the MBU:SGC number in which the diagnosis is
to be done.
Compatibilities:
Restrictions for different DE capacity stages
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! !SN:31LTG!SN:63LTG!SN:126LTG!SN:252LTG!SN:504LTG!
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
! MBUS ! 0 ! 0 ! 0 ! 0,1 ! 0...3 !
+------+--------+--------+---------+---------+---------+
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MBUS- 1-
DISP MCR
DIGITS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE CALL RECORDS
This command displays Mobile Call Records of a subscriber which
are stored in the MCR file on disk. (IA.ICMCR)
The records can be selected on the subscriber number or on the
sequence number of the record.
Notes:
The command is rejected if :
- Formatting on the CAPs is active.
- There is no file present.
- DIGITS and SEQ are entered at the same time.
- DATE and/or TIME are entered and DIGITS is not entered.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MCR - DIGITS SELECT ON DIGITS
2. DISP MCR - SEQ SELECT ON SEQUENCE NUMBER
1. Input format
SELECT ON DIGITS

[ [
[ DISP MCR : DIGITS= [,DATE=] [,TIME=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DIGITS DIGITS
This parameter specifies the subscriber number for which
the Mobile call records have to be displayed.
Compatibilities:
- If this parameter is entered, the optional parameters
DATE and TIME are additional selection criteria.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c[-d]
a: SIGN OF NUMBER
A A-NUMBER
Select on the calling party.
B B-NUMBER
Select on the called party.
b: A- OR B-NUMBER=
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
This unit specifies a part of the subscriber number.
The entered digits must be the first part of the
whole subscriber number structure.
Example:
- a MSISDN number is always constructed as :
country code - national destination code - subscriber number
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: LENGTH OF NUMBER=
0...24, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MCR- 1+
DISP MCR
DIGITS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This unit specifies the total length of the subscriber number.
Notes:
- If a 0 is entered then the length of the number is not
specified.
d: SELECT ON TYPE OF NUMBER
D DEFAULT NUMBER (MSISDN/OTHER)
Default selection : The selection of the Mobile
call records is performed on the MSISDN or the
OTHER_PARTY, depending on the type of record and
the party selection criteria.
Exceptions:
- Emergency call without SIM card (select on IMEI)
- Subscriber Controlled Input (select on IMSI)
- Short Message Service (select on Service Center
Address)
- invalid MSISDN number (select on IMSI).
I SELECT ON IMSI NUMBER
IMSI selection : only the Mobile call records with
an IMSI number that matches the entered digits,
are displayed.
Default: D
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the begin date or a date interval
from which the Mobile call records are to be displayed.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not specified, all Mobile call
records are displayed.
- If this parameter is entered, all Mobile call records
containing a begin date equal to the specified date
are displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the creation time or time interval
from which the Mobile call records are to be displayed.
Notes:
- If this parameter is not specified, all Mobile call
records are displayed.
- If this parameter is entered, all Mobile call records
containing a begin time equal to the specified moment
are displayed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MCR- 2+
DISP MCR
DIGITS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the output format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HEX HEX DUMP OUTPUT FORMAT
The Mobile call records are fully displayed in
hexadecimal form.
Each record fills min 6 and max 18 lines in the
output, depending on the record type.
TAB TABLE PRINTOUT FORMAT
The most important fields of the Mobile call
record, that are copied in the client record,
are displayed in a table.
Each record occupies 2 lines in the table.
Default: TAB
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MCR- 3+
DISP MCR
SEQ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SELECT ON SEQUENCE NUMBER

[ [
[ DISP MCR : SEQ= [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SEQ SEQUENCE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the sequence number of the
Mobile call record. The records containing a sequence
number equal to the specified number will be displayed.
The maximum sequence number is 16777215.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...8 digit decimal number
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the output format.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HEX HEX DUMP OUTPUT FORMAT
The Mobile call records are fully displayed in
hexadecimal form.
Each record fills min 6 and max 18 lines in the
output, depending on the record type.
TAB TABLE PRINTOUT FORMAT
The most important fields of the Mobile call
record, that are copied in the client record,
are displayed in a table.
Each record occupies 2 lines in the table.
Default: TAB
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MCR- 4-
CONF MCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS
This command configures the receivers of a Line Trunk Unit of
type Mid Call Trigger to one of the states PLA, MBL or
ACT.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MCT : LTG= ,MCTNO= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
MCTNO LTUNO TYPE MID CALL TRIGGER
This parameter specifies the unit number in an LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating status.
The following status transitions are permitted:
MBL <-> PLA
MBL <-> ACT
UNA --> ACT, MBL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MCT- 1-
DIAG MCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS
This command starts diagnosis of a Line Trunk Unit of type
Mid Call Trigger.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be in the operating status ACT or CBL
- The Mid Call Trigger Receiver must be in the operating
status MBL.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MCT : LTG= ,MCTNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
MCTNO LTUNO TYPE MID CALL TRIGGER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MCT- 1-
STAT MCT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP. STATUS MID CALL TRIGGER RECEIVERS
This command displays the operating status of
- one LTU of type Mid Call Trigger of a particular LTG
- one LTU of type Mid Call Trigger of all LTGs
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger of one LTG
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger of all LTGs
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger in a particular operating
status of a particular LTG
- all LTUs of type Mid Call Trigger in a particular operating
status of all LTGs
For the parameter LTG a value or X must always be entered.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT MCT : LTG= [,MCTNO=] [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
MCTNO LTUNO TYPE MID CALL TRIGGER
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT MCT- 1-
DISP MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETIC DISK
This command displays the following information for each magnetic disk:
- label
- capacity
- number of available PAM blocks,
- number of available F1 labels,
- number of disk files.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MD ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MD- 1-
INIT MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC DISK
This command initializes a magnetic disk.
The disk is labelled automatically when it is activated.
Prerequisites:
- The magnetic disk device must be available.
- The magnetic disk device must be in the correct operating state.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
Input format

[ [
[ INIT MD : MDD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the logical device number
of the magnetic disk device.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INIT MD- 1-
CONF MDD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This command configures a magnetic disk device.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MDD : MDD= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MDD- 1-
DIAG MDD
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a magnetic disk device.
Prerequisites:
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG MDD - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG MDD - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a magnetic disk device.

[ [
[ DIAG MDD : MDD= [,SUP=] [,TA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
TA TEST AREA
This parameter specifies the test area.
Default: T2 - T4
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DIAGST STATISTICS AFTER INIT
FORMAT FORMATTING OF DISK
T1 INITIALIZATION OF DISK
T2 TEST OF SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
T3 TEST OF ADDRESS FUNCTIONS
T4 TEST OF DATA TRANSFER
T5 RESERVE
T6 READ CHECK OF DISK CONTENTS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MDD- 1+
DIAG MDD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a magnetic
disk device.

[ [
[ DIAG MDD : MDD= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] [,TA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
TA TEST AREA
This parameter specifies the test area.
Default: T2 - T4
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
T1 INITIALIZATION OF DISK
T2 TEST OF SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
T3 TEST OF ADDRESS FUNCTIONS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MDD- 2+
DIAG MDD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
T4 TEST OF DATA TRANSFER
T5 RESERVE
T6 READ CHECK OF DISK CONTENTS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MDD- 3-
TEST MDD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This command tests a magnetic disk device.
Prerequisites:
-
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST MDD : [MDD=] [,SUP=] [,TA=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic disk device to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active units of
the relevant type are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...1, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
TA TEST AREA
This parameter specifies the test area.
Default: T1-T4
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
T1 DISPLAY OF DISK PARAMETERS
T2 TEST OF SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS
T3 TEST OF ADDRESS FUNCTIONS
T4 TEST OF DATA TRANSFER
T5 RESERVE
T6 READ CHECK OF DISK CONTENTS
TESTST DISPLAY OF STATISTICS
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST MDD- 1-
CONT MDDACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONTINUE MDD-ACTIVATION
This command instructs the file control processor to reactivate the disk
with files after a double disk out. Before this however, the most up-to-
date generation is sent to the terminal.
Input format

[ [
[ CONT MDDACT : [LABEL=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LABEL LABEL OF TARGET COMMAND
This parameter specifies whether the disk, is to be re-labelled.
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONT MDDACT- 1-
STOP MDDACT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STOP ACTIVATION OF DISC
This command stops disk activation after a double disk failure. This is done
via the file control processor.
Input format

[ [
[ STOP MDDACT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STOP MDDACT- 1-
ACT MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE MDD AUDIT
This command starts a specified Checksum MDD Audit On Demand.
If the user wants to check only one file or one generation of
a generation TYPE, he has to provide the parameter FILE with the
file name and/or the parameter GEN with the generation name.
Providing the parameter RESTORE the user can control or initiate
different Audit functions. The automatic restoration function
during this running Audit can be locked or a restoration can be
carried out for a selected file half. The specified file copy
of MDD-0 or MDD-1 will be signed as mismatched and restored using
the copy of the other disk MDD-1 or MDD-0.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT MDDAUDIT : TYPE= [,GEN=] [,FILE=] [,RESTORE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE GENERATION TYPE
This parameter specifies a generation type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
X ALL GENERATION TYPES
ACTUAL ACTUAL GENERATION
BACKUP BACKUP GENERATION
GOLDEN GOLDEN GENERATION
FIXPOINT FIXPOINT GENERATION
GEN NAME OF GENERATION
This parameter specifies the generation name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
FILE NAME OF FILE
This parameter specifies a file name of a generation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
RESTORE RESTORATION ORDER
This parameter controls or initiates the restoration function
of the MDD Audit On Demand.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
REST RESTORE DEFECTIVE FILE HALFS
The restoration of a defective file half will be
done automatically by the Checksum MDD Audit.
CHECK CHECK ONLY
Checks only the file halves without restoration.
The automatic restoration function of this
MDD Audit will be locked. The Audit delivers only
the F1-label checksum informations and the
computed checksums.
HALF0 RESTORE DEFECTIVE FILE HALF 0
Restore the file half on MDD-00.
HALF1 RESTORE DEFECTIVE FILE HALF 1
Restore the file half on MDD-01.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MDDAUDIT- 1-
DACT MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DEACTIVATE MDD AUDIT
This command deactivates a running Routine Checksum MDD Audit or
an running Checksum MDD Audit On Demand.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT MDDAUDIT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT MDDAUDIT- 1-
DISP MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MDD AUDIT ATTRIBUTES
This command displays the attributes of the Checksum MDD Audit.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MDDAUDIT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MDDAUDIT- 1-
MOD MDDAUDIT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY DATA FOR ROUTINE MDD AUDIT
This command modifies the attributes of the Routine Checksum MDD Audit.
To change the start time of the Routine Checksum MDD Audit provide
the parameter TIME.
To lock or unlock the Routine Checksum MDD Audit for one generation
type, provide the parameter TYPE and LOCKSTAT.
To lock or unlock the Routine Checksum MDD Audit for all generation
types, provide only the parameter LOCKSTAT.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MDDAUDIT : <TIME= ,LOCKSTAT=> [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TIME START TIME
This parameter specifies the start time of the
Routine Checksum MDD Audit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: HOURS=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
LOCKSTAT LOCK STATUS
This parameter specifies the lock status of one or all generation
types, which has to be tested by the Routine Checksum MDD Audit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LOCKED LOCKED
UNLOCKED UNLOCKED
TYPE GENERATION TYPE
This parameter specifies a generation type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
X ALL GENERATION TYPES
ACTUAL ACTUAL GENERATION
BACKUP BACKUP GENERATION
GOLDEN GOLDEN GENERATION
FIXPOINT FIXPOINT GENERATION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MDDAUDIT- 1-
CONF MDDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Configure Magnetic Disk Device MP
This task configures a magnetic disk device, i.e the magnetic
disk device is activated or deactivated.
The magnetic disk device can be activated either with or without labeling.
The activation without labeling of the second (slave) disk is not
always possible. In this case the system switches to an
activation with labeling
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MDDMP : [MP=] ,Side= ,Administrative State= [,Label=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Administrative State
This parameter specifies the type of configuration.
Allowed values are unlocked or locked
Label
This parameter specifies whether the respective magnetic disk
device is to be activated with or without labeling.
Labeling means the original content is lost, i.e. the content will be
copied from the redundant magnetic disk device.
Without labeling means the original content is retained,
i.e. only the differences are copied from the redundant magnetic
disk device. Allowed values are Yes or No
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MDDMP- 1-
DIAG MDDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Diagnose Magnetic Disk Device MP
This task starts diagnosis of an ]MDD] of ]MP].
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MDDMP : MP= ,Side= ,Kind of diagnosis= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the MP number.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Kind of diagnosis
This parameter specifies the kind of diagnosis.
Following values are allowed:
]Self diagnosis]:
Base test for the unit.
It checks the availability and the workability of
the components .
Resets unit and becomes ]Self diagnosis].
No further tests are performed.
]Quick diagnosis]:
Performs a more comprehensive test than ]Self
diagnosis].
It includes all diagnosis tests without long
running
tests.
It must include testing of those hardware parts
which
are tested during normal operation.
]Complete diagnosis]:
This option performs full testing of all the
object functions, including tests which take a
long time
to complete such as memory tests.
]Quick format]:
In a first step the disk is formated and then an
]Quick diagnosis] of the ]MDD] is performed.
]All format]:
In a first step the disk is formated and then an
]Complete diagnosis] of the ]MDD] is performed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MDDMP- 1-
DISP MDDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Magnetic Disk Device MP
This task displays information about the magnetic disk devices.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MDDMP : [MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MDDMP- 1-
MOD MDDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Magnetic Disk Device MP
This task changes the value of the ]Alarm profile MP] of the
]MDD] on an ]MP].
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MDDMP : MP= ,Side= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the MP number.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MDDMP- 1+
MOD MDDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MDDMP- 2-
STAT MDDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STAT Magnetic Disk Device MP
This task displays the states of all ]MDDs] of the ]MP].
Input format

[ [
[ STAT MDDMP : [MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the MP number.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT MDDMP- 1-
CAN MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command cancels the modem tone generator ports belonging to a
modem tone generator unit (MDTOG).
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the modem tone generator unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MDTOG- 1-
CONF MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command configures a modem tone generator to one of the states
PLA, MBL or ACT.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This parameter specifies the unit number in an LTG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter specifies the target operating status.
The following status transitions are permitted:
MBL <-> PLA
MBL <-> ACT
UNA --> ACT, MBL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
PLA PLANNED
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MDTOG- 1-
CR MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command creates the modem tone generator ports belonging to a
modem tone generator unit (MDTOG).
Prerequisites :
- The LTU must have previously been created with the appropriate type for
modem tone generator unit.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and upper ones).
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the modem tone generator unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MDTOG- 1-
DIAG MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command starts diagnosis of a modem tone generator in a
line trunk group.
Prerequisites:
- The LTG must be in the operating status ACT or CBL
- The modem tone generator must be in the operating status
MBL.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MDTOG : LTG= ,MDTOG= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MDTOG- 1-
DISP MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command displays one or all MDTOGs
within a specified range (interval) of LTGs.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MDTOG : LTG= [,MDTOG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LINE TRUNK GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b
a: LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Dependent on the Switching Network Hardware this unit
represents the Time Stage Group (TSG for SNB) or the
Switching Network MULTIPLEXER (SNMUX for SND and upper ones).
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LINE TRUNK GROUP NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR NUMBER
This parameter specifies the number of the modem tone generator unit.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MDTOG- 1-
STAT MDTOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY STATUS OF MODEM TONE GENERATOR
This command displays the operating status of
- one Modem Tone Generator in a particular LTG
- one Modem Tone Generator in all LTGs
- all Modem Tone Generators in one LTG
- all Modem Tone Generators in all LTGs
- all Modem Tone Generators in a particular operating
status in a particular LTG
- all Modem Tone Generators in a particular operating
status in all LTGs
For the parameter LTG a value or X must always be entered.
This command allows multiple starts.
Input format

[ [
[ STAT MDTOG : LTG= [,MDTOG=] [,OST=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LTG LTG NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LTGSET NUMBER=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: LTG NUMBER=
1...63, range of decimal numbers
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
MDTOG MODEM TONE GENERATOR NUMBER
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...7, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
UNA UNAVAILABLE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT MDTOG- 1-
DISP ME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Managed Element
This task displays general information about the current ]Managed element`
i. e.
the ]Managed element ID`,
the ]Vendor name`,
the current ]System time` and
the information if the ]System time` is secure or insecure.
There are no input parameters required.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP ME ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP ME- 1-
DISP MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY CHARGE METERS
This command displays the meter contents for the specified subscriber
directory numbers, or Toll free Service number or Inter Administration
Charging Statistics (IACHASTA) registration point.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MET - IACMET METERS FOR IACHASTA
2. DISP MET - METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
3. DISP MET - METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
1. Input format
METERS FOR IACHASTA
This input format displays the meters for a registration point (IACHASTA).
Notes:
- Display for a running registration:
It is only possible to display the meters of an individual registration
point.
- for a named registration point: parameter RGPT must be entered.
- for an anonymous registration point: parameters OBJORIG and/or OBJDEST
must be entered.
- Display from an account file.
The parameters are the same as for a running registration, with additionally
the parameter SOURCE.
It is possible to display the meters of an individual registration, or for
the whole file.

[ [
[ DISP MET : TYPE= <,RGPT= ,OBJORIG= ,OBJDEST= ,SOURCE=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IACMET METERS FOR IACHASTA
RGPT REGISTRATION POINT
This parameter specifies the named registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJORIG OBJECT ORIGIN
This parameter specifies the origin object of an anonymous
registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
OBJDEST OBJECT DESTINATION
This parameter specifies the destination object of an anonymous
registration point.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MET- 1+
DISP MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SOURCE SOURCE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the accounting file to be used as
input.
Notes:
SOURCE file name format: CA.IR.rnnns.fffff
CA = Call Data Administration
IR = IACHASTA Counters
r = S in case of a SINGLE sided registration
= D in case of a DOUBLE sided registration
= M in case of a MIXED registration
nnn = day number 001-366 or 400-999
s = sequence number (0-9)
fffff = the file extension which has (eventually) been entered at
the start of the registration with parameter FILEEXT of
command ACT IACRG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MET- 2+
DISP MET
METSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
This input format displays the metering charges for the specified
subscriber directory numbers, when the directory numbers are not
suppressed by the suppression criterion (DNSUP) by the ENTR METADM
command.

[ [
[ DISP MET : TYPE= ,DN= [,LAC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the directory number(s) or directory
number interval(s).
Notes:
- Up to 7 directory numbers/directory number intervals
can be linked.
- All explicitly entered directory numbers (including start and end
values of intervals) must exist.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Notes:
- LAC=X is only allowed with DN=X.
- No value for LAC is only allowed when only 1 areacode exists
in the exchange.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MET- 3+
DISP MET
METTFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
This input format displays the metering charges for Toll Free Service
numbers.

[ [
[ DISP MET : TYPE= ,SDN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
SDN TFS SERVICE DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the service directory number of a Toll Free
Service (TFS) subscriber. The number is entered in two units, of which
the second is optional. The first unit is the directory number and
the second is the option code.
It is only useful to enter the option code when displaying a single
TFS meter. A list is output for all destination codes of the service
directory number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: 3 TO 6 DIGIT SDN=
3...6 digit decimal number
b: SERVICE OPTION CODE=
1...2 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MET- 4-
EDIT MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EDIT CHARGE METER
This command creates charge meter files on the EWSD-system disk.
These files contains the current meter readings for one of the following
charging types:
- METSUB subscriber directory numbers
- METSTAT statistic indices
- METTR trunks
- METTFS Toll Free Service directory numbers
- IACMET inter administration charging (IACHASTA)
File creation is only possible for charging types that have been activated
with the command ENTR EXDDAT (not applicable to IACHASTA).
Prerequisites:
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. EDIT MET - IACMET METERS FOR IACHASTA
2. EDIT MET - METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS
3. EDIT MET - METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
4. EDIT MET - METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
5. EDIT MET - METTR METERS FOR TRUNKS
1. Input format
METERS FOR IACHASTA
This input format creates disk files with the meter readings for IACHASTA.
By default, the meters contents are read from memory.
It is however, also possible to read the meter contents from a dedicated
disk file.
Notes:
- CREATED account file name format: CA.IC.rnnns.fffff
with r = kind of contained registration points
- S in case of a SINGLE sided registration
- D in case of a DOUBLE sided registration
- M in case of a MIXED registration
nnn = day number 001-366 or 400-999
s = sequence number
In normal cases, no more than 10 account files per day will
be generated for a given registration. For these, nnn indicates
the current day number of the year and s the sequence number,
starting with 0, for that day.
If more than 10 files are generated then, for the 11th and
further files of that day, nnns defaults to the first free
number (no such file with this number on disk) starting from
4000.
fffff = the file extension which has (eventually) been entered at the
start of the registration with parameter FILEEXT of command
ACT IACRG (optional).

[ [
[ [
[ [[,SOURCE= [[ [
[ EDIT MET : TYPE= [,RGPTTYPE=[ ; [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IACMET IACHASTA WITH METERS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 1+
EDIT MET
IACMET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SOURCE SOURCE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the file to be used as the
source for the meter readings. Otherwise, the current memory
contents are used.
If a source file is entered, a file is created for each registration
contained in the source file.
Notes:
- INPUT file name format: CA.IC.UCHA.nnnhhs (optional)
CA = Call Data Administration
IC = IACHASTA counters
UCHA = update charges
nnn = day number (001-366) or (400-999)
hh = hour (00-23)
s = sequence number (0-9)
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
RGPTTYPE REGISTRATION POINT TYPE
This parameter specifies the registration point type.
Notes:
- The parameter RGPTTYPE is incompatible with parameter SOURCE.
If neighter SOURCE nor RGPTTYPE is specified, an account file
is created per active meter registration (SINGLE/ DOUBLE/ MIXED).
The parameter RGPTTYPE allows to specify the generation for
one specific registration instead of all active registrations.
- Default = value of the defined registrations.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DOUBLE DOUBLE REGISTRATION
MIXED MIXED REGISTRATION
SINGLE SINGLE REGISTRATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 2+
EDIT MET
METSTAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
METERS FOR STATISTICS
This input format creates disk files with the current meter readings for
statistic charging.

[ [
[ EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name of the output file.
Notes:
- File name layout: CA.meter type.function.identifier
CA = call data administration
meter type = SU METSUB
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
function = CHA for charge accounting
APS for APS change
identifier = 1...7 alphanumerical characters
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
This parameter specifies the function (requested action) of the
command.
Notes:
- If the parameter FUNC is not specified, the value ACCOUNT is default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCOUNT ACCOUNT FILE
APSCHANG APS CHANGE FILE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 3+
EDIT MET
METSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
This input format creates disk files with the current meter readings for
subscriber charging.
Notes:
- The parameters ACCMO, ACC, METSGN are only allowed and mandatory when
generating account files for subscribers and FORMAT=2 was specified with
the ENTR METADM command.

[ [
[ EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] [,DNGRP=] [,LAC=] [
[ [
[ [,METSGN=] [,ACCMO=] [,ACC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name of the output file.
Notes:
- File name layout: CA.meter type.function.identifier
CA = call data administration
meter type = SU METSUB
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
function = CHA for charge accounting
APS for APS change
identifier = 1...7 alphanumerical characters
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
This parameter specifies the function (requested action) of the
command.
Notes:
- If the parameter FUNC is not specified, the value ACCOUNT is default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCOUNT ACCOUNT FILE
APSCHANG APS CHANGE FILE
DNGRP DIRECTORY NUMBER GROUP
This parameter specifies the directory number group.
Notes:
- If the parameter DNGRP was specified, only the charges for the
directory numbers which group agrees with the parameter value, are
included.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 4+
EDIT MET
METSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code.
Notes:
- If the parameter LAC is specified, the charges for those directory
numbers which are contained in the specified local network are
included.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
METSGN METER TYPE SIGNIFICANCE
This parameter specifies the significance of the generated meter file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIRST FIRST CHARGE DISK FILE
LAST LAST CHARGE DISK FILE
NORMAL NORMAL CHARGE DISK FILE
ACCMO ACCOUNT MONTH
This parameter specifies the accounting month.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12, range of decimal numbers
ACC ACCOUNT OFFICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the accounting location.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 5+
EDIT MET
METTFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
This input format creates disk files with the current meter readings for
Toll Free Service numbers.
Notes:
- The parameters ACCMO, METSGN are only allowed and mandatory when
generating account files for TFS meters and FORMAT=3 was specified
with the ENTR METADM command.

[ [
[ EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] [,METSGN=] [,ACCMO=] [
[ [
[ [,ACC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name of the output file.
Notes:
- File name layout: CA.meter type.function.identifier
CA = call data administration
meter type = SU METSUB
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
function = CHA for charge accounting
APS for APS change
identifier = 1...7 alphanumerical characters
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
This parameter specifies the function (requested action) of the
command.
Notes:
- If the parameter FUNC is not specified, the value ACCOUNT is default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCOUNT ACCOUNT FILE
APSCHANG APS CHANGE FILE
METSGN METER TYPE SIGNIFICANCE
This parameter specifies the significance of the generated meter file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIRST FIRST CHARGE DISK FILE
LAST LAST CHARGE DISK FILE
NORMAL NORMAL CHARGE DISK FILE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 6+
EDIT MET
METTFS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACCMO ACCOUNT MONTH
This parameter specifies the accounting month.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12, range of decimal numbers
ACC ACCOUNT OFFICE NUMBER
This parameter specifies the accounting location.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 7+
EDIT MET
METTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
METERS FOR TRUNKS
This input format creates disk files with the current meter readings for
trunk charging.
- The parameters ACCMO, METSGN are only allowed and mandatory when
generating account files for trunk meters and FORMAT=3 was specified
with the ENTR METADM command.

[ [
[ EDIT MET : TYPE= ,FILE= [,FUNC=] [,METSGN=] [,ACCMO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METTR METERS FOR TRUNKS
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name of the output file.
Notes:
- File name layout: CA.meter type.function.identifier
CA = call data administration
meter type = SU METSUB
ST METSTAT
TF METTFS
TR METTR
function = CHA for charge accounting
APS for APS change
identifier = 1...7 alphanumerical characters
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
This parameter specifies the function (requested action) of the
command.
Notes:
- If the parameter FUNC is not specified, the value ACCOUNT is default.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACCOUNT ACCOUNT FILE
APSCHANG APS CHANGE FILE
METSGN METER TYPE SIGNIFICANCE
This parameter specifies the significance of the generated meter file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
FIRST FIRST CHARGE DISK FILE
LAST LAST CHARGE DISK FILE
NORMAL NORMAL CHARGE DISK FILE
ACCMO ACCOUNT MONTH
This parameter specifies the accounting month.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 8+
EDIT MET
METTR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 EDIT MET- 9-
REG MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REGENERATE CHARGE METER
This command regenerates the meter readings for the specified charging
type after an APS change. The regeneration of the charging data (for sub-
scriber, statistic, trunk meters or toll free service meters) is carried
out from a charging type specific disk file.
Prerequisites:
- The regeneration of subscriber charges after an APS change is only
possible if the number of local networks, their designation
(local area code) and the thresholds for the individual counters
have not changed.
Input format

[ [
[ REG MET : FILE= ,TYPE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the file name of the input file.
Notes:
- Filename is arbitrary. The file is a copy of the file CA.xx.APS.xxxxx
which was created with EDIT MET:FUNC=APSCHANG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
+,*,%,#
TYPE TYPE
This parameter specifies the charging type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS
METTR METERS FOR TRUNKS
METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REG MET- 1-
SAVE MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SAVE CHARGE METER
This command, depending on the requested function:
- verifies the checksum
- saves the contents
- repairs the contents
- initiates a reload of the meter from the backup file
after a change of APS-generation.
Input format

[ [
[ SAVE MET : [TYPE=] [,REFILE=] [,ZEROIN=] [,FUNC=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies for which charging type the meters are to be
saved. Leaving out this parameter automatically saves the meters of all
charging types which have been activated with the ENTR EXDDAT command.
Notes:
The only function that can be specified for the SAVE MET command
in combination with TYPE=IARA is FUNC=FALLBACK.
This combination brings the IARA disk files up-to-date after a switch
to a different APS-generation caused by a recovery >=ISTART2.
The command is particularly important after an automatic generation
fallback. In both cases it is possible that the generation that becomes
active does not contain all the matrix points that where present in the
original APS and, therefore, in the disk files. To remedy this, the
database must be synchronized by executing all the relevant logging
files before SAVE MET:FUNC=FALLBACK is entered.
Counters in the file for which there are still no matrix points in the
database are reported as such.
They must be re-created by entering the necessary CR IARMPT commands.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS
METTR METERS FOR TRUNKS
METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
IARA METERS F.INTERADM.REVENUE ACC.
REFILE REPAIR FILE
This parameter specifies the name of the repair file, used for
repairing corrupted charge meters.
Notes:
- The repair file is an older copy of a backup file.
- The repair file is the file used to repair defective charge meters
when a safeguarding file is corrupted.
- The entered file must already exist on disk.
- The validity of a repair file is verified (correct file and charging
type) before use.
- This parameter should only be entered after a system request
(the repairable meters have already been repaired, only the remainder
will be loaded from the repair file).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
ZEROIN ZERO INITIALIZE
This parameter forces the initialization to zero of corrupted charge
meters.
Notes:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SAVE MET- 1+
SAVE MET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Initialization should only be performed if the charge meters in
the transient area, safeguarding file and repair file are detected
as being defective (if more than 10 errors are found in one
logical block, the entire block is treated as defective).
- This parameter should only be entered after a system request
(the already repairable meters have been repaired, so only the not
repairable meters, double errors, are reset to zero).
N NO
NO
Y YES
YES
Default: N
FUNC FUNCTION MODE
This parameter specifies the function (intended use) of the command.
Notes:
- Default value is SAVE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CHECK CHECK METERS
SAVE SAVE METERS
FALLBACK START FALLBACK
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SAVE MET- 2-
DISP METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER ADMINISTRATION DATA
This command displays the general meter administration data.
The following values are displayed :
- the central dispatching office
- the number of the booking office
- Toll Free Service account number prefix
- the pilot directory number length
- selection criterion for directory number suppression
- the postprocessing format
- the charge meter threshold values .
Input format

[ [
[ DISP METADM ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP METADM- 1-
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER METER ADMINISTRATION DATA
This command enters exchange specific settings for the meter administration:
- the central dispatching office,
- the number of the booking office,
- the toll free service account number prefix,
- the pilot directory number length,
- the directory number suppression criteria,
- the postprocessing format,
- the counter threshold values.
Prerequisites:
- The FORMAT parameter must be entered before an account file for
the corresponding TYPE can be created.
- The DPATCH and BOOKOF parameters must be entered before the
first subscriber metering account file of FORMAT=2 is created
and before a TFS-account file is created.
- The ACNOPR parameter must be entered before the first Toll Free
Service account file is created.
- CNTRTHR values, if they differ from the default, must be entered
before charge meters from the previous APS are regenerated.
Warnings:
The following should be considered when changing the thresholds of
individual counters:
- In the case of counter overflow, postprocessing can not determine
whether the overflow took place before or after the threshold was
changed.
- Regeneration of meter readings is only allowed if all the thresholds
in the regeneration file correspond with the current values in memory.
Changing these values can, therefore, invalidate the APS-change files.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR METADM : [DPATCH=] [,BOOKOF=] [,TYPE=] [,FORMAT=] [
[ [
[ [,ACNOPR=] [,CNTRTHR=] [,DNSUP=] [,PDNLEN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DPATCH CENTRAL DISPATCHING OFFICE
This parameter specifies the central dispatching office.
Notes:
- If no value is specified, the entered value is not
changed.
- This parameter is only relevant if Toll Free Service
account files or subscriber account files of format 2
are to be generated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
BOOKOF NUMBER OF THE BOOKING OFFICE
This parameter specifies the identification of the booking office.
Notes:
- If no value is specified, the entered value is not
changed.
- This parameter is only relevant if subscriber metering
account files of FORMAT=2 or Toll Free Service ac-
count files are to be generated.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR METADM- 1+
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
TYPE METER TYPE
This parameter specifies the selected charging type and, therefore,
controls the meaning of the accompanying CNTRTHR and FORMAT para-
meters.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
METSUB METERS FOR SUBSCRIBERS
METSTAT METERS FOR STATISTICS .
METTR METERS FOR TRUNKS
METTFS METERS FOR TOLL FREE SERVICE
FORMAT ACCOUNT FILE FORMAT
This parameter, depending on the value of TYPE, specifies the
charging type specific postprocessing format of the account file.
Notes:
- There is no default value for this parameter.
It must be entered before any account file of the corresponding
type can be generated.
- Subscriber charging: FORMAT 1 = world market, counters 1-3,
33-byte records
FORMAT 2 = DBP, counter 2, 32-byte records
FORMAT 3 = world market, counters 1-5,
50-byte records
FORMAT 4 = world market, counters 1-5,
+ header (with creation date
and creation time), 50-byte
records
FORMAT 5 = world market, counters 1-5,
with extended directory numbers,
54-byte records
FORMAT 6 = world market, counters 1-5,
with extended directory numbers,
with DN state and subscriber
category, 57-byte records
- Trunk charging : FORMAT 1 = TGNO-LNO trunk identification;
combined counters for incoming/
outgoing directions
FORMAT 2 = TGNO-LNO-CIC trunk identification;
combined counters for incoming/
outgoing directions
FORMAT 3 = TGNO-LNO-CIC trunk identification;
separate counters for incoming/
outgoing directions
- Statistic charging : FORMAT 1 = without call duration; standard
assignment identification
FORMAT 2 = with call duration
FORMAT 3 = with call duration; extended
assignment identification
- Toll Free Service : FORMAT 2 = world market
FORMAT 3 = DBP (max. counter value 999999999)
- If no value is specified, the entered value is not changed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
ACNOPR ACCOUNT NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the account number prefix for Toll Free
Service.
Notes:
- There is no default value for this parameter.
- It must be entered before a Toll Free Service account file is
generated.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR METADM- 2+
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
CNTRTHR COUNTER SPECIFIC THRESHOLD
This parameter, depending on the value of TYPE,
specifies the overflow thresholds for either the
normal subscriber or the Toll Free Service subscriber
charge and call counters.
Notes:
- For normal subscribers, the thresholds for all five
counters can be changed.
- Threshold administration for TFS subscribers
is restricted to counters 2 and 3 (counter 1
is a dummy).
- If no value is specified, the entered value is not
changed.
Compatibilities:
The maximum threshold for a specific counter is
limited by its physical length:
TYPE=METSUB
- counters 1 and 3 are 2 bytes long and have a
maximum value of 65535.
- counters 2,4 and 5 are 3 bytes long and can go
up to 16777215.
TYPE=METTFS
- all counters have a minimum threshold of 999999
- the maximum thresholds depend on the value of the
accompanying format parameters:
FORMAT 2:
max. value for counter 2 = 99999999
max. value for counter 3 = 16777215
FORMAT 3:
max. value for counter 2 = 999999999
max. value for counter 3 = 999999
- default:
for TYPE=METSUB : the highest possible value as
defined by the physical counter
length.
for TYPE=METTFS : 999999
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: THRESHOLD VALUE=
9999...999999999, range of decimal numbers
b: COUNTER NUMBER=
1...5, range of decimal numbers
DNSUP DIRECTORY NUMBER SUPPRESSION
This parameter specifies the selection criterion "directory
number suppression" and controls all output of subscriber
meters.
Notes:
- This parameter is valid for all functions of the meter
administration with which meters are displayed or
collected. Only meters which are not suppressed
by this criterion:
- are collected in the account file
- are displayed with DISP MET
- are displayed for DN related objects with meter
assignment
- are displayed in case of repaired meters
- are displayed when they cannot be regenerated
- When no suppression criterion exists (=NONE),
all standard directory numbers are output.
Standard directory numbers are all directory numbers,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR METADM- 3+
ENTR METADM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
except:
- directory numbers for trunk work stations
- directory numbers for large conference units
- directory numbers for OSS operators
- directory numbers for CTX attendants
- additional directory number for PBX
- Entering a suppression criterion overwrites the existing
one.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
NONE NONE
No suppression, this means all standard
directory numbers are included.
NOTCONN NOT CONNECTED
Suppress the directory numbers:
- all not connected numbers
- with announcement for changed number
- with ported number
METPDN METERING UNDER PILOT DN
Suppress the line service numbers (LSN)
with CHRG=METPDN (no counting on this line).
NONDEC NONDECIMAL
Suppress all directory numbers with a nondecimal
digit in the digit combination.
DEB DETAILED BILLING
Suppress all directory numbers with the feature
detailed billing.
The line service number of a PBX line is sup-
pressed when either the PBX or the PBX line
itself has DEB.
Remark: The pilot DN of a PBX without DEB
is not suppressed, even when the special line
(LSN=pilot DN) has the feature DEB.
SKIP SKIP
Skip all suppression actions, also the standard
suppression actions.
Remark: this parameter value is not allowed in
combination with other parameter values.
PDNLEN PILOT DIRECTORY NUMBER LENGTH
This parameter specifies the pilot DN length.
The value VAR is the default and indicates that only the
pilot DN part as stored in the DN-database must be used for
DISP MET and account files.
The value FIX forces the combined length of LAC+DN for dis-
play and accounting to the value "n". I.e. shorter combina-
tions are padded to the right with "0" (LAC without discrimination
digits).
This is important for DDI PBX as in countries with a fixed DN
length.
Restrictions:
- The PDNLEN setting is valid for all account file formats
except FORMAT=2.
- For DISP MET the combined length does not include the
national prefix part which is always added to the LAC.
- Padded LAC+DN combinations exceeding the available space
in the account record are truncated.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: LENGTH SETTING
VAR VARIABLE LENGTH
FIX FIXED LENGTH
b: FIXED LENGTH=
6...18, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR METADM- 4-
DISP METSAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER SAVE TIMES
This command displays all the automatic check and save times of the
meter safeguarding system.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP METSAV ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP METSAV- 1-
ENTR METSAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER METER SAVE TIMES
This command specifies up to 8 automatic meter save times.
Each day the memory-based meter readings data are checked at these
save times and, corrected with them, previously saved, equivalents if
necessary.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR METSAV : TIME= ,CHEKNO= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the requested automatic save time.
Notes:
- Up to eight times of the day can be entered.
- Only 0, 15, 30, 45 minute values are allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
CHEKNO CHECK NUMBER
This parameter specifies how often the meter readings must
be checked between the individual saving times.
Notes:
- This check is done regularly in 15-minute intervals.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...9, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR METSAV- 1-
ACT MEUPG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate Measurement Upgrade
This task starts the upgrade for Measurement
Input format

[ [
[ ACT MEUPG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MEUPG- 1-
CAN MLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This command cancels a predefined Gateway Mobile Location Center.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MLC : MLC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER NAME
This parameter specifies the Mobile Location Center name to
uniquely identify an entity within the GSM PLMN network.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MLC- 1-
CR MLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This command creates a Mobile Location Center, i.e. a Gateway Mobile
Location Center (GMLC) for a GSM PLMN.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MLC : MLC= ,MLCNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER NAME
This parameter specifies the Mobile Location Center name to
uniquely identify an entity within a GSM PLMN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MLCNO MOBILE LOCATION CENTER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the E.164 address of a Mobile Location Center
which is used for routing of messages within the network.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MLC- 1-
DISP MLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This command displays one or more predefined Gateway Mobile
Location centers within a GSM PLMN.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP MLC : MLC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER NAME
This parameter specifies the Mobile Location Center name to
uniquely identify an entity within a GSM PLMN.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MLC- 1-
MOD MLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This command modifies an existing Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC) in
a GSM PLMN.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD MLC : MLC= ,MLCNO= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER NAME
This parameter specifies a Mobile Location Center name to
uniquely identify an entity within a GSM PLMN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MLCNO MOBILE LOCATION CENTER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the E.164 address of a Mobile Location Center
which is used in the routing of messages within the network.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MLC- 1-
CAN MLCAREA
CELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MOBILE LOCATION CENTER AREA
This command cancels the assignment of a mobile location center or an emergency
service zone to an internal cell within a mobile services switching center area
(MSC area).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN MLCAREA - CELL ASSIGNMENTS TO INTERNAL CELL
2. CAN MLCAREA - GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
1. Input format
ASSIGNMENTS TO INTERNAL CELL
This input format cancels the assignment of a mobile location center
or emergency service zone to the specified internal cell.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MLCAREA : TYPE= ,LACOD= ,CI= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile location center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single base
station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MLCAREA- 1+
CAN MLCAREA
GMLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This input format cancels the assignment of the specified gateway mobile
location center to all internal cells.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MLCAREA : TYPE= ,MLC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile location center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This parameter specifies the mobile location center to uniquely
identify an entity within an MSC area.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MLCAREA- 2-
DISP MLCAREA
ALL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER AREA
This command displays the assignment of a mobile location center or an emergency
service zone to an internal cell within a mobile services switching center area
(MSC area).
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MLCAREA - ALL ALL DATA
2. DISP MLCAREA - CELL ASSIGNMENTS TO INTERNAL CELL
3. DISP MLCAREA - GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
1. Input format
ALL DATA
This input format displays all internal cells assigned to a mobile location
center and/or emergency service zone.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP MLCAREA : <TYPE= ,MLC=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile location center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This parameter specifies the mobile location center to uniquely
identify an entity within an MSC area.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MLCAREA- 1+
DISP MLCAREA
CELL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
ASSIGNMENTS TO INTERNAL CELL
This input format displays the assignments of a mobile location center and/or
an emergency service zone to an internal cell.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP MLCAREA : [TYPE=] ,LACOD= ,CI= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile location center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single base
station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MLCAREA- 2+
DISP MLCAREA
GMLC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This input format displays all internal cells assigned to a gateway mobile
location center.

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP MLCAREA : TYPE= ,MLC= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile location center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This parameter specifies the mobile location center to uniquely
identify an entity within an MSC area.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MLCAREA- 3-
ENTR MLCAREA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER MOBILE LOCATION CENTER AREA
This command is used to assign a mobile location center and an emergency service
zone to an internal cell within a mobile services switching center area
(MSC area).
Prerequisites:
- The mobile location center has to be created (CR MLC).
- The internal cell has to be created (CR INTCELL).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
This input format is used to assign a gateway mobile location center to an
internal cell.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR MLCAREA : TYPE= ,MLC= ,LACOD= ,CI= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TYPE MOBILE LOCATION CENTER TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile location center.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GMLC GATEWAY MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
MLC MOBILE LOCATION CENTER
This parameter specifies the mobile location center to uniquely
identify an entity within an MSC area.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
CI CELL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the geographical area in which a single base
station supplies the radio resources. A cell is the smallest
addressable unit of a radio area from point of view of the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MLCAREA- 1-
CAN MNATROAG
GLOBAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MOBILE NATION. ROAMING AGREEMENT
This command cancels either one global roaming agreement or
one local or a list of up to 20 local roaming agreement(s).
A global agreement is a non location area specific roaming
permission for subscribers of a PLMN , defined by the MNC.
A local agreement is a roaming permission just for one
specific location area for subscribers of a PLMN, defined
by the MNC.
The parameter TYPE defines whether a global or a local
agreement is canceled.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN MNATROAG - GLOBAL GLOBAL AGREEMENT
2. CAN MNATROAG - LOCAL LOCAL AGREEMENT
1. Input format
GLOBAL AGREEMENT
This input format allows the cancelation of global agreement.
Prerequisites:
- All local agreements for the specified MNC must be canceled
first.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MNATROAG : MNC= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the Mobile Network Code
for which an agreement is canceled.
Only the MNC of another national PLMN may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit decimal number
TYPE TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This parameter specifies the roaming agreement type, whether
it is a local or global agreement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GLOBAL GLOBAL AGREEMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MNATROAG- 1+
CAN MNATROAG
LOCAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LOCAL AGREEMENT
This input format allows the cancelation of local agreement.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MNATROAG : MNC= ,TYPE= ,LACOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the Mobile Network Code
for which an agreement is canceled.
Only the MNC of another national PLMN may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit decimal number
TYPE TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This parameter specifies the roaming agreement type, whether
it is a local or global agreement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LOCAL LOCAL AGREEMENT
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MNATROAG- 2-
CR MNATROAG
GLOBAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MOBILE NATION. ROAMING AGREEMENT
This command creates either one global roaming agreement or one local
or a list of up to 20 local roaming agreement(s).
These agreements can be created for national PLMNs other than
the own PLMN. ( i.e. the mobile country code must be the same )
A global agreement is a non location area specific roaming
permission for subscribers of a PLMN , defined by the MNC.
A local agreement is a roaming permission just for one
specific location area for subscribers of a PLMN, defined
by the MNC.
If neither a global nor a local agreement with another national
PLMN ( specified by MNC ) exists all subscribers of this PLMN
are allowed to roam within the VLR area.
If a global agreement exists the subscribers of the partner PLMN
are allowed to roam in those location areas for which, in addition,
a local agreement is created.
( i.e. if only a global agreement is created the VLR area is
forbidden for all subscribers of the PLMN specified by MNC.)
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR MNATROAG - GLOBAL GLOBAL AGREEMENT
2. CR MNATROAG - LOCAL LOCAL AGREEMENT
1. Input format
GLOBAL AGREEMENT
This input format allows the creation of global agreement.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MNATROAG : MNC= ,TYPE= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the Mobile Network Code
for which an agreement is created.
Only the MNC of another national PLMN may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit decimal number
TYPE TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This parameter specifies the roaming agreement type, whether
it is a local or global agreement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GLOBAL GLOBAL AGREEMENT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MNATROAG- 1+
CR MNATROAG
LOCAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
LOCAL AGREEMENT
This input format allows the creation of local agreement.
Prerequisites:
-A global agreement for the specified MNC must be
created.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MNATROAG : MNC= ,TYPE= ,LACOD= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the Mobile Network Code
for which an agreement is created.
Only the MNC of another national PLMN may be entered.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit decimal number
TYPE TYPE OF AGREEMENT
This parameter specifies the roaming agreement type, whether
it is a local or global agreement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
LOCAL LOCAL AGREEMENT
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MNATROAG- 2-
DISP MNATROAG
LACOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE NATION. ROAMING AGREEMENT
This command displays global and / or local roaming agreements.
Local and / or global agreements with a partner PLMN are
displayed if the corresponding MNC is specified.
If the LACOD is entered the MNCs of all PLMNs with local
agreements for this Location area will be output.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MNATROAG- LACOD LOCAL AGREEMENT
2. DISP MNATROAG- MNC GLOBAL AND LOCAL AGREEMENT
1. Input format
LOCAL AGREEMENT
This input format allows the display of all or one local
roaming agreement(s) for the specified location area(s).

[ [
[ DISP MNATROAG : LACOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MNATROAG- 1+
DISP MNATROAG
MNC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GLOBAL AND LOCAL AGREEMENT
This input format allows the display of created local and / or
global roaming agreements for one or all national PLMN(s).
The PLMN is specified by the corresponding MNC.
Depending on the specified parameter values the following data
are output:
MNC = mnc,TYPE = GLOBAL : one existing global agreement
for the specified MNC.
MNC = X,TYPE = GLOBAL : all existing global agreements.
MNC = mnc,TYPE = LOCAL : all existing local agreements
for the specified MNC.
MNC = X,TYPE = LOCAL : all existing local agreements.
MNC = mnc,TYPE = X : all existing agreements for
the specified MNC.
MNC = X,TYPE = X : all existing agreements.

[ [
[ DISP MNATROAG : MNC= [,TYPE=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the Mobile Network Code for which
the roaming agreements are to be displayed.
The output information is sorted in ascending order by
the Mobile Network Code.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2 digit decimal number
TYPE AGREEMENT TYPE
This parameter specifies the roaming agreement type ,
whether it is a local or global agreement or both to be
displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GLOBAL GLOBAL AGREEMENT
[LOCAL [ LOCAL AGREEMENT
X ENTIRE.RANGE OF PARAM.VALUES
Default: X
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MNATROAG- 2-
DISP MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This command displays the information from the label of a
magneto optical disk.
Prerequisite:
- The magneto optical disk device must be available.
- The magneto optical disk must be available.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [VSN=[ [
[ DISP MO : MOD= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
magneto optical disk.
Note:
- The following character strings are reserved for magnetic
disk devices and are therefore illegal:
VSN000 and VSN001.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the logical device number of the
magneto optical disk device.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MO- 1-
INIT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INITIALIZE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This command is used to initialize a magneto optical
disk (generate its VOL1 label).
Prerequisites:
- The specified data carrier must be available.
- The specified data carrier must be a magneto optical disk.
- If it is a new magneto optical disk, the device number must
also be specified.
- The expiration date must have been passed, or it must be
specified.
Input format

[ [
[ INIT MO : VSN= ,CD= [,MOD=] [,OWNER=] [,EXPDAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new or the old and new volume
serial numbers of the magneto optical disk.
Notes:
- The following character strings are reserved for magnetic
disk devices and are therefore illegal:
VSN000 and VSN001.
n
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CD CODE
This parameter specifies the code (defined in the label)
to be used for writing to the magneto optical disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EBC EBCDIC-CODE
ISO ASCII-CODE
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the logical device number of the
magneto optical disk device.
Notes:
- If a new value is entered for the parameter VSN, then
this parameter is mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
OWNER OWNER OF THE DEVICE
This parameter allows the magneto optical disk owner
to be identified by name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INIT MO- 1+
INIT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXPDAT EXPIRATION DATE
This parameter specifies the expiration date of the magneto
optical disk.
It is entered to indicate that the retention period of the
magneto optical disk has been noted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INIT MO- 2-
MOUNT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOUNT MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
Following a system request for magneto optical disk, this
command can be used to inform the system whether magneto
optical disk processing should be interrupted or whether it
should be continued using a magneto optical disk on any disk
station.
Prerequisite:
- The magneto optical disk device must be available.
- The data carrier must be available and not reserved by
another process.
Notes:
- After a magneto optical disk request, no MOUNT MO command
should be entered while disk positioning (after inserting
the follow-up disk) is still in progress.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [DEV= [ [
[ MOUNT MO : REJECT= [,VSN=] ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DEV OUTPUT DEVICE
This parameter defines the magneto optical disk device
where disk processing is to be continued. It is the
logical device number of the magneto optical disk device
where the relevant magneto optical disk is inserted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE NAME
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
b: DEVICE NUMBER=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
REJECT REJECT OPTICAL DISK REQUEST
This parameter tells the system that the requested magneto
optical disk cannot be provided and disk processing must be
terminated.
N DONT REJECT MOD REQUEST
NO DONT REJECT MOD REQUEST
Y REJECT MOD REQUEST
YES REJECT MOD REQUEST
Default: N
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk volume
serial number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOUNT MO- 1+
MOUNT MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,+,*,%,#
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOUNT MO- 2-
RSET MO
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This command releases the magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The magneto optical disk device must be available.
- The data carrier must be available and not reserved by
another process.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [VSN=[ [
[ RSET MO : MOD= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
magneto optical disk device.
Note:
- The following character strings are reserved for magnetic
disk devices and are therefore illegal:
VSN000 and VSN001.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the logical device number of the
magneto optical disk device.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET MO- 1-
DISP MOBINTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE IN THRESHOLD
This command displays the mobile IN traffic restriction threshold values.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MOBINTHR ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBINTHR- 1-
ACT MOBS
SHG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACTIVATE METER OBSERVATION
This command activates meter observation for a subscriber.
All outgoing and/or incoming calls for a specified subscriber directory
number are then observed in respect to the number of charge units
recorded per call.
At activation, a meter observation record is generated which includes
the current values of the subscribers charge counters and the date
and time.
Usage:
To prevent the loss of data due to the cyclic overwriting of the
meter observation disk file, it is recommended that the file
should be saved when an occupancy level of 75% is reached (command
TRANS FILE).
There are the following alternatives:
- local mode: transfer to a local magnetic tape/optical disk.
- remote mode: transfer to DCP (data communication processor)
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. ACT MOBS - SHG SUBSCRIBER HUNTING GROUP
2. ACT MOBS - SUB SUBSCRIBER AND HUNTING MEMBERS
1. Input format
SUBSCRIBER HUNTING GROUP
This input format activates meter observation
for subscriber hunting groups

[ [
[ ACT MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] ,LNO= ,OPMODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation. The
following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered without
local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COS CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CONCUR CONCURRENT OUTPUT
If this value is entered, the concurrent printout
of the meter observation records is activated for
the subscriber with the specified directory
number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MOBS- 1+
ACT MOBS
SHG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ORIG ORIGINATING
Entry of this information unit sets the class of
service for monitoring originating traffic.
To modify or extend a class of service, the old
entry must first be cancelled.
TERM TERMINATING
Entry of this information unit sets the class
of service for monitoring terminating traffic.
To modify or extend a class of service, the
old entry must first be cancelled.
Default: ORIG
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the
pilot directory number of the hunting group member.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MOBS- 2+
ACT MOBS
SUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SUBSCRIBER AND HUNTING MEMBERS
This input format activates meter observation
for subscriber and hunting members

[ [
[ ACT MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation. The
following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered without
local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COS CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CONCUR CONCURRENT OUTPUT
If this value is entered, the concurrent printout
of the meter observation records is activated for
the subscriber with the specified directory
number.
ORIG ORIGINATING
Entry of this information unit sets the class of
service for monitoring originating traffic.
To modify or extend a class of service, the old
entry must first be cancelled.
TERM TERMINATING
Entry of this information unit sets the class
of service for monitoring terminating traffic.
To modify or extend a class of service, the
old entry must first be cancelled.
Default: ORIG
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MOBS- 3-
CAN MOBS
SHG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL METER OBSERVATION
This command has following functions:
- without entry of COS = CONCUR, meter observation for the
subscriber is deactivated. This means that all active classes of
service (ORIG,TERM and/or CONCUR) are deactivated.
At the same time, a MOB record is generated which includes
the current values of the subscribers charge meters and the date and
time of cancellation.
- with entry of COS = CONCUR only the concurrent output for a
subscriber is deactivated. The feature meter observation
remains active.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN MOBS - SHG SUBSCRIBER HUNTING GROUP
2. CAN MOBS - SUB SUBSCRIBER AND HUNTING MEMBERS
1. Input format
SUBSCRIBER HUNTING GROUP
This input format cancels meter observation
for subscriber hunting groups

[ [
[ CAN MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] ,LNO= ,OPMODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter
observation. The following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered without
local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COS CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONCUR CONCURRENT OUTPUT
If this value is entered, the concurrent printout
of the meter observation records is cancelled for
the subscriber with the specified directory
number.
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MOBS- 1+
CAN MOBS
SHG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the
pilot directory number of the hunting group member.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MOBS- 2+
CAN MOBS
SUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SUBSCRIBER AND HUNTING MEMBERS
This input format cancels meter observation
for subscriber and hunting members

[ [
[ CAN MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= [,COS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory
number volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter
observation. The following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered without
local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
COS CLASSES OF SERVICE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONCUR CONCURRENT OUTPUT
If this value is entered, the concurrent printout
of the meter observation records is cancelled for
the subscriber with the specified directory
number.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MOBS- 3-
DISP MOBS
SHG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION
This command displays the meter observation classes of service
for one specific subscriber.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MOBS - SHG SUBSCRIBER HUNTING GROUP
2. DISP MOBS - SUB SUBSCRIBER AND HUNTING MEMBERS
1. Input format
SUBSCRIBER HUNTING GROUP
This input format displays the meter observation classes of service
for subscriber hunting groups

[ [
[ DISP MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= ,LNO= ,OPMODE= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation.
The following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The subscribers directory numebr must be entered without
local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
LNO LINE NUMBER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...9999, range of decimal numbers
OPMODE OPERATING MODE
This parameter specifies the operating mode of the
pilot directory number of the hunting group member.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ABW ANALOG BOTHWAY
AIC ANALOG INCOMING
AOG ANALOG OUTGOING
IBW ISDN BOTHWAY
IBW1TR6 ISDN BOTHWAY 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IIC ISDN INCOMING
IIC1TR6 ISDN INCOMING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
IOG ISDN OUTGOING
IOG1TR6 ISDN OUTGOING 1TR6 PROTOCOL
MBW MIXED BOTHWAY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBS- 1+
DISP MOBS
SUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SUBSCRIBER AND HUNTING MEMBERS
This input format displays the meter observation classes of service
for subscriber and hunting members

[ [
[ DISP MOBS : [LAC=] ,DN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
Notes:
- Input is mandatory in an exchange with multiple directory number
volume.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation.
The following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The subscribers directory numebr must be entered without
local area code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBS- 2-
SEL MOBS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT METER OBSERVATION
This command displays all selected subscribers for which meter
observation has been activated.
Notes:
- The following parameter entries are possible:
LAC DN
- - all the subscibers with MOB of the exchange are displayed
x - all the subscribers with MOB of this LAC are displayed
- x all the subscribers with MOB of the specified DN interval are
displayed (only allowed when DN volume is unique).
x x all the subscribers with MOB of the specified LAC and DN interval
are displayed.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ SEL MOBS : [LAC=] [,DN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the local area code of the subscribers
to be selected for meter observation.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the range of directory numbers of the
subscribers to be selected for meter observation.
Following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
Notes:
- The directory numbers must be entered without local area code.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
1...12 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL MOBS- 1-
DISP MOBSDAT
MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY METER OBSERVATION DATA
This command displays the meter observation data records of one subscriber.
The following variants are possible, depending on the input parameters:
- Input without time parameters (DATE and TIME)
display all meter observation data records for the last
observation period stored for a subscriber.
- Input with time parameters
display all meter observation data records generated for a subscriber
since the time specified.
The records may stem from different observation periods. A SUMMARY
printout is generated for each observation period.
Usage:
Before entering the command any data records still buffered
in the main memory must be transferred to disk using command
TRANS BUFFER: TYPE = MOB (forced output).
Remark:
It is not assured that the records in the protocoll are
cronological when date time changes are performed.
Date time changes are visualized in the print out (for the world
market only!) if the generation of date time change records is
activated by the craftperson by means of the ACT IAOPT command.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MOBSDAT - MD MAGNETIC DISK
2. DISP MOBSDAT - MT MAGNETIC TAPE
1. Input format
MAGNETIC DISK
Input format for the display from magnetic disk

[ [
[ DISP MOBSDAT : DN= ,FORMAT= [,DATE= ,TIME=] [,FILE=] [
[ [
[ [,DISPSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation.
Following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
- account number for Toll Free Service
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered with local area
code (without trunk or international prefix), or without local area
code, if no one is implemented.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the data format in the MOB printout.
FORMAT = 1 => world market print out
FORMAT = 2 => BRD print out
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBSDAT- 1+
DISP MOBSDAT
MD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the start date from which the meter
observation data must be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the start time from which the meter
observation data must be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk or
tape/optical disk file. The following variants are
possible:
- Name of the cyclic disk file for meter observation.
Default name= FILE=IA.ICMOB
- Name of a copy of the meter observation file generated
using TRANS FILE. Printer output is only possible if
the format of this file matches the format of the cyclic
disk file.
- Name of the magnetic tape/optical disk file generated
using TRANS FILE (DEFAULT = IA.ICMOB). Printer
output is only possible if the tape/optical disk
format matches the format of the cyclic disk file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DISPSN DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
This parameter allows a secret number contained in a terminating
MOB record, to be displayed in the DISP MOBSDAT print out.
If this parameter is not entered or the value NO is entered, a secret
A-number will not be displayed and FFFFFF will appear in the print out.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
NO DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Y DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
YES DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBSDAT- 2+
DISP MOBSDAT
MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MAGNETIC TAPE
Input format for the display from magnetic tape/optical disk

[ [
[ DISP MOBSDAT : DN= ,FORMAT= ,VSN= [,DATE= ,TIME=] [,FILE=] [
[ [
[ [,DISPSN=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DN DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter identifies the subscriber under meter observation.
Following directory number types can be entered:
- directory number of main stations
- line service number (billing number) of PBX lines
- account number for Toll Free Service
Notes:
- The subscribers directory number must be entered with local area
code (without trunk or international prefix), or without local area
code, if no one is implemented.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...24 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
FORMAT OUTPUT FORMAT
This parameter specifies the data format in the MOB printout.
FORMAT = 1 => world market print out
FORMAT = 2 => BRD print out
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...255, range of decimal numbers
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of
the tape/optical disk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DATE DATE
This parameter specifies the start date from which the meter
observation data must be displayed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
TIME TIME
This parameter specifies the start time from which the meter
observation data must be displayed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBSDAT- 3+
DISP MOBSDAT
MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
b: MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
c: SECOND=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
FILE FILE NAME
This parameter specifies the name of the disk or
tape/optical disk file. The following variants are
possible:
- Name of the cyclic disk file for meter observation.
Default name= FILE=IA.ICMOB
- Name of a copy of the meter observation file generated
using TRANS FILE. Printer output is only possible if
the format of this file matches the format of the cyclic
disk file.
- Name of the magnetic tape/optical disk file generated
using TRANS FILE (DEFAULT = IA.ICMOB). Printer
output is only possible if the tape/optical disk
format matches the format of the cyclic disk file.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DISPSN DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
This parameter allows a secret number contained in a terminating
MOB record, to be displayed in the DISP MOBSDAT print out.
If this parameter is not entered or the value NO is entered, a secret
A-number will not be displayed and FFFFFF will appear in the print out.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
NO DO NOT DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Y DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
YES DISPLAY SECRET NUMBER
Default: NO
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBSDAT- 4-
DISP MOBTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE THRESHOLD
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MOBTHR : MOBTHR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOBTHR THRESHOLD DEFINITION
This parameter specifies the mobile threshold type.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AUTHSE AUTHENTICATION SETS
AUTHEV AUTHENTICATION EVENTS
TMSIRE TMSI REALLOCATION EVENTS
SECREC SECURITY RECORDING EVENTS
IDETTIM IMPLICIT DETACH TIME
MSIMISM TMSI-IMSI MISMATCH EVENTS
NATVAL NAT UNIT REPORT VALUE
INTVAL INTERN UNIT REPORT
UNRELT UNIT RELEASE VALUE
DURSUP DURATION SUPERVISON
UKLIFTIM UMTS KEY LIFETIME CONT. TIMER
SNMPRD SEQ. NO. MANAGEM. PROFILE D
SNMPRA SEQ. NO. MANAGEM. PROFILE A
SNMPRDEL SEQ. NO. MANAGEM. PROF. DELTA
DURMMEVT DURATION MM EVENT NOTIFICATION
AGELOC AGE OF LOCATION INFORMATION
ALPAGLOC ALLOWED PAGING LOCATION
X ALL VALUE
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOBTHR- 1-
MOD MOBTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MOBILE THRESHOLD
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD MOBTHR : MOBTHR= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOBTHR THRESHOLD DEFINITION
This parameter specifies the mobile threshold characteristics.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: THRESHOLD TYPE
AUTHSE AUTHENTICATION SETS
This threshold type is only relevant in
case of VLR entity.
Its associated value ranges from 0 to 2.
Default value: 2.
AUTHEV AUTHENTICATION EVENTS
This threshold type is only relevant in
case of VLR entity.
Its associated value ranges from 1 to 15.
Default value: 1.
TMSIRE TMSI REALLOCATION EVENTS
This threshold type is only relevant in
case of VLR entity.
Its associated value ranges from 1 to 15.
Default value: 1.
SECREC SECURITY RECORDING EVENTS
This threshold type is only relevant in
case of VLR entity.
Its associated value ranges from 0 to 15.
Default value: 1.
IDETTIM IMPLICIT DETACH TIME
This threshold type is only relevant in
case of VLR entity.
Its associated value ranges from 6 to 1800.
Default value: 360 minutes.
MSIMISM TMSI-IMSI MISMATCH EVENTS
This threshold type is only relevant in
case of VLR entity.
Its associated value ranges from 0 to 1000.
Default value: 1.
NATVAL NAT UNIT REPORT VALUE
Report threshold for national calls, based
on the amount of charge units. When the
threshold is exceeded, a report is sent to
the output device.
Its associated value ranges from 1 to 2000.
Default value: 2000.
INTVAL INTERN UNIT REPORT
Report threshold for international calls,
based on the amount of charge units. When
the threshold is exceeded, a report is sent
to the output device.
Its associated value ranges from 1 to 10000.
Default value: 10000.
UNRELT UNIT RELEASE VALUE
Release threshold based on the amount of
charge units. When the threshold is exceeded,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MOBTHR- 1+
MOD MOBTHR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the call is terminated by the CP.
Its associated value ranges from 1 to 900000.
Default value: 900000.
DURSUP DURATION SUPERVISON
Release threshold based on the duration of
the call. When the threshold is exceeded,
the call is terminated by the CP.
Its associated value ranges from 1 to 1440.
Default value: 120 minutes.
UKLIFTIM UMTS KEY LIFETIME CONT. TIMER
Release threshold based on the lifetime
of the integrity/cipher key. When the
threshold is exceeded, a new key set is
allocated.
This threshold is used for UMTS.
Its associated value ranges from 0 to 1440.
If the value is set to 0, this means that
security-data are always required.
Default value: 60 minutes.
SNMPRD SEQ. NO. MANAGEM. PROFILE D
This UMTS threshold type is only relevant
in case of AC entity.
This threshold specifies the parameter D
value in the sequence number management
profile.
Its associated value ranges from
0 to 2147483647.
Default value: 65536 (2^16).
SNMPRA SEQ. NO. MANAGEM. PROFILE A
This UMTS threshold type is only relevant
in case of AC entity.
This threshold specifies the parameter A
value in the sequence number management
profile.
Its associated value ranges from
0 to 2147483647.
Default value: 32.
SNMPRDEL SEQ. NO. MANAGEM. PROF. DELTA
This UMTS threshold type is only relevant
in case of AC entity.
This threshold specifies the parameter DELTA
value in the sequence number management
profile.
Its associated value ranges from
0 to 2147483647.
Default value: 268435456 (2^28).
DURMMEVT DURATION MM EVENT NOTIFICATION
Threshold value for the minimum duration between
two Mobility Management event notifications for
the same subscriber (VMSC/VLR).
It is only relevant in case of location update.
Its associated value ranges from 0 to 2147483647.
Default value: 60 seconds.
AGELOC AGE OF LOCATION INFORMATION
Threshold value for the maximum age of location
information to determine when paging for a current
location retrieval is really necessary (VMSC/VLR).
Its associated value ranges from 0 to 2147483647.
Default value: 60 seconds.
ALPAGLOC ALLOWED PAGING LOCATION
Threshold value for the allowed paging requests
for a current location retrieval per hour (VMSC).
Its associated value ranges from 0 to 2147483647.
The value must be modified by step of 100.
Other values are rounded off to previous hundred
value. 0 means that no threshold applies.
Default value: 1000 per hour.
b: THRESHOLD VALUE=
0...2147483647, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MOBTHR- 2-
CAN MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command cancels a magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The IOPUNI must be PLA, MBL or ACT.
- The magneto optical disk device must be PLA.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MOD : MOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to
be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MOD- 1-
CONF MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command configures a magneto optical disk device.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MOD : MOD= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to be
configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MOD- 1-
CR MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command creates a magneto optical disk device. The created
magneto optical disk device is in the operating state PLA after the
command has been executed.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MOD : IOP= ,MOD= ,SCSIADDR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to which the
magneto optical disk device is to be connected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
b: IOP NUMBER=
0...7, range of decimal numbers
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the number of the magneto optical disk device
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SCSIADDR SCSI ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address at the SCSI bus.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
2...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MOD- 1-
DIAG MOD
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The magneto optical disk device must be MBL.
- A magneto optical disk must be inserted.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG MOD - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG MOD - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a magneto optical disk device.

[ [
[ DIAG MOD : MOD= [,SUP=] [,LABELMO=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to be
diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
LABELMO LABEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
This parameter specifies that the inserted magneto optical disk
is labelled and prepared for the diagnosis.
Notes:
- The label function must only be used for new disks and disks
with wrong format. Otherwise the existing files are deleted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DO NOT LABEL MO
NO DO NOT LABEL MO
Y LABEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
YES LABEL MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK
Default: NO
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MOD- 1+
DIAG MOD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a magneto
optical disk device.

[ [
[ DIAG MOD : MOD= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to be
diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MOD- 2-
DISP MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command displays the magneto optical disk device, the preceding
IOP and the address at the SCSI bus.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MOD : MOD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MOD- 1-
TEST MOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This command tests a magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites:
- The magneto optical disk device must be ACT and a magneto optical
disk must also be inserted.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST MOD : [MOD=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MOD MAGNETO OPTICAL DISK DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magneto optical disk device to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active units
of the relevant type are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST MOD- 1-
DMP MODIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DUMP MODULE MEMORY IMMEDIATE DUMP
This command supplies a consistent display of the memory contents of
DLU/LTG platforms specified via address ranges.
Up to five different address ranges to be dumped from the same
HW module can be specified.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is provided for use only by
Non-Standard Maintenance (NM) personnel.
Input format

[ [
[ DMP MODIMDMP : PLF= ,ADDR= [,LENGTH=] [,FORMAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
PLF PLATFORM NAME
This parameter specifies the platform to be dumped.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c[-d]
a: PLATFORM TYPE
DLU DIGITAL LINE UNIT
This unit specifies the location of the HW module.
b: DLU NUMBER OR LINE TRUNK GROUP SET=
0...13023, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the Digital Line Unit Number or the
line trunk group set.
c: DLU-SIDE/SHELF OR LTG-NUMBER=
0...63, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DLU controller side or the
DLU shelf number in the case of HW modules, or the LTG number.
d: DLU MODULE NUMBER OR LTG MODULE TYPE=
0...20, range of decimal numbers
This unit specifies the DLU module number or the LTG module
type.
ADDR LIST OF ADDRESS RANGES
This parameter defines an address or an address range of the
memory content to be dumped.
For dumping a memory content, two ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either an address range is entered with ADDR,
or, if only the start address is given, the length of the dump
using parameter LENGTH is specified.
As a matter of principle a dump address can be inserted as
[<selector>/<segment>] + <offset>/<linear address>
in the following form:
e.g.: ADDR="@@@@SSSS.H00000000"
where @@@@ is only a filling string;
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP MODIMDMP- 1+
DMP MODIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SSSS is the selector/segment (2 bytes hexadecimal) of a HW module
equipped with an INTEL 8086/80386 processor. In the case of a MOTOROLA
processor or INTEL 8085, the SSSS must be supplied with @@@@.
00000000 is the offset (max. 4 bytes hexadecimal) in the case of any
INTEL processor. For INTEL 8085 only a 2 byte offset is allowed.
00000000 is the linear address (max. 4 bytes hexadecimal) in the case
of a MOTOROLA processor.
A pseudo dump message can be inserted in the form of:
e.g.: ADDR="@@@@@@@@.HTTTTTTTT"
where @@@@@@@@ is only a filling string;
TTTTTTTT is the "pseudo dump information" (4 bytes hexadecimal)
Up to 5 different address ranges may be entered, concatenated by "&".
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...72 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
LENGTH LENGTH OF DUMP ELEMENT
This parameter provides the number of bytes to be dumped
if only a start address is entered.
If value 0 is entered, the parameter ADDR must contain
only a pseudo dump information.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65536, range of decimal numbers
FORMAT FORMAT OF OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the format type of the output.
If HEX is chosen, an output in hexadecimal form will be
produced, in the case of ASCII the output will contain ASCII
characters in addition to the hex output.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
HEX HEXADECIMAL OUTPUT
ASCII ASCII OUTPUT
Default: ASCII
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP MODIMDMP- 2-
CAN MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Magneto Optical Disk Device MP
This task cancels a magneto optical disk device.
Prerequisites: The magneto optical disk device has to be deactive.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MODMP : Side= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MODMP- 1-
CONF MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Configure Magneto Optical Disk Device MP
This task configures a magneto optical disk device, i.e. the magneto
optical disk device is activated or deactivated. The magneto optical disk
device can be activated with or without labeling.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MODMP : Side= ,Administrative State= [,Label=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Administrative State
This parameter specifies the type of configuration.
Allowed values are unlocked or locked
Label
This parameter specifies whether the magneto optical disk
device is to be activated with or without labeling.
Labeling means the original content is lost. Without labeling
means the original content is retained.
Allowed values are Yes or No
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MODMP- 1-
CR MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Magneto Optical Disk Device MP
This task creates a magneto optical disk device.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MODMP : Side= [,Alarm profile MP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile
MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MODMP- 1-
DIAG MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Diagnose Magneto Optical Disk MP
This task starts diagnosis of an ]MOD] of ]MP].
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MODMP : Side= ,Kind of diagnosis= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Kind of diagnosis
This parameter specifies the kind of diagnosis.
Following values are allowed:
]Self diagnosis]:
Base test for the unit.
It checks the availability and the workability of
the components .
Resets unit and becomes ]Self diagnosis].
No further tests are performed.
]Quick diagnosis]:
Performs a more comprehensive test than ]Self
diagnosis].
It includes all diagnosis tests without long
running
tests.
It must include testing of those hardware parts
which
are tested during normal operation.
]Complete diagnosis]:
This option performs full testing of all the
object functions, including tests which take a
long time
to complete such as memory tests.
]Quick format]:
In a first step the disk is formated and then an
]Quick diagnosis] of the ]MOD] is performed.
]All format]:
In a first step the disk is formated and then an
]Complete diagnosis] of the ]MOD] is performed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MODMP- 1-
DISP MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Magneto Optical Disk Device MP
This task displays information about the selected magneto optical disk device.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MODMP : Side= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MODMP- 1-
MOD MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Magneto Optical Disk MP
This task changes the value of the ]Alarm profile MP] of the
]MOD] of an ]MP].
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MODMP : Side= ,Alarm profile MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MODMP- 1+
MOD MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MODMP- 2-
STAT MODMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
STAT Magneto Optical Disk MP
This task displays the states of an ]MOD] of the ]MP].
Input format

[ [
[ STAT MODMP : Side= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT MODMP- 1-
CAN MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel Main Processor
This task deletes an ]MP].
First ensure if all MP Load measurements of appropriate MP was deleted before.
This task also deletes LBS when MP-OAMD is deleted.
Prerequisites to delete MP-OAMD:
- Administrative state of MP-OAMD is Reserved.
- Administrative state of LBS is Locked.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MP : MP= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 3...63.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MP- 1-
CONF MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Configure Main Processor
This task configures an ]MP].
There is a choice between the states ]locked], ]unlocked], ]reserved] and
]underRepair].
If the input of ]state] is ]locked] then ]Hazard check] can be performed.
Performing the ]Hazard check] means that in case a hazard is detected, the
configuration will not be executed and detected hazards are displayed.
Not performing the ]Hazard check] means that the configuration will always
be executed and detected hazards are displayed.
If there is an input for the ]Side], then only one ]Side] (0 or 1) will be
configured, otherwise the whole MP (]Side] 0 and 1) will be configured .
For one ]Side] it is not allowed to use the state ]reserved].
If ]underRepair] is selected a ]Side] must be entered.
Notes:
If ]states] is not ]locked] the input parameter ]Hazard check] is not used.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MP : MP= [,Side=] ,Admin. state= ,Hazard check= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Admin. state
This parameter is used to select the kind of configuration.
Hazard check
If the parameter is ]Yes], ]Hazard check] is started at the deactivation
of a unit.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MP- 1-
CR MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create Main Processor
This task creates an ]MP].
Prerequisites:
- A ]Shelf] must exist.
- In this ]Shelf] an ]AMX] must exist.
- The ]MPs] with number 1 and 2 already exist in the system.
- The statistics property is allowed if ]Load type] is ]TSTATS01].
Only one ]MP] with ]Load model] ]STATS] can be created.
Notes:
- When creating MP-Dependent, optional parameters must not be entered.
- When creating MP-Ethernet, all mandatory parameters and `Additional devices`
parameter must be entered.
- Allowed combinations of `Shelf type` and `Pitch` for MP-Dependent and
MP-Ethernet:
+---------------+---------+
! `Shelf type` ! `Pitch` !
+---------------+---------+
! SCB ! 103 !
! ! 127 !
! SXCB ! 137 !
! ! 161 !
! SCE ! 103 !
! ! 127 !
! ! 151 !
! ! 175 !
! ! 291 !
! ! 315 !
! ! 339 !
! ! 363 !
+---------------+---------+
- It must be regarded that the values of ]Load type]
and ]Load model] are matching together.
Following combinations are allowed:
+------------+--------------------+
!]Load type] ! ]Load model] !
+------------+--------------------+
! TSM00001 ! SM !
! TSLT0001 ! SLT_MTP !
! ! SLT_MTP_SGTR_IP !
! ! SLT_UDP_IP !
! ! SLT_MTP_IP !
! ! SLT_IP1 !
! ! SLT_IP2 !
! ! SLT_AAL5_IP1 !
! ! SLT_AAL5_IP2 !
! ! SLT_SGTR !
! ! SLT_MTP_SGTR1 !
! ! SLT_MTP_SGTR2 !
! TSTATS01 ! STATS !
! TNP00001 ! NP !
! TPD000G1 ! PD !
! TMM000G1 ! MM !
! TRANAPG2 ! RANAP !
! TAAL20G2 ! AAL2 !
! TACC00G2 ! ACC !
! TACCIOG2 ! ACCIO !
! TIN000G2 ! IN !
! THI000G3 ! HI !
+------------+--------------------+
Creating MP-OAMD:
- When creating MP-OAMD all mandatory and optional parameters
must be entered.
- Allowed combinations of Pitch, Shelf and Shelftype
for MP-OAMD :
+-------------+-------+---------+
! Shelf type ! Shelf ! Pitch !
+-------------+-------+---------+
! SCB ! 9 ! 299 !
! SXCB ! 7, 9 ! 251 !
+-------------+-------+---------+
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MP- 1+
CR MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format

[ [
[ CR MP : MP= ,Rack= ,Shelf= ,Pitch= ,Load model= ,Load type= [
[ [
[ ,Board type= ,Statistics= ,Alarm profile MP= [
[ [
[ ,Alarm profile MP Mpu= [,PBS Alarm Prof. Pointer=] [
[ [
[ [,Additional devices=] [,Ama Flag=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an ]MP].
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 3...63.
Rack
This parameter is the name of an existing ]Rack].
Allowed values are symbolic names of exactly 8 characters.
Shelf
This parameter is the number of an existing ]Shelf].
Allowed values are: 3, 5, 7, 9.
Pitch
This parameter is the number of an ]Pitch] of ]Side] 0.
Allowed values are: 103, 127, 137, 151, 161, 175, 251, 291, 299, 315,
339, 363.
Pitches: 251 in SXCB Shelf and 299 in SCB Shelf, are only for MP-OAMD.
Load model
This parameter specifies the ]Load model] of an ]MP].
Load type
This parameter is used to specify the ]Load type] of the ]MP] to be
created.
The allowed values are TSM00001, TSLT0001, TSTATS01, TNP00001, TPD000G1,
TMM000G1,
TRANAPG2, TAAL20G2, TACC00G2, TACCIOG2, TIN000G2, THI000G3
Board type
Attribute to specify the board (hardware) of a unit.
Alowed values ]MPUC AP] and ]MPUD AP].
Statistics
This parameter sets the ]Statistics] property of the ]MP], if the input
is ]TRUE].
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MP- 2+
CR MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
Alarm profile MP Mpu
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP of MPU to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MP- 3+
CR MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
PBS Alarm Prof. Pointer
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP of PBS to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
Additional devices
Attribute to specify additional device
Alowed values Ethernet Disc, Ethernet and None
Ama Flag
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MP- 4+
CR MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Allowed values Yes and No
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MP- 5-
DIAG MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Diagnose Main Processor
This task starts diagnosis of a ]MP].
Input format

[ [
[ DIAG MP : MP= ,Side= ,Kind of diagnosis= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
Kind of diagnosis
This parameter specifies the kind of diagnosis.
Following values are allowed:
Self diagnosis:
It is the base test for the unit. It checks the
availability and
the workability of the components. It resets the
unit and performs
a self diagnosis. No further tests are performed.
for MP-OAMD is only Self Diagnosis alloewd.
Quick diagnosis:
It performs a more comprehensive test than
]SelfCheck]. It includes
all diagnostics tests without long running tests. It
includes
testing of those hardware parts which are not tested
during
normal operations.
Complete diagnosis:
This option performs full testing of all the object
functions,
including tests which take a long time to complete,
such as memory
tests.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MP- 1-
DISP MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Main Processor
This task is used to display an ]MP].
Following combinations are allowed:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT | OUTPUT !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! - | all ]MP]s and each side of all ]MP]s are displayed !
! MP | one ]MP] and each side of one ]MP] are displayed !
! MP, Side | one ]Side] of one ]MP] is displayed. !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MP : [MP=] [,Side=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MP- 1-
MOD MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify Main Processor
This task changes the ]Alarm profile MP], ]Alarm profile MP] of ]MPU],
]Load model] , Statistics and the Additional Devices] of the ]MP]. More than one
value of ]MP]
can be changed with this task at the same time.
Prerequisites:
- The statistics property is allowed if ]Load type] is ]TSA00001],
]TSM00001] or ]TSTATS01].
- It is not allowed to reset the last ]MP] in the system with statistics
property.
- It must be regarded that the values of ]Load type] and ]Load model] are
matching together.
+----------------------------------+
!]Load types] | ]Load models] !
+----------------------------------+
! TSLT0001 | SLT_MTP !
! | SLT_MTP_SGTR_IP !
! | SLT_UDP_IP !
! | SLT_MTP_IP !
! | SLT_IP1 !
! | SLT_IP2 !
! | SLT_AAL5_IP1 !
! | SLT_AAL5_IP2 !
! | SLT_SGTR !
! | SLT_MTP_SGTR1 !
! | SLT_MTP_SGTR2 !
+----------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MP : MP= [,Alarm profile MP=] [,Alarm profile MP Mpu=] [
[ [
[ [,Load model=] [,Statistics=] [,Board type=] [
[ [
[ [,Aditional Devices=] [,Ama Flag=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Alarm profile MP
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MP- 1+
MOD MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
Alarm profile MP Mpu
This parameter relates an Alarm Profile MP of MPU to the managed
unit to control its alarming behavior.
The Alarm Profile MP is used to determine the priority of
an alarm, depending on its Probable cause (see Q3-standards
X.721, M.3100 etc.) and the detected service impact.
Input format:
Selection from:
generally applicable Alarm Profile MPs available on MP:
- ALSUPP: Alarm suppression
Alarm is negligible and therefore suppressed.
No alarm processing will be performed.
- WARNING: Warning
Alarm constitutes a situation to which attention
is drawn. For all Probable cause values the
alarm priority Warning will be used.
- MINNOESC: Minor with no escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MINESC: Minor with escalation
Alarm is of minor importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Minor will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- MAJNOESC: Major with no escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with no escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used. If service is degraded, no
alarm escalation will be performed.
- MAJESC: Major with escalation
Alarm is of major importance, with escalation.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Major will be used if no service impact is
detected. If service is degraded, the alarm
priority will escalate to Critical.
- CRITICAL: Critical
Alarm indicates a critical system condition.
For all Probable cause values the alarm priority
Critical will be used.
or a user-defined one:
- own name, Input: 1...8 characters from printable character set
Use task DISP ALPROFMP to get an overview of the
existing Alarm Profile MPs.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MP- 2+
MOD MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Standard behavior:
If no Alarm Profile MP is specified in a create task, a reasonable
default value, depending on the managed object class, is selected by
the system.
Load model
This parameter is used to modify the ]Load model] of an ]MP].
The value ]Default] is used by the service.
If the loadModel of an MP should be changed some restrictions
must be taken into account:
For CCS7-Functionality in the switch there is necessary (among
others) at least one active MP with functionality SGTR one active
MP with functionality MTP
That means: never change for example a loadModel SLT_MTP to
SLT_SGTR if there is no other MP with functionality MTP
(SLT_MTP or SLT_MTP_SGTR1/2 or SM_SLT_MTP_SGTR1).
Statistics
This parameter sets or resets the statistics-property of the ]MP].
The statistics-property is set if the input is TRUE and reset
if the input is FALSE.
Board type
Attribute to specify the board (hardware) of a unit.
Alowed values ]Mpud Sa] and ]Mpud Ap].
Aditional Devices
Attribute to specify additional device
Alowed values Ethernet and None
Ama Flag
Alowed values Yes and No
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MP- 3-
RECOV MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Recover Main Processor
This task is used to recover an ]MP].
Allowed parameters for recoveries of ]MP] are:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
! ]Scope] ]Depth] ]Measures] !
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
! PROREC3 ]Platform] ]Selective recovery] ]No measures] !
! FULLREC ]Platform] ]Full recovery] ]No measures] !
! LOADREC2 ]Platform] ]Cold start] ]Loading of code and data] !
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ RECOV MP : MP= ,Scope= ,Depth= ,Measures= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Scope
This parameter specifies that only the addressed platform is recovered.
Depth
This parameter specifies whether the recovery shall be ]Selective
recovery], ]Full recovery] or ]Cold start].
Measures
This parameter specifies that code and data are reloaded if a Loadrec2
is requested.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RECOV MP- 1-
STAT MP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display Status of Main Processor
This task displays an ]MP].
Following combinations are allowed:
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! INPUT | OUTPUT !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
! - | all ]MP]s and each side of all ]MP]s are displayed !
! MP | one ]MP] and each side of one ]MP] are displayed !
! MP, SIDE | one ]Side] of one ]MP] is displayed. !
+---------------------------------------------------------------+
Input format

[ [
[ STAT MP : [MP=] [,Side=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter is the number of an existing MP.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Side
This parameter is the number of one side. Allowed values are 0 or 1.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 STAT MP- 1-
CAN MPEVDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MP Event Dump
This task cancels a dump event. The specified event is deleted
in the dump event administration of one MP platform or, if no
specific platform is given, on all MP platforms available
systemwide.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MPEVDMP : [MP=] ,Event number= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter must be specified, if the task should be
performed for a specific MP platform.
Event number
This parameter specifies definitely the event number related
to a dump buffer on a platform.
Possible values are 1 to 255.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MPEVDMP- 1-
DISP MPEVDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MP Event Dump
This task displays the job data of a dump event (previously entered).
If no event number is specified, only a list of the event numbers
entered in the event administration of the current platform will
be displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MPEVDMP : [MP=] [,Event number=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter must be specified, if the task should be
performed for a specific MP platform.
Event number
This parameter specifies definitely the event number related
to a dump buffer on a platform.
Possible values are 1 to 255.
A list of event numbers of all valid events can be obtained
by omitting this parameter.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPEVDMP- 1-
DMP MPEVDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump MP Event Dump
This task provides a consistent output of the contents of a dump
buffer of one specific or of all available MP platforms systemwide.
The dump buffer is selected by specifying its corresponding
event number. All valid dumps collected in the specific buffer
will be put out.
Input format

[ [
[ DMP MPEVDMP : [MP=] ,Event number= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter must be specified, if the task should be
performed for a specific MP platform.
Event number
This parameter specifies definitely the event number related
to a dump buffer on a platform.
Possible values are 1 to 255.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP MPEVDMP- 1-
ENTR MPEVDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Enter MP Event Dump
This Task creates a dump event in the event administration of the
specified MP platform(s).
The event can either be specified by giving trigger time and date using
this command or it can be triggered by SWT.
Any time the event is triggered, the dumped memory content is
stored in the corresponding dump buffer.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR MPEVDMP : [MP=] ,Beginn address= [,Length=] [,End address=] [
[ [
[ ,Event number= [,Chain offset=] [,Chain number=] [
[ [
[ [,Event time=] [,Element number=] [,Buffer mode=] [
[ [
[ [,Buffer type=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter must be specified, if the task should be
performed for a specific MP platform.
Beginn address
This parameter defines the start address of the memory content
to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either a begin address and an end address is entered, or
if only the begin address is given, the length of the
dump must be specified.
In case of dumping chained elements (a linked list), only
a begin address has to be specified, the length of each
chained element has to be entered via parameter Length.
Following values are possible:
- Begin address is specified relative to a module begin,
i.e capsule, SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters
each), plus a distance within the module
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006 or
CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter H
and a single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name
(i.e. the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label
is preceded by the letter L and a single quote:
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000 or
CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000
instead of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPEVDMP- 1+
ENTR MPEVDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0
- Indirect dump can be specified by a begin address: It contains
a pointer which indicates the real start address preceded by
the letters IN and a single quote:
e.g.: INCAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C+H8
Length
This parameter specifies the length of the adress range to
be dumped. In case of a chained dump it specifies the length
of one chained element.
Possible values are 1 to 65535.
End address
This parameter can be used to define the end of the adress range
to be dumped.
If End addess is not given, Length must be specified.
Following values are possible:
- End address is specified with SPU, and module name
(8 characters each), plus a distance within the module
e.g.: SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006 or
SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter H
and a single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
Event number
This parameter specifies definitely the event number related
to a dump buffer on a platform.
Possible values are 1 to 255.
Chain offset
This parameter specifies the offset of the link pointer to the
next element within the chained list to be dumped.
Possible values are 1 to 65535.
Chain number
This parameter specifies the number of chained elements
to be dumped.
Possible values are 1 to 50.
Event time
If this parameter is entered, the dump event will be
triggered at the time specified.
Element number
This parameter specifies the size of the dump buffer
that will be allocated for the event to be created:
Element number is equal to the maximum number of complete dump
elements that can be stored in the dump buffer.
Possible values are 1 to 100.
Buffer mode
This parameter specifies the operation mode of the dump buffer
allocated for the event to be created.
It is possible to specify a linear buffer or a cyclic buffer.
Buffer type
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPEVDMP- 2+
ENTR MPEVDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter defines the kind of the dump buffer.
This could be either a dump buffer which is recovery resistant
or which is not recovery resistant.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPEVDMP- 3-
DMP MPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Dump MP Memory Immediate Dump
This task supplies a consistent display of memory contents of MP
platforms or of the corresponding load library.
If MP is not specified, the dump data will be read from load library.
It is also possible to perform a chained dump from memory.
In this case, the parameters Chain offset and Chain number must be
specified too.
Input format

[ [
[ DMP MPIMDMP : [MP=] ,Beginn address= [,Length=] [,End address=] [
[ [
[ [,Chain offset=] [,Chain number=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter must be specified, if a dump from MP memory
should be performed.
Beginn address
This parameter defines the start address of the memory content
to be dumped.
For dumping a linear memory content, 2 ways of specifying
the address limits of the dump can be used:
either a begin address and an end address is entered, or,
if only the begin address is given, the length of the
dump must be specified.
In case of dumping chained elements (a linked list), only
a begin address has to be specified, the length of each
chained element has to be entered via parameter Length.
Following values are possible:
- Begin address is specified relative to a module begin,
i.e capsule, SPU, and module name are entered (8 characters
each), plus a distance within the module
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006 or
CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter H
and a single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
- A symbolic address can be specified by using a symbol name
(i.e. the name of a granted object, length 8 characters):
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006.SYMBOLA0+H12A4
- Symbolic addresses can be specified by using labels. A label
is preceded by the letter L and a single quote:
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.LLABELBEG+H476EBF
- Symbolic address by using the value of an exported symbol (8
characters) as an additional offset:
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P_0101.CONST000 or
CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C
+SPU00A0A.MODULE2P.CONST000+H0FF4
If both module names are identical, the second one may be
omitted.
e.g.: CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOLA0+.CONST000
instead of
CAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.SYMBOL
+SPU00A0A.MODULE1C_2401.CONST000
- Absolute address within capsule in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: CAPSCA0A+H2A476EBF
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP MPIMDMP- 1+
DMP MPIMDMP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Absolute address within a load module in hexadecimal form:
e.g.: LDMOD00X+H10ED04D0
- Indirect dump can be specified by a begin address: It contains
a pointer which indicates the real start address preceded by
the letters IN and a single quote:
e.g.: INCAPSCA0A.SPU00A0A.MODULE1C+H8
Length
This parameter specifies the length of the adress range to be
dumped. In case of a chained dump it specifies the length of one
chained element.
Possible values are 1 to 65535.
End address
This parameter can be used to define the end of the adress range
to be dumped.
If End addess is not given, Length must be specified.
Following values are possible:
- End address is specified with SPU, and module name
(8 characters each), plus a distance within the module
e.g.: SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006 or
SPU00A0A.MODULE0C_0006+H23F
Offsets are hexadecimal numbers preceded by the letter H
and a single quote.
The module version number (underline and 4 digits) may be
omitted.
Chain offset
This parameter specifies the offset of the link pointer to the
next element within the chained list to be dumped.
Possible values are 1 to 65535.
Chain number
This parameter specifies the number of chained elements
to be dumped.
Possible values are 1 to 50.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DMP MPIMDMP- 2-
CAN MPLDLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MP Load Measurement Logfile
This task cancels an MP Load Measurement Logfile.
Notes:
- After canceling this logfile the MP Load Measurement reports arent
stored anymore.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MPLDLOG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MPLDLOG- 1-
CR MPLDLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create MP Load Measurement Logfile
This task creates an MP Load Measurement Logfile.
This logfile is used for storing all MP Load Measurement reports.
The content of the logfile can be retrieved and viewed using the
application Q3 Event Presentation Service.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MPLDLOG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MPLDLOG- 1-
DISP MPLDLOG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MP Load Measurement Logfile Info
This task displays the MP Load Measurement Logfile Info.
Notes:
- The content of the logfile can be retrieved and viewed using
the application Q3 Event Presentation Service.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MPLDLOG ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPLDLOG- 1-
CAN MPLDME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MP Load Measurement
This task cancels an MP Load Measurement object.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding MP has to be active.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MPLDME : Measurement type= ,MP= ,Meas. time period= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
Please select the Measurement type of the MP Load Measurement
object to be canceled.
Input format:
Virtual CPU
Message handler
Default:
Virtual CPU
MP
Please enter the MP for which the MP Load Measurement
object is to be canceled.
Input format:
Integer
Meas. time period
Please select the Meas. time period of the MP Load Measurement
object to be canceled.
Input format:
5 min
15 min
Default:
5 min
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MPLDME- 1-
CR MPLDME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create MP Load Measurement
This task creates an MP Load Measurement object.
To generate reports containing the data of that MP Load
Measurement object there has to be an Unlocked MP Load
Measurement Reporting with the same Meas. time period
and the same Measurement type.
To store the reports you should create a Logfile.
To create an MP Load Measurement Reporting you should use
the task Create MP Load Measurement Reporting.
To create a logfile you can use e.g. the task Create MP Load
Measurement Logfile.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding MP has to be active.
- To create an MP Load Measurement object for Message handler
the corresponding MP has to be an SLT.
Notes:
- At maximum one MP Load Measurement object for Virtual CPU
and one for Message handler can be created per MP.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MPLDME : Measurement type= ,MP= ,Meas. time period= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
Please select the Measurement type.
Input format:
Virtual CPU
Message handler
Default:
Virtual CPU
MP
Please enter the MP for which the MP Load Measurement
object is to be created.
Input format:
Integer
Meas. time period
Please select the Meas. time period. The data for one report
are always collected during one Meas. time period.
Input format:
5 min
15 min
Default:
5 min
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MPLDME- 1-
DISP MPLDME
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MP Load Measurement
This task displays an MP Load Measurement object.
Prerequisites:
- The corresponding MP has to be active.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MPLDME : Measurement type= ,MP= ,Meas. time period= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
Please select the Measurement type of the MP Load Measurement
object to be displayed.
Input format:
Virtual CPU
Message handler
Default:
Virtual CPU
MP
Please enter the MP for which the MP Load Measurement
object is to be displayed.
Input format:
Integer
Meas. time period
Please select the Meas. time period of the MP Load Measurement
object to be displayed.
Input format:
5 min
15 min
Default:
5 min
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPLDME- 1-
CAN MPLDRPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MP Load Measurement Reporting
This task cancels an MP Load Measurement Reporting.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MPLDRPT : Measurement type= ,Meas. time period= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
Please select the Measurement type of the MP Load
Measurement Reporting to be canceled.
Input format:
Virtual CPU
Message handler
Default:
Virtual CPU
Meas. time period
Please select the Meas. time period of the MP Load Measurement
Reporting to be canceled.
Input format:
5 min
15 min
Default:
5 min
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MPLDRPT- 1-
CR MPLDRPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create MP Load Measurement Reporting
This task creates an MP Load Measurement Reporting.
If the MP Load Measurement Reporting is Unlocked reports will be
generated.
Every report contains the data of all MP Load Measurement objects with
the same Meas. time period and the same Measurement type than the
MP Load Measurement Reporting.
To store the reports you should create a Logfile.
To create an MP Load Measurement object you should use the task Create
MP Load Measurement.
To create a logfile you can use e.g. the task Create MP Load Measurement
Logfile.
Notes:
- Only one MP Load Measurement Reporting for Virtual CPU and one for
Message handler per Meas. time period can be created.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MPLDRPT : Measurement type= ,Meas. time period= ,Admin. state= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
Please select the Measurement type.
Input format:
Virtual CPU
Message handler
Default:
Virtual CPU
Meas. time period
Please select the Meas. time period. The data for one report
are always collected during one Meas. time period.
Input format:
5 min
15 min
Default:
5 min
Admin. state
Please enter the Admin. state.
Input format:
Unlocked
Locked
Default:
Unlocked
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MPLDRPT- 1-
DISP MPLDRPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MP Load Measurement Reporting
This task displays an MP Load Measurement Reporting.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MPLDRPT : Measurement type= ,Meas. time period= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
Please select the Measurement type of the MP Load Measurement
Reporting to be displayed.
Input format:
Virtual CPU
Message handler
Default:
Virtual CPU
Meas. time period
Please select the Meas. time period of the MP Load Measurement
Reporting to be displayed.
Input format:
5 min
15 min
Default:
5 min
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPLDRPT- 1-
MOD MPLDRPT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify MP Load Measurement Reporting
This task modifies the Admin. state of an
MP Load Measurement Reporting.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MPLDRPT : Measurement type= ,Meas. time period= ,Admin. state= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
Please select the Measurement type of the MP Load Measurement
Reporting to be modified.
Input format:
Virtual CPU
Message handler
Default:
Virtual CPU
Meas. time period
Please select the Meas. time period of the MP Load Measurement
Reporting to be modified.
Input format:
5 min
15 min
Default:
5 min
Admin. state
Please enter the Admin. state of the MP Load Measurement Reporting
to be modified.
Input format:
Unlocked
Locked
Default:
Locked
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MPLDRPT- 1-
ACT MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate MP Permanent Patch
This task is used to activate one or more permanent patches in
the memory of the selected MP platforms. Max. 4 platforms can be
affected simultaneously. If no platform specified, all platforms
affected.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT MPPRPCH : [MP=] ,Patch ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter specifies the MP platform on which the patch
should be activated. Max. 4 platforms can be activated simultaneously.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Allowed characters:
NUMBERS : 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
SEPARATORS : , and ;
DASH : - (for interval, mpId1-mpId2)
and SPACE :
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs which should be
activated on the platform.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MPPRPCH- 1-
CAN MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MP Permanent Patch
This task is used to cancel one or more permanent patches from
the patch administration of the selected MP platform.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MPPRPCH : Patch ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs which should be
cancelled from the platform.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MPPRPCH- 1-
DACT MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Deactivate MP Permanent Patch
This task is used to deactivate one or more permanent patches in
the memory of the selected MP platforms. Max. 4 platforms can be
affected simultaneously. If no platform specified, all platforms
affected
Input format

[ [
[ DACT MPPRPCH : [MP=] ,Patch ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter must be specified, if the patch should be
deactivated on a specific MP platform. Max. 4 platforms
can be deactivated simultaneously.
The allowed range of decimal numbers is 1...63.
Allowed characters:
NUMBERS : 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
SEPARATORS : , and ;
DASH : - (for interval, mpId1-mpId2)
and SPACE :
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs which should be
deactivated on the platform.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT MPPRPCH- 1-
DISP MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MP Permanent Patch
This task displays patch data kept in the patch administration
on disk and patch states concerning permanent patches for the
specified MP platform.
The patch selection can be done either by patch identifier(s) or by
logical address ranges affected by the patches.
If Patch ID and Patch address
are not specified all patch IDs are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MPPRPCH : [MP=] [,Patch ID=] [,Patch address=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter must be specified, if the patch information
should be displayed for a specific MP platform.
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs whose information
should be displayed.
The patch ID is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and
a patch name (1 to 16 characters).
Example:
Capsule Name: C00OSPAC (Upper or lower case characters)
Patch Name: A1234L0Z.0001.0 (Only upper case characters)
Patch Name is allowed to contain wildcards:
* for a string of undefined length
? for a single character
Patch address
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed.
It consists of a capsule name, and optional a beginn address
and a end address within the capsule.
The begin and end address can be specified either in
hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: Begin address = address, End address = address or
Begin address = address, End address = +distance
where address may have one of the following structures:
spuname.modname+offset+distance, or
spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance, or
label+offset+distance, or
offset+distance, where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address may be omitted. If it is omitted in the case
of capsule or module the entire address range of the unit
is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of symbol or offset
the search range is that byte only.
Example: C00OSPAC.BBPTBE0C.PAGYCA1C+H0A
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPPRPCH- 1+
DISP MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPPRPCH- 2-
ENTR MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Enter MP Permanent Patch
This task is used to enter a Permanent Patch into the patch
administration on disk.
With each ENTR MPPRPCH task one of the four different
subpatch types can be entered:
- Insert Rucksack Subpatches
- Replace Subpatches
- Insert Procedure Subpatches
- Insert Variable Subpatches
The subpatch types can be entered in the form of subpatches belonging
to a specified Patch ID.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter Total subpatch number.
All Subpatches with the exception of Insert Variable can be
entered in subpatch parts for each part using an individual
ENTR MPPRPCH task. All subpatch parts except Insert
Procedure Subpatches are referred to the same patch address.
The concatenation of those subpatch parts is supported by
means of parameter Subpatch part.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR MPPRPCH : Patch ID= [,Insert rucksack address=] [
[ [
[ [,Replace address=] [,Continuation address=] [
[ [
[ [,Insert variable=] [,Insert procedure reference=] [
[ [
[ [,Total subpatch number=] [,Subpatch part number=] [
[ [
[ [,New content=] [,Last subpatch part=] [,Old content=] ;[
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Patch ID
This parameter specifies the unambiguous Patch ID.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
Whenever a subpatch is entered for a certain patch the
Patch ID must be identical.
Example:
Capsule Name: C00OSPAC (Upper or lower case characters)
Patch Name: A1234L0Z.0001.0 (Only upper case characters)
Insert rucksack address
This parameter provides the insert rucksack subpatch address.
The address format is an interval within the module boundaries
in the form of begin address and continuation address
whereby the latter may be given as a distance relative
to the begin address.
At the begin address the instruction is replaced by a branch
instruction for jumping to the respective rucksack.
The end address serves as continuation address from which the
program will continue after the rucksack code has been executed.
The old instruction (5 Byte), overwritten by the branch
instruction, is at users own risk to add to the rucksack
or not.
An address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: spuname.modname.symbol+distance or
offset+distance or
label+distance, where
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPPRPCH- 1+
ENTR MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset@
The given address is valid for the capsule denoted within
parameter Capsule name.
Example: BBPTBE0C.PAGYCA1C+H0A
Replace address
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address.
The address format is a replacement address.
e.g.: spuname.modname.symbol+distance or
offset+distance or
label+distance, where
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
Example: BBPTBE0C.PAGYCA1C+H0A
Continuation address
This parameter serves as continuation address from which the
program will continue after the rucksack code has been executed.
The address can be specified either in hexadecimal form as an
offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: spuname.modname.symbol+distance or
label+distance or
offset
Example: BBPTBE0C.PAGYCA1C+H7
+H7
Insert variable
This parameter provides the insert variable subpatch reference
including the number of the insert variable (0 to 999)
and the length of the variable in bytes (1 to 4096).
Insert procedure reference
This parameter provides the insert procedure subpatch
reference including the number (0 to 999) of the insert
procedure.
The number serves to address the inserted procedure within
other subpatches of the defining patch.
Total subpatch number
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a patch name. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTER MPPRPCH task with the parameters Patch ID and
Total subpatch number, whereby the latter
one corresponds to the number of patches, entered under the
same ID.
Subpatch part number
This parameter specifies the subpatch part sequence number
and serves as concatenation controller.
Possible values are 1 to 999.
New content
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPPRPCH- 2+
ENTR MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter Old content.
Last subpatch part
This parameter denotes either the last or not last part
of a subpatch.
Old content
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
Must not be used for Insert Variable or Insert Procedure
subpatches.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPPRPCH- 3-
UPD MPPRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Update MP Permanent Patch
This task is used to update one or more permanent patches on disk,
whereby they are implicitly activated in memory on all active
MP platforms.
Input format

[ [
[ UPD MPPRPCH : Patch ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs which should be
updated on the platform.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 UPD MPPRPCH- 1-
DISP MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE PROJECT DESCRIPTION DATA
This command displays project dependent data concerning:
- numbering scheme,
- call data thresholds and
- other project dependent data.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MPRDDAT ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPRDDAT- 1-
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER MOBILE PROJECT DESCRIPTION DATA
This command enters project dependent data concerning:
- numbering scheme,
- call data thresholds and
- other project dependent data.
Note:- Existing values will be superseded by entering new parameter values
(exception: national supplementary service data).
- The length of the Msisdn (CC-NDC-SN) must not exceed 15 digits.
- Cancellation of a national supplementary service is not allowed,
if subscribers with provision for this national supplementary
service already exist.
- Modification of the length of msc external location area code
is not allowed, if external lacods already exist.
- The length of the Msisdn of a wll subscriber (CC-LAC-SN) must
not exceed 16 digits.
- The length of the Imsi (MCC-MNC-MSIN) must now be checked and
must not exceed 15 digits.
- The parameters that can only be entered at installation
are marked with "I" within the DISP MPRDDAT display mask.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR MPRDDAT : <MCC= ,MNC= ,CC= ,NDC= ,PSTNLAC= ,NATPREF= [
[ [
[ ,INATPREF= ,EMERGNO= ,MSCLACOD= ,HLRLNGT= [
[ [
[ ,MSINLNGT= ,SNLNGT= ,RCTIMCFW= ,RCTIMCBC= [
[ [
[ ,PROJECT= ,MAXCF= ,MSRNFORM= ,HONFORM= [
[ [
[ ,ORIGCFW= ,ORIGHO= ,ORIGRO= ,ORIGLOOP= [
[ [
[ ,ORIGUSSD= ,ORIGCCBS= ,ORIG1IN= ,ORIGVS= [
[ [
[ ,EMRGID= ,SYSIND= ,MYTYP= ,MARKETID= [
[ [
[ ,SWITCHNB= ,NATSSERV= ,IWDEDPAD= ,CIPHERAL= [
[ [
[ ,EFTN= ,TS61PRIO= ,TS61SPCH= ,BALWGMSC= [
[ [
[ ,SCMMODEF= ,SYSTEMDN= ,DFLTCAC= ,PICLEN= [
[ [
[ ,LRNORIG1= ,ORIGLATA= ,SERVIND= ,APSNAME= [
[ [
[ ,APPRNUM= ,MAXNORIG= ,MAXALLMS= ,EXTEINFO= [
[ [
[ ,SCMMTDEF= ,MAXPFXCH= ,DPREMLPP= ,NPTTID= [
[ [
[ ,NPPFX= ,MNHCOD= ,MSCID= ,MSCPFX= ,NANAT= [
[ [
[ ,TIMEZONE= ,CACPFX= ,NUMPRFD= ,PROFAIL= [
[ [
[ ,PASSBI= ,RAC= ,UCIPHALG= ,UINTEALG= ,LCSOPT= [
[ [
[ ,AMF= ,ORIGOR= ,ORIGATM= ,COMMODPR= [
[ [
[ ,BEOGCDIR=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MCC MOBILE COUNTRY CODE
This parameter specifies the Mobile Country Code according to the
CCITT Recommendation E.212.
The Mobile Country Code is part of the International Mobile Subscriber
Identity (IMSI).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 1+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3 digit decimal number
MNC MOBILE NETWORK CODE
This parameter specifies the Mobile Network Code according to the
CCITT Recommendation E.212.
The Mobile Network Code is part of the International Mobile Subscriber
Identity (IMSI).
Note: * means no Mobile Network Code.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
CC COUNTRY CODE
This parameter specifies the Country Code according to the CCITT Re-
commendation E.163.
The Country Code is part of the Mobile Station International ISDN
Number (MSISDN).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
NDC NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE(S)
This parameter specifies the National Destination Code according to
the CCITT Recommendation E.164.
The National Destination Code is part of the Mobile Station Inter-
national ISDN Number (MSISDN).
Up to thirty-nine additional National Destination Codes can be entered
to allow the creation of MSISDNs with different NDCs.
In this case, the first NDC indicates the home PLMN NDC.
Note: - * means no National Destination Code.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
PSTNLAC PSTN LOCAL AREA CODE(S)
This parameter specifies the PSTN Local Area Code.
The PSTN Local Area Code is part of the Mobile Station Inter-
national ISDN Number (MSISDN) of a WLL subscriber.
Up to 63 additional PSTN Local Area Codes can be entered to
allow the creation of WLL subscribers MSISDNs with different
LACs.
The feature MULTLAC should be released for input of multiple PSTNLACs.
If you have to enter more then 35 PSTN Local Area Codes then it
is necessary to use a command file !!!
Note: * means no PSTN Local Area Code.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...5 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NATPREF NATIONAL PREFIX
This parameter specifies the National Prefix according to CCITT Re-
commendation E.163
Note: * means no National Prefix.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 2+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
INATPREF INTERNATIONAL PREFIX(ES)
This parameter specifies the International Prefix according to CCITT
Recommendation E.163.
Up to seven additional International Prefixes can be entered.
The first International Prefix indicates the default International
prefix.
The feat. MULINTPR should be released for input multiple INATPREFs.
Note: * means no International Prefix.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...3 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
EMERGNO EMERGENCY NUMBER
This parameter specifies an Emergency Number that replaces the default
GSM Emergency Number.
The default GSM Emergency Number is 112.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
MSCLACOD LENGTH OF MSC EXTERNAL LACOD
This parameter specifies the length of the MSC external Location Area
Code.
This value is used when administrating Location Areas of foreign MSC
areas:
If the value is 16 (bits), it denotes an unstructered Location Area
Code. Any other value between 1 and 15 describes the structered case,
where the supplement to 16 is the value to be specified in this pa-
pameter.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...16, range of decimal numbers
HLRLNGT HLRID LENGTH
This parameter specifies the length of the HLR identification number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3, range of decimal numbers
MSINLNGT MSIN LENGTH
This parameter specifies the length of the Mobile Subscriber Identifi-
cation Number (MSIN).
The MSIN is part of the International Mobile Subscriber Identity
(IMSI).
The command is rejected if the length of the IMSI (MCC+MNC+MSIN)
exceeds 15 digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5...12, range of decimal numbers
SNLNGT SN LENGTH
This parameter specifies the length of the Subscriber Number (SN).
The SN is part of the Mobile Station International ISDN Number
(MSISDN).
The SN may be of fixed or variable length. If the length of the SN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 3+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
is variable, the value specifies the maximum number of digits.
The command is rejected if the length of the MSISDN (CC+NDC+SN) ex-
ceeds 15 digits.
The command is also rejected if the length of the WLL Subscribers
MSISDN (CC+LAC+SN) exceeds 16 digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: LENGTH=
4...16, range of decimal numbers
b: FORMAT
FIX SN WITH FIXED LENGTH
VAR SN WITH VARIABLE LENGTH
RCTIMCFW NO REPLY COND.FOR CALL FORWARD
This parameter specifies the default value (in seconds) for the
No Reply Condition Timer for call forwarding.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
RCTIMCBC NO REPLY COND.FOR CALL BACK
This parameter specifies the default value (in seconds) for the
No Reply Condition Timer for call back.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
5,10,15,20,25,30, range of decimal numbers
PROJECT PROJECT IDENTIFIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOP NO PROJECT IDENTIFIER
D2M D2 MANNESMANN/GERMANY
DTC DETECON/GERMANY
FRR SFR/FRANCE
GB1 CELLNET/GREAT BRITAIN
MCH MOBILE SHANGHAI/GUANG./CHINA
MFI MOBILE RADIOLINJA/FINLAND
MKA MOBILE PTT/CAMEROON
MLU MOBILE PTT/LUXEMBOURG
MPH MOBILE PILTEL/PHILIPPINES
MPO MOBILE TMN/PORTUGAL
MRS MOBILE TELKOM/SOUTH AFRICA
MTR MOBILE SIMKO/TURKEY
NOR NETCOM/NORWAY
OES OEPTV/AUSTRIA
RTT RTT/BELGIUM
SWE COMVIQ/SWEDEN
MQA MOBILE QUATAR
MSA MOBILE UMBRELLA/SAUDI ARABIA
MBL MOBILE BASQUE PROVINCES
MIN MOBILE INDONESIA
MKU MOBILE KUWAIT
MMA MOBILE MOROCCO
MML MOBILE MALAYSIA
MMO MOBILE MOSCOW
MPK MOBILE PAKISTAN
MRO MOBILE ROSTOV
MSP MOBILE SPAIN
MTH MOBILE THAILAND
MUS MOBILE USA
MVE MOBILE UNITED ARABIAN EMIRATES
IRI MOBILE IRIDIUM
MAXCF MAX. TIMES OF CALL FORWARDINGS
This parameter specifies the maximum times a call can be forwarded.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 4+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5, range of decimal numbers
MSRNFORM MSRN FORMAT
This parameter specifies whether the VLR has to send the Mobile
Station Roaming Number (MSRN) for national roamers in the natio-
nal (without Country Code) or the international format (with
Country Code) format to the HLR.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NAT NATIONAL FORMAT
INAT INTERNATIONAL FORMAT
HONFORM HANDOVER NUMBER FORMAT
This parameter specifies whether the VLR has to send the Handover
Number (HON) in the national (without Country Code) or the inter-
national format (with Country Code) to the MSC.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NAT NATIONAL FORMAT
INAT INTERNATIONAL FORMAT
ORIGCFW ORIG. MARK FOR CALL FORW.
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for call forwarding.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGHO ORIG. MARK FOR HANDOVER
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for handover.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGRO ORIG. MARK FOR ROAMING
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for roaming.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGLOOP ORIG. MARK FOR LOOP LTG
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for loop LTG in case of multiple SCP dialogue in IN.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGUSSD ORIG. MARK FOR USSD
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for USSD (Unstructured Supplementary Service Data).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 5+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGCCBS ORIG. MARK FOR CCBS
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for call completion to busy subscribers.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIG1IN ORIG. MARK FOR IN
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for call completion to IN.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGVS ORIG. MARK FOR VGCS/VBS
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for Voice Group Call Service (VGCS) and Voice Broadcast Service
(VBS) calls.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
EMRGID EMERGENCY CALL IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the mode of subscriber identification in case
of emergency call without SIMCARD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
VLRISD IDENTIFICATION BY VLRISD
IMEI IDENTIFICATION BY IMEI
SYSIND SYSTEM IDENTIFIER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GSM GSM SYSTEM
MYTYP SYSTEM MY TYPE
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NOT NOT USED
EDS EDS
AST ASTRONET
ATT AT&T
ERI ERICSSON
GTE GTE
MOT MOTOROLA
NEC NEC
NTI NTI
NOV NOVATEL
PLE PLEXSYS
DEC DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP
INE INET
BEL BELLCORE
ALC ALCATEL-SEL
TAN TANDEM
QUA QUALCOMM
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 6+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALD ALDISCON
CEL CELCORE
TEL TELOS
STA STANLITE
COS CORAL SYSTEMS
SAC SYNACOM
DSC DSC
MCI MCI
NEW NEWNET
SEM SEMA GROUP TELECOMS
LIC LG INFO AND COMMUNICATIONS
CBS CBIS
SIE SIEMENS
SAM SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
REA READYCOM
MARKETID MARKET IDENTIFIER
This parameter specifies market identifier.
Note: insert 2 bytes as an integer.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...65635, range of decimal numbers
SWITCHNB SWITCH NUMBER
This parameter specifies switch number.
Note: insert 1 byte as an integer.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...255, range of decimal numbers
NATSSERV NATIONAL SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies the national defined supplementary services.
It is not allowed to assign several MAP codes to the same national
defined supplementary service.
It is not allowed to assign the same MAP code to several national
defined supplementary services.
Notes:- To delete an existing national supplementary service use the
SCI code 0.
- To delete an existing SCI code enter NATSSERV and MAP code
without SCI code.
- To modify an existing SCI code enter NATSSERV and MAP code
without the new SCI code.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b[-c]
a: NAME
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
CALLBACK CALL BACK
CALLTRAN CALL TRANSFER
INSCMMOC IN SERVICE CLASS MARK FOR MOC
INSCMMTC IN SERVICE CLASS MARK FOR MTC
USERSIG1 USER TO USER SIGNAL SERVICE 1
NATCCBS COMPLETION CALLS TO BUSY SUB
NATSS01 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 01
NATSS02 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 02
NATSS03 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 03
NATSS04 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 04
NATSS05 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 05
NATSS06 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 06
NATSS07 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 07
NATSS08 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 08
NATSS09 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 09
NATSS10 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 10
NATSS11 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 11
NATSS12 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 12
NATSS13 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 13
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 7+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NATSS14 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 14
NATSS15 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 15
FOLLOWME FOLLOW ME NAT SUPPL SERVICE
FROUT FORCED ROUT NAT SUPPL SERVICE
b: MAP CODE=
241...255, range of decimal numbers
c: SCI CODE=
0...999, range of decimal numbers
Note: To delete an existing national supplementary service use
the value 0.
IWDEDPAD INTERWORKING WITH DEDI. PAD
This parameter specifies the transfer capability to be signaled from
MSC towards the dedicated PAD.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
AUDIO 3.1 KHZ AUDIO EX PLMN
UDI UNRESTRICTED DIGITAL
CIPHERAL NETWORK CIPHERING ALGORITHM
This parameter specifies the ciphering algorithm supported by the
network.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
A51A50 NETWORK WITH A5/1 & A5/0 ALGO.
Network with A5/1 ciphering algorithm.
Unencrypted mode (A5/0) is allowed (for mobile
stations, which are not able to handle the ci-
phering algorithm A5/1).
A51 NETWORK WITH A5/1 ALGORITHM
Network with A5/1 ciphering algorithm.
Unencrypted mode (A5/0) is not allowed (for mobile
stations, which are not able to handle the cipher-
ing algorithm A5/1).
A52A50 NETWORK WITH A5/2 & A5/0 ALGO.
Network with A5/2 ciphering algorithm.
Unencrypted mode (A5/0) is allowed (for mobile
stations, which are not able to handle the ci-
phering algorithm A5/2).
A52 NETWORK WITH A5/2 ALGORITHM
Network with A5/2 ciphering algorithm.
Unencrypted mode (A5/0) is not allowed (for mobile
stations, which are not able to handle the cipher-
ing algorithm A5/2).
A5251A50 NETWORK WITH A5/2,A5/1,A5/0 A.
A5251 NETWORK WITH A5/2 & A5/1 ALGO.
EFTN EXTEND FORWARD TO NO WITH NDC
This parameter specifies if the Forwarded To Number (FTN) must be
extended with the National Destination Code (NDC) in order to get the
international format of FTN.
This must be done in the HLR if the subscriber dials a FTN without
NDC in own PLMN (format: unknown).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES FTN WITHOUT NDC ALLOWED
NO FTN WITHOUT NDC NOT ALLOWED
TS61PRIO TELESERVICE 61 PRIORITY
This parameter specifies the network priority for facsimile teleser-
vices.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 8+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES TELESERVICE 61 IS PREFERRED
NO TELESERVICE 61 IS NOT PREF.
TS61SPCH TELESERVICE 61 SPEECH FIRST
This parameter specifies whether the facsimile teleservices starts
with speech first or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES TELESERVICE 61 SPEECH FIRST
NO TELESERVICE 61 FAX FIRST
BALWGMSC CASE B HANDLING ALWAYS IN GMSC
This parameter specifies if the GMSC always handles the case A/B
conversion.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES CASE B ALWAYS HANDLED IN GMSC
NO CASE B NOT ALWAYS HANDLED GMSC
SCMMODEF SERVICE CLASS MARK MOC DEFAULT
This parameter specifies the default Service Class Mark for
a mobile originating call.
Notes: To delete the specified value,
use the code 00000.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
SYSTEMDN SYSTEM DIRECTORY NUMBER
This parameter specifies the System directory number for
a mobile originating call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
DFLTCAC DEFAULT CARRIER ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the default carrier
access code.
Only the relevant digits must be entered for the code
No special preceding characters are required
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
PICLEN PIC LENGTH MIN AND MAX
This parameter specifies the minimum and maximum length of the field
PIC.
The command is rejected if the minimum is bigger then the maximum,
it is allowed that they are equal.
If the the value of the minimum and maximum are both equal to zero
then no PIC can be inserted.
For PCS1900 ONLY the following combinations of minimum and maximum
should be used : 0-0 , 3-3, 3-4 and 4-4 !!!!!
For GSM worldmarket, any combination is allowed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 9+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: MINIMUM=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
b: MAXIMUM=
0...4, range of decimal numbers
LRNORIG1 LRN ORIGINATING MARK
This parameter is used for translating routing number
received from SCP/Trk. If LRNORIG=0 then ORIG1 that was
previously used for the call will be used to translate
the number received from LRN-SCP/Trk.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGLATA ORIGINATING LATA
This parameter specifies the originating local acess
transport area.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3 digit decimal number
SERVIND SERVICE INDICATOR
The service indicator is used for service number evaluation
and is administrable in the project database. Administration
of service indicator for subscriber related routing.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
APSNAME APS-NAME
Fill in APS-name with MML command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
APPRNUM APS APPROVAL NUMBER
Fill in APS approval number with MML command.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...20 characters from the
text string character set, enclosed in "
MAXNORIG MAX NUMBER OF ORIGINS
This parameter specifies maximal number of origins.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...100, range of decimal numbers
MAXALLMS MAX. ALLOC. MSRNS PER SUBSCR
This parameter specifies the maximum number of msrns each subscriber
can allocate.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...100, range of decimal numbers
EXTEINFO EXTENDED INFO
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 10+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OTWD WEEKDAY
OTHH HOLIDAY HALF
OTHO HOLIDAY FULL
OTHN HOLIDAY NATIONAL
OTWH WEEKEND HALF
OTWF WEEKEND FULL
SCMMTDEF SERVICE CLASS MARK MTC DEFAULT
This parameter specifies the default Service Class Mark for
a mobile terminating call.
Notes: To delete the specified value,
use the code 00000.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MAXPFXCH MAX. NUMBER OF PREFIX CHANNELS
This parameter specifies the maximum number of prefix channels,
which can be set to 1 (default) or 2.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...2, range of decimal numbers
DPREMLPP DEFAULT PRIORITY LEVEL EMLPP
This parameter specifies the default priority level eMLPP,
which can be given a value between 0 and 15 (default 2).
0 = No priority.
1 = eMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 4.
2 = eMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 3.
3 = eMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 2.
4 = eMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 1.
5 = eMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL 0.
6 = eMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL B.
7 = eMLPP PRIORITY LEVEL A.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...15, range of decimal numbers
NPTTID NUM PORT TRANSLATION TYPE ID
This parameter specifies the translation
identification, which should be used for
the message SEND_ROUTING_INFO for the
interrogation to the HLR.
This TTID is used for every SRI when NP
is released.
If the parameter is not entered, then
the same TTID value as for interrogation
without NP query is used (this is UNKNOWN).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
UNKNOWN TRANSLATION TYPE UNKNOWN
IMSI INT. MOBILE SUB. IDENTITY
CCV CREDIT CARD VERIFICATION
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE
INDD IN DIALED DIGITS
INCGPA IN CALLING PARTY ADDRESS
INPPDD IN PREFIX PLUS DIALED DIGITS
IEESS ISDN ENDTOEND SUPP.SERV.
ITCC INT.TELECOMM.CHARGING CARD
MSCSMLC MSC TO SMLC ROUTING
MSCGMLC MSC TO GMLC ROUTING
LMUSMLC LOCATION MEAS UNIT TO SMLC
TT1 TRANSLATION TYPE 1
TT2 TRANSLATION TYPE 2
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 11+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TT3 TRANSLATION TYPE 3
TT4 TRANSLATION TYPE 4
TT5 TRANSLATION TYPE 5
TT6 TRANSLATION TYPE 6
TT7 TRANSLATION TYPE 7
TT8 TRANSLATION TYPE 8
TT9 TRANSLATION TYPE 9
TT10 TRANSLATION TYPE 10
TT11 TRANSLATION TYPE 11
TT12 TRANSLATION TYPE 12
TT13 TRANSLATION TYPE 13
TT14 TRANSLATION TYPE 14
TT15 TRANSLATION TYPE 15
TT16 TRANSLATION TYPE 16
TT17 TRANSLATION TYPE 17
TT18 TRANSLATION TYPE 18
TT19 TRANSLATION TYPE 19
TT20 TRANSLATION TYPE 20
TT21 TRANSLATION TYPE 21
TT22 TRANSLATION TYPE 22
TT23 TRANSLATION TYPE 23
TT24 TRANSLATION TYPE 24
TT25 TRANSLATION TYPE 25
TT26 TRANSLATION TYPE 26
TT27 TRANSLATION TYPE 27
TT28 TRANSLATION TYPE 28
TT29 TRANSLATION TYPE 29
TT30 TRANSLATION TYPE 30
TT31 TRANSLATION TYPE 31
TT32 TRANSLATION TYPE 32
TT33 TRANSLATION TYPE 33
TT34 TRANSLATION TYPE 34
TT35 TRANSLATION TYPE 35
TT36 TRANSLATION TYPE 36
TT37 TRANSLATION TYPE 37
TT38 TRANSLATION TYPE 38
TT39 TRANSLATION TYPE 39
TT40 TRANSLATION TYPE 40
TT41 TRANSLATION TYPE 41
TT42 TRANSLATION TYPE 42
TT43 TRANSLATION TYPE 43
TT44 TRANSLATION TYPE 44
TT45 TRANSLATION TYPE 45
TT46 TRANSLATION TYPE 46
TT47 TRANSLATION TYPE 47
TT48 TRANSLATION TYPE 48
TT49 TRANSLATION TYPE 49
TT50 TRANSLATION TYPE 50
TT51 TRANSLATION TYPE 51
TT52 TRANSLATION TYPE 52
TT53 TRANSLATION TYPE 53
TT54 TRANSLATION TYPE 54
TT55 TRANSLATION TYPE 55
TT56 TRANSLATION TYPE 56
TT57 TRANSLATION TYPE 57
TT58 TRANSLATION TYPE 58
TT59 TRANSLATION TYPE 59
TT60 TRANSLATION TYPE 60
TT61 TRANSLATION TYPE 61
TT62 TRANSLATION TYPE 62
TT63 TRANSLATION TYPE 63
TT64 TRANSLATION TYPE 64
TT65 TRANSLATION TYPE 65
TT66 TRANSLATION TYPE 66
TT67 TRANSLATION TYPE 67
TT68 TRANSLATION TYPE 68
TT69 TRANSLATION TYPE 69
TT70 TRANSLATION TYPE 70
TT71 TRANSLATION TYPE 71
TT72 TRANSLATION TYPE 72
TT73 TRANSLATION TYPE 73
TT74 TRANSLATION TYPE 74
TT75 TRANSLATION TYPE 75
TT76 TRANSLATION TYPE 76
TT77 TRANSLATION TYPE 77
TT78 TRANSLATION TYPE 78
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 12+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TT79 TRANSLATION TYPE 79
TT80 TRANSLATION TYPE 80
TT81 TRANSLATION TYPE 81
TT82 TRANSLATION TYPE 82
TT83 TRANSLATION TYPE 83
TT84 TRANSLATION TYPE 84
TT85 TRANSLATION TYPE 85
TT86 TRANSLATION TYPE 86
TT87 TRANSLATION TYPE 87
TT88 TRANSLATION TYPE 88
TT89 TRANSLATION TYPE 89
TT90 TRANSLATION TYPE 90
TT91 TRANSLATION TYPE 91
TT92 TRANSLATION TYPE 92
TT93 TRANSLATION TYPE 93
TT94 TRANSLATION TYPE 94
TT95 TRANSLATION TYPE 95
TT96 TRANSLATION TYPE 96
TT97 TRANSLATION TYPE 97
TT98 TRANSLATION TYPE 98
TT99 TRANSLATION TYPE 99
TT100 TRANSLATION TYPE 100
TT101 TRANSLATION TYPE 101
TT102 TRANSLATION TYPE 102
TT103 TRANSLATION TYPE 103
TT104 TRANSLATION TYPE 104
TT105 TRANSLATION TYPE 105
TT106 TRANSLATION TYPE 106
TT107 TRANSLATION TYPE 107
TT108 TRANSLATION TYPE 108
TT109 TRANSLATION TYPE 109
TT110 TRANSLATION TYPE 110
TT111 TRANSLATION TYPE 111
TT112 TRANSLATION TYPE 112
TT113 TRANSLATION TYPE 113
TT114 TRANSLATION TYPE 114
TT115 TRANSLATION TYPE 115
TT116 TRANSLATION TYPE 116
NPPFX NUMBER PORTABILITY PREFIX
This parameter specifies the Number Portability Prefix.
This code is prefixed in front of the called party address
of the global title for the message SEND_ROUTING_INFO for
the interrogation to the HLR.
This prefix is used for every SRI when NP is released.
If the parameter is not entered, then no digits are
prefixed in front of the MSISDN.
Notes: To delete the specified value,
use the code 00000.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MNHCOD MOBILE NUMBER HANDLING
This parameter specifies the Mobile Number Handling Code.
There are four values, each up to ten digits, possible.
These value are default 0.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...10 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
MSCID MSC IDENTIFICATION
This parameter specifies the MSC Identification, which
has between six and fifteen digits.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 13+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
6...15 digit decimal number
MSCPFX MSC PREFIX
This parameter specifies the MSC Prefix.
There are ten values, each up to four digits, possible.
These value are default 0.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NANAT NATURE OF ADDRESS INDICATOR
This parameter specifies the Nature of Address Indicator.
There are two values which can vary between 0 and 127.
The default value is 0.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...127, range of decimal numbers
TIMEZONE TIME_ZONE
This parameter indicates the difference, expressed in quarters
of an hour, between the local time and the GMT.
TIMEZONE can vary between 48-POS and 48-NEG.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: QUARTERS=
0...48, range of decimal numbers
b: SIGN
POS POSITIVE TIME DIFFERENCE
NEG NEGATIVE TIME DIFFERENCE
CACPFX CARRIER ACCESS CODE PREFIX
This parameter specifies the common carrier access code prefix.
Up to five hexadecimal digits are allowed for this prefix.
Notes:
- To delete the specified value, use the code 00000.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...5 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
NUMPRFD PREFIX DIGITS TO CUT FOR CCBS
This parameter specifies the number of prefix digits to be cut
for CCBS in digit translation, due to the following reason:
using Subscriber Dependent Digit Processing & Feature Control
Administration (SDDPFC), sometimes prefix digits are added for
routing purpose, e.g. length depending routing for France. To
derive a normal dialable number, a number of digits have to be cut.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8, range of decimal numbers
PROFAIL PROCESSING FAILURE FOR VLR UPD
This parameter specifies whether hlrAcProcessingFailure message
VLR not updated is sent to the OS platform or not (HLR Evolution):
PROFAIL=CONF : not sent
PROFAIL=ERR : sent
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 14+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
CONF VLR NOT UPDATED MESS. NOT SENT
ERR VLR NOT UPDATED MESSAGE SENT
PASSBI PASSWORD IN BARRING INFO
This parameter specifies whether the password component of barring
info is present or not in the display of subscriber info
(HLR Evolution).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DISP DISPLAY PASSWORD
NODISP NOT DISPLAY PASSWORD
RAC RAILWAY ACCESS CODE
This parameter specifies the value of the railway access code. It
is used by the Follow Me service in case of functional addressing.
Note: To delete the specified value, use the code 000.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3 digit decimal number
UCIPHALG UMTS CIPHERING ALGORITHM
This parameter specifies the UMTS ciphering algorithm supported by
the network.
Note: the value UEA0 is allocated by default.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
UEANULL ALL UEA VALUES TO NULL
UEA0 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA0
UEA1 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA1
UEA2 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA2
UEA3 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA3
UEA4 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA4
UEA5 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA5
UEA6 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA6
UEA7 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA7
UEA8 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA8
UEA9 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA9
UEA10 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA10
UEA11 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA11
UEA12 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA12
UEA13 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA13
UEA14 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA14
UEA15 CIPHERING PARAMETER UEA15
UINTEALG UMTS INTEGRITY ALGORITHM
This parameter specifies the UMTS integrity algorithm supported by
the network.
Note: the value UIA1 is allocated by default.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
UIANULL ALL UIA VALUES TO NULL
UIA1 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA1
UIA2 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA2
UIA3 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA3
UIA4 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA4
UIA5 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA5
UIA6 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA6
UIA7 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA7
UIA8 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA8
UIA9 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA9
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 15+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
UIA10 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA10
UIA11 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA11
UIA12 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA12
UIA13 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA13
UIA14 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA14
UIA15 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA15
UIA16 INTEGRITY PARAMETER UIA16
LCSOPT LCS PLMN/OFFICE OPTIONS
This parameter specifies the Location Services options.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
LCSNULL ALL LCSOPT VALUES TO NULL
LCSOVR LCS OVERRIDE INDICATOR
This value allows the use of the LCS Override
indicator.
LINTSC LAWFUL INTERCEPT LCS
If this value is set, a Lawful Interception LCS
client served by a GMLC in the same country is
allowed to retrieve the mobile stations location.
EMISC EMERG. SERV. IN SAME COUNTRY
If this value is set, an emergency services LCS
client served by a GMLC in the same country is
allowed to retrieve the mobile stations location.
EMSCCE EMERG. SERV. WHILE CALL ESTAB.
If this value is set, an emergency services LCS
client served by a GMLC in the same country is
allowed to retrieve the mobile stations location
only while an emergency call is established.
OPRISP OPERATOR LCS IN SAME PLMN
If this value is set, a PLMN operator LCS client
served by a GMLC in the same PLMN is allowed to
retrieve the mobile stations location.
MTLRHS MT-LR BILL REC. FOR HOME SUB.
This value enables generation of billing records
for home subscribers in case of mobile
terminating location request.
MTLRRS MT-LR BILL REC. FOR ROAM. SUB.
This value enables generation of billing records
for roaming subscribers in case of mobile
terminating location request.
MTLRBRU MT-LR UNSUCC. LCS BILL REC.
This value enables generation of billing records
for unsuccessful location services in case of
mobile terminating location request.
MTLRBRS MT-LR SUCCESS. LCS BILL REC.
This value enables generation of billing records
for successful location services in case of
mobile terminating location request.
LOCBR STORAGE SUB LOC. IN BILL REC.
This value allows the storage of a subscribers
location in Billing Records.
IMSCHO LCS AFTER INTER-MSC HANDOVER
This value allows to perform LCS after an
Inter-MSC Handover.
MOLRHS GEN. MO-LR BILL. REC. HOME SUB
This value enables generation of billing records
for home subscribers in case of mobile originating
location request.
MOLRRS GEN. MO-LR BR ROAMING SUB.
This value enables generation of billing records
for roaming subscribers in case of mobile
originating location request.
MOLRBRU GEN. MO-LR UNSUC. LOC. SERV.BR
This value enables generation of billing records
for unsuccessful location services in case of
mobile originating location request.
MOLRBRS GEN. MO-LR SUCC. LOC. SERV.BR
This value enables generation of billing records
for successful location services in case of mobile
originating location request.
NILRHS GEN. NI-LR BILL. REC. HOME SUB
This value enables generation of billing records
for home subscribers in case of network induced
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 16+
ENTR MPRDDAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
location request.
NILRRS GEN. NI-LR BR ROAMING SUB.
This value enables generation of billing records
for roaming subscribers in case of network induced
location request.
NILRBRU GEN. NI-LR UNSUC. LOC. SERV.BR
This value enables generation of billing records
for unsuccessful location services in case of
network induced location request.
NILRBRS GEN. NI-LR SUCC. LOC. SERV. BR
This value enables generation of billing records
for successful location services in case of
network induced location request.
AMF AUTHENTICATION MANAG. FIELD
This parameter specifies the authentication management field (AMF) in
AUTN of authentication vector.
AMF is used in the AC entity during calculation of authentication
vectors for UMTS subscribers.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...FFFF, range of hexadecimal numbers
ORIGOR ORIG. MARK FOR OPTIMAL ROUTING
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for Optimal Routing.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
ORIGATM ORIG. MARK FOR ATM
This parameter specifies the reserved originating mark 1 value
for ATM application.
Note: 0 means no special originating mark.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3840, range of decimal numbers
COMMODPR COMPRESSED MODE PRE-SELECTED
This parameter specifies whether the compressed AMR mode is
pre-selected for the ATM leg.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
YES COMP. AMR MODE PRE-SELECTED
NO COMP.AMR MODE NOT PRE-SELECTED
BEOGCDIR BEARER ESTABLISH. OG CALLS DIR
This parameter specifies the direction, forward or backward, of
the Bearer Establishment of outgoing calls, for all BICC Trunk
Groups of the complete switch (for incoming calls, the remote
switch will select the direction of the Bearer Establishment).
The value NODIR can be entered in order to set back the
parameter with its neutral initial value.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NODIR NO DIRECTION
FORWARD FORWARD DIRECTION
BACKWARD BACKWARD DIRECTION
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPRDDAT- 17-
ACT MPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate MP Transient Patch
This task is used to activate one or more transient patches in
the memory of one MP platform.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT MPTRPCH : MP= ,Patch ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter specifies the MP platform on which the patch
should be activated.
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs which should be
activated on the platform.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MPTRPCH- 1-
CAN MPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MP Transient Patch
This task is used to cancel one or more transient patches from
the patch administration of one MP platform.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MPTRPCH : MP= ,Patch ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter specifies the MP platform on which the patch
should be canceled.
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs which should be
cancelled from the platform.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MPTRPCH- 1-
DACT MPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Deactivate MP Transient Patch
This task is used to deactivate one or more transient patches in
the memory of one MP platform.
Input format

[ [
[ DACT MPTRPCH : MP= ,Patch ID= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter specifies the MP platform on which the patch
should be deactivated.
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs which should be
deactivated on a specific platform.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DACT MPTRPCH- 1-
DISP MPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MP Transient Patch
This task displays patch data kept in the patch administration
on the individual platform and patch states concerning transient patches
on the specified MP platform.
The patch selection can be done either by patch identifier(s) or by
logical address ranges affected by the patches.
If Patch ID and Patch address
are not specified all patch IDs are displayed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MPTRPCH : MP= [,Patch ID=] [,Patch address=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter specifies the MP platform those patch
information should be displayed.
Patch ID
This parameter specifies up to 4 patch IDs whose information
should be displayed.
The patch ID is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and
a patch name (1 to 16 characters).
Example:
Capsule Name: C00OSPAC (Upper or lower case characters)
Patch Name: A1234L0Z.0001.0 (Only upper case characters)
Patch Name is allowed to contain wildcards:
* for a string of undefined length
? for a single character
Patch address
This parameter represents an interval in which the search
for patches will be performed.
It consists of a capsule name, and optional a beginn address
and a end address within the capsule.
The begin and end address can be specified either in
hexadecimal form as an offset from capsule begin or symbolically.
e.g.: Begin address = address, End address = address or
Begin address = address, End address = +distance
where address may have one of the following structures:
spuname.modname+offset+distance, or
spuname.modname.symbol+offset+distance, or
label+offset+distance, or
offset+distance, where
capname <text string> = 8 char.,
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset <hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
The end address may be omitted. If it is omitted in the case
of capsule or module the entire address range of the unit
is scanned. If it is omitted in the case of symbol or offset
the search range is that byte only.
Example: C00OSPAC.BBPTBE0C.PAGYCA1T+H0A
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPTRPCH- 1+
DISP MPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MPTRPCH- 2-
ENTR MPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Enter MP Transient Patch
This task is used to enter a Transient Patch into the patch
administration on a MP platform.
With each ENTR MPTRPCH task the subpatch type Replace Subpatches
can be entered.
The subpatch type can be entered in the form of subpatches belonging
to a specified Patch ID.
The completeness of the subpatches is indicated by means of
parameter Total subpatch number.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR MPTRPCH : MP= ,Patch ID= [,Replace address=] [
[ [
[ [,Total subpatch number=] [,New content=] [
[ [
[ [,Old content=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MP
This parameter specifies the MP platform where the patch should
be entered.
Patch ID
This parameter specifies the unambiguous Patch ID.
It is defined by the capsule name (8 characters) and a
patch name (1 to 16 characters).
Whenever a subpatch is entered for a certain patch the
Patch ID must be identical.
Example:
Capsule Name: C00OSPAC (Upper or lower case characters)
Patch Name: A1234L0Z.0001.0 (Only upper case characters)
Replace address
This parameter provides the replace subpatch address.
The address format is a replacement address.
e.g.: spuname.modname.symbol+distance or
offset+distance or
label+distance, where
label L<text string> = 8 char.,
spuname <text string> = 8 char.,
modname <text string> = 8 char. (or 13 if the
version is included),
symbol <text string> <= 8 char.,
offset H<hexadecimal string> <= 8 hex signs,
distance disitem+disitem ..+disitem..,
disitem spuname.modname.symbol or offset
Example: BBPTBE0C.PAGBPA2T+H0A
Total subpatch number
This parameter represents the total number of subpatches
belonging to a patch name. A patch must be closed by a final
ENTER MPTRPCH task with the parameters Patch ID and
Total subpatch number, whereby the latter
one corresponds to the number of patches, entered under the
same ID.
New content
This parameter represents the new instruction code to be
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPTRPCH- 1+
ENTR MPTRPCH
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
executed instead of the old instruction code which may be
represented by parameter Old content.
Old content
This parameter represents the old instruction code to be
checked for security reasons.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MPTRPCH- 2-
ACT MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Activate MTP Route Verification Test
This task activates MTP route verif.test.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are:
- Net ID or Net name
- DPC to be tested
- Threshold
- Trace requested
The ACT (START) command will be rejected if
- the attribute Admin. state is not UNLOCKED.
- the operational state is disabled
- the usage state is busy
- an MRVT for the test destination given in the action parameters is
already in progress
The reason for the rejection will be returned to the user.
The MRVT procedure sends an MRVT message for each signaling
route which is contained in the MTP routing tables to reach the test
destination. The destination (DPC) of each of these messages is the
adjacent signaling point within the particular route under test.
For each MRVT message a corresponding MRVA message is expected.
When the MRVT procedure is initiated, a timer T1 is started. The
value of timer T1 depends on the value of the attribute Max.perf.time MRVT
msg. and the value of threshold given in the parameters (2.4/Q.753).
When all MRVA messages expected have been received or when T1 expires,
the test is complete and the result will be returned to the management
process in the action reply.
Input format

[ [
[ ACT MRVT : [Net ID=] [,Net name=] ,DPC to be tested= ,Threshold= [
[ [
[ ,Trace requested= [,Information request=] [
[ [
[ [,Return unknown parameter=] [,Direct route check=] [
[ [
[ [,Test initiator=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling
point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
DPC to be tested
This parameter represents the own point code of a certain
Signaling point.
Depending on the network configuration, the format
of the point code may consits of 1 up to 4 integer
components (A,B,C,D).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MRVT- 1+
ACT MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E.g.: 4673 A (one component),
122-15 A-B (two components),
255-34-0 A-B-C (three components),
10-2-15-7 A-B-C-D (four components).
The highest value for each integer component is
defined by the number of bits of that component.
E.g.: bit structure highest values
(14) 16383
(7-7) 127-127
(8-8-8) 255-255-255
(4-3-4-3) 15-7-15-7
The bit structure is specified by the network
configuration. In ANSI networks the only allowed
bit structure is (8-8-8).
Notes: The destination point codes contained in the
same network must have the same point code
format.
Input format: bit14 (0...16383)
bit24 (0...16777215)
bit24Str.network (0...255)
bit24Str.cluster (0...255)
bit24Str.member (0...255)
Threshold
The threshold indicates the maximum allowed number of
signalling points crossed including the initiator signaling point.
Trace requested
Information indicating that a trace is requested.
If the trace is requested, the MRVR messages are returned for all
routes which may be used to reach the test destination regardless
of the result of the test.
If the trace is not requested, the MRVR messages are sent only if a
failure or inconsistency is detected.
Information request
The infoRequest parameter is optional and indicates:
1) that the test initiator is able to understand MRVR messages with
optional parameters
and
2) information that any MRVR message may contain.
The possible values are:
- pointCode,
- pointCodeList and
- routePriorityList.
Return unknown parameter
The returnUnknownParams is optional and indicates which
parameters of the MRVT message, that can not be handled by the
signaling point, should be returned in any MRVR message.
This parameter can only be present if the infoRequest parameter
is present.
Possible values:
Tag 15: direct route check
Tag 16: input GT (global title)
Direct route check
This parameter is optional and requests a direct route check.
This check means that a receiver of an MRVT message has a route
through the MRVT sender to the test initiator.
Possible values:
Tag 15: direct route check
Tag 16: input GT (global title)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MRVT- 2+
ACT MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Test initiator
This parameter represents the own point code of a certain
Signaling point.
Depending on the network configuration, the format
of the point code may consits of 1 up to 4 integer
components (A,B,C,D).
E.g.: 4673 A (one component),
122-15 A-B (two components),
255-34-0 A-B-C (three components),
10-2-15-7 A-B-C-D (four components).
The highest value for each integer component is
defined by the number of bits of that component.
E.g.: bit structure highest values
(14) 16383
(7-7) 127-127
(8-8-8) 255-255-255
(4-3-4-3) 15-7-15-7
The bit structure is specified by the network
configuration. In ANSI networks the only allowed
bit structure is (8-8-8).
Notes: The destination point codes contained in the
same network must have the same point code
format.
Input format: bit14 (0...16383)
bit24 (0...16777215)
bit24Str.network (0...255)
bit24Str.cluster (0...255)
bit24Str.member (0...255)
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ACT MRVT- 3-
CAN MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MTP Route Verification Test
This task deletes MTP route verif.test.
valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are:
For one network:
- Net ID or Net name
For all networks:
- no Net ID and no Net name
If the Admin. state is not locked, the delete request will be
rejected.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MRVT : [Net ID=] [,Net name=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own signalling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MRVT- 1-
CR MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create MTP Route Verification Test
This task creates MTP route verif.test.
Admin. state of MTP route verif.test is an
optional inputparameter. If the Admin. state is not selected,
then the MTP route verif.test
will be created with Admin. state = LOCKED.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are:
For one network:
- Net ID or Net name
For all networks:
- no Net ID or Net name
The route verification test is used to determine whether the data of the
MTP route tables throughout the network is consistent. The test is started
from a certain signaling point by its OS and this signaling point will report
the test result to its OS. The test checks whether a certain destination can be
reached via all possible routes without loops and excessive length routes.
The reference to the used sccpAccessPoint is done automatically.
MRVT is allowed for ITU networks only.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MRVT : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Admin. state=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling
point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Admin. state
This attribute indicates whether the MRVT
protocol is allowed to be performed and MRVT
tests can be started.
The supported values are:
- Unlocked: The MRVT is allowed to perform its normal
test functions. ACTIONs will be accepted to
start a MRVT for a certain destination.
- Locked: The MRVT is not allowed to perform its normal
test functions. NO ACTIONs will be accepted.
- Shutting down: The usage of the MRVT is administratively
limited to the running tests. ACTIONs to start
a new test will be rejected. If all running
tests are finished, the administrative state
becomes locked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MRVT- 1-
DISP MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MTP Route Verification Test
This task displays MTP route verif.test.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are:
- one instance of one network:
Net ID or Net name
- all instances of all networks:
no Net ID and no Net name
The following parameters can be displayed in the outputtable:
- MRVT ID
This parameter identifies the MTP route verifikation test
instance within the Signaling point.
Input format: 1
- MRVT name
This parameter represents the name of the MRVT.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
- Max. number of tests
This parameter represents the maximum number
of simultaneous MRVT tests at one Signaling point.
Input format: 2
- Version
The Version identifies the version of the
associated managed object.
- Max. perf. time MRVT msg.
This parameter represents the maximum performance time D for
an STP to process MRVT and MRVA messages.
Input format: 8
- Admin. state
This attribute indicates whether the MRVT protocol is allowed to be
performed and MRVT tests can be started.
- Operational state
This attribute indicates whether the MRVT is operable.
- Usage state
This attribute indicates whether additional tests are possible.
- Availability status
This attribute indicates if the test can operate or not.
detail outputtable:
- MRVT ID
- MRVT name
- Max. number of tests
- Version
- Max. perf. time MRVT msg.
- Admin. state
- Operational state
- Usage state
- Availability status
summary outputtable:
- MRVT ID
- MRVT name
- Max. number of tests
- Version
- Max. perf. time MRVT msg.
- Operational state
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MRVT : [Net ID=] [,Net name=] [,Admin. state=] [
[ [
[ [,Availability status=] [,Operational state=] [
[ [
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MRVT- 1+
DISP MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
[ [,Usage state=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling
point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Admin. state
This attribute indicates whether the MRVT
protocol is allowed to be performed and MRVT
tests can be started.
The supported values are:
- Unlocked: The MRVT is allowed to perform its normal
test functions. ACTIONs will be accepted to
start a MRVT for a certain destination.
- Locked: The MRVT is not allowed to perform its normal
test functions. NO ACTIONs will be accepted.
- Shutting down: The usage of the MRVT is administratively
limited to the running tests. ACTIONs to start
a new test will be rejected. If all running
tests are finished, the administrative state
becomes locked.
Availability status
This attribute indicates if the test can operate or not:
- Dependency: The test cannot operate because a
server resource on which it depends is unavailable
(e.g. TCAP, SCCP). In this case the operational state
is disabled.
- Empty SET: The test can operate.
Operational state
This attribute indicates whether the MRVT is operable.
- Enabled: The MRVT is fully operational.
- Disabled: The MRVT is incapable of performing
its normal functions. ACTIONs to start a test
will be rejected.
Usage state
This attribute indicates whether additional tests are possible.
The supported values are:
- Idle: No test is running.
- Active: Tests are running, and there is spare
capacity to provide additional tests simultaneously.
- Busy: An additional test cannot be provided,
because the maximum number of tests that can be run
simultaneously has been reached. The number of tests
is limited by the value of the maxNumOfTests attribute.
Commands to start an additional test will be rejected.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MRVT- 2+
DISP MRVT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MRVT- 3-
MOD MRVTST
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify MTP Route Verification Test State
This task sets the Admin. state of MTP route verif.test.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are:
- one instance of one network:
Net ID or Net name and Admin. state
- all instances of all networks:
Admin. state
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MRVTST : [Net ID=] [,Net name=] ,Admin. state= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own
signaling point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling
point within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Admin. state
This attribute indicates whether the MRVT
protocol is allowed to be performed and MRVT
tests can be started.
The supported values are:
- Unlocked: The MRVT is allowed to perform its normal
test functions. ACTIONs will be accepted to
start a MRVT for a certain destination.
- Locked: The MRVT is not allowed to perform its normal
test functions. NO ACTIONs will be accepted.
Running test will be stopped.
- Shutting down: The usage of the MRVT is administratively
limited to the running tests. ACTIONs to start
a new test will be rejected. If all running
tests are finished, the administrative state
becomes locked.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MRVTST- 1-
REC MSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RECORD MOBILE SWITCHING CENTRE DATA
This command records the mobile services switching center related data.
Prerequisites:
- System time must be secure when the command is entered.
Notes:
- The measurement can be stopped with STOP JOB if the time
parameter values allow a continuation of the job.
- This command is only allowed for an MSC.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command starts a semipermanent job. It can be canceled with CAN JOB.
Input format

[ [
[ REC MSC : UNIT= [,DTYPE=] [,BEG=] [,TER=] [,IV=] [,PER=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
UNIT UNIT
This parameter specifies the output unit and the form of output.
Only one of the possible alternatives may be selected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: DEVICE
MDD MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
If this option is selected, a measurement file
is created and the received traffic data are
output to this file. After the parameter has
been accepted and at the end of the last
recording, an acknowledgement is output to
the OMT. It includes the name of the file in
which the traffic data are available for
postprocessing.
For postprocessing, the data must first be
copied to tape.
Notes:
- Identifier a covers both MDD and MOD.
This information unit specifies the output unit.
b: FILETYPE
SINGLE SINGLE FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to single measurement files.
DAILY DAILY FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
output to daily files. This is appropriate in
connection with continuous measurements which
start immediately and have no defined end.
To secure the required space on disk, all 7
daily files (MO...SU) are prepared and created
before the command is accepted.
Time parameters are not permissible for these
measurements.
A daily file is closed at the end of the day
and a new file for the next day is automatically
created on disk or the existing file is replaced.
In the second and subsequent weeks, the file
for the same day of the week is overwritten.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC MSC- 1+
REC MSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CYCLIC CYCLIC FILE
If this option is selected, the data are
written into a cyclic measurement file.
Time parameters are not permitted for these
measurements.
If the cyclic file runs full, the newest
data will be lost.
This occurs after a period of two days.
This information unit specifies the desired output form
(daily files, single or cyclic measurement files).
DTYPE DATATYPE
This parameter specifies the kind of data that is to be measured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL COMPLETE DATA (DEFAULT)
GENERAL GENERAL DATA
HANDOVER HANDOVER DATA
SMS SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE DATA
ASCI ASCI DATA
BEG BEGINNING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement begin time.
Notes:
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must be
specified.
Exception : time parameters may not be specified for the data output
in daily and cyclic files.
- A maximum of four BEG dates (in ascending order) may be linked
with &. In case of linked BEG dates, TER is not permissible.
- The earliest possible begin date is the day after entry.
- It is not permissible to enter the command after 23:45 hours with a
begin date on the following day.
- The first measurement may not begin later than one month after the
current date. Subsequent measurements may not begin later than one
year after the current date.
Default: current date
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year of the begin
date.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month of the begin
date.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day of the begin
date.
TER TERMINATING DATE
This parameter specifies the measurement termination date.
Notes:
- Only one termination date may be entered per command.
The earliest possible termination date is the day after entry.
- The measurement duration may not exceed one year.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC MSC- 2+
REC MSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- The begin date BEG and/or the termination date TER must
be specified.
Exception: time parameters may not be specified for data output
in daily and cyclic files.
Default: the end of the measurement is determined by the single day
measurement.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the year in which
recording is to terminate.
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the month in which
recording is to terminate.
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the day on which
recording is to terminate.
IV INTERVAL TIME
This parameter specifies the measurement interval times.
Notes:
- A maximum of 4 measurement intervals may be linked with &.
- Interval times are only permissible in connection with a
begin date (BEG).
Incompatibilities:
- Intervals covering more than one day (e.g. 23-00-01-00).
- Intervals separated by a break of less than one hour.
Default: 24-hour measurement on the specified days.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: BEGIN HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval begins.
b: BEGIN MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval begins.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
c: END HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the hour at which the
measurement interval terminates.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC MSC- 3+
REC MSC
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: END MINUTE=
0...59, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the minutes past the hour at
which the measurement interval terminates.
Notes:
- Possible values : 0, 15, 30 and 45.
PER PERIODICAL WEEKDAY
This parameter specifies the days of the week on which
recording is to take place.
Notes:
- The input of weekdays is only permissible in connection with
a termination date (TER).
Default: daily measurement during the measurement period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MO MONDAY
TU TUESDAY
WE WEDNESDAY
TH THURSDAY
FR FRIDAY
SA SATURDAY
SU SUNDAY
WO WORKDAY
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REC MSC- 4-
DISP MSECHAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE SECURITY HANDLING
This command displays the frequency of the security functions authentication,
Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI) reallocation and IMEI (International
Mobile station Equipment Identity) checking dependent on the event.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MSECHAND ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSECHAND- 1-
MOD MSECHAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MOBILE SECURITY HANDLING
This command modifies the frequency of the security functions authentication,
Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI) reallocation and International
Mobile (station) Equipment Identity (IMEI) checking dependent on the event.
The parameters AUTHENT and TMSIREAL of this command are only permitted when
an exchange is first being put into service.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD MSECHAND : <AUTHENT= ,TMSIREAL= ,IMEICHK=> ,EVENT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
AUTHENT FREQUENCY OF AUTHENTICATION
This parameter specifies in which amount authentication must be exe-
cuted.
This parameter is allowed only if the feature authentication is re-
leased.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEVER AUTHENTICATION NEVER
Execution of authentication for the specified
event is not required.
ALWAYS AUTHENTICATION ALWAYS
Execution of authentication for the specified
event is required.
REDUCED REDUCED AUTHENTICATION
Execution of authentication for the specified
event must be executed only, if the subscriber
related counter reaches the threshold value.
This threshold value must be entered via MML
command MOD MOBTHR.
TMSIREAL FREQUENCY OF TMSI REALLOCATION
This parameter specifies in which amount TMSI reallocation must be
executed.
This parameter is allowed only if the feature TMSI reallocation is
released.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEVER TMSI REALLOCATION NEVER
Execution of TMSI reallocation for the specified
event is not required.
ALWAYS TMSI REALLOCATION ALWAYS
Execution of TMSI reallocation for the specified
event is required.
REDUCED REDUCED TMSI REALLOCATION
Execution of TMSI reallocation for the specified
event must be executed only, if the subscriber
related counter reaches the threshold value.
This threshold value must be entered via MML
command MOD MOBTHR.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSECHAND- 1+
MOD MSECHAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
IMEICHK FREQUENCY OF IMEI CHECKING
This parameter specifies in which amount IMEI checking must be exe-
cuted.
This parameter is allowed only if the feature EIR available is re-
leased.
Invalid combinations of IMEICHK and EVENT are rejected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NEVER IMEI CHECKING NEVER
Execution of IMEI checking for the specified
event is not required.
ALWAYS IMEI CHECKING ALWAYS
Execution of IMEI checking for the specified
event is required.
EVENT EVENT
This parameter specifies the events, which may cause the execution
of security functions.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EXLUPOWN EXTERN. LOC. UPD. OWN SUB.
External location update of own mobile subscriber.
EXLUPVST EXTERN. LOC. UPD. VISIT. SUB.
External location update of a visiting mobile
subscriber.
INLUPOWN INTERN. LOC. UPD. OWN SUB.
Internal location update of own mobile subscriber.
INLUPVST INTERN. LOC. UPD. VISIT. SUB.
Internal location update of a visiting mobile
subscriber.
PERLUP PERIODIC LOCATION UPDATE
MOCOWN MOBILE ORIG. CALL OWN SUB.
Mobile originating call of own mobile
subscriber.
MOCVST MOBILE ORIG. CALL VISIT. SUB.
Mobile originating call of a visiting mobile
subscriber.
MTCOWN MOBILE TERM. CALL OWN SUB.
Mobile terminating call of own mobile subscriber.
MTCVST MOBILE TERM. CALL VISIT. SUB.
Mobile terminating call of a visiting mobile
subscriber.
SCIOWN SUB. CONTR. INPUT OWN SUB.
Subscriber controlled input of own mobile
subscriber.
SCIVST SUB. CONTR. INPUT VISIT. SUB.
Subscriber controlled input of visiting mobile
subscriber.
SMMOCOWN SHORT MESSAGE MOC OWN SUB.
Short message for mobile originating call of own
mobile subscriber.
SMMOCVST SHORT MESSAGE MOC VISIT. SUB.
Short message for mobile originating call of a
visiting mobile subscriber.
SMMTCOWN SHORT MESSAGE MTC OWN SUB.
Short message for mobile terminating call of own
mobile subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSECHAND- 2+
MOD MSECHAND
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SMMTCVST SHORT MESSAGE MTC VISIT. SUB.
Short message for mobile terminating call of a
visiting mobile subscriber.
IMSIACC IMSI ACCESS
International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
access.
IMSIAOWN IMSI ATTACH OWN SUB.
International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
attach of own mobile subscriber.
IMSIAVST IMSI ATTACH VISIT. SUB.
International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
attach of a visiting mobile subscriber.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSECHAND- 3-
DISP MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE SERVICE OPTIONS
This command displays the status of teleservices, bearer services, supplementary
services according to GSM recommendations and mobile features.
For mobile services following additional information is displayed:
Teleservices: Radio channel requirement and connection element.
Bearer services: Radio channel requirement and connection element.
Supplementary services: Capability to perform operator controlled input
or subscriber controlled input and eventual an al-
ternate supplementary service, if indicated supple-
mentary service is blocked.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MSERVOPT- FEATURE FEATURE STATUS
2. DISP MSERVOPT- SERVICE SERVICE STATUS
1. Input format
FEATURE STATUS
This input format is used to display the status of the features.

[ [
[ DISP MSERVOPT : [FEAT=] [,STAT=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the general mobile features. It is possible
to select a single or all features.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL FEATURES
ABAUDCH AUTOBAUDING CHARGING
ADCMPLTG ADDR. CMPL. TYPE IN BSSAP LTG
ADIGCPN A DIG CALL PARTY NUM
ADIGINW A DIG IN INTERW CPN
ADMCLOC NOT USED IN SR7
ADMCOCHK SUPPR.ADMIN. CONSISTENCY CHECK
ADMINK4 K4 ADMIN. WITH CHIP CARDS
Administration of K4 keys with chip cards via a
chip card reader which is connected to an IOP:AUC.
The feature flag MULTIK4 and the feature flag
ADMINK4 may not be marked as sold simultaneously.
Both feature flags realise the same functionality
i.e. installation of multiple key K4 in the
authentication centre.
Difference in the feature flags:
- MULTIK4:installation of K4 keys with CP patches,
- ADMINK4:installation of K4 keys with chip cards.
AIMEIEIR ADAPT IMEI IN EIR
AIMEIFOR ADAPT IMEI FOREIGN SUBS
AIMEIMSC ADAPT IMEI IN MSC
ALOWTCHF ALLOW TRAFF CHAN FULLRATE 14.4
ANBUSYMS ANNOUNCEMENT ON BUSY MOB. SUB.
If the mobile B-subscriber is busy and a "busy"
announcement is created, the A-subscriber gets
this announcement instead of a tone.
ASUBMSRN ABSENT SUBSCRIBER MSRN
AUTHENT AUTHENTICATION
AUTHFARE AUTHENTICATION FAILURE REPORT
This feature flag switches the mechanism for
reporting authentication failures on or off.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 1+
DISP MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
It enables the MSC/VLR to report a failed
authentication to the subscribers HLR.
The functionality associated to this feature flag
is not available in this release.
AUTOBAUD AUTOBAUDING SELFSELECTING
BACKCRG BACKWARD CHARGE MES
BAREMRG BARR. EMERG. CALLS BLACK LIST
BLKACSUB BLOCKING LOCAL AC SUB. ADMIN.
BLKADMCL BLOCK ADM CAN LOC
BLKSMSMT SELECTIVE BLOCKING OF SMS MT
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
selective blocking of SMS MT.
With this feature the operator has the
possibility to block incoming SMS MT traffic from
networks with which no agreement exists.
BSSTRAC BSS TRACE
CAITARSW CAI PACK TARIFFSW AOCI
CALCUGP UNIT CALCULATION IN GP
CALLATT CHARGING OF CALL ATTEMPTS
CALLIBSS CALL IRREGULARITIES FOR BSSAP
CAMEL CAMEL
CAMEL2 CAMEL MAP PHASE 2
CAMEL3 CAMEL MAP PHASE 3
CAMUSSD1 CAMEL:USSD MAP VERSION 1
CARRIER CARRIER ROUTING
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
Carrier Routing.
CASEBHDL X31 CASE B PACKET HANDLER
CATASTR CATASTROPHE STATE
This feature flag allows to switch on and off
the catastrophe state at the MSC.
When the MSC is set into catastrophe state,
calls from and towards subscribers with special
priority (e.g. doctors, members of government,
firemen,...) are processed with higher priority.
CCSAOCC CHANG CHARG START AOCC
CDMAAMPS CDMA TO AMPS
CELLDCH CELL DEPENDENT CHARGING
CFD CALL FORWARDING BY DEFAULT
CHACELL ACT.CELL IN INTERMEDIATE REC
Actual cell in intermediate charging records
CHADMIN RES. FOR ADMIN CHRG FEAT
CHCCFZON CHRG CALL CONTR. FUNCT. ZONING
The feature zoning is switched on with this flag.
If this feature is active, a valid zoning database
has to be administered.
If this feature is blocked, a default zoning value
will be sent to GP from CP in impacted commands.
CHCDPAPX CHARG CALLED PARTY WITH PREFIX
This feature flag enables project-specific
handling of call records for subscribers with IP
preset service. If this flag is set and the
subscriber belongs to the MS category payphone,
the prefix 17951 will be added to the called
party number in the MOC record.
CHCFROA ADD ROA REC AT HLR DETECTED CF
CHDSTIC CHARG. DIG. SERV. TELEPH. IC.
CHDSTOG CHARG. DIG. SERV. TELEPH. OG.
CHFBSIG CHARG. FREE BACKW. SIGN. (CFW)
CHFCATT CHARGE FREE CALL ATTEMPTS
CHFOSGL CHARGING FOLLOW ON SINGLE
Charging for follow on calls via single tickets
instead of intermediate tickets.
CHGCAIN CHARG CALL ATTEMPTS IN INVOC
Charging for call attempts for calls with IN
invocation.
CHGGDCS CHARGING OF USER VIA GDCS
The feature charging via GDCS is switched on with
this flag. Charging via old (BAR) solution is
switched off. ODAGEN expansion of LDC probe data
container is a prerequisite for using the GDC for
data collection. At the same time the memory for
BARs has to be decreased as much as possible with
ODAGEN.
Incompatibilities:
- not allowed with parameter CRFONCAP.
CHGGIDIS CHARG. FOR GID IN ISUP FORMAT
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 2+
DISP MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
generation of the General Call Id in ISUP format,
i.e. with 14 bit SPC (Signalling Point Code).
CHGHOTLN CHARGING FOR HOT LINING
This feature flag allows to switch on and off
the charging for Hot Lining (RTT feature).
CHGTDP3 CHARGING TDP3 DIALOG SWITCH
Charging for TDP3 dialog switch INServiceKey and
DestinationNumber if TDP12/2 is pending.
CHGUCR CHARG. FOR UNIVERSAL CALL REF.
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
generation of a Universal Call Reference, i.e.
General Call Id and MAP-CRN (MAP-Call Reference
Number) have the same value wherever possible.
CHICPABX CHARGING FOR IC. PABX CALLS
CHINST RES FOR NONADMIN CHRG FEAT
CHINTREC INTERROGATION RECORDS
CHKBASNO CHECK BAR ON SHORT NUMBER
CHNP0MT CHARGING NAT. PREFIX 0 FOR MTC
Insert national prefix 0 to other party for
MTC ticket.
CHOGPABX CHARGING FOR OG. PABX CALLS
CHPOECT CHARGING PRINTOUT ECT
At EMC set up an OMT mask is generated instead
of an ECT record.
CHRGPRT PRINTOUT CHARGING FAILURE
CHSIGMS CHARGING CF SIGNALED MSISDN
Take the received digits as MSISDN instead of
MSISDN coming from interrogation for CF (Call
Forwarding) ticket.
CHSUCSMO SUPPRESS SMS MO TICKET
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
suppression of SMS MO ticket after successful SCP
query. If the SCP has charged the SMS-MO, no
charging ticket is required.
CHTRANS CHARGING FOR TRANSIT
CHTRAOTG TRANSIT REC CTRLD BY OTG
Transit record controlled by outgoing trunk
CHUSSD CHARGING TICKETS FOR USSD
Charging tickets are generated for Unstructured
Supplementary Service Data (USSD) transactions.
CIPHER CIPHERING
CISMSMO COLLEC. FOR INTERNAT. SMS MO
CISMSMT COLLEC. FOR INTERNAT. SMS MT
CLDPSIG CALLED PARTY AS SIGNALED
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
possibility to have the signaled MSISDN (meaning
the called party) in the tickets for incoming
calls, instead of the standard MSISDN, as
collected by charging (without any prefixes or
overdialed digits).
CMTCOSUB CHARG MTC OWN SUBSCRIBERS
CRELNB CALL RELATED NUMBER
CRFBDISK CR FILE BOTH DISK
CRFONCAP FORMAT CLIENT RECORDS ON CAP
The transfer of call data records into the
customized layout is immediately performed
on the call processor (CAP).
Incompatibilities:
- not allowed with parameter CHGGDCS.
CSCASN1 FIXED SUBS RECORDS IN ASN1
CSMSMO COLLEC. FOR NATIONAL SMS MO
CSMSMT COLLEC. FOR NATIONAL SMS MT
CSUBVLR CANCELATION OF SUB. IN VLR
CTCUGOC CT CUG FOR CALLS OUTSIDE CUG
DATACOMP DATA COMPRESSION V.42 BIS
DETIMSI EXPLICIT DETACH WITH IMSI
DETTMSI EXPLICIT DETACH WITH TMSI
DIGGSM DIGITS GSM IE
DIRRETRY DIRECTED RETRY
DISPMCR DISPLAY MOBILE CALL RECORD
DISTRELC DISTANCE RELATED CHARGING
DSUBVLR DISPLAY OF SUBSCRIBER IN VLR
EARLDTMF ALLOW DTMF TONES BEFORE ANSWER
EHO3G2G EXTERNAL HANDOVER 3G TO 2G
This feature enables the UMTS - GSM handover
function. Source and target cells are located
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 3+
DISP MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
in different MSCs.
EHO3G3G EXTERNAL HANDOVER 3G TO 3G
This feature enables the UMTS - UMTS handover
function. Source and target cells are located
in different MSCs.
EMCPRIO 2 EMERGENCY PRIORITY
EMLPAP ENH MULT LEV PREC AND PRE-EMPT
Enhanced multi-level precedence and pre-emption
EMLPPRIO EMLPP PRIORITY ONLY
Evaluate only the eMLPP priority table during call
setup. This feature only applies to GSM-R
projects.
EMRGPRT PRINTOUT OF EMERGENCY RECORDS
EMRGSIM EMERGENCY CALL WITHOUT SIMCARD
EMRGTRAC EMERGENCY CALL TRACE
ESVSIG ESV SIGNALLING
ETHRTS11 THRESHOLD REPORT ONLY FOR TS11
ETRREP THRESHOLD REPORT; REPORT ONLY
ETSS EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
EXTOMT EXTENSION OF NUMBER OF OMTS
FCLNTREC CHARGE FREE CLIENT RECORDS
FCSSIND FORW. CHECK SUPPL. SERV. IND.
FEATXXXX FEATURE XXXX
Feature number XXXX with 0277 <= XXXX <= 0512.
Purpose of those features are stated in the Switch
Commander.
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPR. FOR BILLING DATA
FMHLRIW FOLLOW ME HLR
FMTMN FAULT MANAGEMENT FOR TMN
FRAUDPR FRAUD PREVENTION
GENCID GENERAL CALL ID
GPRSMSUB HLR SUB. ADMIN. WITH GPRS DATA
MSUB in HLR are administrable with GPRS data
GSINTERF GS INTERFACE FOR VLR
Feature flag for GS Interface in the MSC/VLR. The
GS Interface connects the databases in the MSC/VLR
and the Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN), in order
to coordinate the location information of MS that
are attached to both GSM and GPRS services.
GSMRSUBA GSM R SUBADDRESSING
HBASCI HOT BILLING ASCI
HBCF HOT BILLING CF
HBEMC HOT BILLING EMC
HBLR HOT BILL. FOR LOCATION REQUEST
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
hot billing feature for the location request.
HBMOC HOT BILLING MOC
HBMTC HOT BILLING MTC
HBSCI HOT BILLING SCI
HBSMSMO HOT BILLING SMS MO
HBSMSMT HOT BILLING SMS MT
HLRACQ3 HLR/AC ADMINISTRATION VIA Q3
This parameter specifies whether HLR and AC
administration is possible via Q3 interface
of MP:OAM platform.
HLRGRPCP HLR GROUP CMD
HOTBFD HOT BILLING FLUSH DELAY
HOTBGMSC HOT BILLING IN GATEWAY MSC
HPLMNRO OWN PLMN ROAMING
IACAMA INTERADM CHARGING AMA TICKETS
IACTRA INTERADM CHARGE TRANSIT REC
IHO3G2G INTERNAL HANDOVER 3G TO 2G
This feature enables the UMTS - UMTS handover
function. Source and target cells are located
in different MSCs.
IMEICHK IMEI CHECK
IMEIID IMEI IDENT. FOR AMA TICKET
IMPLDET IMPLICIT DETACH
IMSITRAC IMSI TRACING
INFONCAP FORMAT IN RECORDS ON CAP
INTELAMT INTELLIGENT TERMINAL AMT
JURINC JURIDICAL INTERCEPTION
KEYMML SECURITY KEY MANAGEM. VIA MML
KEYSAS SECURITY KEY MANAGEM. VIA SAS
LACSUPP LAC SUPPRESSION ALLOWANCE
LAIROUT LOCATION AREA IDENT. ROUTING
LCS LOCATION SERVICES FEATURE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 4+
DISP MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
location services feature.
LTGPOOL LTG POOLING
LUPGTTF LUP GTT FAIL. NO NETW. FAIL.
LUPMAP1 LUP MAP PH.1 NO PLMN N. ALLOW.
LUPMAP2 LUP MAP PH.2 NO PLMN N. ALLOW.
MBANDCM3 MULTI BAND CLASSM3
MPCOUNT SUPPORT METERPULSE COUNT
MSCHO MSC MSC HANDOVER
MSUBACC CAN MSUB IN AC
MSUBEXD MSUB EXPIRY DATE
MULHLDAY MULTIPLE HOLIDAY CALENDAR
MULINTPR MULTIPLE INTERNAT. PREFIXES
MULNDC MULTIPLE NATIONAL DEST. CODE
MULTIK4 MULTIPLE K4 ALGORITHM
MULTINU MULTINUMBERING
MULTINUD MULTINUMBERING FOR UDI
MULTLAC MULTIPLE LAC PER MOB. NETWORK
NATCBN NAT CHARGE BAND NUM
NAT0SPC INA SPC FOR NET. INDIC. NAT 0
For INA tickets, the SPC will be delivered only
for the Network Indicator NAT 0.
NCIDBYCF NEW CALL ID BY CF
NDCINSN NDC INPUT IN SN
NDCSUPPR NAT. DEST. CODE SUPPRESSION
NICA NETWORK INITIATED CONTEXT ACT.
This feature flag enables or disables the Gc
interface between HLR and GGSN.
The functionality associated to this feature flag
is not available in this release.
NONOTCCF NO CF NOTIFICATION FOR CCF
NONOTCFU NO CF NOTIFICATION FOR CFU
NOPROIR NO PROGRESS IND IRIDIUM
NOTITOP TICKET SUPPR CALLS ICPT OPER
NPCCBS CCBS PORTED SUBSCRIB. WITH SRF
CCBS handling for number portability
NSFITMAD NO SET FLAG IN TM
NUMPORT NUMBER PORTABILITY
OACSU OFF AIR CALL SET UP
ODB OPERATOR DETERMINED BARRING
ODFEAT11 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 11
ODFEAT12 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 12
ODFEAT13 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 13
ODFEAT14 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 14
ODFEAT15 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 15
ODFEAT20 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 20
ODFEAT21 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 21
ODFEAT22 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 22
ODFEAT23 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 23
ODFEAT24 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 24
ODFEAT25 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 25
ODFEAT26 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 26
ODFEAT27 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 27
ODFEAT28 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 28
ODFEAT29 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 29
ODFEAT30 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 30
ODFEAT31 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 31
ORECF OR OF EARLY CALL FORWARDING
This feature flag allows to indicate that GMSC and
HLR are capable to handle optimal routing
for early call forwarding.
ORLCF OR OF LATE CALL FORWARDING
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
optimal routing function of late call forwarding.
ORMMC OR OF MOBILE-TO-MOBILE CALLS
This feature flag allows to indicate that GMSC and
HLR are capable to handle optimal routing of
Mobile-to-Mobile calls.
PAGNGSIF PAGING VIA GS INTERFACE
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
paging via Gs Interface.
PBXEXTO PABX NUMBER EXT. ONLY
PBXNOSNT SENT PABX NUMBER FOR PABX OG
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
sending of the PABX number for a PABX outgoing
call.
PBXWEXT PABX NUMBER WITH EXT.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 5+
DISP MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
PICIDXTR PIC INDEX TRANSLATION
This feature flag enables the Preferred
Interexchange carrier (PIC) assigned to a mobile
subscriber in the HLR to be used as an index in
the MSC. This index is translated via newcode
handling into the real carrier access code. In
this way, two PICs can be used for each mobile
subscriber.
PISCB PORTED IN SPECIFIC CB
PLMNRES PLMN RESTRICTION
POSCB PORTED OUT SPECIFIC CB
PPSCSUBS PPSC SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
PRCIPAG PROVIDE CI FOR PAGING
PURGINIT VLR PURGING INITIATION
During creation of a new subscriber record within
the VLR, another subscriber record is purged, if
the VLR database is filled up to 80% and the last
radio access of the MS is older than 5 days.
QUEUING QUEUING / PREEMPTION
REGRO REGIONAL ROAMING
RESUBMML REENCRYPT AC SUB. DATA VIA MML
RESUBSAS REENCRYPT AC SUB. DATA VIA SAS
ROUATMCN ROUTE TO ATM CORE NETWORK
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
routing to additional ATM trunks in Core Network.
RSCELLBA REG.SUBSCRIPTION ON CELL BASIS
RSCELLID RS CELL ID SUBSCR CHECK
SCCPROER SCCP RETURN ON ERROR
SCMINP SERV CLASS MARK IND NUM PL
SCMNDCSP NDC/LAC SUPPR. FOR SCM SUB.
SECREG SECURE REGEN/LOG WITHOUT SAS
SECSAS SECURITY EVENTS VIA SAS
SECSSS SECURITY EVENTS VIA SSS FILE
SIMCHANG SIMCARD CHANGE OVER
SKIPFRAM SKIP FORCED ROUT AUTH MANAG
SKIPLCCH SKIP LAC CI CHECK
SNRFIXSD SHORT NUM. ROUT. FIX./SUBDEP.
SNRSERVC SHORT NUM. ROUT. SERV. CENTER
SPNUHAN SPECIAL NUMBER HANDLING
SRECFILE S-RECORD FILE INTERCEPTION
SSERVLTG SPECIAL SERV. NB. IN BSSAP LTG
SSUTR2 SUPPORT SSUTR2 CHARGING
SUBBAPRE SUBSTIT. BAR PR ENTERTAINMENT
SUBBAPRI SUBSTITUTE BAR PR INFO
SUBCMISE SUBSCRIBER ADMIN. VIA CMISE
SUBLSRET SUBLOC STATRETR
SUBOSBA1 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 1
SUBOSBA2 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 2
SUBOSBA3 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 3
SUBOSBA4 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 4
SUBQUEU SUBSCRIBER RELATED QUEUING
SUBSAS SUBSCRIBER ADMIN. VIA SAS
SUPBAASN SUPPRESS BAR CHECK
SUPCIPHC SUPPRESS CIPH CMD
TDIOPAUC TEST/DIAG. OF IOP:AUC VIA SAS
TEMPLSUB TEMPLATE SUB POSS
THRREP THRESHOLD REPORTING
TINCWER TERMINATE IN CALLS WITH ERRORS
TMSIREAL TMSI REALLOCATION
TS21GPRS SMS MT OVER SGSN OF GPRS
Short message mobile terminated over SGSN of GPRS
TS22GPRS SMS MO OVER SGSN OF GPRS
Short message mobile originated over SGSN of GPRS
TWOIMSI TWO IMSI PER SUBSCRIBER
UCIPHMEC UMTS CIPHERING MECHANISM
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
UMTS ciphering mechanism.
UKEYCTRL UMTS KEY LIFETIME CONTROL
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
UMTS integrity/cipher key lifetime control.
UNILACOD UNIQUE LOCATION AREA CODE
This feature flag allows to use the parameters
MCC and MNC for unique LACOD definition.
USECEMC UMTS SECURITY DURING EMERGENCY
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
UMTS security mechanism during emergency.
USINUPDO USER INITIATED UP-/DOWNGRADING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 6+
DISP MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
USSDVCOD USSD VPLMN COD HAND FOR SUBSCR
USSD VPLMN code handling for foreign subscriber
USSD2 USSD ACCORDING MAP VERSION 2
Unstructured supplementary service data (USSD)
mechanism according to MAP protocol version 2.
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
VIRHLRID VIRTUAL HLRID
VLRQUERY VLR QUERY
VLRSTAL VLR STAND ALONE
VSEXTEND VGCS/VBS EXTENDED FEATURE
In case of VGCS/VBS calls, the group call area can
be extended to more than one MSC. A total of 8
MSCs, one anchor MSC and up to seven relay MSCs,
is possible.
VSUBORIG DISP FOR NUMBER OF SUB IN VLR
Display for number of subscribers in VLR
ZOINTNO ZONING WITH REAL INTERCEPT NUM
In case a MOC is intercepted and rerouted to an
announcement located outside the A-MSC by means of
CR INC, this feature flag enables zoning with
the routing digits defined by INRES=NEWCOD
instead of the B-party number.
STAT STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
The use of the specified service/feature is
allowed.
BLK BLOCKED
The use of the specified service/feature is
not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 7+
DISP MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
SERVICE STATUS
This input format is used to display the status of the services.

[ [
[ [
[ [[TSERV= [[ [
[ [[BSERV= [[ [
[ DISP MSERVOPT : [SSERV= [ [,STAT=] ; [
[ [[DPFCFEAT=[[ [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TSERV TELESERVICE
This parameter specifies the teleservices.
It is possible to select a single or all teleservices.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL TELESERVICES
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
TS91 VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
TS92 VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
BSERV BEARER SERVICE
This parameter specifies the bearer services.
It is possible to select a single or all bearer services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL BEARER SERVICES
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A. SERVICES
General bearer service, asynchronous data service.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S. SERVICES
General bearer service, non-transparent synchr.
data service
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS CA SERVICES
General bearer service, dedicated pad service.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH / DATA C.D.A
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA C.D.A
SSERV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies the supplementary services.
It is possible to select a single or all supplementary services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
AOCCHRG ADVICE OF CHARGE (CHARGING)
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 8+
DISP MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AOCINFO ADVICE OF CHARGE (INFORMATION)
CALLBACK CALL BACK
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
CALLTRAN CALL TRANSFER
CALLWAIT CALL WAITING
CBIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT BARR. IC ROAMING NON HPLMN
CBOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC BARRING OF OUTGOING INT. CALLS
CBOICEXH BARR. OG INT. NON HPLMN CALLS
CCBSA CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUB. A
That supplementary service enables the completion
of call to busy subscriber, originating side.
CCBSB CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUB. B
That supplementary service enables the completion
of call to busy subscriber, terminating side.
CFBUSY CALL FORW. ON SUB BUSY
CFNREACH CALL FORW. ON SUB NOT REACH.
CFNREPLY CALL FORWARDING ON NO REPLY
CFU CALL FORWARDING UNCONDITIONAL
CLIP CALLING LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT. RESTRICT.
COLP CONNECTED LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
COLR CONNECTED LINE IDENT. RESTRIC.
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
EMLPP ENH MULT LEV PREC AND PRE-EMPT
Enhanced multi-level precedence and pre-emption
FROUT FORCED ROUT NAT SUPPL SERVICE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
INSCMMOC IN SERVICE CLASS MARK FOR MOC
INSCMMTC IN SERVICE CLASS MARK FOR MTC
MPTY MULTI PARTY SERVICE
NATCCBS COMPLETION CALLS TO BUSY SUB
NATSS01 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 01
NATSS02 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 02
NATSS03 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 03
NATSS04 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 04
NATSS05 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 05
NATSS06 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 06
NATSS07 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 07
NATSS08 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 08
NATSS09 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 09
NATSS10 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 10
NATSS11 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 11
NATSS12 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 12
NATSS13 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 13
NATSS14 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 14
NATSS15 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 15
USERSIG1 USER TO USER SIGNAL SERVICE 1
DPFCFEAT DPFC FEATURES
This parameter specifies the features in the subscriber
dependent digit processing and feature control feature
package.
It is possible to select a single or all features.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACTINC ACC. CODE TYPE INCOMING CALL
ACTTPCS ACCESS CODE TYPE TRANSLAT PCS
ACCESS CODE TYPE TRANSLATION PCS
AMBIGCOD SUPP OF AMBIG CODE WITHOUT SPL
SUPP OF AMBIGUOURS CODE WITHOUT SPLITING
ANNDCS ANNOUNCEMENT DURING CALL SETUP
ANUMDPRC NUMBER DEPEND ROUT AND CHARGIN
A NUMBER DEPENDENT ROUTING AND CHARGING
AOCTGS AOC TARIF FOR CERT GR OF SUBS
AOC TARIFFS FOR CERTAIN GROUPS OF SUBSCRIBERS
ASLIFOP SUBSCR LOCAT INFO FOR OPERATOR
A SUBSCRIBER LOCATION INFORMATION FOR OPERATOR
CACSDDP SDDPFC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
CBSDFS CALL BLOCKING FOR FOR SUBSCR
CALL BLOCKING FOR FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS
CBSDSS CALL BLOCKING FOR SPEC SUBSCR
CALL BLOCKING FOR SPECIAL SUBSCRIBERS
CLIRTMIN CLIR TEMPORARY MODE INVOCATION
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 9+
DISP MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CORSINOV CORI SHORTC NETW OVERLAY STRUC
CORI SHORTCODES IN NETWORK OVERLAY STRUCTURE
DCFSSMTC MTC DEL CTRL FOR SPEC SUBSCR
MTC DELIVERY CONTROL FOR SPECIAL SUBSCRIBERS
DIFKEYA DIF PLU TREAT FOR OWN AND ROAM
DIFF PLUS TREATMENT FOR OWN AND ROAMERS
ENHSPNDC ENHANCED SUPPRESSION OF NDC
EVALCSI EVALUATION OF CSI
FRHRTANP FULLRATE/HALFRATE TANDEM PREV
FULLRATE/HALFRATE TANDEM PREVENTION
IDSCPACC IMSI DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
IDVMSCF CF IMSI DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
IDVMSMOC MOC IMSI DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
INOVLMTC IN OVERLAY SOLUT FOR MTC
INTRIG IN TRIGGERING
IPTGCGS CERT GRPS IMMED PRINT TICK GEN
CERTAIN GROUPS IMMEDIATE PRINTOUT TICKET GENER
IPTGCSS IMMED PRINTOUT AND TICKET GEN
IMMEDIATE PRINTOUT AND TICKET GENERATION
IRDRCF CF IMSI RANGE DEPEND ROUTING
CF IMSI RANGE DEPENDENT ROUTING
IRDRMOC MOC IMSI RANGE DEPEND ROUTING
MOC IMSI RANGE DEPENDENT ROUTING
IRDRMTC MTC IMSI RANGE DEPEND ROUTING
MTC IMSI RANGE DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRALL ALL LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRCF CF LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRINC ICALL LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRMOC MOC LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRMTC MTC LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LOCDRINC ICALL LOCATION DEPEND ROUTING
ICALL LOCATION DEPENDENT ROUTING
LOCDRMOC MOC LOCATION DEPENDENT ROUTING
MDSCPACC MSISDN DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
MDVMSCF CF MSISDN DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
MDVMSMOC MOC MSISDN DEPENDENT VMS ACC
MOC MSISDN DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
NSSDSCPA NAT SUPPL SERVICE DEP SCP ACC
NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
OTASAPUS OTASAP IN USR5
PAYREMIN PAYMENT REMINDER SERVICE
PROJSF01 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 01
PROJSF02 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 02
PROJSF03 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 03
PROJSF04 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 04
PROJSF05 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 05
PROJSF06 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 06
PROJSF07 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 07
PROJSF08 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 08
PROJSF09 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 09
PROJSF10 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 10
RDFSPL ROUT TO ANN FOR SUBSCR LANG
ROUTING TO ANNOUNC FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS LANGUAGE
RDOSPL ROUT TO ANN OWN SUBSCR LANGUAG
ROUTING TO ANNOUNC OWN SUBSCRIBERS LANGUAGE
RSDFSCF CF RESTRIC FOR FOREIGN SUBSCR
CF RESTRICTION FOR FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS
RSDSSCF CF RESTRICTION FOR SPEC SUBSCR
CF RESTRICTION FOR SPECIAL SUBSCRIBERS
SCDSCPAC SUBSCR CAT DEPENDENT SCP ACC
SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
SCMINDNP SCM INDEPENDENT OF NUMBER PLAN
SCM INDEPENDENT OF NUMMBERING PLAN
SDRMOC MOC SSIND DEPENDENT ROUTING
SERVCF SERVICES FOR CF AND MOC
SERVMOC SERVICES FOR MOC
SLDSCPAC SUBSCR LOCATION DEP SCP ACC
SUBSCRIBER LOCATON DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
SOFPSFS SUPPORT OF FOR PLMN SHORTCODES
SUPPORT OF FOREIGN PLMN SHORTCODES
SPWSRSWS PLMN WI SUB REL SHTC W SIE HLR
PLMN WIDE SUB REL SHORTCOD WITHOUT SIEMENS HLR
SRELFFS SREL FOR FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS
SRFALL ALL SPECIAL ROUTING
SRFCF CF SPECIAL ROUTING
SRFINC ICALL SPECIAL ROUTING
SRFMOC MOC SPECIAL ROUTING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 10+
DISP MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SRFMTC MTC SPECIAL ROUTING
SRMOCCF MOC OR CFVMSC SPECIAL ROUTING
STGCGS SUPPR TICKKET GENERAT GROUPS
STGCGSCD SUPPR TICK GEN GRPS CERT DEST
SUPPR TICKET GENERAT GROUPS CERTAIN DEST
SZONFALL ALL SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFCF CF SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFINC INC SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFMOC MOC SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFMTC MTC SPECIAL ZONNING
STAT STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
The use of the specified service/feature is
allowed.
BLK BLOCKED
The use of the specified service/feature is
not allowed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSERVOPT- 11-
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MOBILE SERVICE OPTIONS
This command modifies the options of mobile services. Mobile services are:
teleservices,
bearer services,
supplementary services and
general mobile features.
Note: - The modification of certain service options may be blocked project
dependent.
- In case of activation (STAT=ACT) of all features at once (FEAT=ALL),
the status of the features AUTHENT, AIMEIMSC, AIMEIEIR and AIMEIFOR
are not modified.
- In case of deactivation (STAT=BLK) of all features at once (FEAT=ALL),
the status of the features AUTHENT and LTGPOOL are not modified.
- In case of activation of the features AIMEIMSC, AIMEIEIR and AIMEIFOR
only one can be active (Operating status).
- The feature SUBLSRET can only be active when the feature CAMEL
is active.
- The feature CAMEL2 can only be active when the feature CAMEL
is active.
- The feature CAMEL3 can only be active when the feature CAMEL2
is active.
- The feature PAGNGSIF can only be active when the feature CAMEL3
is active.
- The feature NICA can only be active when the feature GPRSMSUB
is active.
- The feature EHO3G2G can only be active when the feature IHO3G2G
is active.
- The feature CATASTR can only be active when the feature EMLPAP
is active.
- The feature CAMEL can not be set to blocked when the feature
SUBLSRET is active.
- The feature CAMEL can not be set to blocked when the feature
CAMEL2 is active.
- The feature CAMEL2 can not be set to blocked when the feature
CAMEL3 is active.
- The feature CAMEL3 can not be set to blocked when the feature
PAGNGSIF is active.
- The feature GPRSMSUB can not be set to blocked when the feature
NICA is active.
- The feature IHO3G2G can not be set to blocked when the feature
EHO3G2G is active.
- The feature EMLPAP can not be set to blocked when the feature
CATASTR is active.
IMPORTANT:
- The change of the operating status of some services/features is not
allowed.
Those services/features are marked as IMONLY equal YES within
the DISP MSERVREL display mask.
Caution: The execution of this command may compromise the regular operation of
the exchange!
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD MSERVOPT - FEATURE FEATURE STATUS
2. MOD MSERVOPT - RACHPROP RADIO CHANN. TRANS. PROPERTIES
3. MOD MSERVOPT - SCI SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED INPUT
4. MOD MSERVOPT - SERVICE SERVICE STATUS
1. Input format
FEATURE STATUS
This input format is used to modify the status of the features.
Note: The modification of the status of certain features may
be blocked project dependent.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 1+
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD MSERVOPT : FEAT= ,STAT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
FEAT FEATURE
This parameter specifies the general mobile features. It is possible
to select a single or all features.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL FEATURES
ABAUDCH AUTOBAUDING CHARGING
ADCMPLTG ADDR. CMPL. TYPE IN BSSAP LTG
ADIGCPN A DIG CALL PARTY NUM
ADIGINW A DIG IN INTERW CPN
ADMCLOC NOT USED IN SR7
ADMCOCHK SUPPR.ADMIN. CONSISTENCY CHECK
ADMINK4 K4 ADMIN. WITH CHIP CARDS
Administration of K4 keys with chip cards via a
chip card reader which is connected to an IOP:AUC.
The feature flag MULTIK4 and the feature flag
ADMINK4 may not be marked as sold simultaneously.
Both feature flags realise the same functionality
i.e. installation of multiple key K4 in the
authentication centre.
Difference in the feature flags:
- MULTIK4:installation of K4 keys with CP patches,
- ADMINK4:installation of K4 keys with chip cards.
AIMEIEIR ADAPT IMEI IN EIR
AIMEIFOR ADAPT IMEI FOREIGN SUBS
AIMEIMSC ADAPT IMEI IN MSC
ALOWTCHF ALLOW TRAFF CHAN FULLRATE 14.4
ANBUSYMS ANNOUNCEMENT ON BUSY MOB. SUB.
If the mobile B-subscriber is busy and a "busy"
announcement is created, the A-subscriber gets
this announcement instead of a tone.
ASUBMSRN ABSENT SUBSCRIBER MSRN
AUTHENT AUTHENTICATION
AUTHFARE AUTHENTICATION FAILURE REPORT
This feature flag switches the mechanism for
reporting authentication failures on or off.
It enables the MSC/VLR to report a failed
authentication to the subscribers HLR.
The functionality associated to this feature flag
is not available in this release.
AUTOBAUD AUTOBAUDING SELFSELECTION
BACKCRG BACKWARD CHARGE MES
BAREMRG BARR. EMERG. CALLS BLACK LIST
BLKACSUB BLOCKING LOCAL AC SUB. ADMIN.
BLKADMCL BLOCK ADM CAN LOC
BLKSMSMT SELECTIVE BLOCKING OF SMS MT
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
selective blocking of SMS MT.
With this feature the operator has the
possibility to block incoming SMS MT traffic from
networks with which no agreement exists.
BSSTRAC BSS TRACE
CAITARSW CAI PACK TARIFFSW AOCI
CALCUGP UNIT CALCULATION IN GP
CALLATT CHARGING OF CALL ATTEMPTS
CALLIBSS CALL IRREGULARITIES FOR BSSAP
CAMEL CAMEL
CAMEL2 CAMEL MAP PHASE 2
CAMEL3 CAMEL MAP PHASE 3
CAMUSSD1 CAMEL:USSD MAP VERSION 1
CARRIER CARRIER ROUTING
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
Carrier Routing.
CASEBHDL X31 CASE B PACKET HANDLER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 2+
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CATASTR CATASTROPHE STATE
This feature flag allows to switch on and off
the catastrophe state at the MSC.
When the MSC is set into catastrophe state,
calls from and towards subscribers with special
priority (e.g. doctors, members of government,
firemen,...) are processed with higher priority.
CCSAOCC CHANG CHARG START AOCC
CDMAAMPS CDMA TO AMPS
CELLDCH CELL DEPENDENT CHARGING
CFD CALL FORWARDING BY DEFAULT
CHACELL ACT.CELL IN INTERMEDIATE REC
Actual cell in intermediate charging records
CHADMIN RES. FOR ADMIN CHRG FEAT
CHCCFZON CHRG CALL CONTR. FUNCT. ZONING
The feature zoning is switched on with this flag.
If this feature is active, a valid zoning database
has to be administered.
If this feature is blocked, a default zoning value
will be sent to GP from CP in impacted commands.
CHCDPAPX CHARG CALLED PARTY WITH PREFIX
This feature flag enables project-specific
handling of call records for subscribers with IP
preset service. If this flag is set and the
subscriber belongs to the MS category payphone,
the prefix 17951 will be added to the called
party number in the MOC record.
CHCFROA ADD ROA REC AT HLR DETECTED CF
CHDSTIC CHARG. DIG. SERV. TELEPH. IC.
CHDSTOG CHARG. DIG. SERV. TELEPH. OG.
CHFBSIG CHARG. FREE BACKW. SIGN. (CFW)
CHFCATT CHARGE FREE CALL ATTEMPTS
CHFOSGL CHARGING FOLLOW ON SINGLE
Charging for follow on calls via single tickets
instead of intermediate tickets.
CHGCAIN CHARG CALL ATTEMPTS IN INVOC
Charging for call attempts for calls with IN
invocation.
CHGGDCS CHARGING OF USER VIA GDCS
The feature charging via GDCS is switched on with
this flag. Charging via old (BAR) solution is
switched off. ODAGEN expansion of LDC probe data
container is a prerequisite for using the GDC for
data collection. At the same time the memory for
BARs has to be decreased as much as possible with
ODAGEN.
Incompatibilities:
- not allowed with parameter CRFONCAP.
CHGGIDIS CHARG. FOR GID IN ISUP FORMAT
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
generation of the General Call Id in ISUP format,
i.e. with 14 bit SPC (Signalling Point Code).
CHGHOTLN CHARGING FOR HOT LINING
This feature flag allows to switch on and off
the charging for Hot Lining (RTT feature).
CHGTDP3 CHARGING TDP3 DIALOG SWITCH
Charging for TDP3 dialog switch INServiceKey and
DestinationNumber if TDP12/2 is pending.
CHGUCR CHARG. FOR UNIVERSAL CALL REF.
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
generation of a Universal Call Reference, i.e.
General Call Id and MAP-CRN (MAP-Call Reference
Number) have the same value wherever possible.
CHICPABX CHARGING FOR IC. PABX CALLS
CHINST RES FOR NONADM CHRG FEAT
CHINTREC INTERROGATION RECORDS
CHKBASNO CHECK BAR ON SHORT NUMBER
CHNP0MT CHARGING NAT. PREFIX 0 FOR MTC
Insert national prefix 0 to other party for
MTC ticket.
CHOGPABX CHARGING FOR OG. PABX CALLS
CHPOECT CHARGING PRINTOUT ECT
At EMC set up an OMT mask is generated instead
of an ECT record.
CHRGPRT PRINTOUT CHARGING FAILURE
CHSIGMS CHARGING CF SIGNALED MSISDN
Take the received digits as MSISDN instead of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 3+
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSISDN coming from interrogation for CF (Call
Forwarding) ticket.
CHSUCSMO SUPPRESS SMS MO TICKET
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
suppression of SMS MO ticket after successful SCP
query. If the SCP has charged the SMS-MO, no
charging ticket is required.
CHTRANS CHARGING FOR TRANSIT
CHTRAOTG TRANSIT REC CTRLD BY OTG
Transit record controlled by outgoing trunk
CHUSSD CHARGING TICKETS FOR USSD
Charging tickets are generated for Unstructured
Supplementary Service Data (USSD) transactions.
CIPHER CIPHERING
CISMSMO COLLEC. FOR INTERNAT. SMS MO
CISMSMT COLLEC. FOR INTERNAT. SMS MT
CLDPSIG CALLED PARTY AS SIGNALED
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
possibility to have the signaled MSISDN (meaning
the called party) in the tickets for incoming
calls, instead of the standard MSISDN, as
collected by charging (without any prefixes or
overdialed digits).
CMTCOSUB CHARG MTC OWN SUBSCRIBERS
CRELNB CALL RELATED NUMBER
CRFBDISK CR FILE BOTH DISK
CRFONCAP FORMAT CLIENT RECORDS ON CAP
The transfer of call data records into the
customized layout is immediately performed
on the call processor (CAP).
Incompatibilities:
- not allowed with parameter CHGGDCS.
CSCASN1 FIXED SUBS RECORDS IN ASN1
CSMSMO COLLEC. FOR NATIONAL SMS MO
CSMSMT COLLEC. FOR NATIONAL SMS MT
CSUBVLR CANCELATION OF SUB. IN VLR
CTCUGOC CT CUG FOR CALLS OUTSIDE CUG
DATACOMP DATA COMPRESSION V.42 BIS
DETIMSI EXPLICIT DETACH WITH IMSI
DETTMSI EXPLICIT DETACH WITH TMSI
DIGGSM DIGITS GSM IE
DIRRETRY DIRECTED RETRY
DISPMCR DISPLAY MOBILE CALL RECORD
DISTRELC DISTANCE RELATED CHARGING
DSUBVLR DISPLAY OF SUBSCRIBER IN VLR
EARLDTMF ALLOW DTMF TONES BEFORE ANSWER
EHO3G2G EXTERNAL HANDOVER 3G TO 2G
This feature enables the UMTS - GSM handover
function. Source and target cells are located
in different MSCs.
EHO3G3G EXTERNAL HANDOVER 3G TO 3G
This feature enables the UMTS - UMTS handover
function. Source and target cells are located
in different MSCs.
EMCPRIO 2 EMERGENCY PRIORITY
EMLPAP ENH MULT LEV PREC AND PRE-EMPT
Enhanced multi-level precedence and pre-emption
This feature flag is necessary because EMLPP
is a non standardised supplementary service.
EMLPPRIO EMLPP PRIORITY ONLY
Evaluate only the eMLPP priority table during call
setup. This feature only applies to GSM-R
projects.
EMRGPRT PRINTOUT OF EMERGENCY RECORDS
EMRGSIM EMERGENCY CALL WITHOUT SIMCARD
EMRGTRAC EMERGENCY CALL TRACE
ESVSIG ESV SIGNALLING
ETHRTS11 THRESHOLD REPORT ONLY FOR TS11
ETRREP THRESHOLD REPORT; REPORT ONLY
ETSS EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
EXTOMT EXTENSION OF NUMBER OF OMTS
FCLNTREC CHARGE FREE CLIENT RECORDS
FCSSIND FORW. CHECK SUPPL. SERV. IND.
FEATXXXX FEATURE XXXX
Feature number XXXX with 0277 <= XXXX <= 0512.
Purpose of those features are stated in the Switch
Commander.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 4+
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FLAMCOMP FLAM COMPR. FOR BILLING DATA
FMHLRIW FOLLOW ME HLR
FMTMN FAULT MANAGEMENT FOR TMN
FRAUDPR FRAUD PREVENTION
GENCID GENERAL CALL ID
GPRSMSUB HLR SUB. ADMIN. WITH GPRS DATA
MSUB in HLR are administrable with GPRS DATA
GSINTERF GS INTERFACE FOR VLR
Feature flag for GS Interface in the MSC/VLR. The
GS Interface connects the databases in the MSC/VLR
and the Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN), in order
to coordinate the location information of MS that
are attached to both GSM and GPRS services.
GSMRSUBA GSM R SUBADDRESSING
HBASCI HOT BILLING ASCI
HBCF HOT BILLING CF
HBEMC HOT BILLING EMC
HBLR HOT BILL. FOR LOCATION REQUEST
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
hot billing feature for the location request.
HBMOC HOT BILLING MOC
HBMTC HOT BILLING MTC
HBSCI HOT BILLING SCI
HBSMSMO HOT BILLING SMS MO
HBSMSMT HOT BILLING SMS MT
HLRACQ3 HLR/AC ADMINISTRATION VIA Q3
This parameter specifies whether HLR and AC
administration is possible via Q3 interface
of MP:OAM platform.
HLRGRPCP HLR GROUP CMD
HOTBFD HOT BILLING FLUSH DELAY
HOTBGMSC HOT BILLING IN GATEWAY MSC
HPLMNRO OWN PLMN ROAMING
IACAMA INTERADM CHARGING AMA TICKETS
IACTRA INTERADM CHARGE TRANSIT REC
IHO3G2G INTERNAL HANDOVER 3G TO 2G
This feature enables the UMTS - UMTS handover
function. Source and target cells are located
in different MSCs.
IMEICHK IMEI CHECK
IMEIID IMEI IDENT. FOR AMA TICKET
IMPLDET IMPLICIT DETACH
IMSITRAC IMSI TRACING
INFONCAP FORMAT IN RECORDS ON CAP
INTELAMT INTELLIGENT TERMINAL AMT
JURINC JURIDICAL INTERCEPTION
KEYMML SECURITY KEY MANAGEM. VIA MML
KEYSAS SECURITY KEY MANAGEM. VIA SAS
LACSUPP LAC SUPPRESSION ALLOWANCE
LAIROUT LOCATION AREA IDENT. ROUTING
LCS LOCATION SERVICES FEATURE
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
location services feature.
LTGPOOL LTG POOLING
LUPGTTF LUP GTT FAIL. NO NETW. FAIL.
LUPMAP1 LUP MAP PH.1 NO PLMN N. ALLOW.
LUPMAP2 LUP MAP PH.2 NO PLMN N. ALLOW.
MBANDCM3 MULTI BAND CLASSM3
MPCOUNT SUPPORT METERPULSE COUNT
MSCHO MSC MSC HANDOVER
MSUBACC CAN MSUB IN AC
MSUBEXD MSUB EXPIRY DATE
MULHLDAY MULTIPLE HOLIDAY CALENDAR
MULINTPR MULTIPLE INTERNAT. PREFIXES
MULNDC MULTIPLE NATIONAL DEST. CODE
MULTIK4 MULTIPLE K4 ALGORITHM
MULTINU MULTINUMBERING
MULTINUD MULTINUMBERING FOR UDI
MULTLAC MULTIPLE LAC PER MOB. NETWORK
NATCBN NAT CHARGE BAND NUM
NAT0SPC INA SPC FOR NET. INDIC. NAT 0
For INA tickets, the SPC will be delivered only
for the Network Indicator NAT 0.
NCIDBYCF NEW CALL ID BY CF
NDCINSN NDC INPUT IN SN
NDCSUPPR NAT. DEST. CODE SUPPRESSION
NICA NETWORK INITIATED CONTEXT ACT.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 5+
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This feature flag enables or disables the Gc
interface between HLR and GGSN.
The functionality associated to this feature flag
is not available in this release.
NONOTCCF NO CF NOTIFICATION FOR CCF
NONOTCFU NO CF NOTIFICATION FOR CFU
NOPROIR NO PROGRESS IND IRIDIUM
NOTITOP TICKET SUPPR CALLS ICPT OPER
NPCCBS CCBS PORTED SUBSCRIB. WITH SRF
CCBS handling for number portability
NSFITMAD NO SET FLAG IN TM
NUMPORT NUMBER PORTABILITY
OACSU OFF AIR CALL SET UP
ODB OPERATOR DETERMINED BARRING
ODFEAT01 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 01
ODFEAT02 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 02
ODFEAT03 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 03
ODFEAT04 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 04
ODFEAT05 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 05
ODFEAT06 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 06
ODFEAT07 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 07
ODFEAT08 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 08
ODFEAT09 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 09
ODFEAT10 OFFICE DEPEND FEATURE 10
ODFEAT11 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 11
ODFEAT12 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 12
ODFEAT13 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 13
ODFEAT14 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 14
ODFEAT15 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 15
ODFEAT20 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 20
ODFEAT21 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 21
ODFEAT22 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 22
ODFEAT23 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 23
ODFEAT24 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 24
ODFEAT25 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 25
ODFEAT26 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 26
ODFEAT27 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 27
ODFEAT28 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 28
ODFEAT29 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 29
ODFEAT30 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 30
ODFEAT31 OFFICE DEPENDENT FEATURE 31
ORECF OR OF EARLY CALL FORWARDING
This feature flag allows to indicate that GMSC and
HLR are capable to handle optimal routing
for early call forwarding.
ORLCF OR OF LATE CALL FORWARDING
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
optimal routing function of late call forwarding.
ORMMC OR OF MOBILE-TO-MOBILE CALLS
This feature flag allows to indicate that GMSC and
HLR are capable to handle optimal routing of
Mobile-to-Mobile calls.
PAGNGSIF PAGING VIA GS INTERFACE
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
paging via Gs Interface.
PBXEXTO PABX NUMBER EXT. ONLY
PBXNOSNT SENT PABX NUMBER FOR PABX OG
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
sending of the PABX number for a PABX outgoing
call.
PBXWEXT PABX NUMBER WITH EXT.
PICIDXTR PIC INDEX TRANSLATION
This feature flag enables the Preferred
Interexchange carrier (PIC) assigned to a mobile
subscriber in the HLR to be used as an index in
the MSC. This index is translated via newcode
handling into the real carrier access code. In
this way, two PICs can be used for each mobile
subscriber.
PISCB PORTED IN SPECIFIC CB
PLMNRES PLMN RESTRICTION
POSCB PORTED OUT SPECIFIC CB
PPSCSUBS PPSC SUBSCRIBER SERVICE
PRCIPAG PROVIDE CI FOR PAGING
PURGINIT VLR PURGING INITIATION
During creation of a new subscriber record within
the VLR, another subscriber record is purged, if
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 6+
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the VLR database is filled up to 80% and the last
radio access of the MS is older than 5 days.
QUEUING QUEUING / PREEMPTION
REGRO REGIONAL ROAMING
RESUBMML REENCRYPT AC SUB. DATA VIA MML
RESUBSAS REENCRYPT AC SUB. DATA VIA SAS
ROUATMCN ROUTE TO ATM CORE NETWORK
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
routing to additional ATM trunks in Core Network.
RSCELLBA REG.SUBSCRIPTION ON CELL BASIS
RSCELLID RS CELL ID SUBSCR CHECK
SCCPROER SCCP RETURN ON ERROR
SCMINP SERV CLASS MARK IND NUM PL
SCMNDCSP NDC/LAC SUPPR. FOR SCM SUB.
SECREG SECURE REGEN/LOG WITHOUT SAS
SECSAS SECURITY EVENTS VIA SAS
SECSSS SECURITY EVENTS VIA SSS FILE
SIMCHANG SIMCARD CHANGE OVER
SKIPFRAM SKIP FORCED ROUT AUTH MANAG
SKIPLCCH SKIP LAC CI CHECK
SNRFIXSD SHORT NUM. ROUT. FIX./SUBDEP.
SNRSERVC SHORT NUM. ROUT. SERV. CENTER
SPNUHAN SPECIAL NUMBER HANDLING
SRECFILE S-RECORD FILE RESTRICTION
SSERVLTG SPECIAL SERV. NB. IN BSSAP LTG
SSUTR2 SUPPORT SSUTR2 CHARGING
SUBBAPRE SUBSTIT. BAR PR ENTERTAINMENT
SUBBAPRI SUBSTITUTE BAR PR INFO
SUBCMISE SUBSCRIBER ADMIN. VIA CMISE
SUBLSRET SUBLOC STATRETR
SUBOSBA1 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 1
SUBOSBA2 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 2
SUBOSBA3 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 3
SUBOSBA4 SUBSTITUTE OP SPEC BAR 4
SUBQUEU SUBSCRIBER RELATED QUEUING
SUBSAS SUBSCRIBER ADMIN. VIA SAS
SUPBAASN SUPPRESS BAR CHECK
SUPCIPHC SUPPRESS CIPH CMD
TDIOPAUC TEST/DIAG. OF IOP:AUC VIA SAS
TEMPLSUB TEMPL SUB POSS
THRREP THRESHOLD REPORTING
TINCWER TERMINATE IN CALLS WITH ERRORS
TMSIREAL TMSI REALLOCATION
TS21GPRS SMS MT OVER SGSN OF GPRS
Short message mobile terminated over SGSN of GPRS
TS22GPRS SMS MO OVER SGSN OF GPRS
Short message mobile originated over SGSN of GPRS
TWOIMSI TWO IMSI PER SUBSCRIBER
UCIPHMEC UMTS CIPHERING MECHANISM
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
UMTS ciphering mechanism.
UKEYCTRL UMTS KEY LIFETIME CONTROL
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
UMTS integrity/cipher key lifetime control.
UNILACOD UNIQUE LOCATION AREA CODE
This feature flag allows to use the parameters
MCC and MNC for unique LACOD definition.
USECEMC UMTS SECURITY DURING EMERGENCY
This feature flag allows to switch on and off the
UMTS security mechanism during emergency.
USINUPDO USER INITIATED UP/-DOWNGRADING
USSDVCOD USSD VPLMN COD HAND FOR SUBSCR
USSD VPLMN code handling for foreign subscriber
USSD2 USSD ACCORDING MAP VERSION 2
Unstructured supplementary service data (USSD)
mechanism according to MAP protocol version 2.
VBS VOICE BRAODCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
VIRHLRID VIRTUAL HLRID
VLRQUERY VLR QUERY
VLRSTAL VLR STAND ALONE
VSEXTEND VGCS/VBS EXTENDED FEATURE
In case of VGCS/VBS calls, the group call area can
be extended to more than one MSC. A total of 8
MSCs, one anchor MSC and up to seven relay MSCs,
is possible.
VSUBORIG DISP FOR NUMBER OF SUB IN VLR
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 7+
MOD MSERVOPT
FEATURE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display for number of subscribers in VLR
ZOINTNO ZONING WITH REAL INTERCEPT NUM
In case a MOC is intercepted and rerouted to an
announcement located outside the A-MSC by means of
CR INC, this feature flag enables zoning with
the routing digits defined by INRES=NEWCOD
instead of the B-party number.
STAT STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
The use of the specified service/feature is
allowed.
BLK BLOCKED
The use of the specified service/feature is
not allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 8+
MOD MSERVOPT
RACHPROP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
RADIO CHANN. TRANS. PROPERTIES
This input format is used to modify the radio channel transmission
properties (radio channel requirement and connection element).
Note: The modification of the radio channel transmission properties
may be blocked project dependent.

[ [
[ [
[ [TSERV=[ ; [
[ MOD MSERVOPT : BSERV= <,CONNEL= ,RACHRQ=> [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TSERV TELESERVICE
This parameter specifies the teleservices.
It is possible to select a single or all teleservices.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL TELESERVICES
TS11 TELEPHONY
TS12 EMERGENCY CALL
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
BSERV BEARER SERVICE
This parameter specifies the bearer services.
It is possible to select a single or all bearer services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL BEARER SERVICES
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A. SERVICES
General bearer service, asynchronous data service.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S. SERVICES
General bearer service, non-transparent synchr.
data service
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS CA SERVICES
General bearer service, dedicated pad service.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH / DATA C.D.A
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA C.D.A
CONNEL CONNECTION ELEMENT
This parameter specifies the type of radio transmission supported by
the PLMN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 9+
MOD MSERVOPT
RACHPROP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BNONTR BOTH/NON-TRANSPARENT PREFERRED
Radio channel transmission with and without radio
link protocol is possible, however transmission
with RLP is preferred.
BTR BOTH/TRANSPARENT PREFERRED
Radio channel transmission with and without radio
link protocol is possible, however transmission
without RLP is preferred.
NONTR NON-TRANSPARENT
Non-transparent radio transmission with Radio Link
Protocol (RLP).
TR TRANSPARENT
Transparent radio transmission without Radio Link
Protocol (RLP).
RACHRQ RADIO CHANNEL REQUIREMENT
This parameter specifies the transmission rate of traffic channels
supported by the PLMN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DFRCH DUAL/FULL RATE CHANNEL PREF.
Radio channel transmission with full and half rate
possible, however full rate transmission is pre-
ferred.
DHRCH DUAL/HALF RATE CHANNEL PREF.
Radio channel transmission with full and half rate
possible, however half rate transmission is pre-
ferred.
FRCH FULL RATE CHANNEL
Radio channel transmission with full rate.
HRCH HALF RATE CHANNEL
Radio channel transmission with half rate.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 10+
MOD MSERVOPT
SCI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED INPUT
This input format is used to enable or disable the subscriber controlled
input for supplementary services.
Note: The modification of the SCI status may be blocked project dependent.
The SCI function interrogation is always possible.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD MSERVOPT : SSERV= ,SCI= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SSERV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies the supplementary services.
It is possible to select a single or all supplementary services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
CALLBACK CALL BACK
CALLTRAN CALL TRANSFER
CALLWAIT CALL WAITING
CBIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT BARR. IC ROAMING NON HPLMN
CBOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC BARRING OF OUTGOING INT. CALLS
CBOICEXH BARR. OG INT. NON HPLMN CALLS
CFBUSY CALL FORW. ON SUB BUSY
CFNREACH CALL FORW. ON SUB NOT REACH.
CFNREPLY CALL FORWARDING ON NO REPLY
CFU CALL FORWARDING UNCONDITIONAL
SCI SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED INPUT
This parameter specifies the status of subscriber controlled input for
the specified supplementary service.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NO SUB. CONTR. INPUT NOT ALLOWED
Subscriber controlled input is not allowed.
YES SUB. CONTR. INPUT ALLOWED
Subscriber controlled input is allowed.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 11+
MOD MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SERVICE STATUS
This input format is used to modify the status of the services.
Note: The modification of the status of certain services may
be blocked project dependent.

[ [
[ [
[ [TSERV= [ [
[ [BSERV= [ ; [
[ MOD MSERVOPT : SSERV= ,STAT= [
[ [DPFCFEAT=[ ! [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
TSERV TELESERVICE
This parameter specifies the teleservices.
It is possible to select a single or all teleservices.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL TELESERVICES
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
TS91 VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
TS92 VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
BSERV BEARER SERVICE
This parameter specifies the bearer services.
It is possible to select a single or all bearer services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL BEARER SERVICES
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A. SERVICES
General bearer service, asynchronous data service.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S. SERVICES
General bearer service, non-transparent synchr.
data service
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS CA SERVICES
General bearer service, dedicated pad service.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH / DATA C.D.A
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA C.D.A
SSERV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter specifies the supplementary services.
It is possible to select a single or all supplementary services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 12+
MOD MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ALL ALL SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
AOCCHRG ADVICE OF CHARGE (CHARGING)
AOCINFO ADVICE OF CHARGE (INFORMATION)
CALLBACK CALL BACK
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
CALLTRAN CALL TRANSFER
CALLWAIT CALL WAITING
CBIC BARRING OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT BARR. IC ROAMING NON HPLMN
CBOC BARRING OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC BARRING OF OUTGOING INT. CALLS
CBOICEXH BARR. OG INT. NON HPLMN CALLS
CCBSA CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUB. A
That supplementary service enables the completion
of call to busy subscriber, originating side.
CCBSB CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUB. B
That supplementary service enables the completion
of call to busy subscriber, terminating side.
CFBUSY CALL FORW. ON SUB BUSY
CFNREACH CALL FORW. ON SUB NOT REACH.
CFNREPLY CALL FORWARDING ON NO REPLY
CFU CALL FORWARDING UNCONDITIONAL
CLIP CALLING LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
A PLMN which supports GSM CLIP service supports
also the CLIR service.
CLIR CALLING LINE IDENT. RESTRICT.
In case of CLIP service active, the CLIR service
has also to be activated.
COLP CONNECTED LINE IDENT. PRESENT.
A PLMN which supports GSM COLP service supports
also the COLR service.
COLR CONNECTED LINE IDENT. RESTRIC.
In case of COLP service active, the COLR service
has also to be activated.
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
EMLPP ENH MULT LEV PREC AND PRE-EMPT
Enhanced multi-level precedence and pre-emption
FROUT FORCED ROUT NAT SUPPL SERVICE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
INSCMMOC IN SERVICE CLASS MARK FOR MOC
INSCMMTC IN SERVICE CLASS MARK FOR MTC
MPTY MULTI PARTY SERVICE
NATCCBS COMPLETION CALLS TO BUSY SUB
NATSS01 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 01
NATSS02 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 02
NATSS03 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 03
NATSS04 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 04
NATSS05 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 05
NATSS06 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 06
NATSS07 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 07
NATSS08 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 08
NATSS09 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 09
NATSS10 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 10
NATSS11 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 11
NATSS12 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 12
NATSS13 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 13
NATSS14 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 14
NATSS15 NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE 15
USERSIG1 USER TO USER SIGNAL SERVICE 1
DPFCFEAT DPFC FEATURES
This parameter specifies the features in the subscriber
dependent digit processing and feature control feature
package.
It is possible to select a single or all features.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACTINC ACC. CODE TYPE INCOMING CALL
ACTTPCS ACCESS CODE TYPE TRANSLAT PCS
ACCESS CODE TYPE TRANSLATION PCS
AMBIGCOD SUPP OF AMBIG CODE WITHOUT SPL
SUPP OF AMBIGUOURS CODE WITHOUT SPLITING
ANNDCS ANNOUNCEMENT DURING CALL SETUP
ANUMDPRC NUMBER DEPEND ROUT AND CHARGIN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 13+
MOD MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A NUMBER DEPENDENT ROUTING AND CHARGING
AOCTGS AOC TARIF FOR CERT GR OF SUBS
AOC TARIFFS FOR CERTAIN GROUPS OF SUBSCRIBERS
ASLIFOP SUBSCR LOCAT INFO FOR OPERATOR
A SUBSCRIBER LOCATION INFORMATION FOR OPERATOR
CACSDDP SDDPFC CARRIER ACCESS CODE
CBSDFS CALL BLOCKING FOR FOR SUBSCR
CALL BLOCKING FOR FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS
CBSDSS CALL BLOCKING FOR SPEC SUBSCR
CALL BLOCKING FOR SPECIAL SUBSCRIBERS
CLIRTMIN CLIR TEMPORARY MODE INVOCATION
CORSINOV CORI SHORTC NETW OVERLAY STRUC
CORI SHORTCODES IN NETWORK OVERLAY STRUCTURE
DCFSSMTC MTC DEL CTRL FOR SPEC SUBSCR
MTC DELIVERY CONTROL FOR SPECIAL SUBSCRIBERS
DIFKEYA DIF PLU TREAT FOR OWN AND ROAM
DIFF PLUS TREATMENT FOR OWN AND ROAMERS
ENHSPNDC ENHANCED SUPPRESSION OF NDC
EVALCSI EVALUATION OF CSI
FRHRTANP FULLRATE/HALFRATE TANDEM PREV
FULLRATE/HALFRATE TANDEM PREVENTION
IDSCPACC IMSI DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
IDVMSCF CF IMSI DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
IDVMSMOC MOC IMSI DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
INOVLMTC IN OVERLAY SOLUT FOR MTC
INTRIG IN TRIGGERING
IPTGCGS CERT GRPS IMMED PRINT TICK GEN
CERTAIN GROUPS IMMEDIATE PRINTOUT TICKET GENER
IPTGCSS IMMED PRINTOUT AND TICKET GEN
IMMEDIATE PRINTOUT AND TICKET GENERATION
IRDRCF CF IMSI RANGE DEPEND ROUTING
CF IMSI RANGE DEPENDENT ROUTING
IRDRMOC MOC IMSI RANGE DEPEND ROUTING
MOC IMSI RANGE DEPENDENT ROUTING
IRDRMTC MTC IMSI RANGE DEPEND ROUTING
MTC IMSI RANGE DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRALL ALL LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRCF CF LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRINC ICALL LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRMOC MOC LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LDRMTC MTC LENGTH DEPENDENT ROUTING
LOCDRINC ICALL LOCATION DEPEND ROUTING
ICALL LOCATION DEPENDENT ROUTING
LOCDRMOC MOC LOCATION DEPENDENT ROUTING
MDSCPACC MSISDN DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
MDVMSCF CF MSISDN DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
MDVMSMOC MOC MSISDN DEPENDENT VMS ACC
MOC MSISDN DEPENDENT VMS ACCESS
NSSDSCPA NAT SUPPL SERVICE DEP SCP ACC
NAT SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
OTASAPUS OTASAP IN USR5
PAYREMIN PAYMENT REMINDER SERVICE
PROJSF01 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 01
PROJSF02 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 02
PROJSF03 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 03
PROJSF04 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 04
PROJSF05 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 05
PROJSF06 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 06
PROJSF07 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 07
PROJSF08 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 08
PROJSF09 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 09
PROJSF10 PROJECT SPECIFIC FEATURE 10
RDFSPL ROUT TO ANN FOR SUBSCR LANG
ROUTING TO ANNOUNC FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS LANGUAGE
RDOSPL ROUT TO ANN OWN SUBSCR LANGUAG
ROUTING TO ANNOUNC OWN SUBSCRIBERS LANGUAGE
RSDFSCF CF RESTRIC FOR FOREIGN SUBSCR
CF RESTRICTION FOR FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS
RSDSSCF CF RESTRICTION FOR SPEC SUBSCR
CF RESTRICTION FOR SPECIAL SUBSCRIBERS
SCDSCPAC SUBSCR CAT DEPENDENT SCP ACC
SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
SCMINDNP SCM INDEPENDENT OF NUMBER PLAN
SCM INDEPENDENT OF NUMMBERING PLAN
SDRMOC MOC SSIND DEPENDENT ROUTING
SERVCF SERVICES FOR CF AND MOC
SERVMOC SERVICES FOR MOC
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 14+
MOD MSERVOPT
SERVICE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SLDSCPAC SUBSCR LOCATION DEP SCP ACC
SUBSCRIBER LOCATON DEPENDENT SCP ACCESS
SOFPSFS SUPPORT OF FOR PLMN SHORTCODES
SUPPORT OF FOREIGN PLMN SHORTCODES
SPWSRSWS PLMN WI SUB REL SHTC W SIE HLR
PLMN WIDE SUB REL SHORTCOD WITHOUT SIEMENS HLR
SRELFFS SREL FOR FOREIGN SUBSCRIBERS
SRFALL ALL SPECIAL ROUTING
SRFCF CF SPECIAL ROUTING
SRFINC ICALL SPECIAL ROUTING
SRFMOC MOC SPECIAL ROUTING
SRFMTC MTC SPECIAL ROUTING
SRMOCCF MOC OR CFVMSC SPECIAL ROUTING
STGCGS SUPPR TICKKET GENERAT GROUPS
STGCGSCD SUPPR TICK GEN GRPS CERT DEST
SUPPR TICKET GENERAT GROUPS CERTAIN DEST
SZONFALL ALL SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFCF CF SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFINC INC SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFMOC MOC SPECIAL ZONNING
SZONFMTC MTC SPECIAL ZONNING
STAT STATUS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
The use of the specified service/feature is
allowed.
BLK BLOCKED
The use of the specified service/feature is
not allowed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSERVOPT- 15-
SEL MSG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT MESSAGE
This command outputs all messages associated with a specified message group.
In addition, the allocation of message to standard message group is displayed
if the message is allocated to customer a message group.
If only GRPNO=0 is input, all messages that are not assigned to a
standard message group or were assigned retrospectively to a message
group are output.
To display the allocation of message to message group, use command DISP MSGLNK
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL MSG : <MSGRP= ,GRPNO=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter designates a message group.
Note:
- message group names can also be entered left-justified and
partially qualified.
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...21 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GRPNO MESSAGE GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the group number which corresponds to the
OMDS data type.
Note:
- a maximum of 5 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL MSG- 1-
DISP MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MESSAGE LINK
This command displays the specified messages which are assigned to
the message groups.
If a message is allocated to a customer device group, this
connection is always active.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MSGLNK : [MSG=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSG MESSAGE
This parameter designates a message.
Note:
- there are two types of messages: command response messages and
system messages.
- system context for system messages with the following possible
values:
SPT spontaneous message which is not an alarm
Alarm contexts:
SYOP SYSTEM OPERATOR CALL
SYPUPD SYSTEM PANEL UPDATE
SYPCHNG SYSTEM PANEL CHANGE
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE ALARM
CALLID CALL IDENTIFICATION
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
CU CENTRAL UNIT ALARM
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR ALARM
MB MESSAGE BUFFER ALARM
SN SWITCHING NETWORK ALARM
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ALARM
LNMAIN LINE MAINTENANCE ALARM
LNLNCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK ALARM
TRMAIN TRUNK MAINTENANCE ALARM
TGBL TRUNKGROUP BLOCKED
TGAL TRUNKGROUP ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
SYP SYSTEM PANEL ALARM
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
NLMPAL NO LAMP ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
SERV SERVICE CIRCUITS
TAXUP CCS7 TAXATION USER PART
TIMESYNC EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
ATMF ATM FABRIC
- project-specific some of the values may be unused.
- a maximum of 10 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Corresponds to the command code in a
command response message or the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSGLNK- 1+
DISP MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
system context in a system message.
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: FORMAT=
0...99999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSGLNK- 2-
RSET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
RESET MESSAGE LINK
This command restores the standard assignment of messages to message
groups. If a message was assigned to a customer message group,
this link is removed. This results in the messages being output
according to their standard message groups again.
Prerequisite:
- the messages must exist.
The standard allocation to which the message is to be reset can be
displayed with the command SEL MSG or DISP MSGLNK.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ RSET MSGLNK : MSG= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSG MESSAGE
This parameter designates a message.
Note:
- there are two types of messages: command response messages and
system messages.
- system context for system messages with the following possible
values:
SPT spontaneous message which is not an alarm
Alarm contexts:
SYOP SYSTEM OPERATOR CALL
SYPUPD SYSTEM PANEL UPDATE
SYPCHNG SYSTEM PANEL CHANGE
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE ALARM
CALLID CALL IDENTIFICATION
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
CU CENTRAL UNIT ALARM
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR ALARM
MB MESSAGE BUFFER ALARM
SN SWITCHING NETWORK ALARM
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ALARM
LNMAIN LINE MAINTENANCE ALARM
LNLNCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK ALARM
TRMAIN TRUNK MAINTENANCE ALARM
TGBL TRUNKGROUP BLOCKED
TGAL TRUNKGROUP ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
SYP SYSTEM PANEL ALARM
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
NLMPAL NO LAMP ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
SERV SERVICE CIRCUITS
TAXUP CCS7 TAXATION USER PART
TIMESYNC EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
ATMF ATM FABRIC
- project-specific some of the values may be unused.
- a maximum of 10 parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET MSGLNK- 1+
RSET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Corresponds to the command code in a
command response message or the
system context in a system message.
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
b: FORMAT=
0...99999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 RSET MSGLNK- 2-
SET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET MESSAGE LINK
This command modifies the assignment of messages to message groups.
A distinction should be made between the following two cases:
- the original message group is a standard message group. In this case, the
assignment to the original message group remains but the message control
only takes account of the assignment to the new message group.
- the old message group is not a standard message group. In this case,
there is no assignment to the old message group; the messages are
assigned to the new message group.
Prerequisite:
- the messages and the message group must exist.
- the message group must have been created via MML command or must be
a standard message group.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ SET MSGLNK : MSG= ,MSGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSG MESSAGE
This parameter designates a message.
Note:
- there are two types of messages: command response messages and system
messages.
- system context for system messages with the following possible
values:
SPT spontaneous message which is not an alarm
Alarm contexts:
SYOP SYSTEM OPERATOR CALL
ADMINAL ADMINISTRATION ALARM
TIMINSEC TIME INSECURE ALARM
CALLID CALL IDENTIFICATION
CAT1 CAT LEVEL 1
CAT2 CAT LEVEL 2
MAL MAINTENANCE ALARM
SAL SERVICE ALARM
CU CENTRAL UNIT ALARM
CLOCK CENTRAL CLOCK GENERATOR ALARM
MB MESSAGE BUFFER ALARM
SN SWITCHING NETWORK ALARM
CCS COMMON CHANNEL SIGNALING ALARM
LNMAIN LINE MAINTENANCE ALARM
LNLNCKOUT LINE LOCKOUT ALARM
SIGLINK SIGNALING LINK ALARM
TRMAIN TRUNK MAINTENANCE ALARM
TGBL TRUNKGROUP BLOCKED
TGAL TRUNKGROUP ALARM
LTG LTG ALARM
DLU DLU ALARM
SYP SYSTEM PANEL ALARM
EALEXCH EXTERNAL EXCHANGE ALARM
EALDLU EXTERNAL DLU ALARM
NLMPAL NO LAMP ALARM
OVLD OVERLOAD ALARM
RECOV RECOVERY ALARM
DIU DIGITAL INTERFACE UNIT
SERV SERVICE CIRCUITS
TAXUP CCS7 TAXATION USER PART
TIMESYNC EXTERNAL TIME SYNCHRONIZATION
ATMF ATM FABRIC
- project-specific some of the values may be unused.
- a maximum of ten parameter values can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET MSGLNK- 1+
SET MSGLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: CONTEXT=
1...12 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Corresponds to the command code in a
command response message or the
system context in a system message.
The following characters are not permitted:
.,+,*,%,#
b: FORMAT=
0...99999, range of decimal numbers
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter designates a message group.
Note:
- the last character may not be a period.
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...21 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET MSGLNK- 2-
CAN MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MESSAGE GROUP
This command cancels message groups which have been created via
the MML command CR MSGRP.
Prerequisite:
- The message groups may not be standard message groups.
- The message groups must exist.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MSGRP : MSGRP= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter designates a message group.
Note:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
- the last character may not be a period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...21 characters from the
symbolic name character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSGRP- 1-
CR MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MESSAGE GROUP
This command creates a customer message group and the assignment to a
customer device group or a standard device group.
Prerequisite:
- the name of a standard message group may not be specified in the
command.
- The device group corresponding to parameter DVGRP must have been
created with the command CR DVGRP.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MSGRP : MSGRP= ,GRPNO= [,DVGRP=] [,STDDG=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter designates a message group.
Note:
- the last character may not be a period.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GRPNO MESSAGE GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the group number which corresponds to the
OMDS data type.
Notes:
- 2800<=GRPNO<=3295: reserved for standard message groups;
3296<=GRPNO<=3299: reserved for message groups which can
register unknown messages;
- if one of the three numbers 3296, 3297 or 3298 are entered for
the parameter GRPNO, the following implicit assignment is made:
- GRPNO = 3296 : the message group which has been created contains all
unknown command messages.
- GRPNO = 3297 : the message group which has been created contains all
unknown alarm messages.
- GRPNO = 3298 : the message group which has been created contains all
unknown spontaneous messages.
- the group numbers can only be specified at random in the area
3300-3500.
- A list of the unknown messages can be obtained using command SEL MSG
: GRPNO=0;
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
3296,3297,3298...3500, range of decimal numbers
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group of the message control.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STDDG STANDARD DEVICE GROUP
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSGRP- 1+
CR MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
WPB WASTE PAPER BASKET
Messages belonging to a message group
which is assigned to device group
WPB are suppressed, if OUTPUT SUPPRESSION
is not deactivated.
SRCOMT SOURCE TERMINAL
Messages belonging to a message group
assigned to device group SRCOMT
are output on the input device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSGRP- 2-
SEL MSGRP
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT MESSAGE GROUP
This command outputs all message groups are assigned to the
specified device group, or all message groups assigned
to a standard device group.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ SEL MSGRP : <DVGRP= ,STDDG=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter designates a device group of the message control.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STDDG STANDARD DEVICE GROUP
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
WPB WASTE PAPER BASKET
Messages belonging to a message group
which is assigned to device group
WPB are suppressed, if OUTPUT SUPPRESSION
is not deactivated.
SRCOMT SOURCE TERMINAL
Messages belonging to a message group
assigned to device group SRCOMT
are output on the input device.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SEL MSGRP- 1-
DISP MSGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MESSAGE GROUP LINK
This command displays all customer and standard device
groups associated with one of the specified message groups. At least one
of the two parameters must be specified.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP MSGRPLNK : [MSGRP=] [,GRPNO=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter specifies a message group. Names of message groups
can be input partially qualified and left-justified. Up to five
parameter values can be linked with &.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...21 characters from the
symbolic name character set
GRPNO MESSAGE GROUP NUMBER
This parameter specifies the data type assigned to the message
group. Up to five parameter values can be linked with &.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...9999, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSGRPLNK- 1-
SET MSGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SET MESSAGE GROUP LINK
This command sets the assignment of message groups to their device group.
The device group may either be a standard device group (STDDG) created
by the system or a device group created via MML command (DVGRP).
Prerequisites:
- The device group which corresponds to parameter DVGRP must have
previously been created using command CR DVGRP.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [,DVGRP=[ ; [
[ SET MSGRPLNK : MSGRP= ,STDDG= [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSGRP MESSAGE GROUP
This parameter specifies a message group.
Notes:
- a maximum of five parameter values can be linked with &.
- the last character may not be a period.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...21 characters from the
symbolic name character set
DVGRP DEVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a device group of the message control.
Notes:
- If one of the linked values of parameter MSGRP is
MSYP.ALARM or MSYP.REPORT the DVGRP must consist of
output devices of DCP type or applications which can handle
binary structured outputs.
These applications must have been created with the command
CR APPL with APPLID = SMMLB.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...17 characters from the
symbolic name character set
STDDG STANDARD DEVICE GROUP
This parameter specifies a standard device group.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
WPB WASTE PAPER BASKET
Messages belonging to a message group
which is assigned to device group
WPB are suppressed, if OUTPUT SUPPRESSION
is not deactivated.
SRCOMT SOURCE TERMINAL
Messages belonging to a message group
assigned to device group SRCOMT
are output on the input device.
Incompatibilities:
- In context of parameter STDDG with
identifier SRCOMT none of the linked
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET MSGRPLNK- 1+
SET MSGRPLNK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
values of parameter MSGRP may be
MSYP.ALARM or MSYP.REPORT.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 SET MSGRPLNK- 2-
CAN MSRNB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CAN MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK
This command cancels a mobile station routing number (MSRN) block.
Incompatibilities :
- No LACOD may be entered, if location area dependent MSRN
allocation is not allowed.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MSRNB : MSRNP= [,LACOD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSRNB- 1-
CR MSRNB
ATM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CR MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK
This command creates a mobile station routing number (MSRN) block.
The usage of the MSRN block depends on the MS routing number kind.
An MSRNB can be created either for:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number and handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number
In the MSRN block network internal numbers are allocated which are
required for routing calls and messages to the mobile subscriber.
Incompatibilities :
- The total length of MSRN (CC (Country Code) + MSRNP + MSRNR) may
not exceed the length of MSISDN and is project dependent.
- This command is rejected if the number of requested
MSRN blocks per MSRN kind exceed 20 entries.
- No LACOD may be entered if location area dependent MSRN
allocation is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value handover number
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value group call number
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value ATMMSRN
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value ATMHON
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value ATMGCN
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR MSRNB - ATM ATM PATH OF CR MSRNB
2. CR MSRNB - GCN GROUP CALL NUMBER
3. CR MSRNB - GLOBAL GLOBAL PATH OF CR MSRNB
1. Input format
ATM PATH OF CR MSRNB
Input format to create an MSRNB for ATMMSRN,
ATMHON or ATMGCN.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MSRNB : MSRNP= ,MSRNR= ,MSRNK= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSRNB- 1+
CR MSRNB
ATM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSRNR MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
MSRNK MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number and handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ATMGCN ATM GROUP CALL NUMBER
ATMHON ATM HANDOVER NUMBER
ATMMSRN ATM MS ROAMING NUMBER
Default: BOTH
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSRNB- 2+
CR MSRNB
GCN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GROUP CALL NUMBER
Input format to create an MSRNB for GCN.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MSRNB : MSRNP= ,MSRNR= ,MSRNK= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
MSRNR MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
MSRNK MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number and handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GCN GROUP CALL NUMBER
Default: BOTH
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSRNB- 3+
CR MSRNB
GLOBAL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
GLOBAL PATH OF CR MSRNB
Input format to create an MSRNB for MSRN, HON or BOTH.
Depending on MSRNK the LACOD can be entered.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MSRNB : MSRNP= ,MSRNR= [,MSRNK=] [,LACOD=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
MSRNR MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
MSRNK MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number and handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH BOTH
HON HANDOVER NUMBER
MSRN MS ROAMING NUMBER
Default: BOTH
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSRNB- 4-
DISP MSRNB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISP MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK
This command displays all created mobile station routing
number (MSRN) blocks.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MSRNB ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSRNB- 1-
MOD MSRNB
ATM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MOD MOBILE STATION ROUTING NUMBER BLOCK
This command has two functions:
1.It modifies an existing entry by a modified value of an MSRN range
and / or an MSRN kind and / or a location area code (LACOD).
2.It creates a new entry for MSRN prefix combined with an erasure
of the old entry specified by the MSRN prefix and the
location area code (LACOD).
When LACOD dependent allocation is required, both the old and the
new LACOD should be entered.
Incompatibilities :
- The total length of MSRN (CC (Country Code) + MSRNP + MSRNR) may
not exceed the length of MSISDN and is project dependent.
- This command will be rejected if the number of requested
MSRN blocks per MSRN kind exceed 20 entries.
- No LACOD may be entered if location area dependent MSRN
allocation is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value handover number
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value group call number
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value ATMMSRN
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value ATMHON
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
- In case the parameter MSRN kind contains the value ATMGCN
an input of LACOD is not allowed.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD MSRNB - ATM ATM PATH OF MOD MSRNB
2. MOD MSRNB - GCN GROUP CALL NUMBER
3. MOD MSRNB - LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
4. MOD MSRNB - OTHERS MSRNB KIND AND RANGE
5. MOD MSRNB - PREFIX MSRNB PREFIX
1. Input format
ATM PATH OF MOD MSRNB
Input format to modify an MSRNB for ATMMSRN,
ATMHON or ATMGCN.

[ [
[ MOD MSRNB : MSRNP= ,NMSRNP= [,NMSRNR=] [,NMSRNK=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
NMSRNP NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSRNB- 1+
MOD MSRNB
ATM
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
NMSRNR NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the new validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
NMSRNK NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the new usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number, handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ATMGCN ATM GROUP CALL NUMBER
ATMHON ATM HANDOVER NUMBER
ATMMSRN ATM MS ROAMING NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSRNB- 2+
MOD MSRNB
GCN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
GROUP CALL NUMBER
Input format to modify the MSRNB for GCN.

[ [
[ MOD MSRNB : MSRNP= ,NMSRNR= ,NMSRNK= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
NMSRNR NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the new validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
NMSRNK NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the new usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number, handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GCN GROUP CALL NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSRNB- 3+
MOD MSRNB
LACOD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
LOCATION AREA CODE
Input format to modify the LACOD for MSRN and BOTH.

[ [
[ MOD MSRNB : MSRNP= ,LACOD= ,NLACOD= [,NMSRNR=] [,NMSRNK=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
NLACOD NEW LOCATION AREA CODE
NLACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
NMSRNR NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the new validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
NMSRNK NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the new usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number, handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH BOTH
HON HANDOVER NUMBER
MSRN MS ROAMING NUMBER
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSRNB- 4+
MOD MSRNB
OTHERS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
MSRNB KIND AND RANGE
Input format to modify a MSRNR or / and a MSRNK.

[ [
[ MOD MSRNB : MSRNP= <,NMSRNR= ,NMSRNK=> [,LACOD=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
NMSRNR NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the new validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
NMSRNK NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the new usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number, handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH BOTH
HON HANDOVER NUMBER
MSRN MS ROAMING NUMBER
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSRNB- 5+
MOD MSRNB
PREFIX
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
MSRNB PREFIX
Input format to modify a MSRNP.

[ [
[ MOD MSRNB : MSRNP= ,NMSRNP= [,LACOD=] [,NMSRNR=] [,NMSRNK=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSRNP MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
NMSRNP NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER PREFIX
This parameter specifies the leading digits (including the national
destination code and the MSC identification without the country code)
of the MSRN block.
The allowed format is defined by individual PTTs on a project
specific basis.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 digit decimal number
LACOD LOCATION AREA CODE
LACOD a: 0..65535
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...65535, range of decimal numbers
NMSRNR NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER RANGE
This parameter specifies the new validity range of the MSRN block.
Within this scope MSRN will be allocated.
e.g. If the range is 4, MSRN will be allocated ending from
...0000 up to ...9999.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6, range of decimal numbers
NMSRNK NEW MS ROUTING NUMBER KIND
This parameter specifies the new usage of the MSRN block.
It may be either used as:
- a mobile station roaming number
- a handover number
- both (mobile station roaming number, handover number)
- a group call number
- an ATM mobile station roaming number
- an ATM handover number
- an ATM group call number.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
BOTH BOTH
HON HANDOVER NUMBER
MSRN MS ROAMING NUMBER
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSRNB- 6-
CAN MSUB
CANHLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This command deletes the complete subscriber entry in the HLR
and/or in external entities where the mobile subscriber is
currently registered.
Prerequisites:
- A linkage with another mobile subscriber has to be
deleted (CAN MSUBLINK).
- A SIM card changeover task has to be deleted (CAN SIMCCH).
- To delete a profile subscriber all references to this subscriber
have to be deleted first (MOD MSUB).
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CAN MSUB - CANHLR CANCEL MSUB IN HLR
2. CAN MSUB - IWMSUB INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
3. CAN MSUB - SGSN CANCEL MSUB IN SGSN
4. CAN MSUB - VLR CANCEL MSUB IN VLR
5. CAN MSUB - VLRSGSN CANCEL MSUB IN VLR AND SGSN
1. Input format
CANCEL MSUB IN HLR
This input format is used to cancel a mobile subscriber
in the home location register and in external entities.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MSUB : MSIN= [,FILTER=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
FILTER FILTER FOR MSUB ENTRIES
This parameter specifies which mobile subscribers are to be
processed.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter must be used, if more than one subscriber
is specified by parameter MSIN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 1+
CAN MSUB
CANHLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a: FILTER TYPE
ALLMSUB ALL MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
DEFINED DEFINED FILTER
EXPIRED EXPIRED MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
b: FILTER NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter specifies the name of the filter,
which is used for deleting only those
mobile subscriber entries that match predefined filter
criteria.
Compatibilities:
- a = DEFINED
Prerequisites:
- The filter must have been created (CR FILTER).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 2+
CAN MSUB
IWMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
This input format is used to cancel a mobile subscriber
in a GSM-CDMA interworking node.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MSUB : IMSI= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MSUB IDENTITY
This parameter specifies the international
mobile subscriber identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 3+
CAN MSUB
SGSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
CANCEL MSUB IN SGSN
This input format is used to cancel a mobile subscriber in
the SGSN only.
Compatibilities:
- If more than one subscriber is specified by parameter MSIN,
for parameter SGSNISD the value X is allowed only.

[ [
[ [
[ [MSIN=[ ; [
[ CAN MSUB : IMSI= ,SGSNISD= [,FILTER=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MSUB IDENTITY
This parameter specifies the international
mobile subscriber identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
SGSNISD SGSN ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the SGSN-ISDN number of the
SGSN where the subscriber is roaming.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
FILTER FILTER FOR MSUB ENTRIES
This parameter specifies which mobile subscribers are to be
processed.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter must be used, if more than one subscriber
is specified by parameter MSIN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: FILTER TYPE
ALLMSUB ALL MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
DEFINED DEFINED FILTER
EXPIRED EXPIRED MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
b: FILTER NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 4+
CAN MSUB
SGSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the name of the filter,
which is used for deleting only those
mobile subscriber entries that match predefined filter
criteria.
Compatibilities:
- a = DEFINED
Prerequisites:
- The filter must have been created (CR FILTER).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 5+
CAN MSUB
VLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
CANCEL MSUB IN VLR
This input format is used to cancel a mobile subscriber in
the VLR only.
Compatibilities:
- If more than one subscriber is specified by parameter MSIN,
for parameter VLRISD the value X is allowed only.

[ [
[ [
[ [MSIN=[ ; [
[ CAN MSUB : IMSI= ,VLRISD= [,FILTER=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MSUB IDENTITY
This parameter specifies the international
mobile subscriber identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
VLRISD VLR ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the VLR-ISDN number of the
VLR where the subscriber is roaming.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
FILTER FILTER FOR MSUB ENTRIES
This parameter specifies which mobile subscribers are to be
processed.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter must be used, if more than one subscriber
is specified by parameter MSIN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: FILTER TYPE
ALLMSUB ALL MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
DEFINED DEFINED FILTER
EXPIRED EXPIRED MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
b: FILTER NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 6+
CAN MSUB
VLR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter specifies the name of the filter,
which is used for deleting only those
mobile subscriber entries that match predefined filter
criteria.
Compatibilities:
- a = DEFINED
Prerequisites:
- The filter must have been created (CR FILTER).
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 7+
CAN MSUB
VLRSGSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5. Input format
CANCEL MSUB IN VLR AND SGSN
This input format is used to cancel a mobile subscriber in
VLR and SGSN only.
Compatibilities:
- If more than one subscriber is specified by parameter MSIN,
for parameter VLRISD the value X is allowed only.
- The same applies to parameter SGSNISD.

[ [
[ [
[ [MSIN=[ ; [
[ CAN MSUB : IMSI= ,VLRISD= ,SGSNISD= [,FILTER=] [
[ [ [ ! [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MSUB IDENTITY
This parameter specifies the international
mobile subscriber identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
VLRISD VLR ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the VLR-ISDN number of the
VLR where the subscriber is roaming.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
SGSNISD SGSN ISDN NUMBER
This parameter specifies the SGSN-ISDN number of the
SGSN where the subscriber is roaming.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
FILTER FILTER FOR MSUB ENTRIES
This parameter specifies which mobile subscribers are to be
processed.
Compatibilities:
- This parameter must be used, if more than one subscriber
is specified by parameter MSIN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 8+
CAN MSUB
VLRSGSN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: FILTER TYPE
ALLMSUB ALL MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
DEFINED DEFINED FILTER
EXPIRED EXPIRED MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
b: FILTER NAME=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This parameter specifies the name of the filter,
which is used for deleting only those
mobile subscriber entries that match predefined filter
criteria.
Compatibilities:
- a = DEFINED
Prerequisites:
- The filter must have been created (CR FILTER).
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUB- 9-
CR MSUB
GPRS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This command creates a mobile subscriber in the HLR.
Prerequisites:
- The mobile subscriber has to be created in the AC (CR ACMSUB).
- An HLRID appropriate to the MSIN has to be created (CR HLRID).
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR MSUB - GPRS GPRS ONLY MSUB
2. CR MSUB - IWMSUB INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
3. CR MSUB - MULTI MULTINUMBERING
4. CR MSUB - SINGLE SINGLENUMBERING
1. Input format
GPRS ONLY MSUB
This input format is used to create a mobile
subscriber with the network access mode GPRS
in the HLR.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NDC=[[ [
[ CR MSUB : MSIN= ,BSNBC= [,LAC=[ [,NUMTYP=] [,PRFMSIN=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,MSCAT=] [,SUBRES=] [,BAOC=] [,BAIC=] [,BAROAM=] [
[ [
[ [,BAGPRS=] [,BASPH=] [,EXPIRY=] [,TOSM=] [,CHRG=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,OR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
BSNBC BASIC SERVICE AND SN AND BCN
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: BASIC SERVICE CODE
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
b: SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 1+
CR MSUB
GPRS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This information unit specifies the subscriber number.
The variability (variabel or fixed) is project dependent.
The maximum number of digits is project dependent.
At least one subscriber number must be entered.
NDC NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers
NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE, that precedes the
SUBSCRIBER NUMBER within the MSISDN.
Prerequisites:
- The NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE must exist in project definition data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the subscribers LOCAL AREA CODE,
that precedes the local SUBSCRIBER NUMBER.
Prerequisites:
- The LOCAL AREA CODE must exist in project definition data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 digit decimal number
NUMTYP NUMBERING TYPE
This parameter specifies the numbering type of a mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MULTI MULTINUMBERING
In projects with multinumbering
MULTI is default.
SINGLE SINGLENUMBERING
In projects without multinumbering
SINGLE is default.
PRFMSIN PROFILE MSIN
This parameter specifies type and MSIN of a mobile subscriber
profile entry. Depending on the type of the profile the following
profile data is linked to the created mobile subscriber:
GPRS profile: PDP context records assigned by ENTR GPRSERV
CAMEL profile: all CAMEL services and CSIs assigned by ENTR OPRSERV
SSV profile: data related to location services specified by ENTR GCSERV
The profile data entered by CR MSUB is not linked to the created
mobile subscriber.
The data entered explicitly for the subscriber and the profile data
linked to the subscriber are logically summed - the explicitly entered
data taking precedence over the profile data.
Example:
PDP context records 1 and 2 are entered for the subscriber and records
1 and 3 are entered for the linked profile. The resulting subscriber
data contains records 1 and 2 of the subscriber and record 3 of the
profile.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- A subscriber must only use references to profile subscribers
within the same HLRID.
- Only one reference for every type of profile is possible.
Compatibilities:
- MSUBTYP = GENERIC
- MSUBTYP = TEMPLATE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 2+
CR MSUB
GPRS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF PROFILE
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
b: MSIN OF PROFILE=
1...12 digit decimal number
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscriber category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATACALL DATA CALL
NATOPER NATIONAL OPERATOR
OLADD1 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 1
OLADD2 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 2
OLADD3 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 3
OLENGLSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE ENGLISH
OLFRENCH OPERATOR LANGUAGE FRENCH
OLGERMAN OPERATOR LANGUAGE GERMAN
OLRUSSIA OPERATOR LANGUAGE RUSSIAN
OLSPANSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE SPANISH
ORDINSUB ORDINARY CALLING SUBSCRIBER
PAYPHONE PAYPHONE
PRIOSUB PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTCALL TEST CALL
ORDFREE ORDINSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIOFREE PRIOSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIO1SUB PRIORITY 1 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO2SUB PRIORITY 2 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO3SUB PRIORITY 3 SUBSCRIBER
VERIFSUB VERIFICATION SUBSCRIBER
Default: ORDINSUB
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the area where the subscriber
is allowed to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
ONAOFPLM ONE NAT. PLMN ALL FOREIGN PLMN
Default: ONAOFPLM
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
BAOC BARRING OF OUTGOING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of outgoing calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
OC OUTGOING CALLS
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 3+
CR MSUB
GPRS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OCROUT OC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
OIC OUTGOING INTERNATIONAL CALLS
OICEXH OIC EXCEPT HOME PLMN COUNTRY
Default: NONE
BAIC BARRING OF INCOMING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of incoming calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IC INCOMING CALLS
ICROUT IC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
NONE NONE
Default: NONE
BAROAM BARRING OF ROAMING
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of roaming applies to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
ROAMOH ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
ROAMOHC ROAMING OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
Default: NONE
BAGPRS BARRING OF GPRS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of GPRS ATTACH applies to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLPLMN BARRING IN ALLPLMN
NONE NO BARRING
VPLMN BARRING IN VPLMN
Default: NONE
BASPH BARRING SPECIFIC TO HOME PLMN
This parameter indicates which of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination,
applies to the mobile subscriber.
Notes:
- When creating a MSUB from a TEMPLATE, this parameter
completely replaces the BASPH settings of the referenced
TEMPLATE.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
EXPIRY EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers expiry date.
The subscription expires at the begin of the entered date.
0-0-0 means: expires never.
Otherwise 0 is not allowed for mm or dd.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 4+
CR MSUB
GPRS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: MONTH=
0...12, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
c: DAY=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
TOSM TRANSFER OPTION SHORT MESSAGE
This parameter specifies whether the mobile terminated short
message service is delivered via SGSN or MSC. This parameter
is only applied, if the short message gateway MSC does not
support GPRS.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber gets the
subscription of TS21GPRS. If this parameter is not
entered, the used value will be SGSN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MSC TRANSFER VIA MSC
SGSN TRANSFER VIA SGSN
CHRG CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the general charging characteristics.
These general values will be taken in the SGSN if no special
charging characteristics are defined in the used PDP context.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber gets the
subscription of GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
OR OPTIMAL ROUTING
This parameter specifies whether the optimal routing
is allowed or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 5+
CR MSUB
IWMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
This input format is used to create a mobile subscriber in a GSM-CDMA
interworking node. His IMSI - created in the mobile subscribers HLR -
is made known to this GSM-CDMA interworking node.

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MSUB : IMSI= [,SUBRES=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MSUB IDENTITY
This parameter specifies the international
mobile subscriber identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the area where the subscriber
is allowed to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
Default: ALLPLMN
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 6+
CR MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
MULTINUMBERING
This input format is used to create a multinumbering mobile
subscriber with the network access mode GSM or both GSM and
GPRS in the HLR.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NDC=[[ [
[ CR MSUB : MSIN= ,BSNBC= [,LAC=[ [,NUMTYP=] [,REFMSIN=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,PRFMSIN=] [,MSUBTYP=] [,MSCAT=] [,SUBRES=] [
[ [
[ [,BAOC=] [,BAIC=] [,BAROAM=] [,BAGPRS=] [,BAPRC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,BASPH=] [,EXPIRY=] [,TOSM=] [,CHRG=] [,OR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
BSNBC BASIC SERVICE AND SN AND BCN
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: BASIC SERVICE CODE
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 7+
CR MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
This information unit specifies the subscriber number.
The variability (variabel or fixed) is project dependent.
The maximum number of digits is project dependent.
At least one subscriber number must be entered.
c: BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit specifies a bearer capability name.
Each bearer capability name has to be assigned to a
subscriber number.
Prerequisites:
- The bearer capability name has to be created with
CR GSMBCIE.
Notes:
- For the following BASIC SERVICE CODE a
BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1 is obligatory:
- TELEPHON TELEPHONY
- TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
- TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
- BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
- BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
- BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
- BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
- BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
- BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
- BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
- BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
- BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
- BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
- BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
- BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
- BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
- Depending on the feature
SUPPR.ADMIN. CONSISTENCY CHECK
the following rules apply:
- If the consistency check is performed,
it is checked that the BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1
fits to the BASIC SERVICE CODE.
- If the consistency check is performed,
for the following BASIC SERVICE CODEs
a BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1 is not allowed:
- TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
- TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
- BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
- BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
- BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
- BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
- BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
- BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
- BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
- VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
- VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
- GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
- TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
- TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
- If no consistency check is performed,
any BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1 can be given for any
BASIC SERVICE CODE.
d: BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2=
1...8 characters from the
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 8+
CR MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
symbolic name character set
This information unit specifies a second bearer
capability name.
Prerequisites:
- The bearer capability name has to be created with
CR GSMBCIE.
Notes:
- For the following BASIC SERVICE CODE a
BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2 is obligatory:
- BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
- BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
- Depending on the feature
SUPPR.ADMIN. CONSISTENCY CHECK
the following rules apply:
- If the consistency check is performed,
it is checked that the BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2
fits to the BASIC SERVICE CODE.
- If the consistency check is performed,
BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2 is allowed for
BASIC SERVICE CODEs BS61A and BS81A only.
- If no consistency check is performed,
any BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2 can be given for any
BASIC SERVICE CODE.
NDC NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers
NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE, that precedes the
SUBSCRIBER NUMBER within the MSISDN.
Prerequisites:
- The NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE must exist in project definition data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the subscribers LOCAL AREA CODE,
that precedes the local SUBSCRIBER NUMBER.
Prerequisites:
- The LOCAL AREA CODE must exist in project definition data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 digit decimal number
NUMTYP NUMBERING TYPE
This parameter specifies the numbering type of a mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MULTI MULTINUMBERING
In projects with multinumbering
MULTI is default.
REFMSIN REFERENCE MSIN
This parameter specifies the MSIN of a mobile subscriber
template entry. The data of this entry is copied to the created
mobile subscriber and overwritten with the information given in
the other parameters of this command.
Compatibilities:
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 9+
CR MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- MSUBTYP = GENERIC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PRFMSIN PROFILE MSIN
This parameter specifies type and MSIN of a mobile subscriber
profile entry. Depending on the type of the profile the following
profile data is linked to the created mobile subscriber:
GPRS profile: PDP context records assigned by ENTR GPRSERV
CAMEL profile: all CAMEL services and CSIs assigned by ENTR OPRSERV
SSV profile: data related to location services specified by ENTR GCSERV
The profile data entered by CR MSUB is not linked to the created
mobile subscriber.
The data entered explicitly for the subscriber and the profile data
linked to the subscriber are logically summed - the explicitly entered
data taking precedence over the profile data.
Example:
PDP context records 1 and 2 are entered for the subscriber and records
1 and 3 are entered for the linked profile. The resulting subscriber
data contains records 1 and 2 of the subscriber and record 3 of the
profile.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- A subscriber must only use references to profile subscribers
within the same HLRID.
- Only one reference for every type of profile is possible.
Compatibilities:
- MSUBTYP = GENERIC
- MSUBTYP = TEMPLATE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF PROFILE
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERV. PROFILE
b: MSIN OF PROFILE=
1...12 digit decimal number
MSUBTYP MSUB TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GENERIC GENERIC MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
LMU LOCATION MEASUREMENT UNIT
PROFILE PROFILE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
TEMPLATE TEMPLATE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
Default: GENERIC
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscriber category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATACALL DATA CALL
NATOPER NATIONAL OPERATOR
OLADD1 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 1
OLADD2 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 2
OLADD3 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 3
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 10+
CR MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OLENGLSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE ENGLISH
OLFRENCH OPERATOR LANGUAGE FRENCH
OLGERMAN OPERATOR LANGUAGE GERMAN
OLRUSSIA OPERATOR LANGUAGE RUSSIAN
OLSPANSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE SPANISH
ORDINSUB ORDINARY CALLING SUBSCRIBER
PAYPHONE PAYPHONE
PRIOSUB PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTCALL TEST CALL
ORDFREE ORDINSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIOFREE PRIOSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIO1SUB PRIORITY 1 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO2SUB PRIORITY 2 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO3SUB PRIORITY 3 SUBSCRIBER
VERIFSUB VERIFICATION SUBSCRIBER
Default: ORDINSUB
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the area where the subscriber
is allowed to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
ONAOFPLM ONE NAT. PLMN ALL FOREIGN PLMN
Default: ONAOFPLM
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
BAOC BARRING OF OUTGOING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of outgoing calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
OC OUTGOING CALLS
OCROUT OC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
OIC OUTGOING INTERNATIONAL CALLS
OICEXH OIC EXCEPT HOME PLMN COUNTRY
Default: NONE
BAIC BARRING OF INCOMING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of incoming calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IC INCOMING CALLS
ICROUT IC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
NONE NONE
Default: NONE
BAROAM BARRING OF ROAMING
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 11+
CR MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
operator determined barring of roaming applies to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
ROAMOH ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
ROAMOHC ROAMING OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
Default: NONE
BAGPRS BARRING OF GPRS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of GPRS ATTACH applies to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLPLMN BARRING IN ALLPLMN
NONE NO BARRING
VPLMN BARRING IN VPLMN
Default: NONE
BAPRC BARR. OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of premium rate calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
ENT ENTERTAINMENT CALLS
INFO INFORMATION CALLS
NONE NONE
Default: NONE
BASPH BARRING SPECIFIC TO HOME PLMN
This parameter indicates which of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination,
applies to the mobile subscriber.
Notes:
- When creating a MSUB from a TEMPLATE, this parameter
completely replaces the BASPH settings of the referenced
TEMPLATE.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
EXPIRY EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers expiry date.
The subscription expires at the begin of the entered date.
0-0-0 means: expires never.
Otherwise 0 is not allowed for mm or dd.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 12+
CR MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: MONTH=
0...12, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
c: DAY=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
TOSM TRANSFER OPTION SHORT MESSAGE
This parameter specifies whether the mobile terminated short
message service is delivered via SGSN or MSC. This parameter
is only applied, if the short message gateway MSC does not
support GPRS.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber gets the
subscription of TS21GPRS. If this parameter is not
entered, the used value will be SGSN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MSC TRANSFER VIA MSC
SGSN TRANSFER VIA SGSN
CHRG CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the general charging characteristics.
These general values will be taken in the SGSN if no special
charging characteristics are defined in the used PDP context.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber gets the
subscription of GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
OR OPTIMAL ROUTING
This parameter specifies whether the optimal routing
is allowed or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 13+
CR MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4. Input format
SINGLENUMBERING
This input format is used to create a singlenumbering mobile
subscriber with the network access mode GSM or both GSM and
GPRS in the HLR.

[ [
[ [
[ [[,NDC=[[ [
[ CR MSUB : MSIN= ,BSNBC= [,LAC=[ [,NUMTYP=] [,REFMSIN=] [
[ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,PRFMSIN=] [,MSUBTYP=] [,MSCAT=] [,SUBRES=] [
[ [
[ [,BAOC=] [,BAIC=] [,BAROAM=] [,BAGPRS=] [,BAPRC=] [
[ [
[ ; [
[ [,BASPH=] [,EXPIRY=] [,TOSM=] [,CHRG=] [,OR=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
BSNBC BASIC SERVICE AND SN AND BCN
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: BASIC SERVICE CODE
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 14+
CR MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
b: SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
This information unit specifies the subscriber number.
The variability (variabel or fixed) is project dependent.
The maximum number of digits is project dependent.
At least one subscriber number must be entered.
NDC NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers
NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE, that precedes the
SUBSCRIBER NUMBER within the MSISDN.
Prerequisites:
- The NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE must exist in project definition data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 digit decimal number
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter specifies the subscribers LOCAL AREA CODE,
that precedes the local SUBSCRIBER NUMBER.
Prerequisites:
- The LOCAL AREA CODE must exist in project definition data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 digit decimal number
NUMTYP NUMBERING TYPE
This parameter specifies the numbering type of a mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
SINGLE SINGLENUMBERING
In projects without multinumbering
SINGLE is default.
REFMSIN REFERENCE MSIN
This parameter specifies the MSIN of a mobile subscriber
template entry. The data of this entry is copied to the created
mobile subscriber and overwritten with the information given in
the other parameters of this command.
Compatibilities:
- MSUBTYP = GENERIC
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
PRFMSIN PROFILE MSIN
This parameter specifies type and MSIN of a mobile subscriber
profile entry. Depending on the type of the profile the following
profile data is linked to the created mobile subscriber:
GPRS profile: PDP context records assigned by ENTR GPRSERV
CAMEL profile: all CAMEL services and CSIs assigned by ENTR OPRSERV
SSV profile: data related to location services specified by ENTR GCSERV
The profile data entered by CR MSUB is not linked to the created
mobile subscriber.
The data entered explicitly for the subscriber and the profile data
linked to the subscriber are logically summed - the explicitly entered
data taking precedence over the profile data.
Example:
PDP context records 1 and 2 are entered for the subscriber and records
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 15+
CR MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1 and 3 are entered for the linked profile. The resulting subscriber
data contains records 1 and 2 of the subscriber and record 3 of the
profile.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- A subscriber must only use references to profile subscribers
within the same HLRID.
- Only one reference for every type of profile is possible.
Compatibilities:
- MSUBTYP = GENERIC
- MSUBTYP = TEMPLATE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF PROFILE
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERV. PROFILE
b: MSIN OF PROFILE=
1...12 digit decimal number
MSUBTYP MSUB TYPE
This parameter specifies the type of the mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GENERIC GENERIC MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
LMU LOCATION MEASUREMENT UNIT
PROFILE PROFILE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
TEMPLATE TEMPLATE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
Default: GENERIC
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscriber category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATACALL DATA CALL
NATOPER NATIONAL OPERATOR
OLADD1 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 1
OLADD2 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 2
OLADD3 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 3
OLENGLSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE ENGLISH
OLFRENCH OPERATOR LANGUAGE FRENCH
OLGERMAN OPERATOR LANGUAGE GERMAN
OLRUSSIA OPERATOR LANGUAGE RUSSIAN
OLSPANSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE SPANISH
ORDINSUB ORDINARY CALLING SUBSCRIBER
PAYPHONE PAYPHONE
PRIOSUB PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTCALL TEST CALL
ORDFREE ORDINSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIOFREE PRIOSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIO1SUB PRIORITY 1 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO2SUB PRIORITY 2 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO3SUB PRIORITY 3 SUBSCRIBER
VERIFSUB VERIFICATION SUBSCRIBER
Default: ORDINSUB
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the area where the subscriber
is allowed to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 16+
CR MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
ONAOFPLM ONE NAT. PLMN ALL FOREIGN PLMN
Default: ONAOFPLM
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
BAOC BARRING OF OUTGOING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of outgoing calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
OC OUTGOING CALLS
OCROUT OC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
OIC OUTGOING INTERNATIONAL CALLS
OICEXH OIC EXCEPT HOME PLMN COUNTRY
Default: NONE
BAIC BARRING OF INCOMING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of incoming calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IC INCOMING CALLS
ICROUT IC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
NONE NONE
Default: NONE
BAROAM BARRING OF ROAMING
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of roaming applies to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
ROAMOH ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
ROAMOHC ROAMING OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
Default: NONE
BAGPRS BARRING OF GPRS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of GPRS ATTACH applies to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLPLMN BARRING IN ALLPLMN
NONE NO BARRING
VPLMN BARRING IN VPLMN
Default: NONE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 17+
CR MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BAPRC BARR. OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of premium rate calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
ENT ENTERTAINMENT CALLS
INFO INFORMATION CALLS
NONE NONE
Default: NONE
BASPH BARRING SPECIFIC TO HOME PLMN
This parameter indicates which of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination,
applies to the mobile subscriber.
Notes:
- When creating a MSUB from a TEMPLATE, this parameter
completely replaces the BASPH settings of the referenced
TEMPLATE.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
EXPIRY EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers expiry date.
The subscription expires at the begin of the entered date.
0-0-0 means: expires never.
Otherwise 0 is not allowed for mm or dd.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
b: MONTH=
0...12, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
c: DAY=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
Default: 0
TOSM TRANSFER OPTION SHORT MESSAGE
This parameter specifies whether the mobile terminated short
message service is delivered via SGSN or MSC. This parameter
is only applied, if the short message gateway MSC does not
support GPRS.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber gets the
subscription of TS21GPRS. If this parameter is not
entered, the used value will be SGSN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 18+
CR MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSC TRANSFER VIA MSC
SGSN TRANSFER VIA SGSN
CHRG CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the general charging characteristics.
These general values will be taken in the SGSN if no special
charging characteristics are defined in the used PDP context.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber gets the
subscription of GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
OR OPTIMAL ROUTING
This parameter specifies whether the optimal routing
is allowed or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUB- 19-
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This command displays data of created mobile subscribers depending
on command parameters.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DISP MSUB - GSMSUB GSM MSUB DATA
2. DISP MSUB - IWMSUB INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
1. Input format
GSM MSUB DATA
This input format is used to display mobile subscriber data.

[ [
[ [
[ [MSIN=[ [[,NDC=[[ [
[ DISP MSUB : SN= [,LAC=[ [,DATAKD=] [,NUMTYP=] [,BCN=] [
[ [ [ [[ [[ [
[ ! - [
[ [
[ [,BSV=] [,SSV=] [,MSUBFT=] [,OPRSERV=] [,MSCAT=] [
[ [
[ [,SUBRES=] [,BAOC=] [,BAIC=] [,BAROAM=] [
[ [
[ [,BAGPRS=] [,BAPRC=] [,BASPH=] [,BASSM=] [
[ [
[ [,EXPIRY=] [,SHRTCD=] [,SELECT=] [,PLMN= [
[ [
[ [,ZCODE=]] [,CHRG=] [,QOSPROF=] [,NTF=] [
[ [
[ [,PRFMSIN=] [,VIEW=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...12 digit decimal number
SN SUBSCRIBER NUMBER
This parameter specifies the subscriber number.
The total number of digits of the subscriber number is project
dependent.
Notes:
- The number of potential mobile subscribers to be displayed with
this parameter may not exceed 100.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 1+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
1...16 digit decimal number
NDC NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with one
of the specified national destination codes.
Notes:
- If MSIN is entered, this parameter is optional.
- IF SN is entered, this parameter is optional or
obligatory dependent on project data.
- IF SN is entered then one NDC is allowed only.
- Up to 3 NDCs can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...6 digit decimal number
LAC LOCAL AREA CODE
This parameter selects WLL subscribers with the
specified local area code.
Notes:
- If MSIN is entered, this parameter is optional.
- IF SN is entered, this parameter is optional or
obligatory dependent on project data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 digit decimal number
DATAKD DATA KIND
This parameter specifies different output data combinations.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLDATA GENERAL AND SERVICE DATA
CUGDATA CLOSED USER GROUP DATA
DIAGDATA DIAGNOSTIC DATA
GENRDATA GENERAL DATA
MOBDATA MOBILITY DATA
RSDATA REGIONAL SUBSCRIPTION DATA
SSDATA SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE DATA
NUMTYP NUMBERING TYPE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified NUMBERING TYPE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MULTI MULTINUMBERING
In projects with multinumbering
MULTI is default.
SINGLE SINGLENUMBERING
In projects without multinumbering
SINGLE is default.
BCN BEARER CAPABILITY NAME
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BEARER CAPABILITY NAME.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
BSV BASIC SERVICE CODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers, that have at least
the subscription of all entered basic services.
Notes:
- Up to 3 basic services can be specified.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 2+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers, that have at least
the subscription of all entered supplementary services.
Notes:
- Up to 3 supplementary services can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
ALLCB ALL CALL BARRING SERVICES
ALLCF ALL CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
ALLCFCON ALL CF CONDITIONAL
ANYLCS ANY LCS PRIVACY EXCEPT. CLASS
AOCCHRG ADVICE OF CHARGE CHARGING
AOCINFO ADVICE OF CHARGE INFORMATION
ASLC AUTONOMOUS SELF LOCATION
BSLC BASIC SELF LOCATION
CALLBACK CALL BACK
CALLHOLD CALL HOLD
CALLWAIT CALL WAITING
CBI CB OF INCOMING CALLS
CBIC CB OF ALL INCOMING CALLS
CBICROUT CBIC ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
CBO CB OF OUTGOING CALLS
CBOC CB OF ALL OUTGOING CALLS
CBOIC CB OF ALL OUTGOING INT. CALLS
CBOICEXH CBOIC EXCEPT TO HPLMN COUNTRY
CCBSA CALL COMPLETION BUSY SUBSCR. A
CCBSB CALL COMPLETION BUSY SUBSCR. B
CFBUSY CF ON MSUB BUSY
CFNREACH CF ON MSUB NOT REACHABLE
CFNREPLY CF ON NO REPLY
CFU CF UNCONDITIONAL
CLIP CALLING LINE ID. PRESENTATION
CLIR CALLING LINE ID. RESTRICTION
COLP CONNECTED LINE ID PRESENTATION
COLR CONNECTED LINE ID RESTRICTION
CREL CALL RELATED CLASS
CT CALL TRANSFER
CUG CLOSED USER GROUP
CUNREL CALL UNRELATED CLASS
EMLPP EMLPP SERVICE
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 3+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FMSPV FOLLOW ME SUPERVISOR
FOLLOWME FOLLOW ME
FROUT FORCED ROUTING
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
MPTY MULTI PARTY
NATCCBS CALL COMPL. TO BUSY SUBSCR.
NATSS01 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 01
NATSS02 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 02
NATSS03 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 03
NATSS04 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 04
NATSS05 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 05
NATSS06 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 06
NATSS07 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 07
NATSS08 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 08
NATSS09 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 09
NATSS10 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 10
NATSS11 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 11
NATSS12 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 12
NATSS13 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 13
NATSS14 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 14
NATSS15 NATIONAL SUPPL. SERVICE 15
PLMNOPR PLMN OPERATOR CLASS
UNIVERS UNIVERSAL CLASS
USERSIG1 USER TO USER SIGN. SERV. 1
MSUBFT SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified subscriber-related feature.
Notes:
- The meaning of the specified feature is project-dependent.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ANYFT ANY SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
MSUBFT01 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 01
MSUBFT02 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 02
MSUBFT03 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 03
MSUBFT04 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 04
MSUBFT05 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 05
MSUBFT06 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 06
MSUBFT07 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 07
MSUBFT08 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 08
MSUBFT09 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 09
MSUBFT10 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 10
MSUBFT11 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 11
MSUBFT12 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 12
MSUBFT13 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 13
MSUBFT14 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 14
MSUBFT15 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 15
MSUBFT16 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 16
OPRSERV OPERATOR SERVICES
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified operator service.
Notes:
- Up to 12 operator services can be specified.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OPERATOR SERVICE TYPE
ALLCSI ALL CAMEL SUBSCRIPTION INFO
DCSI DIALED SERVICE CSI
GPRSCSI GPRS CAMEL SUBSCRIPTION INFO
INMOC IN MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL
INMTC IN MOBILE TERMINATING CALL
MCSI MOBILITY MANAGEMENT CSI
MSP MULTIPLE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
OCSI ORIGINATING CSI
SMSCSI SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CSI
SSCSI SSV CAMEL SUBSCRIPTION INFO
SUBRELRO SUBSCRIBER RELATED ROUTING
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 4+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TCSI TERMINATING CSI
TIFCSI TRANSLATION INFORM. FLAG CSI
UCSI USSD CAMEL SUBSCRIPTION INFO
VTCSI VISITED MSC TERMINATING CSI
b: OPERATOR SERVICE NAME=
1...10 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This unit specifies the service name
as a further selection criteria.
If "X" is entered the service name is ignored.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
c: CSI STATE
ACT ACTIVATED
DACT DEACTIVATED
This unit specifies the CAMEL subscription
information state as a further selection criteria.
Incompatibilities:
- a = MSP
- a = SUBRELRO
d: CSI NOTIFICATION
ACT ACTIVATED
Incompatibilities:
- c = DACT
DACT DEACTIVATED
This unit specifies the CAMEL subscription information
notification as a further selection criteria.
Incompatibilities:
- a = MSP
- a = SUBRELRO
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATACALL DATA CALL
NATOPER NATIONAL OPERATOR
OLADD1 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 1
OLADD2 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 2
OLADD3 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 3
OLENGLSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE ENGLISH
OLFRENCH OPERATOR LANGUAGE FRENCH
OLGERMAN OPERATOR LANGUAGE GERMAN
OLRUSSIA OPERATOR LANGUAGE RUSSIAN
OLSPANSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE SPANISH
ORDINSUB ORDINARY CALLING SUBSCRIBER
PAYPHONE PAYPHONE
PRIOSUB PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTCALL TEST CALL
ORDFREE ORDINSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIOFREE PRIOSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIO1SUB PRIORITY 1 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO2SUB PRIORITY 2 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO3SUB PRIORITY 3 SUBSCRIBER
VERIFSUB VERIFICATION SUBSCRIBER
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION.
It specifies the area where the subscriber is allowed
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 5+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
ONAOFPLM ONE NAT. PLMN ALL FOREIGN PLMN
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
BAOC BARRING OF OUTGOING CALLS
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BARRING OF OUTGOING CALLS.
It specifies which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of outgoing calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
OC OUTGOING CALLS
OCROUT OC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
OIC OUTGOING INTERNATIONAL CALLS
OICEXH OIC EXCEPT HOME PLMN COUNTRY
BAIC BARRING OF INCOMING CALLS
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BARRING OF INCOMING CALLS.
It specifies which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of incoming calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IC INCOMING CALLS
ICROUT IC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
NONE NONE
BAROAM BARRING OF ROAMING
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BARRING OF ROAMING.
It specifies which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of roaming applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
ROAMOH ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
ROAMOHC ROAMING OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
BAGPRS BARRING OF GPRS
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BARRING OF GPRS.
It specifies which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of GPRS ATTACH applies to
the mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLPLMN BARRING IN ALLPLMN
NONE NO BARRING
VPLMN BARRING IN VPLMN
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 6+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
BAPRC BARR. OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BARR. OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS.
It specifies which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of premium rate calls applies
to the mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
ENT ENTERTAINMENT CALLS
INFO INFORMATION CALLS
NONE NONE
BASPH BARRING SPECIFIC TO HOME PLMN
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BARRING SPECIFIC TO HOME PLMN.
It specifies which one of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination, applies
to the mobile subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
BASSM BARR. SUPPL. SERV. MANAGEMENT
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified BARR. SUPPL. SERV. MANAGEMENT.
It specifies whether the mobile subscriber is subject
to operator determined barring of supplementary service
management.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
SCI SUBSCRIBER CONTROLLED INPUT
EXPIRY EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified expiry date.
Only mobile subscribers whose expiry date matches the input to
this parameter are selected for display.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
SHRTCD SHORT CODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified SHORT CODE.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...3 digit decimal number
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 7+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SELECT SELECTION MODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers matching
all specified selection modes.
Notes:
- The maximum number of list entries is 8.
Incompatibilities:
- Any combination of the parameter values TEMPLATE,
LMU and PROFILE is not allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
EXPIRED EXPIRED MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
IMSITRAC MSUB WITH IMSI TRACE
LMU LOCATION MEASUREMENT UNIT
MSUBLINK LINKED MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
OR OPTIMAL ROUTING
PROFILE PROFILE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
RSSERV REGIONAL SUBSCR. SERVICE DATA
SIMCCH MSUB WITH SIM CARD CHANGEOVER
TEMPLATE TEMPLATE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
WLLSUB WLL SUBSCRIBERS
PLMN PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with respect to the
PLMN for which the subscribers have regional subscription
data.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: COUNTRY CODE=
1...3 digit decimal number
This unit specifies the visited PLMNs country code.
b: NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE=
1...4 digit decimal number
This unit specifies the visited PLMNs
NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE.
It may be omitted for visited PLMN that have
no NATIONAL DESTINATION CODE.
ZCODE ZONE CODE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers, which have all of
the entered zone codes in their regional subscription data for
the entered PLMN.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...65535, range of decimal numbers
CHRG CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter selects mobile subscribers, that have at least
the specified charging characteristics entered.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
QOSPROF QOS PROFILE NAME
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified quality of service profile.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 8+
DISP MSUB
GSMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
NTF NOTIFICATION TO CSE
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified notification flag.
Notes:
- Up to 3 notification flags can be specified.
- Combination NONE with other flags is not allowed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CBSERV CALL BARRING SERVICES
CFSERV CALL FORWARDING SERVICES
NONE NO NOTIFICATION FLAG
ODB OPERATOR DETERMINED BARRING
PRFMSIN PROFILE MSIN
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified profile MSIN.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- If "X" is entered, then the type of profile is ignored.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: TYPE OF PROFILE
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERV. PROFILE
X TYPE OF PROFILE IS IGNORED
b: MSIN OF PROFILE=
1...12 digit decimal number
VIEW VIEW ON MSUB DATA
This parameter selects the type of view on profiles linked
to the mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NORMAL NORMAL DISPLAY
Display names of linked profiles.
PRFEXP PROFILE DATA EXPLODED
Display data of linked profiles.
Default: NORMAL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 9+
DISP MSUB
IWMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
This input format is used to display a mobile subscriber
in a GSM-CDMA interworking node.

[ [
[ DISP MSUB : IMSI= [,DATAKD=] [,SUBRES=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MSUB IDENTITY
This parameter specifies the international
mobile subscriber identification.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
a value-range by linking two values with &&.
Multiple values and/or ranges can be linked with &.
1...15 digit decimal number
DATAKD DATA KIND
This parameter specifies different output data combinations.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
GENRDATA GENERAL DATA
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter selects mobile subscribers with the
specified SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION.
It specifies the area where the subscriber is allowed
to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUB- 10-
MOD MSUB
IWMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This command modifies the assigned mobile subscriber data in the HLR.
Restrictions:
- It is not possible to modify the NUMBERING TYPE.
- It is not possible to modify the MSUB TYPE.
- It is not possible to enter an EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
when the mobile subscriber has a CREATE LINKAGE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER.
- It is not possible to enter an EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
when the mobile subscriber has a ENTER SIM CARD CHANGEOVER DATA.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD MSUB - IWMSUB INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
2. MOD MSUB - MULTI MULTINUMBERING
3. MOD MSUB - SINGLE SINGLENUMBERING
1. Input format
INTERWORKING NODE MSUB
This input format is used to modify a mobile subscriber
in a GSM-CDMA interworking node.

[ [
[ ; [
[ MOD MSUB : IMSI= ,SUBRES= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IMSI INTERNATIONAL MSUB IDENTITY
This parameter specifies the international
mobile subscriber identification.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...15 digit decimal number
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the area where the subscriber
is allowed to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
Notes:
- When this information unit is omitted, a
previous assignment of a ROAMING AREA is
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 1+
MOD MSUB
IWMSUB
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
removed from the mobile subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 2+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
MULTINUMBERING
This input format is used to modify a multinumbering
mobile subscriber in the HLR.

[ [
[ MOD MSUB : MSIN= <,BSNBC= ,CBSNBC= ,PRFMSIN= ,CPRFMSIN= [
[ [
[ ,MSCAT= ,SUBRES= ,PIC= ,BAOC= ,BAIC= ,BAROAM= [
[ [
[ ,BAGPRS= ,BAPRC= ,BASPH= ,CBASPH= ,EXPIRY= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,TOSM= ,CHRG= ,CCHRG= ,OR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
BSNBC BASIC SERVICE AND SN AND BCN
This parameter adds a new BSNBC.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: BASIC SERVICE CODE
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
b: SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
This information unit specifies the subscriber number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 3+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The variability (variabel or fixed) is project dependent.
The maximum number of digits is project dependent.
c: BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit specifies a bearer capability name.
Each bearer capability name has to be assigned to a
subscriber number.
Prerequisites:
- The bearer capability name has to be created with
CR GSMBCIE.
Notes:
- For the following BASIC SERVICE CODE a
BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1 is obligatory:
- TELEPHON TELEPHONY
- TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
- TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
- BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
- BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
- BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
- BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
- BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
- BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
- BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
- BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
- BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
- BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
- BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
- Depending on the feature
SUPPR.ADMIN. CONSISTENCY CHECK
the following rules apply:
- If the consistency check is performed,
it is checked that the BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1
fits to the BASIC SERVICE CODE.
- If the consistency check is performed,
for the following BASIC SERVICE CODEs
a BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1 is not allowed:
- TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
- TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
- BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
- BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
- BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
- BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
- BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
- BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
- VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
- VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
- GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
- TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
- TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
- If no consistency check is performed,
any BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1 can be given for any
BASIC SERVICE CODE.
d: BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
This information unit specifies a second bearer
capability name.
Prerequisites:
- The bearer capability name has to be created with
CR GSMBCIE.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 4+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Notes:
- For the following BASIC SERVICE CODE a
BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2 is obligatory:
- BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
- BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
- Depending on the feature
SUPPR.ADMIN. CONSISTENCY CHECK
the following rules apply:
- If the consistency check is performed,
it is checked that the BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2
fits to the BASIC SERVICE CODE.
- If the consistency check is performed,
BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2 is allowed for
BASIC SERVICE CODEs BS61A and BS81A only.
- If no consistency check is performed,
any BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2 can be given for any
BASIC SERVICE CODE.
CBSNBC OLD BASIC SERV. AND SN AND BCN
This parameter erases a BSNBC.
All units given during creation of BSNBC must be entered
to identify the combination of basic service and subscriber number
and bearer capability names to be deleted.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: OLD BASIC SERVICE CODE
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
b: OLD SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
c: OLD BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 1=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 5+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
d: OLD BEARER CAPABILITY NAME 2=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
PRFMSIN PROFILE MSIN
This parameter specifies type and MSIN of a mobile subscriber
profile entry. Depending on the type of the profile the following
profile data is linked to the created mobile subscriber:
GPRS profile: PDP context records assigned by ENTR GPRSERV
CAMEL profile: all CAMEL services and CSIs assigned by ENTR OPRSERV
SSV profile: data related to location services specified by ENTR GCSERV
The profile data entered by CR MSUB is not linked to the created
mobile subscriber.
The data entered explicitly for the subscriber and the profile data
linked to the subscriber are logically summed - the explicitly entered
data taking precedence over the profile data.
Example:
PDP context records 1 and 2 are entered for the subscriber and records
1 and 3 are entered for the linked profile. The resulting subscriber
data contains records 1 and 2 of the subscriber and record 3 of the
profile.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- A subscriber must only use references to profile subscribers
within the same HLRID.
- Only one reference for every type of profile is possible.
Compatibilities:
- MSUBTYP = GENERIC
- MSUBTYP = TEMPLATE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF PROFILE
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERV. PROFILE
b: MSIN OF PROFILE=
1...12 digit decimal number
CPRFMSIN OLD PROFILE MSIN
This parameter cancels one or more references to mobile subscriber
profile entries. Only the references specified by type of profile
are deleted.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- If "X" is entered, then all references are canceled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERV. PROFILE
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscriber category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATACALL DATA CALL
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 6+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
NATOPER NATIONAL OPERATOR
OLADD1 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 1
OLADD2 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 2
OLADD3 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 3
OLENGLSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE ENGLISH
OLFRENCH OPERATOR LANGUAGE FRENCH
OLGERMAN OPERATOR LANGUAGE GERMAN
OLRUSSIA OPERATOR LANGUAGE RUSSIAN
OLSPANSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE SPANISH
ORDINSUB ORDINARY CALLING SUBSCRIBER
PAYPHONE PAYPHONE
PRIOSUB PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTCALL TEST CALL
ORDFREE ORDINSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIOFREE PRIOSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIO1SUB PRIORITY 1 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO2SUB PRIORITY 2 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO3SUB PRIORITY 3 SUBSCRIBER
VERIFSUB VERIFICATION SUBSCRIBER
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the area where the subscriber
is allowed to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
ONAOFPLM ONE NAT. PLMN ALL FOREIGN PLMN
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
Notes:
- When this information unit is omitted, a
previous assignment of a ROAMING AREA is
removed from the mobile subscriber.
PIC PREF. INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER
This parameter defines the carrier code to the subscribers
preferred interexchange carrier.
The length of the carrier code is project dependent.
Valid carrier codes contain digits "0" to "9" only.
Input of "F" removes a PIC assignment for the mobile
subscriber.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed for a subscriber with the
network access mode GPRS.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
BAOC BARRING OF OUTGOING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of outgoing calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
OC OUTGOING CALLS
OCROUT OC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 7+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OIC OUTGOING INTERNATIONAL CALLS
OICEXH OIC EXCEPT HOME PLMN COUNTRY
BAIC BARRING OF INCOMING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of incoming calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IC INCOMING CALLS
ICROUT IC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
NONE NONE
BAROAM BARRING OF ROAMING
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of roaming applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
ROAMOH ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
ROAMOHC ROAMING OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
BAGPRS BARRING OF GPRS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of GPRS ATTACH applies to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLPLMN BARRING IN ALLPLMN
NONE NO BARRING
VPLMN BARRING IN VPLMN
BAPRC BARR. OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of premium rate calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed for a subscriber with the
network access mode GPRS.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
ENT ENTERTAINMENT CALLS
INFO INFORMATION CALLS
NONE NONE
BASPH BARRING SPECIFIC HOME PLMN
This parameter adds one or more of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination, to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
CBASPH OLD BARR. SPECIFIC HOME PLMN
This parameter deletes one or more of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination, from the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 8+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
EXPIRY EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers expiry date.
The subscription expires at the begin of the entered date.
0-0-0 means: expires never.
Otherwise 0 is not allowed for mm or dd.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
0...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
TOSM TRANSFER OPTION SHORT MESSAGE
This parameter specifies whether the mobile terminated short
message service is delivered via SGSN or MSC. This parameter
is only applied, if the short message gateway MSC does not
support GPRS.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber has the
subscription of TS21GPRS or gets it within this command.
If this parameter is not entered in this case, the used
value will be SGSN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MSC TRANSFER VIA MSC
SGSN TRANSFER VIA SGSN
CHRG CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the general charging characteristics.
These general values will be taken in the SGSN if no special
charging characteristics are defined in the used PDP context.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber has the
subscription of GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE or gets it within this co
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
CCHRG OLD CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the charging characteristics to be deleted.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 9+
MOD MSUB
MULTI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OR OPTIMAL ROUTING
This parameter specifies whether the optimal routing
is allowed or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 10+
MOD MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3. Input format
SINGLENUMBERING
This input format is used to modify a singlenumbering
mobile subscriber in the HLR.

[ [
[ MOD MSUB : MSIN= <,BSNBC= ,CBSNBC= ,PRFMSIN= ,CPRFMSIN= [
[ [
[ ,MSCAT= ,SUBRES= ,PIC= ,BAOC= ,BAIC= ,BAROAM= [
[ [
[ ,BAGPRS= ,BAPRC= ,BASPH= ,CBASPH= ,EXPIRY= [
[ [
[ ; [
[ ,TOSM= ,CHRG= ,CCHRG= ,OR=> [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
BSNBC BASIC SERVICE AND SN AND BCN
This parameter adds a new BSNBC.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: BASIC SERVICE CODE
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
b: SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
This information unit specifies the subscriber number.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 11+
MOD MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The variability (variabel or fixed) is project dependent.
The maximum number of digits is project dependent.
CBSNBC OLD BASIC SERV. AND SN AND BCN
This parameter erases a BSNBC.
All units given during creation of BSNBC must be entered
to identify the combination of basic service and subscriber number
and bearer capability names to be deleted.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: OLD BASIC SERVICE CODE
BS20GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.A.
BS21 DATA C.D.A. 300B/S
BS22 DATA C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS23 DATA C.D.A. 1200-75B/S
BS24 DATA C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS25 DATA C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS26 DATA C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS30GENR GENERAL DATA C.D.S.
BS31 DATA C.D.S. 1200B/S
BS32 DATA C.D.S. 2400B/S
BS33 DATA C.D.S. 4800B/S
BS34 DATA C.D.S. 9600B/S
BS40GENR GENERAL PAD ACCESS C.D.A.
BS41 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 300B/S
BS42 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 1200B/S
BS44 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 2400B/S
BS45 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 4800B/S
BS46 PAD ACCESS C.D.A. 9600B/S
BS61A ALTERNATE SPEECH OR DATA
BS81A SPEECH FOLLOWED BY DATA
GPRS GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE
TELEPHON TELEPHONY
TS21 SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP
TS21GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MT/PP FOR GPRS
TS22 SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP
TS22GPRS SHORT MESSAGE MO/PP FOR GPRS
TS61 FACSIMILE GROUP 3 AND SPEECH
TS62 AUTOMATIC FACSIMILE GROUP 3
VBS VOICE BROADCAST SERVICE
VGCS VOICE GROUP CALL SERVICE
b: OLD SUBSCRIBER NUMBER=
1...16 digit decimal number
PRFMSIN PROFILE MSIN
This parameter specifies type and MSIN of a mobile subscriber
profile entry. Depending on the type of the profile the following
profile data is linked to the created mobile subscriber:
GPRS profile: PDP context records assigned by ENTR GPRSERV
CAMEL profile: all CAMEL services and CSIs assigned by ENTR OPRSERV
SSV profile: data related to location services specified by ENTR GCSERV
The profile data entered by CR MSUB is not linked to the created
mobile subscriber.
The data entered explicitly for the subscriber and the profile data
linked to the subscriber are logically summed - the explicitly entered
data taking precedence over the profile data.
Example:
PDP context records 1 and 2 are entered for the subscriber and records
1 and 3 are entered for the linked profile. The resulting subscriber
data contains records 1 and 2 of the subscriber and record 3 of the
profile.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- A subscriber must only use references to profile subscribers
within the same HLRID.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 12+
MOD MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Only one reference for every type of profile is possible.
Compatibilities:
- MSUBTYP = GENERIC
- MSUBTYP = TEMPLATE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b
a: TYPE OF PROFILE
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERV. PROFILE
b: MSIN OF PROFILE=
1...12 digit decimal number
CPRFMSIN OLD PROFILE MSIN
This parameter cancels one or more references to mobile subscriber
profile entries. Only the references specified by type of profile
are deleted.
Notes:
- Up to 3 entries can be specified.
- If "X" is entered, then all references are canceled.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
CAMEL CAMEL PROFILE
GPRS GPRS PROFILE
SSV SUPPLEMENTARY SERV. PROFILE
X ENTIRE RANGE OF PARAM. VALUES
MSCAT MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CATEGORY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscriber category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
DATACALL DATA CALL
NATOPER NATIONAL OPERATOR
OLADD1 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 1
OLADD2 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 2
OLADD3 ADD. OPERATOR LANGUAGE 3
OLENGLSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE ENGLISH
OLFRENCH OPERATOR LANGUAGE FRENCH
OLGERMAN OPERATOR LANGUAGE GERMAN
OLRUSSIA OPERATOR LANGUAGE RUSSIAN
OLSPANSH OPERATOR LANGUAGE SPANISH
ORDINSUB ORDINARY CALLING SUBSCRIBER
PAYPHONE PAYPHONE
PRIOSUB PRIORITY SUBSCRIBER
TESTCALL TEST CALL
ORDFREE ORDINSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIOFREE PRIOSUB WITHOUT CHARGING
PRIO1SUB PRIORITY 1 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO2SUB PRIORITY 2 SUBSCRIBER
PRIO3SUB PRIORITY 3 SUBSCRIBER
VERIFSUB VERIFICATION SUBSCRIBER
SUBRES SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
This parameter specifies the area where the subscriber
is allowed to use the equipment.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a[-b]
a: SUBSCRIPTION RESTRICTION
ALLPLMN ALL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 13+
MOD MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
HPLMN HOME PLMN ONLY
ONAOFPLM ONE NAT. PLMN ALL FOREIGN PLMN
b: ROAMING AREA=
1...8 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Prerequisites:
- The area has to be created by CR ROAMAREA.
Notes:
- When this information unit is omitted, a
previous assignment of a ROAMING AREA is
removed from the mobile subscriber.
PIC PREF. INTEREXCHANGE CARRIER
This parameter defines the carrier code to the subscribers
preferred interexchange carrier.
The length of the carrier code is project dependent.
Valid carrier codes contain digits "0" to "9" only.
Input of "F" removes a PIC assignment for the mobile
subscriber.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed for a subscriber with the
network access mode GPRS.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...4 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
BAOC BARRING OF OUTGOING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of outgoing calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
OC OUTGOING CALLS
OCROUT OC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
OIC OUTGOING INTERNATIONAL CALLS
OICEXH OIC EXCEPT HOME PLMN COUNTRY
BAIC BARRING OF INCOMING CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of incoming calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
IC INCOMING CALLS
ICROUT IC ROAM. OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
NONE NONE
BAROAM BARRING OF ROAMING
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of roaming applies to the
mobile subscriber.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
NONE NONE
ROAMOH ROAMING OUTSIDE HOME PLMN
ROAMOHC ROAMING OUTSIDE HPLMN COUNTRY
BAGPRS BARRING OF GPRS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of GPRS ATTACH applies to the mobile
subscriber.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 14+
MOD MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALLPLMN BARRING IN ALLPLMN
NONE NO BARRING
VPLMN BARRING IN VPLMN
BAPRC BARR. OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
This parameter indicates which one of the following categories of
operator determined barring of premium rate calls applies to the
mobile subscriber.
Incompatibilities:
- This parameter is not allowed for a subscriber with the
network access mode GPRS.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ALL ALL OUTG. PREMIUM RATE CALLS
ENT ENTERTAINMENT CALLS
INFO INFORMATION CALLS
NONE NONE
BASPH BARRING SPECIFIC HOME PLMN
This parameter adds one or more of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination, to the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
CBASPH OLD BARR. SPECIFIC HOME PLMN
This parameter deletes one or more of the following categories of
operator specific barring, in any combination, from the mobile
subscriber.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
EXPIRY EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY
This parameter specifies the mobile subscribers expiry date.
The subscription expires at the begin of the entered date.
0-0-0 means: expires never.
Otherwise 0 is not allowed for mm or dd.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
0...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
0...31, range of decimal numbers
TOSM TRANSFER OPTION SHORT MESSAGE
This parameter specifies whether the mobile terminated short
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 15+
MOD MSUB
SINGLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
message service is delivered via SGSN or MSC. This parameter
is only applied, if the short message gateway MSC does not
support GPRS.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber has the
subscription of TS21GPRS or gets it within this command.
If this parameter is not entered in this case, the used
value will be SGSN.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
MSC TRANSFER VIA MSC
SGSN TRANSFER VIA SGSN
CHRG CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the general charging characteristics.
These general values will be taken in the SGSN if no special
charging characteristics are defined in the used PDP context.
Notes:
- This parameter is allowed only, if the subscriber has the
subscription of GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE or gets it within this co
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
CCHRG OLD CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS
This parameter specifies the charging characteristics to be deleted.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
FLATRATE FLAT RATE
HOTBILL HOT BILLING
NORMAL NORMAL
PREPAID PREPAID
OR OPTIMAL ROUTING
This parameter specifies whether the optimal routing
is allowed or not.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N NO
NO NO
Y YES
YES YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MSUB- 16-
DISP MSUBDBSZ
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE SUBSCRIBER DATABASE SIZE
This command displays the size and actual usage of ODAGEN expandable
HLR database modules.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MSUBDBSZ ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUBDBSZ- 1-
CAN MSUBFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
This command cancels subscriber related features.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MSUBFT : MSIN= ,MSUBFT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
MSUBFT SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
MSUBFT01 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 01
MSUBFT02 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 02
MSUBFT03 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 03
MSUBFT04 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 04
MSUBFT05 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 05
MSUBFT06 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 06
MSUBFT07 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 07
MSUBFT08 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 08
MSUBFT09 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 09
MSUBFT10 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 10
MSUBFT11 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 11
MSUBFT12 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 12
MSUBFT13 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 13
MSUBFT14 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 14
MSUBFT15 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 15
MSUBFT16 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 16
This parameter specifies a subscriber related feature.
The meaning of the specified feature is project dependent.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUBFT- 1-
ENTR MSUBFT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
This command assigns a feature to the given MSIN.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ ENTR MSUBFT : MSIN= ,MSUBFT= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
MSUBFT SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE
This parameter specifies a subscriber related feature.
The meaning of the specified feature is project dependent.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b]
a: FEATURE IDENTIFIER
MSUBFT01 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 01
MSUBFT02 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 02
MSUBFT03 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 03
MSUBFT04 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 04
MSUBFT05 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 05
MSUBFT06 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 06
MSUBFT07 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 07
MSUBFT08 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 08
MSUBFT09 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 09
MSUBFT10 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 10
MSUBFT11 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 11
MSUBFT12 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 12
MSUBFT13 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 13
MSUBFT14 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 14
MSUBFT15 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 15
MSUBFT16 SUBSCRIBER RELATED FEATURE 16
b: FEATURE DATA=
1...16 digit hexadecimal number where B is
interchangeable with * and C is interchangeable with #
The parameter-unit specifies the data for the entered
subscriber related feature. The meaning of the data is
project dependent.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MSUBFT- 1-
CAN MSUBLINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL LINKAGE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This command deletes a linkage between two mobile subscribers.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
This input format is used to cancel a link between two
GSM mobile subscriber.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MSUBLINK : MSIN= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MSUBLINK- 1-
CR MSUBLINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE LINKAGE FOR MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
This command creates a linkage between two mobile subscribers.
Prerequisites:
- The mobile subscribers have to be created (CR MSUB).
- None of the mobile subscribers must have a pending
ENTER SIM CARD CHANGEOVER DATA.
- None of the mobile subscribers must have a
EXPIRY DATE OF MSUB ENTRY.
- None of the mobile subscribers must be a profile subscriber.
This command is normally logged.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
This input format is used to link two GSM mobile subscribers.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CR MSUBLINK : MSIN1= ,MSIN2= [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN1 MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN1 a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
MSIN2 MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN2 a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MSUBLINK- 1-
DISP MSUBLINK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY LINKAGE OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBERS
This command displays the linkage between two mobile subscribers.
This command allows multiple starts.
This command is only permitted if a home location register
(HLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MSUBLINK : MSIN= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MSIN MSUB IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MSIN a: 10 Digits
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...12 digit decimal number
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MSUBLINK- 1-
DISP MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE
This command displays the information from the label of a magnetic
tape.
Prerequisite:
- The tape device must be available.
- The tape must be available.
- The tape device must be suitable for the required recording density.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [VSN=[ [
[ DISP MT : MTD= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape.
Note:
- The following character strings are reserved for disk devices and
are therefore illegal: VSN000 and VSN001.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the logical device number of the
magnetic tape device.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MT- 1-
INIT MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INITIALIZE MAGNETIC TAPE
This command is used to initialize a magnetic tape (generate its VOL1 label).
Prerequisites:
- The specified data carrier must be available.
- The specified data carrier must be a magnetic tape.
- If it is a new magnetic tape, the device number must also
be specified.
- The expiration date must have been passed, or it must be specified.
- The specified recording density must be available.
Input format

[ [
[ INIT MT : VSN= ,CD= [,MTD=] [,OWNER=] [,EXPDAT=] [,DENS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the new or the old and new volume
serial numbers of the tape.
Notes:
- The following character strings are reserved for disk devices and
are therefore illegal: VSN000 and VSN001.
n
n/o
n, o: new, old parameter value =
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
CD CODE
This parameter specifies the code (defined in the
label) to be used for writing to the magnetic tape.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
EBC EBCDIC-CODE
ISO ASCII-CODE
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the logical device number of the
magnetic tape device.
Notes:
- If a new value is entered for the parameter VSN, then this
parameter is mandatory.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
OWNER OWNER OF THE DEVICE
This parameter allows the tape owner to be identified by name.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...14 characters from the
symbolic name character set
The following characters are not permitted:
.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INIT MT- 1+
INIT MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EXPDAT EXPIRATION DATE
This parameter specifies the expiration date of the tape.
It is entered to indicate that the retention period of the tape
has been noted.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b-c
a: YEAR=
0...99, range of decimal numbers
b: MONTH=
1...12, range of decimal numbers
c: DAY=
1...31, range of decimal numbers
DENS DENSITY
This parameter specifies the recording density
used on the magnetic tape.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1600,6250, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 INIT MT- 2-
REWIND MT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
REWIND MAGNETIC TAPE
This command rewinds a magnetic tape and releases the tape device.
Prerequisite:
- The tape device must be available.
- The data carrier must be available and not reserved by another process.
Input format

[ [
[ [
[ [VSN=[ [
[ REWIND MT : MTD= ; [
[ [ [ [
[ [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
VSN VOLUME SERIAL NUMBER
This parameter specifies the volume serial number of the
tape.
Note:
- The following character strings are reserved for disk devices and
are therefore illegal: VSN000 and VSN001.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...6 characters from the
symbolic name character set
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the logical device number of the
magnetic tape device.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...99, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 REWIND MT- 1-
CAN MTAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MOBILE TARIFF
This command cancels a mobile tariff.
Prerequisites:
- The mobile tariff must not be used in a mobile tariff category.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MTAR : MTAR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTAR MOBILE TARIFF
This parameter specifies a parameter set.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...522, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTAR- 1-
DISP MTAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE TARIFF
This command displays the parameters for a specified mobile tariff.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MTAR : MTAR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTAR MOBILE TARIFF
This parameter specifies a parameter set.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
0...522, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTAR- 1-
ENTR MTAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ENTER MOBILE TARIFF
This command enters a tariff for mobile originating calls, the call
forwarding leg or call attempts ( attempts of mobile originating
calls ). A tariff is defined as a set of parameters which are used to
start timers with a defined length and for adding a determined number
of charging units to a counter.
In case of answered mobile originating or forwarded calls, the
determination of charging units is done as follows:
1. A base number of units ( E4INU ) is stored in the charge unit
counter.
2. The first timer is started with a value according to E7SPITI. If
E7SPITI = 0 then E2SPTI is used instead.
3. When this timer expires, a number of units according to E1UPTI
is added to the charge unit counter.
4. The second timer is started with a value according to E2SPTI.
5. When this timer expires a number of units according to E1UPTI is
added to the charge unit counter.
6. The steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the call is released.
7. The number of charging units is multiplied by a factor according
to the parameter E3SCF which has been specified for the home
PLMN of the served subscriber ( ENTR PLMNTAR ).
In case of a chargeable call attempt only the number of units
defined with E4INU is stored in the charge unit counter and
finally multiplied by E3SCF as described above ( Step 7 ).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR MTAR : MTAR= ,E1UPTI= ,E2SPTI= ,E4INU= [,E5UPDI=] [
[ [
[ [,E6SPDI=] ,E7SPITI= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTAR MOBILE TARIFF
This parameter assigns a number to a parameter set via which it can
be addressed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...522, range of decimal numbers
E1UPTI UNITS PER TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the number of units that will be incremented
per interval. The resolution of the E1UPTI-parameter is 0.1 and
hence its value ranges from 000.0 to 819.1. (E.g. If value 30 is
entered then E1UPTI = 3 units per interval ).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E2SPTI SECONDS PER TIME INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the interval ( used in E1UPTI ) in seconds.
The resolution of the E2SPTI-parameter is 0.1 and hence its value
ranges from 000.0 to 819.1. (E.g. If value 30 is entered, then
E2SPTI = 3 seconds per interval ).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MTAR- 1+
ENTR MTAR
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E4INU INITIAL UNITS
This parameter specifies the number of units that will be incremented
at the beginning of the call. The resolution of the E4INU-parameter
is 0.1 and hence its value ranges from 000.0 to 819.1. ( E.g. If
value 30 is entered, then 3 units will be charged at the beginning
of the call.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E5UPDI UNITS PER DATA INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the number of units that will be incremented
per data interval. The resolution of the E5UPDI-parameter is 0.1
and hence its value ranges from 000.0 to 819.1. (E.g. If value 30
is entered then E5UPDI = 3 seconds per data interval ).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E6SPDI SEGMENTS PER DATA INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the data interval ( used in E5UPDI ) and
is expressed in segments. The resolution of the E6SPDI-parameter
is 1 and hence its value ranges from 0 to 8191.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E7SPITI SECONDS PER INITIAL TIME INTER
This parameter specifies the initial interval ( used in E1UPTI ) in
seconds. The resolution of the E7SPITI-parameter is 0.1 and hence
its value ranges from 000.0 to 819.1. (E.g. If value 30 is entered
then E7SPITI = 3 seconds per initial interval ).
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MTAR- 2-
MOD MTAR
MODMTAR1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MOBILE TARIFF
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. MOD MTAR - MODMTAR1 MODIFICATION OF E PARAMETERS
2. MOD MTAR - MODMTAR2 REFRESH AOC TABLES IN LTG
1. Input format
MODIFICATION OF E PARAMETERS
This input format is used to modify one or more parameters of a mobile
tariff. Parameters which are not entered remain unchanged.

[ [
[ MOD MTAR : MTAR= <,E1UPTI= ,E2SPTI= ,E4INU= ,E5UPDI= [
[ [
[ ,E6SPDI= ,E7SPITI=> ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTAR MOBILE TARIFF
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...522, range of decimal numbers
E1UPTI UNITS PER TIME INTERVAL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E2SPTI SECONDS PER TIME INTERVAL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E4INU INITIAL UNITS
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E5UPDI UNITS PER DATA INTERVAL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E6SPDI SEGMENTS PER DATA INTERVAL
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
E7SPITI SECONDS PER INITIAL TIME INTER
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...8191, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTAR- 1+
MOD MTAR
MODMTAR2
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REFRESH AOC TABLES IN LTG
This input format is used to retransmit the tariffs to all relevant
LTGs.

[ [
[ MOD MTAR ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTAR- 2-
CAN MTARCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This command cancels an existing mobile tariff category.
Prerequisites:
- The mobile tariff can not be canceled if it is still used by a mobile
zone.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MTARCAT : MTARCAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTARCAT MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This parameter specifies a mobile tariff category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...254, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTARCAT- 1-
DISP MTARCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This command displays the tariffs and their associated switch-over
times for a given mobile tariff category.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MTARCAT : MTARCAT= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTARCAT MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This parameter specifies a mobile tariff category.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...254, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTARCAT- 1-
ENTR MTARCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This command defines a mobile tariff category, i.e. the associations
between mobile tariffs and the times when the switch-over to these
tariffs have to be performed.
Prerequisites:
- The mobile tariffs mentioned in the SWTAR parameters have to
exist ( ENTR MTAR ).
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ENTR MTARCAT : MTARCAT= ,SWTAR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTARCAT MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This parameter specifies a mobile tariff category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...254, range of decimal numbers
SWTAR SWITCH-OVER TIME AND TARIFF
This parameter specifies the tariff to switch to and the
switch-over time in relation with the weekday category when the
switch has to be executed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies
the HOUR of the switch-over time.
b: MINUTE (00, 15, 30, 45)=
0...45, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies
the MINUTE of the switch-over time.
c: MOBILE TARIFF=
0...522, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the mobile tariff which
will be valid after the switch-over.
d: WEEKDAY CATEGORY
WO WORKDAY
HH HALF HOLIDAY
HO FULL HOLIDAY
HN NATIONAL HOLIDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND
EF FULL WEEKEND
This information unit specifies the weekday category for which
the switch-over has to be performed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 ENTR MTARCAT- 1-
MOD MTARCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MODIFY MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MTARCAT : MTARCAT= [,NSWTAR=] [,CSWTAR=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTARCAT MOBILE TARIFF CATEGORY
This parameter specifies a mobile tariff category.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...254, range of decimal numbers
NSWTAR NEW SWITCH-OVER TARIFFS
This parameter specifies the new mobile tariffs to switch to and the
switch-over time in relation with the weekday category when the
switch has to be executed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
a-b-c-d
a: HOUR OF SWITCH-OVER TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the
HOUR of the new switch-over time.
b: MINUTE (00, 15, 30, 45)=
0...45, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the
MINUTE of the new switch-over time.
c: MOBILE TARIFF=
0...522, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the mobile tariff which
will be valid after the switch-over.
d: WEEKDAY CATEGORY
WO WORKDAY
HH HALF HOLIDAY
HO FULL HOLIDAY
HN NATIONAL HOLIDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND
EF FULL WEEKEND
This information unit specifies the weekday category for
witch the switch-over is to be performed.
CSWTAR CANCELLED SWITCH-OVER TARIFFS
This parameter specifies the old mobile tariffs to switch to
and the switch-over time in relation with the weekday category
when the switch had to be executed.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTARCAT- 1+
MOD MTARCAT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
of multiple values linked with &.
a[-b[-c[-d]]]
a: HOUR OF SWITCH-OVER TIME=
0...23, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the
HOUR of the old switch-over time.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of
unit values.
b: MINUTE (00, 15, 30, 45)=
0...45, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the
MINUTE of the old switch-over time.
c: MOBILE TARIFF=
0...522, range of decimal numbers
This information unit specifies the mobile tariff which
would be valid after the switch-over.
d: WEEKDAY CATEGORY
WO WORKDAY
HH HALF HOLIDAY
HO FULL HOLIDAY
HN NATIONAL HOLIDAY
EH HALF WEEKEND
EF FULL WEEKEND
This information unit specifies the weekday category for
which the switch-over was to be performed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTARCAT- 2-
CAN MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command cancels a magnetic tape device.
Prerequisites:
- A connecting IOPMTD must be PLA or MBL.
A connecting IOPUNI must be PLA, MBL or ACT.
- The magnetic tape device must be PLA.
This command is normally logged.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MTD : MTD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be cancelled.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTD- 1-
CONF MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CONFIGURE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command configures a magnetic tape device.
Notes:
- The configuration from ACT to MBL is considered dangerous.
A dialog mask is output. The operating personnel must decide by
entering + or - whether the command should be executed.
Input format

[ [
[ CONF MTD : MTD= ,OST= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be configured.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
OST OPERATING STATE
This parameter specifies the target operating state.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
ACT ACTIVE
MBL MAINTENANCE BLOCKED
PLA PLANNED
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CONF MTD- 1-
CR MTD
IOPMTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CREATE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command creates a magnetic tape device. The created magnetic
tape device is in the operating state PLA after the command
has been executed.
Prerequisites:
- The specified IOPMTD must not be ACT, however the specified
IOPUNI may be ACT.
This command is normally logged.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. CR MTD - IOPMTD CREATE MTD AT IOPMTD
2. CR MTD - IOPUNI CREATE MTD AT IOPUNI
1. Input format
CREATE MTD AT IOPMTD
This input creates a magnetic tape device at an
input/output processor for magnetic tape device.

[ [
[ CR MTD : IOP= ,MTD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to which the
magnetic tape device is to be connected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPMTD IOP FOR MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
b: IOP NUMBER=
0,1,2...3, range of decimal numbers
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the number of the magnetic tape device
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTD- 1+
CR MTD
IOPUNI
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
CREATE MTD AT IOPUNI
This input creates a magnetic tape device at an
input/output processor unified for O&M devices.

[ [
[ CR MTD : IOP= ,MTD= ,SCSIADDR= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
IOP INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSOR
This parameter specifies the input/output processor to which the
magnetic tape device is to be connected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: IOP TYPE
IOPUNI IOP UNIFIED FOR O&M DEVICES
b: IOP NUMBER=
0,1,2...7, range of decimal numbers
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the number of the magnetic tape device
to be created.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SCSIADDR SCSI ADDRESS
This parameter specifies the address at the SCSI bus.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
4...5, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTD- 2-
DIAG MTD
DIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DIAGNOSE MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command initiates single, repeated or permanent diagnostic runs
for a magnetic tape device.
Prerequisites:
- The magnetic tape device must be MBL.
- An initialized tape with a file protection ring must be inserted.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
THIS COMMAND HAS FOLLOWING INPUT FORMATS :
1. DIAG MTD - DIAG SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
2. DIAG MTD - REPDIAG REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
1. Input format
SINGLE DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a single diagnosis for a magnetic tape device.

[ [
[ DIAG MTD : MTD= [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MTD- 1+
DIAG MTD
REPDIAG
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2. Input format
REPEATED DIAGNOSIS
This input initiates a repeated or permanent diagnosis for a magnetic
tape device.

[ [
[ DIAG MTD : MTD= ,REP= [,INT=] [,STATCS=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be diagnosed.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
REP REPEAT
Valid values are :
2...65535 for repeated diagnosis
PERM for permanent diagnosis with unlimited number
of runs (termination with command STOP JOB)
This parameter specifies the number of diagnostic runs.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...5 characters from the
symbolic name character set
INT INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTIC CYCLE
This parameter specifies that a repeated or permanent diagnosis is
interrupted as soon as a fault is detected.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
NO CONTINUE IN CASE OF FAULT
Y TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
YES TERMINATE IN CASE OF FAULT
Default: NO
STATCS OUTPUT OF STATISTICS
This parameter specifies the interval between statistic outputs
in minutes.
Notes:
- Statistic output can also be requested with the DISP DIAGSTAT
command.
Standard Behavior: no statistic output
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
1...60, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DIAG MTD- 2-
DISP MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command displays the magnetic tape device, the preceding IOP
and the address at the SCSI bus.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MTD : MTD= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device.
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTD- 1-
TEST MTD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TEST MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This command tests a magnetic tape device.
Prerequisites:
- The magnetic tape device must be ACT and an initialized
tape with a file protection ring must also be inserted.
This command may start a long-running job. It can be stopped with STOP JOB: JN=
<job number>.
Input format

[ [
[ TEST MTD : [MTD=] [,SUP=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
MTD MAGNETIC TAPE DEVICE
This parameter specifies the magnetic tape device to be tested.
Notes:
- If the optional unit parameter is omitted, all active units
of the relevant type are tested.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
0...3, range of decimal numbers
SUP SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
N DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
NO DISPLAY PROGRESS MESSAGES
Y SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
YES SUPPRESS PROGRESS MESSAGES
Default: YES
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 TEST MTD- 1-
CAN MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MTP Account. and Verific.
This task deletes one specific MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- Net ID, Accounting ID
- Net name, Accounting ID
A delete command is rejected if:
- the Account is still activated
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MTPAV : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Accounting ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own signalling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Accounting ID
This parameter identifies the MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Input format: 1...255
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTPAV- 1-
CR MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create MTP Account. and Verific.
This task creates one MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- Net ID, Accounting ID
- Net name, Accounting ID
Attention:
During the creation the controlStatus will be set to suspend, i.e. no
notification will be generated. In order to get the notification the
logFile (CR SS7LOG) hasto be created and the account has to be
activated (ACT SS7BAV).
Enter Dest.point group name for
- Accounting dest.point grp. and
- Verification dest.point .grp.
Enter Link set name for
- Set of acc.link sets
The MTP Accounting a. Verification allows by means of the Set of acc.link sets
parameter to define a set (at least one) of Signaling link sets
which are leading to an adjacent operator and therefore their
MSU traffic can be accounted/verified collectively.
One Signaling link set must not be assigned often within one Signaling point.
All Set of acc.link sets of MTP Accounting a. Verifications with the same
Operatorname must be disjunct.
The selectionItem in each of the entries of
Accounting dest.point grp. refers each to one Dest.point group,
Each selectionGroup entry shall be unique in this parameter.
For each selectionGroup it is counted separately. Each counter
information contains
- the number of MSUs
- the number of octets
- an eventual data problem.
The counters are only available in the notification.
If the account is activated a notification is generated every 30 minutes for the
SS7 Accounting a. Verification control object controlling the MTP Accounting a.
Verification, except if the parameter Accounting dest.point grp. has size zero.
If accounting is done for all accounts in the same way, then it is possible to
include the pointCodeSet only in one notification (e.g. the first) of the
interval and omit it in all others. In this case the sequence of the given
counters must be identical, i.e. refer to the same DPCs, for all notifications of
the interval. If no reactionType is given explicitly, the value passOn and count
is assumed for the corresponding counter.
There exist two different notifications :
- one for accounting
- one for accounting verification
containing the measurement results are generated
If a Accounting dest.point grp. is empty, this means
that accounting resp. verification is not performed for the adjacent
oeprator. In this case there is no notification for accounting
resp. verification.
A create command is rejected if
- at least one of the pointers in parameter
Set of acc.link sets would reference an instance of another object class
than the MTP Accounting a. Verification or a Signaling link set which is
already referenced by another MTP Accounting a. Verification
- at least one of the dpcGroup which would be referenced by the parameter
Accounting dest.point grp. or- ForVerification is not existing or is
of another object class than dpcGroup
- at least one of the dpcGroups which would be referenced by the
parameter Accounting dest.point grp. or- ForVerification is contained
in another Signaling point.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPAV- 1+
CR MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format

[ [
[ CR MTPAV : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] ,Accounting ID= ,Operatorname= [
[ [
[ [,Reaction type list=] [,Accounting dest.point grp.=] [
[ [
[ [,Verification dest.point .grp.=] ,Set of acc.link sets= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own signalling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Accounting ID
This parameter identifies the MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Input format: 1...255
Operatorname
The Operatorname parameter indicates the operator for which accounting
and/or verification is done in the account.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Reaction type list
This list parameter determines how MSUs with the corresponding incoming
linkset/DPC
combinations are treated. The entry in the first position refers to the
first entry
in the Accounting dest. point grp., the second to the second and so on.
Input format: 1...16 elements
Accounting dest.point grp.
The Accounting dest.point grp. parameter refers to a set of groups
of objects that are representing the items against which
incoming SS7 traffic should be registered.
Input format: 1...16 elements
This parameter identifies a Signaling destination point by its name.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Verification dest.point .grp.
The Verification dest.point.grp. parameter refers to a set of groups
of objects that are representing the items against which
outgoing SS7 traffic should be registered.
Input format: 1...16 elements
This parameter identifies a Signaling destination point by its name.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Set of acc.link sets
The Set of acc.link sets refers to a set of (at least one) Signaling
link sets,
for which MTP Accounting a. Verification or verification shall be done
collectively.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPAV- 2+
CR MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format: 1...32 elements
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPAV- 3-
DISP MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MTP Account. and Verific.
This task displays MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Notes :
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
one instance of one network
- Net ID, Accounting ID
- Net name, Accounting ID
all instances of one network
- Net ID
- Net name
all instances
- no input
Enter Dest.point group name for
- Accounting dest.point grp. and
- Verification dest.point .grp.
Enter Link set name for
- Set of acc.link sets
The following parameters can be displayed in the output tables:
Accounting ID
This attribute identifies the MTP Accounting and Verification.
Net name
Net name
Net ID
Net ID
Accounting dest.point grp.
Accounting dest.point grp.
Verification dest.point .grp.
Verification dest.point .grp.
Set of acc.link sets
Set of acc.link sets
controlStatus
This attribute determines the status of the accounting measurement. In case
of {suspend} the account is inactive and no notifications are sent. In case of
{} the account is active and notifications are sent.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MTPAV : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Accounting ID=] [
[ [
[ [,Operatorname=] [
[ [
[ ,Filteroperation for Set of acc.link sets= [
[ [
[ [,Set of acc.link sets=] [
[ [
[ ,Filteroperation for Accounting dest.point grp.= [
[ [
[ [,Accounting dest.point grp.=] [
[ [
[ ,Filteroperation for Verification dest.point .grp.= [
[ [
[ [,Verification dest.point .grp.=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPAV- 1+
DISP MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own signalling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
Accounting ID
This parameter identifies the MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Input format: 1...255
Operatorname
The Operatorname parameter indicates the operator for which accounting
and/or verification is done in the account.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Filteroperation for Set of acc.link sets
equality:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if the value supplied in the
entered attribute is equal to the value of the stored attribute.
subset of:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if all asserted members are
present in the stored attribute.
superset of:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if all members of the
stored attribute are present in the entered attribute.
non null set intersection:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if at least one of the
asserted members is present in the stored attribute.
Set of acc.link sets
The Set of acc.link sets refers to a set of (at least one) Signaling
link sets,
for which MTP Accounting a. Verification or verification shall be done
collectively.
Input format: 1...32 elements
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Filteroperation for Accounting dest.point grp.
equality:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if the value supplied in the
entered attribute is equal to the value of the stored attribute.
subset of:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if all asserted members are
present in the stored attribute.
superset of:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if all members of the
stored attribute are present in the entered attribute.
non null set intersection:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if at least one of the
asserted members is present in the stored attribute.
Accounting dest.point grp.
The Accounting dest.point grp. parameter refers to a set of groups
of objects that are representing the items against which
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPAV- 2+
DISP MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
incoming SS7 traffic should be registered.
Input format: 1...16 elements
This parameter identifies a Signaling destination point by its name.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Filteroperation for Verification dest.point .grp.
equality:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if the value supplied in the
entered attribute is equal to the value of the stored attribute.
subset of:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if all asserted members are
present in the stored attribute.
superset of:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if all members of the
stored attribute are present in the entered attribute.
non null set intersection:
Evaluates to TRUE if and only if at least one of the
asserted members is present in the stored attribute.
Verification dest.point .grp.
The Verification dest.point.grp. parameter refers to a set of groups
of objects that are representing the items against which
outgoing SS7 traffic should be registered.
Input format: 1...16 elements
This parameter identifies a Signaling destination point by its name.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPAV- 3-
MOD MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify MTP Account. and Verific.
This task modifies attributes for one MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- Net ID, Accounting ID
- Net name, Accounting ID
A set command is rejected if:
- at least one of the pointers in attribute Set of acc.link sets is not
unique or would not reference an existing Signaling link set in the same net
or a Signaling link set is already referenced by another MTP Accounting a.
Verification.
- at least one of the pointers in attribute Accounting dest.point grp. or
Verification dest.point .grp. is not unique or would not reference an existing
Dest.point Group in the same net.
- a Accounting dest.point grp. is given but the Reaction type list is missing.
- a Accounting dest.point grp. and the Reaction type list is given and the
number of elements is different.
- at least one referenced Signaling destination point in the Point code set is
already
used by another Dest.point group, which is referenced by any MTP Accounting a.
Verification as
an Accounting dest.point grp..
- at least one referenced Signaling destination point in the Point code set is
already
used by another Dest.point group, which is referenced as Verification
dest.point .grp.
within the MTP Accounting a. Verification.
- for all MTP Accounting a. Verifications a Accounting dest.point grp. points
to more than 255
different Dest.point groups.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MTPAV : [Net name=] [,Net ID=] [,Accounting ID=] [
[ [
[ [,Operatorname=] ,Reaction type list operat.= [
[ [
[ [,Reaction type list=] [
[ [
[ ,Accounting dest.point grp. operat.= [
[ [
[ [,Accounting dest.point grp.=] [
[ [
[ ,Verification dest.point .grp. operat.= [
[ [
[ [,Verification dest.point .grp.=] [
[ [
[ ,Set of acc.link sets operat.= [,Set of acc.link sets=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Net name
This parameter identifies the name of the own Signaling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Net ID
This parameter identifies the ID of the own signalling point
within a signaling network.
Input format: 1...32
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTPAV- 1+
MOD MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Accounting ID
This parameter identifies the MTP Accounting a. Verification.
Input format: 1...255
Operatorname
The Operatorname parameter indicates the operator for which accounting
and/or verification is done in the account.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Reaction type list operat.
This parameter defines the type of operation to be performed for
the Reaction type list.
Reaction type list
This list parameter determines how MSUs with the corresponding incoming
linkset/DPC
combinations are treated. The entry in the first position refers to the
first entry
in the Accounting dest. point grp., the second to the second and so on.
Input format: 1...16 elements
Accounting dest.point grp. operat.
This parameter defines the type of operation to be performed for
the Accounting dest.point grp..
Accounting dest.point grp.
The Accounting dest.point grp. parameter refers to a set of groups
of objects that are representing the items against which
incoming SS7 traffic should be registered.
Input format: 1...16 elements
This parameter identifies a Signaling destination point by its name.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Verification dest.point .grp. operat.
This parameter defines the type of operation to be performed for
the Verification dest.point .grp..
Verification dest.point .grp.
The Verification dest.point.grp. parameter refers to a set of groups
of objects that are representing the items against which
outgoing SS7 traffic should be registered.
Input format: 1...16 elements
This parameter identifies a Signaling destination point by its name.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
Set of acc.link sets operat.
This parameter defines the type of operation to be performed for
the Set of acc.link sets.
Set of acc.link sets
The Set of acc.link sets refers to a set of (at least one) Signaling
link sets,
for which MTP Accounting a. Verification or verification shall be done
collectively.
Input format: 1...32 elements
This parameter represents the name of the signaling link set.
Input format: 1...12 characters from the printable character set
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTPAV- 2+
MOD MTPAV
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTPAV- 3-
CAN MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MTP Level 2 Protocol Profile
This task cancel Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- L2 profile ID
- L2 profile name
A Mtp L2 protocol profile defines the layer 2
characteristics of signaling Links.
The Mtp L2 protocol profiles can be created
in order to define a particular profile.
At creation time of a Signaling link one of the
Mtp L2 protocol profiles is referenced. Several
Signaling link can use the same Mtp L2 protocol profile.
The timer limit values depend on the Transmission rate
(56/64 kbit) and the Correction Method (pcr/basic).
The parameters Receive congestion threshold abatement,
Receive congestion noMSUsAccepted and
Receive congestion threshold onset cannot be administered
externally.
A set of profiles is instantiated internally.
For these profiles no changes are allowed.
Additional profiles may be created or deleted within
a L2 profile ID (range from 9 to 64).
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MTPL2PF : [L2 profile name=] [,L2 profile ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
L2 profile name
This parameter is the name of a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
L2 profile ID
This parameter identifies a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Possible values: 9..64
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTPL2PF- 1-
CR MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create MTP Level 2 Protocol Profile
This task creates Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
- L2 profile ID and L2 profile name
for automatic instance naming :
- L2 profile name
A Mtp L2 protocol profile defines the layer 2
characteristics of signaling Links.
The Mtp L2 protocol profiles can be created
in order to define a particular profile.
At creation time of a Signaling link one of the
Mtp L2 protocol profiles is referenced. Several
Signaling link can use the same Mtp L2 protocol profile.
The timer limit values depend on the Transmission rate
(56/64 kbit) and the Correction Method (pcr/basic).
The parameters Receive congestion threshold abatement,
Receive congestion noMSUsAccepted and
Receive congestion threshold onset cannot be administered
externally.
A set of profiles is instantiated internally.
For these profiles no changes are allowed.
Additional profiles may be created or deleted within
a L2 profile ID (range from 9 to 64).
Input format

[ [
[ CR MTPL2PF : L2 profile name= [,L2 profile ID=] [,Congestion method=] [
[ [
[ [,Correction method=] [,L2 timer T1 [ms]=] [
[ [
[ [,L2 timer T2 [ms]=] [,L2 timer T3 [ms]=] [
[ [
[ [,L2 timer T4E [ms]=] [,L2 timer T4N [ms]=] [
[ [
[ [,L2 timer T5 [ms]=] [,L2 timer T6 [ms]=] [
[ [
[ [,L2 timer T7 [ms]=] [,Number of threshold levels=] [
[ [
[ [,Trm.cong.abatement L1=] [,Trm.cong.abatement L2=] [
[ [
[ [,Trm.cong.abatement L3=] [,Trm.cong.discard L1=] [
[ [
[ [,Trm.cong.discard L2=] [,Trm.cong.discard L3=] [
[ [
[ [,Trm.cong.onset L1=] [,Trm.cong.onset L2=] [
[ [
[ [,Trm.cong.onset L3=] [,Transmission rate=] [
[ [
[ [,Max.MSU for retrm.=] [,Max.oct.for retrm.=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
L2 profile name
This parameter is the name of a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
L2 profile ID
This parameter identifies a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Possible values: 9..64
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPL2PF- 1+
CR MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Congestion method
This parameter defines which method of congestion
control is to be performed within a Signaling link set.
This parameter is part of the SAAL NNI and Mtp L2 protocol profile.
On creation of the Signaling link, it will be checked that the
congestion method chosen for the linkset within which the link is
contained and the congestion method in the profile used for
the link are the same.
The Congestion method of all linkset in one net must be equal, i.e. the
Congestion method of the first
Linkset created in a signaling Point defines the Congestion method of
all further linkset in the same
signaling Point.
Possible values: in ANSI net - ANSI nat. with prio. enh. or ANSI
nat.cong. with prio.,
in ITU net - International,
in ITU net - UK compatible (but only if the feature
compatibilityForUK is activated).
Correction method
This parameter is used to specify the type of
error-correction the Signaling link is using.
Possible values: Basic|PCR
L2 timer T1 [ms]
The L2 timer T1 Alignment ready defines the time
between the end of the proving period locally and the
receiving of FISUs indicating the end of the proving
period at the remote side. The duration of time-out T1
should be chosen such that the remote end can perform
four additional proving attempts. The unit for the
integer value is milliseconds.
The default value is 45000 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
Possible values: ITU: 40000..50000
ANSI: 12900..50000
L2 timer T2 [ms]
The L2 timer T2 Not aligned defines the time Level
2 will attempt alignment. When during this time the
remote Level 2 does not reply to the alignment request,
local Level 2 stops the attempt for alignment. The unit
for the integer value is milliseconds.
The default value is 25000 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
Possible values: ITU: 5000..150000
ANSI: 5000..30000
L2 timer T3 [ms]
The L2 timer T3 Aligned defines the time for the supervision
of the aligned state. The timer is started when
the local Level 2 enters the aligned state and stopped
when LSSUs with status indication SIN or SIE are
received indicating that the remote Level 2 has also
entered the aligned state. The unit for the integer
value is milliseconds.
The default value is 1500 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
Possible values: ITU: 1000..2000
ANSI: 5000..14000
L2 timer T4E [ms]
The L2 timer T4E defines the time for an emergency proving
period (Level 2 Proving period timer emergency). During
this time LSSUs with status indication emergency are
transmitted.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPL2PF- 2+
CR MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The timer value corresponds to the transmission time of
Pe=2**x (2 to the power of x) octets.
For x following values are defined:
- ITU-T and ANSI T1.111: x=12.
The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
The default value is 500 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
PCR error correction method and ITU-T recommendation.
Possible values: ITU: 400..600
ANSI: 540..600 (Transmission rate: 56 kBit)
450..600 (Transmission rate: 64 kBit)
L2 timer T4N [ms]
The L2 timer T4N defines the time for a normal proving
period (Level 2 Proving period timer normal). During
this time LSSUs with status indication normal are
transmitted. The timer value corresponds to the
transmission time of Pn=2**x (2 to the power of x) octets,
for x following values are defined:
- ITU-T: x=16
- ANSI T1.111: x=14
The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
The default value is 8200 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
PCR error correction method and ITU-T recommendation.
Possible values: ITU: 7500..9500
ANSI: 2000..2500 (Transmission rate: 56 kBit)
1800..2500 (Transmission rate: 64 kBit)
L2 timer T5 [ms]
The L2 timer T5 Sending SIB defines the interval
for sending of LSSUs with status indication busy to
the remote Level 2 during a local receive congestion
situation. The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
The default value is 100 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
PCR error correction method.
Possible values: 80..120
L2 timer T6 [ms]
The L2 timer T6 defines the time for the supervision of
a remote congestion situation (Level 2 timer Remote
congestion). The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
The default value is 4500 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
Possible values: ITU: 3000..6000
ANSI: 1000..6000
L2 timer T7 [ms]
The L2 timer T7 Excessive delay of acknowledgement
supervises the acknowledgement of transmitted MSUs. The
timer value must be greater than the loop delay TL of
the signaling data link plus the processing time of the
signaling link terminal. The unit for the integer value
is milliseconds.
The default value is 1000 and refers to the following
combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic
error correction method.
Possible values: 500..2000
800..2000 (if correction method PCR is used)
Number of threshold levels
This parameter defines the number of thresholds to be
used when the congestion control method is national
congestion control method with multiple thresholds and
congestion priorities. Currently the value 3 is allowed
only. When the congestion control method is international,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPL2PF- 3+
CR MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
this parameter must have the value 0.
Possible values: 0|1|2|3
Trm.cong.abatement L1
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer of a congested link falls below
this level, the respective link is no longer in the
congestion status. All congestion control measures cease.
It must be assured that the Transmission congestion
abatement L1 is less than the Transmission
congestion onset L1. If this condition is not
fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
Sufficient hysteresis should be provided between the
Transmission congestion onset L1 and the
Transmission congestion abatement L1 to prevent excessive
oscillation between congested and non-congested states.
Thus a value of mess 15/oct 300 is proposed for the
Transmission congestion abatement L1.
National congestion method:
If the number of messages in the transmission/retransmission
buffer falls below this abatement level, then the link is no
longer congested. Congestion status 1 measures end. (Messages
received from level 4 with congestion priority 0 and higher
are transmitted unless the route set congestion state is higher
than this link congestion state.)
The Transmission congestion abatement L1 must be less than
Transmission congestion onset L1. If this
condition is not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
The default value refers to the threshold of Transmission congestion
abatement L1 used for the basic error correction method.
Possible values: messages (1..448)
octets (1..8498)
Trm.cong.abatement L2
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer falls below this abatement
level, then the Signaling link is no longer in congestion status 2.
Congestion status 2 measures end.
(Messages received from level 4 with congestion priority 1 and
higher are transmitted unless the route set congestion state is
higher than this link congestion state.)
The Transmission congestion abatement L2 must be less than
Transmission congestion onset L2 and greater than
the Transmission congestion onset L1.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
Possible values: messages (3..2147483643)
octets (3..2147483643)
Trm.cong.abatement L3
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer falls below this abatement
level, then the Signaling link is no longer in congestion status 3.
Congestion status 3 measures end.
(Messages received from level 4 with congestion priority 2 and
higher are transmitted unless the route set congestion state is
higher than this link congestion state.)
The Transmission congestion abatement L3 must be less than
Transmission congestion onset L3 and greater than
the Transmission congestion onset L2. If these conditions are not
fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
Possible values: messages (5..2147483645)
octets (5..2147483645)
Trm.cong.discard L1
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this discard level,
then the Signaling link is in discard status 1 and
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPL2PF- 4+
CR MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
MSUs with priority 0 will be discarded.
The Transmission congestion discard L1 must be greater than
Transmission congestion onset L1 and less than Transmission
congestion onset L2.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
Possible values: messages (3..2147483643)
octets (3..2147483643)
Trm.cong.discard L2
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this discard level,
then the Signaling link is in discard status 2 and
MSUs with priority 1 or lower will be discarded.
The Transmission congestion discard L2 must be greater than
Transmission congestion onset L2 and less than Transmission
congestion onset L3.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
Possible values: messages (5..2147483645)
octets (5..2147483645)
Trm.cong.discard L3
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this discard level,
then the Signaling link is in discard status 3 and
MSUs with priority 2 or lower will be discarded. Only
level 3 MSUs are still transmitted.
The Transmission congestion discard L3 must be greater than
Transmission congestion onset L3.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
Possible values: messages (7..2147483647)
octets (7..2147483647)
Trm.cong.onset L1
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this congestion level,
then the respective link enters the congestion status.
Congestion control measures are now initiated to reduce
the load on the link.
Note:
It must be assured that this level is greater than the
Transmission congestion abatement L1 and less
than the maximum resources given to a link
(linkTransmissionResourceThreshold). If this conditions
are not fulfilled, the commandrequest is rejected.
It should be assured that the buffer capacity below the
Transmission congestion onset L1 is engineered
so that factors such as a long loop delay do not result
in the link going into congestion under normal load
conditions respectively to overcome load peaks due to
signaling network management functions. The remaining
buffer capacity should allow User Parts enough time to
react to congestion indications before message discard
occurs. The link transmission resource threshold has a
value of mess 450/oct 8800. Thus a value of
mess 100/oct 2000 is proposed for the
Transmission congestion onset L1.
National congestion method:
If the number of messages in the transmission/retransmission
buffer exceeds this onset level, then the link is in congestion
status 1. Congestion status 1 measures start. (Messages received
from level 4 with congestion priority 1 and higher are transmitted
only unless the route set congestion state is higher than this link
congestion state.)
Transmission congestion onset L1 must be greater than Transmission
congestion abatement L1, less than Transmission congestion abatement
L2 and less than Transmission congestion discard L1.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
The default value refers to the threshold of onset Level1 used for
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPL2PF- 5+
CR MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
the international congestion method.
Possible values: messages (2..449)
octets (2..8499)
Trm.cong.onset L2
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this onset level,
then the Signaling link is in congestion status 2.
Congestion status 2 measures start. (Messages received
from level 4 with congestion priority 2 and higher are transmitted
only unless the route set congestion state is higher than this
Signaling link congestion state.)
Transmission congestion onset L2 must be greater than Transmission
congestion abatement L2, less than Transmission congestion
abatement L3 and less than Transmission congestion discard L2.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is
rejected.
This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
Possible values: messages (4..2147483644)
octets (4..2147483644)
Trm.cong.onset L3
If the number of messages in the
transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this onset level,
then the Signaling link is in congestion status 3.
Congestion status 3 measures starts. (Messages received
from level 4 with congestion priority lower this link congestion
state are discarded.)
Transmission congestion onset L3 must be greater than Transmission
congestion abatement L3 and less than Transmission congestion discard L3.
If this condition is not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
Possible values: messages (6..2147483646)
octets (6..2147483646)
Transmission rate
This parameter (default=64Kbits/s) defines
the bandwidth (line speed) of a narrowband or
broadband (highspeed) Signaling link.
If an E1 LIC is used, 64 or 1984Kbit/s are allowed,
in case of DS1 LIC 56, 64 or 1536Kbit/s.
Possible values: 4.8 kBit|56 kBit|64 kBit|
1536 kBit|1984 kBit
Max.MSU for retrm.
This parameter defines the maximum number of MSUs (N1)
which are available for retransmission. This value is
used by the error correction method PCR and the basic
error correction method.
N1 is limited by the maximum numbering capacity of the
forward sequence number range which dictates that not
more than 127 (4095 for High Speed Links according to
ITU Q.703 ANNEX A) message signal units can be available
for retransmission.
Since the buffer capacity is appropriate for the maximum
number of MSUs available for retransmission, no necessity
exists to set N1 below that maximum value. For both error
correction methods the default value is equal to the
upper limit of N1.
Note : a too small adjusted N1 value can reduce the maximum
message throughput of a Signaling link.
Possible values: 1..127
Max.oct.for retrm.
This parameter defines the maximum number of
MSU octets (N2) which are available for retransmission. This value
is only used by the error correction method PCR.
The value of N2 depends on the signaling loop delay TL.
It must be ensured that not more than TL/Teb message signal
unit octets are available for retransmission, where
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPL2PF- 6+
CR MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- TL is the signaling link loop delay, i.e. the time between
the sending of a message signal unit and the reception
of an acknowledgement for this message signal unit in
undisturbed operation
- Teb is the emission time of one octet.
The default value refers to a loop delay
TL=0.5s (satellite link).
Note : compared with the calculation TL/Teb a wrong adjusted
N2 value reduces the maximum message throughput of a link.
Possible values: 1..16384
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPL2PF- 7-
DISP MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MTP Level 2 Protocol Profile
This task displays Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Valid mandatory inputparameter combinations are :
For one Mtp L2 protocol profile
- L2 profile ID
- L2 profile name
For all Mtp L2 protocol profiles
- no input
The following parameters can be displayed in the output tables:
L2 profile ID
- This parameter identifies a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
- Possible values: 9..64
-
L2 profile name
- This parameter is the name of a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
- Possible values: up to 12 characters
-
Transmission rate
- This parameter (default=64Kbits/s) defines
- the bandwidth (line speed) of a narrowband or
- broadband (highspeed) Signaling link.
- If an E1 LIC is used, 64 or 1984Kbit/s are allowed,
- in case of DS1 LIC 56, 64 or 1536Kbit/s.
- Possible values: 4.8 kBit|56 kBit|64 kBit|
- 1536 kBit|1984 kBit
Congestion method
- This parameter defines which method of congestion
- control is to be performed within a Signaling link set.
- This parameter is part of the SAAL NNI and Mtp L2 protocol profile.
- On creation of the Signaling link, it will be checked that the
- congestion method chosen for the linkset within which the link is
- contained and the congestion method in the profile used for
- the link are the same.
- The Congestion method of all linkset in one net must be equal, i.e. the
Congestion method of the first
- Linkset created in a signaling Point defines the Congestion method of all
further linkset in the same
- signaling Point.
- Possible values: in ANSI net - ANSI nat. with prio. enh. or ANSI nat.cong. with
prio.,
- in ITU net - International,
- in ITU net - UK compatible (but only if the feature
compatibilityForUK is activated).
-
Correction method
- This parameter is used to specify the type of
- error-correction the Signaling link is using.
- Possible values: Basic|PCR
Number of threshold levels
- This parameter defines the number of thresholds to be
- used when the congestion control method is national
- congestion control method with multiple thresholds and
- congestion priorities. Currently the value 3 is allowed
- only. When the congestion control method is international,
- this parameter must have the value 0.
- Possible values: 0|1|2|3
-
L2 timer T1
- The L2 timer T1 Alignment ready defines the time
- between the end of the proving period locally and the
- receiving of FISUs indicating the end of the proving
- period at the remote side. The duration of time-out T1
- should be chosen such that the remote end can perform
- four additional proving attempts. The unit for the
- integer value is milliseconds.
- The default value is 45000 and refers to the following
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPL2PF- 1+
DISP MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
- ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
- Possible values: ITU: 40000..50000
- ANSI: 12900..50000
L2 timer T2
- The L2 timer T2 Not aligned defines the time Level
- 2 will attempt alignment. When during this time the
- remote Level 2 does not reply to the alignment request,
- local Level 2 stops the attempt for alignment. The unit
- for the integer value is milliseconds.
- The default value is 25000 and refers to the following
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
- ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
- Possible values: ITU: 5000..150000
- ANSI: 5000..30000
L2 timer T3
- The L2 timer T3 Aligned defines the time for the supervision
- of the aligned state. The timer is started when
- the local Level 2 enters the aligned state and stopped
- when LSSUs with status indication SIN or SIE are
- received indicating that the remote Level 2 has also
- entered the aligned state. The unit for the integer
- value is milliseconds.
- The default value is 1500 and refers to the following
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
- ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
- Possible values: ITU: 1000..2000
- ANSI: 5000..14000
L2 timer T4E
- The L2 timer T4E defines the time for an emergency proving
- period (Level 2 Proving period timer emergency). During
- this time LSSUs with status indication emergency are
- transmitted.
-
- The timer value corresponds to the transmission time of
- Pe=2**x (2 to the power of x) octets.
- For x following values are defined:
-
- - ITU-T and ANSI T1.111: x=12.
-
- The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
- The default value is 500 and refers to the following
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
- PCR error correction method and ITU-T recommendation.
- Possible values: ITU: 400..600
- ANSI: 540..600 (Transmission rate: 56 kBit)
- 450..600 (Transmission rate: 64 kBit)
L2 timer T4N
- The L2 timer T4N defines the time for a normal proving
- period (Level 2 Proving period timer normal). During
- this time LSSUs with status indication normal are
- transmitted. The timer value corresponds to the
- transmission time of Pn=2**x (2 to the power of x) octets,
- for x following values are defined:
-
- - ITU-T: x=16
- - ANSI T1.111: x=14
-
- The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
- The default value is 8200 and refers to the following
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
- PCR error correction method and ITU-T recommendation.
- Possible values: ITU: 7500..9500
- ANSI: 2000..2500 (Transmission rate: 56 kBit)
- 1800..2500 (Transmission rate: 64 kBit)
L2 timer T5
- The L2 timer T5 Sending SIB defines the interval
- for sending of LSSUs with status indication busy to
- the remote Level 2 during a local receive congestion
- situation. The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
- The default value is 100 and refers to the following
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPL2PF- 2+
DISP MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- PCR error correction method.
- Possible values: 80..120
L2 timer T6
- The L2 timer T6 defines the time for the supervision of
- a remote congestion situation (Level 2 timer Remote
- congestion). The unit for the integer value is milliseconds.
- The default value is 4500 and refers to the following
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic,
- ITU-net and PCR error correction method.
- Possible values: ITU: 3000..6000
- ANSI: 1000..6000
L2 timer T7
- The L2 timer T7 Excessive delay of acknowledgement
- supervises the acknowledgement of transmitted MSUs. The
- timer value must be greater than the loop delay TL of
- the signaling data link plus the processing time of the
- signaling link terminal. The unit for the integer value
- is milliseconds.
- The default value is 1000 and refers to the following
- combination of parameters: 64 kbit/s link and basic
- error correction method.
- Possible values: 500..2000
- 800..2000 (if correction method PCR is used)
Trm.cong.abatement L1
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer of a congested link falls below
- this level, the respective link is no longer in the
- congestion status. All congestion control measures cease.
-
- It must be assured that the Transmission congestion
- abatement L1 is less than the Transmission
- congestion onset L1. If this condition is not
- fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- Sufficient hysteresis should be provided between the
- Transmission congestion onset L1 and the
- Transmission congestion abatement L1 to prevent excessive
- oscillation between congested and non-congested states.
- Thus a value of mess 15/oct 300 is proposed for the
- Transmission congestion abatement L1.
-
- National congestion method:
- If the number of messages in the transmission/retransmission
- buffer falls below this abatement level, then the link is no
- longer congested. Congestion status 1 measures end. (Messages
- received from level 4 with congestion priority 0 and higher
- are transmitted unless the route set congestion state is higher
- than this link congestion state.)
- The Transmission congestion abatement L1 must be less than
- Transmission congestion onset L1. If this
- condition is not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- The default value refers to the threshold of Transmission congestion
- abatement L1 used for the basic error correction method.
- Possible values: messages (1..448)
- octets (1..8498)
Trm.cong.abatement L2
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer falls below this abatement
- level, then the Signaling link is no longer in congestion status 2.
- Congestion status 2 measures end.
- (Messages received from level 4 with congestion priority 1 and
- higher are transmitted unless the route set congestion state is
- higher than this link congestion state.)
- The Transmission congestion abatement L2 must be less than
- Transmission congestion onset L2 and greater than
- the Transmission congestion onset L1.
- If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
- Possible values: messages (3..2147483643)
- octets (3..2147483643)
Trm.cong.abatement L3
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer falls below this abatement
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPL2PF- 3+
DISP MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- level, then the Signaling link is no longer in congestion status 3.
- Congestion status 3 measures end.
- (Messages received from level 4 with congestion priority 2 and
- higher are transmitted unless the route set congestion state is
- higher than this link congestion state.)
- The Transmission congestion abatement L3 must be less than
- Transmission congestion onset L3 and greater than
- the Transmission congestion onset L2. If these conditions are not
- fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
- Possible values: messages (5..2147483645)
- octets (5..2147483645)
-
Trm.cong.onset L1
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this congestion level,
- then the respective link enters the congestion status.
- Congestion control measures are now initiated to reduce
- the load on the link.
-
- Note:
- It must be assured that this level is greater than the
- Transmission congestion abatement L1 and less
- than the maximum resources given to a link
- (linkTransmissionResourceThreshold). If this conditions
- are not fulfilled, the commandrequest is rejected.
- It should be assured that the buffer capacity below the
- Transmission congestion onset L1 is engineered
- so that factors such as a long loop delay do not result
- in the link going into congestion under normal load
- conditions respectively to overcome load peaks due to
- signaling network management functions. The remaining
- buffer capacity should allow User Parts enough time to
- react to congestion indications before message discard
- occurs. The link transmission resource threshold has a
- value of mess 450/oct 8800. Thus a value of
- mess 100/oct 2000 is proposed for the
- Transmission congestion onset L1.
-
- National congestion method:
- If the number of messages in the transmission/retransmission
- buffer exceeds this onset level, then the link is in congestion
- status 1. Congestion status 1 measures start. (Messages received
- from level 4 with congestion priority 1 and higher are transmitted
- only unless the route set congestion state is higher than this link
- congestion state.)
- Transmission congestion onset L1 must be greater than Transmission
- congestion abatement L1, less than Transmission congestion abatement
- L2 and less than Transmission congestion discard L1.
- If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- The default value refers to the threshold of onset Level1 used for
- the international congestion method.
- Possible values: messages (2..449)
- octets (2..8499)
Trm.cong.onset L2
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this onset level,
- then the Signaling link is in congestion status 2.
- Congestion status 2 measures start. (Messages received
- from level 4 with congestion priority 2 and higher are transmitted
- only unless the route set congestion state is higher than this
- Signaling link congestion state.)
- Transmission congestion onset L2 must be greater than Transmission
- congestion abatement L2, less than Transmission congestion
- abatement L3 and less than Transmission congestion discard L2.
- If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is
- rejected.
- This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
- Possible values: messages (4..2147483644)
- octets (4..2147483644)
Trm.cong.onset L3
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this onset level,
- then the Signaling link is in congestion status 3.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPL2PF- 4+
DISP MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- Congestion status 3 measures starts. (Messages received
- from level 4 with congestion priority lower this link congestion
- state are discarded.)
- Transmission congestion onset L3 must be greater than Transmission
- congestion abatement L3 and less than Transmission congestion discard L3.
- If this condition is not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
- Possible values: messages (6..2147483646)
- octets (6..2147483646)
Trm.cong.discard L1
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this discard level,
- then the Signaling link is in discard status 1 and
- MSUs with priority 0 will be discarded.
- The Transmission congestion discard L1 must be greater than
- Transmission congestion onset L1 and less than Transmission
- congestion onset L2.
- If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
- Possible values: messages (3..2147483643)
- octets (3..2147483643)
-
Trm.cong.discard L2
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this discard level,
- then the Signaling link is in discard status 2 and
- MSUs with priority 1 or lower will be discarded.
- The Transmission congestion discard L2 must be greater than
- Transmission congestion onset L2 and less than Transmission
- congestion onset L3.
- If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
- Possible values: messages (5..2147483645)
- octets (5..2147483645)
Trm.cong.discard L3
- If the number of messages in the
- transmission/retransmission buffer exceeds this discard level,
- then the Signaling link is in discard status 3 and
- MSUs with priority 2 or lower will be discarded. Only
- level 3 MSUs are still transmitted.
- The Transmission congestion discard L3 must be greater than
- Transmission congestion onset L3.
- If these conditions are not fulfilled, the command request is rejected.
- This parameter is used in the national congestion method only.
- Possible values: messages (7..2147483647)
- octets (7..2147483647)
Max.MSU for retrm.
- This parameter defines the maximum number of MSUs (N1)
- which are available for retransmission. This value is
- used by the error correction method PCR and the basic
- error correction method.
- N1 is limited by the maximum numbering capacity of the
- forward sequence number range which dictates that not
- more than 127 (4095 for High Speed Links according to
- ITU Q.703 ANNEX A) message signal units can be available
- for retransmission.
- Since the buffer capacity is appropriate for the maximum
- number of MSUs available for retransmission, no necessity
- exists to set N1 below that maximum value. For both error
- correction methods the default value is equal to the
- upper limit of N1.
-
- Note : a too small adjusted N1 value can reduce the maximum
- message throughput of a Signaling link.
- Possible values: 1..127
Max.oct.for retrm.
- This parameter defines the maximum number of
- MSU octets (N2) which are available for retransmission. This value
- is only used by the error correction method PCR.
-
- The value of N2 depends on the signaling loop delay TL.
- It must be ensured that not more than TL/Teb message signal
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPL2PF- 5+
DISP MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- unit octets are available for retransmission, where
-
- - TL is the signaling link loop delay, i.e. the time between
- the sending of a message signal unit and the reception
- of an acknowledgement for this message signal unit in
- undisturbed operation
-
- - Teb is the emission time of one octet.
- The default value refers to a loop delay
- TL=0.5s (satellite link).
-
- Note : compared with the calculation TL/Teb a wrong adjusted
- N2 value reduces the maximum message throughput of a link.
- Possible values: 1..16384
Rcv.cong.abatement
- When the number of messages in the receive buffer falls
- below this value, then the receive congestion situation
- is over and congestion control measure ceases. This means
- that the transmission of LSSUs with status indication
- busy is stopped and received MSUs will be acknowledged
- again. The value is calculated by the system, therefore it is
- not allowed to specify the value within the create.
-
Rcv.cong.onset
- When the number of messages in the receive buffer
- reaches this value, then congestion control measure
- begins. This means LSSUs with status indication busy
- are transmitted to the remote Level 2 at the interval
- of timer T5. Received MSUs will still be accepted but
- not any longer be acknowledged.
- The value is calculated by the system, therefore it is
- not allowed to specify the value within the create request.
-
Rcv.cong.MSU disc.
- When the number of messages in the receive buffer reaches
- this value, then further received MSUs will not be accepted
- i.e. received MSUs will be discarded and will not be acknowledged.
- The value is calculated by the system, therefore it is
- not allowed to specify the value within the create request.
-
A Mtp L2 protocol profile defines the layer 2
characteristics of signaling Links.
The Mtp L2 protocol profiles can be created
in order to define a particular profile.
At creation time of a Signaling link one of the
Mtp L2 protocol profiles is referenced. Several
Signaling link can use the same Mtp L2 protocol profile.
The timer limit values depend on the Transmission rate
(56/64 kbit) and the Correction Method (pcr/basic).
The parameters Receive congestion threshold abatement,
Receive congestion noMSUsAccepted and
Receive congestion threshold onset cannot be administered
externally.
A set of profiles is instantiated internally.
For these profiles no changes are allowed.
Additional profiles may be created or deleted within
a L2 profile ID (range from 9 to 64).
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MTPL2PF : [L2 profile name=] [,L2 profile ID=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPL2PF- 6+
DISP MTPL2PF
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
L2 profile name
This parameter is the name of a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Possible values: up to 12 characters
L2 profile ID
This parameter identifies a Mtp L2 protocol profile.
Possible values: 9..64
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPL2PF- 7-
DISP MTPLOGNU
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MTP Logical Numbers
This Task displays the logical ID and RDN Sequence of the selected object.
Prerequisites:
Select the object by listbox:
- Signaling destination point
- Signaling link set
- Signaling link
- MTP Accounting a. Verification control (combination with Logical number not
supported)
- IP signaling link set
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MTPLOGNU : Logical number type= [,Logical number=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Logical number type
Type of objects to be displayed.
Logical number
Logical number of the object to be displayed,
not supported for MTP Accounting a. Verification control.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPLOGNU- 1-
CAN MTPSCHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Cancel MTP Scheduling
This task deletes MTP Measurement Scheduling package with a 5 or 15 minutes
measurement time period
which can be selected by listbox :
- Net element meas.
- Sign.point utilisat.meas.
- Obl.sign.point util.meas.
- Network MSU meas.
- Sign.point meas.
- Link set duration meas.
- Destination point meas.
- Obl. link duration meas.
- Link duration meas.
- Obl.link utilisat. meas.
- Link utilisation meas.
- Link congestion meas.
- HS link utilisation meas.
- Obl.HSlink utilisation meas.
Input format

[ [
[ CAN MTPSCHD : Measurement type= ,Meas. time period= ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
This parameter specifies the type of MTP measurement.
Meas. time period
This attribute specifies the time between two successive
scans.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTPSCHD- 1-
CR MTPSCHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Create MTP Scheduling
This task creates the scheduling for one measurement type and measurement time
period
of MTP measurement which can be selected by listbox :
- Net element meas.
- Sign.point utilisat.meas.
- Obl.sign.point util.meas.
- Network MSU meas.
- Sign.point meas.
- Link set duration meas.
- Link set utilisat. meas.
- Destination point meas.
- Obl. link duration meas.
- Link duration meas.
- Obl.link utilisat. meas.
- Link utilisation meas.
- Link congestion meas.
- HS link utilisation meas.
- Obl.HSlink utilisation meas.
Input format

[ [
[ CR MTPSCHD : Measurement type= ,Meas. time period= [,Start time=] [
[ [
[ [,Stop time=] [,Weekly intervals=] [,Daily intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
This parameter specifies the type of MTP measurement.
Meas. time period
This attribute specifies the time between two successive
scans.
Start time
The year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds field are
compared in order to determine whether the specified value
is greater or less than the value of the attribute. The
values for the year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds
are determined from the character string representation and
the year value is first compared. If equal the month value
is compared and this process is continued if the compared
fields are equal.
Stop time
The year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds field are
compared in order to determine whether the specified value
is greater or less than the value of the attribute. The
values for the year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds
are determined from the character string representation and
the year value is first compared. If equal the month value
is compared and this process is continued if the compared
fields are equal.
Weekly intervals
Combination with Daily intervals not allowed.
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week within
which reporting is active. At least one day with one
interval must be selected. If this parameter is entered the
parameter for daily scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPSCHD- 1+
CR MTPSCHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled from the default value.
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified within which reporting
is active. If this parameter is entered the parameter for
weekly scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day
Combination with Weekly intervals not allowed.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CR MTPSCHD- 2-
DISP MTPSCHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Display MTP Scheduling
This task displays all scheduling with 5 and 15 minutes measurement
time period used for MTP measurements.
The scheduling for the following MTP measurement types are displayed :
- Net element meas.
- Sign.point utilisat.meas.
- Obl.sign.point util.meas.
- Network MSU meas.
- Sign.point meas.
- Link set duration meas.
- Link set utilisat. meas.
- Destination point meas.
- Obl. link duration meas.
- Link duration meas.
- Obl.link utilisat. meas.
- Link utilisation meas.
- Link congestion meas.
- HS link utilisation meas.
- Obl.HSlink utilisation meas.
Input format

[ [
[ DISP MTPSCHD ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
none
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 DISP MTPSCHD- 1-
MOD MTPSCHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Modify MTP Scheduling
This Task modifies the scheduling package of MTP measurements.
All scheduling changes can be done only, if administrative State is set to
LOCKED before. After changes, administrative State have to be
set to UNLOCKED to resume measurement. The user can select by
Listbox (containing all measurementclasses and granularity period) the
corresponding scanner and modify the scheduling package. If the created
package doesnt correspond to the given package (i.e. weekly-package given
and daily package created) the created scanner wouldnt be changed in any
way (no delete, no set is performed).
The following measurement types can be selected by listbox :
- Net element meas.
- Sign.point utilisat.meas.
- Obl.sign.point util.meas.
- Network MSU meas.
- Sign.point meas.
- Link set duration meas.
- Destination point meas.
- Obl. link duration meas.
- Link duration meas.
- Obl.link utilisat. meas.
- Link utilisation meas.
- Link congestion meas.
- HS link utilisation meas.
- Obl.HSlink utilisation meas.
Input format

[ [
[ MOD MTPSCHD : Measurement type= ,Meas. time period= [,Admin. state=] [
[ [
[ [,Start time=] [,Stop time=] [,Daily intervals=] [
[ [
[ [,Weekly intervals=] ; [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
Measurement type
This parameter specifies the type of MTP measurement.
Meas. time period
This attribute specifies the time between two successive
scans.
Admin. state
Start time
The year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds field are
compared in order to determine whether the specified value
is greater or less than the value of the attribute. The
values for the year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds
are determined from the character string representation and
the year value is first compared. If equal the month value
is compared and this process is continued if the compared
fields are equal.
Stop time
The year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds field are
compared in order to determine whether the specified value
is greater or less than the value of the attribute. The
values for the year, month, day, hour, minute and seconds
are determined from the character string representation and
the year value is first compared. If equal the month value
is compared and this process is continued if the compared
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTPSCHD- 1+
MOD MTPSCHD
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
fields are equal.
Daily intervals
This parameter selects daily scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be specified within which reporting
is active. If this parameter is entered the parameter for
weekly scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format : hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: whole day
Weekly intervals
This parameter selects weekly scheduling. Up to 6 time
intervals can be defined for each day of the week within
which reporting is active. At least one day with one
interval must be selected. If this parameter is entered the
parameter for daily scheduling must not be entered.
The time values are rounded up to a multiple of 5 minutes.
Overlapping intervals are combined to one interval.
Input format: hh:mm-hh:mm (one interval for one day)
hh hour (00 - 23)
mm minute (00 - 59)
Use 00:00-00:00 to select the whole day
Default: selects all days of the week without any time
restriction. Inactive days must be disabled
from the default value.
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 MOD MTPSCHD- 2-
CAN MTRABL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
CANCEL MOBILE TRAFFIC BLOCKING DATA
This command cancels mobile traffic blocking data assigned to the barring
service within the mobile services switching center.
This command is normally logged.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ CAN MTRABL : SERV= [,TRAT=] [
[ ! [
[ [
!-
Input parameter
SERV SERVICE
This parameter specifies a barring service respectivly other services.
This parameter only accepts a single value entry.
a-b
a: BARRING TYPE
BARRSPEC BARRING OF SPECIAL SERVICES
SSBAOC SSV BARR. OF OUTGOING CALLS
SSBOIC SSV BARR. OF OUTG. INT. CALLS
SSBOICEX SSBOIC EXCEPT HPLMN COUNTRY
ODBAOC ODB OF OUTGOING CALLS
ODBOIC ODB OF OUTGOING INT. CALLS
ODBOICEX ODBOIC EXCEPT HPLMN COUNTRY
ODBPREMI ODB PREMIUM RATE INFO CALLS
ODBPREME ODBPREM ENTERTAINMENT CALLS
OSBT1 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 1
OSBT2 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 2
OSBT3 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 3
OSBT4 OPERATOR SPECIFIC BARR. TYPE 4
OINDALL ORIGINATION INDICATOR ALL
OINDINT ORIGINATION INDICATOR INT.
SPINIALL SUB. PIN INCEPT OUTGOING CALLS
SPINIINT SPINI INTERNATIONAL CALLS
SPINICON SPINI INTERCONTINENTAL CALLS
SPINIPOU SPINI POUND CALLS
CCBS CCBS NOT ALLOWED
OACSU OACSU NOT ALLOWED
BASERV1 BARRING SERVICE 1
BASERV2 BARRING SERVICE 2
BASERV3 BARRING SERVICE 3
BASERV4 BARRING SERVICE 4
BASERV5 BARRING SERVICE 5
BASERV6 BARRING SERVICE 6
BASERV7 BARRING SERVICE 7
TRATINT TRAFFIC TYPE INTERNATIONAL
TRATEMG TRAFFIC TYPE EMERGENCY
TERMCHG TRAT TERMINATE CHARGING
INTCHG TRAT INTERCEPT CHARGING
Notes:
- The values
CCBS,
OACSU,
TRATINT,
TRATEMG,
TERMCHG,
INTCHG,
are not used to identify a barring type, but to identify
a specific handling in digit processing of a certain traffic
type.
- The value BASERV1 is used for CDMA local origination
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTRABL- 1+
CAN MTRABL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
indicator.
b: TYPE OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBER
OWN MS OF OWN COUNTRY
FOREIGN MS OF FOREIGN COUNTRY
Compatibilities:
- a =
CCBS,
OACSU,
TRATINT,
TRATEMG,
TERMCHG,
INTCHG,
- b = OWN
TRAT TRAFFIC TYPE
This parameter specifies the traffic type name.
Notes:
- Up to 63 parameter values can be linked.
- No additional values can be entered together with "X".
- If one or more traffic types are entered, then they will be canceled,
but intercept identification will not be changed.
- If traffic type is not entered, then all traffic types assigned
to barring service will be canceled and intercept identification will
be set to default value, depending on barring service.
Standard Behavior:
- INCEPT=
TRATINCP
for
SERV=
BARRSPEC,
SPINIPOU,
CCBS,
OACSU,
BASERV1,
BASERV2,
BASERV3,
BASERV4,
BASERV5,
BASERV6,
BASERV7,
TRATINT,
TRATEMG,
TERMCHG,
INTCHG
- INCEPT=
BAOC
for
SERV=
SSBAOC,
SPINIALL
- INCEPT=
BAOIC
for
SERV=
SSBOIC,
SPINIINT
- INCEPT=
BAOCEXHP
for
SERV=
SSBOICEX,
SPINICON
- INCEPT=
MOTADBAR
for
SERV=
ODBAOC,
OINDALL
- INCEPT=
MOTODBIC
for
SERV=
ODBOIC,
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTRABL- 2+
CAN MTRABL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
OINDINT
- INCEPT=
MOTODBIE
for
SERV=
ODBOICEX
- INCEPT=
MOTODBPI
for
SERV=
ODBPREMI
- INCEPT=
MOTODBPE
for
SERV=
ODBPREME
- INCEPT=
MOTOSB1
for
SERV=
OSBT1
- INCEPT=
MOTOSB2
for
SERV=
OSBT2
- INCEPT=
MOTOSB3
for
SERV=
OSBT3
- INCEPT=
MOTOSB4
for
SERV=
OSBT4
If X is entered, it represents the entire range of parameter values.
This parameter allows entry of a single value, or
of multiple values linked with &.
1...7 characters from the
symbolic name character set
Default: no affect on database
E N D
P30305-V6000-A985-01-7619 CAN MTRABL- 3-
DISP MTRABL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
DISPLAY MOBILE TRAFFIC BLOCKING DATA
This command displays mobile traffic blocking data of a mobile services
switching center.
This command is only permitted if a mobile services switching
center/visitor location register (MSC/VLR) is installed.
Input format

[ [
[ ; [
[ DISP MTRABL : SERV=